Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutR2019-308 2019-12-16 RESOLUTION NO. R2019-308 A Resolution of the City Council of the City of Pearland,Texas,awarding a bid for construction services associated with the FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Project(Phase II), to W.W. Payton, in the amount of$2,075,000.00. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS: Section 1. That competitive bids for the construction of the FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Project (Phase II) have been reviewed and tabulated. Section 2. That the City Council hereby awards a construction services bid to W.W. Payton, in the amount of$2,075,000.00. Section 3. The City Manager or his designee is hereby authorized to execute a construction services contract for the FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Project (Phase II). PASSED, APPROVED and ADOPTED this the 16th day of December, A.D., 2019. 1-40 =��°••.. �'; TOM REID _3 _ MAYOR ATTEST: ''''01•11100••• `,` `���` CALIULCA„ MARIA RODRI UEZ INTERIM CITY SECRETARY APPROVED AS TO FORM: Co DARRIN M. COKER CITY ATTORNEY 4 IL, Project Manual for: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion — Phase 2 — WA1701 1)44,p 9'�! V �4 '. t iw. A ,,,.. • IQ .........evviiv TEX AS �P5E 9.F re .i,,i QC i* I . r 1 s9 ♦•* : i� : */% J• . .. LAC :...� reit. 90X02 ••.....*i I11`E`ss��;FNSEQ. �•i Bid No. : 1020-03 ‘‘ANAL •• �% October 2019 Prepared By: vamtutbr OF rev �� * Costello, Inc. P.NETARDUS 2107 CityWest Boulevard, 3`J Floor . 115917 <vc Houston TX, 77042 i x....�oENS.?..e TBPE Firm Registration No. 280 tNZ t'tttt. r 1' / /0/V/9 Costello ,......,-...-„...,_ior' 1 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM LSection 00900 ADDENDUM NO.3 Date: 10-31-2019 PROJECT: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion- Phase II BID NO.: 1020-03 BID DATE: 11/5/2019 at 2:00 PM FROM: John Lacy,P.E. Division Manager Joshua Netardus, P.E. Assistant Project Manager Costello, Inc. 2017 CityWest Blvd, 3rd Floor, Houston,TX 77042 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract L Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: N/A SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Section 16012 -Electrical Work,Remove and Replace Section in its entirety. Changes include: a. Updated Paragraph 1.05.A to clarify summary of work items 2. Section 16150-Electric Motors,Remove and Replace Section in its entirety. Changes include: a. Revised Paragraph 2.02.D (Manufacturers)to correct misprint. b. Revised Paragraphs 2.03-2.04 (Enclosures and Insulation)to add WP-1 type enclosure. { c. Revised Heading of Paragraph 2.11 (Vertical Motors)to include "- Inverter Duty Rated." i• d. Revised Paragraph 2.11.B (Conditions of Service) for inverter duty requirements. 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM e. Added Paragraph 2.11.0 (Operating Characteristics) for motor operation with VFDs. f. Revised Paragraph 2.11.F.3 (Stator Construction)to clarify insulation requirements for inverter duty service. g. Deleted non-applicable motor requirement paragraphs located after Paragraph 2.11.R (Submittal Data). 3. Section 16175 -Variable Frequency Drive, Remove and Replace Section in its entirety. Changes include: a. Revised the last sentence of Paragraph 2.01.A to clarify assumed motor type for VFD. 4. Section 16482 -Motor Control Centers (600 Volts or Less), Remove and Replace Section in its entirety. Changes include: a. Revised Paragraph 2.01 (Manufacturers). b. Deleted Paragraph 3.03 (Lockout Tagout Station). CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: N/A PRE-BID QUESTIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS: N/A END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 ........t o--(::W::::) 1*.f.gb..:......"111.;47.4:1 of gg Lacy,P.E It 0202....• ...,i Division Manager I cc:si ENSEQ...�..i NI 474".....b 40 /15 :4:- Joshua Netardus. P.E. I-•-- ,p Assisitant Project Manager *=• %\ JOSHUA P.NETARDUS ;. 115917 41 "�c�`• .OENS��G2.a th 014At FCS ..- it fit! /titi * 0 / /0/31119 2-22-12 00900-2 of 2 Nor SECTION 16012 ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS 1.02 Not Used 1.03 Contractor shall comply with programming allowance requirements of: A. Item 1.07—"Contractor's Responsibilities" of this specification section. Contractor or his Subcontractors are not responsible for contents of program. Warranty for operation of program is solely the responsibility of the Programmer, Hatch. There are to be no contractual agreements between the Contractor and/or his Subcontractors and the Programmer, Hatch. Provide programming allowance per Item 1.07 — "Contractor's Responsibilities." Contractor is bound to coordination of various equipment installations and operation so as to not delay scheduled installation and testing of programs. Review all electrical related Specifications for schedule requirements of programming activities. B. Contractor shall verify requirements of Item 2.01—"Materials" before bidding. C. Contractor to conform to Item 1.06— "Contractor Qualifications" of this specification before LD. bidding. General Contractor is solely responsible for coordinating all electrical requirements of all equipment installed under this contract. E. Electrical Subcontractor shall confirm this with General Contractor before bidding. Within 10 days of "Notice to Proceed," the General Contractor shall appoint a person responsible for coordination of all electrical controls and equipment that are a part of this project and shall,at that time, notify Engineer in writing of that person's name, telephone number, fax number, address, and all other pertinent information. F. This specification section is an inherent part of all work performed on this project and its contents shall apply for any and all electrical power,control and instrumentation related work. Contractor shall advise all Subcontractors and Vendors accordingly. G. Warning: Electrical systems for this project have lethal voltages present. Contractor shall not work on energized equipment except when absolutely necessary and then only in the presence of another trained, experienced Electrician and with proper protective gear. See Item 1.06— "Contractor Qualifications"for safety training requirements. H. All correspondence, RFI's, and submittals concerning electrical, instrumentation, and controls matters shall be from General Contractor and shall have statement that General Contractor has verified the correctness or validity of the correspondence, etc. in respect to contractual requirements of the plans and specifications. Any correspondence, etc. not having this statement or determined to be covered in the requirements of the plans and specifications will not be responded to and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for any action or non-action thereof. Lir Addendum 3 16012-1 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 All references to"days"in the electrical,mechanical,instrumentation,and controls specifications means "working days." All prequalification under this specification shall be submitted no later than ten (10) days prior to bid date. J. Installation shall conform to most recent National Electrical Code, International Building Code, and Local Codes. In addition, Contractor shall follow all requirements of NFPA 70E- "Standard for Electrical Safety in the Work Place." Of specific importance are all the requirements of Article 400.11—"Flash Protection." K. Plans and diagrams are illustrative and may not contain all devices wiring and controls required to perform the function intended without reference to Specifications. Location and alignment of motor control centers or other equipment shown on Plans may require adjustment for some Equipment Manufacturers products,and this requirement is the Contractors sole responsibility. L. Substitutions for equipment specified or shown on plans shall be as pre-approved prior to bidding unless specified or shown on plans as "or equal." Where noted as "pre-approved," indicates approval is required prior to bid acceptance. M. All software or programs provided by any Vendor or Contractor shall be open activation without undisclosed passwords,keys,and/or means or devices that prevent Owners access to programs. All software shall be new copies for Owner with no cost attachments. No exceptions. N. All references to plans and/or drawings refer to the complete set of contract plans and not specifically electrical only, unless stated otherwise. 0. Additions or modifications to existing facilities involves a degree of uncertainty and all existing, hidden or unknown conditions may not appear on plans. Contractor is to consider this when bidding and shall cover all reasonable unknown conditions not evident in pre-bid site visit,which is necessary to familiarize Contractor with observable pre-existing conditions. Contact Engineer concerning any questions prior to bidding job. P. Control panels, MCC's and electrical equipment shall be fabricated to fit the available space shown on plans. Install control panels, instruments, and motor control centers to allow a minimum of four (4) foot clearance for access to control devices. This may require special enclosures. Relocation up to 40 feet from where shown on plans may be required and shall be included in bid cost. Supplier and Contractor shall notify Engineer of any variations in size, location or orientation before fabricating equipment. Listing of acceptable Equipment Manufacturers does not limit or remove the intent of this requirement. Q. All devices,fittings,connectors,supports, brackets,and miscellaneous hardware normally used for installation of electrical equipment may not be shown in detail. Contractor shall provide all these items and included them in bid price. R. Any change orders or additional work beyond the scope of this project as bid by Contractor shall be approved in writing by Engineer. Any unapproved work performed is at Contractor's risk. S. Installation shall conform to layout, routing, and details shown on Plans and described in Specifications. Any variations shall be pre-approved in writing by Engineer before work starts. Any unauthorized work shall be removed at Contractor's cost and with no delay in project schedule. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. The work shall include providing materials and equipment required for installation of a complete and functioning electrical system as specified and as shown on the drawings. 16012-2 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 B. This section is an integral part of all Specification Sections related to electrical, control and instrumentation construction under this contract. Contractor shall check all other plans and specifications for this project and include items and circuits accordingly. The total set of construction documents make up the requirements for work for this project and shall be included in Contractor's bid at no additional cost to Owner or Owner's Representative. C. All plans and specifications for this project are representative of the design intent and may not contain minute details associated with normally accepted electrical construction,as described in applicable codes or as described in manufacturer's literature. Contractor shall provide all appurtenances normally associated with a particular equipment or device, and as required for a proper operating system. Some devices,equipment or materials may appear in only one location on the plans or in the specifications. Each and every item shown or described is to be included for this project. No exceptions. All required circuits and devices necessary for intended operation are to be included without additional cost to Owner.Where discrepancies occur between various plans or specifications for this project and where clarification is not requested by Contractor prior to bidding,the most stringent requirement shall be included in the Contractors bid price. Contractor shall review all specifications for all trade disciplines with electrical requirements prior to bidding and shall include most stringent and higher cost requirements in bid price. No elements or requirements of the plans or specifications shall be omitted in Contractor's bid price unless specifically deleted in writing by Engineer. Failure to follow this specification requirement is at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. D. Prior to bidding and during construction, Contractor shall coordinate with equipment vendors ( and suppliers and determine requirements for power, control and interconnection wiring and �r shall provide conduits and conductors accordingly for a complete operating system. E. All electrical work shall be performed only by a Texas State Licensed Electrical Contractor,and as listed in Item 1.06—"Contractor Qualifications" of this Section. 1.05 MAJOR ITEMS OF WORK AS FOLLOWS A. All work shown on plans and described in specifications including as follows: 1. Demolition of existing Motor Control Center(MCC). 2. Demolition of existing diesel generator. 3. Installation and Commission of temporary power and controls for Service Pumps. 4. Installation of new MCC. 5. Installation of three (3) new pumps and/or motors. 6. Installation of five(5)service pump motor feeders. 7. Installation of new diesel generator. Route feeders to automatic transfer switch. 8. Installation & modification of existing controls. 9. Modification and expansion of SCADA controls. 10. Installation of Fiber equipment, cable and conduit. 11. Installation of GST equipment and controls. 12. Installation of all other miscellaneous electrical systems, as shown on plans. B. Contractors shall attend coordination meeting with Engineer to review construction methods, plans and specifications before starting work. Prior to start of work, Contractor to provide 16012-3 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 schedule showing all phases of work, including completion, testing and required programming schedule as described in Item 3.08—"Testing and Startup," of this specification. 1.06 PLANT CONTROL SYSTEM A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete operating control system. The control system shall include but shall not be limited to all circuit breakers,motor starters,alternator,contactors, indicating lights, selector switches, surge protector, phase failure relays, programmable controllers,alarm light and horn, push buttons,control transformer,electronic devices,sensors, interlock wiring, control relays, blocks, snubbers, valves, nameplates, and all other associated items required to provide a workable system. All control circuits to be"fail-safe"type.All blower controls to have low pressure alarm indicator per state requirements. B. Provide circuit conductors,conduits,circuit breakers,and related devices for furnishing power to all motor heaters, instruments, devices, lights, controls, and all other motors and equipment indicated on plans or provided by Vendors or others for this project. Provide circuits and related devices per Code. C. All controls shall be fully tested in shop for proper and satisfactory operation,prior to installation at site. Contractor to provide written certification before delivery to site. Any installations without certification notice are done at risk by Contractor, who shall be obligated to make all necessary corrections in field at no additional cost to owner. D. Where any equipment includes a Manufacturer furnished control panel the Equipment Vendor or Manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination of all interconnecting wiring at related devices. E. Provide interlock circuits between vendor furnished equipment, control panels and lift pump starters. This includes interlock between lift pump and screen controls. Coordinate with each vendor. Do not submit control panels until interlocks are coordinated. Provide interlock circuits with adjustable time delay devices. F. Provide block and bleed valves for level and pressure devices. Route bleed line to outside building or enclosure. G. All multiple pump installations shall have means of alternating pumps and provisions for bypassing pumps not in service in primary and backup mode of operation. H. All CT's to have means for limiting voltage level at CT terminals in event load disconnected while CT is energized. This is required for personnel safely. All control device settings are to be adjusted by Contractor for values recommended by the Plant Operator. Contact Engineer if clarifications needed. 1.07 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor,Subcontractors,and Controls Vendors shall be experienced with all types of electrical systems covered under this contract. No work shall be undertaken where Contractor's firm, project supervisors and project electrical workers have not had recent experience in similar projects in area of project location. Electrical contractors, electricians, inspectors, installers, and programmers assigned to this project shall be full time qualified employees. Contract type employees are not allowed unless preapproved by Engineer. Contractor will be required to furnish proof of experience and 16012-4of19 REVISED 10/1/2019 employment where requested by Owner or Engineer or their Representatives. Pre-qualified Electrical Contractors are listed in Item 1.06, Paragraph E of this section. B. Contractor's Project Manager or his Assistant shall be familiar with types of electrical construction required by this project in order to determine that all subcontractor and vendor's work is in conformance with the plans and specifications. C. Electrical Contractor shall have Master Electrician License for City or County; in which project is located, and shall have a State issued Master Electrician License. D. Contractor shall have an established safety-training program in effect for the duration of this project and will be required to submit proof of safety training for all employees working on this project. E. The following Contractors are considered qualified and acceptable for electrical construction: 1. Pfeiffer&Son, Ltd. 2. W.W. Payton 3. SECO 4. McDonald Electric, Inc. 5. Systems, Inc. 6. Industrial Electrical Services (IES) 7. Resco Electric, Ltd. 8. Clarion Electrical 9. Boyer, Inc. 1.08 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Where applicable,Contractor shall coordinate electrical power, natural gas,telephone,data,or special purpose line installation with utility companies. Within 30 days after award of contract, the Contractor shall contact utility company and Owner and shall request service needed. It is Contractor's sole responsibility to assure that utility company and Owner are notified and are kept aware of requirements. Advise Owner of exact voltage and phase service required when completing application for service. Owner and Engineer shall be advised in writing of Utility Company Service Representative handling service order,telephone number,address and order number within 30 days of Contract Award and notice to proceed. Contractor shall notify Engineer and Owner of proposed service poles to be installed by Power Company and Contractor and shall include copy of "Outlet Location Data Statement" from Power Company before installing poles or conduits. Delays in services installed due to failure to make timely application shall be at Contractor's expense. B. Where applicable,Contractor shall provide all conduit,conductors,and termination equipment as needed for utilities and shall coordinate with utility companies for installation requirements and shall provide installation constructed according to the utility company standards whether or not such is shown in detail or plans. Where underground service is provided by Utility Company, the Contractor shall provide service installation accordingly and shall allow for up to 100 feet of underground feeder ductbank. Work shall include all equipment and materials required for working service. C. Contractor shall review all sections of the plans and specifications for this project and shall note all electrical requirements for devices and equipment shown or implied and shall provide service accordingly for a complete operating control system. Any discrepancies in Electrical or 16012-5of19 REVISED 10/1/2019 Mechanical requirements noted in various plans and specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to ordering equipment or materials or prior to starting construction related to the item in question. Coordination of all equipment and systems is Contractor's sole responsibility. Failure to coordinate all equipment requirements shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, at no additional cost to Owner. D. Unless specifically noted otherwise, Contractor shall furnish all software. Programming will be performed by the Hatch Systems Integration Engineer as required. Contractor shall provide an "Allowance" in bid cost. Where"Allowance"amount is not shown on bid sheet,contact Hatch at(713)467-9961 for the cost. Provide email address in order to receive "Allowance" conformation from Systems Integration Engineer. Failure to provide this"Allowance"is at the expense of the Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. Contractor shall provide all installation,set-up,adjustments and testing of devices or equipment included under this contract. Contractor is not responsible for installation or operation of program.Warranty for programming is solely the responsibility of the Programmer and is exclusive of the Contractor's agreement with Owner, full allowance is required before final acceptance and is not subject to "retainage" withholding. E. Programs will be loaded by Programmer during Engineer's shop testing of system at fabricators facilities. A program will be downloaded for testing and the final program will be downloaded upon receipt of allowance payment. Programmer is not responsible for any delays due to non- compliance by Contractor. F. Contractor is specifically responsible for coordination of all electrical, mechanical, and process systems,devices and equipment provided or installed under this contract and shall assure that all requirements by all trades are met such as to insure a complete and operating electrical,control, process or instrumentation system. Special attention shall be given to coordination of motors �■' supplied,MCC components supplied, mechanical systems supplied,horsepower and voltage and phase requirements of each.Where motor horsepower varies from plans,Contractor shall adjust circuit and control devices accordingly. This includes verification of compatibility of all interfacing connectors and devices at new,existing,and Owner furnished equipment. Notify Engineer of any discrepancies before ordering equipment. Failure to do so may result in additional cost to Contractor. G. Contractor shall assure that all systems have been properly installed,adjusted and tested prior to final inspection and shall notify Engineer at time electrical installation is ready for final inspection and testing. H. Unless Engineer has been duly notified in writing that equipment is not ready for final testing and such is acceptable with Engineer,additional final inspections and testing will be at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. Contractor shall fully inspect all motors and nameplates, controls, conduit, wiring devices and other items before starting work, ordering materials, or submitting shop drawings in order to verify existing conditions are as shown on plans and, shall immediately notify Engineer of any discrepancies between plans and specifications and existing conditions. Failure to do so may result in Contractor's responsibility for any required changes in construction. This includes verification of compatibility of all interfacing connectors and devices for new, existing, and Owner or Contractor furnished equipment. Notify Engineer of any discrepancies before ordering equipment. Where available review "Record" drawings before bidding where existing conditions are unknown. Where available refer to "Record" drawings during 16012-6of19 j1 REVISED 10/1/2019 construction of this project. Note that "Record" drawings may not be available in which case Contractor is required to determine wiring connections and device types as part of this contract. Where Manufacturer's delivered motor size varies from design size shown on one-line diagram or, described in specifications, Contractor shall provide conductors, conduits, and all motor control devices sized for the delivered motor size at no additional cost to Owner. Where motor current transducers are required for use by Manufacturer control panels, Contractor to provide current transducers and conductors sized by Control Panel Manufacturer at no additional cost to Owner. J. When work involving modifications or additions to existing plant will interrupt normal service, Contractor shall make provisions for continuous electrical service thru Contractor furnished standby generator power. Where a standby generator exists but will be temporarily out of service during construction,Contractor shall provide substitute generator power for duration of outage. In no event shall plant be without operating power or, without standby generator service. Include sub-base fuel tank,fuel,attendance and appurtenances required for a complete power system as needed for interim plant operation. Where work disrupts power and/or control to new or existing equipment, furnish temporary bypass circuits, as required, to maintain equipment operation. K. Where power outage is required,it shall be coordinated with Operator and Engineer. An outage shall not exceed 4 hours. Contractor shall plan work and provide equipment as required to maintain electrical power to facilities. L. Where work involves additions, modification, demolition, or renovations to existing facilities, Contractor shall remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. This includes relocation of conduits, equipment and materials that may obstruct placement of new equipment. Existing spare conduits and equipment may not be located at exact place shown on plans. Relocations and adjustments up to 40 feet are required as part of this contract. Where spare buried conduits are to be reused,conduits shall be cleaned out of all debris before use. M. It further includes extension or modification of existing circuits that are related to work covered under this project. Route all existing alarms to autodialer,alarm panel,and PLC where available. Include all conduit and wiring. Extend all existing power and control circuits as required for proper operation of electrical systems. This includes extension of pump cables and instrument cables,which may require in-place splicing. Contractor shall field observe existing conditions prior to submitting a bid to become familiar with existing conditions and shall account for any relocations or extensions in bid. Refer to "Record" drawings and existing O&M Manuals. Failure to do so is at Contractors'risk and at no additional cost to Owner. N. Provide electrical circuits to all equipment as required by manufacturer. Verify location and characteristics of all equipment shown on plans and in specifications and size circuits accordingly. All conductors and conduits to comply with NEC Article 250 and Article 310. All terminations to vendor furnished control panels shall be done by Contractor,unless specifically noted otherwise on plans or in specific specification sections. All panel calibrations and adjustments shall be done by Vendors Representative. When preparing bid or when performing work,observe all plan sheets for vendor furnished equipment and provide all required interface wiring between various panels and/or equipment necessary for a complete operating system. Provide electrical circuits to all equipment, devices, controls, 16012-7of19 REVISED 10/1/2019 controllers, and other items shown on plans, or described in specifications. Provide circuit breaker, conductor, local disconnects, and connections to equipment in compliance with National Electrical Code. All circuits may not be shown on plans and must be verified and installed accordingly. O. Where any equipment performance does not conform to specifications or,where in Engineers opinion,parameters are out of tolerance or erratic in performance,the Contractor shall remove and replace equipment at no additional cost to Owner. P. Location of outlets and equipment shown on Drawings is approximate. Field verify exact location. Minor modification in location of outlets and equipment is considered incidental up to distance of 40 feet with no additional compensation. Q. Provide fail and problem alarms for controls and Manufacturer's equipment. Route circuits to autodialer. Provide circuits, relays, expansion modules, and programming. Route all existing alarms to autodialer where work involves modification or additions to existing equipment. R. Contractor shall provide the equipment necessary for locating all underground pipes,conduits, and structures before digging. All locations of intersection shall be properly staked and identified. Locating all underground lines is the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall be at no additional cost to Owner. Any damage to underground lines is the responsibility of the Contractor. Where obstructions are present in existing spare underground conduits to be used in this project, use video camera to determine cause of obstruction and contact Engineer for directions on how to proceed. Review all plans prior to bidding and during construction and provide power and control requirements for all valve actuators and Manufacturer furnished panels according to the Engineer's specifications and plans for all equipment. This further includes all starters,breakers, controls, conductors, conduits, interface wiring, and devices for a complete electrical system. S. Refer to contract plans and provide local disconnect switches for all motors, heaters, motor operated valves, fans and electrical equipment required for this project per National Electric Code. (Applicable where shown on plans.) T. Change orders submitted by Contractor shall include a full technical explanation of request and shall contain statement confirming that Contractor has reviewed all plans and specifications and that all work was coordinated with other trades. U. All equipment, devices and other items shown or indicated on plans and described in specifications are to be provided, furnished and installed by the Contractor unless, specifically and clearly marked or noted as "N.I.C." (Not in Contract). Failure to include all items is at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. V. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining and adjusting all equipment for safe,damage free operation where equipment must be operated by Owner during construction. This especially pertains to existing equipment and controls that may be modified under this contract but are required to be operated by Owner. All valves, motors,and controls shall be properly locked out in a safe position to prevent inadvertent damage by Owner during the course of operating the plant. Contractor shall notify Owner in writing of any equipment that cannot be safely operated. W. All requirements for instrumentation and control equipment shall be reviewed by Manufacturer's Representative prior to shop drawing submittal and,Engineer shall be notified in writing when installation and application indicated on plans may not result in satisfactory and/or accurate operation of equipment specified. Failure to abide by this requirement is at Contractor's risk and expense. 16012-8of19 REVISED 10/1/2019 X. Do not install fuel tanks within 50 feet of habitable buildings where prohibited by local codes. Field verify with plans before starting work. Notify Engineer of any conflicts. Failure to do so is at Contractor's risk and at no additional cost to Owner. Y. A state licensed Electrician shall be present at all scheduled inspections. No Exceptions. Z. Provide all required wire adapters for oversized feeder conductors at panels,switches,breakers, and other equipment. AA. Where outdoor conduit top entry to enclosures, provide CSBE seals at top of conduits to avoid water entry. This applies to service bus weatherhead entries and other applications. BB. Alarm reporting devices such as automatic telephone dialers shall never be disabled once installed and put in operation or,where already installed at existing facilities. Test autodialer at end of each workday during construction period. CC. Methods of work and devices described in all electrical specification sections are intended to facilitate a properly constructed and operating electrical system that meets Owner's operational requirements and satisfies the requirements of local and national codes. The Electrical Engineer may approve methods or devices that vary from the requirements described in any particular specification if, in the Engineer's judgment, the installation meets the intent of the Engineer's design and, where the electrical system performance meets the general requirements of the facility operation and,where the installation is deemed to present a safe installation that does not present a danger to persons operating or maintaining the electrical installation.This variance may be authorized during the submittal or inspection stage of the project,as the Engineer deems appropriate. DD. All equipment, conduits, panels, and devices shall be installed in the most strict, professional manner to present a neat installation. Where a question arises concerning intent of method for installation or where details are not clear, Contractor is to contact Engineer for clarification before proceeding with work. Any work not suitable or not installed in a professional manner will be modified to an installation acceptable to Engineer and Owner at no additional cost. EE. Provide arc flash warning tags on all electrical equipment where required by NFPA 70E. Submit arc flash analysis for Engineers review. FF. All motors, motor control centers,and all other electrical equipment shall be stored in a climate- controlled area prior to installation. Space heaters in motors and equipment shall be energized while stored. After installation space heaters shall be energized at all times. See relevant specification sections for additional requirements. Contractor is liable for any corrosive damage and any defective equipment. Where Contractor fails to protect electrical equipment before and after installation on site and where excessive dust is observed inside the enclosure, Contractor shall have a factory warranty service technician clean, inspect and test unit, after which factory shall issue a written and signed statement that full factory is in effect. There are no exceptions to this requirement except to replace entire unit at Engineer's request. Any equipment,devices,or software shown or indicated on Contract Documents as required for this project,and that may be overlooked by Owner or Engineer on submittals or at Final Acceptance inspection,shall still be provided by Contractor at no cost to Owner regardless of period of time that expires before Owner requests to be furnished and installed. GG. Vendors for equipment with solid-state controller shall include provisions for both hardwired and data path status,command and alarm functions included under contract without additional cost to Owner, Programmer, or Engineer. 16012-9of19 REVISED 10/1/2019 HH. Contactor shall provide all required power, control, lighting, data and instrument circuits from sources to all miscellaneous accessories and equipment that are a normal part of process equipment, electrical equipment, mechanical equipment, generators other packaged systems furnished by manufacturers for this project. Include all materials and labor required for installation of a complete operating system in bid cost, and at no additional cost to Owner. Contractor is to coordinate these requirements with vendors and manufacturers before submitting bid. For generator and process equipment systems,this shall also include fuel source piping, including chemical or other liquid or gaseous sources and all related devices and equipment that are part of a standard or specialized installation for equipment specific to this project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials provided under all sections of the specifications shall be new and the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. Motor control centers, control panels, controller panels, pump panels, blower panels, and all similar equipment shall be manufactured by a firm located within 200 miles of the project facility or, firm shall have an established full time service and repair facility located within 200 miles of project facility. Final assembly of motor control centers and control panels shall be performed at these local facilities. All materials shall conform to the National Electrical Code and shall be approved by Engineer and listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories. Materials described by manufacturer's name and catalog number are selected to set a definite standard of design and quality to be required. There is not any intention to discriminate against a product of another manufacturer, which is equally durable in construction, similar in design, and will serve the purpose for which it is intended. All equipment, hardware, materials, motors, towers, masts, brackets,or accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall contact Manufacturer's designated local Representative for confirmation of exact model, options, configuration and services that are to be included in bid cost. Manufacturer's Representative shall make all critical adjustments to electronic modules and controls. Where plans, details, or specifications indicate instructions that are contrary to Manufacturer's instructions,consult with Engineer before ordering or installing. Failure to follow the requirements of this paragraph is at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. B. Materials and equipment specifications are general in coverage and may contain reference to construction items that apply in only particular situations and may not apply as a general rule for materials installed on this project. Listing of acceptable Equipment Manufacturers does not limit or remove the intent of any specification sections included for this project. Provide all required accessories required by Equipment or Materials Manufacturer for proper installation. Failure to do so is at Contractor's expense. C. All equipment and devices shall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate installation with manufacturer's representative to assure correct installation methods have been applied. Prior to submittal review,Manufacturer's Representative shall review plans and specifications and shall notify Engineer in writing where application shown on plans will not provide satisfactory and/or accurate performance. Failure to abide by this requirement shall be 16012-10 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 at Contractor's risk and cost. All equipment and materials shall be rated for the harsh Industrial, Electrical, and Mechanical environment in which installed and shall be warranted by manufacturer accordingly. This includes all enclosures located in wastewater and water facilities, including all outdoor control panels, breaker panels, switches, junction boxes, and similar electrical equipment at other facilities which shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel without exception. This requirement is paramount to all other drawings or specification requirements unless specifically noted or, unless approved otherwise by Engineer in writing. D. Outdoor equipment shall not have exposed devices or controls, unless specifically called for on plans. The outer door shall cover all such items. No see thru windows are allowed unless specifically approved. All outer doors to have locking hasp and door restraint to hold door open at 90 degrees position. Keyed handles for indoor panels are only acceptable where specifically approved. All NEMA 4X equipment enclosure doors to have three(3) point latching handle and locking hasp. NEMA 4X splice box enclosures shall have quick release latches. Plexiglas inner or outer doors are not acceptable. E. All PLC's, controllers, VFD's, instruments and electronic equipment installed outdoors or in unconditioned spaces shall have means of cooling to allow satisfactory operation in local environment and at conditions required by equipment manufacturer's specification. All motor starters over 100 horsepower shall have forced fan cooling in the starter section as a minimum. All outdoor enclosures are to have sufficient cooling. Provide rain hood, intake louvers, insect screens, and fan motor circuits with t-stat and on/off controls. F. All control panels and motor control centers that are not standard manufacture, off the shelf products shall be manufactured in accordance with Plans and Specifications with high quality materials and components, bear a UL listed label, and be constructed by a UL listed shop. 2.02 Manufacturer shall have local manufacturing and/or repair facility within 200 miles and have local Service Technician that can provide prompt service when required by Owner. Equipment Manufacturers who fabricate own panels may provide control panels for this project. Control panels will be fabricated accordingly to plans and Specifications.However,no outsourced panels are allowed except for Control Panel Manufacturers listed below. This requirement will be strictly enforced. Service Technicians shall have detailed knowledge of control panels specific to this project. There are no exceptions to the requirements of this paragraph. The following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Weimar Manufacturing Co. 2. B.L. Technology, Inc. 3. W.W. Payton 4. Ace Controls 5. Texas Industrial Controls Manufacturing (TICM) 6. Systems, Inc. 7. Control Panel Manufacturers preapproved in writing by Engineer. A. All pressure switches and transmitters on pump discharge lines are to have"snubbers"sized to produce hydraulic delay required for satisfactory operation of controls. 16012-11 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 B. Substitution items may be acceptable where deemed by Engineer to be of equal type, service, value, or suitable for a particular application. The Engineer reserves the right of decision on all substitutions unless specifications state, "no substitutions allowed". C. Equipment ratings shown on plans are the "minimum" acceptable sizes. All Equipment Manufacturer's products may not be available in the exact rating shown, in which case next greater available size shall be provided. D. Generator connectors installed at transfer switches shall be reverse service type with exposed female sleeve type and matching generator cable connector shall be recessed male pin type. Contractor shall coordinate connector's style and size with Owner's existing connectors to assure compatibility. Provide cut sheets or samples to Owner for confirmation. Provide adapters where needed for proper operation. E. All control panels and MCC's shall have single piece door with door-mounted devices mounted directly to door. Plexiglas plates are not acceptable. Auxiliary mounting plates shall not be used to mount devices to door. All panels must be fabricated in a neat and professional manner. Metalwork shall be performed with proper commercially available tools, with no hacksaw or nibbler cuts allowed. F. All transmitter displays to be in actual unit values and not percent scale. G. All Motor Operated Valves (MOV's)to have local control station with starter contacts, selector switches and limit switches, indicators and all other devices required to function as indicated on plans and in specifications. Where MOV's are installed in pump discharge or suction line,provide interlock circuits that prevent motor operation when valve is closed. H. Door-mounted, rotating operating mechanisms for circuit breakers are not allowed for MCC's or control panels. All components inside enclosures shall be fastened down with proper hardware. All cables shall be bundled and bound with waxed cord or nylon tie-wraps manufactured for that purpose. Adhesive tie down blocks are not allowed. Provide threaded press-in or welded studs for nylon cable clamps as required. All work shall be done in a neat and professional manner. J. All control panels,SCADA panels and MCC's shall have 120 VAC GFI duplex receptacles with low voltage circuit inside controls section for test equipment use. Control section shall have interior lighting. All gauges, instruments, transmitters, and meters to read 75% of scale at system maximum rated parameters such as voltage, amp, pressure, level, and flow. K. All controls circuits for PLC's, Multilins, RTU's, CCU's, CCTV, VFD's, solidstate starters, power monitors and all such products wired into a panel assembled by a panel fabricating shop or system integration shop shall be reviewed and approved by the Product Manufacturer's Representative. Contractor and Supplier shall allow for any additional cost associated with this review and approval process and shall certify such approval has been issued at time shop drawings are submitted. L. CT's for power monitor device, controller input or other instrument inputs shall be sized to detect peak inrush current motor. M. All electrical devices attached to or, normally a standard part of an equipment item shall be provided by that Equipment Manufacturer. For example, limit switches, solenoids, and transducers for flow control valves are to be provided by the Flow Control Valve Manufacturer. This is to be coordinated by the General Contractor and the Electrical Subcontractor. N. All equipment installed on this project shall incorporate all devices and features to protect that equipment from the influence of other equipment, line voltage and phase irregularities, power 16012-12 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 surges, harmonics and other disturbances that may effect the proper and safe operation of that equipment whether these required features are a standard component of that equipment as an off-the-line product. Provide surge protection devices (SPD) for all power feeders, service equipment and power panels. No equipment shall be installed without these features. O. All equipment installed shall include all DC power supplies operated from a 120-volt circuit. No equipment shall be battery powered only unless required by the specifications.Include all cabling and other components necessary for a complete operating system. Where firmware,software, or programming is required for operation satisfactory to Engineer, it shall be included accordingly. P. All equipment and devices shall be NEMA rated. IEC rated equipment and devices are not acceptable. Q. All requirements for instruments, motor operated valves,VFD's,and electrical equipment shown on electrical plans or described in electrical specifications shall be coordinated through the local Manufacturer's Representative to assure equipment meets the requirements for this project. All such items shall be purchased through local Distributors or sales offices located within 200 miles of this project. In any case, the local Factory Representative shall be consulted for exact requirements—no exceptions. This is to assure local service for Owner when needed on a 24- hour basis. Any items furnished that do not meet this requirement will be replaced at expense of Contractor. R. All MCC rooms with 800 amp devices and/or MCC's greater than 6 feet wide shall have doors at each end of room unless NEC exceptions apply. Doors shall open in direction of egress and shall have panic bars per NEC Article 110. S. All electrical work shall be performed in a neat and orderly manner. Any work that does not appear as professional workmanship shall be corrected or replaced, at Engineers discretion. T. All slabs around electrical equipment shall be constructed and sloped to avoid any standing water. U. Where equipment model numbers are shown on plans or specifications, provide most current model or version. V. Where devices with RS-485 outputs are installed, provide an RS-485 to Ethernet converter with associated power supply. W. For rehab or expansion work on controls, provide additional new panduit wireways. Do not overfill Panduit on new or rehab projects. X. All electronic controllers, instruments, and devices furnished by any Vendor or Manufacturer shall have an ethernet data port and means for status monitoring and control interface with the plant PLC controller. Vendor to provide all programs, software, and I/O addresses. Y. All service and feeder breakers to be electronic type with adjustable trips. Z. All analog instrument outputs to be 4-20 mA unless noted otherwise on Plans. Coordinate scaling with Engineer. AA. Provide complete power, control and instrumentation circuits for motor breakers, RTDs, temperature sensors, instruments and control devices. BB. All pump motor starters to have start time delay relay. CC. All equipment, instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge, phase fail, or other line conditions that may damage equipment,instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers'responsibility to 16012-13 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. `•�/ 2.03 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Electrical plans and specifications are not intended to discriminate against any particular manufacturer. Specific values shown for a particular manufacturer's product may vary slightly for another product. B. Work required under this contract consists of each and every item, equipment, material and device shown on any of the Civil,Structural,Mechanical,Process,Electrical or other plan sheets contained in the contract documents and includes items shown in details,schedules,diagrams, sections or other means of illustration presented. If any item is shown on a single sheet at any place, it is to be included under this contract unless specifically noted otherwise and,all piping, wiring, and connections for operation of the item shall be included at no additional cost to Owner. If there is any doubt or question,Contractor shall request a"clarification"from Engineer before bidding. The Electrical Engineer reserves the right to interpret the electrical specifications and to make judgment as to acceptance of a product,regardless of minute details in the specifications or on the plans. C. Specifications shall be reviewed for applicability of materials under certain conditions and in certain environments and, where not shown otherwise on plan drawings, these application directions shall be adhered to. D. Where a particular reference on drawing plans does not conform to standard acceptable construction methods for a particular type project,the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and request a clarification before ordering materials or starting construction. E. Plans are general in nature and may not show minute details of existing conditions or proposed work. Existing conditions may include undocumented buried pipes,conduits and structures that lie in the route, or at location, of equipment or conduit installation required for this project. These uncertainties shall be accounted for in the Contractors Bid.Contractor shall adjust conduit routes,equipment pads,and equipment mountings,as required,for a satisfactory installation for the conditions imposed and at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Electrical site plan drawings shall only be scaled when "Scalable Drawing" appears on the drawing sheets. G. All electrical equipment, controls, and devices used in this project shall have self-protection features that prevent damage of that equipment from overload,overvoltage,undervoltage and phase fail conditions. Any failures caused by lack of this provision shall be at full cost to Contractor and equipment manufacturer and at no additional cost to Owner. Where Engineer determines this to be the case and where Contractor disagrees, Contractor shall provide full evidence of failure cause at their own expense. 16012-14 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with current NEC and local codes. Field select routing of conduits to avoid underground piping,conduit or structures that may not be shown on plans. B. All construction and equipment fabrication shall be of highest quality and installed in a professional manner. All devices shall be manufactured specifically for the purpose installed and shall be installed according to Manufacturer's recommendations. C. All fixtures, switch, and receptacle locations shall be approved by Engineer. D. Refer to other sections of this specification for controls. Under this section of the specifications, the Contractor shall install the control devices and provide control wiring switches,outlet boxes, and shall make all final connections. Control wiring and interlocks shall conform to wiring diagrams furnished by equipment manufacturers. E. Coordinate location of motor terminal box to match location of conduit stub up, drop or connection on same side of motor. F. Where equipment, devices, or installation fails or is damaged during construction, said equipment and/or devices shall be replaced with new unit. Repair is not an acceptable remedy unless specifically approved by Engineer and/or Owner. G. Provide 48 inches minimum workspace in front of electrical equipment. H. Provide a minimum of 8 inches between all wall or rack mounted enclosure boxes,switches, or equipment. Do not extend past edge of building wall and maintain 6 inches from edge of wall. 3.02 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. System acceptance upon Substantial Completion shall be defined as that point in time when the following requirements have been fulfilled: 1. When Record drawings and wiring diagrams have been submitted, reviewed, and approved in writing by Engineer. 2. All O&M documentation has been submitted, reviewed, and approved. 3. The complete electrical system has been fully inspected and has successfully been started up,tested and accepted by the Engineer. a. Complete electrical system shall be demonstrated to be fully functional. Every alarm function shall be exercised. b. Complete electrical system shall run continuously for a period of ninety (90) consecutive days without failure. In event of failure, repairs shall be made and test period started over again. c. There are no "Substantial Completions" for electrical systems that cannot demonstrate satisfactory performance of its intended function. 4. All Owners' staff personnel training programs have been completed. 5. Owner/Engineer sign a document indicating electrical installation has formally been accepted. 6. Warranty certificates for electrical equipment have been properly submitted. 16012-15 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 7. All spare parts have been delivered to Owner. 8. All punch list items have been corrected, acknowledged by Contractor in writing and accepted by Engineer. 9. Contractor shall have equipment vendors available for installation, setup, testing, demonstration and commissioning activities as required by other specifications section. Vendors shall allow ample time for these on-site services in their bids. 3.03 CLEAN UP A. The Contractor shall upon completion of the work,remove all materials,empty containers,and any other materials that are not incorporated into the work. B. Concrete spoils shall not be dumped on site without approval by Engineer or Owner. 3.04 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide full 3-year service warranty on the overall installation,and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware, and software. This warranty shall begin at date of written final acceptance of electrical systems and shall include both labor and materials at no additional cost to owner. There are no exceptions to this requirement. Contractors warranty shall guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide whatever labor,work,or materials needed to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for over 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be at no additional cost to Owner. B. Where circuit problems such as irregular power conditions, breaker trips, relay trips, controls failure, etc. develop during construction or prior to or within the 1 year warranty period, Contractor shall furnish a multi-channel recording device with all appurtenances for a total period of 60 days per event and,shall include setup and data retrieval. Work shall be performed when requested by Engineer and shall be at no additional cost to Owner. These conditions also apply to electrical problems during construction where operations of the plant are affected. C. All materials and equipment installed shall have full warranty from manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for the harsh Industrial Electrical/Mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where manufacturer's products fail prematurely, manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have option of declaring that failures were caused by environment and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that product manufacturers are aware of this condition and that manufacturer's warranty statement is included in shop drawings. Failure to do so will be at full expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. Where warranty requirements are shown in other sections,the more stringent requirement shall have precedence. D. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within five(5)working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and backcharging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. 16012-16of19 REVISED 10/1/2019 E. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. 3.05 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide services of his Technician and a factory trained Technician to instruct plant-operating personnel for a period of at least two (2) full days after completion of the contract work. Training requirements in specific specification sections shall have precedence over requirements of this section. B. Where training is required by any specification sections, Contractor shall provide training manuals for Operators. Manuals shall be approved as substantial quality by Engineer. All training manuals must be pre-approved by Engineer. Instructors shall be pre-approved by Engineer as qualified for training. Provide a training manual for each Trainee attending class. Training manuals and approved O&M Manuals shall be used during training. C. Provide Engineer with an outline of training course and topics to be covered. D. Schedule with Owner two (2) weeks in advance. Where Operators must alternate training schedule, more than two (2) days may be required. E. Operations and Maintenance (O&M) manuals and "Record" drawings shall be used during training. F. Engineer may participate in training. 3.06 TESTING AND STARTUP A. All elements of each electrical control system shall be set up, calibrated, and tested by Manufacturer's Technician to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of this Specification. All special testing of materials and equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all of his testing and startup work with the Owner and Systems Integration Engineer. As a minimum, the testing shall include both a factory test and a field test.Testing requirements are as follows: 1. Factory Tests: The electrical controls, motor control centers, switchgear, SCADA, instrumentation systems, and all other associated hardware shall be tested via a full simulation at the factory, prior to shipment, to demonstrate that each component is operational and meets the requirements of these specifications. Manufacturer shall provide test routine program for shop simulation of I/O signals where test are unavailable in shop. B. Where solid-state controller programs are furnished by a specified Systems Integration Programmer, a copy of the program will be provided on CD for Manufacturer's use in factory testing. Test results shall be certified, with written documentation provided to the Engineer upon test completion. Factory testing of controls shall be witnessed by the Engineer and/or Programmer for all control systems containing a solidstate controller of any type. Control System Fabricator shall notify project Electrical Engineer a minimum of(6)six weeks in advance of shop testing, and shall confirm equipment will be ready for testing when arrival of 16012- 17 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 Programmer and/or Engineer Prior to time of testing or during testing, a Program shall be downloaded to the controller by the Programmer or Engineer. C. Where testing facility is located,more than 100 miles from job site and where testing period goes past 6 p.m.,Supplier shall provide suitable accommodations for overnight stay for Engineer and Programmer at cost of Supplier. D. Field Tests: All electrical control system components and instruments shall be checked to verify that they have been installed properly, all terminations have been made correctly and signal parameters are accurate. This includes demonstration of accuracy or all instruments over entire range of operation by live simulation of measurement. Electronic simulation above is not acceptable. E. Witnessed field tests shall be performed on the complete system. Prior to witnessed test, Contractor shall perform a complete test of each and every function, device operation and overall operations of electrical power, control, instrumentation and SCADA system. F. Prior to loading PLC or SCADA final program and prior to testing operation any PLC or SCADA set up by programmer,an inspection shall be conducted by Engineer's Inspector to assure electrical control devices are functioning properly. Any discrepancies or problems shall be corrected and then Contractor shall send a written notice that complete electrical control system is installed and operating per the Plans and Specifications. G. Contractor shall provide a checklist for all electrical,control and instrumentation functions and send to Engineer for approval. Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer on a paragraph-by-paragraph basis. Any equipment, devices or functions that are found not performing properly will be reason for termination of test until repairs are made. Additional testing by Engineer and Owner may be at Contractor's expense for time and travel of Engineer and Owner's staff. Each test shall be witnessed and signed off by the Contractor and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. The equipment Manufacturer's Representative shall be present for all testing, setup, demonstrations, and training. The Contractor shall notify the Owner at least two(2)weeks prior to the commencement date of the field tests. After tests are completed and with system fully operational, system shall run continuously for a period of 90 days without failure. Any failures shall be repaired and test shall start over again. 1. Additional Requirements: a. Measure and record all motor in-rush, run current and terminal voltage at start and run testing. Where multiple motors are installed, test shall include all motor sequencing smallest to largest. Submit recorded values for Engineer's review. Provide instrument and electronic devices calibration ranges and scales for this specific project. (Manufacturer's general information is not sufficient. Include range of 4-20 mA signals, i.e., 4 mA = X psi or Y feet, etc. for each specific instrument and device.) b. Provide setting and adjustments of all solid-state and non-solid-state starters, circuit breakers,controllers,instruments,and other equipment with adjustable settings both manual and programmable. Submit for Engineer's review and approval before operating equipment. 16012-18 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 H. Provide statement of satisfactory demonstration of all instruments, devices and equipment functions over full range of operation. (Any failures or incorrect calibrations or settings detected shall be reason to halt demonstration tests and reschedule after adjustments and recalibrations have been completed.) Factory Technician report stating that all calibrations, settings and adjustments have been completed and that equipment has been functionally tested by Factory Technician on site. (Where report is found to be inaccurate,the Technician shall make necessary on site adjustments and shall issue new report, and where second report is required, a Factory Manager shall sign report attesting to its accuracy. There is no exception to this requirement. Contractor shall be responsible for all factory set up,testing and demonstration costs until system is accepted by the Engineer. Any additional testing as result of non-acceptance by Engineer shall be at Contractor's expense. 1. Record Drawings (Point to point wiring diagrams for every electrical device installed on this project with tags and applicable schedules shall be available at time of testing. Lack of this requirement will result in cancellation of testing until complete documentation is available. This will allow checking of wiring accuracy at time of testing.) K. A state licensed Electrician shall be present at all scheduled inspections. L. Controller Program: Remote testing by Engineer will require a minimum of 30 working days after programs are downloaded to the controller. Provide six (6) weeks' notice for program downloading by Programmer. This shall be accounted for in project schedule. Any delay of project completion due to lack of notice is at Contractor's risk and expense. M. Prior to testing system, PLC programs or HMI programs provided by other than the Systems Integration Engineer noted in Item 1.07 — "Contractor's Responsibilities", programs shall be furnished on CD for review by Engineer. Provide any special software necessary to run and test complete program. N. Modem system setup shall be conducted by Manufacturer's Technician before any field-testing by Engineer is performed. Set up per Manufacturer's written instructions. Provide Engineer with checklist and values of all settings and adjustments before requesting field test by Engineer. Indicate impedance of terminal load resister at each end of modem line. -END OF SECTION- 16012-19 of 19 REVISED 10/1/2019 SECTION 16150 ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work" for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Observe electrical plans, motor protection unit specifications, and all equipment specifications to verify additional requirements before bidding. Vendor's failure to do so is at Vendor's own risk and at no additional cost to Owner for providing everything called for in plans and specifications. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Description of Work: 1. Motors furnished under other sections of these Specifications as part of equipment items shall conform to requirements of this section except as noted otherwise in that section or indicated otherwise on Drawings or schedules. -.mss 2. Submersible well motor shall be supplied in accordance with other sections of this specification. 3. Blower and booster pump motors shall conform to any additional requirements by Equipment Manufacturers where noted in other specifications. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Refer to latest addition of following standards. 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. NEMA MG 1-Motors and Generators. b. NEMA MG 1 - Part 31 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): IEEE Standard 112-Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 3. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA): AFBMA Standards for Ball and Roller Bearings and Balls. 4. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): Standard of Installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Addendum 3 16150- 1 of 14 REVISED 10/2/2019 A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Include motor submittal as part of equipment submittal for equipment specified in other sections. C. Include identification of equipment by name and tag number as indicated in Specifications or on Drawings. D. Submit in accordance with General Conditions and other applicable sections of the Contract Documents. 1. Complete nameplate data in accordance with NEMA standards. Include space heater wattage and voltage. Include sound pressure rating. 2. Full load power factor and maximum correction capacitor kVA for motors 5 hp and larger. 3. Nominal efficiency in accordance with IEEE 112 for motors 5 hp and larger. 4. Insulation in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 31 or, as stated elsewhere in this specification. 5. Motor dimensions and frame size. 6. Manufacturer's printed data on each motor type being provided to indicate compliance with specified performance and construction. 7. Service manual to include storage and alignment instructions. 8. Complete motor winding and bearing, RTD curve data, and provide motor temperature ratings. 9. All motor characteristics and data required for programming VFD motor protection where described in Section 16175 — "Variable Frequency Drive" or, as shown on plans. Submittals without this data will be rejected in entirety. Data to include: a. Motor full load current b. Locked rotor current c. Locked rotor time-hot d. Locked rotor time -cold e. Hot: Safe stall ratio f. Service factor g. Overload/thermal damage curves h. Running cool time Stopped cool time 10. No motor data shall be submitted until motor horsepower, voltage, and phase have been coordinated with MCC and Controls Manufacturer. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. E. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data: Submit in accordance with General Conditions, Section 16012 —"Electrical Work" and other applicable sections of the Contract Documents. F. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark "Complies" or "Non-Compliance" or "Exception" adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 16150-2 of 14 REVISED 10/2/2019 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control: 1. Perform individual motor test on motors over 1 horsepower. 2. Test shall be standard NEMA routine production test in accordance with MG 1-12.51, and consisting of following. a. No load running current. b. Locked rotor current. c. High potential test. d. Bearing inspection. 3. Provide motor data to motor control center (MCC) or motor starter supplier at time MCC is ordered to assure coordination of control and overcurrent protective devices. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 3. Local codes and ordinances. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for purpose of establishing standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Unless otherwise specified, meet or exceed following requirements for general-purpose motors: 1. High efficiency, equivalent to U.S. Motors premium efficiency for motors 5 hp and above. 2. Motors 1/2 hp and Larger: 3-ph, 60 Hz, 230/460V or 240/480V. a. Squirrel cage type, NEMA B. b. Motor Housing and Bearing Brackets: Cast grey iron with tensile strength of 30,000 psi. Do not provide rolled steel and aluminum. c. Secure bearing brackets to motor cast iron housing. Do not use bolt- clamping methods. d. Provide dual voltage windings, 230/460V or 240/480V. 16150-3of14 REVISED 10/2/2019 3. Motors Less than 1/2 hp: 1-ph, 60 Hz, 115/230V, 120/240V, or 120/208V. a. Provide dual voltage windings. 4. Motor Operated Valve Motors: Provide dual voltage windings, 240/480V, 3 phase or 208/480V, 3 phase as required by plans. 5. Suitable for continuous operation with line voltage variation within ±10% of rated voltage. 6. Suitable for continuous operation in 40°C ambient with 80°C temperature rise. 7. Copper motor windings. C. Design for frequent starting. Coordinate with programming of motor protection devices, such as Multilin,for number of starts limitations. D. Provide internal, 120 VAC, heaters sized per manufacturer's recommendations based on use and location. Provide stamped stainless steel nameplate with space heater wattage and voltage. Install heaters in lower winding area of vertical motors. Contractor to provide 120 volt circuits from low voltage panel via starter contactors. E. Provide RTD's where shown on plans or required by specifications, by motor manufacturer or, where shown on drawings. Provide RTD's for both end bearings and for three phase windings. Provide RTDs for all VFD drives and motors 50 horsepower and greater. Provide vibration sensors where indicated on plans. Contractor to provide shielded circuits from motors to controls per RTD manufacturer requirements. F. Where used in conjunction with electronic variable speed drive units such as VFD's, coordinate with drive equipment manufacturer to provide a matched motor and drive system. Motor shall be capable of safe operation, without over heating, throughout full speed range of VFD. Failure to coordinate will result in any additional charges to be paid by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. G. Contractor to coordinate motors and MCC construction to assure starter, MCP and breaker sizes are properly sized for each motor and are satisfactory for safe operation. Where required by high efficiency or high inrush motor design criteria, all devices and conductors shall be adjusted as required. Failure to coordinate will result in any additional charges to be paid by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. H. Where specific equipment specifications motor requirements conflict with this specification, Contractor, Vendor, Supplier and Manufacturer shall contact Engineer for clarification before bidding or, shall be responsible for providing motors with the more stringent requirements. The general requirements of this specification shall be followed where the more specific sections do not apply. J. All submersible pump over-temperature and seal leak modules shall have latching circuit with reset and alarm indicator light built-in or provided as external circuitry. K. Coordinate location of motor terminal box to match location of conduit stub up, drop or connection on same side of motor. L. All equipment, instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge, phase fail, or other line conditions that may damage equipment, instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers' 16150-4of14 REVISED 10/2/2019 responsibility to provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. U.S. Motors B. General Electric C. Marathon D. TECO Westinghouse E. Or equal, as approved by Engineer. 2.03 ENCLOSURES-GENERAL A. Open Drip Proof (ODP): Indoor areas where clean, dry, and well ventilated, unless shown with more stringent requirement in other specification or on plans. B. Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled (TEFC): Indoor or outdoor areas where exposed to corrosive vapors, driving rain or washdown activities. All locations for wastewater facilities. C. Weather Protected Type I WP I): Outdoor areas where exposed to falling water and debris. D. Provide enclosure indicated on Plans. E. Or, as approved by Engineer in writing. 2.04 INSULATION - GENERAL A. ODP: Class F, 1.15 service factor. 1. Two extra dips and bakes of epoxy varnish. B. TEFC: Class F, 1.15 service factor. 1. Two extra dips and bakes of epoxy varnish. C. WP I: Class F, 1.15 service factor. 1. Two extra dips and bakes of epoxy varnish. D. All Well Motors and All VFD Driven Motors: Provide 1600-volt insulation, or 3.1 times motor rated voltage and rise time of 0.1 microseconds per NEMA recommendations. 2.05 BEARINGS- GENERAL A. Ball or roller bearing type at manufacturer's option, unless specified in equipment sections of Specifications. B. Support side thrust loadings. C. Re-greaseable with alamite fittings extended to accessible location for Frame 250 and larger. D. AFBMA B10 bearing life rated (flexible coupled) at 50,000 hrs. 16150-5of14 REVISED 10/2/2019 E. For VFD driven motors 100 hp and greater, provide insulated bearing at one end and shaft grounding ring at other end. For motors less than 100 hp, provide a shaft grounding ring at either end of motor. 2.06 SPEED A. As specified under equipment section and as required by specific applications. 2.07 TORQUE - GENERAL A. Breakdown torque shall be 200%or more of maximum torque load placed on motor shaft. B. Provide necessary WK2 curves for special loads to coordinate with motors. C. Supply special motors where load requirements exceed standard design. 2.08 SLIDE RAILS AND SOLE PLATE A. As required for application. Provide as furnished by or, as recommended by, Motor Manufacturer. 2.09 SINGLE PHASE FRACTIONAL HP MOTORS A. Capacitor or open split phase start, unless otherwise noted. 2.10 THREE PHASE MOTORS-GENERAL A. Provide horizontal or vertical squirrel cage induction motors for standard duty. B. Full voltage starting or, as specified in equipment sections of specifications or, on plans. Use reduced voltage autotransformer starting for motors as indicated, rated 100 horsepower and greater or, use solid-state starter where specifically shown otherwise on plans. C. Provide low pass filter protection for VFD driver motors 10 horsepower to 500 horsepower where conductor length between VFD and motor exceeds 50 feet. 2.11 VERTICAL MOTORS— INVERTER DUTY RATED A. This section provides guidelines for design and manufacture of low voltage vertical squirrel cage induction motors on larger than NEMA size frames. B. Conditions of Service 1. Motors shall be suitable for continuous operation on a three phase, 60-hertz system rated 240 or 480 volts. 2. Motors shall be rated for operation on a three-phase,VFD power supply. 3. Motors shall be designed to operate at rated load in a minimum ambient temperature of 40°C at maximum altitude of 1,000 meters. 4. The location of installation will be either indoors or outdoors as dictated by the specific provisions for each motor. 16150-6of14 REVISED 10/2/2019 5. Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load with variation in the voltage or the frequency not exceeding the following conditions: a. +/- 10% rated voltage at rated constant volts/hertz ratio except for specific torque boost situations. b. Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load and volts/hertz ratio when the voltage unbalance at the motor terminals does not exceed one percent. C. Operating Characteristics: With rated volts/hertz ratio applied, motor performance shall be as follows for critical operating characteristics: 1. Torques: Motors shall meet or exceed the minimum locked rotor (starting) and breakdown torques specified in NEMA Standard MG1 Part 12 for Design B for the rating specified when on sine wave power 2. Currents: Locked rotor(starting) currents shall not exceed NEMA Design B values for the specified rating on 5:1 constant torque or less and variable torque motors. NEMA Design A values are allowed for 6:1 constant torque or higher value constant torque rated motors. Motors shall be capable of a 20-second stall at six times full load current without injurious heating to motor components. 3. Efficiency: Motors 600 volts and below shall have a nameplate minimum and nominal full load efficiency, which will meet or exceed the values listed in Table 1 for motors when tested in accordance with NEMA Standard MG1 Part 12, IEEE Test Procedure 112 Method B, using accuracy improvement by segregated loss determination including stray load loss measurements. 4. Temperature Rise: The temperature rise, by resistance, shall be 80° C or less when measured at rated load on sine wave power, on inverter power ratings shall be 105° or less. D. Design Requirements 1. Motors shall be capable of withstanding all normal forces, which may be imposed upon them during the course of normal operation, including starting and normal stops. 2. Motors shall be suitable for across the line starting and shall be able to start and accelerate the connected load to full load speed with 90% of rated voltage at the motor terminals. Where shown on plans or, noted in specifications, motors shall be suitable for reduced voltage starting. 3. Motors shall be capable of continuous operation at full load and rated frequency with a voltage variation of+10%. 4. Motors shall be capable of continuous operation at full load and rated voltage with a frequency variation of+5%. 5. Motor starting current shall not exceed a value equal to 650% of the motor full load current. 16150-7of14 REVISED 10/2/2019 6. Motor installation in hostile environments subject to dust, moisture, and/or corrosive atmospheric conditions shall have all parts given protective treatment such as U.S. Motors' "CORRO-DUTY®" or equal. E. Enclosure: 1. Motors shall be furnished with enclosure types based on the location of installation and the specific requirements for each motor. 2. Openings on all weather-protected designs shall be covered with metal guard screens having a mesh size no larger than %2 inch square. a. Weather Protected Type I motors shall be designed to protect internal components from falling water and debris at angles up to 100 degrees from vertical. b. When specified, Weather Protected Type II designs shall be furnished with removable, cleanable, and reusable air filters over intake air openings. 3. Enclosures shall be of fabricated steel or cast iron construction in accordance with the Manufacturer's standard design. Canopy caps shall be of aluminum, cast iron, or sheet metal and shall be easily removable for maintenance purposes. 4. Motors to be installed in locations where moisture may collect shall be furnished with drain openings and plugs. In the case of explosion-proof motors, drains and breathers shall be furnished and shall be of the type approved by UL. F. Stator Construction 1. Stator laminations shall be of fully processed steel. Each lamination surface shall be given the necessary treatment so as to have core plate type C-5 insulation. 2. Stator windings for system voltages above 600 volts shall be form wound of rectangular copper magnet wire. Aluminum magnet wire is not acceptable. Individual coils shall be insulated with mica bearing tape prior to insertion. Coil extensions shall be blocked and braced sufficiently to minimize movement during normal starting and running conditions at full rated voltage. 3. Insulation: Standard motors shall utilize the U.S. Electrical Motors' Inverter Grade insulation system, which consists of at a minimum Class F or better insulation materials with additional phase insulating material, extra end-turn bracing a Class H spike resistant wire. The resultant system shall withstand 2000-volt transients without premature motor failure and have no cable limitations in motor application. Standard motors shall be given U.S. Electrical Motors' Insulife 2000 an additional insulation treatment to increase moisture resistance. 4. Insulation systems shall receive a minimum of two (2) vacuum pressure impregnation treatments using a 100%solids epoxy resin. 16150-8of14 REVISED 10/2/2019 5. When specified, a completely sealed insulation system shall be supplied. This system shall be capable of passing the NEMA MG1-20.48 water immersion test and shall be U.S. Motors' "EVERSEAL," or equivalent system. 6. When specified, motors to be rated for variable frequency drive applications shall meet NEMA MG-1 Part 31 dated 1993 and shall be U.S. Motors' Inverter Grade' insulation system or equal. The insulation system shall be warranted for a minimum of 3 years operation on VFD power, which shall not be limited by maximum cable length restrictions. 7. Temperature rise shall not exceed the limits defined by NEMA for Class B insulation systems while operating at nameplate horsepower,frequency, and voltage. 8. In the case of a particular rating where a Class F temperature rise is required, motors shall be furnished with Class F or better insulation. G. Rotor Construction: Rotors shall be of cast or fabricated aluminum in accordance with Manufacturer's standard design. H. Bearings 1. Bearings supplied shall be of type and size sufficient to satisfy thrust loading requirements for each motor in accordance with manufacturer's standard design. Bearings shall be rated for a minimum in-service B-10 life of 50,000 hours. 2. Thrust Bearings: a. Motors shall be designed and constructed with thrust bearings on top to allow inspection and/or replacements without requiring complete disassembly of motor. b. Thrust bearings shall be deep-groove ball, angular contact ball, or spherical roller type. Bearings mounted back-to-back or in tandem are acceptable and may be furnished when required according to Manufacturer's standard design. 3. Deep-groove ball bearings shall be used only on normal thrust design motors and shall be capable of handling thrust loads in either direction. 4. High thrust design motors shall be supplied with angular contact ball bearings whenever possible and in accordance with Manufacturer's standard design. 5. Where thrust requirements restrict the use of angular contact bearings, spherical roller bearings shall be furnished. 6. When required, motors furnished with spherical roller bearings shall also be provided with a system of coils in the oil reservoir for the circulation of cooling water. 7. Spherical roller bearings shall be spring loaded to keep the lower bearing race in contact and prevent bearing damage during starting and momentary upthrust conditions. Guide Bearings: 16150-9of14 REVISED 10/2/2019 1. Guide bearings shall be deep-groove ball type and shall be located at the bottom of the motor. 2. Guide bearings may be stacked when necessary according to Manufacturer's standard design to accommodate specified upthrust conditions. 3. Guide bearings or bearing assemblies shall be provided with sufficient means for preventing the leakage of lubricant or entrance of foreign matter along the shaft. J. Lubrication 1. Thrust bearings shall be oil lubricated and contained in an oil reservoir with oil sight level gauge and oil fill and drain openings with plugs. 2. Deep-groove ball bearings furnished as thrust bearings for normal thrust motors shall be grease lubricated. When furnished as guide bearings for high thrust units, they shall be oil lubricated. 3. Grease lubricated bearings shall be furnished with provisions for in-service positive lubrication. A drain shall be provided to guard against over lubrication. K. Noise Level: Sound pressure levels shall be measured according to IEEE 85 and shall not exceed 85 decibels as measured on the A-Weighted Scale at a distance of 1 meter from any motor surface under no load, free field conditions. L. Nameplates: 1. Motors nameplates shall be of stainless steel and shall be securely fastened to the motor fame with pins of a like material. Nameplate data shall be pressure stamped into nameplate to form an embossed impression. Painted data is not acceptable except where painted in addition to embossed impression. 2. The following information shall be contained on the motor nameplate as a minimum: a. Rated Horsepower b. Full Load Speed c. Frequency d. NEMA KVA Code and Design Letter(when applicable) e. Rated Voltage f. Manufacturer's Serial Number g. Service Factor h. Insulation Class Maximum Ambient j. Full Load Current at Nameplate Voltage k. Frame Size Designation M. Terminal Boxes 1. Terminal boxes shall be of fabricated steel or cast iron construction to be compatible with motor enclosure specified and when possible, shall be diagonally split and 16150-10 of 14 REVISED 10/2/2019 capable of rotation in 90° increments. Boxes not suitable for rotation must be capable of top entry. 2. The area in which the main terminal box is connected with the motor frame shall be fully gasketed in order to prevent entrance of foreign matter into the motor and to provide support for the stator leads where they pass through the motor frame. 3. A properly sized grounding terminal shall be mounted in the main terminal box when specified. 4. The motor terminal box shall be sufficiently oversized to allow stress cone terminals of shielded power cables and to allow mounting of any surge capacitors, lightning arrestors, or current transformers as may be specified. 5. Size motor terminal box shall be adequately sized to accommodate conduits as shown on Plans or described in schedule. 6. Coordinate location of motor terminal box to match location of conduit stub up, drop or connection on same side of motor. N. Leads: 1. Main motor leads shall have EPDM or equal type jackets and shall be permanently tagged for identification. 2. The relationship between lead markings and the direction of rotation shall be indicated on a separate motor nameplate. 0. Space Heaters 1. Motors shall be furnished with space heaters to provide sufficient wattage to maintain the internal temperature of the motor at a level approximately 10° C above the ambient temperature while the motor is not in operation. 2. Space heaters shall be of the silicone rubber strip type attached directly to the stator end turns. When specified, the leads shall be brought out to an auxiliary terminal box. 3. Space heaters shall be rated for operation on a single phase, 60 hertz, 120-volt system. 4. Space heater shall be energized via a temporary 120-volt circuit while motors are stored prior to installation, and shall be energized via the permanent 120-volt circuit after installation. Where motor is allowed to stand for extended periods exceeding one (1) day without heaters energized, Contractor shall have motor inspected by motor shop for corrosion. Where corrosive damage is found, motor shall be replaced with new moor. P. Protective Devices 1. Stator winding protection shall consist of one or more of the following systems unless indicated otherwise in plans or specifications: 16150- 11 of 14 REVISED 10/2/2019 a. Six (6), 100 or 120 ohm nickel resistance-type temperature detectors (RTD's) embedded in the stator windings, two (2) per phase. Each detector shall have its leads wired to an auxiliary terminal box. Verify ohm resistance required with Motor Protection Unit Manufacturer. b. One (1) positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistor temperature sensor embedded in each phase of the stator winding and corresponding solid-state electronic control. (Where indicated on plans) Thermistor system shall be U.S. Motors' "THERMA- SENTRY," or equal. c. Three (3) bi-metallic thermostats of the automatic reset type, with normally closed contacts, mounted one (1) per phase. Each thermostat shall be furnished with leads suitable for connection to the control circuit. (Where indicated on plans) 2. Bearing protection shall consist of one of the following unless indicated otherwise in plans or specifications: a. Two (2) 100 or 120 ohm nickel resistance-type temperature detectors (RTD's), one (1) per bearing, mounted as closely as possible to the outer surface of each bearing. Each detector shall have its leads wired to a terminal block located in an auxiliary terminal box. Verify ohm resistance required with Motor Protection Unit Manufacturer. b. Two (2) bearing temperature relays one (1) per bearing, furnished with indicating scale, where otherwise indicated in plans or specifications. c. Two (2) dial type thermometers, one (2) per bearing. d. Two (2) iron or copper constantan thermo-couples, one (1) per bearing, where otherwise indicated in plans or specifications. Q. Testing 1. When specified motor shall be given a complete initial test in accordance with IEEE 112 method B and shall include the following items: a. Current Balance b. High Potential Test c. Vibration Test d. Winding Resistance e. Locked Rotor Current f. No Load Running Current g. Full Load Heat Run h. Full Load Percent Slip Efficiency at 100%, 75% and 50% Load 16150-12 of 14 REVISED 10/2/2019 j. Power Factor at 100%, 75%and 50% Load 2. When specified, noise test shall be performed in accordance with IEEE standard 85 decibel. 3. When specified, water immersion test shall be performed in accordance with NEMA MG 1-20.48. 4. Five (5) copies of certified test reports shall be submitted to the purchaser upon completion of all required tests. 5. Purchaser reserves the right to witness any or all of the tests specified to be performed. Prices for this shall be included as a separate item in the seller's quotation. 6. Motor Vibration: Shall not exceed 0.08 inches/second velocity. R. Submittal Data 1. Required with Proposal a. Preliminary Dimension Print and Frame Size b. Approximate Motor Weight c. Complete Motor Nameplate Information d. Motor Performance Data, including the following: 2. Guaranteed minimum efficiencies at 100%, 75%, and 50% of full load. 3. Guaranteed minimum power factor at 100%, 75%, and 50% of full load. 4. Locked Rotor Current 5. Full Load Current 6. Starting Torque 7. Full Load Torque 8. Breakdown Torque a. Complete description of testing facilities. b. Job site storage requirements. 9. Required within 6 weeks of purchase order award: a. Certified Dimension Prints b. Recommended Spare Parts List Priced 10. Required within motor upon shipment: a. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals b. Connection Diagrams c. Test Reports as Specified 16150-13of14 REVISED 10/2/2019 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA"Standard of Installation," and recognized industry practices. B. Energize motor heater while motor is stored on job site. After installation, motor heater shall remain energized at all times. See Item 1.04 — "Quality Assurance" of this specification section for additional requirements. 3.02 ALIGNMENT A. Contractor furnishing motor shall be responsible for alignment. B. Check alignment of motors prior to startup. C. Motors over 50 hp shall have alignment and balance checked using test equipment specially designed for this purpose. 3.03 TESTING A. Before connecting motor to power source, Meg test each conductor and motor. Record results for Engineer's review. B. After energizing motor, measure load current of each phase leg for start and run conditions. Where multiple motors, start all sequentially smallest to largest and record in-rush for each step. Record measurements and submit for Engineer's review. C. Verify measurements are acceptable before energizing motor. D. For VFD driven motors: 1. Test installation for presence of VFD induced shaft current by use of oscilloscope and provide correct action as required to resolve objectionable conditions. 2. Measure motor voltage at terminals for presence of objectionable VFD induced voltage spikes using an oscilloscope. 3. Where objectionable conditions exist, provide wave form recordings for Engineer's review. 3.04 GROUNDING A. Provide bare copper grounding grid buried or under concrete slabs and loop to all motors and electrically operated equipment. Refer to Specification Section 16452— "Grounding" for additional requirements. -END OF SECTION- `"" 16150-14 of 14 REVISED 10/2/2019 SECTION 16175 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work" for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16013 — "Electrical Submittals", for submittal requirements. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section provides for furnishing and installing variable frequency drives for the pump stations. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Section 16012—"Electrical Work" B. Section 16150—"Electric Motors" C. Section 16195—"Electrical Identification" D. Section 16481—"Motor Controllers" E. Section 16482 —"Motor Control Centers (600 V or Less)" 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this section for Engineer's approval. B. Where submittals for a particular equipment, device or material item vary from that specified or shown on plan drawings, and where that item is not specifically noted as acceptable and, where installation of submitted item results in improper or undesirable operation of the system, Contractor shall be liable for removal and/or replacement of that item with the item specified or shown on plan drawings at no additional cost to Owner. C. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark "Complies" or "Non-Compliance" or "Exception" adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide full 3-year service warranty on the overall installation and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Addendum 3 16175-1 of 4 REVISED 10/2/2019 Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware, and software. This warranty shall begin on date of written "Final Acceptance" of the electrical systems and to be executed as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor's warranty shall also guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide labor, work, or materials as necessary to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for more than 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All equipment and materials installed shall have full warranty from Manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for harsh industrial electrical/mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where Manufacturer's products fail prematurely, Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have the option of declaring that failures were caused by environmental conditions and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that Product Manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawing submittals. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within 5 working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and back charging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. C. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. D. Any equipment failures before final acceptance of installation, and before warranty period starts shall be replaced with new equipment. No repaired equipment or devices are allowed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD's) furnished under this specification shall be rated for service on 460 volt, 3 phase, grounded wye electrical systems with plus or minus 10 percent (10%) voltage variation and two (2) percent (2%) frequency variation. Motors are assumed to be induction type NEMA design B of the vertical type. 1. Standard features shall include: a. Pulse width modulation technology b. High efficiency--97 percent (97%) at full load c. Constant power factor at all speeds: 95 percent (95%) d. Quick response time e. Fully compatible with NEMA frame or submersible pump motors f. 4-20 Ma speed control if required including process card g. External contact on-off h. Automatic short circuit shut-off 16175-2 of 4 REVISED 10/2/2019 Ammeter with adjustable contacts for control j. Overvoltage, undervoltage, and overcurrent protection k. Run/stop and manual/auto selector switch Manual speed control pot and selector switch m. Diagnostic and operation control and programming panel n. Motor over temp. shutdown and alarm B. It shall be understood that this is a basic specification. Sizing and selection of the VFD is the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Provide reactors and/or filters as required to prevent any harmonics or disturbance on the plant power system and on the load side of the VFD. Any interference to other instruments or equipment shall be resolved to satisfaction of Engineer. D. Vendors for equipment with solid-state controller shall include provisions for both hardwired and data path status, command and alarm functions included under contract without additional cost to Owner, Programmer, or Engineer. E. For all motors 50 hp and over, provide means for detecting motor over-temp from five (5) RTDs in motor (3 phases and 2 bearing RTDs), or as noted otherwise on plans. F. Contractor to provide motor winding RTDs and shielded circuits from motor VFD controller. G. Contactor shall include minimum of four single pole, double throw spare auxiliary contacts rated at 10 amperes continuous,for each starter furnished. H. All equipment, instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge, phase fail, or other line conditions that may damage equipment, instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers' responsibility to provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. Provide CPT with 120V secondary and primary circuit breakers. CPT to be rated at minimum of 500VA providing 350VA capacity for loads above controller requirements. Provide secondary circuit breakers for controls and other devices indicated on plans. Do not feed motor heater circuits from starter CPT power source. 2.02 PUMP STATION VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE A. Variable frequency drives for pump stations utilizing submersible pumps shall be designed for application with submersible pumps. Ratings shall be such as to provide required horsepower through the pumping range of the pump. B. VFD unit manufacturer shall coordinate with pump motor manufacturer to assure a matched system that performs flawlessly as a unit. 2.03 INSTALLATION A. Installation of the variable frequency drives in equipment or individually shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. Equipment enclosures shall be so designed that the ambient temperature will not exceed the manufacturer's recommendation. Provide forced draft cooling or refrigerated air as required to maintain the operating temperatures recommended by the manufacturer. For the purposes of design, assume an ambient air temperature of 95°F. B. Each VFD shall have a disconnecting means within sight of the VFD, per NEC. The disconnecting means shall be one of the following: 16175-3of4 REVISED 10/2/2019 1. A circuit breaker or switch internal to the VFD. 2. An external disconnecting means where specifically shown on plans. C. Use VFD rated cable only for motor feeders. 2.04 RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION A. Radio frequency radiation from the unit shall meet the latest published standards of the IEEE and NEMA. Particular attention shall be given the wiring and installation of the VFD in equipment so as to minimize radiation from the system that may affect other instruments, equipment or electronic devices installed at this location. All filtering devices required shall be furnished at no additional cost to Owner. 2.05 PROTECTION A. All equipment installed on this project shall incorporate all devices and features to protect that equipment from the influence of other equipment, line voltage and phase irregularities, harmonics and other disturbances that may effect the proper and safe operation of that equipment whether these required features are a standard component of that equipment as an off-the-line product. No equipment shall be installed without these features. PART 3 EXECUTION—(NOT USED) -END OF SECTION- 16175-4of4 REVISED 10/2/2019 SECTION 16482 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (600 VOLTS OR LESS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.00 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16013—"Electrical Submittals",for submittal requirements. D. Listing of acceptable Equipment Manufacturers does not limit or remove the intent of these specification requirements. 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Motor Control Centers (MCC's) for use on ac circuits rated 600 volts or less. B. Overcurrent protective devices and disconnect switches used with motor control centers(MCC's) are specified in Section 16475—"Overcurrent Protective Devices." C. See Section 16012—"Electrical Work," Item 2.01—"Materials"UL fabrication requirements and Section 16013— "Electrical Submittals," for additional submittal requirements. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI C2-90 - National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). B. International Electrical Testing Association(P.O.Box 687,Morrison,CO 80465): ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250-89 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA ICS 2-88 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. 3. NEMA ICS 2.3-88 - Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers. D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 486A-89- Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. 2. UL 845-89- Motor Control Centers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for Engineer's approval. B. Shop Drawings: Addendum 3 16482-1 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 1. Each MCC including dimensioned plans and elevations and component lists. 2. Show ratings, including short-time and short-circuit ratings,and horizontal and vertical bus ampacities. 3. Schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual MCC units. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Interconnecting wiring diagrams pertinent to class and type specified for MCC. Schematic diagram of each type of controller unit indicated. 5. Dimensioned floor plans with MCC location and required stub-up entries into MCC. Show all pertinent dimensions that verify MCC fits space allocated on plans. Identify areas where equipment fit is a problem and describe any proposed solutions. All equipment shall be fabricated to fit available space shown. C. Product Data: Each product and component included in MCC(such as VFD)that is described in other specification sections shall be submitted separately or under the MCC cover, and with applicable specification section marked according to requirements of item F below. Submittals received that are incomplete will be returned without review. D. Test Results: Certified reports of field tests and observations. E. Operations and Maintenance Data: Maintenance data for MCC's. F. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. G. Provide one-line diagram with MCC submittal showing actual horsepower of motors to be provided for this project. Do not rely solely on plans but rather, coordinate with other vendors providing motors and equipment. Failure to do so will be at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. H. All submittals for motor control centers,control panels,control sections,SCADA panels,lift pump panels,and Vendor furnished panels must contain statement of U.L.certification and identifying name and number of U.L. certification. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other nationally recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). This includes complete MCC and switchgear assembly, including controls section. 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms"listed"and "labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code,Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a member of NEMA, regularly engaged in manufacturing LV MCC's complying with requirements of these Specifications,and experienced with at least five (5) projects of similar size and scope. D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for MCC's including clearances between MCC's and adjacent surfaces and items and are based on types and models indicated. MCC's of other manufacturers having equal performance characteristics and 16482-2 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 complying with indicated maximum dimensions may be considered. E. MCC starters,MCP,and breaker sizes shall be coordinated with motors supplied device and sizes shall be adjusted as required by motor criteria. This especially applies to high efficiency motors. Provide motor data to MCC Manufacturer at time MCC is ordered to assure coordination of overcurrent protective devices. F. Final assembly and mating of control sections or motor control center section shall be performed at facilities within 200 miles of project location. The following final assembly facilities are acceptable: 1. Weimar Manufacturing Co. 2. B.L. Technology, Inc. 3. W.W. Payton 4. Ace Controls 5. Texas Industrial Controls Manufacturing (TICM) 6. Systems, Inc. 7. Control Panel Manufacturers listed in other Specification Sections. G. Testing and Startup: 1. All elements of each electrical control system shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of this Specification. All special testing of materials and equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all testing and startup work with the Owner and Systems Integration Engineer. As a minimum, the testing shall include both a shop test and a field test by the Engineer. 2. Factory Tests: The electrical controls and all other associated hardware shall be tested via a full simulation at the factory or shop, prior to shipment,to demonstrate that each component is operational and meets the requirements of these specifications. Manufacturer shall provide test routine program for shop testing of I/O wiring. Test results shall be certified,with written documentation provided to the Engineer upon test completion. Shop testing may be witnessed by the Engineer, who will provide programming at time of testing. 3. Field Tests: All electrical control system components shall be checked to verify that they have been installed properly and that all terminations have been made correctly. Witnessed field tests shall be performed on the complete system. General Contractor shall provide commission services for entire electrical system.Contractor shall provide a checklist for all electrical,control and instrumentation functions and send to Engineer for approval. Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer on a paragraph-by-paragraph basis. Each test shall be witnessed and signed off by the Contractor and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. The Contractor shall notify the Owner at least 2 weeks prior to the commencement date of the field tests. After tests are completed and with system fully operational,system shall run continuously for a period of 10 days without failure. Any failures shall be repaired and test shall start over again. 4. Pump Controller Program: Testing will require a minimum of 10 working days after programs are downloaded to the pump controller. Provide 4 weeks'notice for program downloading by Programmer. This shall be accounted for in project schedule. 16482-3 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 5. Prior to testing system, or PLC programs or HMI programs provided by other than the Systems Integration Engineer shall be furnished on CD for review by Engineer. Provide any special software necessary to run and test complete program. H. Provide MCC that fits space available. Where dimensions exceed available space,sections are to be relocated in room or, MCC shall be specifically manufactured for this project to accommodate the space restrictions at no additional cost to Owner. Contractor shall contact Engineer before ordering equipment or installing conduits where space restriction exists. Where controls section is fabricated by other than MCC Manufacturer, a matching controls sections shall be provided and shipped to controls fabrication shop at time MCC is ordered so as to expedite controls assembly. J. Cabinet and Enclosures Heights: Cabinet,panel,and enclosure heights shall not exceed 6 feet—6 inches from floor to top fastening devices to allow access by Operator without use of ladders or steps to open enclosure doors. K. All equipment, instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge, phase fail, or other line conditions that may damage equipment, instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers'responsibility to provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions. B. Store so condensation will not occur on or in MCC's. Provide temporary heaters as required to prevent condensation. C. Handle MCC's in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for Handling, Installation, Operation,and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers." Use factory-installed lifting provisions. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every five of each type and rating of fuse and fusible devices installed, but not less than one set of three of each kind. Include spares for: a. Control power circuit breakers. b. Fuses and fusible devices for fused circuit breakers. (Where fuses approved.) c. Fuses for fusible switches. (Where fuses approved.) 2. Spare Indicating Lights: Furnish five of each type installed. 3. Touch-Up Paint: Furnish three (3) half-pint unopened containers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton B. General Electric 16482-4 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 C. Siemens D. Schneider Electric. E. Or equal, as pre-approved in writing before bid date. 2.02 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS A. Wiring Classification: Class I,Type B, as defined in NEMA ICS 2. B. Enclosure: NEMA Type 1,gasketed, as defined in NEMA 250, except as otherwise indicated. C. Compartments: 1. Modular,with individual doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw fasteners. 2. For combination starter units provide interlocks so disconnect means must be in off position before door can be opened and so door cannot be closed with disconnect means in on position, except by consciously operating permissive release device. Rotating type operators located outside of door are not acceptable. D. Interchangeability: 1. Construct compartments so it is possible to remove units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in control center. 2. Units requiring same size compartment shall be interchangeable, and compartments shall be constructed to permit ready rearrangement of units such as replacing three single units with unit requiring three spaces without cutting or welding. E. Wiring Spaces: �w 1. Provide each vertical section of structure with horizontal and vertical wiring spaces for wiring to each unit compartment in each section. 2. Provide separate door over vertical wiring space. 3. Provide supports to hold wiring rigidly in place. F. Meet current NEC requirements for service entrance. G. Ratings: Provide nominal system voltage, continuous main bus amperage, and short time and short-circuit-current ratings as indicated and conform to short circuit and coordination study. H. All enclosures for motor starters 100 hp and greater shall have forced air cooling. All outdoor enclosures are to have sufficient forced fan cooling. Provide rain hood, intake louvers, insect screens and fan motor circuits with t-start "On/Off" controls. Unless specifically noted or shown on plans,all outdoor MCC's shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel with three(3)point latching doors. Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 1,unless shown otherwise on plans. Where NEMA 1 enclosure is installed outdoors in a NEMA 3R or 4X outer enclosure, the inner NEMA 1 enclosure shall be independently fabricated and installed, separate from the outer enclosure such that the outer enclosure may be replaced without disturbing the inner enclosure in any manner. J. All outdoor enclosures shall have means of cooling and/or ventilation where environmental temperatures exceed any internal device ratings. K. All step-in or walk-in enclosures shall have adequate ventilation for cooling. L. Door Restraints: Provide door restraints on all doors for outdoor enclosures. M. All MCC sections to have 120-volt space heater with t-stat. 16482-5 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 N. All connections to devices and controls external to MCC shall be made at terminal strips on blocks only. Direct connection to MCC devices is prohibited. 0. Door latches shall not be operated with hex head type screws. Flat blade screwdriver shall be able to open latches. P. Provide enclosed type fluorescent light fixture in each MCC section. Install switch at location shown on Plans. 2.03 BUSES A. Material: Tin plated copper. B. Ampacity Ratings: As indicated for horizontal main buses and vertical bus sized for indicated loads or 300A minimum. C. Neutral Buses: Full size. D. Equipment Ground Bus: Non-insulated, horizontal copper bus 2 inches by 1/4 inch, minimum. E. Horizontal Bus Arrangement: Extend main phase, neutral and ground buses with same capacity entire length of MCC unless otherwise indicated,and provision for future extension at both ends by means of bolt holes and captive bus splice sections or approved equivalent. F. Natural Disconnect Link: For switchgear assembly having main service disconnect. Arrange to permit disconnecting the switchgear assembly neutral bus from the common ground bus and the incoming service neutrals. Also, provide a bolted,un-insulated,'A inch x 2 inch copper bus(main bonding jumper). Arrange to interconnect the neutral and the ground buses to establish the system common ground point. G. Short-Circuit Withstand Rating: Same as short-circuit current rating of section. H. Current transformers shall be mounted with factory brackets in line with bus bar or conductor routing. Provide warning label to deactivate power to MCC before attempting service to C.T. 2.04 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES A. General: Provide modular arrangement of motor controllers, control devices, overcurrent protective devices,transformers,panelboards,instruments,indicating panels,blank panels,and other items mounted in compartments of motor-control center as indicated. B. Motor Controller Units: 1. Combination controller units;of types and with features,ratings,and circuit assignments indicated. 2. Units with full-voltage, across-the-line, magnetic controllers up to and including Size 3 shall be installed on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical section buses while being racked into their normal energized positions. 3. Units shall have short-circuit current ratings equal to or greater than short-circuit current rating of MCC section. 4. Units in MCC's shall be equipped with pull-apart terminal strips or drawout terminal boards for external control connections. 5. All autotransformer type start installation shall be coordinated with power factor capacitors to avoid resonant conditions that might produce harmonics. 6. All autotransformer type starters to have temperature sensor devices. Connect to controls to protect autotransformer from over-temperature. 7. All well and blower motor starters to have start time delay relay. 16482-6 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 8. Contactor shall include minimum of four single pole, double throw spare auxiliary contacts rated at 10 amperes continuous,for each starter furnished. C. Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. Provide types of devices with features, ratings, and circuit assignments indicated, as specified in Section 16475—"Overcurrent Protective Devices." 2. Individual feeder tap units through 225 ampere rating shall be installed on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical section buses while being racked into their normal energized positions. 3. All equipment feeder and/or motor circuit breakers (not MCP) are to have plug-in trip unit. 4. Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) shall be electronic type that learn inrush current and adjust accordingly. D. Overload Relays: 1. Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic. 2. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full load current of specific motor to which connected with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. Overload devices to require manual reset after tripping occurs. Provide trip relay and provide signal circuit to PLC, SCADA, autodialer or annunciator to indicate trip signal. 3. Enhanced Protection Overload Relay: Provide overload relays with NEMA Class 10 tripping characteristics for submersible equipment or where indicated. Select to protect motor against voltage unbalance and single phasing. 4. Select overload heaters and relays based on Motor Manufacturer's requirements, or based on motor nameplate data, size at 1.15 FLA (nameplate). Measure actual FLA in operation and provide data in O&M Manual. Where overloads trip during normal operation,provide current recordings to analyze cause and time of events,and provide data to Engineer for recommended corrective action. E. Coordinate size of circuit breakers,trip units, MCP's and other overcurrent protective devices, with motor manufacturer's and provide proper rated devices accordingly. F. Spaces and Blank Units: Compartments fully bussed and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units. G. Spare Units: Type, sizes, and ratings as indicated, and installed in compartments indicated "spare." H. All motor starter controls are to include ETM, HOA, start time delay relay, and Run light as a minimum. Controls shall have HOA switch and circuits that allow automatic restart of controls after momentary power interruption,without rest action required. Lock-in push button controls are not allowed. Provide time delay for restart. Control Diagrams: Provide complete and accurate control diagrams and one-line diagram laminated in clear plastic and installed in door pockets of motor control center. J. All control transformers shall be sized for 250 percent of full load. K. All display screens or readouts shall be mounted in panel at height of 60 inches above level where operator stands. This must be accounted for where panels are installed on concrete pads or other elevated structures. L. Inhibit Relays: Where generator is not designed to carry full load of motors,provide inhibit relay for each motor starter over 5 horsepower to inhibit motor starter operation when generator 16482-7 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 runs. Relay is to be energized by generator run signal from ATS or generator. Provide bypass switch across the inhibit relay contacts to allow selected motors to run on generator power. M. Provide one (1) additional auxiliary contact for each motor starter. N. Where standard MCC controls section shown on Plans will not contain all devices on backplate, provide additional plate hinged to side of section wall for mounting additional devices. Space location to all clearance from devices on backplate. O. Manufacturer to provide all controller addresses, HMI and OIU templates and other data pertinent to SCADA programming by Engineer. No exceptions. P. All control device settings are to be adjusted by Contractor for values recommended by the Plant Operator. Contract Engineer for clarifications. Q. Controls—Trouble, Failure and Status Indications 1. Control circuit devices shall have auxiliary contacts to indicate position, alarm and status for annunciating a control circuit string condition at any specific time. This string shall include all devices from start of diagram such as HOA switch, control devices, alarm devices, status devices, motor starters, overload relays and circuit breakers, which shall all have status or alarm contacts. Provide circuits from each inputs of PLC controller, SCADA, autodialer or annunciation equipment. This requirement is to allow operator to immediately identify any device or function that may prevent proper operation of electrical system equipment. Refer to control diagrams in places for typical control circuits. 2.05 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Provide identifying devices. B. Equipment Markers: Provide 2-ply,1/8-in.thick laminated plastic,engraved equipment markers. 1. Color: Black letters on white background. 2. Nomenclature: Include following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: a. Equipment name (i.e. motor control center). b. Equipment Tag No. (i.e. 30-MCC-1). 3. Size: Provide approximate 3-in. by 6-in. (minimum) for equipment. a. 1-in. high letters for equipment tag number. b. 1/2-in. high letters for descriptive equipment name. 4. Size: Provide approximate 1 1/2 inch by 3 inch (minimum) for device or component. a. % inch high letters for equipment tag number. b. 1/4 inch high letters for descriptive equipment name. 5. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws except contact type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. C. Wire Markers: Provide wire markers for all power and control wiring. Install at points where wire terminates at devices and terminal strip. 16482-8 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 D. Place wire identification tags at each end of all conductors. 2.06 FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard finish suitable for environment in which installed. 2.07 CONCRETE BASES A. Class "B" as specified in Part 3—"Execution." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install MCC's in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3 "Instructions for Handling,Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of MCC's," and with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Anchor each motor-control center assembly to concrete base in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Level and grout sills flush with motor-control center mounting surface. C. Remove temporary lifting eyes,channels,brackets,and temporary blocking of moving parts from MCC units and components. D. Install separate independent anchor bolts for NEMA 1 enclosure where based outdoors with an outer enclosure. Outer enclosure shall be removable without disturbing inner enclosure, as described in Item 2.02—"Motor Control Centers." E. All components inside enclosures shall be fastened down with proper hardware. All cables shall be bundled and bound with waxed cord or nylon tie-raps manufactured for that purpose. Adhesive tie down blocks are not allowed. Provide threaded press-in or welded studs for nylon cable clamps as required. F. Contractor shall coordinate all conduit stub-ups into MCC. Any mis-located conduits shall be relocated at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. G. All motor control centers shall be fabricated to fit space available as shown on plans,even when special fabrication is required. H. Stub up all conduits entering MCC's,and other equipment enclosures from the bottom into each respective starter,feeder breaker or control section per equipment manufacturers conduit layout detail. Coordinate with equipment manufacture data sheets before starting any underground or below slab conduit installations. 3.02 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide 4-inch high concrete foundation on pad under MCC or as shown on plans. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten MCC bus joint bolts, electrical connector, and terminal bolts in accordance with Manufacturer's installation instructions and torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not stated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 16482-9 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Supplier's or manufacturer's technician for equipment specified herein shall be present at job site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum of 2 workdays, travel time excluded, for assistance during plant startup, equipment adjustment, and training of Owner's personnel for plant operation. Include minimum of: a. Two(2) person-days for Instructional Services. 2. Supplier or Manufacturer shall direct services to specific system and equipment operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting. B. Testing: 1. Comply with applicable requirements of InterNational Electrical Testing Association (INETA) Standard ATS, "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems." 2. Reports: Notify Engineer in writing indicating defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include record of repairs and adjustments made. 3. Perform following tests: a. Test insulation resistance of MCC buses;components;and of connecting supply, feeder,and control circuits. For components with solid-state devices or other sensitive components, perform tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Make continuity tests of circuits. c. Inspect MCC's for defects and physical damage,testing laboratory labels,circuit connections,and nameplate compliance with up-to-date system drawings. d. Perform operational test and exercise of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. e. Check MCC anchorage, external clearances, and alignment and fit of components including internal elements. f. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values. g. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for motor control and protective devices. h. Device Ratings and Settings: Verify ratings and settings of overload relays, motor circuit protectors, and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Quality Control Testing Program: Assure MCC installation meets specified requirements, is operational within specified tolerances, and provides appropriate protection for systems and equipment. a. Test and inspect MCC's in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. b. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test commencement. 16482-10 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 c. Reports: Prepare written reports of test results and observations. Report defective materials and workmanship. Include complete records of adjustments and corrective action taken. d. Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply label to tested components indicating results, person responsible, and date. e. Test insulation resistance of buses and portions of control wiring that disconnect from solid-state devices through normal disconnecting features. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. f. Verify appropriate capacity, overcurrent protection, and operating voltage of control power elements including control power transformers and control power wiring. g. Check phasing of supply source to bus. h. Test motor-control devices. Test overcurrent protective devices. 5. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest. Verify by retests that specified requirements are met. 3.05 CLEANING A. Inspect interior and exterior of MCC's. Remove paint splatters and other spots,dirt,and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation within each section of switchgear throughout periods during which the switchgear is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. 3.07 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide full 3-year service warranty on the overall installation and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware, and software. This warranty shall begin on date of written "Final Acceptance"of the electrical systems and to be executed as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor's warranty shall also guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide labor, work, or materials as necessary to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for more than 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All equipment and materials installed shall have full warranty from Manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for harsh industrial electrical/mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where Manufacturer's products fail prematurely,Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have the option of declaring that failures were caused by environmental conditions and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that Product Manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawing submittals. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. 16482- 11 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within 5 working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and back charging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. C. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. 3.08 TRAINING A. Provide minimum eight (8) hours of "hands-on" instruction each for Owner's staff. To be conducted at project site by control systems manufacturer's representative,at no additional cost to Owner. Training is to be conducted after all control systems are fully operational. To include PLCs and other devices. See Section 16012—"Electrical Work"for additional requirements and refer to other equipment B. Provide minimum two (2) weeks notice to Engineer and Owner before conducting training. -END OF SECTION- -- , _ 16482 ECTION- 16482-12 of 12 REVISED 10/1/2019 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 Car ADDENDUM NO. 2 Date: 10-29-2019 PROJECT: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase II BID NO.: 1020-03 BID DATE: 11/5/2019 at 2:00 PM NOTE: BID DATE HAS CHANGED FROM: John Lacy, P.E. Division Manager Joshua Netardus, P.E. Assistant Project Manager Costello, Inc. 2017 CityWest Blvd, 3`d Floor, Houston, TX 77042 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract L Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Section 00100, INVITATION TO BID, Remove and Replace Section in its entirety. Changes include: Page 1 of 3, Fourth Paragraph, Changed bid opening date to "2:00 p.m., Tuesday, November 5, 2019." 2. Section 00300. BID PROPOSAL, Remove and Replace Section in its entirety. Changes include: Revised Bid Items 12 and 13 to reflect anicillary work (generator pad, sound wall, access platforms) associated with generator replacement. SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Section 16012 - Electrical Work, 1.07 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS, Modify Section to add the following Paragraph E.9: 9. Boyer, Inc. 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM 2. Add the attached specification Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications in its entirety (6 pages). 3. Add the attached specification Section 05512 - Structural Steel in its entirety (5 pages). 4. Add the attached specification Section 05520 - Grating in its entirety (1 page). 5. Add the attached specification Section 05521 - Aluminum Railing in its entirety (11 pages). 6. Add the attached specification Section 16290- Low Voltage Surge Protection Device (SPD) in its entirety (9 pages). 7. Add the attached specification Section 16470- Panelboards in its entirety (7 pages). 8. Add the attached specification Section 16476 - Disconnects and Circuit Breakers in its entirety (4 pages). 9. Add the attached specification Section 16496 - Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) in its entirety (10 pages). 10. Add the attached specification Section 16622 - Sound Attenuating Enclosures in its entirety (3 pages). 11. Section 16650 - Diesel Engine Generator and Controls, 2.07 WEATHERPROOF HOUSING - (WHERE INDICATED ON PLANS) Remove Paragraph A and Replace with the following: A. Construction: Provide an overall weather protective housing with removable side panels and a hinged,padlockable meter panel door to make the engine generating plant suitable for outdoor installation. In addition, sound levels at the nearest property line shall not exceed 58 db at residential project locations and 68 db at non-residential project locations. Where sound attenuating housing is shown on plans, provide according to those specifications. 12. Add the attached specification Section 16911 - Power Monitor in its entirety (6 pages). 13. Section 16949 - Cellular Router, Delete Section in its entirety. 14. Add the attached specification Section 16950 - Field Electronic Transmitters in its entirety (3 pages). 15. Section 16995 - Electrical Systems Commissioning, Delete Section in its entirety. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: 1. Sheet 4 of 41, SHEET Cl - DEMOLITION PLAN, Remove and Replace Sheet in its entirety. Changes include: a. Added information to Note 4 clarifying the existing generator pad, CMU sound wall, and miscellaneous asphalt paving is to be demolished and replaced with a larger pad and CMU sound wall as shown on Sheet E21. Bollards are to be relocated. 2-22-12 00900-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM tire b. Added notes to clarify the specifications for the replacement sound wall. 2. Sheet 34 of 41, SHEET E18 -ELECTRICAL GROUND STORAGE TANK DETAILS, DETAIL 1 - GST CONNECTION DETAIL, Add Note 9 as follows: 9. GST NO. 1 LEVEL PROBE ENTRY: CONTRACTOR SHALL USE EXISTING HATCH SIDEWALL CONDUIT ENTRY. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 316 STAINLESS STEEL TERMINAL BOX AND PROBE SUPPORT(S) PER PROBE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 3. Sheet 37 of 41, SHEET E21 - ELECTRICAL GENERATOR DETAILS SHEET 1, Remove and Replace Sheet in its entirety. Changes include: a. Deleted generator pad detail. b. Modified Generator Plan Layout to clarify limits of proposed pad, steel access platform, and proposed CMU sound wall. PRE-BID QUESTIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS: 1. Question: The bid form shows the generator and the diesel tank as separate bid items. Since the diesel tank is a belly tank,can these two items be combined into one bid item? Response: Yes, see replacement Section 00300 BID PROPOSAL. 2. Question: What is the current status of the TxDOT crossing permit (for fiber optic crossing of Shadowcreek Parkway)? Response: See attached printout of current status in online TxDOT UIR system which shows where the project is in the review queue and the contact information. 3. Question: Are the flanges for the probe holders existing on the GSTs? Response: See below for the status at each of the three ground storage tanks: - GST3: There is an existing roof riser flange on GST3 near the hatch that is currently unused. The existing flange can be replaced with the proposed flange/probe holder. - GST2: There is an existing roof riser flange near the hatch on GST2 that currently has conduit for a level monitoring device penetrating it; Contractor shall remove that existing flange and level device and replace it with the proposed flange/probe holder. - GST1: There is no existing roof riser flange on this GST. A level monitoring device is currently installed by penetrating through the riser neck of the hatch; Contractor shall remove that existing device and replace it with the proposed probes at this penetration location, modifying as required. See Sheet E18, Detail 1, Note 9 added by addendum for clarification. See attached photo of GST I hatch riser penetration for reference. 4. Question: Was the mixer probe control panel supplied with the mixers or is it part of this contract? L Response: The optional "Medora GridBee Mixer Control Panel" was not provided with the mixers and is not planned in this contract. The "Proposed Mixer Run/Stop Control Station" shown on 2-22-12 00900-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Sheet E3 and detailed in Detail 3 on Sheet E19 shall be provided in this contract and is basically just a local on/off switch and not a control panel or other type of optional Medora equipment. .1o01 5. Question: Is a steel platform going to be required to go around the generator? If so, are plans going to be issued? Response: A steel access platform shall be required for access to the generator enclosure. See attached replacement Sheet E2 1 for orientation and requirements. 6. Question: How long can the plant be without power if the GST's are full when the power is shut down? Response: Duration will be dependent upon the time of year and corresponding water demand when the power shut down is requested. When approved in advance by the City, the FM521 plant can be run on generator power for up to a maximum of 24 hours (continuously) before incoming power must be restored. 7. Question: Do all pumps need to be operational when we shut power down to change out the MCC? Response: Generally, no more than one pump may be taken out of service at a time unless approved otherwise. Contractor requests to remove a pump from service and the duration must be coordinated with and approved in advance with the City. 8. Question: Is the power system study and arc flash analysis required on this project? Spec section 16947 calls for an arc flash hazard analysis study and spec section 16995 calls for a power system study. Response: Arc flash hazard analysis study will be required. Power systems study will not be required. 9. Question: There is a spec section for a cellular router however I don't see one. Is one required for this project? Response: No. Section 16949 has been removed as part of this Addendum. 10. Question: Spec section 16995 states to test all the systems in the plant. Our contract is only for a small part of the items or systems listed to be tested and commissioned. Can you clarify that the testing and training are only for the systems or items we furnish and install on this contract? Response: Section 16995 has been removed as part of this Addendum. Testing and Training will be limited to the requirements for equipment provided in appropriate sections. 11. Question: There is no spec for the generator ATS. The ATS is shown to be installed in the MCC. Will the manufacturer of the MCC (such as Eaton) be acceptable as the ATS supplier? Is Asco an approved manufacturer for the ATS? Response: The MCC manufacturer and ASCO will be acceptable. Section 16946 Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) has been added as part of this Addendum for clarification. 2-22-12 00900-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM_ L 12. Question: Can the ATS be installed separately from the MCC? Response: The MCC manufacturer will be acceptable. Section 16946 Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS)has been added as part of this Addendum for clarification. 13. Question: Specification Section 16012 Para. 1.07 E. Contractor Qualifications includes all qualified and acceptable Electrical Contractors. Boyer, Inc. is not listed and would like to be added. Please advise. Response: Boyer, Inc. has been added as part of this Addendum. 14. Clarification: Unless approved otherwise,all components of generator access platform shall conform to Division 5 specifications included in this addendum, with structural steel and grating consisting of A36 steel, hot dip galvanized after fabrication,with 2" diameter,2-rail (42" height) aluminum handrails. Stairs shall be minimum 3'-0" access width. include serrated grating stair tread with checkered plate nosing. Walkway height shall be as required for access to final generator enclosure(approximately 29-inches above generator pad finished floor). Anchor platform to concrete pad with galvanized anchor bolts &hardware. See Sheet E21 for additional requirements. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 ......o.vm‘ ` 0.�i�tEOtxPF•r�, 1�, f* •.• �1.. ,I1� 0�► : \ ,....t......... 's* / JO 1* I II / j• t H LACY•... N W. Jo n Lacy,P. •.. •• Division Manager ,``�'NA`���v toivil :a f 4 .,A I __. 14.:_zia;17- __ of,52r..4t.,. ',, Joshua Netardus.P.E. ; . /\ .* * , Assisitant Project Manager JOSHUA P.NETARDUS ' -fl 115917 ;�115917 Aft; %. •l CENSti�••*:, FSSiONAI�S. ,,-- 4-1/447 / ,-- 4-'yap- - / /o/i9/!9 (1... 2-22-12 00900-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebidsnpearlandtx.gov. All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids, shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic bids will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Tuesday, November 5`h, 2019. All Bids shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 - WA1701 City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: WA1701 BID NO.: 1020-03 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the City of Pearland City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 10:00 a.m. on Thursday October 17`h, 2019. The project will entail the removal and replacement of a motor control center, two booster pumps and two variable frequency drives; installation of a generator with diesel tank,quiet enclosure, fuel cleaner and concrete pad; analyze electrical loads; modification to civil, mechanical, electrical, Addendum 2-08-2018 00100- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID instrumentation, HVAC, and controls; installation of fiber optic extension from FM 2234 to water plant electrical building; SWPPP measures; site grading; and site restoration. Upon award of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to,all transmittals and material submittals,RFI's, RFC's,Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, internes access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project. For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200. Electronic Bid Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents may also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (281) 376-4577 4001 Sherwood Houston, TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (713) 334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston, TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832) 613-0201 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston, TX 77092 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System. BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A BID EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications bid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Addendum 2-08-2018 00100-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID The successful Bidder must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in `•/� the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent(100%) of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity: All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor, sub-recipient, or sub-contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this agreement, which may result in the termination of this agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal: The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of Lowest Responsible Bidder. In identifying this criteria the City will consider: 1) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested, including but not limited to: Base Bid, Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to be in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been "opened"may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the bid price. Young Lorfing, TRMC City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date October 9. 2019 Second Publication date October 16, 2019 Addendum 2-08-2018 00100-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL Section 00300 Lir BID PROPOSAL Lowest Responsible Bid Date: Bid of , an individual proprietorship/a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas/a partnership consisting of , for the construction of: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 - WA1701 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1701 BID NO.: 1020-03 (Submitted in Electronic format) To: The Honorable Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 Pursuant to the published Invitation to Bidders, and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools and materials, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of Liv the FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 - WA1701 with all related appurtenances, complete, tested, and operational, in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared by Joshua Netardus, P.E. and John Lacy, P.E., Costello, Inc, at 2107 CityWest Blvd, 3rd Floor, Houston, TX 77042, 713-783-7788, for the unit prices or applicable prices set forth in Exhibit "A", the electronic bid form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall constitute a legal and executable proposal from the Bidder. It is understood that, in the event any changes are ordered on any part of the Work, the applicable unit prices bid shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Work so changed. The Bid Security required under the Instructions to Bidders is included and has been uploaded as an attachment within the E-bid system and, that a fully executed, signed and sealed hard copy has been delivered to the Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of Bidder, as required by the Instructions to Bidders if requested to do so as a condition of the Bid process. The Bidder binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price, according to the forms included in the Contract Documents, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated in Exhibit A of this proposal along with all required insurance in the required amounts. Bidder's Initial's: 10-2017 00300- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL The undersigned Bidder agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete within THREE HUNDRED (300) CALENDAR DAYS after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for Substantial Completion shall begin on the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s) specified in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement, in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts bid in this Bid Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety (90) days following date of Bid Proposal opening, or such longer period as may be agreed to in writing by the City of Pearland and Bidder. It is understood that in the event the Successful Bidder fails to enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stated amounts within ten (10) days of the Notice of Award, the Successful Bidder will forfeit the Bid Security as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). The Bidder acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bidding Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Proposal prices. Addendum No.: Date: Addendum No.: Date: Addendum No.: Date: Addendum No.: Date: Bidder hereby represents that the only person or parties interested in this offer as principals are those named. Bidder has not directly or indirectly entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Firm Name: By: Title: Address: Phone No: ATTEST: (Seal, if Bidder is a Corporation) (Typed or Printed Name) Signature Date: END OF SECTION J Bidder's Initial's: 10-2017 00300-2 of 2 FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 WA1701 Bid Form ,`,. A. BASE BID ITEMS ITEM SPEC NO ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNITS UNIT PRICE TOTAL BID PRICE 1 01505 Mobilization and Demobilization(not to exceed 1 LS $ $ 3%of total bid price) 2 01555 Traffic Control and Regulation 1 LS $ $ 3 01561 Reinforced Filter Fabric 500 LF $ $ 4 02220 Demolition 1 LS $ $ 02220, Demolition for 300 KW Generator and Diesel 5 16650, Base Tank,including relocation to Public Works 1 LS $ $ 16655 at 3501 E.Orange Street for storage 02541 6 02634 Yard Piping and Valves 1 LS S 5 02635 7 09901 Protective Coatings and Shrouding 1 LS S $ 11211, 8 16150, Fairbanks-Morse 2000-gpm Vertical Turbine Can- 2 EA $ $ 16175 Type Booster Pump(without can) 11211, 9 16150, 150 HP Inverter Duty Motor 3 EA $ $ 16175 10 15012 Replace Air Conditioner at MCC Building, 1 LS $ $ including pad and duct modifications 16175, New Motor Control Center,including five 150 it 16482 HP Variable Frequency Drives and temporary 1 LS $ $ power and controls 16496, 800 KW Diesel Generator,including Enclosure, 12 16622, ATS replacement/feeders,3,000 gallon diesel 1 LS S 5 16650, storage base tank,access platform,and —16655 replacement concrete foundation Replacement 8"CMU"Sound Wall"Per Sheets 13 SHT 4 Cl and E21 to match height of Generator 56 LF $ $ Enclosure (approximately 10 feet tall) Page 1 FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 WA1701 Bid Form ITEM SPEC NO ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNITS UNIT PRICE TOTAL BID PRICE 14 16655 Driveway and Sidewalk Pavement Restoration 1 LS $ $ 15 16740 Multi-Duct Conduit(RMC,4"with 4-1"inner 40 LF $ $ ducts) Multi-Duct Conduit(HDPE,4"with 4-1"inner 16 16740 ducts)(Trenchless)(Orange),including irrigation 1,960 LF $ $ system and surface restoration at pits 17 16740 TxDOT Type 2 Ground Box with Apron 5 EA $ $ 18 16740 Fiber Optic Splice Enclosure-Underground, 1 EA $ $ Waterproof 19 16740 Poli-Mod Patch and Splice Module 9 EA $ $ Fiber Optic Cable 20 16740 2,100 EA $ $ (Single-Mode)(96 Strand) 21 16740 Fiber Optic Cable Road Marker 6 EA $ $ 22 16740 Fiber Optic Patch Panel 1 EA $ $ (144 Position) Splicing Work at FM 2234 Ground Box(connect 23 16740 Prop 96 strand 1 LS $ $ to Exist 144 strand) Fiber Optic Work at MCC Building,including 24 16740 splicing/termination,wall penetration, 1 LS $ $ enclosure,conduit supports,and all other fiber optic work 25 16941 Electrical&Control System 1 LS $ $ Controller Programming& 26 16941 SCADA Commissioning 1 LS $ 62,500.00111 $ 62,500.00 (by Hatch) A. BASE BID ITEMS SUBTOTAL 5 4.1110 Page 2 FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 WA1701 Bid Form B. EXTRA BID ITEMS ITEM SPEC NO ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNITS UNIT PRICE TOTAL BID PRICE 27 02252 Extra Cement Stabilized Sand 100 CY $ $ 28 02252 Extra Bank Sand 100 CY $ $ 29 02255 Extra Select Fill 350 CY $ $ 30 02318 Extra Machine Excavation 100 CY $ $ 31 02318 Extra Hand Excavation 100 CY $ $ 32 02634 Extra Ductile Iron Fittings 5 TON $ $ 33 02922 Extra Sodding 6500 SY $ $ 34 03300 Extra Class"C"Concrete 50 CY $ $ . _ 35 01570 Trench Safety 200 LF $ $._ 36 02921 Hydromulch 1 AC $ $ Replacement of Suction Barrel for High Service Pump,Only When Authorized by Owner, 37 11211 including piping,slab,pump pad,electrical,and 2 EA $ $ related modifications as required,complete in place L Page 3 FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 WA1701 Bid Form 02220/1 Extra Remove and Replace TxDOT Type 2 38 6740 Ground Box with Apron 1 LA $ $ Adder To Install 8"Steel Casing at FM 2234 39 02417 Conduit Crossing(Trenchless)(Does not include 103 LF S_ cost for Conduit/Fiber Installation) B. EXTRA BID ITEMS SUBTOTAL $ C. BID ALTERNATE ITEMS ITEM SPEC NO ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNITS UNIT PRICE TOTAL BID PRICE Deduct to Substitute Engineer-Approved Equal 11211, 40 16150, Manufacturer 1 LS S $ 16175 2000-gpm Vertical Turbine Can-Type Booster Pump(without can) BID SUMMARY A. BASE BID ITEMS SUBTOTAL(ITEMS 1-26) $ B. EXTRA BID ITEMS SUBTOTAL(ITEMS 27-39) $ C. BID ALTERNATE ITEM 40 $ Page 4 FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 WA1701 Bid Form TOTAL BASE BID AMOUNT $ (ITEMS 1-39) TOTAL BASE BID WITH ALTERNATE AMOUNT $ (ITEMS 1-39, 40) Substantial Completion:Contractor must achieve Substantial Completion within 300 Calendar Days from date specified in Notice to Proceed, as the time may be adjusted by Change Order Final Completion: Contractor must complete the Punch List within 30 Calendar Days from Substantial Completion Liquidated Damage Amount for Failure to Meet Time for Substantial Completion:$500.00 per Calendar Day Liquidated Damage Amount for Failure to Complete Punch List Items by Time for Final Completion:$500.00 per Calendar Day Extra Bid Items are not to be used without prior authorization from the City of Pearland. InFixed Unit Price.Bidder cannot change. ‘111.' • L Page 5 FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 WA1701 Bid Form EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS: Pumps: Fairbanks Morse-Nijhuis(Pentair) (Base Bid) Pumps: (Alternate 1) Motors: VFDs: MCC: Generator: HVAC: SUBCONTRACTORS: Piping Fab: Electrical: Fiber Optic: Programming: Hatch Integrators/Engineers Page 6 Cr SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bolts, anchors, nuts, sleeves, concrete anchors, scheduled items, and other miscellaneous ferrous metal and sheet metal items not specifically included under other sections of these specifications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners,finish and accessories. Include erection drawings showing locations, elevations, clearances, and details where applicable. B. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Submit manufacturer's technical literature and test reports showing certified capacities for concrete anchors. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. B. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section entitled, "SUBMITTALS," certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Construction Plans. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Shop-primed Materials: 1. Steel Shapes, Bars and Plates: ASTM A36. cre 2. Structural Tube: Hot formed square or rectangular tubing, ASTM A501. 05500-1 of 6 3. Cold-rolled Sheets: ASTM A366. 4. Cold-finished Bars: ASTM A108. 5. Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 if not shown otherwise. B. Uncoated Ferrous Materials: 1. Stainless Steel: Austenitic Type 302 or 304, No. 4 belt polished, 50-180 grit finish, stainless steel conforming to ASTM A276, A269, A312, A632, as applicable. 2. Cast Iron: ASTM A48, Class 30B. 3. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Bolts per ASTM F593,Type 316;nuts per ASTM F594,Type 316; UNC coarse threads. 4. Concrete Anchors: Concrete anchors are inserted into holes drilled in hardened concrete and shall be one of the following types: a. Adhesive Anchors: Concrete anchors which are submerged, in splash zones, in enclosed spaces over liquids, or anchoring vibrating equipment shall be epoxy adhesive anchors. Adhesive anchors may be used at all locations where concrete anchors are required. Epoxy systems shall be Sika/FI System with Sikadur Injection Gel Epoxy,Master Builders Concresive Epoxy Cartridge Dispensing System and Concresive Paste LPL,or equal. Threaded rods shall be ASTM F593, Type 316 studs. Where adhesive anchors, or connected metal, are exposed to direct sunlight, the anchors shall be certified to maintain at least 90 percent of their rated strength(tested at 73 degrees F)when tested at 160 degrees F. b. Expansion Anchors: Where concrete anchors are indicated and adhesive anchors are not required, wedge type anchors made with ASTM A276,Type 316 Stainless Steel shall be used. Anchors shall be KWIK Bolt III By Hilti,Inc. or approved equal. C. Galvanized Materials: 1. Non-structural Pipe: ASTM A 120. 2. Iron and Steel Hardware: ASTM A153. 3. Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strips: ASTM A123. 4. Steel Sheets: ASTM A446. 5. Assembled Steel Products: ASTM A386. 6. Delivery of Hot-dipped items: ASTM A525. D. Aluminum Materials: 1. Standard Structural Shapes: ASTM B308. 2. Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B429. 3. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B221. } 05500-2 of 6 4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209. Use alloy 3003-H16 for mill finish and alloy 5005-H16 for anodized finish. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight,flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts;unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications.Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FINISHES A. Steel Shop Primer: 1. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP-2 and SP-l. Remove mill scale, loose rust, and other foreign materials. 2. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. 3. Acceptable Primers: Comply with F.S.TT-P-86,Type I or II,TT-P-636C, or SSPC—Paint 4-64T. Proprietary primers of equal performance may be used. 4. Application: Apply with spray only for Workmanship Classes 1 and 2. Apply primer free of runs and other irregularities that may require modification to achieve the specified finish appearance. B. Galvanization: Galvanize, after completion of welded fabrication, in accordance with ASTM A123, structural steel members. Provide minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. 2.04 WORKMANSHIP CLASSES (Steel) A. CLASS 1: 1. Exposed Surfaces: Sandblast surfaces smooth with pits,mill marks,nicks and scratches filled or ground off. Defects shall not show when painted. 05500-3 of 6 2. Welds: Conceal welds where possible. Where exposed, grind welds to small radius with uniform sized cove. When painted, welds shall be undetectable. 3. Bolts: Use only flat head countersunk bolts in exposed locations. 4. Straightness: Distortions visible to the eye will be rejected. 5. Joints: Fit joints to hairline finish. B. CLASS 2: 1. Exposed Surfaces: Moderate irregularities not visible at 30 feet may remain. Mill marks may remain. 2. Welds: Grind welds to small radius with uniform sized cove. 3. Bolts: Use only flat or oval head, countersunk bolts where exposed to view. 4. Straightness: Minor distortions will be permitted. 5. Joints: Provide maximum gap of 1/16 inch. C. CLASS 3: 1. Exposed Surfaces: No improvement from mill finish required except preparation of galvanizing or priming. 2. Welds: Grinding not required. 3. Bolts: Exposed bolts permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate sections. C. All stainless steel threads to be coated with an anti-seizing compound prior to installing the nuts. J 05500-4 of 6 (ay 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level,accurately fitted,free from distortion or defects and as recommended by product manufacturer. Attach members firmly to abutting materials,parallel to adjoining construction. B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. Fill and sand screw heads and joints larger than a hairline in Class 1 workmanship items. G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. Cie 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. General - The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Construction Plans details for items not specifically scheduled. Items not listed require the following workmanship classes and finishes. 1. Exposed items in finished areas: Class 1. 2. Exposed items in utility areas: Class 2. 3. Concealed items: Class 3. 4. Items not subject to contact with moisture: Primed finish. 5. Items subject to contact with moisture: Galvanized finish. B. List of Typical Steel Items (Workmanship and Finish) 1. CLASS 1 Workmanship: (Shop Primer finish) Interior wall ladders to roof hatches. 2. CLASS 2 Workmanship: (Shop Primer finish) Miscellaneous interior (11W exposed angles. 05500-5 of 6 3. CLASS 2 Workmanship: (Galvanized finish) a. Miscellaneous exterior exposed angles. b. Exterior loose lintels. c. Exterior wall ladders to roof. 4. CLASS 3 Workmanship: (Shop Primer finish) Miscellaneous interior concealed angles. 5. CLASS 3 Workmanship: (Galvanized finish) Miscellaneous exterior concealed angles. C. List of Typical Aluminum Items I. Anodized Items: Closure panels and plates,exposed to view. * END * 05500-6 of 6 SECTION 05512 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section in general covers the furnishing, fabrication and erection of steel for structural use, anchoring and metal items not specifically included under other specification sections. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section entitled "SUBMITTALS". B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connections, attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. D. Submit manufacturer's technical literature and test reports showing certified capacities for concrete anchors. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. B. Welder's Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section entitled "SUBMITTALS", certifying welders employed on the Work and verifying AWS qualifications within the previous 12-months. 1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Construction Plans. 1.05 REFERENCES A. AISC Steel Construction Manual B. ASTM A36- Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel C. ASTM A123- Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 05512-1 of 5 D. ASTM A307- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Steel, 60000 PSI Tensile Strength E. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 KSI Minimum Tensile Strength F. AWS A5.1- Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. G. AWS D1.1- Structural Welding Code Steel. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. All structural steel shapes, plates, pipe support framing, bearing plates, and completely embedded steel items shall conform to ASTM Standard A36 unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2. Structural steel for curb angles, sheet metal, embedded steel (not completely embedded), stairs and miscellaneous items shall conform to ASTM Standard A36 and shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. B. Standard Bolts and Nuts 1. Unless otherwise specified, noted on the drawings, or required, bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Standard A325, latest edition, Grade A, with square head, hex nuts, and standard washers. C. Anchor Bolts 1. Anchor bolts shall be galvanized and fabricated from new, ASTM A307 steel, round bar stock, complete with American Standard threads, hex nuts, and washer unless otherwise noted. D. Pipe Supports 1. The pipe supports shall be fabricated from steel conforming to ASTM Standard A36, latest edition. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 05512-2 of 5 C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. 2.03 FINISHES A. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. B. Galvanize, after completion of welded fabrication, in accordance with ASTM A123. Provide minimum 1.25 oz/sq. ft. galvanized coating. 2.04 PAINT MATERIALS A. Provide the manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the type specified or approved by Engineer. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. B. Painting Specifications: a. 1st Coat: Devoe Devshield Rust Penetrating Metal Primer 4130-6130 b. 2nd Coat: Devoe Devflex Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Semi-gloss 4206 (color as directed) PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION AND ERECTION A. General 1. All welding to be performed in the field shall be by welders having current weld certifications in accordance with AWS for that type/class of weld. 2. All shop fabrication, field fabrication and erection shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the AISC Manual and Specifications for fabrication and erection of buildings. All fabrication shall be welded construction, unless otherwise shown or approved by the Engineer. 3. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Welding 1. Welding electrodes and welding procedures shall conform to the latest requirements of the AWS A5.1 and D1.1. 2. Clean and strip steel items bare metal where site welding is required. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 05512-3 of 5 B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true J alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1. 1. E. Obtain Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: '4-inch, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset from true Alignment: '4-inch. 3.04 PAINTING A. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. C. Clean surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer before applying paint or surface treatments. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces. D. Mix, prepare and store painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. E. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. F. Do not apply material when surface and ambient temperature are outside the temperature range required by the paint product manufacturer. G. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain, fog, or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint manufacturer. H. Provide special, temporary ventilation and any other protective measures as required by the paint manufacturer and/or applicable laws and regulations. 05512-4 of 5 I. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing, or replacing and repainting as acceptable to Owner. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly-painted wet finishes. * END * L 05512-5 of 5 SECTION 05520 GRATING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section governs for furnishing and installing grating and related labor, materials, and accessories, complete in place. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel grating shall conform to NAAMM standards for rectangular grid utilizing ASTM A569 or A36 steel, of sizes and thicknesses indicated on Plans. B. Grating shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. C. Anchors to be saddle-type clips of stainless or galvanized steel for the type and size of grating specified, supplied by manufacturer of grating. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Install grating as indicated on Plans, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Anchor clips to be installed at manufacturer's recommended spacing. Field-drill holes for bolts in accordance with these recommendations. 3.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit product data for all materials used to Engineer for approval in accordance with the Section entitled "Submittals". B. Submit complete shop drawings showing sizes, fabrication, anchorage, metal gauges, reinforcement, finishes, and other pertinent data. C. After fabrication and finishing and prior to shipment, manufacturer to provide simulated field layout of all grating and accessories to assure proper fit, alignment, and bundling in sequence of erection. • * END * 05520-1 of 1 SECTION 05521 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipments, and incidentals required to provide welded aluminum handrail and railing system as shown on Construction Plans and/or as specified herein. B. The Work also includes providing openings in and attachments to new railings and providing for the railings all items such as anchor bolts, fasteners, studs and all items required for which provision is not specified included under other sections. C. Review installation procedures under other sections and coordinate the work that must be installed with or attached to the railings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid: 1. ASTM B26 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. 2. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 3. ASTM B210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes. 4. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 5. ASTM B241 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube. 6. ASTM B247 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy [ Die Forgings, Hand Forgings, and Rolled Ring Forgings. 05521-1 of 11 7. ASTM B429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 8. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) Metal Finishes Manual. 9. ANSI/ASSE A 1264.1 Safety Requirements for Workplace Walking/Working Surfaces and Their Access; Workplace Floor, Wall and Roof Openings; Stairs and Guardrails Systems. 10. The Aluminum Association - Aluminum Standards and Data; and Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements at all locations of handrailing prior to the fabrication of any handrailing in order to ensure proper fitting of the work. Coordinate post or wall mounting bracket locations with adjacent equipment and field conditions encountered. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Shop Assembly: 1. Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field splicing and assembly of unit at the project site. 2. Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 3. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installations. D. Qualification for Welding: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Structural Welding Code" D1.1, Section 5, Qualifications. 2. Provide certification that all welders employed on or to be employed for the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. 3. Ensure that all certifications are kept current. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Handrails: 05521-2 of 11 ( 1. Uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied any direction without damage or permanent set. 2. Concentrated load of 300 pounds applied in any direction. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Top Rails of Guards: 1. Uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied horizontally and concurrently with 100 pounds per linear foot applied vertically downward. 2. Concentrated load of 300 pounds applied any direction. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. I.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made accordance with the requirements of Section entitled, "SUBMITTALS." Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Samples, Handrails and Railings: a. Submit sample with specified metal finish, including typical welded or bolted connections, not less than 6-inches long. b. Submit one sample for each fitting: elbow, tee, cross, side outlets elbow. One for each type of mounting flange. Sample will be reviewed for texture, finish and workmanship. c. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Submit for review shop drawings for the fabrications and erection of aluminum handrails and railings. b. Include plans, elevations, and details of the sections and connections. c. Show anchorage items. d. Design calculations to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of paragraph 1.04 of this Section. e. All Shop Drawings and calculations are to be prepared by, or under the direct supervision of, and officially sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed the State of Texas attesting to the conformance with design criteria. C. Manufacturer Certification: L 05521-3 of 11 1. Furnish certifications by Manufacturer that the handrail conforms to all applicable OSHA and ANSI requirements for load and deflection. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pack and ship all railing in individual plastic film to protect finish. B. Protect from corrosion, deformation and other types of damage. Store items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Replace damaged items with new materials. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METALS, GENERAL A. Railings and posts for circular section railing systems are to be specifically fabricated from aluminum alloy 6063-T832 hollow pipe of 1-inch nominal diameter size. Pipe is to be Schedule 40 circular piping having a 1.900-inch outside diameter, a 1.610-inch inside diameter, a 0.145-inch wall thickness, and a weight of 0.940 pounds per linear foot. All railing posts are to be reinforced with 1-inch O. D. solid round bars of 6061-T6 aluminum. Aluminum for all railing systems is to have a mill finish, unless otherwise indicated. B. Toe plates are to conform to the following design criteria: 4-inch x 1/4-inch plate aluminum alloy type 6061-T6 with mill finish. C. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations or blemishes. D. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. B. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B429, Alloy 6063-T6. C. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6. 05521-4 of 11 kumw 2.03 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Aluminum Railings: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. B. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 3. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. C. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place or chemical anchors, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1. For aluminum railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: 05521-5 of 11 1. Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. 2. Fabricate handrailing true to line, level and profiles shown. 3. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work. 4. Provide all exterior handrail posts with a 3/16-inch weep holes drilled in the plane of the railing approximately lh inch above surrounding concrete. 5. All post shall be equally spaced within a continuous run of handrailing, with a maximum post spacing of 4-feet 0-inches, unless otherwise shown. 6. Top rail to be continuous in each section. 7. Vertical post to be continuous between the floor and the top rail. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections, unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 05521-6 of 11 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings. J. Form changes in direction by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise fir• indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4-inch or less. N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6-inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure. Q. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from stainless-steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged. Lie 05521-7 of 11 1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings, unless otherwise indicated. R. Toe Boards: 1. Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 2. Provide for railings not on concrete curb. 3. Material: American Standard Aluminum Channel, 4-inches x 2.16 pounds per linear foot. 4. Cope channel to match, post spacing. 5. Securely fasten in place with not more than 1/4-inch clearance above floor level. 6. Splice toe plate channel using 1/4-inch x 2 -inch x 6-inch long aluminum plate, attached to inside of channel web with 316 stainless steel countersunk screws. Do not splice within the middle 1/3 of any span. 7. Meet the requirements of OSHA Part 1910.23 Section (e). 2.06 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal .mood Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 2.07 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Mechanical Finish: AA-M12 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated). PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 05521-8 of 11 B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16-inch in 3-feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4-inch in 12-feet. C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. D. Dissimilar Materials: Make connections using stainless steel fasteners and isolate with dielectric. E. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. F. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.02 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in paragraph 2.05 of this Section whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending 2-inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within 6-inches of post. 3.03 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use stainless steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. L 05521-9 of 11 B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5-inches deep and 3/4-inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material. D. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post. E. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete. 3.04 ANCHORING RAILING A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. 3.05 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. B. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3.06 CLEANING AND REPAIRING: A. Cleaning: 1. Remove protective plastic as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Remove all stains, dirt, grease, or other substances by washing railings thoroughly using clean water and soap; rinse with clean water. 3. Do not use acid solution, steel wool or other harsh abrasive. 4. If stain remains after washing, remove finish and restore in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. 5. After cleaning, apply a thin, clear wax coat to all railing and post surfaces. 05521-10 of 11 B. Repair: 1. Remove stained or otherwise defective work and replace with material that meets specification requirements. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. * END * L 05521-11 of 11 SECTION 16290 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE PART 1 GENERAL 1.00 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment conforms to the requirements of this project before purchase. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16012 — "Electrical Work", Item 1.04—"Submittals"for submittal requirements. D. All equipment installed on this project shall incorporate all devices and features to protect that equipment from the influence of other equipment, line voltage and phase irregularities, harmonics and other disturbances that may affect the proper and safe operation of that equipment whether these required features are a standard component of that equipment as an off-the-line product. No equipment shall be installed without these features. All surge protective devices shall be provided by same manufacturer. E. Contractor shall contact SPD manufacturer's local representative before bidding to confirm model number supplied is proper for this project application. 1.01 SUMMARY REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall furnish and install Surge Protective Device (SPD) equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings, or models specified as specified herein. The AC surge protection shall be integrated into each of the following items in this project: Electrical distribution equipment, Main breaker, switchgear, transfer switches, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, solid-state starters, VFD's and local control panels, including equipment vendor control panels. This provision may not appear on all drawings, but is required unless specifically noted otherwise. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS A. General: The latest edition of the following standards and publications shall comply with the work of this section: 1. ANSI/IEEE C84.1, American National Standard for Electric Power Systems and Equipment-Voltage Ratings (60 Hertz) 2. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 3. ANSI/IEEE C62.45, Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits ADDENDUM NO.2 16290-1 of 9 REVISED 10/28/2019 4. Underwriters Laboratories-UL 1449 Third Edition, Standard for Safety - Surge Protective Devices 5. Underwriters Laboratories-UL 1283, Standard for Safety - Electromagnetic Interference Filters 6. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 70- National Electrical Code 7. IEEE Standard 142, IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (IEEE Green Book) 8. ANSI/IEEE Standard 141, IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants (IEEE Red Book) 9. IEEE Standard 1100, IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment (IEEE Emerald Book) 10. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, NEMA LS-1 11. MIL Standard 220B Method of Insertion-loss Measurement 12. ISO 9001, Quality Management Requirements 1.03 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. Eaton shall be the basis of design. All products submitted shall comply with, meet, or exceed the specifications of the Eaton model type specified herein. Equal products as pre-approved in writing by Engineer are acceptable. B. The manufacturer must be regularly engaged in the manufacture of surge suppression products for the specified categories for no less than 10 years. C. For the equipment specified herein,the Manufacturer shall be 150 9001 or 9002 certified. D. The Manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of 5 years. When requested by the Engineer,an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. E. The surge protection device shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide full 10-year service warranty on the overall installation and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware, and software. This warranty shall begin on date of written "Final Acceptance" of the electrical systems and to be executed as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor's warranty shall also guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide labor, work, or materials as necessary to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for more than 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All equipment and materials installed shall have full warranty from Manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for harsh industrial electrical/mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where Manufacturer's products fail prematurely, Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have the option of declaring that failures were caused by environmental conditions and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that Product Manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawing submittals. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. ADDENDUM NO.2 16290-2 of 9 REVISED 10/28/2019 B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within 5 working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and back charging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. C. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. D. A surge protection device that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the warranty period shall be replaced free of charge. Since "Acts of Nature" or similar statements typically include the threat of lightning to which the surge protection devices shall be exposed, any such clause limiting warranty responsibility in the general conditions of this specification shall not apply to this section. The warranty shall cover the replacement of complete device. Surge protection devices with warranties that are meant to repair or supply replaceable parts shall not apply to this section 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. The SPD submittals shall include, but shall not be limited to,the following information: 1. Data for each suppressor type indicating conductor sizes, conductor types, and connection configuration and lead lengths. 2. Manufacturer's certified test data indicating the ability of the product to meet or exceed requirements of this specification. 3. The SPD manufacturer's local representative shall confirm, in writing, that the SPD model purchased is the proper selection for this project application as indicated on plans and specifications. 4. List and detail all protection systems such as fuses, disconnecting means and protective materials. 5. Surge protection device wiring, bonding, and grounding connections shall be indicated on the wiring diagrams for each system. Include installation details demonstrating mechanical and electrical connections to equipment to be protected. 6. If requested, a sample of each suppressor type shall be submitted for use in testing and evaluation. 7. Provide verification that the surge protection device complies with the required ANSI/UL 1449, Third Edition listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). Compliance may be in the form of a file number that can be verified on UL's website or on any other NTRL website, as long as the website contains the following information at a minimum: model number, surge protection device type, system voltage, phases, modes of protection, Voltage Protection Rating(VPR), and Nominal Discharge Current (I„). 8. Provide Electrical drawings showing unit dimensions, weights, installation instruction details, lead length configuration, wiring configuration, and mounting arrangement of any optional remote diagnostic equipment and assemblies. 9. Wiring diagram for each surge protector. 10. MOV ratings. ADDENDUM NO.2 16290-3 of 9 REVISED 10/28/2019 B. Provide submittals per Specification Section 16012 — "Electrical Work," Item 1.04, for Engineer's review and approval. C. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final As-Built drawings and information for items listed above and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 2. Provide As-Built Drawings per Specification Section 16012- "Electrical Work," Item 1.05. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of Manufacturer's instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. O&M manuals shall be provided with each surge protection device shipped per Specification Section 16012 "Electrical Work," Item 1.05. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Cutler-Hammer B. Pre-approved equal 2.02 SYSTEM APPLICATION A. Only apply a wye (three-phase,four-wire)configured SPD if the neutral is physically connected to the SPD and properly installed per NEC. Confirm with manufacturer. B. Use a delta (three-phase, three-wire) configured SPD for any type of impedance (resistive, inductive) grounded system. Confirm with manufacturer. C. Use a delta (three-phase,three-wire)configured SPD for a solidly grounded wye system where the neutral wire is not pulled through to the SPD location. Confirm with manufacturer. D. Use a delta (three-phase, three-wire) configured SPD if the presence of a neutral wire is not known. Confirm with manufacturer. E. The surge protection device applications covered under this section include distribution and branch panel locations, busway, motor control centers (MCC), switchgear, and switchboard assemblies. All surge protection devices shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C, B, and A environments. F. Surge Protection Device Type: All surge protection devices installed on the line side of the service entrance disconnect shall be Type 1 surge protection devices. All surge protection devices installed on the load side of the service entrance disconnect shall be Type 1 or Type 2 surge protection devices. ADDENDUM NO.2 16290-4 of 9 REVISED 10/28/2019 G. Surge protection devices should not be installed on the load (at motor) of any variable frequency drive.Surge protection devices with EMI/RFI filters are not to be used on the load side (at motor) of soft starters. 2.03 VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION —GENERAL A. Electrical Requirements: 1. Unit Operating Voltage — Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration. 2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) —The MCOV shall not be less than 125% of the nominal system operating voltage. 3. Surge current per phase — 250 KA/phase for service entrance, 120 KA/phase for panelboards or other locations with 150 amps or more. Provide lower KA/phase ratings only where specifically shown on drawings,or recommended by manufacturer. 4. The suppression system shall incorporate self protected metal-oxide varistors (MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service entrance and all other distribution levels. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes,selenium cells or air gaps. 5. Protection Modes — The surge protection device must protect all modes of the electrical system being utilized. The required protection modes are indicated by bullets in the following table: Protection Modes Configuration L-N L-G L-L N-G Wye • • • • Delta N/A • • N/A Single Split Phase • • • • High Leg Delta • • • • 6. Nominal Discharge Current (In) — All surge protection devices applied to the distribution system shall have a 20kA nominal discharge current rating regardless of their surge protection device type(includes Types 1 and 2)or operating voltage. Surge protection devices having a nominal discharge current less than 20kA shall be rejected. ADDENDUM NO.2 16290-5 of 9 REVISED 10/28/2019 - B. Surge Protection Device Design: 1. Balanced Suppression Platform —The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating replaceable surge protection device modules shall not be accepted. 2. Electrical Noise Filter—Where specifically indicated on plans, unit shall include a high- performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method. Products unable able to meet this specification shall not be accepted. Noise filter shall not be used for VFD driven motor applications. 3. Internal Connections — No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be soldered, hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors. 4. Monitoring Diagnostics — Each surge protection device shall provide the following integral monitoring options: a. Protection Status Indicators - Each unit shall have a green / red solid state indicator light that reports the status of the protection on each phase. A. The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light shall indicate that damage has occurred on the respective phase or mode. All protection status indicators must indicate the actual status of the protection on each phase or mode. If power is removed from any one phase,the indicator lights must continue to indicate the status of the protection on all other phases and protection modes. 1. Diagnostics packages that simply indicate whether power is present on a particular phase shall not be accepted. 2. Overcurrent Protection: The unit shall contain self protected MOVs. These self protected MOVs shall have a self protection element packaged together with the MOV in order to achieve overcurrent protection of the MOV. The self protection element shall disconnect the MOV(s)from the system in a fail-safe manner should a condition occur that would cause them to enter a thermal runaway condition. 3. Fully Integrated Component Design —All of the surge protection device components and diagnostics shall be contained within one discrete assembly. Surge protection devices or individual surge protection device modules that must be ganged together in order to achieve higher surge current ratings or other functionality shall not be accepted. 4. Safety Requirements: a. The surge protection device shall minimize potential arc flash hazards by containing no user serviceable / replaceable parts and shall be maintenance free. Surge protection devices containing items such as replaceable modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries shall not be accepted. Surge protection devices requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections shall not be accepted. Surge protection devices requiring user intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar ADDENDUM NO.2 16290-6 of 9 REVISED 10/28/2019 device shall not be accepted. b. Surge protection devices designed to interface with the electrical assembly via conductors shall require no user contact with the inside of the unit. Such units shall have any required conductors be factory installed. c. Side mount surge protection devices shall be factory sealed in order to prevent access to the inside of the unit. Side mount surge protection devices shall have factory-installed phase, neutral,ground and remote status contact conductors factory installed and shall have a pigtail of conductors protruding outside of the enclosure for field installation. 2.04 ENCLOSURES A. All indoor enclosed equipment shall have NEMA 1 general-purpose enclosures, unless otherwise noted, otherwise provide enclosures suitable for locations as indicated in Specification Section 16012 — "Electrical Work," Item 2.01, Paragraph C or on the drawings, and as described below: 1. NEMA 1 —Constructed of a polymer (units integrated within electrical assemblies) or steel(sidemount units only), intended for indoor use to provide a degree of protection to personal access to hazardous parts and provide a degree of protection against the ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt). 2. NEMA 4—Constructed of steel intended for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (dirt and windblown dust); to provide a degree of protection with respect to the harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow, splashing water,and hose directed water);and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure. 3. NEMA 4X—Constructed of 316 stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION/INSPECTION A. The Manufacturer shall submit a written statement indicating that a factory authorized representative has inspected the installation. The installing contractor shall submit a checkout memorandum to the manufacturers. The memorandum shall indicate the date the equipment is placed into service and the actual method of installation. Submit three copies to the specifying engineer. B. Inspection is to be performed prior to energizing SPD's. C. The installation of surge protection devices within or on electrical distribution equipment shall in no way compromise or violate equipment listing, labeling, or warranty of the distribution equipment, and shall not damage equipment or SPD. D. SPDs shall use a separate path to building ground where specifically shown on plans; the equipment safety ground is not to be used as the primary transient voltage ground path. E. The installing contractor shall install the parallel surge protection device with short and straight conductors as practically possible. ADDENDUM NO.2 16290-7 of 9 REVISED 10/28/2019 F. The contractor shall follow the Surge Protection Device Manufacturer's recommended installation practice as found in the equipment installation instructions, and as directed by the manufacturer and representative in writing. G. The installation shall adhere to all applicable codes. H. Route fail alarm circuits to autodialer and to PLC where shown on plans. The installing contractor of low-voltage lightning arresters shall be knowledgeable, and if required,certified, in all applicable electrical practices,standards,codes and wiring techniques as they pertain to installing surge suppressors. J. The installing contractor shall follow all applicable safety standards. K. The installing contractor shall follow manufacturer's installation instructions. L. The installing contractor shall mount surge protection device devices to keep phase neutral and ground conductor as short as possible and free of sharp bends in conductors. Phase conductors to be equal length. Installer shall make corrections to installation as directed by Engineer. M. Where SPD unit is installed at circuit breakers with adjustable GFI trip, contractor shall adjust trip setting at level that prevents false trips due to current flow to ground thru the SPD unit. Provide before and after trip setting values for Engineers review. 3.02 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The surge protection device application covered under this section includes lighting, distribution panelboards, switchgear, switchboard, MCC and busway locations. The surge protection device units shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category B and C environments. 1. The surge protection device shall not limit the use of through-feed lugs,sub-feed lugs, and sub-feed breaker options. 2. Surge protection devices shall be installed immediately following the load side of the main disconnect device. Surge protection devices installed in main lug only panelboards shall be installed immediately following the incoming main lugs. 3. The panelboard shall be capable of re-energizing upon removal of the surge protection device. 4. The surge protection device shall be interfaced to the panelboard via a direct bus bar connection. Alternately, a surge protection device connected to a circuit breaker for disconnecting purposes may be installed using short lengths of conductors as long as the conductors originate integrally to the surge protection device. The surge protection device shall be located directly adjacent to the circuit breaker. 5. The surge protection device shall be included and mounted within the panelboard by the manufacturer of the panelboard. 6. The complete panelboard including the surge protection device shall be UL67 listed. 7. The surge protection device shall be factory installed inside the switchgear, switchboard, MCC, and/or bus plug at the assembly point by the original equipment manufacturer. 8. The surge protection device shall be integral to switchgear, switchboard, MCC,and/or bus plug as a factory standardized design. 9. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment. ADDENDUM NO.2 16290-8 of 9 REVISED 10/28/2019 B. Sidemount Mounting Applications Installation (surge protection device mounted external to electrical assembly) 1. Lead length between the breaker and suppressor shall be kept as short as possible to ensure optimum performance. Any excess conductor length shall be trimmed in order to minimize let-through voltage. The installer shall comply with the manufacturer's recommended installation and wiring practices. Phase conductors shall be twisted per manufacturer's requirements. 3.03 FACTORY TESTING A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards. -END OF SECTION- ADDENDUM NO.2 16290-9 of 9 REVISED 10/28/2019 SECTION 16470 PAN ELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.00 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work" for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Lighting and power panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V or less. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE C62.1 -Standard for Gap Silicon-Carbide Surge Arrestors for AC Power Circuits. 2. IEEE C62.11 -Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Power Circuits. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA PB.1 - Panelboards. 2. NEMA PB1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 volts or less. C. Underwriter's Laboratory (UL): 1. UL 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors, 7th Edition. 2. UL 870-Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings, 5th Edition. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Load Center: Panelboard with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker branches, primarily of bolt- on type, designed for residential and light commercial projects, operating at 240 V and below, available in both single and 3-phase versions, and equipped with combination flush/surface mounting trim. Plug-in type breakers are not allowed. B. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): Device operative on excessive current that causes and maintains interruption of power in circuit it protects. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for Engineer's approval. ADDENDUM NO.2 16470-1 of 7 REVISED 10/28/2019 B. Product Data: 1. For each type panelboard, accessory item, and component specified. 2. Identification materials. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. 2. Tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. 3. Include: a. Enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1. b. Bus configuration and current ratings. c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboard. d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components. D. Wiring diagrams detailing schematic diagram including control wiring, and differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field- installed wiring. E. Report of field tests and observations in accordance with this section. F. Maintenance and Operations Data: Include instructions for testing circuit breakers. G. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark "Complies" or "Non-Compliance" or "Exception" adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Terms "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Schneider Electric B. General Electric C. Eaton Corp. D. Or equal. ADDENDUM NO.2 16470-2 of 7 REVISED 10/28/2019 2.02 PANELBOARDS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Construction in accordance with NEMA PB1. B. Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPD's): 1. Provide type, rating, and features as indicated. 2. Comply with Section 16475—"Overcurrent Protective Devices" with OCPD's adapted to panelboard installation. 3. Tandem circuit breakers shall not be used. 4. Multi-pole breakers shall have common trip. C. Enclosures: Cabinets, enclosures, and panels, flush or surface mounted as indicated. NEMA Type 12 enclosure shall be use indoors, except where other enclosure requirements are indicated on drawings. All outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel. This includes indoor locations such as wastewater process areas and environmentally harsh locations. D. Front: 1. Secure to box with concealed trim clamps except as indicated. 2. Front for surface-mounted panels shall be same dimensions as box. 3. Fronts for flush panels shall overlap box except as otherwise specified. E. Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panel door. F. Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity. G. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. H. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors. Bonded to box. Service Equipment Approval: Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards having main service disconnect. 1. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances,for the OCPD ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices. K. Special Features: Provide following features for panelboards as indicated. 1. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; insulated from box. 2. Split Bus: Vertical bus of indicated panels divided into two vertical sections with connections as indicated. 3. Extra Gutter Space: Dimensions and arrangement as indicated. 4. Auxiliary Gutter: Conform to UL 870. 5. Column-Type Panelboard Configuration: Narrow cabinet extended as wireway to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 6. Sub-feed: OCPD or lug provision as indicated. 7. Feed-Through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated. 8. Surge Arresters: For panelboards as indicated on Plans. a. Comply with IEEE C62.11 or IEEE C62.1. b. Description: Coordinate impulse sparkover voltage with system circuit ADDENDUM NO.2 16470-3 of 7 REVISED 10/28/2019 voltage and provide factory mounting with UL-recognized mounting device. 2.03 LOAD CENTERS A. Provide load-center-type panelboards only where specifically indicated. B. OCPD's: Plug-in full module (nominal 1-in. width) circuit breaker. C. Circuit Breakers for Switching Lights at Panelboards: Indicated type SWD. D. Circuit Breakers for Equipment Marked HCAR Type: Indicated HCAR type. E. Interiors: Provide physical means to prevent installation of more OCPD's than quantity for which enclosure was listed. F. Main, Neutral, and Ground Lugs and Buses: Mechanical connectors for conductors. 2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch OCPD's: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. B. Doors: In panel front, with concealed hinges. Secure with flush catch and tumbler lock, all keyed alike. 2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Branch-Circuit Breakers: Where OCPD's are indicated to be circuit breakers, use bolt-on breakers except circuit breakers 225-ampere frame size and greater may be plug-in type where individual positive locking device requires mechanical release for removal. B. Doors: 1. In panel front, omit single panelboard door in cabinet front for fusible switch panelboards except as indicated. 2. Secure with vault-type with tumbler lock, all keyed alike. 2.06 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items as required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. B. Portable Test Set: Arranged to permit testing of functions of solid-state trip devices without removal from panelboard. C. Spare Fuse Cabinet: Identified, compartmented, lockable steel box or cabinet with compartments suitable for surface mounting on wall. D. All equipment, instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge, phase fail, or other line conditions that may damage equipment, instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers' responsibility to provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. 2.07 IDENTIFICATION A. General: Provide nameplates for all panelboards. B. Panelboard Nameplates: Engraved laminated plastic for each panelboard. ADDENDUM NO.2 16470-4 of 7 REVISED 10/28/2019 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install panelboards and accessory items in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1, and manufacturers' written installation instructions, and approved submittals. B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 6 ft 2-in. above finished floor, except as indicated. C. Mounting: 1. Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. 2. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish. D. Circuit Directory: Typed and reflective of final circuit changes required to balance panel loads. Obtain approval before installing. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. F. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: 1. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panel into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future. 2. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab other than slabs on grade. G. Auxiliary Gutter: Install where a panel is tapped to a riser at an intermediate location. H. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups, bundle, and wrap with wire ties after completion of load balancing. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs in accordance with Section 16195—"Electrical Identification." 3.03 GROUNDING A. Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated. B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus indicated. C. Ground in accordance with Section 16452—"Grounding." 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ADDENDUM NO.2 16470-5 of 7 REVISED 10/28/2019 A. Perform tests on low-voltage power panelboards and accessories. B. Upon completing installation of system, perform following tests: 1. Make insulation resistance tests of panelboard buses, components, and connecting supply,feeder, and control circuits. 2. Make continuity tests of circuits. C. Quality Control Program. 1. Procedures: Make field tests and inspections and prepare panelboard for satisfactory operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. 2. Notify Engineer at least one week in advance of testing. 3. Report Testing: a. Report written reports of tests and observations. b. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. c. Include records of repairs and adjustments made. 4. Protective Device Ratings and Settings: a. Verify indicated ratings and settings to be appropriate for final system configuration and parameters. b. Where discrepancies are found, recommend final protective device ratings and settings. c. Use accepted ratings or settings to make final system adjustments. D. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include following inspections and related work: 1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate compliance with requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard schedules. 2. Exercise and perform operational tests of all mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 3. Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components. 4. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values. 5. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for overcurrent protective devices as within this section. E. Electrical tests: Include following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instruction: 1. Insulation resistance test of buses and portions of control wiring that disconnected from solid-state devices. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. 2. Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections. 3. Test main and sub-feed overcurrent protective devices in accordance within this section. ADDENDUM NO.2 16470-6 of 7 REVISED 10/28/2019 F. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide retesting of panelboards. Verify by system tests that total assembly meets specified requirements. 3.06 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. B. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. C. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. D. Clean interior of panelboard. 3.07 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. 3.08 COMMISSIONING A. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but before Final Acceptance, conduct load-balancing measurements and circuit changes as follows: 1. Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised by Owner. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility. Make special arrangements with Owner to avoid disrupting critical 24-hr services such as Fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference between phase loads exceeding 20 percent at any one panelboard is not acceptable. Re-balance and recheck as required to meet this minimum requirement. -END OF SECTION- ADDENDUM NO.2 16470-7 of 7 REVISED 10/28/2019 SECTION 16476 DISCONNECTS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.00 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work" for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Fusible switches are allowed only where specifically shown on Plans for this project, or where approved in writing by Engineer. 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Service disconnects. 2. Feeder and equipment disconnects. 3. Enclosed circuit breakers 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for Engineer's approval. B. Product Data: 1. Submit for switches, circuit breakers, and accessories. 2. Descriptive data and time-current curves for protective devices and let-through current curves for those devices with current-limiting characteristics. Include coordination charts and tables, and related data. C. Shop Drawings: Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. D. Test Results: Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results. E. Operating and Maintenance Data: Maintenance data for tripping devices F. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark "Complies" or "Non-Compliance" or "Exception" adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. G. Coordination: Contractor shall determine size, horsepower, voltage, and phase of all equipment and motors supplied and shall adjust breaker and fused switch size accordingly and shall note on submittals. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ADDENDUM NO.2 16476-1 of 4 REVISED 10/28/2019 A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall be product of single manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fusible Switches: 1. Eaton 2. Schneider Electric 3. Siemens 4. Or equal, as pre-approved in writing. B. Fused Power Circuit Devices: 1. Eaton 2. Boltswitch C. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Eaton 2. Schneider Electric D. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground Fault Trip: 1. Eaton 2. Schneider Electric E. Molded-Case Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: 1. Eaton 2. Schneider Electric F. Other Manufacturers that are pre-approved in writing. 2.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES ADDENDUM NO.2 16476-2 of 4 REVISED 10/28/2019 A. Enclosed Non-fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1,Type HD handle lockable with 2 padlocks B. Enclosed Fusible Switch, 800 Amperes and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate specified fuses, enclosure consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with two (2) padlocks, and interlocked with cover in CLOSED position. C. Enclosed Fusible Switch Larger Than 800 Amperes: Bolted-pressure or high-pressure contact switch, bus drilled to accommodate specified fuses, enclosure consistent with environment where located. 1. Minimum Fault Current Rating: 100,000 symmetrical rms amperes. D. All enclosures located outdoors or where subject to wet or environmentally harsh locations shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel. E. All switches shall be rated at 600 volts minimum. F. Handle operator mechanisms shall be on side of enclosure and not on front. Keyed mechanisms that separate handle from breaker mechanism when door is opened are not acceptable. 2.03 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Enclosed Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, handle lockable with 2 padlocks B. Characteristics: 1. Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated 2. Interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current, 10,000 symmetrical rms amperes minimum 3. Appropriate application listing when used for switching fluorescent lighting loads or heating, air conditioning, and refrigeration equipment. C. All enclosures located outdoors or where subject to wet or environmentally harsh locations shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Solidstate breaker requiring programming unit for settings adjustment 1. Provide new programming unit and all accessories for Owner and Engineers use. Turn over to Engineer for review and testing. 2. Original set-up and adjustments shall be performed by the Circuit Breaker Manufacturers Factory Representative. 2.05 TRIP UNITS A. All service and feeder breakers to have replaceable trip plugs, or be adjustable (load current), or be electric type with adjustable trips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ADDENDUM NO.2 16476-3 of 4 REVISED 10/28/2019 A. Install enclosed switches and circuit breakers in locations as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install enclosed switches and circuit breakers level and plumb. C. Install wiring between enclosed switches and circuit breakers and control/indication devices. D. Connect enclosed switches and circuit breakers and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Supplier's or manufacturer's representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at job site or for assistance during plant construction, plant startup, and training of Owner's personnel for plant operation. B. Testing: After installing enclosed switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Standard ATS, Section 7.5 for enclosed switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units at site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest. C. Training: 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. 2. Review operating and maintenance data. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable enclosed switches and circuit breaker trip ranges as indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. After completing system installation including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions. -END OF SECTION- ADDENDUM NO.2 16476-4 of 4 REVISED 10/28/2019 SECTION 16496 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.00 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work" for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor or Supplier and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16012 — "Electrical Work," for submittal requirements. D. Under no conditions shall transfer switch ampacity be rated less than main service breaker ampacity. E. Transfer switches with cable linkage when in manual mode are not accepted. F. Coordinate power and controls with Generator Manufacturer where generator is shown on Plans. G. All outdoor unit enclosures to strictly conform to Item 2.02, Paragraph A, Number 3, Sentence 4 of this specification. Any unit installed that does not conform to this requirement shall not be submitted. Any unit installed that does not conform shall be removed in its entirety and replaced with correct unit. H. All equipment, instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge, phase fail, or other line conditions that may damage equipment, instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers' responsibility to provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Delayed open transition automatic transfer switches to automatically transfer between normal and standby power sources. 2. Delayed open transition automatic transfer switches to transfer between normal and standby power sources by manually depressing a switch or push button for each transition required and to allow selection of automatic transfer from standby to normal power sources after being manually transferred from normal to standby power source. There shall be a pause in neutral position of switch for transfers in both directions with an adjustable time delay. 3. Service rated transfer switches. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70- National Electrical Code (NEC) ADDENDUM NO.2 16496-1 of 10 REVISED 10/28/2019 B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA ICS 2-447- AC Automatic Transfer Switches C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): UL 1008 -Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Manufacturer shall submit shop drawings for review, which shall include the following, as a minimum: 1. Descriptive literature 2. Plan, elevation, side, and front view arrangement drawings, including overall dimension, weights and clearances, as well as mounting or anchoring requirements and conduit entrance locations. 3. Schematic diagrams 4. Wiring diagrams 5. Accessory list C. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark "Complies" or "Non-Compliance" or "Exception" adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Onan B. ASCO by Schneider Electric C. Eaton D. G.E./Zenith E. Switchgear and MCC Manufacturers who furnish circuit breaker type service rated transfer switch assemblies as part of switch of MCC equipment. F. No substitutions allowed except where pre-approved in writing by Engineer. G. Listing of acceptable Manufacturers does not relieve obligation of conditions described in this Specification Section. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. The delayed transition automatic transfer switch shall be furnished as shown on the drawings. Voltage and continuous current ratings and number of poles shall be as shown. Switches shall be UL listed in accordance with UL-1008. a. Where transfer switch is shown on one-line diagram or on details as installed directly after service head and, where no overcurrent protection precedes the transfer switch, a service rated, breaker type switch shall be provided. b. Ampacity of transfer switch contacts shall be rated equal or greater than ADDENDUM NO.2 16496-2 of 10 REVISED 10/28/2019 ampacity of main service breaker and/or MCC bus. No exceptions. 2. On 3 phase, 4 wire systems, utilizing ground fault protection down stream of the transfer switch, a true 4-pole switch shall be supplied with all four poles mounted on a common shaft. The continuous current rating and the closing and withstand rating of the fourth pole shall be identical to the rating of the main poles and shall have quick-break contacts. See plans for 4 pole requirements. This requirement does not apply for water and wastewater facility installation. 3. The transfer switch shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors, and NEMA 4X 316 S.S. for outdoors, unless otherwise indicated. Indoor enclosures shall be fabricated from 12-gauge steel. The enclosure shall be sized to exceed minimum wire bending space required by UL 1008. Outdoor enclosures shall have no exposed controls. Fabricated covers over exposed controls are not allowed. Controls shall be located on inner door of automatic transfer switch. Enclosure shall have three (3) point latching handle with locking hasp. Where shown on plans in MCC, transfer switch enclosure shall match MCC enclosure. 4. The transfer switch shall be equipped with an internal welded steel pocket, housing an operations and maintenance manual. 5. The transfer switch shall be top and bottom accessible. 6. The main contacts shall be capable of being replaced without removing the main power cables, or removing incoming normal power from service rated transfer switches. 7. The main contacts shall be visible for inspection without any major disassembly of the transfer switch. 8. All bolted bus connections shall have Belleville compression type washers. 9. When a solid neutral is required, a fully rated bus bar with required AL-CU neutral lugs shall be provided. 10. Control components and wiring shall be front accessible. All control wires shall be multi-conductor 18-gauge 600-volt SIS switchboard type point-to-point harness. All control wire terminations shall be identified with tubular sleeve-type markers. 11. The switch shall be equipped with 90 degrees C rated copper/aluminum solderless mechanical type lugs. 12. The complete transfer switch assembly shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation and compliance with the specification requirements. A copy of the factory test report shall be available upon request. 13. Transfer time shall be of sufficient duration to allow motor run controls to drop out or, Contractor shall provide additional time delay controls in the neutral position, both directions of transfer to accomplish this function. 14. Provide 480: 120/240 volt, single phase transformer and all required circuit breakers to provide low voltage power to all generator heaters, controls, etc. Feed from load motor control center or, from side of ATS where shown on plans. 15. All power and control circuits to have circuit breakers for overcurrent protection. Fuses are not acceptable. No Exceptions. 16. All doors on outdoor enclosures shall have door restraints, 3 point latching handle and locking hasp. Keyed handles are not acceptable. 17. No devices or controls are to be installed on outer door of outdoor enclosures or where NEMA 4X rated. 18. Provide generator status annunciator with voltage, current, and phase indicators and ADDENDUM NO.2 16496-3 of 10 REVISED 10/28/2019 run time (non-resettable) elapse time meter in panel (door) of indoor transfer switch. Provide nameplate. Flush mount annunciator. Where ATS is located outdoors or in NEMA 4 X enclosure, mount status annunciator in inner door panel. Installation to be completed by ATS Factory Technician. 19. Install Generator Manufacturer furnished alarm annunciator panel on wall near ATS or as shown on plans. 20. All circuit breakers shall be covered. No exposed circuit breakers. No exceptions. 21. Provide heater with thermostat control in all enclosures. Route 120 VAC circuit from LVP. Provide circuit breaker. 22. Provide all power supplies required to operate transfer switch. 23. Where transfer switch contains two circuit breakers, and where service breaker serves as main breaker, the transfer switch shall be UL listed, "Service Rated," and acceptable to Power Company. B. Automatic Transfer Switch: 1. The transfer switch shall be double throw, actuated by two electric operators momentarily energized, and connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple over center type linkage. Cable linkage mechanism is not acceptable. 2. The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in both the normal and emergency positions without the use of hooks, latches, magnets, or springs, and shall be silver-tungston alloy. Separate arcing contacts with magnetic blowouts shall be provided on all transfer switches. Interlocked, molded case circuit breakers or contactors are not acceptable unless specifically shown on Plans, or pre-approved in writing. 3. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a safe external manual operator, designed to prevent injury to operating personnel. The manual operator shall be front accessible and shall provide "quick make-quick break" operation, offering the same contact-to-contact transfer speed as the electrical operator to prevent switching the main contacts slowly. The external manual operator shall be UL listed for operation, under load, from the outside of the transfer switch while the door is closed. Door shall have 3 point latching handle. No automatic transfer switch enclosure shall be installed without door; Exerciser timer shall be readily accessible to operator. 4. Circuit breakers used for service rated transfer switches shall be mechanically or electrically interlocked in a manner acceptable to the local Power Company. 5. Provide all AC and/or DC power supplies required for transfer switch operation. Provide separate batteries and charger where operation requires separate power source independent of normal or generator power sources. C. Automatic Transfer Switch Controls: 1. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a microprocessor based control system, to provide all the operational functions of the automatic transfer switch. The controller shall have two asynchronous serial ports. The controller shall have a real time clock with Nicad battery back up. 2. The CPU shall be equipped with self-diagnostics, which perform periodic checks of ADDENDUM NO.2 16496-4 of 10 REVISED 10/28/2019 the memory I/O, and communication circuits, with a watchdog/power fail circuit. 3. The controller shall use industry standard open architecture communication protocol for high speed serial communications via multi-drop connection to other controllers and to a master terminal with up to 4000 ft of cable, or further, with the addition of a communication repeater. The serial communication port shall be RS422/485 compatible. In addition, provide Ethernet port for communicating with plant PLC controller via a data switch. 4. The Ethernet communication port shall allow interface to the Manufacturers and/or the Owner's furnished remote supervisory control. Provide all software, programming, testing, and cables and hardware for a complete operating system. Coordinate with SCADA Provider and Programmer and assist in setting up system. Provide all addresses, HMI templates, and function descriptions for Programmer's use. Functions shall include status of all operating time settings such as transfer time,transition delays, etc. 5. The controller shall have password protection required to limit access to qualified and authorized personnel. 6. The controller shall include a 20 character, LCD display, with a keypad, which allows access to the system. 7. The controller shall include three phase over/under voltage, over/under frequency, phase sequence detection and phase differential monitoring on both normal and emergency sources. 8. The controller shall be capable of storing the following records in memory for access either locally or remotely: a. Number of hours transfer switch is in the emergency position. b. Number of hours emergency power is available. c. Total transfer in either direction. d. Date, time, and description of the last four source failures. e. Date of the last exercise period. f. Date of record reset (where applicable). D. Sequence of Operation: 1. When the voltage on any phase of the normal source drops below 80% or increases to 120%, or frequency drops below 90%, or increase to 110%, or 20% voltage differential between phases occurs, after a programmable time delay period of 0- 300 seconds factory set at 3 seconds to allow for momentary dips, the engine starting contacts shall close to start the generating plant. 2. The transfer switch shall transfer to emergency when the generating plant has reached specified voltage and frequency on all phases. 3. After restoration of normal power on all phases to a preset value of at least 90% to 110% of rated voltage, and at least 95% to 105% of rated frequency, and voltage differential is below 20%, an adjustable time delay period of 0-3600 seconds (factory set at 300 seconds) shall delay retransfer to allow stabilization of normal power. If the emergency power source should fail during this time delay period, the switch shall automatically return to the normal source. 4. After retransfer to normal, the engine generator shall be allowed to operate at no load for a programmable period of 0-3600 seconds,factory set at 300 seconds. ADDENDUM NO.2 16496-5 of 10 REVISED 10/28/2019 E. Automatic Transfer Switch Accessories: 1. Programmable three phase sensing of the normal source set to pickup at 90% and dropout at 80% of rated voltage and overvoltage to pickup at 120% and dropout out at 110% of rated voltage. Programmable frequency pickup at 95% and dropout at 90% and over frequency to pickup at 110% and dropout at 105% of rated frequency. Programmable voltage differential between phases, set at 20%, and phase sequence monitoring. 2. Time delay for override of momentary normal source power outages (delays engine start signal and transfer switch operation). Programmable 0-300 seconds. Factory set at 3 seconds, if not otherwise specified. 3. Time delay to control contact transition time on transfer to either source. Programmable 0-120 seconds, factory set at 10 seconds. 4. Time delay on retransfer to normal, programmable 0-3600 seconds, factory set at 300 seconds if not otherwise specified, with overrun to provide programmable 0- 3600 second time delay, factory set at 300 seconds, unloaded engine operation after retransfer to normal. Time delay in neutral position of switch shall be adjustable 0- 300 seconds. 5. Time delay on transfer to emergency, programmable 0-300 seconds, factory set at 1 second. 6. A maintained type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power failure, keypad initiated. 7. A remote type load test switch shall be included to simulate a normal power failure, remote switch initiated. 8. A time delay bypass on retransfer to normal shall be included. Keypad initiated. 9. Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to close on failure of normal source to initiate engine starting. 10. Contact, rated 10 Amps 30 volts DC, to open on failure of normal source for customer functions. 11. Light emitting diodes shall be mounted on the microprocessor panel to indicate: switch is in normal position, switch is in emergency position, and controller is running. 12. A plant exerciser shall be provided with ten (10) 7-day events, programmable for any day of the week and (24) calendar events, programmable for any month/day, to automatically exercise generating plant programmable in one-minute increments. Also include selection of either "no load" (switch will not transfer) or "load" (switch will transfer) exercise period. Keypad initiated with password. Provide means to observe and adjust settings locally and via data link to plant PLC controller. 13. Provision to select either "no commit" or "commit" to transfer operation in the event of a normal power failure shall be included. In the "no commit position," the load will transfer to the emergency position unless normal power returns before the emergency source has reach 90% of its rated values (switch will remain in normal). In the "commit position", the load will transfer to the emergency position after any normal power failure. Keypad initiated. 14. Two auxiliary contacts rated 10 Amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 100 to 800 amps) 15 amp, 120 volts AC (for switches 1000 to 4000 amps), shall be mounted on the main shaft, one closed on normal, the other closed on emergency. Both contacts will be wired to a terminal strip for ease of customer connections. ADDENDUM NO.2 16496-6 of 10 REVISED 10/28/2019 15. A three phase digital LCD voltage readout, with 1% accuracy shall display all three separate phase-to-phase voltages simultaneously, for both the normal and emergency source. 16. A digital LCD frequency readout with 1% accuracy shall display frequency for both normal and emergency source. 17. An LCD readout shall display normal source and emergency source availability. 18. Signal before transfer contacts. 19. Selector switch to allow transfer by manual push button or switch movement. 20. Maintenance Selector Switch: For service rated transfer switches provide means to deactivate switch in "Normal," "Open," or "Emergency" positions when servicing internal parts of switch assembly. Provide means for locking out in any position. 21. Provide means to temporarily switch off "All" control voltages that are tapped on the incoming power side of the Normal circuit break for maintenance purposes. This is to remove all live voltages during service of transfer switches. 22. Provide all available "Options" for transfer switch. F. Ratings: 1. Delayed transition automatic transfer switches shall have the following 3-cycle short circuit closing and withstand as follows: a. RMS Symmetrical Amperes 480 VAC Current Limiting Amperes Closing and Withstand Fuse Rating 100-400 42,000 200,000 600 50,000 200,000 800 65,000 200,000 1000-1200 85,000 200,000 1600-4000 100,000 200,000 2. During the 3 cycle closing and withstand tests, there shall be no contact welding or damage. The 3 cycle tests shall be performed without the use of current limiting fuses. The test shall verify that contacts separation has not occurred, and there is contact continuity across all phases. Test procedures shall be in accordance with UL- 1008, and testing shall be certified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 3. When conducting temperature rise tests to UL-1008, the manufacture shall include post-endurance temperature rise tests to verify the ability of the transfer switch to carry full rated current after completing the overload and endurance tests. 4. The microprocessor controller shall meet the following requirements: a. Storage conditions- 25 degrees C to 85 degrees C b. Operation conditions - 20 degrees C to 70 degrees C ambient c. Humidity 0 to 99% relative humidity, non-condensing d. Capable of withstanding infinite power interruptions e. Surge withstand per ANSI/IEEE C-37.90A-1978 ADDENDUM NO.2 16496-7 of 10 REVISED 10/28/2019 5. Manufacturer shall provide copies of test reports upon request. G. Provide means to remotely monitor switch positions via a data network. See electrical plans for additional requirements. Provide all programming, software and devices. Provide on CD all addressing information for starter, alarm, and functions available for display at PLC HMI. Manufacture's Representative shall provide setup assistance during construction. Coordinate with Generator and Data Monitoring Systems Vendors to assure a unified power system. H. Manufacturer: 1. The transfer switch manufacturer shall employ a nationwide factory-direct, field service organization, available on a 24-hour a day, 365 days a year, call basis. 2. The Manufacturer shall include an 800-telephone number, for field service contact, affixed to each enclosure. 3. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each transfer switch, by serial number, for a minimum 20 years. Warranty: Provide Manufacturer's standard full 5-year comprehensive extended coverage service. Warranty shall be "on site" and warranty service shall be available by the factory service department on an emergency basis if required. Depot or non-site warranties are not acceptable. J. Load Bank Controls: 1. Where load bank is required, provide all controls, contactors, and devices needed to exercise generator on load bank. Normal plant loads shall not be on generator during load bank operation of generator. 2. Coordinate with Generator Vendor. 3. Submit load bank controls data. K. Provide fiber optic connector interface where indicated on plans. L. Where transfer switches are used ahead of main breaker or include main breaker, unit shall be "service rated" and shall have normal service breaker rated for service ampacity. 2.03 PROTECTION A. All equipment installed on this project shall incorporate all devices and features to protect that equipment from the influence of other equipment, line voltage and phase irregularities, harmonics and other disturbances that may effect the proper and safe operation of that equipment whether these required features are a standard component of that equipment as an off-the-line product. No equipment shall be installed without these features. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Automatic Transfer Switches shall be provided with adequate lifting means for ease of installation of wall or floor mounted enclosures. B. Provide access and working space as indicated or as required. C. Where Contractor fails to protect automatic transfer switches before and after installation ADDENDUM NO.2 16496-8 of 10 REVISED 10/28/2019 on site and where excessive dust is observed inside the enclosure, the Contractor shall have a factory warranty service technician clean, inspect and test unit, after which the factory shall issue a written and signed statement that full factory is in effect. There are no exceptions to this requirement except to replace entire unit at Engineer's request. 3.02 ADJUSTMENTS A. Tighten assembled bolted connections with appropriate tools to manufacturer's torque recommendations prior to first energization. 3.03 START-UP AND TESTING A. Provide the services of a Factory Technician to checkout, adjust, set-up, test, and start-up the automatic transfer switch in conjunction with the standby generator. Fully function test the automatic transfer switch to verify proper operation. B. A Factory Technician shall be present for final acceptance testing and shall demonstrate unit operation to Engineer and Owner's Representative. C. Factory Representative shall demonstrate operation of system to Owner and Engineer. 3.04 TRAINING A. Provide two (2) 4-hour training courses conducted by Manufacturer's Representative at a time approved by Owner and Engineer. Provide training outline to Engineer for approval of contents. Notify Engineer of training schedule. Engineer may be present. Training shall include operation and required owner service and preventative maintenance. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be used during training for reference. 3.05 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide the Manufacturer's full 5 year comprehensive extended coverage service warranty on the generator installation and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware, and software. This warranty shall begin on date of written "Final Acceptance" of the electrical systems and to be executed as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor's warranty shall also guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide labor, work, or materials as necessary to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for more than 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All equipment and materials installed shall have full warranty from Manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for harsh industrial electrical/mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where Manufacturer's products fail prematurely, Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have the option of declaring that failures were caused by environmental conditions and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that Product Manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawing submittals. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not ADDENDUM NO.2 16496-9 of 10 REVISED 10/28/2019 completed within 5 working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and back charging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. C. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. END OF SECTION ADDENDUM NO.2 16496-10 of 10 REVISED 10/28/2019 SECTION 16622 SOUND ATTENUATING ENCLOSURE PART 1 GENERAL 1.00 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work" for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16012 — "Electrical Work", Item 1.04—"Submittals"for submittal requirements. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies furnishing and installing a weatherproof sound attenuating enclosure around the standby emergency power generator. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Furnish and install a weatherproof sound attenuating enclosure designed to reduce the noise level of the standby emergency power generator set. The overall acoustical performance shall reduce the un-silenced noise levels 3 feet from all sides, at 5 feet elevation, and at 3 feet above the enclosure to minimum 84 db or less. In addition, construction shall reduce sound levels at nearest property line or site boundary so as not to exceed 58 db(A) at residential project locations, and so as not to exceed 68 db(A) for non- residential locations. Adjust concrete pad size accordingly to accommodate enclosure. B. Wall construction and cooling baffle or silence construction shall be independently tested in conformance with ASTM procedures C423 for sound absorption, E90 for transmission loss, E413 for sound transmission class and E477 for silencer acoustical performance (Dynamic Insertion Loss). C. In addition to these minimum acoustical performance numbers, the enclosure shall meet the following fire related parameters per NFPA No. 255 or ASTM E84. Flame spread = 15, smoke developed = 0, and fuel contributed = 0. D. General enclosure design shall be able to withstand the following loadings: 120 mph winds, 42 lbs./ft. Roof loads. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Division 16— "Electrical"that apply to the requirements of this project. 1.04 PRODUCT A. Construction: ADDENDUM NO.2 16622-1 of 3 REVISED 10/28/2019 1. General construction of the enclosure walls and roof shall consist of dual wall, prefabricated tongue-and-groove type acoustic panels with a 16 gauge, galvanized steel outer skin: a 22 gauge, perforated galvanized steel inner skin; roll formed internal channel stiffers and framing; and 3 lbs/cu. ft. density mineral glass fiber acoustical/ thermal insulation completely filling the void between the inner and outer skins. Also included shall be a 2 mil mylar protective liner installed between the perforated inner skin and the insulation material. An acoustical labyrinth shall be achieved at each panel joint or seam. 2. The enclosure's super structure will consist of a structural rectangular tube frame work. The structure shall consist of two full length base members, six full width base members, four full height corner columns, and two full width roof beams. This structure shall be completely seal welded at each connection point and all open tube ends will be capped with seal welded plates. Lifting eyes rated at a safe working load of 8,000 pounds each (for units that weigh more than 6,000 pounds) or 6,000 pounds each (for units that weigh less than 6,000 pounds) shall be installed at the top of each structural tube steel corner column. Anchor bolt clips shall be located and installed along the inside perimeter of the structural tube steel base frame. 3. All doors will be factory mounted in a separate, self-supporting, welded steel frame. All door hardware will be factory mounted. Door hardware to include 316 stainless steel Component Hardware Group brand refrigeration type slam locks with exit bar, two-point slam and take-up locks with inside release handle, Component Hardware Group, Inc. ball bearing heavy duty hinges, and positive type stainless steel door holders. Doors shall have neoprene or EPDM perimeter Basketing. Door shall seal completely along gasketed perimeter. 4. Acoustical treatment of the cooling air intake and discharge opening shall be achieved with straight-through type, full height vertical baffles. Each baffle shall be of a one-piece construction. Construction of each baffle shall include a galvanized steel frame and stiffeners, perforated galvanized steel skin, roll-formed galvanized steel end caps, and acoustical insulation completely filling the void between the perforated skins. Each baffle must be easily removable to allow for completely open ends. Removal of the baffles shall not affect structural integrity of the enclosure. The baffles shall be located within the overall length of the enclosure's walls and roof. Silencers mounted externally from the enclosure are not acceptable. 5. In addition to the cooling air intake/discharge openings being acoustically treated, a set of 6" deep stationary weather louvers with bird screens shall be supplied. These louvers shall be mounted to the enclosure's structural tube steel frame at each end of the enclosure. Louvers are to be removable and have lifting eyes to aid in remova I. 6. Vent fan forced air ventilation with T-STAT and switch, interior lighting with switch, and GFI W.P. receptacle shall be provided and connected to a 12 circuit (minimum) NEMA 1 surface mounted lighting panel complete with 60AT/2P main breaker, (12) 20A (or, as required for loads) plug-in circuit breakers and 15 kVA (or, as shown on plans) encapsulated 480/120-240 volt transformer, located in the enclosure. Contractor to provide feeder circuit from Motor Control Center. 7. Provide approved concrete or steel stairs with landing where required for access from grade level. Provide shop drawings for Engineer's approval. 8. No penetrations shall be made through walls, floor, or top of enclosure by anyone ADDENDUM NO.2 16622-2 of 3 REVISED 10/28/2019 other than the Manufacturer or, unless specifically authorized by Engineer, in writing, after detailed drawing has been submitted. This includes penetrations for -- fuel lines and conduits. Any unauthorized holes may result in replacement of entire enclosures. 9. All fuel lines to engine are to enter via underground 4-inch Schedule 80 PVC sleeve or via floor through, as indicated on plans. No exceptions. B. Manufacturers 1. Acceptable manufacturers are: a. SEMCO, Inc. b. Acoustical Control Systems, Inc. (ACS) c. Engine & Compressor Accessories (E&CA) d. Or, as pre-approved in writing. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval prior to placing any equipment on order: C. Dimensional Drawings. Submit dimensional drawings of the sound attenuating enclosure and accessories. D. Test Report. Furnish a certified copy of the factory test report on the actual enclosure provided. E. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark "Complies" or "Non-Compliance" or "Exception" adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. PART 2 PRODUCTS—(NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install sound attenuating enclosure according to plans and specifications. 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. Perform sound level measurements with a calibrated sound level instrument and demonstrate readings in presence of Engineer and Owner's Representative. Record readings on plans and elevation drawing for Owner's record. END OF SECTION ADDENDUM NO.2 16622—3 of 3 REVISED 10/28/2019 SECTION 16650 DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work" for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Refer to Item 2.01— "Ratings" for EPA tier rating requirements before bidding. D. A complete generating system and all related equipment, including cooling system, coolant pumps, expansion tanks, valves, piping lubricating systems, fuel system components, miscellaneous devices and all required appurtenances shall be furnished and installed by the generator Manufacturers Supplier and/or Local Representative. It is the Generator Suppliers responsibility that any and all electrical and mechanical parts of the complete generator system that Supplier sub-assigns for installation by another Contractor be accounted for, approved and coordinated by said Generator Supplier. Any additional electrical and/or mechanical equipment or devices required for the specific generating system for this project shall be accounted for in Supplier and Contractor's bid where or not shown in plan and specifications details for this project. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. It is accepted that each manufacturer listed may have variation in certain specified parameters that are particular to each specific product, and this is to be accounted for in bid and in the data submitted for Engineer's review. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16012—"Electrical Work",for submittal requirements. E. Coordinate generator circuit breaker and controls with transfer switch and switchgear supplier and provide interface circuits, equipment and devices as required for a complete operating system. F. Listing of acceptable Equipment Manufacturers does not limit or remove the intent of these specification requirements. G. Refer to Specification Section 15012 — "Mechanical Work," for mechanical work methods related to generator installation. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies the furnishing and installation of a packaged electric generating plant. B. The packaged, diesel engine-electric generating plant shall be pre-wired, pre-piped, assembled, and aligned on a single skid type base. The packaged system of new, unused equipment of the manufacturer's latest design includes all necessary instruments, devices, switches, and other appurtenances for proper operation of the unit: supplies steel safety guards around all external rotating parts, and provides a unit on which adjustments, repairs, and normal maintenance are possible without the use of special tools. The supplier will be responsible for the proper performance of the complete unit and support systems. Only manufacturers with a minimum of 5 years experience will be considered. The supplier of the ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-1 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 package must have complete parts and service available on a 24-hour basis in the area of the job site. Parts stock must be maintained on engine/generator by the supplier of the package. C. The successful bidder of this equipment shall herein be referred to as vendor. D. Any failure to take exception to any part of this specification in the initial bid by the vendor shall imply complete compliance to the specification and will subject the vendor to complete liability for any omitted items. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide the Generator Manufacturer's full 5 year comprehensive extended coverage service warranty on the generator installation and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware, and software. This warranty shall begin on date of written "Final Acceptance" of the electrical systems and to be executed as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor's warranty shall also guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide labor, work, or materials as necessary to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for more than 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All equipment and materials installed shall have full warranty from Manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for harsh industrial electrical/mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where Manufacturer's products fail prematurely, Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have the option of declaring that failures were caused by environmental conditions and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that Product Manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawing submittals. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within 5 working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and back charging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. C. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. 1.04 STANDARDS AND CODES A. All material and equipment supplied under this specification shall be designed, assembled, and tested in full compliance with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. NEC- National Electric Code 2. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 3. UL- Underwriters' Laboratories 4. NEMA- National Electronic Manufacturers Association 5. ASA-American Standards Association r, ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-2 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 6. ANSI -American National Standards Institute B. The generator shall be listed by UL2200 as a complete assembly. C. Generator system shall comply with all EPA, state and local requirements. Where generator size shown on plans is not properly rated,the next size up shall be supplied. 1.05 DRAWINGS AND DATA A. Provide CAD files of diagrams, equipment views, and material & device schedules on CD and include with submittals. Only one (1) copy required for Electrical Engineer. Only electronic files will be reviewed. Hard copy submittals are not acceptable and will be returned as rejected. B. Six (6) copies of the following items are required of the successful bidder prior to manufacture: 1. Certified dimensional drawings showing weight, outline dimensions, bolting and drilling details, clearances for installation, operation and maintenance, and required ventilation. 2. Elevation views, showing and identifying all items furnished and section views as required to locate all components. 3. Bill of material describing all components and recommended spare parts with pricing and delivery. 4. Brochures on engine, generator, muffler, batteries, charger, control panel, and any accessory equipment showing ratings, construction features, and performance characteristics. 5. Schematic and wiring diagrams of the electrical system showing all factory wiring and clearly indicating wiring and voltage of any electrical strip heaters. Also, submit fully detailed inter-connection drawings indicating each individual connection to any remote equipment, including a separate connection drawing to show point-to-point electrical wiring connections. 6. Submit documentation showing compliance with EPA/TCEQ emission requirements via location and EPA "TIER" rating. Include the current EPA conformity documentation for engine supplied with submittal package for review. 7. Calculations of steps, voltage drops, and kVA. 8. Descriptive literature describing the standard series specified (not a one-of-a-kind fabrication). 9. Drawing submittal schedule with approval allowance requirements. 10. Shipping time after receipt of order. 11. Exceptions and clarifications to this specification. 12. Factory testing procedures. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Factory and Field Tests: Deliver to the purchaser six copies of each factory and field test report on the actual packaged electric generating plant provided, indicating results for all tests described herein. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the purchaser six sets of the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals pertaining directly to the unit provided. Bind each set in a substantial binder, with each item properly ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-3 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 indexed. Include the following information: 1. Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and including as-built shop drawings, outline drawings, schematic and wiring diagrams. 2. Instructions for erection and alignment, including tolerances and preparation for use. C. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. Refer to Section 16012 —"Electrical Work," Item 1.04—"Submittals" for additional requirements. D. With each submittal, include an electronic copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark "Complies" or "Non-Compliance" or "Exception" adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. E. Provide CAD files of all diagrams, equipment views, and material and device schedules on CD and include with submittals. Only one (1) copy required for Electrical Engineer. Only electronic files will be reviewed. Hard copy submittals are not acceptable and will be returned as "Rejected." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RATINGS A. Diesel Engine Driven Generating Set, complete with accessories, shall be at minimum the KW rating shown on plans and as manufactured by the following: 1. Cummins/Onan (Southern Plains Power, Inc.). 2. Or equal, as pre-approved in writing before bid date. B. Generator shall be at minimum the KVA shown on plans at a 0.8 power factor. If a particular Manufacturer's unit of kVA shown on plans does not have proper EPA tier ratings or, will not start all loads then, next largest size meeting these requirements shall be used. Voltage rating should be as shown on plans. Generator shall be capable of starting all plant loads sequentially, starting with smallest load first and progressing up to largest load, in steps. Refer to one-line diagram and load analysis on drawing sheets. C. Generator shall be capable of starting loads in sequential order, smallest to largest loads, with not more than 20% terminal voltage drop, and not more then 5% frequency drop. Voltage drop shall be defined as the voltage drop at a period of time specified by the engineer after review of the generator data sheets D. Contractor shall verify code letter of motors furnished and shall adjust generator size accordingly where code letters vary from design values. E. Generator system shall meet current EPA Tier 1, 2 or 3 status requirements as applicable. Where size shown on plans is not proper tier rated, the next size unit shall be supplied. F. When next size generator is required, all conductor and conduit sizes shall be adjusted accordingly. 2.02 ENGINE A. Type: Liquid cooled, full diesel compression ignition engine, either naturally aspirated or ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-4 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 turbocharged. 4-cycled engine required, or as approved by the Engineer. B. Rating: Provide an engine with brake horsepower not less than required by the full load rating of the generator, including losses, and with all accessories attached. C. Speed: The engine speed will be suitable for direct connection to the generator without exceeding engine manufacturer's published curves. Speed must not exceed 1800 RPM. D. BMEP: The engine BMEP will not exceed 310 PSI, when producing rated load. Piston speed shall be 1800 feet per minute or less. E. Construction: 1. Replaceable liners. 2. Two (2) valves per cylinder. 3. Full pressure lube system with crankshaft driven oil pump. 4. Unit injectors. 5. Full flow replaceable oil filter. 6. Lube Oil Heater 7. Primary and secondary fuel oil filters. 8. Replaceable fuel transfer pump suitable for 6 feet suction lift or, as required for this project. 9. Dry type air intake cleaner. 10. Fuel water separator with see-through polycarbonate bowl and manual drain. F. Starting System 1. Heavy duty, battery driven electric starter motor. 2. A fully charged 24-volt lead acid, impact resistant, storage battery or batteries mounted on the unit. Make battery capacity sufficient for four cranking cycles at firing speed of 10 seconds duration each, with 15 seconds rest periods- Provide all battery cables, connections, electrolyte, and a hydrometer. Battery rack to have rubber coating or epoxy paint. G. Cooling System: The generator set will be furnished with a unit mounted radiator having sufficient capacity for cooling the engine when delivering full rated horsepower at the design ambient. The fan is to be engine driven pusher type. An immersion heater shall be furnished in the jacket water system. Where unit mounted radiator does not have sufficient cooling capacity a remote cooling system shall be furnished by Generator Supplier and shall include all equipment devices and pumps, expansion tanks, piping, and appurtenances required for a complete operating system. H. Exhaust System: High degree, critical-rated 316 stainless exhaust system with maximum silencing capacity mounted on unit. Include a suitable length of flexible 316 stainless steel exhaust tubing for mounting between engine and muffler. When V type engines are used, a wye type flex will be furnished all exhaust system components to be 316 stainless steel. Provide (1) digital exhaust gas temperature meter on in-line engine or (2) on "V" engine. Digital readout to be included in engine/generator control panel. Fuel System: 1. Engine driven, self-priming fuel pump suitable for unassisted transfer of fuel from the fuel tank to the engine. Provide fuel pump capable of satisfactory flow from tank to generator at distance shown on plans. Optional fuel pump may be installed at tank location by providing all power and control circuits and equipment required ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-5 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 for complete operating fuel system. 2. Where shown on plans, provide fuel tank meeting UL 142, unless noted otherwise. Capacity will be for hour operation at maximum load noted on plans or for gallon shown on plans. Where plans show separate fuel tank, furnish according to Section 15248—"Above Ground Fuel Tank." 3. Where plans show sub-base fuel tank, furnish according to Section 16655 — "Diesel Fuel Generator Base Tanks." 4. Full flow fuel/water separator with see-through polycarbonate bowl and drain. 5. Full flow replaceable element fuel filter. 6. Fuel connection lines between tank and engine. 7. Provide governor of the full electronic type to maintain frequency stability at any constant load, including no load, within plus or minus 1/4 percent, and to maintain frequency regulation between no load steady state and full load steady within 3 percent. 8. Fuel restriction indicators. 9. Air filter restriction indicators. 10. Generator Manufacturer shall designate piping entry into generator, and shall consult with Contractor on fuel pipe sizes and routing. It is Contractors responsibility to secure Manufacturer's directions and advise for a proper fuel system operation. 11. Contractor shall provide full tank of fuel after testing is completed. J. Battery Charger: A static, solid-state type battery charger unit, which automatically controls the charge rate. Include a charging rate ammeter, thermal overload circuit and transformer. The charge shall be suitable for operation at 120 volts single phase, 60 Hertz. The maximum charging time to bring the batteries up to full charge will be 12 hours. Mount charger on unit, using adequate vibration devices. Charger shall be of the dual rate type. K. Engines used in proposed generator set to be certified to comply with current US EPA and CARB Mobile Off-highway emission limits when tester per ISO 8178 D2. Engines used shall also comply with TCEQ air quality regulations at location and time of installation. L. Where installation of sub-base fuel tank is shown on plans and elevates generator controls above normal access level, Contractor to provide an approved stair/platform structure for access to controls and generator components. Provide shop drawings for Engineer's approval. 2.03 ALTERNATOR A. Type: Furnish a direct coupled, synchronous, brushless type alternator with amortisseur windings, revolving field, exciter, and built-in static rectifier and permanent magnet excitation system. B. Rating: 1. Voltage and Phase, as shown on plans. 2. Frequency- 60 Hertz. 3. Minimum KW and KVA, rating as shown on plans. 4. Power Factor-0.8. C. Insulation System: Class H, 150 degrees Celsius rise over a 40°C ambient. Generator not to exceed 105°C over 40°C ambient at 100% rated power. D. Instantaneous Voltage Dip: Less than 20 percent when full load is applied to the unit. ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-6 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 E. Voltage Stability: Maintain within plus or minus percent of rated voltage at any constant from no load to full load. F. Voltage Regulation - Maintain within plus or minus 1-1/2 percent deviation from rated voltage between no load steady state and full load steady state. Voltage regulation shall allow motor starting with solid state soft starters and reduce voltage autotransformer starters, and shall maintain continuous power to the starter during the transition from Start to Run phase of operation. G. Enclosure: Weatherproof, except where sound attenuating enclosure is indicated on plans, refer to Section 16622—"Sound Attenuating Enclosures." H. Coupling: From engine, drive rotor through a semi-flexible coupling to ensure permanent alignment. Strip Heaters: Provide low surface temperature space heaters to prevent condensation. J. Generator set shall have automatic controls to protect alternator from overload. Controls shall be independent of main breaker, which shall not be depended on or, used for, generator protection. Controls shall be provided to monitor the output current of the generator set and initiate an alarm when load current exceeds 110% of the rated current of the generator set on any phase for more than 60 seconds. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator for both single phase and three phase fault conditions. The system shall control the alternator output to provide 300% of rated current under short circuit conditions, for both single phase and three phase faults. Systems, which regulate single phase and three phase faults at identical excitation levels, are not acceptable. There shall be no exceptions to this requirement, regardless of standards for manufacturers listed in Item 2.01—"Ratings." K. Provide 100% rated circuit breaker. Where alternator is rated for 3 phase, 4 wire service greater than 800 amps, provide GFI trip function per NEC. L. Coordinate generator and accessories such as conductor lugs on breaker and dimensional spaces shown before shipping. Lack of coordination shall be at vendor's risk and at no additional cost to Owner. M. Control and voltage regulator's operation shall not be affected by electrical system leading power factor conditions. Where power factor capacitors may affect generator operation, provide means to disengage capacitors during generator operation. 2.04 CONTROL PANEL A. General: Provide a solidstate control panel mounted to unit, which includes, but is not limited to,the following instruments and protective devices. 1. AC ammeter. 2. Phase selector switch. 3. Current transformers. 4. AC voltmeter. 5. Automatic solid-state voltage regulator. 6. Rheostat for adjusting voltage plus or minus 5 percent of rated voltage. 7. Engine Malfunction Warning Lights: a. Low oil pressure. b. High water temperature. c. Engine overcrank. ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-7 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 d. Engine overspeed. 8. Frequency meter. 9. Non-resetable elapsed time meter with a 9,999.9-hour maximum indication. 10. Coolant temperature gage. 11. Oil pressure gage. 12. Main circuit breaker- molded case type. 13. Combination alarm-shutdown system with manual reset and indicating lights for high engine temperature, low oil pressure, engine overspeed, and engine fail-to- start. Include an additional set of contacts for remote alarms. 14. Manual start/stop switch for control of engine. 15. Alarm dry contact closures as follows: a. Low oil pressure b. High water temperature c. Engine overcrank d. Engine run e. Fuel low level 16. Remote control contacts as follows: a. Engine start via transfer switch (which will include power transfer). 17. Provide latest electronic control panel at engine. 18. Provide space heater in generator set mounted control panel to prevent condensation. B. Provide remote annunciator with minimum of (6) six programmable relays for use as alarm outputs unit to be recess mounted in door of automatic transfer switch, except where ATS is outdoors, in which case annunciator shall be installed in the inner panel of the ATS or, on wall in MCC Room as shown on plans or otherwise designated by Engineer. Wall surface mounted annunciator shall be installed in manufacturer's surface mounted style box. Recessed mounted annunciator shall be installed in recessed box with annunciator free place trim flush with wall. C. Contractor shall provide fail and problem alarms and run signals to monitoring station at Operator's room to autodialer, when present. Provide circuits, devices, expansion modules, and programming as required for autodialer. D. Non-resetable elapsed time meter with a 9,999.9-hour maximum indication. E. Provide data port for use with SCADA monitoring of generator status using ModBus protocol via Ethernet. Provide CD with program, information and status display. Provide generator communications interface module with Ethernet connector, power supply, programming for SCADA system use and all appurtenances. Provide compatible HMI template for specific generator. Provide all addresses, HMI templates, and software required for display on SCADA HMI. Provide Owners copy of Manufacturer's software for use in displaying generator data. Include Manufacturers time for assisting in installation and set-up of program. Assist Systems Integration Engineer in setting up plant controller PLC and/or SCADA. F. Provide factory built, U.L. listed, remote annunciator that interfaces with generator control panel. ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-8 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 2.05 ENGINE START/STOP CONTROLS A. The engine controls shall be provided with bypassing of the low oil pressure shutdown circuitry during start-up. B. If unit fails to start in an appropriate time (normally 30 seconds), the starting circuit shall shut down for an appropriate time (approximate 10 seconds) and then repeat the start cycle. If the unit still fails to start after approximately four start attempts, the overcrank alarm shall activate and the starting circuit shall shut down. C. The engine start/stop control shall be static solid state. 2.06 BASE A. Mount the assembled packaged unit on a base of welded structural steel, box type construction. Prime all exposed metal parts with a rust inhibitor and finish in durable machinery enamel. B. Vibration isolators shall be of the steel spring type. 2.07 WEATHERPROOF HOUSING — (WHERE INDICATED ON PLANS) A. Construction: Provide an overall weather protective housing with removable side panels and a hinged, padlockable meter panel door to make the engine generating plant suitable for outdoor installation. In addition, sound levels at the nearest property line shall not exceed 58 db at residential project locations and 68 db at non-residential project locations. Where sound attenuating housing is shown on plans, provide according to those specifications. B. Painting: Prime all exposed metal parts with a suitable rust inhibitor applied to the clean, bare metal, followed by two coats of epoxy paint for exterior weather. C. All doors and access panels shall be lockable. Provide mechanical (non-magnetic) contact switches on all moveable panels and doors to detect entry into generator enclosure. D. Contractor to coordinate with manufacturer on housing size prior to constructing concrete pad. E. Provide low voltage transformer, panel and appurtenance sized for all low voltage requirements at generator. Provide feeder circuit from Motor Control Center. F. Where sound attenuating enclosure is shown on plans, or where referred to in Section 16622 — "Sound Attenuating Enclosures," provide enclosure instead of the standard weatherproof enclosure. Enclosure manufacturer shall be consulted for piping and conduit entries into housing. Also, coordinate with generator manufacturer and engineer before installing. 2.08 GENERATOR CONCRETE FOUNDATION A. Provide concrete pad as shown on plans. Use 3000-psi concrete with #5 rebar 12" O.C. Coordinate pad construction with generator drawings and weight. 2.09 GENERATOR ACCESS A. Where generator controls or enclosure step-up height is greater than 18 inches above grade, Contractor shall provide concrete or galvanized steel steps for access to controls or to enclosure. ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-9 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 2.10 LOAD BANK A. Load Bank Controls: 1. Where load bank is required, provide all controls, contactors, and devices needed to exercise generator on load bank. Normal plant loads shall not be on generator during load bank operation of generator. 2. Coordinate with Generator Vendor. 3. Submit load bank controls data. 2.11 GENERATOR MONITORING SYSTEM A. Provide interface to the generator solidstate controller and route data signal (ModBus TCP) to data switch as shown on plans. B. Provide all software, programming, and devices required for monitoring trouble status, run status, alternator loading, fuel tank level, and all other available status signals. Provide HMI templates for display on SCADA HMI. Route data cable to monitoring station PLC via Ethernet switch as shown on plans. Assist in setting up system during construction, testing, demonstrations to Owner, and final inspection. C. Provide all addressing information needed to display all alarm, function, and status information at PLC HMI. Send information on CD or via e-mail to Engineer. 2.12 GENERATOR INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall consult with Generator Manufacturer on all aspects of generator installation to assure all work is proper and professional. 2.13 FUEL LINE ROUTING A. Fuel lines from supply source that are routed in generator stub area shall be installed in a covered trench, up into generator enclosure or in a buried line as described in Section 15249 —"Above-Ground Fuel Tank," Item 2.06— "Fuel Lines" and as shown on plans. 2.14 STORAGE A. Where generator is stored on site prior to installation, provide any heating or other measures required to prevent moisture accumulation in high humidity areas. Consult Manufacturer for requirements. 2.15 INHIBIT RELAYS A. Where generator is not designed to carry full load of motors, provide inhibit relay for each motor starter over 5 horsepower to inhibit motor starter operation when generator runs. Relay is to be energized by generator run signal from ATS or generator. Provide bypass switch across the inhibit relay contacts to allow selected motors to run on generator power. 2.16 GENERATOR ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall provide power, control, and instrument circuits as well as all fuel source piping and devices, cooling equipment, pumps, and related appurtenances, and all accessory _ ADDENDUM NO.2 16650- 10 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 equipment that is standard factory component supplied by the generator manufacturer.as part of this installation. Contractor shall coordinate all requirements with generator vendor and include all materials and design in bid cost. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. TESTING A. Units shall be factory tested under design conditions. Engineer and/or Owner, may witness test. Vendor shall give one (1) week notice to Engineer before test is conducted. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation of generator shall be according to Manufacturer's instructions and shall be witnessed and inspected by Manufacturer's Representative. B. Do not install vibration isolation rubber pads at random locations under skids. Place continuous pad, that is width of skids or, do not place at all. Manufacturer is to advise on this requirement. C. Install on concrete pad that is sloped to avoid any standing water under generator or skids. Standing water test will be conducted and where water stands, the concrete slab shall be reworked to provide satisfactory installation. D. Generator frame is to be bonded to ground grid via exothermic welded connection with 2/0 bare cu conductor(minimum). 3.03 TESTING AFTER INSTALLATION A. Perform Startup test to insure all systems work properly together to include transfer switches, annunciator panel and other associated accessories. B. Perform a load bank test as follows: 1. Utilizing a resistive load bank, load test the generator set as follows: a. Load should be applied as 50% of the generator name plate output for the first 30 minutes, 75% of the generator name plate output for the next 30 minutes, 100% of the generator name plate output for the next 60 minutes, for a total run time of at least 2 hours. b. At a minimum, record the following at least every 15 minutes during the test. Time - Frequency (Hz) Battery Voltage (DC) Voltage (AC-L1, L2, L3) Oil Pressure (PSI) Amperage (AC-L1, L2, L3) - Coolant Temperature Power Factor(1.0) Ambient Temperature kW ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-11 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 - Exhaust Temperature - Load Percentage C. Perform a plant load test as follows: 1. After the resistive load bank test has been completed, perform a plant load test to confirm generator can run connected loads as designed. Testing shall be performed as a complete simulation of power loss- ie shut off main disconnect and observe generator starts and ATS transfers to back-up source as required. All loads shown for connection shall be operated for up to 15 minutes (full load) unless system parameters do not allow pumps to run for that amount of time. Coordinate system parameters with plant Operator who shall be present for all plant load testing. Allow plant to run on generator under normal conditions for minimum of 1 hour. Record all values as shown for load bank testing every 5 minutes during plant load test. 2. Allow generator to run unloaded for at least 5 minutes before shutting down. 3.04 LOAD LIMITING A. Where generator is not sized to carry all motor loads simultaneously, Contractor shall provide inhibit relays and bypass switches to prevent operation of selected loads when on standby power. Locate devices in motor control section of MCC. 3.05 FIELD TESTS A. Perform field tests at the site after installation is complete and in the presence of the Owner's representative to verify that unit meets start up sequences listed. B. Manufacturer's Representative shall conduct field tests after electrical installation is completed and shall provide a certified report of these tests for the Owner and Engineer. The tests shall include sequential stating of all motor loads and recording the voltage dip as each motor starts. This report shall be sent to Engineer no less than 10 working days prior to "Final Acceptance" testing. Operation of system shall be demonstrated to Owner and Engineer by the Representative during setup tests and at final inspection and testing. C. Load testing shall be performed using a reactive load bank sized to simulate all loads running with largest load then applied. Provide written report of tests for Engineer's review. D. The following minimum work shall be performed by the Contractor and Manufacturer's Representative under the technical direction of the manufacturer's service representative. Allow for a minimum of twelve (12) days for factory technician including all expenses for the following services: 1. Inspection and final adjustments for startup, and acceptance testing. 2. Operational and functional test of controllers. 3. Participation in commissioning services. Technical Representative shall be present for duration of commissioning tests related to vendor equipment. E. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report before final payment is made. 3.06 OIL PAN ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-12 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 A. Provide galvanized steel oil pan beneath engine to catch oil drips. Provide drain valve with oil resistant drain hose extending to the skid and attached with stainless steel clamp to prevent oil spills when draining oil pan. 3.07 FIRE EXTINGUISHER A. Provide two (2) high quality portable fire extinguishers noted for diesel fuel fire suppression. Provide mounting brackets and install on both sides of the enclosure doors located in the electrical control panel area. Coordinate location with Owner. 3.08 EAR PROTECTION A. Provide dispenser with disposable ear protection devices on inside of generator enclosure near entry at controls section. 3.09 FUEL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall provide all fuel required for use during the construction phase. Fuel tank shall be full when the facility is turned over to the Owner after final acceptance. -END OF SECTION- ADDENDUM NO.2 16650-13 of 13 REVISED 10/28/2019 SECTION 16911 POWER MONITOR PART I GENERAL 1.00 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work" for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16012 — "Electrical Work", Item 1.04—"Submittals"for submittal requirements. 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the Power Monitor equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings, and modifications as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS A. General: The latest edition of the following standards and publications shall comply with the work of this section: 1. ANSI/IEEE C12.20 2. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 70- National Electrical Code 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 4. ISO 9001, Quality Management Requirements 1.03 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. Eaton/Cutler Hammer shall be the basis of design. All products submitted shall comply with, meet, or exceed the specifications of the Eaton model type specified herein. Equal products as pre-approved are acceptable. See section 2.00 of this specification. B. The Manufacturer of the assembly shall be the Manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. C. For the equipment specified herein,the Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. D. The Manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of 5 years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of ADDENDUM NO.2 16911-1 of 6 REVISED 10/28/2019 installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide full 5-year service warranty on the overall installation and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware, and software. This warranty shall begin on date of written "Final Acceptance" of the electrical systems and to be executed as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor's warranty shall also guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide labor, work, or materials as necessary to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for more than 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All equipment and materials installed shall have full warranty from Manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for harsh industrial electrical/mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where Manufacturer's products fail prematurely, Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have the option of declaring that failures were caused by environmental conditions and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that Product Manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawing submittals. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within 5 working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and back charging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. C. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. The Power Monitor submittals shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following information: 1. Data for each type indicating conductor sizes, conductor types, and connection configuration and lead lengths 2. Manufacturer's certified test data indicating the ability of the product to meet or exceed requirements of this specification ADDENDUM NO.2 16911-2 of 6 REVISED 10/28/2019 3. Drawings, with dimensions, indicating mounting arrangement and lead length configuration, and mounting arrangement of any optional remote diagnostic equipment and assemblies 4. List and detail all protection systems such as fuses, disconnecting means and protective materials 5. Include installation details demonstrating mechanical and electrical connections to equipment to be monitored. B. Refer to 16013 Electrical Submittals for additional requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of Manufacturer's instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS & RECORD DRAWINGS A. O&M manuals shall be provided in accordance to 16014 Electrical O&M Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.00 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Cutler-Hammer B. Schneider Electric C. Pre-approved equal 2.01 Power Monitor—Service Entrance A. Provide a microprocessor based Power Quality Meter equal or better: 1. Power Xpert PXM4000 with Webserver and Mod bus TCP B. Electrical Requirements: 1. Unit Operating Voltage—Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit 2. Power Monitor Requirements 3. The device shall be capable of monitoring the following with a minimum accuracy of 0.5% of reading: 4. Voltage (L-L and L-N) 5. Amperes (all phases) 6. Watts,Vars,VA 7. Power Factor ADDENDUM NO.2 16911-3 of 6 REVISED 10/28/2019 8. Frequency 9. Var-Hours,VA-Hours 10. Ampere-demand, Watt-demand,VAR-demand, VA-Demand 11. The device shall be capable of monitoring the following advanced parameters with all readings having a minimum accuracy of+/-0.2%: a. Individual Harmonics to the 40'h harmonic b. Total Harmonic Distortion (Voltage/Current) 12. Capable of trend logging and analysis up to 100,000 events with timestamp 13. The device shall be capable of recording the waveform with a minimum of 512 samples per cycle. 14. The device shall have a current range of at minimum .1-200% of nominal. 15. The device at a minimum shall have a display capable of 3 lines with 4 characters each, with indication of parameter being displayed. C. The meter shall be capable of providing the graphically display of the following Main Meter Menu Screens: 1. Meter Screen providing: a. Volts: L-L and L-N, and average b. Frequency c. Current and average phase A, B, and C, N & G d. Power Screen providing: e. Energy f. Demand g. Power Factor h. Quality Screen providing: Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of volts and current j. Percent Nines (9s) reliability 2. Events screen providing: a. Latest events b. Enabled Triggers c. Historical Events d. Calendar view of Events e. Events Timeline screen f. Set-up screen providing: g. View set-up h. Edit set-up Login j. Logout ADDENDUM NO.2 16911-4 of 6 REVISED 10/28/2019 D. Power Monitor—Communications 1. The PQM shall be provided with multiple communications ports and protocols, including the following capability: 2. RS-485 remote display port 3. RS-485 Modbus RTU 4. RJ-45 10/100 baseT Local Ethernet Configuration Port for local WEB server connection 5. HTML web pages 6. File transfer protocol (ftp) 7. Modbus TCP 8. SMTP(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)for email support 9. SNMP(Simple Network Management Protocol) MIB support 10. Ethernet TCP/IP 11. NTP(Network Time Protocol) support E. The WEB server shall provide the user with remote WEB access to all the metered, trend and waveform information. The WEB server shall include real time monitored information in both numeric and graphical visual formats. F. Event Logging: The embedded WEB Server shall allow the user to view a list of triggered events along with event details. In addition, a separate system log shall store logging of activities including acknowledged triggers, and systems operations, such as resets. Storage shall be reserved for 100,000 events. G. No additional software shall be required to access data or modify settings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.00 INSTALLATION A. The Manufacturer shall submit a written statement indicating that a factory technician has inspected the installation. The installing contractor shall submit a checkout memorandum to the manufacturer. The memorandum shall indicate the date the equipment is placed into service and the actual method of installation. Submit three copies to the specifying engineer. B. The installation of devices within or on electrical distribution equipment shall in no way compromise or violate equipment listing, labeling, or warranty of the distribution equipment. C. The contractor shall follow the Device Manufacturer's recommended installation practice as found in the equipment installation instructions. D. The installation shall adhere to all applicable codes. E. System setup, calibration, and testing shall be conducted by factory trained technician, or a factory approved, qualified, independent technician. ADDENDUM NO.2 16911-5 of 6 ...r REVISED 10/28/2019 3.01 FACTORY TESTING A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards. 3.02 TRAINING A. Provide training for set-up, testing, programming and operation for Owners Operators. Engineer may attend training classes. Training to be performed by an experienced factory trained technician, or a factory approved, qualified, independent technician at Owners facilities. -END OF SECTION- ADDENDUM NO.2 16911-6 of 6 REVISED 10/28/2019 SECTION 16950 FIELD ELECTRONIC TRANSMITTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.00 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work" for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16012 — "Electrical Work," Paragraph 1.04— "Submittals"for submittal requirements. 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Field transmitters for instrumentation and control (I&C) system and is applicable only where indicated on plans or other specification sections. Provide applicable transmitter type where indicated on plans. B. All readouts shall be in actual units measured for this specific project. Percent of scale readouts are not acceptable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRONIC GAUGE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER A. Manufacturers: 1. Foxboro. 2. Rosemount. 3. Danfoss 4. Or pre-approved equal. B. Electro-mechanical device to produce analog current signal as function of pressure input to it. C. Mounting: Universal bracket for 2-in. pipe mounting. D. Housing: Threaded, metal NEMA 4. E. Connections: 1/2 in. NTP. F. Wetted Parts: Type 316 stainless steel. G. Calibration Capability: Gauge, vacuum, and absolute. H. All readouts to be actual unit values and not percent scale. I. Output: 4-20 mAdc into 400 ohms (24-vdc power) or 1,000 ohms (45-vdc power). 1. Adjustments: Zero and span, for 5:1 rangeability. K Power: 24 to 45 VDC. ADDENDUM NO.2 16950-1 of 3 REVISED 10/28/2019 L. Accuracy: ±0.5% of span. M. Accessories: 1. Weatherproof integral output indicator 0%to 100% linear. 2. Zero elevation/suppression of at least 100% of span. N. Type: IGP 10 O. Pressure Range: 0-150 psi (for water facility applications). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals. B. Set-up and calibration of equipment shall only be performed by a Factory Technician. C. Provide diaphragm seal for all pressure transmitters that are used for measuring liquid level at hydro tanks and for all pressure transmitters measuring corrosive liquids or gasses. For high temperature air, gas or liquid measurements, install isolation diaphragm seal near pipe tap and provide extension piping to transmitter located remotely from heat source. D. For all differential level transmitters used to measure level of hydro tanks, provide a diaphragm seal at the top connection to the hydro tank to prevent water entry into the transmitter. Unit shall be rated for the pressure range of the transmitter and shall be stainless steel construction. 3.02 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide full 3-year service warranty on the overall installation and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware, and software. This warranty shall begin on date of written "Final Acceptance" of the electrical systems and to be executed as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor's warranty shall also guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide labor, work, or materials as necessary to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for more than 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All equipment and materials installed shall have full warranty from Manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for harsh industrial electrical/mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where Manufacturer's products fail prematurely, Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have the option of declaring that failures where caused by environmental conditions and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that Product Manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawing submittals. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not ADDENDUM NO.2 16950-2 of 3 REVISED 10/28/2019 completed within 5 working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and back charging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. C. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. D. Any failed equipment may not be repaired and returned to service prior to final acceptance. Only new equipment is allowed. E. For all differential level transmitters used to measure level of hydro tanks, provide a diaphragm seal at the connection to the hydro tank to prevent water entry into the transmitter. Unit shall be rated for the pressure range of the transmitter and shall be stainless steel construction. 3.03 CALIBRATION A. Provide services of a Factory Technician for calibration and programming of transmitters for range of variable with 4/20 mA representing 0 to 125 percent of maximum range. Allow for field adjustments during testing of installation. -END OF SECTION- ADDENDUM NO.2 16950-3 of 3 REVISED 10/28/2019 • 11,11 4 , 0 Lg ' c x.+ rY aY a yyX s •i• I 4e, i^ u lif t. ill 2di` li; ) s. p ja. v ti !Flj vi l'i \ /' \ ,\ U i . •\ / / \/ / t N \ Sii. / :,,,; • f.'- r \ . 10..�E /j i _.. `/� „-'::�.._... \• , \\ ,..„, \\ \\ \` / // .�., Y ,"e' • aa\ \ \ / IIs-...-...._..,--- \-.-4'N.,_1.- --:\-\s' .:::::1\,...,\\V-C:‘, : \,N.,,,,..._, _.. .. .,.. . \t.., „, ---...........„ ei'''' \V`‘r ''''- ....*'—'..--\ ;°. 1.\'\.4 * 1 .'..! !•'S.: ',,\..1,1- ..1.... \ \ am \ " 4 °\ fi ; hY \ CSV` \, '![: . �,rG'' 1 \ \ \ \ \\\♦ \.\.` tee \,'�\\Ss'_..--- • ',"\ ,i 1 \a y\ j. ilkklwAlliiks �• .i il. \ \ y.+r iI 1l3 • \ \) ‘ - ,\X ter* it " , > yr, ' t S b k � - f,, \ iib • \ \ es, //,ice %' F.41111116,16111 \ w.. •\\ %jam' / / . ® , �-. Ehl,, aW A'.<•:. "\ \ r \ y \ Cry i g './ t' 6 ! 51 tr-; \ �\\ a ; -12, \ ` uIV 2 .AOOY-AY7owe{{-pgpyt02\OCOM1,oz\p'ijfeKer? VII U ¢ serf fa m G17 qei{ e g . _ `, q ,, ..... `r i i Iia+�•. k`�='� y G- 1 Et 4 I _ B w ;03 =Q like aW - iw2 4.11 ICI W W a W u 8 '_,U r 9a Wg 1g64g 15 gig w 8 aga g¢ "P CC 4 2i -� A gli § wC 1 Cl) 1 W 1110 k hozQ 9 f6 Z f" as �� 25g_ cQH op aa i 1447 44 al IN ® r < a W - 1------:::- "Emu !'.4- 52g 1 4' ° - 0 �w . b wIII ` B ¢ d tm6+ U4LU trQL 1 't w „ �Wig € 7 g3z a 0Wa= tY o< J i {' W � .Fo 4H _- S P ,- S W o www <ags� � O t 2 zWm of - i w ,,,q) Wcxx . z554Q Eo x 5z x 0 <� i m ¢ o >`1 o .WW s _0.os_ $ Iiuluilui'1 8 L z • W j >> 8 g3 g •' MXqiW o1 IO IA aSa El 62 s �sH � 3� goo g �, gni w m .�i o dao, y� �a J O = 3 / 3 <66 O f] a o O J o=1 w o4 $ 41. slaw 0 of ' sZ 1s { wgg ` pE_ 8 Q n 'NIM 'NI OBC NIM 1 IP ow= z 0 IE4111 <a a�W W x 52, pi ia8i '64 ilt \ ._ : 'NI BBg .I W ; otg M tn n ,.) ' hhi'll Q 1 iD1 i 19. W O O? 13 c @ t'' `Q a7 '- b1 j *J ro'O g L _E ro � 2) U C •- -• z ›.• 4. O ,r,, V, w CO �'"' • -&-•ro ,a9 �a,1, a. u,� �, -2 7-6 w A rC C C ra (-a 1 p u.1 iJ G O W LI' 'C C fcoryo ; a. _ 1n - iO ++ S g. ti u +y-' r3 C .G o I 0, � aQ, � cu 'E a•0 yt5" n O _ r0 }.;, roc : 5 Y ,� C• y O V ro r r1. V N O' 'S3.� +� C ai {U_ c v M ria"` Z s O T.°}. ,_ {�1 1 c� } /O '�,� 'cr Q p1 3 =y . i t -. v., , : CO 2 oro .^vv ,n T.gr G t, O. • co n 0 rU U y.L1 �'� m O �O goCro�E U �D C to c c ra c n rn } € - ro O i�uj ,W4, r $: V c m 0,2.-.c , y 'L co. 3 c ._. ..... r� ,, a: 7 cA U C •'ppC fvi c -� r0 ✓ U �1 d Q, C i > N c "M7 v C C 32. o r0 C ro V a > 'd p Y t°T q .�'.� = V y 3 V d v O '� 1 t7l ro �•�•� V N LL, LL p p O `^ ',Y.. C ?- u ° 8-1 d u1 V �n: lI d ---� �n i....7,0 u 'o o a u, o ro ro L) m 0 X! ?- y 0 y o Cx! 45. 0.. ai ,m p 0 is 6,-� ;73, 'C .0-c 0 `° �i m ?(-AZ clo t. rr`\, " Z c ,O j C! o x H ro °— 3' rco rot 'S , ••• t ro r� d `v oro hjh c ..c � h � '6u -a 17, r c $ a. 8!8 if) 2 I c°i ;C G o a �' c ° oc o ro o. al '� r„ dw' a'1 .�.J - ^1 R j VV" M i C_ O G >` v, Y r Y V ® o f io_N C U! 1O,^, a0+ ,....-, 0 I �+ CN' 11 v (Ne y, o r' Cl.) .n `1 C O Al Cl x' 10 f N ro O M Z. ` O y rO a c P roc N ,-. .'.- 'C ro 5- N c -A ._ C v Ic o,c �oo � 'c � L_ sumo ao � � ox "e-x' c., ,'"1 .0..... t..'. OG 2 2 4,.. Q •. u Q dG:.ti C 2 + ✓ U Q1 3 7 t _U7 _.__.. _.... D cc O J k 40 f flJami ( —) t f a 2' n c ce w I . Q N w V I C 1 O L f. .-, r-..) ° .LJ O ,.... w l j j C �. ..� a r� N 2 i M O aC, N - O a) N O '. l= r L N y rr^ Y m .j.c.f) Q {/I c c N Z7 C C cu Ti C v 'C U ,, 1.I U u 0 A > w �" cn U W m U1 U W S m i n I d < Z 1,—r = r/1 W L d✓ n o y ;) p 11 & p v U ° c _ `" Qv y 4 ? 7 Q O to C `O O 8 LLl ti` T ra u c n O $ V X v c :9 U " a o r6 ° ro o c H"ti, c ° w U • o 4 a o ° is r,•4 o c c a n o v g. f-- 9n VI 1� iL rr, ‘jiy .b a� h- _ F- y� V f- rq c T H Pjffl • o O +� r u d L °r C� ° O X OG v�� u > x c ra OC ti 2 Qi a�a1, c� O u a a� rw° x `� ra O 2 L 2 C� 4 2 1 .-, L 7..) rl >: Cr) ct u. D 1^ Q h U1 h r- h N D rt in , • �' «.'------, . • i s— Q) ' - Cl) 1 ifp,s, _C (..) .4.-• " -I-0 Co I . co ., . ..._. s....a) -1--, • ,s9.4"". C • . .i:,:z.... ,s,, a) i to, ,a,•-• . 'i...,i t a'410611. ...*:.• ....., ,,,,„:„*Agattat41 . '•,,..„„ . . 0 ,:0'C 0) .• . C .,.. .... .« „$ I f I i Cl) 0 .0 0 • ' .' - 41. w'--- - • -• • , -•-,.;;,:. . . .... It. '' .. , . ,. ,'......,•;.,:, tr . ''.",•-•.- . Ilk---,iiii . -.. -...:„ • ':. . ,, 4 .......-- 411FP .1,:. .. .%... . i. " t • i 1...*.,. . . ,• . iii: •.i.. ' r• ••.•,:4 f4,,,4i < :. •:., 47 • '4'.' .. ., . '''. . , gi ',..'. ;' r ..-, ,.:4•.,. 4 tie, , „,•,, • ,, ...-. ''...'.. .'<'fi..•; ( • tE••• '• j. . , ',..kt,.. j 4.1_.• • e:.',,.; , ?,,.::-.• itl, • .• :, - :, .,5- ,',., 1 t= •, •-• ;414 '"" .., • iiiiiiiii . 4 -•.,, ,•,., . :., S1 ''',. . •:, CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Date: 10-17-2019 PROJECT: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion-Phase II BID NO.: 1020-03 BID DATE: 10/31/2019 at 2:00 PM FROM: John Lacy,P.E. Division Manager Joshua Netardus, P.E. Assistant Project Manager Costello, Inc. 2017 CityWest Blvd, 3rd Floor, Houston,TX 77042 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract tie Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: N/A SPECIFICATIONS: N/A CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: N/A PRE-BID QUESTIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS: 1. Clarification: Any requests to visit the plant site should be coordinated through City of Pearland Project Manager Jameson Appel (jappel@pearlandtx.gov,281-652-1757). 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM 2. Clarification: All questions shall be submitted in writing to the City at ebids@pearlandtx.gov. The cutoff for all questions shall be Wednesday October 23`d at 4:00pm. Questions received after •�/ this time will not be addressed. 3. Clarification: The existing pump discharge piping is steel. All replacement piping shall be ductile iron. Steel will not be allowed as an alternate material. 4. Question: The bid form shows the generator and the diesel tank as separate bid items. Since the diesel tank is a belly tank, can these two items be combined into one bid item? Response: This will be clarified in a future addendum. 5. Question: Is an access platform required with the proposed generator? Response: This will be clarified in a future addendum. 6. Question: How much will the other contractor that is currently on-site interfere with construction access? Response: DN Tanks is mostly demobilized from the site and should be completely demobilized within the next month or so. C3 has some site work remaining on the site which should be completed soon. If they are still on site when this Project begins,they will coordinate to avoid blocking any Phase A work. C3 should be well complete with the project before Phase B work on-site mobilization needs to begin. 7. Are the mixers already on site? Response: Yes,the three existing mixers have already been installed in the three existing tanks. The mixers inside the tanks and cable up to the junction boxes on the roof of each tank are complete. The Contractor must bring wire/conduit to those boxes. The motorized actuator and control valve for the GST3 fill line control valve is also already installed, but will need power and control brought to it as well. No level control devices for GST3 were included in the prior project. The locations on GST3 where these level devices will be installed will be complete before work begins(a flanged tee outlet with an isolation valve on side of tank and a flanged riser on roof). 8.The agenda and sign in sheet for the Pre-Bid meeting is attached to this addendum END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 tit •c.. F TF�,1ti1 John Lacy,P. - ° Division Manager * **' 1� *�'rqs* e* *1, *� /\ •* JOHN W. LACY JOSHUA P.NETARDUS /rv. 90202 147/464 - hua Netardus. P.E. ¢hh°�o,,,...1159170 w `�,4SSro ......�t�, � Assisitant Project ManagerhlhKShp` •�' • /I � t4�1� � 2-22-12 111f ' l0! 2 of 2 /0//`//if 6 ti 4a .,_ -- N N •,lio r" t� • �. d C,r Y a, N. C`, N M Cka (..S M r.",-, cJ v ! i , - w, . Y v ", Y a I w ' e. r .... cc i- 7s a w N — �;: - J al Z w .-1 Q oO \ * !ife v �` `t. N p z o v` l7 w v o 1.5 p cwn Z Q a w W < V e-i .O J o. m a m Z� •�> J J cc O !0 -4 J ,i ro A j -�� IJ ' al I, 1 IV l E t1 a 47 Z ;. r , LS .4 j cam. LH t� � Dr .•`� L. < < • J '^a v 44* CITY OF PEARLAND 1. PROJECTS DEPARTMENT .yF v 3519 Liberty Drive, Suite 300 Pearland,Texas 77581 TE x AS pearlandtx.gov/projects Fs r. i Si PRE-BID MEETING AGENDA FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion Phase II October 17,2019 10:00 AM 1) Introduction of Participants 2) Introduction of the Project a) Project Name: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion Phase II b) City of Pearland Project Number: WA1701 c) Bid No: 1020-03 d) City of Pearland Project Manager: Jameson Appel, P.E. 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77581 281.652.1657 office e) Project Design Engineers: John Lacy, P.E. and Joshua Netardus, P.E. Costello, Inc. 2107 CityWest Blvd, 3`d Floor Houston, Texas 77042 713-783-7788 office f) Electrical Engineer: Tim Gobrogge, P.E. (Subconsultant) Hatch, Inc. Town & Country Blvd., Suite 650 Houston, Texas 77024 713-467-9961 office 3) Project Overview a) Overview of Work i) This project includes work at the City's FM521 Water Plant which is located in the northwest part of the City. The Plant is located just south of the intersection of Shadowcreek Parkway and FM 521. This project includes the demolition of the following items: • One 300 kW diesel generator, with belly tank and enclosure, including relocation to City Public Works Facility (3501 E. Orange Street). • Two 1,000 gpm vertical turbine booster pumps, including 75HP motors (VFDs)and a small portion of the associated discharge piping and appurtenances. • One 150HP motor(not VFD rated) • Motor Control Center(serving two 75 HP VFDs and three 150 HP constant speeds) with Automatic Transfer Switch Design 1 of 4 D36 Revised 2016 • HVAC This project includes construction of the following Water Plant improvements: • One 800 kW diesel generator, with belly tank and enclosure • Two 2,000 gpm vertical turbine booster pumps, including 150 HP motors (VFDs) • One 150HP motor(VFD rated) • Motor Control Center(to serve five 150 HP VFDs) and Automatic Transfer Switch • Larger HVAC and associated duct adjustments The project also includes the following fiber optic improvements: • Approximately 2000 LF of 4-inch HDPE conduit with four 1" inner ducts, installed by trenchless methods, including ground boxes and a cased crossing of TxDOT ROW (Shadowcreek Pkwy). One fiber optic cable will be installed, includes routing inside the MCC Building and terminations at both ends (existing box and MCC Bldg). A third ground storage tank was recently constructed at the site and a mixer was added in each of the three ground storage tanks. The electrical, instrumentation, controls, and programming associated with bringing these items into service are included in this project. All Controller Programming and SCADA Commissioning shall be provided by Hatch under the programming allowance included in the bid form. No modifications to the disinfection system are included in this contract. • ii) The pump station is a critical component of the City's water distribution system and must stay in active service throughout the entire construction duration. As a result, no more than one pumping unit(or the associated piping, motor, starter, and other components) may be taken out of service at a time unless approved otherwise by the Owner. Contractor is responsible for providing temporary power plan as needed to facilitate construction. b) Preliminary Cost Estimates i) Approximately $1,800,000 c) Construction concerns i) Work by Others: DN Tanks is the other Contractor that is nearing completion of the third ground storage tank. ii) Work Sequence/Phasing: The project schedule has two phases. • Phase A - Contractor shall provide all electrical, instrumentation, controls, and programming to bring the third ground storage tank and all three tank mixers online and fully operational. All Phase A work must be completed within 90 calendar days from notice to proceed, unless approved otherwise. The Owner reserves the right to enforce liquidated damages as described in Section 00500 if good faith efforts are not made to complete the Phase A work within this time. • Phase B: Contractor shall complete all other remaining work in this Contract • iii) Pump Suction Barrels (Cans): The intent is to reuse the existing suction barrels if they were constructed to the same dimensions as the 150HP pumps. The Contractor is to provide field Design 2 of D36 Revised 2016 measurement of the suction barrels for Pumps 1 and 2. If they are found to be different from the known suction barrel dimensions installed at Pumps 3,4, and 5, and/or deemed to be unsuitable for the proposed pumps,a supplemental item is included for replacement of the suction barrels, including any related work. iv) Hydropneumatic Tank: The existing 15,000 gallon hydropneumatic tank shown on the plans is planned to have been removed from the site before construction begins. This is being removed by the existing Contractor on site. v) Field Verification: Contractor to field verify existing yard piping,valves, and appurtenances and notify City of Pearland and Engineer of any discrepancies from the information shown on the plans. Existing yard piping has not been field verified. vi) Phasing/Coordination with City: Contractor will be required to coordinate phasing and provide advance notice to City for requested operational changes such as shutdowns. vii)Fiber Optic Work Restoration: Need to restore site with sod upon completion of that portion of work. Bid items are included. viii) Permits: Contractor is required to obtain all permits. 4) Bidding Process a) Advertised: October 9, 2019& October 16,2019 in Pearland Journal. b) Mandatory Pre-bid Conference: Thursday, October 17, 2019 at City of Pearland City Hall c) Construction Plans& Specs available for download at City's EBID system. All bids should be submitted through the E-Bid system located on the City's website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are advised to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-Bid System at the above website by clicking on "Supplier Registration" and completing a short registration questionnaire. Electronic Bid Documents, including Plans, Technical Specifications and Bid Forms are available for download after registration is approved by City Purchasing office. No plan fees or deposits are required for bid `4101) documents obtained through the City's E-bid System. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebidsa,pearlandtx.gov. d) Sealed bids due: Thursday, October 31,2019,by 2:00 pm (via EBID system). Bids will be opened and read aloud after the 2:00 pm deadline. Location: City Hall Council Chamber. e) Bidder Qualifications—may be asked to submit f) Bid Security—Five percent(5%) bid security must accompany each bid proposal in the form of certified check,cashier's check or Bid Bond 5) Contract a) Award i) Notice of Award—Successful Bidder shall return Standard Form of Agreement and Payment Bond Forms within 10 days. ii) Notice to Proceed—Contractor shall commence work within ten (10)days after receipt of Notice to Proceed b) Project Duration i) Substantial Completion: 300 days ii) Complete/Final Payment: 330 days iii) Liquidated Damages: $500 per day 6) Closing comments Anything that has been said during the Pre-bid Conference is for the purpose of assisting in the clarification of the details of this project. This discussion is intended to be helpful to the potential bidders, but in no way is it meant to change anything contained in the Bid Documents. Additional `41) Design 3 of 4 D36 Revised 2016 questions regarding to project plans or bid documents must be submitted in writing to the Design Engineer. Bidders must rely on Addenda for official answers to issues that are either not covered or are ambiguous in the Bid Documents. All Pre-Bid participants will be notified of future Addenda, if required. Interested bidders are responsible for obtaining Addenda from the Design Consultant. The City expects the highest standards of customer service and customer satisfaction. Field personnel must extend courtesy, cooperation, and rapid response to customer concerns. Communicate any customer request, complaints, and/or concerns to the Project Manager, Construction Manager, or the Construction Inspector as soon as possible. 7) Questions 41110 Design 4 of 4 D36 Revised 2016 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS CITY OF PEARLAND 4111, FORT BEND COUNTY, TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE DIVISION 0—BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00100 Invitation to Bid 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Proposal 00500 Standard Form of Agreement 00610 Performance Bond 00611 Payment Bond 00612 One-Year Maintenance Bond 00615 Partial Waiver of Lien 00700 General Conditions of Agreement 00800 Special Conditions of Agreement 00811 Wage Scale for Engineering Construction 00900 Addendum DIVISION I —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary of Work 01140 Contractor's Use of Premises 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures 01290 Change Order Procedures 01310 Coordination and Meetings 01350 Submittals 01380 Construction Photographs 01420 Referenced Standards 01430 Contractor's Quality Control 01440 Observation Services 01450 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01505 Mobilization 01550 Stabilized Construction Exit 01555 Traffic Control and Regulation 01560 Filter Fabric Fence 01561 Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier 01562 Waste Material Disposal 01563 Tree and Plant Protection 01564 Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 01565 TPDES Requirements 01566 Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation 01570 Trench Safety System 01580 Project Identification Signs E 01600 Material and Equipment �r 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 01720 Field Surveying 00010-1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 01750 Starting Systems 01760 Project Record Documents 01770 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2—SITE WORK 02200 Site Preparation 02220 Site Demolition 02252 Cement Stabilized Sand 02255 Bedding,Backfill,and Embankment Materials 02317 Excavation and Backfill for Structures 02318 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 02330 Embankment 02370 Geotextile 02417 Augering Pipe or Casing for Water Line 02510 Water Mains 02512 Polyethylene Wrap 02513 Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines 02541 Water and Wastewater Line Valves 02634 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 02635 Steel Pipe and Fittings 02636 Polyurethane Coating on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe 02710 Base Course for Pavement 02741 Asphaltic Concrete 02742 Prime Coat 02743 Tack Coat 02910 Topsoil 02921 Hydromulch Seeding 02922 Sodding 02931 Landscape and Tree Planting DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 03300 Cast In Place Concrete 03310 Structural Concrete DIVISION 9 - COATINGS 09901 Protective Coatings DIVISION II - EQUIPMENT 11211 Vertical Turbine Can-Type Booster Pumps DIVISION 15—ELECTRICAL 15012 Mechanical Work 00010-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS (1111, DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 16012 Electrical Work 16013 Electrical Submittals 16014 Electrical O&M 16060 Electrical Demolition 16111 Conduit, Fittings and Bodies 16119 Underground Ducts and Manholes 16120 600 Volt Building Wire and Cable 16125 Variable Frequency Drive Cable 16126 Instrumentation Cable 16131 Device, Pull, and Junction Boxes 16135 Cabinets, Boxes and Fittings 16150 Electric Motors 16175 Variable Frequency Drive 16195 Electrical Identification 16402 Underground Ductbanks 16452 Grounding 16475 Overcurrent Protective Devices 16481 Motor Controllers 16482 Motor Control Centers(600 Volts or Less) 16650 Diesel Engine Generator& Controls 16655 Diesel Fuel Generator Base Tanks 16740 Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable System 16936 Pilot and Miscellaneous Control Devices 16941 Valve Controller 16947 Electrical Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study 16949 Cellular Router 16995 Electrical Systems Commissioning APPENDIX A—STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN END OF SECTION 00010-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade(New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids(a/pearlandtx.gov. All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids, shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic bids will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, October 31, 2019. All Bids shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened"and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion -Phase 2 -WA1701 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1701 BID NO.: 1020-03 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the City of Pearland City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland, Texas 77581 at 10:00 a.m.on Thursday October 171, 2019. The project will entail the removal and replacement of a motor control center,two booster pumps and two variable frequency drives; installation of a generator with diesel tank,quiet enclosure,fuel cleaner and concrete pad; analyze electrical loads; modification to civil, mechanical, electrical. 08-2018 00100- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID 411/ instrumentation, HVAC,and controls; installation of fiber optic extension from FM 2234 to water plant electrical building; SW PPP measures; site grading; and site restoration. Upon award of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to,all transmittals and material submittals,RFI's,RFC's,Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, intemet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project. For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200. Electronic Bid Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents may also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (281) 376-4577 4001 Sherwood Houston, TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (713) 334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston,TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832) 613-0201 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston,TX 77092 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System. BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A BID EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications bid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein,all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. 08-2018 00100-2 of CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID 4111/ The successful Bidder must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent(100%) of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally,the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity: All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor, sub-recipient, or sub-contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this agreement, which may result in the termination of this agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- cir Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal: The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of Lowest Responsible Bidder. In identifying this criteria the City will consider: I) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested, including but not limited to: Base Bid, Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to be in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been "opened"may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the bid price. Young Lorfing, TRMC City Secretary, City of Pearland 4111, First Publication date October 9. 2019 Second Publication date October 16, 2019 08-2018 00100-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section 00200 41W INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (LRB) 1. Defined Terms 1.1 The term "Owner" hereinafter is defined as the City of Pearland and is used interchangeably with the term "the City". Both terms are synonymous and refer to the City of Pearland and may be used inter-changeably. 1.2 The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid Proposal directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The term "Successful Bidder" means the Lowest Responsible Bidder to whom the Owner (on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bid Documents" includes the Invitation to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders,the Bid Proposal, and the proposed Contract Documents(plans and specifications including all Addenda issued prior to bid opening). 1.3 The term "E-bid System" refers to the City's electronic bidding system. This is a web- based system (Ion Wave) that provides all Bid Documents electronically to interested parties (potential Bidders and forms the pathway for Bidders to submit bids in response to The Invitation to Bid. The term "e-bid" and/ or "electronic bid" means the Bidders' electronic response submitted on the electronic Bid Proposal with all required attachments to the Owner by way of the E-bid System. The terms "electronic bid" or "e-bid" are used inter-changeably to describe the above bid submittal process to submit a bid to the City in response to an Invitation to Bidders. L 1.4 The term "Pro-Trak" means the City's web-based contract administration and fir+ construction records management software used by the contracting parties to administer the project. This system serves as the web accessed centralized project information hub for communications and document management, pay application processing and record retention for all project documentation. Operational instructions for accessing this system will be issued to the successful Bidder at the pre-Construction Meeting. 1.5 All other definitions set out in the Contract Documents are applicable to terms used in the Bidding Documents. 1.6 Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean consecutive calendar day(s). 1.7 The term "Alternate(s)"or"Add Alternate(s)"as used here inter-changeably are defined as an additive work item that may be selected or rejected by the Owner based on the Owner's sole acceptance or rejection of the price proposed for this item. Alternate bid prices shall include all labor,material,equipment and overhead costs to perform the work as specified, complete in place. When selected by the Owner, the costs for an Alternate work item shall be added to the Base Bid price and made a part of the Contract price. 2. Registration for E-bid System 2.1 The Owner's E-bid System is accessible via the City's web site at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Loein.aspx. Bid documents can be viewed by simply selecting a specific project from the BID OPPORTUNITIES list and clicking on that project AFTER registration as a Supplier. Interested Bidders MUST REGISTER as a "Supplier" by clicking on 08-2018 00200- I of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS fire the Supplier Registration button and completing the registration form. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade(New Construction) Select the appropriate Time Zone for the Bidder's location and whether that location observes Daylight Savings time. Complete the registration information providing all required contact information and establish password security for the E-bid System. Once complete,"suppliers" will receive emails notifying of future bid opportunities. Downloading any proiect bid data will automatically place the bidder's contact information on the list of plan holders and the E-bid System will automatically send any and all updates,addenda,changes or additional information associated with that project. 2.2 The electronic Bid Proposal can only be submitted through this system. The form can be printed for Bidder's use, but the Bid Proposal MUST be submitted on the electronic form within the E-bid System. 2.3 Questions regarding use of the E-bid System may be directed by email to: ebids(alpearlandtx.gov. 3. Copies of Bidding Documents 3.1 Complete sets of "electronic" Bidding Documents are available for download to registered Bidders at No Cost from the City's E-bid System at: httos://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Interested Bidders must register as a"Supplier"on this site in order to receive the Bid Documents, and all Addenda or other notifications of changes, including communications from the Owner or Engineer. All Bid Documents are available to download and print. 3.2 The Bidder accepts sole responsibility for ensuring that he obtains a full set of these documents by completing the registration and executing a full and complete download of the project documents. Downloading of Bid Documents automatically ensures receipt of any and all subsequent communications,addenda or additional information from the City or its Engineer. 3.3 Copies of Bidding Documents are available or may be viewed at any of the Plan Houses listed in the Invitation to Bidders. It is recommended that all interested Bidders,whether bidding directly to the Owner or Sub-bidders/Vendors providing pricing to a Bidder, register as a Supplier and download all of the project Bid Documents. 3.4 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bid Proposals; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents including,but not limited to all Addenda issued prior to bid. 3.5 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bid Proposals on the Work, and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 08-2018 00200-2 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4. Qualifications of Bidders 4.1 In determining to whom to award a contract, the City of Pearland may consider, in addition to the other selection criteria identified in section 16 of these Instructions to Bidders, the following Qualifications of Bidder, and each Bidder must be prepared to submit within two (2)days of Owner's request any or all of such Qualifications requested. Failure to provide this information within the specified time frame may be cause for rejection of the Bid. I) A brief narrative of previous experience of the Bidder with projects of a similar nature and scope; specifically including a list of 5 representative projects completed by the Bidder of a similar nature and scope to the work covered by this proposed Contract. The references for the projects provided must include the cost of the project,Owner's name,Engineer or prime contact and telephone number; 2) A list, including owner name and project location, of on-going projects and contracts for construction of projects of the Bidder which are not yet substantially complete including total contract value and current percent complete by payment; 3) A list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers for the project being bid and the total value of work awarded to subcontractors as shown on the Subcontractors List Bid Form; 4) A list of names, address and telephone number of references for other projects completed by Bidder; and 5)A Financial Statement of Bidder,consisting of the balance sheet and annual income statement of Bidder for the Bidder's last fiscal year end preceding the submission of the Bid Proposal, which has been audited or examined by an independent certified public accountant. The Financial Statement of Bidder shall be used to determine a Bidder's net working capital, which is defined as current assets less current liabilities. A Bidder's net working capital shall be considered evidence of the Bidder's ability to provide sufficient financial management of the project being bid. The Bidder's Financial Statement shall be clearly and conspicuously marked as "confidential", and shall be deemed and treated as confidential and excepted from the Public Information disclosure requirements of Texas Government Code Section 552.001 et seq., as such information, if released, would give advantage to a competitor or bidder, and/or would cause substantial competitive harm to Bidder. 5. Examination of Contract Documents and Site 5.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid Proposal, to (a) examine the Bidding Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress,performance or furnishing of the Work,(c) consider federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work,(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, omissions or discrepancies in the Contract Documents,(f)to recognize and plan for use of the City's"Pro-Trak"software to administer the construction process and perform the work of the project. 5.2 Any reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents will be made available to Bidders for review,but such reports are not part of the Contract Documents. Bidder may not and should not ( rely upon the accuracy of the data contained in such reports, interpretations or opinions v contained therein, or the completeness thereof,for the purposes of bidding or construction. 08-2018 00200-3 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 5.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground utilities, equipment or other underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. 5.4 Before submitting a Bid Proposal, each Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations,investigations,explorations,tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid Proposal prices for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the Contract Time, Contract Price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 5.5 On request in advance,Owner will provide each prospective Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each prospective Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid Proposal. Prospective Bidders shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. 5.6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands, access thereto or contractual arrangements for use by the Contractor required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 5.7 The submission of a Bid Proposal will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4,that without exception the Bid Proposal is premised upon performing and furnishing all of the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in, required by or reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 6. Interpretations and Addenda 6.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered or transmitted by electronic means to all registered Bidders in the City's E-bid System. Questions received less than five (5) days prior to the date for opening of Bid Proposals may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 6.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. Addenda will automatically be made available to all registered Bidders that have downloaded Bid Documents from the City's E-bid System. 08-2018 00200-4 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 7. Bid Security 7.1 Each Bid Proposal must be accompanied by bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid Proposal price, in the form of a certified check, cashier's check or a Bid Bond ("Bid Security"). 7.2 Bidders submitting bids through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of their Bid Security(sealed Bid Bond,Certified Check or Cashier's Check)as an attachment to their electronic bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. 7.3 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such time as Bidder has executed the Standard Form of Agreement,and furnished the required Performance and Payment Bonds, whereupon the Bid Security of both bidders will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish the required performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and shall be entitled to make a claim against the Bid Security. The Bid Security of other Bidders will be retained until the Contract is awarded and the Standard Form of Agreement becomes effective, or all bids are rejected, whereupon Bid Security furnished by all such Bidders will be returned. 8. Contract Time 8.1 The number of days in which the Work is to be Substantially Completed, as set forth in the Bid Proposal form and the Standard Form of Agreement, subject to such extension of time as may be due under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents ("Contract Time"). All references to "time" or"days" shall be interpreted as consecutive calendar days. 9. Liquidated Damages and Early Completion Bonus 9.1 Provisions for liquidated damages and early completion bonus, if any,are set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement. 10. Substitute or"Or-Equal" Items 10.1 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of the specified materials and equipment described in the Plans and Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or- equal" items unless otherwise stated. Whenever it is indicated in the Plans or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or"or-equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by the Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Agreement becomes effective. All "or-equal" references shall be interpreted to mean "or Owner approved equal". Any substitution made by the Bidder upon which the bid is based shall be at the Bidder's sole risk. The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engineer is set forth in the Contract Documents. 4111/ 082018 00200-5 of CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 11. Bid Form 11.1 The Bid Proposal form (Section 00300 — Bid Proposal) is included with the Bidding Documents when downloaded. This Document must be printed and signed, as required below, and then uploaded as an Attachment to the Bid. 11.2 All E-bids must be submitted on the City's official E-bid System Bid Proposal document. All blanks on the Bid Proposal form must be completed or filled in. The Bidder shall bid all Alternates, if any. Incomplete Bid Proposals may be cause for rejection. 11.3 Bid Proposals by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president(or other corporate officer accompanied be evidence of authority to sign)and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid. 11.4 Bid Proposals by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title must appear under the signature,and if a corporate general partner, executed as required above for corporations and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid. 11.5 The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda (the number of which must be filled in on the Bid Proposal form). Failure to do so could be cause for rejection of the Bid. 11.6 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid Proposal must be shown on the Bid Proposal form. 411/ 12. Submission of Bid Proposals 12.1 The place, date and/or time designated for opening Bid Proposals may be changed in accordance with applicable laws, codes and ordinances. Any such changes to the Bid Schedule shall be made by Addenda. 12.2 Electronic Bids shall be submitted per the requirements, instructions, terms and conditions as stated in the registration and submittal instructions of the City's E-bid System electronic bidding software. All Bidders utilizing this system MUST register as a potential supplier, (Bidder). E-Bids are submitted directly via the City's Web based system located at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. 12.3 Bid Proposals submitted after the bid date and time will be rejected. 13. Modification and Withdrawal of Bid Proposals 13.1 Prior to submission, E-bid Bid Proposals may be modified or withdrawn without prejudice. 13.2 Once submitted, Bid Proposals may only be modified by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid Proposal must be executed) and delivered to Office of City Purchasing, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 and submitted any time prior to the opening of Bid Proposals. 08-2018 00200-6 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 41, 13.3 A Bidder may not modify or withdraw its Bid Proposal by facsimile or verbal means. A withdrawn Bid Proposal may be resubmitted prior to the designated time for opening Bid Proposals. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety(90)days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. 13.4 If,within twenty-four(24)hours after Bid Proposals are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material mistake in the preparation of its Bid Proposal, that Bidder may request to withdraw its Bid Proposal and the bid security may be returned or, at the discretion of the Owner, Owner may make a claim against the bid security. Thereafter,that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Project to be provided under the Contract Documents. 13.5 Bid securities for unsuccessful Bidders will be returned to bidders once a successful Bidder has be identified and notified of the Owner's intent to award a contract. 14. Opening of Bid Proposals 14.1 Bid Proposals will be opened and(unless obviously non-responsive)read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bid Proposals and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bid Proposals through E-Bid. Bid Proposals, in their entirety, shall be open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, with the exception of any trade secrets or confidential information contained therein, provided Bidder has expressly identified any specific information contained therein as being trade secrets or confidential information. 15. Bid Proposals to Remain Subject to Acceptance 15.1 All Bid Proposals will remain subject to acceptance for ninety (90)days after the day of the Bid Proposal opening,but Owner may, in its sole discretion,release any Bid Proposal and return the bid security prior to that date. 16. Award of Contract 16.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bid Proposals, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder. Owner may reject a bid as non-responsive if: I) Bidder fails to provide required Bid Security; 2) Bidder improperly or illegibly completes or fails to complete all information required by the Bidding Documents; 3) Bidder fails to sign the Bid Proposal or improperly signs the Bid Proposal; 4) Bidder qualifies its Bid Proposal; 5) Bidder tardily or otherwise improperly submits its Bid Proposal; 6) Bidder fails to submit the Qualifications of Bidder as required under section 4 of these Instructions to Bidders; or 7) Bid Proposal is otherwise non-responsive. Contracts are awarded on the basis of the Lowest Responsible Bidder. 16.2 The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of bidder, if requested to do so. As required by the Instructions to Bidders and as a condition of Bid acceptability, the Contractor hereby agrees: 08-2018 00200-7 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. That the City, as Owner and Contract Administrator, retains the right to review and approve the Contractor's and all Subcontractors' qualifications to perform the Work of the Contract and to reject any Subcontractor not meeting the City's standards, as outlined in the General Conditions, or TxDOT's and FHWA qualifications for performing the Work. 16.3 Lowest Responsible Bidder. In determining Lowest Responsible Bidder, Owner will consider: Lowest Total Bid price for all work including Base Bid, Extra Work, Add Alternates and Cash Allowances, if any, and any other cost criteria. Additional evaluation criteria may include: the Qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bid Proposals comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Proposal form or prior to the Notice of Award. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 16.4 A contract to be awarded to the Lowest Responsible Bidder may be let on either a lump sum basis or a unit cost basis dependent on the Bid Proposal format. 16.5 Acceptance of any and all bids may be conditioned on compliance with the requirement for attendance of the mandatory pre-bid meeting. 16.6 In either case, Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid Proposal and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, to Owner's satisfaction, within the Contract Time. 16.7 Each Bidder agrees to waive any claim it has or may have against the Owner, the Professional/Engineer, and their respective employees, arising out of or in connection with the administration, evaluation, or recommendation of any bid. 17. Contract Security 17.1 When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Standard Form of Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the Performance, Payment, Maintenance and Surface Correction Bonds required by the Contract Documents. Bonds may be on the forms provided herein or an equal form containing no substantive changes, as determined by Owner. 18. Signing of Agreement 18.1 When Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement, and the required Performance and Payment Bond forms. Within ten (10) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement to Owner with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Contractor. There shall be no contract or agreement between Owner and the Successful Bidder until proper execution and attestation of the Standard Form of 411/ Agreement by authorized representatives of the Owner. 08-2018 00200-8 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 19. Pre-bid Conference 19.1 A pre-bid conference will be held as indicated in the Invitation to Bid. 20. Retainage 20.1 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 08-2018 00200-9 of 9 CITY OFPEARLAND BID PROPOSAL Section 00300 BID PROPOSAL Lowest Responsible Bid Date: 11-5-19 Bid of W.W. Payton Corporation ,—' nett a-p p,'iri,rsrtil-p/a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas/apartnexship=eonsisting of --- ;for the construction of: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion-Phase 2-WA1701 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1701 BID NO.: 1020-03 (Submitted in Electronic format) To: The Honorable Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 Pursuant to the published Invitation to Bidders, and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools and materials, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of the FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 - WA1701 with all related appurtenances, complete, tested, and operational, in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared by Joshua Netardus, P.E. and John Lacy, P.E., Costello, Inc, at 2107 CityWest Blvd, 3i4 Floor, Houston, TX 77042, 713-783-7788, for the unit prices or applicable prices set forth in Exhibit "A", the electronic bid form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall constitute a legal and executable proposal from the Bidder. It is understood that, in the event any changes are ordered on any part of the Work,the applicable unit prices bid shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Work so changed. The Bid Security required under the Instructions to Bidders is included and has been uploaded as an attachment within the E-bid system and, that a fully executed, signed and sealed hard copy has been delivered to the Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland,Texas 77581. The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of Bidder, as required by the Instructions to Bidders if requested to do so as a condition of the Bid process. The Bidder binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price, according to the forms included in the Contract Documents, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated in Exhibit A of this proposal along with all required L insurance in the required amounts. `r Bidder's Initial's. 10-2017 0030 - I ort I , { CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL ihreThe undersigned Bidder agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete within THREE HUNDRED (300) CALENDAR DAYS after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for Substantial Completion shall begin on the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s) specified in Section 00500 - Standard Form of Agreement, in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts bid in this Bid Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety (90) days following date of Bid Proposal opening, or such longer period as may be agreed to in writing by the City of Pearland and Bidder. It is understood that in the event the Successful Bidder fails to enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stated amounts within ten (t0) days of the Notice of Award, the Successful Bidder will forfeit the Bid Security as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein,all references to"day(s)"shall mean calendar day(s). The Bidder acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bidding Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Proposal prices. AddendumNo.: 1 Date: 10-17-19 AddendumNo.: 3 Date: 10-31-19 Addendum No.: 2 Date: 10-29-19 Addendum No.: Date: - Bidder hereby represents that the only person or parties interested in this offer as principals are those named. Bidder has not directly or indirectly entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion,or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Firm Name: W.W. Payton Corporation By: i/ilN °- I /�)) I Title: President - tJesk 1 ii (Gtf1on Address: P.O. BOX 1056, Katy,Texas 77492 Phone No: (281) 371-7068 ATTEST: N p1`\-' 11G`il` h R, A y top fott(Seal, if Bidder is a Corporation) (Typed or Printed ame) -- , r"<../. Signature Date: 11-5-19 END OF SECTION Bidder's Initial's' 10-2017 00300 oft FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 WA1701 Bid Form A. BASE BID ITEMS ITEM SPEC NO ITEM DESCRIPTION CITY UNITS UNIT PRICE TOTAL BID PRICE 1 01505 Mobilization and Demobilization snot to exceed 1 $ 40,000.00 $ 40,000.00 3%of total bid pike) 2 01555 Traffic Control and Regulation 1 1g $ 500.00 ... 500.00 3 01561 Reinforced Filter Fabric 500 LF $ 1.00 $ 500.00 4 02220 Demolition 1 LS $ 15,000.00 $ 15,000.00 02220, Demolition for 300 KW Generator and Diesel 2,000.00 5 16650, Base Tank,Including relocation to Publk Works 1 LS $ 2.000.00 $ 16655 at 3501 E.Orange Street for storage 02541 12,000.00 12,000.00 6 02634 Yard Piping and Valves 1 15 $ $ 02635 s7 09901 Protective Coatings and Shrouding 115 $ 6,000.00 $ 6,000.00 11211' Fairbanks-Morse 2000-gpm Vertical Turbine Can 2 EA $70,000.00 $ 140,000.00 B 16150, Type Booster Pump(without can) 16175 11211, 25,000.00 75,000.00 9 16150, 150 HP Inverter Duty Motor 3 EA $ $ 16175 10 15012 Replace Air Condklaner at MCC Building, 1 6 $ 15,000.00 $ 15,000.00 Including pad and duct modifications 16175, New Motor Control Center,mdudingflYe 150 500,000.00 500,000.00 11 HP VarHble Frequency Drives and temporary 1 is $ $ I6482 power and controls 16496, 800 KW Diesel Generator,including Enclosure, 12 16622, ATS replacement/feeders,3,000 gallon diesel 1 $ 400,000.00 $ 400,000.00 16650, storage base tank,access plattorm,and 16655 replacement concrete foundation Replacement g"CMU"Sound Wail"Per Sheets 13 SHT4 Cl and E21 to match height of Generator 56 LF $300.00 $ 16,800.00 Endow re (a pproximateiy 10 feet tall) thy itPagel • FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 • WA1701 Bid Form ITEM SPEC NO ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNITS UNIT PRICE TOTAL BID PRICE 14 16655 Driveway and Sidewalk Pavement Restoration 1 6 $2,000.00 $ 2,000.00 15 16740 Mull-Duct Conduit(RMC,4"with 44"inner 40 6 $ 50.00 5 2,000.00 ducts) GrL Multi-Duct Conduit(HDPE,4"with4-1"Inner (� /! l.16 16740 ducts)(Trendikss)(Orange),includingIudIngIrrigation 1,960 LF 5��' f�(} 5 ��7/U�Q� Qf system and surface restoration at pits 17 16740 TxDOT Type 2 Ground Box with Apron 5 EA $ 5,000.00 5 25,000.00 18 16740 Fiber Optic Splice Enclosure-Underground, 1 EA 51,000.00 $ 1,000.00 Waterproof 19 16740 Poll-Mod Patch and Splice Module 9 EA $ 250.00 $ 2,250.00 ` 20 16740 Fiber Optic Cable 2,100 EA $ 1.50 $ 3,150.00 (Single-Mode)(96 strand) 21 16740 Fiber Optic CableRoad Marker 6 EA $ 250.00 5 1,$00.00 22 16740 Fiber Optic Patch Panel 1 EA $ 500.00 $ 500.00 (144 Position) Spiking Work at FM 2234 Ground Box(connect Q,000.00 4)000.00 23 16740 Prop 96strand 1 iS $ 5 to Exist 144 strand) Fiber Optic Work at MCC Building,Including 24 16740 splIcing/termination,wall penetration, 1 SS $ 10,000.00 $10,000.00 enclosure,conduit supports,and all other Ober optic work 25 16941 Elecrical&Control System 1 L5 Slid/� a30o o[. $ / %3O al Controller Programming& 26 16941 SCADA Commissioning 1 IS $ 62,5000010 $ 6250000 (by Hatch) L!�4.--)e,....A.BASE BID ITEMS SUBTOTAL $I 1 13q000 000 °o Paget FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 WA1701 41111, Bid Form B.EXTRA BID ITEMS ITEM SPEC NO ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNITS UNIT PRICE TOTAL BID PRICE 27 02252 Extra Cement Stabilized Sand 100 CV $ 40.00 $ 4,000.00 20.00 2,000.00 28 02252 Extra Bank Sand 100 Cy $ $ 25.00 8,750.00 29 02255 Extra Select FIll 350 CT $ $ 30 02318 Extra Machine Excavation 100 CY $ 10.00 $ 1,000.00 31 02318 Extra Hand Excavation 100 CY $ 150.00 $15,000.00 32 02634 Extra Ductile Iran Fittings 5 TON $ 1.000.00 $ 5,000.00 33 02922 Extra Sodding 6500 SV $4'00 $2 (,000.00 34 03300 Extra Class"C"Concrete 50 CV $ 300.00 $ 15,000'00 35 01570 Trench Safety 200 LF $ 1.00 $ 200.00 36 02921 Hydromulcl 1 AC $ 2,000.00 $ 2,000.00 Replacement of Suction Barrel for High Service Pump,Only When Authorized by Owner, 25,000.00 50,000.00 37 11211 Including piping,slab,pump pad,electrical,and 2 EA $ $ related modifications as required,complete in place Page 3 FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion- Phase 2 WA1701 Bid Form �+ 36 02220/1 Extra Remove and Replace TxDOT Type 2 1 EA $97750,00 $cJ -y9o,cL2�l7/�� 6740 Ground Box with Apron O Adder To Install e"Steel Casing at FM 2234 �,e� 39 02417 Conduit Crossing(Trenchless) Does not Include 103 LF $ 100 op $ 1"f� SOL(ct cost for Conduit/Flber Installation) 7 B.EXTRA BID ITEMS SUBTOTAL 5 /EI G 000„eb C.BID ALTERNATE ITEMS ITEM SPEC NO ITEM DESCRIPTION OTy UNITS UNIT PRICE TOTAL BID PRICE 11211, Deduct to Substitute EngineehApproved Equal /-76 vov.d� $ /‘"70°°-", 1471-- Manufacturer Manufacturer VW, ]). 4f� 40 16150, 2000 gpm Vertical Turbine Can Type Booster 1 1 16175 Pump(without can) 411110 BID SUMMARY , Oz A. BASE BID ITEMS SUBTOTAL(ITEMS 1-26) $ i 1 c7 3U,000, 26 B.EXTRA BID ITEMS SUBTOTAL(ITEMS 27-39) $ i 95 000,c'o C.BID ALTERNATE ITEM 40 s e 76:000) .4 ta- TOTAL BASE BID AMOUNT � 075 000 . oc (ITEMS 1-39) L. TOTAL BASE BID WITH ALTERNATE AMOUNT $a 600 c Pc), o 0 (ITEMS 1-39,40) Li Page 4 FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion -Phase 2 WA17O1 Bid Form EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS: Pumps: Fairbanks Mors&Nghuis(Pentair) (Base Bid) /a ('+ Pumps: ?red (Alternate 1) US MOTORS Motors: VIDE SQUARE D SQUARE D MCC: Generator CUMMINS HVAC: AS SPECIFIED SUBCONTRACTORS: Piping Fob: W.W.PAYTON CORPORATION Electrical: W.W.PAYTON CORPORATION AMERICAN TELE COMMUNICATIONS Fiber Opus: Programming: Hatch Integrators/Engineers Page 6 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Section 00500 411/ STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is by and between City of Pearland (hereinafter called OWNER or City) and W.W. Payton Corporation (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents (hereinafter the "Work"). The Work is generally described as follows: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion -Phase 2 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1701 BID NO.: 1020-03 Article 2. ENGINEER The Work has been designed by Joshua Netardus, P.E. and John Lacy, P.E., Costello, Inc., 2107 CityWest Blvd, 3rd Floor, Houston, TX 77042 who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3. CONTRACT TIME 3.1 The Work will be Substantially Complete (as defined in Article I of the General Conditions) within THREE HUNDRED (300) days (including weekends and holidays) from the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions (as revised in the Special Conditions if applicable), and completed and ready for Final Payment within THREE HUNDRED THIRTY (330) days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run. No work will be allowed on Sundays. 3.2 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions. OWNER and CONTRACTOR also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring (11101 any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER five hundred 4-2015 00500- 1 of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT cor dollars ($500.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time set out in the Certificate of Substantial Completion or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER five hundred dollars($500.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in the Certificate of Substantial Completion for completion and readiness for Final Payment. 3.3 Inspection Time. Working hours for the Pearland Inspection personnel are from 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding City approved holidays. The Contractor shall notify the OWNER of any required inspection overtime work at least 48 hours in advance and shall pay the overtime wages for the required City inspections. Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds [$2,075,000.00] (the "Contract Price"). The Contract Price includes the Base Bid as accepted by OWNER as shown in Document 00300—Bid Proposal. Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Section 6.0 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. Application for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1 Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work and actual quantity of Work completed, in accordance with Article 6 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. 5.1.1 Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage or actual quantity of Work complete, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with the General Conditions. The OWNER shall make payment within 30 days of receipt of application for payment by the ENGINEER. 5.1.2 Each progress payment shall be less retainage as specified in Paragraph 6.06 of the General Conditions, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion and some unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may upon 4-2015 00500-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT written recommendation of the ENGINEER pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR at the OWNER's option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work and, thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the conditions stated under"Final Payment." 5.2 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 6.09 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 6.09. Article 6. INTEREST Interest on any overdue payment from OWNER to CONTRACTOR shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251.025 of the Texas Government Code, as amended. Article 7. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work. 7.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all available surveys, assessments, reports of explorations, investigations, and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions of the site. Such technical reports and drawings are not Contract Documents, and Owner makes no representations or warranties as to the accuracy of such documents or information, or to whether or not they are complete, comprehensive, or all-inclusive. 7.3 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraphs 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, and CONTRACTOR assumes the risk of such subsurface and physical conditions, and shall furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests,reports, and studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract documents with respect to existing underground facilities 4-2015 00500-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 411110 at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and finish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.5 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor knew or should have known, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including any written resolution of any such conflict, error or discrepancy by ENGINEER. In the event of a conflict that was not brought to the OWNER'S or ENGINEER's attention prior to the bid, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have bid the most expensive alternative. Article 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents, which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work, consist of the following, each of which are incorporated herein by reference: 8.1 Standard Form of Agreement(Section 00500). 8.2 Performance, Payment, and/or Maintenance Bonds (Sections 00610, 00611, and 00612). 8.3 General Conditions of Agreement (Section 00700), including Attachment No. I Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor. 8.4 Special Conditions of Agreement(Section 00800). 8.5 Plans, consisting of sheets numbered 1 through 41 inclusive with attachments with each sheet bearing the following general title: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 8.6 Instructions to Bidders and CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal, including any Addenda referenced therein. 8.7 Technical Specifications for the Work. 4-2015 00500-4 of CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT sar 8.8 The following, which may be delivered or issued after this Agreement becomes effective: Any Change Orders or other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents in accordance with the General Conditions. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in the General Conditions. Article 9. MISCELLANEOUS 9.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Section I, "Definitions and Interpretations" of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 9.3 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representative to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4 CONTRACTOR agrees to warranty the Work for a period of one (1) year from Substantial Completion against defects in materials and workmanship. CONTRACTOR agrees to repair or replace any defective work within this warranty period immediately unless such repairs require long lead time materials and equipment in which case CONTRACTOR shall provide an agreeable schedule for repairs at no additional cost to OWNER. 9.5 The Work will be completed according to the Contract Documents and in accordance with codes, ordinances, and construction standards of the City of Pearland, and all applicable laws, codes and regulations of governmental authorities. 9.6 In the event any notice period required under the Contract Documents is found to be shorter than any minimum period prescribed by applicable law,the notice period required shall be construed to be the minimum period prescribed by applicable law. 9.7 This Contract and the Contract Documents, insofar as they relate in any part or in any way to the Work undertaken therein, constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto, and it is expressly understood and agreed that there are no agreements or promises by and between said parties, except as aforesaid, and that any additions thereto or changes shall be in writing. 4-2015 00500-5 of CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 4.1100 9.8 The provisions of this Contract shall be applied and interpreted in a manner consistent with each other so as to carry out the purposes and the intent of the parties, but if for any reason any provision is unenforceable or invalid, such provisions shall be deemed severed from this Contract and the remaining provisions shall be carried out with the same force and effect as if the severed provision had not been part of this Contract. 9.9 The headings of the paragraphs are included solely for the convenience of reference and if there is any conflict between the headings and the text of this Contract, the Contract text shall control. 9.10 The waiver of any breach hereof shall not constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other provision hereof. Failure by the OWNER in any instance to insist upon observance or performance by CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed a waiver by CONTRACTOR of any such observance or performance. No waiver will be binding upon OWNER unless in writing and then will be for the particular instance only. Payment of any sum by OWNER to CONTRACTOR with knowledge of any breach or default will not be deemed a waiver of such breach or default or any other breach or default. 9.11 The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the OWNER (through its employee handbook)considers the following to be misconduct that is grounds for termination 4111,1 of an employee of the OWNER: Any fraud, forgery, misappropriation of funds, receiving payment for services not performed or for hours not worked, mishandling or untruthful reporting of money transactions, destruction of assets, embezzlement, accepting materials of value from vendors,or consultants, and/or collecting reimbursement of expenses made for the benefit of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR agrees that it will not, directly or indirectly; cause an employee of the OWNER to engage in such misconduct. 9.12 The CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with Appendix A (attached)of the City of Pearland's Title VI Nondiscrimination Plan Assurances. 411501 4-2015 00500-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in Le duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and one to CONTRACTOR. This Agreement will be effective upon execution and attestation by authorized representatives of the City of Pearland and upon the following date: December 16, 2019. OWNERI CONTRACTOR: CITY O < AN b W.W. Payton Corporation {��. wBy: By: II Wesley W. P n Title: L ...< f - Title: President Date: 12.-* (' Date: December 16, 2019 (Corporate Seal) 1 ATTEST ATTEST y Marilyn R. Payton cretary Address for giving notices W.W. Payton Corporation P.O. Box 1056 Katy, Texas 77492-1056 Phone: (281) 371-7068 Fax: (281) 371-7069 Agent for service of process: Wesle ton - President Vna AN. \, END OF SECTION lir 4-2015 00500-7 of 7 Title VI Nondiscrimination Assurances APPENDIX A During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the"contractor') agrees as follows: (1) Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in Federally-Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter, 'DOT') Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. (2) Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. (3) Solicitations for Subcontracts, including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: t In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the �y contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurements of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractors obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, color, or national origin. (4) Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Sub-Recipient, or the Federal Highway Administration as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. (5) Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractors noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract,the Sub-Recipient shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Highway Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: (a) withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and/or (b) cancellation, termination or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. 411110 (6) Incorporation of Provisions:The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every subcontract,including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance. Provided, however, that, in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Sub-Recipient to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Sub-Recipient, and, in addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. CITY OF PEARL AND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT (110 APPENDIX B House Bill 89 Verification I, Wesley W. Payton (Person name), the undersigned representative (hereafter referred to as "Representative") of W.W. Payton Corporation (company or business name, hereafter referred to as "Business Entity"), being an adult over the age of eighteen (1 t3)years of age, after being duly sworn by the undersigned notary, do hereby depose and affirm the following: 1. That Representative is authorized to execute this verification on behalf of Business Entity; 2. That Business Entity does not boycott Israel and will not boycott Israel during the term of any contract that will be entered into between Business Entity and the City of Pearland; and 3. That Representative understands that the term "boycott Israel" is defined by Texas Government Code Section 2270.001 to mean refusing to deal with, terminating business activities with, or otherwise taking any action that is intended to penalize, inflict economic harm on, or limit commercial relations specifically with Israel, or with a person or entity doing business in Israel or in an Israeli-controlled territory, but does not include an action made for ordinary business purposes. pig SIGNATURE OF RE ENTATIVE Wesley W. Payton Pre dent SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this 9th day of December , 20 1/99.. ESC& NOI2ry • blic ' .'•• My Notary IDR 1246246 39187 ti. *j Eric A. Sliva '+ty.R;,it$ Expires AU ,st 4,2023 CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 1 oft Complete Nos.1-4 and 6 if there are interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY Complete Nos.1,2,3,5,and 6 if there are no interested parties. CERTIFICATION OF FILING I Name of business entity filing form,and the city,state and country of the business entity's place Certificate Number: of business. 2019-558317 W.W.Payton Corporation Katy,TX United States Date Filed: 2 Name of governmental entity or state agency that is a parry to the contract for which the form is 11/05/2019 being filed. City of Pearland Date Acknowledged: 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract,and provide a description of the services,goods,or other property to be provided under the contract. WA1701 FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion Phase 2 Nature of interest 4 Name of Interested Party City,State,Country(place of business) (check applicable) Controlling I Intermediary Payton,Wesley and Marilyn Katy,TX United States X 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. ❑ 6 UNSWORN DECLARATION Myname is Wesley W.Payton , and my date of birth is My address is P.O.BOX 1056 Katy TX 77492 Harris (street) (city) (state) (zip code) (county) I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed in Waller County, State of Texas ,on the 5th day ofNovember 20 19 (month) (year) a 41, L J` Signature of authorized agent• •rh.cting business entity (Declarant) Forms provided by Texas Ethics Commission Www.ethics.state.tx.us Version V1.1.3a6aaf7d Bond No.46BCSIE3569 CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND `. Section 006IU PERFORMANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF FORT BEND § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That W.W.Payton Corporation of the City of Katy ,County of Harris and State of Texas,as principal,and Hartford Fire Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$ """ for the payment whereof,the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents: *** Two Million Seventy Five Thousand Dollars and No/100's ($2,075,000.00) WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner,effective as of the Skil day of .W-cn.L0 , 20/9, (the"Contract")to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion -Phase 2 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1701 BID NO.: 1020-03 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, TILE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract Work and shall in all respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions, and agreements in and by said Contract agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed,and according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and Contract Documents,then this obligation shall be void;otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond,and it does hereby waive notice of any such change,extension of time,alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 1212007 00610- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND (111W. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this /L a day of neee...be.- 20a. Principal: Surety: W.W. PaytonC o tion H. tfoy ire I sura e om.an By: 410 ruinn _ Title: Wesley W.Payton,Presi t Title: Sharon Cavanauu ,Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address: P.O. Box 1056 3000 Internet Blvd,#600 Katy,Texas 77492 Frisco,Texas 75034 Telephone: 281-371-7068 Telephone: 800-872-8212 Fax: 281-371-7069 Fax: NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM TILE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 122007 00610-2of2 Bond No. 46BCSIE3569 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND Section 00611 PAYMENT BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF FORT BEND § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That W.W. Payton Corporation of the City of Katy ,County of Harris _ ,and State of Texas,as principal,and Hartford Fire Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$ "' for the payment whereof,the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally,by these presents: ""Two Million Seventy Five Thousand Dollars and No/100's ($2,075,000.00) WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the /48 day of , 206, (the"Contract")to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: I FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion -Phase 2 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1701 BID NO.: 1020-03 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor or material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in said Contract,then,this obligation shall be void;otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER,that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond,and it does hereby waive notice of any such change,extension of time,alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract,or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 4100 07/2006 00611 -1 oft • CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this/66 day of Qnrtan Ler ,20(x. Principal: Surety: W W Payton Corpo tion Hy(L d Fir- Insura 2-4 Comvany By: � . 1� 411W Title: ' Title: Wesley W.Payton,Pr ident Title: Sharon Cavanaugh,Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address: P.Q.Box 1056 3000 Internet Blvd. Katy,Texas 77492 Frisco,Texas 75034 II Telephone: 281-371-7068 Telephone: 800-872-8212 Fax: 281-370-7069 Fax: NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION • 1 L 07/2006 00611 -2 oft Bond No.46BCSIE3569 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND Section 00612 ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF FORT BEND § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That W.W.Payton Corporation of the City of Katy County of Harris ,and State of Texas,as principal,and Hartford Fire Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$ 44* for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents: »»» Two Million Seventy Five Thousand Dollars and No/100's ($2,075,000.00) WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner,effective as of the lL S day of Di.e...L. ,20/i, (the"Contract")to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion-Phase 2 4111, City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1701 BID NO.: 1020-03 which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully correct all such work not in accordance with the Contract Documents discovered within the one-year period from the date of substantial completion,then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER,that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein, Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond,and it does hereby waive notice of any such change,extension of time,alteration or addition to the terms of the contract,or to the work to be performed thereunder. tl 07/2006 00612- I of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this Jd ee day of ,20g. Principal: Surety: W.W.Payton Cor.oration Har or. ire I,sura Sj- Com.an By: L, w : tiI /u Title: Wesley W.Payton, sident Title: Sharon Cavanaugh,Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address: P.O.Box 1056 3000 Internet Blvd.,#600 Katy,Texas 77492 Frisco,Texas 75034 Telephone: 281-371-7068 Telephone: 800-872-8212 Fax: 281-371-7069 Fax: NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 41111/ 07/2006 00612-2o12 Direct Inquiries/Claims to: THE HARTFORD POWER OF ATTORNEY OnetxkW0mt6155 Bond.Clalmsfalh'hartford.com cell 885-266-3154 area 860.7513835 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: Agency Name: MARSH 4 MCLENNAN AGENCY LLC Agency Code: 46-505907 1-1 Hartford Fire Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut X Hartford Casualty Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana F-7 Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Twin City Fire Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the Slate of Indiana [ Hartford Insurance Company of Illinois.a corporation duly organized under the laws of the Slate of Illinois FT Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest,a corporation duly organized wider the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford Insurance Company of the Southeast,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the Slate of Florida having their home office in Hartford,Connecticut,(hereinafter collectively referred to as the'Companies")do hereby make,constitute and appoint, up to the amount of Unlimited : Roxanne G. Brune, Sharen Groppell, Francine Hay, Beverly A. Ireland, Edward L. Moore, Kurt A. Risk, James W. Tomforde, Gloria Villa of Houston TX, C.W. Adams, Sharon Cavanaugh of HOUSTON, Texas their true and lawful AHorney(s)-In-Fact,each In their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign Its name as surely(Ies)only as delineated above by ®, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof,on behalf of the Companies In their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof,and as authorized by a Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies on May 6,2015 the Companies have caused these presents to be signed by its Senior Vice President and its corporate seals to be hereto affixed, duly attested by Its Assistant Secretary. Further,pursuant to Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies,the Companies hereby unambiguously affirm that they are and will be bound by any mechanically applied signatures applied to this Power of Attorney. nuy ,F I1 ' '�M 4�::t �fgm,m i Baas 7• .�1 a"' ,k f ` n ` � /1 i �, w1 ra1 of save son • to John Gray.Assistant Secretary M.Ross Fisher.Senior Vice President STATE OF CONNECTICUT ss. Hartford COUNTY OF HARTFORD On this 5th day of January,2016,before me personally came M.Ross Fisher,to me known,who being by me duly sworn,did depose and say: that he resides In the County of Hartford, State of Connecticut; that ha is the Senior Vice President of the Companies, the corporations described in and which executed the above Instrument; that he knows the seals of the said corporations; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by authority of the Boards of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto by like authority. ) 44. •• Punic KethleenT.Maynard •_ Ndvy Publk CERTPCATE My Coeuokrion Expires July 31.2621 I,the undersigned,Assistant Vice President of the Companies,DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the above and foregoing Is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which is still In full force effective as of Signed and sealed at the City of Hartford. 11% 6 a Is 8C:11.1 ..en.. ?', is ?*zin 'l loft fa Wlr:,n. . Ke n Heekmae,Assistant Mee President IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: 4. You may contact your Agent. You may call The Hartford's Consumer Affairs toll-free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-800-451-6944 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights, or complaints at: 1-800.252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512) 490-1007 Web: www.tdi.texas.qov E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim, you should contact the (agent) (company) (agent or the company) first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: ‘w This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. ./TX4275-1 t 4111, THE HARTFORD Claims Inquiries Notice Hartford Fire Insurance Company Twin City Insurance Company Hartford Casualty Insurance Company Hartford Insurance Company of Illinois Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company Hartford Insurance Company of the Southwest Please address inquiries regarding Claims for all surety and fidelity products issued by The Hartford' s underwriting companies to the following: Phone Number: 888-266-3488 Fax— Claims 860-757-5835 or 860-221-3965 E-mail bond.claims@thehartford.com Mailing Address : The Hartford BOND, T-12 One Hartford Plaza Hartford, CT 06155 Claims Inquiries Notice 2003 4coes CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATEIMMIDD"""I `-----• 12/2/2019 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. MPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). CONT PRODUCER NAME:CT Yvette Cash Marsh&McLennan Agency LLC PHONE - FAX -- 2500City West Blvd, Ste 2400 mjc,E-MAIL.E-m;_]13-]Ba6154 /Arc,NOP Houston TX 77042 ADDRESS: yyette.cash@marshmma.com _ INSURER(SI AFFORDING COVERAGE NAICN _ INSURER A:BITCO General Insurance Corporation 20095 INSURED WAPAY.2 INSURER B:Travelers Lloyds Insurance Company 41262 W W Payton Corporation INSURER C: PO Box 1056 - -- -- ------- Katy TX 77492-1056 INSURER o: — — INSURERE: INSURERF: I COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:185186547 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. /NSLTR I TYPE OF INSURANCE INSDISWID-i POLICY NUMBER I(MMIDDNYYYYI IMMIDDUBR POLICY EFF 1VIYYYV1EPP i LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y V CLP3684671 8/112019 8/1/2020 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED I CLAIMS-MADE XI OCCUR 1 PREMISES 1Ee occurrence/ 5300,000 I X Do MED EXP{Any one person) 55000 I PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY i S1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 'POLICY X PEQ nLOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OR AGG 52.000,000 _ _ OTHER $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITYV I CAP3684673 8/1/2019 8/1/2020 'COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT 51000,000 A Y X ANY AUTO I(Ea acciden0 BODILY INJURY(Per person) S �OWNED X SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) 5 'AUTOS ONLY AUTOS yPROPERTY DAMAGE 5 HIRED NON.OWNED AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) _ _ S A X UMBRELLA LIAB 1, X OCCUR 1Y V i CUP2815542 8/1/2019 8/1/2020 I EACH OCCURRENCE S 10.000,000 IEX 55 IARI CLAIM&M_AD_R1 "AGGREGATE •$10,000_,000 ;DED ' X 1 RETENTIONS Ana 1 I is A WORKERS COMPENSATION 11 Y WC3684815 8/1/2019 0/1/2020 X I STATUTE I ERH AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY IANVPROPNETONPARTNER/EXECUTIVE YNx 11•NIA EL EACH ACCIDENT 151,000,000 OFFOEP/MEMBEREXOLUDED? '(Mandatory In NH) E L DISEASE.EA EMPLOYEE,51,000,000_ !if yes.descobe undar i DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below EL DISEASE POLICY LIMIT I$1000,000 B 'Contractors Equipment 1 V Y QT66080]5X30]TLC 19 8/1/2019 8/1/2020 Scheduled EDlnpmen l ' 2463,610 i Rented/Leased Equipme 150,000 Builde(e Rish Any One Location' 1$,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (ACORD 101.Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) The General Liability,Auto Liability,Umbrella Liability&Builder's Risk policies include a blanket automatic additional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status to the certificate holder only when there is an executed written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires such status.The General Liability,Auto Liability,Umbrella Liability,Workers'Compensation policies include a blanket waiver of subrogation endorsement that provides this feature only when there is an executed written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires it. The General Liability policy &Umbrella policy contains "Primary and Noncontributory wording.The Builders Risk Policy contains a waiver of subrogation endorsement in favor of certificate holder that requires it.The Umbrella is not excess over General Liability Limited Work site Pollution Endorsement or Builders Risk Policy. Blanket 30 day notice of cancellation applicable to General Liability,Auto;Workers'Compensation and Excess policies. See Attached... CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF. NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive AUTHORIZED REP ESENTABVE ��k1 Peadand TX 77581 r _Brett Herrington ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: WWPAY-2 LOC#: A`Ro ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 1 of AGENCY NAMED INSURED Marsh 8 McLennan Agency LLC W W Payton Corporation PO Box 1056 POLICY NUMBER Katy TX 77492-1056 CARRIER NAIC CODE EFFECTIVE DATE' ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: 25 FORM TITLE: CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE Contractors Equipment Deductible-$2,500 except Cranes 2.5%of the amount of insurance subject to min.of$5,000 'Builders Risk-$15,000,000 Limit Any One Location(Non-combustible/Masonry Non-Combustible;Semi-Fire Resistive or Fire-Resistive $1,000,000 Limit Any One Location(Frame,Brick,Veneer or Joisted Masonry Limit Any One Occurrence-$25000,000 Deductible-$5.000 except$25,000(Flood Zone X)Outside High Hazard Counties $25,000-(Earthquake)Outside of High or Moderate Hazard County or Independent City RE:Construction of FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion-Phase 2-Project No.WAITGT to serve the City of Pearland,TX Additional Insured(s):City of Pearland,TX and Costello,Inc.-applies per the Blanket Additional Insured endorsement which grants additional insured status only where such status is required by a written contract. 4.1111) ACORD 101 (2008101) ©2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD WW Payton Corporation Policy#CAP3689673 08/01/2019-08/01/2020 COMMERCIAL AUTO 4100 CA00011013 BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM Various provisions in this policy restrict coverage. Read SECTION I-COVERED AUTOS the entire policy carefully to determine rights, duties and hem Two of the Declarations shows the °autos' that are what is and is not covered. covered 'autos' for each of your coverages. The Throughout this policy the words you and "your' refer following numerical symbols describe the 'autos' that to the Named Insured shown in the Declarations. The may be covered *autos'.The symbols entered next to a words 'we', 'us' and our refer to the company coverage on the Declarations designate the only'autos' providing this insurance, that are covered'autos'. Other words and phrases that appear in quotation marks A. Description 01 Covered Auto Designation have special meaning.Refer to Section V-Definitions. Symbols Symbol Description Of Covered Auto Designation Symbols 1 Any'Auto' 2 Owned'Autos' Only those'autos'you own(and for Covered Autos Liability Coverage any'trailers' Only you don't own while attached to power units you own).This includes those'autos'you acquire ownership ol alter the policy begins. 3 Owned Private Only the private passenger'autos'you own.This includes those private Passenger passenger'autos'you acquire ownership of atter the policy begins. 'Autos'Only 0 Owned Only those'autos'you own that are not of the private passenger type(and for 'Autos'Other Covered Autos Liability Coverage any'trailers'you don't own while attached to power tir Than Private units you own).This includes those'autos' not ol the private passenger type you Passenger acquire ownership of after the policy begins. 'Autos'Only 5 Owned'Autos' Only those'autos'you own that are required to have no-fault benefits in the state Subject To where they are licensed or principally garaged.This includes those'autos'you acquire No-fault ownership al after the policy begins provided they are required to have no-fault benefits in the slate where they are licensed or principally garaged. 6 Owned'Autos' Only those'autos'you own that because of the law in the stale where they are Subject To A licensed or principally garaged are required to have and cannot reject Uninsured Compulsory Motorists Coverage.This includes those'autos'you acquire ownership of alter the Uninsured policy begins provided they are subject to the same slate uninsured motorists Motorists Law requirement. 7 Specifically Only those'autos'described in Item Three of the Declarations for which a Described premium charge is shown(and for Covered Autos Liability Coverage any'trailers'you 'Autos' don't own while attached to any power unit described in Item Three). B Hired'Autos' Only those'autos'you lease,hire,rent or borrow.This does not include any'auto'you Only lease,hire,rent or borrow from any of your'employees'.partners Of you are a partnership),members(if you are a limited liability company)or members of their households. 9 Non-owned Only those'autos'you do not own,lease,hire,rent or borrow that are used in 'Autos'Only connection with your business.This includes'autos'owned by your'employees', partners(if you are a partnership),members(if you are a limited liability company)or members ol their households but only while used in your business or your personal affairs. CA 00 01 10 13 0 Insurance Services Office,Inc.,2011 Page 1 0112 • J 19 Mobile Only those'autos'that are land vehicles and that would quality under the definition of Equipment 'mobile equipment'under this policy if they were not subject to a compulsory or Subject To financial responsibility law or other motor vehicle insurance law where they are Compulsory Or licensed or principally garaged. Financial Responsibility Or Other Motor Vehicle Insurance Law Only B. Owned Autos You Acquire After The Policy SECTION II—COVERED AUTOS LIABILITY Begins COVERAGE 1. II Symbols 1,2,3,4,5,6 or 19 are entered next A. Coverage to a coverage in Item Two of the Declarations, We will pay all sums an'insured'legally must pay as then you have coverage for 'autos' that you acquire of the damages becausewhithis 'bodilyrn injury' or 'used by q type described for the remainder of damage' to which insurance applies, caused by the policy period. an 'accident' and resulting from the ownership, 2. But, if Symbol 7 is entered next to a coverage in maintenance or use of a covered'auto'. Item Two of the Declarations, an 'auto' you We will also pay all sums an 'insured' legally must acquire will be a covered'auto' for that coverage pay as a 'covered pollution cost or expense'to which only if: this insurance applies, caused by an 'accident' and a. We already cover all 'autos' that you own for resulting from the ownership, maintenance or use of that coverage or it replaces an 'auto' you covered 'autos'. However, we will only pay for the previously owned that had that coverage;and 'covered pollution cost or expense' if there is either b. You tell us within 30 days alter you acquire it 'bodily injury' or 'property damage' to which this that you want us to cover it for that coverage. insurance applies that is caused by the same 'accident'. C. Certain Trailers,Mobile Equipment And We have the right and du to defend an Temporary Substitute Autos 9 dulyany 'insured' If Covered Autos LiabilityCoverage isprovided byagainst a 'suit' asking for such damages or a 9 'covered pollution cost or expense'. However, we this Coverage Form, the following types of vehicles have no duty to defend any 'insured' against a'suit' are also covered 'autos' for Covered Autos Liability seeking damages for 'bodily injury' or 'property Coverage: damage' or a 'covered pollution cost or expense' to 1. 'Trailers' with a load capacity of 2,000 pounds or which this insurance does not apply. We may less designed primarily for travel on public roads, investigate and settle any claim or 'suit' as we 2. 'Mobileequipment' while being carried or towed consider appropriate. Our duty to defend or settle by a ered'sut' ends when the Covered Autos Liability Coverage Limit of Insurance has been exhausted by payment 3. Any 'auto' you do not own while used with the of judgments or settlements. permission of its owner as a temporary substitute 1 Who Is An Insured for a covered'auto'you own that is out of service because of ifs: The following are'insureds': a. Breakdown; a. You for any covered'auto'. b. Repair; b. Anyone else while using with your permission c. Servicing; a covered 'auto' you own, hire or borrow except: d. 'Loss';or (1) The owner or anyone else from whom you e. Destruction. hire or borrow a covered'auto'. This exception does not apply if the covered'auto' is a 'trailer' connected to a covered'auto'you own. J Pegs2 of 12 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc.,2011 CA 0001 1013 (2) Your 'employee' if the covered -auto' is These payments will not reduce the Limit of owned by that'employee' or a member of Insurance. his or her household. b. Out-of-state Coverage Extensions (3) Someone using a covered 'auto"while he While a covered 'auto' is away from the state or she is working in a business o1 selling, where it is licensed,we will: servicing, repairing, parking or storing 'autos'unless that business is yours. (1) Increase the Limit of Insurance for (4) Covered Autos Liability Coverage to meet Anyone other than your 'employees', r partners (if you are a partnership), the limits responsibilityespied by a compulsory e members (if you are a limited liability financial herlaw of the company) or a lessee or borrower or any jurisdiction where the extension ovdred nap ly p y) being used. li its doesb not apply of their 'employees', while moving to the limit or limits specified by any law property to or from a covered'auto'. governing motor carriers of passengers or (5) A partner (if you are a partnership) or a property. member (it you are a limited liabilitytypes company) for a covered 'auto' owned by (2) Provide the v minimumgamounts and him or her or a member of his or her other coverages, such as no-fault,the household. required ol Petrel-stets vehicles by the jurisdiction where the covered 'auto' is c. Anyone liable for the conduct of an 'insured' being used. described above but only to the extent of that We will not pay anyone more than once for liability. the same elements of loss because of these 2. Coverage Extensions extensions. a. Supplementary Payments B. Exclusions We will pay for the'insured': This insurance does not apply to any of the following: (1) All expenses we incur. 1. Expected Or Intended Injury (2) Up to $2,000 for cost of bail bonds 'Bodily injury' or 'property damage' expected or 11. (including bonds for related traffic law intended from the standpoint of the'insured'. violations) required because of an 2. Contractual 'accident' we cover. We do not have to furnish these bonds. Liability assumed under any contract or (3) The cost of bonds to release attachments agreement. in any 'suit' against the °insured' we But this exclusion does not apply to liability for defend, but only for bond amounts within damages: our Limit of Insurance. a. Assumed in a contractor agreement that is an (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the 'insured contract', provided the 'bodily injury' 'insured' at our request, including actual or 'property damage' occurs subsequent to loss of earnings up to$250 a day because the execution of the contract or agreement;or ol time off from work. b. That the 'insured-would have in the absence (5) All court costs taxed against the 'insured' of the contract or agreement. in any °suit' against the 'insured' we 3. Workers'Compensation defend. However, these payments do not Any obligation for which the 'insured' or the include attorneys' lees or attorneys' 'insured's' insurer may be held liable under any expenses taxed against the insured', workers' compensation, disability benefits or (6) All interest on the full amount of any unemployment compensation law or any similar judgment that accrues after entry of the law. judgment in any 'suit' against the 'insured' we defend, but our duty to pay interest ends when we have paid, offered to pay or deposited in court the pail of the judgment that is within our Limit of Insurance. CA 0001 1013 ®Insurance Services Office,Inc.,2011 Page 3 o112 )4. Employee Indemnification And Employers b. After it is moved from the covered 'auto' to 4/ Liability the place where it is finally delivered by the 'Bodily injury'to: insured'. a. An 'employee' of the 'insured' arising out of O. Movement Of Property By Mechanical Device and in the course of: 'Bodily injury' or 'properly damage' resulting (1) Employment by the'insured';or from the movement of properly by a mechanical (2) Performing the duties related to the device (other than a hand truck) unless the device is attached to the covered'auto'. conduct of the'insured's'business;or 9. Operations b. The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of that 'employee' as a consequence of 'Bodily injury' or'properly damage'arising out of Paragraph a.above. the operation of: This exclusion applies: a. Any equipment listed in Paragraphs 6,b. and (1) Whether the'insured' may be liable as an 6.c,of the definition of'mobile equipment';or employer or in any other capacity;and b. Machinery or equipment that is on, attached to or part of a land vehicle that would qualify (2) To any obligation to share damages with under the definition of'mobile equipment'it it or repay someone else who must pay were not subject to a compulsory or financial damages because of the injury. responsibility law or other motor vehicle But this exclusion does not apply to'bodily injury' insurance law where it is licensed or to domestic 'employees° not entitled to workers' principally garaged. compensation benefits or to liability assumed by 10. Completed Operations the 'insured' under an °insured contract'. For the purposes of the Coverage Form, a domestic 'Bodily injury'or'property damage'arising out of 'employee' is a person engaged in household or your work alter that work has been completed or domestic work performed principally in abandoned. connection with a residence premises. In this exclusion,your work means: 5. Fellow Employee a. Work or operations performed by you or on 'Bodily injury'to: your behalf;and a. Any fellow 'employee' of the 'insured'arising b. Materials, parts or equipment furnished in out of and in the course of the fellow connection with such work or operations. 'employee's' employment or while performing Your work includes warranties or representations duties related to the conduct of your business; made at any time with respect to the fitness, or quality, durability or performance of any of the b. The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of items included in Paragraph a.or b.above. that fellow 'employee' as a consequence of Your work will be deemed completed at the Paragraph a.above. earliest of the following times: 6. Care,Custody Or Control (1) When all of the work called for in your 'Property damage' to or 'covered pollution cost contract has been completed; or expense' involving properly owned or (2) When all of the work to be done at the site transported by the 'insured' or in the 'insured's' has been completed it your contract calls care, custody or control. But this exclusion does for work at more than one site;or not apply to liability assumed under a sidetrack (3) When that part of the work done at a job agreement, site has been put to its intended use by 7. Handling Of Property any person or organization other than 'Bodily injury' or 'properlydamage' resulting another contractor or subcontractor from the handling of properly: working on the same project. a. Before it is moved from the place where it is accepted by the 'insured' for movement into or onto the covered'auto';or 1146) Page 4 of 12 ®Insurance Services Office,Inc.,2011 CA 0001 1013 Work that may need service, maintenance, Paragraphs b. and e. above of this exclusion do correction, repair or replacement, but which is not apply to 'accidents' that occur away from otherwise complete.will be treated as completed. premises owned by or rented to an'insured'with 11. Pollution respect to 'pollutants' not in or upon a covered 'auto'if: 'Bodily injury' or'property damage'arising out of the actual, alleged or threatened discharge, (a) The 'pollutants' or any property in dispersal, seepage, migration, release or escape which the 'pollutants' are contained of'pollutants': are upset,overturned or damaged as a result of the maintenance or use of a a. That are,or that are contained in any property covered'auto';and that is: (b) The discharge, dispersal, seepage, (1) Being transported or towed by, handled or migration, release or escape of the handled for movement into, onto or from 'pollutants' is caused directly by such the covered'auto': upset,overturn or damage. (2) Otherwise in the course of transit by or on 12. War behalf of the'insured',or Beingstored, disposed of, treated or 'Bodily injury' or 'properly damage' arising (3) directly or indirectly out of: processed in or upon the covered'auto'; a. War,including undeclared or civil war; b. Before the 'pollutants' or any properly in which the 'pollutants' are contained are b. Warlike action by a military force, including moved from the place where they are action in hindering or defending against an accepted by the 'insured' for movement into actual or expected attack, by any government, or onto the covered auto':or sovereign or other authority using military Personnel or other agents;or c. Alter the 'pollutants' or any property in which c. Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, the 'pollutants' are contained are moved from usurped the covered'auto'to the place where they are power or action taken by governmental finally delivered,disposed of or abandoned by authority in hindering or defending against L" the'insured', any of these. �r Paragraph a. above does not apply to fuels, 13. Raoing lubricants, fluids, exhaust gases or other similar Covered'autos'while used in any professional or 'pollutants' that are needed for or result from the organized racing or demolition contest or stunting normal electrical, hydraulic or mechanical activity, or while practicing for such contest or functioning of the covered'auto'or its pads il: activity. This insurance also does not apply while (1) The 'pollutants' escape, seep, migrate or that covered 'auto' is being prepared for such a are discharged, dispersed or released contest or activity. directly from an 'auto' pan designed by its C. Limit Of Insurance manufacturer to hold, store, receive or Regardless of the number of covered 'autos'. dispose of such'pollutants'.and 'insureds', premiums paid, claims made or vehicles (2) The 'bodily injury', 'property damage' or involved in the 'accident', the most we will pay for 'covered pollution cost or expense' does the total of all damages and 'covered pollution cost not arise out of the operation of any or expense' combined resulting from any one equipment listed in Paragraphs 6.b. and 'accident' is the Limit Of Insurance for Covered 6.e. of the definition of 'mobile Autos Liability Coverage shown in the Declarations. equipment'. CA 00 01 10 13 0 Insurance Services Office, Inc.,2011 Page S of 12 All 'bodily injury°, 'property damage' and 'covered 3. Glass Breakage-Hitting A BIN Or Animal- pollution cost or expense' resulting from continuous Falling Objects Or Missiles or repeated exposure to substantially the same If you carry Comprehensive Coverage for the conditions will be considered as resulting Iron one damaged covered 'auto', we will pay for the "accident'. following under Comprehensive Coverage: No one will be entitled to receive duplicate payments a. Glass breakage; for the same elements of°loss° under this Coverage Form and any Medical Payments Coverage b. 'Loss'caused by hitting a bird or animal;and endorsement, Uninsured Motorists Coverage c. 'Loss'caused by falling objects or missiles. endorsement or Underinsured Motorists Coverage However, you have the option of having glass endorsement attached lo this Coverage Part breakage caused by a covered 'autos' collision SECTION III-PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE or overturn considered a 'loss' under Collision A. Coverage Coverage. 1. We will pay for 'loss' to a covered 'auto° or its 4. Coverage Extensions equipment under: a. Transportation Expenses a. Comprehensive Coverage We will pay up to$20 par day,to a maximum From any cause except: of$600, for temporary transportation expense (1) The covered auto's'collision with another incurred by you because of the total theft of a object;or covered 'auto' of the private passenger type. We will pay only for those covered'autos' for (2) The covered'auto's'overturn. which you carry either Comprehensive or b. Specified Causes 01 Loss Coverage Specified Causes 01 Loss Coverage. We will Caused by: pay for temporary transportation expenses incurred during the period beginning 48 hours (1) Fire,lightning or explosion; after the theft and ending, regardless of the (2) Theft; policy's expiration,when the covered'auto'is returned to use or we pay for its 'loss'. (3) Windstorm,hail or earthquake; b. Lon Of Use Expenses (4) Flood; For Hired Auto Physical Damage, we will pay (5) Mischief or vandalism;or expenses for which an 'insured' becomes (6) The sinking, burning, collision or legally responsible to pay for loss of use of a derailment of any conveyance transporting vehicle rented or hired without a driver under the covered'auto'. a written rental contract or agreement.We will c. Collision Coverage pay for loss of use expenses if caused by: Caused by: (1) Other than collision only if the Declarations indicates that (1) The covered'auto's'collision with another Comprehensive Coverage is provided for object;or any covered'auto"; (2) The covered'auto's'overturn. (2) Specified Causes OI Loss only it the 2. Towing Declarations indicates that Specified Causes OI Loss Coverage is provided for We will pay up to the limit shown in the any covered'auto';or Declarations for lowing and labor costs incurred each time a covered 'auto' of the private passenger type is disabled. However, the labor must be performed at the place of disablement. Page 6 of 12 ®Insurance Services Office, Inc.,2011 CA 00 01 1013 (3) Collision only if the Declarations indicates b. Any device designed or used to detect speed- that Collision Coverage is provided for any measuring equipment, such as radar or laser covered'auto'. detectors, and any jamming apparatus However, the most we will pay for any intended to elude or disrupt speed-measuring expenses for loss of use is$20 per day, to a equipment. maximum of$600. c. Any electronic equipment, without regard to B. Exclusions whether this equipment is permanently 1. We will not payfor 'loss' caused by or resultinginstalled, that reproduces, receives or transmits audio,visual or data signals. trom any of the following. Such'loss' is excluded regardless of any other cause or event that d. Any accessories used with the electronic contributes concurrently or in any sequence to equipment described in Paragraph c.above. the'loss', 5. Exclusions 4.c. and 4.d. do not apply to a. Nuclear Hazard equipment designed to be operated solely by use of the power from the 'auto's' electrical system (1) The explosion of any weapon employing that,at the time of loss',is: atomic fission or fusion;or a. Permanently installed in or upon the covered (2) Nuclear reaction or radiation, or 'auto'; radioactive contamination, however caused. b. Removable from a housing unit which is b. Wer Or Military Action permanently installed in or upon the covered auto'; (1) War, including undeclared or civil war; c. An integral part 01 the same unit housing any (2) Warlike action by a military force,including electronic equipment described in Paragraphs action in hindering or defending against an a.and b.above;or actual or expected attack, by any d. Necessary for the normal operation el the government, sovereign or other authority covered 'auto' or the monitoring of the using military personnel or other agents; covered'autos'operating system. Lor 6. We will not pay for loss'to a covered auto'due (3) Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurped to 'diminution in value'. power or action taken by governmental authority in hindering or defending against C. Limbs Of Insurance any of these. 1. The most we will pay tor: 2. We will not pay for 'loss' to any covered 'auto' a. 'Loss' to any one covered 'auto'is the lesser while used in any prolessional or organized of: racing or demolition contest or stunting activity,or (1) The actual cash value of the damaged or while practicing for such contest or activity. We stolen property as of the time of the'loss': will also not pay for 'loss' to any covered 'auto' or while that covered 'auto' is being prepared for such a contest or activity. (2) The cost of repairing or replacing the 3. We will not pay for lose due and confined to: damaged or stolen property with other property of like kind and quality. a. Wear and tear, freezing, mechanical or b. All electronic equipment that reproduces, electrical breakdown. receives or transmits audio, visual or data b. Blowouts, punctures or other road damage to signals in any one loss' is $1,000. if, at the tires. time of'loss',such electronic equipment is: This exclusion does not apply to such 'loss' (1) Permanently installed in or upon the resulting from the total theft of a covered'auto'. covered 'auto' in a housing, opening or 4. We will not pay for loss'to any of the following, other location that is not normally used by the'auto' manufacturer for the installation a. Tapes, records, discs or other similar audio, of such equipment; visual or data electronic devices designed for use with audio, visual or data electronic equipment. 4110. CA 00 01 10 13 ®Insurance Services Office,Inc.,2011 Page 7 0112 (2) Removable from a permanently installed (2) The'insured's'name and address;and housing unit as described in Paragraph (3) To the extent possible, the names and b.(1)above:or addresses of any injured persons and (3) An integral part of such equipment as witnesses. described in Paragraphs b.(1) and b.(2) b. Additionally, you and any other involved above. 'insured'must 2. An adjustment lur depreciation and physical (1) Assume no obligation, make no payment condition will be made in determining actual cash or incur no expense without our consent. value in the event of a total°loss'. except at the'insureds'own cost. 3. If a repair or replacement results in better than (2) Immediately send us copies of any like kind or quality,we will not pay for the amount request, demand, order, notice, summons of the betterment. or legal paper received concerning the D. Deductible claim or'suit'. For each covered 'auto', our obligation to pay for, (3) Cooperate with us in the investigation or repair, return or replace damaged or stolen property settlement of the claim or defense against will be reduced by the applicable deductible shown in the'suit'. the Declarations. Any Comprehensive Coverage (4) Authorize us to obtain medical records or deductible shown in the Declarations does not apply other pertinent information. to'loss'caused by fire or lightning. SECTION IV—BUSINESS AUTO CONDRIONS (5) Submit to examination,at our expense,by physicians of our choice, as often as we The following conditions apply in addition to the reasonably require. Common Policy Conditions: c. If there is 'loss' to a covered 'auto' or its A. Loss Conditions equipment,you must also do the following: 1. Appraisal For Physical Damage Loss (1) Promptly notify the police it the covered If you and we disagree on the amount of 'loss', 'auto'or any of its equipment is stolen. either may demand an appraisal of the 'loss'. In (2) Take all reasonable steps to protect the this event, each party will select a Competent covered 'auto' from further damage. Also appraiser. The two appraisers will select a keep a record of your expenses for competent and impartial umpire. The appraisers consideration in the settlement of the will state separately the actual cash value and claim. amount of "loss', If they fail to agree, they will (3) Permit us to inspect the covered 'auto' submit their differences to the umpire. A decision and records proving the loss' before its agreed to by any two will be binding. Each party repair or disposition. will: a. Pay its chosen appraiser;and (4) Agree to examinations under oath at our request and give us a signed statement of b. Bear the other expenses of the appraisal and your answers. umpire equally. 3. Legal Action Against Us If we submit to an appraisal,we will still retain our No one may bring a legal action against us under right to deny the claim. this Coverage Form until: 2. Dulles In The Event Of Accident,Claim,Suit a. There has been lull compliance with all the Or Loss terms of this Coverage Form;and We have no duty to provide coverage under this b. Under Covered Autos Liability Coverage, we policy unless there has been full compliance with agree in writing that the 'insured' has an the following duties: obligation to pay or until the amount of that a. In the event of 'accident', claim, 'suit' or obligation has finally been determined by loss', you must give us or our authorized judgment alter trial. No one has the right representative prompt notice of the'accident' under this policy to bring us into an action to or'loss'.Include: determine the'insured's'liability. (1) How, when and where the 'accident' or 'loss'occurred; J Page 8 of 12 0 Insurance Services Office,Inc.,2011 CA 00 01 10 13 4119 4. Loss Payment—Physical Damage Coverages 5. Other Insurance Al our option,we may: a. For any covered 'auto' you own, this a. Pay for, repair or replace damaged or stolen Coverage Form provides primary insurance. properly; For any covered 'auto' you don't own, the insurance provided by this Coverage Form is D. Return the stolen properly, at our expense. excess over any other collectible insurance. We will pay for any damage that results to the However, while a covered 'auto' which is a 'auto'from the theft;or 'trailer' is connected to another vehicle, the c. Take all or any part of the damaged or stolen Covered Autos Liability Coverage this properly at an agreed or appraised value. Coverage Form provides for the'trailer' is: If we pay for the 'loss', our payment will include (1) Excess while it is connected to a motor the applicable sales tax for the damaged or stolen vehicle you do not own;or properly. (2) Primary while it is connected to a covered 5. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against 'auto'you own. Others To Us b. For Hired Auto Physical Damage Coverage, If any person or organization to or for whom we any covered 'auto' you lease, hire, rent or make payment under this Coverage Form has borrow is deemed to be a covered'auto'you rights to recover damages trom another, those own. However, any 'auto' that is leased, rights are transferred to us. That person or hired, rented or borrowed with a driver is not a organization muss do everything necessary to covered'auto'. secure our rights and must do nothing after e. Regardless of the provisions of Paragraph a. 'accident'or'loss'to impair them. above, this Coverage Form's Covered Autos B. General Conditions Liability Coverage is primary for any liability 1. Bankruptcyassumed under an'insured contract'. Bankruptcy or insolvency of the 'insured' or the d. When this Coverage Form and any other 'insured's' estate will not relieve us of any Coverage Form or policy covers on the same obligations under this Coverage Form. basis, either excess or primary, we will pay 41010only our share. Our share is the proportion 2. Concealment,Misrepresentation Or Freud that the Limit of Insurance of our Coverage This Coverage Form is void in any case of fraud Form bears to the total of the limits of all the by you at any time as it relates to this Coverage Coverage Forms and policies covering on the Form. It is also void if you or any other'insured', same basis. at any lime, intentionally conceals or 6. Premium Audit misrepresents a material fact concerning: a. This Coverage Form; a. The estimated premium for this Coverage 9Form is based on the exposures you told us b. The covered'auto'; you would have when this policy began. We c. Your interest in the covered auto';or will compute the final premium due when we determine your actual exposures. The d. A claim under this Coverage Form, estimated total premium will be credited 3. Liberallzatlon against the final premium due and the first INamed Insured will be billed for the balance,if I we revise this Coverage Form to provide more any. The due date for the final premium or coverage without additional premium charge, retrospective premium is the date shown as your policy will automatically provide the the due date on the bill. If the estimated total additional coverage as of the day the revision is premium exceeds the final premium due, the effective in your state. first Named Insured will get a refund. 4. No Benefit To Bailee—Physical Damage b. If this policy is issued for more than one year, Coverages the premium for this Coverage Form will be We will not recognize any assignment or grant computed annually based on our rates or any coverage for the benefit of any person or premiums in effect at the beginning of each organization holding, storing or transporting year of the policy. property for a fee regardless of any other provision of this Coverage Form. CA 00 01 10 13 ©Insurance Services Office,Inc.,2011 Page 9 of 12 7. Polley Period,Coverage Territory 2. Any other land vehicle that is subject to a Under this Coverage Form, we cover'accidents' compulsory or financial responsibility law or other and losses'occurring: motor vehicle insurance law where it is licensed the policyor principally garaged. B. During period shown in the Declarations;and However, 'auto' does not include 'mobile b. Within the coverage territory. equipment'. The coverage territory is: C. 'Bodily injury' means bodily injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including death (1) The United States of America; resulting from any of these. (2) The territories and possessions of the D. 'Covered pollution cost or expense' means any cost United Stales of America; or expense arising out of: (3) Puerto Rico; 1. Any request, demand, order or statutory or (4) Canada;and regulatory requirement that any 'insured' or others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, (5) Anywhere in the world if a covered 'auto' contain, treat,detoxify or neutralize,or in any way of the private passenger type is leased, respond to, or assess the effects of, 'pollutants'; hired, rented or borrowed without a driver or for a period of 30 days or less, 2. Any claim or 'suit' by or on behalf of a provided that the 'insured's' responsibility to pay governmental authority for damages because of damages is determined in a 'suit' on the merits, testing for, monitoring, cleaning up, removing, in the United States of America, the territories containing, treating, detoxifying or neutralizing, or and possessions of the United States of America, in any way responding to, or assessing the Puerto Rico or Canada, or in a settlement we effects of, 'pollutants'. agree to. 'Covered pollution cost or expense'does not include We also cover 'loss' lo, or'accidents' involving, any cost or expense arising out of the actual, alleged a covered'auto'while being transported between or threatened discharge, dispersal, seepage, any of these places. migration,release or escape of°pollutants': WI B. Two Or More Coverage Forms Or Policies a. That are,or that are contained in any property Issued By Us that is: II this Coverage Form and any other Coverage (1) Being transported or lowed by, handled or Form or policy issued to you by us or any handled for movement into, onto or from company affiliated with us applies to the same the covered'auto'; 'accident', the aggregate maximum Limit of (2) Otherwise in the course of transit by or on Insurance under all the Coverage Forms or policies shall not exceed the highest applicable behalf of the insured';or Limit of Insurance under any one Coverage Form (3) Being stared, disposed of, treated or or policy. This condition does not apply to any processed in or upon the covered'auto'; Coverage Form or policy issued by us or an b. Before the 'pollutants' or any properly in D affiliated company specifically to apply as excess which the rcontained D rtY insurance over this Coverage Form. moved fromthea place where they are SECTION v—DEFINITIONS accepted by the 'insured' for movement into A. 'Accident' includes continuous or repeated exposure or onto the covered'auto';or to the same conditions resulting in 'bodily injury' or c. After the'pollutants' or any property in which 'property damage'. the 'pollutants' are contained are moved from B. 'Auto'means: the covered'auto'to the place where they are finally delivered,disposed of or abandoned by 1. A land motor vehicle, 'trailer' or semitrailer the'insured'. designed for travel on public roads;or Page 10 of 12 0 Insurance Services Office,Inc.,2011 CA 00 01 10 13 41, Paragraph a. above does not apply to fuels, 5. Thal part of any oilier contract or agreement lubricants, fluids, exhaust gases or other similar pertaining to your business (including an 'pollutants' that are needed for or result from the indemnification of a municipality in connection normal electrical, hydraulic or mechanical with work performed for a municipality) under functioning of the covered°auto'or its parts,if: which you assume the ton liability of another to (1) The 'pollutants' escape, seep, migrate or pay for 'bodily injury' or 'property damage' to a are discharged, dispersed or released third party or organization. Tort liability means a directly from an'auto'part designed by its liability that would be imposed by law in the manufacturer to hold, store, receive or absence of any contract or agreement;or dispose of such'pollutants';and 6. That part of any contract or agreement entered (2) The 'bodily injury', 'property damage' or into, as part of your business, pertaining to the 'covered pollution cost or expense' does rental or lease, by you or any ol your not arise out ol the operation of any 'employees°, ol any auto'. However, such equipment listed in Paragraph eh.or S.C. contract or agreement shall not be considered an of the definition ofmobile equipment'. 'insured contract' to the extent that it obligates to you or any of your 'employees' to pay for Paragraphs b. and c. above do nota apply property damage' to any 'auto' rented or leased 'accidents'that occur away from premises owned by you or any ol your'employees'. by or rented to an 'insured° with respect to An 'insured contract' does not include that pad of 'pollutants'not in or upon a covered'auto'if: any contract or agreement: (a) The 'pollutants' or any property in which the 'pollutants' are contained a. That indemnifies a railroad for 'bodily injury' are upset,overturned or damaged as a or 'property damage' arising out of result of the maintenance or use of a construction or demolition operations, within covered auto';and 50 feel of any railroad property and enacting any railroad bridge or trestle, tracks, (b) The discharge, dispersal, seepage, roadbeds,tunnel,underpass or crossing; migration, release or escape of the "pollutants' is caused directly by such b. That pertains to the loan,lease or rental of an it" upset,overturn or damage. 'auto' to you or any of your 'employees', if E. 'Diminution in value' means the actual or perceived the 'auto' is loaned, leased or rented with a tlriver;or loss in direct and accidental 'loss'.market value or resale value which results from a c. That holds a person or organization engaged n F. 'Employee' includes a leased worker°. 'Employee' 'a toe business of transporting property by Ycovered for hire o' harmlessrr for your use of t does not include a'tempomry worker'. covered 'auto' over a route or territory that G. 'Insured' means any person or organization person or organization is authorized to serve qualifying as an insured in the Who Is An Insured by public authority. provision of the applicable coverage. Except with I. 'Leased worker' means a person leased to you by a respect to the Limit of Insurance, the coverage labor leasing firm under an agreement between you afforded applies separately to each insured who is and the labor leasing firm to perform duties related to seeking coverage or against whom a claim or'suit'is the conduct of your business. 'Leased worker' does brought. not include a'temporary worker'. H. 'Insured contract'means: J. 'Loss'means direct and accidental loss or damage. 1. A lease of premises; K. 'Mobile equipment' means any of the following types 2. A sidetrack agreement; of land vehicles,including any attached machinery or 3. Any easement or license agreement, except in equipment: connection with construction or demolition 1. Bulldozers, farm machinery, forklifts and other operations on or within 50 feet of a railroad; vehicles designed for use principally off public 4. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to roads; indemnity a municipality, except in connection 2. Vehicles maintained for use solely on or next to with work for a municipality; premises you own or rent; 3. Vehicles That travel on crawler treads; cov CA 00 01 10 13 ®Insurance Services Office, Inc.,2011 Page 11 of 12 4. Vehicles, whether self-propelled or not, However, 'mobile equipment' does nal include land 111) maintained primarily to provide mobility to vehicles that are subject to a compulsory or financial permanently mounted: responsibility law or other motor vehicle insurance a. Power cranes, shovels, loaders, diggers or law where it is licensed or principally garaged. Land drills;or vehicles subject to a compulsory or financial responsibility law or other motor vehicle insurance b. Road construction or resurfacing equipment law are considered'autos'. such as graders,scrapers or rollers; L. °Pollutants' means any solid, liquid, gaseous or 5. Vehicles not described in Paragraph 1., 2., 3. or thermal irritant or contaminant, Including smoke, 4. above that are not sell-propelled and are vapor, soot, fumes, acids, alkalis, chemicals and maintained primarily to provide mobility to waste. Waste includes materials to be recycled, permanently attached equipment of the lollowing reconditioned or reclaimed. types: a. Air compressors, pumps and generators, M. 'Properly damage° means damage to or loss of use of tangible property. including spraying,welding, building cleaning, geophysical exploration, lighting and well- N. 'Suit'means a civil proceeding in which: servicing equipment;or 1. Damages because of 'bodily injury' or 'properly b. Cherry pickers and similar devices used to damage';or raise or lower workers:or 2. A'covered pollution cost or expense'; 6. Vehicles not described in Paragraph 1., 2., 3. or to which this insurance applies,are alleged. 4. above maintained primarily for purposes other 'Suit'includes: than the transportation of persons or cargo. However, sell-propelled vehicles with the a. An arbitration proceeding in which such following types of permanently attached damages or 'covered pollution costs or equipment are not'mobile equipment' but will be expenses' are claimed and to which the considered'autos': 'insured' must submit or does submit with our a. Equipment designed primarily toconsent;or r. (1) Snow removal; b. Any other alternative dispute resolution proceeding in which such damages or (2) Road maintenance,but not construction or 'covered pollution costs or expenses' are resurfacing;or claimed and to which the insured submits with (3) Street cleaning; our consent. b. Cherry pickers and similar devices mounted O. 'Temporary worker' means a person who is on automobile or truck chassis and used to furnished to you to substitute for a permanent raise or lower workers;and 'employee' on leave or to meet seasonal or short- term workload conditions. c. Air compressors, pumps and generators, including spraying,welding, building cleaning, P. 'Trailer includes semitrailer. geophysical exploration, lighting or well- servicing equipment. Page 12 of 12 ®Insurance Services Office, Inc.,2011 CA 00 01 10 13 WW Payton Corporation Policy#CLP3684671 08/01/2019 - 08/01/2020 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. L BUILDERS EXTENDED LIABILITY COVERAGE This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM It is agreed that the provisions listed below apply only upon the entry of an n in the box next to the caption of such provision. A. rn Partnership and Joint Venture Extension N. 1 Construction Project General Aggregate Limits 8. 0 Contractors Automatic Additional Insured O. 1 Fellow Employee Coverage Coverage—Ongoing Operations P. IT Property Damage Liability-Elevators C. n Automatic Waiver of Subrogation O. 0 Property Damage to the Named Insured's Work D. Q Extended Notice of Cancellation,Nonrenewal R. Q Care,Custody or Control E. []Unintentional Failure to Disclose Hazards S. M Concrete Rework Labor Reimbursement F. n Broadened Mobile Equipment Coverage G. 0 Personal and Advertising Injury-Contractual T. n Lost Key Coverage Coverage U. I Electronic Data Liability Coverage H. n Nonemployment Discrimination `y V. ❑X Consolidated Insurance Program Residual I. QX Liquor Liability Liability Coverage J. %Q Broadened Conditions W n Automatic Additional Insureds—Managers or Lessors of Premises K. Automatic Additional Insureds—Equipment Leases X. M Automatic Additional Insureds—State or Governmental Agency or Political L. Q Insured Contract Extension-Railroad Property Subdivisions—Permits or Authorizations and Construction Contracts Y. 1 Contractors Automatic Additional Insured M. 1111 Turnkey Jobs-Coverage For Alienated Coverage—Completed Operations Premises Z. n Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors A. PARTNERSHIP AND JOINT VENTURE EXTENSION The following provision is added to SECTION II•WHO IS AN INSURED: The last lull paragraph which reads as follows: No person or organization is an insured with respect to the conduct of any current or past partnership. joint venture or limited liability company that is not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations. 4110 GL-3084(09111) -I- is deleted and replaced with the following: With respect to the conduct ol any past or present joint venture or partnership not shown as a Named 1111) Insured in the Declarations and of which you are or were a partner or member,you are an insured,but only with respect to liability arising out of'your work'on behalf of any partnership or joint venture not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations, provided no other similar liability insurance is available to you for'your work'in connection with your interest in such partnership or joint venture. B. CONTRACTORS AUTOMATIC ADDITIONAL INSURED COVERAGE—ONGOING OPERATIONS SECTION II — WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an additional insured any person or organization who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy, but only with respect lo liability for 'bodily injury'. 'property damage' or 'personal and advertising injury' caused, in whole or in part,by: 1. Your acts or omissions;or 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured(s) at the project(s) designated in the written contract. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusions apply: This insurance does not apply to'bodily injury'or'property damage occurring alter: 1. All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project(other than service,maintenance or repairs)to be performed by or on behalf ol the additional insured(s)at the location of the covered operations has been completed;or 2. That portion of'your work'out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary,excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In hal event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be noncontributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured,this insurance will be excess. C. AUTOMATIC WAIVER OF SUBROGATION Item 8. of SECTION IV- COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS. is deleted and replaced with the following: 8. Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others to Us and Automatic Waiver of Subrogation. a. If the insured has rights to recover all or part of any payment we have made under this Coverage Form, those rights are transferred to us. The insured must do nothing after loss to impair those rights. At our request,the insured will bring'suit'or transfer those rights to us and help us enforce them. b. It required by a written contract executed prior to loss, we waive any right of recovery we may have against any person or organization because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of'your work'(or that person or organization. GL-3084(09111) -2- D. EXTENDED NOTICE OF CANCELLATION,NONRENEWAL 4100 Item A2.b.of the COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS,is deleted and replaced with the following: A2.b. 60 days before the effective dale of the cancellation it we cancel for any other reason. Item 9. of SECTION W- COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: 9. WHEN WE DO NOT RENEW a. It we choose to nonrenew this policy,we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in the Declarations written notice of the nonrenewal not less than 60 days before the expiration date. b. If we do not give notice ol our intent to nonrenew as prescribed in a.above,it is agreed that you may extend the period of this policy for a maximum additional sixty(60)days from its scheduled expiration date. Where not otherwise prohibited by law,the existing terms,conditions and rates will remain in effect during that extension period. It is further agreed that so long as it is not otherwise prohibited by law, this one time sixty day extension is the sole remedy and liquidated damages available to the insured as a result of our failure to give the notice as prescribed in 9. a.above. E. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS Although we relied on your representations as to existing and past hazards, if unintentionally you should fail to disclose all such hazards al the inception date of your policy.we will not deny coverage under this Coverage Form because of such failure. F. BROADENED MOBILE EQUIPMENT Item 12.b.ol SECTION V-DEFINITIONS,is deleted and replaced with the fallowing: 12.b. Vehicles maintained for use solely on or next to premises, sites or locations you own, rent or occupy, G. PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY-CONTRACTUAL COVERAGE Exclusion 2.e.of SECTION I,COVERAGE B is deleted. H. NONEMPLOYMENT DISCRIMINATION Unless'personal and advertising injury'is excluded from this policy: Item 14.of SECTION V-DEFINITIONS,is amended to include: 'Personal and advertising injury' also means embarrassment or humiliation, mental or emotional distress, physical illness, physical impairment, loss of earning capacity or monetary loss, which is caused by*discrimination.' SECTION V-DEFINmONS,is amended to include: 'Discrimination' means the unlawful treatment of individuals based on race, color, ethnic origin, age, gender or religion. CIO GL-3064(09/11) -3- Item 2.Exclusions of SECTION I,COVERAGE B,is amended to include: 'Personal and advertising injury'arising out of 'discrimination'directly or indirectly related to the past employment, employment or prospective employment of any person or class of persons by any insured. 'Personal and advertising injury' arising out of 'discrimination' by or at your, your agents or your 'employees'direction or with your,your agents or your'employees'knowledge or consent. 'Personal and advertising injury' arising out of discrimination' directly or indirectly related to the sale, rental, lease or sub-lease or prospective sale, rental, lease or sublease of any dwelling, permanent lodging or premises by or al the direction of any insured. Fines, penalties, specific performance or injunctions levied or imposed by a governmental entity, or governmental code,law,or statute because of'discrimination' I. LIQUOR LIABILITY Exclusion 2.c.of SECTION I,COVERAGE A,is deleted. J. BROADENED CONDMONS Items 2.a. and 2.b. of SECTION IV- COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDMONS, are deleted and replaced with the following: 2. Duties In The Event Ot Occurrence,Offense,Claim Or Suit: a. You must see to it that we are notified of an 'occurrence' or an offense which may result in a claim as soon as practicable after the 'occurrence' has been reported to you, one of your officers or an'employee'designated to give notice to us. Notice should include: J (1) How,when and where the°occurrence'or offense look place; (2) The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses:and (3) The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the'occurrence'or oflense. b. If a claim is made or'suit'is brought against any insured,you must: (1) Record the specifics of the claim or 'suit' and the date received as soon as you, one of your officers,or an'employee'designated to record such information is notified of it;and (2) Notify us in writing as soon as practicable after you, one of your officers, your legal department or an 'employee'you designate to give us such notice learns of the claims or 'suit.' Item 2.e.is added to SECTION IV-COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDMONS: 2.e. If you report an 'occurrence' to your workers compensation insurer which develops into a liability claim for which coverage is provided by the Coverage Form,failure to report such 'occurrence'to us at the time of 'occurrence' shall not be deemed in violation of paragraphs 2.a., 2b., and 2.c. However,you shall give written notice of this 'occurrence' to us as soon as you are made aware of the fact that this'occurrence'may be a liability claim rather than a workers compensation claim. K. AUTOMATIC ADOMONAL INSUREDS-EQUIPMENT LEASES SECTION II-WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include any person or organization with whom you agree in a written equipment lease or rental agreement to name as an additional insured with respect to liability for'bodily injury','properly damage'or'personal and advertising injury'caused,at least in part,by GL-3084(09/11) -4. • your maintenance. operation, or use by you of the equipment leased to you by such person or 411, organization,subject to the following additional exclusions. The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to: 1. 'Bodily injury'or'property damage'occurring after you cease leasing the equipment. 2. 'Bodily injury'or'properly damage'arising out of the sole negligence of the additional insured. 3. 'Property damage'to: a. Property owned,used or occupied by or rented to the additional insured;or b. Property in the care, custody or control of the additional insured or over which the additional insured is for any purpose exercising physical control. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary,excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. L. INSURED CONTRACT EXTENSION-RAILROAD PROPERTY AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS Item 9.of SECTION V-DEFINITIONS,is deleted and replaced with the following. 9. 'Insured Contract'means: tiva. A contract for a lease of premises. However,that portion of the contract for a lease of premises that indemnifies any person or organization for damage by lire to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner is not an 'insured contract'; b. A sidetrack agreement; c. Any easement or license agreement; d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to indemnify a municipality, except in connection with work for a municipality; e. An elevator maintenance agreement; 1. Thal part of any other contract or agreement pertaining 10 your business (including an indemnification of a municipality in connection with work performed for a municipality) under which you assume the tort liability of another party to pay for 'bodily injury' or 'property damage' to a third person or organization. Tort liability means a liability that would be imposed by law in the absence of any contractor agreement. Paragraph 1.does not include that part of any contract or agreement: (1) That indemnifies an architect,engineer or surveyor for injury or damage arising out of: (a) Preparing, approving, or tailing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions,reports,surveys,field orders,change orders or drawings and specifications; or (' (b) Giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of �+ the injury or damage;or GL-3084(09111) -5- (2) Under which the insured, ii an architect, engineer or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or damage arising out of the insured's rendering or failure to render professional services, including those listed in (1) above and supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. M. TURNKEY JOBS-COVERAGE FOR ALIENATED PREMISES Itis agreed that: Exclusion 2442)of SECTION I,COVERAGE A, does not apply if the premises are'your work'and were not occupied,rented or held for rental by you for more than 12 months after completion. N. CONSTRUCTION PROJECT GENERAL AGGREGATE LIMITS This modifies SECTION III-LIMITS OF INSURANCE. A. For all sums which can be attributed only to ongoing operations at a single construction project for which the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages caused by an 'occurrence under SECTION I-COVERAGE A, and for all medical expenses caused by accidents under SECTION I- COVERAGE C 1. A separate Construction Project General Aggregate Limit applies to each construction project, and that limit is equal to the amount of the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations. 2. The Construction Project General Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay f or the sum of all damages under COVERAGE A, except damages because of 'bodily injury' or °properly damage included in the 'products-completed operations hazard,' and for medical expenses under COVERAGE C regardless of the number of: a. Insureds; J b. Claims made or'suits'brought;or e. Persons or organizations making claims or bringing'suits.' 3. Any payments made under COVERAGE A for damages or under COVERAGE C for medical expenses shall reduce the Construction Project General Aggregate limit for that construction project. Such payments shall not reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations nor shall they reduce any other Construction Project General Aggregate limit for any other construction project. 4. The limits shown in the Declarations for Each Occurrence, Fire Damage and Medical Expense continue to apply. However, instead of being subject to the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, such limits will be subject to the applicable Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. B. For all sums which cannot be attributed only to ongoing operations al a single construction project for which the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages caused by an 'occurrence' under SECTION I - COVERAGE A, and for all medical expenses caused by accidents under SECTION I-COVERAGE C: 1. Any payments made under COVERAGE A for damages or under COVERAGE C for medical expenses shall reduce the amount available under the General Aggregate Limit or the Products- Completed Operations Aggregate Limit,whichever is applicable;and 2. Such payments shall not reduce any Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. J GL-3084(09/11) -6- C. Payments for damages because of 'bodily injury' or 'property damage' included in the 'products- (' completed operations hazard'will reduce the Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit,and �/ not reduce the General Aggregate Limit nor the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. D. II a construction project has been abandoned, delayed, or abandoned and then restarted,or if the authorized contracting parties deviate trom plans, blueprints, designs, specifications or timetables, the project will still be deemed to be the same construction project E. The provisions ol SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE not otherwise modified by this endorsement shall continue to be applicable. O. FELLOW EMPLOYEE COVERAGE Exclusion 2.e. Employers Liability of SECTION I, COVERAGE A. is deleted and replaced with the following: 2.e. 'Bodily injury'to (1) An'employee'of the insured arising out of and in the course of: (a) Employment by the insured;or (b) Performing duties related to the conduct of the insured's business;or (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of that 'employee' as a consequence of paragraph (1)above. This exclusion applies: 411, (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an employer or in any other capacity;and (2) To any obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury. This exclusion does not apply to: (1) Liability assumed by the insured under an'insured contract';or (2) Liability arising from any action or omission of a co-'employee' while that co-'employee' is either in the course of his or her employment or performing duties related to the conduct of your business. Item 2.a.(1xa)ol SECTION II-WHO IS AN INSURED,is deleted and replaced with the lollowing: 2.e.(1)(a) To you, to your partners or members (it you are a partnership or joint venture) or to your members (if you are a limited liability company), or to your 'volunteer workers' while performing duties related to the conduct of your business. P. PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY-ELEVATORS 'Properly damage'liability is changed as follows: 1. Exclusions 4(3)and 24(4)of SECTION 1,COVERAGE A,do not apply to the use of elevators. 2. The insurance afforded by reason of this provision is excess over any valid and collectible properly insurance (including any deductible portion thereof) available to the insured whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, and the OTHER INSURANCE condition is changed L accordingly. �/ GL-3084(09/11) -7- O. PROPERTY DAMAGE TO THE NAMED INSURED'S WORK Exclusion I of SECTION I,COVERAGE A.is deleted and replaced with the following: 4111) I. Damage to Your Work 'Property damage' to 'your work' arising out of it or any part of it and included in the 'products completed operation hazard.' This exclusion applies only to that portion of any loss in excess of $50,000 per occurrence if the damaged work and the work out of which the damage arises was performed by you. This exclusion does not apply if the damaged work or the work out of which the damage arises was performed on your behalf by a subcontractor. R. CARE,CUSTODY OR CONTROL Exclusion 21A of SECTION I,COVERAGE A.is deleted and replaced with the following: 24.4 Personal property in the care, custody or control of the insured. However, for personal property in the care, custody or control al you or your'employees,'this exclusion applies only to that portion of any loss in excess of$25,000 per occurrence,subject to the following terms and conditions; (a) The most that we will pay under this provision as an annual aggregate is $100,000, regardless of the number of occurrences. (b) This provision does not apply to 'employee' owned property or any properly that is missing where there is not physical evidence to show what happened to the properly. (c) The aggregate limit for this coverage provision is part of the General Aggregate Limit and111111/ SECTION III-LIMITS OF INSURANCE is changed accordingly. (d) In the event of damage to or destruction of property covered by this exception, you shall, if requested by us, replace the properly or furnish the labor and materials necessary for repairs thereto,at actual cost to you,exclusive of prospective profit or overhead charges of any nature. (e) $2,500 shall be deducted from the total amount of all sums you became obligated to pay as damages on account of damage to or destruction of all property of each person or organization, including the loss of use of that properly, as a result of each 'occurrence.' Our limit of liability under the endorsement as being applicable to each 'occurrence' shall be reduced by the amount of the deductible indicated above: however, our aggregate limit of liability under this provision shall not be reduced by the amount of such deductible. The conditions of the policy, including those with respect to duties in the event of 'occurrence; claims or 'suit' apply irrespective of the application of the deductible amount. We may pay any part or all of the deductible amount to effect settlement of any claim or'suit'and, upon notification of the action taken,you shall promptly reimburse us for such pad of the deductible amount as has been paid by us. S. CONCRETE REWORK LABOR REIMBURSEMENT COVERAGE As it applies to this coverage, SECTION I•COVERAGE A Is amended as follows: 1. Insuring Agreement,is deleted and replaced by the following: We will reimburse you for your direct labor expense associated with your 'concrete rework' which was performed by you during the policy period due to the original'concrete product' tailing to meet contractual specifications as ordered for the job or accepted industry standards for its specific GL-3084(09/11) -8- intended use,verified by testing by an ASTM (American Society of Testing& Materials) accredited independent testing agency. 2. Exclusions,is deleted and replaced by the following: The insurance provided by this endorsement does not apply to: a. 'Cosmetic Defects° b. Loss of use e. Changes to the 'concrete product' contractual specilicalions not acknowledged by the named insured in writing prior to the beginning of the job d. 'Loss' arising from the"subsidence'of land o. 'Loss' arising from work performed on your behalf by a subcontractor, except for the supply of the 'concrete product" 1. Cost of materials used in the installation of the'concrete product-or'concrete rework' g. Damages or 'loss' that is covered by a Property or Inland Marine coverage form for your financial interest in your project and structures h. °Loss' unless the 'concrete rework' is completed within one year from the completion of the original'concrete product'installation performed by you I. 'Loss'caused by the failure to order the'concrete product'as required: 4019 a. In the contractual specifications;or b. By accepted industry standards for its specific intended use j. 'Loss'expected or intended from the standpoint of the insured k 'Concrete product'supplied by you SECTION III-LIMITS OF INSURANCE la amended to include the following: 1. The Limits of Insurance as shown and the rules below fix the most we will pay regardless of the number of a. Insureds covered under this insurance; b. 'Concrete rework'projects to which this insurance applies. 'Concrete Rework'Project Limit $50,000 'Concrete Rework'Policy Aggregate Limits $50,000 'Concrete Rework'Deductible $ 1,000 2. The'Concrete Rework'Project Limit shown above is the mosl we will reimburse you for your direct labor expense arising out of any single'concrete rework' project. 3. Subject to 2.above.the'Concrete Rework' Policy Aggregate Limit shown above is the most we will reimburse you for your direct labor expenses for the sum of all'concrete rework-projects. GL-3004(09/11) -9- 4. The 'Concrete Rework' Project Limit and the 'Concrete Rework' Policy Aggregate Limits shall be included within and not be in addition to the General Aggregate Limit or the Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit (whichever applies), as stated in the declarations and as described in41111) SECTION III-LIMITS OF INSURANCE. 5. Our obligation to reimburse you applies only to the amount of your direct labor expense in excess of the 'Concrete Rework' Deductible stated above. This deductible shall apply separately to each 'concrete rework'project. The Limits of Insurance of this coverage apply separately to each consecutive annual period and to any remaining period of less than 12 months, starting with either the beginning of the policy period shown in the Declarations, or the effective date of the endorsement, whichever is less. If the policy period is extended after issuance for an additional period of less than 12 months the additional period will be deemed pad of the preceding period for purposes of determining the Limits of Insurance. SECTION IV-COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS Is amended as follows: Item 2. Duties in The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Suit is deleted and replaced by the following: 2. Dulles in The Event Of Occurrence,Offense,Claim Or Suit a. You must see to it that we are notified prior to completing the 'concrete rework' which may result in labor reimbursement. Notice should include: (1) How,when and where the incident took place; (2) The names and addresses of any witnesses,and (3) The estimated labor expense for the°concrete rework' b. You must promptly take all steps to minimize the expenses involved. e. You must cooperate with us and upon request. assist in enforcing any right of contribution or indemnity against any person or organization. d. You must provide us with proof of loss and any other required documents within 60 days of our request. You must also permit us to examine and copy any of your books and records at any reasonable time. You, your'employees' and your agents must, if we require you to,submit to examination under oath at such times as may be required,and sign a copy of the examination. a. No insureds will,except at their own cost,assume any obligation,or incur any expense without our consent. SECTION V-DEFINITIONS Is amended to add the following: 'Concrete rework"means the alteration,repair,removal or replacement of a'concrete product' 'Concrete product' means any product you directly install consisting of concrete, cement,sand,mortar mix or related materials 'Cosmetic defects' means a superficial or surface detect that does not attest the structural integrity of the 'concrete product' 'Loss'means your direct labor expense associated with a 'concrete rework'project 'Subsidence'means earth movement,including but not limited to: a. Landslide; GL-3084(09/11) -10- b. Mud flow; fily c. Earth sinking; d. Earth rising; e. Collapse or movement of fill; f. Improper compaction; g. Earth settling,slipping,lalling away,caving in,eroding,tilting or shifting; h. Earthquake;,or I. Any other movement of land or earth. T. LOST KEY COVERAGE As it applies to this coverage, SECTION I,COVERAGE A,is amended to include as follows: We will pay those sums, subject to the limits of liability and deductible staled herein, that you become legally obligated to pay as damages due to the loss or mysterious disappearance of keys entrusted to or in the care, custody or control of you or your "employees"or anyone acting on your behalf. The damages covered by this endorsement are limited to the: 1. Actual cost of the keys; 41. 2. Cost to adjust locks to accept new keys;or 3. Cost of new locks,if required,including the cost of installation. Item 2.Exclusions of SECTION I,COVERAGE A,is amended to include the following: 1. Keys owned by any insured,employees of any insured,or anyone acting on behalf of any insured. 2. Any resulting loss of use from the loss or mysterious disappearance of keys;or 3. Any of the following acts by any insured, employees of any insured, or anyone acting on behalf of any insureds: a. Misappropriation; b. Concealment; c. Conversion; d. Fraud;or a. Dishonesty Exclusions 2.j.(3)and 21.(4)of SECTION I,COVERAGE A do not apply to Lost Key Coverage. SECTION III-LIMITS OF INSURANCE is amended to include the following: I. The Lost Key Coverage Occurrence Limit shown below is the most we will pay for each occurrence Mr damages for Lost Kay Coverage provided in this endorsement. GL-3084(09/11) -11- 2. The Lost Key Coverage Policy Aggregate Limit shown below is the most we will pay for all occurrences covered by this endorsement during the policy period. Lost Key Coverage Occurrence Limit $50,000 Lost Key Coverage Policy Aggregate Limit $50,000 Lost Key Coverage Deductible $ 1,000 3. The Lost Key Coverage Policy Aggregate Limit shall be included within and not be in addition to the General Aggregate Limit or the Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit (whichever applies),as slated in the declarations and as described in SECTION III-LIMITS OF INSURANCE. Our obligation under this coverage to pay damages on your behalf applies only to the amount of damages in excess of the Lost Key Coverage Deductible stated above. The deductible applies on an"occurrence" basis. We may pay any part or all of the deductible amount to effect settlement of any claim or"suit" and,upon notification of the action taken,you shall promptly reimburse us for such part of the deductible amount as has been paid by us. U. ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY COVERAGE 1. Exclusion 2.p. Electronic Data of SECTION I, COVERAGE A, is deleted and replaced with the lollowing: 2.p. Damages arising out of the loss of, loss ol use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to manipulate "electronic data"that does not result from physical injury to tangible properly. 2. The following definition is added to SECTION V-DEFINITIONS: "Electronic data" moans information, facts or programs stored as or on, created or used on, or transmitted to or from computer software (including systems and applications software), hard or floppy disks, CD-ROMS, tapes, drives, cells,data processing devices or any other media which are used with electronically controlled equipment. 3. For the purposes of this coverage, the definition of "property damage" in SECTION V — DEFINITIONS is replaced by the following: Property damage"means. a. Physical injury to tangible property,including all resulting loss ol use of that property. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the physical injury that caused it; b. Loss of use of tangible properly that is not physically injured. MI such loss 01 use shall be deemed to occur al the time of the'occurrence' that caused it;or c. Loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to properly manipulate 'electronic data', resulting from physical injury to tangible property. All such loss of"electronic data'shall be deemed to occur at the time of the*occurrence'that caused it. For the purposes of this insurance,'electronic data'is not tangible properly. V. CONSOLIDATED INSURANCE PROGRAM RESIDUAL LIABILITY COVERAGE With respect to 'bodily injury", 'properly damage", or 'personal and advertising injury"arising out of your ongoing operations;or operations included within the"products-completed operations hazard",the policy to41111) GL-3084 109111) -12- which this coverage is attached shall apply as excess insurance over coverage available to you" under a Consolidated Insurance Program (such as an Owner Controlled Insurance Program or Contractors Controlled Insurance Program). Coverage aflorded by this endorsement does not apply to any Consolidated Insurance Program involving a "residential project or any deductible or insured retention, specified in the Consolidated Insurance Program. The following is added to Section V-Definitions "Residential project"means any project where 30%or more of the total square fool area of the structures on the project is used or is intended to be used for human residency. This includes but is not limited to single or multilamily housing, apartments, condominiums, townhouses, co-operatives or planned unit developments and appurtenant structures (including pools, hot tubs, detached garages, guest houses or any similar structures). A "residential project" does not include military owned housing, college/university owned housing or dormitories,long term care facilities, hotels,motels,hospitals or prisons. All other terms,provisions,exclusions and limitations of this policy apply. W. AUTOMATIC ADDITIONAL INSUREDS-MANAGERS OR LESSORS OF PREMISES • SECTION II-WHO IS AN INSURED Is amended to include: Any person or organization with whom you agree in a written contractor written agreement to name as an additional insured but only with respect to liability arising out of the ownership,maintenance or use of that part of the premises, designated in the written contract or written agreement, that is leased to you and subject to the following additional exclusions: This insurance does not apply to: 1. Any"occurrence'which takes place after you cease to be a tenant in that premises. 2. Structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by or on behalf of the additional insured listed in the written contractor written agreement. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary,excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s)which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. X. AUTOMATIC ADDITIONAL INSUREDS - STATE OR GOVERNMENTAL AGENCY OR POLITICAL SUBDIVISIONS-PERMITS OR AUTHORIZATIONS SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include any state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision with whom you are required by written contract, ordinance, law or building code to name as an additional insured subject to the following provisions: This insurance applies only with respect to operations performed by you or on your behalf lur which the state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision has issued a permit or authorization. This insurance does not apply lo: a. "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury' arising out of operations performed for the federal government,state or municipality;or b. °Bodily injury or"property damage included within the"products-completed operations hazard'. GL-3084(09/17) -13- This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary,excess, contingent or on any other basis,unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s)which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualities as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. Y. CONTRACTORS AUTOMATIC ADDITIONAL INSURED COVERAGE-COMPLETED OPERATIONS SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an additional insured any person or organization who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy for completed operations, but only with respect to liability for'bodily injury' or'properly damage caused, in whole or in part, by °your work° al the project designated in the contract, performed for that additional insured and included in the'products-completed operations hazard. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary,excess, contingent or on any other basis,unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s)which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution Iron- such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. Z. ADDITIONAL INSURED-ENGINEERS,ARCHITECTS OR SURVEYORS SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an additional insured any architect, engineer or surveyor who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy,but only with respect to liability for'bodily injury', 'property damage' or'personal and advertising injury caused, in whole or in part by: 1. Your acts or omissions;or 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations performed by you or on your behalf. This includes such architect, engineer or surveyor, who may not be engaged by you, but is contractually required to be added as an additional insured to your policy. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the lollowing additional exclusion applies. This insurance does not apply to 'bodily injury, 'property damage' or 'personal and advertising injury' arising out of the rendering of or the lailure to render any professional services.including: 1. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys,change orders,designs or specifications;or 2. Supervisory,inspection or engineering services. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary,excess, contingent or on any other basis,unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event. this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s)which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be noncontributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. J GL-3084(09111) -14- WW Payton Corporation 08/01/2019 - 08/01/2020 POLICY NUMBER: CLP 3 684 671 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILRY CO 20 10 04 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name 01 Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organization(s) Locatlon(s)01 Covered Operations SEE FORM MAN-00008 TEXAS Information required to complete this Schedule,it not shown above,will be shown in the Declarations. A. Section II - Who Is An Insured is amended to B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional insured the person(s) or additional insureds, the following additional organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with exclusions apply: respect to liability for 'bodily injury', 'property This insurance does not apply to 'bodily injury' or damage' or'personal and advertising injury'caused, 'property damage'occurring alter: in whole or in part,by: 1. Your acts or omissions;or 1. All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your project (other than service, maintenance or behalf; repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured(s) at the location of the additional insured(s) at the location(s) designated covered operations has been completed;or above. 2. That portion of'your work'out of which the injury However: or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than 1. The insurance aortled to such additional insured fl only applies to the extent permitted by law;and anotherm g operationspeor for a principal engageds inf performing for a principal as a part of 2. II coverage provided to the additional Insured is the same project. required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than That which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. 4119 CG 2010 0413 ®Insurance Services Office.Inc.,2012 Page 1 of 2 • C. With respect to the insurance atlorded to these 2. Available under the applicable Limits of Insurance additional insureds,the following is added to Section shown in the Declarations; III-Limits Of Insurance: whichever is less. If coverage provided to the additional insured is This endorsement shall not increase the applicable required by a contract or agreement,the most we will Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. pay on behalf of the additional insured is the amount of insurance: 1. Required by the contract or agreement;or J Page 2 of 2 ©Insurance Services Olfico,Inc.,2012 CG 20 10 04 13 WW Payton Corporation 08/01/2019-08/01/2020 POLICY NUMBER: CLP 3 684 671 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CO 20 37 04 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organization(s) Location And Description Of Completed Operations SEE FORM MAN-00009 TEXAS Information required lo complete this Schedule, it not shown above,will be shown in the Declarations. A. Section II - Who Is An Insured is amended to B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional insured the person(s) or additional insureds, the fallowing is added to Section organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only Ili-Limits Of Insurance: with respect to liability for'bodily injury'or'property If coverage provided to the additional insured is damage'caused,in whole or in part,by'your work' required by a contract or agreement, the most we will at the location designated and described in the pay on behalf of the additional insured is the amount Schedule of this endorsement performed for that of insurance: additional insured and included in the 'products- completed operations hazard'. 1. Required by the contract or agreement;or However: 2. Available under the applicable Limits of Insurance 1. The insurance afforded to such additional shown in the Declarations; insured only applies to The extent permitted by whichever is less. law;and This endorsement shall not increase the applicable 2. If coverage provided to the additional insured is Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. CG 20 37 04 13 e Insurance Services Office,Inc.,2012 Page 1 of 1 WW Payton Corporation Policy#CLP3684671 08/01/2019 -08/01/2020 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG20010413 J THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY - OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART The following Is added to the Other Insurance Condition (2) You have agreed in writing in a contract or and supersedes any provision to the contrary: agreement that this insurance would be Primary And Noncontributory Insurance primary and would not seek contribution from any other insurance available to the additional This insurance is primary to and will not seek insured. contribution from any other insurance available to an additional insured under your policy provided Mat: (1) The additional insured is a Named Insured under such other insurance;and • J CG 2001 0413 ®Insurance Services Office, Inc.,2012 Page 1 of 1 WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY WC 42 0304 8 (Ed.6-14) TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but This waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the Schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization ( X) Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations'. ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3. Premium: Intl . The premium charge for this endorsement shall be VRS percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s) or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium: Incl . This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached and is effective on the date issued unless othenvise stated. (The information below Is required only when this endorsement Is Issued subsequent to preparation of the P01141/4 Endorsement Effective 08/01/2019 Policy No. Endorsement No. Insured WC3684672 Premium Insurance Company Countersigned by WW Payton Corporation 41104 WC420304B (Ed.6-14) Copyright 2014 National Council on Compensation Insurance, Inc.All Rights Reserved. CITY OF PEARLAND PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN Section 00615 PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN AND PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT The undersigned contracted with City of Pearland to furnish in connection with certain improvements to real property located in the City of Pearland, TX and owned by the City of Pearland which improvements are described as follows: In consideration of Pay Estimate No. in the amount of$ the undersigned,on oath, states that all persons and firms who supplied labor and materials to the undersigned in connection with said Project will be fully paid within 30 days of the date of this document by the undersigned for such work through In consideration of the payment herewith made,the undersigned does fully and finally release and hold harmless the City of Pearland and its surety, if any, through the above date from any and all claims, liens, or right to claim or lien, arising out of this Project under any applicable bond, law or statue. It is understood that this affidavit is submitted to induce payment of the above sum and for use by the City of Pearland in assuring the Owner and others that all liens and claims relating to the said Project furnished by the undersigned are paid. Signature Printed Name&Title Company Name State of County of Subscribed and sworn to, before me,this day of , 20 My Commission Expires: Notary Public cro 5-12-12 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS Pane No. 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1 1.01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer 1.02 Contract Documents 1.03 Subcontractor 1.04 Written Notice 1.05 Work 1.06 Extra Work 1.07 Work Day 1.07-I Rain Day 1.07-2 Impact Day 1.08 Calendar Day 1.09 Substantially Completed 1.10 Interpretation of Words and Phrases 1.11 Referenced Standards 1.12 Contract Time 1.13 Construction Inspector 1.14 Balancing Change Order 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 4 2.01 No Warranty of Design 2.02 Right of Entry 1111, 2.03 Ownership of Plans 10-2012 00700-i CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 2.04 Changes and Alterations 2.05 Damages 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 6 3.01 Owner-Engineer Relationship 3.02 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible 3.03 Preliminary Approval 3.04 Inspection by Engineer 3.05 Determination of Questions and Disputes 3.06 Recommendation of Payment 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 8 4.01 Independent Contractor 4.02 Contractor's Understanding 4.03 Laws and Ordinances 4.04 Assignment and Subletting 4.05 Performance and Payment Bonds [and Maintenance Bond] 4.06 Insurance 4.07 Permits and Fees 4.08 Texas State Sales Tax 4.09 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence 4.10 Character of Workers 4.11 Labor, Equipment, Materials, Construction Plant and Buildings 4.12 Sanitation 4.13 Cleaning and Maintenance 4.14 Performance of Work 4.15 Right of Owner to Accelerate the Work 10-2012 00700-ii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 41110 4.16 Layout of Work 4.17 Shop Drawings 4.18 Engineer-Contractor Relationship; Observations 4.19 Observation and Testing 4.20 Defects and Their Remedies 4.21 Liability for Proper Performance 4.22 Protection Against Accident To Employees and the Public 4.23 Protection of Adjoining Property 4.24 Protection against Claims of Subcontractors, Laborers, Materialmen, and Furnishers of Equipment, Machinery and Supplies 4.25 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention 4.26 Indemnification 400 4.27 Losses From Natural Causes 4.28 Guarantee 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 18 5.01 Time and Order of Completion 5.02 Extension of Time 5.03 Hindrances and Delays 5.04 Suspension of Work 5.05 Liquidated Damages for Delay 5.06 Change of Contract Time 5.07 Delays Beyond Owner's and Contractor's Control 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 21 6.01 Discrepancies and Omissions 4111, 6.02 Quantities and Measurements 10-2012 00700-iii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CO 6.03 Estimated Quantities 6.04 Price of Work 6.05 Payments 6.06 Partial Payments 6.07 Use of Completed Portions& Punchlist 6.08 Substantial Completion 6.08-I 6.09 Final Payment 6.10 Correction of Work Before Final Payment 6.11 Correction of Work After Final Payment 6.12 Payments Withheld 6.13 Delayed Payments pr7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 27 7.01 Differing Site Conditions 7.02 Change Orders 7.03 Change Orders 7.04 Request for Work Approval for Work on Non-Work Days 7.05 Minor Changes 7.06 Extra Work 7.07 Time of Filing Claims 8.0 DEFAULT 30 8.01 Default by Contractor 8.02 Supplementation of Contractor Forces 4110, 8.03 Cumulative Remedies & Specific Performance 8.04 Cross-Default 10-2012 00700-iv CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.05 Insolvency 8.06 Contingent Assignment 8.07 Waiver of Consequential Damages 8.08 Termination for Convenience 8.09 Default by Owner 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 35 ATTACHMENT NO. l: WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE Al ATTACHMENT NO. 2: AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE BI ATTACHMENT NO. 3: OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR CI C L 10-2012 00700-v CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 411„ Section 00700 ` GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 OWNER, CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER. The OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER are those persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement. The term ENGINEER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Engineer or Architect identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as a representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the preparation of plans and specifications of this Contract. The term CONSTRUCTION MANAGER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Construction Manager identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the performance of the work of this Contract. The Owner's representative on the project site shall be the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER or ENGINEER as designated. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall consist of all of the documents identified in Article 8 of the Standard Form of Agreement, which documents, excluding such documents as may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement, as referenced in Article 8, shall be bound together in a Project Manual for the Work. All references to the "Contract" or the "Agreement" in these General Conditions of Agreement shall include the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary. and what is required by one shall be binding as if required by all. In the event of any conflict among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern in the following order: (1) Modifications in writing and signed by both parties, including any Change Orders; (2) Standard Form of Agreement; (3) Special Conditions of Agreement; (4) General Conditions of Agreement, including Attachment No. 1 — Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 — Agreement for Final Payment and CONTRACTOR'S Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 — Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor; (5) Addenda, if any; (6) Plans and Specifications referenced or included in the Project Manual; (7) Instructions to Bidders; (8) Bid Proposal; and 08-2018 00700- I of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (9) Exhibits: The following Exhibits, if any, attached hereto, are incorporated herein, and are a part of this Contract: In the event a conflict or inconsistency remains between or within the Contract Documents, or the Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, CONTRACTOR shall provide the greater quantity or better quality, or CONTRACTOR shall comply with the more stringent requirements, as determined by ENGINEER. Terms or phrases used in the Contract Documents with a well-known technical or construction industry meaning shall have such recognized meanings. References to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, shall mean the latest in effect on the effective date of the Contract. unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. 1 .03 SUBCONTRACTOR. The term "subcontractor", as employed herein, includes those entities having a contract with the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor for performance of work on the Project. OWNER shall have no responsibility to any subcontractor for performance of work on the Project contemplated by these Contract Documents, and any such subcontractor shall look exclusively to CONTRACTOR for any payments due subcontractor. 1.04 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person or by electronic means through the Pro-Trak to the individual or to a partner of the partnership or joint venture, or to an officer of the corporation or company for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested, to the last known business address or registered office of such individual,partnership,joint venture or corporation or company, or to the address for giving notices listed in the Standard Form of Agreement. 1.05 WORK. Unless otherwise stipulated, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities or services of any nature whatsoever necessary for the execution and completion of the Work described in the Standard Form of Agreement. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of good quality. The CONTRACTOR shall, if required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well-known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials shall be furnished in strict conformity with the Contract Documents. 1.06 EXTRA WORK. The term `Extra Work", as used in this Contract, shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER,to be performed by the CONTRACTOR to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown in the plans. Extra work shall be authorized in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement. Extra Work items are paid for on an as needed, as authorized basis only. 1.07 WORK DAY: As used herein, a "Work Day" is defined as any Monday through 40, Friday, not a legal holiday, and any Saturday or Sunday specifically approved by the OWNER, in which the CONTRACTOR can perform six or more hours of work per the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR agrees to request specific approval from the Construction Manager or 08-2018 00700-2 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner, in advance, to perform work on Saturdays or Sundays and in so doing agrees to pay all charges and costs for Inspection and or Construction Management services required during the performance of any such approved work. Refer to paragraph 7.04 for procedure to determine cost for Construction Management and Inspection Services for work on non-work days. 1.07-I RAIN DAY: As used herein, is defined as any WORK DAY during which weather related conditions prevent the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items as identified in the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR shall record Rain Days on the Pay Application each month for the review and possible approval by the OWNER. The approved Rain Day is then added to the Contract Time. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) 1.07-2 IMPACT DAY: As used herein, is a day that is added to the CONTRACT TIME by the OWNER by Change Order to extend the Contract Time by one full Work Day. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) Impact Days, once approved by the OWNER, shall extend the Contract Time on a one-to-one basis to replace a Work Day lost to conditions that prevented the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items. Impact Days are added to the Contract Time by Change Order only at the end of the work and then only if, in the opinion of the OWNER, a time extension is warranted due to delays beyond the control of the Contractor and required to complete the work within the Contract Time. 1.08 CALENDAR DAY. A "calendar day" is any day of the week, month or year no days being excepted. Unless otherwise expressly provided, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). I .09 SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED: The terms "Substantially Completed", or "Substantially Complete" or"Substantial Completion" as used in this Contract, shall mean that all major process components of the facility or work have been made suitable for use or occupancy, including appropriate documentation from the equipment suppliers that all of the individual components have been installed in accordance with the specifications and manufacturer's recommendations, the installations have been approved by the ENGINEER and the items have met the start-up and testing requirements of the contract documents or is deemed to be in a condition to serve its intended purpose or requires only minor miscellaneous work and adjustment to achieve Final Completion and Acceptance as determined by the ENGINEER. Upon compliance with the above referenced criteria, ENGINEER shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: designation will be given on components of the Work that must be placed into service prior to the completion of the entire Work. The contractor's One Year Warranty period for these items shall begin on the date of Partial Substantial Completion as designated by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall determine and make all such designations. 1.10 INTERPRETATION OF WORDS AND PHRASES. Whenever the words "directed","permitted", "designated", "required", "ordered", "considered necessary", "prescribed" or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, opinion designation or prescription of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative is intended. Similarly, the words "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory" or words of like import shall mean that no exception is taken by ENGINEER, but does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 08-2018 00700-3 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 610 Whenever in the Specifications or Plans of the Contract Documents, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms or clauses defining the character of the work. 1.11 REFERENCED STANDARDS. No provision of any referenced standard specification, or manual shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, or their consultants, employees, or representatives from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to the Engineer or its consultants, employees, or representatives any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.12 CONTRACT TIME The term Contract Time as used herein, refers to the number of Calendar days provided to complete the work or the date, stated in the Agreement: (i)to achieve Substantial Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with Paragraph 6.09 and as modified as a result of any authorized Extensions. The established Contract Time includes 40 Rain Days per year, based on the average number of rain days per year for the period of June 1898 to December 1996 as recorded by the Alvin Weather Center Record. The Contract Time shall only be extended by (a) the addition of Rain Days equal to the number of actual Rain Days in excess of 40 days per year and (b) the number of Impact Days granted for delays, in the opinion of the Owner, beyond the control of the Contractor. The extension of the Contract Time shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for delays. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR The term "Construction Inspector" here in includes those professionals engaged by the OWNER to ensure CONTRACT work's compliance with the specifications and any applicable statutory requirements. 1.14 BALANCING CHANGE ORDER is a change order executed during the close-out process that may add/remove pay items, or adjust quantities of existing items or remove unused pay items or quantities Balancing Change Orders are used to reconcile the unit cost of the work performed or installed by the Contractor. 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 2.01 NO WARRANTY OF DESIGN. It is understood that the OWNER MAKES NO WARRANTY OF THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY OR SUFFICIENCY OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR ANY OTHER DESIGN DOCUMENTS, AND OWNER HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY SUCH WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. Prior to / commencing each portion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the ` relevant Contract Documents, shall observe conditions at the site affecting the Work, and shall take field measurements of existing conditions related to the Work. Any errors, omissions or 08-2018 00700-4 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 41119 inconsistencies in the Contract Documents noted by the CONTRACTOR, and/or any variance between the Contract Documents and applicable codes, standards or ordinances, shall be promptly reported by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER in writing as a Request for Information. Work performed prior to a Request for Information shall be at the Contractor's risk. If CONTRACTOR fails to perform its obligations under this paragraph, CONTRACTOR shall pay such costs and damages to OWNER as would have been avoided if CONTRACTOR had reported any errors, omissions, inconsistencies or variances in the Contract Documents noted by CONTRACTOR or which should have been noted by a careful study of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the OWNER. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the CONTRACTOR to show that he has complied with the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved modifications thereof and all approved additions and alterations,thereto, as the same shall have been interpreted by the ENGINEER. 2.02 RIGHT OF ENTRY. The OWNER reserves the right to enter the property or location on which the work herein contracted for is to be performed, constructed or installed, for itself or such agent or agents as it may select, for the purpose of inspecting the work, or for the purpose of performing, constructing or installing such collateral work as the OWNER may desire. The OWNER shall have the right to make inspections at all reasonable times, and the CONTRACTOR hereby waives any claims for extension of time and/or compensation for any loss or damage if his work shall be delayed by reason of such inspection, performance, construction or installation of collateral work. 2.03 OWNERSHIP OF PLANS. All plans, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the OWNER shall not be reused on other work and, with the exception of the sets forming the part of the signed Contract Documents, are to be returned to the OWNER on request at the completion of the Work. All plans and models are the property of the OWNER. 2.04 CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations, additions and deletions as the OWNER may see fit, in the Work, including but not limited to changes in line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or specifications for the Work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of construction, without affecting the validity of this Contract and the corresponding Performance and Payment Bonds. If such changes or alterations or deletions diminish the quantity or the value of the Work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for compensation or damages, including lost or anticipated profits on the Work that may be affected. If the amount of Work is increased and the work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this Contract, otherwise, such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Article 7 hereof for Extra Work. In case the OWNER shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any Work already done or material already furnished or used in said Work, then the OWNER shall compensate the CONTRACTOR for any material or labor so used and for any actual loss occasioned by such change due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the Work as originally planned. 2.05 DAMAGES. In the event the OWNER is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or default of the CONTRACTOR, or should the 08-2018 00700-5 of 35 CITY OFPEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR unreasonably delay the progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the OWNER becomes liable, then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss. 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 3.01 OWNER-ENGINEER RELATIONSHIP. The ENGINEER shall serve as the OWNER'S representative during construction. The duties, responsibilities and limitations on the authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents; and the ENGINEER shall not have authority to extend the OWNER's liability or to bind the OWNER for any additional liability of any nature whatsoever without the written consent of the OWNER. Any communications by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR regarding the Work shall be issued through the ENGINEER. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the Work; therefore, written decisions or directions rendered by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be resolved as provided in Article 7. Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the OWNER'S representative shall have the authority to issue written stop work orders whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE. The ENGINEER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR with four (4) copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR shall keep one full size copy of the same constantly accessible on the job site, with the latest revisions noted thereon. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for preserving the Plans and Specifications, timely and accurately updated, for reference and review by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and submittal of redlines during closeout. 3.03 PRELIMINARY APPROVAL. The ENGINEER shall not have the power to waive the obligations imposed under this Contract for the furnishing by the CONTRACTOR of new material of good quality, and for good and workmanlike performance of the Work as herein described, and in full accordance with the Contract Documents, without alteration, deletion or change. No failure or omission of the OWNER'S representative to discover, object to or condemn any non-conforming or defective work or material, or to stop work, shall release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to fully and properly perform the Contract, including without limitation, the obligation to at once remove and properly replace any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance, upon discovery of such non-conforming or defective work or material. Any questioned Work may be ordered taken up or removed for inspection by the ENGINEER prior to final acceptance, and if found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, all expense of removing, inspection and repair or replacement shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR; otherwise the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra Work and shall be paid for by the OWNER, provided that where inspection or approval is specifically required by the Specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the CONTRACTOR proceed with such work without se requesting prior inspection or approval, he shall bear all expense of taking up, removing and replacing this work if so directed by the ENGINEER. 08-2018 00700-6 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3.04 INSPECTION BY ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine if such Work generally meets the essential performance and design features and the technical, functional /or engineering requirements of the Contract Documents, and is in all other respects being performed in compliance with the Contract Documents. However, the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality and/or quantity of the work, nor shall the ENGINEER be in any way responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions or lack of same incident to the Work being performed or any part thereof. The ENGINEER shall use reasonable care to prevent deviation from the intent and substance of the Contract Documents by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work and any part thereof and, on the basis of such on-site observations, will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the CONTRACTOR. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement or any other Contract Document, the ENGINEER shall not be in any way responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractors, agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the Work. 3.05 DETERMINATION OF QUESTIONS AND DISPUTES. In order to prevent delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is agreed that the ENGINEER shall, in all cases, determine the quantities and qualities of the several kinds of Work, which are to be paid for under this Contract. The ENGINEER shall address all questions in relation to said Work and the construction thereof, as well as all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. In the event the ENGINEER shall become aware of or shall receive information that there is a dispute or a possible dispute as to the reasonable interpretation of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, or any other dispute or question, the ENGINEER shall, within a reasonable time, provide a written interpretation of the Contract Documents or a written decision on all questions arising relative to the execution of the Work, copies of which shall be delivered to all parties to the Contract. If the CONTRACTOR or OWNER desires to take exception to any directions, order, interpretation or instructions of the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR or OWNER shall present any such claim to the ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.07. 3.06 RECOMMENDATION OF PAYMENT. The ENGINEER shall review the CONTRACTOR's application for payment and supporting documents, shall determine the amount owed to the CONTRACTOR and shall provide written recommendation to the OWNER for payment to the CONTRACTOR in such amount. Such recommendation of payment to CONTRACTOR shall constitute a representation to the OWNER of the ENGINEER's judgment that the work has progressed to the point indicated, to the best of his knowledge, information and belief; however, such recommendation of an application for payment to CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed an acceptance of any defective or non-conforming Work. Any recommendation of payment by the ENGINEER shall be subject to OWNER's rights to withhold payment under Section 6.12 and as otherwise provided in the Contract. cir 08-2018 00700-7 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.01 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is, and shall remain, an independent contractor, solely responsible for the manner and method of completing the Work under this Contract, with full and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise and control his own employees and to determine the means, method and manner of performing such Work, so long as such methods comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and do not adversely affect the completed improvements or any other property abutting or adjoining the Work area, the OWNER and ENGINEER being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements to the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents. The fact that the OWNER or ENGINEER as the Owner's representative shall have the right to observe CONTRACTOR's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the OWNER and the ENGINEER hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or affect the status of the CONTRACTOR as an independent contractor with respect to either the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative or to the CONTRACTOR's own employees or to any other person, firm or corporation. 4.02 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the CONTRACTOR has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the Work, the general and local conditions, including but not limited to weather, access, lay down and storage areas, and all other matters which in any way affect the Work under this Contract. It is further understood that the CONTRACTOR has satisfied himself as to the terms, meaning, intent and requirements of all of the Contract Documents, and applicable laws, codes, regulations and ordinances. CONTRACTOR hereby warrants and represents that it has taken into consideration all of the foregoing factors, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4.03 LAWS AND ORDINANCES. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state or local laws, codes, ordinances, permits and regulations, regardless of whether the same are adopted before or after the execution of this Contract, which in any manner affect the Contract or the work, and shall indemnify, save and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER against any claim arising out of the violation of any such laws, ordinances and regulations, whether by the CONTRACTOR or his agents, employees, subcontractors or vendors. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the Plans and Specifications are at variance with federal or state laws or codes or the ordinances or regulations of the City, he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the CONTRACTOR performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, codes, ordinances, rules or regulations, or if CONTRACTOR reasonably should have known of any such violation, and without such notice to the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The OWNER is a Political Subdivision of the State of Texas, and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the OWNER may enter into contracts, shall be controlling and shall be considered as part of this Contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. Neither the act 08-2018 00700-8 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 411.1 of OWNER entering into this Contract, nor OWNER's performance hereunder, shall constitute a waiver of any immunity from suit enjoyed by OWNER under applicable law, all such rights and defenses being hereby expressly reserved, notwithstanding any term or provision herein to the contrary. The Code of Ordinances and other applicable regulations of the OWNER shall be deemed to be embodied in this Contract. The prevailing wage rates applicable to this Project shall be either Document 00811 — Wage Scale for Engineering Construction, or Document 00813 —Wage Scale for Building Construction, or both, as set out in the Project Manual. 4.04 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this Contract and that he will not assign, by power of attorney or otherwise, or sublet said Contract, or any rights, duties or obligations arising thereunder, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of the OWNER. and that no part or feature of the Work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the ENGINEER or the OWNER. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to disapprove the subletting of this Contract or any portion hereof on any basis whatsoever. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the Work or materials required in the performance of this Contract shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to the OWNER, as provided for by this Agreement. 4.05 PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND MAINTENANCE BONDS. In the event the Contract Price shall be in excess of $25,000.00, the CONTRACTOR shall execute separate Performance. Payment and Maintenance Bonds, each in the sum of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price, and each in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. If the Contract Price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All required Bonds shall be payable to OWNER and on forms approved by the OWNER, and shall be executed by a corporate surety in accordance with Article 7.19-I of the Texas Insurance Code. It is agreed that the Contract shall not be in effect until such original Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds are delivered to and approved by the OWNER. The cost of the premium for the Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, should Maintenance Bonds be required, shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal. All bonds shall be issued by Texas Department of Insurance approved surety companies. 4.06 INSURANCE. The CONTRACTOR, at his own expense, shall procure, maintain and keep in force throughout the duration of the Work, and throughout the Guarantee Period, insurance as specified in Attachment No. 1 hereto with regard to Workers' Compensation Insurance, and as specified in Attachment No. 3 hereto with regard to all other Insurance. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this Contract, whether performed by the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor,or others for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. 4.07 PERMITS AND FEES. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, and which are legally required at the time bids are received. Permits required by the City of Pearland will be issued as a NO FEE permit. 4.08 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX. Materials incorporated into this project are exempt from State Sales according to provisions of the Texas Tax Code, Chapter 151, Subsection H. 08-2018 00700-9 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit or exemption certificate which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the Work without paying tax at due time of purchase. 4.09 CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE. The CONTRACTOR shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this Contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the ENGINEER as the OWNER'S representative. The superintendent shall represent the CONTRACTOR in his absence and shall act as the agent of the CONTRACTOR, and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the CONTRACTOR is essential to the proper performance of the Work, and lack of such supervision shall be an act of default, and grounds for suspending operations of the CONTRACTOR. The Superintendent cannot be removed from the project without the consent of the Owner; the Superintendent must speak and understand the English language; the Superintendent must be on site when any work on the project is being done, even when a subcontractor is performing the work. The Work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the CONTRACTOR, and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Neither the OWNER nor the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative will be responsible for CIO the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or any of its agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 4.10 CHARACTER OF WORKERS. The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance of the type of work required under this Contract, to do the Work, and agrees that whenever the ENGINEER shall inform him in writing that any worker or workers on the Work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, or in the ENGINEER's opinion, are not using their best efforts for the progress of the Work, such worker or workers shall be discharged from the Work and shall not again be employed on the Work without the ENGINEER's written consent. OWNER reserves the right to bar any person, subcontractor, or supplier found to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or not using their best efforts to progress work or considered to be a threat to the health, safety and welfare to the project or workforce. 4.11 LABOR, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT, AND BUILDINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, services, tools, equipment, machinery, supplies, facilities, utilities and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this Contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that the OWNER shall furnish same; and further, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of construction and any and all parts of the Work, whether the CONTRACTOR has been paid, partially paid or not paid for such Work, until the entire Work is completed and accepted. (ise The building or placement of structures for housing workers or offices, or the erection of tents or other forms of protection, will be permitted only with the ENGINEER's written permission, and at 08-2018 00700- 10 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT such places as the ENGINEER shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Any structures of any nature constructed, placed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection, placement or construction thereof; and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER or OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, placement, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings or structures. 4.12 SANITATION. Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers and others on the Work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the CONTRACTOR in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the ENGINEER, and their use shall be strictly enforced. Any structures of any nature constructed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection or construction thereof, and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER and OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings. 4.13 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep and maintain the premises free from accumulation of debris, trash and waste. The CONTRACTOR shall remove waste, debris and trash at the end of each work day. CONTRACTOR shall remove all such debris, trash and waste, tools, scaffolding and surplus thr materials, and shall leave the Work broom-clean or its equivalent, upon completion of the Work. The Work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute, the OWNER may remove the debris,trash,waste and surplus materials, and charge the cost to the CONTRACTOR. 4.14 PERFORMANCE OF WORK. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with the generally accepted practice for such materials furnished or work completed, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.15 RIGHT OF OWNER TO ACCELERATE THE WORK. If at any time the methods or equipment used by the CONTRACTOR, or the work force supplied are found to be inadequate to achieve the progress required to Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time, the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, may order the CONTRACTOR in writing to supplement its forces and/or equipment, or work shifts or overtime, or otherwise improve its efficiency and rate of progress to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and the CONTRACTOR shall comply with such order, at its own cost and expense. 4.16 LAYOUT OF WORK. Except as specifically provided herein, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out work by means of construction surveying and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER and in conformance with the Contract Documents. 4.17 SHOP DRAWINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own Work or in that of any other contractor, six (6) checked copies, unless otherwise specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules 08-2018 00700- 11 of35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4110 required for the work of the various trades. Contractor will check and approve shop drawings for compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and will so certify by stamp on each drawing prior to submittal to ENGINEER. Any drawings submitted without Contractor's stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned to him for proper submission. The ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, indicating desired corrections. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the ENGINEER, file with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. The ENGINEER's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents, unless he has, in writing, called the ENGINEER's attention to such deviations at the time of the submission, and the ENGINEER has acknowledged and accepted such deviations in writing, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on his ability to perform the required Contract Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and within the Contract Time. Such review by the ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the apparent sufficiency of said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the Contract Documents, and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed that the ENGINEER does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety of either person or property during CONTRACTOR's performance hereunder, and any action taken by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility and liability to comply with the Contract Documents. OWNER, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals, review comments, notes, corrections, schedules and updates, testing results, payment applications, instructions and other communications by means of the OWNER'S Pro-Trak. The OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall each retain such hard copies form this system as are required for their specific record keeping requirements. No documents shall be removed from this system or destroyed except those being replaced by the systems protocols as a latest version document. All requirements for written communications, submittals, comments, instructions or other documents processed by means of this system shall have the same legal or time sensitive status as if they had been hand delivered in hard copy to their intended addressee. 4.18 ENGINEER-CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP; OBSERVATIONS. It is agreed by the CONTRACTOR that the ENGINEER, as the OWNER's representative, shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint such subordinate engineers, representatives or observers as the said ENGINEER may from time to time deem proper to observe the materials furnished and the Work done under this Agreement. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, representatives or observers for the proper observation and examination of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, representatives or observers so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the CONTRACTOR object to any orders by any 08-2018 00700- 12 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 46, subordinate engineer, representative or observer, the CONTRACTOR may, within three (3) days, make written appeal to the ENGINEER for his decision. 4.19 OBSERVATION AND TESTING. The OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe, inspect and test the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation, inspection and testing at any location wherever Work is in preparation or progress. The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the scope of any observation, inspection or testing which may be contemplated by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the Work will be ready for such observation, inspection or testing. The OWNER or the ENGINEER may reject any Work found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such deficiencies, and regardless of whether the ENGINEER has previously accepted the Work through oversight or otherwise. If any Work is covered without approval or consent of the OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for examination, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. In the event that any part of the Work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for the OWNER or the ENGINEER to make observations of such Work or require testing of said Work, then in such event, the OWNER or the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by independent persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the Contract Documents. If any Work, which is required to be inspected, tested or approved, is covered up without written approval or consent of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation and testing, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise provided herein. Any Work which fails to meet the requirements of such tests, inspections or approval, and any Work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective. Such defective Work and any other work affected thereby shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. Neither observations by the OWNER or by the ENGINEER, nor inspections, certifications, tests or approvals made by the OWNER, the ENGINEER or other persons authorized under this Agreement to make such inspections, tests or approvals, shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.20 DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES. It is further agreed that if the Work or any part thereof or any material brought on the site of the Work for use in the Work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the ENGINEER as unsuitable or not in conformity with the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the ENGINEER, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such Work so that 41, it shall be in full accordance with this Contract, It is further agreed that any such remedial action contemplated herein shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. 08-2018 00700- 13 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ihr 4.21 LIABILITY FOR PROPER PERFORMANCE. Engineering construction drawings and specifications, as well as any additional instructions and information concerning the Work to be performed, passing from or through the ENGINEER, shall not be interpreted as requiring or allowing the CONTRACTOR to deviate from the Contract Documents, the intent of such drawings, specifications and any other such instructions being to define with particularity the agreement of the parties as to Work the CONTRACTOR is to perform. CONTRACTOR shall be fully and completely liable and contractually bound, at his own expense, for design, construction, installation and use or non-use of all items and methods incident to the performance of the Contract, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports, shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, similar items or devices used by him during construction, and work performed either directly or incident to construction, and for all loss, damage or injury incident thereto, either to person or property, whether such damage be suffered by the ENGINEER,the OWNER or any other person not a party to this Contract. Any review of Work in progress or any visit or observation during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents by the ENGINEER or OWNER, or any agent, employee or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the Project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for construction or construction processes, or by other means or methods, is agreed by the CONTRACTOR to be for the purpose of observing the extent and nature of Work completed or being performed, as measured against the Contract Documents, or for the purpose of enabling the CONTRACTOR to more fully understand the Contract Documents so that the completed construction Work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR from full and complete responsibility for proper performance of his Work on the Project, including, without limitation, the propriety of means and methods of the CONTRACTOR in performing said Contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plans or other facilities for accomplishing such performance. Any action by the ENGINEER or the OWNER in visiting or observing during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents shall not constitute a waiver of CONTRACTOR'S liability for damages as herein set out. Deviation by the CONTRACTOR from Contract Documents, whether called to the CONTRACTOR's attention or not, shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with said Contract Documents, and further shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of his liability for loss, damage or injury as herein set out. 4.22 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees and persons entering the project site, as well as for the protection of the improvements being erected and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder. The CONTRACTOR shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and others on or near the Work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded, as a minimum, in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall C provide all necessary machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, barricades, fences,traffic control, warning signs and other safety devices. 08-2018 • 00700- 14 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 410 No alcoholic beverages, non-prescription drugs, or unsafe practices shall be allowed on the Work site. CONTRACTOR shall dismiss anyone participating in any of the above from the Work site for the duration of the Project. Only prescription drug uses with a doctor's authorization to perform construction activities shall be allowed on the Work site. Violation of this provision is a default under the Contract. The use, possession, sale, transfer, purchase or being under the influence of alcohol, drugs or any other illegal or unlawful substance by CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's employees, or CONTRACTOR's subcontractors and employees at any time at the Work site or while on company business is prohibited. CONTRACTOR shall institute and enforce appropriate drug testing guidelines and program. All accidents or injuries to CONTRACTOR's employees working on the job site must be reported verbally and in writing to the ENGINEER immediately, and within no more than eight(8)hours. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, in his sole discretion as an independent contractor. Inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative concerning omissions under thus paragraph as the Work progresses, are intended as reminders to the CONTRACTOR of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty by ENGINEER, or OWNER's representative to supervise safety precautions by either the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors. 4.23 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY. The CONTRACTOR shall employ proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way 4111, encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent or adjoining property. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD HARMLESS THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OWNER AND ENGINEER AGAINST ANY CLAIM OR CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, LOSS, COSTS OR EXPENSES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ATTORNEY'S FEES, DUE TO ANY INJURY TO ANY ADJACENT OR ADJOINING PROPERTY, ARISING OR GROWING OUT OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE, LOSS, COST OR EXPENSE IS CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER AND/OR ENGINEER. 4.24 PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT HE WILL PROMPTLY PAY WHEN DUE, AND WILL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ALL CLAIMS GROWING OUT OF THE DEMANDS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, WORKERS, MECHANICS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY AND PARTS THEREOF, EQUIPMENT, POWER TOOLS AND ALL SUPPLIES, INCLUDING COMMISSARY, INCURRED IN THE FURTHERANCE OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS CONTRACT. When so desired by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If the CONTRACTOR fails to do so, then the OWNER may, at the option of the OWNER, either pay directly any unpaid bills of which the OWNER has written notice, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably 08-2018 00700- 15 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4111, sufficient to liquidate any and all such claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payments to the CONTRACTOR shall be resumed in full, in accordance with the terms of this Contract. Any and all communications between any parties under this paragraph shall be in writing. Nothing contained in this paragraph or this Agreement shall create, establish or impose any relationship,contractual or otherwise, between OWNER and any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create, establish or impose any duty upon OWNER to pay or to see to the payment of any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR. 4.25 PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENTED INVENTION. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright, by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner thereof THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DEFEND ALL SUITS OR CLAIMS FOR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND SHALL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF, EXCEPT SUCH SUITS AND CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF A PARTICULAR DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS OR THE PRODUCT OF A PARTICULAR MANUFACTURER OR MANUFACTURERS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED BY THE OWNER; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF CHOICE OF ALTERNATE DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS IS ALLOWED TO THE CONTRACTOR, OR IF CONTRACTOR KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND FAILED TO PROMPTLY NOTIFY OWNER IN WRITING, THEN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF. 4.26 INDEMNIFICATION. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE ENGINEER AND THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY CLAIMS OR DEMANDS OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER MADE BY ANY EMPLOYEE, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS OF CONTRACTOR, OR BY ANY UNION, TRADE ASSOCIATION, WORKER'S ASSOCIATION OR OTHER GROUPS, ASSOCIATIONS OR INDIVIDUALS, ALLEGEDLY REPRESENTING EMPLOYEES OF THE CONTRACTOR, IN ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY INVOLVING, GROWING OUT OF OR ARISING FROM CLAIMS BY SUCH EMPLOYEES FOR WAGES, SALARY, COMPENSATION, BENEFITS, WORKING CONDITIONS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR COMPLAINT OR CLAIM WHICH MAY BE MADE. THE CONTRACTOR, HIS SURETIES AND INSURANCE CARRIERS SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES FROM AND AGAINST ALL DAMAGES, CLAIMS, LOSSES, DEMANDS, SUITS, LIABILITIES, JUDGMENTS AND COSTS OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEY'S FEES AND EXPENSES, AND SHALL BE REQUIRED TO PAY ANY JUDGMENT THEREFOR, WITH COSTS, WHICH MAY BE OBTAINED AGAINST THE OWNER AND/OR THE ENGINEER OR ANY OF THEIR OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM OR ALLEGEDLY ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM THE PERFORMANCE 08-2018 00700- 16 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CPI OF THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH DAMAGES, CLAIM, LOSS, DEMAND, SUIT, LIABILITY,JUDGMENT, COST OR EXPENSE: (A) ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR ALLEGEDLY ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, ANY BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY BY CONTRACTOR; OR (B) IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY, SICKNESS, DISEASE OR DEATH OR INJURY TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY, INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM; AND IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR IS ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF THE CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, THEIR AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES OR ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY ONE OF THEM OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT IT IS CAUSED IN PART OR ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER, ENGINEER AND/OR A PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER. Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in the Agreement to the contrary, in accordance with 4111, the provisions of Section 130.002 of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, CONTRACTOR shall not be obligated to indemnify or hold harmless the ENGINEER, his agents, servants or employees, from liability for damage that is caused by or results from defects in plans, designs or specifications prepared, approved or used by the ENGINEER, or negligence of the ENGINEER in the rendition or conduct of professional duties called for or arising out of any construction contract and the plans, designs or specifications that are a part of the construction contract, and arises from personal injury or death, property injury, or any other expense that arises from personal injury, death, or property injury. This indemnity agreement is a continuing obligation, and shall survive notwithstanding completion of the Work, Final Payment, expiration of the warranty period, termination of the Contract, and abandonment or takeover of the Work. CONTRACTOR's indemnification obligations hereunder shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts, and shall not be limited by any limitation on amounts or coverage of insurance provided or to be provided under this Contract. 4.27 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES. All loss, cost, expense or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the Work to be done or from any unforeseen circumstances in the prosecution of the same, or from the action of the elements, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the Work, shall be sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. 08-2018 00700- 17 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.28 GUARANTEE. The CONTRACTOR hereby guarantees all the Work under the Contract to be free from defects or deficiencies in material in every particular and free from defects or deficiencies in workmanship; and against unusual damage from proper and usual use; and agrees to replace or to re-execute without cost to the OWNER such Work as may be found to be defective, deficient or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, and to make good all damages caused to other work or material, due to such defective Work or due to its required replacement or re-execution. This guarantee shall cover a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion of Work under the Contract, as evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for defective, deficient or non-conforming material or workmanship during the period covered by the guarantee. The one-year period of guarantee will not limit the OWNER'S other rights under common law with respect to any defects, deficiencies or non-conforming Work discovered after one year. If this one-year guarantee conflicts with other warranties or guarantees, the longer period of warranty or guarantee will govern. 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.01 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION. It is the meaning and intent of this Contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to prosecute his Work at such times and seasons, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the Work shall be Substantially Completed as a whole and in 41108 part, in accordance with this Contract and the Contract Time; provided, also, that when the OWNER is having other work done, either by contract or by his own forces,the ENGINEER may direct the time and manner of constructing the Work done under this Contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the OWNER shall be harmonized, and the CONTRACTOR shall fully cooperate and coordinate its Work with OWNER or such other contractors. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, an updated schedule with every pay estimate for review by the ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the Work, with dates on which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. Such schedules shall show completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and/or shall show such recovery efforts as CONTRACTOR intends to undertake in the event Substantial Completion of the Work is delayed. 5.02 EXTENSION OF TIME. The CONTRACTOR agrees that he has submitted his Bid Proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this Project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions as hereinafter set forth, and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this Contract, except when Substantial Completion of the Work has been delayed solely by strikes, lockouts, fires, Acts of God, or by any other cause which the ENGINEER shall decide justifies the delay. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER prompt notice, in writing and within three (3) days of the start of any such delay, of the cause of any such delay, and its estimated effect on the Work and the schedule for cie completion of the Work. Upon receipt of a written request for an extension of the Contract Time from the CONTRACTOR, supported by relevant and all requested documentation, the ENGINEER shall submit such written request, together with his written recommendation, to the 08-2018 00700- 18 of 35 CITY OF PEA RLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OWNER for consideration. If the delay is not attributable in whole or in part to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or suppliers, and if the OWNER determines that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of time under the terms of the Contract, the OWNER shall grant an extension of time for Substantial Completion of the Work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, and such extension of time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy, except as may be otherwise provided herein. No extensions of Contract Time shall be made for delays occurring prior to the Contractor's mobilization as defined in Section 01505 MOBILIZATION. The Contract Time as defined in the Bid Proposal and other sections herein incorporates 40 Rain Days per calendar year or an average of 3.33 days per calendar month. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep record of all weather related delays and to submit the monthly count on each Pay Application. The Owner's Representative shall review and sign off on this record as a part of the Pay Application approval process every month. If, during preparation of the Balancing Change Order, the status of the work progress requires an extension of the Contract Time, Impact Days shall be added to the Completion Date equal to the total number of Weather or Impact Days approved less the original 40 days resident in the original Contract Time. The Addition of Weather or Impact Days will only alter the Contract Time when added by Change Order. If the Work is completed prior to the Completion Date, No Days will be added. The addition of Weather or Impact Days shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole remedy for delays to the completion of the Work and their addition to the Contract Time shall not affect the Contract Price through any "per diem" adjustment to the General Conditions costs, Temporary Facilities costs or any other costs associated with the extension of the Contract Time. 5.03 HINDRANCES AND DELAYS. In executing the Contract, the CONTRACTOR agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all interference, disruption, hindrances and delays incident to such Work, whether growing out of delays in securing material, workmen or otherwise. No claim shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for damages, loss, costs or expense resulting from interference, disruption, hindrances or delays from any cause during the progress of any portion of the Work embraced in this Contract, except where the Work is stopped or suspended by order of the OWNER's representative and such stoppage or suspension is not attributable to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR. 5.04 SUSPENSION OF WORK. OWNER may, without cause, order the CONTRACTOR in writing to suspend the Work, in whole or in part, for such period of time as OWNER may request. The Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be adjusted for any increase in the cost of or the time required for performance of the Work caused by such suspension. No adjustment shall be made to the extent performance was or would have been suspended by a cause for which CONTRACTOR is responsible, or to the extent an adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract Documents. 5.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY: It is understood and agreed that time is of the essence, and that the CONTRACTOR will commence the Work on the date specified herein or in any Notice to Proceed, and will Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, that the time for the Substantial Completion of the Work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that a failure to complete on time will cause damage to the OWNER and that such damages 08-2018 00700- 19 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT cannot be accurately measured or that ascertainment will be difficult. Therefore, the parties agree that for each and every calendar day the Work or any portion thereof shall remain uncompleted after the expiration of the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall pay, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable estimate of OWNER's damages, and not as a penalty,the amount set out in the Standard Form of Agreement. However, the foregoing agreement as to liquidated damages constitutes only an agreement by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as to the amount of damages which the OWNER will sustain by reason of the CONTRACTOR'S failure to complete the work within the Contract Time. Should the OWNER suffer damage by reason of any other breach by CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may recover such actual damages in addition to any liquidated damages due. The OWNER shall have the right to deduct and withhold the amount of any and all such damages whether it be the minimum amount stipulated above or otherwise, from any monies owing by it to said CONTRACTOR, or the OWNER may recover such amount from the CONTRACTOR and the sureties of his bond; all of such remedies shall be cumulative and the OWNER shall not be required to elect any one nor be deemed to have made an election by proceeding to enforce any one remedy. 5.06 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME: The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an adjustment of Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making such claim to the other party and to the ENGINEER promptly, but in no event later than ten (10) days after the event-giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim, along with supporting data, shall be delivered within thirty (30) days of the occurrence and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written representation that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in Contract Time shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. Contractor shall submit, as a minimum, the following data: A. Information showing that the time requested is not included in the existing Contract and in addition to the Contract. B. Information documenting that the number of days requested is accurate for the event. C. Revised, current construction schedule showing that the time requested affects the project's critical path. 5.07 DELAYS BEYOND OWNER'S AND CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL: Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delays beyond the control of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time in an amount equal to the time lost. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Price as a result of such delays. IN NO EVENT SHALL OWNER BE LIABLE TO CONTRACTOR FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM (i) Delays caused by, or within the control of, the CONTRACTOR, or (ii) Delays beyond the control of both parties including, but not limited to. interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, even if such delays are due in part to the negligence, other fault, breach of contract or warranty, violation of the Texas Deceptive Trade Act, or strict liability without regard 08-2018 00700-20 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT to fault of OWNER. An extension of Contract time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for any such delays. Delays attributed to, and within the control of, a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of the CONTRACTOR. 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6.01 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS. If the CONTRACTOR knows or reasonably should have known of any discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, he shall notify the ENGINEER and obtain a clarification by Addendum before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the ENGINEER prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the CONTRACTOR fully understands the Work to be performed and has provided sufficient sums in his Bid Proposal to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5)days prior to the opening of bids. 6.02 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS. No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and/or computed length, area, volume, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. 6.03 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES. This Agreement, including the Contract Documents, and including any estimates contained therein, is intended to convey all Work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of Work to be done and material to be furnished under this Contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and for comparing the Bid Proposals offered for the Work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of Work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this Contract may differ from the estimates and that the items listed or estimated quantities stated, and/or any difference between estimated and actual Work, shall not give rise to a claim by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER for loss, cost,expense, damages, unit price adjustment, quantity differences, unrecovered overhead or lost or anticipated profits, or other compensation. 6.04 PRICE OF WORK. It is agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work described in the Bid Proposal, and Contract Documents, is to be done for the prices bid by the CONTRACTOR and that such prices shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents as interpreted by the ENGINEER, and all costs, expenses, bond and insurance premiums, taxes, overhead, and profit. In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all Work by the CONTRACTOR, and upon the completion of all Work and the delivery of all materials embraced in this Contract in full conformity with the Contract Documents, the OWNER agrees to pay to the CONTRACTOR the prices set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that the Contract is a unit cost agreement, unless stated otherwise, and that the final Contract amount is equal to the unit cost multiplied by the number of units authorized, installed and approved by the Owner. The OWNER does not assume any obligation to pay for any services or material not actually authorized and used. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to receive such prices as payment in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid Work, and for all expenses incurred by him, and for full performance of the Work and the whole thereof in the 08-2018 00700-21 of35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT manner and according to this Agreement, Contract Documents, and the requirements of the ENGINEER. 6.05 PAYMENTS. No payments made or approvals or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the Contract, either in whole or in part, nor shall any certificate, approval or payment be considered as acceptance of defective, deficient or non-conforming Work. CONTRACTOR shall, at any time requested during the progress of the Work, furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with an affidavit showing the CONTRACTOR's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the Work. Before Final Payment is made, the CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the OWNER, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no unpaid claims due subcontractors, suppliers or laborers by reason of any Work under the Contract. Acceptance by CONTRACTOR of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims of whatsoever nature against OWNER, arising out of or related to the Contract, or the Work, or any acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this Contract. 6.06 PARTIAL PAYMENTS. When the Contract Price is a lump sum amount, prior to the first Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review and approval a Schedule of Values, which shall fairly allocate the entire Contract Price among the various portions of the Work and shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the ENGINEER may reasonably require. The Schedule of Values shall follow the trade divisions of the Specifications so far as practicable. Upon approval, this Schedule of Values shall be used by ENGINEER as the basis for reviewing the Contractor's Application for Payment. Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. On or before the tenth day of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER, for approval or correction, an application for partial payment, being a statement showing as completely as practicable, the agreed unit quantities and extended total value of the Work done by the CONTRACTOR up to and including the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all conforming materials to be fabricated into the Work and stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the OWNER or ENGINEER at the Work site only. No payment will be made for materials stored until OWNER has approved in writing storage at the Work site. The ENGINEER shall then review such statement of unit quantities and application for partial payment and the progress of the Work made by the CONTRACTOR and, within ten days after the date ENGINEER receives CONTRACTOR's application for payment, if the application is found to be accurate and correct and the WORK conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall certify the application for partial payment and shall deliver his preliminary certification for payment to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR; or, if the ENGINEER finds that CONTRACTOR's application for payment contains an error or is otherwise disputed, he shall notify CONTRACTOR of such error or dispute, and shall prepare a preliminary certificate for partial payment for the undisputed amount of the application for payment due CONTRACTOR, and deliver it to the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER'S notice to CONTRACTOR that a bona fide dispute for payment exists shall include a list of the specific reasons for nonpayment. All payment applications made by CONTRACTOR and delivered to ENGINEER and all verifications and certification of such applications shall be made and transmitted within the Pro- Trak system and signed with the appropriate electronic signatures as provided for in the software. Such applications for payment shall not be considered complete unless accompanied by the 08-2018 00700-22 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR'S Partial Waiver of Lien and Payment Affidavit, Section 00615, duly executed by an authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR and reflecting the correct corresponding amount of the payment application. The OWNER shall then pay the CONTRACTOR, within thirty (30) days of the date of ENGINEER's receipt of the application for payment, the undisputed balance due, less applicable retainage, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained or withheld by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR may submit a corrected application for payment after its receipt of the ENGINEER's notice of error or dispute, and such corrected application for payment shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER and disputed or paid under the same procedure and within the same time limits set out above. As a condition of any progress payment under this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall execute and deliver to ENGINEER and OWNER a full release of all claims, direct or indirect, at law or in equity, arising out of or related to the Work to date, excluding retainage or any claims previously submitted as required under the terms of the Contract, and specifically identified and excluded by CONTRACTOR in the release. OWNER shall be entitled to retain from each progress payment five percent (5%) of the amount thereof. Such retainage shall be retained until Final Completion and satisfaction of all conditions for Final Payment. It is understood, however, that in case the whole Work be near to completion, as certified by the ENGINEER, and some unexpected or unusual delay occurs, through no neglect or fault on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may, upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER, pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER'S option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work, and thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive, at the OWNER'S option, payment of the balance due him under the Contract for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, subject to OWNER's rights to otherwise withhold or retain payments, and subject to the conditions set forth under"6.09 FINAL PAYMENT." The Owner at its option and in compliance with Texas law may reduce retainage to less than the above-stated percentages. 6.07 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS & PUNCHLIST. The OWNER shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired; but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within three (3) days of OWNER's taking possession, give OWNER written notice of same, and CONTRACTOR may be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as may be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. 6.08 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER AND ENGINEER, by letter executed by a duly qualified officer of CONTRACTOR that in CONTRACTOR's opinion, the Work of the Contract, or an agreed portion thereof, is "Substantially Complete". Such notification shall include a list of all outstanding or incomplete items. Upon receipt, and within a reasonable time thereafter, of such notice, the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall jointly perform a walk-through and inspection of the Work to determine the status of all or the identified portion of the work, and the ENGINEER shall prepare a detailed 08-2018 00700-23 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT list of unfinished, incomplete, defective and/or non-conforming Work ("Punchlist"). If the ENGINEER determines that the Work is Substantially Complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall issue to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a Certificate of Substantial Completion. OWNER shall have seven (7) days after receipt of Certificate to make written objection to the ENGINEER as to any provision of the Certificate or the attached list of non-conforming work. If ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not Substantially Complete, ENGINEER will, within fourteen (14) days, notify CONTRACTOR of the reason he believes the Work is not Substantially Complete. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities, pending final payment and acceptance, with respect to security, maintenance, utilities and damage to the Work, except as otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. NEITHER THE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK, NOR THE OMISSION OF AN ITEM FROM THE PUNCHLIST, SHALL EXCUSE THE CONTRACTOR FROM PERFORMING ALL OF THE WORK UNDERTAKEN, WHETHER OF A MINOR OR MAJOR NATURE, AND THEREBY COMPLETING THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall establish the time period within which CONTRACTOR shall complete the Work for Final Acceptance by the Owner and ENGINEER. 6.08-I OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, for security requirement reasons. OWNER may establish an access procedure to facilitate CONTRACTOR's uninterrupted access to the Work for the purposes of completing and correcting all items on the Punchlist in an expeditious manner. pr 6.09 FINAL PAYMENT. Final payment of the Retainage withheld from the Contract Price shall be made by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR at such time as: (a) the Work, including all Change Orders and including all Punchlist work, has been fully completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents; (b) the Contract has been fully performed except for the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work during the warranty period set forth in the Contract Documents, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; (c) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER; (d) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Consent of Surety, if any, to final payment; (e) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a complete set of As-Built Drawings, reflecting all deviations from the Plans, Specifications and approved shop drawings in the Work actually constructed, and delivers all maintenance and operating manuals and/or instructions; 08-2018 00700-24 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (t) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all building certificates required prior to occupancy and all other required inspections/approvals/acceptances by city, county, state governmental entities or other authorities having jurisdiction; (g) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER assignments of all guarantees and warranties from subcontractors, vendors, suppliers or manufacturers, as well as names, addresses and telephone numbers of contacts for each subcontractor, vendor, supplier or manufacturer; (h) CONTRACTOR removes all equipment, tools, temporary facilities, surplus materials and rubbish from the site, and final cleans the site to OWNER's satisfaction; (i) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Full and Final Release and Affidavit of Bills Paid in the form attached hereto as Attachment No. 2, executed by CONTRACTOR; (j) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all other documentation required to be submitted to OWNER pursuant to the Contract Documents, including but not limited to any special guarantees or warranties, operation and maintenance manuals, etc'. in each case in a form satisfactory to OWNER as determined in OWNER's sole discretion; and 4111, (k) The Final Application for Payment has been approved by the ENGINEER and OWNER. Acceptance of Final Payment by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than any claims previously made in writing by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, and still unsettled, and except for claims arising out of third party actions, cross-claims and counterclaims. No interest shall be due or payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR on any sums retained or withheld by OWNER pursuant to the terms or provisions of the Contract Documents, except as otherwise provided by applicable law. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion nor the Final Payment nor possession or acceptance of the Work shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of its obligation for correction of defective or non- conforming Work, or for fulfillment of any warranty, which may be required by law or by the Contract Documents. 6.10 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from OWNER's premises all materials, equipment or Work which is defective or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, whether actually incorporated in the Work or not, and CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, promptly replace such materials, equipment or Work with other materials conforming to the requirements of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of CONTRACTOR or other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If CONTRACTOR does not remove and replace any such unsuitable Work within ten (10) business days after receipt of a written notice from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, the OWNER may 4111/ remove, replace and remedy such work at CONTRACTOR's expense. 08-2018 00700-25 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.11 CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT. If within one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, at its sole cost, correct it and any other work affected thereby promptly after receipt of a written notice from OWNER to do so. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to building contents, when such damage results from the CONTRACTOR's use of faulty materials or defective workmanship; to the extent such damage is not covered by OWNER's insurance. This warranty period shall renew and recommence for each corrected item of Work upon completion of the remedial work. This time period for correction by CONTRACTOR is in addition to, and not in lieu of, all warranties or remedies, which exist at common law or by statute. These warranty obligations shall survive the termination of this Contract, and shall be enforceable by a decree of specific performance, in addition to such other rights and remedies available to OWNER at law or in equity. 6.12 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. The OWNER may withhold, or on account of subsequently discovered evidence nullify and demand immediate repayment of, the whole or part of any certificate for payment or payment, to such extent as may be necessary to protect OWNER from loss on account of: (a) Defective or non-conforming Work not remedied; (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims; (c) Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for material or labor; (d) Damage to another contractor, OWNER, existing improvements on the site, or to adjacent or adjoining property; (e) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract amount; (f) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; (g) Failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to execute any and all documents, releases or other documents presented to the CONTRACTOR for execution, as provided for herein or otherwise; (h) Liquidated or other damages due to late completion; and/or (i) Any breach by CONTRACTOR of this Contract or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. When the above grounds are removed to OWNER's satisfaction,the withheld payment shall be made promptly. If the said causes are not so remedied, OWNER may remedy the same for CONTRACTOR's account, charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR and deduct such cost 08-2018 00700-26 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 411, from the Contract Sum or from any payments due or to become due under any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 6.13 DELAYED PAYMENTS. Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRACTOR when payment is due in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, any interest due CONTRACTOR for late payments shall accrue and be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and payment of such interest shall fully liquidate and compensate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment. Should OWNER fail to pay CONTRACTOR an undisputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, CONTRACTOR shall give the notice required and comply with the provisions of Section 2251.051 of the Texas Government Code, and shall thereupon be entitled to the rights and remedies provided therein. 7.1) EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 7.01 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS. During the progress of the work, if subsurface, latent physical conditions or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the contract or from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work provided for in the contract,the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER's Representative in writing within three(3)calendar days of the specific differing conditions before the site is disturbed and before the affected work is performed. (a) Upon written notification,the ENGINEER will investigate the conditions, and if it is determined that the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost or time required for the performance of any work under the contract, an adjustment, excluding anticipated profits, will be made and the contract modified in writing accordingly. The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of the determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment which results in a benefit to the CONTRACTOR will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has provided the required written notice. (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause for any effects caused on unchanged work. 7.02 SUSPENSIONS OF WORK ORDERED BY THE ENGINEER. If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended by the ENGINEER in writing for seven (7) calendar days and the CONTRACTOR believes that additional compensation and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension,the CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request for adjustment to the ENGINEER within seven (7)calendar days of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for such adjustment. (a)Upon receipt,the ENGINEER will evaluate the CONTRACTOR's request. If the ENGINEER agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of the CONTRACTOR, its suppliers, or subcontractors at any approved tier, and not caused by weather, the ENGINEER will make an adjustment(excluding profit) and modify the contract in writing accordingly. The CONTRACTOR will be notified of the ENGINEER's determination, in writing, whether or 08-2018 00700-27 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has submitted the request for adjustment within the time prescribed. (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause to the extent that performance would have been suspended by any other cause, or for which an adjustment is provided or excluded under any other term or condition of this contract. 7.03 CHANGE ORDERS. Without invalidating this Agreement,the OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions to the Work; such changes will be authorized by Change Order to be prepared by the ENGINEER for execution by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. The Change Order shall set forth the basis for any change in Contract Price,as hereinafter set forth for Extra Work,and any change in Contract Time,which may result from the change. 7.04 In accordance with paragraph 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S request to work weekends, the Owner's Construction Manager shall, upon receipt of written notice by the CONTRACTOR of the need to conduct work on otherwise non-Work Days, prepare a cost estimate for providing Construction Management and Inspection services during the requested period and submit this to both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If approved by both parties the Construction Manager shall prepare a Deductive Change Order in the amount stated in the estimate for the signature of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER for inclusion in the next Pay Application. The Deductive Change Order must be signed and executed by both the OWNER and CONTRACTOR prior to start of work on any non-Work Day. 7.05 MINOR CHANGES. The ENGINEER may authorize minor changes in the Work not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in Contract Price or time. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor changes authorized by the ENGINEER involves Extra Work or entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall give notice of same by written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order, with a copy to OWNER. Any such notice and request by the CONTRACTOR shall be given prior to beginning the changed work. CONTRACTOR's commencement of any minor change in the Work prior to such written notice and request shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims for an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time arising out of or related to such changed work. 7.06 EXTRA WORK. It is agreed that the CONTRACTOR shall perform all work when presented with a written Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order signed by the ENGINEER, subject, however, to the right of the CONTRACTOR to require written confirmation of such Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order by the OWNER. It is agreed that the basis of compensation or adjustment to the CONTRACTOR for work either altered, added or deleted by a Change Order or Work Change Directive, or for which a claim for Extra Work is made, shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: Method (A) --By Contract unit prices applicable to the work, if any; or `' Method (B) --By agreed unit prices or agreed stipulated lump sum price; or 08-2018 00700-28 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT cir Method (C)--If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) can be agreed upon before the Extra Work is commenced, then the CONTRACTOR shall be paid the "Actual Field Cost" of the work plus: a) For subcontractors performing work mark-up shall be limited to fifteen percent, ten (10%) for the subcontractor plus five (5%) for the General Contractor or b) For the General Contractor alone, self-performing the extra work, without subcontractor, the mark-up shall not exceed ten percent (10%), as full and final compensation for the Extra Work and all costs and expenses, direct or indirect, arising out of or related thereto. In the event said Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work is performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "Actual Field Cost" is hereby defined as the cost to the CONTRACTOR of all workers, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, trucks, rentals of machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred together with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, plus all necessary incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a rateable proportion of premiums on Performance and Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by law or ordinance, or the Contract Documents, plus all payments to subcontractors for such work. The ENGINEER may direct the form in which accounts of the "Actual Field Cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made available to the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER or OWNER may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using one hundred percent (100%), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America where practicable. The mark-up of the "Actual Field Cost" to be paid to the CONTRACTOR, shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the "Actual Field Cost" as herein defined, save that where the CONTRACTOR'S field office must be maintained solely on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "Actual Field Cost." No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered by the ENGINEER in a written Work Order. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the CONTRACTOR to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the Contract Time, he shall make written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order authorizing such Extra Work within ten (10) days of ENGINEER's orders or instructions, otherwise the orders or instructions will be considered minor changes. The issuance of a Work Order by the ENGINEER shall not constitute or be construed as an agreement or acknowledgement by the ENGINEER that the work which is the subject of the Work Order is Extra Work outside the scope of the Contract Work, but shall merely constitute a direction to the 08-2018 00700-29 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR to perform the work, and the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the work, and shall keep an accurate account of the "Actual Field Cost" thereof, as provided under Method (C). Upon completion of the alleged Extra Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within ten (10) days submit his claim to the ENGINEER by proper certification and attestation, on forms provided by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall render a written decision on CONTRACTOR's claim within ten (10) days. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. If the ENGINEER shall fail to respond in writing to CONTRACTOR's claim within thirty (30) days of the date of submission, or if CONTRACTOR shall dispute or object to ENGINEER's decision on any claim, and CONTRACTOR fails to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0, within sixty (60) days after the date of submission to the ENGINEER, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, the CONTRACTOR shall lose and forfeit his right to make such claim for Extra Work at any later date, and all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed waived, forfeited and forever barred. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 7.07 TIME OF FILING CLAIMS. Except as otherwise provided herein, all questions of dispute or adjustment shall be made within the Pro-Trak system and filed with the ENGINEER within three.(3) days after the ENGINEER has given any directions, order or instruction to which the CONTRACTOR desires to take exception. The ENGINEER shall reply within thirty (30) days to such written exceptions, and render his final decision in writing. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. In case the CONTRACTOR should desire to appeal from the ENGINEER's decision, the CONTRACTOR may request a meeting between representatives of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for the purposes of appealing the ENGINEER's decision directly to the OWNER, such meeting to occur within ten (10) days after the date of the CONTRACTOR's request, or such longer period as may be agreed to by the parties in writing. If the CONTRACTOR shall still be aggrieved after a meeting with the OWNER and/or his representative, the CONTRACTOR shall have sixty (60) days after the date of the meeting, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0. In the event the CONTRACTOR shall fail, for any reason,to timely file a Request for Mediation, the OWNER shall be released of any and all liability, and the CONTRACTOR's failure to timely file a Request for Mediation shall constitute a waiver, forfeit and final bar of all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 8.0 DEFAULT 8.01 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR. In case the CONTRACTOR should abandon and fail or refuse to resume Work within five (5) days after written notification from the OWNER (111110 or the ENGINEER, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the orders of the ENGINEER when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents, or if the CONTRACTOR otherwise defaults on its obligations under the Contract, OWNER shall have the right, if it so elects and 08-2018 00700-30 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT without prejudice to any other rights it may have, after giving five (5) days written notice of default to CONTRACTOR and any surety, to terminate the Contract or any part thereof and/or to take over or cause others to take over the Work or any part thereof, and to complete such Work for the account of CONTRACTOR. Where Performance and Payment Bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds shall be directed to complete the Work in conjunction with the notice of default, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the CONTRACTOR. After receiving said notice of default,the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within no more than three (3) days, remove from the Work any machinery, equipment, or tools then on the job, not intended for incorporation into the Work. Should CONTRACTOR fail to promptly remove such machinery, equipment or tools, OWNER may remove such machinery, equipment or tools and store same at CONTRACTOR's expense; return such machinery, equipment or tools to their purported owner; or otherwise dispose of such machinery, equipment or tools as OWNER sees fit. Any materials, supplies and/or equipment delivered for use in the Work, may be used in the completion of the Work by the OWNER or the surety on the Performance Bond, or another contractor in completion of the Work; it being understood that the use of such equipment, supplies and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the Work and be reflected in the final settlement. Where there is no Performance Bond or in case the surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinabove provided for within ten (10) days after the service of such notice, then the OWNER may provide for completion of the Work in either of the following elective manners: 4119 (a) The OWNER may thereupon employ such force of workers and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the OWNER may deem necessary to expeditiously complete the Work, and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said CONTRACTOR, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, then said CONTRACTOR shall be credited with the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by such CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such excess to the OWNER upon demand; or (b) The OWNER, under sealed bids, under the times and procedures provided for by law, may let the contract for completion of the Work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this Contract. In case of any increase in cost to the OWNER under the completion contract, as compared to what would have been the cost under this Contract, such increase shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR, and the amount of such increase may be deducted by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such increase to the OWNER 08-2018 00700-31 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL, CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT upon demand. However, should the cost to complete any such completion contract prove to be less than what would have been the cost to complete under this Contract, the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall be credited therewith. In the event of a default by CONTRACTOR, no further payments shall be made to CONTRACTOR under the Contract until the Work is Finally Completed. When the Work shall have been Finally Completed,the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be so notified. A complete itemized statement of the Contract accounts, certified by the ENGINEER as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the CONTRACTOR and his surety, whereupon the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement. The OWNER, prior to incurring an obligation to make payment hereunder, shall have such statement of completion attested to by the CONTRACTOR and the surety as accurate, and in exchange for payment of the sum stated therein, the OWNER shall be entitled to a full and final release of any claims or demands by the CONTRACTOR or the surety. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the OWNER had the work been completed by the CONTRACTOR under the terms of this Contract, or when the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the OWNER, then all machinery, equipment, tools or supplies left on the site of the Work shall be turned over to the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety. Should the cost to complete the Work exceed the Contract Price, and the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety fail to pay the amount due the OWNER within the time designated above, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies which are the property of CONTRACTOR on the site of the Work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the CONTRACTOR and his surety at the respective addresses designated in the Contract, provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the CONTRACTOR and his surety, subject only to the duty of the OWNER to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of such notice, the OWNER may sell such property, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the CONTRACTOR and his surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the OWNER may elect. The OWNER shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, which remain on the Work, and belong to persons other than the CONTRACTOR or his surety, to their reputed owners. 8.02 SUPPLEMENTATION OF CONTRACTOR FORCES. If CONTRACTOR at any time shall, in OWNER'S sole opinion, fail to furnish skilled workers, suitable materials, supplies or adequate equipment sufficient for the prompt, timely and diligent prosecution of the Work in accordance with OWNER's direction, OWNER shall have the right, without prejudice to the exercise of other remedies for the same default and without fully taking over the Work, to supplement CONTRACTOR's forces and to expedite delivery of and to procure and furnish such workers, materials, tools, supplies or equipment for CONTRACTOR's account by employing other contractors and suppliers engaged in the same class of work and charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR, said cost to be deducted from sums due or to become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER or any parent, (1111/ subsidiary or affiliate of OWNER. 08-2018 00700-32 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.03 CUMULATIVE REMEDIES & SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE. All rights and IkW remedies of OWNER, under the terms of the Contract and/or available at law or in equity, are cumulative. In the event CONTRACTOR or any of its subcontractors, vendors or suppliers fails or refuses for any reason to provide timely manufacture, fabrication, delivery, installation, erection, construction or completion of any supplies, materials, expendables, equipment, machinery, accessories or appurtenances to be furnished hereunder, CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that such items are required, necessary, essentially unique to the Project and the Work and will cause irreparable harm to OWNER and the Project if not furnished in accordance with the Contract, and OWNER shall have the right to obtain a decree of specific performance and mandatory injunctive relief from any Court of competent jurisdiction to ensure the timely furnishing of such items. 8.04 CROSS-DEFAULT. If, for any reason, CONTRACTOR is declared in default and/or terminated by OWNER under any other agreement with OWNER, whether related to the Project or not related to the Project, OWNER shall have the right to offset and apply any amounts which might be owed to OWNER by CONTRACTOR under any other such agreements against any earned but unpaid amounts owing to CONTRACTOR by OWNER under the Contract, any retainage earned by CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any unearned, unpaid amount under the Contract. 8.05 INSOLVENCY. It is recognized that if CONTRACTOR becomes a debtor in voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy proceedings, makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, such events could seriously impair or frustrate CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Accordingly, it is agreed that should CONTRACTOR become a debtor in bankruptcy, either voluntary or involuntary, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing within twenty-four (24) hours of the filing with the bankruptcy court. Further, it is agreed that upon occurrence of any one or more such events, OWNER shall be entitled to request of CONTRACTOR or its successors, trustees or receivers, adequate assurances of future performance. In the event such adequate assurances are not given to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER within seventy-two (72) hours of such request, OWNER shall have the right to immediately invoke the remedies of this Section 8 or as provided by law. Pending receipt of such adequate assurances of such future performance, OWNER may proceed with the Work on a temporary basis and deduct the costs, plus reasonable overhead and profit, from any amounts due or which may become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER. In this regard, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that delays in performance could result in more damages to CONTRACTOR than would be sustained if OWNER failed to exercise such remedies. 8.06 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT. CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to OWNER, all of CONTRACTOR's rights under and interest in any and all subcontracts and/or purchase orders entered into by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this Agreement, such assignment to become effective upon CONTRACTOR's default under this Agreement or OWNER's termination of this Contract, and OWNER's acceptance of such assignment. Upon CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of this Contract, OWNER may, in the event there is no performance bond for the Contract, or in the event the performance bond surety fails to complete the Contract, or if OWNER otherwise so elects in its sole discretion, accept such assignment by written notice of such acceptance to CONTRACTOR and subcontractor, and may require subcontractors to perform all of the then unperformed duties and obligations under the subcontract, for the direct benefit of OWNER. In the event OWNER requires such performance by a subcontractor, then OWNER 08-2018 00700-33 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT shall be obligated to pay such subcontractor any amounts due and owing under the terms of the subcontract/purchase order, at the subcontract prices and rates, and subject to any rights of withholding or offset and other terms and conditions of the subcontract, for all work properly performed by such subcontractor, to the date of OWNER's acceptance and thereafter. OWNER's liability in this connection, however, shall not exceed the amount obtained by subtracting all payments made by CONTRACTOR to subcontractor from the Subcontract Price at the time of CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall include a provision in its subcontracts that allows such assignment and allows OWNER to take these actions, and further provides that in the event of CONTRACTOR's termination for default, the subcontractor agrees to give the OWNER or its agent the right to inspect all books and records of subcontractor relating to the Work. 8.07 WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. CONTRACTOR expressly waives any and all claims for consequential damages against OWNER arising out of or related to this Contract, or any other agreements between CONTRACTOR and OWNER, including, but not limited to, claims for damages incurred by CONTRACTOR for principal office expenses, including the compensation of personnel stationed there, losses of financing, bonding capacity, business and reputation, and claims for lost profit, whether on this Contract or otherwise. 8.08 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE. OWNER may at its sole discretion, upon five (5) days written notice to CONTRACTOR, terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, if and when OWNER determines that it is in the best interest of OWNER to do so. Upon receipt of such written notice from OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall cease all terminated Work and take reasonable precautions to protect and preserve such work, and shall take all reasonable measures after consultation with OWNER to terminate or assign to OWNER all subcontracts, purchase orders or other commitments related to the Work or the Project on terms and conditions acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR will be paid for all Work performed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, based upon the Contract Price and the percentage of completion on the date of termination, and less amounts previously paid, subject to any reasonable backcharges attributable to CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Contract and further subject to the other terms of this Contract regarding payment. In no event will CONTRACTOR receive or be entitled to any payment or compensation whatsoever for interruption of business or loss of business opportunities, any other items of consequential damages, for overhead or loss of profits on the unperformed Work and/or services and unfurnished materials or for any intangible, impact or similarly described cost, damages or expense, and under no circumstances shall the total sum paid to or received by CONTRACTOR under this Contract exceed the Contract Price. The compensation provided herein shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy arising out of a termination for convenience. 8.09 DEFAULT BY OWNER. In case the OWNER shall default on its material obligations under this Contract, other than OWNER's failure to pay CONTRACTOR a disputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, as addressed by Section 6.13 of this Agreement, and shall fail or refuse to cure, or to commence and diligently pursue cure of such default within fifteen (15) days after written notification by the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR may suspend or wholly abandon the Work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of the Work that have not been included in payments to the CONTRACTOR and have not been incorporated into the Work. And thereupon, the ENGINEER shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the CONTRACTOR, which estimate shall include the value of all Work actually completed by 08-2018 00700-34 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT said CONTRACTOR (at the Contract Prices), the value of all partially completed Work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this Contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the CONTRACTOR to carry the whole Work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The ENGINEER shall then make a final statement of the balance due the CONTRACTOR by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the OWNER and all other sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement, and shall present the same to the OWNER, and OWNER's payment of said sum to the CONTRACTOR, on or before thirty (30) days after OWNER's receipt of such statement, shall satisfy any and all rights, claims or causes of action of CONTRACTOR arising out of or related to such default by OWNER, and shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such default. A disputed or unilateral claim by the Contractor cannot by itself constitute a default hereunder. 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION Any dispute or pending claim or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall not excuse or relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations under the Contract, and CONTRACTOR shall diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to, the Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to any other dispute resolution process as may be selected by OWNER. Unless mutually agreed otherwise the mediation shall be conducted by a third party who will be selected by agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, and Request for Mediation shall be filed with the other party. The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. If a claim, dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the work of a subcontractor or supplier, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such subcontractor or supplier as a party to any mediation proceeding between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts and/or purchase orders related to the Work a specific provision whereby the subcontractor or supplier consents to being joined in mediation between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the work of such subcontractor or supplier. This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas and shall be considered performable in Brazoria County, Texas, for venue purposes. Further, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR stipulate that venue for any dispute resolution proceeding involving or touching upon the Contract other than the conduct of an arbitration hearing shall be in Brazoria County, Texas, or, if such choice of venue is prohibited or unenforceable by law, shall be held in the county where the Project is located. CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in the event OWNER seeks to enforce any provision of this Contract whether by arbitration or other dispute resolution process. Further, in the event OWNER defends any claim instituted by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, whether in arbitration or other dispute resolution process, CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in defending such claim provided OWNER is the prevailing party, in whole or in part, in such proceeding. 08-2018 00700-35 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. I TO GENERAL CONDITIONS WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. DEFINITIONS: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC8I, TWCC-82, TWCC-83 or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the Project. Duration of the Project includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the contractor's/person's work on the Project has been completed and the Project warranty period has expired. Persons providing services on the project includes persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with due contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, motor carriers and owner- operators, (as defined at Section 406.121 of the Texas Labor Code), leasing companies, and employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the OWNER prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. E. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each subcontractor or other person providing services on a project, and provide to the OWNER: 4111, (I) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, so the OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 05/2007 00700-A I CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR and prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, of any changes that materially affect the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. NOTICE REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,too: (I) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; (2) provide to the CONTRACTOR, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the Project: 05/2007 00700-A2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (3) provide the CONTRACTOR,prior to the end of the coverage period,a new certificate of coverage, showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the Project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage,prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts,to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 1. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project. that the coverage agreements will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR, which entitles the OWNER to pursue all rights and remedies available to it under the Contract,at law or in equity, if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 05/2007 00700-A3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 2 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE In consideration of the Final Payment under that certain contract between [Contractor's Company Name] (hereafter "CONTRACTOR") and the City of Pearland (hereafter "OWNER") for the Project known as FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion - Phase 2 (the"Contract"), the CONTRACTOR makes the following representations to OWNER, either individually if a proprietorship, or jointly and severally by all general partners if a partnership, or if a corporation, by action of the president and secretary of said corporation, as duly authorized by appropriate action of the stockholders and/or board of directors of said corporation, their signatures hereon constituting a representation under oath by said individuals that they have the authority to execute this Agreement for and on behalf of the said corporation: I. The undersigned CONTRACTOR represents to OWNER that the Application for Payment for the Final Payment under the Contract, and the final Change Order issued under the Contract if any, whether or not modified, corrected or changed in some way by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER, a copy of which are attached hereto and marked Exhibit "A", are true, correct and accurate, and that CONTRACTOR has received payment in full for all other Applications for Payment submitted under the Contract, and that CONTRACTOR has been fully compensated for all labor, materials, equipment and/or services furnished in connection with the Contract, except for the Final Payment. 2. It is agreed and stipulated by the undersigned CONTRACTOR that upon the receipt of Final Payment in the amount as set out on the attached Application for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, by execution of this instrument of release, does, therefore, RELEASE and FOREVER DISCHARGE OWNER of and from all manner of debts, claims, demands, obligations, suits, liabilities and causes of action of any nature whatsoever, at law or in equity, in contract or in tort, now existing or which may hereafter accrue, arising out of or related to the Contract, any Change Orders or Work Orders, the Work, or any labor, materials, equipment or services furnished by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR, acting by and through the person or persons whose names are subscribed hereto, does solemnly swear and affirm that all bills and claims have been paid to all materialmen, suppliers, laborers, subcontractors, or other entities performing services or supplying materials or equipment, and that OWNER shall not be subject to any bills, claims, demands, litigation or suits in connection therewith. 4. It is further specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a part of the Contract, and it is also specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement shall not act as a modification, waiver or renunciation by OWNER of any of its rights or remedies as set out in the Contract itself, but this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a supplement thereto for the additional protection of OWNER. 05/2007 00700-B 1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4110 SIGNED and EXECUTED this, the_day of , 20_ CONTRACTOR: By: Signature Print Name: Title: [If CONTRACTOR is a proprietorship, owner must sign; if a partnership, each general partner must sign; if a corporation, the following language should be used.] SIGNED and EXECUTED this,the day of 20_by , a Texas corporation, under authority granted to the undersigned by said corporation as contained in the Charter, By-Laws or Minutes of a meeting of said corporation regularly called and held. CONTRACTOR: By: President ATTEST: Corporate Secretary (Corporate Seal) [This form is for use by either a proprietorship or a partnership. In the event CONTRACTOR is a partnership or ajoint proprietorship, additional signature lines should be added for each individual.] 4111, 05/2007 00700-B2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the person or persons whose name(s)are subscribed to the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release,who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: I (We) am (are)the person(s) who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and I (we) have read the facts and statements as therein set out and the representations as made therein, and I (we) state that the above and foregoing are true and correct. CONTRACTOR - Affiant SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me,the day of 20 . Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: [This form is for use in the event CONTRACTOR is a corporation.] 07/2006 00700-B3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME,the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the persons who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment mid Contractor's Sworn Release, whose names are set out above, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: We each are the persons whose names are subscribed above, and hold respectively the offices in the corporation as set out above, and each state under oath that we have the authority to execute this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release for and on behalf of said corporation, pursuant to authority granted to us in the Charter of said corporation, the By-Laws of said corporation and/or the Minutes of said corporation; and the facts, statements and representations as set out in the instrument to which this Affidavit is attached,are true and correct. SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me this, the_day of 20 Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: 07/2006 00700-B4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO.3 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS ` OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR Definitions. For purposes of this Agreement: 1.1 Owner Parties. "Owner Parties" means (a) the City of Pearland, its successors and assigns, and the Engineer, (b) any officers, employees, or agents of such persons or entities,and (c) others as required by the Contract Documents, if any. 1.2 Contractor. "Contractor" shall mean the vendor providing the service or work to be performed under this Agreement. 1.3 Subcontractor. "Subcontractor" shall include subcontractors of any tier. 1.4 ISO. "ISO"means Insurance Services Office. 2. Contractor Insurance Representations to Owner Parties 2.1 It is expressly understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required herein: 2.1.1 represent Owner Parties' minimum requirements and are not to be construed to void or limit the Contractor's indemnity obligations as contained in this Agreement nor represent in any manner a determination of the insurance coverages the Contractor should or should not maintain for its own protection; and 2.1.2 are being, or have been, obtained by the Contractor in support of the Contractor's liability and indemnity obligations under this Agreement. Neither the requirements as to insurance to be carried as provided for herein, the insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company carrying insurance of the Contractor, nor the failure of any insurance company to pay claims accruing, shall be held to affect, negate or waive any of the provisions of this Agreement. 2.2 Failure to obtain and maintain the required insurance shall constitute a material breach of, and default under, this Agreement. If the Contractor shall fail to remedy such breach within five (5) business days after notice by the Owner, the Contractor will be liable for any and all costs, liabilities, damages and penalties resulting to the Owner Parties from such breach, unless a written waiver of the specific insurance requirement(s) is provided to the Contractor by the Owner. In the event of any failure by the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Agreement, the Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance, at the Contractor's expense, provided that the Owner shall have no obligation to do so and if the Owner shall do so, the Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages. 411, 10-2012 00700-CI CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3. Conditions Affecting All Insurance Required Herein 3.1 Cost of Insurance. All insurance coverage shall be provided at the Contractor's sole expense. 3.2 Status and Rating of Insurance Company. All insurance coverage shall be written through insurance companies authorized to do business in the state in which the work is to be performed and rated no less than A-: VII in the most current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. 3.3 Restrictive, Limiting, or Exclusionary Endorsements. All insurance coverage shall be provided to the Owner Parties in compliance with the requirements herein and shall contain no endorsements that restrict, limit, or exclude coverage required herein in any manner without the prior express written approval of the Owner. 3.4 Limits of Liability. The limits of liability may be provided by a single policy of insurance or by a combination of primary and umbrella policies, but in no event shall the total limits of liability available for any one occurrence or accident be less than the amount required herein. 3.5 Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal, or Material Reduction in Coverage. All insurance coverage shall contain the following express provision: `r In the event of cancellation, non-renewal, or material reduction in coverage affecting the certificate holder, thirty (30) days prior written notice shall be given to the certificate holder by certified mail or registered mail, return receipt requested. 3.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The Contractor hereby agrees to waive its rights of recovery from the Owner Parties with regard to all causes of property and/or liability loss and shall cause a waiver of subrogation endorsement to be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on all insurance coverage carried by the Contractor, whether required herein or not. 3.7 Deductible/Retention. Except as otherwise specified herein, no insurance required herein shall contain a deductible or self-insured retention in excess of $25,000 without prior written approval of the Owner. All deductibles and/or retentions shall be paid by, assumed by, for the account of, and at the Contractor's sole risk. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. 4. Maintenance of Insurance. The following insurance shall be maintained in effect with limits not less than those set forth below at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter as required: 10-2012 00700-C2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance 4.1.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of all locations and operations of the Contractor, including but not limited to liability assumed under this contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract). Defense shall be provided as an additional benefit and not included within the limit of liability. 4.1.2 Form. Commercial General Liability Occurrence form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CG 0001 0798 or its equivalent). 4.1.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with limits of not less than: Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Product-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury Limit $1,000,000 4.1.4 Required Endorsements a. Additional Insured. Additional insured status shall be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on any of the following: i. ISO form CG 20 10 11 85; or ii. ISO form CG 20 26 11 85; or iii. a combination of ISO forms CG 20 33 10 01 and CG 20 37 tool; or iv. any form providing equivalent protection to Owner. b. Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limit. The aggregate limit shall apply separately to this Agreement through use of an ISO CG 25 03 03 97 endorsement or its equivalent. c. Notice of Cancellation. Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5,above. d. Personal Injury Liability. The personal injury contractual liability exclusion shall be deleted. e. Primary and Non-Contributing Liability. It is the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all insurance required herein shall be primary to all insurance available to the Owner Parties. The obligations of the Contractor's insurance shall not be affected by any other insurance available to the Owner Parties and shall seek no contribution from the Owner Parties' insurance, whether primary, excess contingent, or on any other basis. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be endorsed to provide such primary and non- contributing liability. 411,11 f. Waiver of Subrogation. as required in 3.6, above. 10-2012 00700-C3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1.5 Continuing Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (I) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to Owner stating Work completion date. 4.2 Auto Liability Insurance 42.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto (including owned,hired, and non-owned). 4.2.2 Form. Business Auto form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CA 0001 or its equivalent). 4.2.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 4.2.4 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.3 Employer's Liability Insurance 4.3.1 Coverage. Employer's Liability Insurance shall be provided as follows: 4.3.2 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than: Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 each accident and each disease. 4.3.3 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation,as required in 3.6, above. 4.4 Umbrella Liability Insurance 4.4.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall be excess over and be no less broad than all coverages described above and shall include a drop-down provision for exhaustion of underlying limits. 4.4.2 Form. This policy shall have the same inception and expiration dates as the commercial general liability insurance required above. 10-2012 00700-C4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4111, 4.4.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $5,000,000. 4.4.4 Continuing Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.5 Professional Liability Insurance 4.5.1 Coverage. The Contractor shall provide professional liability insurance for any professional design or engineering drawing required by the work. Such insurance shall indemnify the Owner from claims arising from the negligent performance of professional services of any type, including but not limited to design or design/build services as part of the Work to be performed. 4.5.2 Form. This insurance shall include prior acts coverage sufficient to cover all services rendered by the Contractor and by its consultants under this Agreement. It is recognized that this coverage may be provided on a Claims-Made basis. 4120 4.5.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 4.5.4 Continuing Professional Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount for at least one (I) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.6 Builder's Risk 4.6.1 Insureds. Insureds shall include: a. Owner, General Contactor and all Loss Payees and Mortgagees as Named Insureds; and b. subcontractors of all tiers in the Work as Additional Insureds. 10-2012 00700-CS CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 41010 4.6.2 Covered Property. Such insurance shall cover: a. all structure(s) under construction, including retaining walls, paved surfaces and roadways, bridges, glass, foundation(s), footings, underground pipes and wiring, excavations, grading, backfilling or filling; b. all temporary structures (e.g., fencing, scaffolding, cribbing, false work, forms, site lighting, temporary utilities and buildings) located at the site; c. all property including materials and supplies on site for installation; d. all property including materials and supplies at other locations but intended for use at the site; e. all property including materials and supplies in transit to the site for installation by all means of transportation other than ocean transit; and f. other Work at the site identified in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached. Form a. Coverage shall be at least as broad as an unmodified ISO Special form, shall be provided on a completed-value basis, and shall be primary to any other coverage insurance available to the insured parties, with that other insurance being excess, secondary and non- contributing. b. No protective safeguard warranty shall be permitted. c. Required coverage shall further include: Additional expenses due to delay in $ TBD completion of project (where applicable) ii. Agreed value Included without sublimit iii. Damage arising from error, omission or Included without sublimit deficiency in construction methods, design, specifications, workmanship or materials, including collapse iv. Debris removal additional limit 25%of direct damage loss v. Earthquake (where applicable) $TBD vi. Earthquake sprinkler leakage (where $TBD applicable) vii. Expediting expenses $TBD viii. Flood (where applicable) $TBD ix. Freezing Included without sublimit x. Mechanical breakdown, including hot & Included without sublimit Ccold testing(where applicable) xi. Notice of cancellation, non-renewal or Included 10-2012 00700-C6 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CPO material reduction—60 days prior written notice to each insured xii. Occupancy clause, as required in F, Included below xiii. Ordinance or law Included without sublimit xiv. Pollutant clean-up and removal $TBD xv. Preservation of property Included without sublimit xvi. Replacement cost Included xvii. Theft Included without sublimit xviii. Waiver of subrogation as required in G, Included below. 4.6.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided in an amount equal at all times to the full replacement value and cost of debris removal for any single occurrence. 4.6.4 Deductibles. Deductibles shall not exceed the following: a. All Risks of Direct Damage, Per $5,000 Occurrence, except b. Delayed Opening Waiting Period 5 Days c. Flood, Per Occurrence $25,000 or excess of NFIP if in Flood Zone A, thW BorV d. Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler $25,000 Leakage, Per Occurrence 4.6.5 Termination of Coverage. The termination of coverage provision shall be endorsed to permit occupancy of the covered property being constructed so long as such occupancy does not exceed 20% of the usable area of the property. This insurance shall be maintained in effect, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, until the earliest of the following dates: a. the date on which all persons and organizations who are insureds under the policy agree that it shall be terminated; b. the date on which final payment, as provided for in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached,has been made; or c. the date on which the insurable interests in the Covered Property of all insureds other than Contractor have ceased. 10-2012 00700-C7 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 161110 4.6.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The waiver of subrogation provision shall be endorsed as follows: a. A waiver of subrogation shall be provided in favor of all insureds. b. The waiver of subrogation provisions shall be endorsed as follows: Should a covered loss be subrogated, either in whole or in part, your rights to any recovery will come first, and we will be entitled to a recovery only after you have been fully compensated for the loss. 5. Intentionally left blank. 6. Evidence of Insurance 6.1 Provision of Evidence. Evidence of the insurance coverage required to be maintained by the Contractor, represented by certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements issued by the insurance company or its legal agent, and must be furnished to the Owner prior to commencement of Work and not later than fifteen (15) days after receipt of this Agreement. New certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall be provided to the Owner prior to the termination date of the current certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements. 6.2 Form 6.2.1 All property insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 28,"Evidence of Property Insurance". 6.2.2 All liability insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 25,"Certificate of Insurance". 6.3 Specifications. Such certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall specify: 6.3.1 The Owner as a certificate holder with correct mailing address. 6.3.2 Insured's name, which must match that on this Agreement. 6.3.3 Insurance companies affording each coverage, policy number of each coverage, policy dates of each coverage, all coverages and limits described herein, and signature of authorized representative of insurance company. 6.3.4 Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number listed. 6.3.5 Additional insured status required herein. 6.3.6 Amount of any deductibles and/or retentions. 6.3.7 Cancellation, non-renewal and material reduction in coverage notification as required by this Agreement. Additionally, the words "endeavor to" and "but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any Cif kind upon Company, it agents or representatives" shall be deleted from the cancellation provision of the ACORD 25 certificate of insurance form. 10-2012 00700-CB CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.3.8 Designated Construction Project Aggregate Limits required herein. 6.3.9 Personal Injury contractual liability required herein. 6.3.10 Primary and non-contributing status required herein. 6.3.11 Waivers of subrogation required herein. 6.4 Required Endorsements. A copy of each of the required endorsements shall also be provided. 6.5 Failure to Obtain. Failure of any Owner Party to demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of any Owner Party to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. 6.6 Certified Copies. Upon request of any Owner Party, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a certified copy of all insurance policies required herein within ten (10) days of any such request. Renewal policies, if necessary, shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the expiration of the previous policy. 6.7 Commencement of Work. Commencement of Work without provision of the required certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements, or without compliance with any other provision of this Agreement, shall not constitute a waiver by any Owner Party of any rights. The Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, of prohibiting the Contractor or any subcontractor from performing any Work until such certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements are received and approved by the Owner. 7. Insurance Requirements of Contractor's Subcontractors 7.1 Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by all subcontractors (or provided by the Contractor on behalf of subcontractors) to cover operations performed under any subcontract agreement. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modification in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. The Contractor shall maintain certificates of insurance from all subcontractors containing provisions similar to those listed herein (modified to recognize that the certificate is from subcontractor) enumerating, among other things, the waivers of subrogation, additional insured status, and primary liability as required herein, and make them available to the Owner upon request. 7.2 The Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to its property on the site, including tools and equipment, and shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to or vandalism, theft, burglary, pilferage and unexplained disappearance of property. Any insurance covering the Contractor's or its subcontractor's property shall be the Contractor's and its subcontractor's sole and complete means or recovery for any such loss. To the extent any loss is not covered by said insurance or subject to any deductible or co-insurance, the Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. Should the Contractor or its subcontractors choose to self insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor hereby waives, and shall cause its 10-2012 00700-C9 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 411100 subcontractors to waive, any claim for damage or loss to said property in favor of the Owner Parties. 8. Use of the Owner's Equipment. The Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Owner's equipment only with express written permission of the Owner's designated representative and in accordance with the Owner's terms and condition for such use. If the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers utilize any of the Owner's equipment for any purpose, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts or similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and be liable to the Owner Parties for any and all loss or damage which may arise from such use. 9. Release and Waiver. The Contractor hereby releases,and shall cause its subcontractors to release, the Owner Parties from any and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which the Contractor and/or its subcontractors might otherwise now or hereafter possess resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered by insurance, whether required herein or not, or which should have been covered by insurance required herein, including the deductible and/or uninsured portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by the Contractor and/or its subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement. (11111, 4111111 10-2012 00700-CO CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT �. Section 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The following Special Conditions modify the General Conditions, Document 00700. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Special Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE I DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 Add the following paragraph to the end of Article 1.01: The OWNER'S representative on the project site is: telephone: 281. 652. The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is: telephone: The CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR is: telephone: ARTICLE 4 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.05 Add the following paragraph to Article 4.05: A Maintenance Bond in accordance with Document 00612 of the Project Manual is required for this Project. The cost of this bond shall be included in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid Proposal. Attachment No. 3 To General Conditions, Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor, Article 4.6 Builder's Risk—Builder's Risk Insurance is Not Required for this project. ARTICLE 5 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.08 Add Article 5.08: The Contract Time as defined in the bid and other sections of the Contract Documents includes a certain number of rain days. Based on the Alvin Weather Center Records, the average annual rain days from June 1898 to December 1996 is 40 days calculated from all precipitation days of record. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep a record of rain days at the site. The record of rain days must be accepted and signed by the City Inspector monthly, and shall be reported on the monthly pay estimate submittal. At the end of the contract,the CONTRACTOR will be credited only for 46, 08/2018 00800- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT the number of accepted rain days that exceed 40 rain days per year, proportionate to the original Contract Time. General Notes: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities requires CONTRACTOR to provide high speed interne[ access in the Field Office. BIDDER is Required to provide either a Field Office or any interne[ access for this project. All other requirements remain and will be required per the section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for all Traffic Control Documents.Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for procurement of Traffic Control Documents prior to permitting. Contractor is to keep a minimum of one lane open at all times, in both directions. No lane closures to extend beyond the defined work day. Contractor Will be required to provide an on-site construction office for the duration of this project. END OF SECTION L C 08/2018 00800-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Section 00811 WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION 1.01 In accordance with the Prevailing Wage law on Public Works (Article 2258 of the Texas Government Code),the public body awarding the contract does hereby specify the rates shown in Table 00811-A following to be the general prevailing rates in the locality in which the work is being performed. 1.02 This prevailing wage rate does not prohibit the payment of more than the rates stated. 1.03 The wage scale for engineering construction is to be applied to all site work greater than five (5) feet from an exterior wall of new building under construction or from an exterior wall of an existing building. (Attach the current wage rates. Number the pages 00811-2, 00811-3, etc.) 16188. 10-2012 00811 - 1 of l General Decision Number: TX190054 01/04/2019 TX54 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20180080 State: Texas Construction Type: Heavy County: Fort Bend County in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS Including Water and Sewer Lines (Does Not Include Flood Control) Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.60 for calendar year 2019 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.60 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2019. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a) (1) (ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate) . The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1 (a) (2)-(60) . Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/04/2019 * SFTX0669-001 04/01/2017 Rates Fringes SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers) $ 29.03 15.84 SUTX2005-020 06/14/2005 Rates Fringes CARPENTER $ 14.38 0.00 00811-2 41.110 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER $ 11 .37 1.13 ELECTRICIAN $ 18.40 1.34 Formbuilder/Formsetter $ 13.35 1.17 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING $ 11.29 0.00 Laborers: Common $ 8.95 0.00 Landscape $ 7.35 0.00 Mason Tender Cement $ 9.96 0.00 Pipelayer $ 10.31 0.91 PIPEFITTER $ 17.00 0.04 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR: Backhoe $ 12.08 0.00 Bulldozer $ 10.44 0.00 Crane $ 12.67 0.45 Excavator $ 16.74 0.00 Front End Loader $ 10.68 1.42 Grader $ 12.20 1.48 Tractor $ 12.38 1.51 TRUCK DRIVER $ 12.28 0.98 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member for person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii) ) . 00811-3 'r The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local) , a survey rate (weighted average race) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate) . Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e. , Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. 4110 Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those 00811-4 classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1. ) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2. ) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2. ) If the answer to the question in 1. ) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7) . Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the 00811-5 interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc. ) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3. ) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board) . Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4 . ) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION C 00811-6 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. # Date: [mm dd, yyyy] [NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Please read this entire section carefully; edit, add, modify as appropriate and/or necessary for your project; coordinate all changes with the City prior to issuance and; DELET THIS TEXT BOX PRIOR TO PRINTING.] PROJECT: [Project name; project limits] BID NO.: [200#-###] BID DATE: [Date; time] FROM: [Responsible engineer] [Title] [Firm name] [Firm address] To: Prospective Bidden and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: [Insert as needed] SPECIFICATIONS: [Insert as needed] CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: [Insert as needed] END OF ADDENDUM NO. [#] [Responsible engineer] [Title] 4,02-22-12 00900- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 CV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 04/2008 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK Section 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A summary of the Work to be performed under this Contract, work by Owner, Owner furnished products, Work sequence, future Work, Contractor's use of Premises, and Owner occupancy. 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A Work of the Contract is for the construction of: vertical turbine booster pump and motor replacement, motor control center replacment, diesel generator and appurtenances replacement, HVAC and duct replacement at CMU building, fiber optic installation/termination, and associated civil, mechancial, electrical, instrumentation, and controls for improvements. B This project includes removing two existing 75 HP vertical turbine high service booster pumps, inverter duty motors, with associated piping and appurtenances and installation of two proposed 150 HP vertical turbine high service booster pumps, inverter duty motors, with associated piping and appurtenances. Pumps are to be installed in existing suction barrels unless Owner authorizes barrel replacement. C This project includes removing one 150 HP vertical turbine high service booster pump motor that is not inverter duty and replacement with inverter duty motor. D This project includes demolition of existing motor control center and replacement with motor control center that includes five 150 HP variable frequency drives and a new automatic transfer switch. E Supplemental bid item for replacement of suction barrels shall only be authorized by the Owner if the field-measured dimensions (by Contractor) of the existing suction barrels for Pumps 1 and 2 are found to be different from the known suction barrel dimensions installed at Pumps 3, 4, and 5 and/or deemed to be unsuitable for the proposed pumps. F This project includes removing existing 300kW diesel generator with diesel tank, enclosure, and appurtenances and installation of 800kW diesel generator with diesel tank, enclosure, and appurtenances. Existing 300kW diesel general with diesel tank, enclosure, and appurtenances is to be delivered to City of Pearland Public Works Building as directed by Owner. C 08/2016 01100- I of 3 CITY OFPEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK G This project includes removing existing HVAC system with duct and appurtenances and installation of new HVAC system with duct and appurtenances 111) at existing CMU electrical building. H This project includes installation of approximately 2000 LF of bored 4-inch HDPE conduit with four I" inner ducts, including ground boxes and a crossing of TxDOT right-of-way. One fiber optic cable (single-mode 96 fiber) will be installed between the existing pump building and an existing ground box in TxDOT right-of-way (Shadowcreek Parkway) shall be supplied and installed, including terminations at each end. Work includes rigid metal conduit and overhead routing/penetrations at existing electrical building. 1 This project includes providing all electrical, instrumentation, controls, and programming to improvements that are currently being constructed in a separate construction contract by Others. Work by Others that will connected to in this Contract includes mixers installed in three ground storage tanks, as well as appurtenances for a third ground storage tank (motorized actuator for 18" butterfly inlet tank fill control valve and tank level controls). Modifications to the existing disinfection system are not part of this contract. K See Sheets CI, C5-C7, M2, E3, and EIS for limits of work. L Contractor to field verify existing yard piping, valves, electrical, and appurtenances and notify City of Pearland and Engineer of any discrepencies from the information shown on the plans. M No partial or complete plant shutdowns are anticipated to be required. Contractor will be required to submit proposed work plan, including provisions to minimize impacts if shutdowns of any kind are deemed to be required, for Owner and Engineer approval. Contractor shall schedule project coordination meeting with Owner and Engineer to identify allowable shutdown time, based on when work is planned to be scheduled. N The pump station is a critical component of the City's water distribution system and must stay in active service throughout the entire construction duration. As a result, no more than one pumping unit (or the associated piping, motor, starter, and other components) may be taken out of service at a time unless approved otherwise by the Owner. O Hatch (formerly Shrader Engineering) shall provide all programming for this project under the programming allowance included in the bid form. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A N/A 1.04 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS J 08/2016 01100-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK A N/A 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A Phase A - Contractor shall provide all electrical, instrumentation, controls, and programming to bring the third ground storage tank and all three tank mixers online and fully operational. All Phase A work must be completed within 90 calendar days from notice to proceed, unless approved otherwise. The Owner reserves the right to enforce liquidated damages as described in Section 00500 if good faith efforts are not made to complete the Phase A work within this time. B Phase B: Contractor shall complete all other remaining work in this Contract. C Contractor to submit project schedule to Engineer & Owner for approval as specified in Section 01350—Submittals. D Contractor shall coordinate the Work with the Engineer and Owner as specified in Section 01310 -Coordination and Meetings. 1.06 FUTURE WORK A N/A 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A Comply with procedures for access to the site and Contractor's use of rights-of- way as specified in Section 01140-Contractor's Use of Premises. B Contractor shall be responsible for all utilities required for construction. 1.08 OWNER OCCUPANCY A Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate the Owner's operations. Coordinate Contractor's activities with Engineer. B Schedule Work to accommodate this requirement. 2.0 PRODUCTS -NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION thw 08/2016 01100-3of3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES Section 01140 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A General use of the Project Site including properties inside and outside of the limits of construction, work affecting roads, ramps, streets and driveways and notification to adjacent occupants. B References to Technical Specifications: 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2 Section 01730—Cutting&Patching 3 Section 01555 —Traffic Control &Regulation 4 Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 5 Section 01720—Field Surveying 6 Section 02980—Pavement Repair 7 Section 02770—Curbs, Curb& Gutter, &Headers 8 Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill,& Embankment Materials 9 Section 02922—Sodding I O Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding ♦• 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.4 LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A Confine access,operations,and storage areas to limits of construction as shown on the Plans provided by Owner as stipulated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement;trespassing on abutting lands or other lands in the area is not allowed. B Contractor may make arrangements,at Contractor's cost,for temporary use of private properties,in which case Contractor and Contractor's surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against claims or demands arising from such use of properties outside of the limits of construction. I. Improvements to private properties made for the Contractor's use mustbe removed upon completion of the Work. a. No fill material may be placed in temporary work areas or on adjacent private properties without the written permission of the Engineer or the issuance of a Fill Permit by the City of Pearland or other governing entity. C Restrict total length which materials may be distributed along the route of the construction at any one time to 1,000 linear feet unless otherwise approved by Engineer. 012018 01140- 1 of4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.5 PROPERTIES OUTSIDE OF LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A If Contractor's means and methods require the acquisition of Temporary Construction Easements or any access to private property not already included in the above, such access and documentation along with any costs involved shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B Altering the condition of properties adjacent to and along the limits of construction will not be permitted unless authorized by the Engineer and property owner(s) as noted above. C Means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures which will result in damage to properties or improvements in the vicinity outside of the limits of construction will not be permitted without temporary or permanent easements as determined by the Engineer. D Any damage to properties outside of the limits of construction shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. E Contractor shall protect or replace all property corners, monuments or other demarcations disturbed,damaged or lost as a result of his activities. The replacement of these devices shall be properly documented to the satisfaction of the City by a Registered Public Land Surveyor with copies delivered to the Owner or private property owner. 1.6 USE OF SITE A Obtain approvals of governing authorities prior to impeding or closing public roads or streets. Do not close consecutive intersections simultaneously B Notify Engineer 48 hours prior to closing a street or a street crossing. Permits for street closures are required in advance and are the responsibility of the Contractor. C Maintain access for emergency vehicles including access to fire hydrants. D Avoid obstructing drainage ditches or inlets; when obstruction is unavoidable due to requirements of the Work, provide grading and temporary drainage structures to maintain unimpeded flow. E Locate and protect private lawn sprinkler systems which may exist on rights-of-ways within the Project Site. Repair or replace damaged systems to condition equal to or better than that existing at start of the Work. F When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting&Patching. G Fires are not permitted on the Project Site. 01/2018 01140-2 of CITY OF PEABLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.7 NOTIFICATION TO ADJACENT OCCUPANTS A Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the Work of the proposed construction and time schedule. Notification shall be 24 hours, 72 hours and 2 weeks prior to work being performed within 200 feet of the homes or businesses. B Include in notification names and telephone numbers of two representatives for resident contact,who will be available on 24-hour call. Include precautions which will be taken to protect private property and identify potential access or utility inconvenience or disruption. C Submit proposed notification to Engineer for approval. Consideration shall be given to the ethnicity of the neighborhood where English is not the dominant language. Notice shall be in an understandable language. 1.8 EXCAVATION IN STREETS AND DRIVEWAYS A Avoid hindering or needlessly inconveniencing public travel on a street or any intersecting alley or street for more than two blocks at any one time, except by permission of the Engineer. B Obtain the Engineer's approval when the nature of the Work requires closing of an entire street. Permits required for street closure are the Contractor's responsibility. Avoid unnecessary inconvenience to abutting property owners. Remove surplus materials and debris and open 1000 feet or less for public use as work in that block is complete. D Acceptance of any portion of the Work will not be based on return of street to public use. E Avoid obstructing driveways or entrances to private property. F Provide temporary crossing or complete the excavation and backfill in one continuous operation to minimize the duration of obstruction when excavation is required across drives or entrances. G Provide barricades and signs in accordance with Section 01555 —Traffic Control & Regulation. 1.9 CLEAN-UP A Maintain Project Site in a neat and orderly manner. B Perform daily clean-up in and around construction zone of dirt,debris,scrap materials, other disposable items. C Leave streets, driveways, and sidewalks broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of each work day. D Promptly remove barriers,signs,and components of other control systems that are no 01/2018 01140-3 of CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES longer being utilized. E Dispose of waste and excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. 1.10 RESTORATION A Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre-construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on the Plans. B Repair/Replace removed or damaged pavement in accordance with Section 02980— Pavement Repair and removed or damaged curbs,gutters,and headers in accordance with Section 02770—Curbs, Curb & Gutter, & Headers. Repair/Replace with like materials to match existing style, lines, grades, etc., unless otherwise directed by Engineer. C Repair turf areas which become damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. D Level with bank sand or topsoil,conforming to Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill,& Embankment Materials, as approved by the Engineer. E Provide sodding in areas of residential land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02922— Sodding. Use only block sodding;do not use spot sodding or sprigging. Nied F Provide hydromulch seeding in areas of commercial, industrial or undeveloped land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding. G Water and level newly sodded areas with adjoining turf using steel wheel rollers appropriate for sodding 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2018 01140-4 of CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES LO GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for measurement and payment of Work. B Conditions for nonconformance assessment and nonpayment for rejected products. C References to Technical Specifications: See Bid Proposal Sheet D Reference Standards: 1. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1.02 AUTHORITY A Units and methods delineated in this Section are intended to complement the criteria of the Technical Specifications and Section 00300—Bid Proposal. B In the event of conflict, the unit specified for Bid Items in Section 00300 — Bid (111, Proposal shall govern. ` • Measurements and quantities submitted by the Contractor will be verified by the Engineer. D Contractor shall provide necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required by Engineer to verify quantities. 1.03 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A Quantity and measurement estimates stated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal are for contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work, authorized and verified by Engineer shall determine payment as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B If the actual Work requires greater or lesser quantities than those quantities indicated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, provide the required quantities at the unit prices contracted except as otherwise stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement or in executed Change Order. 1.04 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A Measurement by Weight: Reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction or scale weights. 05/2007 01200- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES B Measurement by Volume: 1. Stockpiles: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width, and height or thickness. 2. Excavation and Embankment Materials: Measured by cubic dimension using the average end area method. C Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. D Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. E Stipulated Price Measurement: By unit designated in the agreement. F Other: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or lineal means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. 1.05 PAYMENT A Payment includes full compensation for all required supervision,labor,products,tools, equipment,plant,transportation,services,and incidentals;and erection,application or installation of an item of the Work; and Contractor's overhead and profit. The price bid shall include the total cost for required Work. Claims for payment as Unit Price Work not specifically covered in Section 00300—Bid Proposal will not be accepted. B Progress Payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the Engineer's observations 1111) and evaluations of quantities incorporated in the Work multiplied by the unit price. C Progress Payments for Lump Sum Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of the percentage of quantities included in the schedule of values incorporated in the Work. D Final Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities determined by Engineer multiplied by the unit price for Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. 1.06 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT A Remove and replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the Contract Documents. B If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Engineer will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The nonconforming Work will remain as is, but the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer. 2. The nonconforming Work will be modified as authorized by the Engineer, and the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer, if the modified Work is deemed to be less suitable than originally specified. 05/2007 01200-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES C Individual Technical Specifications may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. D The authority of the Engineer to assess the nonconforming Work and identify payment adjustment is final. 1.07 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable to Engineer. 2. Products determined as nonconforming before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work, unless specified otherwise. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION tie 05/2007 01200-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Section 01290 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for processing Change Orders, including: 1. Assignment of a responsible individual for approval and communication of changes in the Work; 2. Documentation of change in Contract Price and Contract Time; 3. Change procedures, using proposals and construction contract modifications,Work Change Directive, Stipulated Price Change Order,Unit Price Change Order, Time and Materials Change Order; 4. Execution of Change Orders; 5. Correlation of Contractor Submittals. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents C Other References: 46. 1. Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment(Data Quest Blue Book). Rental Rate is defined as the full unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL A Contractor shall provide a letter indicating the name and address of the individual authorized to execute change documents, and who shall also be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ and Subcontractors of changes to the Work. The information shall be provided at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME A Provide full information required for identification and evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of proposed changes in the Work. B Contractor shall document each Proposal for Change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow for its evaluation. 4111 02/2008 01290- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES C Proposal for Change shall include, as a minimum, the following information as applicable: 1. Original Quantities of items in Section 00300—Bid Proposal with additions, reductions, deletions, and substitutions. 2. When Work items were not included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal, Contractor shall provide unit prices for the new items, with supporting information as required by the Engineer. 3. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 4. Additional data upon request. D For changes in the Work performed on a time-and-material basis, the following additional information may be required: 1. Quantities and description of products and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit as noted in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 7.03 "Extra Work". 4. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 5. Time records and certified copies of applicable payrolls. 6. Invoices and receipts for products, rented equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. E Rented equipment will be paid to the Contractor by actual invoice cost for the duration of time required to complete the extra work. If the extra work comprises only a portion of the rental invoice where the equipment would otherwise be on the site, the Contractor shall compute the hourly equipment rate by dividing the actual monthly Nis) invoice by 176. (One day equals 8 hours and one week equals 40 hours.) Operating costs shall not exceed the estimated operating costs given for the item of equipment in the Blue Book. F For changes in the work performed on a time-and-materials basis using Contractor- owned equipment, compute rates with the Blue Book as follows: 1. Multiply the appropriate Rental Rate by an adjustment factor of 70 percent plus the full rate shown for operating costs. The Rental Rate utilized shall be the lowest cost combination of hourly,daily, weekly or monthly rates. Use 150 percent of the Rental Rate for double shifts (one extra shift per day) and 200 percent of the Rental Rate for more than two shifts per day. No other rate adjustments shall apply. 2. Standby rates shall be 50 percent of the appropriate Rental Rate shown in the Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A Changes to Contract Price or Contract Time can only be made by issuance of a Change Order. Issuance of a Work Change Directive or written acceptance by the Engineer of changes will be formalized into Change Orders. All such changes will be in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.01 "Change Orders". 02/2008 01290-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES B The Engineer will advise Contractor of Minor Changes in the Work not involving an �r adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time as authorized by Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.02 "Minor Changes", by issuing supplemental instructions. C Contractor may request clarification of Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents or other information. Response by the Engineer to a Request for Information does not authorize the Contractor to perform tasks outside the scope of the Work. All changes must be authorized as described in this Section. 1.06 PROPOSALS FOR CHANGE AND CONTRACT MODIFICATION A The Engineer may issue a Request for Proposal,which includes adetailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Plans and Technical Specifications.The Engineer may also request a proposal in the response to a Request for Information. Contractor will prepare and submit its Proposal for Change within 7 days or as specified in the request. B The Contractor may propose an unsolicited change by submitting a Proposal for Change to the Engineer describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time including full documentation. 410, 1.07 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A Engineer may issue a signed Work Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B The document will describe changes in the Work and will designate a method of determining any change in Contract Price or Contract Time. C Contractor shall proceed promptly to execute the changes in the Work in accordance with the Work Change Directive. 1.08 STIPULATED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A A Stipulated Price Change Order will be based on an accepted Proposal for Change including the Contractor's lump sum price quotation. 1.09 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A Where Unit Prices for the affected items of the Work are included in Section 00300- Bid Proposal , the Unit Price Change Order will be based on unit prices as originally bid, subject to provisions of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Where unit prices of the Work are not pre-determined in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, Work Change Directive or accepted Proposal for Change will specify the unit prices to be used. 02/2008 01290-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.10 TIME-AND-MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A Contractor shall provide an itemized account and supporting data after completion of change,within time limits indicated for claims in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Contractor shall maintain detailed records of work done on time-and-material basis as specified in this Section, 1.04 "Documentation of Change in Contract Price and Contract Time". D Contractor shall provide full information required for evaluation of changes,and shall substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.11 EXECUTION OF CHANGE DOCUMENTATION A Engineer will issue Change Orders,Work Change Directives, or accepted Proposals for Change for signatures of parties named in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement. 1.12 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A For Stipulated Price Contracts, Contractor shall promptly revise Schedule of Values 1 and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a •�/ separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. B For Unit Price Contracts,the next monthly Application for Payment of the Work after acceptance of a Change Order will be revised to include any new items not previously included and the appropriate unit rates. C Contractor shall promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time,and shall revise schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit for review. D Contractor shall promptly enter changes to the on-site and record copies of the Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents as required in Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01290-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01310 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Section includes general coordination including Preconstruction Conference, Site Mobilization Conference, and Progress Meetings. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Coordination is required throughout the documents. Refer to all of the Contract Documents and coordinate as necessary. 1.03 ENGINEER AND REPRESENTATIVES A The Engineer may act directly or through designated representatives as defined in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 1.01 "Owner, Contractor, and Engineer", and as identified by name at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION A Coordinate scheduling,submittals,and work of the various Technical Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B Coordinate completion and clean up of the Work for Substantial Completion and for portions of the Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. C Coordinate access to Project Site for correction of nonconforming work to minimize disruption of Owner's activities where Owner is in partial occupancy. 1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A Engineer will schedule a Preconstruction Conference. B Attendance Required: Engineer's representatives,Consultants,Contractor,and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Distribution of Contract Documents. 2. Designation of personnel representing the parties to the Contract, and the Consultant. 3. Review of insurance. 02/2008 01310-1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 4. Discussion of formats proposed by the Contractor for Schedule of Values, and Construction Schedule. 5. Discussion of required Submittals, including, but not limited to, Work Plans,Traffic Control Plans, Safety Programs,Construction Photographs. 6. Procedures and processing of Shop Drawings and other submittals, substitutions,Applications for Payment, Requests for Information, Request for Proposal, Change Orders, and Contract Closeout. 7. Scheduling of the Work and coordination with other contractors. 8. Review of Subcontractors. 9. Appropriate agenda items listed in this Section, 1.06"Site Mobilization Conference", when Preconstruction Conference and Site Mobilization Conference are combined. 10. Procedures for testing. 11. Procedures for maintaining Project Record Documents. 12. Designation of the individual authorized to execute change documents and their responsibilities. 13. Discussion of requirements of a Trench Safety Program. 1.06 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A When required by Section 01100—Summary of Work, Engineer will schedule a Site Mobilization Conference at the Project Site prior to Contractor occupancy. B Attendance Required: Engineer representatives, Consultants, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor 2. Safety and first aid procedures 3. Construction controls provided by Owner 4. Temporary utilities 5. Survey and layout 6. Security and housekeeping procedures 1.07 PROGRESS MEETINGS A Progress Meetings shall be held at Project Site or other location as designated by the Engineer. Meeting shall be held at monthly intervals, or more frequent intervals if directed by Engineer. B Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Engineer representatives, and Consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C Engineer or City's representative will make arrangements for meetings,and recording minutes. D Engineer or City's representative will prepare the agenda and preside at meetings. 02/2008 01310-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS E Contractor shall provide required information and be prepared to discuss each agenda item. F Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Construction Schedule, Applications for Payment, payroll and compliance submittals. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of Submittal Schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review status of Requests for Information, Requests for Proposal. 7. Review status of Change Orders. 8. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 9. Maintenance of updates to Construction Schedule. 10. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 11. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 12. Coordination of projected progress. 13. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 14. Effect of proposed changes on Construction Schedule and coordination. 15. Other items relating to the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 4111110 02/2008 01310-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS 411/ Section 01350 SUBMITTALS 1.0 GENERAL This Section contains general lists of Submittals and Technical Specifications that may be required for the Work. When Submittals are required elsewhere in these Technical Specifications,refer to this Section for Submittal requirements and procedures. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Submittal procedures for: 1. Schedule of Values 2. Construction Schedules 3. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 4. Operations and Maintenance Data 5. Manufacturer's Certificates 6. Construction Photographs 7. Project Record Documents 8. Design Mixes B References to the following Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01310—Coordination &Meetings 2. Section 01630—Product Options & Substitutions 3. Section 01100—Summary of Work 4. Section 01380—Construction Photographs 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A Scheduling and Handling 1. Schedule Submittals well in advance of the need for material or equipment for construction. Allow time to make delivery of material or equipment after Submittal is approved. 2. Develop a Submittal Schedule that allows sufficient time for initial review, correction,resubmission and final review of all submittals.The Engineer will review and return submittals to the Contractor as expeditiously as possible but the amount of time required for review will vary depending on the complexity and quantity of data submitted. In no case will a Submittal Schedule be acceptable which allows less than 30 days for initial review by the Engineer. This time for review shall in no way be justification for delays or additional compensation to the Contractor. 3. The Engineer's review of submittals covers conformity to the Plans,Technical Specifications, and dimensions which affect the layout. The Contractor is responsible for quantity determination. The Contractor is responsible for any errors, omissions or deviations from the Contract requirements; review of 01/2008 01350- I of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS submittals in no way relieves the Contractor from his obligation to furnish required items according to the Plans and Technical Specifications. 4. Submit 5 copies of documents unless otherwise specified in this Section or by individual Technical Specifications. 5. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. 6. The Contractor shall assume the risk for material or equipment which is fabricated or delivered prior to approval. No material or equipment shall be incorporated into the Work or included in Applications for Payment until approval has been obtained in the specified manner. B Transmittal Form and Numbering 1. Transmit each submittal to the Engineer with a transmittal form. 2. Sequentially number each transmittal form beginning with the number I. Re- Submittals shall use the original number with an alphabetic suffix (i.e.,2A for first Re-Submittal of Submittal 2 or 15C for third Re-Submittal of Submittal 15). Each submittal shall only contain one type of work, material, or equipment. Mixed submittals will not be accepted. 3. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents and identify product or system limitations. 4. For submittal numbering of video tapes, see this Section, 1.10"Video". C Contractors Certification 1. Each submittal shall contain a statement or stamp signed by the Contractor, j certifying that the items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in �n/ accordance with Contract Documents, except as noted by any requested variance. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment. A Schedule of Values shall be provided for each of the items indicated as Lump Sum (LS) in Section 00300— Bid Proposal for which the Contractor requests to receive Progress Payments. B Schedule of Values shall be typewritten on 8-ur x 11",plain bond,white paper. Use the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as a format for listing costs of Work by Section. C Round off figures for each listed item to the nearest$100.00 except for the value of one item, if necessary, to make the total price for all items listed in the Schedule of Values equal to the applicable Lump Sum in Section 00300—Bid Proposal. D For Unit Price Contracts, items should include a proportional share of Contractor's overhead and profit, such that the total of all items listed in the Schedule of Values equals the Contract amount. For Stipulated Price Contracts,Mobilization,Bonds,and Insurance may be listed as separate items in the Schedule of Values. 01/2008 01350-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS E For Lump Sum equipment items, where Submittals for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports in conjunction with Operation and Maintenance Data are required, include a separate item for equipment Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals and a separate item for Submittals of equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports, each valued at five(5)percent of the Lump Sum. F Revise the Schedule of Values and resubmit for items affected by contract modifications,Change Orders,and Work Change Directives. Submit revised Schedule of Values 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment after the changes are approved by the Engineer. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A Submit Construction Schedules for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall be,at a minimum,a bar chart, (computer generated or prepared manually) and a narrative report. B During the Preconstruction Meeting, as noted in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the format to be used for the Construction Schedule Submittal.The format is subject to approval by the Engineer. Review of the Submittal will be provided within 7 days of the Submittal of the sample. C Within 7 days of the receipt of approval of the Contractor's format, or 14 days of the Notice to Proceed, whichever is later, the Contractor shall submit a proposed Construction Schedule for review. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall meet the following requirements: 1. The Construction Schedule shall usually include a total of at least 20 but not more than 50 activities. Fewer activities may be accepted, if approved by the Engineer. 2. For Projects with work at different physical locations,each location should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 3. For projects with multiple crafts or significant subcontractor components,these elements should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 4. For Projects with multiple types of tasks within the scope,these types of work should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 5. For Projects with significant major equipment items or materials worth over 25 percent of the Total Contract Price, the Construction Schedule shall indicate dates when these items are to be purchased,when they are to be delivered,and when installed. 6. For Projects where operating plants are involved,each period of work which will require the shut down of any processor operation shall be identified in the Construction Schedule and must be agreed to by the Engineer prior to starting work in the area. 7. A Billing Schedule(tabulation of the estimated monthly billings)for the Work shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor with the first Construction Schedule. This information is not required in the monthly updates, unless significant changes in Work require re-submittal of the Construction Schedule for review. The total for each month and a cumulative total will be indicated. 01/2008 01350-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS These monthly forecasts are only for planning purposes of the Engineer. Monthly payments for actual work completed will be made by the Engineer in accordance with Section 00700-General Conditions of Agreement. D The Contractor must receive approval of the Engineer for the Construction Schedule and Billing Schedule prior to the first monthly Application for Payment. No payment will be made until these are accepted. E Upon written request from the Engineer, the Contractor shall revise and submit for approval all or any part of the Construction Schedule to reflect changed conditions in the Work or deviations made from the original plan and schedule. F The Contractor's Construction Schedule shall thereafter be updated with the Actual Start and Actual Finish Dates, Percent Complete, and Remaining Duration of each Activity and submitted monthly. The date to be used in updating the monthly Construction Schedule shall be the same Date as is used in the monthly Application for Payment. This monthly update of the Construction Schedule shall be required before the monthly Application for Payment will be processed for payment. G The narrative Construction Schedule Report shall include a description of changes made to the Construction Schedule; Activities Added to the Construction Schedule; Activities Deleted from the Construction Schedule; any other changes made to the Construction Schedule other than the addition of Actual Start Dates and Actual Finish Dates and Remaining Durations. r/ 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES A Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop Drawings for review as required by the Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each Shop Drawing. 3. The Shop Drawing shall accurately and distinctly present the following: a. Field and erection dimensions clearly identified as such. b. Arrangement and section views. c. Relation to adjacent materials or structure including complete information for making connections between work under this Contract and work under other contracts. d. Kinds of materials and finishes. e. Parts list and descriptions. f. Assembly Shop Drawings of equipment components and accessories showing their respective positions and relationships to the complete equipment package. g. Where necessary for clarity, identify details by reference to sheet numbers and detail numbers, schedule or room numbers as shown on the Plans. 4. Shop Drawing Drawings shall be to scale,and shall be a true representation of the specific equipment or item to be furnished. 0112008 01350-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS B Product Data I. Submit Product Data for review when required in individual Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each data item submitted. 3. Mark each copy to identify applicable products,models,options to be used in this Project. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information unique to this Project, where required by the Technical Specification. 4. For products specified only by reference standard,submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 5. For Approved Products, those designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words"or approved equal",submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 6. For products proposed as alternates to Approved Products, refer to Section 01630-Product Options and Substitutions, 1.04"Selection Options"and 1.07 "Substitution Procedures". 7. For products that are neither Pre-Approved, Approved, specified only by reference standard, nor proposed as alternates, submit product description, trade name, manufacturer, and supplier. Contractor shall provide additional information upon written request by Engineer or Owner. C Samples 1. Submit samples for review as required by the Technical Specification. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on each sample or a firmly attached sheet of paper. 3. Submit the number of samples specified in the Technical Specification;one of which will be retained by the Engineer. 4. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are identified in the Technical Specifications. 1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A When specified in Technical Specification,submit manufacturers'printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, operation, adjusting, finishing, and maintenance. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section. 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each document. C Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers' certificate of compliance for review by Engineer. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of the certificate. 01/2008 01350-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS C Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. D Manufacturer's Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product,but must be acceptable to Engineer. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Submit photographs in accordance with Section 01380—Construction Photographs. Prints: Prepare 2 prints of each view and submit I print directly to the City's Representative within 7 days of taking photographs. One print shall be retained by the Contractor and made available at all times for reference on the job site. B PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS: 1. Prior to the commencement of any construction,take digital color photographs on the entire route of the project 2. Photographs: Two prints, color, matte finish; 3 x 5 inch size, mounted on 8%2 x 11-inch soft card stock, with left edge binding margin for three hole punch, or in plastic pockets in three-ring notebook. 3. Th photographs shall show: a. Date photographs were taken b. Location of the photograph, house number and street name. (This information may be shown on a chalk board in the photograph by a label on the mountings.) 4. Photographs should show the condition of the following a. Esplanades and boulevards b. Yards (near, side and far side of street) c. Housewalk, sidewalk and driveway; curb d. Area between walk and curb I) Particular features(yard lights, shrubs, fences,trees, etc.) 2) Landscaping and decorative features. C POST CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1. On completion of construction, provide photographs of any public or private property which has been repaired or restored and any damage which is or may be the subject of complaints. 1.09 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Submit Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01760—Project Record Documents. 1.10 VIDEO A Submit television video in DVD format as required in individual Technical Specifications. B Transmittal forms for video disks shall be numbered sequentially beginning with TOI, T02,T03, etc. 01/2008 01350-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS 411110 1.11 DESIGN MIXES A When specified, submit design mixes for review. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each design mix. C Mark each design mix to identify proportions,gradations, and additives for each class and type of design mix submitted. Include applicable test results on samples for each mix. D Maintain a copy of approved design mixes at mixing plant. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2008 01350-7 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS Section 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for construction photographs and submittals. B References Technical Specifications: I. Section 01100—Summary of Work 2. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Construction Photographs under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for installed Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A When required by Section 01100 — Summary of Work, submit photographs in accordance applicable provisions of this Section. [ B Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section �/ 01350—Submittals. C Prepare three(3)prints of each view and submit two(2) prints directly to the Project Manager within seven (7)days of taking photographs. One(1)print shall be retained by the Contractor in the field office at the Project Site and available at all times for reference. D When requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall submit extra prints of photographs, for distribution directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for the extra prints directly to the photographer. E When required by individual Sections, submit photographs taken prior to start of the Work to show original Project Site conditions. F When required by Contract Documents, submit photographs with Application for Payment. G When required by individual Sections,submit photographs taken following completion of the Work to show the condition in which the Project Site will be left. H With each submittal,include photographic negatives in protective envelopes,identified by Project Name, Contractor, and date photographs were taken. 01/2008 01380- 1 of3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Contractor shall be responsible for the timely execution of the photographs, their vantage point, direction of shot, and quality. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A Photographs shall be digital quality and shall be submitted on a CD. B The photographs shall show on a non-elective chalkboard or white board,readable in the photograph: 1. Job number. 2. Date and time photographs were taken. 3. Location of the photograph, house number and street, along with the project number. C Indicate the condition of the following: 1. Esplanades and boulevards. 2. Yards (near side and far side of street). 3. House-walk and sidewalk. 4. Curb. 5. Area between walk and curb. 6. Particular features (yard lights, shrubs,fence,trees, etc.). 7. Date shall be on negative. 8. Provide notation of vantage point marked for location and direction of shot on a key plan of the Project Site. D Sufficient number of photographs shall be taken to show the existence or non- existence of cracked concrete and the condition of trees, shrubs and grass. E Identify each photograph with an applied label or rubber stamp on the back with the following information: 1. Name of the Project. 2. Name and address of the photographer(if a professional photographer is used). 3. Name of the Contractor. 4. Date the photograph was taken. 5. Photographs to be in plastic pockets and bound in three -ring notebook for easy access and viewing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Prior to the commencement of the Work, take photographs of the entire route of the Project Site. 01/2008 01380-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 3.02 POST-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Following the completion of the Work,take photographs from corresponding vantage points and direction of shots. 3.03 PROGESS PHOTOGRAPHS A Take photographs at intervals, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment and submit on CD with monthly Application for Payment. B Select the vantage points for each shot each month to best show the status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken. Take not less than two (2) shots from the same vantage point creating a time-lapsed sequence. C Follow direction when given by the Project Manager in selecting vantage points. END OF SECTION 41.0 01/2008 01380-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Section 01420 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A General quality assurance as related to Reference Standards and a list of references. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on the date as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Request clarification from Engineer before proceeding should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents. ( 1.03 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES qtr AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, Ml 48219-0150 AGC Associated General Contractors of America 1957 E Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AI Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W. Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 02/2008 01420- I of 5 CITY OF PEAR/AND REFERENCED STANDARDS AISC American Institute of Steel Construction .� 400 North Michigan Avenue, Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma,WA 98411 API American Petroleum Institute 1220 L Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AREA American Railway Engineering Association 50 P Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWPA American Wood-Preservers'Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society P.O. Box 35104 Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 02/2008 01420-2 of 5 ( CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS `r CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington,DC 20036 CRD U.S.A. Corps of Engineers Code of Ordinances City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77581 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 707 Westchester Avenue White Plains, NY 10604 FDA U.S. Food and Drug Administration 5600 Fisher Lane Rockville, MD 20857-0001 411, FS Federal Standardization Documents General Services Administration, Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineer Association P.O. Box 440 S. Yarmouth, MA 02664 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 445 Hoes Lane P.O. Box 1331 Piscataway, NJ 0855-1331 MIL Military Specifications General Services Administration, Specifications Unit(WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers P. O. Box 986 411, Katy,TX 77450 02/2008 01420-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers'Association 2101 L Street, N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101 Quincy,MA 02269-9101 OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration U.S. Department of Labor, Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077-1083 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 SDI Steel Deck Institute Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TAC Texas Administrative Code TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P. O. Box 13087 Austin, TX 78711-3087 TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation 125 East 1 1th Street Austin,TX 78701-2483 Texas MUTCD Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices(2003 Adoption) (published by Texas Department of Transportation) UL Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 UNI-BELL UNI-BELL Pipe Association 2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155 02/2008 01420-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARIAND REFERENCED STANDARDS 4111 Dallas,TX 75234 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 942 Main Street—Suite 300 Hartford, CT 06103 W WD/PI Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation P.O. Box 12157 Austin, TX 78711 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 1611, 02/2008 01420-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL 4111, Section 01430 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Quality assurance and control of installation and manufacturer's field services and reports. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce the Work of specified quality at no additional cost to the Owner. B Comply fully with manufacturers' installation instructions, including each step in sequence. C Request clarification from Project Manager before proceeding should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents. D Comply with specified Standards as minimum requirements for the Work except when more stringent tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E Perform work by persons qualified to produce the specified level of workmanship. F Obtain copies of Standards and maintain at Project Site when required by individual Technical Specifications. 1.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A When specified in individual Technical Specifications, provide material or product suppliers' or manufacturers' technical representative to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation,quality of workmanship,start-up of equipment, operator training, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate operation,as required. Conform to minimum time requirements for start-up operations and operator training if defined in Technical Specifications. 02/2008 01430- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL B At the Project Manager's request, submit qualifications of manufacturer's representative to Project Manager fifteen (15) days in advance of required Nulib representative's services. The representative shall be subject to approval of Project Manager. C Manufacturer's representative shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. Submit report within one(1)day of observation to Project Manager for review. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION V 02/2008 01430-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND OBSERVATION SERVICES IVSection 01440 OBSERVATION SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Observation services and references. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 INSPECTION A Project Manager will appoint an Observer as a representative of the Owner to oversee inspections,tests,and other services specified in individual Technical Specifications. B Alternately, Project Manager may appoint, employ, and pay an independent firm to provide additional observation or construction management services as indicated in Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. C Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to Project Manager,Engineer,and Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D Contractor shall assist and cooperate with the Observer;furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, and storage. E Contractor shall notify Project Manager 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. Notify Engineer and independent firm when noted. F Contractor shall sign and acknowledge report for Observer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION thir 09/2009 01440- 7 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 41, Section 01450 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Testing Laboratory Services and Contractor responsibilities related to those services. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3740, "Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction" b. ASTM E 329, "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" 1.02 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A Owner will select,employ,and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing identified in individual Technical Specifications. B Employment of testing laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C Owner or designated representative shall schedule and monitor testing as required to provide timely results and to avoid delay to the Work. D Contractor shall be responsible for paying for services of commercial testing laboratory, with prior approval of Owner, to perform the following: 1. Pipe diameter deflection tests on all flexible and semi-rigid sanitary sewer collection system pipe installation 2. Laboratory services required to establish mix design proposed for use for Portland cement concrete, asphaltic concrete mixtures and other material mixes requiring control by testing laboratory when required because of change in source of materials or other conditions not caused by Owner. 3. Tests required to establish optimum moisture of earth and base materials and to determine required compactive effort to meet density requirements. 4. Cores to test for thickness. 5. Testing and inspection performed for the Contractor's convenience. 6. Retesting and repetitions of laboratory services when initial tests indicate work does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents. 04/2008 01450- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARL4ND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.03 LABORATORY REPORTS A The Engineer will receive I copy, the Project Manager will receive 2 copies,and the Contractor will receive 2 copies of Laboratory Reports from the testing laboratory. One of the Contractor's copies shall remain at the Project Site for duration of Project. Test results which indicate non-conformance shall be transmitted immediately via fax from the testing laboratory to the Contractor and Project Manager. 1.04 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A Notify Project Manager and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Notify Engineer if specification section requires the presence of the Engineer. B Cooperate with laboratory personnel in collecting samples to be tested or collected on Project Site. C Provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. D Provide samples to laboratory in advance of their intended use to allow thorough examination and testing. E Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to the Work to be tested;to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested; and to facilitate tests and inspections including storage and curing of test samples. F Arrange with laboratory and pay for: 1. Retesting required for failed tests. 2. Retesting for nonconforming Work. 3. Additional sampling and tests requested by Contractor for his own purposes. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 04/2008 01450-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 4 3.01 CONDUCTING TESTING A Laboratory sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 329,as well as other test standards specified in individual Technical Specifications. END OF SECTION 04/2008 01450-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Section 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Temporary facilities and the necessary controls for the Work including utilities, telephone, sanitary facilities, field office, storage sheds and building, safety requirements,first aid equipment,fire protection,security measures,protection of the Work and property, access roads and parking, environmental controls, disposal of trash,debris,and excavated material,pest and rodent control,water runoff and erosion control. B References to Technical Specifications: Section 00200—Instructions to Bidders Section 01100—Summary of Work Section 01350—Submittals Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation Section 01100—Summary of Work Section 01600—Material & Equipment Section 01570—Trench Safety System Section 01555—Traffic Control & Regulation Section 01720—Field Surveying Section 01563 —Tree& Plant Protection Section 01564—Control of Ground Water& Surface Water Section 13730- Computer Equipment C Referenced Standards: Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) National Fire Protection Association (NEPA) Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas D Definitions: Underground Structures - sewer, water, gas, and other piping, and manholes, chambers, electrical and signal conduits, tunnels, and other existing subsurface installations located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Surface Structures - existing buildings, structures and other constructed installations above the ground surface. Included with such structures are their foundations or any extension below the surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to 12-2-2011 01500- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS buildings,tanks, walls, bridges, roads, dams, channels,open drainage,piping, poles, wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, guard cables, fencing, and other facilities that are visible above the ground surface. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A The facilities and controls specified in this Section are considered minimum for the Work. The Contractor may provide additional facilities and controls for the proper execution of the Work and to meet Contractor's responsibilities for protection of persons and property. B Comply with applicable requirements specified in other Technical Specifications. Maintain and operate temporary facilities and systems to assure continuous service. Modify and extend systems as Work progress requires. ] Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer ,I required. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or to original condition. 1.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A Temporary Service Make arrangements with utility service companies for such temporary services as are necessary to construct the work and manage the site. Abide by rules and regulations of the utility service companies or authorities having jurisdiction. Be responsible for utility service costs until the Work is Substantially Complete. Included are fuel,power,light,heat,and other utility services necessary for execution, completion,testing, and initial operation of the Work. B Water Provide water required for and in connection with Work to be performed and for specified tests of piping, equipment, devices, or for other use as required for proper completion of the Work. 12-2-2011 01500-2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS For water to be drawn from public water supply, obtain special permit or license and meter from the proper City officials. For facilities under construction, establish a water/sewer billing account with City's Utility Billing Department.A deposit based on rates established by latest ordinance will be required. For water drawn from fire hydrants, apply for and receive a construction water meter from City'Public Works Department. Identify specific location for construction water meter installation. Once installed,water meter may not be moved without notification of Public Works Department. Install backflow preventer on fire hydrant supply if not included in City provided meter. Provide and maintain an adequate supply of potable water for domestic consumption by Contractor personnel. C Electricity and Lighting Provide temporary electric power service in Contractor's name, as required for the prosecution of the Work, including testing of Work. Provide power for lighting, operation of the Contractor's equipment, or for any other use by Contractor or as necessary to maintain any of Owner's on-going operations as may continue on the site during any scheduled shutdown. Minimum lighting level shall be 5 foot-candles for open areas; 10 foot-candles for stairs and shops. 2 Provide permanent electric power service, in the Contractor's name,to the work or site as and when required by the schedule of the work to achieve Substantial Completion or thor Partial Substantial Completion.Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. D Natural Gas Provide and pay for natural gas service to the work as and when required by the schedule to achieve Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. E Temporary Heat and Ventilation Provide temporary heat as necessary for protection or completion of the Work. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to assure safe working conditions; maintain enclosed areas at a minimum of 50 degrees F. F Telephone Provide emergency telephone service at the Project Site for use by Contractor personnel and others performing work or furnishing services. G Sanitary Facilities ihr Provide and maintain sanitary facilities for persons on the Project Site,in compliance with federal, state, and local regulations. Locate toilets on the Project Site near the 12-2-2011 01500-3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS work and secluded from view insofar as possible. Keep toilets clean and supplied throughout the course of the Work. Enforce the use of sanitary facilities by construction personnel at the Project Site. Such facilities shall be enclosed. Pit-type toilets will not be permitted. No discharge will be allowed from these facilities. Collect and store sewage and waste so as not to cause a nuisance or health problem; have sewage and waste hauled off-site and properly disposed in accordance with local regulations. Control areas where sanitary facilities are located in conformance with Section 01566 —Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 1.06 FIELD OFFICE A Provision of a Field Office and other specific temporary facilities as required in paragraph B below UNLESS otherwise stated in Section 00800 - Special Conditions of the Agreement,or Section 01100—Summary of Work. Provide for transportation,move-in,set-up,tie-down and,when project is complete,removal and move-out. The Contractor shall confirm location of office and other temporary facilities with Owner's Representative at Pre-Construction Meeting prior to delivery and set up. Location of temporary facilities shall be approved by the Owner's Representative by way of the submittal process. B. At a minimum, the Contractor's field office shall provide for, contain or serve to: provide a secured space for project administrative operations, periodic progress meetings,on-site storage for project files and plans,office space for CONTRACTOR's field supervisory personnel and provide a separate securable office space for OWNER's Representative including: meeting table and chairs, a single two drawer filing cabinet,a built-in drawing table and plan holders. Provide electric lighting and HVAC to the mobile office. 1. Field Office shall provide for, at a minimum, a high speed intemet connection for use by Owner's Representative or Construction Manager as controlled by Paragraph A above. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Provide for storage of materials under the provisions of Section 01600—Material & Equipment. 1.08 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A Contractor shall prepare, submit and follow a Safety Program that complies with federal, state, and local safety codes, statutes, and practices. Include in the Safety Program documented response to excavation, embankment, and trench safety requirements as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety System. B Conduct operations in strict accord with applicable federal,state and local safety codes and statutes and with good construction practice. The Contractor is fully responsible and obligated to establish and maintain procedures for safety of all work, personnel and equipment involved in the Work. 12-2-2011 01500-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS C Observe and comply with Texas Occupational Safety Act (Art. 5182a, V.C.S.) and with all safety and health standards promulgated by Secretary of Labor under Section 107 of Contract Work Hours and Standards Act, published in OSHA Standards -29 CFR, Part 1926, and adopted by Secretary of Labor under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970,and to any other legislation enacted for safety and health of Contractor employees. Such safety and health standards apply to subcontractors and their employees as well as to the Contractor and its employees. D Observance of and compliance with the regulations shall be solely and without qualification the responsibility of the Contractor without reliance or superintendence of or direction by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative. Immediately advise the Engineer of investigation or inspection by Federal Safety and Health inspectors of the Contractor or subcontractor's work or place of work on the Project Site under this Contract,and after such investigation or inspection,advise the Engineer of the results. Submit one copy of accident reports to Engineer within ten (10)days of occurrence. E Protect areas occupied by workmen using the best available devices for detection of lethal and combustible gases. Test such devices frequently to assure their functional capability. Constantly observe infiltration of liquids into the Work area for visual or odor evidence of contamination. Take immediate and appropriate steps to seal off entry of contaminated liquids to the Work area. F Safety measures, including but not limited to safety personnel, first-aid equipment, ventilating equipment and safety equipment,in the Plans and Technical Specifications are obligations of the Contractor. G Maintain required coordination with the local Police and Fire Departments during the entire period covered by the Contract. 1.09 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT A Provide a first aid kit throughout the construction period. List telephone numbers for physicians, hospitals, and ambulance services in each first aid kit. B Have at least one person thoroughly trained in first aid procedures present on the Project Site whenever work is in progress. 1.10 FIRE PROTECTION A Fire Protection Standards. Conform to specified fire protection and prevention requirements as well as those that may be established by Federal, State, or local governmental agencies. B. Comply with all applicable provisions of NFPA Standard No. 241, Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations. Provide portable fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A or 5B in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 10,Portable Fire Extinguishers,for each temporary building,and for every 3000 square feet of floor area of facilities under construction. 12-2-2011 01500-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Locate portable fire extinguishers within 50 feet maximum from any point on the Project Site. J C. Fire Prevention and Safety Measures. Prohibit smoking in hazardous areas. Post suitable warning signs in areas that are continuously or intermittently hazardous. Use metal safety containers for storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids. Do not store flammable or combustible liquids in or near stairways or exits. Maintain clear exits from all points within a structure. 1.11 SECURITY MEASURES A Protect all materials, equipment, and property associated with the Work from loss, theft,damage,and vandalism. Contractor's duty to protect property includes Owner's property. B If existing fencing or barriers are breached or removed for purposes of construction, provide and maintain temporary security fencing equal to existing as approved by Owner's Representative. 1.12 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES A Prevent damage to existing public utilities during construction. These utilities are J shown on the Plans at their approximate locations. Give owners of these utilities at least 48 hours notice before commencing Work in the area, for locating the utilities during construction,and for making adjustments or relocation of the utilities when they conflict with the proposed Work. 1.13 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Preventive Actions. Take precautions, provide programs, and take actions necessary to protect the Work and public and private property from damage. Take action to prevent damage, injury or loss, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Store apparatus,materials,supplies,and equipment in an orderly,safe manner that will not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or the Work of any other contractor, any utility service company, or the Owner's operations. b. Provide suitable storage for materials that are subject to damage by exposure to weather, theft, breakage, or otherwise. c. Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety of that portion of the Work. d. Frequently clean up refuse,rubbish,scrap materials,and debris caused V by construction operations, keeping the Work safe and orderly. 12-2-2011 01500-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS e. Provide safe barricades and guard rails around openings, for scaffolding, for temporary stairs and ramps, around excavations, elevated walkways,and other hazardous areas. Obtain written consent from proper parties before entering or occupying with workers, tools,materials or equipment,privately owned land except on easements provided for construction. Assume full responsibility for the preservation of public and private property on or adjacent to the site. If any direct or indirect damage is done by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in execution of the Work by the Contractor, it shall be restored by the Contractor to a condition equal to or better than that existing before the damage was done. B Barricades and Warning Signals. Where Work is performed on or adjacent to any roadway, right-of-way, or public place, furnish and erect barricades, fences, lights,warning signs, and danger signals; provide watchmen;and take other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and protection of the Work.Conform to Section 01555—Traffic Control& Regulation. C Preserving Control Points Maintain permanent benchmarks, public or private elevation or property demarcation and control monumentation, or other reference points. Unless otherwise directed in writing,replace at no cost to the Owner,those monuments, property corners or other permanent demarcations that are damaged or destroyed in accordance with Section 01720—Field Surveying. D Tree and Plant Protection. Protect trees,shrubs, lawns,outside of grading limits and within the grading limits as designated on the Plans,and in accordance with requirements of Section 01563—Tree & Plant Protection. E Protection of Underground and Surface Structures Known underground structures, including water, sewer, electric, and telephone services are shown on the Plans in accordance with the best information available,but is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. Contractor is responsible for making Locate Calls. Explore ahead of trenching and excavation work and uncover obstructing underground structures sufficiently to determine their location, to prevent damage to them and to prevent interruption of utility services. Restore to original condition damages to underground structure at no additional cost to the Owner. Immediately notify the agency or company owning any existing utility which is damaged,broken,or disturbed. Obtain approval from the Engineer and agency for any repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent. 12-2-2011 01500- 7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Necessary changes in location of the Work may be made by the Engineer to avoid unanticipated underground structures. If permanent relocation of an underground structure or other subsurface installations is required and not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents,the Engineer will direct Contractor in writing to perform the Work, which shall be paid for under the provisions for changes in the Contract Price as described in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. Support in place and protect from director indirect injury to underground and surface structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Install such supports carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure. Before installing structure supports,Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the methods and procedures to be used have been approved by the owner of the structure. Avoid moving or in any way changing the property of public utilities or private service corporations without prior written consent of a responsible official of that service or public utility. Representatives of these utilities reserve the right to enter within the limits of this project for the purpose of maintaining their properties,or of making such changes or repairs to their property that may be considered necessary by performance of this Contract. Notify the owners and/or operators of utilities and pipelines of the nature of construction operations to be performed and the date or dates on which those operations will be performed. When construction operations are required in the immediate vicinity of existing structures,pipelines,or utilities,give a minimum of five (5)working days advance notice. Probe and flag the location of underground utilities prior to commencement of excavation. Keep flags in place until construction operations reach and uncover the utility. Assume risks attending the presence or proximity of underground and surface structures within or adjacent to the limits to the Work including but not limited to damage and expense for director indirect injury caused by the Work to any structure. Immediately repair damage caused, to the satisfaction of the owner of the damaged structure. 1.14 PROTECTION OF THE WORK Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed,prior to completion of the Work. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment,materials, and surfaces. 1.15 ROADS AND PARKING A Prevent interference with traffic and Owner operations on existing roads. B Minimize use of existing streets and driveways by construction traffic. C Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces. 12-2-2011 01500-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS D Construct and maintain temporary detours, ramps, and roads to provide for normal public traffic flow when use of public roads or streets is closed by necessities of the Work. E Provide mats or other means to prevent overloading or damage to existing roadways from tracked equipment or exceptionally large or heavy trucks or equipment F Designate temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. Locate as approved by Engineer. G Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment unnecessarily in existing parking areas. 1.16 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction as necessary for controls over environmental conditions at the construction site and adjacent areas. B Comply with statutes, regulations,and ordinances which relate to the proposed Work for the prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources, including but not limited to the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, PL 91- 190, Executive Order 11514. C Provide, install and maintain storm water runoff control including but not limited to temporary entrance, silt fencing,etc. as specified in Contract Documents. D Recognize and adhere to the environmental requirements of the Project. Disturbed areas shall be strictly limited to boundaries established by the Contract Documents. Burning of rubbish, debris or waste materials is not permitted. 1.17 POLLUTION CONTROL A Provide methods,means,and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil,water or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. B Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain any spillage,and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site,and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. C Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems in conformance with TPDES requirements and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. D Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. 12-2-2011 01500-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS E Use equipment during construction that conforms to current federal, state, and local laws and regulations. ISO 1.18 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A Provide rodent and pest control as necessary to prevent infestation of Project Site. B Employ methods and use materials which will not adversely affect conditions at the Project Site or adjoining properties. 1.19 NOISE CONTROL A Provide vehicles, equipment, and construction activities that minimize noise to the greatest degree practicable. Noise levels shall conform to OSHA Standards- 29 CFR and in no case will noise levels be permitted which create a nuisance in the surrounding neighborhoods. B Conduct construction operations during daylight hours from 7:30 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. except as approved by Engineer. C Comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Codes of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas. 1.20 DUST CONTROL A Control objectionable dust caused by operation of vehicles and equipment under the provisions of Section 01566— Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 1.21 WATER RUNOFF AND EROSION CONTROL A Provide methods to control surface water,runoff,subsurface water,and water pumped from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the Project Site, or adjoining properties in accordance with Section 01564—Control of Ground Water& Surface Water and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Inspect earthwork periodically to detect any evidence of the start of erosion. Apply corrective measures as required to control erosion. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION J 12-2-2011 01500- 10 of10 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION 4111, Section 01505 MOBILIZATION LI GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A Mobilization of construction equipment and facilities onto the Work. B Referenced Standards: Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) 2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment for Mobilization is on a Lump Sum basis and shall not exceed three percent(3%)of the total bid price. B. Payment for 50% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the first monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Schedule of Values (Section 01350—Submittals) 2. Trench Safety Program (Section 01570—Trench Safety System) 3. Construction Schedule (Section 01350—Submittals) 4. Pre-construction Photographs (Section 01380—Construction Photographs) 5. Installation and acceptance of Project Identification Sign(s)(Section 01580—Project Identification Signs) 6. Installation and acceptance of Field Office(Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) 7. Installation and acceptance of TPDES requirements (Section 01565 - TPDES Requirements) C. Payment for 25% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Installation of High Speed Internet Access (Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) D. Payment for 15%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the third monthly Application for Payment. E. Payment for the remaining 10%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the fourth monthly Application for Payment. F. For contracts with a duration of less than 120 days, payment for the remaining f 50%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second �y monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the items listed in B. and C. above,as applicable. 08/2018 01505 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION G. Mobilization payments will be subject to Retainage as stipulated in Section 00700 General Conditions of Agreement. 2.1 PRODUCTS 2.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Provide specified number of project identification sign(s) per Section 01580. The name, address and contact information of the general contractor for the project shall be shown on the sign per Section 01580 and the attached exhibit. 3.1 EXECUTION 3.2 PLACEMENT OF PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Place a Project Identification Sign as described in Section 01580,part 1.03,D visible to passing traffic or as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION V 08/2018 01505- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS Section 01550 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of erosion and sediment control for Stabilized Construction Exits used during construction and until final development of the Project site. B References to Technical Specifications: I. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01565 —TPDES Requirements 4. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4632, `Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required in this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other product data on Geotextile fabric. C Sieve analysis of aggregates conforming to requirements in this Section,2.02"Course Aggregates". 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A Provide woven or non-woven geotextile fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene,or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a minimum grab strength of 270 psi any principal direction, and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Both the geotextile and threads shall be resistant to chemical attack, mildew, and rot (111111 and shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable life at a temperature range of 0°F to 120°F. 12/2015 01550- 1 of3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS D Representative Manufacturers: Mirafi, Inc., Or-Equal. 2.02 COARSE AGGREGATES A Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone,gravel,concrete,crushed blast fumace slag,ora combination of these materials. Aggregate shall be composed of clean,hard, durable materials free from adherent coatings,salt,alkali,dirt,clay,loam, shale,soft or flaky materials, or organic and injurious matter. B Course aggregates shall be open graded with a size 3"to 6". 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A The Contractor shall provide stabilized construction exits at the construction,staging, parking, storage, and disposal areas to keep the street clean of mud carried by construction vehicle and equipment. Such erosion and sediment controls shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Maintain existing erosion and sediment control systems located within the Project Site until acceptance of the Work or until directed by the Engineer to remove and discard the existing system. Maintenance shall be performed routinely to remove soil build up or, as required by the Engineer. D Regularly inspect and repair or replace components of stabilized construction exits. Unless otherwise directed, maintain them until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove stabilized construction exits promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. E Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of dedicated rights-of-way and easements for construction. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems, including vegetative systems shall be repaired immediately. F Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Section 01566-Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation and Section 01565 TPDES Requirements. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide stabilized access roads, subdivision roads, parking areas, and other on-site vehicle transportation routes where shown on Plans. 12/2015 01550-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS B Provide stabilized construction exits, and truck washing areas when approved by Engineer, of the sizes and locations where shown on Plans or as specified in this Section. C Vehicles leaving construction areas shall have their tires cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto public right-of-way. When washing is needed to remove sediment, Contractor shall construct a truck washing area. Truck washing shall be done on stabilized areas which drain into a drainage system protected by erosion and sediment control measures. D Details for Stabilized Construction Exits are shown on the Plans. Construction of all other stabilized areas shall be to the same requirements. Roadway width shall be at least 14 feet for one-way traffic and 20 feet for two-way traffic and shall be sufficient for all ingress and egress. Furnish and place geotextile fabric as a permeable separator to prevent mixing of coarse aggregate with underlying soil. Exposure of geotextile fabric to the elements between laydown and cover shall be a maximum of 14 days to minimize damage potential. E Roads and parking areas shall be graded to provide sufficient drainage away from stabilized areas. Use sandbags,gravel,boards,or similar methods to prevent sediment from entering public right-of-way, receiving stream or storm water conveyance system. F The stabilized areas shall be inspected and maintained daily. Provide periodic top dressing with additional coarse aggregates to maintain the required depth. Repair and clean out damaged control measures used to trap sediment. All sediment spilled, dropped,washed,or tracked onto public right-of-way shall be removed immediately. G The length of the stabilized area shall be as shown on the Plans, but not less than 50 feet. The thickness shall not be less than 8 inches. The width shall not be less than full width of all points of ingress or egress. H Stabilization for other areas shall have the same coarse aggregate,thickness,and width requirements as the stabilized construction exit,except where shown otherwise on the Plans. I Stabilized area may be widened or lengthened to accommodate truck washing area when authorized by Engineer. Alternative methods of construction may be utilized when shown on Plans, or when approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION C 12/2015 01550-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS 41110 Section 01554 STREET SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Materials, hardware and installation of Traffic Signs. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices(Texas MUTCD) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Signs installed or replaced will be measured by the each sign. Signs refurbished will be measured by each sign. B Payment for installation of traffic signs will be on the basis of each sign installed. C The price is full compensation for furnishing and installing new signs and hardware.Cost of associated posts, footings, and miscellaneous mounting hardware will not be paid for directly but is to be included in the unit price bid for installation of each traffic sign. D Non-standard signs installed or replaced will be measured by the square foot of the sign face. Non-standard signs shall not be installed without prior approval from the City 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Contractor shall submit a list of intended suppliers and products to be used for all signs, posts, and associated hardware. City reserves the right to request actual product samples prior to approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. 12/2015 01554- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS B The following ASTM Standards and documents, of the issue in effect on the date of Invitation for Bid, form a part of this specification to the extent herein. 1. ASTM B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. ASTM D 523 Standard Method for Test for Specular Gloss 3. ASTM D 4956 Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control. 4. ASTM E 284 Standard Definition of Terms Relating to Appearance of Materials. 5. ASTM E 308 Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the CIE System 6. ASTM E 810 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Retroreflection of Retroreflective Sheeting. 7. ASTM E 1164 Standard Practice for Obtaining Spectrophotometric Data for Object-Color Evaluation. C Substrate (Sign Blanks)—This shall be aluminum alloy 5052-R38. The thickness of sign shall be 0.125 inch with 3/4" radius corner. 1. Metal working—The aluminum shall be free of burrs and pits on both sides, including edges and holes, and shall be made ready for applications of sheeting. 2. Surface preparation—The aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased with solvent and alkaline emulsions cleaner by immersion, spray, or vapor degreasing and dried prior to application of the gold chromate sheeting coat. The aluminum shall be new and corrosion-free with holes drilled or punched, corners round to radii 3/4" and all edges smoothed prior to application of sheeting. The heavy or medium chromate coating shall conform in color and corrosion resistance to that imparted by the Alodine 1200F treatment. 3. Size—The dimension of substrate application for regulatory, warning, and guide signs shall be as specified by the Engineer and as shown on the plans. D Sign Face (Background, Legends, Symbols, and Colors) — These shall be in accordance with the Standard Highway Signs Designs(SHSD)for Texas and with the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD) 1. Street Name shall be constructed from Avery Dennison OL—2007 Green Electronic Cutable Film, using Highway B Series Font, 6" Upper/Lower case,3" Suffix for St., Dr., Ave. designations. Signs shall have a '''A" White Border. a. Tolerance for Horizontal Alignment - Letters, numerals and symbols shall be horizontally aligned to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. b. Tolerance for Vertical Alignment — Letters, numerals, and symbols shall be vertically aligned to a tolerance of 1/16 inch on each letter in each line. 2. All sign blanks shall be covered with Avery Dennison T—7500 White Vinyl reflective sheeting. 3. Signs requiring"No Outlet" or"Dead End"designations shall be constructed from Avery Dennison Black PC-500— 190-0 Vinyl,2 '/d" `r/ 12/2015 01554-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS 4w upper case lettering. Arrow shall be I '/" x 4 '/o"Long,overlaid with Avery Dennison OL—2001 Yellow electronic Cutable Film 5 ''A" x 8". E Street Name Sign shall have a'/d'x'/d'City of Pearland dating sticker indicating the month and year of manufacture of each sign. Dating sticker shall be applied to the White Reflective Vinyl,covered by the Green EC film in the manufacturing process. F Avery Dennison is the approved manufacturer of vinyls for the City of Pearland.Any substitutions will require submission of sample materials and specifications sheets to the City Of Pearland Traffic Operations manager prior to use.Any and all components are to be match components. Uses of non-matching components are prohibited. G Sign Posts - Steel post shall conform to the standard specification for hot rolled carbon sheet steel, structural quality, ASTM designation A570, Grade 50. Average minimum yield strength after cold forming is 60,000 psi. 1. The location, height, size and the foundation of the sign post shall conform to the City's standard detail. 2. The signs shall be installed using RPB412F— 12" Round Post Cap and RPB412F—12"Cross Piece Brackets. Posts caps shall be attached to sign post using 5/16"Carriage Bolts and 5/16"Tuff Nuts. Signs are to be attached to brackets using same. H Warranty -The Contractor shall warrant the materials and workmanship of each sign in accordance with the maximum limits of material warranties extended by manufacturers of raw materials, subject to the conditions they specify. The retro- reflective sheeting will be considered unsatisfactory if it has deteriorated due to natural causes to the extent that: (I) the sign is ineffective for its intended purpose when viewed from a moving vehicle under normal day and night driving conditions; or (2) the coefficient of retro-reflection is less than the minimum specified for that sheeting. When sign failure occurs prior to the minimum years indicated and an inspection demonstrates that the failure is caused by materials warranted to contractor to endure at least that long, the sign will be replaced or repaired free of materials charges. When failure occurs and inspection demonstrates that such failure is due to poor workmanship, the sign will be replaced or repaired at Contractor's expense, including shipping charges. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT The contractor shall provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A Construction shall be high quality with no visible defects in the finished product. Fabrication shall be in accordance with these specifications. Street name signs 12/2015 01554-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS shall always be supplied and installed at each project intersection whether signs previously existed at the location or not. B The removal of existing signs shall be coordinated with the Traffic Operations Section of the Public Works Department (281-652-1900) and arrangements made for a convenient time to deliver City signs and poles. All salvaged traffic signs shall be delivered to the Traffic Operations Center located at 2559 Hillhouse Road, Pearland. All deliveries to the Traffic Operations Center requires a minimum notice of two (2) working days prior to returning or delivering any sign and/or sign related material. 3.03 RESPONSIBILITIES A The contractor is responsible for providing and supplying aluminum traffic signs covered with retro-reflective sheeting, applying standard legends (or special legends if shown in the plans) to the covered sign blanks, galvanized steel sign poles,pole anchors, all hardware for installing the signs and poles, and for installing traffic signs, poles and anchors as shown in the plans or call for in the contract documents, complete and ready for field installations. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01 140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C Repair damage caused by installation. END OF SECTION rI 12/2015 01554-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION Section 01555 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for traffic control plans,signs,signals,control devices,flares,lights and traffic signals, as well as construction parking control, designated haul routes and bridging of trenches and excavations. B Requirements for and qualifications of Flaggers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Traffic Control and Regulation. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Traffic Control and Regulation, including submittal of a traffic control plan if different from the one provided on the Plans, provision of traffic control devices, and provision of equipment and personnel as necessary to protect the Work and the public. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for traffic control and regulation. B Flaggers. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Flaggers as required for the Work. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for Flaggers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B A Traffic Control Plan responsive to the Texas MUTCD and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer is incorporated into the Plans. If the Contractor proposes to implement traffic control different than the plan provided, he shall submit a Traffic Control Plan in conformance with Texas MUTCD for approval of the Engineer. C For both the Traffic Control Plan and Flaggers' use, submit Schedules of Values within 30 days following the Notice to Proceed. D Each week submit a daily log for Flaggers listing name,badge number,time start,time finish, and hours worked. 03/2008 01555- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.04 FLAGGERS A Unless otherwise specified, use only Baggers who are off-duty,regularly employed, uniformed Peace Officers. B Baggers are required at the following locations: 1. Where multi-lane vehicular traffic must be diverted into single-lane vehicular traffic. 2. Where vehicular traffic must change lanes abruptly. 3. Where construction equipment either enters or crosses vehicular traffic lanes and walks. 4. Where construction equipment may intermittently encroach on vehicular traffic lanes and unprotected walks and cross-walks. 5. Where construction activities might affect public safety and convenience. 6. Where traffic regulation is needed due to rerouting of vehicular traffic around the work site. 7. When requested by Owner. C The use of Baggers is for the purpose of assisting in the regulation of traffic flow and movement, and does not in any way relieve the contractor of full responsibility for taking such other steps and provide such other Flaggers or personnel as the Contractor may deem necessary to protect the work and the public, and does not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for any damage for which he would otherwise be liable. 7411 Baggers shall be used and maintained at such points for such periods of time as may be required to provide for the public safety and convenience of travel. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNS,SIGNALS,AND DEVICES A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. B Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As approved by agencies having jurisdiction. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PUBLIC ROADS A Abide by laws and regulations of governing authorities when using public roads. If the Contractor's work requires that public roads be temporarily impeded or closed, approvals shall be obtained from governing authorities and permits paid for before starting any work. Coordinate activities with the Engineer. B Contractor shall maintain at all times a 10-foot-wide all-weather lane adjacent to work areas which shall be kept free of construction equipment and debris and shall be for the use of emergency vehicles, or as otherwise provided in the Traffic Control Plan. 03/2008 01555-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION C Contractor shall not obstruct the normal flow of traffic from 7:00 a.m.to 9:00 a.m.and 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on designated major arterials or as directed by the Engineer. D Contractor shall maintain local driveway access to residential and commercial properties adjacent to work areas at all times. E Cleanliness of Surrounding Streets: 1. Keep streets used for entering or leaving the job area free of excavated material, debris, and any foreign material resulting from construction operations. Leave the area broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of the work day. F Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking,and access by emergency vehicles. G Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles in existing facilities. Maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas. H Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non-designated areas. 3.02 FLARES AND LIGHTS A Provide flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. 41.0 3.03 HAUL ROUTES A Utilize haul routes designated by Owner or shown on the Plans for construction traffic. B Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. C Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic and minimize interference with public traffic. D Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by vehicles utilizing haul routes. 3.04 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS A Install traffic control devices at approaches to the site and on site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic. B Relocate traffic signs and control devices as Work progresses to maintain effective traffic control. 3.05 BRIDGING TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS A Whenever necessary,bridge trenches and excavation to permit an unobstructed flow of traffic. 03/2008 01555 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION B Secure bridging against displacement by using adjustable cleats,angles,bolts or other devices whenever bridge is installed: xelle 1. On an existing bus route; 2. When more than five percent of daily traffic is comprised of commercial or truck traffic; 3. When more than two separate plates are used for the bridge; or 4. When bridge is to be used for more than five consecutive days. C Install bridging to operate with minimum noise. D Adequately shore the trench or excavation to support bridge and traffic. E Extend steel plates used for bridging a minimum of one foot beyond edges of trench or excavation. Use temporary paving materials (premix) to feather edges of plates to minimize wheel impact on secured bridging. F Use steel plates of sufficient thickness to support 11-20 loading, truck or lane, that produces maximum stress. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C Repair damage caused by installation. D Remove post settings to a depth of 2 feet. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01555-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE Section 01560 FILTER FABRIC FENCE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of filter fabric fence to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants from overland flow. Filter fabric fence is not for use in channelized flow areas. Filter fabric fence may be reinforced. B References to Technical Specifications: I. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 4. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and 411, Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT A Filter fabric fence will be measured by the linear foot between the limits of the beginning and ending of wooden stakes. B Payment for filter fabric fence will include and be full compensation for all labor, equipment,materials,supervision,and all incidental expenses for construction of these items,complete in place,including,but not limited to protection of trees,maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement & Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other Product Data on geotextile fabric. co 03/2008 01560-1 of3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene,ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction,a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM-D3786,and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi, Inc., or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil,other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric fence as specified in this Section,3.02F. Unless otherwise directed,maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. D Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide filter fabric fence systems in accordance with the Plan detail for Filter fabric fence. Filter fabric fence shall be installed in such a manner that surface runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. B Attach the filter fabric to 2-inch by 2-inch wooden stakes spaced a maximum of 3 feet apart and embedded a minimum of 8 inches. If filter fabric is factory preassembled 03/2008 01560-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE 411,1 with support netting,then maximum spacing allowable is 8 feet. Install wooden stakes at a slight angle toward the source of anticipated runoff. C Trench in the toe of the filter fabric fence with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Filter fabric fence shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above natural ground. E Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary,splice the Fabric together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. F Inspect filter fabric fence systems after each rainfall,daily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the fence or 6 inches, whichever is less. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01560-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARIAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER Section 01561 REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of reinforced filter fabric barrier to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants in channelized flow areas. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTMD 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 6 1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT i�I A Measurement for reinforced filter fabric barrier is on a linear foot basis between the limits of the beginning and ending fence posts,measured, accepted, and complete in place. B Payment for filter fabric barrier will include and be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, supervision, and incidental expenses for construction of these items,complete in place,including,but not limited to protection of trees,maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction.. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other product data on geotextile fabric. cri 05/2008 01561 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM - D4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction,a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM-D3786,and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi, Inc.,or equal. 2.02 FILTER FABRIC REINFORCEMENT A Provide woven galvanized steel wire fence with minimum thickness of 14 gauge and a maximum mesh spacing of 6 inches. B Welded wire shall be galvanized, 2-inch by 4-inch, welded wire fabric, 12 Y2 gauge. 2.03 EXECUTION 2.04 PREPARATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil,other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric barrier. Unless otherwise directed,maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 1562—Waste Material Disposal. D Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. J 05/2008 01561 -2 of 3 CITY OF PEARL AND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 2.05 INSTALLATION A Install reinforced filter fabric barriers for erosion and sediment control used during construction and until the final development of the Project Site. Reinforced filter fabric barriers are used to retain sedimentation in channelized flow areas. B Provide reinforced filter fabric barrier in accordance with the Plan detail for Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier. Reinforced filter fabric bather systems shall be installed in such a manner that runoff will percolate through the system and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. C Trench in the toe of the reinforced filter fabric barrier with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Reinforced filter fabric barrier shall have a height of 18 inches. E Securely fasten the filter fabric to the wire with tie wires. F Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary, splice the fabric together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. G Inspect the reinforced filter fabric barrier systems after each rainfall, daily during 411119 periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the barrier or 6 inches, whichever is less. END OF SECTION C 05/2008 01561 -3 of 3 CITY OF PEARIAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL Section 01562 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Disposal of waste material and salvageable material. B References to Technical Specifications: I. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion&Sedimentation 3. Section 01600—Materials &Equipment 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Obtain and submit applicable permits for proposed disposal sites. C Submit a Waste Material Disposal Plan. D Submit a copy of written permission from property owners,along with a description of the property,prior to disposal of excess material adjacent to the Project Site. Submit a written and signed release from property owner upon completion of disposal work. City of Pearland requires individual fill placement permits for all fill placed within the City limits. 1.04 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL PLAN A Contractor shall formulate and implement a plan for the collection and disposal of waste materials on the Project Site which includes the following information: 1. Schedule for collection and inspection. 2. Location of trash and waste receptacles. 3. Provisions for liquid waste and potential water pollutants material. B The plan shall comply with applicable federal, state, and local health and safety regulations and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used C 07/2006 01562- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARIAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A Excavated material: When indicated on Plans, load, haul, and deposit excavated material at a location or locations outside the limits of Project Site. B Base, surface, and bedding material: Deliver gravel, asphaltic, or other base and surfacing material designated for salvage to the location designated by the Engineer. C Pipe culvert: Deliver culverts designated for salvage to Owner's storage area. D Other salvageable materials: Conform to requirements of individual Technical Specifications. E Coordinate delivery of salvageable material with Engineer. F When temporary, on-site storage of salvaged materials is required, comply with applicable provisions of Section 01600—Materials &Equipment. 3.02 SEDIMENT DISPOSAL A Remove sediment deposits and dispose of them at the designated spoil site for the Project. If a spoil site is not designated on the Plans,dispose of sediment off site at a location not in or adjacent to a stream or floodplain. J B Off-site disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. C Sediment to be placed at the Project Site should be spread evenly throughout the designated area,compacted and stabilized. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into a stream or drainage way. D If sediment has been contaminated,it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.03 EXCESS MATERIAL,WASTE,AND EQUIPMENT A Vegetation,rubble,broken concrete,debris,asphaltic concrete pavement,excess soil, and other materials not designated for salvage,shall become the property of Contractor and shall be removed from the Project Site and legally disposed of. B Dispose of removed equipment,materials,waste and debris in a manner conforming to applicable laws and regulations C Excess soil may be deposited on private property adjacent to the Project Site when written permission is obtained from property owner under the provisions of this Section, 1.03D. 07/2006 01562-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL D Verify the flood plain status of any proposed disposal site. Do not dispose of excavated materials in an area designated as within the 100-year Flood Hazard Area. E Waste materials shall be removed from the site on a daily basis, such that the site is maintained in a neat and orderly condition. F No materials shall be disposed in a manner to damage the Owner in any way. END OF SECTION C 07/2006 01562-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION . Section 01563 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tree and plant protection. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Preserve and protect existing trees and plants to remain from foliage,branch,trunk,or root damage that could result from construction operations. B Prevent following types of damage: I. Compaction of root zone by foot or vehicular traffic, or material storage. 2. Trunk damage from equipment operations,material storage, or from nailing 41/ 2. bolting. 3. Trunk and branch damage caused by ropes or guy wires or machine impacts. 4. Root poisoning from spilled solvents, gasoline,paint, and other noxious materials. 5. Branch damage due to improper pruning or trimming. 6. Damage from lack of water due to: a. Cutting or altering natural water migration patterns near root zones. b. Failure to provide adequate watering. 7. Damage from alteration of soil pH factor caused by depositing lime, concrete, plaster, or other base materials near roots. 8. Cutting feeder of roots or roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 1.04 DAMAGE ASSESSMENT A When trees,other than those designated for removal,are destroyed or badly damaged as a result of construction operations,remove and replace with same size,species,and variety up to and including 8 inches in trunk diameter. Trees larger than 8 inches in diameter shall be replaced with an 8-inch diameter tree of the same species and variety and total contract amount will be reduced by an amount determined from the following International Shade Tree Conference formula: 0.7854 x D2 x $10.00 where D is diameter in inches of tree or shrub trunk measured 12 inches above grade. 411010 B All necessary tree replacements shall be as approved by Engineer/Urban Forester. 02/2013 01563- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Asphalt paint: Emulsified asphalt or other adhesive, elastic, antiseptic coating formulated for horticultural use on cut or injured plant tissue,free from kerosene and coal creosote. B Burlap: Suitable for use as tree wrapping. C Fertilizer: Liquid containing 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorus, and 5 percent potash. D. Temporary Barrier Fence: Plastic, bright orange color for visibility, 48 inches in height, 8.5 pounds weight minimum. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING TREES AND SHRUBS A Except for trees and shrubs shown on Plans to be removed,all trees and shrubs within the Project Site area are to remain and be protected from damage. B For designated trees to be removed, perform the following: 1. Stake right-of-way limits and identify any tree of diameter greater than 4 inches which is to be removed. Mark trees prior to felling with an X in orange paint, clearly visible,on the trunk, and at eye level. 2. After marking trees give a minimum of 48-hours notice in writing to the Engineer of intent to begin felling operations. 3. Trees whose trunks are only partially in the right-of-way shall be protected and preserved as described below. C For trees or shrubs to remain, perform the following: 1. Trim trees and shrubs only as necessary. a. Trees and shrubs requiring pruning for construction should also be pruned for balance as well as to maintain proper form and branching habit. b. Cut limbs at branch collar. No stubs should remain on trees. Branch cuts should not gouge outer layer of tree structure or trunk. 2. Use extreme care to prevent excessive damage to root systems. a. Roots in construction areas will be cut smoothly with a trencher before excavation begins. Do not allow ripping of roots with a backhoe or other equipment. b. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. c. Cover exposed roots with soil as soon as possible. 3. Prevent damage or compaction of root zone (area inside dripline)by construction activities. a. Do not allow scarring of trunks or limbs by equipment or other means. 02/2013 01563 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION b. Do not store construction materials, vehicles, or excavated material inside dripline of trees. c. Do not pour liquid materials inside dripline. 4. Water and fertilize trees and shrubs that will remain to maintain their health during construction period. a. Supplemental watering of landscaping during construction should be done once a week in months receiving average rainfall and twice a week in months receiving below average rainfall. b. This watering shall consist of saturating soils at least 6 to 8 inches beneath surface. 5. Water areas currently being served by private sprinkler systems while systems are temporarily taken out of service to maintain health of existing landscapes. 6. At option of the Contractor and with the Engineer's permission,trees and shrubs to remain may be temporarily transplanted and returned to original positions under supervision of professional horticulturist. 3.02 PROTECTIVE CONTROLS A Protection of trees or shrubs in open area: 1. Install steel drive-in fence posts in protective circle,approximately 8 feet on center, at the dripline of the leaf canopy of trees or 2 ft. around shrubs. 2. Drive steel drive-in fence posts 3 feet minimum into ground, leaving 5 feet 411, minimum above ground. 3. For trees or shrubs in paved areas, use moveable posts constructed from concrete-filled steel pipe 2-1/2 inches minimum in diameter mounted in rubber auto tires filled with concrete. 4. Mount plastic temporary barrier safety fence on posts. B Timber-wrap protection for trees in close proximity of moving or mechanical equipment and construction work: 1. Wrap trunk with layer of burlap. 2. Install 2 x 4's or 2 x 6's(5-foot to 6-foot lengths)vertically, spaced 3 inches to 5 inches apart around circumference of tree trunk. 3. Tie in place with 12 to 9 gage steel wire. 3.03 MAINTENANCE OF NEWLY PLANTED TREES A Water newly planted trees adequately to maintain and support healthy plants at the time of planting. B The Contractor guarantees that trees planted for this Work shall remain alive and healthy at least until the end of a one-year warranty period. 1. Within four weeks of notice from Owner, Contractor shall replace,at his expense, any dead trees or any trees that in the opinion of Owner, have become unhealthy or unsightly or have lost their natural shape as a result of additional growth, improper pruning or maintenance, or weather conditions. 02/2013 01563 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2. When tree must be replaced,the guarantee period for that tree shall begin on date of replacement of tree, subject to the Owner's inspection, for no less than one year. 3. Straighten leaning trees and bear entire cost. 4. Dispose of trees rejected at any time by Engineer at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION J 02/2013 01563-4 of 4 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER torSection 01564 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER AND SURFACE WATER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Dewatering,depressurizing,draining,and maintaining trench and structure excavations and foundation beds in dry and stable condition. B Protecting work against surface runoff and rising flood waters. C Disposing of removed water. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems 4. Section 01565—TPDES Requirements 5. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion&Sedimentation E Referenced Standards: 4111, 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 2. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 3. Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas 4. Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council (WWD/PI) F Definitions: 1. Ground Water Control Systems - installations external to the excavation such as well points, eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering and depressurization. a. Dewatering- lowering the water table and intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations and disposing of removed water. The intent of dewatering is to increase stability of excavated slopes; prevent dislocation of material from slopes or bottoms of excavations;reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material; prevent failure or heaving of the bottom of excavations; and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures and other installations. b. Depressurization -reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, as required to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom. 2. Surface Water Control - diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water away from the excavation. 3. Excavation Drainage- keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. 02/2008 01564-1 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT `ia/ A Measurement for and control of ground water for open cut pipe excavations shall be on a linear foot basis and shall not exceed the length of open cut pipe installation in the area requiring ground water control. B Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for control of ground water for any condition(s) other than those described in this Section, 1.02A. No separate payment will be made for control of surface water. Include the cost to control non-pipe excavation ground water and surface water in price for Work requiring such controls. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan for review by the Engineer prior to start of any field work. The plan shall be signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. The plan shall include the following: 1. Results of subsurface investigation and description of the extent and characteristics of water bearing layers subject to ground water control. 2. Names of equipment suppliers and installation subcontractors. 3. A description of proposed ground water control systems indicating arrangement, location, depth and capacities of system components, installation details and criteria, and operation and maintenance procedures. 4. A description of proposed monitoring and control system indicating depths and locations of piezometers and monitoring wells, monitoring installation details and criteria, type of equipment and instrumentation with pertinent data and characteristics. 5. A description of proposed filters including types, sizes, capacities and manufacturer's application recommendations. 6. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed systems for intended applications. Define potential area of influence of ground water control operation near contaminated areas. 7. Operating requirements, including piezometric control elevations for dewatering and depressurization. 8. Excavation drainage methods including typical drainage layers, sump pump application and other necessary means. 9. Surface water control and drainage installations. 10. Proposed methods and locations for disposing of removed water. C Submit the following records upon completed initial installation: 1. Installation and development reports for well points, eductors, and deep wells. 02/2008 01564-2 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 2. Installation reports and baseline readings for piezometers and monitoring wells. 3. Baseline analytical test data of water from monitoring wells. 4. Initial flow rates. D Submit the following records on a weekly basis during operations: 1. Records of flow rates and piezometric elevations obtained during monitoring of dewatering and depressurization. Refer to this Section,3.02 "Requirements for Eductor,Well Points, or Deep Wells". 2. Maintenance records for ground water control installations, piezometers, and monitoring wells. E Submit the following records at end of the Work. Decommissioning (abandonment) reports for monitoring wells and piezometers installed by other during the design phase and left for Contractor's monitoring and use. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Conduct subsurface investigations to identify groundwater conditions and to provide parameters for design, installation, and operation of groundwater control systems. B Design a ground water control system, compatible with the requirements of OSHA 411, Standards - 29 CFR, Part 1926, and Section 01570- Trench Safety Systems of these Technical Specifications, to produce the following results: 1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure affecting excavations. 2. Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. 3. Preclude damage to adjacent properties,buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities, and other work. 4. Prevent the loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condition, or softening of the foundation strata. 5. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations. C Ground water control systems may include single-stage or multiple-stage well point systems, eductor and ejector-type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water, as well as water from any other source entering the excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, such as crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E Provide ditches,berms,pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water from excavation and other work areas. 411, F Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. 02/2008 01564-3 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER ] G Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or J damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures and any settlement or resultant damage caused by the ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, or adjacent water wells,or affect potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of the system to protect property as required. H Provide an adequate number of piezometers installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide meaningful observations of the conditions affecting the excavation, adjacent structures, and water wells. I Provide environmental monitoring wells installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into the work area or into the ground water control system. ] Decommission piezometers and monitoring wells installed during design phase studies and left for Contractors monitoring and use. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B Comply with TCEQ regulations and WWD/PI Advisory Council for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering system. C Obtain permit from TCEQ under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES),for storm water discharge from construction sites. Refer to Section 01565— TPDES, 3.02 "Certification Requirements". D Obtain all necessary permits from agencies with control over the use of groundwater and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Because the review and permitting process may be lengthy,take early action to pursue and submit for the required approvals. E Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in the vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. F Implement control of ground and surface water under the provisions of Section 01566 —Source Controls for Erosion &Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A Equipment and materials are at the option of Contractor as necessary to achieve desired results for dewatering. Selected equipment and materials are subject to reviewNei 02/2008 01564-4 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 46, of the Engineer through Submittals required in Section 01350 — Submittals, 1.06 "Operations and Maintenance Data". B Eductors, well points, or deep wells, where used, must be furnished, installed and operated by an experienced contractor regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation. C Equipment and instrumentation for monitoring and control of the ground water control system includes piezometers and monitoring wells,and devices,such as flow meters, for observing and recording flow rates. D All equipment must be in good repair and operating order. E Sufficient standby equipment and materials shall be kept available to ensure continuous operation, where required. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GROUND WATER CONTROL A Perform a subsurface investigation by borings as necessary to identify water bearing layers,piezometric pressures,and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests,if necessary to determine the drawdown 41110 characteristics of the water-bearing layers. The results shall be presented in the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan. Refer to this Section, 1.03B. B Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in a manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of the installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the Plan. Notify Engineer in writing of any changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to the Work. Provide revised drawings and calculations with such notification. D Provide for continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange for appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E Monitor operations to verify that the system lowers ground water piezometric levels at a rate required to maintain a dry excavation resulting in a stable subgrade for prosecution of subsequent operations. F Where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavation, depressurize those zones to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or installed works. Allowable piezometric elevations shall be defined in the Plan. 02/2008 01564-5 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Maintain water level below subgrade elevation. Do not allow levels to rise until foundation concrete has achieved design strength. H During backfilling,dewatering may be reduced to maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. However, do not allow that water level to result in uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement stabilized sand until at least 48 hour after placement. Provide a uniform diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drain when it has served its purpose. If removal of pipe is impractical, provide grout connections at 50-foot intervals and fill pipe with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout when pipe is removed from service. ] Extent of construction ground water control for structures with a permanent perforated underground drainage system may be reduced,such as for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means of draining the affected portion of underground system,including standby equipment. Maintain drainage system during operations and remove it when no longer required. K Remove system upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L Compact backfill as required by the Contract Documents. 3.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR, WELL POINTS,OR DEEP WELLS A For aboveground piping in ground water control system, include a 12-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between every eductor well or well point and discharge header so that discharge from each installation can be visually monitored. B Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that all trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are predrained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for Contractor's selected method of work. C Install piezometers or monitoring wells not less than one week in advance of beginning the associated excavation. D Dewatering may be omitted for portions of underdrains or other excavations,but only where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is predrained by an existing system such that the criteria of the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan are satisfied. J 02/2008 01564-6 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER E Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F Provide additional ground water control installations or change the methods in the event that the installations according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03A. G Mechanical dewatering equipment shall comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Code of Ordinances,City of Pearland,Texas. 3.03 EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A Contractor may use excavation drainage methods if necessary to achieve well drained, stable trench conditions. The excavation drainage may consist of the following methods or combination of methods: I. Sump pumping in combination with: a. Layer of crushed stone and filter fabric. b. Sand and gravel drains. 2. Wells for ground water control. B Use sump pumping and a drainage layer, as defined in ASTM D 2321,placed on the foundation beneath pipe bedding or thickened bedding layer of Class I material. 400 3.04 MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while the ground water control installations or excavation drainage are operating in an area. Keep system in good operating condition. B Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedule. C Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make observations, as specified. D Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside the excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by the Engineer. 3.05 MONITORING AND RECORDING A Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. These records shall be obtained daily until steady conditions are achieved, and twice weekly thereafter. C 02/2008 01564-7 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER B Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control •/ system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until the Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when Engineer determines that more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Engineer's direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures as necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. 3.06 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through use of dikes, ditches,curb walls,pipes,sumps or other approved means. The requirement includes temporary works required to protect adjoining properties from surface drainage caused by construction operations. B Divert surface water and seepage water into sumps and pump it into drainage channels or storm drains, when approved by agencies having jurisdiction. Provide settling basins when required by such agencies. C Provide additional surface water control measures or change the methods in the event that the measures according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03B. END OF SECTION J J 02/2008 01564-8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS Section 01565 TPDES REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL A As used herein and in conjunction with TPDES General Permit No.TXRI50000,the term OPERATOR refers to the CONTRACTOR. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A Description of the required documentation to be prepared,signed and submitted by the Contractor before conducting construction operations, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES)General Permit as issued March 5, 2003, re-issued March 5, 2013, and re-issued March 5, 2018, by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality under the provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Section 26.040 of the Texas Water Code. B Contractor's responsibility for implementation,maintenance,and inspection of storm water pollution prevention control measures including,but not limited to,erosion and sediment controls,storm water management plans,waste collection and disposal,off- site vehicle tracking,and other practices shown on the Plans or specified elsewhere in this or other Technical Specifications.This Specification provides guidelines and Best Management Practices(BMP's) information for the Contractor to use in adhering to 4111, all local, state and federal environmental regulations with respect to storm water pollution prevention during construction activity. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01310—Coordination & Meetings 3. Section 01770—Contract Closeout D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) E Other References: 1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) found in Appendix A of these Technical Specifications. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 08/2018 01565- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIRED NOTICES A The Contractor shall complete,sign,and date the Contractor's Notice of Intent(NOI) attached in Appendix A. The signed copy of the Contractor's NOI shall be returned to the TCEQ. It is contractor's responsibility to pay for any fees associated with the permit. Submission of the NOI is required by both the Owner and the Contractor before construction operations start. B Upon completion of construction and acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Contractor shall complete, sign, and date the Contractor's Notice of Termination (NOT) attached in Appendix A. 3.02 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A On the Operator's Information form attached in Appendix A, the Contractor shall complete name, address, and telephone number for the Contractor; the names of persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures and all Subcontractors. B The Contractor and Subcontractors named in the Contractor's Information form shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's/Subcontractor's Certification form, attached in Appendix A. C The persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's Inspection and Maintenance Certification form, attached in Appendix A. D The Contractor's Information form and all certification forms shall be submitted to the Owner before beginning construction. E Contractor shall review implementation of the SWPPP in a meeting with the Owner and Engineer prior to start of construction in accordance with Section 01310 — Coordination& Meetings. 3.03 RETENTION OF RECORDS A The Contractor shall keep a copy of the SWPPP at the Project Site or at the Contractor's office from the date that it became effective to the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. B At Contract Closeout,the Contractor shall submit to the Owner all TPDES forms and certifications, as well as a copy of the SWPPP, in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. The SWPPP records and data will be retained by Owner for a period of 3 years from the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. J 08/2018 01565-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 3.04 POSTING OF NOTICES 41, A The following notices shall be posted from the date that this SWPPP goes into effect until the date the Work is accepted by the Owner: 1. Copies of the Notices of Intent submitted by the Owner and Contractor and a brief Description of Construction Activity being conducted at the Project Site, as given in Article I of the SWPPP, shall be posted at the Project Site or at Contractor's office in a prominent place for public viewing. 2. Notice to drivers of equipment and vehicles, instructing them to stop, check, and clean tires of debris and mud before driving onto traffic lanes. Post such notices at every stabilized construction exit area. 3. In an easily visible location on Project Site,post a notice of waste disposal procedures. 4. Notice of hazardous material handling and emergency procedures shall be posted with the NOI on Project Site. Keep copies of Material Safety Data Sheets at a location on Project Site that is known to all personnel. 5. Keep a copy of each signed certification at the Project Site or at Contractor's office. APPENDIX A FOLLOWS THIS SECTION END OF SECTION 41110 08/2018 01565-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS Section 01565 Nail) TPDES REQUIREMENTS (APPENDIX A) Table of Contents TCEQ General Permit NOI TCEQ Form 20022 TCEQ Form—20134 NOC TCEQ Form—20023 Site Notice Forms J J 08/2018 01565-4 of 4 too General Permit to Discharge Under TCEQ the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activities fir TXR150000 Effective March 5, 2018 tir TEXAS COMMISSION ON ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY recycled paper Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P.D.Box 13087,Austin,Texas 78711-3087 f.Y GENERAL PERMIT TO DISCHARGE UNDER THE. TEXAS POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM under provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Chapter 26 of the Texas Water Code This permit supersedes and replaces TPDES General Permit No.T%R15o0o0,issued March 5,2013 Construction sites that discharge stormwater associated with construction activity located in the state of Texas may discharge to surface water in the state only according to monitoring requirements and other conditions set forth in this general permit,as well as the rules of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ or Commission),the laws of the State of Texas,and other orders of the Commission of the TCEQ. The issuance of this general permit does not grant to the permittee the right to use private or public property for conveyance of stormwater and certain non-stormwater discharges along the discharge mute. This includes property belonging to but not limited to any individual,partnership,corporation or other entity. Neither does this general permit authorize any invasion of personal rights nor any violation of federal,state,or local laws or regulations. It is the responsibility of the permittee to acquire property rights as may be necessary to use the discharge route. This general permit and the authorization contained herein shall expire at midnight,five years from the permit effective date. EFFECTIVE DATE: March 5,2018 ISSUED DATE: 2�g,1$ tx0N`W� �� / For eCo cion j` C TPDES GENERAL PERMIT NUMBER TXRl50000 RELATING TO STORMWATER DISCHARGES ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Table of Contents Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions 5 Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required 5 Section B. Definitions 6 Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage 13 Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 13 r. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity 13 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities 13 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges 13 4. Other Permitted Discharges 14 Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out 14 Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage t4 1. Post Construction Discharges t4 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges 14 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards i4 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)Requirements r4 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone t5 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas 16 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities r6 8. Indian Country Lands i6 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation 16 to. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities 16 ii. Endangered Species Act t6 12. Other t7 Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 1. Large Construction Activities 17 2. Small Construction Activities 17 Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion. 17 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: r8 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: rq Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities 20 S. Effective Date of Coverage 20 6. Notice of Change(NOC) 21 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination(NOT)Forms,NOC Letters,and Construction Site Notices 22 8. Contents of the NOI 22 Section F. Terminating Coverage 23 1. Notice of Termination(NOT)Required 23 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT 23 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites 24 4. Transfer of Day-to-Day Operational Control 24 Section G. Waivers from Coverage 25 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage 25 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver 26 3. Effective Date of a LREW 26 4. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period 26 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 27 r. Individual Permit Alternative 27 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges 27 3. Individual Permit Required 27 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization 27 Section I. Permit Expiration 27 Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) 28 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development 29 Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 29 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications 29 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control 3o Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation, Implementation,and Compliance 3o Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 3o Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s 31 Section F. Contents of SWP3 31 Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites 40 Part W. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants 42 Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 42 4.110 Section B. Best Management Practices(BMPs)and SWP3 Requirements 44 Page 3 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRiS0000 Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges 46 Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements 46 Part VI. Retention of Records 47 Part VII.Standard Permit Conditions 47 Part VIII. Fees 48 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization 50 Appendix B: Erosivity Index(EI)Zones in Texas 52 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map 53 Appendix 1): Erosivity Indices for El Zones in Texas 54 J Page 4 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRr50000 Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required When calculating the acreage of land area disturbed, include the disturbed land-area of all construction and construction support activities. How much land will be disturbed?(•t) Cl acre)) va Du you meat the res Will 5 or more definition of acres be disturbed? -operator?"0'2/ (e1) Na 1'hS fir Permit Coverage Required • Prepare and Implement SWP3 • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of Site Notice to MS4 Operator • tAre you a"primary NO operator?'(^^_) its Permit Coverage Not Remained,Unless Part permit Coverage Reouired of Larger Common • Prepare and Implement SWP3 Plan of Development • Submit NOI to TCFQ or Sale • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of NOI to MS4 Operator (•1) To desennine thesize of the construction projec5 use the size of the entire area to be disturbed,and include the size of the linger common plan of development or sale.if the project[span of a father project(refer to Pmt L&, "Definitions."for an explanation of"common plan of development or sale% Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRrg0000 Section B. Definitions Arid Areas-Areas with an average annual rainfall of o to to inches. Best Management Practices(BMPs)-Schedules of activities,prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures,structural controls,local ordinances,and other management practices to prevent or reduce the discharge of pollutants. BMPs also include treatment requirements,operating procedures,and practices to control construction site runoff,spills or leaks,waste disposal,or drainage from raw material storage areas. Commencement of Construction-The initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavation activities,as well as other construction-related activities (e.g.,stockpiling of fill material,demolition). Common Plan of Development-A construction activity that is completed in separate stages,separate phases,or in combination with other construction activities. A common plan of development(also known as a"common plan of development or sale")is identified by the documentation for the construction project that identifies the scope of the project,and may include plats,blueprints,marketing plans,contracts,building permits,a public notice or hearing,zoning requests,or other similar documentation and activities. A common plan of development does not necessarily include all construction projects within the jurisdiction of a public entity(e.g.,a city or university). Construction of roads or buildings in different parts of the jurisdiction would be considered separate"common plans,"with only the interconnected parts of a project being considered part of a"common plan"(e.g.,a building and its associated parking lot and driveways,airport runway and associated taxiways,a building complex,etc.). Where discrete construction projects occur within a larger common plan of development or sale but are located I4 mile or more apart,and the area between the projects is not being disturbed,each individual project can be treated as a separate plan of development or sale,provided that any interconnecting road,pipeline or utility project that is part of the same`common plan"is not included in the area to be disturbed. Construction Activity-Includes soil disturbance activities,including clearing,grading, excavating,construction-related activity(e.g.,stockpiling of fill material,demolition),and construction support activity. This does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site (e.g.,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways, and similar maintenance activities). Regulated construction activity is defined in terms of small and large construction activity. Construction Support Activity—A construction-related activity that specifically supports construction activity,which can involve earth disturbance or pollutant-generating activities of its own,and can include,but are not limited to,activities associated with concrete or asphalt batch plants,rock crushers,equipment staging or storage areas,chemical storage areas, material storage areas,material borrow areas,and excavated material disposal areas. Construction support activity must only directly support the construction activity authorized under this general permit. Dewatering—The act of draining rainwater or groundwater from building foundations, vaults,and trenches. Discharge—For the purposes of this permit,the drainage,release,or disposal of pollutants in stormwater and certain non-stormwater from areas where soil disturbing activities(e.g., clearing,grading,excavation,stockpiling of fill material,and demolition),construction materials or equipment storage or maintenance(e.g.,fill piles,borrow area,concrete truck wash out,fueling),or other industrial stormwater directly related to the construction process (e.g.,concrete or asphalt batch plants)are located. Drought-Stricken Area—For the purposes of this permit,an area in which the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration's U.S.Seasonal Drought Outlook indicates for the period during which the construction will occur that any of the following conditions are J Page 6 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR15oo00 (1110 likely: (1)"Drought to persist or intensify",(2)"Drought ongoing,some improvement",(3) "Drought likely to improve,impacts ease",or(4)"Drought development likely". See ham://www.coc.nceanoaa.gov/products/exnert assessment/seasonal drought.html. Edwards Aquifer-As defined under Texas Administrative Code(TAC)§213.3 of this title (relating to the Edwards Aquifer),that portion of an arcuate belt of porous,water-bearing, predominantly carbonate rocks known as the Edwards and Associated Limestones in the Balcones Fault Zone trending from west to east to northeast in Kinney,Uvalde,Medina, Bexar,Carnal,Hays,Travis,and Williamson Counties; and composed of the Salmon Peak Limestone,McKnight Formation,West Nueces Formation,Devil's River Limestone, Person Formation,Kainer Formation,Edwards Formation,and Georgetown Formation. The permeable aquifer units generally overlie the less-permeable Glen Rose Formation to the south,overlie the less-permeable Comanche Peak and Walnut Formations north of the Colorado River, and underlie the less-permeable Del Rio Clay regionally. Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone-Generally,that area where the stratigraphic units constituting the Edwards Aquifer crop out,including the outcrops of other geologic formations in proximity to the Edwards Aquifer,where caves,sinkholes,faults,fractures,or other permeable features would create a potential for recharge of surface waters into the Edwards Aquifer. The recharge zone is identified as that area designated as such on official maps located in the offices of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and the appropriate regional office. The Edwards Aquifer Map Viewer,located at ha://www.tcem.texas.zov/compliance/field ops/eapn/mapdisclaimer.html,can be used to determine where the recharge zone is located. Edwards Aquifer Contributing Zone-The area or watershed where runoff from precipitation flows downgradient to the recharge zone of the Edwards Aquifer. The contributing zone is located upstream(upgradient)and generally north and northwest of the recharge zone for the following counties: all areas within Kinney County,except the area 411, within the watershed draining to Segment No.2304 of the Rio Grande Basin;all areas within Uvalde,Medina, Bexar,and Comal Counties;all areas within Hays and Travis Counties, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Colorado River above a point 1.3 miles upstream from Tom Miller Dam,Lake Austin at the confluence of Barrow Brook Cove, Segment No. 1403 of the Colorado River Basin; and all areas within Williamson County, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Lampasas River above the dam at Stillhouse Hollow reservoir,Segment No.1216 of the Brazos River Basin. The contributing zone is illustrated on the Edwards Aquifer map viewer at http://www.tceu.texas.eov/compliance/field ops/eann/mandisclaimer.html. Effluent Limitations Guideline(ELG)—Defined in 40 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)§122.2 as a regulation published by the Administrator under§304(b)of the Clean Water Act(CWA)to adopt or revise effluent limitations. Facility or Activity—For the purpose of this permit,referring to a construction site,the location of construction activity,or a construction support activity that is regulated under this general permit,including all contiguous land and fixtures(for example,ponds and materials stockpiles),structures,or appurtenances used at a construction site or industrial site. Final Stabilization-A construction site status where any of the following conditions are met: (a) All soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and a uniform(that is, evenly distributed,without large bare areas)perennial vegetative cover with a density of at least 70%of the native background vegetative cover for the area has been established on all unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent structures,or equivalent permanent stabilization measures(such as the use of riprap,gabions,or geotextiles) E have been employed. Page 7 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (b) For individual lots in a residential construction site by either: (1) the homebuilder completing final stabilization as specified in condition(a)above; or (2) the homebuilder establishing temporary stabilization for an individual lot prior to the time of transfer of the ownership of the home to the buyer and after informing the homeowner of the need for,and benefits of,final stabilization.If temporary stabilization is not feasible,then the homebuilder may fulfill this requirement by retaining perimeter controls or BMPs,and informing the homeowner of the need for removal of temporary controls and the establishment of final stabilization. Fulfillment of this requirement must be documented in the homebuilder's stormwater pollution prevention plan(SWP3). (c) For construction activities on land used for agricultural purposes(such as pipelines across crop or range land),final stabilization may be accomplished by returning the disturbed land to its preconstruction agricultural use. Areas disturbed that were not previously used for agricultural activities,such as buffer strips immediately adjacent to surface water and areas that are not being returned to their preconstruction agricultural use must meet the final stabilization conditions of condition(a)above. (d) In arid,semi-arid,and drought-stricken areas only,all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and both of the following criteria have been met: (1) Temporary erosion control measures(for example,degradable rolled erosion control product)are selected,designed,and installed along with an appropriate seed base to provide erosion control for at least three years without active maintenance by the operator,and (2) The temporary erosion control measures are selected,designed,and installed to achieve 70%of the native background vegetative coverage within three years. Hyperchlorination of Waterlines—Treatment of potable water lines or tanks with chlorine for disinfection purposes,typically following repair or partial replacement of the waterline or tank,and subsequently flushing the contents. Impaired Water-A surface water body that is identified as impaired on the latest approved CWA§303(d)List or waters with an EPA-approved or established total maximum daily load(TMDL)that are found on the latest EPA approved Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 305(b)and 303(d),which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. Indian Country Land—All land within the limits of any Indian reservation under the jurisdiction of the United States government,notwithstanding the issuance of any patent, and,including rights-of-way running through the reservation; (2)all dependent Indian communities with the borders of the United States whether within the originally or subsequently acquired territory thereof,and whether within or without the limits of a state; and(3)all Indian allotments,the Indian titles to which have not been extinguished, including rights-of-way running through the same. (40 CFR§122.2) Indian Tribe-Any Indian Tribe,band,group,or community recognized by the Secretary of the Interior and exercising governmental authority over a Federal Indian Reservation(40 CFR§122.2). Infeasible—Not technologically possible,or not economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. (40 CFR§450.11(b)). Large Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than five(5)acres of land. Large construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than five(5)acres of total Page 8 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than five(5)acres of land. Large construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site(for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities.) Linear Project—Includes the construction of roads,bridges,conduits,substructures, pipelines,sewer lines,towers,poles,cables,wires,connectors,switching,regulating and transforming equipment and associated ancillary facilities in a long,narrow area. Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver(LREW)-A written submission to the executive director from an operator of a construction site that is considered as small construction activity under the permit,which qualifies for a waiver from the requirements for small construction activities,only during the period of time when the calculated rainfall erosivity factor is less than five(5). Minimize-To reduce or eliminate to the extent achievable using stormwater controls that are technologically available and economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System(MS4)-A separate storm sewer system owned or operated by the United States,a state,city,town,county,district,association,or other public body(created by or pursuant to state law)having jurisdiction over the disposal of sewage,industrial wastes,stormwater,or other wastes,including special districts under state law such as a sewer district,flood control or drainage district,or similar entity,or an Indian tribe or an authorized Indian tribal organization,that discharges to surface water in the state. Notice of Change(NOC)—Written notification to the executive director from a 4111, discharger authorized under this permit,providing changes to information that was previously provided to the agency in a notice of intent form. Notice of Intent(NOI)-A written submission to the executive director from an applicant requesting coverage under this general permit. Notice of Termination(NOT)-A written submission to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this general permit requesting termination of coverage. Operator-The person or persons associated with a large or small construction activity that is either a primary or secondary operator as defined below: Primary Operator—the person or persons associated with construction activity that meets either of the following two criteria: (a) the person or persons have on-site operational control over construction plans and specifications,including the ability to make modifications to those plans and specifications;or (b) the person or persons have day-to-day operational control of those activities at a construction site that are necessary to ensure compliance with a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3)for the site or other permit conditions(for example,they are authorized to direct workers at a site to carry out activities required by the SWP3 or comply with other permit conditions). Secondary Operator—The person or entity,often the property owner,whose operational control is limited to: (a) the employment of other operators,such as a general contractor,to perform or supervise construction activities;or 410 Page q Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (b)the ability to approve or disapprove changes to construction plans and specifications, but who does not have day-to-day on-site operational control over construction activities at the site. Secondary operators must either prepare their own SWP3 or participate in a shared SWP3 that covers the areas of the construction site,where they have control over the construction plans and specifications. If there is not a primary operator at the construction site,then the secondary operator is defined as the primary operator and must comply with the requirements for primary operators. Outfall-For the purpose of this permit,a point source at the point where stormwater runoff associated with construction activity discharges to surface water in the state and does not include open conveyances connecting two municipal separate storm sewers,or pipes, tunnels,or other conveyances that connect segments of the same stream or other water of the U.S.and are used to convey waters of the U.S. Permittee-An operator authorized under this general permit. The authorization may be gained through submission of a notice of intent,by waiver,or by meeting the requirements for automatic coverage to discharge stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction activity. Point Source—Any discernible,confined,and discrete conveyance,including but not limited to,any pipe,ditch,channel,tunnel,conduit,well,discrete fissure,container,rolling stock concentrated animal feeding operation,landfill leachate collection system,vessel or other floating craft from which pollutants are,or maybe,discharged. This term does not include return flows from irrigated agriculture or agricultural stormwater runoff(go CFR §122.2). Pollutant-Dredged spoil,solid waste,incinerator residue,sewage,garbage,sewage sludge, filter backwash,munitions,chemical wastes,biological materials,radioactive materials,heat, Nia wrecked or discarded equipment,rock,sand,cellar dirt,and industrial,municipal,and agricultural waste discharged into any surface water in the state. The term"pollutant"does not include tail water or runoff water from irrigation or rainwater runoff from cultivated or uncultivated rangeland,pastureland,and farmland. For the purpose of this permit,the term "pollutant"includes sediment. Pollution-The alteration of the physical,thermal,chemical,or biological quality of, or the contamination of,any surface water in the state that renders the water harmful,detrimental, or injurious to humans,animal life,vegetation,or property or to public health,safety,or welfare,or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose(Texas Water Code(TWC) §26.00i(4)). Rainfall Erosivity Factor(R factor)-the total annual erosive potential that is due to climatic effects,and is part of the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE). Receiving Water-A"Water of the United States"as defined in go CFR§122.2 or a surface water in the state into which the regulated stormwater discharges. Semiarid Areas-areas with an average annual rainfall of 10 to 20 inches. Separate Storm Sewer System-A conveyance or system of conveyances(including roads with drainage systems,streets,catch basins,curbs,gutters,ditches,man-made channels,or storm drains),designed or used for collecting or conveying stormwater;that is not a combined sewer,and that is not part of a publicly owned treatment works(POTW). Small Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than one(1)acre and less than five(5)acres of land. Small construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than one(1)acre of total land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than one(1)and Page 10 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRiS0000 less than five(S)acres of land. Small construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site(for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities). Steep Slopes—Where a state,Tribe,local government,or industry technical manual(e.g. stormwater BMP manual)has defined what is to be considered a"steep slope",this permit's definition automatically adopts that definition. Where no such definition exists,steep slopes are automatically defined as those that are 15 percent or greater in grade. Stormwater(or Stormwater Runoff)-Rainfall runoff,snow melt runoff,and surface runoff and drainage. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity-Stormwater runoff,as defined above,from a construction activity. Structural Control(or Practice)-A pollution prevention practice that requires the construction of a device,or the use of a device,to reduce or prevent pollution in stormwater runoff. Structural controls and practices may include but are not limited to:silt fences, earthen dikes,drainage swales,sediment traps,check dams,subsurface drains,storm drain inlet protection,rock outlet protection, reinforced soil retaining systems,gabions,and temporary or permanent sediment basins. Surface Water in the State- Lakes,bays,ponds,impounding reservoirs,springs,rivers, streams,creeks,estuaries,wetlands,marshes,inlets,canals,the Gulf of Mexico inside the territorial limits of the state(from the mean high water mark(MH WM)out 10.36 miles into the Gulf),and all other bodies of surface water,natural or artificial,inland or coastal,fresh or salt,navigable or non-navigable,and including the beds and banks of all water-courses and bodies of surface water,that are wholly or partially inside or bordering the state or 411/ subject to the jurisdiction of the state; except that waters in treatment systems which are authorized by state or federal law,regulation,or permit,and which are created for the purpose of waste treatment are not considered to be water in the state. Temporary Stabilization-A condition where exposed soils or disturbed areas are provided a protective cover or other structural control to prevent the migration of pollutants. Temporary stabilization may include temporary seeding,geotextiles,mulches,and other techniques to reduce or eliminate erosion until either permanent stabilization can be achieved or until further construction activities take place. Thawing Conditions—for the purposes of this permit,thawing conditions are expected based on the historical likelihood of two or more days with daytime temperatures greater than 327. This date can be determined by looking at historical weather data. Note: The estimation of thawing conditions is for planning purposes only. During construction,the permittee will be required to conduct site inspections based upon actual conditions(i.e.,if thawing conditions occur sooner than expected,the permittee will be required to conduct inspections at the regular frequency). Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)-The total amount of a pollutant that a water body can assimilate and still meet the Texas Surface Water Quality Standards. Turbidity—A condition of water quality characterized by the presence of suspended solids and/or organic material. Waters of the United States-Waters of the United States or waters of the U.S.means: (a) all waters which are currently used,were used in the past,or may be susceptible to use in interstate or foreign commerce,including all waters which are subject to the ebb and flow of the tide; (b) all interstate waters,including interstate wetlands; Page it Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRtt0000 (c) all other waters such as intrastate lakes,rivers,streams(including intermittent streams),mudflats,sandflats,wetlands,sloughs,prairie potholes,wet meadows, playa lakes,or natural ponds that the use,degradation,or destruction of which would affect or could affect interstate or foreign commerce including any such waters: (r) which are or could be used by interstate or foreign travelers for recreational or other purposes; (2) from which fish or shellfish are or could be taken and sold in interstate or foreign commerce;or (3) which are used or could be used for industrial purposes by industries in interstate commerce; (d) all impoundments of waters otherwise defined as waters of the United States under this definition; (e) tributaries of waters identified in paragraphs(a)through(d)of this definition; (f) the territorial sea;and (g) wetlands adjacent to waters(other than waters that are themselves wetlands) identified in paragraphs(a)through(f)of this definition. Waste treatment systems,including treatment ponds or lagoons designed to meet the requirements of CWA are not waters of the U.S. This exclusion applies only to manmade bodies of water which neither were originally created in waters of the U.S. (such as disposal area in wetlands)nor resulted from the impoundment of waters of the U.S. Waters of the U.S.do not include prior converted cropland. Notwithstanding the determination of an area's status as prior converted cropland by any other federal agency,for the purposes of the CWA,the final authority regarding CWA jurisdiction remains with EPA. J Page 12 411, Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from small and large construction activities may be authorized under this general permit. 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction support activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit may be authorized,provided that the following conditions are met: (a) the construction support activities are located within one(r)mile from the boundary of the construction site where the construction activity authorized under the permit is being conducted that requires the support of these activities; (b) an SWP3 is developed for the permitted construction site according to the provisions in Part IILF of this general permit,and includes appropriate controls and measures to reduce erosion and the discharge of pollutants in stormwater runoff according to the provisions in Part III.G of this general permit; (c) the activities are directly related to the construction site; (d) the activities are not a commercial operation,nor serve other unrelated construction projects; and (e) the activities do not continue to operate beyond the completion of the construction 411Vactivity at the project it supports. Construction support activities that operate outside the terms provided in(a)through(e) above must obtain authorization under a separate Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES)permit,which may include the TPDES Multi Sector General Permit(MSGP),TXRo50000(related to stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity),an alternative general permit(if available),or an individual water quality permit. 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges The following non-stormwater discharges from sites authorized under this general permit are also eligible for authorization under this general permit: (a) discharges from fire-fighting activities(fire-fighting activities do not include washing of trucks, run-off water from training activities,test water from fire suppression systems,or similar activities); (b) uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings(excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life),which include flushings from systems that utilize potable water,surface water,or groundwater that does not contain additional pollutants(uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings do not include systems utilizing reclaimed wastewater as a source water); (c) water from the routine external washing of vehicles,the external portion of buildings or structures,and pavement,where detergents and soaps are not used, where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred(unless spilled materials have been removed;and if local state,or federal regulations are applicable,the materials are removed according to those regulations),and where the purpose is to remove mud,dirt,or dust; Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (d) uncontaminated water used to control dust; (e) potable water sources,including waterline flushings,but excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life; (I) uncontaminated air conditioning condensate; (g) uncontaminated ground water or spring water,including foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with industrial materials such as solvents; and (h) lawn watering and similar irrigation drainage. 4. Other Permitted Discharges Any discharge authorized under a separate National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(NPDES),TPDES,or TCEQ permit may be combined with discharges authorized by this general permit,provided those discharges comply with the associated permit. Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out The wash out of concrete trucks at regulated construction sites must be performed in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage 1. Post Construction Discharges Discharges that occur after construction activities have been completed,and after the construction site and any supporting activity site have undergone final stabilization, are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Discharges originating from the sites are not authorized under this general permit following the submission of the notice of termination(NOD or removal of the appropriate site notice,as applicable,for the regulated construction activity. 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges Except as otherwise provided in Part ILA of this general permit,only discharges that are composed entirely of stormwater associated with construction activity may be authorized under this general permit. 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards Discharges to surface water in the state that would cause,have the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or that would fail to protect and maintain existing designated uses of surface water in the state are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. The executive director may require an application for an individual permit or alternative general permit(see Parts 11.11.2 and 3.)to authorize discharges to surface water in the state if the executive director determines that any activity will cause,has the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or is found to cause,has the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to,the impairment of a designated use. The executive director may also require an application for an individual permit considering factors described in Part ILH.3 of this general permit. 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)Requirements The permittee shall determine whether the authorized discharge is to an impaired water body on the latest EPA-approved CWA Section 303(d)List or waters with an EPA- approved or established TMDL that are found on the latest EPA-approved Texas Page 14 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 411, Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 305(b)and 303(d), which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. New sources or new discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired waters are not authorized by this permit unless otherwise allowable under 3o TAC Chapter 305 and applicable state law. Impaired waters are those that do not meet applicable water quality standard(s)and are listed as category 4 or 5 in the current version of the Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality,and waterbodies listed on the CWA§ 3o3(d)list.Pollutants of concern are those for which the water body is listed as impaired. Discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired water bodies for which there is a TMDL are not eligible for coverage under this general permit unless they are consistent with the approved TMDL. Permittees must incorporate the conditions and requirements applicable to their discharges into their SWP3,in order to be eligible for coverage under this general permit. For consistency with the construction stormwater-related items in an approved TMDL,the SWP3 must be consistent with any applicable condition,goal,or requirement in the TMDL,TMDL Implementation Plan(I-Plan),or as otherwise directed by the executive director. 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone Discharges cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 3o TAC Chapter 213(relating to Edwards Aquifer). In addition,commencement of construction (i.e.,the initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavating activities,as well as other construction-related activities such as stockpiling of fill material and demolition)at a site regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213,may not begin until the appropriate Edwards Aquifer Protection Plan(EAPP)has been approved by the TCEQ's Edwards Aquifer Protection Program. (a) For new discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,or within that area upstream from the recharge zone and defined as the Contributing Zone (CZ),operators must meet all applicable requirements of,and operate according to, 3o TAC Chapter 213 (Edwards Aquifer Rule)in addition to the provisions and requirements of this general permit. (b) For existing discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,the requirements of the agency-approved Water Pollution Abatement Plan(WPAP) under the Edwards Aquifer Rule is in addition to the requirements of this general permit. BMPs and maintenance schedules for structural stormwater controls,for example,may be required as a provision of the rule. All applicable requirements of the Edwards Aquifer Rule for reductions of suspended solids in stormwater runoff are in addition to the requirements in this general permit for this pollutant. (c) For discharges located within ten stream miles upstream of the Edwards Aquifer recharge zone,applicants shall also submit a copy of the NOI to the appropriate TCEQ regional office. Counties: Comal,Bexar,Medina,Uvalde,and Kinney Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager San Antonio Regional Office 14250 Judson Road San Antonio,Texas 78233-4480 (210)490-3096 Counties: Williamson,Travis,and Hays Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager 411, Austin Regional Office 12100 Park 35 Circle Page 15 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Room 179,Building A Austin,Texas 78753 (512)339-2929 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas Discharges otherwise eligible for coverage cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 30 TAC Chapter 311(relating to Watershed Protection)for water quality areas and watersheds. 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities This general permit does not limit the authority or ability of federal,other state,or local governmental entities from placing additional or more stringent requirements on construction activities or discharges from construction activities. For example,this permit does not limit the authority of a home-rule municipality provided by Texas Local Government Code§401.002. 8. Indian Country Lands Stormwater runoff from construction activities occurring on Indian Country lands are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. If discharges of stormwater require authorization under federal NPDES regulations,authority for these discharges must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA). 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation Stormwater runoff from construction activities associated with the exploration, development,or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources,including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline,are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Authorization for stormwater discharges from construction activities that are associated with production of oil or gas or geothermal resources,including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline must be obtained,as required,from the U.S.EPA or the Texas Railroad Commission,as applicable. Discharge of stormwater related to construction activity, from a facility that stores both refined products intended for off-site use and crude oil in aboveground storage tanks,is regulated by the TCEQ and is eligible for coverage under this general permit. 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities Stormwater discharges from agricultural activities that are not point source discharges of stormwater are not subject to TPDES permit requirements. These activities may include clearing and cultivating ground for crops,construction of fences to contain livestock,construction of stock ponds,and other similar agricultural activities. Discharges of stormwater runoff associated with the construction of facilities that are subject to TPDES regulations,such as the construction of concentrated animal feeding operations,would be point sources regulated under this general permit. 11. Endangered Species Act Discharges that would adversely affect a listed endangered or threatened aquatic or aquatic-dependent species or its critical habitat are not authorized by this permit,unless the requirements of the Endangered Species Act are satisfied. Federal requirements related to endangered species apply to all TPDES permitted discharges and site-specific controls may be required to ensure that protection of endangered or threatened species is achieved. If a permittee has concerns over potential impacts to listed species,the permittee may contact TCEQ for additional information. via Page 16 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 400 12. Other Nothing in Part II of the general permit is intended to negate any person's ability to assert force majeure(act of God,war,strike,riot,or other catastrophe)defenses found in 3o TAC§70.7. Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Large Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction-Operators of large construction activities continuing to operate after the effective date of this permit,and authorized under the TPDES Construction General Permit TXR15o0o0(effective on March 5, 2013),must submit an NOI to renew authorization or a NOT to terminate coverage under this general permit within go days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim or grace period,as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES general permit. 2. Small Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction-Discharges from ongoing small construction activities that commenced prior to the effective date of this general permit,and that do not meet the conditions to qualify for termination of this permit as described in Part ILF of this general permit,must meet the requirements to be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim period,as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES Construction General Permit. Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion: Operators of small construction activity,as defined in Part LB of this general permit, shall not submit an NOI for coverage,unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities,which occur in certain counties and during periods of low potential for erosion that do not meet the conditions of the waiver described in Part II.G of this general permit, may be automatically authorized under this general permit if all the following conditions are met. (a) the construction activity occurs in a county and during the corresponding date range(s)listed in Appendix A; (b) the construction activity is initiated and completed,including either final or temporary stabilization of all disturbed areas,within the time frame identified in 411/ Appendix A for the location of the construction site; Page 17 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (c) all temporary stabilization is adequately maintained to effectively reduce or prohibit erosion,permanent stabilization activities have been initiated,and a condition of final stabilization is completed no later than 3o days following the end date of the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; (d) the permittee signs a completed TCEQ small construction site notice for low potential for erosion,including the certification statement; (e) a signed and certified copy of the small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is posted at the construction site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities,and maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity; NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified site notice,with a viewable signature,located on- site and available for review by any applicable regulatory authority. (t) a copy of the signed and certified small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities; (g) discharges of stormwater runoff or other non-stormwater discharges from any supporting concrete batch plant or asphalt batch plant is separately authorized under an individual TPDES permit,another TPDES general permit,or under an individual TCEQ permit where stormwater and non-stormwater is disposed of by evaporation or irrigation(discharges are adjacent to water in the state);and (h) any non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization,are not considered by TCEQ to be a wastewater,or are captured and routed for disposal at a publicly operated treatment works or licensed waste disposal facility. If all of the conditions in(a)—(h)above are met,then the operator(s)of small construction activities with low potential for erosion are not required to develop a SWP3. If an operator is conducting small construction activities and any of the above conditions (a)—(h)are not met,the operator cannot declare coverage under the automatic authorization for small construction activities with low potential for erosion and must meet the requirements for automatic authorization(all other)small construction activities,described below in Part II.E.z. For small construction activities that occur during a period with a low potential for erosion,where automatic authorization under this section is not available,an operator may apply for and obtain a waiver from permitting(Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver— LREW),as described in Part ILG of this general permit. Waivers from coverage under the LREW do not allow for any discharges of non-stormwater and the operator must ensure that discharges on non-stormwater are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization. 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: Operators of small construction activities as defined in Part LB of this general permit shall not submit an NOI for coverage,unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities,as defined in Part I.B of this general permit or as defined but who do not meet in the conditions and requirements located in Part II.E.r above,may be automatically authorized for small construction activities,provided that they meet all of the following conditions: J Page 18 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit,that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site for which the applicant is the operator,and implement the SWP3 prior to commencing construction activities; (b) all operators of regulated small construction activities must post a copy of a signed and certified Small Construction site notice,the notice must be posted at the construction site in a location where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities, at least two days prior to commencing construction activity,and maintain the notice in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities, e.g. pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway; notice for these linear sites may be relocated,as necessary,along the length of the project,and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state,and federal authorities); (c) operators must maintain a posted site notice at the construction site until final stabilization has been achieved; and NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Small Construction site notice,with a viewable signature,located on-site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. (d) provide a copy of the signed and certified construction site notice to the operator of any municipal separate storm sewer system(MS4)receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities. As described in Part I.B of this general permit,large construction activities include those that will disturb less than five(5)acres of land,but that are part of a larger common plan tio of development or sale that will ultimately disturb five(5)or more acres of land,and must meet the requirements of Part II.E.3.below. 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: Operators of large construction activities that qualify for coverage under this general permit must meet all of the following conditions: (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site where the applicant is the operator. The SWP3 must be developed and implemented prior to obtaining coverage and prior to commencing construction activities; (b) primary operators of large construction activities must submit an NOI prior to commencing construction activity at a construction site.A completed NOI must be submitted to TCEQ electronically using the online e-Permits system on TCEQ's website. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver must submit a completed NOI to TCEQ at least seven(7)days prior to prior to commencing construction activity to obtain provisional coverage seven(7)days from the postmark date for delivery to the TCEQ. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOL. If an additional primary operator is added after the initial NOI is submitted,the additional primary operator must meet the same requirements for existing primary operator(s),as indicated above. If the primary operator changes due to responsibility at the site being transferred from one primary operator to another after the initial NOI is submitted,the new primary operator must submit a paper NOI or an electronic NOI at least ten(to) Page 19 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 days prior to assuming operational control of a construction site and commencing construction activity. Operators that submit NOIs electronically must use the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. (c) all operators of large construction activities must post a site notice in accordance with Part III.D.2 of this permit. The site notice must be located where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities,and must be maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities,e.g.pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway;notice for these linear sites may be relocated,as necessary,along the length of the project,and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local, state,and federal authorities); (d) two days prior to commencing construction activities,all primary operators must: i. provide a copy of the signed NOI to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to any secondary construction operator,and ii. list in the SWP3 the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy; (e) all persons meeting the definition of"secondary operator"in Part I of this permit are hereby notified that they are regulated under this general permit,but are not required to submit an NOI,provided that a primary operator at the site has submitted an NOI,or prior to commencement of construction activities,a primary operator is required to submit an NOI and the secondary operator has provided notification to the operator(s)of the need to obtain coverage(with records of notification available upon request). Any secondary operator notified under this provision may alternatively submit an NOI under this general permit,may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES individual permit,or may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES general permit if available;and (f) all secondary operators of large construction activities must post a copy of the signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice and provide a copy of the signed and certified site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to the commencement construction activities. NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice,with a viewable signature,located on-site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants must submit an NOI using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities: Operators of certain small construction activities may obtain a waiver from coverage under this general permit,if applicable. The requirements are outlined in Part II.G below. 5. Effective Date of Coverage (a) Operators of small construction activities as described in either Part II.E.i or II.E.2 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions of Part II.E.r or II.E.2. Secondary operators of large construction Page zo Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 activities as described in Part II.E.3 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions in Part I1.E.3. For activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (b) Primary operators of large construction activities as described in Part II.E.3 above that electronically submit an NOI are authorized immediately following confirmation of receipt of the electronic form by the TCEQ,unless otherwise notified by the executive director. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver are provisionally authorized seven(7)days from the date that a completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ,unless otherwise notified by the executive director. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOI. For construction activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction activities may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (c) Operators are not prohibited from submitting late NOIs or posting late notices to obtain authorization under this general permit. The TCEQ reserves the right to take appropriate enforcement action for any unpermitted activities that may have occurred between the time construction commenced and authorization was obtained. (d) If operators that submitted NOIs have active authorizations for construction activities that are ongoing when the term of the current general permit expires and a new general permit is issued,a 90-day interim(grace)period is granted to provide coverage that is administratively continued until operators with active authorizations can obtain coverage under the newly issued CGP. The 90-day grace period starts on the effective date of the newly issued CGP. Deadlines for obtaining coverage for operators of small and large construction are provided in Part II.D.1 and 2 above. 6. Notice of Change(NOC) If relevant information provided in the NOI changes,the operator that has submitted the NOI must submit an NOC to TCEQ at least fourteen(14)days before the change occurs, if possible. Where a 14-day advance notice is not possible,the operator must submit an NOC to TCEQ within 14-days of discovery of the change. If the operator becomes aware that it failed to submit any relevant facts or submitted incorrect information in an NOI, the correct information must be submitted to TCEQ in an NOC within 14 days after discovery. The NOC shall be submitted on a form provided by the executive director,or by letter if an NOC form is not available. A copy of the NOC form or letter must also be placed in the SWP3 and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge. A list that includes the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy of the NOC(or NOC letter)must be included in the SWP3. Information on an NOC may include,but is not limited to,the following: a change in the description of the construction project; an increase in the number of acres disturbed(for increases of one or more acres);or the name of the operator(where the name of the operator has changed). A transfer of operational control from one operator to another,including a transfer of 4111, the ownership of a company. Coverage under this general permit is not transferable Page 21 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 from one operator to another or one company to another,and may not be included in an NOC. A transfer of ownership of a company may include,but is not limited to,the following: changes to the structure of a company,such as changing from a partnership to a corporation or changing corporation types,so that the filing number(or charter number)that is on record with the Texas Secretary of State must be changed. An NOC is not required for notifying TCEQ of a decrease in the number of acres disturbed. This information must be included in the SWP3 and retained on site. Effective September 1,2018,applicants must submit an NOC using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination(NOT)Forms,NOC Letters,and Construction Site Notices NOI forms,NOT forms,NOC letters,and Construction Site Notices that require a signature must be signed according to 3o TAC§305.44(relating to Signatories for Applications). 8. Contents of the NOl The NOI form shall require,at a minimum,the following information: (a) the TPDES CGP authorization number for existing authorizations under this general permit,where the operator submits an NOI to renew coverage within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit; (b) the name,address,and telephone number of the operator filing the NOI for permit coverage; (c) the name(or other identifier),address,county,and latitude/longitude of the construction project or site; (d) the number of acres that will be disturbed by the applicant; (e) confirmation that the project or site will not be located on Indian Country lands; (f) confirmation that a SWP3 has been developed in accordance with this general permit,that it will be implemented prior to commencement of construction activities,and that it is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans;for multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3,the confirmation for an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3 provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator; (g) name of the receiving water(s); (h) the classified segment number for each classified segment that receives discharges from the regulated construction activity(if the discharge is not directly to a classified segment,then the classified segment number of the first classified segment that those discharges reach);and (i) the name of all surface waters receiving discharges from the regulated construction activity that are on the latest EPA-approved CWA§3o3(d)List of impaired waters or Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b)and 3o3(d)as not meeting applicable state water quality standards. 9I Page 22 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRl50000 Section F. Terminating Coverage 1. Notice of Termination(NOD Required Each operator that has submitted an NOI for authorization of large construction activities under this general permit must apply to terminate that authorization following the conditions described in this section of the general permit. Authorization of large construction must be terminated by submitting an NOT on a paper form to TCEQ supplied by the executive director or electronically via the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates at midnight on the day a paper NOT is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ or immediately following confirmation of the receipt of the NOT submitted electronically by the TCEQ. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until an NOT is submitted. Effective September r,2018,applicants must submit an NOT using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. The NOT must be submitted to TCEQ,and a copy of the NOT provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(with a list in the SWP3 of the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy),within 3o days after any of the following conditions are met: (a) final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; (b) a transfer of operational control has occurred(See Section II.F.4 below); or 410, (c) the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual TPDES permit or alternative TPDES general permit. 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT The NOT form shall require,at a minimum,the following information: (a) if authorization for construction activity was granted following submission of an NOI,the permittee's site-specific TPDES authorization number for a specific construction site; (b) an indication of whether final stabilization has been achieved at the site and a NOT has been submitted or if the permittee is simply no longer an operator at the site; (c) the name,address,and telephone number of the permittee submitting the NOT; (d) the name(or other identifier),address,county,and location(latitude/longitude)of the construction project or site;and (e) a signed certification that either all stormwater discharges requiring authorization under this general permit will no longer occur,or that the applicant is no longer the operator of the facility or construction site,and that all temporary structural erosion controls have either been removed,will be removed on a schedule defined in the SWP3,or have been transferred to a new operator if the new operator has applied for permit coverage. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats,are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal. co Page 23 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRt50000 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites (a) Each operator that has obtained automatic authorization for small construction or is a secondary operator for large construction must perform the following when terminating coverage under the permit: i. remove the site notice; ii. complete the applicable portion of the site notice related to removal of the site notice;and iii. submit a copy of the completed site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(or provide alternative notification as allowed by the MS4 operator, with documentation of such notification included in the SWP3). (b) The activities described in Part II.F.3.(a)above must be completed by the operator within 3o days of meeting any of the following conditions: i. final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; ii. a transfer of day-to-day operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions has occurred(See Section II.F.4.below);or iii. the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual or general TPDES permit. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates immediately upon removal of the applicable site notice. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until the site notice is removed. 4. Transfer of Day-to-Day Operational Control (a) When the primary operator of a large construction activity changes or operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions is transferred to another primary operator,the original operator must do the following: i. submit an NOT within ten(to)days prior to the date that responsibility for operations terminates,and the new operator must submit an NOI at least ten (to)days prior to the transfer of operational control,in accordance with condition(c)below;and ii. submit a copy of the NOT from the primary operator terminating its coverage under the permit and its operational control of the construction site and submit a copy of the NOI from the new primary operator to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge in accordance with Part II.F.r above. (b) For transfer of operational control,operators of small construction activities and secondary operators of large construction activities who are not required to submit an NOI must do the following: i. the existing operator must remove the original site notice,and the new operator must post the required site notice prior to the transfer of operational control,in accordance with the conditions in Part II.F.4.(c)i or ii below;and ii. a copy of the site notice,which must be completed and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge,in accordance with Part II.F.3 above. (c) Each operator is responsible for determining its role as an operator as defined in Part I.B and obtaining authorization under the permit,as described above in Part Page 24 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRiS0000 41109 II.E. 1—3. Where authorization has been obtained by submitting an NOI for coverage under this general permit,permit coverage is not transferable from one operator to another. A transfer of operational control can include changes to the structure of a company,such as changing from a partnership to a corporation,or changing to a different corporation type such that a different filing(or charter) number is established with the Texas Secretary of State. A transfer of operational control can also occur when of the following criteria is met,as applicable: i. Another operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that do not meet the definition for final stabilization; ii. all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have either been removed, scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3,or transferred to a new operator,provided that the original permitted operator has attempted to notify the new operator in writing of the requirement to obtain permit coverage. Records of this notification(or attempt at notification)shall be retained by the operator transferring operational control to another operator in accordance with Part VI of this permit. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats,are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal; or iii. a homebuilder has purchased one or more lots from an operator who obtained coverage under this general permit for a common plan of development or sale. The homebuilder is considered a new operator and shall comply with the requirements of this permit. Under these circumstances,the homebuilder is only responsible for compliance with the general permit requirements as they apply to the lot(s)it has operational control over in a larger common plan of development,and the original operator remains responsible for common controls or discharges,and must amend its SWP3 to remove the lot(s) 41104 transferred to the homebuilder. Section G. Waivers from Coverage The executive director may waive the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit for stormwater discharges from small construction activities under the terms and conditions described in this section. 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage Operators of small construction activities may apply for and receive a waiver from the requirements to obtain authorization under this general permit,when the calculated rainfall erosivity(R)factor for the entire period of the construction project is less than five(5). The operator must submit either a signed paper Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver(LREW) certification form to the TCEQ,supplied by the executive director,or complete the form electronically via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. The form is a certification by the operator that the small construction activity will commence and be completed within a period when the value of the calculated R factor is less than five(5). The paper LREW certification form must be postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ at least seven(y)days before construction activity begins or,if submitted electronically, construction may begin at any time following the receipt of written confirmation from TCEQ that a complete electronic application was submitted and acknowledged. This waiver from coverage does not apply to any non-stormwater discharges,including what is allowed under this permit. The operator must insure that all non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization,or are captured and routed to an authorized treatment facility for disposal. Page 25 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Effective September r, 2018,applicants must submit an LREW using the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver The construction site operator may calculate the R factor to request a waiver using the following steps: (a) Estimate the construction start date and the construction end date. The construction end date is the date that final stabilization will be achieved. (b) Find the appropriate Erosivity Index(EI)zone in Appendix B of this permit. (c) Find the EI percentage for the project period by adding the results for each period of the project using the table provided in Appendix D of this permit,in EPA Fact Sheet 2.1,or in USDA Handbook 703,by subtracting the start value from the end value to find the percent EI for the site. (d) Refer to the Isoerodent Map(Appendix C of this permit)and interpolate the annual isoerodent value for the proposed construction location. (e) Multiply the percent value obtained in Step(c)above by the annual isoerodent value obtained in Step(d). This is the R factor for the proposed project. If the value is less than 5,then a waiver may be obtained. If the value is five(5)or more,then a waiver may not be obtained,and the operator must obtain coverage under Part II.E.2.of this permit. Alternatively,the operator may calculate a site-specific R factor utilizing the following online calculator: ://ei.tamu.edu/index.html or using another available resource. A copy of the LREW certification form is not required to be posted at the small construction site. 3. Effective Date of a LREW Unless otherwise notified by the executive director,operators of small construction activities seeking coverage under a LREW are provisionally waived from the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit seven(7)days from the date that a completed paper LREW certification form is postmarked for delivery to TCEQ,or immediately upon receiving confirmation of approval of an electronic submittal, made via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Effective September r,2018,applicants seeking coverage under a LREW must submit an application for a LREW using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 4. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period If a construction activity extends beyond the approved waiver period due to circumstances beyond the control of the operator,the operator must either: (a) recalculate the R factor using the original start date and a new projected ending date,and if the R factor is still under five(5),submit a new waiver certification form at least two(2)days before the end of the original waiver period;or (b) obtain authorization under this general permit according to the requirements for automatic authorization for small construction activities in Part ILE.2 of this permit, prior to the end of the approved LREW period. J Page 26 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 4.1 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 1. Individual Permit Alternative Any discharge eligible for coverage under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under an individual TPDES permit according to 30 TAC§305(relating to Consolidated Permits). Applications for individual permit coverage must be submitted at least three hundred and thirty(33o)days prior to commencement of construction activities to ensure timely authorization. Existing coverage under this general permit should not be terminated until an individual permit is issued and in effect. 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges Certain discharges eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),as applicable. 3. Individual Permit Required The executive director may require an operator of a construction site,otherwise eligible for authorization under this general permit,to apply for an individual TPDES permit in the following circumstances: (a) the conditions of an approved TMDL or TMDL I-Plan on the receiving water; (b) the activity being determined to cause,has a reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or being found to cause,or contribute to,the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state: and (c) any other consideration defined in 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges)including 3o TAC Chapter 2o5.4(c)(3)(D),which allows the commission to deny authorization under the general permit and require an individual permit if a discharger has been determined by the executive director to have been out of compliance with any rule,order,or permit of the commission, including non-payment of fees assessed by the executive director. A discharger with a TCEQ compliance history rating of"unsatisfactory"is ineligible for coverage under this general permit. In that case,3o TAC§60.3 requires the executive director to deny or suspend an authorization to discharge under a general permit. However,per TWC§26.040(h),a discharger is entitled to a hearing before the commission prior to having an authorization denied or suspended for having an "unsatisfactory"compliance history. Denial of authorization to discharge under this general permit or suspension of a permittee's authorization under this general permit for reasons other than compliance history shall be done according to commission rules in 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges). 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization Any discharge eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),if applicable. Section I. Permit Expiration 1. This general permit is effective for a term not to exceed five(5)years. All active discharge authorizations expire on the date provided on page one(r)of this permit. Following public notice and comment,as provided by 3o TAC§205.3(relating to Public Notice, Public Meetings,and Public Comment),the commission may amend, Page 27 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 revoke,cancel,or renew this general permit. All authorizations that are active at the time the permit term expires will be administratively continued as indicated in Part II.I.2 below and in Part ILD.r(b)and D.2(b)of this permit. 2. If the executive director publishes a notice of the intent to renew or amend this general permit before the expiration date,the permit will remain in effect for existing, authorized discharges until the commission takes final action on the permit. Upon issuance of a renewed or amended permit,permittees may be required to submit an NOI within 90 days following the effective date of the renewed or amended permit,unless that permit provides for an alternative method for obtaining authorization. 3. If the commission does not propose to reissue this general permit within 90 days before the expiration date,permittees shall apply for authorization under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. If the application for an individual permit is submitted before the expiration date,authorization under this expiring general permit remains in effect until the issuance or denial of an individual permit. No new NOIs will be accepted nor new authorizations honored under the general permit after the expiration date. Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) All regulated construction site operators shall prepare an SWP3,prior to submittal of an NOI,to address discharges authorized under Parts II.E.2 and ILE.3 of this general permit that will reach Waters of the U.S. This includes discharges to MS4s and privately owned separate storm sewer systems that drain into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. Individual operators at a site may develop separate SWP3s that cover only their portion of the project,provided reference is made to the other operators at the site. Where there is more than one SWP3 for a site,operators must coordinate to ensure that BMPs and controls are consistent and do not negate or impair the effectiveness of each other. Regardless of whether a single comprehensive SWP3 is developed or separate SWP3s are developed for each operator,it is the responsibility of each operator to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit in the areas of the construction site where that operator has control over construction plans and specifications or day-to-day operations. An SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater associated with construction activity and non-stormwater discharges described in Part ILA.3,in compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit. An SWP3 must also identify any potential sources of pollution that have been determined to cause,have a reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause or contribute to the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state from discharges of stormwater from construction activities and construction support activities. Where potential sources of these pollutants are present at a construction site,the SWP3 must also contain a description of the management practices that will be used to prevent these pollutants from being discharged into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. NOTE: Construction support activities can also include vehicle repair areas,fueling areas,etc.that are present at a construction site solely for the support construction activities and are only used by operators at the construction site. The SWP3 is intended to serve as a road map for how the construction operator will comply with the effluent limits and other conditions of this permit and does not establish the effluent limits that apply to the construction site's discharges. These limits are established in Part III.G of the permit Page 28 ''IJ Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRrs0000 410 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development For more effective coordination of BMPs and opportunities for cost sharing,a cooperative effort by the different operators at a site is encouraged. Operators of small and large construction activities must independently obtain authorization under this permit,but may work together with other regulated operators at the construction site to prepare and implement a single,comprehensive SWP3,which can be shared by some or all operators,for the construction activities that each of the operators are performing at the entire construction site. 1. The SWP3 must include the following: (a) for small construction activities—the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3; (b) for large construction activities-the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3,the general permit authorization numbers of each operator (or the date that the NOI was submitted to TCEQ by each operator that has not received an authorization number for coverage under this permit); and (c) for large and small construction activities-the signature of each operator participating in the shared SWP3. 2. The SWP3 must clearly indicate which operator is responsible for satisfying each shared requirement of the SWP3. If the responsibility for satisfying a requirement is not described in the plan,then each permittee is entirely responsible for meeting the requirement within the boundaries of the construction site where they perform construction activities. The SWP3 must clearly describe responsibilities for meeting each requirement in shared or common areas. 3. The SWP3 may provide that one operator is responsible for preparation of a SWP3 in compliance with the CGP,and another operator is responsible for implementation of the SWP3 at the project site. Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications MI secondary operators and primary operators with control over construction plans and specifications shall: (a) ensure the project specifications allow or provide that adequate BMPs are developed to meet the requirements of Part III of this general permit; (b) ensure that the SWP3 indicates the areas of the project where they have control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications; (c) ensure that all other operators affected by modifications in project specifications are notified in a timely manner so that those operators may modify their BMP s as necessary to remain compliant with the conditions of this general permit;and (d) ensure that the SWP3 for portions of the project where they are operators indicates the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number(s)for operators with the day-to-day operational control over those activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions. If a primary operator has not been authorized or has abandoned the site,the secondary 4.00 operator is considered to be the responsible party and must obtain authorization Page 29 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRts0000 as a primary operator under the permit,until the authority for day-to-day operational control is transferred to another primary operator. The new primary operator must update or develop a new SWP3 that will reflect the transfer of operational control and include any additional updates to the SWP3 to meet requirements of the permit. 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control Primary operators with day-to-day operational control of those activities at a project that are necessary to ensure compliance with an SWP3 and other permit conditions must ensure that the SWP3 accomplishes the following requirements: (a) meets the requirements of this general permit for those portions of the project where they are operators; (b) identifies the parties responsible for implementation of BMPs described in the SWP3; (c) indicates areas of the project where they have operational control over day-to- day activities;and (d) the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number of the parties with control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications for areas where they have operational control over day-to-day activities. Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation,Implementation,and Compliance The SWP3 must be prepared prior to obtaining authorization under this general permit, and implemented prior to commencing construction activities that result in soil disturbance. The SWP3 must be prepared so that it provides for compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit. Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 1. The SWP3 must be retained on-site at the construction site or,if the site is inactive or does not have an on-site location to store the plan,a notice must be posted describing the location of the SWP3. The SWP3 must be made readily available at the time of an on-site inspection to: the executive director;a federal,state,or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans,grading plans,or stormwater management plans;local government officials; and the operator of a municipal separate storm sewer receiving discharges from the site. If the SWP3 is retained off-site,then it shall be made available as soon as reasonably possible. In most instances,it is reasonable that the SWP3 shall be made available within 24 hours of the request. 2. Operators with authorization for construction activity under this general permit must post a TCEQ site notice at the construction site at a place readily available for viewing by the general public,and local,state,and federal authorities. (a) Primary and secondary operators of large construction activities must each post a TCEQ construction site notice,respective to their role as an operator at the construction site,as required above and according to requirements in Part II.E.3 of this general permit. (b) Primary and secondary operators of small construction activities must post the TCEQ site notice as required in Part III.D.2.(a)above and for the specific type of small construction described in Part II.E.t and 2 of the permit. (c) If the construction project is a linear construction project,such as a pipeline or highway,the notices must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway. Site notices for small and large construction Page 3o Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 activities at these linear construction sites may be located,as necessary,along the length of the project,but must still be readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state,and federal authorities;and contain the following information: i. the site-specific TPDES authorization number for the project if assigned; ii. the operator name,contact name,and contact phone number; iii. a brief description of the project;and iv. the location of the SWP3. 3. This permit does not provide the general public with any right to trespass on a construction site for any reason,including inspection of a site; nor does this permit require that permittees allow members of the general public access to a construction site. Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s The permittee must revise or update the SWP3 within seven days of when any of the following occurs: 1. a change in design,construction,operation,or maintenance that has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants and that has not been previously addressed in the SWP3; 2. changing site conditions based on updated plans and specifications,new operators, new areas of responsibility,and changes in BMPs;or 3. results of inspections or investigations by construction site personnel authorized by the permittee,operators of a municipal separate storm sewer system receiving the 4111, discharge,authorized TCEQ personnel,or a federal,state or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans indicate the SWP3 is proving ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutants in discharges authorized under this general permit. Section F. Contents of SWP3 The SWP3 must be developed and implemented by primary operators of small and large construction activities and include,at a minimum,the information described in this section and must comply with the construction and development effluent guidelines in Part III,Section G of the general permit. I. A site or project description,which includes the following information: (a) a description of the nature of the construction activity; (b) a list of potential pollutants and their sources; (c) a description of the intended schedule or sequence of activities that will disturb soils for major portions of the site,including estimated start dates and duration of activities; (d) the total number of acres of the entire property and the total number of acres where construction activities will occur,including areas where construction support activities(defined in Part I.B of this general permit)occur; (e) data describing the soil or the quality of any discharge from the site; (0 a map showing the general location of the site(e.g.a portion of a city or county map); 4111/ (g) a detailed site map(or maps)indicating the following: Page 31 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR>,50000 i. drainage patterns and approximate slopes anticipated after major grading 1 activities; J ii. areas where soil disturbance will occur; iii. locations of all controls and buffers,either planned or in place; iv. locations where temporary or permanent stabilization practices are expected to be used; v. locations of construction support activities,including those located off-site; vi. surface waters(including wetlands)either at,adjacent,or in close proximity to the site,and also indicate whether those waters are impaired; vii. locations where stormwater discharges from the site directly to a surface water body or a municipal separate storm sewer system; viii. vehicle wash areas;and ix. designated points on the site where vehicles will exit onto paved roads(for instance,this applies to construction transition from unstable dirt areas to exterior paved roads). Where the amount of information required to be included on the map would result in a single map being difficult to read and interpret,the operator shall develop a series of maps that collectively include the required information. (h) the location and description of support activities authorized under the permittee's NOI,including asphalt plants,concrete plants,and other activities providing support to the construction site that is authorized under this general permit; (i) the name of receiving waters at or near the site that may be disturbed or that may receive discharges from disturbed areas of the project; (j) a copy of this TPDES general permit; (k) the NOI and the acknowledgement of provisional and non-provisional authorization for primary operators of large construction sites,and the site notice for small construction sites and for secondary operators of large construction sites; (I) stormwater and allowable non-stormwater discharge locations,including storm drain inlets on site and in the immediate vicinity of the construction site where construction support activities will occur;and (m) locations of all pollutant-generating activities at the construction site and where construction support activities will occur,such as the following: Paving operations; concrete,paint and stucco washout and water disposal;solid waste storage and disposal;and dewatering operations. 2. A description of the BMPs that will be used to minimize pollution in runoff. The description must identify the general timing or sequence for implementation. At a minimum,the description must include the following components: (a) General Requirements i. Erosion and sediment controls must be designed to retain sediment on-site to the extent practicable with consideration for local topography,soil type, and rainfall. ii. Control measures must be properly selected,installed,and maintained according to the manufacturer's or designer's specifications. Page 32 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 iii. Controls must be developed to minimize the offsite transport of litter, construction debris,and construction materials. (b) Erosion Control and Stabilization Practices The SWP3 must include a description of temporary and permanent erosion control and stabilization practices for the construction site,where small or large construction activity will occur. The erosion control and stabilization practices selected by the permittee must be compliant with the requirements for sediment and erosion control,located in Part III.G of this permit. The description of the SWP3 must also include a schedule of when the practices will be implemented. Site plans must ensure that existing vegetation at the construction site is preserved where it is possible. i. Erosion control and stabilization practices may include but are not limited to:establishment of temporary or permanent vegetation,mulching, geotextiles,sod stabilization,vegetative buffer strips,protection of existing trees and vegetation,slope texturing,temporary velocity dissipation devices,flow diversion mechanisms,and other similar measures. ii. The following records must be maintained and either attached to or referenced in the SWP3,and made readily available upon request to the parties listed in Part III.D.1 of this general permit: (A) the dates when major grading activities occur; (B) the dates when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site; and (C) the dates when stabilization measures are initiated. C iii. Erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily ceased and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. Stabilization measures that provide a protective cover must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have permanently ceased. The term"immediately"is used to define the deadline for initiating stabilization measures.In the context of this requirement,`immediately"means as soon as practicable,but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth-disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Except as provided in (A)through(D)below,these measures must be completed as soon as practicable,but no more than 14 calendar days after the initiation of soil stabilization measures: (A) Where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased due to frozen conditions, non-vegetative controls must be implemented until thawing conditions(as defined in Part I.B of this general permit) are present,and vegetative stabilization measures can be initiated as soon as practicable. (B) In and areas,semi-arid areas,or drought-stricken areas,as they are defined in Part I.B of this general permit,where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased or is precluded by arid conditions,other types of erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated at the site as soon as practicable. Where vegetative controls are infeasible due to arid conditions,and within 14 calendar days of a temporary or permanent cessation of construction activity in any portion of the site,the operator shall immediately install non- Page 33 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 vegetative erosion controls in areas of the construction site where construction activity is complete or has ceased. If non-vegetative controls are infeasible,the operator shall install temporary sediment controls as required in Part III.F.2.(b).iii.(C)below. (C) In areas where non-vegetative controls are infeasible,the operator may alternatively utilize temporary perimeter controls. The operator must document in the SWP3 the reason why stabilization measures are not feasible,and must demonstrate that the perimeter controls will retain sediment on site to the extent practicable. The operator must continue to inspect the BMPs at the frequencies established in Part IILF.7.(c)for unstabilized sites. (D) The requirement for permittees to initiate stabilization is triggered as soon as it is known with reasonable certainty that construction activity at the site or in certain areas of the site will be stopped for 14 or more additional calendar days. If the initiation or completion of vegetative stabilization is prevented by circumstances beyond the control of the permittee,the permittee must employ and implement alternative stabilization measures immediately. When conditions at the site changes that would allow for vegetative stabilization,then the permittee must initiate or complete vegetative stabilization as soon as practicable. iv. Final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. v. TCEQ does not expect that temporary or permanent stabilization measures to be applied to areas that are intended to be left un-vegetated or un- stabilized following construction(e.g.,dirt access roads,utility pole pads, areas being used for storage of vehicles,equipment,or materials). (c) Sediment Control Practices The SWP3 must include a description of any sediment control practices used to remove eroded soils from stormwater runoff,including the general timing or sequence for implementation of controls. i. Sites With Drainage Areas of Tenor More Acres (A) Sedimentation Basin(s) (1) A sedimentation basin is required,where feasible,for a common drainage location that serves an area with ten(lo)or more acres disturbed at one time. A sedimentation basin may be temporary or permanent,and must provide sufficient storage to contain a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained. When calculating the volume of runoff from a 2-year,24-hour storm event,it is not required to include the flows from offsite areas and flow from onsite areas that are either undisturbed or have already undergone permanent stabilization,if these flows are diverted around both the disturbed areas of the site and the sediment basin.Capacity calculations shall be included in the SWP3. (2) Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,the sedimentation basin must provide at least 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained until final stabilization of the site. J Page 34 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRiS0000 (3) If a sedimentation basin is not feasible,then the permittee shall provide equivalent control measures until final stabilization of the site. In determining whether installing a sediment basin is feasible,the permittee may consider factors such as site soils, slope, available area,public safety,precipitation patterns,site geometry,site vegetation,infiltration capacity,geotechnical factors,depth to groundwater,and other similar considerations. The permittee shall document the reason that the sediment basins are not feasible,and shall utilize equivalent control measures, which may include a series of smaller sediment basins. (4) Unless infeasible,when discharging from sedimentation basins and impoundments,the permittee shall utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface. (B) Perimeter Controls: At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips,or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area,and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. H. Controls for Sites With Drainage Areas Less than Ten Acres: (A) Sediment traps and sediment basins may be used to control solids in stormwater runoff for drainage locations serving less than ten(to) acres. At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips,or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area,and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site 4rneconditions. (B) Alternatively,a sediment basin that provides storage for a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained may be utilized. Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,a temporary or permanent sediment basin providing 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained may be provided. If a calculation is performed,then the calculation shall be included in the SWP3. (C) If sedimentation basins or impoundments are used,the permittee shall comply with the requirements in Part III.G.6 of this general permit. 3. Description of Permanent Stormwater Controls A description of any stormwater control measures that will be installed during the construction process to control pollutants in stormwater discharges that may occur after construction operations have been completed must be included in the SWP3. Permittees are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater management measures,as follows: (a) permittees authorized under the permit for small construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures prior to final stabilization of the site; or (b) permittees authorized under the permit for large construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures prior to final stabilization of the site and prior to submission of an NOT. 4. Other Required Controls and BMPs Page 35 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRis0000 (a) Permittees shall minimize,to the extent practicable,the off-site vehicle tracking of sediments and the generation of dust. The SWP3 shall include a description of controls utilized to accomplish this requirement. (b) The SWP3 must include a description of construction and waste materials expected to be stored on-site and a description of controls to minimize pollutants from these materials. (c) The SWP3 must include a description of potential pollutant sources in discharges of stormwater from all areas of the construction site where construction activity,including construction support activities,will be located, and a description of controls and measures that will be implemented at those sites to minimize pollutant discharges. (d) Permittees shall place velocity dissipation devices at discharge locations and along the length of any outfall channel(i.e.,runoff conveyance)to provide a non- erosive flow velocity from the structure to a water course,so that the natural physical and biological characteristics and functions are maintained and protected. (e) Permittees shall design and utilize appropriate controls to minimize the offsite transport of suspended sediments and other pollutants if it is necessary to pump or channel standing water from the site. (f) Permittees shall ensure that all other required controls and BMPs comply with all of the requirements of Part III.G of this general permit. (g) For demolition of any structure with at least io,000 square feet of floor space that was built or renovated before January 1, 1980,and the receiving waterbody is impaired for polychlorinated biphenyls(PCBs): i. Implement controls to minimize the exposure of PCB-containing building materials,including paint,caulk,and pre-198o fluorescent lighting fixtures to precipitation and to stormwater; and ii. Ensure that disposal of such materials is performed in compliance with applicable state,federal,and local laws. 5. Documentation of Compliance with Approved State and Local Plans (a) Permittees must ensure that the SWP3 is consistent with requirements specified in applicable sediment and erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by federal,state,or local officials. (b) SWP3s must be updated as necessary to remain consistent with any changes applicable to protecting surface water resources in sediment erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by state or local official for which the permittee receives written notice. (c) If the permittee is required to prepare a separate management plan,including but not limited to a WPAP or Contributing Zone Plan in accordance with 3o TAC Chapter 213(related to the Edwards Aquifer),then a copy of that plan must be either included in the SWP3 or made readily available upon request to authorized personnel of the TCEQ. The permittee shall maintain a copy of the approval letter for the plan in its SWP3. 6. Maintenance Requirements (a) All protective measures identified in the SWP3 must be maintained in effective operating condition. If,through inspections or other means,as soon as the permittee determines that BMPs are not operating effectively,then the permittee shall perform maintenance as necessary to maintain the continued effectiveness Page 36 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi,50000 CPO of stormwater controls,and prior to the next rain event if feasible. If maintenance prior to the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,the reason shall be documented in the SWP3 and maintenance must be scheduled and accomplished as soon as practicable. Erosion and sediment controls that have been intentionally disabled,run-over,removed,or otherwise rendered ineffective must be replaced or corrected immediately upon discovery. (b) If periodic inspections or other information indicates a control has been used incorrectly,is performing inadequately,or is damaged,then the operator shall replace or modify the control as soon as practicable after making the discovery. (c) Sediment must be removed from sediment traps and sedimentation ponds no later than the time that design capacity has been reduced by 5o%. For perimeter controls such as silt fences,berms,etc.,the trapped sediment must be removed before it reaches 5o%of the above-ground height. (d) If sediment escapes the site,accumulations must be removed at a frequency that minimizes off-site impacts,and prior to the next rain event,if feasible. If the permittee does not own or operate the off-site conveyance,then the permittee shall work with the owner or operator of the property to remove the sediment. 7. Inspections of Controls (a) Personnel provided by the permittee must inspect disturbed areas(cleared, graded,or excavated)of the construction site that do not meet the requirements of final stabilization in this general permit,all locations where stabilization measures have been implemented,areas of construction support activity covered under this permit,stormwater controls(including pollution prevention controls) for evidence of,or the potential for,the discharge of pollutants,areas where stormwater typically flows within the construction site,and points of discharge from the construction site. i. Personnel conducting these inspections must be knowledgeable of this general permit,the construction activities at the site,and the SWP3 for the site. ii. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC§305.128. (b) Requirements for Inspections i. Inspect all stormwater controls(including sediment and erosion control measures identified in the SWP3)to ensure that they are installed properly, appear to be operational,and minimizing pollutants in discharges,as intended. ii. Identify locations on the construction site where new or modified stormwater controls are necessary. iii. Check for signs of visible erosion and sedimentation that can be attributed to the points of discharge where discharges leave the construction site or discharge into any surface water in the state flowing within or adjacent to the construction site. iv. Identify any incidents of noncompliance observed during the inspection. v. Inspect locations where vehicles enter or exit the site for evidence of off-site sediment tracking. vi. If an inspection is performed when discharges from the construction site are occurring: identify all discharge points at the site,observe and document 41110 the visual quality of the discharge(i.e.,color,odor,floating,settled,or Page 37 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 suspended solids,foam,oil sheen,and other such indicators of pollutants in stormwater). vii. Complete any necessary maintenance needed,based on the results of the inspection and in accordance with the requirements listed in Part III.F.6 above. (c) Inspection frequencies: i. Inspections of construction sites must be conducted at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,unless as otherwise provided below in Part III.F.7.(c).ii—v below. ii. Inspection frequencies must be conducted at least once every month in areas of the construction site that meet final stabilization or have been temporarily stabilized. iii. Inspection frequencies for construction sites,where runoff is unlikely due to the occurrence of frozen conditions at the site,must be conducted at least once every month until thawing conditions begin to occur(See definitions for thawing conditions in Part I.B). The SWP3 must also contain a record of the approximate beginning and ending dates of when frozen conditions occurred at the site,which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly, while those conditions persisted,instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of o.5 inches or greater. iv. In arid,semi-arid,or drought-stricken areas,inspections must be conducted at least once every month and within 24 hours after the end of a storm event of o.5 inches or greater. The SWP3 must also contain a record of the total rainfall measured,as well as the approximate beginning and ending dates of when drought conditions occurred at the site,which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly,while those conditions persisted,instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. v. Man alternative to the inspection schedule in Part III.F.7.(c).i above,the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven(7)calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed, then the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. vi. The inspection procedures described in Part III.F.7.(c).i.—v above can be performed at the frequencies and under the applicable conditions indicated for each schedule option,provided that the SWP3 reflects the current schedule and that any changes to the schedule are made in accordance with the following provisions: the inspection frequency schedule can only be changed a maximum of one time each month;the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month;and the reason for the schedule change documented in the SWP3(e.g.,end of"dry"season and beginning of"wet"season). (d) Utility line installation,pipeline construction,and other examples of long, narrow,linear construction activities may provide inspection personnel with limited access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a)above. i. Inspection of linear construction sites could require the use of vehicles that could compromise areas of temporary or permanent stabilization,cause Page 38 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi5o0o0 additional disturbance of soils,and result in the increase the potential for erosion. In these circumstances,controls must be inspected at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,but representative inspections may be performed. ii. For representative inspections,personnel must inspect controls along the construction site for 0.25 mile above and below each access point where a roadway,undisturbed right-of-way,or other similar feature intersects the construction site and allows access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a) above. The conditions of the controls along each inspected 0.25 mile portion may be considered as representative of the condition of controls along that reach extending from the end of the 0.25 mile portion to either the end of the next 0.25 mile inspected portion,or to the end of the project, whichever occurs first. As an alternative to the inspection schedule described in Part III.F.7.(c).i above,the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven(7)calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed,the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. iii. The SWP3 for a linear construction site must reflect the current inspection schedule. Any changes to the inspection schedule must be made in accordance with the following provisions: (A) the schedule may be changed a maximum of one time each month; (8) the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month,and (C) the reason for the schedule change must be documented in the SWP3 (e.g.,end of"dry"season and beginning of"wet"season). (e) In the event of flooding or other uncontrollable situations which prohibit access to the inspection sites,inspections must be conducted as soon as access is practicable. (0 Inspection Reports i. A report summarizing the scope of any inspection must be completed within 24-hours following the inspection. The report must also include the date(s) of the inspection and major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3. Major observations in the report must include: the locations of where erosion and discharges of sediment or other pollutants from the site have occurred;locations of BMPs that need to be maintained;locations of BMPs that failed to operate as designed or proved inadequate for a particular location; and locations where additional BMPs are needed. ii. Actions taken as a result of inspections must be described within,and retained as a part of,the SWP3. Reports must identify any incidents of non- compliance. Where a report does not identify any incidents of non- compliance,the report must contain a certification that the facility or site is in compliance with the SWP3 and this permit. The report must be retained as part of the SWP3 and signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC§305.128(relating to Signatories to Reports). iii. The names and qualifications of personnel making the inspections for the permittee may be documented once in the SWP3 rather than being included in each report. C (g) The SWP3 must be modified based on the results of inspections, as necessary,to better control pollutants in runoff. Revisions to the SWP3 must be completed Page 39 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1.50000 within seven(7)calendar days following the inspection. If existing BMPs are ` modified or if additional BMPs are necessary,an implementation schedule J must be described in the SWP3 and wherever possible those changes implemented before the next storm event. If implementation before the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,these changes must be implemented as soon as practicable. 8. The SWP3 must identify and ensure the implementation of appropriate pollution prevention measures for all eligible non-stormwater components of the discharge,as listed in Part II.A.3 of this permit. 9. The SWP3 must include the information required in Part III.B of this general permit. to. The SWP3 must include pollution prevention procedures that comply with Part III.G.4 of this general permit. Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites Except as provided in 4o CFR§§1253o-12532,any discharge regulated under this general permit,with the exception of sites that obtained waivers based on low rainfall erosivity,must achieve,at a minimum,the following effluent limitations representing the degree of effluent reduction attainable by application of the best practicable control technology currently available(BPT). 1. Erosion and sediment controls. Design,install,and maintain effective erosion controls and sediment controls to minimize the discharge of pollutants.At a minimum,such controls must be designed,installed,and maintained to: (a) Control stormwater volume and velocity within the site to minimize soil erosion in order to minimize pollutant discharges; (b) Control stormwater discharges,including both peak flowrates and total stormwater volume,to minimize channel and streambank erosion and scour in the immediate vicinity of discharge point(s); (c) Minimize the amount of soil exposed during construction activity; (d) Minimize the disturbance of steep slopes; (e) Minimize sediment discharges from the site. The design,installation,and maintenance of erosion and sediment controls must address factors such as the amount,frequency,intensity and duration of precipitation,the nature of resulting stormwater runoff,and soil characteristics,including the range of soil particle sizes expected to be present on the site; (f) If earth disturbance activities are located in close proximity to a surface water in the state,provide and maintain appropriate natural buffers if feasible and as necessary,around surface water in the state,depending on site-specific topography,sensitivity,and proximity to water bodies. Direct stormwater to vegetated areas and maximize stormwater infiltration to reduce pollutant discharges,unless infeasible. If providing buffers is infeasible,the permittee shall document the reason that natural buffers are infeasible and shall implement additional erosion and sediment controls to reduce sediment load; (g) Preserve native topsoil at the site,unless the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that the topsoil be disturbed or removed,or it is infeasible; and (h) Minimize soil compaction. In areas of the construction site where final vegetative stabilization will occur or where infiltration practices will be installed, either: i. restrict vehicle and equipment use to avoid soil compaction; or Page 40 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1500oo IIlie ii. prior to seeding or planting areas of exposed soil that have been compacted, use techniques that condition the soils to support vegetative growth,if necessary and feasible; Minimizing soil compaction is not required where the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that it be compacted. (i) TCEQ does not consider stormwater control features (e.g.,stormwater conveyance channels,storm drain inlets,sediment basins)to constitute"surface water"for the purposes of triggering the buffer requirement in Part III.G.t.(f) above. 2. Soil stabilization.Stabilization of disturbed areas must,at a minimum,be initiated immediately whenever any clearing,grading,excavating,or other earth disturbing activities have permanently ceased on any portion of the site,or temporarily ceased on any portion of the site and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. In the context of this requirement,"immediately"means as soon as practicable, but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth- disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Temporary stabilization must be completed no more than 14 calendar days after initiation of soil stabilization measures,and final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. In arid,semi-arid,and drought-stricken areas where initiating vegetative stabilization measures immediately is infeasible,alternative non- vegetative stabilization measures must be employed as soon as practicable. Refer to Part III.F.2.(b)for complete erosion control and stabilization practice requirements. In limited circumstances,stabilization may not be required if the intended function of a specific area of the site necessitates that it remain disturbed. 3. Dewatering. Discharges from dewatering activities, including discharges from dewatering of trenches and excavations,are prohibited,unless managed by appropriate controls. 4. Pollution prevention measures.Design,install,implement,and maintain effective pollution prevention measures to minimize the discharge of pollutants.At a minimum,such measures must be designed, installed,implemented, and maintained to: (a) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from equipment and vehicle washing, wheel wash water,and other wash waters.Wash waters must be treated in a sediment basin or alternative control that provides equivalent or better treatment prior to discharge; (b) Minimize the exposure of building materials,building products,construction wastes,trash,landscape materials,fertilizers,pesticides,herbicides,detergents, sanitary waste,and other materials present on the site to precipitation and to stormwater; (c) Minimize the exposure of waste materials by closing waste container lids at the end of the work day. For waste containers that do not have lids,where the container itself is not sufficiently secure enough to prevent the discharge of pollutants absent a cover and could leak,the permittee must provide either a cover(e.g.,a tarp,plastic sheeting,temporary roof)to minimize exposure of wastes to precipitation,or a similarly effective means designed to minimize the discharge of pollutants(e.g.,secondary containment);and (d) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from spills and leaks,and implement chemical spill and leak prevention and response procedures. 5. Prohibited discharges.The following discharges are prohibited: 41, Page 41 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) Wastewater from wash out of concrete,unless managed by an appropriate control; (b) Wastewater from wash out and cleanout of stucco,paint,form release oils, curing compounds and other construction materials; (c) Fuels,oils,or other pollutants used in vehicle and equipment operation and maintenance; (d) Soaps or solvents used in vehicle and equipment washing; and (e) Toxic or hazardous substances from a spill or other release. 6. Surface outlets.When discharging from basins and impoundments,utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface,unless infeasible. Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants Discharges of stormwater runoff from concrete batch plants present at regulated construction sites and operated as a construction support activity may be authorized under the provisions of this general permit,provided that the following requirements are met for concrete batch plant(s)authorized under this permit. Only the discharges of stormwater runoff and non-stormwater from concrete batch plants that meet the requirements of a construction support activity can be authorized under this permit(see the requirements for "Non-Stormwater Discharges"in Part ILA.3 and"Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activity"in Part II.A.2). If discharges of stormwater runoff or non-stormwater from concrete batch plants are not authorized under this general permit,then discharges must be authorized under an alternative general permit or individual permit[see the requirement in Part II.A.2.(c)]. This permit does not authorize the discharge or land disposal of any wastewater from concrete batch plants at regulated construction sites. Authorization for these wastes must be obtained under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 1. Operators of concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit shall sample the stormwater runoff from the concrete batch plants according to the requirements of this section of this general permit,and must conduct evaluations on the effectiveness of the SWP3 based on the following benchmark monitoring values: Table i.Benchmark Parameters Benchmark Benchmark Value Sampling Sample Type Parameter Frequency Oil and Grease(*1) 15 mg/L 1/quarter(*2) (*3) Grab(*4) Total Suspended 5o mg/L 1/quarter(*2) (*3) Grab(*4) Solids(*1) pH 6.o—9.o Standard Units 1/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) Total Iron(*1) 1.3 mg/L 1/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) (*1) All analytical results for these parameters must be obtained from a laboratory that is accredited based on rules located in 3o TAC§25.4(a)or through the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program(NELAP). Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 4o CFR§136.1(c)and 40 CFR §122.44(i)(1)(iv). Vie Page 42 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRg0000 (*2) When discharge occurs. Sampling is required within the first 3o minutes of discharge. If it is not practicable to take the sample,or to complete the sampling,within the first 3o minutes,sampling must be completed within the first hour of discharge. If sampling is not completed within the first 3o minutes of discharge,the reason must be documented and attached to all required reports and records of the sampling activity. (*3) Sampling must be conducted at least once during each of the following periods. The first sample must be collected during the first full quarter that a stormwater discharge occurs from a concrete batch plant authorized under this general permit. January through March April through June July through September October through December For projects lasting less than one full quarter,a minimum of one sample shall be collected,provided that a stormwater discharge occurred at least once following submission of the NOI or following the date that automatic authorization was obtained under Section II.E.z,and prior to terminating coverage. (*4) A grab sample shall be collected from the stormwater discharge resulting from a storm event that is at least o.t inches of measured precipitation that occurs at least 72 hours from the previously measurable storm event. The sample shall be collected downstream of the concrete batch plant,and where the discharge exits any BMPs utilized to handle the runoff from the batch plant,prior to cipt commingling with any other water authorized under this general permit. z. The permittee must compare the results of sample analyses to the benchmark values above,and must include this comparison in the overall assessment of the SWP3's effectiveness. Analytical results that exceed a benchmark value are not a violation of this permit,as these values are not numeric effluent limitations. Results of analyses are indicators that modifications of the SWP3 should be assessed and may be necessary to protect water quality. The operator must investigate the cause for each exceedance and must document the results of this investigation in the SWP3 by the end of the quarter following the sampling event. The operator's investigation must identify the following: (a) any additional potential sources of pollution,such as spills that might have occurred; (b) necessary revisions to good housekeeping measures that are part of the SWP3; (c) additional BMPs,including a schedule to install or implement the BMPs; and (d) other parts of the SWP3 that may require revisions in order to meet the goal of the benchmark values. Background concentrations of specific pollutants may also be considered during the investigation. If the operator is able to relate the cause of the exceedance to background concentrations,then subsequent exceedances of benchmark values for that pollutant may be resolved by referencing earlier findings in the SWP3. Background concentrations may be identified by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-on to the permitted facility,by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-off from adjacent non-industrial areas,or by identifying the pollutant is a naturally occurring material in soils at the site. 4.0 Page 43 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section B. Best Management Practices(BMPs)and SWP3 Requirements Minimum SWP3 Requirements—The following are required in addition to other SWP3 requirements listed in this general permit,which include,but are not limited to the applicable requirements located in Part III.F.7 of this general permit,as follows: 1. Description of Potential Pollutant Sources-The SWP3 must provide a description of potential sources(activities and materials)that can cause,have a reasonable potential to cause or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause,or contribute to,the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state in stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this permit. The SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity and non-stormwater discharges(described in Part IIA.3 of this general permit),in compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit,including the protection of water quality, and must ensure the implementation of these practices. The following must be developed,at a minimum,in support of developing this description: (a) Drainage—The site map must include the following information: i. the location of all outfalls for stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this permit; ii. a depiction of the drainage area and the direction of flow to the outfall(s); structural controls used within the drainage area(s); iv. the locations of the following areas associated with concrete batch plants that are exposed to precipitation:vehicle and equipment maintenance activities(including fueling,repair,and storage areas for vehicles and equipment scheduled for maintenance);areas used for the treatment, storage,or disposal of wastes;liquid storage tanks; material processing and storage areas;and loading and unloading areas; and v. the locations of the following: any bag house or other dust control device(s); recycle/sedimentation pond,clarifier or other device used for the treatment of facility wastewater(including the areas that drain to the treatment device);areas with significant materials;and areas where major spills or leaks have occurred. (b) Inventory of Exposed Materials—A list of materials handled at the concrete batch plant that may be exposed to stormwater and that have a potential to affect the quality of stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this general permit. (c) Spills and Leaks-A list of significant spills and leaks of toxic or hazardous pollutants that occurred in areas exposed to stormwater and that drain to stormwater outfalls associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit must be developed,maintained,and updated as needed. (d) Sampling Data-A summary of existing stormwater discharge sampling data must be maintained,if available. 2. Measures and Controls-The SWP3 must include a description of management controls to regulate pollutants identified in the SWP3's"Description of Potential Pollutant Sources"from Part N.B.1 of this permit,and a schedule for implementation of the measures and controls. This must include,at a minimum: Page 44 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TX10.50000 (a) Good Housekeeping-Good housekeeping measures must be developed and implemented in the area(s)associated with concrete batch plants. i. Operators must prevent or minimize the discharge of spilled cement, aggregate(including sand or gravel),settled dust, or other significant materials from paved portions of the site that are exposed to stormwater. Measures used to minimize the presence of these materials may include regular sweeping or other equivalent practices. These practices must be conducted at a frequency that is determined based on consideration of the amount of industrial activity occurring in the area and frequency of precipitation,and shall occur at least once per week when cement or aggregate is being handled or otherwise processed in the area. ii. Operators must prevent the exposure of fine granular solids,such as cement,to stormwater.Where practicable,these materials must be stored in enclosed silos,hoppers or buildings,in covered areas,or under covering. (b) Spill Prevention and Response Procedures-Areas where potential spills that can contribute pollutants to stormwater runoff,and the drainage areas from these locations,must be identified in the SWP3. Where appropriate,the SWP3 must specify material handling procedures,storage requirements,and use of equipment. Procedures for cleaning up spills must be identified in the SWP3 and made available to the appropriate personnel. (c) Inspections-Qualified facility personnel(i.e.,a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit,the concrete batch plant,and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s)for the site)must be identified to inspect designated equipment and areas of the facility specified in the SWP3. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory C authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC§305.128. Inspections of facilities in operation must be performed once every seven days. Inspections of facilities that are not in operation must be performed at a minimum of once per month. The current inspection frequency being implemented at the facility must be recorded in the SWP3. The inspection must take place while the facility is in operation and must,at a minimum,include all areas that are exposed to stormwater at the site,including material handling areas, above ground storage tanks, hoppers or silos, dust collection/containment systems, truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Follow-up procedures must be used to ensure that appropriate actions are taken in response to the inspections. Records of inspections must be maintained and be made readily available for inspection upon request. (d) Employee Training-An employee training program must be developed to educate personnel responsible for implementing any component of the SWP3, or personnel otherwise responsible for stormwater pollution prevention,with the provisions of the SWP3. The frequency of training must be documented in the SWP3,and at a minimum,must consist of one training prior to the initiation of operation of the concrete batch plant. (e) Record Keeping and Internal Reporting Procedures-A description of spills and similar incidents,plus additional information that is obtained regarding the quality and quantity of stormwater discharges,must be included in the SWP3. Inspection and maintenance activities must be documented and records of those inspection and maintenance activities must be incorporated in the SWP3. (t) Management of Runoff-The SWP3 shall contain a narrative consideration for reducing the volume of runoff from concrete batch plants by diverting runoff or otherwise managing runoff,including use of infiltration,detention ponds, retention ponds,or reusing of runoff. Page 45 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRis0000 3. Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation—At least once per year,one or more qualified personnel(i.e.,a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit, the concrete batch plant,and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s)for the site)shall conduct a compliance evaluation of the plant. The evaluation must include the following. (a) Visual examination of all areas draining stormwater associated with regulated concrete batch plants for evidence of,or the potential for,pollutants entering the drainage system. These include,but are not limited to: cleaning areas, material handling areas,above ground storage tanks,hoppers or silos,dust collection/containment systems,and truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Measures implemented to reduce pollutants in runoff(including structural controls and implementation of management practices)must be evaluated to determine if they are effective and if they are implemented in accordance with the terms of this permit and with the permittee's SWP3. The operator shall conduct a visual inspection of equipment needed to implement the SWPs,such as spill response equipment. (b) Based on the results of the evaluation,the following must be revised as appropriate within two weeks of the evaluation: the description of potential pollutant sources identified in the SWP3(as required in Part "Description of Potential Pollutant Sources");and pollution prevention measures and controls identified in the SWP3(as required in Part IV.B.2, "Measures and Controls"). The revisions may include a schedule for implementing the necessary changes. (c) The permittee shall prepare and include in the SWP3 a report summarizing the scope of the evaluation,the personnel making the evaluation,the date(s)of the evaluation, major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3,and actions taken in response to the findings of the evaluation. The report must identify any incidents of noncompliance. Where the report does not identify incidences of noncompliance,the report must contain a statement that the evaluation did not identify any incidence(s),and the report must be signed according to 3o TAC§3o3.128,relating to Signatories to Reports. (d) The Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation may substitute for one of the required inspections delineated in Part W.B.z.(c)of this general permit. Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges Wastewater discharges associated with concrete production including wastewater disposal by land application are not authorized under this general permit. These wastewater discharges must be authorized under an alternative TCEQ water quality permit or otherwise disposed of in an authorized manner. Discharges of concrete truck wash out at construction sites may be authorized if conducted in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Pan V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements This general permit authorizes the land disposal of wash out from concrete trucks at construction sites regulated under this general permit,provided the following requirements are met. Any discharge of concrete production waste water to surface water in the state must be authorized under a separate TCEQ general permit or individual permit. A. Discharge of concrete truck wash out water to surface water in the state,including discharge to storm sewers,is prohibited by this general permit. B. Concrete truck wash out water shall be disposed in areas at the construction site where structural controls have been established to prevent discharge to surface water Page 46 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRis0000 in the state,or to areas that have a minimal slope that allow infiltration and filtering of wash out water to prevent discharge to surface water in the state. Structural controls may consist of temporary berms,temporary shallow pits,temporary storage tanks with slow rate release,or other reasonable measures to prevent runoff from the construction site. C. Wash out of concrete trucks during rainfall events shall be minimized. The discharge of concrete truck wash out water is prohibited at all times,and the operator shall insure that its BMPs are sufficient to prevent the discharge of concrete truck wash out as the result of rainfall or stormwater runoff. D. The disposal of wash out water from concrete trucks,made under authorization of this general permit must not cause or contribute to groundwater contamination. E. If a SWP3 is required to be implemented,the SWP3 shall include concrete wash out areas on the associated site map. Part VI. Retention of Records The permittee must retain the following records for a minimum period of three(3)years from the date that a NOT is submitted as required in Part II.F.r and 2 of this permit. For activities in which an NOT is not required,records shall be retained for a minimum period of three(3)years from the date that the operator terminates coverage under Section II.F.3 of this permit. Records include: A. A copy of the SWP3; B. All reports and actions required by this permit,including a copy of the construction site notice; cre C. All data used to complete the NOI,if an NOI is required for coverage under this general permit;and D. All records of submittal of forms submitted to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to the secondary operator of a large construction site,if applicable. Part VII. Standard Permit Conditions A. The permittee has a duty to comply with all permit conditions. Failure to comply with any permit condition is a violation of the permit and statutes under which it was issued(CWA and TWC),and is grounds for enforcement action,for terminating, revoking and reissuance,or modification,or denying coverage under this general permit,or for requiring a discharger to apply for and obtain an individual TPDES permit,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,3o TAC§305.66 and 4o CFR§122.41 (a). B. Authorization under this general permit maybe modified,suspended, revoked and reissued,terminated or otherwise suspended for cause,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,3o TAC§305.66 and 40 CFR§122.41(f). Filing a notice of planned changes or anticipated non-compliance by the permittee does not stay any permit condition. The permittee must furnish to the executive director,upon request and within a reasonable time,any information necessary for the executive director to determine whether cause exists for modifying,revoking and reissuing,terminating or,otherwise suspending authorization under this permit,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,3o TAC§305.66 and 4o CFR 022.41(h). Additionally,the permittee must provide to the executive director,upon request,copies of all records that the permittee is required to maintain as a condition of this general permit. C. It is not a defense for a discharger in an enforcement action that it would have been necessary to halt or reduce the permitted activity to maintain compliance with the permit conditions. Page 47 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 D. Inspection and entry shall be allowed under TWC Chapters 26-28,Texas Health and Safety Code§§361.032-361.033 and 361.037,and 40 CFR§122.41(1).The statement in TWC§26.014 that commission entry of a facility shall occur according to an establishment's rules and regulations concerning safety,internal security,and fire protection is not grounds for denial or restriction of entry to any part of the facility or site,but merely describes the commission's duty to observe appropriate rules and regulations during an inspection. E. The discharger is subject to administrative,civil,and criminal penalties,as applicable,under TWC Chapter 7 for violations including but not limited to the following: 1. negligently or knowingly violating the federal CWA§§301,302,306,307,3o8, 318,or 405,or any condition or limitation implementing any sections in a permit issued under CWA§402,or any requirement imposed in a pretreatment program approved under CWA§§4o2(a)(3)or 402(b)(8); 2. knowingly making any false statement,representation,or certification in any record or other document submitted or required to be maintained under a permit,including monitoring reports or reports of compliance or noncompliance; and 3. knowingly violating CWA§303 and placing another person in imminent danger of death or serious bodily injury. F. All reports and other information requested by the executive director must be signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC§305.128(relating to Signatories to Reports). G. Authorization under this general permit does not convey property or water rights of any sort and does not grant any exclusive privilege. H. The permittee shall take all reasonable steps to minimize or prevent any discharge in violation of this permit that has a reasonable likelihood of adversely affecting human health or the environment. I. The permittee shall at all times properly operate and maintain all facilities and systems of treatment and control(and related appurtenances)that are installed or used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the conditions of this permit. Proper operation and maintenance also includes adequate laboratory controls and appropriate quality assurance procedures.This provision requires the operation of back-up or auxiliary facilities or similar systems that are installed by a permittee only when the operation is necessary to achieve compliance with the conditions of the permit. J. The permittee shall comply with the monitoring and reporting requirements in 40 CFR§122.410)and(I),as applicable. K. Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 40 CFR§136.1(c)and 40 CFR§122.44(i)(1)(iv). Part VIII. Fees A. A fee of must be submitted along with the NOI: 1. $325 if submitting a paper NOI,or 2. $225 if submitting an NOI electronically. B. Fees are due upon submission of the NOI. An NOI will not be declared administratively complete unless the associated fee has been paid in full. C. No separate annual fees will be assessed for this general permit. The Water Quality Annual Fee has been incorporated into the NOI fees as described above. Page 48 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRis0000 111110 D. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants seeking coverage under an NOI or LREW must submit their application using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 411/ 4119 Page 49 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150o00 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization Periods of Low Erosion Potential by County—Eligible Date Ranges Andrews: Nov.15-Apr.3o Ector: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Archer: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Edwards: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Armstrong: Nov.15-Apr.3o El Paso: Jan. 1-Jul. 14,or May 15-Jul. Bailey: Nov. 1-Apr.3o,or Nov. 15-May 31,or Jun.1-Aug.14,or Jun. 15-Sept. 14, or Jul. 1-Oct. 14,or Jul.15-Oct 31,or 1q Aug. 1-Apr.30,or Aug.15-May 14,or Baylor: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Sept.1-May 30,or Oct.1-Jun. 14,or Borden: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Nov.1-Jun.3o,or Nov. 1g-Jul. 14 Brewster: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Fisher: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Briscoe: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Floyd: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Brown: Dec.15-Feb.14 Foard: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Callahan: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Gaines: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Carson: Nov.15-Apr.3o Garza: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Castro: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Glasscock: Nov.15-Apr.30 Childress: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Hale: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Cochran: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- Hall: Feb. 1-Mar.30 May 14 Hansford: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Coke: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Hardeman: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Coleman: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Hartley: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Collingsworth: Jan. 1-Mar.30,or Dec. 1- Haskell: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Feb. 28 Hockley: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15- Concho: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Apr.30 Cottle: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Howard: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Crane: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Hudspeth: Nov. 1-May 14 Crockett: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb. 1- Hutchinson: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Mar.3o Irion: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Crosby: Nov.15-Apr.3o Jeff Davis: Nov. 1-Apr.30 or Nov. 15- Culberson: Nov. 1-May 14 May 14 Dallam: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. Jones: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 30 Kent: Nov. 15-Jan.14 or Feb. 1-Mar.30 Dawson: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Kerr: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Deaf Smith: Nov. 15-Apr. 3o Kimble: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Dickens: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb. 1-Mar. King: Dec.15-Feb. 14 30 Dimmit: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Kinney: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Donley: Jan. 1-Mar.30,or Dec. 1-Feb. Knox: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 28 Lamb: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. Eastland: Dec.15-Feb.14 30 Page 50 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRl50000 4109 Loving: Nov. r-Apr.30,or Nov. r5-May Scurry: Nov. r5-Apr.3o rq Shackelford: Dec. r5-Feb. 14 Lubbock: Nov.r5-Apr.3o Sherman: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Lynn: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Stephens: Dec. r5-Feb. 14 Martin: Nov. rS-Apr.3o Sterling: Nov. r5-Apr.3o Mason: Dec. r5-Feb. 14 Stonewall: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Maverick: Dec. r5-Feb.14 Sutton: Dec. r5-Feb. 14 McCulloch: Dec. r5-Feb. 14 Swisher: Nov.r5-Apr.30 Menard: Dec. y5-Feb. 14 Taylor: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Midland: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Terrell: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Mitchell: Nov. r5-Apr.3o Terry: Nov. Ur-Apr.30 Moore: Nov.r5-Apr.3o Throckmorton: Dec. r5-Feb. 14 Motley: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb. r-Mar. Tom Green: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 3o Nolan: Dec. r5-Feb. 14 Upton: Nov. r5-Apr.3o Oldham: Nov. r5-Apr.3o Uvalde: Dec. t5-Feb. 14 Parmer: Nov. r-Apr. 14,or Nov. r5-Apr. Val Verde: Nov. Ur-Jan.14, or Feb. 1- 30 Mar.3o Pecos: Nov. rS-Apr.3o Ward: Nov. t-Apr. 14,or Nov. rS-Apr. 3o 4110 Potter: Nov. r5-Apr.3o Wichita: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Presidio: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. r5- Wilbarger: Dec. r5-Feb. 14 May 14 Randall: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Winkler: Nov. 1-Apr.3o, or Nov. 15- May 14 Reagan: Nov. r5-Apr.3o Yoakum: Nov. r-Apr.3o,or Nov. 15- Real: Dec. r5-Feb.14 May 14 Reeves: Nov. 1-Apr.3o,or Nov. r5-May Young: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 �4 Wheeler: Jan. 1-Mar.3o,or Dec. 1-Feb. Runnels: Dec.15-Feb. 14 28 Schleicher: Dec. r5-Feb. 14 Zavala: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 410 Page 51 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TX10.50000 Appendix B:Erosivity Index(EI)Zones in Texas 4 ••••*• •••• r Vet ass• {. : Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRl5o000 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map taranststitaawa ��.r/i. lar ,�r leti-: tiara*itAta'Erali!ir7.ii:r" rtar 111/4111 4 Int 111 !AP Vain.I" rt4 11 in aria Ir 'RA r:0"relliiil ortith tic ors tmils ma U!*ir�ilibb��ab j-nT •ira amiss rlraiartrfii!�i.�"rw:s..;.1 uta *i tar/tiaras" -ten -- MwdA4 1 •st9/L!rut 'ar is :#►Fa 7/Alpo _*: ifs nliteAdwirdialitaitte �/ tiabliti641111,14fri rata �t -Mtt'� 40 rte.-�''4�'�: liatti 4P 1 "Alia tore;ig "4* Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703:"Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture,Agricultural Research Service CPE Page 53 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas Periods: El 1/I 1/16 1/31 2/15 3/1 3/16 3/31 4/15 4/30 5/15 5/30 6/14 6/29 7/14 7/29 8/13 8/28 9/129/27 10/1210/2711/11 11/2612/1112/31 89 0 I 1 2 3 4 7 2 8 27 38 48 55 62 69 76 83 90 94 97 98 99 100 100 100 90 0 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 21 29 37 46 54 60 65 69 74 81 87 92 95 97 98 99 100 91 0 0 0 0 1 I 1 2 6 4 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 100 100 92 0 0 0 0 1 1 I 2 6 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 100 100 93 0 1 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 25 40 49 56 62 67 72 76 80 85 91 97 98 99 99 100 94 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 21 29 38 47 53 57 61 65 70 76 83 88 91 94 96 98 100 95 0 1 3 4 5 7 9 11 14 18 27 35 41 46 51 57 62 68 73 79 84 89 93 96 98 100 96 0 2 4 6 9 12 17 23 30 37 43 49 54 58 62 66 70 74 78 82 86 90 94 97 100 97 0 1 3 5 7 10 14 20 28 37 48 56 61 64 68 72 r 81 86 89 92 95 98 99 100 106 0 3 6 9 13 17 21 27 33 38 44 49 55 61 67 71 75 78 81 84 86 90 94 97 100 * Each period begins on the date listed in the table above and lasts until the day before the following period. The final period begins on December rr and ends on December 31. Table adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703:"Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"US.Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service J Page 54 TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No: CN: RN: '' �1 Notice of Intent (NOI) for an Authorization for Stormwater Discharges Associated with BM Construction Activity under TCEQ TPDES General Permit TXR150000 DIPORI.A.AT INI-(IRVI AI ION Please read and use the General Information and Instructions prior to filling out each question in the NOI form. Use the NOI Checklist to ensure all required information is completed correctly. Incomplete applications delay approval or result in automatic denial. Once processed your permit authorization can be viewed by entering the following link into your Internet browser: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm or you can contact TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700. Effective September 1, 2018, this paper form must be submitted to TCEQ with a completed electronic reporting waiver form(TCEQ-20754). To submit an NOI electronically, enter the following web address into your Internet browser and follow the instructions: https://www3.tceq.texas.gov/steers/index.cfm `r APPLICATION FEE AND PAYMENT The application fee for submitting a paper NOI is $325. The application fee for electronic submittal of a NOI through the TCEQ ePermits system(STEERS)is $22 S. Payment of the application fee can be submitted by mail or through the TCEQ ePay system. The payment and the NOI must be mailed to separate addresses. To access the TCEQ ePay system enter the following web address into your Internet browser: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/epay. Provide your payment information for verification of payment: • If payment was mailed to TCEQ provide the following: o Check/Money Order Number: o Name printed on Check: • If payment was made via ePay, provide the following: o Voucher Number: o A copy of the payment voucher is attached to this paper NOI form. ILW TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Paget Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRis0000 RENEWAL(This portion of the Notts not applicable after June 3, 2018) .. '., .. Is this NOI for a renewal of an existing authorization? 0 Yes 0 No If Yes, provide the authorization number here: TXR1 S .. NOTE: If an authorization number is not provided, a new number will be assigned. SI:( ) ION I. (WI[It.A I HI: ( \I'I'LI( \NI a) If the applicant is currently a customer with TCEQ,what is the Customer Number (CN) issued to this entity? CN (Refer to Section La) of the Instructions) b) What is the Legal Name of the entity(applicant) applying for this permit? (The legal name must be spelled exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State, County, or in the legal document forming the entity.) c) What is the contact information for the Operator (Responsible Authority)? Prefix(Mr. Ms. Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credentials: Phone Number: Fax Number: I' E-mail Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing Information if outside USA: Territory: Country Code '' Postal Code: d) Indicate the type of customer: d Individual Ct Federal Government O Limited Partnership O County Government Cl General Partnership C1 State Government O Trust C( City Government O Sole Proprietorship (D.B.A.) 0 Other Government O Corporation 0 Other: O Estate e) Is the applicant an independent operator? 0 Yes 0 No TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 2 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TRffis0000 (If a governmental entity, a subsidiary, or part of a larger corporation, check No.) f) Number of Employees. Select the range applicable to your company. O 0-20 ❑ 251-500 ❑ 21-100 0 501 or higher O 101-250 g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers: (Required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. Not Required for Individuals, Government, or Sole Proprietors.) State Franchise Tax ID Number: Federal Tax ID: I` Texas Secretary of State Charter(filing) Number: DUNS Number (if known): .SI{C I1ON 2. .APPI.IC A IION ((ON 11(..I. Is the application contact the same as the applicant identified above? O Yes, go to Section 3 O No, complete this section Prefix(Mr. Ms. Miss): } .. First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: ' ' " Credential: Organization Name: Phone Number: --Fax Number: E mad: Mailing Address: Internal Routing (Mail Code, Etc.): City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing information if outside USA: Territory: Country Code: 'd Postal Code: cd ( HON . RI(;II \111) 1 \ 1111 3:111^.101:11 \I \ ON PItOII.( I (MI: Sill: a) If this is an existing permitted site, what is the Regulated Entity Number(RN) issued to this site? RN (Refer to Section 3.a) of the Instructions) TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 3 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRI50000 b) Name of project or site (the name known by the community where it's located): c) In your own words, briefly describe the type of construction occurring at the regulated site (residential, industrial, commercial, or other): d) County or Counties (if located in more than one): e) Latitude: e'. Longitude: f) Site Address/Location If the site has a physical address such as 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, complete Section A. If the site does not have a physical address, provide a location description in Section B. Example: located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway I. Section A: Street Number and Name: ';• City, State, and Zip Code: Section B. Location Description: City(or city nearest to) where the site is located: Zip Code where the site is located: Sh( lin, I. GI AGR:AI ( II:\R LkIS I IC S a) Is the project or site located on Indian Country Lands? O Yes, do not submit this form. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. CINo b) Is your construction activity associated with a facility that,when completed, would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources? O Yes. Note: The construction stormwater runoff may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas and may need to obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. O No c) What is the Primary Standard Industrial Classification(SIC) Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site? d) What is the Secondary SIC Code(s), if applicable? e) What is the total number of acres to be disturbed? f) Is the project part of a larger common plan of development or sale? TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 4 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRig0000valid El Yes pf 0 No. The total number of acres disturbed, provided in e) above, must be 5 or more. If the total number of acres disturbed is less than 5, do not submit this form. See the requirements in the general permit for small construction sites. g) What is the estimated start date of the project? .. h) What is the estimated end date of the project? i) Will concrete truck washout be performed at the site? 0 Yes 0 No j) What is the name of the first water body(ies) to receive the stormwater runoff or potential runoff from the site? k) What is the segment number(s) of the classified water body(ies) that the discharge will eventually reach? 1) Is the discharge into a Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System(M54)? Yes 0 No If Yes, provide the name of the MS4 operator Note: The general permit requires you to send a copy of this NOI form to the MS4 operator. m) Is the discharge or potential discharge from the site within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, as defined in 30 TAC Chapter 213? 0 Yes, complete the certification below. 0 No, go to Section 5 I certify that the copy of the TCEQ-approved Plan required by the Edwards Aquifer Rule (30 TAC Chapter 213) that is included or referenced in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan will be implemented. Cl Yes SI("IION. i. AOI (l'.RI Ill(.\ l OAC a) I certify that I have obtained a copy and understand the terms and conditions of the Construction General Permit (TXR1S0000). 0 Yes b) I certify that the full legal name of the entity applying for this permit has been provided and is legally authorized to do business in Texas. 0 Yes c) I understand that a Notice of Termination (NOT) must be submitted when this authorization is no longer needed. 0 Yes d) I certify that a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan has been developed, will be implemented prior to construction and to the best of my knowledge and belief is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans, as required in the Construction General Permit (TXR150000). 13 Yes Note: For multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3, the confirmation of an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3, provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator. 41/ TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Pages Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRiS0000 SI'.('110,N G. :AI'1'LIC:ANI ('Ii121111( \1105 SIGN':111 RI' Operator Signatory Name: ' "' ' _ r/ Operator Signatory Title: I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information,including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature (use blue ink): Date: J TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 6 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRr5oo0o `r NOTICE OF INTENT CHECKLIST (Dal 50000) Did you complete everything? Use this checklist to be sure! Are you ready to mail your form to TCEQ? Go to the General Information Section of the Instructions for mailing addresses. Confirm each item(or applicable item) in this form is complete.This checklist is for use by the applicant to ensure a complete application is being submitted. Missing information may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. (See NOI process description in the General Information and Instructions.) APPLICATION FEE If paying by check:. .. _. O Check was mailed separately to the TCEQs Cashier's Office. (See Instructions for Cashier's address and Application address.) O Check number and name on check is provided in this application. If using ePay: O The voucher number is provided in this application and a copy of the voucher is attached. RENEWAL O If this application is for renewal of an existing authorization, the authorization number is provided. OPERATORJNFORMATTON O Customer Number(CN) issued by TCEQ Central Registry O Legal name as filed to do business in Texas. (Call TX SOS 512-463-5555 to verify.) O Name and title of responsible authority signing the application. O Phone number and e-mail address O Mailing address is complete&verifiable with USPS. www.usos.com 0 Type of operator (entity type). Is applicant an independent operator? O Number of employees. 0 For corporations or limited partnerships - Tax ID and SOS filing numbers. 0 Application contact and address is complete &verifiable with USPS. http://www.usps.com REGULATED ENTITY(RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE .. O Regulated Entity Number (RN) (if site is already regulated by TCEQ) O Site/project name and construction activity description O County 4111/ 0 Latitude and longitude http://www.tceq.texas.gov/kis/somaview.html TCEQ-20022 Checklist(03/06/2018) Page 1 0 Site Address/Location. Do not use a rural route or post office box. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS O Indian Country Lands -the facility is not on Indian Country Lands. O Construction activity related to facility associated to oil,gas, or geothermal resources O Primary SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site. www.osha.>?ov/oshstats/sicser.html CI Estimated starting and ending dates of the project. O Confirmation of concrete truck washout. O Acres disturbed is provided and qualifies for coverage through a NO!. O Common plan of development or sale. 0 Receiving water body or water bodies. O Segment number or numbers. 0 MS4 operator. O Edwards Aquifer rule. CERTIFICATION O Certification statements have been checked indicating Yes. 0 Signature meets 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44 and is original. V TCEQ-20022 Checklist(03/06/2018) Page 2 th. Instructions for Notice of Intent (NOI) for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TPDES General Permit (TXR150000) ( 1 NIiR:\I IA1010I \ IoA Where to Send the Notice of Intent(NO!): By Regular Mail: By Overnight or Express Mail: TCEQ TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) Stormwater Processing Center(MC228) P.O. Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, Texas 78711-3087 Austin, TX APPI' aton Fee: The application fee of $325 is required to be paid at the time the NOI is submitted. Failure to submit payment at the time the application is filed will cause delays in acknowledgment or denial of coverage under the general permit. Payment of the fee may be made by check or money order, payable to TCEQ, or through EPAY(electronic payment through the web). Mailed Payments: Use the attached General Permit Payment Submittal Form. The application fee is submitted to a different address than the NOI. Read the General Permit Payment Submittal Form for further instructions, including the address to send the payment. ePAY Electronic Payment: httn://www.tceq.texas.gov/epav When making the payment you must select Water Quality, and then select the fee category "General Permit Construction Storm Water Discharge NOI Application". You must include a copy of the payment voucher with your NOI. Your NOI will not be considered complete without the payment voucher. TCEQ Contact List Application - status and form questions: 512-239-3700, swpermit@tceq.texas.gov Technical questions: 512-239-4671, swgp@tceq.texas.gov Environmental Law Division: 512-239-0600 Records Management - obtain copies of forms: 512-239-0900 Reports from databases (as available): 512-239-DATA(3282) Cashier's office: 512-239-0357 or 512-239-0187 Notice of Intent Process; When your NOI is received by the program, the form will be processed as follows: • Administrative Review: Each item on the form will be reviewed for a complete response. In addition, the operator's legal name must be verified with Texas Secretary of State as valid and active (if applicable). The address(es) on the form must be verified with the US Postal service as receiving regular mail delivery. Do not give an overnight/express mailing address. 41110 TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 1 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 • Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a notice of deficiency (NOD) will be mailed to the operator. The operator will have 30 days to respond to the NOD. The response will be reviewed for completeness. • Acknowledgment of Coverage:An Acknowledgment Certificate will be mailed to the operator. This certificate acknowledges coverage under the general permit. or Denial of Coverage: If the operator fails to respond to the NOD or the response is inadequate, coverage under the general permit may be denied. If coverage is denied, the operator will be notified. General..Permit(Your,Permit) For NOls submitted electronically through ePermits, provisional coverage under the general permit begins immediately following confirmation of receipt of the NOI form by the TCEQ. For paper NOls, provisional coverage under the general permit begins 7 days after a completed NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. You should have a copy of your general permit when submitting your application. You may view and print your permit for which you are seeking coverage, on the TCEQ web site http://www.tceo.texas.uov. Search using keyword TXR1 50000. Changed 13perntor An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated project or site changes, the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted no later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. TCEQ Cort bats'Eorm. The Core Data Form has been incorporated into this form. Do not send a Core Data Form to TCEQ.After final acknowledgment of coverage under the general permit, the program will assign a Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number, if one has not already been assigned to this customer or site. For existing customers and sites, you can find the Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number by entering the following web address into your internet browser: http://www15.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/or you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. On the website, you can search by your permit number, the Regulated Entity(RN) number, or the Customer Number(CN). If you do not know these numbers, you can select "Advanced Search" to search by permittee name, site address, etc. The Customer(Permittee) is responsible for providing consistent information to the TCEQ and for updating all CN and RN data for all authorizations as changes occur.For this permit, a Notice of Change form must be submitted to the program area. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 41, INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILING OUT THE NOI FORM Renewal of General Permit. Dischargers holding active authorizations under the expired General Permit are required to submit a NOI to continue coverage. The existing permit number is required. If the permit number is not provided or has been terminated, expired, or denied, a new permit number will be issued. Section 1. OPERATOR(APPLICANT) a) Customer Number(CN) TCEQ's Central Registry will assign each customer a number that begins with CN, followed by nine digits. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. If the applicant is an existing TCEQ customer, the Customer Number is available at the following website: htto://www15.tceq.texas.arov/crpub/. If the applicant is not an existing TCEQ customer, leave the space for CN blank. b) Legal Name of Applicant Provide the current legal name of the applicant. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, as filed in the county. You may contact the SOS at 512-463-5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. If filed in the county, provide a copy of the legal documents showing the legal name. c) Contact Information for the Applicant(Responsible Authority) Provide information for the person signing the application in the Certification section. This person is also referred to as the Responsible Authority. Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. The mailing address must be recognized by the US Postal Service. You may verify the address on the following website: https://tools.uses.com/eo/ZipLookupAction!input.action. The phone number should provide contact to the applicant. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the applicant. d) Type of Customer(Entity Type) Check only one box that identifies the type of entity.Use the descriptions below to identify the appropriate entity type. Note that the selected entity type also indicates the name that must be provided as an applicant for an authorization. Individual An individual is a customer who has not established a business,but conducts an activity that needs to be regulated by the TCEQ. Partnership A customer that is established as a partnership as defined by the Texas Secretary of State Office (TX SOS). If the customer is a 'General Partnership' or 'Joint Venture' filed in the county(not filed with TX SOS), the legal name of each partner forming the 'General Partnership' or 'Joint Venture' must be provided. Each 'legal entity' must apply as a co-applicant. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 3 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Trust or Estate A trust and an estate are fiduciary relationships governing the trustee/executor with respect to the trust/estate property. Sole Proprietorship(DBA) A sole proprietorship is a customer that is owned by only one person and has not been incorporated. This business may: 1. be under the person's name 2. have its own name (doing business as or DBA) 3. have any number of employees. If the customer is a Sole Proprietorship or DBA, the 'legal name' of the individual business 'owner' must be provided. The DBA name is not recognized as the 'legal name' of the entity. The DBA name may be used for the site name (regulated entity). Corporation A customer that meets all of these conditions: 1. is a legally incorporated entity under the laws of any state or country 2. is recognized as a corporation by the Texas Secretary of State 3. has proper operating authority to operate in Texas The corporation's 'legal name' as filed with the Texas Secretary of State must be provided as applicant. An 'assumed' name of a corporation is not recognized as the 'legal name' of the entity. Government Federal, state, county, or city government (as appropriate) The customer is either an agency of one of these levels of government or the governmental body itself. The government agency's 'legal name' must be provided as the applicant. A department name or other description of the organization is not recognized as the 'legal name'. Other This may include a utility district,water district, tribal government, college district, council of governments, or river authority. Provide the specific type of government. e) Independent Entity Check No if this customer is a subsidiary, part of a larger company, or is a governmental entity. Otherwise, check Yes. f) Number of Employees Check one box to show the number of employees for this customer's entire company, at all locations. This is not necessarily the number of employees at the site named in the application. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 4 'SII Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers These are required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. These are not required for Individuals, Government, and Sole Proprietors. State Franchise Tax ID Number Corporations and limited liability companies that operate in Texas are issued a franchise tax identification number. If this customer is a corporation or limited liability company, enter the Tax ID number. Federal Tax ID All businesses, except for some small sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships should have a federal taxpayer identification number(TIN). Enter this number here. Use no prefixes, dashes, or hyphens. Sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships do not need to provide a federal tax ID. DC SOS Charter(filing) Number Corporations and limited Partnerships required to register with the Texas Secretary of State are issued a charter or filing number. You may obtain further information by calling SOS at 512-463-5555. DUNS Number Most businesses have a DUNS (Data Universal Numbering System) number issued by Dun and Bradstreet Corp. If this customer has one, enter it here. Section 2.AFFIXATION CONTACT 41110 Provide the name and contact information for the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. Section 3.REGULATED ENTITY(RE)INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR,SITE a) Regulated Entity Number(RN) The RN is issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites where an activity is regulated by TCEQ. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. Search TCEQ's Central Registry to see if the site has an assigned RN at http://wwwl5.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/. If this regulated entity has not been assigned an RN, leave this space blank. If the site of your business is part of a larger business site, an RN may already be assigned for the larger site.Use the RN assigned for the larger site. If the site is found, provide the assigned RN and provide the information for the site to be authorized through this application. The site information for this authorization may vary from the larger site information. An example is a chemical plant where a unit is owned or operated by a separate corporation that is accessible by the same physical address of your unit or facility. Other examples include industrial parks identified by one common address but different corporations have control of defined areas within the site. In both cases, an RN would be assigned for the physical address location and the permitted sites would be identified separately under the same RN. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 5 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 b) Name of the Project or Site Provide the name of the site or project as known by the public in the area where the site is located. The name you provide on this application will be used in the TCEQ Central Registry as the Regulated Entity name. c) Description of Activity Regulated In your own words,briefly describe the primary business that you are doing that requires this authorization. Do not repeat the SIC Code description. d) County Provide the name of the county where the site or project is located. If the site or project is located in more than one county, provide the county names as secondary. e) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees, minutes, and seconds or decimal form. For help obtaining the latitude and longitude, go to: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/gis/sumaview.html. f) Site Address/Location If a site has an address that includes a street number and street name, enter the complete address for the site in Section A If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address, you may need to validate the address with your local police (911 service) or through an online map site used to locate a site. Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. If a site does not have an address that includes a street number and street name, provide a complete written location description in Section B.For example: "The site is located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1." Provide the city(or nearest city) and zip code of the site location. Section 4. GENERAL CHARACIEEISTICS a) Indian Country Lands If your site is located on Indian Country Lands, the TCEQ does not have authority to process your application. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6, Dallas. Do not submit this form to TCEQ. b) Construction activity associated with facility associated with exploration, development, or production of oil, gas, or geothermal resources If your activity is associated with oil and gas exploration, development, or production, you may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas (RRC) and may need to obtain authorization from EPA Region 6. Construction activities associated with a facility related to oil, gas or geothermal resources may include the construction of a well site; treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 6 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 carbon dioxide geologic storage facility; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution w pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. Where required by federal law, discharges of stormwater associated with construction activities under the RRC's jurisdiction must be authorized by the EPA and the RRC, as applicable. Activities under RRC jurisdiction include construction of a facility that, when completed, would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources, such as a well site; treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a carbon dioxide geologic storage facility under the jurisdiction of the RRC; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. The RRC also has jurisdiction over stormwater from land disturbance associated with a site survey that is conducted prior to construction of a facility that would be regulated by the RRC.Under 33 U.S.C. §1342(1)(2) and §1362(24), EPA cannot require a permit for discharges of stormwater from field activities or operations associated with {oil and gas} exploration,production, processing, or treatment operations, or transmission facilities, including activities necessary to prepare a site for drilling and for the movement and placement of drilling equipment, whether or not such field activities or operations may be considered to be construction activities unless the discharge is contaminated by contact with any overburden, raw material, intermediate product, finished product,byproduct, or waste product located on the site of the facility. Under §3.8 of this title (relating to Water Protection), the RRC prohibits operators from causing or allowing pollution of surface or subsurface water. Operators are encouraged to implement and maintain best management practices (BMPs) to minimize discharges of pollutants, including sediment, in stormwater during construction activities to help ensure protection of surface water quality during storm events. For more information about the jurisdictions of the RRC and the TCEQ read the Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) between the RRC and TCEQ at 16 Texas Administrative Code, Part 1, Chapter 3, Rule 3.30, by entering the following link into an internes browser: http://texreg.sos.state.tx.us/public/readtac$ext.TacPage?s1=R&app=9&p_dir=&p_rloc= &p tloc=&p_ploc=&pg=1&p tac=&ti=16&pt=1&ch=3&r1=30 or contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 for additional information. c) Primary Standard Industrial Classification(SIC) Code Provide the SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at this site. Common SIC Codes related to construction activities include: • 1521 - Construction of Single Family Homes • 1522 - Construction of Residential Buildings Other than Single Family Homes • 1541 - Construction of Industrial Buildings and Warehouses TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 7 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 • 1542 - Construction of Non-residential Buildings, other than Industrial Buildings and Warehouses r/ • 1611 -Highway and Street Construction, except Highway Construction • 1622 - Bridge, Tunnel, and Elevated Highway Construction • 1623 -Water, Sewer, Pipeline and Communications, and Power Line Construction For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your internet browser: http://www.osha.gov/pls/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Local Government Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. d) Secondary SIC Code Secondary SIC Code(s) may be provided. Leave this blank if not applicable. For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your internet browser: httn://www.osha.gov/bls/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. e) Total Number of Acres Disturbed Provide the approximate number of acres that the construction site will disturb. Construction activities that disturb less than one acre, unless they are part of a larger common plan that disturbs more than one acre, do not require permit coverage. Construction activities that disturb between one and five acres,unless they are part of a common plan that disturbs more than five acres, do not require submission of an NOI. Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five,unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. If you have any questions about this item, please contact the stormwater technical staff by phone at 512-239-4671 or by email at swgp@tceq.texas.gov. f) Common Plan of Development Construction activities that disturb less than five acres do not require submission of an NOI unless they are part of a common plan of development or for sale where the area disturbed is five or more acres. Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five,unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. For more information on what a common plan of development is, refer to the definition of"Common Plan of Development" in the Definitions section of the general permit or enter the following link into your Internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/permitting/stormwater/common_plan_of development_steps.html For further information, go to the TCEQ stormwater construction webpage enter the following link into your Internet browser: www.tceo.texas.Rov/¢oto/construction and search for "Additional Guidance and Quick Links If you have any further questions about the Common Plan of Development you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 or the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance at 800-447- 2827. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 8 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 4110, g) Estimated Start Date of the Project This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity is initiated at the site. If renewing the permit provide the original start date of when construction activity for this project began. h) Estimated End Date of the Project This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity will end and final stabilization will be achieved at the site. i) Will concrete truck washout be performed at the site? Indicate if you expect that operators of concrete trucks will washout concrete trucks at the construction site. j) Identify the water body(s) receiving stormwater runoff The stormwater may be discharged directly to a receiving stream or through a MS4 from your site.It eventually reaches a receiving water body such as a local stream or lake, possibly via a drainage ditch. You must provide the name of the water body that receives the discharge from the site (a local stream or lake). If your site has more than one outfall you need to include the name of the first water body for each outfall, if they are different. k) Identify the segment number(s) of the classified water body(s) Identify the classified segment number(s) receiving a discharge directly or indirectly. Enter the following link into your Internet browser to find the segment number of the t classified water body where stormwater will flow from the site: �+ www.tceq.texas.¢ov/waterauality/monitoring/viewer.html or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. You may also find the segment number in TCEQ publication GI-316 by entering the following link into your Internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/publications/gi/gi-316 or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge is into an unclassified receiving water and then crosses state lines prior to entering a classified segment, select the appropriate watershed: • 0100(Canadian River Basin) • 0200(Red River Basin) • 0300(Sulfur River Basin) • 0400(Cypress Creek Basin) • 0500(Sabine River Basin) Call the Water Quality Assessments section at 512-239-4671 for further assistance. 1) Discharge into MS4 - Identify the MS4 Operator The discharge may initially be into a municipal separate storm sewer system (MS4). If the stormwater discharge is into an MS4, provide the name of the entity that operates the MS4 where the stormwater discharges. An MS4 operator is often a city, town, county, or utility district, but possibly can be another form of government. Please note that the Construction General Permit requires the Operator to supply the MS4 with a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 9 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 copy of the NOI submitted to TCEQ. For assistance, you may call the technical staff at 512-239-4671. m) Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone and Certification The general permit requires the approved Contributing Zone Plan or Water Pollution Abatement Plan to be included or referenced as a part of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. See maps on the TCEQ website to determine if the site is located within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer by entering the following link into an Internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/field/eapp/viewer.html or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at 512-239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge or potential discharge is within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, a site-specific authorization approved by the Executive Director under the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program(30 TAC Chapter 213) is required before construction can begin. For questions regarding the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program, contact the appropriate TCEQ Regional Office. For projects in Hays, Travis and Williamson Counties: Austin Regional Office, 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, 512-339- 2929. For Projects in Bexar, Comal, Kinney, Medina and Uvalde Counties: TCEQ San Antonio Regional Office, 14250 Judson Rd., San Antonio, TX 78233-4480, 210-490- 3096. SWIM S.NOI C ITIFICATION Note: Failure to indicate Yes to all of the certification items may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. a) Certification of Understanding the Terms and Conditions of Construction General Permit(TXR150O00) Provisional coverage under the Construction General Permit (TXR150000) begins 7 days after the completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. Electronic applications submitted through ePermits have immediate provisional coverage.You must obtain a copy and read the Construction General Permit before submitting your application. You may view and print the Construction General Permit for which you are seeking coverage at the TCEQ web site by entering the following link into an Internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/goto/construction or you may contact the TCEQ Stormwater processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. b) Certification of Legal Name The full legal name of the applicant as authorized to do business in Texas is required. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, that is filed in the county where doing business. You may contact the SOS at 512-463 5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. c) Understanding of Notice of Termination A permittee shall terminate coverage under the Construction General Permit through the submittal of a NOT when the operator of the facility changes, final stabilization has TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 10 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 been reached, the discharge becomes authorized under an individual permit, or the construction activity never began at this site. d) Certification of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan The SWP3 identifies the areas and activities that could produce contaminated runoff at your site and then tells how you will ensure that this contamination is mitigated. For example, in describing your mitigation measures, your site's plan might identify the devices that collect and filter stormwater, tell how those devices are to be maintained, and tell how frequently that maintenance is to be carried out.You must develop this plan in accordance with the TCEQ general permit requirements. This plan must be developed and implemented before you complete this NOI. The SWP3 must be available for a TCEQ investigator to review on request. S on.6.APPLICANT:CERTIFICATION SIGNATURE The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44. If you are a corporation: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(1) (see below). According to this code provision, any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. 411,0 If you are a municipality or other government entity: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(3) (see below). According to this code provision, only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity, it may be beneficial to consult your city charter, county or city ordinances, or the Texas statute(s)under which your government entity was formed. An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3). The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation. By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above, please contact the TCEQ's Environmental Law Division at 512-239-0600. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 11 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 30 texasiA4mftifstr tive Code §305.44. Signatories to Applications (a)MI applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation, the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph, a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy or decision- making functions for the corporation; or the manager of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million(in second-quarter 1980 dollars), if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship, the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor, respectively. (3) For a municipality, state, federal, or other public agency, the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph, a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency, or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g., regional administrator of the EPA). TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 12 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 thr Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit Payment Submittal Form 1-se this form to submit your-Applicanon Fee onl} it you arc mailing}•our pa}unent. Insunttiohst • Complete items 1 through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mail this form with your NOI form. • Do not mail this form to the same address as your NOL. Mail this form and your check to either of the following: By Regular U.S.Mail By Overnight or Express Mail Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Financial Administration Division Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office, MC-214 Cashier's Office, MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, DC 78711-3088 Austin, TX 78753 Pee Code: CPA '.General Permit: TXR1:..50000 1. Check or Money Order No: 2. Amount of Check/Money Order: .._. Le 3. Date of Check or Money Order: 4. Name on Check or Money Order: 5. NOI Information: If the check is for more than one NOI, list each Project or Site (RE) Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. Do not submit a copy of the NOI with this form, as it could cause duplicate permit application entries! If there is not enough space on the form to list all of the projects or sites the authorization will cover, then attach a list of the additional sites. Project/Site (RE) Name: Project/Site (RE) Physical Address: Staple the check or money order to this form in this space. TCEQ-20134 (03/06/2018) Page 1 t Texas Commission on Environmental Quality �r General Permit Payment Submittal Form Use this form to submit tour Application Fee onk if Sou are mailing your pacmcnt. • Complete items 1 through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mail this form with your NOI form. • Do not mail this form to the same address as your NOI. Mail this form and your check to: BY REGULAR U.S.MAIL BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL Texas Commission on Environmental Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Quality Financial Administration Division Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office,MC-214 Cashier's Office,MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,TX 78711-3088 Austin,TX 78753 Fee Code: GPA General Permit: TXG920000 1. Check/Money Order No: YY 2. Amount of Check/Money Order: t 3. Date of Check or Money Order: �r 4. Name on Check or Money Order: 5. NOI INFORMATION If the check is for more than one NOI,list each Project/Site(RE)Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. DO NOT SUBMIT A COPY OF THE NOI WITH THIS FORM AS IT COULD CAUSE DUPLICATE PERMIT ENTRIES. See Attached List of Sites(If more space is needed,you may attach a list.) Project/Site(RE)Name: Project/Site(RE)Physical Address: YYOY Staple Check in This Space thile TCEQ-20134(04/13/2006) Page TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No: 41P. rgi CN: RN: Region: wrap ism Notice of Termination (NOT) for Authorizations under TCEQ TPDES General Permit TXR150000 IVIPORT:ANT TION: Please read and use the General Information and Instructions prior to filling out each question in the form. Effective September 1, 2018, this paper form must be submitted to TCEQ with a completed electronic reporting waiver form(TCEQ-20754). ePermits: This form is available on our online permitting system. Sign up for online permitting at: https://www3.tceo.texas.gov/steers/ What is the permit number to be terminated? TXR15 TXRCW .. Section 1. OPERATOR (Permitted a) What is the Customer Number(CN) issued to this entity? CN 4111, b) What is the Legal Name of the current permittee? c) Provide the contact information for the Operator(Responsible Authority). Prefix(Mr. Ms. or Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: -d. Credentials: Phone Number: Fax Number: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Country Mailing Information, if outside USA: . Se, I ion 2. APPLICATION CON \C This is the person TCEQ will contact if additional information is needed regarding this application. Is the application contact the same as the permittee identified above? 0 Yes, go to Section 3. EI No, complete section below TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 1 Notice of Termination for TXR1 S0000 ... ............................. Prefix(Mr. Ms. or Miss): . First and Last Name::' ; Suffix: .... Title: " Credentials: ' Phone Number: a_ Fax Number: Email: i .:.? Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Country Mailing Information, if outside USA: Section 3. REGI] VIED EN1I ) IRE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) TCEQ issued RE Reference Number(RN): RN b) Name of project or site as known by the local community: . c) County,or counties if more than 1: d) Latitude: . °i� Longitude: e) Site Address/Location: If the site has a physical address such as 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin,TX 78753, complete Section 3A. If the site does not have a physical address, provide a location description in Section 38. Example: located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1. Section 3A:Physical Address of Project or Site: Street Number and Name: City, State, and Zip Code: •rt Section 3B: Site Location Description: Location description: City where the site is located or, if not in a city,what is the nearest city: . Zip Code where the site is located: Section 4. RE\SON FOR TPRVIIN-\TION Check the reason for termination: p Final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the Operator and all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have been removed, or scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3. 0 Another permitted Operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that have not been finally stabilized, and temporary erosion controls that have been identified in the SWP3 have been transferred to the new Operator. 4.00 TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 2 Notice of Termination for TXR 150000 0 The discharge is now authorized under an alternate TPDES permit. CI The activity never began at this site that is regulated under the general permit. 41110 Section 3. CERTIFICATION Signatory Name: Signatory Title: I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system,or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information,the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief,true, accurate, and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature(use blue ink): Date: TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 3 Notice of Termination for TXRI50000 Instructions for Notice of Termination (NOT) for Authorizations under TPDES General Permit TXR1S0000 GENF.R:AL INFOR I-\TION Where to Send the Notice of I'erminalion KNOT): BY REGULAR U.S. MAIL: BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL: Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Stormwater Processing Center (MC-228) Stormwater Processing Center(MC-228) P.O.Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, Texas 78711-3087 Austin,TX 78753 RTO Contact List: Application status and form questions: 512-239-3700, swpermit.li tceq.texas.gov Technical questions: 512-239-4671, swvoCtilceq.texas.¢ov Environmental Law Division: 512-239-0600 Records Management- obtain copies of forms: 512-239-0900 Reports from databases(as available): 512-239-DATA(3282) Cashier's office: 512-239-0357 or 512-239-0187 Notice of Termination Process: A Notice of Termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ. When your NOT is received by the program,the form will be processed as follows: 4111111, 1) Administrative Review: The form will be reviewed to confirm the following: • the permit number is provided; • the permit is active and has been approved; • the entity terminating the permit is the current permittee; • the site information matches the original permit record; and • the form has the required original signature with title and date. 2) Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a phone call will be made to the applicant to clear the deficiency. A letter will not be sent to the permittee if unable to process the form. 3) Confirmation of Termination: A Notice of Termination Confirmation letter will be mailed to the operator. Change in Operator: An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated entity changes,the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted not later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT TOL FORM The majority of permit information related to the current operator and regulated entity are available at the following website: httn://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wo doa/index.cfm. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 1 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Seel ion 1. 0-manor (Current I'ermil teel: a) Customer Number(CN) TCEQ's Central Registry assigns each customer a number that begins with CN, followed by nine digits. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number.The Customer Number, for the current permittee, is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.eov/wa dpa/index.cfm. b) Legal Name of Operator The operator must be the same entity as previously submitted on the original Notice of Intent for the permit number provided.The current operator name, as provided on the current authorization,is available at the following website: httn://www2.tcea.texas.Rov/wo dna/index.cfm. c) Contact Information for the Operator (Responsible Authority) Provide information for person signing the NOT application in the Certification section. This person is also referred to as the Responsible Authority. Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. Update the address if different than previously submitted for the Notice of Intent or Notice of Change. The mailing address must be recognized by the US Postal Service. You may verify the address on the following website:https://tools.uses.com/eo/ZioLookuDAction!innut.action. The phone number should provide contact to the operator. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the operator. Section 2. Aj>lication Conflict: •�/] Provide the name, title and contact information of the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. Section 3. Regulated Enlit} (I2]-.1 Information on Project or Site: a) Regulated Entity Reference Number(RN) A number issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites where an activity regulated by TCEQ. This is not a permit number,registration number,or license number. The Regulated Entity Reference Number is available at the following website: http://www2.tceu.texas.eov/wq dpa/index..cfm. b) Name of the Project or Site Provide the name of the site as known by the public in the area where the site is located. c) County Identify the county or counties in which the regulated entity is located. d) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees, minutes,and seconds or decimal form.The latitude and longitude as provided on the current authorization is available at the following website: htto://www2.tceo.texas.Rov/wu dna/index.cfm. e) Site/Project(RE) Physical Address/Location Information The physical address/location information, as provided on the current authorization, is available at the following website: httn://www2.tcea.texas.gov/wa dpa/index.cfm. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Section 3A. If a site has an address that includes a street number and street name, enter the complete address for the site. If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address,you may need to validate the address with your local police(911 service)or through an online map site used to locate the site. Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. Section 3B. If a site does not have an address that includes a street number and street name, provide a complete written location description.For example: "The site is located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1" Provide the city(or nearest city) and Zip Code of the facility location. Section 4. Reason for Termination: The Notice of Termination form is only for use to terminate the authorization(permit). The Permittee must indicate the specific reason for terminating by checking one of the options. If the reason is not listed then provide an attachment that explains the reason for termination. Please read your general permit carefully to determine when to terminate your permit. Permits will not be reactivated after submitting a termination form. The termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ. Section 5. Certification: The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44. IF YOU AREA CORPORATION The regulation that controls who may sign an application form is 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44(a), which is provided below. According to this code provision,any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. IF YOU AREA MUNICIPALITY OR OTHER GOVERNMENT ENTITY: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a),which is provided below. According to this code provision,only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity, it may be beneficial to consult your city charter, county or city ordinances, or the Texas statutes under which your government entity was formed.An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3). The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation.By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above,please contact the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality's Environmental Law Division at 512-239-0600. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 3 Instmctions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44. Signatories to Applications (a) All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation,the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph,a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary, treasurer,or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function,or any other person who performs similar policy or decision-making functions for the corporation;or the manager of one or more manufacturing,production, or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding$25 million(in second-quarter 1980 dollars),if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship,the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor,respectively. (3) For a municipality,state, federal, or other public agency, the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph,a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency,or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g.,regional administrator of the EPA). TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 4 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR1 50000 111 s memtaim a OW LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "PRIMARY OPERATOR" NOTICE This notice applies to construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXRI50000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part 111.13.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the Internet at: 4/0 http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq_construction.html ISite-Specific TPDES Authorization Number: Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location,and estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized. Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: 4Irr LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "SECONDARY OPERATOR " NOTICE This notice applies to secondary operators of construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part 111.D.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the intemet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html ('II Site-Specific TPDES Authorization Number: Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, and estimated start dale and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized • Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (S W P3): For Large Construction Activities Authorized Under Part I1.E.3. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.3. of TPDES General Permit TXRI50000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part IL F 3 =Wear a IIMM 11111•1111111 411, SWMSISIleisms111 DS SMALL CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 The following information is posted in compliance with Part II.E.2. of the TCEQ General Permit Number TXRI50000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from small construction sites. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the interne at: httn://wwwiceu.state.tx.usinav/permits/wq_construction.html Operator Name: I Contact Name and Phone Number: roject Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: For Small Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.2. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.2.of TPDES General Permit TXR150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed ALSO operator notified per Part 11E3. C CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION fir Section 01566 SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Descriptions of measures and practices, in response to TPDES General Permit TXR 150000, which shall be used on the Work to eliminate or significantly minimize pollutants in discharges into Surface Water in the State by controlling erosion and sediments at their source. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01550—Stabilized Construction Exit 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls C Definitions: 1. Potential Water Pollutant- any substance that could potentially alter the physical,thermal, chemical, or biological quality of the Surface Water in the State, rendering the water harmful,detrimental,or injurious to humans, animal life, vegetation, or property, or to public health, safety or welfare, or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose. 1.02 MEAUSREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Plans and this Technical Specification. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C The Contractor shall install, maintain, and inspect erosion and sediment control measures and practices that operate effectively and as specified in the Plans and in this or other Technical Specifications. 07/2006 01566- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION ]] D Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on vi/ areas outside of the limits of construction or dedicated rights-of-way and easements. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor. E The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting, storing, hauling, and disposing of spoil, silt, waste materials, and contaminated material resulting from erosion and sediment control measures as specified in this or other Technical Specifications and in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.02 EXPOSED SOIL A When soil is exposed as a result of clearing,grading,excavating,stockpiling,or other soil disturbing activities, the Contractor shall implement measures to effectively control erosion and prevent the escape of sediments from the Project Site. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Preserve existing vegetation to the extent possible. 2. Construct drainage swales, berms, or sediment basins. 3. Maintain grades to minimize the velocity of sheet flow over disturbed areas and promote evaporation and infiltration of storm water directly into the ground. 4. Install filter fabric fences or barriers, sediment traps, seepage basins, gabions,or storm drain inlet protection devices. 5. Utilize vegetative buffer strips, mulching,or riprap C When the placement of topsoil, bank sand, or other soil material is specified,after an area has been brought to grade and immediately prior to placement, loosen the subgrade discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 2 inches to permit bonding to the subsoil. D When all soil disturbing activities have been completed, establish a perennial vegetative cover on all areas that are not paved, covered by permanent structures, or otherwise permanently stabilized. 3.03 DUST CONTROL A Implement control measures to minimize dust creation and movement on construction sites and roads and to prevent airborne sediment from reaching receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems, to reduce on-site and off-site damage, to prevent health hazards, and to improve traffic safety. B Control blowing dust by using one or more of the following measures: I. Mulches bound with chemical binders. 2. Temporary vegetative cover. 3. Tillage to roughen surface and bring clods to the surface. 4. Irrigation by water sprinkling. 07/2006 01566-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 11I 5. Barriers using solid board fences, burlap fences,crate walls,bales of hay,or similar materials. C Implement dust control measures immediately whenever dust can be observed blowing on the Project Site. 3.04 DEMOLITION AREAS A Demolition activities which create large amounts of dust with significant concentrations of heavy metals or other potential water pollutants shall use methods described in this Section,3.03"Dust Control",to limit transport of airborne pollutants. However, water or slurry used to control dust contaminated with heavy metals or potential water pollutants shall be retained on the Project Site and shall not be allowed to run directly into watercourses or storm water conveyance systems by the appropriate use of control measures described in this Section. Methods of ultimate disposal of these materials shall be carried out in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal health and safety regulations. 3.05 SEDIMENT TRACKING A Minimize off-site tracking of sediments and the generation of dust by construction vehicles, keeping the streets clean or construction debris and mud, by implementing one or more of the following control measures: I. Restrict all ingress and egress to stabilized construction exits. 2. Stabilize areas used for staging,parking, storage or disposal. 3. Stabilize on-site vehicle transportation routes. 4. Remove mud and other debris, washing if necessary, from vehicles prior to entrance onto public roadways from the Project Site. 5. Maintain grade to minimize the occurrence of mud on the Project Site. B Construct stabilized construction areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. C In addition to Stabilized Construction Exits shovel or sweep the pavement to the extent necessary to keep the street clean. Water-hosing or sweeping of debris and mud off of the street into adjacent areas is not allowed. 3.06 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR A Control equipment maintenance and repair so that oils,gasoline,grease,solvents,and other potential water pollutants cannot be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Confine maintenance and repair of construction machinery and equipment to areas specifically designated for that purpose. 2. Provide these areas with adequate waste disposal receptacles for liquid as well as solid waste. 07/2006 01566-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 3. Clean and inspect maintenance and repair areas daily. 4. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 5. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 6. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper,or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 7. Isolate areas of contaminated soil or other materials to facilitate proper removal and disposal. C Where effective control measures are not feasible,equipment shall be taken off-site for maintenance and repair. 3.07 WASTE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL A Conduct operations in conformance with the plan provided in Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal and utilize such control measures,described in this Section,as may be necessary to eliminate or significantly reduce the discharge of possible water pollutants from the Project Site as a result of waste collection and disposal. B Keep receptacles and waste collection areas neat and orderly to the extent possible. Waste shall not be allowed to overflow its container or accumulate from day-to-day. Locate trash collection points where they will least likely be affected by concentrated storm water runoff. 3.08 WASHING AREAS J A Vehicles such as concrete delivery trucks or dump trucks and other construction equipment shall not be washed at locations where the runoff will flow directly into a watercourse or storm water conveyance system. Preventative measures may include the following practices: Designate special areas for washing vehicles. 2. Locate these areas where the wash water will spread out and evaporate or infiltrate directly into the ground, or where the runoff can be collected in a temporary holding or seepage basin. 3. Beneath wash areas construct a gravel or rock base to minimize mud production. B Construct washing areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. 3.09 STORAGE AND USAGE OF POTENTIAL WATER POLLUTANTS A Store and use potential water pollutants such as pesticides,fertilizers,distillate fuels, lubricants, solvents, cements, paints, acids, caustics, and other toxic substances in accordance with manufacturers' guidelines, Material Safety Data Sheets, and with local, state, and federal regulations. 07/2006 01566-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION B Isolate these substances in areas where they are to be stored,opened or used such that they will not cause pollution of runoff from the Project Site. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 2. Store containers on raised platforms. 3. Place plastic matting,packed day,tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 4. Provide protective cover or weather proof enclosure. 5. Minimize accidental spillage. 6. Keep containers tightly closed. 7. Periodically inspect containers for leakage. 8. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 9. Provide berms,filter fabric fences or barriers, or sediment basins. 10. Designate washing areas for containers and other items that have come in contact with potential water pollutants. C Avoid overuse of substances such as pesticides and fertilizers which could produce contaminated runoff. 3.10 SANITARY FACILITIES A Provide the Project Site with adequate portable toilets for workers in accordance with Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls,and applicable health regulations. B Control areas where sanitary facilities are located so that sewage or chemicals will not be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems by using one or more of the following measures. 1. Inspect the facilities daily. 2. Service the facilities as often as necessary to maintain cleanliness and prevent overflows. 3. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate 4. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area END OF SECTION 07/2006 01566-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM cor . Section 01570 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trench safety system for the construction of trench excavations. B. Trench safety system for excavation of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of federal, state, or local excavation safety laws. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals D. Referenced Standards: Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 411, E. Definitions: 1. Trench. A narrow excavation (in relation to its depth) made below the surface of the ground. In general,the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench (measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet. 2. Trench safety system requirements apply to larger open excavations if the erection of structures or other installations limits the space between the excavation slope and the installation to dimensions equivalent to a trench as defined. 3. Trench safety systems include both Protective Systems and Shoring Systems but are not limited to sloping, sheeting, trench boxes or trench shields, slide rail systems, sheet piling,cribbing, bracing, shoring, dewatering or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. L 5/2013 01570- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM a. Protective System: A method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from material that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from the collapse of an adjacent structure. b. Shoring System: A structure, which supports the sides of an excavation, to prevent cave-ins, maintain stable soil conditions, or to prevent movements of the ground affecting adjacent installations or improvements. c. Special Shoring: A shoring system meeting Special Shoring Requirements for locations identified on the Plans. 4. Competent Person-one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for trench safety systems used on utility excavations is on a linear foot basis, measured along the centerline of the trench. Payment for trench safety systems includes payment for manholes and other line structures. B. Unless indicated in as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for shoring systems under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for trench safety systems. C. If shown on the Plans and included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as a separate Bid Item, Measurement and Payment for Special Shoring system installation for trench excavation is on a square foot basis, measured and completed in place. D. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on structural excavations under this Section. Include cost for trench safety system used on structural excavations in applicable structure installation. E. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on roadway excavation or embankment under this Section. Include cost in applicable Sections. F. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a safety plan specifically for the construction of trench excavation,excavation of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of 5/2013 01570-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM federal, state,or local excavation safety laws. Design the Trench Safety Plan to be in accordance with OSHA Standards - 29CFR governing the presence and activities of individuals working in and around trench excavations, and in accordance with any Special Shoring requirements at locations shown on the Plans. Include in the plan, submittal of the contact information for the Competent Person. C. Have Shop Drawings for trench safety systems sealed, as required by OSHA, by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas, retained and paid by the Contractor. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with the provision of Excavations,Trenching,and Shoring,OSHA Standards-29 CFR,Part 1926,Subpart P, as amended,including Final Rule,published in the Federal Register Vol.54,No.209 on Tuesday, October 31, 1989. The sections that are incorporated into these Technical Specifications, by reference, include Standard 1926.650-652. B. A reproduction of the OSHA Standards — 29 CFR included in Subpart P — "Excavations"from the Federal Register Vol. 54,No. 209 is available upon request to Contractors bidding on the Work. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the reproduction. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a copy of this section of the Federal Register. C. Include in the Trench Safety Program measures that establish compliance with the standard interpretation of the General Duty Clause,Section 5.(a)(1),of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970—20 USC 654 which states,"Employers must shore or otherwise protect employees who walk/work at the base of an embankment from possible collapse." D. Legislation that has been enacted by the State of Texas with regard to Trench Safety Systems is hereby incorporated, by reference, into these specifications. Under Texas Statutes, refer to Chapter 756 of the Health and Safety Code, SUBCHAPTER C. TRENCH SAFETY. E. Reference materials, if developed for this Work, will be issued by the Engineer along with the Bid Documents, including the following: 1. Geotechnical information obtained for use in design of the trench safety system. 2. Special Shoring Requirements. 1.05 INDEMNIFICATION A. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its employees, and agents, from any and all damages,costs (including,without limitation, legal fees,court costs, and the cost of investigation),judgments or claims by anyone for injury or death of 5/2013 01570-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM persons resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this Contract. B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity for the Owner in case the Owner is negligent either by act or omission in providing for trench safety, including, but not limited to safety program and design reviews, inspections, failures to issue stop work orders, and the hiring of the Contractor. C. Review of the safety program by the Engineer will only be in regard to compliance with the Contract Documents and will not constitute approval by the Engineer nor relieve Contractor of obligations under state and federal trench safety laws. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with provisions of OSHA Standards—29 CFR. B. Specially designed trench safety systems shall be installed in accordance with the Contractor's trench excavation safety program for the locations and conditionsyasj identified in the program. C. Install Special Shoring at the locations shown on the Plans. D. Obtain verification from a Competent Person,defined in this Section and as identified in the Contractor's Trench Safety Program, that trench boxes and other pre- manufactured systems are certified for the actual installation conditions. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Conduct daily inspections by Contractor or Contractor's independently retained consultant, of the trench safety systems to ensure that the installed systems and operations meet OSHA Standards-29 CFR and other personnel protection regulations requirements. B. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, immediately stop work in the trench and move personnel to safe locations until necessary precautions have been taken to safeguard personnel. C. Maintain a permanent record of daily inspections. J 5/2013 01570-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify specific applicability of the selected or specially designed trench safety systems to each field condition encountered on the Work. END OF SECTION 411/ 411, 5/2013 01570-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 4111, Section 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Project identification sign description. B. Installation. C. Maintenance and removal. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. No separate payment will be made for design, fabrication, installation, and maintenance of project identification signs under this Section. Include cost of work performed under this Section in the pay item for Section 01505 - Mobilization. B. If changes to project identification signs are requested by the City Engineer to keep them current, payment will be made by change order. C. Skid-mounted signs shall be relocated as directed by the City Engineer at no additional cost to the City. Post-mounted signs shall be relocated once, if directed in writing by the City Engineer,at no additional cost to the City. If a post-mounted sign is relocated more than once at the written direction of the City Engineer, payment will be made by change order. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sign Construction: Project identification signs shall be constructed of new materials and painted new for the project. Construct post-mounted signs as shown on Construction Sign Details. B. Appearance: Project identification signs shall be maintained to present a clean and neat look throughout the project duration. C. Sign Manufacturer/Maker: Experienced as a professional sign company. D. Sign Placement: Place signs at locations as directed by the City Engineer. The City Engineer will provide sign placement instructions at the Pre-construction Meeting. 1. A linear project is one involving paving, overlay, sewer lines, storm drainage,or water mains that run in the right-of-way over a distance. A 400 10/2014 01580-1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS linear project requires a project identification sign at each end of the construction site. 2. Single Site or Building Projects: Provide one project identification sign. 3. Multiple Sites: Provide one project identification sign at each site. 4. Sign Relocation: As work progresses at each site, it may be necessary to move and relocate project identification signs. Relocate signs as directed in writing by the City Engineer. E. Alternate Skid-mounted Sign Construction: Post-mounted signs are preferred, but skid-mounted signs are allowed, especially for projects with noncontiguous locations where work progresses from one location to another. The skid structure shall be designed so that the sign will withstand a 60-mile-per-hour wind load directly to the face or back of the sign. Use stakes, straps, or ballast. Approval of the use of skid-mounted signs shall not release the Contractor from responsibility of maintaining a project identification sign on the project site and shall not make the City responsible for the security of such signs. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures. B. Show content, layout, lettering style, lettering size, and colors. Make sign and lettering to scale, clearly indicating condensed lettering, if used. J 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: All sign materials shall be new. 1. Sign Posts: Use 4-inch by 4-inch treated wood posts, sized to fix tor of sign at 6 FEET ABOVE GROUND. 2. Sign Supports and Skid Bracing: 2-inch by 4-inch wood framing material. 3. Skid Members: 2-inch by 6-inch wood framing material. 4. Fasteners: a. Use galvanized steel fasteners. b. Use 3/8-inch by 5-1/2-inch button head carriage bolts to attach sign to posts. Secure with nuts and flat head washers at locations as recommended by Sign Manufacturer. c. Cover button heads with white reflective film or paint to match sign background B. Sign and Sign Header: Use medium density overlaid marine plywood, minimum 1/2-inch thick. Use full-size 4-foot by 8-foot sheets for sign and a single piece for header to minimize joints; do not piece wood to fabricate a sign face. C. Paint and Primers: White paint used to prime surfaces and to resist weathering shall be an industrial grade,fast-drying,oil-based paint with gloss finish. Paint structural V 10/2014 01580-2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS Ihise and framing members white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint sign and sign header material white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint all sign surfaces with this weather-protective paint prior to adding any sign paint or adhesive applications. D. Colors: Follow criteria established by attached Exhibit 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification signs within 10 calendar days after Date of Commencement. B. Erect signs where designated by the City Engineer at the Pre-construction Meeting or as described in part 1.03 of this Section. Position the sign in such a manner as to be fully visible and readable to the general public. C. Erect sign level and plumb. D. If mounted on posts, sink posts a minimum of 30 inches below grade in 10-inch diameter posthole. Stabilize posts with sharp sand or concrete to minimize lateral motion. Leave a minimum of 8 feet of post above existing grade for mounting of the sign and header. E. Erect sign so that the top edge of the sign, is no higher than 6 feet above existing grade. 3.02 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL A. Keep signs and supports clean. Repair deterioration and damage. B. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations to a depth of 2 feet upon completion of Project. Restore the area to a condition equal to or better than before construction. END OF SECTION cor 10/2014 01580-3 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN EXHIBIT I irsr .... / pn_ PROJECT NAME LOCATED HERE .m::fiie ,::o,. ' :' PROJECT NO. 12345678 COOSInPom.mnl PROJECT SCHEDULE MONTHIYEAR uwA Yvwn it gilta,EVa: BUDGET.$DOLLAR AMOUNT ' ° ENGINEER/ARCHITECT:NEERIARCNITECT. 'kM0 *Tilai pv t< i -- E: NAME GOES HERE "' Ma _ iiIPPEPow:WWWiFili CONTRACTOR: oum„mN Miii**. iti CONTRACTOR NAME GOES HERE --- R6RR w..e pxg peaMndU.govidepeMlenLsiergineedn9capital-projed.Upr �•" .• SPECIAL NOTE:CONTACT CITY SECRETARY FOR CURRENT COUNCIL NAMES sP.®WLNN SINGLE SIDE MDO MARINE GRADE PLYWOOD FINISHED WITH ALKYD ENAMEL GLOSS WHITE vevge .um rx COMPUTER CUT VINYL AND DIGITAL PANT 6 YEAR LIFE MINIMUM MATERIALS vrnu.ecu.mmw INJ STALL ON TWO 4-X4 TREATED POSTS,MIX.DEPTH IS 2C 'D ,OR SKID MOUNTED AS SITE REG . CLIENT APPROVAL J 10/2014 01580-4 CITY OF PFARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT thr Section 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for transportation, delivery, handling, and storage of materials and equipment. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this work is a component. 1.03 PRODUCTS A Products: Means material,equipment,or systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,fabrication,conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for fible reuse. B Do not reuse materials and equipment,designated to be removed,except as specified by the Contract Documents. C Provide equipment and components from the fewest number of manufacturers as is practical, in order to simplify spare parts inventory and to allow for maximum interchangeability of components. For multiple components of the same size,type or application, use the same make and model of component throughout the Work. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION A Make arrangements for transportation, delivery, and handling of equipment and materials required for timely completion of the Work. B Transport and handle products in accordance with instructions. C Consign and address shipping documents to the proper party giving name of Project, street number, and City. Shipments shall be delivered to the Contractor. 1.05 DELIVERY A Arrange deliveries of products to accommodate the Construction Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. Avoid deliveries that cause 412, lengthy storage or overburden of limited storage space. 07/2006 01600- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT B Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the Project Site and to accommodate the following: 1. Work of other contractors or the Owner. 2. Limitations of storage space. 3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products. 4. Owner's use of premises. C Have products delivered to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. D Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment to assure: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Containers and packages are intact; labels are legible. 4. Products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A Coordinate the off-loading of materials and equipment delivered to the Project Site. If necessary to move stored materials and equipment during construction, Contractor shall relocate materials and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. B Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those provided by the Owner,by methods to prevent damage to products or packaging. C Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking scraping, marring, or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas. D Handle products by methods to prevent over bending or overstressing. E Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. F Handle materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. G Do not drop, roll, or skid products off delivery vehicles. Hand carry or use suitable materials handling equipment. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIAL A Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of these Technical Specifications. Control storage of potential water pollutants in conformance with Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment. Place loose soil materials,and materials to be incorporated into the Work to prevent damage to any part of the Work or existing facilities and to maintain free access at all times to all parts of the Work and to utility service company installations in the vicinity of the ] Work. r/ 07/2006 01600-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT C Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause a minimum of inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants, and occupants. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. D Provide adequately ventilated, watertight storage facilities with floor above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. E Restrict storage to areas available on the construction site for storage of material and equipment as shown on Plans or approved by the Project Manager. F Provide off-site storage and protection when on-site storage is not adequate. G Do not use lawns, grass plots, or other private property for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. Damage to lawns,sidewalks,streets or other improvements shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. H Protect stored materials and equipment against loss or damage. I Store materials in manufacturers' unopened containers. Materials delivered and stored along the line of the Work shall be not closer than 3 feet to any fire hydrant. Public and private drives and street crossings shall be kept open. K The total length which materials may be distributed along the route of construction at any one time is 1000 lineal feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Project Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION Cr 07/2006 01600-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Section 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS L0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Options for making product or process selections. B Procedures for proposing equivalent construction products or processes,including pre- approved, and approved products or processes C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350— Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A Product: Means,materials,equipment,or systems incorporated into the Work.Product does not include machinery and equipment used for production,fabrication,conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for re-use. B Process: Any proprietary system or method for installing system components resulting in an integral, functioning part of the Work. For this Section, the word Product includes Processes. 1.04 SELECTION OPTIONS A Pre-approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers are designated in the Technical Specifications as"pre-approved". Products of other manufacturers or suppliers will not be acceptable under this Contract and will not be considered under the submittal process for approving alternate products. B Approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal". Approval of alternate products not listed in the Technical Specifications may be obtained through provisions of this Section and Section 01350—Submittals. The procedure for approval of alternate products is not applicable to Pre-approved Products. C Product Compatibility: To the maximum extent possible,provide products that are of the same type or function from a single manufacturer, make, or source. Where more than one choice is available as a Contractor's option, select a product which is compatible with other products already selected, specified, or in use by the Owner. 07/2006 01630- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A Furnish information the Engineer deems necessary to judge equivalency of the alternate product. B Pay for laboratory testing as well as any other review or examination cost needed to establish the equivalency between products which enables the Engineer to make such a judgment. C If the Engineer determines that an alternate product is not equivalent to that named in the Technical Specifications,the Contractor shall furnish one of the specified products. 1.06 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A Alternate products may be used only if approved in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer's determination regarding acceptance of a proposed alternate product is final. B Alternate products will be accepted if the product is judged by the Engineer to be equivalent to the specified product or to offer substantial benefit to the Owner. C The Owner retains the right to accept any product deemed advantageous to the Owner, and similarly, to reject any product deemed not beneficial to the Owner. 1.07 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A Collect and assemble technical information applicable to the proposed product to aid in 14) determining equivalency as related to the Approved Product specified. B Submit a written request for a product to be considered as an alternate product along with the product information within fourteen(14)days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. C After the submittal period has expired, requests for alternate products will be considered only when a specified product becomes unavailable because of conditions beyond the Contractor's control. D Submit 5 copies of each request for alternate product approval. Include the following information: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturers literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation. Include the name of the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and installing contractor. 07/2006 01630-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Shop Drawings illustrating methods. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Data relating to changes in Construction Schedule 6. Relationship to separate contracts, if any. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 8. Other information requested by the Engineer. E Approved alternate products will be subject to the same review process as the specified product would have been for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION Cr 07/2006 01630-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING CIO Section 01720 FIELD SURVEYING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for surveyors and surveys. B Procedures pertaining to survey control points and reference points. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL A Conform to State of Texas laws for surveys requiring licensed surveyors. Employ a land surveyor acceptable to Engineer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit to Engineer the name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. C Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work on request. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. B Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 1.06 EXAMINATION A Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting Work. B Notify Engineer immediately of any discrepancies discovered. 4111, 07/2006 01720- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING 1.07 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A Control datum for survey is that established by Owner-provided survey and indicated on Plans. B Locate and protect survey control points,including property corners,prior to starting site work. Use caution to preserve permanent reference points during construction. C The Contractor shall not reset; nor cause to be reset, lost, disturbed, or damaged; control points. Promptly notify Engineer of disturbance or damage to any control point(s). D Notify Engineer 48 hours in advance of need for relocation of reference points due to changes in grades or other reasons. E Report promptly to Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point. F Any re-staking of control points lost,disturbed,or damaged by Contractor's operations will be provided by Owner at Contractor's expense. O Employ a Registered Public Land Surveyor to reset any missing,disturbed,or damaged monumentation. 1.08 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. V B Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on Project Site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C Establish and record in survey notes elevations,lines and levels to provide quantities required for Measurement and Payment and to provide appropriate controls for the Work. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading; fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Mounumented Baseline. D Verify periodically layouts by same means. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION J 07/2006 01720-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARIAND STARTING SYSTEMS thr Section 01750 STARTING SYSTEMS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Starting systems. B Demonstration and instructions. C Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D References to Technical specifications: I. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Contractor shall conduct all start-up operations under this Contract in conformance with Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control. B Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. C Notify Engineer 7 days prior to startup of each item. D Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. (1110 E Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. 07/2006 01750- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND STARTING SYSTEMS F Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G Execute start-up under Contractor's supervision in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H When specified in individual specification sections,require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect,check and approve equipment or system installation prior to and during start-up,and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner two weeks minimum prior to date of Substantial Completion. B Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location. D Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.03 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 4011) A Contractor shall start, test, adjust, balance, and provide reports on all installed equipment as provided for in this section. B Owner may also appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner indicating observations and results of the tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C Owner's employment of an independent firm shall not relieve the Contractor's responsibility under this section. END OF SECTION J 07/2006 01750-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Section 01760 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Maintenance and Submittal of Record Documents and Samples. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01770—Contract Closeout 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.04 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A Maintain one copy of Record Documents at the Project Site in accordance with Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 3.02 "Keeping Plans and Specifications Accessible". B Store Record Documents and Samples in field office if a field office is required by Contract Documents, or in a secure location. Provide files,racks,and secure storage for Record Documents and Samples. C Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large,printed letters. D Maintain Record Documents in a clean,dry,and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. E Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection by Engineer. 1.05 RECORDING A Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. B Plans, Change Orders, and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record all actual construction,or "as built" conditions, including: 411110 1. Measured horizontal locations and elevations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 07/2006 01760- 1 of2 CITY OF PEARL{ND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2. Elevations of underground utilities referenced to bench marks utilized for the Work. J 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by modifications. 5. Details not on original Plans. 6. References to related Shop Drawings and Modifications. C Record information with a red pen or pencil on a set of drawings indicated as the Record Document Set, provided by Engineer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION A Deliver Record Documents and Samples to Owner in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01760-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01770 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Closeout procedures including final submittals such as operation and maintenance data,warranties, and spare parts and maintenance materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A Comply with Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement regarding Final Completion and Final Payment when Work is complete and ready for Engineer's final inspection. B Provide Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. C Complete or correct items on punch list,with no new items added. Any new items will be addressed during warranty period. D The Owner will occupy portions of the Work as specified in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. E Contractor shall request Final Inspection at least two weeks prior to Final Acceptance. 1.05 FINAL CLEANING A Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B Clean debris from drainage systems. 411, C Clean Project Site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 09/2009 01770- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary construction facilities from the Project Site following the final test of utilities and completion of the Work. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit Operations and Maintenance data under provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.07 WARRANTIES A Provide one original of each warranty from Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers. B Provide Table of Contents and assemble warranties in 3-ring/D binder with durable plastic cover. C Submit warranties prior to Final Application for Payment. 1. Warranties shall commence in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 1.09 "Substantially Completed". 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION Contractor shall diligently pursue completion of the items and activities contained in the Contract Close Out and Project Record Document sections of the project manual. Notwithstanding any performance of warranty work, the work of Contract Closeout shall be complete within thirty(30) days of the date of Final Completion and Acceptance of the work. END OF SECTION J 09/2009 01770-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 Cr TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Cr DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 07/2006 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION Section 02200 SITE PREPARATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Removal of topsoil, stripping and stockpiling, clearing and grubbing. B Removal and disposal of waste materials, excess materials, debris and trash. C Removal of obstructions. D Excavation and fill. E Salvaging of designated item. F References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350— Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material 6. Section 02330—Embankment 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises G Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If Site Preparation is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit embankment material sources and product quality information in accordance this Section. 1/2018 02200- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. A Clear Project Site oftrees,shrubs,and other vegetation,except for those designated by `i/ Owner to be left standing. B Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees designated to remain. C Completely remove stumps,roots,and other debris protruding through ground surface. 1. On areas required for roadway, channel, or structural excavation, remove stumps, 2" diameter or larger limbs and roots,to depth of 2 feet below lower elevation of excavation. 2. On areas required for embankment construction, remove 2" diameter limbs, stumps and roots to depth of 2 feet below ground surface 3. Trees and stumps may be cut off as close to natural ground as practicable on areas which are to be covered by at least 3 feet of embankment 13 Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth,and thoroughly compact to density equal to adjacent original ground. E Complete operations by bulldozing, blading,and grading so that prepared area is free of holes, unplanned ditches,abrupt changes in elevations and irregular contours,and preserve drainage of area. 1. Blade entire area to prevent ponding of water and to provide drainage,except in areas to be immediately excavated 1/2018 02200-2 of CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 4100 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING A Obtain approval of topsoil quality before excavating and stockpiling. B Excavate topsoil for esplanades and areas to receive grass or landscaping from areas to be further excavated. C Topsoil Stripping: 1. Remove growths of grass from areas before stripping. 2. Topsoil is defined as surface soil found of depth of not less than 4 inches. 3. Strip topsoil to depths encountered. 4. Perform stripping in a manner to prevent intermingling of topsoil with underlying sterile subsoil and remove objectionable materials, including clay lumps, stones over 2 in. in diameter,weeds, roots, leaves, and debris. 5. Where trees are designated by Owner to be left standing,stop topsoil stripping at extreme limits of tree drip line to prevent damage to main root system. D Topsoil Stockpiling: 1. Stockpile in areas designated on Plans. 2. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. 3. Cover storage piles, if required to prevent wind-blown dust. 4. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Stockpile in a manner to prevent erosion. 3.03 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A Undercut, remove, and replace material which Engineer designates as unsuitable for subsequent construction. B Material used to replace unsuitable material shall be suitable material from site excavation or as indicated on Plans. 3.04 EXCAVATION AND FILL A Construction surveying shall be performed by qualified personnel under the direction of the contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and correctness of this work. In the event that the work consists of significant alteration of the topographic features of natural grade, contractor shall perform enough topographic survey to substantiate existing pre-construction elevations. No claim shall be made for additional excavation or grade adjustment in excess of quantities contained in the contract documents without demonstrable evidence that such conditions existed prior to start of the work B Depressed site areas shall be filled using material from high areas, insofar as practicable. Cie 1/2018 02200-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION C When fill obtained from high areas is exhausted, fill to indicated rough grade elevations under roadways with"Structural Fill"and open areas not under structures or roadways with"General Fill", or as indicated on Plans. D Place and compact fill in accordance with Section 02330—Embankment. 3.05 SALVAGEABLE ITEMS AND MATERIAL A Items designated by Engineer to be salvaged are to be carefully removed,so as to cause no damage to the salvaged items and delivered to Owner's storage yard. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. END OF SECTION J J 1/2018 02200-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION Section 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Demolishing and removing existing pavements, structures,equipment and materials only to the extent as indicated on the Plans. B Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, and base courses. C Removing concrete curbs, concrete curb and gutters, sidewalks and driveways. D Removing pipe culverts and sewers. E Removing miscellaneous structures of wood, plastics, metals, concrete, masonry, or combination of concrete and masonry, etc. F Disposing of demolished materials and equipment. G References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Control 4. Section 01100—Summary of Work 5. Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 7. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures under this Section. Include cost for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If indicated as a Bid Item, measurement will be as follows: 1. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing,and removing asphaltic surfacing,is on a square yard basis measured between lips of gutters. 2. Measurement for removing and disposing of cement stabilized shell base course, with or without asphalt surfacing,is on a square yard basis. 3. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing with curbs,is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. Payment includes removal of all base,asphaltic surfacing,concrete pavement,esplanade 41110 curbs, curb and gutters, and paving headers. 04/2008 02220- I of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 4. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete pavement is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. J 5. Measurement for removing and disposing of monolithic curb and gutter, removing monolithic concrete curb,and removing concrete curb,is on a lineal foot basis measured along the face of the curb. 6. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete sidewalk and driveway is on a square yard basis. 7. Measurement for removing and disposing of miscellaneous concrete and masonry removal is on a cubic yard basis of the structure in place. 8. Measurement for removing and disposing of pipe culverts and sewers is on a lineal foot basis for each diameter of type of pipe removed. 9. Measurement for removing and disposing of unlisted materials shall be on the lump sum basis. C No payment will be made for work outside maximum payment limits indicated on Plans,or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for ,, demolition. Describe coordination for shutting off,capping,and removing temporary utilities. Plan operations to minimize temporary disruption of utilities to existing facilities or adjacent property. C Submit proposed demolition and removal schedule for approval. Notify Engineer in writing at least 48 hours before starting demolition. D Submit an approved copy of demolition schedule to Engineer prior to commencement of demolition operations. E Obtain a permit for building demolition, as required. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. B The Contractor shall be responsible for safety and integrity of adjacent structures and shall be liable for any damage due to movement or settlement. Provide proper framing and shoring necessary for support. Cease operations if an adjacent structure appears to be endangered. Resume demolition only after proper protective measures have been taken. e/ 04/2008 02220-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 1.05 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A Materials and equipment designated for reuse or salvage are listed in Section 01100— Summary of Work. Protect items designated for reuse or salvage from damage during demolition, handling and storage. Restore damaged items to satisfactory condition. B Materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage become the property of the Contractor. 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A Store and protect materials and equipment designated for reuse until time of installation. B Deliver and unload items to be salvaged to storage areas indicated on Plans. C Remove equipment and materials not designated for reuse or salvage and all waste and debris resulting from demolition from site. Remove material as work progresses to avoid clutter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FOR DEMOLITION cir A Use equipment and materials approved as prescribed in this Section, 1.03"Submittals'. B Use of a"drop hammer" must have the Engineer's prior approval. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Prior to demolition, make an inspection with Engineer to determine the condition of existing structures and features adjacent to items designated for demolition. B Engineer will mark or list existing equipment to remain the property of the Owner. C Do not proceed with demolition or removal operations until after the joint inspection and subsequent authorization by Engineer. B Stop demolition and notify Engineer if underground fuel storage tanks, asbestos, PCB's, contaminated soils, or other hazardous materials are encountered. 3.02 UTILITY SERVICES A Follow rules and regulations of authorities or companies having jurisdiction over communications, pipelines, and electrical distribution services. 4 B Notify and coordinate with utility company and adjacent building occupants when temporary interruption of utility service is necessary. 04/2008 02220-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 3.03 MECHANICAL WORK ITEMS A Mechanical removals consist of dismantling and removing existing piping, pumps, motors,water tanks,equipment and other appurtenances. It includes cutting,capping, and plugging required to restore use of existing utilities. B Remove existing process,water,chemical, gas,fuel oil and other piping not required for new work. Take out piping to the limits shown or to a point where it will not interfere with the new work. Piping not indicated to be removed or which does not interfere with new work shall be removed to the nearest solid support,capped,and the remainder left in place. Purge chemical and fuel lines and tanks. Verify that such lines are safe prior to removal or capping. C Where piping that is to be removed passes through existing walls, cut and cap piping on each side of the wall. Use cap appropriate for pipe material to be capped. Provide fire-rated sealant for walls classified as fire-rated. D When underground piping, which is not located in the public right-of-way, is to be altered or removed,cap the remaining piping. Abandoned underground piping may be left in place unless it interferes with new work or is shown or specified to be removed. 411) Piping less than 15 inches in diameter may be plugged and abandoned in place. For piping 15 inches in diameter and greater to be abandoned,fill with sand,pressure grout or other approved method and plug with concrete or brick masonry bulkhead. E Remove waste and vent piping to points shown. Plug pipe and cleanouts and plugs. Where vent stacks pass through an existing roof that is to remain,remove the stack and patch the hole in the roof,making it watertight. Comply with requirements of existing roof installer so as to maintain roof warranty. F Conform to applicable codes when making any changes to plumbing and heating systems. 3.04 ELECTRICAL WORK ITEMS A Electrical removals consist of disconnecting and removing existing switchgear, distribution switchboards,control panels,bus duct,conduits and wires,panel boards, lighting fixtures, and miscellaneous electrical equipment. B Remove existing electrical equipment and fixtures to prevent damage to allow continued operation of existing systems and to maintain the integrity of the grounding systems. 04/2008 02220-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C Remove poles and metering equipment, if designated for removal on the Plans. Coordinate electrical removals with the power company, as necessary. Verify that power is properly de-energized and disconnected. D Where shown or otherwise required, remove wiring in underground duct systems. Verify function of wiring before disconnecting and removing. Plug ducts which are not to be reused at entry to buildings. E Changes to electrical systems shall conform to applicable codes. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove from the site all items contained in or upon the structure not designated for reuse or salvage in accordance with this Section and Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. C Follow method of disposal as required by regulatory agencies. END OF SECTION thIr 40, 04/2008 02220-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND CSection 02252 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Cement stabilized sand for backfill and bedding. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" b. ASTM D 1632, "Practice for Making and Curing Soil-Cement Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory" c. ASTM D 1633, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders" d. ASTM C 150,"Standard Specification for Portland Cement" (1111, e. ASTM C 33,"Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" f. ASTM D 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" g. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" h. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" j. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" k. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" ASTM C 31,"Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as an Extra Item, no separate payment will be made for cement stabilized sand under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for applicable utility or structure installation. B If use of cement stabilized sand is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a 411/ per ton basis. A conversion between volumes calculated based on theoretical limits and total weight will be made based on a ratio of 1.64 tons per cubic yard. 02/2009 02252- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — J Submittals. B Submit material qualification and design mix tests to include: I. Three series of tests of sand or fine aggregate material from the proposed source. Tests shall include procedures defined in this Section, 2.01 "Materials". 2. Three moisture-density relationship tests prepared using the material qualified by the tests in this Section, 1.03B1. Blends of fine aggregate from crushed concrete and bank run sand shall be tested at the ratio to be used for the design mix testing. 3. Design mix report to meet the specifications of this Section, 1.04 "Design Requirements". The design mix shall include compressive strength tests after 48-hours and 7 days curing. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A Design sand-cement mixture to produce a minimum unconfined compressive strength of 100 pounds per square inch in 48 hours when compacted to a minimum 95 percent in accordance with ASTM D 558 and when cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632, and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633. Mix shall contain a minimum of 1-1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard. Compact mix with a moisture content on the dry side of optimum. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Cement shall be Type 1 Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150. B Sand shall be clean, durable, and meet grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM C 33 and the following requirements: 1. Classified as SW, SP or SM by the United Soil Classification System of ASTM D 2487. 2. Deleterious material content: a. Clay lumps shall comprise less than 0.5 percent by ASTM C 142. b. Lightweight pieces shall comprise less than 5.0 percent by ASTM C 123. c. Organic impurities shall produce color no darker than the standard color by ASTM C 40 ASTM. 3. Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. C Fine aggregate,manufactured from crushed concrete meeting the quality requirements for crushed rock material in Section 02255 - Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials, may be used as a complete or partial substitute for Bank Sand. The blending ratio of fine aggregate from crushed concrete and Bank Sand shall be defined ] in the mix design report. r/ 02/2009 02252-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND D Water shall be potable,free of oils,acids,alkalies,organic matter,or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C 94. 2.02 MIXING MATERIALS A Thoroughly mix sand, cement and water in proportions of the mix design using a pugmill-type mixer. The plant shall be equipped with automatic weight controls to ensure correct mix proportions. B Stamp batch ticket at plant with time of loading directly after mixing. Material not placed and compacted within 4 hours after mixing shall be rejected. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A Place sand-cement mixture in 8-inch-thick loose lifts and compact to a minimum of 95 percent of ASTM D 558, unless otherwise specified on Plans. The moisture content during compaction shall be on the dry side of optimum but sufficient for hydration. Perform and complete compaction of sand-cement mixture within 4 hours after addition of water to mix at the plant. B Do not place or compact sand-cement mixture in standing or free water. thit 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services. B Mixing plant inspections will be performed periodically. Material samples will be obtained and tested in accordance with this Section, 2.01 "Materials", if there is evidence of change in material characteristic. C One sample of cement stabilized sand shall be obtained for each 150 tons of material placed per day with no less than one sample per day of production. Random samples of delivered cement stabilized sand shall be taken in the field at point of delivery in accordance with ASTM 3665.Obtain three individual samples of approximately 12 to 15 lb each from the first, middle, and last third of the truck and composite them into one sample for test purpose. D Prepare and mold four specimens (for each sample obtained) in accordance with ASTM D558,Method A,without adjusting moisture content.Samples will be molded at approximately same time material is being used,but no later than 4 hours after water is added to mix. E After molding, specimens will be removed from molds and cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632. 41110 02/2009 02252-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND F Specimens will be tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D 1633, Method A. Two specimens will be tested at 48 hours plus or minus 2 hours and two specimens will be tested at 7 days plus or minus 4 hours. G A strength test will be average of strengths of two specimens molded from same sample of material and tested at same age. Average daily strength will be average of strengths of all specimens molded during one day's production and tested at same age. H Precision and Bias: Test results shall meet recommended guideline for precision in ASTM D 1633 Section 9. Reporting: Test reports shall contain, as a minimum,the following information: 1. Supplier and plant number 2. Time material was batched 3. Time material was sampled 4. Test age (exact hours) 5. Average 48-hour strength 6. Average 7-day strength 7. Specification section number 8. Indication of compliance/non-compliance 9. Mixture identification 10. Truck and ticket numbers 11. The time of molding 12. Moisture content at time of molding 13. Required strength 14. Test method designations 15. Compressive strength data as required by ASTM D 1633 16. Supplier mixture identification 17. Specimen diameter and height, in. 18. Specimen cross-sectional area, sq. in. The cement content will be checked on samples obtained in the field whenever there are apparent changes in the mix properties. 3.03 ACCEPTANCE A Strength level of material will be considered satisfactory if: I. The average 48-hour strength is greater than 100 psi with no individual strength test below 70 psi. 2. All 7-day individual strength tests(average of two specimens)are greater than or equal to100 psi. B Material will be considered deficient when 7-day individual strength test(average of two specimens) is less than 100 psi but greater than 70 psi. See Paragraph 3.04 Adjustment for Deficient Strength. C The material will be considered unacceptable and subject to removal and replacement at Contractors expense when individual strength test(average of two specimens) has 7-day strength less than 70 psi 02/2009 02252-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND C D When moving average of three daily 48-hour averages falls below 100 psi,discontinue shipment to project until plant is capable of producing material,which exceeds 100 psi at 48 hours. Five 48-hour strength tests shall be made in this determination with no individual strength tests less than 100 psi. E Testing laboratory shall notify Contractor,Project Manager,and material supplier by facsimile of tests indicating results falling below specified strength requirements within 24 hours. F If any strength test of laboratory cured specimens falls below the specified strength, Contractor may, at his own expense, request test of cores drilled from the area in question in accordance with ASTM C42. In such cases,three(3)cores shall be taken for each strength test that falls below the values given in 3.03.A. G Cement stabilized sand in an area represented by core tests shall be considered satisfactory if the average of three(3)cores is equal to at least 100 psi and if no single core is less that 70 psi.Additional testing of cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength results will be permitted. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT FOR DEFICIENT STRENGTH A When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength greater than or equal to 100 psi, then material will be considered satisfactory and bid price will be paid in full. tho B When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 100 psi and greater than or equal to 70 psi,material shall be accepted contingent on credit in payment Compute credit by the following formula: Credit per Cubic Yard=$30.00 x 2 (100 psi -Actual psi) 100 C When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 70 pounds per square inch, then remove and replace cement-sand mixture and paving and other necessary work at no cost to City. END OF SECTION C 02/2009 02252-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS Section 02255 BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A reference source for materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment,specified elsewhere in the Technical Specifications,and their associated material qualification testing requirements. B Source qualifications and handling of these materials. C Material use and application is specified on the Plans or in individual Technical Specifications referencing materials either by Material Classification or by Product Description. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Section 02910—Topsoil 3. Section 02252—Cement Stabilized Sand E Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM ID 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" b. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" c. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" d. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" e. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" f. ASTM D 1140, "Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer the No. 200 (70-um) Sieve" g. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" h. ASTM C 136, "Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" i. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" 07/2007 02255 - 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 2.0 PRODUCTS v, 2.01 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS A Materials shall be classified for the purpose of quality control in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification Symbols as defined in ASTM D 2487. 1. Class I: Well-graded gravels and sands, gravel-sand mixtures,crushed well- graded rock, little or no fines (GW, SW): a. Plasticity index: non-plastic. b. Gradation: D6o/D10 - greater than 4 percent; amount passing No. 200 sieve -less than or equal to 5 percent. 2. Class II: Poorly graded gravels and sands, silty gravels and sands, little to moderate fines: a. Plasticity index: non-plastic to 4. b. Gradations: Gradation (GP, SP): amount passing No. 200 sieve- less than 5 percent. Gradation(GM,SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. c. Borderline gradations with dual classifications(e.g.,SP-SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve-between 5 percent and 12 percent. 3. Class IB: Clayey gravels and sands, poorly graded mixtures of gravel, sand, silt, and clay(GC, SC, and dual classifications,e.g.,SP-SC): a. Plasticity index: greater than 7. b. Gradation: amount passing No.200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. 4. Class IVA: Lean clays (CL). a. Plasticity Indexes: Plasticity index: greater than 7, and above A line. Borderline plasticity with dual classifications (CL-ML): PI between 4 and 7. b. Liquid limit: less than 50. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. 5. Class IVB: Fat clays (CH) a. Plasticity index: above A line. b. Liquid limit: 50 or greater. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve -greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. B Use soils with dual class designation according to ASTM D 2487, and which are not defined above, according to the more restrictive class. 2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS A Unsuitable Material. Unsuitable soil materials are the following: 07/2007 02255-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS I. Materials that are classified as ML,CL-ML,MH,PT,OH and OL according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Materials that cannot be compacted to the required density due to either gradation,plasticity,or moisture content. 3. Materials that contain large clods, aggregates, stones greater than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, vegetation, waste or any other deleterious materials. 4. Materials that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical contaminants. B Suitable Material. Soil materials meeting specification requirements. Unsuitable soils meeting specification requirements for suitable soils after treatment with,for example, lime or cement shall be considered suitable,unless otherwise indicated. C General Fill. Material that is free of stones greater than 3 inches, free of roots,waste, debris,trash,organic material,unstable material,non-soil matter,hydrocarbon or other contamination,conforming to the following limits for deleterious materials: 1. Clay lumps: Less than 0.5 percent for Class I, and less than 2.0 percent for Class II, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142. 2. Lightweight pieces: Less than 5 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 123. 3. Organic impurities: No color darker than standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. 411, D Random Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I, Il,III, IV, or fat clay (CH), sand,gravel,or a combination,from excavation or borrow,which can be compacted to form stable embankments, and conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 65 maximum, ASTM- D4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 0 minimum, 45 maximum, ASTM -D43I8. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. E Structural Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I,II,III,or IV,sand,gravel,or a combination, from excavation or borrow, which can be compacted to form stable embankments and fills conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 45 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 12 minimum, 20 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones,hard lumps of earth and frozen,corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. F Select Fill. Class III clayey gravel or sand or Class IV lean clay or clayey soils treated with lime or cement, and conforming to: 40, 07/2007 02255-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1. Plasticity Index: 7 minimum, 20 maximum,ASTM D 4318. J 2. Free from trash, vegetation,organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 3. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. G Concrete Fill. Conform to requirements for Class B concrete as specified in Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete. H Topsoil. Conform to requirements specified in Section 02910-Topsoil. Bank Sand: Durable Bank Sand classified as SP, SW, or SM by the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487) meeting the following requirements: 1. Less than 15 percent passing the number 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140. The amount of clay lumps or balls not exceeding 2 percent. 2. Material passing the number 40 sieve shall meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: a. Liquid limit: not exceeding 25 percent. b. Plasticity index: not exceeding 7. J Cement Stabilized Sand. Conform to requirements of Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand. K Concrete Sand. Natural sand, manufactured sand, or a combination of natural and manufactured sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 100 No.4 95 to 100 No. 8 80 to 100 No. 16 50 to 85 No. 30 25 to 60 No. 50 l0 to 30 No. 100 2 to 10 L Gem Sand. Sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 for course aggregates specified for number 8 size and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 95 to 100 No. 4 60 to 80 No. 8 15 to 40 J 07/2007 02255-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 4111eM Pea Gravel. Durable particles composed of small,smooth,rounded stones or pebbles and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 1/2" 100 3/8" 85 to 100 No. 4 10 to 30 No. 8 0 to 10 No. 16 0 to 5 N Crushed Aggregates. Crushed aggregates consist of durable particles obtained from an approved source and meeting the following requirements: 1. Materials of one product delivered for the same construction activity from a single source. 2. Non-plastic fines. 3. Los Angeles Abrasion Test wear not exceeding 45 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 4. Crushed aggregate shall have a minimum of 90 percent of the particles retained on the No.4 sieve with 2 or more crushed faces as determined by TxDOT Tex- 460-A, Part I. 5. Crushed stone: Produced from oversize plant processed stone or gravel,sized C by crushing to predominantly angular particles from a naturally occurring single source. Uncrushed gravel are not acceptable materials for embedment where crushed stone is shown on the applicable utility embedment drawing details. 6. Crushed Concrete: Crushed concrete is an acceptable substitute for crushed stone as utility backfill. Gradation and quality control test requirements are the same as crushed stone. Provide crushed concrete produced from normal weight concrete of uniform quality; containing particles of aggregate and cement material,free from other substances such as asphalt, reinforcing steel fragments, soil, waste gypsum (calcium sulfate), or debris. 7. Gradations, as determined in accordance with TxDOT Tex-110-E. PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT FOR PIPE SIEVE EMBEDMENT BY RANGES OF NOMINAL PIPES SIZES >15" 15" -8" <8" 1" 95 - 100 100 - 3/4" 60- 90 90— 100 100 1/2" 25 - 60 - 90— 100 3/8" - 20—55 40- 70 No. 4 0 - 5 0— 10 0 - 15 No. 8 - 0- 5 0 - 5 4111 07/2007 02255-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SOURCE QUALIFICATIONS FOR BORROW MATERIAL A Use of material encountered in excavations is acceptable, provided applicable requirements are satisfied. If excavation material is not acceptable,provide from other approved source. B Identify off-site sources for materials at least 14 days ahead of intended use so that the Engineer may obtain samples for verification testing. C Obtain approval for each material source by the Engineer before delivery is started. If sources previously approved do not produce uniform and satisfactory products,furnish materials from other approved sources. Materials may be subjected to inspection or additional verification testing after delivery. Materials which do not meet the requirements will be rejected. Do not use material which,after approval,has become unsuitable for use due to segregation, mixing with other materials, or by contamination. Once a material is approved by the Engineer, a Change Order is required to change to a different material. D Bank sand, select fill, and random fill, if available in the project excavation, may be obtained by selective excavation and acceptance testing. Obtain additional quantities of these materials and other materials required to complete the Work from off-site sources. E The Owner does not represent or guarantee that any soil found in the excavation work will be suitable and acceptable as backfill material. 3.02 MATERIAL HANDLING A When material is obtained from either a commercial or non-commercial borrow pit, open the pit to expose the vertical faces of the various strata for identification and selection of approved material to be used. Excavate the selected material by vertical cuts extending through the exposed strata to achieve uniformity in the product. B Establish temporary stockpile locations for practical material handling and control,and verification testing by the Engineer in advance of final placement. Obtain approval from landowner for storage of backfill material on adjacent private property. C When stockpiling material near the Project Site,use appropriate methods to eliminate blowing of materials into adjacent areas and prevent runoff containing sediments from entering the drainage system. D Place material suitable for backfilling in stockpiles at a distance from the trench to prevent slides or cave-ins. Do not place stockpiles of excavated materials on public streets. 07/2007 02255-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING, BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS E Place stockpiles in layers to avoid segregation of processed materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. END OF SECTION C 07/2007 02255-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARL AND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES CP/ Section 02317 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Excavation,backfilling, and compaction of backfill for structures. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01450 -Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 7. Section 01570-Trench Safety System 8. Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 9. Section 02220- Site Demolition 10. Section 02200—Site Preparation 11. Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand 4100 12. Section 01562 - Waste Material Disposal C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" c. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" d. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" e. ASTM D 3017, "Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) a. Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-I10-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils D Definitions: 1. Backfill - material meeting specified quality requirements, placed and compacted under controlled conditions around pavements, structures and utilities. 07/2006 02317- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 2. Foundation Backfill -natural soil or manufactured aggregate meeting Class I J requirements and Geotextile fabrics as required to control drainage and material separation placed and compacted where needed to provide stable support for the structure foundation base. Foundation backfill may include crushed aggregate with filter fabric as required, cement stabilized sand, or concrete seal slab. 3. Foundation Base - provides a smooth, level working surface for the construction of the concrete foundation. 4. Foundation Subgrade-the surface of the natural soil which has been excavated and prepared to support the foundation base or foundation backfill, where needed. 5. Over-Excavation - excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below the foundation as shown on the Plans. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT UNIT PRICES A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Excavation and Backfill for Structures under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for construction of structures. B If Excavation and Backfill for Structures is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. r/ 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Submit for each structure a work plan for excavation and backfill with a complete written description which identifies details of the proposed method of construction and the sequence of operations for construction relative to excavation and backfill activities. The descriptions, with supporting illustrations, shall be sufficiently detailed to demonstrate to the Engineer that the procedures meet the requirements of the Plans and Technical Specifications. C Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. ID Submit field red lines documenting location of structures as installed, referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 07/2006 02317-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 4111110 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY • A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment,backfill, back-dressing,and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A Perform excavation with equipment suitable for achieving the requirements of this Section. B Use equipment which will produce the degree of compaction specified. Backfill within 3 feet of walls shall be compacted with hand operated equipment. Do not use equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds closer to walls than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Use hand operated power compaction equipment where use of heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to weight limitations. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570-Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in accordance with requirements of Section 02220 -Site Demolition, as applicable. D Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 - Site Preparation prior to excavation. 07/2006 02317-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES E Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200-Site Preparation r/ F Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.02 EXCAVATION A Perform excavation work so that the underground structure can be installed to depths and alignments shown on Plans Drawings. Use caution during excavation work to avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. Keep excavation to the absolute minimum necessary. No additional payment will be made for excess excavation not authorized by Engineer. B Avoid settlement of surrounding soil due to equipment operations, excavation procedures, vibration, dewatering, or other construction methods. C Prevent voids from forming outside of sheeting. Immediately fill voids with grout, concrete fill, cement stabilized sand, or other material approved by Engineer. D After completion of the structure, remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing unless Engineer has approved in writing that such temporary structures may remain. Remove sheeting,shoring,and bracing in such a manner as to maintain safety during backfilling operations and to prevent damage to the Work and adjacent structures or improvements. E Immediately fill and compact voids left or caused by removal of sheeting with cement stabilized sand or material approved by Engineer. 3.03 DEWATERING A Maintain ground water control as directed by Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water and until the structure is sufficiently complete to provide the required weight to resist hydrostatic uplift with a minimum safety factor of 1.2. B Maintain the ground water surface a minimum of two feet below the bottom of the foundation base. 3.04 FOUNDATION EXCAVATION A Notify Engineer at least 48 hours prior to planned completion of foundation excavations. Do not place the foundation base until the excavation is accepted by the Engineer. B Excavate to elevations shown on Plans Drawings,as needed to provide space for the foundation base, forming a level undisturbed surface, free of mud or soft material. Remove pockets of soft or otherwise unstable soils and replace with foundation backfill material or a material as directed by the Engineer. Prior to placing material r/ 07/2006 02317-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES over it,re-compact the subgrade,scarifying as needed,to 95 percent of the maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698. If the specified level of compaction cannot be achieved, moisture condition the subgrade and re-compact until 95 percent is achieved,over-excavate to provide a minimum layer of 24 inches of foundation backfill material, or other means acceptable to the Engineer. C Fill unauthorized excessive excavation with foundation backfill material or other material as directed by the Engineer. D Protect open excavations from rainfall, runoff, freezing groundwater, or excessive drying so as to maintain foundation subgrade in a satisfactory,undisturbed condition. Keep excavations free of standing water and completely free of water during concrete placement. E Soils which become unsuitable due to inadequate dewatering or other causes, after initial excavation to the required subgrade, shall be removed and replaced with foundation backfill material, as directed by Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. F Place foundation base, or foundation backfill material where needed, over the subgrade on same day that excavation is completed to final grade. Where base of excavations are left open for longer periods,protect them with a seal slab or cement- stabilized sand. �r • Where directed by the Plans Drawings,all crushed aggregate,and other free draining Class I materials,shall have a Geo-textile filter fabric separating it from native soils or select material backfill. The fabric shall overlap a minimum of 12 inches beyond where another material stops contact with the soil. H Crushed aggregate, and other Class I materials, shall be placed in uniform layers of 8-inch maximum thickness. Compaction shall be by means of at least two passes of a vibratory compactor. 3.05 FOUNDATION BASE A After the subgrade is properly prepared, including the placement of foundation backfill where needed, the foundation base shall be placed. The foundation base shall consist of a 12-inch layer of crushed aggregate or cement stabilized sand. Alternately, a 4-inch minimum seal slab may be placed. The foundation base shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the edge of the structure foundation. B Where the foundation base and foundation backfill are of the same material,both can be placed in one operation. 07/2006 02317-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARL AND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 3.06 BACKFILL r/ A Complete backfill to surface of natural ground or to lines and grades shown on Plans Drawings. Use existing material that qualifies as select material, unless indicated otherwise. Deposit backfill in uniform layers and compact each layer as specified. B Do not place backfill against concrete walls or similar structures until laboratory test breaks indicate that the concrete has reached a minimum of 85 percent of the specified compressive strength. Where walls are supported by slabs or intermediate walls,do not begin backfill operations until the slab or intermediate walls have been placed and concrete has attained sufficient strength. C Remove concrete forms before starting backfill and remove shoring and bracing as work progresses. D Maintain fill material at no less than 2 percent below and no more than 2 percent above optimum moisture content. Place fill material in uniform 8-inch maximum loose layers. Compaction of fill shall be to at least 95 percent of the maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698 under paved areas. Compact to at least 90 percent around structures below unpaved areas. E Where backfill is placed against a sloped excavation surface, run compaction equipment across the boundary of the cut slope and backfill to form a compacted slope surface for placement of the next layer of backfill. F Place backfill using cement stabilized sand in accordance with Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Tests will be performed initially on minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics,in accordance with ASTM D 4318,and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with TxDOT Tex-l01-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. B In-place density tests of compacted subgrade and backfill will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017, and at the following frequencies and conditions: 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 cubic yards of compacted backfill material. 2. A minimum three density tests for each full work shift. 3. Density tests will be performed in all placement areas. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil types or moisture contents are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density. 07/2006 02317-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES (IbirC At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be initially performed for each type of backfill material in accordance with ASTM D 698. Additional moisture-density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. D If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140- Contractor's Use of Premises. B In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.09 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B Prevent erosion at all times. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02317-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 41W Section 02318 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation,trenching,foundation,embedment,and backfill for installation of utilities, storm sewers including manholes, pipeline structures and other associated appurtenances. B. References to Technical Specifications: I. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350— Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 4. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 7. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 8. Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 9. Section 02370—Geotextile 10. Section 02220—Site Demolition I I. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 2321, "Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications" b. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" c. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" d. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" e. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" f. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" g. ASTM D 3017, "Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" 5/2013 02318- 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 2. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) J a. Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils D. Definitions: I. Excavation - Any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by removal of material. a. Extra Hand Excavation- excavation by manual labor at locations designated by the Engineer, which is not included in other Bid Items. b. Extra Machine Excavation- excavation by machine at locations designated by the Engineer, which is not included in other Bid Items. c. Special Excavation-excavation necessitated by obstruction of pipes, ducts, or other structures, not shown on Plans, which interfere with installation of utility piping by normal methods of excavation or augering. Contractor shall be responsible for locating such underground obstructions,sufficiently in advance of trench excavation or augering, to preclude damage to the obstructions. 2. Pipe Foundation-suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at the trench J subgrade after excavation to depth of bottom of the bedding as shown on the Plans, or foundation backfill material placed and compacted in over- excavations. 3. Pipe Bedding-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of foundation up to a level line at bottom of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 4. Haunching-the material placed on either side of pipe from top of bedding up to spring-line of pipe and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 5. Initial Backfill - the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from spring-line of pipe(top of haunching)up to a level line 12 inches above top of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 6. Pipe Embedment - the portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding, haunching,and initial backfill. 7. Trench Zone-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe embedment up to pavement subgrade or up to final grade when not J beneath pavement. 5/2013 02318-2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES cor 8. Trench Conditions - description of the stability of trench bottom and trench walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed soils or foundation backfill,except where structural trench support is necessary. a. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone as a result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground water level. b. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water seepage is controlled by excavation drainage. I) Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to control seepage and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately clayey soils prior to bedding placement. 2) Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is 411110 provided in the embedment zone in combination with ground water control in predominately sandy or silty soils. c. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in the pipe embedment zone if ground water inflow or high water content causes soil disturbances,such as sloughing,sliding,boiling,heaving or loss of density. 9. Sub-trench - a special case of benched excavation. Sub-trench excavation below trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and compaction of foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils. Depth of a sub-trench depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by the Contractor. 10. Trench Dam - a placement of low permeability material in pipe embedment zone or foundation to prohibit ground water flow along the trench. II. Over-Excavation and Backfill - excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of foundation as shown on Plans, and backfilled with foundation backfill material. 12. Foundation Backfill Materials - natural soil or manufactured aggregate of controlled gradation, and geo-textile filter fabrics as required, to control 5/2013 02318-3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and ., compacted as backfill to provide stable support for bedding. Foundation backfill materials may include concrete seal slabs. 13. Trench Shield(Trench Box)-a portable worker safety structure moved along the trench as work proceeds, used as a Protective System and designed to withstand forces imposed on it by cave-in,thereby protecting persons within the trench. Trench shields may be stacked if so designed or placed in a series depending on depth and length of excavation to be protected. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench excavation,embedment,and backfill under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for all excavation and backfill associated with the placement and construction of: underground piping,boxes,manholes and associated appurtenances including conduit, or duct work. B. If Special Excavation is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction,and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item, measurement will be on a cubic yard basis, measured in place,without deduction for space occupied by portions of pipes, ducts, or other structures left in place across trenches excavated under this item. 1. Payment for Special Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Protection of pipes, ducts, or other structures encountered including bracing, shoring, and sheeting necessary for support. c. Replacement of pipes, ducts, or structures damaged by special excavation operations, except where payment for replacement is authorized by Engineer due to deteriorated condition of pipes,ducts,or structure. d. Temporary disconnecting,plugging, and reconnecting of low volume water pipes,to allow machine excavation or augering,when approved by Engineer. Pipe for replacement shall be new and conform to specification requirements for type of existing pipe removed. e. Placement of material from Special Excavation. f Geo-textile material and concrete trench dams required to complete the placement of material from Special Excavation. g. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Special Excavation. h. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: 5/2013 02318-4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 4111, a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Utility piping installed in trenches excavated under this item. c. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. C. If Extra Hand Excavation is allowed,based on the Engineer's direction,and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis, measured in place. I. Payment for Extra Hand Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from Extra Hand Excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Hand Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component.: a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. D. If Extra Machine Excavation is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis, measured in place. 1. Payment for Extra Machine Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from extra machine excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Machine Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and 41, sidewalks. 5/2013 02318-5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. Refer to Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures. No payment will be made for delays in completion of Work resulting from Extra Item Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a written description for information only of the planned typical method of excavation, backfill placement and compaction, including: I. Sequence of work and coordination of activities. 2. Selected trench widths. 3. Procedures for foundation and embedment placement, and compaction. 4. Procedure for use of trench boxes and other pre-manufactured systems while assuring specified compaction against undisturbed soil. 5. Procedure for installation of Special Shoring at locations identified on the Plans. C. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. D. Submit field red lines documenting location of Utilities as installed, referenced to J survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. V 5/2013 02318-6 of 15 CITY OF PEA RLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.06 SPECIAL SHORING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Special Shoring shall be, in accordance with Section 01570—Trench Safety System, designed by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas, At Contractor's expense. B. Special Shoring shall be designed to provide support for the sides of the excavations, including soils and hydrostatic ground water pressures as applicable, and to prevent ground movements affecting adjacent installations or improvements such as structures, pavements and utilities. C. Special Shoring may be a pre-manufactured system or a field fabricated system that meets the requirements of the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. B. Manufactured materials, such as crushed concrete,may be substituted for natural soil or rock products where indicated in the product specification, and approved by the Engineer,provided that the physical property criteria are determined to be satisfactory by testing. C. Geotexti le (Filter Fabric): Conform to requirements of Section 02370—Geotextile. D. Concrete for Trench Dams: Concrete backfill or 3 sack premixed (bag) concrete. E. Timber Shoring Left in Place: Untreated oak. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Perform excavation with track mounted excavator or other equipment suitable for achieving the requirements of this Section. B. Use only hand-operated tamping equipment until a minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained over pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not use heavy compacting equipment until adequate cover is attained to prevent damage to pipes,conduits, or ducts. C. Use trench shields or other Protective Systems or Shoring Systems which are designed and operated to achieve placement and compaction of backfill directly against undisturbed native soil. 5/2013 02318-7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. Use Special Shoring systems where required which may consist of braced sheeting, 7/ braced soldier piles and lagging, slide mil systems, or other systems meeting the Special Shoring design requirements. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Employ a Trench Safety Program as specified in Section 01570 — Trench Safety Systems. B. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures conform to Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, to conform with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. D. Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to excavation. E. Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation F. Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on the same day that acceptable foundation has been achieved for each section of pipe installation,manhole, r/ or other structures. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Except as otherwise specified or shown on the Plans, install underground utilities in open cut trenches with vertical sides. B. Perform excavation work so that pipe,conduit,and ducts can be installed to depths and alignments shown on the Plans. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. C. Determine trench excavation widths using the following schedule as related to pipe outside diameter(O.D.). Maximum trench width shall be the minimum trench width plus 24 inches. NOMINAL MINIMUM TRENCH PIPE SIZE, INCHES WIDTH,INCHES Less than 18 O.D.+ 18 18 to 30 O.D. +24 Greater than 30 O.D. + 36 5/2013 02318-8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. Use sufficient trench width or benches above the embedment zone for installation of well point headers or manifolds and pumps where depth of trench makes it uneconomical or impractical to pump from the surface elevation. Provide sufficient space between shoring cross braces to permit equipment operations and handling of forms, pipe, embedment and backfill, and other materials. E. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work at that location. Notify the Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding. F. Shoring of Trench Walls. I. Install Special Shoring in advance of trench excavation or simultaneously with the trench excavation, so that the soils within the full height of the trench excavation walls will remain fully laterally supported at all times. 2. For all types of shoring, support trench walls in the pipe embedment zone throughout the installation. Provide trench wall supports sufficiently tight to prevent washing the trench wall soil out from behind the trench wall support. 3. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer,leave sheeting driven into or below the pipe embedment zone in place to preclude loss of support of foundation L and embedment materials. Leave rangers, walers,and braces in place as long �r as required to support sheeting,which has been cut off,and the trench wall in the vicinity of the pipe zone. 4. Employ special methods for maintaining the integrity of embedment or foundation material. Before moving supports,place and compact embedment to sufficient depths to provide protection of pipe and stability of trench walls. As supports are moved, finish placing and compacting embedment. 5. If sheeting or other shoring is used below top of the pipe embedment zone,do not disturb pipe foundation and embedment materials by subsequent removal. Maximum thickness of removable sheeting extending into the embedment zone I inch. Fill voids left on removal of supports with compacted backfill material. G. Use of Trench Shields. When a trench shield (trench box) is used as a worker safety device,the following requirements apply: I. Make trench excavations of sufficient width to allow shield to be lifted or pulled freely,without damage to the trench sidewalls. 2. Move trench shields so that pipe, and backfill materials, after placement and compaction, are not damaged nor disturbed, nor the degree of compaction 4111, reduced. 5/2013 02318-9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 3. When required, place, spread, and compact pipe foundation and bedding materials beneath the shield. For backfill above bedding, move the shield as backfill is placed and ramped in. Place and compact backfill materials against undisturbed trench walls and foundation. 4. Maintain trench shield in position to allow sampling and testing to be performed in a safe manner. 3.03 TRENCH FOUNDATION A. Excavate bottom of trench to uniform grade to achieve stable trench conditions and satisfactory compaction of foundation or bedding materials. B. Place trench dams in Class I foundations in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.04 PIPE EMBEDMENT PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Immediately prior to placement of embedment materials,the bottoms and sidewalls of J trenches shall be free of loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil. B. Place Geotextile,if specified,to prevent particle migration from the in-situ into open- graded (Class I)embedment materials or drainage layers. C. Place embedment including bedding, haunching and initial backfill to meet requirements indicated on Plans. PVC & HDPE require cement stabilized sand bedding and backfill to one foot below subgrade or below grade if under pavement,or one foot above top of pipe if not under pavement. D. For pipe installation,manually spread embedment materials around the pipe to provide uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Do not allow materials to free-fall from heights greater than 24 inches above top of pipe. Perform placement and compaction directly against the undisturbed soils in the trench sidewalls, or against sheeting which is to remain in place. E. Do not place trench shields or shoring within height of the embedment zone unless means to maintain the density of compacted embedment material are used. If moveable supports are used in embedment zone, lift the supports incrementally to allow placement and compaction of the material against undisturbed soil. F. Do not damage coatings or wrappings of pipes during backfilling and compacting operations. When embedding coated or wrapped pipes, do not use crushed stone or other sharp, angular aggregates. 5/2013 02318- 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 40, G. Place haunching material manually around the pipe and compact it to provide uniform bearing and side support. If necessary, hold small-diameter or lightweight pipe in place during compaction of haunch areas and placement beside the pipe with sand bags or other suitable means. H. Place electrical conduit directly on foundation without bedding. Shovel pipe embedment material in place and compact it using pneumatic tampers in restricted spaces,and vibratory-plate compactors or engine-powered jumping jacks in unrestricted spaces. Compact each lift before proceeding with placement of the next lift. 1. Class I embedment materials. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Systematic compaction by at least two passes of vibrating equipment. Increase compaction effort as necessary to effectively embed the pipe to meet the deflection test criteria. c. Moisture content as determined by Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of trench bottom,foundation or trench walls. 2. Class II embedment and cement stabilized sand. 4111, a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by methods determined by Contractor to achieve a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined according to ASTM D 698 for Class II materials and according to ASTM D 558 for cement stabilized materials. c. Moisture content of Class H materials within 3 percent of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 698. Moisture content of cement stabilized sands on the dry side of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration. J. Place trench dams in Class 1 embedments in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.05 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable. Leave only the minimum length of trench open as necessary for construction. Backfill placement and compaction shall apply to all soils excavated for the trench especially including any areas that were "benched" or over-excavated in place of trenched shoring. All disturbed soils generated during excavation,whether inside the trench or associated with it, shall be considered to fall under this requirement. 5/2013 02318- 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES B. Where damage to completed pipe installation work is likely to result from withdrawal of sheeting, leave the sheeting in place. Cut off sheeting 1.5 feet or more above the crown of the pipe. Remove trench supports within 5 feet from the ground surface. C. For sewer pipes,use backfill materials described here as determined by trench limits. As trench zone backfill in paved areas for streets and to one foot back of curbs and pavements,use cement stabilized sand for pipe of nominal sizes less than 36 inches,or Bank Sand for pipe of nominal sizes 36 inches and larger as indicated on the Drawings. Uniformly backfill trenches unless specified otherwise according to the paved area criteria. Use select backfill within one foot below pavement subgrade for rigid pavement. For asphalt concrete,use flexible base material within one foot below pavement subgrade. D. For water lines, backfill in trench zone, including auger pits, with Bank Sand, Select Fill, or Random Fill material as specified in this Section. E. For trench excavations under pavement,place trench zone backfill in lifts and compact by methods indicated below. Fully compact each lift before placement of the next lift. 1. Bank Sand. a. Maximum 9-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 3 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698 2. Cement Stabilized Sand. a. Maximum lift thickness determined by Contractor to achieve uniform placement and required compaction, but not exceeding 24 inches. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558. c. Moisture content on the dry side of optimum determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for cement hydration. 3. Select Fill. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by equipment providing tamping or kneading impact to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 2 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698. F. For trench excavations outside pavements,a Random Fill of suitable material may be V used in the trench zone. 5/2013 02318- 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES tv 1. Fat clays (CH) may be used as trench zone backfill outside paved areas at the Contractor's option. If the required density is not achieved,the Contractor,at his option and at no additional cost to the Owner,may use lime stabilization to achieve compaction requirements or use a different suitable material. 2. Maximum 9-inch compacted lift thickness for clayey soils and maximum 12- inch lift thickness for granular soils. 3. Compact to a minimum of 90 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or to same density as adjacent soils. 4. Moisture content as necessary to achieve density. 3.06 MANHOLES,JUNCTION BOXES AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES A. Meet the requirements of adjoining utility installations for backfill of pipeline structures,as shown on the Plans. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 40, A. Quality Control The Engineer may sample and test backfill at: a. Sources including borrow pits, production plants and Contractor's designated off-site stockpiles. b. On-site stockpiles. c. Materials placed in the Work. 2. The Engineer may resample material at any stage of work or location if changes in characteristics are apparent. B. Production Verification Testing: The Owner's testing laboratory will provide verification testing on backfill materials,as directed by the Engineer. Samples may be taken at the source or at the production plant, as applicable. C. Provide excavation and Trench Safety Systems at locations and to depths required for testing and retesting during construction. D. Tests will be performed on a minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. 5/2013 02318- 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be performed initially for J backfill materials in accordance with ASTM D 698,and for cement stabilized sand in accordance with ASTM D 558. Additional moisture-density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. F. In-place density tests of compacted pipe foundation, embedment and trench zone backfill soil materials will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017,and at the following frequencies and conditions. 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted embedment and for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted trench zone backfill material. Testing shall be performed for each lift thickness for different backfill material specified in Item 3.05. 2. A minimum of three density tests for each full shift of Work when backfill is placed. 3. Density tests will be distributed among the placement areas. Placement areas are: foundation, bedding, haunching, initial backfill and trench zone. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil type or moisture content are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density, as specified. 5. Density tests may be performed at various depths below the fill surface by pit excavation. Material in previously placed lifts may therefore be subject to acceptance/rejection. 6. Two verification tests will be performed adjacent to in-place tests showing density less than the acceptance criteria. Placement will be rejected unless both verification tests show acceptable results. 7. Re-compacted placement will be retested at the same frequency as the first test series, including verification tests. G. Recondition,re-compact,and retest at Contractor's expense if tests indicate Work does not meet specified compaction requirements. For Cement Stabilized Sand with nonconforming density,core and test for compressive strength at Contractor's expense. H. Acceptability of crushed rock compaction will be determined by inspection. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01 140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 5/2013 02318- 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 4111, 3.09 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B. Prevent erosion at all times. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. D. Coordinate excavation within 15 feet of existing utilities with utility representative. Excavate by hand to locate existing utility, support utility with methods agreed upon by utility representative. All work shall be subsidiary to bid items in Section 00300 Bid Proposal. No additional cost to City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02318- 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT 41, Section 02330 EMBANKMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Construction of embankments with excess excavated material and borrow. B References to Technical Specifications: Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350— Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 5. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 6. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 7. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material 8. Section 02910—Topsoil 9. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 10. Section 01720—Field Surveying 411, 11. Section 02220— Site Demolition 12. Section 02200—Site Preparation 13. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" c. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" d. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Embankment under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If embankment is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 5/2013 02330- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit field red lines documenting location of embankments as installed,referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, I.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. D Submit a Trench Safety Plan under the provisions of Section 01570—Trench Safety System that included measures that establish compliance with the standard interpretation of the General Duty Clause,Section 5.(a)(1),of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 — 20 USC 654 which states, "Employers must shore or otherwise protect employees who walk/work at the base of an embankment from possible collapse." 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the Vl provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. B Topsoil: Conform to requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. C Borrow Material: Conform to requirements of intended use. Take borrow material from sources approved by Engineer. J 5/2013 02330-2of5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify borrow and excess excavated materials to be reused, are approved. B Verify removals, and clearing and grubbing operations, have been completed. C Verify backfill of new or relocated utilities and structures, below future grade, is complete. 3.02 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720— Field Surveying. D Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in conformance with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. �+ E Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to placing embankment or opening borrow source. F Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation. G Backfill test pits, or stump holes and other surface irregularities such as small swales with embankment materials and compact in proper lift depths according to the compaction requirements of this Section. H Areas of unsuitable material shall be removed,backfilled with embankment materials and compacted in proper lift depths according to the compaction requirements of this Section. I Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.03 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A Do not conduct placement operations during inclement weather or when existing ground or embankment materials exceed 3 percent of optimum moisture content. Contractor may manipulate wet material to facilitate drying,by disking or windrowing, at Contractor's expense. 5/2013 02330-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT B Do not place embankment material until density and moisture content of previously placed material complies with specified requirements. C Scarify areas to receive embankment to a minimum depth of 4 inches to bond existing and new materials. Mix with first layer of embankment material. D Spread embankment material evenly,from dumped piles or windrows,into horizontal layers approximately parallel to finished grade. Place to meet specified compacted thickness. Break clods and lumps and mix materials by blading,harrowing,discing,or other approved method. Each layer shall extend across full width of embankment. E Each layer shall be homogeneous and contain uniform moisture content before compaction. Mix dissimilar abutting materials to prevent abrupt changes in composition of embankment. F Layers shall not exceed depth as indicated on the Plans. G Where shown on Plans for steep slopes, cut benches into slope and scarify before placing embankment. Place increasingly wide horizontal layers of specified depth,to the level of each bench. H Build embankment layers on back slopes,adjacent to existing roadbeds,to level of old roadbed. Scarify top of old roadbed to minimum depth of four inches and re-compact with next layer. I Construct to lines and grades shown on Plans. 3.04 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A Maintain moisture content of embankment materials to attain required compaction density. B Compact to minimum densities shown on the Plans with a moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698. 3.05 TOLERANCES A Top of compacted surface:Plus or minus 1/2 inch in cross section,or in 16 foot length. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B A minimum of three tests will be taken for each 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of embankment per lift. 5/2013 02330-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT C If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements, recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.07 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain all embankment areas in good condition until completion of Work. B Repair and re-compact slides, washouts, settlements, areas with loss of density, or excavation damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. C Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. coy END OF SECTION 4118 5/2013 02330-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND GEOTEXTILE Section 02370 GEOTEXTILE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Geotextile, also called filter fabric, in applications such as under a granular fill, as a pipe embedment wrap,around the exterior of a tunnel liner,or around the foundations of pipeline structures. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" b. ASTM D 4533,"Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles" c. ASTM D 4833,"Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products" d. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" e. ASTM D 4751, "Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile" f. ASTM D 4491, "Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Work requiring geotextile. B If Geotextile is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Submit the standard manufacturer's catalog sheets and other pertinent information,for approval,prior to installation. 07/2006 02370- I of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND GEOTEXTILE C Submit installation methods,as a part of the work plan for tunneling or for excavation and backfill for utilities. Obtain approval from Engineer for Geotextile material and the proposed installation method prior to use of the geotextile. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GEOTEXTILE A Provide a geotextile(filter fabric)designed for use in geotechnical applications which forms a permeable layer or media while retaining the soil matrix. B Use a fabric which meets the physical requirements for Class A Subsurface Drainage installation conditions as defined in AASHTO M288 and as specified in this Section, 2.02"Properties". 2.02 PROPERTIES A Material: Non-woven,non-biodegradable,fabric consisting only of continuous chain polymer filaments or yams, at least 85 percent by weight poly-olefins, polyesters or polyamide, formed into a dimensionally stable network. B Chemical Resistance: Inert to commonly encountered chemicals and hydrocarbons over a pH range of 3 to 12. C Physical Resistance: Resistant to mildew and rot, ultraviolet light exposure,insects ➢1 and rodents. •�/ D Minimum Test Values: PROPERTY VALUE(MIN) TEST METHOD Grab strength 180 lbs ASTM D 4632 Trapezoidal Tear Strength 50 lbs ASTM D 4533 Puncture Strength 80 lbs ASTM D 4833 Mullen Burst Strength 290 psi ASTM D 3786 Apparent Opening Size(Q 0.25 mm ASTM D 4751 Permittivity (sec-1) 0.2 ASTM D 4491 (1) Maximum average roll value 3.0 EXECUTION - Notused END OF SECTION 07/2006 02370-2 of 2 CITY OF PEAR/AND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES Section 02417 AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of pipe and casing for water lines by methods of augering. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 2. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02635 —Steel Pipe and Fittings 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT UNIT PRICES A Measurement for augered casing with water pipe will be on a linear foot basis measured from end to end of the casing. B Payment of augered casing with water pipe will be full compensation for all labor, equipment,casing,water pipe,materials and supervision for construction complete in place including dewatering,augering,joints,spoil removal,pipe installation,grouting, utility adjustments,testing,and cleanup,and other work necessary for construction as shown on the Plans and as specified. C Measurement of augered water pipe will be on a linear foot basis along the axis of the pipe from auger pit to auger pit. D Payment of augered water pipe will be full compensation for labor,pipe, equipment, materials, and supervision for construction complete in place including dewatering, jacking,utility adjustments,testing,cleanup,and other work necessary for construction as shown on the Plans and as specified. E No separate payment will be made for auger pits and other excavations under this section. Include cost of excavation, surface restoration, pavement repair, etc., for auger pits or observation pits in Sections related to the open-cut utility installation portion of the Work. Include cost of trench safety for auger pits or observation pits in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. F Refer to Section 01200- Measurement and Payment Procedures. 02/2008 0 417- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES 1.03 SUBMITTALS Yt/ A Submit product data in accordance with requirements of Section 01350- Submittals. B Submit product data for casing insulators for approval. C Prior to commencement of work,furnish for the Engineer's approval,a plan showing pit locations. Approval of this plan will not relieve Contractor from responsibility to obtain specified results. D Show actual pit locations dimensioned on as-built drawings so that they can be identified in field. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Conform to Texas Department of Transportation for installations under state highways. Owner will obtain required permits for State Highway crossings. City will make submittal to TxDOT. Contractor will supply Traffic Control Plans. B Installations under railroads: 1. Secure and comply with requirements of right-of-entry for crossing railroad company's easement or right-of-way from railroad companies affected. Comply with railroad permit requirements. Submit copy to the Engineer. 2. Use dry auger method only. 3. No extra compensation for damages due to delays caused by the railroad requesting work to be done at hours which will not inconvenience the railroad. 4. Maintain minimum 35-foot clearance from centerline of tracks. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.06 CRITERIA FOR DETERMINING INSTALLATION LOADS A Pipes and casings shall be selected by the Contractor to carry overburden pressure and applicable surcharge and installation loads. B The criteria to be used for truck loading shall be HS-20 vehicle loading distributions in accordance with AASHTO. C The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection of the casing,pipe,and pipe joints to carry the thrust of the jacks or loads due to the pulling mechanism. D The Contractor shall select the diameter of the casing to meet the minimum dimensions defined in the Plans, and to permit practical installation(including skids, pipe spiders and shims, if applicable) and grouting, where required. 02/2008 02417 -2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Piping and Fittings: As required by Plans. B Casings: Where required by Plans,in accordance with Section 02635-Steel Pipe and Fittings. C Insulators: Where casings are required by Plans, casing insulator width 8 inches for pipe sizes 4 to 14 inches; 12 inches for pipe sizes 16 to 30 inches. 1. For welded steel pipe 12 inches and smaller, use Pipeline Seal & Insulator Model PE, or approved equal. 2. For other pipe materials, use Pipeline Seal & Insulator Model C8G-2 or approved equal for pipe sizes up to 12 inches. 3. For all pipe sizes above 12 inches, use Pipeline Seal & Insulator Model C I 2G-2 or approved equal. D Casing End Seals: Provide Pipeline Seal &Insulator Model C or approved equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Do not exceed 100 feet for length of auger hole for uncased PVC pipe less than 12 inches in diameter without intermediate pit. B Do not exceed 75 feet for length of auger hole for uncased PVC pipe 12 inches to 16 inches in diameter without intermediate pit. C Do not exceed 80 feet for length of auger hole for uncased PVC pipe greater than 16- inches in diameter without intermediate pit. 3.02 PREPARATION A Secure right-of-entry for crossing railroad company's easement or right-of-way. 3.03 JACKING A Comply with Section 01570 - Trench Safety Systems for all pits, access shafts, end trenches and other excavations relating to work required by this specification. B If grade of pipe at jacking end is below ground surface, excavate suitable pits or trenches for conducting jacking operations and for placing end joints of pipe. Wherever end trenches are cut in sides of embankment or beyond it, sheath securely and brace such work to prevent earth caving. C No more than one joint shall be made-up in pit or trench prior to jacking. 02/2008 02417-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES D Construction shall not interfere with operation of railroad, street, highway, or other facility, nor weaken or damage embankment or structure. E During construction operations,furnish and maintain barricades and lights to safeguard traffic and pedestrians as directed by the Engineer,until such time as backfill has been completed and removed from site. F Provide heavy-duty jacks suitable for forcing pipe through embankment. Use suitable jacking head, usually of timber, and suitable bracing between jacks and jacking head and suitable jacking frame or backstop so that jacking pressure will be applied to pipe uniformly around ring of pipe. Set pipe to be jacked on guides, properly braced together, to support section of pipe and to direct it in proper line and grade. Place jacking assembly in line with direction and grade of pipe. Excavate embankment material just ahead of pipe and remove material through pipe. Force pipe through embankment with jacks, into space thus provided. G Conform excavation for underside of pipe to contour and grade of pipe,for at least one third of circumference of pipe. Provide clearance of not more than 2 inches for upper half of pipe. Taper off upper clearance to zero at point where excavation conforms to contour of pipe. H Distance that excavation shall extend beyond end of pipe depends on character of material,but it shall not exceed 2 feet in any case. Decrease distance on instructions from the Engineer,if character of material being excavated makes it desirable to keep advance excavation closer to end of pipe. I Jack pipe from low or downstream end. Lateral or vertical variation in final position of pipe from line and grade established by the Engineer will be permitted only to extent of 1 inch in 10 feet, provided such variation is regular and only in one direction and that final grade of flow line is in direction indicated on plans. Use cutting edge of steel plate around head end of pipe extending short distance beyond end of pipe with inside angles or lugs to keep cutting edge from slipping back onto pipe. K Once jacking of pipe is begun, carry on without interruption to prevent pipe from becoming firmly set in embankment. L Remove and replace any pipe damaged in jacking operations. M Backfill pits or trenches excavated to facilitate jacking operations immediately after completion of jacking of pipe. N Grout annular space when loss of embankment occurs or when clearance of two inches is exceeded. V 02/2008 02417-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES 3.04 AUGERING(BORING) A Auger from approved pit locations. Excavate for pits and install shoring as outlined above under"Jacking." Auger mechanically with use of a pilot hole entire length of crossing and check for line and grade on opposite end of bore from work pit. The large hole is to be no more than 2 inches larger than diameter of bell. Place excavated material outside working pit and dispose of as required. Use water or other fluids in connection with boring operation only to lubricate cuttings; jetting will not be permitted. B In unconsolidated soil formations,a gel-forming colloidal drilling fluid may be used. Fluid is to consist of at least 10 percent of high-grade processed bentonite and shall consolidate cuttings of bit, seal walls of hole, and shall furnish lubrication for subsequent removal of cuttings and installation of pipe. 3.05 PIPE IN CASING A Pipes shall be installed in augered casings in accordance with this Section, as applicable. B Bottom of trench adjacent to each end of casing should be graded to provide firm, uniform, and continuous support for carrier pipe. If trench requires some backfill to establish final trench bottom grade,backfill material should be placed in 6-inch lifts and each layer properly compacted. C Install casing end seals in accordance with manufactures specifications. 3.06 INSULATOR INSTALLATION A Casing spacers and/or insulators should be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Special care should be taken to ensure that all subcomponents are correctly assembled and evenly tightened,and that no damage occurs during tightening or carrier pipe insertion. B Spacing of spacers or insulators should ensure that carrier pipe is adequately supported throughout its length, particularly at ends, to offset settling and possible electrical shorting. End spacer must be within 6 inches of end of casing pipe,regardless of size of casing and carrier pipe or type of spacer used. Casing spacers are designed to withstand much greater loads than can be safely applied to most coatings. Therefore, spacing between spacers depends largely on load bearing capabilities of pipe coating and flexibility of pipe. 1. Spacing shall be as shown on Plans with maximum distance between spacers to be 10 feet for pipe sizes 4 to 14 inches and 8 feet for pipe sizes 16 to 30 inches. 2. For ductile iron pipe,flanged pipe,or bell-and-spigot pipe,spacers should be installed within one foot on each side of bell or flange and one in center of joint when 18-to 20-foot-long joints are used. 3. If casing or carrier pipe is angled, bent, or dented, spacing should be reduced. 4111/ 02/2008 02417-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARL4ND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES C Where metallic carrier pipe is to be placed in metallic casing, provide electric insulating type spacers to ensure no contact between carrier pipe and casing. 3.07 FILLING ANNULAR SPACE A Allowable variation from line and grade shall be as specified under'Jacking." Block void space around pipe in augered hole with approximately 12 inches of packed clay or similar material approved by the Engineer,to prevent bedding or backfill from entering the void around the pipe in the augered hole when compacted. For pipe diameters 4 inches through 8 inches use minimum 1/2 cubic foot clay for pipe diameters 12 inches through 16 inches use minimum 3/4 cubic foot clay. 3.08 AUGER PITS A Locate auger pits where there is minimum interference with traffic or access to property. B Pit Size: Provide minimum 6-inch space between pipe and walls of bore pit. Maximum allowable width of pit shall be 5 feet unless approved by the Engineer. Width of pit at surface shall not be less than at bottom. Maximum allowable length of pit shall be no more than 5 feet longer than one full joint of pipe and shall not exceed 25 feet unless approved by the Engineer. C Excavate bore pits to finished grade at least 6 inches lower than grade indicated by a stakes or as approved by the Engineer. J D Backfill in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.09 CLEAN UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.10 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain all pipe and casing augering in good condition until completion of Work. END OF SECTION rI 02/2008 02417-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS Section 02510 WATER MAINS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of water mains, including valves, fire hydrants, wet connections, cut and plug of mains, disinfection, and hydrostatic testing for pipelines. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 02514 -Fire Hydrant Assembly 4. Section 03300 -Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02512 -Polyethylene Wrap 6. Section 02417 -Augering Pipe for Water Lines 7. Section 02515 - Water Tap and Service Line Installation 8. Section 02318 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 9. Section 02980 -Pavement Repair 10. Section 01450 -Testing Laboratory Services 11. Section 02634 -Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings C. Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 2. American Water Works Association (AW WA) 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for water mains open cut or augered, with or without casing, is on a linear foot basis for each size of pipe installed. Mains: Measure along axis of pipe and include fittings and valves. Branch Pipe: Measure from axis of main to end of branch. B. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: I. Pipe shall bear Underwriter's Laboratories(UL)or Factory Mutual(FM)label. 411100 6/2014 02510- 10(22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2. Pipe material acceptable without penalty to State's community fire insurance rating agency. 3. System acceptable to City and TCEQ. 4. Bacteriological disinfection acceptable to local health officials and Texas Department of Health,and TCEQ. 5. Water taps and draw off lines in compliance with local municipal specifications and regulations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Product Data: I. Obtain from pipe manufacturer installation instructions, manuals,and printed recommendations, except for Owner furnished pipe. 2. Retain product data on job site for reference. 3. Submit certified record of tests of pipe, fittings, or valves upon request of Engineer. 4. Submit hydrant manufacturer flow and friction loss curve. C. Samples: 1. Notify City when system is pressure tested and disinfected. City will take all samples for bacteriological testing as required by TCEQ. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver pipe to trench in sound, undamaged condition. B. Cut pipe neatly avoiding sharp, ragged, or unbeveled, plain ends and do not damage lining by cutting. C. Remove damaged or rejected materials from project site. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not lay pipe when it is raining or when trench is muddy,soft,or contains standing water. B. 6/2014 02510-2 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE A. Conform to requirements of Section 02534-PVC Pipe. All pipe used for water mains shall be blue. 2.02 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE A. Conform to requirements of Section 02532W - HDPE 2.03 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER LINES A. Conform to requirements of Section 02513 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines. 2.04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Conform to requirements of Section 02634 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2.05 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Conform to requirements of Section 02514 - Fire Hydrant Assembly. 2.06 VALVES A. General: Conform to requirements of Section 02541 — Water and Wastewater Line Valves. 1. Manual operators: a. Provide hand wheel manual operators for in-plant valves. b. Equip buried valves with 2 in. square operating nuts. 2. Furnish no less than one operating key with each lot of 10 buried valves with nut operators. 3. Rotation: a. Direction: OPEN COUNTERCLOCKWISE (OPEN LEFT). 4. Shop coating: a. Shop coat ferrous metal surfaces of valves both interior and exterior for corrosion protection. b.Protect internal and external iron surfaces of valves with coating of 4 mils of two-part thermosetting epoxy: AW WA C 550. 5. Working and test pressures: a. Valves 2 in. through 12 in.: 200 psi working pressure, 400 psi hydrostatic test pressure. b. Valves 14 in.through 36 in.: 150 psi working pressure,300 psi hydrostatic test pressure. 41100 6/2014 02510-3 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS B. Gate Valves(2 in. Through 36 in.): 1. Buried valves: a. Comply with AWWA C500, non-rising stem (NRS); resilient wedge. b. Epoxy-coated ductile iron body and bonnet, inside screw. c. Bronze: Seat and disc rings, stem and mountings,and disc wedges. d. "O"ring sealed stem and 2 in. square operating nut. e. Valves 2 in. through 12 in.: Vertical type without by-passes. f. Valves 16 in.through 36 in.: Horizontal type with enclosed steel bevel gears resilient wedge, standard size by-pass valves. g. Stuffing box and bonnet bolts and nuts to be 304 stainless steel. h. Install in section of horizontal pipe. Mechanical joint ends with gasket complying with AWWA C 111. j. Acceptable product: 1) East Jordan, American Flow Control, Mueller Co. "A-2380 Series" C. Tapping Valves and Tapping Sleeves: 1. Tapping sleeves shall be solid stainless steel and valves shall conform with all others as mentioned above. D. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast iron,threaded screw extension sleeve type,adjustable suitable for depth of cover over pipe,with base and cover. 2. 3/16 in.thick, 5 in. diameter minimum. 3. Provide with suitable cast iron bases and covers. 4. Covers: Cast name designating type of service, e.g., "WATER" for water service. 2.07 RELATED MATERIALS A. Concrete: As specified in Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete. 6/2014 02510-4 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS B. Meter Box: 4111, B. Cast iron to Owner's dimensions: ASTM A 48. C. The service line between Curb stop and Corporation Stop shall be CTS Polyethylene, SDR-9. D. Corporation and Curb Stops and Fittings: ASTM B 62,NSF 61 lead free 3.0 EXECUTION A. Conform to requirements in Section 02534 -PVC Pipe, Section 02634- Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings, Section 02532W —HDPE, Section 02635 Steel Pipe and Fittings, and Section 02513 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean pipe interiors of foreign matter before being lowered into trench. B. Clean hydrant and valve interiors of foreign matter before installation. C. Employ workmen who are skilled and experienced in laying pipe of type and joint configuration being furnished. Provide watertight pipe and pipe joints. 40.0 D. Lay pipe to lines and grades shown on Drawings and Details. E. If asbestos-cement (A.C.) pipe is encountered, follow safety practices outline in American Water Works Association's publication, "Work Practices for A/C Pipe". Strictly adhere to "recommended practices" contained in this publication and make them"mandatory practices" for this project. F. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater,clearly mark each section of pipe and fitting with unique designation on inside of pipe along with pressure class. Locate unique identifying mark minimum of five feet away from either end of each section of pipe. Provide one unique identifying mark in middle of each fitting. Place markings at consistent locations. Use permanent black paint and minimum letter height of 4 inches to mark designations. G. Contractor is responsible for assuring chosen manufacturer fulfills requirements for extra fittings and,therefore, is responsible for costs due to downtime if requirements are not met. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Inspection: I. Carefully examine each piece of pipe for soundness and specifications compliance after delivery at trench before placing in trench. 6/2014 02510-5 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2. Remove rejected pipe and fittings from site of work and replace with sound pipe. 3. Pipe and fittings will be rejected because of any of the following: a. Cracks in pipe or fittings. b. Damaged or cracked ends. c. Damaged gaskets or gasket grooves. d. Less than minimum wall thickness. e. Defects and deformations. B. Cleaning: I. Clean interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter before laying. 2. Keep interiors and ends clean during installation. 3. Keep joint contact surfaces clean during installation. 4. Take precautions to prevent foreign material from entering pipe during installation. 5. Do not place rubbish,tools, rags,or other materials in pipe. 6. Whenever pipe laying is stopped,place plugs in uncompleted ends of pipe. C. Installation: 1. Install pipe, couplings, and fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Conform to applicable installation specifications for types of pipes use. 2. Install gaskets and lubricants as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Full length of each barrel of pipe shall rest solidly on pipe bed with recesses excavated to accommodate bells and joints. 4. Take up and relay pipe that has grade or joint disturbed. 5. Do not joint pipe with water in trench. 6. Keep water out of trench until jointing is completed. 7. Do not lay water pipe closer than 10 ft. horizontally from sanitary sewer. 8. Do not locate joints at cross-overs with sanitary sewers closer than 9 ft. from cross-over point. 6/2014 02510-6 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS �+ 9. Where water lines cross sanitary sewers,construct in accordance with the City of Pearland Engineering Design Criteria Manual for water line or TCEQ standards whichever is more stringentl0. Where pipe ends are left for future connections, install valve and plug or cap end. Forty feet minimum line section required between valve and plug or cap end. 11. Install concrete thrust blocking at bends and tees and at ends of lines to provide adequate reaction backing. 12. Lay not more than 100 feet of pipe in trench ahead of backfilling operations. 13. Dig trench proper width as shown in details. When trench width below top of pipe becomes 4 feet wider than specified, install higher class of pipe or improved bedding,as determined by Engineer. No additional payment will be made for higher class of pipe or improved bedding. I4. Use adequate surveying methods and equipment;employ personnel competent in use of this equipment. Horizontal and vertical deviations from alignment as indicated on Drawings shall not exceed 0.10 feet. Measure and record "as built"horizontal alignment and vertical grade at maximum of every 100 feet on record drawings. 15. Before assembling couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets per manufacturer's specification. 16. Prevent damage to coating when placing backfill. Use backfill material free of large rocks or stones, or other material which could damage coatings. D. Setting Valves, Valve Boxes and Fire Hydrants: 1. Set plumb. 2. Center valve boxes on valves. 3. Where feasible, locate valves outside area of roads and streets. 4. Carefully tamp back fill around each valve box to distance of 4 ft.on all sides or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 ft. 5. Set hydrants at elevation so that connecting pipe will not have less cover than mains. 6. Set hydrants on concrete pad. 7. Depth of bury of hydrant is defined as distance from bottom of inlet pipe to ground line. 6/2014 02510-7 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 8. Place concrete thrust block back of hydrant opposite pipe connections set J against vertical face of trench to prevent from blowing off line. 9. Use 5/8 in. stock stainless steel bridle rods and rod collars. 10. Place not less than 5 cu. ft. of broken stone around base of hydrant to ensure drainage. I I. Compact backfill to grade in accordance with specification section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 12. Tighten stuffing boxes. 13. Test hydrant and valve in opened and closed position to ensure that parts are in working condition. E. Joints and Jointing: I. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints for PVC,Steel,and Ductile Iron Pipe: 2. a.After rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe,equalize rubber gasket cross section by inserting tool or bar recommended by manufacturer under rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. b. Lubricate gaskets per manufacturer's specification. c.Fit pipe units together in manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging rubber gasket. d. After pipe sections are joined,check gaskets to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred.If displacement has occurred,remove pipe section and remake joint as for new pipe. Remove old gasket, inspect for damage and replace if necessary before remaking joint. a Where preventing movement of 16-inch diameter or greater pipe is necessary due to thrust, use restrained joints as shown on Drawings. I) Include buoyancy conditions for soil unit weight when computing thrust restraint calculations. 2) Do not include passive resistance of soil in thrust restraint calculations. f. Except for PVC pipe, provide means to prevent full engagement of spigot into bell as shown on Drawings. Means may consist of wedges or other types of stops as approved by Engineer. 6/2014 02510-8 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 4111110 2. Flanged Joints where required on Ductile Iron Pipe,or Steel Pipe: a. AWWA C 207. Prior to installation of bolts, accurately center and align flanged joints to prevent mechanical prestressing of flanges,pipe and equipment. Align bolt holes to straddle vertical, horizontal or north-south center line. Do not exceed 3/64 inch per foot inclination of flange face from true alignment. b. Use full-face gaskets for flanged joints. Provide I/8-inch-thick cloth inserted rubber gasket material. Cut gaskets at factory to proper dimensions. c. Use stainless steelnuts and bolts to match flange material.Use stainless steelnuts and bolts underground.Tighten bolts progressively to prevent unbalanced stress. Maintain at all times approximately same distance between two flanges at points around flanges.Tighten bolts alternately (180°apart)until all are evenly tight.Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of gaskets. d. Full length bolt isolating sleeves and washers shall be used with flanged connections. 4111, e. For in-line flange joints 30 inches in diameter and greater and at butterfly valve flanges, provide Pyrox G-10 with nitrite seal, conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. For in-line flange joints sized between 12 inches in diameter and greater and 24 inches in diameter and smaller, provide Phenolic PSI with nitrite seal gasket conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. 3. Welded Joints (Steel Pipe): a. Prior to starting work,provide certification of qualification for welders employed on project for type of work procedures and positions involved. b. Joints: AWWA C 206. Full-fillet, single lap-welded slip-type either inside or outside, or double butt-welded type; use automatic or hand welders; completely penetrate deposited metal with base metal; use filler metal compatible with base metal; keep inside of fittings and joints free from globules of weld metal which would restrict flow or become loose. Do not use mitered joints. For interior welded joints, complete backfilling before welding. For exterior field-welded joints, provide adequate working room under and beside pipe. Use exterior welds for 30-inch and smaller. cov 6/2014 02510-9 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS c. Furnish welded joints with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 36- inch and larger pipe. d. Bell-and-spigot,lap-welded slip joints:Deflection may be taken at joint by pulling joint up to 3/4 inch as long as 1 Yz inch minimum lap is maintained. Spigot end may be miter cut to take deflections up to 5 degrees as long as joint tolerances are maintained. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used for joint deflections of up to 5 degrees. e. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/8 inch. Set fittings and joints square and true, and preserve alignment during welding operation. For butt welded joints, align abutting ends to minimize offset between surfaces. For pipe of same nominal wall thickness, do not exceed 1/16 inch offset. Use line-up clamps for this purpose; however, take care to avoid damage to linings and coatings. f. Protect epoxy or cement lining during welding by draping an 18-inch wide strip of heat resistant material over top half of pipe on each side of lining holdback to avoid damage to lining by hot splatter. Protect tape coating similarly if external welding is required. g. Welding rods: Compatible with metal to be welded to obtain strongest bond, E-7018. Root or"Stringer" pass shall be performed with 6011 rods and Filler and Cap shall be done using 7018 rods. h. Deposit metal in successive layers to provide at least 2 passes or beads for automatic welding and 3 passes or beads for manual welding in completed weld. Deposit no more than 1/4 inch of metal on each pass.Thoroughly clean each individual pass with wire brush or hammer to remove dirt,slag or flux. j. Do not weld under weather condition that would impair strength of weld, such as wet surface, rain or snow, dust or high winds, unless work is properly protected. k. Make tack weld of same material and by same procedure as completed weld. Otherwise, remove tack welds during welding operation. 1. Remove dirt,scale,and other foreign matter from inside piping before tying in sections, fittings,or valves. m. Welded Joints for Large Diameter Water Lines: V 6/2014 02510- 10 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 1) Furnish pipe with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 36 inch and larger pipe. 2) Use exterior welds for 30 inch and smaller. 3) Only one end may be miter cut. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used for joint deflections of up to 2 'h degrees. 4) For large diameter water lines,employ an independent certified testing laboratory, approved by Engineer, to perform weld acceptance tests on welded joints. Include cost of such testing and associated work to accommodate testing in contract unit price bid for water line. Furnish copies of test reports to Engineer for review. Engineer has final decision as to suitability of welds tested. A) Weld acceptance criteria: i) Cracking. ii) Lack of fusion/penetration. iii) Slag which exceeds one-third (t) where (t) quals material thickness. iv) Porosity/Relevant rounded indications greater than 3/16 inch; rounded indication is one of circular or elliptical shape with length equal to or less than three times its width. v) Relevant linear indications in which length of linear indication exceeds three times its width. vi) Four or more relevant 1/16 inch rounded indications in line separated by 1/16 inch or less edge to edge. n. After pipe is joined and prior to start of welding procedure, make spigot and bell essentially concentric by jacking,shimming or tacking to obtain clearance tolerance around periphery of joint except for deflected joints. o. Furnish each welder employed steel stencil for marking welds,so work of each welder can be identified. Mark pipe with assigned stencil adjacent to weld. When welder leaves job, stencil must be voided and not duplicated. Welder making defective welds must discontinue work and leave project site. Welder may return to project site only after recertification P. Provide cylindrical corrosion barriers for epoxy lined steel pipe 24 inch diameter and smaller, unless minimum wall thickness is 0.5 inches or greater. 6/2014 02510- 11 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 1) In additional to welding requirements contained herein Paragraph 3.06, conform to protection fitting manufacturer's installation recommendations. 2) Provide services of technical representative of manufacturer available on site at beginning of pipe laying operations. Representative to train welders and advise regarding installation and general construction methods. Welders must have 12 months prior experience installing protection fittings. 3) All steel pipe is to have cutback 3/4 inch to no greater than I inch of internal diameter coating from weld bevel. 4) Furnish steel fittings with cylindrical corrosion barriers with shop welded extensions to end of fittings. Extension length to measure no less than diameter of pipe. Shop apply lining in accordance with AWWA C210 or AWWA C213. 5) All steel pipe receiving field adjustments are to be cold cut using standard practices and equipment. No cutting using torch is to be allowed. 4. Restrained Joints: 'qui) a. For existing water lines and water lines less than 16 inches in diameter, restrain pipe joints with concrete thrust blocks. b. Thrust restraint lengths shown on Drawings are minimum anticipated lengths. These lengths are based on deflections indicated for large diameter lines and ductile iron pipe for small diameter lines. Adjustments in deflections or use of other pipe material may result in reduction or increase of thrust lengths. Perform calculations by pipe manufacturer to verify proposed thrust restraint lengths. Submit calculations for all pipe materials sealed by a registered Professional Engineer in State of Texas for review by Engineer. Make adjustments in thrust restraint lengths at no additional cost to City. c. Passive resistance of soil will not be permitted in calculation of thrust restraint. d. For 16 inch lines and larger use minimum 16 foot length of pipe in and out of joints made up of beveled pipe where restraint joint lengths are not identified on Drawings. Otherwise, provide restraint joints for a minimum length of 16 feet on each side of beveled joints. e. Installation: 6/2014 02510- 12 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS tie I) Install restrained joints mechanism in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2) Examine and clean mechanism; remove direct, debris and other foreign material. 3) Apply gasket and joint NSF 61 FDA per manufacturer's specification. 4) Verify gasket is evenly seated. 5) Do not over stab pipe into mechanism f. Prevent any lateral movement of thrust restraints throughout pressure testing and operation. g. Place 2500 psi concrete conforming to Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction, for blocking at each change in direction of existing water lines, to brace pipe against undisturbed trench walls. Finish placement of concrete blocking, made from Type I cement, 4 days prior to hydrostatic testing of pipeline. Test may be made 2 days after completion of blocking if Type II cement is used. 5. Joint Grout (Steel Pipe): a. Mix cement grout mixture by machine except when less than 1/2 cubic yard is required. When less than 1/2 cubic yard is required,grout may be hand mixed. Mix grout only in quantities for immediate use. Place grout within 20 minutes of mixing. Discard grout that has set. Retempering of grout by any means is not permitted. b. Prepare grout in small batches to prevent stiffening before it is used. Do not use grout which has become so stiff that proper placement cannot be assured without retempering. Use grout for filling grooves of such consistency that it will adhere to ends of pipe. c. Surface Preparation: Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces with wire brush or hammer to sound, clean surface. Remove rust and foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. 6/2014 02510- 13 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS d. Follow established procedures for hot and cold weather concrete placement. e. Complete joint grout operations and backfilling of pipe trenches as closely as practical to pipe laying operations. Allow grouted exterior joints to cure at least I hour before compacting backfill. f. Grouting exterior joint space: Hold wrapper in place on both sides of joint with minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel straps or bands. Place no additional bedding or backfill material on either side of pipe until after grout band is filled and grout has mechanically stiffened. Pull ends of wrapper together at top of pipe to form access hole. Pour grout down one side of pipe until it rises on other side. Rod or puddle grout to ensure complete filling of joint recess.Agitate for 15 minutes to allow excess water to seep through joint band. When necessary, add more grout to fill joint completely. Protect gap at top of joint band from backfill by allowing grout to stiffen or by covering with structurally protective material. Do not remove band from joint. Proceed with placement of additional bedding and backfill material. g. Interior Joints for Pipe 24 inches and Smaller:Circumferentially butter J bell with grout prior to insertion of spigot,strike off flush surplus grout inside pipe by pulling filled burlap bag or inflated ball through pipe with rope. After joint is engaged, finish off joint grout smooth and clean. Use swab approved by Project Manager for 20-inch pipe and smaller. h. Protect exposed interior surfaces of steel joint bands by metallizing,by other approved coatings,or by pointing with grout.Joint pointing may be omitted on potable water pipelines if joint bands are protected by zinc metalizing or other approved protective coatings. Remove and replace improperly cured or otherwise defective grout. j. Strike off grout on interior joints and make smooth with inside diameter of pipe. k. When installed in tunnel or encasement pipe and clearance within casing does not permit outside grout to be placed in normal manner, apply approved flexible sealer,such as Flex Protex or equal,to outside joint prior to joint engagement. Clean and prime surfaces receiving sealer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply sufficient quantities of sealer to assure complete protection of steel in vs/ 6/2014 02510- 14 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS joint area. Fill interior of joint with grout in normal manner after joint closure. Interior Joints for Water Lines 30 inches and Larger:Clean joint space, wet joint surfaces,fill with stiff grout and trowel smooth and flush with inside surfaces of pipe using steel trowel so that surface is smooth. Accomplish grouting at end of each work day. Obtain written acceptance from Project Engineer of inside joints before proceeding with next day's pipe laying operation. During inspection, insure no delamination of joint mortar has occurred by striking joint mortar lining with rubber mallet. Remove and replace delaminated mortar lining. m. Work which requires heavy equipment to be over water line must be completed before mortar is applied to interior joints. n. Do not apply grout to joints that are out of tolerance until acceptable repairs are made. 6. Large Diameter Water Main Joint Testing: In addition to testing individual joints with feeler gauge approximately 1/2 inch wide and 0.015-inch thick,use other joint testing procedure approved or recommended by pipe manufacturer which will help ensure watertight installation prior to backfilling.Perform tests 41110 at no additional cost to City. 7. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints or other method as recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends which exceed manufacturer's recommended deflection prior to installation. a. Deflection of pipe joints shall not exceed maximum deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. If deflection exceeds that specified but is less than 5 percent, repair entire deflected pipe section such that maximum deflection allowed is not exceeded. c. If deflection is equal to or exceeds 5 percent from that specified, remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe. d. Replace, repair, or reapply coatings and linings as required. e. Assessment of deflection may be measured by the Engineer at location along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection or similar average measurement methods will not be deemed as meeting intent of standard. 6/2014 02510- 15 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS f. When rubber gasketed pipe is laid on curve, join pipe in straight J alignment and then deflect to curved alignment. 8. Closures Sections and Approved Field Modifications to Steel Pipe and Fittings: a. Apply welded-wire fabric reinforcement to interior and exterior of exposed interior and exterior surfaces greater than 6 inches in diameter. Welded-wire fabric: minimum W I; maximum spacing 2 inches by 4 inches; 3/8 inch from surface of steel plate or middle third of lining or coating thickness for mortar thickness less than 3/4 inch. b. Fill exposed interior and exterior surfaces with nonshrink grout. c. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, perform field welds on interior and exterior of pipe. d. For large diameter water lines,provide minimum overlap of 4 inches of butt strap over adjacent piece on butt-strap closures. F. Cathodic Protection Appurtenances: I. Where identified on Drawings,modify pipe for cathodic protection as detailed j on Drawings and specified. Unless otherwise noted, provide insulation kits rI including test stations at connections to existing water system or at locations to isolate one type of cathodic system from another type, between water line, access manhole piping and other major openings in water line,or as shown on Drawings. 2. Bond joints for pipe installed in tunnel or open cut, except where insulating flanges are provided. Weld strap or clip between bell and spigot of each joint or as shown on Drawings. No additional bonding required where joints are welded for thrust restraint.Repair coatings as specified by appropriate A W WA standard,as recommended by manufacturer,and as approved by the Engineer 3. Bonding Strap or Clip: Free of foreign material that may increase contact resistance between wire and strap or clip. 6/2014 02510- 16 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS G. Anchorage of Fittings: 1. Anchor tees, elbows and plugs in water mains with concrete thrust blocks. 2. Place blocks so that joints will be accessible for inspection and repair. H. Handling: 1. Place pipe along project site where storm water or other water will not enter or pass through pipe. 2. Load, transport, unload, and otherwise handle pipe and fittings to prevent damage of any kind. Handle and transport pipe with equipment designed, constructed and arranged to prevent damage to pipe,lining and coating.Do not permit bare chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids or cradles to come in contact with coatings. Where required, provide pipe fittings with sufficient interior strutting or cross bracing to prevent deflection under their own weight. 3. Hoist pipe from trench side into trench by means of sling of smooth steel cable, canvas, leather, nylon or similar material. 4. For large diameter water lines, handle pipe only by means of sling of canvas, 4111/ leather,nylon,or similar material. Sling shall be minimum 36 inches in width. Do not tear or wrinkle tape layers. 5. Use precautions to prevent injury to pipe, protective linings and coatings. a. Package stacked pipe on timbers. Place protective pads under banding straps at time of packaging. b. Pad fork trucks with carpet or other suitable material.Use nylon straps around pipe for lift when relocating pipe with crane or backhoe. c. Do not lift pipe using hooks at each end of pipe. d. Do not place debris,tools,clothing,or other materials on pipe. 6. Repair damage to pipe or protective lining and coating before final acceptance. 7. For cement mortar line and coated steel pipe, permit no visible cracks longer than 6 inches,measured within 15 degrees of line parallel to pipe longitudinal axis of finished pipe,except: a. In surface laitance of centrifugally cast concrete. thir b. In sections of pipe with steel reinforcing collars or wrappers. c. Within 12 inches of pipe ends. 6/2014 02510- 17 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 8. Reject pipe with visible cracks (not meeting exceptions) and remove from project site. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean and dry interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter before installation,and keep interior clean until Work has been accepted. Keep joint contact surfaces clean until jointing is completed. Do not place debris,tools,clothing or other materials in pipe. After pipe laying and joining operations are completed, clean inside of pipe and remove debris. J. Inspection: Before installation, inspect each pipe and fitting for defects. Reject defective, damaged or unsound pipe and fittings and remove them from site. 3.04 WET CONNECTIONS A. Definitions: 1. Wet connections consist of isolating sections of pipe to be connected with installed valves,draining the isolated sections,and completing the connections. 2. Connection of 2 inch or smaller lines,which may be referred to on Plans as "2 inch standard connections"or"gooseneck connections'will be measured as 2" wet connections. This item is not to be used as any part of a 2-inch service line. B. Materials: I. Corporation stops and saddles shall conform to requirements of Section 02515- Water Tap and Service Line Installation. 2. Valves shall conform to requirements of Section 02541 — Fire Hydrant Assembly. 3. Brass fittings shall conform to requirements of AW WA C800. C. Execution: 1. Plan wet connections in such manner and at such hours as to least inconvenience public. Notify Public Works Department at least 48 hours in advance of making connections. 2. DO NOT OPERATE VALVES ON MAINS IN USE BY OWNER.Owner will handle, at no cost to Contractor,all operations involving opening and closing valves for wet connections. 3. Conduct connection operations when Inspector is at job site. Connection work shall progress without interruption until complete, once existing mains have been cut or plugs have been removed for making connections. r/ 6/2014 02510- 18 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS D. 2-Inch Wet Connections: I. Tap water main. Provide and install corporation stops,saddles,as required for line and grade adjustment; and brass fittings necessary to adapt to existing main. Provide one Corporation Stop at main line and one Curb Stop at meter. The service line between Curb Stop and Corporation Stop shall be CTS Polyethylene, SDR-9. 3.05 CUT,PLUG AND ABANDONMENT OF MAINS A. Materials: 1. Concrete for thrust blocks: Class B conforming to requirements of Section 03305. 2. Plugs and clamps shall be suitable for type of pipe to be plugged. B. Execution: 1. Do not begin cut,plug and abandonment operations until replacement main has been constructed, disinfected, and tested, and all service lines have been transferred to replacement main. 2. Install plug,clamp, and concrete thrust block and make cut at location shown on Plans. 3. Main to be abandoned shall not be valved off and shall not be cut or plugged other than at supply main or as shown on Plans. 4. After main to be abandoned has been cut and plugged,check for other sources feeding abandoned main. If sources are found, notify Engineer immediately. Cut and plug abandoned main at point of other feed as directed by Engineer. 5. Plug or cap all ends or openings in abandoned main in an acceptable manner approved by Engineer. 6. Remove and dispose of all surface identifications such as valve boxes and fire hydrants. Valve boxes in improved streets,other than shell,may be poured full of concrete after removing cap. 7. Backfill all excavations in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 8. Repair all street surfaces in accordance with Section 02980—Pavement Repair. cor 6/2014 02510- 19 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 3.06 HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. Hydrostatically test all new water pipelines for liquids before connecting to water distribution system. B. Pipelines shall be tested in lengths between valves, or plugs, of not more than 1,500 feet unless greater length is approved by Engineer. C. Conduct hydrostatic tests in presence of Engineer. D. Preparation: 1. Disinfect water system pipelines prior to hydrostatic testing. E. Test Procedures: I. Furnish,install,and operate connections,pump,meter and gages necessary for hydrostatic testing. 2. Allow pipeline to sit minimum of 24 hours from time it is initially disinfected until testing begins, to allow pipe wall or lining material to absorb water. Contractor should be aware that periods of up to 7 days may be required for mortar lining to become saturated. 3. Expel all air and apply a minimum test pressure of 125 psi or 150 psi as directed by Engineer. 4. Maintain test pressure for 8 hours. If a large quantity of water is required to maintain pressure during test,testing shall be discontinued until cause of water loss is identified and corrected. F. Allowable Leakage for Water Mains: 1. During hydrostatic tests,no leakage will be allowed for sections of water mains consisting of welded joints. 2. Maximum allowable leakage for water mains with rubber gasketed joints: 11.65 gallons per inch nominal diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours while testing at the required pressure. G. Correction for Failed Tests: 1. Repair all joints showing visible leaks on surface regardless of total leakage shown on test. Check all valves and fittings to ensure that no leakage occurs that could affect or invalidate test. Remove any cracked or defective pipes, fittings and valves discovered during pressure test and replace with new items. 2. Repeat test until satisfactory results are obtained. 6/2014 02510-20 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 411110 3.07 DISINFECTION A. All waterlines constructed shall be promptly disinfected before any tests are conducted on waterlines and before waterlines are connected to water distribution system. B. Water for disinfection and flushing will be furnished without charge to Contractor. C. Preparation: 1. Furnish all required temporary blind flanges,cast-iron sleeves,plugs,and other items needed to facilitate disinfection of new mains prior to connecting them to water distribution system. Normally,each valved section of waterline requires two each 3/4-inch taps. A 2-inch minimum blow-off is required for waterlines up to and including 6-inch diameter. 2. .Fire hydrants shall be used as blow-offs to flush newly constructed waterlines 8-inch diameter and above. Where fire hydrants are not available on waterlines, locations and designs for blow-offs shall be as indicated on Plans. Install temporary blow-off valves and remove promptly upon successful completion of disinfection and testing. Abandon by turning off corp and using a stainless steel cap. 41100 3. Slowly fill each section of pipe with water in a manner approved by Engineer. Average water velocity when filling pipeline should be less than I fps and shall not, under any circumstance, exceed 2 fps. Before beginning disinfection operations, expel all air from pipeline. 4. All excavations made shall be backfilled immediately after installation of risers or blow-offs. 5. Install blow-off valves at end of main to facilitate flushing at all dead-end water mains. Install permanent blow-off valves/auto flusher per drawing LI D. Disinfection: 1. Use not less than 100 parts of chlorine per million parts of water. Introduce chlorinating material to water lines in accordance with A W WA C65I. After contact period of not less than 24 hours, flush system with clean water until residual chlorine is no greater than 1.0 parts per million parts of water. Open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contact period.If super-chlorinated water (i.e. chlorine concentration above 4mg/I) is used for cleaning water main disinfection and flushing,the water must be dechlorinated prior to discharge. The water discharged into the stormsewer system or natural waterway must meet the Clean Water Act (33 USC § 1251 et seq.) and any subsequent amendments thereof. ihr 2. If a chemical compound is used for a sterilizing agent, it shall be placed in pipes as directed by Engineer. 6/2014 02510-21 of22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS E. Bacteriological Testing: I. After disinfection and flushing of waterlines, bacteriological tests will be performed by Owner or testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01450— Testing Laboratory Services. If test results indicate need for additional disinfection of waterlines based upon Texas Department of Health and TCEQ requirements,Contractor shall perform additional disinfection operations at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Completion: 1. Upon completion of disinfection and testing, remove risers except those approved for use in subsequent hydrostatic testing, and backfill excavation promptly. END OF SECTION J J 6/2014 02510-22 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYETHYLENE WRAP Section 02512 POLYETHYLENE WRAP LO GENERAL 1.01 SECTION NCLUDES A Polyethylene wrap for cast and ductile iron pipe to be used only in open-cut construction when cathodic protection system is not required by Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350— Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C105 American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-hon Pipe Systems 2. American Society of Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41, A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for polyethylene wrap. Include cost of polyethylene wrap in unit price for items wrapped. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for proposed film and tape for approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Polyethylene Film: Tubular or sheet form without tears, breaks, holidays or defects; conforming with requirements of AWWA C 105,2.5 to 3 percent carbon black content, either low- or high-density: 1. Low-density polyethylene film. Low-density polyethylene film shall be manufactured of virgin polyethylene material conforming to the following requirements of ASTM D 1248. a. Raw material. I) Type : I 2) Class: C (black) 411. 3) Grade: E-5 07/2006 02512- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYETHYLENE WRAP 4) Flow rate (formerly melt index): 0.4 g/10 minute, maximum 5) Dielectric strength: Volume resistivity, 1015 ohm-cm, minimum b. Physical properties. 1) Tensile strength: 1200 psi, minimum 2) Elongation: 300 percent, minimum 3) Dielectric strength: 800 V/mil thickness,minimum c. Thickness: Low-density polyethylene film shall have a nominal thickness of 0.008 inch. The minus tolerance on thickness is 10 percent of the nominal thickness. 2. High-density,cross-laminated polyethylene film:High-density,cross laminated polyethylene film shall be manufactured of virgin polyethylene material conforming to the following requirements of ASTM D 1248 a. Raw material. 1) Type: III 2) Class: C (black) 3) Grade: P33 4) Flow rate (formerly melt index): 0.4 to 0.5g/10 minute, maximum 5) Dielectric strength: Volume resistivity, 1015 ohm-cm, minimum b. Physical properties. 1) Tensile strength: 5000 psi, minimum vaile 2) Elongation: 100 percent,minimum 3) Dielectric strength: 800 V/mil thickness,minimum c. Thickness: Film shall have a nominal thickness of 0.004 inch. The minus tolerance of thickness is 10 percent of the nominal thickness. B Polyethylene Tape: Provide 3-inch wide,plastic-backed,adhesive tape;Polyken No. 900, Scotchwrap No. 50,or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Preparation: 1. Remove all lumps of clay, mud, cinders, etc., on pipe surface prior to installation of polyethylene encasement. Prevent soil or embedment material from becoming trapped between pipe and polyethylene. 2. Fit polyethylene film to contour of pipe to affect a snug fit, but not tight; encase with minimum space between polyethylene and pipe. Provide sufficient slack in contouring to prevent stretching polyethylene where it bridges irregular surfaces,such as bell-spigot interfaces,bolted joints or fittings,and to prevent damage to polyethylene due to backfilling operations. Secure overlaps and ends with adhesive tape to hold polyethylene encasement in place until backfilling operations are complete. 07/2006 02512-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYETHYLENE WRAP 3. For installations below water table and/or in areas subject to tidal actions,seal both ends of polyethylene tube with adhesive tape at joint overlap. B Tubular Type(Method A): 1. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe section. Slip tube around pipe, centering it to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section,and bunching it accordion-fashion lengthwise until it clears pipe ends. 2. Lower pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene tube. 3. After assembling pipe joint,make overlap of polyethylene tube. Pull bunched polyethylene from preceding length of pipe, slip it over end of new length of pipe,and secure in place. Then slip end of polyethylene from new pipe section over end of first wrap until it overlaps joint at end of preceding length of pipe. Secure overlap in place. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug,but not tight, fit along barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points. 4. Repair cuts, tears,punctures,or other damage to polyethylene. Proceed with installation of next section of pipe in same manner. C Tubular Type (Method B): 1. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately I foot shorter than pipe section. Slip tube around pipe,centering it to provide 6 inches of bare pipe at each end. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug, but not tight, fit along 41110 barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points; secure ends. 2. Before making up joint, slip 3-foot length of polyethylene tube over end of preceding pipe section, bunching it accordion-fashion lengthwise. After completing joint, pull 3-foot length of polyethylene over joint, overlapping polyethylene previously installed on each adjacent section of pipe by at least 1 foot; make each end snug and secure. 3. Repair cuts, tears, punctures, or other damage to polyethylene. Proceed with installation of next section of pipe in same manner. D Sheet Type: I. Cut polyethylene sheet to a length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe section. Center length to provide I-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, bunching it until it clears pipe ends. Wrap polyethylene around pipe so that it circumferentially overlaps top quadrant of pipe. Secure cut edge of polyethylene sheet at intervals of approximately 3 feet. 2. Lower wrapped pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene. After completing joint, make overlap and secure ends. 3. Repair cuts, tears, punctures, or other damage to polyethylene. Proceed with installation of next section of pipe in same manner. E Pipe-shaped Appurtenances: Cover bends, reducers, offsets, and other pipe-shaped appurtenances with polyethylene in same manner as pipe. 07/2006 02512-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYETHYLENE WRAP F Odd-shaped Appurtenances: When it is not practical to wrap valves,tees,crosses,and other odd-shaped pieces in tube, wrap with flat sheet or split length of polyethylene tube by passing sheet under appurtenance and bringing it up around body. Make seams by bringing edges together, folding over twice, and taping down. Tape polyethylene securely in place at valve stem and other penetrations. G Repairs: Repair any cuts, tears,punctures,or damage to polyethylene with adhesive tape or with short length of polyethylene sheet or cut open tube, wrapped around pipe to cover damaged area, and secured in place. H Openings in Encasement: Provide openings for branches, service taps,blowoffs, air valves, and similar appurtenances by making an X-shaped cut in polyethylene and temporarily folding back film. After appurtenance is installed, tape slack securely to appurtenance and repair cut,as well as other damaged area in polyethylene,with tape. Service taps may also be made directly through polyethylene, with any resulting damaged areas being repaired as described above. I Junctions between Wrapped and Unwrapped Pipe: Where polyethylene-wrapped pipe joins an adjacent pipe that is not wrapped,extend polyethylene wrap to cover adjacent pipe for distance of at least 3 feet. Secure end with circumferential turns of tape. Wrap service lines of dissimilar metals with polyethylene or suitable dielectric tape for minimum clear distance of 3 feet away from cast or ductile iron pipe. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02512-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS Section 02513 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. New large diameter(24 inches and greater)steel pipe and fittings for water mains and pumping facilities. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 3. Section 02510—Water Mains C. Referenced Standards: I. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 411110 a. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel b. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped -Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. c. ASTM A135, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. d. ASTM A139 - "Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (ARC) - Welded Steel Pipe(NPS 4 and Over)" e. ASTM A570 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality. f ASTM A1011 -Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,Hot- Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability and Ultra-High Strength. g. ASTM A1018 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commerical, Drawing, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability and Ultra-High Strength. h. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. ASTM C35-Standard Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster. j. ASTM C150- Standard Specification for Portland Cement. k. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. I. ASTM C595-Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 4111/ m. ASTM C881 -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 5/2013 02513-1 of35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS j n. ASTM Cl 107- Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- J Cement Grout(Nonshrink). o. ASTM D512 - Standard Test Methods for Chloride Ion in Water. p. ASTM D1293 - Standard Test Methods for pH of Water. q. ASTM D3363 - Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. r. ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Tests. s. ASTM D4752-Standard Test Method for Measuring MEK Resistance of Ethyl Silicate(Inorganic)Zinc-Rich Primers by Solvent Rub. 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C200- Steel Water Pipe 6 inches and Larger b. AWWA C205 - Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe. c. AWWA C206 - Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. d. AWWA C207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service -Sizes 4 inch Through 144 inch e. AWWA C208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings; Addendum C 208A. E AWWA C209 - Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines. g. AWWA C210 - Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. h. AWWA C214-Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. AWWA C216-Heat-Shrinkable Cross-Linked Polyoefin Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines. j. AWWA C602 - Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines - 4 inch (100 mm) and Larger- In Place. k. AWWA MI 1 - Steel Pipe -A Guide for Design and Installation. 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. NSF Standard 61 4. National Sanitation Foundation (NES) 5. Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC) a. SSPC Good Painting Practice, Volume 1. b. SSPC SP I -Surface Preparation Specification No. 1 Solvent Cleaning. c. SSPC SP 5 -Joint Surface Preparation Standard White Blast Cleaning. d. SSPC SP 6-Surface Preparation Specification No.6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. r/ 5/2013 02513-2 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 1 e. SSPC SP 10 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning. f. SSPC VIS 1 - Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for steel pipe and fittings under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for water mains. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings signed and sealed by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas showing following: 1. Manufacturer's pipe design calculations. 2. Provide lay schedule of pictorial nature indicating alignment and grade,laying th, dimensions,welding procedures,fabrication,fitting,flange,and special details, with plan view of each pipe segment sketched,detailing pipe invert elevations, horizontal bends, welded joints and other critical features. Indicate station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings. Do not start production of pipe and fittings prior to review and approval by Engineer. Provide final approved lay schedule on CD-ROM in Adobe portable document format (*.PDF). 3. Include hot tapping procedure. 4. Submit certification from manufacturer that design was performed for project in accordance with requirements of this Section. Certification to be signed and sealed by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas. C. Submit manufacturer's certifications that pipe has been hydrostatically tested at factory in accordance with AW WA C200. D. Submit certification from NACE Certified Coatings Inspector, under supervision of inspector having Level III certification for coatings and linings, that steel pipe furnished on project was properly inspected and defective coatings detected properly repaired. E. Submit inspection procedures to be used by manufacturer and for quality control and 4.0 assurance for materials and welding. Submit at least 30 days prior to repair work, procedures that describe in details shop and field work to be performed. Repair defects 5/2013 02513-3 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS such as substandard welds, excessive radial offsets (misalignment), pitting, gouges, V cracks, etc. F. Submit following for nonshrink grout for special applications: 1. Manufacturer's technical literature including specifications for mixing,placing and curing grout. 2. Results of tests performed by certified independent testing laboratory showing conformance to ASTM C1107, Nonshrink Grout and requirements of this specification. G. Submit proof of certification for welders. Indicate certified procedures and position each welder is qualified to perform. Ensure welder and welding operator have been certified in accordance with AW WA C206. H. Within 45 calendar days after manufacturing of all pipe, submit affidavit of compliance that materials and work furnished comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards and these specifications. Make available copy of physical and chemical testing reports. 1. Within 45 days of manufacturing of all pipe, submit manufacturer's affidavits that coatings and linings comply with applicable requirements of this Section and: I. Polyurethane coatings were applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and allowed to cure at temperature 5 degrees above dew point. 2. Mortar coatings and linings were applied and allowed to cure at temperature above 32 degrees F. 3. Test Results a. Compressive strength (7 and 28 day)test results for mortar coating. b. Hydrostatic testing, magnetic particle and x-ray weld test reports as required. J. Prior to start of field-applied cement mortar lining operation, submit comprehensive plan which identifies and describes as minimum: 1. Equipment used for batching, weighing, mixing, transporting and placing mortar. 2. Qualifications and specific experience of machine operators. 3. Source and type of cement, pozzolan, sand and admixtures used and certifications from suppliers that materials meet specifications. J 4. Mix proportions to be used and slump limits(max. and min.) 5/2013 02513-4 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 411, 5. A quality control plan which identifies quality control material tests and documented inspections necessary to ensure compliance with specified requirements. K. Submit certification showing calibration within last 12 months for equipment such as scales, measuring devices, and calibration tools used in manufacture of pipe. Each device used in manufacture of pipe is required to have tag recording date of last calibration. Devices are subject to inspection by Engineer. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer to provide permanent quality control department and laboratory facility capable of performing inspections and testing as required by specifications. Material testing, inspection procedures and manufacturing process are subject to inspection by Engineer. Perform manufacturer's tests and inspections required by referenced standards and these specifications, including the following. Correct nonconforming conditions. I. Steel Plate and Coils: a. Review mill certifications for conformance to requirements of 4111/ specifications; perform physical and chemical testing of each heat of steel for conformance to applicable ASTM standards. 2. Pipe: a. Inspect thickness,circumference,roundness,strength and size of seam welds (spiral or longitudinal), and squareness of pipe ends to verify compliance with A W W C200. b. Inspect physical dimensions and overall conditions of all joints for compliance with AWWA C200, approved submittals and specifications. c. Hydrostatically test finished pipe section to 75 percent of specified minimum yield strength of steel being used with zero leakage. d. For wall thickness greater than 1/2-inch perform Charpy V-Notch (CVN)Test in accordance with AWWA C200. 3. Linings: a. Inspect unlined pipe for overall condition of inside barrel. Maintain inside barrel free of corrosive products,oil,grease, dirt,chemical and deleterious material. 4 5/2013 02513-5 of 35 CITY OF PEA RLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS b. Inspect lined pipe for physical dimensions and overall condition of J lining,visible surface defects,thickness of lining and adhesion to steel surface. c. Review certifications by manufacturers of lining components for conformance to AW WA standards and these specifications. 4. Coatings: a. Measure temperature and dew point of ambient air before applying coatings. b. Inspect physical dimensions and overall condition of coatings. c. Inspect for visible surface defects,thickness,and adhesion of coating to surface and between layers. 5. Final Inspection: a. Before shipment, inspect finished pipe, fittings, specials and accessories for markings,metal,coating thickness, lining thickness(if shop applied),joint dimensions and roundness. b. Inspect for coating placement and defects. Test exterior coating for holidays. c. Inspect linings for thickness,pitting, scarring and adhesion. B. Shop-applied coatings and linings;provide services of independent coating and lining inspection service or testing laboratory with qualified coating inspectors. Perform inspection by NACE trained inspectors under supervision of NACE Level III Certified Coatings Inspector. C. Ensure workmen engaged in manufacturing are qualified and experienced in performance of their specific duties. D. Cast four standard test cylinders each day for each 50-cubic yards of mortar coating or portion thereof for each coating and lining placed in a day. Perform compressive strength test at 28 days. No cylinder test result will be less than 80 percent of specified strength. E. Dented steel cylinders will result in rejection of pipe. F. Make available copy of physical and chemical testing reports for steel cylinders and provide reports at request of Engineer. G. Check physical dimensions of pipe and fittings. Physical dimensions to include at least pipe lengths, pipe I.D.,pipe O.D. and bend angles. 1 5/2013 02513-6 of 35 �/ CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS H. Test special sections via non-destructive testing methods in accordance with AWWA C200. Acceptable weld test methods include magnetic particle, liquid penetrant, ultrasonic and radiographic. 1.05 INSPECTION A. Engineer may witness manufacture and fabrication of pipe and appurtenances. Independent testing laboratory under contract to Engineer may perform tests at direction of Engineer to verify compliance with these specifications. Provide assistance to accomplish such testing, including equipment and personnel at no additional cost to City. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL PIPE A. Furnish pipe by same manufacturer. B. Furnish pipe smaller than 24 inch in accordance with Section 2635 - Steel Pipe and Fittings. C. Fabricate and supply miscellaneous steel pipe and fittings with nominal diameter of 24 inches and larger in accordance with AWWA C200,C207,C208 AND AWWA M 11 except as modified herein. Steel to be minimum of ASTM A36,ASTM A570 Grade 36,ASTM A53 Grade B,ASTM A135 Grade B,ASTM A139 Grade B,ASTM A l01 I Grade 36 or ASTM A1018 Grade 36. D. Provide pipe sections in lengths no greater than 40 feet and no less than 10 feet except as required for special fittings or closure sections. E. Provide shop-coated and shop-lined steel pipe with minimum of one coat of shop- applied primer approved for use in potable water transmission on all exposed steel surfaces. Primer for tape-coated steel pipe to be used for field-applied coatings shall have no less than 5 percent solids. Provide primer compatible with coating system and in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. F. Provide closure sections and short sections of steel pipe not less than 4 feet in length unless indicated on Drawings or specifically permitted by Engineer. G. Square flanges with pipe with bolt holes straddling both horizontal and vertical axis. Provide I/2-inch gap between pipe ends to be coupled with sleeve coupling unless otherwise indicated on Drawings 1. Provide standard ring or hub type flanges, conforming to AWWA C207, thw Class D. 5/2013 02513-7 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 2. Apply Densco petroleum-based tape or approved equal to exposed portions of nuts and bolts. H. Pipe Design Conditions: 1. Design: a. Design pipe and fittings to withstand most critical simultaneous application of external loads and internal pressures. b. Base design on minimum of AASHTO HS-20 loading,AREMA E-80 loads and depths of bury as indicated on Drawings. c. Design pipes with Marston's earth loads for transition width trench for all heights of cover. 2. Groundwater Level: Design for most critical ground water level condition. 3. Working pressure= 100 psi. 4. Hydrostatic field test pressure= 150 psi. 5. Maximum pressure due to surge= 150 psi. ] 6. Minimum pressure due to surge=-10 psi. V 7. Modulus of elasticity(E)=30,000,000 psi. 8. Maximum deflection from specified diameter: Two percent for mortar coating; three percent for flexible coatings and three percent for mortar lining. 9. Design stress due to working pressure to be no greater than 50 percent of minimum yield and stress not to exceed 16,500 psi for mortar coated pipe. 10. Design stress due to maximum hydraulic surge pressure to be no greater than 75 percent of minimum yield, and stress not to exceed 24,750 psi for mortar coated pipe, or 31,500 psi for flexible coated pipe. 11. Modulus of soil reaction (EN)< 1,500 psi. If EN> 1,000 psi,do not use silty sand (SM) for embedment. 12. Unit weight of fill (w)> 120 pcf. 13. Deflection lag factor(DI)= 1.2. 14. Bedding constant(K)=0.1. 5/2013 02513-B of35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 15. Fully saturated soil conditions: hw= h =depth of cover above top of pipe. 16. Do not allow diameter(D)over thickness(t) ratio to be greater than 230. 17. Provide minimum inside clear diameter for tunnel liners or casing in accordance with Section 02425 LD - Tunnel Excavation and Primary Liner. 18. Exclude structural benefits associated with primary liner in design of pipe in tunnel installations. a. Design pipe and joints to carry loads including overburden and lateral earth pressures, subsurface soil and water loads, grouting, other conditions of service, thrust of jacks, and stresses anticipated during handling and construction loads during installation of pipe. b. Do not use internal removable stiffeners for pipe in tunnel, unless approved by Engineer. c. External welded steel stiffeners will be permitted in design calculations for steel pipe, provided wall thickness is minimum of 1/2 inch. Minimum clearances specified between exterior pipe wall and tunnel liner applies to distance between outside diameter of external welded 400 stiffener and tunnel liner. 19. Nominal Allowable Steel-wall Thickness for Water Lines: a. Provide in accordance with following table for HS-20 live loads and depths of cover of up to 16 feet. b. Net internal diameter(including inside linings) to be no less than net inside diameter listed. c. Contractor to review design for conditions more extreme than those indicated by this specification and design accordingly. d. If, in opinion of Engineer, proposed pipe wall thicknesses appear inadequate for indicated loading conditions, submittal of design calculations will be required for review. e. Pipe wall not to be less than that defined in following table: Net Inside Minimum Wall Thickness(Inches) Diameter (Inches) Flexible Coating Mortar Coating cor96 0.484 0.464 90 0.454 0.430 5/2013 02513-9 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS j 84 0.423 0395 78 0.393 0.359 72 0.362 0.320 66 0.333 0.295 60 0.301 0.268 Net Inside Minimum Wall Thickness(Inches) Diameter (Inches) Flexible Coating Mortar Coating 54 0.271 0.250 48 0.235 0.215 42 0.207 0.189 36 0.178 0.163 30 0.149 0.136 24 0.149 0.136 Fittings for Water Lines: Fabricate in accordance with AWWA MI I, Section 13.3- 13.7 and AWWA C208. 1. Wall Thickness: Equal to or greater than pipe to which fitting is to be welded. 2. Elbows: 2-piece for 0 degrees to 22-1/2 degrees; 3-piece for 23 degrees to 45 j degrees;4-piece for 46 degrees to 67-1/2 degrees;and 5-piece for 68 degrees to 90 degrees, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 3. Outlets: Reinforced in accordance with AWWA MII, Sections 13.3-13.7, AWWA C200,and AWWA C208.Provide interior lining and exterior coating in accordance with paragraphs on coating and lining and matching pipe to access inlets, service outlets, test inlets, and air-vacuum valve and other outlets, including riser pipes. 4. Radius: Minimum radius of two and one-half times pipe diameter. 5. Butt Straps for Closure Piece: Minimum 12-inch-wide split butt strap; minimum plate thickness equal to thinnest member being joined; fabricated from material equal in chemical and physical properties to thinnest member being joined. Provide minimum lap of 4 inches between member being joined and edge of butt strap, welded on both inside and outside, unless otherwise approved by Engineer. Provide minimum 6-inch welded outlet for inspecting each closure section,unless access manway is within 40 feet of closure section. 6. Joints are to be double-welded and butt or lap joints. Use flanged joints at valves. 7. Provide double-welded lap field joints or full penetration butt-welded joints for J tee fitting supported on pier foundation, aboveground piping and field welds 5/2013 02513- 10 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 4111, for risers including vertical portion of crossover piping. J. Joints: 1. Standard field joint for steel pipe: AWWA C206. Rubber gasket Carnegie shape joint or rolled-groove rubber gasket and 0-ring joint,66-inch maximum diameter. Joints may be lap-welded slip type in accordance with AWWA C206, except where flanged joints or butt strap joints are required. 2. Provide double-welded butt joints at aerial crossings and where noted on Drawings. 3. Pipe Manufacturer: Minimum of 5 years of successful service with proposed field joint or submit results from joint tests determined by Engineer. Tests which may be required include tensile strength or yield tests of base material and spiral welded sections(API 5L),flattening tests,chemical analysis,impact and hardness tests. Engineer's decision as to acceptability of joint is final. 4. Capable of withstanding jacking forces. 5. Design restrained joints for test pressure or maximum surge pressure as specified, whichever is greater. Only minimum restrained joint lengths for 400 prestressed concrete cylinder pipe are shown on Drawings. 6. Provide full circumferential welds at joints required to be welded. 7. Use wire and flux from same manufacturer throughout entire project. 8. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints. a. Bells: Formed by either expansion of pipe end, or by segmental expander which stretches steel past its elastic limit, or by attaching sized weld-on bell rings. Weld-on bell rings shall comply with AWWA MI I and AWWA C200, attached with full-thickness fillet welds, and welded inside and out (double welded). Minimum thickness of completed bell ring is equal to or greater than thickness of pipe wall in barrel of pipe between joint ends. b. Spigots: Sized prior to rolling gasket groove. For Carnegie joints, attach with full thickness fillet welds, welded inside and out (double welded). Minimum thickness of joint ring shall be equal to or greater than thickness of pipe wall in barrel of pipe between joint ends. c. Joints shall be interchangeable and match up during installation,even if used out of sequence. 5/2013 02513- 11 of35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS d. Provide bells and spigots with dimensions and tolerances in accordance V with AWWA C200, as modified herein. Difference in diameter between I.D. of bell and O.D. of spigot shall be between 0.00 inch to 0.10 inch as measured with steel circumference tape. Measurement shall be taken at point of full joint engagement,and pipe cylinder shall be within allowable deflection. Clearance between bell and spigots shall be such that, when joint is assembled, water-tightness will be obtained under operating conditions. e. Furnish joint suitable for safe working pressure equal to class of pipe. Joint shall operate satisfactorily with pull-out,tangent of which is not to exceed 0.75inch/D where D is outside diameter of pipe in inches or with pull-out of 3/4 inch. f. Joints shall be self-centered and gasket will be restrained or confined to annular space in such manner that movement of pipe or hydrostatic pressure cannot displace it. Compression of gasket when joint is completed shall provide watertight joints under operating conditions when properly installed. Compression of gasket shall not be dependent upon water pressure in pipe. K. Manufacturer must maintain on site or in plant enough fittings to satisfy the following requirements: V Line Diameter Required Bends* 20 and 24 inches Four 45 degree bends per 5,000 LF of water line >24 inches Four 22.5 degree bends per 10,000 LF of water line *Based on total length of contract(minimum of four). Any combination of bends may be substituted at manufacturer's option(i.e. two 22.5 degree bends are equivalent to one 45 degree bend) and will be counted as one fitting. L. Manufacturer must be capable of delivering bends to job site within 12 hours of notification. Use fittings at direction of Engineer where unforeseen obstacles are encountered during construction.These fittings are in addition to fittings called out on Drawings and must be available at all times. Use same product throughout entire project. M. Hydrostatic Test of Pipe: 1. AWWA C200,Section 5.2,at point of manufacture. Hold test for minimum 2 minutes and conduct thorough inspection of pipe. Repair or reject pipe revealing leaks or cracks. 2. Calibrate pressure gauges within one year prior to testing as specified in Section 1.04 L. 5/2013 02513- 12 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS N. Provide forged steel threaded outlets of approved design where required for use in passing hose or lead wires into pipe.Tap plugs with standard pipe threads and weld to pipe in approved manner and use solid forged steel plugs for closure. O. Flanges: 1. Fabricate flanges with oversize bolt holes, with flanges drilled in pairs, to accommodate insulating sleeves. 2. Test, coat, line and ship each shop-assembled insulated flange assembly to field as fitting. Use no less than two snug-fitting alignment pins to assist in aligning flanges during assembly. Do not remove pins until bolts have been installed in all remaining holes and have been drawn up tight.After insulating joints have been assembled,subject each assembly(fitting)to shop hydrostatic test pressure of 150 psi and electrically test to ensure that insulated sections are effective. After assembly has been tested, coat insulating joint and adjacent steel pipe as specified for below-ground installation. Line assembly as specified for interior surfaces and in accordance with details shown on Drawings. P. Dished Head Plugs: Design dished head plugs (test plugs) to withstand field hydrostatic test pressure from either side of plug. Design stress due to hydrostatic 11160 pressure to be no greater than 50 percent of minimum yield. Pipe on opposite side of hydrostatic test may or may not contain water. Manufacturer of the steel pipe to hydrostatically test plug at factory. Q. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints, or by using beveled joints, or by combination of two methods,unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or permitted by Engineer. Do not exceed deflection angle at joint as recommended by pipe manufacturer. Make penetration of spigot into bell at all points of circumference at least equal to minimum required penetration shown on Drawings. Beveled pipe sections used in curved alignment to be of standard length except when shorter sections are required to limit radius of curvature,in which case all sections throughout curve are to be of equal length. Do not allow bevel to exceed 5 degrees. 2.02 INTERNAL LINING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL PIPE,ALL INSTALLATIONS A. Supply steel pipe with either epoxy lining or cement-mortar lining, capable of conveying water at temperatures not greater than 140 degrees F. Provide linings conforming to American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NFS) Standard 61, and certification to be from organization accredited by ANSI. Unless otherwise noted,coat all exposed (wetted) steel parts of flanges, blind flanges, bolts, access manhole covers, with epoxy lining, as specified. B. Epoxy Lining: 5/2013 02513- 13 of35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS AWWA C210,color White,or approved equal for shop and field joint applied, J except as modified in this Section. Provide materials from same manufacturer. a. Protect interior surface with approved liquid two-part chemically cured epoxy primer specified for interior surfaces SSPC-SP5 Surface Preparation White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile. Prime Coat NSF Certified Epoxy - Buff,or 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT approved equal Intermediate Coat NSF Certified Epoxy-Buff, or 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT approved equal Finish Coat NSF Certified Epoxy- White, or 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT approved equal 2. Total allowable dry film thickness for system: a. Minimum: 12.0 mils. b. Maximum: 18.0 mils. 3. Provide dry film thicknesses for approved alternate products in accordance with product's manufacturer recommendations. 4. Lining system may consist of three or more coats of same approved alternate epoxy lining without use of separate primer. 5. Perform adhesion test on pipe 48 inches in diameter and larger in accordance with ASTM D4541.Minimum field adhesion:700 psi.Perform test on pipe for project at frequency of one for every 1000 square feet of epoxy lining.Perform cure test in accordance with ASTM D4752 (solvent rub test) and ASTM D3363 (pencil hardness) for each section of pipe. Repair tested areas with approved procedures. C. Shop-applied Cement-mortar Lining: 1. AWWA C205; except as specified herein: 1/2-inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 42 inches and larger; 3/8-inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 36 inches and smaller.Cut back lining from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 2. Apply cement-mortar lining to inside of pipe by centrifugally spinning. For special sections (shape of which precludes application by spinning method) accomplish by mechanical placement or pneumatic placement and finish to produce smooth, dense surface comparable to centrifugally spinning. 5/2013 02513- 14 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 4110, 3. Use galvanized wire mesh when shop-applied mortar is not applied by machine. Do not extend wire mesh across welded portion of mitered fittings. Crimp mesh to provide integral "chair"so wire does not fully rest against steel cylinder. 4. Make repairs of cement-mortar lining for widths exceeding 6 inches by bonding to steel and adjacent faces of lining with bonding agent conforming to ASTM C881, Type II. 5. Restrict usage of sprinkler heads during moist curing to prevent over spraying onto lining.No alternative curing methods are allowed as described in Section 4.4.7.4 of AWWA C205. 6. Satisfy Engineer that above requirements can be accomplished by manufacturer prior to shipment of pipe. D. Field-Applied Cement-Mortar Lining(for pipe>48 inches in diameter):Provide field- applied internal cement-mortar linings in accordance with AWWA C602, latest edition, except as modified in this Section. I. Lining: Applied in one-course application of cement-mortar by machine that 4.0 centrifugally places mortar against wall of pipe and mechanically trowel lining to smooth finish. 2. Steel pipe, fittings, receives cement-mortar lining. 3. Cement-mortar for lining. a. Cement-mortar:Dense,smooth,and of uniform quality and consistency to assure efficient machine operation and uniform cement-mortar lining on pipe wall. b. Water-cement ratio: Kept as low as possible; consistent with proper plasticity for application, allowing slight variations dependent upon temperature,length of haul for mortar,and moisture condition in pipe. c. Mortar: Mixture of one part cement with not less than one or more than I-1/2 parts of dry screened sand, by volume. After determining mixture, control materials to within plus or minus 2-1/2 percent by weight throughout entire work. d. Comply with following materials for cement-mortar: 1) Provide Type II low-alkali Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, or Type IP (MS) Portland-Pozzolan cement 5/2013 02513- 15 of35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS conforming to ASTM C595, unless otherwise specified. Conform to low alkali requirements of Table IA of ASTM C150. Type IP (MS) cement to contain no more than 20 percent Pozzolan,to be inter-ground with clinker. 2) Use suitable facilities approved by Engineer when available for handling and weighing bulk cement.Otherwise,deliver cement in original unopened sacks that have been filled by manufacturer.Plainly mark sacks with manufacturers name or brand, cement type lot number and weight. Discard unused cement.Use unopened bags of cement for each new batch. 3) Material storage: Store cement to permit ready access for inspection and sampling. Protect cement and sand against contamination or moisture. Do not use and remove from site cement delivered with evidence of contamination or otherwise unsuitable. Store admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 4) Use Portland cement of same brand and type unless otherwise approved by Engineer. 5) Pozzolanic material: AW WA C602, Paragraph 2.2. J 6) Sand: AW WA C205,Section 2.3,except gradation of sand to yield fineness modulus of approximately 1.7;having no material coarser than that passing No. 16 sieve. Submit certification for compliance of sand with these specifications at least 10 calendar days before start of lining placement. 7) Water: Clean;free of deleterious amounts of acids,alkalis or organic materials; total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/I; ASTM D512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/I for slurry and mortar cure;ASTM D1293 pH greater than 6.5. 2.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVEGROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED) A. Provide approved 3-coat epoxy/polyurethane coating system as designated below. Provide materials from same manufacturer. J 5/2013 02513- 16 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 41.1 SSPC SP10 Surface Preparation Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile Prime Coat Inhibitive Epoxy Primer,or 4.0 to 4.0 mils DFT approved equal Intermediate Coat Chemical Resistant Epoxy,or 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT approved equal Finish Coat Polyurethane, or approved equal 1.5 to 2.5 mils DFT Blue Fed. Std.No. 15102 color as approved by Engineer B. Total Allowable Dry Film Thickness for System: 1. Minimum: 9.5 mils. 2. Maximum: 12.5 mils. C. Perform adhesion test on pipe 48 inches in diameter and larger in accordance with ASTM D4541. Minimum field adhesion: 700 psi. Perform test on pipe for project at frequency of one for every 1000 square feet of epoxy lining. Perform cure test in accordance with ASTM D4752(solvent rub test)and ASTM D3363(pencil hardness) for each section of pipe. Repair tested areas with approved procedures. 4111, 2.04 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A. Supply pipe with one of the following coatings specified. 1. Tape Coating: Provide approved tape for external tape coating. Apply in accordance with A W WA C 214 and requirements of this section; 80 mil. a. Components: Primer,one 20-mil layer of inner-layer tape for corrosion protection and two 30-mil layers of outer-layer tape for mechanical protection. b. Where sleeve type or victaulic couplings are required,bond coupling to adjacent pipes with bonding cables as shown on Drawings. c. Use approved filler putty type insulating putty to fill in gap and create smooth sloped transition between top of reinforcing plate and pipe, before tape coating is applied. d. Primer: Compatible with tape coating, supplied by coating-system manufacturer. e. Provide pipe with shop coatings cut back approximately 4 to 4-1/2 inches from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. Taper 5/2013 02513- 17 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS successive tape layers by I-inch staggers to facilitate field wrapping and welding of joints. f. Inner and outer tape width: 12 or 18 inches. g. Do not expose tape coating to direct sunlight for more than 60 days. 2. Cement-mortar Coating:AW WA C 205;shop-applied,cement-mortar coating except as modified in this Section; 1-inch minimum thickness;cut back coating from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 3. Polyurethane Coating: See Section 02636-Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe for requirements for use of polyurethane coating system. Refer to Paragraph 2.03 C of this Section for field testing requirements. Provide inspections by NACE trained inspectors under supervision of NACE Certified Coatings Inspector having Level Ill Certification. B. Heat Shrink Joint Sleeves for Tape and Polyethane Coating:Aqua-shield,or approved equal. For repairs to heat shrink joint sleeves,use Aqua-shield Repair Kit or approved equal. Pipe manufacturer to hold back coatings at joints as per shrink sleeve manufacturer's recommendations. 2.05 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE IN TUNNEL,CASING A. Provide exterior coating system of pipe in tunnel,without annular grout,as specified in Cement Mortar Coating for Buried Steel Pipe, or provide minimum 80 mils of polyurethane coating in accordance with Specification Section 02636- Polyurethane Coatings for Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe. B. For water lines in tunnel where annular grout will be used, shop prime external surfaces of steel pipe with 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT of approved Inhibited Epoxy Primer unless pipe has cement-mortar coating. I. Surface Preparation: a. SSPC-SP 10(64). b. Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile. 2. Prime Coat: a. Approved Inhibitive Epoxy Primer 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. 3. Use coating procedures and dry film thicknesses for approved alternate product in accordance with product manufacturer's recommendations. V 5/2013 02513- 18 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 2.06 GROUT FOR JOINTS AND SPECIAL APPLICATIONS A. Cement Grout Mixture: One part cement to two parts of fine, sharp clean sand. Mix interior joint mortar with as little water as possible until very stiff but workable. Mix exterior joint mortar with water until it has consistency of thick cream. Mix cement grout to specific gravity of 19 lb/gallon or greater as measured by grout/slurry balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry by Baroid or approved equal. Perform test in presence of and at request of Engineer.Add additional cement grout or water to mixed cement grout to bring mix to proper moisture content or specific gravity. Discard cement grout that has been mixed more than 20 minutes and is not at proper specific gravity or moisture content. 1. Portland Cement: a. ASTM C 150, Type H. b. Provide one type of cement for entire project. 2. Sand: a. Interior joints: ASTM C 35 fine graded plaster sand. b. Exterior joints: ASTM C 33; natural sand with 100 percent passing No.l6 sieve. 3. Water: a. Potable water with total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/I. b. ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/I for slurry and mortar cure. c. ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5. d. Use potable water with 250 ppm limit on chlorides and sulfates. B. Provide approved Nonshrink Grout for Special Applications, Patches and Repairs. 1. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 1107,Nonshrink Grout. 2. Pre-blended factory-packaged material manufactured under rigid quality control, suitable for use in joints of prestressed concrete cylinder pipe. 3. Contain non-metallic natural aggregate and be nonstaining and noncorrosive. 4. Meeting NSF 61 Standard suitable for use in contact with potable water supply. 5. Exterior:Highly flowable to fill joint wrapper without leaving voids or trapped air. Interior capable of being placed with plastic consistency. 6. Compressive strength: ASTM C 1107 2500 psi minimum 7-day unconfined; 5000 psi minimum 28-day unconfined. tor 7. Non-bleeding and non-segregating at fluid consistency. 5/2013 02513- 19 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 8. Contain no chlorides or additives which may contribute to corrosion of steel pipe. 9. Free of gas-producing, gas-releasing agents. 10. Resist attack by oil or water. 11. Mix, place, and cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Upon 72 hours' notice, provide services of qualified representative of nonshrink grout manufacturer to aid in assuring proper use of product under job conditions. Representative to be on site when product is first used. 12. Mix cement grout to specific gravity of 17.7 lb/gallon or greater as measured by grout/slurry balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry by Baroid or approved equal. Perform test in presence of and at request of Engineer. Add additional cement grout to mixed cement grout or water to bring mix to proper moisture content or specific gravity.Discard cement grout that has been mixed more than 20 minutes and is not at proper specific gravity or moisture content. 13. Compressive strength: ASTM C 1107 2500 psi minimum 7-day unconfined; 5000 psi minimum 28-day unconfined. C. Finished surface of lining and interior joint to be comparable to surface rubbed with No. 16 Carborundum stone. Rub joint mortar sufficiently to bring paste to surface,to remove depressions and projections, and to produce smooth, dense surface. Add cement to form surface paste as necessary.Leave interior with clean,neat and uniform- appearing finish. D. Joint Wrapper: Minimum width of 9 inches for 33-inch diameter and smaller; minimum width of 12 inches for diameters greater than 33-inch hemmed at edge to allow threading with minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel strap. Provide minimum 6-inch wide Ethafoam strip sized,positioned,and sewn such that two circumferential edges of Ethafoam are 1-1/2 inches from outer edge of wrapper. 2.07 COLD-APPLIED TAPE COATING A. Shop-applied Tape Wrap Coating 1. Use primer furnished by tape manufacturer. 2. Wrap, specials and fittings that cannot be machine wrapped due to configuration with primer layer and two layers of prefabricated tape each 35 mils thick. 3. Overlap machine applied tape with hand applied tape by minimum of two 5/2013 02513-20 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS inches and bind to it. 4. Apply approved 30 mil filler tape parallel to spiral weld seams if weld height measures greater than or equal to I/8 inch. B. Surface Preparation 1. Clean bare pipe from mud, mill lacquer, oil, grease, or other contaminants. Inspect and clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP-I to remove oil,grease,and loosely adhering deposits prior to blast cleaning.Remove visible oil and grease spots by solvent wiping. Use approved safety solvents which do not leave residue. Preheating to remove oil, grease, mill scale, water, and ice may be used provided pipe is preheated in uniform manner to avoid distortion. 2. Remove surface imperfections such as slivers, scabs,burrs,weld spatter,and gouges by hand filling or grinding to prevent excessive number of holidays. Presence of metallic defects may be cause for rejection of pipe. 2.08 EXTERNAL TAPE COATING SHOP APPLICATION A. Separate tape dispensing equipment far enough apart to visually inspect continuous steps. B. Make cutbacks straight and for total thickness of coating. C. State of dryness of primer prior to application of weld filler and inner layer of tape to be in accordance with written recommendation of manufacturer. D. Apply weld filler tape over primer and extend minimum of one inch on each side of weld seam. Filler tape may contact rollers as long as release liner is in place and adhesion requirements are met.Remove release liner before applying inner layer tape. E. Spirally apply inner layer of tape in direction of helix weld. Overlap each spiral of tapel inch or greater with next successive spiral of tape applied. F. Overlap end of new roll on top of previous roll minimum of 6 inches. G. Tape-roll body temperature to be greater than 70 degrees F;pipe surface temperature to be greater than 60 degrees F. H. Spirally apply outer layer tapes in direction of helix weld and use overlap width and application tensions as recommended by manufacturer. tie 5/2013 02513-21 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 2.09 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF COATINGS A. Perform electrical inspection on inner layer of tape before intermediate layer of tape is applied. B. If holidays are detected, repair holidays immediately before applying outer layer of tape. Clear holiday area of material and reprime if necessary. Recoat area with inner wrap tape. Overlap inner wrap tape onto surrounding inner wrap coating by at least 2 inches. Perform electrical retest at repaired area after repairing holiday, and before outer wrap is continued. C. Shrink Wrap: Perform electrical inspection on shrink wrap to check for holidays. Perform peel tests over heat affected zone. Minimum acceptable result: 15 lbs-ft/in. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02510—Water Mains except as modified in this Section. B. Comply with following: Make available services of manufacturer's representative when deemed necessary by Engineer. Representative to advise in aspects of installation, including but not limited to handling and storing, cleaning and inspecting, coating and lining repair, and general construction methods as applicable to pipe. 2. Install stulls prior to placement of pipe, bends, and fittings to prevent deflection during installation. Provide stulls consisting of timber struts with end blocks shaped to fit curvature of interior surface of pipe or other appropriate configuration and material. Firmly edge and secure stulls to blocks so that they will remain intact position during handling and installation. Provide stulls adequate to resist loads encountered without structural failure to stull members or damage to pipe.Where applicable,place stulls at such lengths so as to elongate vertical diameter of pipe as required to suit trench conditions encountered. 3. Handling and Storage: Install padded struts or stulls prior to shipping, horizontally and vertically at 10-foot intervals,or as proposed by manufacturer and approved by engineer. Spiders: Installed in joint ends of fittings. Stuns to remain in place, horizontally and vertically positioned under following conditions: a. During storage and shipping. 5/2013 02513-22 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 400 b. Until welding is complete. 4. Reject and remove immediately from site pipe that arrives at site with defects in lining, including sand pockets, voids, and oversanded areas. 5. Store pipe at job site with securely fastened plastic endcaps to maintain moist pipe interior. Promptly replace damaged endcaps to avoid shrinkage or cracking of cement-mortar lining. 6. Immediately replace damaged plastic end caps. Do not leave uncapped for more than 4 hours. 7. Bedding and Backfilling: a. Conform to requirements of Section 02318-Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. b. Align pipe at proper grade prior to joint connection and do not shift after jointing operation has been completed. c. Take necessary precautions during bedding and backfilling operations to prevent deformation or deflection of cylindrical shape of pipe by more than allowable pipe deflection. Do not move trench support system (trench safety system)once bedding material is compacted. d. Excavate outside specified trench section for bell holes,and for spaces sufficient to permit removal of slings. Provide bell holes at proper locations for unrestricted access to joint.Form bell holes large enough to facilitate joint wrapping and to permit visual examination of process. Enlargement of bell holes as required or directed by Engineer. Subsequent backfilling thereof will not be considered as authorized additional excavation and backfill. Backfill bell holes and spaces to satisfaction of Engineer. e. Blocking may be removed 24 hours after placing backfill to top of pavement or natural ground level. 8. Pipe Deflection: After backfill is complete,test pipe for excessive deflection by measuring actual inside vertical diameter. For maximum deflection allowable, see Section 2.01. a. Deflection may be measured by Engineer at location along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection are not acceptable. /' b. If deflection exceeds that specified, do one of the following: �r 5/2013 02513-23 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 1) Remove backfill and side support. Reround the pipe and V properly replace compacted backfill and side support. Review cement mortar lining to assure that no harmful damage has occurred. 2) Remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe as directed by Engineer at no additional cost to City. 9. Move pipe in such manner not to damage pipe or coating. Do not roll pipe nor drag on ground. Inspect and repair coating abrasions before pipe is lowered into trench. 10. Use of dogs,clips,lugs,or equivalent devices welded to steel pipe for purpose of forcing it into position will not be permitted unless approved by Engineer. Remove foreign matter and protective material from surfaces that are to be in contact at joints. Leave surfaces of joint areas thoroughly clean for metal-to- metal contact of field joints. C. Static Electricity: I. Properly ground steel pipeline during construction as necessary to prevent build-up of static electricity. 2. Electrically test where required after installation of pipeline is complete. D. Deviation of installed pipe in one pipe section from line and grade shown on approved shop drawing layout will not exceed 2 inches from grade and 3 inches from line.No deviation from line and grade at contact interfaces are allowed. E. Use adequate surveying methods, procedures and employ competent surveying personnel to ensure pipe sections are laid to line and grade and within stipulated tolerances.Measure and record,in form approved by Engineer and submit copy of data to Engineer at end of that day. Survey data to include unique pipe number,deflection angle at pipe joint and whether beveled ends were used, invert elevation at pipe joint, deviation of joint from project line, deviation of joint from project grade, inside pipe joint lap measured at top,bottom,and at springline(each side). F. Any time that laying of additional pipe is stopped for more than eight hours;plug ends of installed pipe and take proper precautions against flotation of pipe segments. 5/2013 02513-24 of35 CITY OFPEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS 3.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVE GROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED) AND EPDXY INTERNAL LINING SYSTEM A. Safety: Paints,coatings,and linings specified in this Section are hazardous materials. Vapors may be toxic or explosive. Protective equipment, approved by appropriate regulatory agency,is mandatory for personnel involved in painting,coating,and lining operations. B. Workmanship: Application:By qualified and experienced workers who are knowledgeable in surface preparation and application of high-performance industrial coatings. 2. Paint Application Procedures: SSPC Good Painting Practices, Volume 1. C. Surface Preparation: 1. Use abrasive blasting to prepare surfaces. 2. Schedule cleaning and painting so that detrimental amounts of dust or other contaminants do not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces. Protect surfaces not intended to be painted from effects of cleaning and painting operations. 3. Prior to blasting,clean surfaces to be coated or lined of grease, oil and dirt by steaming or detergent cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP I. 4. Metal and Weld Preparation: Remove surface defects such as gouges, pits, welding and torch-cut slag, welding flux and spatter by grinding to 1/4-inch minimum radius. 5. Abrasive Material: a. Blast only as much steel as can be coated within same day of blasting. b. Use sharp, angular, properly graded abrasive capable of producing depth of profile specified herein. Transport abrasive to jobsite in moisture-proof bags or airtight bulk containers. Copper slag abrasives are not acceptable. c. After abrasive blast cleaning, verify surface profile with replica tape such as Tes-Tex Coarse or Extra Coarse Press-O-Film Tape, or approved equal. Furnish tapes to Engineer. 5/2013 02513-25 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS d. Do not blast if metal surface may become wet before priming commences,or when metal surface is less than 5 degrees F above dew point. 6. Evaluate degree of cleanliness for surface preparation with use of SSPC Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces, SSPC-Vis 1. 7. Remove dust and abrasive residue from freshly blasted surfaces by brushing or blowing with clean, dry air. Test cleanliness by placing 3/4-inch by 4-inch piece of clear Scotch-type tape on blasted surface,then removing and placing tape on 3x5 white index card. Reclean areas exhibiting dust or residue. D. Coating and Lining Application: 1. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply when metal temperature is less than 50 degrees F; when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point; when expected weather conditions are such that ambient temperature will drop below 40 degrees F within 6 hours after application;or when relative humidity is above 85 percent.Measure relative humidity and dew point by use of sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables.Provide dehumidifiers for field-applied coatings and linings to maintain proper humidity levels. 2. Application Procedures: SII a. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of this Section.Provide finish free of runs,sags,curtains, pinholes,orange peel,fish eyes,excessive over spray,ordelaminations. b. Thin materials only with manufacturer's recommended thinners.Thin only amount required to adjust viscosity for temperature variations, proper atomization and flow-out. Mix material components using mechanical mixers. c. Discard catalyzed materials remaining at end of day. 3. Thoroughly dry pipe before primer is applied.Apply primer immediately after cleaning surface.Apply succeeding coats before contamination of undersurface occurs. 4. Cure minimum of 24 hours at 77 degrees F before successive coats are applied. During curing process, provide force air ventilation in volume sufficient to maintain solvent vapor levels below published threshold limit value. Apply successive coats within recoat threshold time as recommended by coating or lining manufacturer on printed technical data sheets or through written 5/2013 02513-26 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS communications.Brush blast joints of pipe which have been shop primed and are to receive intermediate and finish coats in field prior to application of additional coats.After interior coats are applied,provide forced-air ventilation in sufficient volume and for sufficient length of time to ensure proper curing before filling pipe with water. 3.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A. Tape Coating System: Joint Protection: a. Heat Shrink Sleeve: In accordance with AWWA C 216. Provide Aqua-Shield, or approved equal. Apply manufacturer-approved insulating putty at bell step-offs. For welded joints,apply heat-resistant protective sleeve,such as Aqua-Shield AQ W-W AB or approved equal, prior to internal welding. Surface preparation: Clean exposed metal with solvent,wire brush,and blast clean in accordance with AWWA C 216 and manufacturer's specifications. Apply sleeve in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Visually inspect sleeve to verify adhesive flows beyond edge, and there are no cracks or holes. Repair ( as necessary in accordance with AWWA C 216 and manufacturer's �r recommendations. Shrink sleeve manufacturer's technical representative shall be available on site at beginning of pipe laying operations,and advise Contractor and Engineer regarding installation, repairs,and general construction methods. b. Heat-Resistant Tape Coating System: In accordance with AWWA C 209. Polyken or approved equal. Apply manufacturer-approved insulating putty at bell step-offs. Surface Preparation: Clean exposed metal with solvent, wire brush and blast clean in accordance with AWWA C 209 and manufacturer's specifications. Follow with primer, and then tape coating in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Visually inspect finished coating for damages, flaws, holidays or mislaps. Repair as necessary in accordance with AWWA C 209 and manufacturer's recommendations. Tape manufacturer's technical representative shall be available on site at beginning of pipe laying operations,and advise Contractor and Engineer regarding installation, repairs and general construction methods. 2. Field Application: AWWA C209 around joint cutbacks except as modified: a. Field-welded joints:Clean shop-primed ends of weld splatter,damaged primer, and rust to achieve required surface preparation prior to field repair of coatings. 5/2013 02513-27 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS b. Extend joint cleaning 4 inches onto existing coating. Completely remove damaged and loose end-coatings. c. Prior to placing pipe in trench,remove shop-applied primer by abrasive blasting, solvent or other method as approved by Engineer. Avoid damage to adjacent existing coatings. d. Clean surfaces to achieve surface preparation at least equivalent to SSPC SP 6 in accordance with AW WA C209. Provide solvent that is environmentally safe and compatible with coating system primer. e. Apply insulating putty onto bell step-off as shown on Drawings. Remove release liner during application. f. Apply primer immediately prior to application of first layer of tape to achieve maximum bond.Apply tape while primer is still "tacky"with 3-inch minimum overlap over shop-applied coating. 3. Joint Tape: a. Extend inner wrap minimum of 2 inches onto existing coating on each side of joint. Extend outer wrap minimum of 4 inches onto existing coating each side of joint. Stagger end laps minimum of 6 inches. Overlap adjacent tape wraps at least I inch,and overlap seam of outer wrap. Do not allow to be coincident with overlap seam of inner wrap. Wash with Xylol area that will be overlapped. b. Apply approved joint wrap tape to uncontaminated primer at proper roll body temperature. If necessary,store joint wrap material in heated box up to point of application. c. Apply joint wrap material to pipe in either spiral or cigarette fashion dependent upon specification. Begin wrapping process 2 to 4 inches onto mill-applied pipe wrap and proceed wrinkle-free up over bell and across joint to spigot side pipe wrap. d. Apply joint wrap under machine tension of 5 to 10 pounds per inch width. Joint wrap width should narrow (neck down) as material is applied tightly around pipe. e. Apply first 1/3 and last 1/3 turn of joint material around pipe with less tension to prevent wrap crawlback.Overlap ofjoint wrap material and system's total thickness as specified in this specification section. J 5/2013 02513-28 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS f. End joint wrap process such that its final edge is directed downwards when pipe is placed in ditch to prevent backfill from pulling exposed joint wrap edge. 4. Do not expose tape coatings or heat-shrinkable joint sleeves to harmful ultraviolet light for more than 90 days. Discard (remove) and replace outer layer of tape coating when exposure exceeds 90 days.In case of factory-applied coatings,remove pipe from site for removal and reapplication of outer layer of tape coatings. 5. At option of Engineer, coating system and application may be tested and inspected at plant site in accordance with AWWA C214. B. Test for holidays: 1. Inspect pipe for holidays and damage to coating. a. If test indicates no holidays and outer wrap is torn, remove damaged layers of outer wrap by carefully cutting with sharp razor-type knife. Wash with Xylol area to be patched and at least 4 inches of undamaged tape where hand-applied tape wrap will overlap. AWWA C209 cold- applied tape compatible with tapewrapping system applied for each layer of outer-wrap tape that has been removed. b. If test indicates holiday, remove outer layers and expose inner wrap. Prime exposed area and overlaps with light coat of primer.Firmly press into place patch of two 35-mil inner wrap tape extending 4 inches from affected area in all directions. Second patch to overlap first patch by 2 inches.Perform holiday test of patch to verify satisfactory installation. Wash exposed outer wrap tape with Xylol and prime. c. For severe outer wrap tape tears or damage,and holiday is not detected, remove outer wrap to boundaries of damaged area, taking care not to damage inner wrap coating.Before replacing outer wrap,apply holiday detector to exposed area to determine that no damage has been made to primary coating.After verification that no holidays exist in underlying tape, clean damaged area and use patch of 35-mil outer wrap tape. Apply as specified herein for repair of areas where bare pipe is exposed. 2. Do not allow bubbles in tape coating system regardless of holiday test results, cut out bubbles and patch as described above as directed by Engineer. 3. Perform test procedure in accordance with NACE Standard RP-02-74.Perform electrical holiday test with 60-cycle current audio detector. Use test voltage below: 5/2013 02513-29 of35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS V Total Coating Thickness Test Voltage (Mils) (Volts) 20 6,000 30/35 7,500 50 9,000 70 11,500 80 12,000 C. Remove areas having physical damage and recoat.After repairing area,apply holiday detector as stated above to verify area is adequately repaired. D. Cement mortar coating. AWWA C 205; I-inch minimum thickness; Cut back from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. E. Polyurethane Coating. Comply with requirements of Paragraph 3.02. 3.04 JOINTS AND JOINTING A. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints. 1. Use 0-ring gasket with sufficient volume to approximately fill area of groove and gasket material in accordance with AWWA C200. Check each splice in J gasket by stretching gasket to at least twice original length of gasket.Visually check stretched splice by rotating 360 degrees. Reject splices showing visible separation or cracks. 2. Equalize rubber gasket cross section after rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe by inserting tool or bar such as large screwdriver under rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. Lubricate gaskets with nontoxic water-soluble lubricant before pipe units arejoined.Fit pipes together in manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging rubber gasket. Check gaskets after pipe sections arejoined with feeler gauge to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred at point around circumference after joining.If displacement has occurred,remove pipe section and remake joint as if for new pipe. Remove old gasket and replace before remaking joint. B. Welded Joints: I. Conform to requirements of Section 02511 - Water Lines. 2. Field weld to be double-welded lap field joints or full penetration butt welded joints for steel pipe and encasement sleeves for entire circumference. 3. Employ independent certified testing laboratory, approved by Engineer, to perform weld acceptance tests on welded joints. Include cost of such testing in 5/2013 02513-30 of35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS contract unit price bid for water line. Furnish copies of all test reports to Engineer for review. Test by magnetic particle test method for lap welds and fillet welds or by X-ray methods for butt welds, for 100 percent of all joint welds. Engineer has final decision as to suitability of welds tested. C. Flanged Joints: Conform to requirements of Section 02511 - Water Lines. D. Joint Grouting and Testing:Conform to requirements of Section 02511 -Water Lines. E. Do not allow steel plugs for threaded outlets to project beyond inner surface of pipe shell and seal weld by at least two passes. Apply weld around outside of plug after it has been inserted in final position. Coat outlets and plugs inside and outside as required at field joints on pipe. 3.05 FIELD-APPLIED CEMENT-MORTAR LINING A. Entrances into Pipeline: 1. Establish means to permit entry and exit of labor, materials and equipment necessary for progress of work, as approved by Engineer. 2. Provide dikes and channeling for diversion of flood and drainage waters away 4111, from these openings in pipeline. Use temporary airtight covers over openings to provide proper curing conditions in completed sections of lined pipe.Where operation of equipment requires that end of pipe be left open,install temporary bulkhead inside pipe to eliminate direct draft through pipe over completed sections. 3. Brace closure sections of pipeline left out to facilitate field lining above ground to conform as nearly as possible to shape of pipe in ground and then place cement-mortar lining by machine or hand trowel to same thickness as in adjoining machine-lined sections. Bulkhead sections immediately after being lined to maintain proper curing conditions for period of not less than 48 hours before sections are installed in pipeline. Install these sections of steel pipe. 4. Coat exterior surface of buttstraps and uncoated exterior surface area of steel pipe within excavations in accordance specifications. Place cement-mortar lining inside areas of joints in accordance with specifications. B. Mixing of Cement-mortar: Mix ingredients for cement-mortar for not less than I-1/2 and not more than 6 minutes;use mortar promptly after mixing for lining pipe.Do not use mortar that has attained its initial for lining. Do not retemper mortar.Add water to mix last. C. Placing Cement-Mortar Lining: 5/2013 02513-31 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS j 1. Complete joint work,backfill and welding before cement-mortar lining begins. V After cement-mortar lining has cured hydrostatic testing of pipe can begin. 2. Provide provisions necessary for Engineer to conduct inspections of work in safe and thorough manner during and after initial application of mortar and after necessary repairs made. Include, as minimum, space on application machine, and adequate lighting to inspect gross surface areas 3. Comply with ASTM C494 and with manufacturer's recommendations when using chemical admixtures,bonding agents,accelerators,and other additives. 4. Remove dirt, debris, oil, grease and loose mill scale and rust from interior surfaces of pipe, and scrape or brush surface with stiff bristle brush and/or water blast as may be necessary, and approved by Engineer, to ensure clean surfaces for successful application of cement-mortar lining.Interior surfaces to be approved by Engineer prior to placing lining. 5. Provide cement-mortar lining uniform in thickness along entire length of pipe. Provide cement-mortar no less than V2 inch over all surfaces with tolerance of plus 1/8 inch, and no allowance for minus tolerance. 6. Mechanically control travel of machine and rates of discharge of mortar to produce uniform thickness of lining without segregation around perimeter and along length of pipe. 7. Check finished surface by placing 12-inch straightedge parallel to axis of pipe along surface of straight section of lining.At no point will space between lined surface and straightedge be greater than 1/16 inch. 8. Provide smooth finished surface,within tolerances specified.Repair or replace surface irregularities including corrugations,ripples,or pits in any direction,to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove defective lining material, including, sand pockets,voids,oversanded areas,blisters,delaminations,or unbounded areas, cracked areas,irregular surfaces,and unsatisfactory thin spots.Remove to pipe wall and area repaired to full thickness of mortar lining. 9. Repair cracks 1/16 inch and larger to satisfaction of Engineer. 10. Place cement-mortar lining by machine having following features: a. An applicator head which can be centered within pipe and which will centrifugally project mortar against wall of pipe at high velocity producing dense, uniformly distributed mortar on wall of pipe. b. Equipped with mechanically driven, rotating steel trowels that immediately follow applicator,providing smooth,hard surface without 5/2013 02513-32 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS `r spiral shoulders.Compensate for torque so that machine will sit true in pipe and trowel faces will not vary in angle with mortar face during complete 360-degree cycle. Clean trowels at frequent intervals to prevent accumulated mortar from obtaining initial set resulting in sanded or unglazed finish. Continuously operate trowels during application of cement-mortar and forward progress of lining machine. c. Design applicator so that nothing will come in contact with troweled surface until it has attained final set, and so that forward progress of machine and mechanical placing of mortar can be controlled to assure uniform thickness of lining. I I. Cement-mortar Lining: Adhere to steel at all points; provide consistent thickness except that lining of bell end of pipe where lining is to be thicker in order to fill depression and make smooth surface. 12. Immediately prior to application of cement-mortar lining,sweep and clean off slime, dirt, loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign materials. Free interior surface of pipe after cleaning of accumulated water on pipe wall or at joints. 13. After receiving its finish troweling,do not roughen lining by rebound material or by mortar direct from machine. 14. Temporarily close outlets in pipeline with easily removable stoppers to prevent spun mortar from being thrown into such openings. After lining is applied, remove stoppers from outlets and repair lining damaged by removal of stoppers. Point outlet openings up to provide smooth flow. D. Hand Finishing: I. Repair defective areas in machine-applied lining and unlined joints by hand patching to yield lining equal to that required for machine-applied troweled lining. 2. Provide nonshrink grout for patching or lining joints as specified in this Section. 3. Clean defective areas of loose foreign material and moisten with water just prior to application of hand-applied mortar. 4. Use steel finishing trowels for hand application of cement-mortar. 5. Complete hand finishing required in given pipe section not later than day 41119 following machine application of mortar lining to that particular pipe section, whether normal working day or otherwise. Slow down or stop machine 5/2013 02513-33o1'35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS application of mortar lining to allow time for hand patching. ., E. Curing of Lining: Begin curing operations immediately after completing any portion of mortar lining. Close pipe by airtight bulkheads, and maintain moist atmosphere in completed section of pipe to keep lining damp and to prevent evaporation of entrained water from mortar lining. Humidify air introduced into pipe for ventilating or curing purposes and maintain moist atmosphere inside pipe until Engineer accepts Work. 3.06 INSPECTION (EXCEPT MORTAR COATED PIPE) A. Include cost of inspection described in Paragraph 3.06-B, Inspection, in contract unit price for water line. Furnish copies of certified inspection reports to Engineer for review. B. Holiday Test and Adhesion Test Provide services of independent coating and lining inspection service or testing laboratory with qualified coating inspectors. Provide inspections by NACE trained inspectors under supervision of NACE Certified Coatings Inspector having Level III Certification. 3.07 COATINGS AND LININGS INSPECTION RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor is responsible for quality control of coatings and linings applications and testing and inspection stipulated in this Section. Engineer is responsible for quality assurance and reserves right to inspect or acquire services of independent third-party inspector who is fully knowledgeable and qualified to inspect surface preparation and application of high performance coatings at phases of coatings and linings, field or shop applied. Contractor is responsible for proper application and performance of coatings and linings whether or not Engineer provides such inspection. B. Cement Mortar Lining and Joint Finish: Finished surface of lining and joint to be comparable to surface rubbed with No. 16 Carborundum stone. Rub joint mortar sufficiently to bring paste to surface, to remove depressions and projections, and to produce smooth,dense surface.Add cement to form surface paste as necessary.Leave interior with clean, neat and uniform-appearing finish. 3.08 FIELD REPAIR PROCEDURES AND SPECIAL FITTINGS APPLICATION FOR CEMENT MORTAR LINING A. Areas less than or equal to 6 inches in diameter: Patch honeycomb and minor defects in concrete surfaces with nonshrink grout.Repair defects by cutting out unsatisfactory material and replacing with nonshrink grout, securely bonded to existing concrete. Finish to make junctures between patches and existing concrete as inconspicuous as possible. After each patch has stiffened sufficiently to allow for greatest portion of j shrinkage, strike off grout flush with surrounding surface. 5/2013 02513-34 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER MAINS B. Areas greater than 6 inches in diameter: 1. Remove defective lining down to bare steel by chipping, making sure care is taken to prevent further lining damage.Ends of lining where defective lining is removed are to be left square and uniform not feathered. 2. Clean bare steel with wire brush to remove loose or other foreign matter. 3. Remove existing wire reinforcement and replace. Overlap new reinforcement to existing reinforcement by 1/2 inch. Secure reinforcement, against wall of pipe, at frequent intervals, by tack welding to pipe. 4. Prepare cement mortar mixture. Mixture to compose of Portland Type Il cement, sand, and water. Proportions of sand to cement not to exceed 3 parts sand to 1 part cement, by weight. Use only enough water to obtain proper placement characteristics. Set up time before mixture is to be discarded is to be no longer than 1/2 hour. Nonshrink grout may also be used. Do not use combination of cement mortar and nonshrink grout within same repair. 5. Apply WELD-CRETE,or approved equal,concrete bonding agent to bare steel and interface of existing lining. After bonding agent is applied to steel and lining new mix must be applied within 10 minutes. 41111, 6. Apply cement mortar to repair area I/2 inch thick then hand trowel to achieve smooth dense finish, making sure wire is not left exposed. To ensure proper thickness while placing new mortar, check thickness with 1/2 inch long wire gauge. 7. Curing: Place plastic sheeting over repair area, use tape to adhere plastic to area surrounding repair area. Let cure for 4 days then remove plastic sheeting. END OF SECTION co 5/2013 02513-35 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES Section 02541 WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Gate valves, Plug Valves, Butterfly Valves, Air Release and Pressure Reducing Valves. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures 3. Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength" b. ASTM B 763,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Casting for Valve Applications" c. ASTM B 62, "Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings" d. ASTM D 429,"Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates" e. ASTM A 126, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings" f. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" g. ASTM A 240,"Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications" h. ASTM A 276, "Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes" ASTM B 584,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications" j. ASTM A 313,"Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire" 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C500 Gate Valves, 3 Through 48 in. NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. b. AWWA C509 or AWWA C515 Resilient-seated Gate Valves, 3 through 12 NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems c. AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants d. AWWA C504 Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves 04/2009 02541 - 1 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for valves under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for water mains. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract,payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for proposed valves for approval. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Submit manufacturer's affidavit that gate valves are manufactured in the United States and conform to stated requirements of AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515 and this Section,and that they have been satisfactorily tested in the United States in accordance with AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES A Gate Valves: AWWA C500,AWWA C509 or C515 and additional requirements of this Section.Direct bury valves and those in subsurface vaults,aboveground and plant valves open counterclockwise. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans, use gate valves as line valves for sizes less than 16-inches. If type of valve is indicated, no substitute is allowed. C Gate Valves 1-1/2 Inches in Diameter and Smaller: 125 psig; bronze; rising-stem; single-wedge; disc type; screwed ends; such as Crane No.428, or approved equal. D Coatings for Gate Valves 2 Inches and Larger: AWWA C550; Indurall 3300 or approved equal, non-toxic,imparts no taste to water,functions as physical,chemical, and electrical barrier between base metal and surroundings, minimum 8-mil-thick, fusion-bonded epoxy. Prior to assembly of valve, apply protective coating to interior and exterior surfaces of body. E Gate Valves 2 Inches in Diameter: Iron body,double gate,non-rising stem, 150-pound test, 2 inch square nut operating clockwise to open. 04/2009 02541 -2 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES F Gate Valves 4 Inches to 12 Inches in Diameter: Non-directional, resilient seated (AWWA C509 or AWWA C515) or parallel seat double disc (AWWA C500), 200 psig, bronze mounting, push-on bell ends with rubber joint rings, and nut-operated unless otherwise specified. Provide resilient seated valves manufactured by American Darling AFC-500, US Pipe Metroseal 200, or approved equal. Provide double disc valves manufactured by American Darling 52, Clow F-6102, or approved equal. Comply with following requirements: 1. Design: Fully encapsulated rubber wedge or rubber seat ring mechanically attached with minimum 304 stainless-steel fasteners or screws; threaded connection isolated from water by compressed rubber around opening. 2. Body: Cast or ductile iron, flange bonnet and stuffing box together with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts.Manufacturer's initials,pressure rating,and year manufactured shall be cast in body. 3. Bronze: Valve components in waterway to contain not more than 15 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum. 4. Stems: ASTM B 763 bronze, alloy number 995 minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi; minimum elongation in 2 inches of 12 percent, non-rising. 5. 0-rings: AWWA C509, sections 2.2.6 and 4.8.2. 6. Stem Seals: Consist of three 0-rings, two above and one below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar. 7. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 8. Resilient Wedge: Molded,synthetic rubber,vulcanized and bonded to cast or ductile iron wedge or attached with 304 stainless steel screws tested to meet or fir exceed ASTM D 429, Method B; seat against epoxy-coated surface in valve body. 9. Bolts: AWWA C509 Section 4.4; stainless steel; cadmium plated, or zinc coated. G Gate Valves 16 Inches to 24 Inches in Diameter: AWWA C500 by Mueller;push-on bell ends with rubber rings and nut-operated unless otherwise specified,double disc, 150 psi, and comply with the following: 1. Body: Cast or ductile iron; flange together bonnet and stuffing box with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts. Manufacturer's initials,pressure rating,and year manufactured shall be cast in body. Equip with rollers, tracks,and scrapers. 2. Stems: Machined from ASTM B 62 bronze rod with integral forged thrust collar machined to size; non-rising. 3. Stem Seals: Consist of one 0-ring above and one 0-ring below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar for operating torque. 4. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Discs: Cast iron with bronze disc rings securely peened into machined dovetailed grooves. 6. Wedging Device: Solid bronze or cast-iron, bronze-mounted wedges. Thin plates or shapes integrally cast into cast-iron surfaces are acceptable. Other moving surfaces integral to wedging action shall be bronze monel or nickel alloy-to-iron. 4111/ 04/2009 02541 -3 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 7. Bronze Mounting: Built as integral unit mounted over,or supported on, cast iron base and of sufficient dimensions to be structurally sound and adequate for imposed forces. 8. Gear Cases: Cast iron;furnished on 18-inch and larger valves and of extended type with steel side plates, lubricated, gear case enclosed with oil seal or 0- rings at shaft openings. 9. Stuffing Boxes: Located on top of bonnet and outside gear case. H Gate Valves 20 Inches and Larger: Furnish and equip with bypass valves. I. Sizes: Provide 3-inch bypass valves for 16-inch through 20 inch gate valves. Provide 4-inch bypass valves for 24-inch gate valves. I Valves 4 Inches through 12 Inches for Installation in Vertical Pipe Lines: 1. Double disc, square bottom. J Valves 14 Inches and Larger for Installation in Horizontal Pipe Lines: 1. Equipped with bronze shoes and slides. K Gate Valves Installed at Greater than 4 foot Depth: 1. Provide non-rising, extension stem having coupling sufficient to attach securely to operating nut of valve. Upper end of extension stem shall terminate in square wrench nut no deeper than 4 feet from finished grade. L Gate Valves in Factory Mutual (Fire Service)Type Meter Installations: 1. Conform to provisions of this specification; outside screw and yoke valves; carry label of Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc.;flanged,Class 125;clockwise to close. M Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. 2.02 BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACTUATORS A Butterfly Valves and Actuators: Conform to AWWA C504, except as modified or supplemented herein. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International, American-Darling,or approved equal. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans, butterfly valves shall be used for line valve sizes 16 inch and larger. If type of valve is specified, no substitute will be allowed. C Butterfly valves shall be short-body,flanged design and installed at locations as shown on Plans. D Direct-bury valves,valves in subsurface vaults. Above-ground and plant valves shall open counterclockwise. E Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. F Butterfly Valves and Actuators(Additional Requirements for Large-Diameter Water Mains): Valves larger than 72 inches in diameter shall have all components designed \/ 04/2009 02541 -4 of 8 CITY OF PEARIAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES so that the allowable stresses at rated pressure shall not exceed one-third of the yield strength or one-fifth of the ultimate strength of the material used. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International, American-Darling, or equal. 2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVE CONSTRUCTION A Valves: AWWA C504, Class 150B. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A 126, Class B. Flanges: ANSI B 16.1, Class 125 lb. B Discs for Butterfly Valves: Either cast iron or ductile iron. C Seats: Buna-N or neoprene, and may be applied to disc or body. Seats shall be mechanically secured and may not rely solely on adhesive properties of epoxy or similar bonding agent to attach seat to body. Seats on disc shall be mechanically retained by stainless steel (18-8)retaining ring held in place by stainless steel(18- 8) cap screws that pass through rubber seat for added retention. When seat is on disc, seat shall be retained in position by shoulders located on both disc and stainless-steel retaining ring. Mating surfaces for seats: Type 304 or 316,stainless steel and secured to disc by mechanical means. Sprayed-on or plated mating surfaces will not be allowed. D Coat interior wetted ferrous surfaces of valve,including disc,with epoxy suitable for potable-water conditions. Epoxy, surface preparation, and epoxy application: In 4111, accordance with AWWA C550 and coating manufacturer's recommendations. Provide two coats of two-component, high-build epoxy with minimum dry thickness of 10 mils. Epoxy coating: Indurall 3300 or approved equal. Coatings shall be holiday tested and measured for thickness. E Valve shaft and keys,dowel pins,or taper pins used for attaching valve shaft to valve disc: Type-304 or 316 stainless steel. Shaft Bearings: Stainless steel,bronze,nylon, or Teflon (supported by fiberglass mat or backing material with proven record of preventing Teflon flow under load) in accordance with AWWA C504. F Packing: Field-adjustable, split-V type, and replaceable without removing operator assembly. G Retaining Hardware for Seats: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. Nuts and screws used with clamps and discs for rubber seats shall be held securely with locktight, or other approved method, to prevent loosening by vibration or cavitational effects. H Valve disc shall seat in position at 90 degrees to the pipe axis and shall rotate 90 degrees between full-open and tight-closed position. Install valves with valve shafts horizontal and convex side of disc facing anticipated direction of flow,except where shown otherwise on Plans. 2.04 BUTTERFLY VALVE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION A Provide actuators for valves with size based on line velocity of 16 feet per second, and, unless otherwise shown on Plans, equip with geared manual actuators. Provide 04/2009 02541 -5 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES fully enclosed and traveling-nut type, rack-and-pinion type, or worm-gear type for valves 24 inches and smaller. B Provide actuator designed for installation with valve shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated on Plans. C Provide valve shaft extended from valve to actuator. Space between actuator housing and valve body shall be completely enclosed so that no moving parts are exposed to soil or elements. D Provide oil-tight and watertight actuator housings for valves,specifically designed for buried service or submerged service when located in valve vaults,and factory packed with suitable grease. E Install a valve position indicator on each actuator housing located above ground or in valve vaults. Valves shall be equipped with 2-inch actuator nut only. F Indicate direction of opening of valve on exposed visible part of assembly. G Design worm-gear or traveling-nut actuators so that a torque of 150 foot-pounds, or less,will operate valve at most adverse condition for which valve is designed.Vertical axis of actuating nut shall not move as valve is opened or closed. 2.05 VALVE BOXES A Provide standard adjustable valve boxes only conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults. 2.06 VALVE SERVICE MANHOLES A For large-diameter water mains, provide manholes to dimensions shown on Plans conforming to requirements of Section 02542—Concrete Manholes. 2.07 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES A Air Release Valves: Apco No. 200, GA Industries Fig. 2-AR, or equal. Materials: body and cover, ASTM A 48, Class 30, cast iron; float and leverage mechanism, ASTM A 240 or A276 stainless steel;orifice and seat,stainless steel against Buna-N or Viton mechanically retained with hex head nut and bolt;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Provide inlet and outlet connections, and orifice as shown on Plans. B Air Release and Vacuum Valves: Provide single-body, standard combination or duplex-body custom combination valves as indicated on Plans. 1. For 2 inch and 3 inch, single-body valves, provide inlet and outlet sizes as shown on Plans and orifice sized for 100 psi working pressure. Valve materials: body, cover and baffle, ASTM A 48, Class 35, or ASTM A 126, Grade B cast iron;plug or poppet,ASTM A 276 stainless steel;float,ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat,Buna-N;other valve internals, stainless steel. Valve exterior: Painted with shop-applied primer suitable for contact with potable 04/2009 02541 -6 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 4111/ water. Provide Apco Model 145C or 147C, Val-Matic Series 200, or equal valves. 2. For 3 inch and larger duplex body valves as shown on Plans, provide Apco Series 1700 with No. 200 air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. AR/GH- 211C/280,or equal. Air and vacuum valve materials: body and cover,ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; float, ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat,Type-304, stainless steel and Buna-N;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Air release valve: Constructed as specified in paragraph above on Air Release Valves. C Vacuum Relief Valves: Provide air inlet vacuum relief valves with flanged inlet and outlet connections as shown on Plans. Provide air release valves in combination with inlet and outlet, and orifice as shown on Plans. Valve shall open under pressure differential not to exceed 0.25 psi. Provide Apco Series 1500 with a No. 200A air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. HCARV, or approved equal. Materials for vacuum relief valves: valve body, ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; seat and plug, ASTM B 584 bronze, copper alloy 836; spring, ASTM A 313, Type-304, stainless steel;bushing,ASTM B 584 bronze,copper alloy 932;retaining screws,ASTM A 276, Type-304, stainless steel. D Air Release Valve Vault as detailed in Plans. 2.08 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A Provide Cla-Val Model 90-01,or approved equal,PRV with strainer in location and arrangement as shown on Plans. Valve body: ASTM A 48,cast iron or ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with ANSI B16.1, Class 125, flanges. Valve cover: ASTM A 48 cast iron. Valve internals: Type-303, stainless steel or B-62 bronze. Rubber parts: Buna-N. No leather parts shall be allowed. Resilient seat shall have rectangular cross section. B Control Tubing: Contain shutoff cocks with "Y" strainer. C PRV: Equip with valve position indicator. Initially set in field by authorized manufacturer's representative with 60 psi downstream pressure. D Provide basket strainer upstream of PRV as shown on Plans. Strainer body: quick- opening type, fabricated-steel construction with ANSI B16.1, Class 150, flanges. Basket: Type-304, stainless steel. Provide Hayward Model 90,or equal, for PRV 4- inch through 24-inch. Provide Hayward Model 510, or equal, for PRV 14 inches or greater when space limitations dictate the use of smaller strainer housing. E Pilot Systems for PRV: Adjustable and pressure sustaining. F Valve Box: Valve Box conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter boxes, and Meter Vaults. Cor 04/2009 02541 -7 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Earthwork. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Operation. Do not use valves for throttling without prior approval of manufacturer. 3.02 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A Remove foreign matter from within valves prior to installation. Inspect valves in open and closed positions to verify that parts are in satisfactory working condition. B Install valves and valve boxes where shown on Plans. Set valves plumb and as detailed. Center valve boxes on valves. Carefully tamp earth around each valve box for minimum radius of 4 feet,or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 feet. Install valves completely closed when placed in water line. C For pipe section of each valve box,use only cast iron,ductile iron,or DRIB PVC pipe cut to proper length. Size to allow future operation of valve. Assemble and brace box in vertical position as indicated on Plans. 3.03 DISINFECTION AND TESTING A Perform disinfection and testing of valves and appurtenances as required by Section V 02510—Water Mains. B Repair or replace valves which exceed the allowable specified leakage rate. 3.04 PAINTING OF VALVES A Paint valves in vaults, stations, and above ground using ACRO Paint No. 2215, or approved equal. END OF SECTION 04/2009 02541 -8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 4110 Section 02634 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for water mains,wastewater force mains,gravity sanitary sewers, and storm sewers. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350— Submittals 2. Section 02676— Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines 3. Section 02533 — Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 4. Section 02630—Polyethylene Wrap 5. Section 02510— Water Mains 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers C. Referenced Standards: CPO 1. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) a. ANSI A21.51, Ductile-Iron Pipe Centrifugal Cast, in Metal Molds b. ANSI A21.11, Rubber Gasket Joints Cast and Ductile Iron Press Pipe c. ANSI A21.15, Flanged Cast and Ductile Iron d. ANSI A21.50, Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe e. ANSI A21.10,Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings,2 thru 48 in./Water f. ANSI B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings g. ANSI A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service h. ANSI A21.4, Cement-Mortar lining/Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings b. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water c. AWWA C153 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service d. AWWA C600 Installation for Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances 3. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) a. SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 5/2013 02634- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS a. ASTM G 62,"Standard Test Method for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings" vale b. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for ductile iron pipe and fittings under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Water Mains, Sanitary Sewage Force Mains, Gravity Sanitary Sewers, and Storm Sewers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details. Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Plans. Production of pipe and fittings prior to review by the Engineer is at Contractor's risk. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide manufacturer's certifications that all ductile iron pipe and fittings meet provisions of this Section and have been hydrostatically tested at factory and meet requirements of ANSI A21.51. B. Provide certifications that all pipe joints have been tested and meet requirements of ANSI A21.11. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Ductile iron pipe barrels: ANSI A21.15,ANSI A21.50 or ANSI A21.51;bear mark of Underwriters' Laboratories approval. B. Provide pipe sections in standard lengths,not less than 18 feet long,except for special fittings and closure sections as indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings,use minimum Pressure Class 250 for waterlines or thickness Class 52 for waterlines in casing or augered hole. Provide minimum thickness Class 52 for sanitary sewers. Provide minimum Pressure Class 350 for flanged pipe. 5/2013 02634-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 411101 2.02 JOINTS A. Jointtypes: ANSI A21.11 push-on;ANSI A21.11 mechanical joint;or ANSI A21.15 flanged end. Provide push-on joints unless otherwise indicated on the Plans or required by these specifications.For bolted joints,bolts shall conform to requirements of AWWA CIII. B. Where restrained joints for buried service are required by Plans, provide one of the following, or Approved Equal (restrained joints shall be polyethylene wrapped): 1. Super-Lock Joint by Clow Corporation. 2. Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring by American Cast Iron Pipe Company. 3. TR-Flex Joint by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 4. EBAA IRON MEGALUG Mechanical Joint Restraint. C. Threaded or grooved type joints which reduce pipe wall thickness below minimum required are not acceptable. D. Provide for restrained joints designed to meet test pressures required under Section 02676 - Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines or Section 02533— Sanitary Sewage Force Mains, as applicable. 4111/ E. Where ductile iron water main is cathodically protected from corrosion, bond rubber gasketed joints as shown on Plans to provide electrical continuity along entire pipeline, except where insulating flanges are required by Plans. 2.03 GASKETS A. Furnish, when no contaminant is identified, plain rubber(SBR) gasket material; for flanged joints 1/8-inch thick gasket in accordance with ANSI A21.15. B. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas,especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed pipeline, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants: CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED Petroleum (diesel,gasoline) Nitrile Rubber, Nitrile Rubber, FKM Viton Type Gasket(ASTM 1418) Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacture 5/2013 02634-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.04 FITTINGS A. Use fittings of same size as pipe. Reducers are not permitted to facilitate an off-size fitting. Reducing bushings are also prohibited. Make reductions in piping size by reducing fittings. Line and coat fittings as specified for pipe they serve. B. Push-on Fittings will not be allowed above grade. C. Flanged Fittings: ANSI A21.10; ANSI B16.1 cast or ductile iron. Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; pressure rated at 250 psig. D. Mechanical Joint Fittings: ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110); pressure rated at 250 psi. E. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Mains:ANSI A21.53(AWWA Cl 53);4-inch through 12-inch diameter;cement-mortar lining; conform to requirements of Section 02630—Polyethylene Wrap. 2.05 COATINGS AND LININGS A. Water Main Interiors: ANSI A21.4, cement lined with seal coat. B. Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors: I. Preparation: Commercial blast cleaning conforming to SSPC-SP6. 2. Liner thickness:Nominal 40 mils,minimum 35 mils, for pipe barrel interior; v/ minimum 6- 10 mils at gasket groove and outside spigot end to 6-inches back from end. 3. Testing: ASTM G 62, Method B for voids and holidays; provide written certification. 4. Acceptable Lining Materials: a. Virgin polyethylene conforming to ASTM D 1248, with inert fillers and carbon black to resist ultraviolet degradation during storage heat bonded to interior surface of pipe and fittings;"Polyline"by American Cast Iron Pipe Company; or Approved Equal. b. Polyurethane: Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals. c. Ceramic Epoxy: Protecto-401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. C. Sanitary Sewer Point Repair Pipe: For pipes which will be lined with high density polyethylene liner pipe or cured-in-place liner,provide cement-lined with seal coat in accordance with ANSI A21.4. For pipes which will not be provided with named liner, provide pipe as specified in this Section, 2.058 "Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors". 5/2013 02634-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS C D. Exterior: Prime coat and outside asphaltic coating conforming to ANSI A21.10,ANSI A21.15,or ANSI A21.51 for pipe and fittings in open cut excavation and in casings. E. Polyethylene Wrap: For buried water lines and sanitary sewers, including point repairs, provide polyethylene wrap unless otherwise specified or shown. Provide Polyethylene Wrap for all buried ductile iron pipe, including polyurethane coated pipe. F. For flanged joints in buried service, provide petrolatum wrapping system, Denso, or Approved Equal, for the complete joint and all alloy steel fasteners. Alternatively, provide bolts made of Type 304 Stainless Steel. G. Pipe to be installed in potentially contaminated areas shall have coatings and linings recommended by the manufacturer as resistant to the contaminants. 2.06 MANUFACTURERS A. Pre-approved manufacturers of ductile iron are American Cast Iron Pipe Co.,McWane Cast Iron Pipe Co., and U. S. Pipe and Foundry Co. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conform to installation requirements of Section 02510—Water Mains,Section 02530 —Gravity Sanitary Sewers,and Section 02533—Sanitary Sewage Force Mains,except as modified in this Section. B. Install in accordance with AW WA C600 and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install all ductile iron pipe in polyethylene wrap, unless cathodic protection is provided. Do not use polyethylene wrap with a cathodic protection system. 3.02 GRADE A. Unless otherwise specified on Plans, install ductile iron pipe for water service to clear utility lines with following minimum cover: DIAMETER DEPTH OF COVER (INCHES) (FEET) 16 and 24 5 12 and smaller 4 END OF SECTION 5/2013 02634-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Section 02635 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A New steel pipe and fittings for water mains, pumping facilities, and casings. B References to Technical Specifications: I. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02636—Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe 3. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 36, "Standard Specification for Carbon structural Steel" b. ASTM A 570, "Standard Practice for Roof System Assemblies Employing Steel Deck, Performed Roof Insulation, and Bituminous Built-Up Roofing" c. ASTM A 53, "Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped,Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless" d. ASTM A 135,"Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe" e. ASTM A 139, "Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (arc)- Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over)" f. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" g. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" h. ASTM D 512, "Standard Test Method for Chloride Ion in Water" i. ASTM D 1293, "Standard Test Method for pH of Water" j. ASTM D 4541, "Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers" 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe-6 in. and Larger b. AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe c. AWWA Ml 1 Steel Water Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation, Fourth Edition d. AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service—Sizes 4 in. Through 144 in. e. AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines f. AWWA C210 Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Special Sections,Connections,and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines 02/2008 02635 -1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS g. AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe—4 in. and Larger—Shop Applied h. AWWA C602 Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in Place-4 in. and Larger AWWA C209 Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. National Sanitation Foundation(NFS) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for steel pipe and fittings under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for water mains, pumping facilities and casings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit Shop Drawings for aerial crossings and water plant/facilities. Include design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade,laying dimensions,lining and coating systems,proposed welding procedures,fabrication,fitting,flange,and special details. C Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Plans. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Provide manufacturer's certifications that all pipe and fittings have been hydrostatically tested at factory in accordance with AWWA C200, Section 3.4. B Provide manufacturer's affidavits that polyurethane coatings,linings and tape coatings comply with applicable requirements of this Section and that coatings were applied and allowed to cure at a temperature 5 degrees above the dew point. C Provide manufacturer's affidavits that mortar coatings and linings comply with applicable requirements of this Section and that linings were applied and allowed to cure at a temperature above 32 degrees F. D Prior to work being started, provide proof of certification of qualification for all welders employed for type of work,procedures and positions involved. Qualifications shall be in accordance with AWWA C206. E Production of pipe and fittings prior to review by the Engineer shall be at Contractor's risk. J 02/2008 02635-2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 4111, 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL PIPE A Provide steel pipe designed and manufactured in conformance with AWWA C200 and AWWA Ml l except as modified herein. Steel shall be minimum of ASTM A 36, ASTM A 570 Grade 36, ASTM A 53 Grade B, ASTM A 135 Grade B, or ASTM A 139 Grade B. B Minimum Allowable Steel-Wall Thickness: In accordance with following table for HS-20 live loads and depths of bury of up to 16 feet and AWWA C200 new uncoated welded steel. CASING PIPE (ENCASEMENT SLEEVES) CASING MINIMUM WALL APPROXIMATE WEIGHT PIPE SIZE PER O.D. THICKNESS LINEAR FOOT UNCOATED 8" 8.625" 0.219" 19.64 10" 10.75" 0.219" 24.60 12" 12.75" 0.219" 29.28 14" 14.00" 0.219" 32.00 16" 16.00" 0.219" 36.86 20" 20.00" 0.250" 52.73 24" 24.00" 0.250" 63.41 30" 30.00" 0.250" 79.43 C Provide pipe sections in lengths of no less than 20 feet except as required for special fittings or closure sections. D Fittings: Factory forged for sizes 4 inches through 24 inches; long radius bends; beveled ends for field butt welding; wall thickness: equal to or greater than pipe to which fittings is to be welded; unless otherwise shown on the Plans. E Joints: I. Standard field joint for steel pipe; including casings: AWWA C206. a. Single-welded, lap joint. b. Double-welded, butt joint. 2. Provide mechanically coupled or flanged joints where required for valves and fittings, and as shown on Plans. Flanges: AWWA C207, Class D; same diameter and drilling as Class 125 cast iron flanges, ASA B16.1. Maintain electrically isolated flanged joints between steel and cast iron by using epoxy- 02/2008 02635-3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS coated bolts, nuts, washers and insulating type gasket unless otherwise approved by Engineer. F Make curves and bends by use of beveled joints unless otherwise indicated on Plans. Contractor may submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for consideration by the Engineer. If other methods are deemed satisfactory,install at no additional cost to Owner. G Provide shop coated and shop lined steel pipe with minimum of one coat of shop applied primer approved for use in potable water transmission on all exposed steel surfaces. Primer for tape coated steel pipe to be used for field-applied coatings shall have no less than 5 percent solids. Provide primer compatible with coating system and in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. H Standard or Special Sections: Within 1/8 inch + of specified or theoretical lengths. Flanges: Square with pipe with bolt holes straddling both horizontal and vertical axis. Provide 1/2-inch gap between pipe ends where pipe is to be coupled with sleeve couplings. 2.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A General: Supplied with either tape coatings as specified herein. 1. Tape Coating: AW WA C214;80-mil,shop-applied,Polyken YG-III,Tek-Rap Yard-Rap,or equal,except as modified herein. Components: primer,one 20- mil layer of inner-layer tape for corrosion protection and two 30-mil layers of outer-layer tape for mechanical protection. Primer: compatible with tape coating, supplied by coating-system manufacturer. Provide pipe with shop coatings cut back from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. Taper successive tape layers by 1-inch staggers to facilitate field wrapping of joints. Cut back approximately 4 to 4-1/2 inches to facilitate welding. Inner and outer tape widths: DIAMETER TAPE WIDTH 4"-6" 6 8"— 12" 9" 14"— 16" 12" 18"—24" 18" 2.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE IN TUNNEL,CASING OR AUGER HOLES A Provide exterior coating system of pipe in augered holes or casing, without annular grout,as specified in Section 02636—Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe. No additional exterior coating is required for mortar coated pipe. vale 02/2008 02635-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 4100 2.04 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVEGROUND (OR EXPOSED) A Provide a 3-coat epoxy/polyurethane coating system as designated below. Surface Preparation SSPC SPIO Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile Prime Coat ACRO 4422 Inhibitive Epoxy Primer, or approved equal 2.0 to 4.0 mils DFT Intermediate Coat ACRO 4460 Chemical Resistant Epoxy, or approved equal 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT Finish Coat ACRO 4428 Polyurethane, or approved equal 1.5 to 2.0 mils DFT B Total minimum allowable dry film thickness for system: 10 mils. C All materials shall be from same manufacturer. 2.05 INTERNAL LINING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL PIPE `r A General: Supply steel pipe with either epoxy lining or shop applied cement mortar lining,capable of conveying water at temperatures not greater than 140°F. All linings shall conform to American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NFS) Standard 61 and certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. Unless otherwise noted, coat all exposed (wetted) steel parts of flanges,blind flanges, bolts, access manhole covers,etc.,with epoxy lining, as specified herein. B Epoxy Lining: AWWA C210 - White, or approved equal for shop and field joint applied,except as modified herein. 1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP-10(64);Near White Blast Clean;2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile. 2. Prime Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy-Buff;4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 3. Intermediate Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy- Buff: 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 4. Finish Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy-White 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 5. Minimum allowable dry film system thickness: 12.0 mils. 6. Maximum allowable dry film system thickness: 18.0 mils. 7. Minimum field adhesion: 700 psi. 8. Dry film thicknesses for approved alternate products in accordance with the product manufacturer's recommendations. 9. The lining system may consist of three or more coats of the same approved alternate epoxy lining without the use of a separate primer. 02/2008 02635-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 10. Provide materials from the same manufacturer. C Shop Applied Cement Mortar Lining: AWWA C205; shop-applied, cement mortar linings,except as specified herein 3/8 inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 24 inches and smaller. Pipe with cut back lining from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 2.06 MORTAR FOR EXTERIOR JOINTS A Cement Mortar: One part cement to two parts of fine, sharp clean sand; mix with water to a consistency of thick cream. B Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type II. C Sand: 1. Inside joints: AWWA C602; fine graded natural sand. 2. Outside joints: ASTM C 33; natural sand with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. D Water: total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/I;ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/1 for slurry and mortar cure; ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION 1.110 A Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02510—Water Mains except as modified herein. 3.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A Tape Coating System: 1. Inspect pipe, prior to shipment,for holidays and damage to coating. Perform electrical holiday test of minimum of 6,000 volts with a 60 cycle current audio detector. If test indicates no holidays and outer wrap(s) is torn, remove damaged layers of outer wrap by carefully cutting with sharp razor-type utility knife. Wash with Xylol area to be patched and at least 4 inches of undamaged tape where hand-applied tape wrap will overlap. AWWA C209 cold-applied tape; compatible with tape-wrapping system applied for each layer of outer- wrap tape that has been removed. If damaged area shows holiday when tested, remove outer layers and expose inner wrap. Prime exposed area and overlaps with light coat of primer. Firmly press into place patch of inner wrap of sufficient size to extend 4 inches from holidays in all directions. Holiday test patch to verify that it is installed satisfactorily. Retrim outer layer of tape to expose first wrap of outer-wrap tape sufficiently to allow minimum lap of 2 inches in all directions. Wash exposed outer wrap tape with Xylol and prime. Apply two layers of AWWA C209 outer wrap with 35 mils minimum thickness. 02/2008 02635-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 4101 2. Regardless of results of electrical holiday test,bubbles in tape coating system are not allowed. Cut out bubbles and patch as detailed above. 3. Field repairs and applications of coatings: AWWA C209 around joint cutbacks except as modified herein. Field-welded joints: clean shop-primed ends of weld splatter, damaged primer and rust to achieve required surface preparation prior to field repair of linings and coatings. a. Immediately prior to placing joint in trench, remove shop-applied primer by abrasive blasting,solvent or other method as approved by the Engineer. Avoid damage to adjacent existing coatings. Clean surfaces to achieve surface preparation at least equivalent to SSPC SP6 in accordance with AWWA C209. Solvent: environmentally safe and compatible with coating-system primer. b. Apply primer immediately prior to application of first layer of tape to achieve maximum bond. Apply tape while primer is still "tacky"with 3-inch minimum overlap over shop-applied coating. 4. Do not expose tape coatings to harmful ultraviolet light for more than 90 days. Discard (remove) and replace outer layer of tape coating when exposure exceeds 90 days. In case of factory applied coatings,remove joint from site for removal and reapplication of outer layer of tape coatings. B At Owner's option,coating system and application may be tested and inspected at plant site in accordance with AWWA C214. 4111/ C Cement Mortar Coating: AWWA C205; I-inch minimum thickness; cut back from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 3.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVEGROUND, IN VAULTS, TUNNELS OR CASINGS, AND INTERNAL LINING FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS A Cement Mortar Lining: AWWA C205; 1/2-inch minimum thickness; cut back from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. B Safety: Paints,coatings,and linings specified herein are hazardous materials. Vapors may be toxic or explosive. Protective equipment,approved by appropriate regulatory agency, is mandatory for all personnel involved in painting, coating, and lining operations. C Workmanship: 1. Application: By qualified and experienced workers who are knowledgeable in surface preparation and application of high-performance industrial coatings. 2. Paint Application Procedures: SSPC Good Painting Practices, Volume 1. D Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare all surfaces for painting with abrasive blasting. 2. Schedule cleaning and painting so that detrimental amounts of dust or other contaminants do not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces. Protect surfaces not intended to be painted from effects of cleaning and painting operations. 02/2008 02635-7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. Prior to blasting, clean surfaces to be coated or lined of grease, oil and dirt by steaming or detergent cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP1. 4. Metal and Weld Preparation: Remove all surface defects such as gouges,pits, welding and torch-cut slag, welding flux and spatter by grinding to 1/4-inch minimum radius. 5. Abrasive Material: a. Blast only as much steel as can be coated same day of blasting. b. Use sharp, angular, properly-graded abrasive capable of producing depth of profile specified herein. Transport abrasive to jobsite in moisture-proof bags or airtight bulk containers. Copper slag abrasives are not acceptable. c. After abrasive blast cleaning, verify surface profile with replica tape such as Tes-Tex Coarse or Extra Coarse Press-O-Film Tape, or approved equal. Furnish tapes to Owner for filing and future reference. d. Do not blast if metal surface may become wet before priming commences,or when metal surface is less than 5 degrees F above dew point. 6. Remove all dust and abrasive residue from freshly blasted surfaces by brushing or blowing with clean, dry air. E Coating and Lining Application: 1. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply coatings or linings when metal temperature is less than 50 degrees F;when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point; when expected weather conditions are such that 81111) ambient temperature will drop below 40 degrees F within 6 hours after application of coating;or when relative humidity is above 85 percent. Measure relative humidity and dew point by use of sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables. Provide dehumidifiers for all field-applied coatings and linings to maintain proper humidity levels. 2. Application Procedures: a. Apply coatings and linings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of this Section. Provide a finish free of runs,sags, curtains, pinholes,orange peel,fish eyes,excessive overspray or de-laminations. b. Thin materials only with manufacturer's recommended thinners. Thin only amount required to adjust viscosity for temperature variations, proper atomization and flow-out. Mix material components using mechanical mixers. c. Discard catalyzed materials remaining at end of day. 3. Apply primer immediately after surface has been cleaned. Thoroughly dry pipe before primer is applied. Apply succeeding coats before contamination of under surface occurs. 4. Allow each coat of paint either to dry or cure amount of time recommended by coating or lining manufacturer before successive coats of paint are applied. Apply all successive coats of paint within recoat threshold time as 02/2008 02635-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS recommended by coating or lining manufacturer on printed technical data sheets or through written communications. 3.04 INSPECTION A Procure services of an independent testing laboratory or inspection service, approved by the Engineer, to perform tests on all portions of coating and lining applications. Laboratory shall supply services of NACE Certified Coatings Inspectors having Level IB Certification for all coating and linings inspection work. Include cost of such testing in contract unit price bid for water main. Furnish copies of all test reports to the Engineer for review. If defective coatings or lining are revealed,cost of repair and testing of repair will be paid for by Contractor. The Engineer shall have full and final decision as to suitability of all coatings and linings tested. B For all field applied coatings and linings,including joints,notify Owner sufficiently in advance of work so that Owner can perform examination of and acceptance of surface preparation and application of each coat prior to application of next coat. Furnish appropriate test data to Owner verifying compliance with requirements of this Section of each coat prior to proceeding with next coat. Recoat or repair runs, overspray, roughness and/or abrasives in coating,or other indications of improper application in accordance with coating or lining manufacturer's and the Engineer's instructions. C Repairs, surface preparation and painting will be subject to inspection by Owner. Guidelines published by Steel Structures Painting Council will be used as basis for acceptance or rejection of cleaning, painting or coating application. SSPC VISI, Pictoral Surface, along with single-probe magnetic pull-off type dry film thickness gages,electrical holiday detectors,and standard wet film thickness gages will be used to determine acceptability of paint applications. D Check film thickness with nondestructive magnetic pull-off gage such as Mikrotest Model DEG-100 or electronic thickness gage. National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibration plates will be used to verify accuracy of thickness gage. Determine maximum and minimum thickness in accordance with SSPC PA2 for frequency and method. Evaluate each length of pipe under SSPC PA2. Consider each field joint area separate and discrete for purpose of DFT measurements. Perform five spot DFT measurements on each field joint area (15 individual readings). Check thickness of each individual coat as well as thickness of overall system with respect to compliance with this Section. Failure to meet either overall system thickness requirements or requirements of component coats shall be cause for rejection and recoat or repair of entire joint or length of pipe. E Holiday Test: I. Begin inspection after coating has sufficiently cured,usually one to five days. (Consult coating manufacturer for specific curing schedule.) 2. Use high-voltage d-c holiday detector such as D.E. Steams Company Model 14/20 or Tinker & Rasor Model AP/W. Use 1600 volts, plus or minus 100 volts. Use brass brush type electrode. 02/2008 02635-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. Ground high-voltage d-c holiday detector to metal being inspected. Earth-type ground tape is not acceptable. Mark detected defects with white chalk,repair and reinspect. 4. Adhesion Tests: ASTM D 4541; pull-off testing using an Elcometer Model 106 Fixed Alignment Adhesion Tester. Adhesion testing may be directed by the Engineer on any length of pipe or joint which exceeds maximum coating thickness limitations specified in this Section. 3.05 COATINGS AND LININGS INSPECTION A Owner reserves right to inspect or acquire service of independent third-party inspector who is fully knowledgeable of, and qualified to inspect, surface preparation and application of high-performance coatings to inspect any and all phases of all coatings and linings work,whether field or shop applied. Contractor responsible for application and performance of coating and lining whether or not Owner provides such inspection. END OF SECTION J V 02/2008 02635- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE Section 02636 POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Two-component polyurethane coating system for use as an internal or external coating for steel or ductile iron pipe. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02634-Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 3. Section 02635 —Steel Pipe and Fittings C Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C210, Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM ID 16, "Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, C b. Materials, and Applications" ASTM ID 1737, "Standard Guide for Testing Industrial Water- Reducible aterReducible Coatings" 3. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) a. SSPC-PA 2, Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges b. SSPC-PA 3, A Guide to Safety in Paint Application c. SSPC-PS Guide 17.00,Guide for Selecting Urethane Painting Systems d. SSPC-SP I, Solvent Cleaning e. SSPC-SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section.Include cost of polyurethane coatings in Bid Items for steel pipe or ductile iron pipe. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit coating manufacturer's catalog sheets and technical information for approval, prior to delivery of pipe. 411110 07/2006 02636- I of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE ]] C Obtain from coating manufacturer and submit a coating "affidavit of compliance" to requirements of this Section stating that coatings were applied in factory and in accordance with manufacturer's minimum requirements. 1.04 SAFETY A Secure, from manufacturer, Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for polyurethane coatings and repair materials listed in this Section. B Safety requirements stated in this and related Sections apply in addition to applicable federal, state and local rules and regulations. Comply with instructions of coating manufacturer and requirements of insurance underwriters. C Follow handling and application practices of SSPC-PA Guide 3; SSPC-PS Guide 17.00; Coating Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Use standard containers to prevent gelling,thickening deleteriously or forming of gas in closed containers within period of one year from date of manufacture. B Label each container of separately packaged component clearly and durably to indicate date of manufacture, manufacturer's batch number, quantity, color, component identification and designated name or formula specification, number of coatings together with special instructions. Do not use coating components older than one year. C Deliver coating materials to pipe manufacturer in sealed containers showing designated name, batch number, color, date of manufacture and name of coating manufacturer. D Store materials on site in enclosures which are out of direct sunlight, and in warm, ventilated, and dry area. E Prevent puncture, inappropriate opening, or other action which may lead to product contamination. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 COATING MATERIAL A Coating Standard: ASTM D 16. B Coating System: Use Type V system which is a 2-package polyisocyanate, polyol- cured urethane coating, mixed in 1:1 ratio at time of application. The components shall be balanced viscosities in their liquid state and not require agitation during use. C Exterior Coating Material: CORROPIPE II-TX and Joint Coating Material CORROPIPE II-PW, manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries,Inc., 5673 Old Dixie Road,Forest Park, Georgia 30050, or approved equal. 07/2006 02636-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE (kWD Internal Coating Material: Joint Coating Material CORROPIPE II-PW,manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries, Inc., 5673 Old Dixie Road, Forest Park, Georgia 30050, or approved equal. E Cured Coating Properties: 1. Conversion to Solids by Volume: 97 percent plus or minus 3 percent. 2. Temperature Resistance: Minus 40 degrees F and plus 130 degrees F. 3. Minimum Adhesion: 500 psi,when applied without primer to ductile iron pipe which has been blasted to comply with SSPC-SP 10. 4. Cure Time: For handling in 1 minute at 120 degrees F, and full cure within 7 days at 70 degrees F. 5. Maximum Specific Gravities: Polyisocyanate resin, 1.20. Polyol resin, 1.15. 6. Minimum Impact Resistance: 80 inch-pounds using 1-inch diameter steel ball where coating is applied at 30 mils to ductile iron pipe surface which has been blasted to SSPC No. 10 finish. 7. Minimum Tensile Strength: 2000 psi. 8. Hardness: 55 plus or minus 5 Shore Dat 70 degrees F. 9. Flexibility Resistance: ASTM D 1737 using 1-inch mandrel. Allow coating to cure for 7 days. Perform testing on test coupons held for 15 minutes at temperature extremes specified in this Paragraph. 2.02 REPAIR AND TOUCHUP MATERIAL crA CORROPIPE II PW (two-component, brush applied, or approved equal). Mix in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A Remove deposits of oil,grease or other organic contaminates before blast cleaning by using solvent wash as specified in SSPC-PA Guide 3. Clean and dry surfaces making them completely dry, free of moisture, dust, grit, oil, grease or any other deleterious substances prior to application of coating. B Exterior and Interior Surfaces: SSPC-SP10, near-white metal blast cleaning. The blasting shall be done with clean, hard, sharp cutting abrasives with no steel or cast iron shot in the mix. C Ductile Iron Pipe: Prior to the start of production blasting, prepare specimens for a white metal blast and a near-white metal blast using the equipment and abrasives proposed for the work. During preparation of the specimens,the blasting intensity and abrasive shall be changed as necessary to provide the degree of cleaning required by SSPC-SPIO,except that the color of the blasted substrate is not expected to match the color of blasted steel. After examination and concurrence by the Engineer, the production blasting may begin. Monitor and control the production blasting so that production pipe surfaces match the surface of the approved blasting specimens. 07/2006 02636-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 3.02 THICKNESS A External Coatings: Minimum DFT of 25 mils (0.025 inch). B Internal Coatings: Minimum DET of 35 mils. C Thickness Determinations: Use Type I magnetic thickness gauge as described in SSP- PA2 specification. Individual readings below 90 percent of specified minimum are not acceptable. Average individual spot readings(consisting of three point measurements within 3 inches of each other) less than 95 percent of minimum are not acceptable. Average of all spot readings less than minimum thickness specified is not acceptable. 3.03 FACTORY APPLICATION OF POLYURETHANE COATING A Equipment: Two-component, 1:1 mix ratio, heated airless spray unit. B Temperature: Minimum 5 degrees F above dew point temperature. The temperature of the surface shall not be less than 60 degrees F during application. C Humidity: Heating of pipe surfaces may be required to meet the requirements of this Section, 2.01E, "Cured Coating Properties", if relative humidity exceeds 80 percent. D Do not thin or mix resins; use as received. Store resins at a temperature above 55 degrees F at all times. •�'i E Application: Conform to coating manufacturer's recommendations. Apply directly to substrate to achieve specified thickness. Multiple-pass,one-coat application process is permitted provided maximum allowable recoat time specified by coating manufacturer is not exceeded. F Recoat only when coating has cured less than maximum time specified by coating manufacturer. When coating has cured for more than recoat time, brush-blast or thoroughly sand coating surface. Blow-off cleaning using clean, dry, high pressure compressed air. G Cure at ambient temperature above 0 degrees F. Do not handle pipe until coating has been allowed to cure as follows: AMBIENT MINIMUM FULL TEMPERATURE CURE TIME Over 70 degrees F 7 days 50 to 70 degrees F 9 days 0 to 50 degrees F 12 days J 07/2006 02636-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 3.04 JOINTS A Apply coating to unlined pipe surfaces including inside of bell socket and outside of spigot. B Coating thickness on sealing areas of spigot end of pipe exterior: Minimum 8 mils (0.008 inch),maximum of 10 mils(0.010 inch). Maximum 10 mils maybe exceeded in spigot end provided maximum spigot diameter as specified by pipe manufacturer is not exceeded. 3.05 INSPECTION A Engineer may inspect coatings at coating applicator's facilities. B Secure approval of surface preparation by coating manufacturer's representative prior to coating application. C Holiday Inspection: Conform to AWWA C 210, Section 5.3.3.1. Follow coating manufacturer's recommendation. Conduct inspection any time after coating has reached initial cure. Repair in accordance with this Section, 3.07 "Repair and Field Touchup". 3.06 PIPE INSTALLATION fairA When required by the Engineer,provide services of manufacturer's representative for period of not less than 2 weeks at beginning of actual pipe laying operations to advise Contractor regarding installation including but not limited to handling and storing, cleaning and inspecting,coatings repairs,and general construction methods as to how they may affect pipe coatings. B Use nylon straps, padded lifts and padded storage skids. Field cuts should be kept to minimum. Repair damage to coating due to handling or construction practices. Refer to Section 02634 -Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings and Section 02635—Steel Pipe and Fittings for additional requirements. C Just before each section of pipe is to be placed into the trench, conduct a visual and holiday inspection. Defects in the coating system shall be repaired before the pipe is installed. 3.07 REPAIR AND FIELD TOUCHUP A Apply repair and touchup materials in conformance with factory application of polyurethane coating requirements specified in this Section, excluding equipment requirements. B Repair Procedure- Holidays: fir 1. Remove traces of oil, grease, dust, dirt, and other deleterious materials 2. Roughen area to be patched by sanding with rough grade sandpaper(40 grit). 07/2006 02636-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 3. Apply one coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into Si scratched surface by brushing. C Repair Procedure-Field Cuts or Large Damage: 1. Remove burrs from field cut ends or handling damage and smooth out edge of polyurethane coating. 2. Remove traces of oil, grease, dust,dirt, and other deleterious materials 3. Roughen area to be patched with rough grade sandpaper (40-grit). Feather edges and include overlap of 1 inch to 2 inches of roughened polyurethane in area to be patched. 4. Apply thick coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing. Feather edges of repair material into prepared surface. Cover at least 1 inch of roughened area surrounding damage, or adjacent to field cut. D Repair Procedure- Thermite Brazed Connection Bonds: I. Remove polyurethane coating with power wire brush from area on metal surface which is to receive thermite brazed connection. 2. Grind metal surface to shiny metal with power grinder and coarse grit grinding wheel. 3. Apply thermite-brazed connection using equipment, charge and procedure recommended by manufacturer of thermite equipment. 4. After welded surface has cooled to temperature below 130 degrees F, apply protective coating repair material to weld,exposed pipe surface and damaged areas of polyurethane coating. 5. Do not cover or backfill freshly repaired areas of coating at thermite-brazed connection until repair material has completely cured. Allow material to cure in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION J 07/2006 02636-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT (111W Section 02710 BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Base course of crushed stone, recycled crushed concrete base, cement-stabilized crushed stone,cement-stabilized bank-run gravel,recycled crushed stone and hot mix asphalt base course. B. References to Technical Specifications: I. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02742—Prime Coat C. Referenced Standards: 11111/ 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" b. ASTM D 4318, `Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" c. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" d. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" e. ASTM D 1557, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort" f. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" g. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" h. ASTM D 3017, "Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" 2. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Tex-101-E, `Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing" b. Tex-110-E, "Particle Analysis of Soils" c. Tex-120-E, "Soil-Cement Testing" d. Tex-106-E, "Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils" e. Tex-203-F, "Sand Equivalent Test" 5/2013 02710- 1 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT f. Tex-126-E,"Molding,Testing,and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Material" g. Tex-204-F, "Design of Bituminous Mixtures" h. Tex-208-F, "Test for Stabilometer Value of Bituminous Material" Tex-227-F, "Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures" j. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges,2004 Adoption I) Item 340, "Dense-Graded Hot-Mix Asphalt(Method)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for base course is on a square yard basis. Separate measurement will be made for each different required thickness of base course. B. When required by Section 01100—Summary of Work,unit price adjustments shall be made for insufficient in-place depth determined by cores as follows: I. Adjusted unit price shall be reduced by a ratio of average thickness determined by cores to thickness bid upon,times unit price bid. 2. Adjustment shall apply to lower limit of 90 percent of unit price bid. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit samples of crushed stone,gravel,crushed concrete and soil binder for testing. C. Submit weight tickets,certified by supplier,with each bulk delivery of cement to work site. D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for pug mill and associated equipment, spreading machine,and compaction equipment for approval. E. Submit manufacturing description and characteristics of spreading and finishing machine for approval. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the 5/2013 02710-2 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stockpiles shall be made up of layers of processed aggregate materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01600 — Material and Equipment and Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Material. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CRUSHED STONE FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE A. Crushed Stone: Material retained on the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements: 1. Durable particles of crusher-run broken limestone,sandstone,gravel or granite obtained from an approved source. 4111, 2. Los Angeles abrasion test percent of wear not to exceed 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. B. Soil Binder: Material passing the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: 1. Maximum Liquid Limit: 40. 2. Maximum Plasticity Index: 12. 3. Maximum Lineal Shrinkage:7(when calculated from volumetric shrinkage at liquid limit). C. Mixed Materials shall meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum compressive strength of 35 psi at 0 psi lateral pressure and 175 psi at 15 psi lateral pressure using triaxial testing procedures. 2. Grading in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following limits: SIEVE PERCENT RETAINED I %-inch 0 to 10 No. 4 45 to 75 4111, No. 40 60 to 85 5/2013 02710-3 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 2.02 CEMENT STABILIZED BASE COURSE J A. Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I; bulk or sacked. B. Water: Clean; clear; and free from oil, acids,alkali, or vegetable matter. C. Crushed Stone: material retained on the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements: 1. Durable particles of crusher-run broken limestone obtained from an approved source. 2. Los Angeles abrasion test percent of wear not to exceed 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. D. Gravel: Durable particles of bank-run gravel or processed material. E. Soil Binder: Material passing the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: I. Maximum Liquid limit: 35. 2. Maximum Plasticity index: 10. F. Mixed aggregate and soil binder shall meet the following requirements: 1. Grading in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following Vi limits: PERCENT RETAINED SIEVE CRUSHED PROCESSED GRAVEL BANKRUN STONE CR. 1 CR.2 GRAVEL 1 3A-inch 0 to 10 0 to 5 - 0 to 5 0 - No. 4 45 to 75 30 to 75 15 to 35 30 to 75 No. 40 55 to 80 60 to 85 55 to 85 65 to 85 2. Obtain prior permission from Engineer for use of additives to meet above requirements. G. Cut back asphalt: MC30 conforming to requirements of Section 02742—Prime Coat. H. Emulsified petroleum resin: EPR-I Prime conforming to requirements of Section 02742—Prime Coat. J 5/2013 02710-4 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 400 I. Design mix for minimum average compressive strength of 200 psi at 48 hours using Tex-I20-E unconfined compressive strength testing procedures. Provide minimum cement content of 1-1/2 sacks, weighing 94 pounds each, per ton of mix. J. Increase cement content if average compressive strength of tests on field samples fall below 200 psi. Refer to Part 3 concerning field samples and tests. K. Mix in stationary pug mill equipped with feeding and metering devices which shall add specified quantities of base material, cement, and water into mixer. Dry mix base material and cement sufficiently to prevent cement balls from forming when water is added. L. Resulting mixture shall be homogeneous and uniform in appearance. 2.03 CEMENT-STABILIZED RECYCLED CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE (RCCB) COURSE A. System Description: Provide RCCB with following performance: 1. Minimum 5 percent cement. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 650 psi at 7 days following TxDOT 120-E. r 3. Prepare concrete product in an on-or off-site pug mill, or in an on-or off-site portable concrete mixer. B. Preliminary Design: Prepare preliminary mix for 4 cement ratios; 5, 6. 7 and 8 percent. 1. Designate source of concrete for crushing. 2. Results of compression tests will be used by Engineer to select the final mix design. C. Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I, II or III; bulk or sacked. D. Water: Potable. E. Aggregate: Recycled Crushed Concrete: Material retained on the No. 40 Sieve, and durable coarse particles of crusher-run reclaimed cured Portland cement concrete, obtained from an approved source. Organic material is prohibited. F. Soil Binder (classified below): Meeting the following requirements when tested following TxDOT Tex-106-E: I. Maximum Liquid Limit: 35 2. Maximum Plasticity Index: 10 5/2013 02710-5 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT G. Mixed Aggregate and Soil Binder: Grading following Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following limits: SIEVE PERCENT RETAINED 1 %-inch 0 to 10 No. 4 45 to 75 No. 40 55 to 80; classified as"Soil Binder" 1. Obtain prior permission from Engineer for use of additives to meet above requirements. H. Asphaltic Seal Cure: 1. Use following as Contractor's option to curing by sprinkling,at no additional cost or time. 2. Cut-back asphalt: MC30 following Section 02742—Prime Coat. 3. Emulsified petroleum resin: EPR-I Prime following Section 02742—Prime Coat. Material Mix and Mixing Equipment J I. Design mix for minimum compressive strength of 650 psi at 7 days following Tex-120-E unconfined compressive strength. 2. Cement Ratio: If compressive strength of field samples of installed products fails to meet strength requirements above, increase cement content in one percent increments up to a maximum of 8 percent. 3. Mix according to the requirement s of this Section, 2.03A, with metering devices adding specified quantities of crushed concrete,cement,and water into mixer. Dry mix crushed concrete and cement to prevent cement balls from forming when water is added. Produce homogeneous and uniformly mixed product. 2.04 HOT MIX ASPHALT BASE COURSE (BLACK BASE) A. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone,or combination thereof that is retained on No. 10 sieve, uniform in quality throughout and free from dirt, organic, or other injurious matter occurring either free or as coating on aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Furnish rock or gravel with Los Angeles abrasion loss not to exceed 40 percent by weight when tested in accordance with V] ASTM C 131. 5/2013 02710-6 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT CIF B. Fine Aggregate: Sand or stone screenings, or combination thereof, passing No. 10 sieve. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Use sand composed of sound,durable stone particles free from foams or other injurious foreign matter. Furnish screenings of same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate. Plasticity index of that part of fine aggregate passing No.40 sieve shall be not more than 6 when tested by Tex-106-E. Sand equivalent shall have a minimum value of 45 when tested by Tex-203-F. C. Composite Aggregate: Conform to the grading limits of TxDOT Item 340 for the paving type indicated on the Plans. D. Asphaltic Material: Moisture-free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347°F,meeting the following requirements: VISCOSITY GRADE TEST AC-10 AC-20 min. max. min. max. Viscosity, 140°F stokes 1000 ± 200 2000 f 400 Viscosity,275°F stokes 1.9 - 2.5 - Penetration, 77° F, 100 g, 5 sec. 85 - 55 - Flash Point, C.E.C., F. 450 - 450 - Solubility in trichloroethylene, percent 99.0 - 99.0 - Tests on residues from thin film oven tests: Viscosity, 140° F stokes - 3000 - 6000 Ductility, 77°F, 5 ems per min., ems 70 - 50 Spot tests Negative for all 1. Material shall not be cracked. 2. Engineer will designate grade of asphalt to use after design tests have been made. Use only one grade of asphalt after grade is determined by test design for project. E. Mixing Plant: Weight-batching or drum mix plant with capacity for producing continuously mixtures meeting specifications. Plant shall have satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment, hot aggregate screens and bins, and dust collectors. Provide equipment to supply materials adequately in accordance with rated capacity of plant and produce finished material within specified tolerances. Following equipment is essential: 1. Cold aggregate bins and proportioning device 2. Dryer 3. Screens 5/2013 02710-7 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 4. Aggregate weight box and batching scales 5. Mixer 6. Asphalt storage and heating devices 7. Asphalt measuring devices 8. Truck scales F. Bins: Separate aggregate into minimum of four bins to produce consistently uniform grading and asphalt content in completed mix. G. Mix: Employ and pay certified testing laboratory to prepare design mixes. Test in accordance with Tex-126-E, Tex-204-F, Tex-208-F, and Tex-227-F. H. Density and Stability Requirements: PERCENT DENSITY PERCENT HVEEM STABILITY PERCENT MIN MAX OPTIMUM NOT LESS THAN 95 99 97 35 I. Proportions for Asphaltic Material: As specified in TxDOT Item 340 for the mix type shown on the Plans. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. Do not mix and place cement stabilized base when temperature is below 40° F and falling. Base may be placed when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35°F and rising. B. Place material on prepared subgrade in uniform layers to produce thickness indicated on Plans. Depth of layers shall not exceed 8 inches. Do not dump material in piles or windrows. C. Spread with approved spreading machine. Conduct spreading so as to eliminate planes of weakness or pockets of non-uniformly graded material resulting from hauling and dumping operations. 5/2013 02710-8of12 J CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT jVD. Provide construction joints between new material and stabilized base that has been in place 4 hours or longer. Joints shall be approximately vertical. Form joint with a temporary header or make vertical cut of previous base immediately before placing subsequent base. E. Use only one longitudinal joint at center line under main lanes and shoulder. Do not use longitudinal joints under frontage roads and ramps. F. Place base so that projecting reinforcing steel from curbs remain at approximate center of base. Secure a firm bond between reinforcement and base. G. Do not place asphaltic base when air temperature is below 50 F and falling. Base may be placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 40 F and rising. H. Haul prepared and heated asphaltic concrete mixture to project in tight vehicles previously cleaned of foreign material. Mixture shall be at temperature between 250° F and 325°F when laid. I. Spread material into place with approved mechanical spreading and finishing machine of screening or tamping type. Use track-mounted finish machine to place base course directly on earth subgrade. corJ. Place base courses 4 inches or greater in thickness in two or more layers,each having compacted thickness of not greater than 4 inches. Spread all lifts. Attain smooth course of uniform density to section, line and grades as indicated on Plans. K. Place courses as nearly continuously as possible. Pass roller over unprotected ends of freshly laid mixture only when mixture has become cooled. When work is resumed, cut back laid material to produce slightly beveled edge for full thickness of course. Remove old material which has been cut away and lay new mix against fresh cut. L. When new asphalt/concrete is laid against existing asphalt,existing asphalt/concrete shall be saw cut full depth to provide straight smooth joint. M. In restricted areas where use of paver is impractical, spread and finish asphalt by mechanical compactor. Use wood or steel forms, rigidly supported to assure correct grade and cross section. Carefully place materials to avoid segregation of mix. Do not broadcast material. Remove any lumps that do not break down readily. Place asphalt courses in same sequence as if placed by machine. 3.03 COMPACTION A. Start compaction as soon as possible but not more than 60 minutes from start of moist mixing. Compact loose mixture with approved tamping rollers until entire depth is uniformly compacted. Do not allow stabilized base to mix with underlying material. 5/2013 02710-9 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT B. Correct irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and J recompacting. C. Apply water to maintain moisture between optimum and 3 percent above optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D 1557. Mix in with a spiked tooth harrow or equal. Reshape surface and lightly scarify to loosen imprints made by equipment. D. Remove and reconstruct sections where average moisture content exceeds ranges specified at time of final compaction. E. Finish by blading surface to final grade after compacting final course. Seal with approved pneumatic tired rollers which are sufficiently light to prevent surface hair line cracking. Rework and recompact at areas where hair line cracking develops. F. Compact to minimum density of 95 percent of modified Proctor density at a moisture content of treated material between optimum and 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 1557, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. G. Maintain surface to required lines and grades throughout operation. 3.04 CURING A. Moist cure for minimum of 7 days before adding pavement courses. Restrict traffic on base to local property access. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling. B. If indicated on Plans,cover base surface with a curing membrane as soon as finishing operation is complete. Apply with approved self-propelled pressure distributer at following rates,or as indicated on Plans: 1. MC30: 0.1 gallon per square yard. 2. EPR-1 Prime: 0.15 gallon per square yard. C. Do not use cutback asphalt during the period of April 16 to September 15. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Completed surface shall be smooth and conform to typical section and established lines and grades. B. Top surface of base course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section, or in 16 foot length. 5/2013 02710- 10of12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT / 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. At the direction of the Engineer, a minimum of one core will be taken at random locations per 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of base to determine in-place depth. B. Contractor may, at his own expense, request additional cores in the vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. If the average of the tests falls below the required depth,place and compact additional material at no cost to the Owner. C. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 at a random location near each depth determination core. Rework and recompact areas that do not conform to compaction requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Fill cores and density test sections with new compacted cement stabilized base. 3.07 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT A. Recompact pavement sections not meeting specified densities or replace them with new asphaltic concrete material. Replace with new material, sections of base course not meeting surface test requirements or having unacceptable surface texture. Patch 4111, asphalt pavement sections in accordance with procedures established by Asphalt Institute. B. Remove and replace areas of asphaltic concrete base course found by cores to be deficient in thickness by more than 10 percent at no cost to Owner. Use new asphaltic concrete base material of thickness shown on Plans. C. Areas of asphaltic concrete base course found by cores to be deficient in thickness by less than 10 percent shall be remedied at the Owner's direction by one of the following methods: 1. Remove and replace using new asphaltic concrete base material of thickness shown on Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no cost to Owner. 2. Reduce the Unit Price by the ratio of the average thickness (as determined by cores)to the thickness required. D. No adjustments will be made for excess thickness. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain stabilized base in good condition until completion of work. Repair defects immediately by replacing base to full depth. 5/2013 02710-I1 ofI2 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT B. Protect the asphalt membrane,if used,from being picked up by traffic. The membrane via may remain in place when proposed surface courses or other base courses are to be applied. END OF SECTION V J 5/2013 02710- 12 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT 4111, Section 02741 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface courses of compacted mixture of coarse and fine aggregates and asphaltic material. B. References to Technical Specifications: I. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02742—Prime Coat 5. Section 02743—Tack Coat C. Referenced Standards: I. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" b. ASTM C 131, `Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" 2. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Tex-106-E, "Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils" b. Tex-203-F, "Sand Equivalent Test" c. Tex-126-E,"Molding,Testing,and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Material" d. Tex-204-F, "Design of Bituminous Mixtures" e. Tex-208-F, "Test for Stabilometer Value of Bituminous Material" f. Tex-207-F, "Determining Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures" g. Tex-227-F, "Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures" h. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges,2004 Adoption 1) Item 340, "Dense-Graded Hot-Mix Asphalt(Method)" 411, 5/2013 02741 - 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT V 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for asphaltic concrete pavement is on square yard basis. Separate measurement will be made for each different required thickness of pavement. B. Payment for asphaltic concrete pavement includes all labor and materials required to complete placement as indicated on Plans. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. D. Refer to this Section,3.07"Noncomforming Pavement"for unit price adjustments for deficient thickness. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit certificates that asphaltic materials and aggregates meet requirements of this Section. C. Submit proposed design mix and test data for each type and strength of surface course in Work. J D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics of mixing plant for approval. E. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics of spreading and finishing machine for approval. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Coarse Aggregate:Crushed stone or gravel or combination thereof,that is retained on No. 10 sieve, uniform in quality throughout and free from dirt, organic or other injurious matter occurring either free or as coating on aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Furnish rock or gravel with Los Angeles 5/2013 02741 -2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT abrasion loss not to exceed 40 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. B. Fine Aggregate: Sand or stone screenings or combination of both passing No. 10 sieve. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Use sand composed of sound,durable stone particles free from loams or other injurious foreign matter. Furnish screenings of same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate. Plasticity index of that part of fine aggregate passing No.40 sieve shall be not more than 6 when tested by Tex-106-E. Sand equivalent shall have a minimum value of 45 when tested by Tex-203-F. C. Composite Aggregate: Conform to the grading limits of TxDOT Item 340 for the paving type indicated on the Plans. D. Asphaltic Material: Moisture-free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347° F, meeting following requirements: VISCOSITY GRADE AC-10 AC-20 TEST MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. 411, Viscosity, 140°stokes 1000 +200 2000 ±400 Viscosity, 275°stokes 1.9 - 2.5 - Penetration, 77°, 100 g, 5 sec. 85 - 55 - Flash Point, C.O.C., F. 450 - 450 - Solubility in trichloroethylene,percent 99.0 - 99.0 - Tests on residues from thin film oven tests: Viscosity, 140°stokes - 3000 - 6000 Ductility, 77°, 5 ems per min.,cms 70 - 50 - Spot tests Negative for all grades I. Material shall not be cracked. 2. The Engineer will designate grade of asphalt to use after design tests have been made. Use only one grade of asphalt after grade is determined by test design for project. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Mixing Plant: Weight-batching or drum mix plant with capacity for producing continuously mixtures meeting specifications. Plant shall have satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment, hot aggregate screens and bins, and dust 5/2013 02741 -3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT j collectors. Provide equipment to supply materials adequately in accordance with rated J capacity of plant and produce finished material within specified tolerances. Following equipment is essential: Cold aggregate bins and proportioning device. 2. Dryer. 3. Screens. 4. Aggregate weight box and batching scales. 5. Mixer. 6. Asphalt storage and heating devices. 7. Asphalt measuring devices. 8. Truck scales. B. Bins: Separate aggregate into minimum of four bins to produce consistently uniform grading and asphalt content in completed mix. 2.03 MIXES A. Employ and pay certified testing laboratory to prepare design mixes. Test in accordance with Tex-126-E or Tex-204-F and Tex-208-F. B. Density and Stability Requirements: yea PERCENT DENSITY PERCENT HVEEM STABILITY PERCENT MIN. MAX. OPTIMUM NOT LESS THAN 95 99 97 35 C. Proportions for Asphaltic Material: As specified in TxDOT Item 340 for the paving type shown on the Plans. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted base course is ready to support imposed loads. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prime Coat: If indicated on the Plans,apply a prime coat conforming to requirements of Section 02742—Prime Coat. Do not apply a tack coat until primed base has cured j to satisfaction of the Engineer. 5/2013 02741 -4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT tor B. Tack Coat: Conform to requirements of Section 02743 — Tack Coat. Where the mixture will adhere to the surface on which it is to be placed without use of a tack coat, tack coat may be eliminated if approved by the Engineer. C. Do not use cutback asphalt during the period of April 16 to September 15. 3.03 PLACEMENT A. Do not place asphaltic mixture in rain or when air temperature is below 50° F and falling. Mixture may be placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 40 F and rising. B. Haul prepared and heated asphaltic concrete mixture to the project in tight vehicles previously cleaned of foreign material. Mixture shall be at temperature between 250° F and 325°F when laid. C. Spread material into place with approved mechanical spreading and finishing machine of screening or tamping type. Use track-mounted finish machine to place base course directly on earth subgrade. D. Surface Course Material: Surface course 2 inches or less in thickness may be spread in one lift. Spread all lifts in such manner that,when compacted,finished course will be smooth,of uniform density,and will be to section, line and grade as shown. Coincide construction joints on surface courses with lime lines, or as directed by the Engineer. E. Place courses as nearly continuously as possible. Pass roller over unprotected ends of freshly laid mixture only when mixture has cooled. When work is resumed,cut back laid material to produce slightly beveled edge for full thickness of course. Remove old material which has been cut away and lay new mix against fresh cut. F. When new asphalt is laid against existing or old asphalt mat, existing or old asphalt shall be saw cut full depth to provide straight smooth joint. G. In restricted areas where use of paver is impractical, spread and finish asphalt by mechanical compactor. Use wood or steel forms, rigidly supported to assure correct grade and cross section. Carefully place materials to avoid segregation of mix. Do not broadcast material. Remove any lumps that do not break down readily. Place asphalt courses in same sequence as if placed by machine. 3.04 COMPACTION A. Begin rolling while pavement is still hot and as soon as it will bear roller without undue displacement or hair cracking. Keep wheels properly moistened with water to prevent adhesion of surface mixture. Do not use excessive water. 411, 5/2013 02741 -5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT B. Compress surface thoroughly and uniformly, first with power-driven, 3-wheel, or tandem rollers weighing from 8 to 10 tons. Obtain subsequent compression by starting at side and rolling longitudinally toward center of pavement,overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half width of rear wheels. Make alternate trips slightly different in length. Continue rolling until no further compression can be obtained and all rolling marks are eliminated. Complete all rolling before mixture temperature drops below 175 F. C. Use tandem roller for final rolling. Double coverage with approved pneumatic roller on asphaltic concrete surface is acceptable after flat wheel and tandem rolling has been completed. D. Along walls,curbs,headers and similar structures,and in all locations not accessible to rollers,compact mixture thoroughly with lightly oiled tamps. E. Compact binder course and surface course to density not less than 93 percent of the maximum possible density of voidless mixture composed of same materials in like proportions. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Furnish templates for checking surface in finished sections. Maximum deflection of templates, when supported at center, shall not exceed 1/8 inch. B. Completed surface,when tested with 10-foot straightedge laid parallel to center line of pavement,shall show no deviation in excess of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Correct any surface not meeting this requirement. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. At the direction of the Engineer, minimum of one core may be taken at random locations per 1,000 feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of asphalt concrete pavement to determine in-place depth and density. B. In-place density will be determined in accordance with Tex-207-F and Tex-227-F from cores or sections of asphaltic base located near each core. Other methods of determining in-place density,which correlate satisfactorily with results obtained from roadway specimens, may be used when approved by the Engineer. C. Contractor may,at his own expense,request three additional cores in vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. In-place depth at these locations shall be average depth of four cores. D. Fill cores and density test sections with new compacted asphaltic concrete pavement. 5/2013 02741 -6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.07 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT A. Recompact pavement sections not meeting specified densities or replace them with new asphaltic concrete material. Replace with new material sections of surface course pavement not meeting surface test requirements or having unacceptable surface texture. Patch asphalt pavement sections in accordance with procedures established by Asphalt Institute. B. Remove and replace areas of asphaltic concrete pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by more than 10 percent at no cost to Owner. Use new asphaltic concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans. C. Areas of asphaltic concrete pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by less than 10 percent shall be remedied at the Owner's direction by one of the following methods: 1. Remove and replace using new asphaltic concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no cost to Owner. 2. Reduce the Unit Price by the ratio of the average thickness(as determined by cores)to the thickness required. D. No adjustments will be made for excess thickness. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Do not open pavement to traffic until 12 hours after completion of rolling,or as shown on Plans. B. Maintain asphaltic concrete pavement in good condition until completion of Work. C. Repair defects immediately by replacing asphaltic concrete pavement to full depth at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 4111/ 5/2013 02741 -7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PRIME COAT 411110 Section 02742 PRIME COAT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prime coat for asphaltic concrete paving B. References to Technical Specifications: I. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350— Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for prime coat under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B. If prime coat is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement 4.1 and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit product data for proposed prime coat. C. Submit report of recent calibration of distributor. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CUTBACK ASPHALT A. Provide moisture-free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347° F and which meets following requirements: 1. Asphalt material for prime coat shall be MC-30 or MC-70 and shall meet following requirements: 5/2013 02742- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PRIME COAT J TYPE-GRADE MC-30 MC-70 PROPERTIES MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. Water,percent --- 0.2 --- 0.2 Flash Point, T.O.C., °F 100 --- 100 --- Kinematic Viscosity at 140°F, est 30 60 70 140 2. Distillate shall be as follows,expressed as percent by volume of total distillate to 680°F: MC-30 MC-70 MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. to 437°F --- 25 --- 20 to 500°F 40 70 20 60 to 600°F 75 93 65 90 V Residue from 680°F Distillation, -Volume, percent 50 --- 55 --- 3. Tests on Distillation Residue: MC-30 MC-70 MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. Penetration at 77°F, 100g, 5 sec. 120 250 120 250 Ductility at 77°F, 5 cm/min. ems 100* --- 100* -- Solubility in trichloroethylene, % 99 --- 99 --- Spot Test All Negative * If penetration of residue is more than 200 and ductility at 77° F is less than 100 cm, material will be acceptable if its ductility at 60° F is more than 100. 1111) 5/2013 02742-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PRIME COAT E 2.02 EMULSIFIED PETROLEUM RESIN �y A. EPR-1 Prime: Slow curing emulsion of petroleum resin and asphalt cement conforming to the following requirements: PROPERTIES MIN. MAX. Fural Viscosity at 77 °F, sec 14 40 Residue by Evaporation, %by weight 60 - Sieve Test,% - 0.1 Particle Charge Test Positive Tests on the Distilation Residue: Flash Point, COC(F) 400 - Kinematic Viscosity @ 140°F (cSt) 190 350 B. For use,EPR-I may be diluted with water up to a maximum of three parts water to one part EPR-1 in order to achieve the desired concentration of residual resin/asphalt and facilitate application. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify base is ready to support imposed loads. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean base course surface of loose material by brooming prior to application of prime coat. B. Prepare sufficient base in advance of paving for efficient operations. 3.03 APPLICATION,GENERAL A. Apply prime coat with approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor. Distribute prime coat evenly and smoothly under pressure necessary for proper distribution. B. Keep all storage tanks, piping,retorts,booster tanks and distributors used in handling asphaltic materials clean and in good operating conditions. Conduct operations so that asphaltic material does not become contaminated. C. If yield of asphaltic material appears to be in error, recalibrate distributor prior to continuing Work. 5/2013 02742-3o14 CITY OF PEARLAND PRIME COAT D. Maintain the surface until Work is accepted by Owner. 3.04 APPLICATION, CUTBACK ASPHALT A. Do not use cutback asphalt during the period of April 16 to September 15. B. Do not place prime coat in rain or when air temperature is below 60°F and falling. Materials may be placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 50°F and rising. C. Distribute at rate of 0.25 to 0.35 gallons per square yard. D. Provide all necessary facilities for determining temperature of asphaltic material in all heating equipment and in distributor, for determining rate of application, and for obtaining uniformity at junction of two distributor loads. Provide and maintain in good working order, recording thermometer at storage heating unit at all times. E. Temperature of application shall be based on temperature-viscosity relationship that will permit application of asphalt with viscosity of 100 to 125 centistokes. Maintain asphalt within 15°F of temperature required to meet viscosity. Selected temperature shall be within following range: PRIME COAT TYPE MINIMUM (° F) MAXIMUM (°F) Nola MC-30 70 150 MC70 125 175 F. Do not allow temperature of MC-30 to exceed 175° F at any time. G. Do not allow temperature of MC-70 to exceed 200°Fat any time. 3.05 APPLICATION,EMULSIFIED PETROLEUM RESIN A. Do not place prime coat in rain or when air temperature is below 36° F and falling. B. Distribute at rate of 0.15 to 0.25 gallons per square yard. 3.06 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. No traffic or placing of subsequent courses shall be permitted over freshly applied prime coat until authorized by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02742-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TACK COAT (1111, Section 02743 ` TACK COAT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tack coat for asphaltic concrete paving. B. References to Technical Specifications: I. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittals C. Referenced Standards: American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 244, "Standard Test Methods and Practices for Emulsified Asphalts" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (1119 A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for tack coat under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B. If tack coat is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit product data for proposed tack coat. C. Submit report of recent calibration of distributor. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CUTBACK ASPHALT 41110 A. Provide moisture-free, homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347° F and which meets following requirements: 5/2013 02743- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TACK COAT 1. Asphalt material for tack coat: RC-250 and meet following: PROPERTIES MIN. MAX. Water, percent --- 0.2 Flash Point, T.O.C., °F 80 --- Kinematic Viscosity at 140°F, cst 250 400 2. Distillate: Expressed as percent by volume of total distillate to 680° F: MIN MAX to 437°F 40 75 to 500°F 65 90 to 600°F 85 --- Residue from 680° F Distillation Volume,percent 70 --- 3. Tests on Distillation Residue: MIN. MAX Penetration at 77°F, 100g, 5 sec. 100 150 Ductility at 77°F, 5 cms 100 --- Solubility in trichloroethylene,% 99 --- Spot Test All Negative 2.02 EMULSION A. Provide homogeneous material which shall show no separation of asphalt after mixing and shall meet the viscosity requirements at any time within 30 days after delivery. I. Emulsion material for tack coat: SS-1 and meet following: 5/2013 02743-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TACK COAT MIN. MAX Furol Viscosity at 77° F, sec. 30 100 Residue by Distillation,% 60 --- Oil Portion of Distillate, % --- 2 Sieve Test, % --- 0.1 Miscibility(Standard Test) Passing Passing Cement Mixing,% --- 2.0 Storage Stability, I Day, % --- 1 Test on Residue: Penetration at 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec 120 160 Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % 97.5 --- Ductility at 77°F, 5 cm/min,cms 100 --- 2. For emulsions used for tack coats during the period of April 16 to September 15,volatile organic compound solvents(VOC)shall not exceed 12%by weight 411/ when tested in accordance with ASTM D 244. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted base is ready to support imposed loads. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean base course or concrete surface of loose material by brooming prior to application of tack coat. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply tack coat uniformly by use of approved distributor at rate not to exceed 0.05 gallons per square yard of surface. B. Paint all contact surfaces of curbs and structures,and all joints with thin uniform coat of tack coat. 5/2013 02743 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TACK COAT C. Cutback Asphalt: V 1. Do not use cutback asphalt during the period of April 16 to September 15. 2. Do not place tack coat in rain or when air temperature is below 50° F and falling. Materials may be placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 40° F and rising. 3. Temperature of tack coat shall be between 125° F and 180° F when applied. 4. Do not heat tack coat above 200° F at any time. 3.04 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. No traffic or placing of subsequent courses shall be permitted over freshly applied tack coat until authorized by the Engineer. END OF SECTION J 5/2013 02743 -4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL 411110 Section 02910 TOPSOIL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing and placing topsoil for finish grading and for seeding, sodding, and planting. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200- Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02200—Site Preparation 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for topsoil under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which topsoil is a component. B If topsoil is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product quality,material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02910- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural sandy loam surface soil obtained from excavation or borrow operations having the following characteristics: 1. pH value of between 5.5 and 6.5. 2. Liquid limit: topsoil not exceed 50 3. Plasticity index: 10 or less. 4. Gradation: maximum of 40 percent with a passing the#280 sieve. B Topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil,clay lumps,weeds,non-soil materials and other litter or contamination. Topsoil shall not contain roots,stumps,and stones larger than 2 inches. C Obtain topsoil from the top material from naturally well drained areas where topsoil occurs at a minimum depth of 4 inches and has similar characteristics to that found at the placement site. Do not obtain topsoil from areas infected with a growth of, or reproductive parts of nut grass or other noxious weeds. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify that excavation and embankment operations have been completed to correct lines and grades. 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND SOTCKPILING A Conform to topsoil stripping and stockpiling requirements of Section 02200 — Site Preparation. 3.03 PLACEMENT A Contractor shall conduct erosion control practices described in Section 01566-Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation during topsoil placement operations. B For areas to be seeded or sodded, scarify or plow existing surface material to a minimum depth of 4 inches,or as indicated on the Plans. Remove any vegetation and foreign inorganic material. Place 4 inches of topsoil on the loosened material and roll lightly with an appropriate lawn roller to consolidate the topsoil. C Increase depth of topsoil to 6 inches when placed over cement stabilized sand used as bedding and backfill material. D For areas to receive bushes or trees,excavate existing material and place topsoil to the depth and dimensions shown on the Plans. 07/2006 02910-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL E Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.04 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain topsoil until a vegetative cover is established. B Repair areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION cot 07/2006 02910-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING Section 02921 HYDROMULCH SEEDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Seeding, fertilizing, mulching, and maintaining areas of commercial, industrial, or undeveloped land disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01 140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMEN AND PAYMENT A Measurement for hydromulch seeding is on a per acre basis,measured and complete in place. B Payment for hydromulch seeding shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and preparation necessary for application and maintenance. C No payment shall be made for hydromulch seeding used in restoration of areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit certification from supplier that each type of seed conforms to these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Seed Law. Certification shall accompany seed delivery. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02921 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARL4ND HYDROMULCH SEEDING 2.0 PRODUCTS J 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Seed: Conform to U.S.Department of Agriculture rules and regulations of the Federal Seed Act and the Texas Seed Law. Seed shall be certified 90 percent pure and furnish 80 percent germination and meet the following requirements: 1. Rye: Fresh, clean, Italian rye grass seed (lollium multi-forum), mixed in labeled Proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and germination must be labeled. Deliver in original unopened containers. 2. Bermuda: Extra-fancy, treated, lawn type common bermuda (Cynodon dactylon). Deliver in original,unopened container showing weight,analysis, name of vender, and germination test results. 3. Wet,moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted. D Fertilizer:Dry and free flowing,inorganic,water soluble commercial fertilizer,which is uniform in composition. Deliver in unopened containers which bear the manufacturers guaranteed analysis. Caked,damaged,or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be accepted. Fertilizer shall contain minimum percentages of the following elements: Nitrogen: 10 Percent Phosphoric Acid: 20 Percent Potash: 10 Percent E Mulch: Virgin wood cellulose fibers from whole wood chips having a minimum of 20 percent fibers 0.42 inches(10.7 mm)in length and 0.01 inches(0.27 mm)in diameter. Mulch shall be dyed green for coverage verification purposes. F Soil Stabilizer: "Terra Tack" 1 or approved equal. U Weed control agent: Pre-emergent herbicide for grass areas, "Benefin" or approved equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start or perform work under conditions that are not satisfactory to perform tasks due to inclement or impending inclement weather. B After the areas to receive hydromulch seeding have been brought to grade,rake out any foreign organic or inorganic material, including stones, hard clay lumps, and other debris. 07/2006 02921 -2 of 4 • CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING corC Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact a layer of topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 —Topsoil. F Surface of topsoil shall be smooth and free of weeds,rocks,and other foreign material immediately before applying hydromulch seeding. 3.02 APPLICATION A Seed: Apply uniformly at the following rates for type of seed and planting date: APPLICATION PLANTING TYPE RATE DATE POUNDS/A Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Jan 1 to Mar 31 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Apr 1 to Sep 30 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Oct I to Dec 31 Annual Rye Grass(Gulf) 30 B Fertilizer: Apply uniformly at a rate of 500 pounds per acre. C Mulch: Apply uniformly at a rate of 50 pounds per 1000 square feet. D Soil stabilizer: Apply uniformly at a rate of 40 pounds per acre. E Weed control agent: Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate prior to Hydromulching. F Suspend all operations under conditions of drought,excessive moisture,high winds,or extreme or prolonged cold. Obtain the Engineer's approval before resuming operations. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintain grassed areas by watering, fertilizing,weeding,and trimming as required to establish and sustain 70% acceptable vegetative cover. B For areas seeded in the fall, continue maintenance the following spring until an acceptable lawn is established. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 07/2006 02921 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain grassed areas a minimum of 90 days, or as required to establish an acceptable lawn. B Once a lawn is established, protect and maintain it until completion of the Work. C Replace seeded areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION J 07/2006 02921 -4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 4110 Section 02922 SODDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Sodding areas of residential lawns disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350— Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Definitions: 1. Lawn - ground covered with fine textured grass kept neatly mowed. 2. Sod-blocks, squares, strips of turf grass, and adhering soil used for vegetative planting. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for utility or paving. B If sodding is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C No payment shall be made for sodding of restoration areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material sources and product quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. cipv 07/2006 02922- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Fertilizer: Available nutrient percentage by weight: 12 percent nitrogen, 4 percent phosphoric acid, and 8 percent potash; or 15 percent nitrogen, 5 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. D Weed and Insect Treatment: Provide acceptable treatment to protect sod from weed and insect infestation. Submit treatment method to the Engineer for approval. All insect and disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas E Water: Potable, available on-site through Contractor's water trucks. Do not use private resident's water. 2.02 SOD A Species: Bermuda (Cynodon Dactylon), Buffalo (Buchloe Dactyloides), or St. Augustine to match existing or as directed. B Contents: 95 percent permanent grass suitable to climate in which it is to be placed; not more than 5 percent weeds and undesirable grasses; good texture, free from obnoxious grasses, roots, stones and foreign materials. C Size: 12 inch wide strips,uniform in thickness(2 inch minimum with clean-cut edges. D Sod is to be supplied and maintained in a healthy condition as evidenced by the grass being a normal,green color. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Do not start work during inclement or impending inclement weather. Perform Sodding only when weather and soil conditions are deemed by Engineer to be suitable for proper placement. 07/2006 02922-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING B After the areas to receive sod are brought to grade, rake out any foreign organic or inorganic material, including stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 — Topsoil. Top soil shall be free of weeds and foreign material immediately before sodding. F Spread 2-inch (-±1")layer of Bank Sand over prepared topsoil. G Prior to placing sod,rake areas smooth,free from unsightly variations,bumps,ridges, or depressions, and completely free from stones,hard clay lumps and other debris. H Apply fertilizer at a rate of 25 lbs/1000 SF. Apply after raking soil surface and not more than 48 hours prior to laying sod. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of soil. Lightly water to aid in dissipation of fertilizer. 3.02 APPLICATION A Lay sod with closely fitted joints leaving no voids and with ends of sod strips staggered. Sod shall be laid within 24 hours of harvesting. B After sod is laid, irrigate thoroughly to secure 6-inch minimum penetration into soil below sod. C Tamp and roll sod with approved equipment to eliminate minor irregularities and to form close contact with soil bed immediately after planting and watering. Submit type of tamping and rolling equipment to be used to the Engineer for approval, prior to construction. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintenance Period: 1. Begin maintenance immediately after each section of grass sod is installed and continue for a 30-day period from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Re-sod unacceptable areas. 3. Water,fertilize, control disease and insect pests, mow,edge,replace unacceptable materials, and perform other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice to ensure normal, vigorous and healthy growth. All disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas. 4. Notify Engineer 10 days before end of maintenance period for inspection. B Watering: 1. Water lawn areas once a day with minimum 1/2 inch water for the first 3 weeks after area is sodded. 07/2006 02922-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 2. After 3-week period, water twice a week with 3/4 inch of water each time unless comparable amount has been provided by rain. 3. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil unless soil is in frozen condition. 4. Water in the morning to enable soil to absorb maximum amount of water with minimum evaporation. C Mowing: 1. Mow sod at intervals which will keep grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches. 2. Set mower blades at 2-1/2 inches. 3. Do not remove more than one-half of grass leaf surface. 4. Sodded areas requiring mowing within 1 month after installation, shall be mowed with a light-weight rotary type mower. The sod shall be mowed only when dry and not in a saturated or soft condition. 5. Remove grass clippings during or immediately after mowing. D Fertilizer and Pest Control: 1. Evenly spread fertilizer composite at a rate of 40 pounds per 5,000 square feet or as recommended by manufacturer. Fertilizer shall not be placed until 2 weeks after placement of sod. 2. Restore bare or thin areas by topdressing with a mix of 50 percent sharp sand and 50 percent sphagnum peat moss. 3. Apply mixture 1/4 to 1/2 inch thick. 4. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by treatment manufacturer. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01 140- Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain sod in good condition until 30 days after Substantial Completion. B Replace sod damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION V 07/2006 02922-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING CSection 02931 LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing all plants and trees, labor, equipment, appliances and materials for landscape and tree planting. Rough and finish grading is part of the landscape work. B References to Technical Specifications: Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02910—Topsoil 4. Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding 5. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for Landscape Planting is on a Lump Sum. B Payment for Tree Planting is on lump sum basis for each tree planted. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit samples of the plants and grasses to be used for approval prior to installation. Inspection will be done on the project site. C Provide materials from the same source and of the same quality and variety as those inspected and approved. B Soils and/or compost materials must be approved at their source prior to delivery. 1.04 REFERENCES A ANSI Z 60.1 -Nursery Stock. B Federal Specification Q-P-1 66E- Peat, Moss; Peat, Humus; and Peat, Reed-Sedge. 1.05 SCHEDULE A The plant schedule gives quantities, scientific names, common names, sizes, and special remarks. 12/2014 02931 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING B The plant list conforms with Standardized Plant Names, 1942,and American Standard for Nursery Stock, 1949, revised April 14, 2014, as prepared by the American Joint vie Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature and the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. C In case of discrepancies between the plant list and drawings, the working drawings shall govern. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Pack all plant material to provide protection against damage from wind, weather or other possible sources. Tie plants to prevent whipping when shipment is made by truck. B When shipment is made by rail,pack plants and ventilate cars as required to prevent sweating. C Provide a platform from all B&B root balls over 24 inches in diameter. D Store plants on the site as directed. E Spray with anti-transpirant at time of delivery in warm season months. Apply at rates in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F Ship trees with Certificates of Inspection as required by governing authorities. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. Do not remove container grown stock from containers before time of planting. G Deliver packaged materials in fully labeled original containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at Site. H Materials shall not be pruned prior to installation unless approved by the Engineer in writing. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape. Use protective covering during delivery. 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS A Substitution of larger size or better grade than specified will be allowed,but with no increase in unit cost. B Substitution of an alternate species may be accepted upon written approval from the Engineer. 1.08 ACCEPTANCE AND APPROVAL A There will be no partial acceptance of grasses. ` 12/2014 02931 -2 of 15 J CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING B Upon Contractor's request,final approval will be made within 15 working days of date of notice to the Engineer if contracted work has been satisfactorily completed. C Final approval of grasses will be given when the following conditions are met: 1. There are no bare spots larger than 9 inches square. 2. The total area of bare spots does not exceed 5 percent of the entire grass area. 1.09 WARRANTY A Provide I-year warranty on all plants and grasses. The warranty period commences after final completion. B Replace plants that fail during the warranty period according to the specifications governing the original plants. C Periodically inspect plants for proper watering and spraying,during warranty period. D Damage caused by natural hazards such as hail,high winds or storm is not covered by the warranty. E Plant materials and grasses which die due to normal insects or diseases are included in the warranty. F Existing in situ plant material required to be moved on the site will be protected under 4110 the warranty. G Contractor shall warrant trees against defects including death,unsatisfactory growth,or loss of shape due to improper pruning,maintenance,or weather conditions,for I year after completion of planting. Contractor shall plumb leaning trees during warranty period. H Remove and replace trees found to be dead during warranty period. Remove and replace trees which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period,or if approved by the Engineer, extend warranty period for such trees for a full growing season. 1.10 SOIL ANALYSIS A Submit for approval an analysis of all soils obtained from off-site sources prior to delivery. B Analysis of existing soil is not required. 1.11 PLANT CERTIFICATES A Submit inspection certificates approved by the Engineer as required by law with the invoice for each shipment or order of stock: 1. Submit certificates to the Engineer for review in ample time to be reviewed and 4111110 meet installation schedule. 12/2014 02931 -3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1.12 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A Take all reasonable precautions to prevent injury to people and to avoid damage to existing structures,plants and grasses. Keep the area free of hazardous obstructions. B Construct barricades where necessary for the protection of persons and property. Mark all barricades with red and white paint and with red reflectors. Erect barricades in the following locations: 1. Areas dangerous to workmen and passersby. 2. Along adjoining property that requires protection. 3. Across streets and walks that are temporarily closed or rerouted. 4. Around plants and trees to be protected. C Excavations larger than I foot deep and I foot wide must be covered when not attended. D Existing trees which may be subject to damage must be protected by fencing or boxing. B During the course of planting operations, protect all installed plants and lawns from damage. If heavy equipment or materials must be moved across lawns,use planks or pontoons to protect the turf. Similarly protect walks across which heavy equipment must pass. 1.13 DEFINITIONS A In situ refers to any soil which is existing and in place on the project site at the time landscape work commences. B Establishment period refers to a period of45 days after installation during which time 5 percent of the construction costs will be withheld. 1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Landscaper shall be a firm specializing in landscape and planting work. B Do not make substitutions of approved trees unless approved in writing by the Engineer. If specified planting material is not obtainable, submit proof of non- availability together with proposal for use of equivalent material. Substitutions of larger size or better grade than specified will be allowed, but with no increase in unit price. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A Topsoil: Conform to requirements of Section 02910 -Topsoil. B Peat moss, bark, and fertilizer: Use material recommended by nursery for establishment of healthy stock after replanting. Moss shall conform to requirements of tqj Federal Specification Q-P-166E. 12/2014 02931 -4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 415, 2.02 FERTILIZER A Provide an inorganic commercial fertilizer which is uniform in composition,dry and free flowing, in original unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Caked, damaged or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be accepted. 1. For lawns: 12-24-12. 2. For ground cover areas,shrub beds and tree holes: 20-10-5(Except for Genus Pyrus(Pear). 2.03 ADDITIVES A Adjustment of pH. For topsoil to attain the specified pH level, furnish raw, ground agricultural limestone containing not less than 85 percent calcium carbonate of which 50 percent will pass through a 100-mesh sieve and 90 percent through a 70-mesh sieve. Wait 2 months after planting before application of fertilizer. 1. following table is a guideline to establish the pounds of limestone needed per 1000 square feet of turf: LIMESTONE NEEDED PER 1000 SQUARE FEET SOIL PH SANDS,LOAMY SANDS SANDY LOAM CLAY LOAM,CLAY >6.0 0 0 0 5.1 -6.0 50 75 100 <5.0 100 125 175 B Humus. Provide a rich humus material free of sticks, stones, weedy roots, or other foreign matter. Humus must have ample water holding capacity and plant food retention. Use a humus with a dark brown to black color. C Dressing Mulch. Provide pine or redwood bark that is evenly shredded,consisting of 90 percent organic matter, brown in color, and free of harmful minerals. Maximum particle size not to exceed 3 inches in diameter. D Sharp Sand. Obtain clean sharp sand of hard durable grains, free from dirt, organic matter or other impurities. Use sand with a grade between 0.05 mm and 2 mm. E Concrete Gravel. Provide clean,crushed stone consisting of hard,durable,uncoated particles free from injurious amounts of soft friable, thin or laminated pieces. Use gravel which conforms to ASTM C 33. The sieve size will be 3/4 inch, 90 to 100 percent passing. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS A Root Ball Anchors: 1. Duck bills will be used to secure the root ball anchors. B Edging: 12/2014 02931 -5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1. Provide 1/2-inch x 4 inches, Cypress or Treated Lumber headerboard. 2. Provide 1 inch x 2 inches x 12 inches, Cypress or Treated Lumber stakes. C Cloth for Balling Trees. Use burlap of jute weighing at least 7.2 ounces per square yard. Secure balled plants with 2-ply twine made of jute. D Paper for Wrapping Trees. Use first quality, 4-inch-wide bituminous impregnated tape, corrugated or crepe paper, specifically manufactured for tree wrapping and having qualities to resist insect infestation. E Materials for Flagging Trees: Mark guyed trees with surveyors white plastic tape. 2. Use surveyors plastic tape for marking as follows. a. Red to be removed. b. Yellow to be transplanted. c. Green to remain. d. Blue to identify special handling. F Labels. Legibly label plants with durable labels that identify the plant by scientific and common name. Use waterproof ink. G Tree Seal. All pruning cuts,bruises,or scars over 3/4 inch in diameter on trees will be treated with a commercial tree wound dressing. H Polyethylene. Use virgin base,resin blended polyethylene sheeting with carbon black concentrate of 2.5 percent. 2.05 SPRAYS A Sterilization: 1. Use approved solution of Dyclomec 4G, or equal, for areas to be planted. 2. Use Pramitol,or equal, for areas to be paved. B Herbicides: 1. Use an approved systemic non-selective,post emergent herbicide on specified areas to kill all vegetation. 2. Use Confront,or equal, for general control of broadleaf weeds in lawns. 3. Use Preemerg, Eptam, Dryclomec, or equal for ground cover. 4. Use an approved pre-emergent to control seed germination in specified areas. C Antitranspirant: 1. Use approved antitranspirant for all plant material that is stored and/or heeled- in on the site. 2. Use approved antitranspirant on all planted trees and shrubs. D Root Stimulant. Use approved root stimulant on all newly planted trees,shrubs,vines and/or ground cover areas. 12/2014 02931 -6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 4.0 2.06 PLANT CHARACTERISTICS A Provide plants which are true to type and name,and typical of their species or variety. Plants must have a normal, well-developed branch structure, with a vigorous root system, and must be generally sound and healthy. Use plants which are free from defects, including: I. Disfiguring knots. 2. Sun scald. 3. Injuries. 4. Bark abrasions. 5. Plant diseases. 6. Insect eggs. 7. Borers. 8. Infestations. B Select well-formed plants balanced between height and spread typical of the species or variety with branches in normal position. Heading back plants to meet size limits will not be permitted. C Unless otherwise specified, all plants will be nursery grown and at least twice transplanted. Use plants which have been growing under similar climatic conditions to those of the project for at least 2 years prior to the date of the contract. Recently stepped-up plants will not be acceptable. All B&B or bare root plants must be freshly dug; heeled-in or cold storage plants will not be accepted. D Balled,bare root,and container-grown plants will conform to the definitions given in American Standards for Nursery Stock. E No tree will be accepted which has had leaders cut or damaged, or which has a thin, weak trunk and/or poorly formed tops. F Regardless of sample selection, a plant may be rejected at the site by the Engineer. 2.07 NURSERY STOCK A Deciduous Trees. Provide trees which are straight and symmetrical and have a persistently preferred main leader. The crown must be in good overall proportion to the entire height of the tree. Where a clump is specified,a plant having a minimum of three stems originating from a common base at the ground line will be furnish. Measure trees by average caliper of trunk. I. For trees up to 4 inches in diameter, measure caliper 6 inches above ground. 2. For trunks larger than 4 inches, measure caliper 12 inches above ground. B Evergreen Trees. Form of the top will be typical of the species and not unnaturally sheared or color-treated. Measure by average caliper. Caliper will be taken 6 inches above the ground on trees up to 4 inches in diameter and 12 inches above the ground 400 on trees larger than 4 inches. 12/2014 02931 -7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING C Vines and Ground Cover. Provide plants which are container-grown for sufficient time to ensure adequate root growth to hold the soil in place and retain the original shape when removed from the container. 2.08 FIELD—COLLECTED PLANTS A Field-collected plants must be grown in favorable locations that ensure fibrous roots and vigorous growth. Such plants will be selected on site by the Landscape architect. B Provide balls at least 1/3 greater in diameter than those specified for nursery stock. C If dug in dormant season and bare root is acceptable, the spread of roots must be at least 1/3 greater than the spread of roots for bare root nursery stock. 2.09 SEED A Seasonal Limitations: 1. Bermuda: a. Hulled seeds may be planted between October and March. b. Unhulled seeds may be planted between April and September. 2. Rye: a. Plant between October and February. B Bermuda. Provide common Bermuda seed that is extra-fancy, treated, lawn type. Deliver in original,unopened container showing weight,analysis,name of vendor and germination test results. Wet,moldy,or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted. w� C Rye. Deliver annual Winter Rye seed in original unopened containers. Seed must be fresh, clean, and mixed in labeled proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and germination must be labeled. 2.10 HYDROMULCH A Provide hydromulch seeding as noted in Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding. 2.11 GRASS A Obtain certified sod from an approved source. B Provide material which is true to type and name,and is typical of the species or variety. C Delivery: 1. Identify and tag sods with correct scientific and common name for each species. 2. Do not deliver more sods than can be planted within 8 hours. 3. Transport and deliver sods in/on pallets. 4. Protect sods against dehydration, overheating or contamination during transportation and delivery. 12/2014 02931 -8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 41, 5. Cover unplanted sods with moistened burlap to prevent dehydration or overheating while awaiting installation. 6. Sods must be harvested within 12 hours of planting and arrive at the project site in a moist condition. D Products: 1. Material to be uniform in color, leaf texture and density. 2. Material to be graded No. 1, or better. 3. Uniform mowed height at time of harvesting material: I-1/2 inches. 4. Inspected and certified free of diseases,nematodes,and undesirable insects by authorized representative of State Department of Agriculture. 5. Material will not be acceptable if it contains any quack grass, Johnson grass, poison ivy, nut grass,thistle,common bent grass,wild garlic,morning glory, perennial sorrel],or brome grass. 6. Turf will be considered weed free when found to contain less than 1 percent of dandelion,jimson weed, mustard, chickweed, per 100 square feet. 2.12 TREES A Provide container grown trees which are straight and symmetrical and have a persistently preferred main leader. The crown shall be in good overall proportion to the entire height of tree with branching configuration as recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species specified. Where a clump is specified,a plant having a minimum of three stems originating from a common base at the ground line shall be furnished. Measure trees by average caliper of trunk as follows: 1. For trunks up to 4 inches or less in diameter, measure caliper 6 inches above top of root ball. 2. For trunks more than 4 inches, measure caliper 12 inches above top of root ball. 3. Caliper measurements shall be by diameter tape measure. Indicated calipers on plans are minimum. Averaging of plant calibers will not be allowed. B Trees shall conform to following requirements: 1. Healthy,vigorous stock, grown in a recognized nursery. 2. Free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae; and free of defects such as knots, sun- scald, injuries, abrasions, disfigurement,or borers and infestations. 2.13 WATER A Water shall be potable from municipal water supplies. 2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A Notify Engineer,prior to installation,of location where trees that have been selected for planting may be inspected. Plant material will be inspected for compliance with following requirements. C 21. . Genus, species, variety, size and quality. Size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects. 12/2014 02931 -9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.15 WORK CONDITIONS A Site Availability. Begin no landscape work where conflicting site work is incomplete or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. B Weather Restrictions. Stop all work during inclement weather such as drought,high winds, excessive rain, extreme heat, cold, or freeze. Obtain authorization before resuming work. 2.16 PLANTING PROCEDURES A Temporary Nursery. A temporary nursery may be used to store plants, but no more than 5 days before planting. Keep plants well watered and protected. 1. Immediately upon delivery, heel-in balled and burlapped (B&B) plants and spray all plants with an antitranspirant. Apply spray from top to bottom. Thoroughly cover plants,but not to the point of run-off. Spray block units and not individual plants. Use a low-pressure,fine-mist applicator. Spray at rates recommended in the manufacturer's directions. 2. Handle all balled and burlapped plants by the ball only. 3. Upon delivery, immediately heel-in bare root plants. Open bundles,separate plants, set roots in trenches, and cover with topsoil. Water plants with an approved root stimulant containing vitamin B. 4. Handle container plants by the container. 5. Handle ground cover plants in flats. Pack flats tightly together and sprinkle plants everyday. Nimie 6. Special plants so designated must be kept in an approved enclosure or planted the day of delivery. 7. Store soils and additives on approved platforms. B Digging and Handling: 1. The actual planting operation must proceed without delay and in a manner to avoid undue drying of the in-situ soil or roots because of exposure to air and sun. Keep an ample supply of sawdust available to cover the roots of B&B stock arriving from the storage nursery. Keep the roots well covered and moist until the plants can be placed in the final location and permanently planted. 2. Handle all plant stock with care to prevent injuries to the trunk, branches and roots. 3. Dig bare root plants when fully dormant. Keep all of the root system intact;do not prune the root system. However, any roots that are broken, crushed, or bruised must be cleanly cut back to sound wood. Make the cut on an angle so that the exposed end faces downward. Seal any cut root exceeding 3/4 inch in diameter with an approved tree wound dressing. 4. Balled and burlapped plants must have the root system encased in a firm,solid ball of natural earth,wrapped in burlap and tightly bound. Each ball must be of sufficient size to encompass all the fibrous feeding roots and not smaller than required by American Standards for Nursery Stock. The ball must remain firm and compact throughout the planting operations. Noll) 12/2014 02931 - 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING irior 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE PREPARATION A Schedule work so that planting can proceed rapidly as portions of site become available. Plant trees after final grades are established and prior to planting of lawns, unless otherwise approved by Engineer in writing. If planting of trees occurs after seeding work,protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from tree planting operations. B Layout individual trees at locations shown on Drawings. In case of conflicts, notify Engineer before proceeding with Work. Trees shall be staked and approved by Engineer prior to planting. C Existing Trees: 1. Protection: Protect tops,trunks and roots of trees to remain on the site. Before starting work, box, fence or otherwise protect trees subject to construction damage. Remove boxing when directed. Permit no stockpiles of heavy equipment within the branch spread of trees. 2. Removal: Remove trees marked for removal. Do not remove any tree without proper authorization. Stumps within 36 inches of final grade must also be removed. 3. Pruning and Surgery: Cut and trim trees only as directed; do not cut any tree without proper authorization. Trim existing trees of dead or diseased limbs. Cut limbs close to the trunk. Cover cuts over 3/4 inch in diameter with an approved tree would dressing. D Grading Around Trees. As required,fill or grade within the branch spread of trees to remain, observing the following requirements. I. For trenching beneath trees, tunnel under the tree roots with careful hand digging. Where possible,avoid cutting or injuring roots. 2. Do not raise or lower the grade around an existing tree in any way unless so directed. E Placing Topsoil: 1. Disk,drag,harrow,or handrake subgrade. Scarify the subgrade to a depth of I- 1/2 inches. Before placing topsoil, rake the subsoil surface clear of stones, wood,rubbish and other debris. Place no topsoil until the subgrade preparation has been approved. 2. Spread, rake, and compact topsoil to form a layer with a minimum depth of 4 inches in lawn areas and 6 inches in shrub areas. Place topsoil to conform to finished gradients as shown on the grading plan. 3. Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. 12/2014 02931 - Il of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING F In Situ Soil Preparation: 1. Cross-till in two directions all existing soil in designated areas to be planted,as follows: a. In lawn areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches. b. In shrub areas to a minimum depth of 10 inches. 2. Evenly broadcast fertilizers and soil additives and thoroughly work into soil. a. Smooth all tilled and amended areas to establish a rough gradient. b. Deeply irrigate all tilled and amended areas to thoroughly wet soil particles and promote settlement. c. After a settlement period of not less than 5 days,and before proceeding with any planting, smooth and rake as necessary to establish finish gradient as required. 3. In all areas which have been utilized for parking, storage or construction lots and/or where heavy equipment has been used, cross-rip the entire compacted areas in two directions to a depth of 10 inches before tilling and amending the soil as specified. A heavy float or drag harrow should be used to smooth all surface areas. a. Verify location of all underground utilities before ripping. b. Ripping teeth should not be set at more than 10-inch spacing. G Fertilizer. Evenly broadcast and work fertilizer into soil at the following rates: Lawns: 1-1/2 N pounds per 1000 square feet. 2. Ground Cover, Shrub, and Tree Areas: 1-1/2 N pounds per 1000 square feet. H Additives: J 1. Humus. Evenly broadcast and work into in situ soil at a rate of 1 cubic yard per 200 square feet. 2. Sharp Sand. Evenly broadcast and work into in situ soil at a rate of 1 cubic yard per 200 square feet. 3. Concrete Gravel. Utilize as a drainage course as shown on construction drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL A Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. B Strip and utilize 4-inch layer of top soil,placed on esplanades under Section 02921 — Hydromulch Seeding, for planting soil mixture. C Mix recommended soil amendments with topsoil at following rates: Top soil: 50 percent. 2. Peat moss: 25 percent. 3. Well rotted Bark: 25 percent. 4. Fertilizer: Rate recommended by nursery. D Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within 48 J hours, unless otherwise directed. 12/2014 02931 - 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING E Incorporate amendments into the soil as a part of the soil preparation process prior to fine grading,fertilizing,and planting. Broadcast or spread amendments evenly at the specified rate over the planting area. Thoroughly incorporate amendments into the top 3 or 4 inches of soil until amendments are pulverized and have become a homogeneous layer of topsoil ready for planting. 3.03 PLANTING A Excavate pits, beds, or trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation raised a minimum of 6 inches at center for proper drainage. Provide following minimum widths: I. 15-gallon containers or larger, 2 feet wider than diameter of root bail. 2. I-and 5-gallon containers,6 inches wider than diameter of root ball. B When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as unsatisfactory soil, obstructions, or adverse drainage conditions, notify the Engineer of such conditions before planting. C Deliver trees after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after deliver, set trees and shrubs in shade,protect from weather and mechanical damage,and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap, or other acceptable means of retaining moisture, and water as needed. D Set root ball on undisturbed soil in center of pit or trench and plumb plant. Place plants at such a level that, after settlement,a natural relationship of plant crown with ground surface will be established. E When set,place additional backfill around base and sides of ball,and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full,water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. F Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching. Mulch pits, trenches and planted areas. Provide no more than 4-inch thickness of mulch,work into top of backfill,and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Cover entire root ball. G Prune, thin out and shape trees in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed in writing, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured and dead branches from flowering trees. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning. H Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures. 1 Anchor root ball immediately after planting. 12/2014 02931 - 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING Control dust caused by planting operations. Dampen surfaces as required. Comply with pollution control regulations of governing authorities. 3.04 PLANTING GRASS A Preparation: Prepare imported topsoil and/or in situ soil. Hand rake to remove all sticks, stones and clods larger than I inch. Apply the final grade but do not mechanically compact the soil. B Seed: I. Evenly broadcast seed specified in 2.09 at the following rates: a. Bermuda: I pound per 1000 square feet b. Rye: 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet 2. Roll the entire seeded area in two directions with a dry/weighted roller. 3. Evenly top dress the entire seeded area with an approved sterilized commercial steer manure. Apply at 2 cubic feet per 100 square feet. 4. Lightly but thoroughly sprinkle the entire seeded area with water after top dress application. C Sod: I. Use Bermuda, Buffalo,or St. Augustine sod in accordance with 2.11A. 2. Prepare soil in accordance with 3.03. 3. Apply eptam (or approved equal) to all areas to be sodded. Follow manufacturer's recommended rates and apply during soil preparation period. 4. Lay sod in a running bond pattern. Pieces should be consistently cut with joints tightly butted together. Water the in-place sod liberally and roll it in two direction with a heavy roller. Areas not level due to fluctuations in the sod depth should be covered and leveled with a 50/50 mix of sharp sand and topsoil. Fertilize in 6 weeks as directed by landscape Architect. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A The Engineer may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at anytime during progress of Work. Contractor shall remove rejected trees immediately from site and replace with specified materials. Plant material not installed in accordance with these Specifications will be rejected. B An inspection to determine final acceptance will be conducted by the Engineer at the end of the 12 month maintenance period. Additional inspections will be conducted for extended warranty periods provided for in paragraph 1.078. 3.06 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE A Contractor shall maintain trees during planting operations and for a period of 12 months after completion of planting. B Water trees to full depth a minimum of once each week, or as required to maintain a healthy vigorous growth. 12/2014 02931 - 14E4'15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING C Prune, cultivate, and weed as required for healthy growth. Restore planting saucers. Tighten and repair rootball anchors, and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 3.07 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A During planting work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B Protect planting work and materials from damage due to planting operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance period. Treat, repair, or replace damaged planting work as directed by the Engineer. C Dispose of excess soil and waste in accordance with requirements of Section 01562— Waste Material Disposal.On-site burning of combustible cleared materials will not be permitted. END OF SECTION 12/2014 02931 - 15 of 15 CITY OFPEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place concrete building frame members,floors,shear walls,foundation walls, and supported slabs,vaults,manholes and wet wells. B. Cast-in-place concrete work for utility construction or rehabilitation,such as slabs on grade,small vaults,site-cast bases for precast units,cast-in-place manholes,including headwalls and miscellaneous small structures. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete seal slabs. E. Control, and expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work, including joint sealants. F. Design, construction, erection, and removal of structural concrete formwork. 4111110 G. Equipment pads, light pole base,thrust blocks. H. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 -Measurement and Payment 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01310 -Coordination and Meetings 4. Section 03600- Structural Grout 5. Section 03310 - Structural Concrete 6. Section 03100—Concrete Formwork 7. Section 01440—Inspection Services 8. Section 01460—Testing Laboratory Services I. Reference Standards: I. American Concrete Institute(ACI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 4. American Welding Society(AWS) 5. Wire Reinforcement Institute (WRI) 6. Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis co 5/2013 03300- 1 of38 CITY OFPEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Measurement for cast-in-place concrete is on lump-sum basis for each aforementioned item as bid. Payment includes related work performed on these items in accordance with related sections of these Technical Specifications. B. Measurement for extra cast-in-place concrete is on cubic-yard basis. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections. C. Refer to Section 01200 -Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI -305R. B. Cold Weather: Period when,for more than 2 successive days,mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI - 306R. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 01350—Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings detailing reinforcement fabrication, bar replacement location, splices, spacing, bar designation, bar type, length, size, bending, number of bars, bar support type, and other pertinent information, including dimensions. Provide sufficient detail for placement of reinforcement without use of Plans. Information shall correspond directly to data listed on bill of materials. 2. Use of reproductions of Plans by Contractor,Subcontractor,erector,fabricator or material supplier in preparation of Shop Drawings(or in lieu of preparation of Shop Drawings) signifies acceptance by that party of information shown thereon as correct,and acceptance of obligation to pay for any job expense,real or implied,arising due to errors that may occur thereon. Remove references to Design Engineer, including seals, when reproductions of Plans are used as Shop Drawings. 3. Detail Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI 315, Figure 6. 'Si 5/2013 03300-2 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 11111/ 4. Submit Shop Drawings showing location of proposed additional construction joints,and obtain approval of the Engineer,prior to submitting reinforcing steel Shop Drawings. C. Bill of Materials: Submit with Shop Drawings. D. Product Data: 1. Mechanical Bar Splices: Submit manufacturer's technical literature,including specifications and installation instructions. 2. Epoxy grout proposed for anchoring reinforcing dowels to hardened concrete: Submit manufacturer's technical literature including recommended installation procedures. 3. Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories and admixtures. E. Certificates: 1. Submit steel manufacturer's certificates of mill tests giving properties of steel proposed for use. List of manufacturer's test number,heat number,chemical analysis, yield point, tensile strength, and percentage of elongation. Identify proposed location of steel in work. 2. Foreign-manufactured reinforcing bars shall be tested for conformance to ASTM requirements by a certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from any other source is not acceptable. Submit test reports for review. Do not begin fabrication of reinforcement until material has been approved. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01350-Submittals. B. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AC!301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete- Ip. B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. C. Conform appropriately to ACI 305R-99:I-Iot Weather Concreting or ACI 306R.1- 90:Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 5/2013 03300-3 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings. B. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM - CI50, Type 1 - Normal Portland Type II - Moderate Sulphate resistance Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM -C33. C. Use coarse limestone aggregate and crushed limestone for fine aggregate. The product of concrete alkalinity(A,as equivalent calcium carbonate)times the thickness of cover over the reinforcing steel (Z, in inches) shall not be less than 0.54, i.e. concrete shall have an AZ factor greater than or equal to 0.54. Provide a minimum concrete cover of 2" over reinforcing steel on the inside of the structures. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM- C260. B. Chemical: ASTM - C494, Type A - Water Reducing Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating admixture. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin. B. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil clear polyethylene film type recommended for below grade application. C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents;capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.04 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Joint Filler Type C: ASTM - D 1752; Premolded sponge rubber, fully compressible with recovery rate of minimum 95 percent. 5/2013 03300-4 of 38 CITY OFPEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE thir B. Sealant: ASTM - Dl 190; synthetic rubber. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM - C94, Alternative No. 3. A minimum of 5.75 bags of cement per cubic yard of concrete shall be used. For Concrete in Contact with sewage use Portland Type II, ASTM - C150, Cement. B. Provide concrete to the following criteria: I. Compressive Strength 7 days: 2400 psi 2. Compressive Strength 28 days: 4000 psi 3. Slump: 3 to 4 inches for concrete cast against earth in slabs and footings and where used as a topping. 5 to 6 inches for concrete in supported slabs,beams, columns and walls. 4. Maximum Water/Cement Ratio: 0.50. C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. 4111, D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Engineer. E. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to temperature lower than 40 degrees F. Air content shall be 3 percent maximum for concrete with trowel finished surfaces and 3-5 percent for other concrete. 2.06 FORM MATERIAL A. Smooth Forms: New plywood, metal, plastic, tempered concrete-form hardboard, dressed lumber faced with plywood or lining,or metal-framed plywood-faced panel material,to provide continuous,straight,smooth surfaces. Form material shall be free of raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents or other defects. Furnish material in largest practical sizes to minimize number ofjoints and,when indicated on Plans,conform to joint system indicated. Form material shall have sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. B. Rough Forms: Plywood, metal, dressed or undressed lumber free of knots, splits or other defects, or other material acceptable to the Engineer of sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. C. Plywood: Conform to PS I, Class 1. D. Lumber: Conform to PS 20. 5/2013 03300-5 of 38 CITY OFPEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Edge Forms and Intermediate Screed Strips: Type and strength compatible with the screed equipment and methods used. F. Plastic Forms: One-piece forms for domes, beams and pan joists. Single lengths for columns not exceeding height of 7-6". For columns over 7-6",use 7-6"sections and filler sections as needed. To facilitate removal of pan joist forms,taper sides 1 inch per foot. G. Metal Pan Joist Forms: Removable type; fabricated of minimum 14-gage steel; one piece between end closures. Adjustable forms not allowed. Taper sides 1 inch per foot to facilitate removal. H. Earth Cuts for Forms: I. Use earth cuts for forming unexposed sides of grade beams cast monolithically with slabs on grade. 2. Where sides of excavations are stable enough to prevent caving or sloughing, following surfaces may be cast against neat-cut excavations: a. Sides of footings. b. Inside face of perimeter grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When inside face is cast against earth, increase beam width indicated on Plans by 1 inch. J c. Both faces of interior grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When grade beam is cast against earth, increase beam width indicated on Plans by 2 inches. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Corrugated fiberboard carton forms, when called for, are intended to form a void space beneath pile-supported and pier-supported slabs and other structural elements as shown. 2. Provide products of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in commercial production of double-faced corrugated fiberboard carton forms,constructed of waterproof paper and laminated with waterproof adhesive. 3. Fiberboard forms: Capable of supporting required dead load plus construction loads,and designed to lose their strength upon prolonged contact with moisture and soil bacteria. 4. Seal cuts and ends of each form section by dipping in waterproof wax, unless liners and flutes are completely impregnated with waterproofing. V 5/2013 03300-6 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE cie5. Size forms as indicated on Plans. Assemble as recommended by manufacturer, either with steel banding at 4'40" maximum on centers, or, where liners and flutes are impregnated with waterproofing,with adequate stapling. J. Circular Forms: 1. Form round-section members with paper or fiber tubes, constructed of laminated plies using water-resistant adhesive with wax-impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without deformation. Provide manufacturer's seamless units to minimize spiral gaps and seams. 2. Fiberglass or steel forms may be used for round-section members. K. Shores: Wood or adjustable metal,with bearing plates; with double wedges at lower end. L. Form Ties: 1. Use commercially-manufactured ties, hangers and other accessories for embedding in concrete. Do not use wire not commercially fabricated for use as a form accessory. 41110 2. Fabricate ties so ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing spalling of concrete faces. Depth from formed concrete face to the embedded portion: At least I inch,or twice the minimum dimension of tie,whichever is greater. 3. Provide waterstop feature for form ties used on liquid-containing structures and on concrete walls which will have earth backfill on one side. 4. Removable ties: Taper ties may be used when approved by the Engineer. In the hole left by the removal of the taper tie, insert a preformed neoprene or polyurethane plug sized to seat at the center of the wall. M. Form Coating: Commercial formulation of form oil or form-release agent having proven satisfactory performance. Coating shall not bond with, stain or otherwise adversely affect concrete surfaces, or impair their subsequent treatment, including application of bonding agents, curing compounds, paint, protective liners and membrane waterproofing. N. Coating for Plastic Forms: Alkali-resistant gel-coat. O. Chamfer Strips: Unless otherwise indicated on Plans,provide 3/4 inch chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled edges where required by this Section, 3.0 "Execution". P. Form Gaskets: Polyethylene rod, closed cell, 1-inch diameter. 5/2013 03300-7 of3S CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.07 DESIGN OF FORMWORK A. Conform to ACI 117, ACI 347 and building codes, unless more restrictive requirements are specified or shown on Plans. Contractor shall design and engineer concrete formwork, including shoring and bracing. Design formwork for applicable gravity loads,lateral pressure,wind loads and allowable stresses. Camber formwork to compensate for anticipated deflection during placement of concrete required to maintain specified tolerances. Design formwork to be readily removed without impact, shock or damage to concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. B. Slip Forming: Permitted on written approval of the Engineer. Contractor shall demonstrate suitability of method proposed. 2.08 REINFORCING MATERIAL A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed bars conforming to ASTM-A6I5,grade as indicated on Plans, except column spirals and those shown on Plans to be smooth bars. Where grade is not shown on Plans, use Grade 60. B. Smooth Bars: Where indicated on Plans, use smooth bars conforming to ASTM - A36; ASTM - A6I5, Grade 60; or ASTM -A675, Grade 70. C. Column Spirals: Bars conforming to ASTM-A615,Grade 60,or wire conforming to ASTM -A82. D. Epoxy-Coated Deformed Bars,Column Spirals and Smooth Bars: Conform to ASTM -A775/A775M. E. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Welded Smooth Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM -A185. 2. Welded Deformed Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM - A497. 3. Provide wire size, type and spacing as shown. Where type is not shown on Plans, use welded smooth wire fabric. 4. Furnish welded wire fabric in flat sheets only. F. Tie Wire: 16-1/2 gage or heavier annealed steel wire. Use plastic-coated tie wire with epoxy-coated reinforcing steel. G. Bar Supports: Provide chairs. Use bar supports and accessories of sizes required to provide required concrete cover. Where concrete surfaces are exposed to weather, water or wastewater,provide plastic accessories only;do not use galvanized or plastic- tipped metal in such locations. Provide metal bar supports and accessories rated Class 1 or 2 conforming to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Use epoxy-coated bar supports with epoxy-coated reinforcing bars. 5/2013 03300-8 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE timp H. Slabs on Grade: Provide chairs with sheet metal bases or provide precast concrete bar supports 3 inches wide, 6 inches long, and thick enough to allow required cover. Embed tie wires in 3-inch by 6-inch side. Mechanical Bar Splices: I. Conform to ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; use where indicated on Plans. a. Compression splices shall develop ultimate stress of reinforcing bar. b. Tension splices shall develop 125 percent of minimum yield point stress of reinforcing bar. 2. Regardless of chemical composition of steel,any heat effect shall not adversely affect performance of reinforcing bar. J. Welded Splices: I. Provide welded splices where shown and where approved by the Engineer. Welded splices of reinforcing steel shall develop a tensile strength exceeding 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing bars connected. 2. Provide materials for welded splices conforming to AWS D1.4 —Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel. �r K. Epoxy Grout: High-strength rigid epoxy adhesive,conforming to ASTM-C881,Type IV, manufactured for purpose of anchoring dowels into hardened concrete and the moisture condition, application temperature and orientation of the hole to be filled. Unless otherwise shown,depth of embedment shall be as required to develop the full tensile strength(125 percent of yield strength)of dowel,but not less than 12 diameters. 2.09 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING A. Bending: Fabricate bars to shapes indicated on Plans by cold bending. Bends shall conform to minimum bend diameters specified in ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. Do not straighten or rebend bars. Fabricate epoxy-coated reinforcing steel to required shapes in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair any epoxy coating with patching material conforming to Item 4.4 of ASTM -A775/A775M. B. Splices: 1. Locate splices as indicated on Plans. Do not locate splices at other locations without approval of the Engineer. Use minimum number of splices located at points of minimum stress. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. 2. Length of lap splices: As shown on Plans. 5/2013 03300-9 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Prepare ends of bars at mechanical splices in accordance with splice manufacturer's requirements. C. Construction Joints: Unless otherwise shown, continue reinforcing through construction joints. D. Bar Fabrication Tolerances:Conform to tolerances listed in ACI 315,Figures 4 and 5. E. Standard Hooks: Conform to the requirements of ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. F. Marking: Clearly mark bars with waterproof tags showing number of bars,size,mark, length, and yield strength. Mark steel with same designation as member in which it occurs. 2.10 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Sealer/Dustproofer (VOC Compliant): Water-based acrylic sealer; non-yellowing under ultraviolet light after 200-hour test in accordance with ASTM - D4587. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. B. Epoxy Floor Topping: Two-component epoxy resin meeting ASTM-C88I Type III, resistant to wear,staining and chemical attack,blended with granite,sand,trap rock or quartz aggregate, trowel-applied over concrete floor. Topping thickness shall be 1/8 inch. Color shall be gray. C. Abrasive Aggregate for Nonslip Finish: Fused aluminum oxide grit,or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 40 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Material shall be factory graded, packaged, rustproof and nonglazing,and unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials. D. Epoxy Penetrating Sealer: Low-viscosity,two-component epoxy system designed to give maximum penetration into concrete surfaces. Sealer shall completely seal concrete surfaces from penetration of water, oil and chemicals; prevent dusting and deterioration of concrete surfaces caused by heavy traffic;and be capable of adhering to floor surfaces subject to hydrostatic pressure from below. Color shall be transparent amber or gray. Surface shall be non-slip. E. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable latex base liquid conforming to ASTM - C 1059. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures,bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. F. Bonding Grout: Prepare bonding grout by mixing approximately one part cement to one part fine sand meeting ASTM -C 144 but with 100 percent passing No. 30 mesh sieve. Mix with water to consistency of thick cream. At Contractor's option, a commercially-prepared bonding agent used in accordance with manufacturer's 5/2013 03300- 10 08 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE t recommendations and instructions may be used. When used in water and wastewater �r treatment structures, bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. Submit manufacturer's technical information on proposed bonding agent. G. Patching Mortar: 1. Make patching mortar of same materials and of approximately same proportions as concrete, except omit coarse aggregate. Substitute white Portland cement for part of gray Portland cement on exposed concrete in order to match color of surrounding concrete. Determine color by making trial patch. Use minimum amount of mixing water required for handling and placing. Mix patching mortar in advance and allow to stand. Mix frequently with trowel until it has reached stiffest consistency that will permit placing. Do not add water. 2. Proprietary compounds for adhesion or specially formulated cementitious repair mortars may be used in lieu of or in addition to foregoing patching materials provided that properties of bond and compressive strength meet or exceed the foregoing and color of surrounding concrete can be matched where required. Use such compounds according to manufacturer's recommendations. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures, material shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. H. Epoxy Adhesive: Two-component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive compound developing 100 percent of strength of concrete, suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Epoxy used to inject cracks and as a binder in epoxy mortar shall meet ASTM -C881,Type VI. Epoxy used as a bonding agent for fresh concrete shall meet ASTM - C881, Type V. I. Non-shrink Grout: See Section 03600 - Structural Grout. J. Spray-Applied Coating: Acceptable products are Thoro System Products "Thoroseal Plaster Mix" or approved equal. Color: Gray. K. Concrete Topping: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size,as specified in this Section. L. Concrete Fill: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size,(Class C where fill thickness exceeds 3 inches throughout a placement), as specified in Section 03310- Structural Concrete. M. Evaporation Retardant: Confilm, manufactured by Master Builders; Eucobar, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company; or equal. 5/2013 03300- 11 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.11 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Membrane-forming Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM - C309, Type ID, and following requirements. 1. Minimum solids content: 30 percent. 2. Compound shall not permanently discolor concrete. When used for liquid- containing structures, curing compound shall be white-pigmented. 3. When used in areas that are to be coated,or that will receive topping or floor covering,material shall not reduce bond of coating,topping,or floor covering to concrete. Curing compound manufacturer's technical information shall state conditions under which compound will not prevent bond. 4. Conform to local,state and federal solvent emission requirements.Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. 5. White pigmented concrete curing compound shall be sprayed on in one even coat with a hand or power sprayer as soon as the surface water disappears from concrete surface. B. Clear Curing and Sealing Compound(VOC Compliant): Conform to ASTM-C309, Type 1,Class B,and the following requirements: 30 percent solids content minimum; non-yellowing under ultraviolet light after 500-hour test in accordance with ASTM- J D4587. Sodium silicate compounds are not permitted. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. C. Sheet Material for Curing Concrete: ASTM - C 171; waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheeting. D. Curing Mats(for use in Curing Method 2): Heavy shag rugs or carpets,or cotton mats quilted at 4 inches on center; 12 ounce per square yard minimum weight when dry. E. Water for curing: Clean and potable. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. B. Verify that anchors,seats,plates,reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. V 5/2013 03300- 12 of 38 CITY OFPEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: I. Under interior slabs on grade,install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches and seal watertight with tape,or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material;lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water, mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. 4110 B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer,new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set, use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted,roughened surface for good bond. Except where the Plans call for joint surfaces to be coated,clean joint surfaces of laitance, loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting(exposing aggregate),roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1/4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. 5/2013 03300- 13 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Plans,Shop Drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Unless otherwise approved by Engineer,place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork,inserts,embedded items,reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with grout or previously-placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age),thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydro-blasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions, unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise,this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms,clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damage the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping,dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. r/ G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. 14. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. I. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed,thoroughly clean dirt,grease,grout, mortar,loose scale,rust and other foreign substances from surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Formwork Construction 1. Construct and maintain formwork so that it will maintain correct sizes of V members,shape,alignment,elevation and position during concrete placement and until concrete has gained sufficient strength. Provide for required 5/2013 03300- 14 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, anchorages, and inserts. 2. Construct forms for easy removal without damage to concrete surfaces. 3. Make formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins. Provide gaskets for wall forms to prevent concrete paste leakage at their base. 4. Place chamfer strips in forms to bevel edges and corners permanently exposed to view,except top edges of walls,and slabs which are indicated on Plans to be tooled. Do not bevel edges of formed joints and interior corners unless indicated on Plans. Form beveled edges for vertical and horizontal corners of equipment bases. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans, make bevels 3/4 inch wide. 5. Provide temporary openings at bases of column and wall forms and other points as required for observation and cleaning immediately before concrete is placed. 6. Where runways are required for moving equipment, support runways directly on the formwork or structural members. Do not allow runways or supports to 41.10 rest on reinforcing steel. 7. Use smooth forms on formed concrete surfaces required to have smooth form finish or rubbed finish. 8. Rough forms may be used on formed concrete surfaces indicated to have rough form finish. B. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish: 1. Drill forms to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of concrete mortar around tie holes. Uniformly space form ties and align in horizontal and vertical rows. Install taper ties, if used, with the large end on the wet face of the wall. 2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back up joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections. 3. Form molding shapes, recesses and projections with smooth-finish materials and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement. 4. Form exposed corners of beams and columns to produce square,smooth,solid, ihw unbroken lines. 5/2013 03300-15 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. Provide exterior exposed edges with 3/4-inch chamfer or 3/4-inch radius. J 6. Arrange facing material in orderly and symmetrical fashion. Keep number of joints to practical minimum. Support facing material adequately to prevent deflection in excess of allowable tolerances. 7. For flush surfaces exposed to view in completed structure,overlap previously- placed hardened concrete with form sheathing by approximately 1 inch. Hold forms against hardened concrete to maintain true surfaces,preventing offsets or loss of mortar. C. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Rubbed Finish: Provide forms as specified in this Section, 3.04B `Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish". Use smooth plywood linings or forms, in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. D. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure supports for types of screeds required. E. Circular Forms: Set forms in one piece for full height of member. F. Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Coordinate surface finish, anchors, reglets, and similar requirements with membrane waterproofing applicator. G. Fireproofing Steel Member: Construct forms to provide not less than the concrete thickness necessary,measured from face of steel member,to provide the required fire rating. Forms for concealed surfaces may be unlined. H. Tolerances: 1. Unless noted otherwise on Plans,construct formwork so concrete surfaces will conform to tolerance limits listed in Tables 031 OOA and 03100B at end of this Section. 2. Establish sufficient control points and bench marks as references for tolerance checks. Maintain these references in undisturbed condition until final completion and acceptance of the Work. Adjustment of Formwork: 1. Use wedges or jacks to provide positive adjustment of shores and struts. After final inspection and before concrete placement,fasten in position wedges used for final adjustment of forms. 2. Brace forms securely against lateral deflections. Prepare to compensate for J settling during concrete placement. 5/2013 03300- 16 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. For wall openings,construct wood forms that facilitate necessary loosening to counteract swelling of forms. J. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Place on smooth firm bed of suitable material to prevent vertical displacement; set tight to prevent horizontal displacement. Exercise care to avoid buckling of forms. Install in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 2. Fit carton forms tightly around piles and piers; completely fill the space between subgrade and concrete placement with carton forms to form a void space. 3. Protect carton forms from moisture and maintain in a dry condition until concrete is placed on them. If they become wet before placement of concrete, allow them to dry and carefully inspect for strength before concrete is placed. 4. Before concrete placement,replace damaged or deteriorated forms which are incapable of supporting concrete dead load plus construction live loads. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded materials before placing concrete. Remove accumulated mortar, grout, rust and other foreign matter. B. Coat forms for exposed or painted concrete surfaces with form oil or form-release agent before placing reinforcement. Cover form surfaces with coating material in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not allow excess coating material to accumulate in forms or to contact hardened concrete against which fresh concrete will be placed. Remove coating material from reinforcement before placing concrete. C. Forms for unexposed surfaces, other than retained-in-place metal forms,may be wet with water immediately before concrete placement in lieu of coating. When possibility of freezing temperatures exists,however,the use of coating is mandatory. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT A. Placement Tolerances: Place reinforcement within tolerances of Table 03210A at the end of this Section. Bend tie wire away from forms to maintain the specified concrete coverage. B. Interferences: Maintain 2-inch clearance from embedded items. Where reinforcing interferes with location of other reinforcing steel,conduit or embedded items,bars may be moved within specified tolerances or one bar diameter,whichever is greater. Where 5/2013 03300- 17 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE greater movement of bars is required to avoid interference,notify the Engineer. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts, conduit, mechanical openings or other items without approval of the Engineer. C. Concrete Cover: Provide clear cover measured from reinforcement to face of concrete as listed in Table 03210B at the end of this Section, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. D. Placement in Forms: Use spacers,chairs,wire ties and other accessory items necessary to assemble,space,and support reinforcing properly. Provide accessories of sufficient number,size and strength to prevent deflection or displacement of reinforcement due to construction loads or concrete placement. Use appropriate accessories to position and support bolts, anchors and other embedded items. Tie reinforcing bars at each intersection,and to accessories. Blocking reinforcement with concrete or masonry is prohibited. E. Placement for Concrete on Ground: Support bar and wire reinforcement on chairs with sheet metal bases or precast concrete blocks spaced at approximately 3 feet on centers each way. Use minimum of one support for each 9 square feet. Tie supports to reinforcing bars and wires. F. Vertical Reinforcement in Columns: Offset vertical bars by at least one bar diameter at splices. Provide accurate templates for column dowels to ensure proper placement. G. Splices: 1. Do not splice bars, except at locations indicated on Plans or reviewed Shop Drawings, without approval of the Engineer. 2. Lap Splices: Unless otherwise shown or noted, Class B, conforming to AD 318-89,Section 12.15.1. Tie securely with wire prior to concrete placement,to prevent displacement of splices during concrete placement. 3. Mechanical Bar Splices: Use only where indicated on Plans or approved by the Engineer. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Couplers located at a joint face shall be of a type which can be set either flush or recessed from the face as shown. Seal couplers prior to concrete placement to completely eliminate concrete or cement paste from entering. b. Couplers intended for future connections: Recess 1/2 inch minimum from concrete surface. After concrete is placed, plug coupler and fill recess with sealant to prevent contact with water or other corrosive materials. c. Unless noted otherwise, match mechanical coupler spacing and capacity to that shown for the adjacent reinforcing. 5/2013 03300- 18 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4 4. Construction Joints: Place reinforcing continuous through construction joints, unless noted otherwise. H. Welded Wire Fabric: Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans, lap adjoining pieces at least 6 inches or one full mesh plus 2 inches, whichever is larger. Lace splices with wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps. Conform to WRI - Manual of Standard Practice for Welded Wire Fabric. Field Bending: Shape reinforcing bent during construction operations to conform to Plans. Bars shall be cold-bent; do not heat bars. Closely inspect reinforcing for breaks. When reinforcing is damaged, replace, Cadweld, or otherwise repair, as directed by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete. J. Epoxy-coated Reinforcing Steel: Install in accordance this Section, 3.06J "Field Bending",and in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair damaged epoxy coating with patching material as specified in Paragraph 2.09 A - Bending. K. Field Cutting: Cut reinforcing bars by shearing or sawing. Do not cut bars with cutting torch. L. Welding of reinforcing bars is prohibited, except where shown on Plans. 3.07 GROUTING OF REINFORCING AND DOWEL BARS A. Use epoxy grout for anchoring reinforcing and dowel steel to existing concrete in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's instructions. Drill hole not more than I/4 inch larger than steel bar diameter(including height of deformations for deformed bars)in existing concrete. Just before installation of steel,blow hole clean of all debris using compressed air. Partially fill hole with epoxy,using enough epoxy so when steel bar is inserted, epoxy grout will completely fill hole around bar. Dip end of steel bar in epoxy and twist bar while inserting into partially-filled hole. 5/2013 03300- 19 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03210A J REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT TOLERANCES Placement Tolerances (in inches) Clear Distance - To formed soffit: -1/4 To other formed surfaces: *1/4 Minimum spacing between bars -1/4 Clear distance from unformed surface to top reinforcement- Members 8 inches deep or less: +1/4 Members more than 8 inches deep but less than 24 inches deep: -1/4, +1/2 Members 24 inches deep or greater: -1/4,+1 Uniform spacing of bars ±2 (but the required number of bars shall not reduced): Uniform spacing of stirrups and ties +1 (but the required number of stirrups and ties shall not be reduced): Longitudinal locations of bends and ends of reinforcement- General: +2 Discontinuous ends of members: ±1/2 Length of bar laps: -1 1/2 Embedded length - Nalb For bar sizes No. 3 through 11: -1 For bar sizes No. 14 and 18: -2 5/2013 03300-20 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03210B MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER FOR REINFORCEMENT Minimum Surface Cover (in inches) Slabs and Joists - Top and bottom bars for dry conditions— No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1 1/2 No. I I bars and smaller: Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water, or weather, over, or in contact with, sewage; and for bottoms bearing on work mat, or slabs supporting earth cover- No. 5 bars and smaller: 11/2 No. 6 through No. 18 bars: 2 Beams and Columns- For dry conditions- Stirrups, spirals and ties: 1 1/2 Principal reinforcement: 2 Exposed to earth, water, sewage or weather Stirrups and ties: 2 Principal reinforcement: 2 1/2 Walls- For dry conditions- No. I 1 bars and smaller: No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1 1/2 Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth,water, sewage or weather, or in contact with ground- Circular tanks with ring tension: 2 All others: 2 Footings and Base Slabs - At formed surfaces and bottoms bearing on concrete work mat: 2 At unformed surfaces and bottoms in contact with earth: 3 Over top of piles: 2 Top of footings - - same as slabs C 5/2013 03300-21 of38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.08 HANDLING,TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE .� A. Conform to applicable requirements of this Section and Chapter 8 of ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete—IP,Chapter 8. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non-conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: I. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel. 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall a not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. `u/J Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet;take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying,hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used,it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. J 5/2013 03300-22 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather,conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses,vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up-slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured for aminimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 90 degrees F. [ 3.09 PUMPING OF CONCRETE fir' A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning,or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose (conduit) diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R-96:Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses(conduits)that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. F. Field Quality Control: Take samples for slump, air content and test cylinders at the placement(discharge)end of the line. 3.10 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures,or fise3 days for other structures, before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not 5/2013 03300-23 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1/2 inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed,remove the strip,level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.11 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly embed reinforcement,eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R-96:Guide for Consolidation of Concrete, Group 3, immersion-type high-speed power vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 rpm) in sufficient number and with sufficient(at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. Do not transport concrete by vibrating. B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously-placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers,with standby units as required,to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.12 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately 18 inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into previously-placed layer. •�/ 5/2013 03300-24 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Refer to Section 03310 - Structural Concrete for Mass Concreting. 3.13 CONCRETE FINISHING 3.14 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES A. Unfinished Surfaces: Finish is not required on surfaces concealed from view in completed structure by earth,ceilings or similar cover, unless indicated otherwise on Plans. B. Rough Form Finish: 1. No form facing material is required on rough form finish surfaces. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Chip off fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height. 3. Rough form finish may be used on concrete surfaces which will be concealed from view by earth in completed structure,except concealed surfaces required to have smooth form finish,as shown on Plans. C. Smooth Form Finish: I. Form facing shall produce smooth, hard, uniform texture on concrete. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Rub fins and joint marks with wooden blocks to leave smooth, unmarred finished surface. 3. Provide smooth form finish on the wet face of formed surfaces of water- holding structures, and of other formed surfaces not concealed from view by earth in completed structure,except where otherwise indicated on Plans. Walls that will be exposed after future construction,at locations indicated on Plans, shall have smooth form finish. Smooth form finish on exterior face of exterior walls shall extend below final top of ground elevation. Exterior face of all perimeter grade beams shall have smooth form finish for full depth of grade beam. D. Rubbed Finish: 1. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Remove forms as soon as practicable,repair defects,wet surfaces,and rub with fie No. 16 carborundum stone or similar abrasive. Continue rubbing sufficiently to bring surface paste,remove form marks and fins,and produce smooth,dense 5/2013 03300-25 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE surface of uniform color and texture. Do not use cement paste other than that drawn from concrete itself. Spread paste uniformly over surface with brush. Allow paste to reset,then wash surface with clean water. 3. Use rubbed finish at locations indicated on Plans,except where rubbed finish is indicated for a wall which will be containing a liquid, use spray-applied coating. E. Spray-applied Coating: At Contractor's option,in lieu of rubbed finish,spray-applied coating may be applied after defects have been repaired and fins removed. Remove form oil, curing compound and other foreign matter that would prevent bonding of coating. Apply coating in uniform texture and color in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. F. Related Unformed Surfaces: Tops of piers, walls, bent caps, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed. Float unformed surfaces to texture reasonably consistent with that of formed surfaces. Continue final treatment on formed surfaces uniformly across unformed surfaces. 3.15 HOT WEATHER FINISHING A. When hot weather conditions exist, as defined in the Section, I.03A"Hot Weather", and as judged by the Engineer, apply evaporation retardant to the surfaces of slabs, topping and concrete fill placements immediately after each step in the finishing process has been completed. 3.16 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO CLASS A, B AND C TOLERANCES A. Apply Class A, B and C finishes at locations indicated on Plans. Class B or better finish shall be applied if not shown otherwise by the Plans. B. Shaping to Contour: Use strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. See Section 03100- Concrete Formwork for edge forms and screeds. C. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as stiff as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling, do not permit manipulation of surfaces prior to finishing operations. D. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Check tolerances by placing straightedge of specified length anywhere on slab. Gap between slab and straightedge shall not exceed tolerance listed for specified class. 5/2013 03300-26 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE tiorStraightedge Tolerance Class Length in Feet in Inches A 10 I/8 B 10 I/4 C 2 1/4 E. Raked Finish: After concrete has been placed,struck off,consolidated and leveled to Class C tolerance,roughen surface before final set.Roughen with stiff brushes or rakes to depth of approximately 1/4 inch. Notify the Engineer prior to placing concrete requiring initial raked surface finish so that acceptable raked finish standard may be established for project. Protect raked,base-slab finish from contamination until time of topping. Provide raked finish for following: 1. Surfaces to receive bonded concrete topping or fill. 2. Steep ramps, as noted on Plans. 3. Additional locations as noted on Plans. F. Float Finish: 1. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has thwdisappeared,or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power-driven float. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats in locations inaccessible to power- driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. After initial floating, re-check tolerance of surface with 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots to Class B tolerance. Immediately re-float slab to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3. Provide float finish at locations not otherwise specified and not otherwise indicated on Plans. G. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional troweling by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to Class A tolerance. On surfaces intended to 5/2013 03300-27 of 38 CITY OFPEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE support floor coverings,remove defects which might show through covering by grinding. 3. Provide trowel finish for floors which will receive floor covering and additional locations indicated on Plans. H. Broom or Belt Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. Immediately after completing floated finish, draw broom or burlap belt across surface to give coarse transverse scored texture. 2. Provide broom or belt finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.17 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO"F-NUMBER SYSTEM" FINISH A. Shaping to Contour: Use strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. Edge forms and screeds: Conform to Section 03100-Concrete Formwork. B. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as dry as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling,do not manipulate surfaces prior to finishing operations. C. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Independent testing laboratory will check floor flatness and levelness in accordance with this Section,3.23F"Field Quality Control". D. Float Finish: I. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared,or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power-driven float. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats in locations inaccessible to power- driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. Check tolerance of surface after initial floating with a 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately refloat slab to uniform, smooth, granular texture to FF20/FLI7 tolerance, unless shown otherwise on Plans. 3. Provide "F-Number System" float finish at locations indicated on Plans. 5/2013 03300-28 of38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 41, E. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to an Fr25/F120 tolerance for slabs on grade and FF25/FLI7 for elevated slabs, unless shown otherwise on Plans. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, remove defects, which might show through covering, by grinding. 3. Provide "F-Number System" trowel finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.18 BONDED CONCRETE TOPPING AND FILL A. Surface Preparation: 1. Protect raked, base-slab finish from contamination until time of topping. 400 Mechanically remove oil, grease, asphalt, paint, clay stains or other contaminants, leaving clean surface. 2. Prior to placement of topping or fill, thoroughly dampen roughened slab surface and leave free of standing water. Immediately before topping or fill is placed, scrub coat of bonding grout into surface. Do not allow grout to set or dry before topping or fill is placed. B. Concrete Fill: 1. Where concrete fill intersects a wall surface at an angle steeper than 45 degrees from vertical, provide a I.5-inch deep keyway in the wall at the point of intersection; size keyway so that no portion of the concrete fill is less than 1.5 inches thick. Form keyway in new walls; create by saw cutting the top and bottom lines and chipping in existing walls. 2. Apply wood float finish to surfaces of concrete fill. 3. Provide concrete fill at locations shown on Plans. C. Bonded Concrete Topping in Bottom of Clarifiers and Thickeners: I. Minimum thickness of concrete topping: 1 inch. Maximum thickness when tifswept in by clarifier and thickener equipment: 3 inches. 5/2013 03300-29 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Compact topping and fill by rolling or tamping,bring to established grade,and float. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top,for the full width of the placement. Coat surface with evaporation retardant as needed between finishing operations to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks. 3. Screed topping to true surface using installed equipment. Protect equipment from damage during sweeping-in process. Perform sweeping-in process under supervision of equipment manufacturer's factory representative. After topping has been screeded, apply wood float finish. During finishing, do not apply water, dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand to the surface. 4. As soon as topping or fill finishing is completed, coat surface with curing compound. After the topping is set and sufficiently hard in clarifiers and where required by the Engineer,fill the tank with sufficient water to cover the entire floor for 14 days. 5. Provide bonded concrete topping in bottom of all clarifiers and thickeners. 3.19 EPDXY PENETRATING SEALER A. Surfaces to receive epoxy penetrating sealer: Apply wood float finish. Clean surface and apply sealer in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. r/ B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: Apply minimum 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. C. Mask walls, doors, frames and similar surface to prevent floor coating contact. D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls,curbs, bases or wainscots, use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Provide epoxy penetrating sealer at locations indicated on Plans. 3.20 EPDXY FLOOR TOPPING A. Surfaces to receive epoxy floor topping: Apply wood float finish unless recommended otherwise by epoxy floor topping manufacturer. Clean surface and apply epoxy floor topping in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Thickness of topping: 1/8 inch. B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: apply 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. 5/2013 03300-30 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Mask walls, doors, frames and similar surfaces to prevent floor coating contact. D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls, curbs, bases or wainscots, use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Finished surface shall be free of trowel marks and dimples. F. Provide epoxy floor topping at locations indicated on Plans. 3.21 SEALER/DUSTPROOFER A. Where sealer or sealer/dustproofer is indicated on Plans,just prior to completion of construction, apply coat of specified clear sealer/dustproofing compound to exposed interior concrete floors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.22 NONSLIP FINISH A. Apply float finish as specified. Apply two-thirds of required abrasive aggregate by method that ensures even coverage without segregation and re-float. Apply remainder of abrasive aggregate at right angles to first application, using heavier application of aggregate in areas not sufficiently covered by first application. Re-float after second application of aggregate and complete operations with troweled finish. Perform finishing operations in a manner that will allow the abrasive aggregate to be exposed and not covered with cement paste. B. Provide nonslip finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete-IP and under provisions of Sections 01440 —Inspection Services and Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 cu yds or less of concrete or as directed by the Engineer. F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting,cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 5/2013 03300-31 of38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. H. Provide the results of alkalinity tests of concrete used in sanitary structures. Provide one test for each structure. These tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory. Perform the test on the concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure. Alkalinity tests are to be in accordance with Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis, Vol. 15, Page 230, Interscience Publishers Division, John Wiley and Sons. 3.24 PATCHING A. Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Engineer upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete- IP. 3.25 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. J B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill,touch-up,repair,or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer for each individual area. 3.26 CURING A. Comply with ACI 308.1-98:Standard Specifications for Curing Concrete. Cure by preventing loss of moisture, rapid temperature change and mechanical injury for a period of 7 curing days when Type 11 or IP cement has been used and for 3 curing days when Type III cement has been used. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. A curing day is any calendar day in which the temperature is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours. Colder days may be counted if air temperature adjacent to concrete is maintained above 50 degrees F. In continued cold weather,when artificial heat is not provided, removal of forms and shoring may be permitted at the end of calendar days equal to twice the required number of curing days. However, leave soffit forms and shores in place until concrete has reached the specified 28-day strength, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. B. Cure formed surfaces not requiring rub-finished surface by leaving forms in place for J the full curing period. Keep wood forms wet during the curing period. Add water as 5/2013 03300-324:438 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C needed for other types of forms. Or, at Contractor's option, forms may be removed after 2 days and curing compound applied. C. Rubbed Finish: I. At formed surfaces requiring rubbed finish, remove forms as soon as practicable without damaging the surface. 2. After rub-finish operations are complete, continue curing formed surfaces by using either approved curing/sealing compounds or moist cotton mats until normal curing period is complete. D. Unformed Surfaces: Cure by membrane curing compound method. 1. After concrete has received a final finish and surplus water sheen has disappeared, immediately seal surface with a uniform coating of approved curing compound, applied at the rate of coverage recommended by manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer. Do not apply less than I gallon per 180 square feet of area. Provide satisfactory means to properly control and check rate of application of the compound. 2. Thoroughly agitate the compound during use and apply by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers equipped with atomizing nozzles. For cie application on small miscellaneous items,hand-powered spray equipment may be used. Prevent loss of compound between nozzle and concrete surface during spraying operations. 3. Do not apply compound to a dry surface. If concrete surface has become dry, thoroughly moisten surface immediately prior to application. At locations where coating shows discontinuities, pinholes or other defects, or if rain falls on a newly coated surface before film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, apply an additional coat of compound at the specified rate of coverage. 3.27 CURING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when curing mass concrete. I. Minimum curing period: 2 weeks. 2. When ambient air temperature falls below 32 degrees F, protect surface of concrete against freezing. 3. Do not use steam or other curing methods that will add heat to concrete. 4. Keep forms and exposed concrete continuously wet for at least the first 48 hours after placing, and whenever surrounding air temperature is above 90 degrees F during final curing period. 5/2013 03300-33 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. During 2-week curing period,provide necessary controls to prevent ambient air temperature immediately adjacent to concrete from falling more than 30 degrees F in 24 hours. 3.28 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Time Limits: 1. When repair of surface defects or finishing is required before concrete is aged, forms on vertical surfaces may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. 2. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be accomplished without damage to concrete. Leave formwork for water-retaining structures in place for at least 2 days. Formwork for non-water-retaining columns, walls, sides of beams and other formwork components not supporting weight of concrete may be removed after 12 hours, provided concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations,and provided removal of forms will not disturb members supporting weight of concrete. 3. Forms and shoring supporting weight of concrete or construction loads: Leave in place until concrete has reached minimum strength specified for removal of forms and shoring. Do not remove such forms in less than 4 days. B. Circular Paper or Spiral Tube Forms: Follow manufacturer's directions for form removal. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to concrete surface. When removal is done before completion of curing time,replace form,tie in place,and seal to retard escape of moisture. C. Removal Strength: I. Control Tests: Suitable strength-control tests will be required as evidence that concrete has attained specified strength for removal of formwork or shoring supporting weight of concrete in beams, slabs and other structural members. Furnish test cylinders and data to verify strength for early form removal. a. Field-cured Test Cylinders: When field-cured test cylinders reach specified removal strength,formwork or shoring may be removed from respective concrete placements. b. Laboratory-cured Test Cylinders: When concrete has been cured as specified for structural concrete for same time period required by laboratory-cured cylinders to reach specified strength, formwork or shoring may be removed from respective concrete placements. 5/2013 03300-34 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Determine length of time that concrete has been cured by totaling the days or fractions of days,not necessarily consecutive,during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above 50 degrees F and concrete has been damp or thoroughly sealed against evaporation and loss of moisture. 2. Compressive Strengths: The minimum concrete compressive strength for removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete is 75 percent of specified minimum 28-day strength for class of concrete involved. 3.29 RESHORING A. When reshoring is permitted, plan operations in advance and obtain the Engineer's approval of such operations. While reshoring is under way, keep live load off new construction. Do not permit concrete in any beam, slab, column or other structural member to be subjected to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads permitted for developed concrete strength at time of reshoring. B. Place reshores as soon as practicable after form-stripping operations are complete but in no case later than end of day on which stripping occurs. Tighten reshores to carry required loads without over stressing construction. Leave reshores in place until tests representative of concrete being supported have reached specified strength at time of removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete. C. Floors supporting shores under newly-placed concrete: Leave original supporting shores in place, or re-shore. Locate reshores directly under shore position above. Extend reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute weight of newly- placed concrete, forms and construction live loads in such manner that design superimposed loads of floors supporting shores are not exceeded. 3.30 FORM REUSE A. Do not reuse forms that are worn or damaged beyond repair. Thoroughly clean and recoat forms before reuse. For wood and plywood forms to be used for exposed smooth finish,sand or otherwise dress concrete contact surface to original condition or provide form liner facing material. For metal forms, straighten, remove dents and clean to return forms to original condition. 5/2013 03300-35 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03100A TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BUILDINGS** For any Variation For any 20-foot Maximum From Variation In 10-foot length or for Entire length any bay Dimension Lines and Surfaces of Columns, 1/4" - -- 1" Plumb or Piers, Walls and Arrises Specified Exposed Corner Columns, Control --- 1/4" 1/2" Batter Joint Grooves, and Other Conspicuous Lines Slab Soffits, Ceilings, Beam Soffits, 1/4" 3/8" 3/4" Level of and Arrises (measured before Specified removal of shores), Grade Exposed Lintels, Sills, Parapets, --- 1/4" 1/2" Horizontal Grooves and Other Conspicuous Lines Drawing Position of Linear Building Lines, --- 1/2" I" Dimensions Columns, Walls and Partitions Size and Location of Sleeves, Floor --- --- ±1/4" Openings and Wall Openings Cross Section of Columns, Beams, - - - --- +1/2",-1/4" Slabs,and Walls Footings* in Plan -- - --- +2", -1/2" Footing Misplacement or Eccentricity - - - --- 2%of Width in Direction of Error(the lesser of) or 2" Footing Thickness Decrease - - - --- 5% Footing Thickness Increase - - - --- No Limit Step Rise in Flight of Stairs - - - --- ±1/8" Step Tread in Flight of Stairs - - - --- ±1/4" Consecutive Step Rise - - - - - - ±1/16" Consecutive Step Tread - - - - - - ±I/8" *Footing tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of vertical reinforcing steel, dowels, or embedded items **Includes water and wastewater process structures V 5/2013 03300-36 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CIV TABLE 03100B TOLERANCE FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BRIDGES,WHARVES AND MARINE STRUCTURES Variation Variation In Maximum From • Plumb of Specified Surfaces of columns,piers and walls 1/2" in 10' Batter Level or Top surfaces of slabs See Section 03345 Specified Grade Top surfaces of curbs and railings 3/16" in 10' Drawing Cross section of columns, caps, walls, beams, and f1/2 -1/4" Dimensions similar members Thickness of deck slabs +1/4", -1/8" Size and location of slab and wall openings +1/2" Footings in plan +2, -1/2" Footing misplacement or eccentricity in direction 2% of width or 2" of error(the lesser ot) Footing thickness decrease 5% Footing thickness increase No limit Step rise in flight of stairs +1/8" Step tread in flight of stairs +1/4" Consecutive step rise +1/16" Consecutive step tread +1/8" 5/2013 03300-37 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.31 PROTECTION J A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION J J 5/2013 03300-38 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 03310 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place normal-weight structural concrete and mass concrete. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 00300—Bid Proposal 2. Section 01200—Measurement 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for structural concrete is on an each basis for each structure as bid. Payment includes related work performed on these structures in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. B. If Extra Structural Concrete is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic-yard basis, measured in place. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. D. No provisions shall be provided for temperature controlled curing of test cylinder. Test cylinder(s)shall be cured in identical environment until picked up by lab. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Mass Concrete: Concrete sections 4 feet or more in least dimension. B. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI - 305R. C. Cold Weather: Period when,for more than 2 successive days,mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI - 306R. 5/2013 03310-1 of23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Section 01350—Submittals. B. Mill Certificates: Required for bulk cement. C. Design Mixes: 1. Submit test data on proposed design mixes for each type of concrete in the Work, including each class, and variations in type, source or quantity of material. Include type, brand and amount of cementitious materials; type, brand and amount of each admixture; slump; air content; aggregate sources, gradations, specific gravity and absorption;total water(including moisture in aggregate); water/cement ratio;compressive strength test results for 7 and 28 days;and shrinkage tests for Class C and D concrete at 21 or 28 days of drying. 2. Submit abrasion loss and soundness test results for limestone aggregate. 3. Testing of aggregates, including sieve analysis, shall be performed by a certified independent testing laboratory. Tests shall have been performed no earlier than 3 months before Notice to Proceed. 4. Provide standard deviation data for plant producing concrete. Data shall include copies of laboratory test results and standard deviation calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1. Laboratory tests shall have been J performed within past 12 months. When standard deviation data is not available, comply with ACI 318, Table 5.3.2.2. 5. Review and acceptance of mix design does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide concrete of quality and strength required by these Specifications. D. Admixtures: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including following: I. Air-Entraining Admixture: Give requirements to control air content under all conditions,including temperature variations and presence of other admixtures. 2. Chemical Admixtures: Give requirements for quantities and types to be used under various temperatures and job conditions to produce uniform, workable concrete mix. Submit evidence of compatibility with other admixtures and cementitious materials proposed for use in design mix. E. High-Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): When proposed for use, submit manufacturer's technical information and instructions for use of superplasticizer. State whether superplasticizer will be added at ready-mix plant or job site. When superplasticizer will be added at job site, submit proposed plan for measuring and adding superplasticizer to concrete mix at job site, and establish dosing area on site with holding tanks and metering devices. When superplasticizer is to be added at "ii) 5/2013 03310-2 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ready-mix plant,submit contingency plans for adding additional superplasticizer at job site when required due to delay in placing concrete. Identify portions of Work on which superplasticizer is proposed for use. F. Hot and Cold Weather Concreting: Submit,when applicable,proposed plans for hot and cold weather concreting. Review and acceptance of proposed procedure will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for quality of finished product. G. Project Record Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that are concealed from view. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide necessary controls during evaluation of materials,mix designs,production and delivery of concrete, placement and compaction to assure that the Work will be accomplished in accordance with Contract Documents. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record dates, locations, quantities, air temperatures, and test samples taken. B. Code Requirements: Concrete construction for buildings shall conform to ACI 318. Concrete construction for water and wastewater treatment and conveying structures shall conform to ACI 318 with modifications by ACI 350R, Item 2.6. Where this Specification conflicts with ACI 318 or ACI 350R,this Specification governs. C. Testing and Other Quality Control Services: 1. Concrete testing required in this section,except concrete mix design,limestone aggregate test data, and testing of deficient concrete, will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. 2. Provide material for and cooperate fully with Owner's testing laboratory technician in obtaining samples for required tests. 3. Standard Services: The following testing and quality control services will be provided by Owner in accordance with Section 01450— Testing Laboratory Services: a. Verification that plant equipment and facilities conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready-Mix Concrete Production Facilities". b. Testing of proposed materials for compliance with this Specification. c. Review of proposed mix design submitted by Contractor. 5/2013 03310-3 of23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE d. Obtaining production samples of materials at plants or stockpiles during work progress and testing for compliance with this Specification. e. Strength testing of concrete according to following procedures: I) Obtaining samples for field test cylinders from every 100 cubic yards and any portion less than 100 cubic yards for each mix design placed each day, according to ASTM C 172, with each sample obtained from a different batch of concrete on a representative, random basis. Selecting test batches by any means other than random numbers chosen before concrete placement begins is not allowed. 2) Molding four specimens from each sample according to ASTM C31, and curing under standard moisture and temperature conditions as specified in Sections 7(a)and(b)of ASTM C3I. 3) Testing two specimens at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days according to ASTM C39, reporting test results averaging strengths of two specimens. However, when one specimen evidences improper sampling, molding or testing, it will be discarded and remaining cylinder considered test result. When high-early-strength concrete is used,specimens will be tested at 3 and 7 days. f. Air content: For each strength test, determination of air content of normal weight concrete according to ASTM C231. g. Slump: For each strength test, and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, conducting slump test in accordance with ASTM C 143. h. Temperature: For each strength test,checking concrete temperature in accordance with ASTM C1064. Lightweight concrete: For each strength test,or more frequently when requested by the Engineer,determination of air content by ASTM C567 and unit weight by ASTM C567. j. Monitoring of current and forecasted climatic conditions to determine when rate of evaporation,as determined by Figure 2.1.5 of ACI 305R, will produce loss of 0.2 pounds of water,or more, per square foot per hour. Testing lab representative will advise Contractor to use hot weather precautions when such conditions will exist during concrete placement,and note on concrete test reports when Contractor has been advised that hot weather conditions will exist. \/ 5/2013 03310-4 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE k. Class A and D Concrete Shrinkage Tests: Performance of drying shrinkage tests for trial batches as follows: I) Preparation and Testing of Specimens: Compression and drying shrinkage test specimens will be taken in each case from the same concrete sample;shrinkage tests will be considered a part of the normal compression tests for the project. 4-inch by 4-inch by 11-inch prisms with an effective gage length of 10 inches, fabricated, cured, dried and measured in accordance with ASTM C157, modified as follows: (a). Wet curing: Remove specimens from molds at an age of 23 hours ±1 hour after trial batching and immediately immerse in water at 70 degrees F 13 degrees F for at least 30 minutes; (b). Measure within 30 minutes after first 30 minutes of immersion to determine original length (not to be confused with "base length"); (c). Then submerge in saturated limewater.at 73 degrees F 13 degrees F, for 7 days; (d). Then measure at age 7 days to establish "base length" for drying shrinkage calculations ("zero" days drying age); (e). Calculate expansion (base length expressed as a percentage of original length); (t). Immediately store specimens in a temperature and humidity controlled room maintained at 73 degrees F, 13 degrees, and 50 percent relative humidity, 14 percent, for the remainder of the test. (g). Measure to determine shrinkage, expressed as percentage of base length. Compute the drying shrinkage deformation of each specimen as the difference between the base length (at ?zero@ days drying age)and the length after drying at each test age. Compute the average drying shrinkage deformation of the specimens to the nearest 0.0001 inch at each test age. If the drying shrinkage of any specimen departs from the average of that test age by more than 0.0004 IIinch,disregard the results obtained from that specimen. 5/2013 03310-5 of23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Report results of shrinkage tests to the nearest 0.001 percent of shrinkage. (h). Report shrinkage separately for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist curing. 4. Additional Testing and Quality Control Services: The following will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450,Testing Laboratory Services, when requested by the Engineer. a. Checking of batching and mixing operations. b. Review of manufacturer's report of each cement shipment and conducting laboratory tests of cement. c. Molding and testing reserve 7-day cylinders or field cylinders. d. Conducting additional field tests for slump,concrete temperature,and ambient temperature. e. Alkalinity Tests: For concrete used in sanitary structures, one test for each structure. Perform alkalinity tests on concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure in accordance V] with "Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis," Vol. 15, page 230. 5. Contractor shall provide the following testing and quality control services: a. Employ an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test design mix for each class of concrete for which material source has been changed. b. Notify commercial testing laboratory employed by Owner 24 hours prior to placing concrete. 6. Testing of deficient concrete in place: a. When averages of three consecutive strength test results fail to equal or exceed specified strength, or when any individual strength test result falls below specified strength by more than 500 psi, strength of concrete shall be considered potentially deficient and core testing, structural analysis or load testing may be required by the Engineer. b. When concrete in place proves to be deficient, Contractor shall pay costs, including costs due to delays, incurred in providing additional 5/2013 03310-6 of 23 �/ CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE testing and analysis services provided by the Engineer, or the independent commercial testing laboratory selected by the Owner. c. Replace concrete work judged inadequate by core tests, structural analysis or load tests at no additional cost to the Owner. d. Core Tests: I) Obtain and test cores in accordance with ASTM C42. Where concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air dry cores (temperature 60 to 80 degrees F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test; test dry. Where concrete in structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C42. 2) Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. Location of cores shall be determined by the Engineer so as to least impair strength of structure. When,before testing,one or more cores shows evidence of having been damaged during or after removal from structure,replace the damaged cores. 4.10 3) Concrete in area represented by core test will be considered adequate when average strength of cores is equal to at least 85 percent of specified strength, and when no single core is less than 75 percent of specified strength. 4) Patch core holes in accordance with Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. e. Structural Analysis: When core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain, the Engineer may perform additional structural analysis at Contractor's expense to confirm safety of structure. f. Load Tests: When core tests and structural analysis do not confirm safety of structure, load tests may be required, and their results evaluated, in accordance with ACI 318. g. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, probe penetration tests (Windsor probe), or other nondestructive device may be permitted by the Engineer to determine relative strengths at various locations in structure,to evaluate concrete strength in place,or for selecting areas to be cored. However, such tests, unless properly calibrated and correlated with other test data,shall not be used as basis for acceptance or rejection of structure's safety. 5/2013 03310-7 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS A. Cement: Store cement in weather tight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set. When there is any doubt as to the expansive potential of shrinkage-compensating cements because of method or length of storage and exposure, laboratory test cement before use. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use aggregate stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 feet in thickness. Complete each layer before next is started. C. Fine Aggregate: Before using, allow fine aggregate to drain until uniform moisture content is reached. D. Admixtures: Store admixtures to avoid contamination,evaporation or damage. For those used in form of suspensions or non-stable solutions,provide suitable agitating equipment to assure uniform distribution of ingredients. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which would adversely affect their characteristics. E. Lightweight Aggregates: Uniformly pre-dampen lightweight aggregates as necessary to prevent excessive variations in moisture content. Allow pre-dampened aggregates to remain in stockpiles, under continuous fog spray, for minimum of 24 hours before use. Provide adequate drainage in stockpile areas to eliminate excess water and Nua accumulation of contaminated fines. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Use same brand of cement used in concrete mix design. Use only one brand of each type in each structure, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Portland Cement:ASTM C150,Type I or Type II,gray in color. Use Type III only when specifically authorized by the Engineer in writing. Use Type II, including the requirements of Table 2, in construction of liquid-containing structures and cooling towers, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. B. Admixtures: I. Do not use calcium chloride,thiocyanate or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. 2. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260,compatible with other admixtures J used. 5/2013 03310-8 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 3. Chemical Admixtures: Polymer type,non-staining,chloride-free admixtures conforming to ASTM C494, Type A, C, D or E. 4. High-Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G, compatible with and by the same manufacturer as other admixtures. C. Mixing Water: Use clean, potable water, free from harmful amounts of oils, acids, alkalis or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94. D. Aggregates: Use coarse aggregate from only one source and fine aggregate from only one source,for exposed concrete in any single structure. 1. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel,crushed gravel or crushed limestone conforming to ASTM C33. 2. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand complying with ASTM C33. 3. Limestone aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 and the following additional requirements: a. Clean,hard,strong and durable particles free of chemicals and coatings of silt,clay,or other fine materials that may affect hydration and bond firof cement paste. b. Select crushed limestone: High-calcium limestone (minimum 95 percent CaCO3 and maximum 3.5 percent MgCO3)with maximum Los Angeles Abrasion loss of 38 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or ASTM C535. c. Test aggregate for soundness in accordance with ASTM C88; maximum loss shall not exceed 18 percent after 5 cycles of magnesium sulfate test. 4. Maximum size of coarse aggregate: a. Normal weight concrete, except as noted below: 1-1/2 inches. b. Formed members 6 inches or less in least dimension: 1/5 least dimension. c. Slabs: 1/3 depth of slab. d. Drilled shafts: 1/3 clearance between reinforcing steel,but not greater than 3/4 inch. (11110 e. Concrete fill,seal slabs and bonded concrete topping in clarifiers: 3/8 inch. 5/2013 03310-9 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. Coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete: ASTM C330. Grading limits: 3/4 'm/ inch to No. 4. 6. Abrasive Aggregate: Conform to requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. E. Calcium Chloride: Not permitted. F. Evaporation Retardant: Masterbuilders "Confilm", Euclid "Eucobar", or equal. G. Miscellaneous Materials: I. Bonding Agent: Two-component modified epoxy resin. 2. Vapor barrier: 6-mil clear polyethylene film of type recommended for below- grade application. 3. Non-shrink grout: premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement and water-reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.02 CONCRETE MIX A. Objective: Select proportions of ingredients to produce concrete having proper placability, durability, strength, appearance and other specified properties. B. Mix Design: Employ and pay an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test mix designs for each type of concrete specified. Proportion mix design ingredients by weight. Submit mix designs and test results for approval. 1. During the trial batches,aggregate proportions may be adjusted by the testing laboratory using two coarse aggregate size ranges to obtain the required properties. If one size range produces an acceptable mix,a second size range need not be used. Such adjustments shall be considered refinements to the mix design and shall not be the basis for extra compensation to the Contractor. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of this Section, whether the aggregate proportions are from the Contractor's preliminary mix design, or whether the proportions have been adjusted during the trial batch process. Prepare trial batches using the aggregates,cement and admixtures proposed for the project. Make trial batches large enough to obtain 3 drying shrinkage test specimens and 6 compression test specimens from each batch. Shrinkage testing is required only for Class A and D concrete. J 5/2013 03310-10 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 4111, 2. Determine compressive strength by testing 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high cylinders,made,cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C 192 and ASTM C39. Test 3 compression test cylinders at 7 days and 3 at 28 days. Average compressive strength for the 3 cylinders tested at 28 days for any given trial batch shall be not less than 125 percent of the specified compressive strength. 3. Perform sieve analysis of the combined aggregate for each trial batch according to of ASTM C136. Report percentage passing each sieve. 4. In mix designs for Class A and D concrete,fine aggregate shall not exceed 41 percent of total aggregate by weight. C. Shrinkage Limitations, Class A and D Concrete 1. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the laboratory from the trial batch: 0.036 percent as measured at 21-day drying age or 0.042 percent at 28-day drying age. Use for construction only mix designs that meet trial batch shrinkage requirements. Shrinkage limitations apply only to Class A and D concrete. 2. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the field shall not exceed the trial batch maximum shrinkage requirement by more than 25 percent. 3. If the required shrinkage limitation is not met during construction,take any or all of the following actions,at no additional cost to the Owner,for securing the specified shrinkage requirements: Changing the source or aggregates,cement or admixtures; reducing water content; washing of aggregate to reduce fines; increasing the number of construction joints; modifying the curing requirements; or other actions designed to minimize shrinkage or its effects. D. Selecting Ingredient Proportions for Concrete: I. Proportion concrete mix according to ACI 301, Chapter 3. 2. Establish concrete mix design by laboratory trial batches prepared by independent testing laboratory, or on basis of previous field experience in accordance with provisions of ACI 318,Item 5.3;however,minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. 3. Concrete mix design data submitted for review shall have average 28-day compressive strength calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.2.1. When data is not available to determine standard deviation in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1, average 28-day strength of mix design shall conform to ACI 318, Table 5.3.2.2. E. Water-Cement Ratios: Maximum allowable water-cement ratios shall be as follows: 5/2013 03310-11 of23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE a. Concrete for liquid-containing structures: 0.45. J b. Concrete subjected to brackish water, salt spray or deicers: 0.40. c. All other concrete: 0.55. 2. Superplasticizer may be added to maintain specified maximum water-cement ratios. Include free water in aggregate in water-cement ratio computations. F. Adjustment of Mix Proportions: After sufficient data becomes available during construction,mix may be adjusted upon approval of the Engineer, in accordance with ACI 318,Item 5.5;however,minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. G. Entrained Air: Air-entrain all concrete except drilled shafts. Total air content in accordance with ASTM C 173: 4 to 6 percent. H. Consistency, Workability,and Slump: 1. The quantity of water in a batch of concrete shall be just sufficient, with a normal mixing period,to produce concrete which can be worked properly into place without segregation,and which can be compacted by vibratory methods as specified, to give the desired strength, density, impermeability and smoothness of surface. Change the quantity of water as necessary, with variations in the nature or moisture content of the aggregates, to maintain uniform production of a desired consistency. Determine the consistency of the concrete in successive batches by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143. Slumps shall be as follows: Concrete Type Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Portland Cement Concrete 2" 4" Concrete to be dosed with superplasticizer: 1" 3" Normal Weight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 9" Lightweight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 7" Drilled Shaft Concrete: 4"* 8" *Minimum slump where drilled shafts are cast in temporary casings: 5 inches 2. Specified slump shall apply at time when concrete is discharged at job site. Perform slump tests to monitor uniformity and consistency of concrete delivered to job site; however, do not use as basis for mix design. Do not exceed water-cement ratios specified. 5/2013 03310-12 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE I. Admixtures: Proportion admixtures according to manufacturer's recommendations. Use of accelerator is permitted when air temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Use of retarder is permitted when temperature of placed concrete exceeds 65 degrees F. 1. High-Range Water Reducers (Superplasticizers): Use superplasticizer to improve workability of concrete or delay hydration of cement,in accordance with requirements and recommendations of product manufacturer and approved submittals. K. Concrete Classification and Strength: 1. Strength: Conform to values for class of concrete indicated on Drawings for each portion of Work. Requirements are based on 28-day compressive strength. If high early-strength concrete is allowed,requirements are based on 7-day compressive strength. 2. Classification: Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Normal-weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard Concrete for Structures Containing Water or Wastewater A 4,000 564 (6 sacks) B 1,500 329 (3 Yz sacks) C 3,000 470 (5 sacks) 5,000 658 (7 sacks) H 3,000 611 (6 'A sacks) Concrete for Buildings, Slabs on Grade and Miscellaneous Structures AB 4,000 Not Applicable BB 1,500 Not Applicable CB 3,000 Not Applicable DB 5,000 Not Applicable Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Light-weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard E 3,000 Not Applicable F 4,000 Not Applicable G 5,000 Not Applicable 3. Maximum size aggregate for Class H concrete: 3/8 inch. Maximum size aggregate for all other normal-weight concrete: 1-1/2 inches, except as specified in Paragraph 2.0ID.4. 4. When required strength is not obtained with minimum cement content as specified,add cement,lower water-cement ratio or provide other aggregates as necessary. w 5/2013 03310-13 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. In addition to conforming to specified strength, lightweight concrete must be within specified unit weight limits. Maximum air-dry unit weight is 118 pounds per cubic foot; minimum is 110 pounds per cubic foot unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Determine air-dry unit weight in accordance with ASTM C567. Correlate air-dry unit weight with fresh unit weight of the same concrete as a basis for acceptance during construction. L. Use of Classes of Concrete: 1. Use classes of concrete as indicated on the Drawings and in other specifications. 2. Liquid-containing structures: If not otherwise indicated, use the following classes for structures containing water or wastewater and for utility applications in the locations described: a. Class A: All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class B: Unreinforced concrete used for plugging pipes, seal slabs, thrust blocks, and trench dams, unless indicated otherwise. c. Class B: Fill and topping. Where concrete fill thickness exceeds 3 inches in the majority of a placement and is not less than 1.5 inches thick, Class A concrete may be used. `I 3. All other structures: If not otherwise indicated,use the following classes in the locations described: a. Class Aft All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class CB: Duct banks;see Section 16402—Underground Duct Banks for additional requirements. c. Class BB: Unreinforced concrete fill under structures. 2.03 MIXING NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE A. Conform to ACI 301, Chapter 7. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: 1. Measure, batch,mix and transport ready-mixed concrete according to ASTM C94. Plant equipment and facilities shall conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities". J 5/2013 03310-14 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 110, 2. Provide batch tickets with information specified in ASTM C94. Deliver batch ticket with concrete and give to Owner's on-site testing laboratory representative. C. Batch Mixing at Site: I. Mix concrete in batch mixer conforming to requirements of CPMB "Concrete Plant Mixer Standards". Use mixer equipped with suitable charging hopper, water storage tank and water measuring device. Batch mixer shall be capable of mixing aggregates, cement and water into uniform mass within specified mixing time, and of discharging mix without segregation. Operate mixer according to rated capacity and recommended revolutions per minute printed on manufacturer's rating plate. 2. Charge batch into mixer so some water will enter before cement and aggregates. Keep water running until one-fourth of specified mixing time has elapsed. Provide controls to prevent discharging until required mixing time has elapsed. When concrete of normal weight is specified,provide controls to prevent addition of water during mixing. Discharge entire batch before mixer is recharged. 3. Mix each batch of 2 cubic yards or less for not less than 1 minute and 30 seconds. Increase minimum mixing time 15 seconds for each additional cubic fir yard or fraction of cubic yard. 4. Keep mixer clean. Replace pick-up and throw-over blades in drum when they have lost 10 percent of original depth. D. Admixtures: 1. Charge air-entraining and chemical admixtures into mixer as solution using automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Measure admixture to accuracy within+3 percent. Do not use admixtures in powdered form. 2. Two or more admixtures may be used in same concrete, provided that admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on concrete or on properties of each other. Inject admixtures separately during batching sequence. 3. Add retarding admixtures as soon as practicable after addition of cement. E. Temperature Control: 1. When ambient temperature falls below 40 degrees F, keep as-mixed temperature above 55 degrees F to maintain concrete above minimum placing temperature. 5/2013 03310-15 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. When water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and xima aggregate when temperature of mixture is greater than 100 degrees F. 3. In hot weather, maintain temperature of concrete below maximum placing temperature. When necessary, temperature may be lowered by cooling ingredients, cooling mixer drum by fog spray, using chilled water or well- crushed ice in whole or part for added water,or arranging delivery sequence so that time of transport and placement does not generate unacceptable temperatures. 4. Submit hot weather and cold weather concreting plans for approval. 2.04 MIXING LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE A. Determining Absorption of Aggregates: Mixing procedures vary according to total absorption by weight of lightweight aggregates. Determine total absorption by weight before pre-damping in accordance with ASTM C127. B. Ten Percent or Less Absorption: Follow same requirements as for mixing normal- weight concrete when preparing concrete made with low-absorptive lightweight aggregates having 10 percent or less total absorption by weight. To be low-absorptive, aggregates must absorb less than 2 percent additional water in first hour after mixing. ] C. More Than 10 Percent Absorption: Batch and mix concrete made with lightweight `/ aggregates having more than 10 percent total absorption by weight, as follows: 1. Place approximately 80 percent of mixing water in mixer. 2. If aggregates are pre-dampened, add air-entraining admixture and all aggregates. Mix for minimum of 30 seconds, or 5 to 10 revolutions of truck mixer. 3. When aggregates have not been pre-dampened,mix aggregates and water for minimum of 1 minute and 30 seconds,or 15 to 30 revolutions of truck mixer. Then add air-entraining admixture and mix for additional 30 seconds. 4. Then, in the following sequence,add specified or permitted admixtures(other than air-entraining agent),all cement, and mixing water previously withheld. 5. Complete mixing using procedures for normal-weight concrete. 2.05 MASS CONCRETE A. Do not use high early-strength cement(Type III) or accelerating admixtures. ] 5/2013 03310-16 of 23 �/ CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE B. Use high-range water-reducing admixture(superplasticizer)to minimize water content and cement content. C. Specified water-reducing retarding admixture may be required to prevent cold joints when placing large quantities of concrete,to permit revibration of concrete,to offset effects of high temperature in concrete or weather, and to reduce maximum temperature or rapid temperature rise. 2.06 EQUIPMENT A. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at delivery end. Conform to following equipment and operations requirements. B. Truck mixers, agitators and manner of operation: Conform to ASTM C94. Use of non-agitating equipment for transporting concrete is not permitted. C. Belt conveyors: Configure horizontally, or at a slope causing no segregation or loss. Use approved arrangement at discharge end to prevent separation. Discharge long runs without separation into hopper. D. Chutes: Metal or metal-lined (other than aluminum). Arrange for vertical-to- horizontal slopes not more than Ito 2 or less than 1 to 3. Chutes longer than 20 feet or not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into hopper before distribution. E. Do not use aluminum or aluminum-alloy pipe or chutes for conveying concrete. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Concreting Under Water: Not permitted except where shown otherwise on Drawings or approved by the Engineer. When shown or permitted,deposit concrete under water by methods acceptable to the Engineer so fresh concrete enters mass of previously- placed concrete from within,causing water to be displaced with minimum disturbance at surface of concrete. B. Protection from Adverse Weather: Unless adequate protection is provided or the Engineer's approval is obtained, do not place concrete during rain, sleet, snow or freezing weather. Do not permit rainwater to increase mixing water or to damage surface finish. If rainfall occurs after placing operations begin, provide adequate covering to protect Work. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: 5/2013 03310-17 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ]] I. Under interior slabs on grade, install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches r/ and seal watertight with tape,or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material;lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water,mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer,new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set,use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted,roughened surface for J good bond. Except where the Drawings call for joint surfaces to be coated, clean joint surfaces of laitance,loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate), roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1/4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Contract Drawings, shop drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork, inserts, embedded items, reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with grout or previously-placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. 5/2013 03310-18 of23 Vl CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age),thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions,unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise,this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms,clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater without special methods. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damage the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping,dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. H. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. 1. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed,thoroughly clean dirt,grease,grout, mortar,loose scale,rust and other foreign substances from surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.03 HANDLING,TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Conform to applicable requirements of Chapter 8 of ACI 301 and this Section. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non-conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: 1. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel that will not be covered by current pour. 5/2013 03310-19 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. Do not transport concrete with vibrators. 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet;take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. Rate of placement shall not exceed 5 feet of vertical rise per hour. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying,hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors, if used,shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used, it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather,conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses,vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up-slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured fora minimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. 5/2013 03310-20 of 23 ,/i CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE coo H. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 90 degrees F. 3.04 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning, or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose(conduit)diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits)that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. F. Field Control: Take samples for slump,air content and test cylinders at the placement (discharge) end of the line. 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures,or 3 days for other structures, before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1/2-inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed,remove the strip,level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.06 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly embed reinforcement,eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R Group 3 immersion- type high-speed power vibrators(8,000 to 12,000 rpm) in sufficient number and with 5/2013 03310-21 of23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE sufficient(at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously-placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers,with standby units as required,to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.07 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately IS inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into previously-placed layer. 3.08 REPAIRING SURFACE DEFECTS AND FINISHING A. Conform to Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.09 CURING A. Conform to Section 03300 - Cast-in- Place Concrete. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. 5/2013 03310-22 of23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 03310-23 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND 411, SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS Section 09901 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing surfaces, providing adequate conditions for proper workmanship, and furnishing and applying the protective coating materials required for metallic, concrete, masonry and plastic surfaces. B. Color code painting of piping and piping identification signs and markers. C. References to Technical Specifications: I. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment 2. Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01440—Inspection Services 5. Section 01460—Testing Laboratory Services D. Reference Standards: 411101 1. ANSI A13.1 — Color Schedule 2. ANSI/AW WA C213 —Fusion-bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. 3. Federal Specification TT-P-28—Paint, Aluminum, Heat Resisting 1200 degrees F. 4. Federal Standard 595A— Federal Standard Colors. 5. Military Specification DOD-P-23236—Paint Coating Systems, Steel Ship Tank, Fuel and Salt Water Ballast, Class 2. 6. NSF Standard 61 — Drinking Water System Components—Health Effects. 7. SSPC-PA 1 —Paint Application Specification No. 1 - Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting. 8. SSPC-PA 2—Paint Application Specification No. 2—Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 9. SSPC-Paint 16—Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide Black (or Dark Red) Paint. 10. SSPC-SP I —Solvent Cleaning. 11. SSPC-SP 2—Hand Tool Cleaning. 12. SSPC-SP 3—Power Tool Cleaning. 13. SSPC-SP 5/NACE I — White Metal Blast Cleaning. 6/2018 09901- I of27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 14. SSPC-SP 6/NACE 3—Commercial Blast Cleaning. 15. SSPC-SP 7/NACE 4—Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. 16. SSPC-SP 10/NACE 2—Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. 17. SSPC-SP II —Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. 18. SSPC-VIS 1-89—Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. 19. SSPC-VIS 3 —Visual Standard for Power-and Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel. 20. SSPC-QP 1 —Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors 21. SSPC-QP 2 —Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors to Remove Hazardous Paint. 22. SSPC-SP12/NACE 5 —Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High-and Ultrahigh-Pressure Water Jelling Prior to Recoating. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. No separate payment will be made for protective coatings unless specifically listed in Section 00300—Bid. Include payment for protective coatings in unit prices for items `Si to which coatings are applied. B. Measurement for protective coatings,when included as a separate pay item, is on a square-foot basis for completed protective coating systems. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Paint, coatings, or finishes as used in this Section include surface treatments, emulsions,enamels, paints,epoxies, polyurethanes, acrylics, zincs, and other protective coatings with the exceptions of galvanizing or anodizing,whether used as a pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat. B. DFT means minimum dry film thickness. C. VOC means Volatile Organic Components 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. See the Drawings and other Specifications to determine how coatings under this Section will be applied. Paint or coat new and modified surfaces in conformance with this Section. J 6/2018 09901-2 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND 4.0 SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS B. Coating system schedules summarize surfaces to be coated, required surface preparation, and coating systems to be applied. Coating notes on Drawings are used to show exceptions to schedules,to show or extend limits of coating systems, or to clarify or show details for application of coating systems. C. Do not apply protective coatings to the following surfaces unless specifically named or shown to be coated: I. Concrete. 2. Stainless steel, bronze,or brass. 3. Machined surfaces. 4. Grease fittings. 5. Glass. 6. Equipment nameplates. 7. Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walk surfaces. 8. Galvanized steel electrical conduit and associated galvanized and factory- coated junction boxes and electrical panels. 9. Galvanized surfaces inside buildings and not exposed to view. 10. Manhole and valve covers and rings, storm water inlet gratings, covers, and frames. D. Provide decorative and protective coatings for interior architectural surfaces such as wood,gypsum board,and masonry in accordance with Section 09900—Painting. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330—Submittal Procedures. B. Submit the following information at least 10 days prior to protective coating work. 1. Coating Materials List: Eight copies of a coating materials list naming the manufacturer and the coating number,keyed to the coating systems described in this Section. Submit the list prior to or at the time of sample submittal. 2. Paint Manufacturer's Information: For each coating system to be used, submit the following data: 6/2018 09901- 3 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS a. Paint manufacturer's Product Data Sheet for each product proposed, including statements on the suitability of the material for the intended use. b. Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with the system performance and material requirements. c. Paint manufacturer's instructions and recommendations on surface preparation, application and curing. d. Colors available for each product, where applicable. e. Compatibility of shop and field applied coatings, where applicable. f. Material Safety Data Sheets for each product used. g. VOC of each paint or coating proposed, stated in grams per litre. 3. Samples a. Submit color samples of paint, finishes, and other coating materials on 8-1/2 inch by 11-inch sheet metal or heavy cardstock. Have each sheet completely coated over its entire surface with one protective coating material, type, and color. b. Provide two sets of color samples to match each color selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard color sheets. If custom- mixed colors are indicated, prepare color samples using color formulations prepared to match the color samples furnished by the Engineer. c. Submit one 15-pound sample of each abrasive proposed to be used for surface preparation for submerged and severe service coating systems. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Submit five(5)references which show that the painting Contractor has previous successful experience with the indicated or comparable coating systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number for the owner of each installation for which the painting Contractor provided the protective coating. As an alternative, submit proof of certification in accordance with SSPC-QP 1. B. For any project which involves removal or repair of lead based paints, submit proof of certification in accordance with SSPC-QP 2. 6/2018 09901-4 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL RESTRICTIONS A. Ventilate area where coating is being applied. Post and enforce NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAME signs until coating has cured. B. Provide lighting level of 80-foot candles(860 lx) measured mid-height at substrate surface. C. Restrict worker access and construction traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing. D. Comply with City of Houston and all applicable OSHA confined space entry regulations including but not limited to OSHA Permit-Required Confined Space Standard 1910.146. 1.08 WARRANTY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE A. Warranty Inspection: 1. A warranty inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of coating and painting. The Contractor and a representative of the coating material manufacturer must attend the inspection. At the option of the 4W Authority,the Authority may be represented by a NACE certified coating inspector. 2. The Engineer may, by written notice to the Contractor, reschedule the warranty inspection to another date within the one-year correction period,or may cancel the warranty inspection altogether. Cancellation of the warranty inspection does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents. 3. Repair defective work discovered during the warranty inspection in accordance with these Specifications. B. Extended Maintenance of Chemical Tank Lining Systems: Promptly repair defects in the chemical resistant sheet lining system for a period of 2 years after the lining has been placed into service. Such maintenance includes repair of the chemical tank and any equipment or facilities damaged by the corrosive action of the chemicals. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 COATINGS CRITERIA A. Suitability: Use suitable coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer. Recommendations must be accompanied by test methods used to determine suitability 4111, and results of these tests. 6/2018 09901- 5 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP P112 PROTECTIVE COATINGS B. Compatibility: In any coating system, use only compatible materials from a single manufacturer. Give particular attention to compatibility of primers, intermediate coats and finish coats. If necessary, apply a barrier coat or tie coat between existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility. C. Containers: Supply coating materials in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, and name of manufacturer, all plainly legible at the time of use. D. Colors: Use colors and shades of colors of all coats of paint as indicated on the coating schedules or as selected by the Engineer. Make each coat a contrasting shade to the previous and following coats to facilitate inspection of surface coverage of each coat. The Engineer will select finish colors from the manufacturer's standard color samples. E. Substitute or Equal Products: 1. To establish equality under Section 01630—Product Substitution Procedures, furnish satisfactory documentation from the manufacturer of the proposed substitute product that the material meets the indicated requirements and is equivalent to or better in the following properties: a. Resistance to abrasion and physical damage. b. Resistance to chemical attack. c. Life expectancy. d. Ability to recoat in the future. e. Solids content by volume. f. Dry film thickness per coat. g. Compatibility with other coatings. h. Suitability for the intended service. i. Temperature limitations in service and during application. j. Type and quality of recommended undercoats and topcoats. k. Ease of application. I. Ease of repairing damaged areas. m. Stability of colors. 6/2018 09901-6 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS n. VOC content expressed in grams per liter. 2. For substitutions, submit protective-coating materials which are standard products produced by recognized manufacturers who are regularly engaged in production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. Where requested,provide the Engineer with the names of not less than 10 successful applications of the proposed manufacturer's products, which comply with these requirements. Applications must be in similar service environments to the job being contracted. 2.02 INDUSTRIAL COATING SYSTEMS A. Material Sources: Each of the following manufacturers is capable of supplying many of the specified industrial coating materials. Manufacturers and specific paint designations(numbers)are listed to indicate the required type and quality of coating. Contractors are to base their bid on the use of products supplied by one of the named manufacturers. These named manufacturers are designated to establish a level of acceptable product quality or manufacturing experience and are not to be construed as the only manufacturers of products acceptable for use. Other manufacturers will be considered on an individual basis, and may be submitted for consideration in accordance with Document 0700, Article 3.8, Product Options and Substitutions (excluding 3.8.3), Section 01330—Submittal Procedures, Section 01630—Products Substitution Procedures, and this Section. L AKZO/International Coatings 2. Ameron International 3. Carboline Coatings Company 4. Hempel Coatings USA, Inc. 5. ICI/Devoe Coatings 6. Sigma Coatings USA, Inc. 7. Tnemec Company B. System 1 —Aliphatic Polyurethane Finish Coat: Use a two-component aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating that provides superior color and gloss retention, resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering, and has a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume. As primer, use a rust inhibitive 2-component epoxy coating with minimum solids content of 66 percent by volume. 1. Prime Coat: a) DFT=4-6 mils (100-150 microns). b) Products: Ameron 385, 4119 Carboline 893, Tnemec 69, VyGuard V75, or equal. 6/2018 09901- 7 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 2. Finish Coats(one or more): a. DFT=2.0 to 4.0 mils(50-100 microns). b. Products: Ameron 450 GL, Carboline 134 HG,Tnemec 74, VyGuard V54, or equal. 3. Total System =6.0 to 10.0 mils(150-250 microns). 4. Apply more than one finish coat as necessary to produce a finish with uniform color and texture. C. System 2—Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy Polyurethane: For prime coat, use a 2-component water or solvent-based inorganic zinc silicate which contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film, and is recommended by the coating manufacturer as a primer for this system. As intermediate coat,use a high-build, 2- component epoxy with a solids content of at least 70 percent by volume. For finish coat, use a 2-component aliphatic acrylic or polyester polyurethane coating material that provides superior color and gloss retention, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering,and has a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume. 1. Prime Coat (Spray application required, roller application not allowed): a. DFT=2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). V b. Products: Ameron Dimetcote 21-5 or 21-9, Carbozinc 11 or D7WB, VyGuard 13F6 or I3F7, or equal. 2. Intermediate Coat: a. DFT 4.0 to 6.0 mils (100-150 microns). b. Ameron 385, Carboline 893, VyGuard V75,or equal. 3. Finish Coats (one or more): a. DFT=2.5 to 4.0 mils(65-100 microns). b. Ameron 450 GL, Carboline 134 HG, VyGuard V54, or equal. 4. Total System DFT=9.0 to 14.0 mils (230-600 microns). 5. Apply intermediate coat in excess of 4 mils (100 microns)DFT using the mist coat/full coat technique to completely cover the inorganic zinc primer and prevent bubbling of the epoxy or polyurethane finish coat. 6. Apply more than one finish coat as necessary to produce a finish with uniform color and texture. sale 6/2018 09901- 8 of27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 7. If inorganic zinc primer is used as a pre-construction or shop-applied primer, and there are damaged or uncoated areas, spot blast the damaged areas with abrasive to an SSPC-SP 10 Near White Metal Standard and then coat with the specified material. D. System 3 —Inorganic Zinc: Use a 2-component water-based inorganic zinc silicate which contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film. 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coat(one). a. DFT=2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). b. Products: Ameron Dimetcote 21-5, Carbozinc D7WB, VyGuard 13F6 or 13F7, or equal. 2. Total System DFT=2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). E. System 4—Acrylic Latex: Use a single component, water-based acrylic latex with a fungicide additive having a minimum solids content of 35 percent by volume. Apply a prime coat as recommended by manufacturer. Select coating material,which is available in ANSI safety colors. I. Prime Coat a. DFT=2.0 to 3.0 mils (50-75 microns). b. Products: Carboline D3358, Ameron 148, Hemucryl 1803. 2. Finish Coats (2 or more): a. DFT=6.0 to 8.0 mils (150-200 microns). b. Products: Carboline D3359, Ameron 220, Hemucryl 4803,or equal. 3. Total System DFT=8.0 to 11.0 mils(200-275 microns). F. System 5 —Epoxy: Use a two-component, rust inhibitive, polyamide-cured epoxy coating material with a recoatable finish that is available in a wide selection of colors. Use a coating with a minimum solids content of 66 percent by volume and resistant to service conditions of condensing moisture, splash and spillage of lubricating oils, and frequent washdown and cleaning. Prime Coat: a. DFT=3.0 to 5.0 mils (75-125 microns). b. Products: Ameron 385PA, Carboline 193, Tnemec 69, VyGuard V75, or equal. 6/2018 09901-9 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 2. Prime Coat(where shop applied): a. DFT=3.0 to 5.0 mils(75-125 microns). b. Products: Ameron 370, Carboline 193, Tnemec 161, VyGuard V75, or equal. 3. Finish Coats(2 or more): a. DFT= 5.0 to 7.0 mils(125-175 microns). b. Products: Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec 69, VyGuard V75,or equal. 4. Total System DFT= 8.0 to 12.0 mils(200-300 microns). G. System 6—Aliphatic Polyurethane, Fiberglass: Use a two-component aliphatic polyurethane coating material with superior color and gloss retention, resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, and resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering. Use a primer,tie coat, or mist coat as recommended by the manufacturer. Prime Coat(Tie Coat): Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec P66, VyGuard V75, or equal. 2. Finish Coats(2 or more): a. DFT=2.0 to 4.0 mils(50-75 microns). b. Products: Ameron Amershield, Carbothane 134 HG,Tnemec 74, VyGuard V54, or equal. H. Section 7—Alkyd Enamel: Use a high quality, gloss,or semi-gloss, medium long oil alkyd finish with a minimum solids content of 49 percent by volume. Apply primer as recommended by manufacturer. Prime Coat: a. DFT=2.0 to 3.0 mils (50 to 75 microns). b. Products: Ameron 5105, Carboline AD29,Tnemec P4-55, VyGuard 13R29, or equal. 2. Finish Coats(2 or more): a. DFT=2.0 to 4.0 mils (50-75 microns). b. Products:Ameron 5401 HAS, Carboline GP62, Tnemec 2H, VyGuard V20,or equal. 6/2018 09901- 10 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 3. Total System DFT =4.0 to 7.0 mils (100-175 microns). System 8—Aluminum Metal Isolation: Use one coat of a high-build polyamide epoxy paint. Products: Tnemec P66, Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec P66,VyGuard V75, or equal. 2. Total System DFT=6.0 to 8.0 mils(150-200 microns). J. System 9—Aluminum Silicone Resin: Use an aluminum silicone resin material suitable for a service temperature of up to 1000 degrees F (538 degrees C). Coating must comply with Federal Specification DOD-P-28. Prime Coat and Finish Coat(2 or more): a. DFT=2.0 to 4.0 mils(50-100 microns). b. Products: Tnemec 39-1061,Ameron 878, Carboline 4631, VyGuard V437A1, or equal. c. Total System DFT=2.0 to 4.0 mils (50-100 microns). 111111, K. System 10—Zinc Rich Epoxy: Use a polyamide Epoxy resin material that contains at least 76 percent zinc in the dried film. Prime Coat and Finish Coat(2 or more): a. DFT=3.0 to 5.0 mils (75-125 microns). b. Products: Ameron 68HS, Carboline 858, VyGuard 13F4, or equal. c. Total System DFT=3.0 to 5.0 mils (75-125 microns). 2.03 SUBMERGED AND SEVERE SERVICE COATING SYSTEMS A. Material Sources: The manufacturers listed in this paragraph are materials,which satisfy the material descriptions of this paragraph and have a documented successful record for long-term submerged or sever service conditions. Proposed substitute products will be considered as indicated under paragraphs 2.01.5. B. System 100—Amine-Cured Epoxy: Use a high-build amine-cured epoxy with a solids content of at least 80 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term immersion in potable water and municipal wastewater. For potable water service, select a coating material listed in the NSF 61 Standard. 411110 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coats (3 or more): 6/2018 09901- 11 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS a. DFT= 16.0 to 19.0 mils(400 to 475 microns). b. Products: Ameron Amercoat 395, Carboline 891, Tnemec 139,or equal. 2. For coating of valves and non-submerged equipment, DFT= 12.0 to 14.0 mils (300-350 microns). C. System 101 —Polyamide Cured Epoxy: Use a high-build, polyamide epoxy resin with a solids content of at least 56 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long- term immersion in potable water or municipal wastewater. For potable water service, select a coating material listed under NSF 61 Standard. I. Prime Coat and Finish Coats(3 or more): a. DFT= 12.0 to 14.0 mils (300-350 microns). b. Products: Tnemec 20, VyGuard 78PR, or equal. D. System 102—Coal Tar Epoxy: Use a high-build, 2-component amine or polyamide- cured coal tar epoxy with a solids content of at least 68 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term immersion in wastewater or for coating of buried surfaces. Coating must conform to Mil Spec DOD-P-23236,or to SSPC Paint 16. Prime coats are for use as a shop primer only. Omit prime coat when both surface preparation and coating are performed in the field. I. Prime Coat: DFT= 1.5 to 2.5 mils(38-65 microns). a. Products: Ameron Amercoat 83145, Tnemec P66, VyGuard V75, or equal. 2. Finish Coats (2 or more): a. DFT= 14.0 to 18.0 mils (350-450 microns). b. Products: Ameron 78HB, Carbomastic 14, Tnemec 4614413, VyGuard 64,or equal. c. Total System DFT= 15.5 to 20.5 mils (387-513 microns). E. System 103—Fusion Bonded Epoxy: Use a 100 percent powder epoxy applied in accordance with ANSI/A W WA C213, except prepare surface as specified in the coating system schedule in this Section. Apply the coating using the fluidized bed process. 1. Liquid Epoxy: For field repairs,use a 100 percent solids liquid epoxy as recommended by the powder epoxy manufacturer to provide a DFT of 15-17 mils(375-425 microns). 6/2018 09901- 12 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 2. Powder Coating: a. DFT= 15.0 to 17.0 mils(375-425 microns). b. Products: Scotchkote 134 or 206N,Napgard 7-0008 or 7-2500,or equal. c. Total System DFT= 15.0 to 17.0 mils (375-425 microns). d. For coating of valves, DFT=-11.0 to 12.0 mils (275-300 microns). F. System 104—Chemical Resistant Sheet Lining: I. Materials: Use natural rubber, chlorobutyl rubber, ethylene propylene diene monomer(EPDM)rubber, chloroprene polymer(neoprene) rubber, or chlorosulfonated polyethylene(Hypalon) rubber sheet lining material. Submit shop drawings containing technical information that confirms the suitability of the lining material system for long-term immersion in each chemical to be stored. Service temperatures are expected to be up to 1500 F (650 C). a. Neoprene Sheet Lining Material: Use a synthetic rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 59688, or equal. b. Chlorobutyl Sheet Lining Material: Use a synthetic rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 60924,or equal. c. Natural Rubber(soft) Sheet Lining Material: Use a soft natural rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 83160,or equal. d. Natural Rubber(hard) Sheet Lining Material: Use a hard, natural rubber resistant to oxidizing agents and formulated for autoclave curing. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 8631, or equal. e. EPDM Sheet Lining Material: Use synthetic rubber suitable for use as a lining for 50 percent sulphuric acid solution and formulated for autoclave or steam curing under pressure. f Hypalon Sheet Lining Material: Use synthetic rubber suitable for use as a lining for 50 percent sulfuric acid solution. 2. Primers: Use primers, adhesives, activators, accelerators, and other necessary materials as recommended by the sheet material manufacturer. 6/2018 09901- 13 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 3. Metal Surface Preparation: Prior to abrasive blast cleaning, prepare the base metal as required by the sheet lining material manufacturer's installation instructions. If the instructions differ from these specifications,provide the highest degree of cleaning and surface preparation required by either instructions or specifications. Perform abrasive blast cleaning in accordance with this section. 4. Installation: Install lining materials in accordance with the material manufacturer's written installation instructions. Line interior surfaces including piping, vents, fittings, flange faces, manhole covers, and blind flanges. 5. Testing: Test the lining system for holidays in accordance with this Section before and after curing. 6. Curing: Cure the lining system by steam using the time and temperature as required by the material manufacturer. G. System 105 —Vinyl Ester: Use vinyl ester resin coating material with an inert flake pigment that is suitable for immersion service in 30 percent hydrochloric acid and 30 percent sulfuric acid solutions. 1. Coating(2 or more coats): V a. DFT=40.0 to 45.0 mils (1000-1125 microns). b. Products: Plasite 4100,or equal. c. Prime Coat: As recommended by the material manufacturer. H. System 106— 100% Solids Epoxy: Use a solventless epoxy resin coating suitable for severe service areas subject to splash, spillage or intermittent immersion in wide range of industrial chemicals and wastewater. Coating to resist normal abrasion from rolling vehicles. 1. Coating (2 or more coats): a. DFT= 15.0 to 20.0 mils(325-500 microns). b. Products: Ameron, Carboline. c. Prime Coat: As recommended by manufacturer. System 107— 100%solids Epoxy Sealer: Use a clear, unpigmented solventless epoxy suitable for application over marginal surfaces, including damp surfaces,tight rust and tight old coatings. Coating serves as primer for alkyd, acrylic, epoxy, and polyurethane finish coats. J 6/2018 09901- 14 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND 41110 SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 1. Coating(1 coat only): a. DFT= 1.0 to 2.0 mils (25-50 microns). b. Products: ICI/Devoe 167 PrePrime, Carboline Rust Bond,or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Require the protective coating manufacturer to furnish a qualified technical representative to visit the project site for technical support as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer's products. B. For submerged and severe service coating systems, require the paint manufacturer to furnish the following services: Provide at least 6 hours of on-site instruction on the proper surface preparation, use, mixing, application, and curing of the coating systems. 2. Observe the start of surface preparation, mixing, and application and curing of the coating systems. 3. Provide the services of a NACE Certified Coating Inspector at all times during the surface preparation, mixing, application, curing and testing of all coatings applied in submerged or acid spill areas. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Use skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision. For all jobs involving lead based paint removal or repair, require the presence of a certified Competent Person, Lead per OSHA requirements. B. Apply coating to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Give special attention to edges, corners,crevices, and joints. Ensure thorough cleaning and an adequate thickness of coating material. Apply coatings to produce finished surfaces free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture and finish. Effect complete hiding so that the addition of another coat would not increase the hiding. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners,crevices,welds, and similar areas receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas. Apply a brushed stripe coat to all edges and welds after priming submerged or severe service areas. C. Remove, mask or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts,bearings, name plates on machinery, and other surfaces not to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent coating materials from 411/ falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Protect the working parts of mechanical and 6/2018 09901- 15 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and coating operations. Mask openings in motors to prevent entry of coating or other materials. D. Do not damage adjacent work during blast cleaning operations. Perform spray painting under carefully controlled conditions. Promptly repair any damage to adjacent work or adjoining property occurring from blast cleaning or coating operations. E. Coordinate cleaning and coating so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-coated surfaces. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS A. The following referenced surface preparation standards of the Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) form a part of this Specification: I. Solvent Cleaning(SSPC-SPI): Removal of oil,grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants from steel surfaces by cleaning with solvent,vapor degreasing, emulsion or alkaline cleaners, or steam. 2. Hand Tool Cleaning(SSPC-SP2): Removal of all loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter by hand chipping, scraping, sanding, and wire brushing. 3. Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP3): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by rotary or impact power tools,power wire brushing, or power abrading. 4. White Metal Blast Cleaning(SSPC-SP5/NACE I): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, dirt,mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter by blast cleaning. 5. Commercial Blast Cleaning(SSPC-SP6/NACE 3): Removal of all visible oil, grease, dust, dirt,mill scale, rust, coating, oxides,corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except limit random staining to no more than 33 percent of each unit area of surface. 6. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning(SSPC-SP7/NACE 4): Removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coating, all of which are considered tightly adherent if they cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife. 7. Near-white Blast Cleaning(SSPC-SPI OMACE 2): Removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products,and other foreign matter,except limit random staining to no more than 5 percent of each unit area of surface. 6/2018 09901- 16 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 3.04 METAL SURFACE PREPARATION(UNGALVANIZED) A. Provide the minimum abrasive-blasted surface preparation as indicated in the coating system schedules at the end of this Section. Where there is a conflict between these specifications and the coatings manufacturer's printed recommendations for the intended service, the higher degree of cleaning applies. B. Perform metal surface preparation in conformance with the current SSPC/NACE Standards and this Section. Blast cleaned surfaces must match standard samples in SSPC-VIZ I. C. Remove oil, grease,welding fluxes,and other surface contaminants prior to blast cleaning using solving cleaning as per SSPC-SPI. D. Round or chamfer sharp edges. Grind to smooth finish burrs, surface defects,and weld splatter prior to blast cleaning. E. Select the type and size of abrasive to produce a surface profile that meets the coating manufacturer's recommendation for the particular coating and service conditions. As abrasives for submerged and severe service coating systems use clean, hard, sharp cutting crushed slag. Do not use automated blasting systems and metal shot or grit for surfaces that will be in submerged service,even if subsequent abrasive blasting is planned with hard, sharp-cutting slag. F. Do not reuse abrasive except when an automated blasting system is used for surfaces that will be in non-submerged service. For automated blasting systems, use clean, oil- free abrasives. In the abrasive mix, use at least 50 percent steel grit. Replenish abrasive mix with new shot/grit combination as necessary to maintain the anchor profile within '''/ mil (13 microns)of the specified profile. G. Comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations for blast cleaning. H. For air-blast cleaning, supply compressed air at adequate pressure from well- maintained compressors equipped with oil and moisture separators which delivers oil and water-free air as checked with white blotter, white cloth, or plastic sheets at the beginning of each blasting sequence. I. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation using dry air- blast cleaning, vacuuming,or another approved method prior to painting. Vacuuming must be the final cleaning method immediately prior to painting areas that will go into submerged service. J. In enclosed areas and other areas where dust may settle, vacuum the surface clean and wipe it with a tack cloth. co 6/2018 09901- 17 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS K. Remove damaged or defective coating by the specified blast or power tool cleaning to meet the clean surface requirements before recoating. L. If the specified abrasive blast cleaning will damage adjacent work,the area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet,and the coated surface will not be in submerged service,then SSPC-SP2—Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP3—Power Tool Cleaning, may be used. If the coated area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and will be in submerged service,then SSPC-SPI 1 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal may be used. M. Completely remove shop-applied coatings of unknown composition before the specified coatings are applied. Examine valves, castings, ductile or cast iron pipe,and fabricated pipe or equipment for the presence of shop-applied temporary coatings. Completely remove temporary coatings by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SPI method before starting abrasive blast cleaning. Alternate cleaning methods such as Baking Soda Blasting or Sponge Jet Blasting may be used as appropriate. N. Use the solvent cleaning method (SSPC-SPI)to clean shop-primed equipment in the field before finish coats are applied. 3.05 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR GALVANIZED FERROUS METAL A. For galvanized ferrous metal,use the alkaline cleaning method per SSPC-SPI to remove oil, grease, and other contaminants detrimental to adhesion of protective coatings. Alternate methods with biodegradable surfactant type cleaners followed by fresh water washing may be used as appropriate. B. Apply pretreatment coatings of surfaces in accordance with the printed recommendations of the coating manufacturer. 3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION OF FERROUS SURFACES WITH EXISTING COATINGS A. Remove grease,oil, heavy chalk, dirt,or other contaminants by solvent or detergent cleaning prior to abrasive blast cleaning. Determine the generic type of the existing coatings by laboratory testing. B. Provide the degree of cleaning specified in the coating system schedule for the entire surface to be coated. If the degree of cleaning is not indicated in the schedule, remove deteriorated coatings by abrasive blast cleaning to meet the requirements of SSPC- SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Clean areas of tightly adhering coatings to meet the requirements of SSPC-SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning,with the remaining thickness of pre-existing coating not to exceed 3 mils. C. If coatings to be applied are not compatible with existing coatings,apply intermediate coatings conforming to the paint manufacturer's recommendation for the indicated coating system or completely remove the existing coating prior to abrasive blast Vl 6/2018 09901- 18 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND 4.0 SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS cleaning. Make a small trial application for compatibility prior to painting large areas. Allow the trial application to cure for 7 days at 50°F(10° C)or higher before determining compatibility. D. Completely remove coatings of unknown composition prior to application of new coatings. E. Where specified or where job site conditions do not permit dry-abrasive blasting for industrial coating systems due to dust or air pollution considerations, water jetting or wet-abrasive blasting may be used. In both methods, use inhibitors approved by the manufacturer of the coating system, which will be applied over the cleaned area. Begin the coating application as soon as the surface has dried, and before the formation of any flash rusting. Perform water jetting with or without abrasive injection, as appropriate,to achieve the specified degree of surface cleanliness. Do not use water-jetting methods for submerged or severe-service coating systems, unless specified for that area. 3.07 PLASTIC,FIBERGLASS,AND NONFERROUS METALS SURFACE PREPARATION A. Unless otherwise indicated,for equipment or parts of equipment which are not submerged in service, shop-prime, and then finish-coat in the field after installation. itheFor methods, materials, application equipment,and other details of shop painting, comply with this Section. If the shop primer requires topcoating within a specified period of time, apply the finish coating in the shop and then touch-up the paint after installation. B. Perform surface preparation and coating work in the field for equipment, or parts and surfaces of equipment which are submerged or inside an enclosed hydraulic structure when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves. C. For certain pieces of equipment, it may be undesirable or impractical to apply finish coatings in the field. Such equipment may include engine generator sets, equipment such as electrical control panels, switch gear or main control boards, submerged parts of pumps, ferrous metal passages in valves, or other items where it is not possible to obtain the required quality in the field. For such equipment,prime and finish-coat in the shop and touch-up in the field after installation. Use the identical material for touch-up that was used for shop painting. Require the manufacturer of each such piece of equipment to certify as part of its shop drawings that the surface preparation is in accordance with these specifications. Submit the coating material product data sheet with the shop drawings for the equipment. D. For certain small pieces of equipment,the manufacturer may have a standard coating system,which is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such cases, the final determination of suitability will be made during review of the shop drawing submittals. Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor equipment such as instruments, small compressors, and chemical metering pumps. 6/2018 09901- 19 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS E. Protect shop-painted surfaces during shipment and handling. Protect surfaces with padding or blocking. Lift equipment with canvas or nylon slings. Before being topcoated,do not expose primed surfaces to the weather for more than 2 months or less when recommended by the coating manufacturer. F. Repair damage to shop-applied coatings in accordance with this Section and the coating manufacturer's printed instructions. G. Make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are compatible and meet the requirements of this Section. Submit copies of applicable coating manufacturer's product data sheets with equipment shop drawings. 3.08 APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. Apply protective coatings to steel substrates in accordance with SSPC-PAI —Paint Application Specification No. 1. Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting. B. Inspect cleaned surfaces and each coat prior to succeeding coats. Schedule inspections with the Engineer in advance. C. Paint blast-cleaned ferrous metal surfaces before rusting or other deterioration of the surface occurs. Limit blast cleaning to only those surfaces that can be coated in the same working day unless the area to be coated is protected by humidity control j equipment set to maintain humidity below 50 percent at all times. .01 D. Apply coatings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and this Section, whichever has the most stringent requirements. E. Give special attention to edges,angles, weld seams, flanges, nuts and bolts, and other places where insufficient film thickness is likely to occur. Use stripe painting by brush,after application of the primer, for these areas. F. Give special attention to materials, which will be joined so closely that proper surface preparation and application are not possible. Coat such contact surface prior to assembly or installation. Use only inorganic zinc primers on faying surfaces. G. Apply finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats, in a manner which will present uniform texture and color-matched appearance. H. Do not apply coatings under the following conditions: 1. Temperature outside of the manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum range. 2. Dust or smoke laden atmosphere. 3. Substrate or air temperature less than 5°F (3°C) above the dew point. 6/2018 09901-20 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 4. Air temperature is expected to drop below 40°F (14°C) or less than 5°F (3°C) above the dew point within 8 hours after application of the coating. 5. Wind conditions in excess of 15 MPH or dust laden. I. Determine the dew point by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with the U.S. Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau psychometric tables. 1. For steel piping which will not be buried, have the surface abrasive blast cleaned and primed before installation. Apply coating to pipe surfaces at concrete supports prior to casting the concrete supports. K. Apply finish coats after concrete, masonry, and equipment installation is complete and the work areas are clean and dust free. Concrete must have cured for a minimum of 28 days @ 75° F (24° C) unless an approved epoxy sealer has been applied to green concrete within 12 hours of finishing the concrete. 3.09 CURING OF COATINGS A. Maintain curing conditions in accordance with the recommendations of the coating material manufacturer and this Section, whichever is the most stringent. Complete curing before placing the coating systems into service. (111110 B. In the case of enclosed areas, forced air ventilation using heated air may be required until the coatings have fully cured. C. Forced air ventilation is required for the application and curing of coatings on the interior surfaces of enclosed hydraulic structures. During application and curing periods, continuously exhaust air from the lowest level of the structure using portable ducting to force air into all compartments and around baffles. After interior coating operations have been completed,provide a final curing period that meets the minimum temperature and time requirements of the manufacturer of the coating system being applied,while operating the forced air ventilation system continuously. 3.10 SHOP AND HELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Give the Operator and Engineer a minimum of 3 days advance notice of the start of any field surface preparation work or coating application work,and a minimum of 7 days advance notice of the start of any shop surface preparation work. B. Perform surface preparation and coating applications in the presence of the Authority Engineer, or his appointed NACE certified coating inspector, unless the Engineer has granted prior approval to perform the work in their absence. C. Inspection by the Engineer or the NACE certified inspector, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the work, does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with these Specifications. 6/2018 09901- 21 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS D. Erect and move scaffolding where requested by the Engineer to facilitate inspection. Provide additional illumination to light areas to be inspected. Remove or grind smooth all scaffolding clips welded to the structure prior to surface preparation of the structure. E. Until final acceptance of the coatings, furnish inspection devices in good working condition for the detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thickness (DFT) of protective coatings. Make DFT gauges available for the Engineer's use throughout the coating process until final acceptance of the coatings. Provide the services of a NACE certified coating inspector for all holiday detection work until the final acceptance of the coatings. Operate holiday inspection devices in the presence of the Engineer. F. Perform holiday tests on coated ferrous surfaces inside a steel reservoir,other surfaces that will be submerged in water or other liquids, or surfaces which are enclosed in a vapor space in such structures. Perform holiday tests on surfaces coated with any of the submerged and severe service coating systems. Mark and repair or recoat areas which contain holidays in accordance with the coating manufacturer's printed instructions and then retest. DO NOT PERFORM HOLIDAY TESTING AFTER STRUCTURE HAS BEEN SUBMERGED. Coatings with Thickness Exceeding 20 mils(500 microns): For surfaces having a total DFT exceeding 20 mils (500 microns); use a pulse-type holiday Detector such as Elcometer 136, or equal. Adjust and operate in accordance with NACE RP0188. 2. Coatings with Thickness of 20 mils (500 microns)or Less: For surfaces having a total DFT of 20 mils or less, use Elcometer 269 non-destructive type holiday detector, or equal. Instrument must operate at less than 75 volts. For thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils(250 and 500 microns), a non-sudsing type wetting agent such as Kodak Photo-Flo, or equal, may be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. For submerged or severe service areas,the residue of the wetting agent must be removed with clean, fresh water prior to application of any additional coats. G. On ferrous metals,measure the DFT in accordance with SSPC-PA2 Measurement of Dry Film Thickness with magnetic gauges using either a pull-off type gauge (Elcometer 211)or constant pressure gauge(Elcometer 345F),or equal. Test each coat for the correct thickness. Calibrate the DFT gauge at the beginning of each workday or shift in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer of the gauge. Do not take measurements until at least 8 hours after coating application. On non- ferrous metals, measure the DFT with positive pressure eddy current gages (Elcometer 345N)or equal. H. Evaluation of blast-cleaned surface preparation work will be based upon comparison with photographic samples contained in SSPC-VIZ 1. 6/2018 09901-22 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND 11, SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS Evaluation of surface profile will be based upon the use of TesTex pressure sensitive tapes. 3.11 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING A. Painting and Color Coding: 1. Use colors and signs to identify all piping which is exposed to view in buildings or tunnels, above suspended ceilings or exposed above grade, and all outdoor piping. Identify each pipe by a color complying with the following schedule of colors and by applied markers. 2. Coat pipes with the number of coats and type of material specified. Base coats for pipeline painting may be a neutral color. Make each succeeding base coat a contrasting color. For the final coat, comply with the pipe identifying color schedule. 3. Apply pipe identification markers to exposed piping, except for the following pipe at wastewater lift stations: a. Discharge piping for wastewater pumps. 111, b. Vent piping. c. Any piping inside wet wells. B. Pipe Identification Markers: 1. Identify all pipes with applied signs or markers at 15-foot centers, at both sides of penetrated walls or floors, adjacent to valves, at connected equipment, at branch fittings,and in congested pipe layouts. a. Apply markers consisting of signs with legends as follows: OUTSIDE DIAMETER LENGTH OF SIZE OF OF PIPE OR COVERING COLOR FIELD LETTERS (INCHES) (INCHES) (INCHES) 3/4 to 1- 1/4 8 1/2 1- 1/2 tot-3/8 8 3/4 2- 1/2 to 5- 7/8 12 1- 1/4 6 to 7-7/8 12 1- 1/4 8 to 10 24 2- 1/2 Over 10 32 3- 1/2 b. As pipe markers, use semi-rigid outdoor grade acrylic plastic, Seton Name Plate Corp., SetMark, or equal. Use Type SNA for outside 4111, diameters 3/4 through 5-7/8 inches and Type STR for 6-inch outside 6/2018 09901-23 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PHI PROTECTIVE COATINGS diameter or larger. For pipes less than 3/4-inch in diameter, use applied marker of brass identification tags 1-1/2 inches square with depressed letters I/4-inch high,black-filled. Apply tightly to pipeline with metal or plastic straps. C. Pipe Identification Color Schedule: I. For pipe coatings, use the colors listed in the following pipe identification color schedule: PIPE IDENTIFICATION COLOR SCHEDULE PIPING SYSTEM COLOR FED. STD.NO. Fire Mains Red 1 1 105 Oxygen Orange 12246 Sodium Hypochlorite Yellow 13655 Raw Polymer Pink 11156 Diluted Polymer Purple 17142 Natural Gas Yellow 13655 Heating Water Pink 11158 Domestic Hot Light Pink 11668 Potable Water Blue 15102 Non-Potable Water White 17875 Instrument Air Green 14187 Plant Air Dark Green 14110 Raw Sewage Gray 16473 Grit Dark Gray 16187 Cyclone Return Gray 16473 Classifier Return Gray 16473 PIPING SYSTEM COLOR FED. STD. NO. Heavy Solids Dark Brown 10080 Return Sludge Brown 10091 Waste Sludge Yellow-Brown 10266 Scum Light Brown 10334 Chilled Water Supply(CWS) Blue-Green 14329 Chilled Water Return (CWR) Blue-Green 14325 Condensing Water Supply(Cond-WS) Light Green 14533 Condensing Water Return (Cond-WR) Light Green 14533 Deionized Water(DW) Light Blue 15526 Vacuum (Vac) White 17875 Vent Light Gray 16492 2. For pipe identification colors not listed above, follow American National Standard (ANSI A13.1-81) Color Schedule: 6/2018 09901-24 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS a. Materials inherently hazardous, flammable or explosive; chemically active or toxic; extreme temperature or pressure; radioactive: Yellow Field with Black Letters. b. Material of inherently low hazard—liquid or liquid admixture: Green Field with White Letters; gas or gaseous admixture: Blue Field with White Letters. c. Fire quenching materials,water, foam, carbon dioxide, Halon, etc.: Red Field with White Letters. 3.12 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULES—FERROUS METALS A. Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal —Not Galvanized SCHEDULE NO. AND SURFACE SYSTEM NO./ APPLICATION PREPARATION DESCRIPTION FM-1: Surfaces indoors and outdoors, exposed or Near White Metal (2) covered,except those listed below. blast cleaning SSPC- Inorganic zinc/epoxy/ SPI0/NACE 2 polyurethane FM-2: Surfaces in chlorination room, chlorine Near White Metal (100) storage room,sodium hypochlorite storage room blast cleaning SSPC- Amine-cured epoxy SPI0/NACE 2 FM-3: Surfaces of pumps and equipment and other White Metal Blast (100) ferrous surfaces submerged or intermittently Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ Amine-cured epoxy submerged in potable water, utility water, and NACE 1 wastewater, including surfaces lower than 2 feet above high-water level in hydraulic structures, and surfaces inside enclosed hydraulic structures, pump state wet wells, and vents (excluding shop-coated valves,couplings,and pumps). FM-4: Surfaces exposed to high temperature between Near White Metal (3) 1500 and 6000 F(650 and 3150 C). blast cleaning SSPC- Inorganic Zinc,water-based SPIO/NACE 2 FM-5: Surfaces exposed to high temperature between Near White Metal (9) 6000 and 10000 F. blast cleaning SSPC- Aluminum silicon resin SPIO/NACE 2 FM-6: Where indicated, ferrous surfaces in water White Metal Blast (101) passages of valves 4-inch size and larger, exterior Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ Polyamide-cured epoxy surfaces of submerged valves. NACE 1 FM-7: Where indicated, ferrous surfaces in water White Metal Blast (101) passages of pumps which have discharge size of 4 Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ Polyamide-cured epoxy inches or larger; exterior, submerged surfaces of NACE I pumps. FM-8: Ferrous surfaces of sleeve couplings. White Metal Blast (103) Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ Fusion-bonded epoxy NACE I FM-9: Ferrous surfaces of sluice gates, flap gates, White Metal Blast (101) and shear gates,including wall thimbles. Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ Polyamide-cured epoxy 6/2018 09901-25 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS NACE I FM-10: Structural steel, miscellaneous metal work, Commercial Blast (10) and supports for prefabricated metal buildings, not Cleaning Zinc Rich Epoxy exposed to view in finished building (SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 FM-12: Ferrous metal exposed to view, inside and Near White Metal (2) outside of buildings. blast cleaning Inorganic zinc/ SSPC-SPIO/NACE 2 epoxy/polyurethane FM-13: Surfaces of indoor equipment, not Commercial Blast (5) submerged. Cleaning SSPC-SP6/ Epoxy,equipment NACE 3 FM14: Exterior (exposed) surfaces shop-coated with Light abrasive blast (6) fusion-bonded epoxy. to roughen surface Aliphatic polyurethane B. Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal —Galvanized: Apply pretreatment coatings, barrier coatings, or washes as recommended by the coating manufacturer. SCHEDULE NO. AND SURFACE SYSTEM NO./ APPLICATION PREPARATION DESCRIPTION FMG-1: Exposed surfaces indoors and outdoors, Alkaline cleaning (1)or(4) except those listed below. SSPC-SPI Aliphatic Polyurethane, or Acrylic FMG-2: Surfaces in chlorination room, chlorine Alkaline Cleaning (100) storage room,and sodium hypochlorite storage room. SSPC-SPI Amine-cured epoxy FMG-3: Surfaces submerged in water or wastewater. Alkaline cleaning (100) including surfaces lower than 2 feet above high-water SSPC-SPI followed Amine-cured epoxy level and surfaces inside hydraulic structures and by Brush-Off blast vents cleaning SSPC-SP7/ NACE 4 FMG-4: Surface exposed to view, inside and outside Alkaline Cleaning (I)or(4) of building. SSPC-SPI Aliphatic polyurethane, or Acrylic C. Coating System Schedule, Interior Surface of Welded Steel Tanks: Coat interior surfaces, including tank nozzles, manholes, nozzle necks, and flange faces. For steel tank exterior coating systems, see paragraph 3.12(A), Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal—Not Galvanized. PRODUCT STORED SURFACE PREPARATION SYSTEM NO./DESCRIPTION Zinc Orthophosphate White metal blast cleaning (104 SSPC-SP5/NACEI Natural rubber(soft)or neoprene _ Liquid Alum White metal blast cleaning (104) SSPC-SP5/NACEI Natural rubber(soft)or neoprene Polymer White metal blast cleaning (104) SSPC-SP5/NACEI Natural rubber(soft)or neoprene Sodium Bisulfite White metal blast cleaning (104) SSPC-SP5/NACEI Natural rubber(soft)or neoprene Ferric Chloride White metal blast cleaning (104) SSPC-SP5/NACEI Natural rubber(hard) Aqueous Ammonia White metal blast cleaning (104) 6/2018 09901-26 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS SSPC-SP5/NACEI Chlorobutyl rubber Caustic Soda Commercial Blast Cleaning No Coating SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Sodium Hypochlorite White metal blast cleaning (104) SSPC-SP5/NACEI Chlorobutyl Rubber _ Sulfuric Acid(max.45% White metal blast cleaning (107) concentration) SSPC-SP5/NACEI Hypalon Sulfuric Acid(above 40% White metal blast cleaning (107) concentration) SSPC-SP5/NACEI Viton Hydrofluosilicic Acid White metal blast cleaning (107) SSPC-SP5/NACEI Chlorobutyl Rubber 3.13 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULES,NONFERROUS METAL, PLASTIC, FIBERGLASS Where isolated non-ferrous parts are associated with equipment or piping, use the coating system for the adjacent connected surfaces. Do not coat handrails, gratings, frames, or hatches. Use primers recommended by coating manufacturer. SCHEDULE NO.AND SURFACE PREPARATION SYSTEM NO./ APPLICATIONS DESCRIPTION NFM-1: Exposed surfaces, indoors and Solvent cleaned SSPC-SPI (1) outdoors,except those listed below. Aliphatic Polyurethane CIF NFM-2: Chlorination room, chlorine Solvent cleaned SSPC-SPI (100) storage room, sodium hypochlorite Amine-Cured Epoxy storage room. NFM-3: Aluminum surfaces in contact Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (8) with concrete, or with any other metal Aluminum Metal Isolation except galvanized ferrous metal NFM-4: Polyvinyl chloride plastic, Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (4) indoors and outdoors, not submerged. Acrylic NFM-5: Fiberglass surfaces. Per paragraph 3.09,Plastic, (6) Fiberglass,and Non-Ferrous Aliphatic Polyurethane Metals Surface Preparation Fiberglass END OF SECTION 41/ 6/2018 09901- 27 of 27 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP P112 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS Section 11211 VERTICAL TURBINE CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work Included I. Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing, installing, and testing a potable water booster pumping system capable of pumping ground water or surface water at ambient temperature. 2. The pumping system shall consist of new, can-type, open shaft, water lubricated, multi-stage vertical turbine pump(s) and appurtenances, as indicated on the Construction Plans. Pumps complete and operational with motors, control equipment, and accessories as shown on the Construction Plans and as specified shall be supplied by the pump manufacturer. 3. The Pump Supplier shall be the single of responsibility for the Pumping System, which shall include, but not be limited to, the Pumps, Motors, and Variable Frequency Drives. The Pump Supplier shall be responsible for coordinating all of the equipment such that the completed Pumping System is fully compatible, tested, and operational. meeting all required design requirements with no issues. 4. Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs), Motors, and all electrical components shall conform to the requirements of this section and Division 16. Specifically see Section 16150 (Electrical Motors) and 16175 (Variable Frequency Drive) for related requirements. 5. The Contractor and Pump Supplier shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to construct, disinfect and test the pumps, replacement piping, and appurtenances as indicated on the drawings, and as specified. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. Piping 2. Electrical Motors and Variable Frequency Drives(VFD's) 4/2019 11211 - 1 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS C. Coordination: 1. Dimensions shown are approximate and are not guaranteed to be exact. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field and shall advise the Engineer of any discrepancies before performing the work. 2. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate with the work related to this Section. 3. Coordinate pumps/motors and controls with electrical work as specified in other Sections. 4. The Contractor shall name a pump manufacturer, who will have responsibility for the function of the complete system in accordance with the intent of these Specifications. In order to ensure equipment compatibility, one manufacturer shall be responsible for providing all pumping equipment, including pump and motor. 5. The Contractor and pump manufacturer shall each assume the proper responsibility for proper functioning of the equipment. The Contractor shall retain overall responsibility for equipment coordination, compatibility, installation,testing, and operation. D. References to Technical Specifications: I. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment 2. Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings 3. Section 01350— Submittals 4. Section 03300—Cast In Place Concrete 5. Section 03310—Structural Concrete 6. Section 01440—Inspection Services 7. Section 01460—Testing Laboratory Services E. Reference Standards: All Codes& Standards shall be considered the most current version of that code unless noted otherwise. 1. AWWA A100— Water Wells 2. AWWA EIOI — Vertical Turbine Pumps — Line Shaft and Submersible Types 3. Hydraulic Institute(HI) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for providing and installing vertical turbine can-type booster pumps is on a lump-sum basis for each aforementioned item as bid. Payment includes related work performed on these items in accordance with related sections of these Technical Specifications. 4/2019 11211 -2 of 18 "/ CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS B. Refer to Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures for unit price procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials used shall be new, of high-grade, and with properties best suited to the work required. B. Pump(s) shall be designed for continuous operation without cavitation within the specified operating range. Pump performance shall be stable and free from cavitation and noise throughout the specified operating head range at minimum submergence. C. All centrifugal pumps shall have a continuously rising curve. In no case shall the required horsepower at any point on the performance curve exceed the rated horsepower of the motor. D. The design is based on a specific manufacturer's equipment. If the Contractor's choice of equipment is approved but requires modifications to structure(s), foundation(s), equipment, or piping for installation, the Contractor is responsible for submitting revised engineering design and drawings to make the proposed equipment compatible with the Project, at no additional cost. E. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Pumping equipment provided under this Section shall be a standard product in regular production by manufacturers whose products have proven reliable in similar service for at least 10 years. 2. Manufacturer shall satisfy the Engineer that it is capable of the following: a. Providing local (i.e., within 50 miles of the limits of the City of Houston) factory trained personnel to service the pumps and allied equipment when needed, within a 48-hour period. b. Providing all needed spare parts for the pumps within a 48-hour period. The following spare parts must be available within a 48- hour period: 1. One Chesterton Mechanical Seal Assembly 2. Two(2) motor space heaters tir 3. Two(2)N.C.winding thermostats 4. Two(2) 10 ohm bearing RTDs. 4/2019 11211 - 3 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS 5. One set of bearings 6. One set of o-rings F. Factory Testing: The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the following tests of each pump,drive, and motor: 1. General: Tests shall be performed in accordance with the Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps of the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute. Before shipment,tests shall be performed on the actual assembled unit from shut- off head condition to 130%of the required maximum design capacity. 2. Factory Tests of Pumps: Test each pump using water. If tests do not meet performance specifications, Contractor shall correct deficiencies to provide the specified performance. All pumps shall be hydrostatically tested to a minimum pressure of 1.5 times the "shut- off' head of the pump. Each pump and motor shall be tested as one assembled unit and shall show zero leakage. Submit test reports containing the following information: a. Hydraulic test with a minimum of 8 readings between "shut- off head and "run-out" head, recorded on data sheets as defined by the Hydraulic Institute, signed, dated, and certified. b. Certified pump curves showing head, flow, bhp, efficiency, and speed. No negative tolerance on flow, head, or efficiency will be accepted. 3. Factory Tests of Motors: All motors of sizes 10 hp and larger shall be assembled, tested, and certified at the factory and the working clearances checked to ensure that all parts are properly fitted. The tests shall be in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112 and ANSI/IEEE 115 standards, including heat run and efficiency tests. All computations shall be recorded and a certified/dated copy of the test results shall be furnished to the Engineer. 4. Factory Testing of Pumping Units: All pumps, variable speed drives, and motors, shall be factory-tested as complete, assembled units, as specified above, and witnessed by a factory-employed registered professional engineer on staff at the manufacturing facility. Test results shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to the anticipated date of shipping of the pumps. Equipment shall not be shipped until the test data have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer. S. Acceptance: In the event of failure of any pump to meet any of the above requirements or efficiencies, the Contractor shall make all necessary modifications, repairs, or replacements to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the pump shall be re-tested at no additional compensation, until found satisfactory. 4/2019 1121 1 - 4 of 18 `/ CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS G. Field Tests: All pumping units shall be field tested after installation, in accordance with the Contract Documents and the appropriate standard specifications, to demonstrate satisfactory operation, without causing excessive noise, vibration, cavitation, and overheating of the bearings. The field testing shall be performed in the presence of an experienced field representative of the manufacturer of each major item of equipment, who shall supervise the following tasks and shall certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation: 1. Pump performance shall be documented by obtaining concurrent readings, showing motor voltage, amperage, pump suction head (if applicable), and pump discharge head, for at least 4 pumping conditions at each pump rpm. Each power lead to the motor shall be checked for proper current balance. 2. Bearing temperatures shall be determined by a contact-type thermometer. A running time of at least 20 minutes shall be maintained for this test. 3. Electrical and instrumentation testing shall conform to applicable Sections of these Specifications. 4. The field testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled test. Each pump shall be operated for a continuous period of 24 hours in automatic operation. Upon proper determination by the Engineer that the pumping system has operated satisfactorily without major failure, the pumping shall be recommended for acceptance by the Engineer. 5. In the event any of the pumping equipment fails to meet the above test requirements, it shall be modified and re-tested in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. The Contractor shall then certify in writing that the equipment has been satisfactorily tested, and that all final adjustments thereto have been made. Certification shall include date of final acceptance test, as well as a listing of all persons present during tests, and resulting test data. The costs of all work performed in this paragraph by factory-trained representatives shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01350 - Submittals. B. Submittals shall include complete fabrication, assembly, and installation drawings,together with detailed specifications and data covering materials used, parts, devices, and other accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished, including the following information: 4/2019 11211 - 5 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS 1. Pumps: ,, a. Name of Manufacturer. b. Type and Model. c. Rotative speed. d. Size of discharge and suction tl anges. e. Diameter of pump shaft. f. Type of bearings and bearing life calculations. g. Thickness of casing. h. Net weight of pump. I. Total weight of pump,motor, base, coupling, guard,etc. J. Certified performance curve showing capacity vs. head,NPSH required, efficiency, and kW input. k. Data on shop painting. 2. Motors: a. Name of Manufacturer. b. Type and Model. c. Type of bearings and lubrication. d. Rated size of motor, horsepower. e. Temperature rating. f Full load rotative speed. g. Net weight. h. Service factor. Efficiency at full load and pump design point. j. Full load current. k. Locked rotor current. 3. Supplemental Pump/Motor Information: a. General lifting, installation, and adjustment instructions and recommendations. b. Exact size, placement, and embedment requirements of all anchor bolts. c. Details on materials of construction of all components including applicable ASTM designations. d. Information on bearing types and bearing life. e. Details of shaft sealing system. f. Piping schematics. g. Equipment and motor protective device details. Connection diagrams for motor and all protective devices. h. Panel layout drawings, schematic wiring diagrams, and component product data sheets for control panels. 4/2019 11211 - 6 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS A list of spare parts and special tools to be provided. j. Any additional information required to show conformance with the equipment specifications. k. Warranty documentation including statement of duration of warranty period and contact phone numbers and addresses for warranty issues. C. Manufacturer's Performance Affidavit/Certifications: I. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's Performance Affidavit for equipment to be furnished. a. Pump manufacturer must certify to the Contractor (and the Owner) that he has examined the Contract Documents (including the arrangement and conditions of proposed electrical, mechanical, and structural systems) and the detailed requirements of manufacturing and subsequent installation of the pumping equipment units, that the equipment, apparatus, or process he offers to furnish will meet in every way the performance requirements set forth or implied in the Contract Documents, and that there are no omissions, ambiguities, or contl icts in the Construction Plans that may negatively affect the pumping unit. b. The Performance Affidavit must be signed by an officer of the corporation, partnership, or company manufacturing the equipment and witnessed by a notary public. 2. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's certification that the running amperes of the motor will not exceed the nameplate rating of the motor under all expected operating conditions. 3. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's certification that spare parts, seals, bearings, etc. shall be available locally for models supplied. D. Instructions for field procedures for installation, adjustments. inspection, and testing shall be provided prior to installation of the pumps. E. Prior to start-up, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer complete operations and maintenance ("O&M") manuals in accordance with the requirements contained in Section 01350—Submittals. F. Submit record drawings in accordance with the requirements contained in [[ Section 01760- Project Record Documents. 111, 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE 4/2019 11211 - 7of18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS A. Installation and Start-Up Assistance: Furnish the service of the equipment manufacturer's representative or technician, experienced in installation and operation of the type of systems being provided, to supervise the installation, start-up, acceptance tests, and final inspection in accordance with this Section and Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control. B. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: The Contractor shall provide for the services of a factory service representative to instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. This service shall consist a half- day's visit to the Site. Field training shall cover all of the items contained in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions. 1.06 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. No pump spare parts shall be supplied with the pumps. See Section 1.03 for the minimum amount of pump spare parts that must be available within 48 hours from the pumping unit supplier upon a call by the Owner. The minimum recommended motor and VFD spare parts must also be available within 48 hours from the final approved motor and VFD supplier. B. Contractor shall furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment. J C. A complete set of all special tools which may be necessary for the adjustment, operation, maintenance, and disassembly of all equipment shall be furnished. Special tools are considered to be those tools which, because of their limited use, are not normally available, but which are necessary for the particular equipment. Tools shall be high-grade, smooth, forged, alloy,tool steel. D. Special tools shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard special tools until completion of the work, at which time they shall be turned over to the Owner. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Equipment and parts shall be packaged for shipment so as to prevent breakage and damage to components. B. Deliver materials to the Site, inspect for damage, and unload and store with a minimum of handling. C. Store materials off the ground and under a weather-tight covering. 4/2019 11211 - 8 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS 4111, D. Apply protective coatings and manually rotate shafts regularly as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated in the O&M instructions. 1.08 EVALUATION AND SELECTION A. The Owner reserves the right to select any equipment which is deemed to be in its best interest. 1.09 IDENTIFICATION PLATES A. Provide each pump with a stainless steel nameplate securely affixed to the pump with stainless steel hardware. The nameplate shall contain the manufacturer's name, model number, serial number, rating information, and any other pertinent data. Additionally, furnish each motor with a stainless steel nameplate containing the information required by ANSI/NEMA MG 1-16.61, as a minimum. B. Number the booster pump(s) with 3-inch or larger stencils, using black alkyd paint. Pump numbers are to correspond to wiring in motor control center. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Pump manufacturer shall furnish to the Owner a warranty written expressly from the manufacturer to the Owner, covering workmanship and material. The warranty shall cover 100% of parts and labor for at least one full year. The warranty shall commence on the day/date of final completion and acceptance of the Work by the Engineer and Owner. Warranty shall be in printed form and previously published as the manufacturer's Standard Warranty for all similar units manufactured. Pumps repaired, under warranty, will be returned to the job- site, freight pre-paid. 2.0 MATERIAL 2.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall furnish and install only such equipment as the designated single manufacturer certifies is suitable for use with its pump(s) for the service conditions. B. All manufactured items provided under this Section shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall be the products of reputable manufacturers specializing in the manufacture of such products; such manufacturers 4/2019 1 121 1 -9 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS shall have had previous experience in such manufacture and shall, V upon request of the Engineer, furnish the names of not less than 10 successful installations of its equipment of comparable nature to that offered under this Contract. C. All combinations of manufactured pumping equipment which are provided under these specifications shall be entirely compatible, and the Contractor and the designated single manufacturer shall be responsible for the compatible and successful operation of the various components of the units conforming to specified requirements. All necessary mountings and appurtenances shall be included. D. Where 2 or more units of the same type and /or size are required, such units shall all be produced by the same manufacturer. E. Substitution: The engineering design is based on a certain manufacturer's equipment. If the Contractor's choice of equipment is approved but requires modifications to plant, equipment, or piping for installation, the Contractor is responsible for submitting revised engineering design and drawings to make the proposed equipment compatible with the Project, at no additional cost to the Owner. F. The equipment shall conform to the American Water Works Association ("AWWA") Standard for Turbine Pumps-Line Shaft and Submersible Types, AWWA E101-88 (or latest revision). 2.02 MANUFACTURER AND ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The design is based on information obtained from JDC Fluid Equipment LLC (281-224-8244, Tommy Truitt or Jeff Williams) which is the supplier of the existing Fairbanks Morse 75 HP and 150 HP pumps shown as existing on the Construction Plans. The intent is to match the proposed replacement pumps to the existing 150 HP pumps shown on the Construction Plans. B. The following named manufacturer will be considered as acceptable, provided the equipment meets the specified requirements and system operating conditions: 1. Fairbanks Morse-Nijhuis (Pentair) C. Listing as an approved or acceptable manufacturer will not relieve the manufacturer from conforming to Contract Specifications. D. Equipment named and specified herein is intended to establish the type, J 4/2019 11211 - 10of18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS function, and quality required. Equipment of other manufacturers not identified above may be accepted if (1) manufacturer is listed on the City's approved products list and if (2) sufficient information is submitted to the Engineer for review no later than 4 working days prior to acceptance of bids. Engineer's determination as to the acceptability of their proposed system or conformance/non-conformance with the specified requirements shall be final. 2.03 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Each pumping unit shall be designed/provided to meet the operating conditions indicated on the Construction Plans. B. Pumps shall be the following unless approved otherwise: Pump Numbers: Pumps 1 & 2 Pump Model: 15H-7000A W Impeller Model: T7FKA99B Impeller Diameter: 9.75-inches Motor Horsepower: 150 HP Motor Full Speed: 1190 rpm Guaranteed Design Point A: 2000 gpm @ 154-feet head @ 82%efficiency Max NPSH-R at Point A: 13-feet Guaranteed Design Point B: 2800 gpm @ 94-feet head @ 73%efficiency Max NPSH-R at Point B: 17-feet C. Motors to be replaced are on Pumps I, 2, and 5. All pumps shall be 150 HP inverter duty motors. D. Pump performance shall be stable and free from cavitation and noise throughout the specified operating head range at minimum suction submergences. The Required Net Positive Suction Head ("NPSHR") at the maximum operating capacity shall not exceed 20 feet. E. Each pumping unit shall be designed so that reverse rotation at rated head will not cause damage to any component. F. Pump shutoff head shall not exceed 225 feet TDH. 2.04 EQUIPMENT A. All parts of the equipment furnished shall, be designed and constructed for the (1111, maximum stresses occurring during fabrication, transportation, installation, 4/2019 11211 - 11 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS testing, and all conditions of operation. All materials employed in the pumping equipment shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be entirely suitable for the intended application. Material not specifically called for shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality, and free from all defects and imperfection that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. B. Motors, couplings, and accessories shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer. C. Equipment and appurtenances shall be designed in conformity with ASTM, ASME, AWE, NEMA, and other generally accepted applicable standards. All parts of duplicate equipment shall be interchangeable without modification. D. All bearings and moving parts shall be adequately protected by bushings or other approved means against wear. E. Details shall be designed for appearance as well as utility. Protruding members,joints, corners,gear covers, etc., shall be finished in appearance. All exposed welds on machinery shall be ground smooth and the corners of structural shapes shall be rounded or chamfered. F. All equipment greater than 100 pounds shall have lifting lugs, eyebolts, etc., for case of lifting, without damage or undue stress exerted on its components. G. Discharge Head: I. Discharge head shall be manufactured of fabricated carbon steel, Grade A-36 or A-53, with minimum 150-pound discharge flange drilled and faced to match connecting pipe. Base of head shall match flange provided on suction barrel. All bolt holes should straddle discharge centerline. Provide minimum I/2-inch NPT drain connection and 3/4- inch NPT barrel vent. Discharge head design shall be capable of containing maximum pressure developed by pump plus suction pressure. 2. Discharge head shall be supplied with adequate integral motor stand height to accommodate shaft seals required and a non-reversible ratchet device to prevent reverse rotation of pump. Pump manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating whether the non-reversible ratchet is built into the motor or provided separately as part of the pumping unit. The top of head shall be machined to accept base of driver provided. H. Suction Barrel: 1. The existing Suction barrel shall be re-used unless field measurements 4/2019 11211 - 12 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PFI2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS indicate that the barrel was not originally constructed as anticipated and the Owner authorizes the supplemental bid item for suction barrel replacement to meet the required configuration. 2. Suction barrel shall be fabricated of ASTM A53 Grade B steel pipe, Schedule 40, with minimum 150 pound suction flange drilled and faced to match connecting pipe. The bottom of barrel shall be supplied with welded plate cap of ASTM A36 steel, thickness of plate shall be equal or greater than the thickness of the barrel. Barrel and flanges shall be capable of containing maximum suction pressure supplied to the suction flange. The barrel shall be equipped with square base plate which shall be machined and tapped to match the discharge head base flange supplied. Barrel shall be supplied with proper gasket or o-ring and bolting for application to seal between the barrel flange and the head base flange. 2. If indicated on the Construction Plans, base shall be drilled to allow barrel to be secured to foundation with stainless steel anchor bolts. The barrel, both inside and outside, shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of the National Sanitation Foundation, after fabrication. Contractor shall submit confirmation with the submittal that the galvanizing has been treated such that it is certified ANSI/NSF 61 safe for long-term submersion in drinking water. 41, Column Assembly: 1. Column pipe shall be fabricated of ASTM A53, Grade B, 0.375-inch wall thickness, steel pipe. Column pipe shall be provided in sections not to exceed 10 feet in length for pump speeds up to 2200 rpm and not to exceed 5 feet in length for pump speeds over 2200 rpm. Top and bottom sections of column pipe shall not exceed 5 feet in length. Column pipe lengths shall be designed to accommodate maximum line shaft bearing spacings. 2. Provide flanged column connections in accordance with the pump manufacturer's recommendations. Provide steel flanges on each end of column pipe with double fillet welds on joints. Mount line shaft bearings in Bismuth Bronze Alloy C89835 or ASTM B584-836 bronze bearing retainers held in position by the butted ends of the flanged column pipe. Bronze shall be NSF-61 rated. 3. Line Shaft Bearings: Spacing of bearing shall be designed to prevent vibration and misalignment of shaft in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Shafts: Provide one-piece bowl, line and head shaft of ASTM A582 Grade 416 stainless steel, polished, and precision straightened. Shaft length should not exceed 10 feet. Where necessary separate pump bowl shafts may be provided of the same material with shaft couplings of bored 4/2019 11211 - 13 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP P112 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS and threaded ASTM A108 Grade B 1112 steel without vent holes. Butting faces shall be machined square to the shaft axis with maximum permissible axial misalignment of the thread axis with the shaft axis of 0.002 inch in 6 inches. Threads shall tighten during pump operation. Shaft sleeves of ASTM A296 type 304 stainless steel shall be provided for mounting mechanical seals. Bowl shaft shall have a minimum diameter of 1-1/4 inch, unless a larger size as determined by AWWA El01-88, Section A4.3, Paragraph 4.3.3. 5. All column bolts and hardware shall be grade 316 stainless steel. J. Mechanical Seal: 1. Mechanical Seal: Provide Chesterton 442/442C split mechanical or approved equal split mechanical seal. Mechanical seal and selected face materials shall be compatible with and rated for the proposed potable water service up to 250 psi and temperature range 0 to 100 degrees F. K. Motor/Pump Coupling: 1. Motor/Pump Coupling: Provide John Crane Metastream Adjustable Coupler Type CPLR2125 C-Series Rigid Couplings Style 2 or approved equal. Coupling shall be non-spacer style with an easily adjustable nut for setting vertical clearances in the driven equipment. 2. Coupling shall meet AGMA Balance Class 8 with clearance fit bores. 3. Coupling shall be AISI 1040 steel with corrosion-resistant phosphate coating. L. Pump Bowl Assembly: Intermediate bowls, discharge adaptor and suction case shall be constructed from close grained ASTM A48, Class 30 cast iron, free from sand holes or other faults. The water passages on bowls sizes 4 inches through 20 inches shall be lined with porcelain enamel and larger sizes shall be Skotchkote 134 fusion bonded epoxy lined to reduce friction losses. 2. The bowl assembly shall be of flanged construction utilizing grade 316 stainless steel bolts or threaded construction utilizing left hand threads. All mating surfaces shall be precision machined and fitted. Rabbeted fits shall be utilized throughout the bowl assembly for accurate fit and alignment and fitted with bronze fitted wear rings. 3. Impellers shall be of the enclosed type and cast from grade 316 stainless steel, machined and dynamically balanced. Each impeller shall be fastened to the shaft with a split collet of Grade 416 stainless steel. 4. Intermediate bowls, suction case, and discharge adaptor shall have water 4/2019 11211 - 14of18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS 4111/ lubricated bronze bearings. 5. Discharge case shall be threaded on the outside and fitted with a cast iron ASTM A48 class 30 column adaptor. 6. See Paragraph 2.04.G.2 for non-reverse ratchet requirements to prevent reverse rotation. M. Motors: Have motors furnished by the pump manufacturer. Motors shall conform to Division 16. Motors shall be Inverter Duty Rated for use with VFDs. 2. Size the motor to be non-overloading at the any point on the characteristic curve of the pump, including run-out. Provide a motor with a power draw that does not exceed the nameplate rating while the pump is operating between the normal minimum and maximum system curves. Do not exceed the total capacity of the motor, excluding the service factor, while the pump is operating between the minimum and maximum points on the characteristic curve. 3. Motor shall be supplied with Aegis Shaft Grounding Rings to protect motor bearings from the destructive voltages produced by variable frequency drives(VFDs). 4. Motor shall be supplied with steady bushings to stabilize the shaft and minimize shaft whip which could damage the mechanical seal. 5. All motor hardware shall be grade 316 stainless steel. 6. VFD, motor, and electrical shall conform to all requirements of Division 16. 7. Unless otherwise noted in Division 16, motors shall be premium efficient electric motors which include space heaters and N.C. winding thermostats in WP-I enclosures. N. Equipment Guards: Equipment driven by open shafts, belts, chains, or gears shall be provided with all-metal guards enclosing the drive mechanism. 2. Guards shall be constructed of perforated stainless steel sheet plate or expanded stainless steel material set in a frame of stainless steel members. 3. Guards shall be secured in position by stainless steel braces or straps which will permit easy removal for servicing the equipment. 4. The guards shall conform in all respects to all applicable safety codes and regulations. O. Bolts, Studs, and Nuts: 1. All bolts, studs, and nuts shall have American National form right- 4/2019 11211 - 15 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS hand machine cut threads which shall be in conformity with the current ANSI Bl.l, "Screw Threads", Coarse Thread Series, unless otherwise specified. 2. Bolt heads and nuts shall be semi-finished and shall be in conformity with ANSI B18.2, "Wrench-Head Bolts and Nuts and Wrench Openings", Heavy Series, unless otherwise specified. All nuts shall be hexagonal in shape. 3. Anchor bolts, flange bolts, studs, and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel in conformity with ASTM A276. P. Pump Suction and Discharge Gauges: Furnish pressure gauges for suction and discharge nozzle of each pump meeting the following criteria. I. Round case, 4-1/2 inches nominal diameter, with stainless steel Bourdon tube, 1/2-inch NPT bottom male threaded connection, stainless steel rack and pinion movement, black micro-adjusted pointers, and black figures with white plastic dials and a threaded ring. Select gauges with an accuracy of 112%of scale range and bracket supported. 2. Provide gauge assemblies complete with stainless steel pipe and fittings, stainless steel shut-off needle valve and an adjustable stainless steel snubber. Q. Pump Coatings: 1. Provide minimum of two coats at 4-6 mils DFT per coat for a total of 8- 12 mils DFT of TNEMEC Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus for Bowls, Column Assembly, and Discharge Head. Provide surface preparation (SSPC-SPIO/NACE 2 Near White Blast Cleaning with minimum anchor profile of 1.5 mils) and apply in accordance with manufacturer recommendations for ANSI/NSF-61 potable immersion service. R. Bearings and Bearing Temperature Detectors: I. Unless otherwise directed by Division 16: a. Provide 100,000 L-I 0 bearing life certified bearings. b. Provide 10 ohm copper bearing temperature detectors (BTDs). 2.05 MATERIALS PROTECTION A. Materials and equipment shall be shop-coated in accordance with manufacturer's standard practices and repairs and final coatings shall be in accordance with the Section titled "Protective Coatings," or as directed by the Engineer. 4/2019 11211 - 16 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS 3.0 CONSTRUCTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS A. Install pumps in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions in locations shown on the Construction Plans. Provide sufficient clearances for thermal expansion and contraction. B. Set anchor bolts in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Use anti-seize compound on all stainless steel bolts. C. Install pump so as to avoid placing stress from the connection piping system to the pump flanges. Support piping on structure with no piping load supported from the pump housing. Use restrained flexible connections for the pump flanges. Install pump to accommodate thermal expansion and stress. D. Install mechanical sealing compound in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 411111, 3.02 PIPING A. Make flanged joints up tight,taking care to avoid undue strain on flanges. B. Align bolt holes for each flanged joint. Use full size bolts for the bolt holes; use of undersized bolts to make up for misalignment of bolt holes or for any other purpose will not be permitted. C. Install flanged pipe so that adjoining flange faces are not out of parallel to such a degree that the flanged joint cannot be made watertight without over straining the flange. D. Replace by one of proper dimensions any flanged pipe or fitting whose dimensions do not allow the making of a proper flanged joint as specified herein. E. Provide hangers and supports, where necessary to support piping. 3.03 REPAIR PAINTING A. Inspect painted surfaces for holidays, scratches,chipping, and other damage. B. Refinish imperfections by cleaning burrs and rough surfaces and sanding to a smooth finish, prime, and repaint in an acceptable manner with paint obtained 411P' smooth the manufacturer. 4/2019 1 121 1 - 17 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND VERTICAL TURBINE SHADOW CREEK WP PH2 CAN-TYPE BOOSTER PUMPS C. Nameplates shall not be covered with paint, but shall be cleaned and legible at completion of the work. 3.04 TESTING A. General: 1. After pumps have been completely installed and working under the direction of the manufacturer, conduct field tests necessary to demonstrate that pump operation conforms to these Specifications. Supply water, labor, equipment and incidentals required to complete field tests. Conduct testing in the presence of the Engineer. 2. Demonstrate with a "Final Acceptance Test" that these Specifications have been met by the equipment as installed. As a minimum, perform the following tests to determine: a. That units have been properly installed and are in correct alignment. b. That units operate without overheating or overloading any parts and without objectionable vibration or strain. c. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts. d. That the controls perform satisfactorily as to sequence control, correct start and stop elevations, and proper high-level alarm functions. e. That the units meet the specified operating conditions. B. If the pump performance does not comply with Specifications, take corrective measures or remove and replace pump(s) with pump(s) which satisfy the conditions specified. END OF SECTION 4/2019 11211 - 18 of 18 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP MECHANICAL WORK Section 15012 MECHANICAL WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. This specification section is an inherent part of all work performed on this project and its contents shall apply for all mechanical systems,control and instrumentation related work. Contractor shall advise all Subcontractors and Vendors accordingly. C. Warning: Mechanical systems for this project have electrically operated equipment present. Contractor shall not work on energized equipment except when necessary and then only in the presence of another experienced person.Use lock-out tags where working on de-energized equipment. D. Coordinate work with ground storage tank contractor and hydrotank contractor. E. Coordinate work with civil, structural and electrical contractors. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The work shall include providing materials and equipment required for installation of a complete and functioning mechanical system as specified and as shown on the drawings. B. This section is an integral part of all Specification Sections related to mechanical, controls,and instrumentation construction under this contract. Contractor shall check all other plans and specifications for this project and include items and equipment accordingly. The total set of construction documents make up the requirements for work for this project and shall be included in Contractor's bid at no additional cost to Owner or Owner's Representative. C. All plans and specifications for this project are representative of the design intent and may not contain minute details normally associated with normally accepted mechanical construction,as described in applicable codes or as described in manufacturer's literature. Contractor shall provide all appurtenances normally associated with a particular equipment or device, and as required for a proper operating system. Some devices, equipment or materials may appear in only one location on the plans or in the specifications. 4/2019 15012 - 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP MECHANICAL WORK Each and every item shown or described is to be included for this project.No exceptions. ., All required equipment and devices necessary for intended operation are to be included without additional cost to Owner. Where discrepancies occur between various plans or specifications for this project and where clarification is not requested by Contractor prior to bidding,the most stringent requirement shall be included in the Contractors bid price. Mechanical Sub-Contractor shall review all specifications for all trade disciplines with mechanical requirements prior to bidding and shall include most stringent and higher cost requirements in bid price. No elements or requirements of the plans or specifications shall be omitted in Contractor's bid price unless specifically deleted in writing by Engineer. Failure to follow this specification requirement is at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.03 MAJOR ITEMS OF WORK AS FOLLOWS A. Replace existing air conditioning unit with new similar unit, except new unit shall be a minimum of 24,000 btu/h larger than existing unit. See name plate data on sheet El 9 for additional information. B. Modification of existing ductwork from ac unit to building. C. Modifications of concrete pad to match new ac unit. D. Provide all supports and structures as required. E. Testing of ac system after installation is completed. 1.04 (not used) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under all sections for Engineer's approval. Any items not submitted are the total responsibility of the Contractor. If it is not submitted, it is not approved. Requirements of this section apply to all other related specifications for this project. All submittals must have Engineer's project number marked clearly on front of submittal. All shop drawings submitted that do not strictly comply with this section will be rejected and returned un-reviewed. B. Where submittals for a particular equipment, device or material item vary from that specified or shown on plan drawings, and where that item is not specifically noted as acceptable and, where installation of submitted item results in improper or undesirable operation of the system,Contractor shall be liable for removal and/or replacement of that item with the item specified or shown on plan drawings at no additional cost to Owner. Such items submitted as substitutions shall be listed separately and clearly noted as "Substituted Item". 4/2019 15012 -2of10 V CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP MECHANICAL WORK C. Submittals of ac system shop drawings will require a minimum of two (2) weeks for review from time of receipt by Engineer. Contractor shall submit all shop drawings in time to account for this period of review. D. Provide CAD files of equipment views and material and device schedules on CD and include with submittals. Only one(I) hard copy is required for Mechanical Engineers review. E. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s)page(s)for the item submitted and mark `Complies" or "Non-Compliance" or"Exception" adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. F. Contractor is fully responsible for submitting correct operating voltage,horsepower,and phase requirements of all equipment furnished and installed under this contract. Shop drawing review by Engineer does not remove this responsibility. Incorrect submittal information is at risk by Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. G. General Contractor shall route all Vendor submittals with electrical requirements to Electrical Contractor who shall review and coordinate all power and control requirements and affix stamp certifying coordination. Any variation to plans or specifications shall be noted accordingly on Vendor's submittal. 411, H. All equipment shop drawings shall indicate changes or modifications as a result of previous submittal variances. No shop drawings shall be submitted that have not been coordinated as required by this specification. Any submittals not coordinated as such will be at Contractor's risk and at no additional cost to the Owner for required changes necessary for a complete operating system as intended by the plans and specifications for this project. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. The Contractor shall provide (6) complete sets of hard-covered ring-bound loose-leaf O&M manuals. In addition to "as-built" system drawings, the manuals shall include internal wiring diagrams and operating and maintenance literature for all components provided under this section. The submitted literature shall be in sufficient detail to facilitate the operation,removal,installation,programming and configuration,adjustment, calibration, testing and maintenance of each component and/or instrument. The O&M manual shall be professionally composed and compiled and shall not be an assembly of "cut-sheets". Engineer shall have sole discretion of acceptance of O&M manual contents and composition. B. The contents of the O&M manuals shall be generally organized as follows: I. System Equipment/Installation 2. Operation (step-by-step procedures)4,0 4/2019 15012 - 3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP MECHANICAL WORK 3. Maintenance and Troubleshooting C. Where mechanical equipment is to be installed under this contract or where existing and noted,the Contractor shall further provide a complete set of as-built plans,diagrams,parts and materials list,parts source,operational instructions,and trouble shooting instructions, service data,testing data, required service and wiring diagrams sufficient for complete operation, service and maintenance of the mechanical equipment by Plant Technicians and Operators or by outside service technicians. D. All of this information shall be provided on CD in AutoCAD 2013,or later version,and in Word format and shall be arranged in final order for insertion into equipment files. Coordinate overall layout and contents of O&M Manual with Engineer. 1.07 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor shall be experienced with all types of HVAC systems covered under this contract.No work shall be undertaken where Contractor's firm,project supervisors,and project mechanical workers have not had recent experience in similar projects in area of project location. Contractor will be required to furnish proof of experience where requested by Owner or Engineer or their Representatives. B. Contractors Project Manager or his Assistant shall be familiar with types of mechanical construction required by this project in order to determine that all subcontractors and vendors work is in conformance with the plans and specifications. C. Contractor shall have an established safety-training program in effect for the duration of this project and will be required to submit proof of safety training for all employees working on this project. 1.08 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor shall review all sections of the plans and specifications for this project and shall note all mechanical requirements for devices and equipment shown or implied,and shall provide service accordingly for a complete operating system. Any discrepancies in Mechanical requirements noted in various plans and specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to ordering equipment or materials or prior to starting construction related to the item in question. Coordination of all equipment and systems is Contractor's sole responsibility. Failure to coordinate all equipment requirements shall be the responsibility of the Contractor,at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Contractor shall provide all installation, set-up, adjustments and testing of devices and equipment included under this contract. 4/2019 15012 -4of10 V CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP MECHANICAL WORK C. Where Manufacturer's delivered motor size varies from design size scheduled on drawings or, described in specifications, Contractor shall provide conductors, conduits, and all motor control devices sized for the delivered motor size at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Contractor shall assure that all systems have been properly installed,adjusted,and tested prior to final inspection and shall notify Engineer at time mechanical installation is ready for final inspection and testing. Unless Engineer has been duly notified in writing that certain equipment are not ready for final testing and such is acceptable with Engineer, additional final inspections and testing will be at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. E. At completion of project and before final inspection, Contractor shall provide the Mechanical Engineer with full size drawings,redlined to reflect the"as-built"mechanical installation. Any variation from plans shall be shown on each applicable plan sheet. F. Location of equipment shown on drawings is approximate. Field verify exact location. Minor modification in location of equipment is considered incidental up to distance of 10 feet with no additional compensation. G. Where training is required by any specification sections,Contractor shall provide training manuals for Operators. Manuals shall be approved as substantial quality by Engineer. All training manuals must be pre-approved by Engineer. Instructors shall be pre-approved by Engineer as qualified for training. H. Change orders submitted by Contractor shall include a full technical explanation of request and shall contain statement confirming that Contractor has reviewed all plans and specifications and that all work was coordinated with other trades. I. All equipment, devices and other items shown or indicated on plans and described in specifications are to be provided, furnished and installed by the Contractor unless, specifically and clearly marked or noted as"N.I.C." (Not in Contract). Failure to include all items is at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. J. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining and adjusting all equipment for safe, damage free operation where equipment must be operated by Owner during construction. This especially pertains to existing equipment and controls that may be modified under this contract but are required to be operated by Owner. All valves,motors,and controls shall be properly locked out in a safe position to prevent inadvertent damage by Owner during the course of operating the plant. Contractor shall notify Owner in writing of any equipment that cannot be safely operated. 4/2019 15012 - 5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP MECHANICAL WORK j 2.0 PRODUCTS J 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials provided under all sections of the specifications shall be new and the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. All materials shall be approved by the Engineer. Materials described by manufacturer's name and catalog number are selected to set a definite standard of design and quality to be required. There is not any intention to discriminate against a product of another manufacturer, which is equally durable in construction,similar in design,and will serve the purpose for which it is intended where pre-approved by Engineer. All equipment,hardware,materials,and accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. Manufacturer's Representative shall make all critical adjustments to electronic modules and controls. Where plans, details or specifications indicate instructions that are contrary to Manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer before ordering or installing. Failure to do so is at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. Within 30 days after award of the contract and before any materials and equipment are placed on order, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the Engineer for approval per Paragraph 1.04. B. Materials and equipment specifications are general in coverage and may contain reference to construction items that apply in only particular situations and may not apply as a general rule for materials installed on this project. Provide all required accessories required by Equipment or Materials Manufacturer for proper installation. Failure to do so is at Contractor's expense. C. All equipment and devices shall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate installation with manufacturer's representative to assure correct installation methods have been applied. Prior to submittal review, Manufacturer's Representative shall review plans and specifications and shall notify Engineer in writing where application shown on plans will not provide satisfactory and/or accurate performance. Failure to abide by this requirement shall be at Contractor's risk and cost. All equipment and materials shall be rated for the harsh Industrial, Electrical, and Mechanical environment in which installed and shall be warranted by manufacturer accordingly. This requirement is paramount to all other drawings or specification requirements unless specifically required otherwise by Engineer in writing. D. Substitution items may be acceptable where deemed by Engineer to be of equal type, service,value,or suitable for a particular application. The Engineer reserves the right of decision on all substitutions unless specifications state "no substitutions allowed". 4/2019 15012 - 6 of 10 `� CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP MECHANICAL WORK 4111, 2.02 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Mechanical plans and specifications are not intended to discriminate against any particular manufacturer. Specific values shown for a particular manufacturer's product may vary slightly for another product. Work required under this contract consists of each and every item,equipment, material and device shown on any of the Civil, Structural,Mechanical, Process,Electrical or other plan sheets contained in the contract documents and includes items shown in details, schedules, diagrams, sections or other means of illustration presented. If any item is shown on a single sheet at any place, it is to be included under this contract unless specifically noted otherwise and,all piping, wiring and connections for operation of the item shall be included at no additional cost to Owner. If there is any doubt or question,Contractor shall request a"clarification"from Engineer before bidding. The Mechanical Engineer reserves the right to interpret the mechanical specifications and to make judgment as to acceptance of a product, regardless of minute details in the specifications or on the plans. B. Specifications shall be reviewed for applicability of materials under certain conditions and in certain environments and, where not shown otherwise on plan drawings, these application directions shall be adhered to. C. Where a particular reference on drawing plans does not conform to standard acceptable construction methods for a particular type project,the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and request a clarification before ordering materials or starting construction. D. Plans are general in nature and may not show minute details of existing conditions or proposed work. Existing conditions may include undocumented buried pipes, conduits and structures that lie in the route, or at location, of equipment or conduit installation required for this project. These uncertainties shall be accounted for in the Contractors Bid. Contractor shall adjust conduit routes, equipment pads, and equipment mountings, as required,for a satisfactory installation for the conditions imposed and at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Mechanical site plan drawings shall only be scaled when"Scalable Drawing"appears on the drawing sheets. F. All mechanical equipment, controls, and devices used in this project shall have self- protection features that prevent damage of that equipment from overload,overspeed,and other unsafe conditions. Any failures caused by lack of this provision shall be at full cost to Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. Where Engineer determines this to be the case and where the Contractor disagrees,Contractor shall provide full evidence of failure cause at their own expense. 4111/ 4/2019 15012 - 7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP MECHANICAL WORK 3.0 EXECUTION ., 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with current local codes. Field select routing of piping to avoid underground piping, conduit, or structures that may not be shown on plans. B. Equipment locations shall be approved by Engineer. 3.02 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. As-Built Drawings: Prior to final inspection, Contractor shall provide complete set of legibly marked up drawings showing all deviations from contract drawings. This shall include pipe routing and sizes, detail changes,etc. Markup shall be in red pencil on black line or blue line plan sheets. As built drawings are to be maintained on site during construction and changes shall be marked as work progresses. Plans shall be available for Engineer and/or Owner's review during the course of construction. Final inspections will not be conducted until as-built drawings are received by Engineer. 3.03 MECHANICAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. System acceptance shall be defined as that point in time when the following requirements have been fulfilled: 1. When as-built drawings have been submitted,reviewed,and approved in writing by Engineer. 2. All O&M documentation has been submitted, reviewed, and approved. 3. The complete mechanical system has been fully inspected and has successfully been started up,tested and accepted by the Engineer. a. Complete mechanical system shall be demonstrated to be fully functional. Every alarm function shall be exercised. b. Complete mechanical system shall run for a minimum period of thirty(30) consecutive days without failure. In event of failure,repairs shall be made and test period started over again. c. There are no "Substantial Completions" for mechanical systems that cannot demonstrate satisfactory performance of its intended function. 4. All Owners' staff personnel training programs have been completed. 5. Owner/Engineer sign a document indicating mechanical installation has formally been accepted. 4/2019 15012- 8 of 10 �/ CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP MECHANICAL WORK 6. Contractor shall have equipment vendors available for installation,set up,testing, demonstration and commissioning activities as required by other specifications. Vendors shall allow ample time for these on-site services in their bids. 3.04 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. All underground piping shall be buried to a minimum depth of 24-inches below finished grade,except where installation requires otherwise,or indicated otherwise on drawings. All trenches shall be uniform width and shall be backfilled and compacted to 95%that of original density. Any damage to underground piping and/or conduits caused by other Contractor's and not promptly repaired may be repaired by this Contractor who shall be compensated accordingly by the party or parties responsible for the damage at the discretion of the Owner or Engineer. B. Do not cut paved driveways, streets, sidewalks, etc. Bore under such construction, maintaining a minimum of 24" below the underside of the pavement or concrete, unless shown otherwise on plans. 3.05 CLEAN UP A. The Contractor shall upon completion of the work, remove all materials, empty containers, and any other materials that are not incorporated into the work. 3.06 WARRANTY A. In addition to labor, equipment, devices, hardware, software, and materials warranty, Contractor shall provide full one (I)year service warranty on overall installation. This warranty shall begin at date of written final acceptance of mechanical systems. Contractor's warranty shall guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide whatever labor,work,or materials needed to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall station mechanical systems be out of service for over 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty. This shall be at no additional cost to Owner. All materials and equipment installed shall have full warranty from manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for the harsh Industrial Electrical/Mechanical environment in which it is installed. Warranty shall be for a one(1)year period after date of written acceptance by the Owner and Engineer and shall include all labor,equipment, and materials. Where manufacturer's products fail prematurely,manufacturer shall be fully responsible for replacement and shall not have option of declaring that failures were caused by environment and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that product manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawings. 41/ 4/2019 15012 -9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SHADOW CREEK WP MECHANICAL WORK Failure to do so will be at full expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. Where warranty requirements are shown in other sections,the more stringent requirement shall have precedence. B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 48 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within ten(10)working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and backcharging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. 3.07 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide services of his Engineer or a factory trained technician to instruct plant operating personnel for a period of at least two(2)full days after completion of the contract work. Training requirements in specific specification sections shall have precedence over requirements of this section. END OF SECTION J 4/2019 15012- l0 of 10 V SECTION 16012 ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS 1.02 Not Used 1.03 Contractor shall comply with programming allowance requirements of: A. Item 1.07—"Contractor's Responsibilities"of this specification section. Contractor or his Subcontractors are not responsible for contents of program. Warranty for operation of program is solely the responsibility of the Programmer,Hatch. There are to be no contractual agreements between the Contractor and/or his Subcontractors and the Programmer, Hatch. Provide programming allowance per Item 1.07 — "Contractor's Responsibilities." Contractor is bound to coordination of various equipment installations and operation so as to not delay scheduled installation and testing of programs. Review all electrical related Specifications for schedule requirements of programming activities. B. Contractor shall verify requirements of Item 2.01—"Materials"before bidding. C. Contractor to conform to Item 1.06—"Contractor Qualifications" of this specification before 40110 bidding. D. General Contractor is solely responsible for coordinating all electrical requirements of all equipment installed under this contract. E. Electrical Subcontractor shall confirm this with General Contractor before bidding. Within 10 days of "Notice to Proceed,' the General Contractor shall appoint a person responsible for coordination of all electrical controls and equipment that are a part of this project and shall,at that time, notify Engineer in writing of that person's name, telephone number, fax number, address,and all other pertinent information. F. This specification section is an inherent part of all work performed on this project and its contents shall apply for any and all electrical power,control and instrumentation related work. Contractor shall advise all Subcontractors and Vendors accordingly. G. Warning: Electrical systems for this project have lethal voltages present. Contractor shall not work on energized equipment except when absolutely necessary and then only in the presence of another trained, experienced Electrician and with proper protective gear. See Item 1.06— "Contractor Qualifications"for safety training requirements. H. All correspondence, RFI's, and submittals concerning electrical, instrumentation, and controls matters shall be from General Contractor and shall have statement that General Contractor has verified the correctness or validity of the correspondence, etc. in respect to contractual requirements of the plans and specifications. Any correspondence, etc. not having this statement or determined to be covered in the requirements of the plans and specifications will not be responded to and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for any action or non-action thereof. 4110. 16012-1 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 I. All references to"days"in the electrical,mechanical,instrumentation,and controls specifications means"working days." All prequalification under this specification shall be submitted no later than ten(10) days prior to bid date. 1. Installation shall conform to most recent National Electrical Code, International Building Code, and Local Codes. In addition,Contractor shall follow all requirements of NFPA 70E-"Standard for Electrical Safety in the Work Place." Of specific importance are all the requirements of Article 400.11—"Flash Protection." K. Plans and diagrams are illustrative and may not contain all devices wiring and controls required to perform the function intended without reference to Specifications. Location and alignment of motor control centers or other equipment shown on Plans may require adjustment for some Equipment Manufacturers products,and this requirement is the Contractors sole responsibility. L. Substitutions for equipment specified or shown on plans shall be as pre-approved prior to bidding unless specified or shown on plans as "or equal." Where noted as "pre-approved," indicates approval is required prior to bid acceptance. M. All software or programs provided by any Vendor or Contractor shall be open activation without undisclosed passwords,keys,and/or means or devices that prevent Owners access to programs. All software shall be new copies for Owner with no cost attachments. No exceptions. N. All references to plans and/or drawings refer to the complete set of contract plans and not specifically electrical only, unless stated otherwise. O. Additions or modifications to existing facilities involves a degree of uncertainty and all existing, hidden or unknown conditions may not appear on plans. Contractor is to consider this when bidding and shall cover all reasonable unknown conditions not evident in pre-bid site visit,which is necessary to familiarize Contractor with observable pre-existing conditions. Contact Engineer concerning any questions prior to bidding job. P. Control panels, MCC's and electrical equipment shall be fabricated to fit the available space shown on plans. Install control panels, instruments, and motor control centers to allow a minimum of four (4) foot clearance for access to control devices. This may require special enclosures. Relocation up to 40 feet from where shown on plans may be required and shall be included in bid cost. Supplier and Contractor shall notify Engineer of any variations in size, location or orientation before fabricating equipment. Listing of acceptable Equipment Manufacturers does not limit or remove the intent of this requirement. Q. All devices,fittings,connectors,supports,brackets,and miscellaneous hardware normally used for installation of electrical equipment may not be shown in detail. Contractor shall provide all these items and included them in bid price. R. Any change orders or additional work beyond the scope of this project as bid by Contractor shall be approved in writing by Engineer. Any unapproved work performed is at Contractor's risk. S. Installation shall conform to layout, routing, and details shown on Plans and described in Specifications. Any variations shall be pre-approved in writing by Engineer before work starts. Any unauthorized work shall be removed at Contractor's cost and with no delay in project schedule. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. The work shall include providing materials and equipment required for installation of a complete and functioning electrical system as specified and as shown on the drawings. 16012-2 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 B. This section is an integral part of all Specification Sections related to electrical, control and instrumentation construction under this contract. Contractor shall check all other plans and specifications for this project and include items and circuits accordingly. The total set of construction documents make up the requirements for work for this project and shall be included in Contractor's bid at no additional cost to Owner or Owner's Representative. C. All plans and specifications for this project are representative of the design intent and may not contain minute details associated with normally accepted electrical construction,as described in applicable codes or as described in manufacturer's literature. Contractor shall provide all appurtenances normally associated with a particular equipment or device, and as required for a proper operating system. Some devices, equipment or materials may appear in only one location on the plans or in the specifications. Each and every item shown or described is to be included for this project. No exceptions. All required circuits and devices necessary for intended operation are to be included without additional cost to Owner.Where discrepancies occur between various plans or specifications for this project and where clarification is not requested by Contractor prior to bidding,the most stringent requirement shall be included in the Contractors bid price. Contractor shall review all specifications for all trade disciplines with electrical requirements prior to bidding and shall include most stringent and higher cost requirements in bid price. No elements or requirements of the plans or specifications shall be omitted in Contractor's bid price unless specifically deleted in writing by Engineer. Failure to follow this specification requirement is at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. D. Prior to bidding and during construction, Contractor shall coordinate with equipment vendors (11111, and suppliers and determine requirements for power,control and interconnection wiring and shall provide conduits and conductors accordingly for a complete operating system. E. All electrical work shall be performed only by a Texas State Licensed Electrical Contractor,and as listed in Item 1.06—"Contractor Qualifications"of this Section. 1.05 MAJOR ITEMS OF WORK AS FOLLOWS A. All work shown on plans and described in specifications including as follows: 1. Installation of two VFD units 2. Modification of existing MCC section to match VFD installation. 3. Installation of two service pump motor feeders. 4. Installation of diesel generator. Route feeders to automatic transfer switch. 5. Installation &modification of existing controls. 6. Modification and expansion of SCADA controls. 7. Installation of Fiber equipment,cable and conduit. 8. Installation of GST equipment and controls. 9. Installation of all other miscellaneous electrical systems,as shown on plans. B. Contractors shall attend coordination meeting with Engineer to review construction methods, plans and specifications before starting work. Prior to start of work, Contractor to provide schedule showing all phases of work,including completion,testing and required programming schedule as described in Item 3.08—"Testing and Startup,"of this specification. 16012-3 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 1.06 PLANT CONTROL SYSTEM `/ A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete operating control system. The control system shall include but shall not be limited to all circuit breakers,motor starters,alternator,contactors, indicating lights, selector switches, surge protector, phase failure relays, programmable controllers,alarm light and horn,push buttons,control transformer,electronic devices,sensors, interlock wiring,control relays, blocks, snubbers,valves, nameplates,and all other associated items required to provide a workable system. All control circuits to be"fail-safe"type.All blower controls to have low pressure alarm indicator per state requirements. B. Provide circuitconductors,conduits,circuit breakers,and related devices for furnishing power to all motor heaters, instruments, devices, lights, controls, and all other motors and equipment indicated on plans or provided by Vendors or others for this project. Provide circuits and related devices per Code. C. All controls shall be fully tested in shop for proper and satisfactory operation,prior to installation at site. Contractor to provide written certification before delivery to site. Any installations without certification notice are done at risk by Contractor, who shall be obligated to make all necessary corrections in field at no additional cost to owner. D. Where any equipment includes a Manufacturer furnished control panel the Equipment Vendor or Manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination of all interconnecting wiring at related devices. E. Provide interlock circuits between vendor furnished equipment, control panels and lift pump starters. This includes interlock between lift pump and screen controls. Coordinate with each vendor. Do not submit control panels until interlocks are coordinated. Provide interlock circuits with adjustable time delay devices. F. Provide block and bleed valves for level and pressure devices. Route bleed line to outside building or enclosure. G. All multiple pump installations shall have means of alternating pumps and provisions for bypassing pumps not in service in primary and backup mode of operation. H. All CT's to have means for limiting voltage level at CF terminals in event load disconnected while CT is energized. This is required for personnel safely. I. All control device settings are to be adjusted by Contractor for values recommended by the Plant Operator. Contact Engineer if clarifications needed. 1.07 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor,Subcontractors,and Controls Vendors shall be experienced with all types of electrical systems covered under this contract. No work shall be undertaken where Contractor's firm, project supervisors and project electrical workers have not had recent experience in similar projects in area of project location. Electrical contractors, electricians, inspectors, installers, and programmers assigned to this project shall be full time qualified employees. Contract type employees are not allowed unless preapproved by Engineer. Contractor will be required to furnish proof of experience and employment where requested by Owner or Engineer or their Representatives. Pre-qualified Electrical Contractors are listed in Item 1.06,Paragraph E of this section. 16012-4of19 REVISED 9/23/2019 covB. Contractor's Project Manager or his Assistant shall be familiar with types of electrical construction required by this project in order to determine that all subcontractor and vendor's work is in conformance with the plans and specifications. C. Electrical Contractor shall have Master Electrician License for City or County; in which project is located,and shall have a State issued Master Electrician License. D. Contractor shall have an established safety-training program in effect for the duration of this project and will be required to submit proof of safety training for all employees working on this project. E. The following Contractors are considered qualified and acceptable for electrical construction: 1. Pfeiffer&Son, Ltd. 2. W.W. Payton 3. SECO 4. McDonald Electric, Inc. 5. Systems, Inc. 6. Industrial Electrical Services (IES) 7. Resco Electric, Ltd. 8. Clarion Electrical 1.08 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Where applicable Contractor shall coordinate electrical power,natural gas,telephone,data,or special purpose line installation with utility companies. Within 30 days after award of contract, the Contractor shall contact utility company and Owner and shall request service needed. It is Contractor's sole responsibility to assure that utility company and Owner are notified and are kept aware of requirements. Advise Owner of exact voltage and phase service required when completing application for service. Owner and Engineer shall be advised in writing of Utility Company Service Representative handling service order,telephone number,address and order number within 30 days of Contract Award and notice to proceed. Contractor shall notify Engineer and Owner of proposed service poles to be installed by Power Company and Contractor and shall include copy of "Outlet Location Data Statement" from Power Company before installing poles or conduits. Delays in services installed due to failure to make timely application shall be at Contractor's expense. B. Where applicable,Contractor shall provide all conduit,conductors,and termination equipment as needed for utilities and shall coordinate with utility companies for installation requirements and shall provide installation constructed according to the utility company standards whether or not such is shown in detail or plans. Where underground service is provided by Utility Company, the Contractor shall provide service installation accordingly and shall allow for up to 100 feet of underground feeder ductbank. Work shall include all equipment and materials required for working service. C. Contractor shall review all sections of the plans and specifications for this project and shall note all electrical requirements for devices and equipment shown or implied and shall provide service accordingly for a complete operating control system. Any discrepancies in Electrical or Mechanical requirements noted in various plans and specifications shall be brought to the 4111, attention of the Engineer prior to ordering equipment or materials or prior to starting 16012-5 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 construction related to the item in question. Coordination of all equipment and systems is Contractor's sole responsibility. Failure to coordinate all equipment requirements shall be the responsibility of the Contractor,at no additional cost to Owner. D. Unless specifically noted otherwise,Contractor shall furnish all software. Programming will be performed by the Hatch Systems Integration Engineer as required.Contractor shall provide an "Allowance"in bid cost. Where"Allowance"amount is not shown on bid sheet,contact Hatch at(713)467-9961 for the cost. Provide email address in order to receive "Allowance" conformation from Systems Integration Engineer. Failure to provide this"Allowance"is at the expense of the Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. Contractor shall provide all installation,set-up,adjustments and testing of devices or equipment included under this contract. Contractor is not responsible for installation or operation of program.Warranty for programming is solely the responsibility of the Programmer and is exclusive of the Contractor's agreement with Owner, full allowance is required before final acceptance and is not subject to "retainage"withholding. E. Programs will be loaded by Programmer during Engineer's shop testing of system at fabricators facilities.A program will be downloaded for testing and the final program will be downloaded upon receipt of allowance payment. Programmer is not responsible for any delays due to non- compliance by Contractor. F. Contractor is specifically responsible for coordination of all electrical, mechanical,and process systems,devices and equipment provided or installed under this contract and shall assure that all requirements by all trades are met such as to insure a complete and operating electrical,control, process or instrumentation system. Special attention shall be given to coordination of motors supplied,MCC components supplied,mechanical systems supplied,horsepower and voltage and phase requirements of each.Where motor horsepowervaries from plans,Contractor shall adjust circuit and control devices accordingly. This includes verification of compatibility of all interfacing connectors and devices at new,existing,and Owner furnished equipment. Notify Engineer of any discrepancies before ordering equipment. Failure to do so may result in additional cost to Contractor. G. Contractor shall assure that all systems have been properly installed,adjusted and tested prior to final inspection and shall notify Engineer at time electrical installation is ready for final inspection and testing. H. Unless Engineer has been duly notified in writing that equipment is not ready for final testing and such is acceptable with Engineer,additional final inspections and testing will be at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. Contractor shall fully inspect all motors and nameplates, controls, conduit,wiring devices and other items before starting work,ordering materials, or submitting shop drawings in order to verify existing conditions are as shown on plans and, shall immediately notify Engineer of any discrepancies between plans and specifications and existing conditions. Failure to do so may result in Contractor's responsibility for any required changes in construction. This includes verification of compatibility of all interfacing connectors and devices for new, existing, and Owner or Contractor furnished equipment. Notify Engineer of any discrepancies before ordering equipment. Where available review"Record"drawings before bidding where existing conditions are unknown. Where available refer to "Record" drawings during construction of this project. Note that "Record" drawings may not be available in which case Contractor is required to determine wiring connections and device types as part of this contract. 16012-6 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 4111, Where Manufacturer's delivered motor size varies from design size shown on one-line diagram or, described in specifications, Contractor shall provide conductors, conduits, and all motor control devices sized for the delivered motor size at no additional cost to Owner. Where motor current transducers are required for use by Manufacturer control panels, Contractor to provide current transducers and conductors sized by Control Panel Manufacturer at no additional cost to Owner. 1. When work involving modifications or additions to existing plant will interrupt normal service, Contractor shall make provisions for continuous electrical service thru Contractor furnished standby generator power. Where a standby generator exists but will be temporarily out of service during construction,Contractor shall provide substitute generator power for duration of outage. In no event shall plant be without operating power or, without standby generator service. Include sub-base fuel tank,fuel,attendance and appurtenances required fora complete power system as needed for interim plant operation. Where work disrupts power and/or control to new or existing equipment, furnish temporary bypass circuits, as required, to maintain equipment operation. K. Where power outage is required,it shall be coordinated with Operator and Engineer. An outage shall not exceed 4 hours. Contractor shall plan work and provide equipment as required to maintain electrical power to facilities. L. Where work involves additions, modification, demolition, or renovations to existing facilities, Contractor shall remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. This includes relocation of conduits,equipment and materials that may obstruct placement of new equipment. Existing spare conduits and equipment may not be located at CIFF exact place shown on plans. Relocations and adjustments up to 40 feet are required as part of this contract. Where spare buried conduits are to be reused,conduits shall be cleaned out of all debris before use. M. It further includes extension or modification of existing circuits that are related to work covered under this project. Route all existing alarms to autodialer,alarm panel,and PLC where available. Include all conduit and wiring. Extend all existing power and control circuits as required for proper operation of electrical systems. This includes extension of pump cables and instrument cables,which may require in-place splicing. Contractor shall field observe existing conditions prior to submitting a bid to become familiar with existing conditions and shall account for any relocations or extensions in bid. Refer to "Record"drawings and existing O&M Manuals. Failure to do so is at Contractors'risk and at no additional cost to Owner. N. Provide electrical circuits to all equipment as required by manufacturer. Verify location and characteristics of all equipment shown on plans and in specifications and size circuits accordingly. All conductors and conduits to comply with NEC Article 250 and Article 310. All terminations to vendor furnished control panels shall be done by Contractor,unless specifically noted otherwise on plans or in specific specification sections. All panel calibrations and adjustments shall be done by Vendors Representative. When preparing bid or when performing work,observe all plan sheets for vendor furnished equipment and provide all required interface wiring between various panels and/or equipment necessary for a complete operating system. Provide electrical circuits to all equipment, devices, controls, controllers, and other items shown on plans, or described in specifications. Provide circuit breaker, conductor, local disconnects, and connections to equipment in compliance with 16012-7 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 National Electrical Code. All circuits may not be shown on plans and must be verified and installed accordingly. O. Where any equipment performance does not conform to specifications or,where in Engineers opinion,parameters are out of tolerance or erratic in performance,the Contractor shall remove and replace equipment at no additional cost to Owner. P. Location of outlets and equipment shown on Drawings is approximate. Field verify exact location. Minor modification in location of outlets and equipment is considered incidental up to distance of 40 feet with no additional compensation. Q. Provide fail and problem alarms for controls and Manufacturer's equipment. Route circuits to autodialer. Provide circuits, relays, expansion modules, and programming. Route all existing alarms to autodialer where work involves modification or additions to existing equipment. R. Contractor shall provide the equipment necessary for locating all underground pipes,conduits, and structures before digging. All locations of intersection shall be properly staked and identified. Locating all underground lines is the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall be at no additional cost to Owner. Any damage to underground lines is the responsibility of the Contractor. Where obstructions are present in existing spare underground conduits to be used in this project, use video camera to determine cause of obstruction and contact Engineer for directions on how to proceed. Review all plans prior to bidding and during construction and provide power and control requirements for all valve actuators and Manufacturer furnished panels according to the Engineer's specifications and plans for all equipment. This further includes all starters,breakers, controls,conductors,conduits, interface wiring, and devices for a complete electrical system. S. Refer to contract plans and provide local disconnect switches for all motors, heaters, motor operated valves, fans and electrical equipment required for this project per National Electric Code. (Applicable where shown on plans.) T. Change orders submitted by Contractor shall include a full technical explanation of request and shall contain statement confirming that Contractor has reviewed all plans and specifications and that all work was coordinated with other trades. U. All equipment, devices and other items shown or indicated on plans and described in specifications are to be provided,furnished and installed by the Contractor unless,specifically and clearly marked or noted as "N.I.C." (Not in Contract). Failure to include all items is at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. V. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining and adjusting all equipment for safe,damage free operation where equipment must be operated by Owner during construction. This especially pertains to existing equipment and controls that may be modified under this contract but are required to be operated by Owner. All valves,motors,and controls shall be properly locked out in a safe position to prevent inadvertent damage by Owner during the course of operating the plant. Contractor shall notify Owner in writing of any equipment that cannot be safely operated. W. All requirements for instrumentation and control equipment shall be reviewed by Manufacturer's Representative prior to shop drawing submittal and,Engineer shall be notified in writing when installation and application indicated on plans may not result in satisfactory and/or accurate operation of equipment specified. Failure to abide by this requirement is at Contractor's risk and expense. 16012-8of19 REVISED 9/23/2019 X. Do not install fuel tanks within 50 feet of habitable buildings where prohibited by local codes. Field verify with plans before starting work. Notify Engineer of any conflicts. Failure to do so is at Contractor's risk and at no additional cost to Owner. Y. A state licensed Electrician shall be present at all scheduled inspections. No Exceptions. Z. Provide all required wire adapters for oversized feeder conductors at panels,switches,breakers, and other equipment. AA. Where outdoor conduit top entry to enclosures,provide CSBE seals at top of conduits to avoid water entry. This applies to service bus weatherhead entries and other applications. BB. Alarm reporting devices such as automatic telephone dialers shall never be disabled once installed and put in operation or,where already installed at existing facilities. Test autodialer at end of each workday during construction period. CC. Methods of work and devices described in all electrical specification sections are intended to facilitate a properly constructed and operating electrical system that meets Owner's operational requirements and satisfies the requirements of local and national codes. The Electrical Engineer may approve methods or devices that vary from the requirements described in any particular specification if, in the Engineer's judgment,the installation meets the intent of the Engineer's design and, where the electrical system performance meets the general requirements of the facility operation and,where the installation is deemed to present a safe installation that does not present a danger to persons operating or maintaining the electrical installation.This variance may be authorized during the submittal or inspection stage of the project,as the Engineer deems appropriate. DD. All equipment, conduits, panels, and devices shall be installed in the most strict, professional manner to present a neat installation. Where a question arises concerning intent of method for installation or where details are not clear, Contractor is to contact Engineer for clarification before proceeding with work. Any work not suitable or not installed in a professional manner will be modified to an installation acceptable to Engineer and Owner at no additional cost. EE. Provide arc flash warning tags on all electrical equipment where required by NFPA 70E. Submit arc flash analysis for Engineers review. FF. All motors,motor control centers,and all other electrical equipment shall be stored in a climate- controlled area prior to installation. Space heaters in motors and equipment shall be energized while stored. After installation space heaters shall be energized at all times. See relevant specification sections for additional requirements. Contractor is liable for any corrosive damage and any defective equipment. Where Contractor fails to protect electrical equipment before and after installation on site and where excessive dust is observed inside the enclosure,Contractor shall have a factory warranty service technician clean,inspect and test unit,after which factory shall issue a written and signed statement that full factory is in effect. There are no exceptions to this requirement except to replace entire unit at Engineer's request. Any equipment,devices,or software shown or indicated on Contract Documents as required for this project,and that may be overlooked by Owner or Engineer on submittals or at Final Acceptance inspection,shall still be provided by Contractor at no cost to Owner regardless of period of time that expires before Owner requests to be furnished and installed. GG. Vendors for equipment with solid-state controller shall include provisions for both hardwired and data path status,command and alarm functions included under contract without additional cost to Owner, Programmer,or Engineer. 41110 16012-9 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 HH. Contactor shall provide all required power, control,lighting,data and instrument circuits from sources to all miscellaneous accessories and equipment that are a normal part of process J equipment, electrical equipment, mechanical equipment,generators other packaged systems furnished by manufacturers for this project. Include all materials and labor required for installation of a complete operating system in bid cost, and at no additional cost to Owner. Contractor is to coordinate these requirements with vendors and manufacturers before submitting bid. For generator and process equipment systems,this shall also include fuel source piping, including chemical or other liquid or gaseous sources and all related devices and equipment that are part of a standard or specialized installation for equipment specific to this project. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials provided under all sections of the specifications shall be new and the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. Motor control centers, control panels, controller panels, pump panels, blower panels, and all similar equipment shall be manufactured by a firm located within 200 miles of the project facility or, firm shall have an established full time service and repair facility located within 200 miles of project facility. Final assembly of motor control centers and control panels shall be performed at these local facilities. All materials shall conform to the National Electrical Code and shall be approved by Engineer and listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories. Materials described by manufacturer's name and catalog number are selected to set a definite standard of design and quality to be required. There is not any intention to discriminate against a product of another manufacturer, which is equally durable in construction, similar in design, and will serve the purpose for which it is intended. All equipment, hardware, materials, motors, towers, masts, brackets,or accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall contact Manufacturer's designated local Representative for confirmation of exact model, options, configuration and services that are to be included in bid cost. Manufacturer's Representative shall make all critical adjustments to electronic modules and controls. Where plans, details, or specifications indicate instructions that are contrary to Manufacturer's instructions,consult with Engineer before ordering or installing. Failure to follow the requirements of this paragraph is at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. B. Materials and equipment specifications are general in coverage and may contain reference to construction items that apply in only particular situations and may not apply as a general rule for materials installed on this project. listing of acceptable Equipment Manufacturers does not limit or remove the intent of any specification sections included for this project. Provide all required accessories required by Equipment or Materials Manufacturer for proper installation. Failure to do so is at Contractor's expense. C. All equipment and devices shall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate installation with manufacturer's representative to assure correct installation methods have been applied. Prior to submittal review,Manufacturer's Representative shall review plans and specifications and shall notify Engineer in writing where application shown on plans will not provide satisfactory and/or accurate performance. Failure to abide by this requirement shall be ,I/] 16012-10 of19 REVISED 9/23/2019 at Contractor's risk and cost. All equipment and materials shall be rated for the harsh Industrial, Electrical, and Mechanical environment in which installed and shall be warranted by manufacturer accordingly. This includes all enclosures located in wastewater and water facilities, including all outdoor control panels, breaker panels, switches, junction boxes, and similar electrical equipment at other facilities which shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel without exception. This requirement is paramount to all other drawings or specification requirements unless specifically noted or, unless approved otherwise by Engineer in writing. D. Outdoor equipment shall not have exposed devices or controls,unless specifically called for on plans. The outer door shall cover all such items. No see thru windows are allowed unless specifically approved. All outer doors to have locking hasp and door restraint to hold door open at 90 degrees position. Keyed handles for indoor panels are only acceptable where specifically approved. All NEMA 4X equipment enclosure doors to have three(3)point latching handle and locking hasp. NEMA 4%splice box enclosures shall have quick release latches. Plexiglas inner or outer doors are not acceptable. E. All PLC's, controllers, VFD's, instruments and electronic equipment installed outdoors or in unconditioned spaces shall have means of cooling to allow satisfactory operation in local environment and at conditions required by equipment manufacturer's specification. All motor starters over 100 horsepower shall have forced fan cooling in the starter section as a minimum. All outdoor enclosures are to have sufficient cooling. Provide rain hood, intake louvers,insect screens,and fan motor circuits with t-stat and on/off controls. F. All control panels and motor control centers that are not standard manufacture, off the shelf products shall be manufactured in accordance with Plans and Specifications with high quality materials and components, bear a UL listed label,and be constructed by a UL listed shop. 2.02 Manufacturer shall have local manufacturing and/or repair facility within 200 miles and have local Service Technician that can provide prompt service when required by Owner. Equipment Manufacturers who fabricate own panels may provide control panels for this project. Control panels will be fabricated accordingly to plans and Specifications.However,no outsourced panels are allowed except for Control Panel Manufacturers listed below. This requirement will be strictly enforced. Service Technicians shall have detailed knowledge of control panels specific to this project. There are no exceptions to the requirements of this paragraph. The following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Weimar Manufacturing Co. 2. B.L.Technology, Inc. 3. W.W. Payton 4. Ace Controls 5. Texas Industrial Controls Manufacturing(TICM) 6. Systems, Inc. 7. Control Panel Manufacturers preapproved in writing by Engineer. A. All pressure switches and transmitters on pump discharge lines are to have"snubbers"sized to produce hydraulic delay required for satisfactory operation of controls. 16012-11 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 B. Substitution items may be acceptable where deemed by Engineer to be of equal type, service, value,or suitable for a particular application. The Engineer reserves the right of decision on all substitutions unless specifications state, "no substitutions allowed". C. Equipment ratings shown on plans are the "minimum" acceptable sizes. All Equipment Manufacturer's products may not be available in the exact rating shown, in which case next greater available size shall be provided. D. Generator connectors installed at transfer switches shall be reverse service type with exposed female sleeve type and matching generator cable connector shall be recessed male pin type. Contractor shall coordinate connector's style and size with Owner's existing connectors to assure compatibility. Provide cut sheets or samples to Ownerfor confirmation. Provide adapters where needed for proper operation. E. All control panels and MCC's shall have single piece door with door-mounted devices mounted directly to door. Plexiglas plates are not acceptable. Auxiliary mounting plates shall not be used to mount devices to door. All panels must be fabricated in a neat and professional manner. Metalwork shall be performed with proper commercially available tools, with no hacksaw or nibbler cuts allowed. F. All transmitter displays to be in actual unit values and not percent scale. G. All Motor Operated Valves(MOV's)to have local control station with starter contacts,selector switches and limit switches,indicators and all other devices required to function as indicated on plans and in specifications. Where MOV's are installed in pump discharge or suction line,provide interlock circuits that prevent motor operation when valve is closed. H. Door-mounted,rotating operating mechanisms for circuit breakers are not allowed for MCC's or control panels. I. All components inside enclosures shall be fastened down with proper hardware. All cables shall 'V be bundled and bound with waxed cord or nylon tie-wraps manufactured for that purpose. Adhesive tie down blocks are not allowed. Provide threaded press-in or welded studs for nylon cable clamps as required. All work shall be done in a neat and professional manner. J. All control panels,SCADA panels and MCC's shall have 120 VAC GFI duplex receptacles with low voltage circuit inside controls section for test equipment use. Control section shall have interior lighting. All gauges, instruments, transmitters, and meters to read 75% of scale at system maximum rated parameters such as voltage,amp,pressure,level,and flow. K. All controls circuits for PLC's, Multilins, RTU's, CCUs, CCTV, VFD's, solidstate starters, power monitors and all such products wired into a panel assembled by a panel fabricating shop or system integration shop shall be reviewed and approved by the Product Manufacturer's Representative. Contractor and Supplier shall allow for any additional cost associated with this review and approval process and shall certify such approval has been issued at time shop drawings are submitted. L. CT's for power monitor device, controller input or other instrument inputs shall be sized to detect peak inrush current motor. M. All electrical devices attached to or, normally a standard part of an equipment item shall be provided by that Equipment Manufacturer. For example, limit switches, solenoids, and transducers for flow control valves are to be provided by the Flow Control Valve Manufacturer. This is to be coordinated by the General Contractor and the Electrical Subcontractor. N. All equipment installed on this project shall incorporate all devices and features to protect that equipment from the influence of other equipment,line voltage and phase irregularities,power 16012-12 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 surges,harmonics and other disturbances that may effect the proper and safe operation of that equipment whether these required features are a standard component of that equipment as an off-the-line product. Provide surge protection devices (SPD) for all power feeders, service equipment and power panels. No equipment shall be installed without these features. O. All equipment installed shall include all DC power supplies operated from a 120-volt circuit. No equipment shall be battery powered only unless required by the specifications.Include all cabling and other components necessary for a complete operating system. Where firmware,software, or programming is required for operation satisfactory to Engineer, it shall be included accordingly. P. All equipment and devices shall be NEMA rated. IEC rated equipment and devices are not acceptable. Q. All requirements for instruments,motor operated valves,VFD's,and electrical equipment shown on electrical plans or described in electrical specifications shall be coordinated through the local Manufacturer's Representative to assure equipment meets the requirements for this project. All such items shall be purchased through local Distributors or sales offices located within 200 miles of this project. In any case, the local Factory Representative shall be consulted for exact requirements—no exceptions. This is to assure local service for Owner when needed on a 24- hour basis. Any items furnished that do not meet this requirement will be replaced at expense of Contractor. R. All MCC rooms with 800 amp devices and/or MCC's greater than 6 feet wide shall have doors at each end of room unless NEC exceptions apply. Doors shall open in direction of egress and shall have panic bars per NEC Article 110. S. All electrical work shall be performed in a neat and orderly manner. Any work that does not appear as professional workmanship shall be corrected or replaced, at Engineers discretion. T. All slabs around electrical equipment shall be constructed and sloped to avoid any standing water. U. Where equipment model numbers are shown on plans or specifications, provide most current model or version. V. Where devices with RS-485 outputs are installed,provide an RS-485 to Ethernet converter with associated power supply. W. For rehab or expansion work on controls, provide additional new panduit wireways. Do not overfill Panduit on new or rehab projects. X. All electronic controllers, instruments, and devices furnished by any Vendor or Manufacturer shall have an ethernet data port and means for status monitoring and control interface with the plant PLC controller. Vendor to provide all programs,software,and I/O addresses. V. All service and feeder breakers to be electronic type with adjustable trips. Z. All analog instrument outputs to be 4-20 mA unless noted otherwise on Plans. Coordinate scaling with Engineer. AA. Provide complete power, control and instrumentation circuits for motor breakers, RTDs, temperature sensors, instruments and control devices. BB. All pump motor starters to have start time delay relay. CC. All equipment,instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge, phase fail, or other line conditions that may damage (111.1 equipment,instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers'responsibility to 16012-13 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. 2.03 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Electrical plans and specifications are not intended to discriminate against any particular manufacturer. Specific values shown for a particular manufacturer's product may vary slightly for another product. B. Work required under this contract consists of each and every item, equipment, material and device shown on any of the Civil,Structural, Mechanical,Process,Electrical or other plan sheets contained in the contract documents and includes items shown in details,schedules,diagrams, sections or other means of illustration presented. If any item is shown on a single sheet at any place, itis to be included under this contract unless specifically noted otherwise and,all piping, wiring, and connections for operation of the item shall be included at no additional cost to Owner. If there is any doubt or question,Contractor shall request a"clarification"from Engineer before bidding. The Electrical Engineer reserves the right to interpret the electrical specifications and to make judgment as to acceptance of a product,regardless of minute details in the specifications or on the plans. C. Specifications shall be reviewed for applicability of materials under certain conditions and in certain environments and, where not shown otherwise on plan drawings, these application directions shall be adhered to. D. Where a particular reference on drawing plans does not conform to standard acceptable construction methods for a particular type project,the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and request a clarification before ordering materials or starting construction. E. Plans are general in nature and may not show minute details of existing conditions or proposed work. Existing conditions may include undocumented buried pipes,conduits and structures that lie in the route, or at location, of equipment or conduit installation required for this project. These uncertainties shall be accounted for in the Contractors Bid.Contractor shall adjust conduit routes,equipment pads,and equipment mountings,as required,for a satisfactory installation for the conditions imposed and at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Electrical site plan drawings shall only be scaled when "Scalable Drawing' appears on the drawing sheets. G. All electrical equipment, controls, and devices used in this project shall have self-protection features that prevent damage of that equipment from overload,overvoltage,undervoltage and phase fail conditions. Any failures caused by lack of this provision shall be at full cost to Contractor and equipment manufacturer and at no additional cost to Owner. Where Engineer determines this to be the case and where Contractor disagrees, Contractor shall provide full evidence of failure cause at their own expense. 'a 16012-14 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with current NEC and local codes. Field select routing of conduits to avoid underground piping,conduit or structures that may not be shown on plans. B. All construction and equipment fabrication shall be of highest quality and installed in a professional manner. All devices shall be manufactured specifically for the purpose installed and shall be installed according to Manufacturer's recommendations. C. All fixtures,switch, and receptacle locations shall be approved by Engineer. D. Refer to other sections of this specification for controls. Under this section of the specifications, the Contractor shall install the control devices and provide control wiring switches,outlet boxes, and shall make all final connections. Control wiring and interlocks shall conform to wiring diagrams furnished by equipment manufacturers. E. Coordinate location of motor terminal box to match location of conduit stub up, drop or connection on same side of motor. F. Where equipment, devices, or installation fails or is damaged during construction, said equipment and/or devices shall be replaced with new unit. Repair is not an acceptable remedy unless specifically approved by Engineer and/or Owner. G. Provide 48 inches minimum workspace in front of electrical equipment. H. Provide a minimum of 8 inches between all wall or rack mounted enclosure boxes,switches,or equipment. Do not extend past edge of building wall and maintain 6 inches from edge of wall. 3.02 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. System acceptance upon Substantial Completion shall be defined as that point in time when the following requirements have been fulfilled: 1. When Record drawings and wiring diagrams have been submitted, reviewed, and approved in writing by Engineer. 2. All O&M documentation has been submitted, reviewed, and approved. 3. The complete electrical system has been fully inspected and has successfully been started up,tested and accepted by the Engineer. a. Complete electrical system shall be demonstrated to be fully functional. Every alarm function shall be exercised. b. Complete electrical system shall run continuously for a period of ninety (90) consecutive days without failure. In event of failure,repairs shall be made and test period started over again. c. There are no "Substantial Completions" for electrical systems that cannot demonstrate satisfactory performance of its intended function. 4. All Owners'staff personnel training programs have been completed. 5. Owner/Engineer sign a document indicating electrical installation has formally been accepted. 6. Warranty certificates for electrical equipment have been properly submitted. 16012-15 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 7. All spare parts have been delivered to Owner. 8. All punch list items have been corrected, acknowledged by Contractor in writing and accepted by Engineer. 9. Contractor shall have equipment vendors available for installation, setup, testing, demonstration and commissioning activities as required by other specifications section. Vendors shall allow ample time for these on-site services in their bids. 3.03 CLEAN UP A. The Contractor shall upon completion of the work,remove all materials,empty containers,and any other materials that are not incorporated into the work. B. Concrete spoils shall not be dumped on site without approval by Engineer or Owner. 3.04 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide full 3-year service warranty on the overall installation,and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware, and software. This warranty shall begin at date of written final acceptance of electrical systems and shall include both labor and materials at no additional cost to owner. There are no exceptions to this requirement. Contractors warranty shall guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide whatever labor,work,or materials needed to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for over 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be at no additional cost to Owner. B. Where circuit problems such as irregular power conditions, breaker trips, relay trips, controls failure, etc. develop during construction or prior to or within the 1 year warranty period, Contractor shall furnish a multi-channel recording device with all appurtenances for a total period of 60 days per event and,shall include setup and data retrieval. Work shall be performed when requested by Engineer and shall be at no additional cost to Owner. These conditions also apply to electrical problems during construction where operations of the plant are affected. C. All materials and equipment installed shall have full warranty from manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for the harsh Industrial Electrical/Mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where manufacturer's products fail prematurely, manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have option of declaring that failures were caused by environment and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that product manufacturers are aware of this condition and that manufacturer's warranty statement is included in shop drawings. Failure to do so will be at full expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. Where warranty requirements are shown in other sections,the more stringent requirement shall have precedence. D. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within five(5)working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and backcharging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. 16012-16 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 E. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. 3.05 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide services of his Technician and a factory trained Technician to instruct plant-operating personnel for a period of at least two (2)full days after completion of the contract work. Training requirements in specific specification sections shall have precedence over requirements of this section. B. Where training is required by any specification sections, Contractor shall provide training manuals for Operators. Manuals shall be approved as substantial quality by Engineer. All training manuals must be pre-approved by Engineer. Instructors shall be pre-approved by Engineer as qualified for training. Provide a training manual for each Trainee attending class. Training manuals and approved O&M Manuals shall be used during training. C. Provide Engineer with an outline of training course and topics to be covered. D. Schedule with Owner two (2) weeks in advance. Where Operators must alternate training schedule, more than two(2)days may be required. E. Operations and Maintenance (O&M) manuals and "Record" drawings shall be used during training. F. Engineer may participate in training. 3.06 TESTING AND STARTUP A. All elements of each electrical control system shall be set up, calibrated, and tested by Manufacturer's Technician to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of this Specification. All special testing of materials and equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all of his testing and startup work with the Owner and Systems Integration Engineer. As a minimum,the testing shall include both a factory test and a field test.Testing requirements are as follows: 1. Factory Tests: The electrical controls, motor control centers, switchgear, SCADA, instrumentation systems, and all other associated hardware shall be tested via a full simulation at the factory, prior to shipment, to demonstrate that each component is operational and meets the requirements of these specifications. Manufacturer shall provide test routine program for shop simulation of I/O signals where test are unavailable in shop. B. Where solid-state controller programs are furnished by a specified Systems Integration Programmer, a copy of the program will be provided on CD for Manufacturer's use in factory testing. Test results shall be certified, with written documentation provided to the Engineer upon test completion. Factory testing of controls shall be witnessed by the Engineer and/or Programmer for all control systems containing a solidstate controller of any type. Control System Fabricator shall notify project Electrical Engineer a minimum of(6)six weeks in advance of shop testing, and shall confirm equipment will be ready for testing when arrival of 16012-17 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 Programmer and/or Engineer Prior to time of testing or during testing, a Program shall be downloaded to the controller by the Programmer or Engineer. C. Where testing facility is located,more than 100 miles from job site and where testing period goes past 6 p.m.,Supplier shall provide suitable accommodations for overnight stay for Engineer and Programmer at cost of Supplier. D. Field Tests: All electrical control system components and instruments shall be checked to verify that they have been installed properly, all terminations have been made correctly and signal parameters are accurate. This includes demonstration of accuracy or all instruments over entire range of operation by live simulation of measurement. Electronic simulation above is not acceptable. E. Witnessed field tests shall be performed on the complete system. Prior to witnessed test, Contractor shall perform a complete test of each and every function, device operation and overall operations of electrical power, control, instrumentation and SCADA system. F. Prior to loading PLC or SCADA final program and prior to testing operation any PLC or SCADA set up by programmer,an inspection shall be conducted by Engineer's Inspector to assure electrical control devices are functioning properly. Any discrepancies or problems shall be corrected and then Contractor shall send a written notice that complete electrical control system is installed and operating per the Plans and Specifications. G. Contractor shall provide a checklist for all electrical,control and instrumentation functions and send to Engineer for approval. Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer on a paragraph-by-paragraph basis. Any equipment,devices or functions that are found not performing properly will be reason for termination of test until repairs are made. Additional testing by Engineer and Owner may be at Contractor's expense for time and travel of Engineer and Owner's staff. Each test shall be witnessed and signed off by the Contractor and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. The equipment Manufacturer's Representative shall be present for all testing, setup, demonstrations, and training. The Contractor shall notify the Owner at least two(2)weeks prior to the commencement date of the field tests. After tests are completed and with system fully operational, system shall run continuously for a period of 90 days without failure. Any failures shall be repaired and test shall start over again. 1. Additional Requirements: a. Measure and record all motor in-rush,run current and terminal voltage at start and run testing. Where multiple motors are installed, test shall include all motor sequencing smallest to largest. Submit recorded values for Engineer's review. Provide instrument and electronic devices calibration ranges and scales for this specific project. (Manufacturer's general information is not sufficient. Include range of 4-20 mA signals, i.e., 4 mA = X psi or Y feet, etc. for each specific instrument and device.) b. Provide setting and adjustments of all solid-state and non-solid-state starters, circuit breakers,controllers,instruments,and other equipment with adjustable settings both manual and programmable. Submit for Engineer's review and approval before operating equipment. 16012-18 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 4111, H. Provide statement of satisfactory demonstration of all instruments, devices and equipment functions over full range of operation. (Any failures or incorrect calibrations or settings detected shall be reason to halt demonstration tests and reschedule after adjustments and recalibrations have been completed.) Factory Technician report stating that all calibrations, settings and adjustments have been completed and that equipment has been functionally tested by Factory Technician on site. (Where report is found to be inaccurate,the Technician shall make necessary on site adjustments and shall issue new report,and where second report is required, a Factory Manager shall sign report attesting to its accuracy. There is no exception to this requirement. Contractor shall be responsible for all factory set up,testing and demonstration costs until system is accepted by the Engineer. Any additional testing as result of non-acceptance by Engineer shall be at Contractor's expense. 1. Record Drawings (Point to point wiring diagrams for every electrical device installed on this project with tags and applicable schedules shall be available at time of testing. Lack of this requirement will result in cancellation of testing until complete documentation is available. This will allow checking of wiring accuracy at time of testing.) K. A state licensed Electrician shall be present at all scheduled inspections. L. Controller Program: Remote testing by Engineer will require a minimum of 30 working days after programs are downloaded to the controller. Provide six (6) weeks' notice for program downloading by Programmer. This shall be accounted for in project schedule. Any delay of project completion due to lack of notice is at Contractor's risk and expense. M. Prior to testing system, PLC programs or HMI programs provided by other than the Systems sisr Integration Engineer noted in Item 1.07 — "Contractor's Responsibilities", programs shall be furnished on CD for review by Engineer. Provide any special software necessary to run and test complete program. N. Modem system setup shall be conducted by Manufacturer's Technician before any field-testing by Engineer is performed. Set up per Manufacturers written instructions. Provide Engineer with checklist and values of all settings and adjustments before requesting field test by Engineer. Indicate impedance of terminal load resister at each end of modem line. -END OF SECTION- 16012-19 of 19 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16013 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements described by this section are in addition to any requirements of the General Conditions of the project.The electrical engineer requires electronic submittals for all equipment provided under the electrical and controls specifications. Do not submit hardcopies to the electrical engineer.This does not eliminate any requirements for hardcopies required by the Owner as required by the General Conditions. B. Requirements of this section apply to all other electrical instrumentation and control related specifications for this project.Submittals provided without all required information are subject to be rejected without review. C. Contractor is to provide a schedule that at minimum shows estimated start dates,completion dates,shop test dates,and field test dates.It is the contractor's responsibility to provide updated schedules to our office in a timely manner. D. Contractor is required to provide the electrical submittal log with electrical or controls submittals. E. Contractor is fully responsible for coordinating/submitting correct operating voltage, horsepower, current, phase and starter sizes requirements of all equipment furnished and siarinstalled under this contract. Shop drawing review by Engineer does not remove this responsibility. Manufacturer's light fixture and accessories data sheets shall not confirm reference to"Contractor Select". Data sheets shall have model numbers that correctly identifies fixture and accessories as described and included on plans and in specifications. Incorrect submittal information is at risk of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. F. Submittals of motor control and electronic device shop drawings will require a minimum of two (2)weeks for review from time of receipt by Electrical Engineer. Contractor shall submit all shop drawings in time to account for this period of review. G. All submittals for motor control centers, control panels,control sections, controllers, lift pump panels,and Vendor furnished panels must contain statement of U.L.certification and identifying name and number of U.L. certification for fabricating shop. All submittals without this information will be rejected. H. Any MCC's or panels installed without U.L. listing and where not acceptable by Engineer or Owner will be replaced at cost of Contractor. I. Where submittals for a particular equipment,device or material item vary from that specified or shown on plan drawings,and where that item is not specifically noted as acceptable and,where installation of submitted item results in improper or undesirable operation of the system, Contractor shall be liable for removal and/or replacement of that item with the item specified or shown on plan drawings at no additional cost to Owner. Such items submitted as substitutions shall be listed separately and clearly noted as"Substituted Item". Do not include Manufacturer's catalog data pages that do not apply to specific equipment or devices used for this project. J. General Contractor shall route all Vendor submittals with electrical requirements to Electrical Contractor who shall review and coordinate all power and control requirements and affix stamp 16013-1 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 certifying coordination. Any variation to plans or specifications shall be noted accordingly on Vendor's submittal. K. All equipment shop drawings shall indicate changes or modifications as a result of previous submittal variances. No shop drawings shall be submitted that have not been coordinated as required by this specification. Any submittals not coordinated as such will be at Contractor's risk and at no additional cost to Owner for required changes necessary for a complete operating system as intended by the plans and specifications for this project. L. Provide detailed drawings of equipment,MCC's,transformers,and control panel layout in room or on area plan drawing. Show dimensions of device layouts on control panels. Show room or area dimensions, conduit stub-up locations, and all other dimensions relative to placement of equipment. All equipment shall fit available space shown on plans. Provide detailed drawings of any modifications, concrete cutting or breaking, or any work not shown on drawings for Engineer's approval. Non-submittal of any such work will result in corrective action at Contractor's expense. Special fabrication may be required for MCC's,control panels and other equipment. Note any exceptions or variations in size, location or configuration on submittal. Do not order equipment, MCC's, or panels until submittal has been approved by Engineer in writing. Where outdoor light poles and pull boxes are installed, provide dimensioned location layout submittal before starting work. M. Provide detailed sketch of all unistrut racks and other type mounting assemblies for Engineer's review before starting work. Items not submitted and not determined as acceptable after construction shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. N. Any notifications or changes to contract plans and specifications shall be authorized by Engineer before submitting shop drawings for approval. O. With each submittal,include an electronic copy of the applicable specification(s)page(s)for the item submitted and mark "Complies" or "Non-Compliance" or "Exception" adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIRMENTS A. Contractor is to submit all shop drawings, and product data required per the relevant specifications section at one time.All related submittals are to be submitted at one time. B. Contractor to follow a consistent naming convention such as: 1. Submittal Number—Submittal Name—Revision Number.File Extension a. ##-Submittal Title-Rev#.PDF C. Submittals are to be formatted as a single PDF format with a table of contents.Submittals that are provided as a group of PDF files not formatted as described will be rejected. D. The following information must be provided with each submittal: 1. Date and Revisions Dates 2. Project Title matching plans and specifications 3. Prime Engineer's Project Number 4. Electrical Engineer's Project Number 16013-2 of 4 REVISED 9/23/201.9 411/ 5. Name of Project Manager,Address and Telephone Numbers of: a. General Contractor b. Electrical Contractor c. Vendor d. Manufacturer 6. Specification Section Number 7. Submittal Log 8. List of Deviations and Reasons 9. Specifications Compliance Checklist 10. General Contractor Signature 1.03 SUBMITTAL LOG Item Submittal Related Submitted No. Description Electrical Specification Sections 1. Construction Schedule 16012 2. Well Pump and Motor 16150 411.4 3. Booster Pumps 16150 4. Automatic Transfer Switch 16496 5. Manual Transfer Switch 16494 6. Generator 15249, 16650, 16660,16661, 16622, 16655, 7. Autosensory Panel 16012, 16016,16195, 16904,16935, 16936, 16950 8. Motor Control Center 16125,16176, 16290, 16410, 16452, 16460, 16470, 16481, 16484, 16496, 16911, 16662 9 Site,Control Room and Generator Pad 03301, 16012, 16401, 16740 Layouts 03400, 16012, 16290, 16476, 16494 10. Electrical Service Equipment 16013-3 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 Misc.Electrical Equipment (Include conduit,conductors,lighting, 16012, 16111, 16119,16120, 16125, 16126, 11. HVAC, transformers,panelboards, 16402, 16452,16460,As indicated on disconnects, grounding,and other electrical plans appurtenances) 12. Chemical Feed Equipment As indicated on electrical plans 13. Flow Meter(s) 13418, 13420, 13426, 13427 14. Flow Control Valve(s) As indicated on electrical plans 15. O&M Manuals 16012 16. As-Built Drawings 16012 Notes:. . .. 1. Submittal log to be included with each submittal.Check off all submittals previously submitted in the far right column. 2. Submittals may be combined. -END OF SECTION- '•/) J 16013-4 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 CPO SECTION 16014 ELECTRICAL OPERATION&MAINTENANCE(O&M) MANUAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements described by this section are in addition to any requirements of the General Conditions of the project.The electrical engineer requires electronic submittals for all equipment provided under the electrical and controls specifications. Do not submit hardcopies to the Electrical Engineer. This does not eliminate any requirements for hardcopies required by the Owner as required by the General Conditions. B. Any hardcopies provided to Owner after approval by Electrical Engineer are to be professionally assembled with tabs and coversheets. 1. Wiring diagrams shall be on same size pages(8.5x11 or 11x17 pullout sheets)as used in Operations and Maintenance Manuals and shall be placed in a separate section of the Manuals identified as Wiring Diagrams. 2. Each O&M Manual hard copy shall include a CD that contains the complete,organized O&M Manual in PDF format inserted in a pocket near front of Manual.All O&M Manuals shall be professionally written and bound in high quality latching post vinyl binder. 411, Loose page three ring binders are not allowed. C. Requirements of this section apply to all other electrical instrumentation and control related specifications for this project.Submittals provided without all required information are subject to be rejected without review. D. Provide diagrams of all controls panels and MCC's in clear plastic laminated pages. One(1)copy in ring binder for Operator and one(1)copy in pocket affixed to inside of cabinet door. E. Contractor is to provide submittals in accordance with 16013 Electrical Submittals. 1.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. Contractor is to submit all shop drawings, and product data required per the relevant specifications section at one time.AU related submittals are to be submitted at one time. B. The contents of the O&M manuals shall be generally organized as follows: C. Contact Information for all contractors and vendors D. System Hardware/Installation E. System Software(where applicable) F. Operation (step-by-step procedures) G. Electrical and Control Wiring Diagrams H. Maintenance and Troubleshooting Warranty Certificates J. Point—to—Point Wiring Diagrams for each circuit installed or provided by equipment suppliers. K. Device Information 16014-1 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 a. Instrument and electronic devices calibration ranges and scales for this specific project. (Manufacturer's general information is not sufficient. Include range of 4-20 mA signals,i.e.,4 mA=X psi or Y feet,etc.for each specific instrument and device.) b. Setting and adjustments of all solid-state and non-solid-state starters,SCADA, PLC's, circuit breakers, controllers, instruments, and other equipment and devices with adjustable settings both manual and programmable settings. Provide this information in table format and show current settings of each adjustable device for this installation,in each motor control center section and each control panel. c. Statement of satisfactory demonstration of all instruments, devices and equipment functions over full range of operation. (Any failures or incorrect calibrations or settings detected shall be reason to halt demonstration tests and reschedule after adjustments and recalibrations have been completed.) d. Factory Technician report stating that all calibrations,settings and adjustments have been completed and that equipment has been functionally tested by Factory Technician on site. Where report is found to be inaccurate, the Technician shall make necessary on site adjustments and shall issue new report, and where second report is required, a Factory Manager shall sign report attesting to its accuracy. There is no exception to this requirement. Contractor shall be responsible for all factory set up,testing and demonstration costs until system is accepted by the Design Engineer. Any additional testing as result of non-acceptance by Engineer shall be at Contractor's expense. 1.03 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor is required to keep up to date redlines at all times and may be reviewed during construction at any time by the Engineer. Record Drawings that are found to be inaccurate are the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Record Drawing Drawings to include point-to-point wiring diagrams for every electrical device installed on this project. C. Provide Record Drawing that clearly show any work that varies from the Contract Drawings. Remove any lines or text from drawings that no longer apply as a result of as-installed variations. "Record Drawing" Drawings shall be on backgrounds that are furnished by the Engineer. All changes are to be in latest version of AutoCAD or other applicable CAD methods as required by Owner or Engineer. Contact Engineer for CAD standards to be followed. Submit Record Drawing Drawings electronically for review. D. All underground conduits entering any building under or in slab shall be accurately dimensioned as to location. Show accurate dimensioned layout of conduits under or encased in building slabs. Record Drawing mark-ups shall be submitted to Engineer for review and coordination prior to cover up with slab or backfill. E. Show accurate dimensioned location of all conduits and ductbanks on site and on structures that are installed or modified under this contract. Identify conduits by tag number. F. Show location and identify all new or relocated devices and equipment in rooms and on structures. 111111) 16014-2 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 G. Provide accurate and complete point-to-point wiring diagrams for all power, control and instrument circuits. Identify each conductor,conduit,terminal block,and device terminal.Use manufactures device terminal numbers and do not assign new conflicting termination numbers. Quality and content of diagrams and drawings shall be such that future troubleshooting or modifications may be done without additional information from field observations. Contractor will be asked to demonstrate certain circuits selected by Engineer or Owner to assure accuracy and completeness of diagrams. Any errors shall be corrected before acceptance of work. This work includes every circuit installed or modified under this contract,without exception. H. Record Drawing construction drawings shall be provided on full size plan sheets for Owner and furnished electronically in AutoCAD format for Owner and Electrical Engineers files. Provide hard copy quantities specified in this specification or in General Conditions Specifications,whichever is more stringent. -END OF SECTION- 16014-3 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16060 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work" and 15012 — Mechanical Work" for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical Demolition 1.03 REFERENCES A. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall be provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association(ANSI/NFPA), No. 70-National Electrical Code(NEC),Article No. 590-Temporary Installations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this section for Engineer's approval. B. Annotate existing drawings to sequence the demolition of systems, equipment removal, and temporary hook-ups. C. Schedule with Owner for required shutdowns to accommodate system demolition and installation of temporary facilities. D. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report any discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation. 16060-1of3 REVISED 9/23/2019 D. By beginning demolition,installer accepts existing conditions and warrants that he will maintain service to equipment and items not scheduled or indicated for removal,and that he will return to V the Owner all serviceable items and systems in good operating conditions. E. Before starting demolition test installation and verify operating condition of all equipment that is to remain serviceable. Notify Owner in writing of any equipment that is not operable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work:As specified in individual Sections,or as required to complete work intended by plans and specification. 2.02 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. The temporary electrical wiring and facilities shall be designed and constructed in strict compliance with NEC-Article No.590. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls,floors,and ceilings scheduled for removal. N.„,) B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company to provide continuous service to operating equipment. C. Where required, provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switch-overs and connections. Obtain permission from the Owner at least one week before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. E. All existing equipment that is to remain serviceable shall be covered and sealed to prevent dust or water intrusion. F. Where equipment, motor control centers, panels,and devices are to be removed or relocated and where wiring is to remain or be reused,trace out all wiring and tag conductors. Record data in Record Drawings. G. Where equipment is to be reused and is disabled without power for a period of over 1 week,the equipment shall be stored in a dry location and a heater shall be installed inside the enclosure and remain activated until equipment is placed back in service. 3.02 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work as shown on plans, and as understood from observable conditions noted during the pre-bid site visit. 16060-2 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. This includes rerouting of underground duct banks and conduits that may not be documented on Owner's record drawings. Contractor is to allow for these conditions in bid price. Failure to do so is at Contractor's risk. C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, plug conduit, and patch surfaces. E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment servicing utilization equipment that has been removed. H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Maintain access to existing installations,which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified for new work. K. Any existing equipment that is to remain serviceable and is damaged during demolition or during new work shall be repaired or replaced to Owner's satisfaction in working condition. 3.03 DISPOSAL AND SALVAGE {I A. Salvage electrical, instrumentation and HVAC equipment removed from existing facilities for reuse as applicable. B. Material and equipment,which can be reused or salvaged,remains the property of the Owner unless specifically indicated in the Specifications or Drawings,or as designed by the Owner. C. Materials and equipment which cannot be reused or salvaged for Owner's use will be removed and disposed by the Contractor at approved disposal facility. D. Remove,seal,and store generators,motors,and other large equipment for Owner's use. Store at designated location wrapped in water and dust tight covering and on skids. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment, which remains or is to be reused. B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangements. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install relocated materials and equipment as shown on plans. -END OF SECTION- 16060-3 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16111 CONDUIT,FITTINGS,AND BODIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specification for conduit,fittings, and bodies. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 1. ANSI C80.1: Rigid Steel Conduit-Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.4: Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit. B. Federal Specifications. 1. W-C-58C: Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies Aluminum,and Malleable Iron. 2. W-C-1094A: Conduit and Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid. 3. WW-C-566C: Flexible Metal Conduit. 4. W W-C-581E: Coatings on Steel Conduit. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 1. NEMA RN1: Polyvinyl Chloride Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing. 2. NEMA TC2: Electrical Plastic Tubing(EPT) and Conduit(EPC-40 and EPC-80). 3. NEMA TC3: PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA),ANSI/NFPA 70- National Electrical Code(NEC). E. Underwriters' Laboratories(UL). 1. UL 1: Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit. 2. UL 6: Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit. 3. UL 514B: Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes. 4. UL 651: Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit. 5. UL 651A: Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit. 6. UL 886: Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous Locations. 16111-1 of 10 REVISED 9/23/2019 F. Section 16195—"Electrical Identification" J 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets,catalog data,with selected products clearly marked. 2. Installation,terminating and splicing procedure. 3. Instruction for handling and storage. 4. Dimensions and weight. B. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests: 1. Rigid steel conduit shall pass the bending, ductility, and thickness of zinc coating tests described by ANSI C80.1. 2. Flexible conduit shall pass the tension,flexibility,impact,and zinc coating test described by UL 1. 3. Nonmetallic conduit and fittings shall pass the test requirements of NEMA TC2, UL 651 and 651A and Federal Specification W-C-1094A. 1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Package conduit in 10-foot bundles maximum with conduit and coupling thread protectors suitable for indoor and outdoor storage. Package fittings in manufacturer's standard quantities and packaging suitable for indoor storage. Package plastic-coated rigid conduit, fittings, and bodies in such a manner as to protect the coating from damage during shipment and storage. B. Store conduit above ground on racks to prevent corrosion and entrance of debris. C. Protect plastic conduit from sunlight. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Rigid Steel Conduit. 1. Allied Tube and Conduit 2. Western Tube and Conduit 3. Wheatland Tube Company 16111-2af 10 REVISED 9/23/2019 0611, B. PVC Coated Steel Conduit. 1. Occidental Coating Company(0-Cal) 2. Robroy Industries, Inc.(Plasti-Bond, KorKap,or Perma-Cote) 3. NEC, Inc. (BlackGuard) C. PVC Rigid Conduit. 1. Cantex 2. Carlon Industries, Inc. 3. Robroy Industries, Inc. D. Conduit Fittings and Bodies. 1. Appleton Electric 2. Crouse-Hinds 3. Killark Electric Manufacturing Company 4. 0-Z/Gedney E. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit. 1. Anamet, Inc. 2. Electriflex Company 410 3. Triangle Wire and Cable, Inc. F. Aluminum Conduit: 1. Allied Tube and Conduit 2. Indalex 3. Or equal 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Design Conditions. Use electrical conduit,fittings, and bodies designed for service in areas as specified within this section to form a continuous support system for power, control, and instrument cables. 1. Use PVC coated steel conduits and hardware for Wastewater Facilities or corrosive environments. 2. Use rigid galvanized steel conduits for Water Facilities. B. Conduit and Fittings 1. Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings: tro 16111-3 of 10 REVISED 9/23/2019 a. Rigid steel conduit, rigid steel conduit bends, nipples,and bodies shall be hot-dipped galvanized and shall comply with the latest ANSI C80.1, UL 6, Federal Specification WW-C-581E,and NEC Article 344. b. Mild steel tubing shall be used for conduit,nipples,and couplings,and shall be free of defects on both the inner and outer surfaces. c. Fittings,bodies,and covers for rigid steel conduit shall be steel or cast- iron and shall comply with ANSI C80.4, UL 5148, and Federal Specification W-C-58C. 2. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings. a. PVC-coated conduit,fittings,bodies,and covers shall conform to NEMA RN1(Type A). Rigid steel galvanized conduit and fittings before coating shall conform to Federal Specification WW-C-581E,ANSI C80.1,and UL 6. Conduit bodies shall conform to UL 5148 and Federal Specification W-C-58C. Provide sufficient coating for touch up after installation. b. PVC-coated couplings shall be of the ribbed type for sizes%"-4". c. Condulet covers shall have encapsulated stainless steel thumbscrews. d. Condulets and covers shall be of malleable iron or feraloy material before coating. e. Urethane coating shall be a minimum of 2-mil thickness on the interior of the conduit and the interior of fittings,condulets,covers,and bodies. f. Conduit clamps, unistrut, and devices shall be PVC coated when used with PVC-coated conduit. 3. Flexible and Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings. a. Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit manufactured in accordance with UL 1 and Federal Specification WW-C-566C. b. Fittings used with liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be the PVC- coated type and of such design as to thoroughly ground the conduit to the fittings and through it to the box or enclosure to which it is attached. c. Liquidtight flexible couplings and fittings for use in hazardous areas shall comply with UL 886, NEC Article 501-10 (A&B), and Federal Specification W-C-586C. d. Do not use flexible metal conduit or liquidtight flexible metal conduit for light fixtures or receptacles unless shown on plans or approved by Engineer. 4. PVC Conduit and Fittings. Use PVC conduit, bends, and fittings, which comply with NEMA TC2, W-C-1094A, and NEC Article 352-III for above ground and underground installation. Conduit shall be Schedule 80,unless shown or noted otherwise on drawings or in other specifications. 5. Use PVC Schedule 80 conduits, fittings, and boxes for all chemical areas and provide conduit seals per NEC. 16111-4 of 1.0 REVISED 9/23/2019 6. Aluminum RMC conduit may be used only where shown on plans. 7. Do not use liquid tight flexible metallic conduit to connect rigid conduit to fixed or wall mounted enclosures or panels. 8. Do not run liquid tight flexible metallic conduit directly thru walls, ceilings,or floors. 9. Do not attach liquid tight flexible metallic conduit with nylon or plastic tie-wraps on straps. Use aluminum straps made for that purpose, except where approved by Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Confirm submittal of shop drawing with conduit and conduit fitting, sizes, types, and routing shown. B. Ensure that the conduit system to be installed is sized properly for the cable and wire requirements. C. Verify the actual physical conduit route from the conduit plan drawings and prepare the conduit support system. D. Verify the equipment locations to which the conduit will be connected and determine detail requirements for connections. E. Submit layout of all conduit stub-ups for Engineers review before installing conduits. Do not cpy install conduit to equipment,electrical panels or devices until enclosure locations and sizes have been determined and verified by Supplier. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install PVC-coated conduits in all locations at wastewaterfacilities,inside valve vaults,in wet well slabs,in corrosive and wet environments,in chemical rooms(Schedule 80 required)and,where specifically noted on drawings. Aluminum PVC-coated conduit may be used where specifically shown on plans,where specifically noted in specifications or where approved in writing. Install PVC coated conduits in Water Facilities where wet locations, inside valve vaults, or where specifically shown on Plans or noted in other Specifications. B. Install rigid galvanized steel(RGS)conduits in dry inside locations and in all outdoor locations for water facilities and, where specifically noted otherwise on drawings. Aluminum RMC may be used where specifically shown on plans, where specifically noted in specifications or where approved in writing. Where aluminum conduit is approved, use all aluminum condulets and fittings. C. Install PVC conduits in duct banks. For stub-ups and directional turn elbows, use PVC-coated rigid steel elbows or rigid steel elbows as applicable in A and B above and other specifically noted locations on drawings. Rigid steel stub-up shall have minimum three(3)layers of mylar tape up to 1" above slab where conduit is in contact with concrete. Stub-ups inside MCC's, panels, equipment and/or enclosures shall have threads with grounding bushings installed. D. Stub up all conduits entering MCC's,and other equipment enclosures from the bottom into each respective starter,feeder breaker or control section per equipment manufacturers conduit layout C 16111-hof 10 REVISED 9/23/2019 detail. Coordinate with equipment manufacture data sheets before starting any underground or below slab conduit installations. E. Run exposed conduit parallel or perpendicular to walls, ceilings, or main structural members. Group multiple conduits together where possible. Do not install conduit where it interferes with the use of passageways, doorways,overhead cranes, monorails, equipment removal areas or working areas. In no case shall conduit routing present a safety hazard or interfere with normal plant operating and maintenance procedures. Maintain a minimum overhead clearance of 8'-0" in passageways. Except where absolutely impossible,all conduits are to be installed in or under concrete slab, in walls and ceilings. Any exposed conduit installed otherwise may be relocated at Contractor's expense where directed by Engineer or Owner. Exceptions,where specifically noted otherwise on plans.Do not route conduits across walk-ways or egress paths. F. Installation and support of conduit shall be from steel or concrete structures in accordance with the standard detail drawings. Furnish necessary conduit straps,clamps,fittings and support for the conduit in accordance with the standard details and consistent with the grade and type of conduit being installed. G. Identify conduit at termination points like MCC, light fixtures,control panels, receptacles, and junction boxes. Tag all conduits per Section 16195 — "Electrical Identification," Item 2.01 — "Raceway and Cable Labels." H. Not more than three (3)equivalent 90 degree bends will be permitted between pullboxes, or between pullboxes and equipment. Provide bonded expansion fittings at building expansion joints. Where pullboxes are located such the three 90 degree bend rule is not exceeded without the pullbox,the box may be deleted where approved by Engineer in writing. )14111 Install conduit runs so that they are mechanically secure,mechanically protected from physical harm, electrically continuous, and neat in appearance. The interiors of conduit shall provide clean, smooth raceways through which conductors may be drawn without damage to the insulation. Make threaded connections wrench tight. J. Cut conduit square with a power saw or a rotary type conduit cutter designed to leave a flat face. Do not use plumbing pipe cutters for cutting conduit. Ream the cut ends of conduit with a reamer,designed for the purpose to eliminate rough edges and burrs. Cut threads with standard conduit dies providing 3/4-inch taper per foot, allowing the proper length so that joints and terminals may be made up tight and the ends of the conduit not deformed. Keep dies sharp and use a good quality threading oil continuously during the threading operation. Remove metal cuttings and oil from the conduit ends after the threads are cut and paint threads before connections are made.Use zinc rich,brush-on compound on the threads of steel conduit before connections are made.Use only tools specifically made for bending and installing PVC-coated or PVC conduit when installing these materials. K. Use strap wrenches only to tighten joints in plastic coated rigid steel conduit. Replace all conduit and fittings with damage to the plastic coating,such as cuts,nicks and threader chuck jaw marks. L. Make up changes in direction of exposed conduit using elbows or fittings. Do not use pull boxes to make direction changes unless specifically designated otherwise. Do not use elbow bends for change in direction of exposed conduit. M. Field fabricated bends shall be free of indentations or elliptical sections. The radius of the bend shall not be less than 6 times the smallest diameter of the raceway. J 16111-bot 10 REVISED 9/23/2019 N. Protect all conduit terminations from mechanical injury. Prevent the entry of moisture and foreign matter into the conduit system by properly capping terminations. 0. Avoid trapped runs of conduit, if possible. When they are necessary, provide drainage using a "tee"condulet equipped with a drain. Conduit is likely to pass through areas with a temperature differential of 20 degrees For more. Seal penetrations with a proper seal fitting at the wall or barrier between such areas. For conduit passing through walls separating pressurized areas from non-pressurized areas, install sealing fittings at the wall on the non-pressurized side. P. Fit conduit crossing building or structure expansion joints with approved expansion fittings, except that fittings will not be required when conduit crossing an expansion joint is supported on trapeze hangers in such a way that at no time will the conduit be under stress due to expansion. Install bonding jumpers around expansion joint fittings. Q. Where conduit terminates in sheet metal enclosures, threaded hubs are required. Conduit entries with double locknuts and bushings are prohibited. Sheet metal enclosures located outside or in any other wet, damp, or corrosive areas shall be furnished with threaded hubs. Restrict side penetrations to the lower one third of the enclosure. R. Provide liquid tight flexible metallic conduit only where necessary to allow for movement or to localize sound or vibration,at transformers,at motors,solenoid valves,motor operated valves, generators,and any other rotating equipment unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Limit length to less than 2 feet.Do not make rigid connections of conduit to vibrating equipment housing or frame. Do not use flexible metallic conduit for light fixture circuits or similar devices and do not use as a substitute for rigid conduit. 5. Seal openings or holes where conduits pass through walls or floors. When conduits are passing tiethrough a firewall or fire-rated floor into different rooms,cabinets,or enclosures,use a fire-rated seal as shown in the typical detail included in the Drawings. Certain walls, where indicated on the Drawings, require environmental(airtight)seals;seal as shown. T. Install explosion-proof seals in conduit runs crossing or entering a hazardous classified area, where shown on Drawings. Install type CSBE removable sealing fittings to seal pump cables in the wet well and at the first junction box outside the well. Install EYS seals in all conduits leaving chemical rooms or chemical storage spaces. There shall be no unions, couplings, boxes, or fittings in conduit run between seal and point at which conduit leaves the room. U. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install expansion fittings every 300 feet within a straight conduit run and where conduit crosses building expansion joints,using bonding straps to ensure ground continuity. V. Parallel runs of conduit may be supported by structural steel racks. When two or more racks are arranged one above the other, provide vertical separation of not less than 12 inches between racks, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Space conduits on the racks at least enough to provide 1/4 inch clearance between hubs on adjacent conduits at terminations and to allow room for fittings. W. Fill conduit racks no more than 75 percent of their capacity, providing usable space for future conduit. To ensure this,conduits leaving the rack horizontally shall be offset up or down so that future conduits may be installed in the space remaining. Construct conduit racks to permit access for wire or cable pulling at all pull points,even when future conduits are added to fill the racks. coo 16111-7 of 10 REVISED 9/23/2019 X. Where conduit racks are supported on rods from beam clamps or by some other non-rigid suspension system,install rigid supports at no more than 50-foot intervals to give lateral stability to the rack. Y. Conduit racks or hangers must in no way interfere with machinery (or its operation), piping, structural members, process equipment, or access to anticipated future equipment. Refer to architectural,structural,equipment layout and piping drawings to ensure that this requirement is met. Z. Label high voltage conduit with the circuit phase-to-phase voltage by means of a firmly attached tag or label of approved design at each conduit termination, on each side of walls or barriers pierced and at intervals not exceeding 200 feet along the entire length of the conduit. AA. Support conduit sizes 2 inches and larger at spacings not exceeding 10 feet and conduit sizes 1- 1/2 inches and smaller at spacings not exceeding 8 feet. BB. The means of fastening conduit to supports shall be: by one hole malleable iron conduit straps secured by wood screws to wood and by bolts with expansion anchors to concrete or masonry; by"Korn"clamps or U-bolts to other surfaces. Use"clamp backs"when strapping conduits to walls, column faces,or other such surfaces. CC. Support conduit runs with conduit clamps,hangers,straps,and metal framing channel attached to structural steel members. Conduits of 1-1/2 inch size or less may be supported by one-hole conduit straps on concrete,tile or steel work,but for larger size conduit,use 2-hole straps. Use clamps of galvanized malleable iron for rigid galvanized conduit and PVC-coated or stainless steel for PVC-coated conduit. Metal framing channel straps used for PVC-coated conduit shall be Type 316 stainless steel. DD. Install conduits supported from building walls with at least 1/4-inch clearance from the wall to Nadi prevent the accumulation of dirt and moisture behind conduit. All conduits shall be routed below concrete floor slabs on grade and shall have sand fill and cover. Set depth to account for radius of turn-up to prevent exposure of elbow bend. EE. Where specifically shown on plans, size and space embedded conduits in structural slabs in accordance with the Uniform Building Code. Conduits should occupy no more than one-third the thickness of the slab and should not be closer than 3 times the largest diameter on center without additional reinforcement. FF. Do not cut paved driveways, sidewalks, concrete foundations, etc. to install conduits unless specifically noted on plans. Bore under such construction and maintain a minimum of 24 inches below underside of paving or concrete. Repair any cutting or damage to original condition and to satisfaction of Engineer and Owner. GC. All conduits for fiber optic cables are to have wide tube radius compatible with cable manufacturer's requirements. Install per NEC. HH. Damaged conduits shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner where Engineer deems necessary because of extent of damage or,where conductors are damaged by defective conduit installation. II. Seal all conduits entering motor control centers,control panels, equipment, enclosures,valve actuators, etc. with CSBE seals or, install EYS at locations permissible. Sealing glands shall be selected specifically for each conduit and conductor. Install seals at all equipment located at elevation lower than U.G.conduit route. 11. Conduits penetrating underground pull boxes shall be sealed with CSBE seals where larger than 1 %-inch diameter and with RTV silicon based sealant where smaller than I%-inch diameter. 16111-8 of 10 REVISED 9/23/2019 KK. Conduits penetrating structural walls of lower levels shall be sealed with CSBE seals where larger than 1%-inch diameter and with RN silicon based sealant where smaller than 1%-inch diameter. Duct seal is not allowed. LL. All conduit duct banks penetrating lower level structures and penetrating underground pull boxes shall be sealed watertight between conduit and wall of structure or pull box. MM. Where conduits are stubbed out from building for future use, extend conduits 5 feet past building wall or past edge of pavement,whichever is applicable. Do not leave under pavement. Cap ends of conduits. NN. All conduits shown entering outside walls of buildings may stub-up immediately adjacent to wall and penetrate low on wall where specifically indicated on plans. Where not shown entering wall, all conduits shall be routed up through building floor by excavating below foundation,core drill through floor, and stub-up conduits then backfill with cement stabilized sand, compacted in place. 00. Apply a conductive coating to field-cut threads of aluminum conduits to ensure continuity and ease of joining. Noalox and Kopr-Shield are acceptable coatings. PP. Avoid excessive force when tightening threaded fittings for aluminum conduit, both between conduits and at threaded box entries. Generally,the correct force is hand-tight plus one full turn with a wrench. At least three(3)full threads should be engaged. QQ. Do not use conduit bushings to secure threaded aluminum RMC to a box or enclosure. Install a locknut between a conduit bushing and the inside of the box or enclosure. RR. Threadless fittings shall not be used with threaded aluminum conduit. SS. Install expansion fittings in outdoor runs of aluminum RMC. 41111, TT. Do not install aluminum conduit in concrete or underground. UU. Use special tools for installing aluminum conduit. All damaged conduits shall be replaced. VV. In chemical rooms, enclosures, and portable/prefab buildings used for chemical storage or chemical equipment operation, use Schedule 80 PVC conduit and fittings only, except where specifically noted on Plans,use PVC coated steel conduit. Use PVC boxes and enclosures. There are no exceptions to this requirement unless specifically noted on drawings as an exception to this section. WW. Provide minimum one(1)additional spare 2 inch,two(2)spare 1 inch conduits from MCC to U.G. pull box and between all U.G. pull boxes on site. XX. Do not route conduit on outside walls of buildings or structures unless specifically shown on Plans, route from floor slab. Do not route conduit on building interiors, MCC rooms or equipment rooms unless shown on Plans, or approved in writing. Exception: conduits to light fixtures on ceilings. Paint to match. Where shown on Plans or where approved,conduits shall be painted to match surface on which installed. Submit drawings or sketches of any conduit routing that varies from Plans or Specifications. YV. Where underground conduit ductbanks are routed under new building slabs greater than 4 inches thick, conduits may be encased in cement stabilized sand with red marking tape. ZZ. Provide steel conduit for all security, fire,TV, and access control system circuits. Coordinate circuits and conduit requirements within respective vendors. MA. Paint all exposed conduit threads to prevent corrosion. Match color of conduit. BBB. Paint all exposed rigid steel surface mounted conduits in MCC rooms. Match wall and ceiling thiPr color. 16111-9 of 10 REVISED 9/23/2019 CCC. Do not route conduits across slabs.Route below slab and turn up at proper location.For existing structures,excavate beneath slab,core drill for conduit penetration up to equipment and back fill excavation with cement-stabilized sand.See details on plans for installation methods. DDD. Contact Engineer for inspection of conduit stub-ups and U.G.ductbanks before concrete pour. EEE. Where RG5 conduit is installed on interior or exterior building walls(or ceilings),paint conduit, supports and clamps to match wall color. FFF. For conduits that will contain coaxial cable or other wide radius band cables,provide wide sweep conduit elbows on beuds that will accommodate pulling such cables thru 3 90 degree turns without exceeding beuds radius limitations. -END OF SECiION- 16111-10 of 10 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16119 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012—"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ducts. 2. Duct banks. 3. Manholes. 4. Handholes. 1.03 REFERENCES 46110 A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. C2-93- National Electrical Safety Code. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C478 REV B-90- Standard Specification for Pre-cast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. 2. C891-90- Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Pre-cast Concrete Utility Structures. C. National Electrical Code — Article 110, Section V — Manholes and other Electric Enclosures Intended for Personnel Entry—All Votages. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Duct: General term for electrical conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, specified for use underground,embedded in earth or concrete. B. Duct Bank: Group of two or more ducts in continuous run between two points. C. Underfloor Conduits. 1. Conduits,which run underground within perimeter of building walls under building floor. This may consist of one conduit, or several conduits grouped together. 16119-1 of REVISED 9/23/2019 D. Duct Bank Conduits 1. Conduits,which run under ground outside perimeter of building walls, may consist of one conduit,or several conduits grouped together. E. Underground Conduits 1. Underground conduits are both underfloor conduits and duct bank conduits. F. Handhole: Below-the-surface enclosure in connection with ducts into which people reach,but do not enter,for purpose of installing,operating,or maintaining equipment or wiring. G. Manhole: Below-the-surface enclosure or chamber, large enough for a person to enter, connecting with ducts, and affording facilities for installing, operating, and maintaining equipment or wiring. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Submittals are not required if Contractor supplies materials or equipment of specified or named manufacturers. If Contractor proposes substitutions to material or equipment of specified or named manufacturers, submittals identified below are required. 1. Product data. C. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable 'V) paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturers of pre-cast manholes and handholes shall be firms regularly engaged in manufacturing factory-fabricated manholes and handholes, of types and sizes required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 yrs. B. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms"listed"and"labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code,Article 100. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association (NEPA) 70. 2. All manholes to be sized in accordance with NEC Article 370-28. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store pre-cast concrete units at site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. 16119-2 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 411111, B. Lift and support pre-cast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination of Work: 1. Coordinate layout and installation of manholes and handholes with final arrangement of ducts as influenced by actual final location of other utilities in field. 2. Coordinate elevations of duct and raceway entrances into manholes and handholes with final profiles of ducts and raceways as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and buildings. 3. Establish locations and elevations to suit field conditions and assure duct banks run drain to manholes, handholes,or as shown on Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Conform to Raceways, Section 16110—"Raceways." 2.02 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Aggregate For Duct Encasement: 3/8-in. maximum size. B. Strength: 3,000-psi minimum 28-day compressive strength. 2.03 DUCT BANK ACCESSORIES A. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacings and concrete cover depths indicated,while rigidly supporting ducts during concreting. 2.04 MANHOLE/HANDHOLE HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Frames and Covers: Cast iron conforming to ANSI C2, Rule 323. Furnish with cast-in legend, "Electric"or"Signal"as appropriate. Cover-to-frame bearing surfaces machined. B. Sump Frame and Grate: Comply with FS RR-F-621,Type VII for frame,Type I for cover. C. Pulling Eyes in Walls: Eyebolt with rebar fastening insert. 2-in.dia eye, 1-in.by 4-in. long bolt. Working load embedded in 6-in,4,000 psi concrete: 13,000 lbs minimum tension. D. Pulling and Lifting Irons in Floor: 7/8-in.dia hot-dipped galvanized,bent steel rod,stress relieved after forming, and fastened to reinforced rod. Exposed triangular shaped opening. Ultimate yield strength,40,000 lbs shear, 60,000 lbs tension. E. Bolting Inserts for Cable Stanchions: Flared, threaded inserts of non-corrosive, chemical resistant,nonconductive thermoplastic material. 1/2-in.internal dia by 2-3/4 in.deep,flared to 1-1/4-in. minimum at base. Tested ultimate pull-out strength: 12,000 lbs,minimum. F. Expansion Anchors for Installation After Concrete is Cast: Zinc-plated carbon steel wedge type with stainless steel expander clip 1/2-in.bolt size,5,300-lb rated pull-out strength,and 6,800-lb rated shear strength, minimum. G. Cable Stanchions: Hot-rolled, hot-dipped galvanized "T"section steel, 2-1/4-in. size, punched with 14 holes on 1-1/2-in.centers for cable arm attachment. 16119-3 of REVISED 9/23/2019 H. Cable Arms: 3/16-ga hot-rolled, hot-dipped galvanized sheet steel pressed to channel shape, approximately two 12-in. wide by 14-in. long and arranged for secure mounting in horizontal position at any position on cable stanchions. Cable Support Insulators: High glaze, wet process porcelain arranged for mounting on cable arms. J. Ground Rods: Solid copper clad steel,3/4-in. dia by 10-ft. length. K. Ground Wire: Stranded bare copper, No.6 AWG, minimum. 2.05 PRE-CAST MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES A. Factory fabricated of reinforced concrete in conformance with ANSI C2 and applicable requirements of ASTM C478. Design manhole structure in accordance with requirements of American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) publication "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges." AASHTO H2O highway loading shall apply with 30%loading added for impact. B. Pre-cast Units: Interlocking, mating sections complete with accessory items, hardware, and features as indicated including concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod. C. Joint sealant for joints between pre-cast sections shall be continuous extrusion of asphaltic butyl material compounded for adhesion,cohesion,flexibility, and durability properties required for permanent seal against maximum hydrostatic pressures theoretically attainable at installation location with ground water level at grade. 2.06 RACEWAY/DUCT SEALING COMPOUND A. Compound: , 1. Non-hardening, putty-like consistency workable at temperatures as low as 35°F. 2. Compound shall not slump at temperature of 300°F and shall readily adhere to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings,concrete,masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals. 2.07 PULL BOXES, HANDHOLES, JUNCTION BOXES, AND MANHOLES PLACED IN NON-DELIBERATE TRAFFIC LOCATIONS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide by one of the following: 1. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 2. Armorcast Products Company 3. Martin Enterprises B. Standard:Comply with all test provision of the latest ANSI/SCTE 77"Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity' and be verified by listing with Underwriters Laboratory, UL such as 66WF. Must meet Load Rating shown on drawings and comply with tier requirements in"Underground Enclosure Application"Article. C. Color:Gray,unless specifically shown otherwise on drawings. D. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 16119-4 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 11111, E. Cover: Shall have a structural load rating consistent with enclosure and secured by Penta Head Stainless Steel Auger style bolts. F. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRICAL", "COMMUNICATIONS", or other applicable descriptive term. G. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions:Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure,fixed installation in enclosure wall. H. Duct Entrance Provisions:Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering duct for secure,fixed installation in enclosure wall. Handholes 24 inches wide by 36 inches long and larger shall have factory-installed inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING METHOD A. General: Install ducts for wiring runs indicated. Provide sizes as indicated. B. Single Duct Runs: Rigid galvanized steel conduit,direct buried in earth where shown on plans. C. Duct Banks: Rigid nonmetallic conduit, Schedule 40 or 80, encased in concrete, unless shown otherwise on plans. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 4.0 A. Excavation: Cut trenches neatly and uniformly,and slope uniformly to required pitch. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCTS A. Slope: Pitch ducts to drain towards manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment,unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Minimum slope shall be 4 in.in 100 ft.Where necessary to achieve this between manholes,slope ducts from high point in run to drain in both directions. B. Curves and Bends: Use manufactured elbows for stub-ups at equipment and at building entrances. For other curves and bends,except as otherwise indicated, use manufactured long sweep bends with minimum radius of 25 ft. in both horizontal and vertical directions. C. Make joints in ducts and fittings watertight in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane. D. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Handholes: End bells spaced approximately 10 in. center to center for 5-in. ducts and varied proportionately for other duct sizes. Change from regular spacing to end bell spacing shall start 10 ft.from end bell and shall be made without reducing duct line slope and without forming trap in line. Grout end bells into manhole walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances. Provide groundable end bushings on metal ducts and connect to system grounding conductor. E. Duct Entrances to Buildings: Transformations from underground PVC duct to steel conduit shall be made 30 ft.minimum,outside building wall and shall use fittings manufactured for purpose. Install in accordance with following: 1. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Install reinforcing in duct banks through disturbed earth near 4111, buildings and excavations and coordinate duct bank with structural design at wall so 16119-5 of REVISED 9/23/2019 duct bank is supported at wall without reducing structural or watertight integrity. 2. Direct-Buried,Non-encased Duct Entering Non-waterproofed Walls: Install Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeve for each duct. Caulk space between conduit and sleeve with duct sealing compound on both sides for moisture-tight seal. 3. Waterproof Entrances: Where ducts enter buildings through waterproofed floor or wall, watertight entrance-sealing device shall be installed with sealing gland assembly on inside. Anchor device securely into masonry construction with one or more integral flanges and membrane waterproofing secured to device in permanently watertight manner. F. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support on plastic separators coordinated with duct size and required duct spacing,and install in accordance with following: 1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, and secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel in such way as to form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 2. Reinforcing: Reinforce duct banks. Size and arrange reinforcing steel as indicated on Drawings. 3. Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct bank application. Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation unless approved by Engineer. Where more than one pour is necessary,terminate each pour in vertical plane and continue duct bank reinforcing minimum of 18 in.beyond termination of pour. 4. Forms: Walls of trench may be used to form side walls of duct bank provided soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions. Use forms where soil is not self-supporting. 5. Minimum Clearances: 3 in. between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 3 in. between ducts for like services, and 6 in. between power and ducts for other systems. 6. Depth: Except as otherwise indicated, top of duct bank shall be 24 in. below finished grade, minimum, in non-traffic areas, and 30 in. below finished grade, minimum, in vehicular traffic areas. G. Stub-ups: Duct stub-ups to equipment shall be galvanized rigid steel. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete pads,steel conduit shall extend minimum of 5 ft.away from edge of pad. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for purpose and encased concrete. H. Sealing: For ducts to be wired in this Project, provide temporary closure at terminations. For spare ducts,seal bore of ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs as required to withstand 15 psi minimum hydrostatic pressure. Pulling Cord: Provide 100-lb test nylon cord in ducts including spares. 1. Marker Tape: Provide plastic marker tape over ducts at 12 in. below finished grade. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF MANHOLES/HANDHOLES,GENERAL A. General: 1. Provide manholes/handholes of sizes,shapes, and locations as indicated. valla 16119-6 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 2. Determine final elevation of ducts as influenced by possible adjustments in other utilities and surface features and discovery of underground obstructions before installing manholes/handholes. Obtain Engineer's approval for manhole/handhole installation adjustments necessitated by obstructions. 3. Install units plumb and level and with orientation and depth coordinated with arrangement of connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Elevation: 1. Manholes: Install with roof top 15 in. below finished grade, minimum. 2. Manholes: Install handholes with depth as indicated. Where indicated,cast handhole cover frame directly into roof of handhole and set roof surface 1-in. above grade. C. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of units where indicated. Arrange to coordinate with drainage provisions indicated or specified. D. Access: Install access to manhole/handhole through cast-iron frame and cover. For manholes, use 30-in.cover except as indicated. Use 30-in.cover for handholes,except use 24-in.covers for 2-ft.by 2-ft. handholes. Install brick chimney to support frame and cover and to connect cover with manhole/handhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting of cast iron frame to chimney. Set frames in paved areas and traffic ways flush with finished grade. Set other frames 1-in.above finished grade. E. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has cured at least 3 days. After ducts have been connected and grouted in, and prior to backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole/handhole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at least 3 days. F. Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has cured 3 days, minimum. After ducts have been connected and grouted in,and prior to backfilling,dampproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole/handhole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at least 3 days. G. Hardware: Install removable hardware including pulling eyes,cable stanchions,cable arms,and insulators as required for installation and support of cable and conductors and as indicated. H. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 in. for anchor bolts installed in field. Use minimum of 2 anchors for each cable stanchion. I. Grounding: Install ground rod through floor of each manhole/handhole with top protruding 4 in. above floor. Seal floor opening against water penetration with waterproof non-shrink grout. Ground exposed metal components and hardware with bare copper ground conductor. Train conductors neatly around corners. Install on walls and roof using cable clamps secured with expansion anchors. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLES/HANDHOLES A. Construct manholes/handholes as indicated. B. Finish interior surfaces with smooth troweled finish. C. Windows for future duct connections shall be concrete knock-out panels 1-1/2 to 2 in. thick, located as indicated. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF PRECAST MANHOLES/HANDHOLES 41111, 161.19-7 of REVISED 9/23/201.9 A. Install in accordance with ASTM C891 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Support units on level bed of crushed stone or gravel,graded from 1-in.sieve to No.4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. 3.07 TESTING A. Field Quality Control: 1. Grounding: Test manhole grounding provisions to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections. Make ground-resistance test at each ground rod and submit report of results. Use an instrument specifically designed for ground- resistance measurements. 2. Duct Integrity: Rod ducts with mandrel 1/4-in. smaller in diameter than internal diameter of ducts. Where rodding indicates obstructions in ducts,remove obstructions and retest. 3. Water Tightness: Make internal inspection of manholes/handholes three months after completion of construction for indications of water ingress. Where leakage is noted, remove water found and seal leakage sources. Re-inspect after two months and reseal remaining leakage sources. Repeat process at two-month intervals until leakage is corrected. 3.08 CLEANING AND RESTORATION A. Clean Ducts: Clean full length of ducts with a round bristle brush with dia 1/2-in.greater than internal diameter of duct. B. Clean Manholes: Clean internal surfaces of manholes including sump. Remove foreign material. 3.09 RESTORATION A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. B. Where sod has been removed,replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. C. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work to their original condition. D. Include necessary top soiling,fertilizing,liming,seeding, sodding,sprigging, or mulching. E. Restore disturbed paving as indicated. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF PULLBOXES, HANDHOLES, JUNCTION BOXES, AND MANHOLES IN NON- DELIBERATE TRAFFIC LOCATIONS A. Excavate a minimum of 6-8 inches wider,longer and deeper than the enclosure.Place a suitable geotextile fabric in the bottom of the excavation. Place 6-8 inches of gravel on top of the geotextile fabric. Place the box of the enclosure on top of the gravel. If the box is larger than 24 inches by 36 inches and or deeper than 24 inches deep,place bracing inside the box during back filling. -END OF SECTION- ) 16119- of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 4111, SECTION 16120 600 VOLT BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for 600-volt building wire and cable. B. Specifications for VFD cable. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association(ANSI/NFPA),NFPA 70-National Electrical Code(NEC): 1. Article 310-Conductors for General Wiring. ( 2. Article 200—Use and Identification of Grounded Conductors. �r B. Underwriter's Laboratories(UL) 1. UL 83: Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables 2. UL 1063: Machine Tool Wires and Cables C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM B3: Soft or Annealed Copper Wires 2. ASTM B8: Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard,Soft D. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA),ICEA 5-61-402:Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy(NEMA WC-5). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for Engineer's approval. 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets and catalog data 2. Instruction for handling and storage 3. Dimensions and weight 41110 16120-1 of 5 REVISED 9/23/2019 B. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests. Cable shall meet all the requirements of Part 6 of ICEA 5-61-402. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Ship wire and cable on manufacturer's standard reel sizes unless otherwise specified. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. Provide moisture protection by using manufacturer's standard procedure or heat shrinkable self-sealing end caps applied to both ends of the cable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cerro B. Southwire C. Service Wire Company 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Design. Provide cable designated as THWN/THHN or XHHW single conductortype and UL 83 and UL 1063 listed, rated 600 volts and certified for continuous operation at maximum conductor temperature of 90°C in dry locations and 75°C in wet locations while installed in underground duct,conduit or in control panels(MTW). Use XHHW,90°rated conductors for main service or feeders. B. Conductors. Provide conductors,which are Class B,concentric stranded, annealed un-coated copper with physical and electrical properties complying with ASTM B3 and B8 and Part 2 of ICEA S-61-402. C. Insulation. Each conductor shall be PVC insulated and nylon jacketed to meet the requirements of Part 3 of ICEA 5-61-402. The insulation thickness shall match the dimensions listed in NEC Table 310-13 for type THHN and THWN wire. D. Wire Marking 1. Wire marking shall be in accordance with NEC Article 310-11 and shall be printed on the wire insulation at 2-foot intervals. 2. The printing method used shall be permanent and the color shall sharply contrast with the jacket color. E. The single conductor color coding shall be as follows: J 16120-2 of 5 REVISED 9/23/2019 41111, System Voltage A B C Neutral 120/240 Volt 1Ph/3w Black Red White 120/208 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Red Blue White 120/240 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Orange Blue White 277/480 Volt 3Ph/4w Brown Purple Yellow Grey Motor Control 1 Black 2 Red 3 Blue Ground Green 2.03 VFD cables are to be selected and provided for AC motor drive duty and shall be rated at voltage listed in VFD Manufacturer's data sheets. 2.04 All service and feeder conductors to be XHHW-2. 2.05 Provide composite multi-conductor,shielded pair or triad,outer sheathed cables where shown on plans. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Complete the cable raceway systems and underground duct banks before installing cables. B. Verify sizing of raceways and pull boxes to ensure proper accommodation for the cables. C. Check the length of the cable raceway system against the length of cable on the selected reel. D. Clean conduits of foreign matter before cables are pulled. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Wiring Methods 1. Use wiring methods indicated on the Drawings 2. In general, use THHN/THWN or XHHW building wire for lighting, power and control wiring where conductors are enclosed in raceways such as above ground conduit system, underground duct banks,or inside control panels. Use XHHW,90°rated conductors for main service or power and motor feeders. 3. Do not use solid conductors. 4. Use conductors no smaller than No. 12 AWG stranded for lighting circuits indoors and not smaller than No. 10 AWG stranded for outdoors. Use No. 10 AWG (minimum)for outdoor receptacles on structures or poles. 5. Use conductors no smaller than No. 14 AWG for control circuits,except when part of a multi-conductor cable or internal panel wiring. 6. In general,do not splice conductors. All conductors must be one continuous length from starting point to end point without splices, unless prior written approval by Engineer. 7. Splices associated with taps for lighting and control circuits are allowed without approval. 8. Make splices in accessible junction boxes located above ground. Do not splice power and control conductors in underground pull boxes or manholes, unless specifically 16120-3 of REVISED 9/23/2019 allowed. Any slices allowed in underground boxes shall be made using 3M water tight kits specifically made to withstand submergence in water. Any conductors allowed to be spliced in underground boxes shall have conductors elevated to near top of wall. 9. Wire nuts with insulated caps may be used for lighting wiring splices located in wall boxes, switch boxes, and receptacle boxes, but not in control panels, MCC's or underground boxes. Splice control circuit with insulated crimp connectors. 10. All conductors routed in manholes,electrical vaults and underground pull boxes shall be routed around walls and supported by nonmetallic fiberglass unistrut that is bolted vertically to walls at intervals not less than two per wall. Do not use horizontal arms unless specifically called for. Support conductors with stainless steel bands made for the purpose of supporting conductors, or with large wide nylon Ty-Wraps. Under no conditions shall conductors be routed directly across length of box. Any conductors routed otherwise shall be removed and replaced at Contractors expense. Splicing in UG pull boxes, manholes or vaults is prohibited without written approval by Engineer. B. Single Conductor in Conduit and Ductbank 1. Install cables in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and NEC Chapter 3- Wiring Methods and Materials. Do not exceed maximum wire tension, maximum insulation pressure and minimum bending radius. 2. Pull cables into conduits using adequate lubrication to reduce friction. Lubricants must not be harmful to the conductor insulation. 3. Splices are not allowed in manholes. C. Single Conductor in Cable Tray: Do not install single conductor building wire and cable in cable tray. All conductors to be tray rated composite cable type. D. Multi-Conductor Shielded VFD Rated Cable: 1. Install cables in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Pull cables into conduits using adequate lubrication to reduce friction. Lubricants must not be harmful to the conductor insulation. 3. Do not splice cables unless specifically shown on plans. Provide as one continuous length. Where splicing is shown on plans or approved, use mechanical compressing tools and splice barrels only, and tape connections. 4. All cables and conductors routed thru UG pull boxes or manholes shall be routed around walls and secured on racks. See plans for details. E. Preparation for Termination 1. Make 600-volt power cable terminations and splices with heat shrinkable sleeves and seals. 2. Terminal lugs and connectors for all sizes of conductors shall be crimp-on type. 3. For size 1/0 AWG and larger, crimp-on lugs shall have the long barrel with 2-hole tongues except in places where termination space is limited. F. Tests: 1. In general,test insulation integrity of the wiring system before terminating. 16120-4 of REVISED 9/23/2019 4111, 2. Make sure to disconnect sensitive electronic equipment before testing insulation. 3. Use a 500 VDC megohmmeter and perform the wire system insulation test in accordance with the operating instructions. G. Termination: After the 600-volt wiring system has been tested with satisfactory results, reconnect wire. H. Inspection of Conductors I. All conductors shall be inspected for damage after pulled in conduit. Where damage is deemed excessive by Engineer,conductors shall be replaced for entire length of run. 1. Where damage is due to condition of conduits, Contractor may be requested to provide a televised inspection of conduits at no additional cost to Owner and where deemed necessary by Engineer, any damaged conduits shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. -END OF SECTION- 41110 16120-5 of 5 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16125 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Single and multiple conductor Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) cables and splices,terminations, and accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing Manufacturing (ASTM): B8-90 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard,or Soft. B. NFPA 70—National Electrical Code: C. NFPA 2196—Tests for Fire Resistive Cable: D. CSA AWM 1/11 A/B FT4, 1000 Volt Rating. E. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): ICEA 5-68-516. F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. WC 7-88 - Cross-Linked - Thermosetting - Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 2. WC 8-88-Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 3. WC 26-90-Wire and Cable Packaging. G. Underwriter's Laboratory(UL): 1. 486A-91 - UL Standard for Safety Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors. 2. 1072-86- UL Standard for Safety Medium-Voltage Power Cables. H. UL 1000 Volt Flexible Motor Supply Cable Rating. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Product Data: Cables and cable accessories descriptions and detailed specifications. C. Test Results: Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance of cable and accessories with referenced standards. D. Operations and Maintenance Data: Maintenance data for cables and accessories. E. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable 16125-1 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. lea 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage experienced Installer of medium- voltage electrical cable to perform installation specified in this section. B. Manufacturers Qualification: 1. At least 20 yrs service record for EPR insulation system development and in-house mixing. 2. Manufacture under Quality Assurance System modeled after Appendix B of Federal Register 10 CFR 50 and ANSI N45.2. C. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms"listed"and"labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code,Article 100. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association (NEPA)70. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver cable on factory reels conforming to NEMA Standard WC 26. B. Store cables on reels on elevated platforms in clean,dry location. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cable: 1. Alpha Wire,or following where equal. 2. Okonite Co. 3. Pirelli Cable Corp. 4. Cablec Continental Cables Co. 5. Belden Driveflex. 6. Or equal. B. Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories: 1. Adelet-PLM 2. Electrical Products Division 3M. 3. G&W Electric Co. 4. The Kerite Co. 5. Raychem Corp. 16125-2of4 REVISED 9/23/2019 6. RTE Components. 7. Or equal. 2.02 1000 VOLT CABLE A. General: Cable shall be single or multiple conductor types,with types and sizes as indicated,and conforming to UL Standard 1072 and UL 514B. See plans for multi-conductor,sheathed,woven braid copper shielded,composite cables for this project. B. Cable: Cross-Link Polyethylene XLPE insulated and shall conform to NEMA Standards. C. Conductors: Class B stranded conforming to ASTM-B8,coated or uncoated annealed copper. D. Strand Screen: Energy suppression layer concentrically extruded over stranded conductor complying with ICEA Standard S-68-516. E. Low capacity cable. F. Metallic Shielding: Tinned copper shielding woven braid over insulation shield. G. Jacket: Black polyvinyl chloride(PVC) outer jacket. H. Phase Identification: Color coded black,red, and blue field-applied colored vinyl tape on outer jacket. Cable Voltage Rating: 1000 volts phase to phase. J. Cable Temperature Rating: 1. 90 degree C normal operation. 2.03 TERMINATING PRODUCTS A. Comply With Following Standards: UL 486A B. Connectors: Compression type as recommended by cable or and termination splicing kit manufacturer for application. C. Terminating Kits: Provide terminations as recommended by manufacturer in writing for specific sizes, ratings, and configurations of cable conductor, splices, and terminations specified. Kits shall contain components required for complete splice or termination including detailed instructions and shall be product of single manufacturer. Completed splices and terminations shall provide insulation equivalent to insulation class of cable it connects. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine raceways,cable trays,pull boxes,manholes,handholes,junction boxes,and other cable installation locations for cleanliness of raceways, minimum bending radii of cables, and conditions affecting performance of cable. Pull mandrel through raceways to check for suitable conditions. Do not proceed with cable installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. General: Install cable accessory items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. B. Provide stress cone type termination where required. 16125-3 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CABLES i A. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one cable is indicated in same raceway. Use V UL-listed and manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. B. Use pulling means including,fish tape,cable,rope,and basket weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable. C. Replace any conductors that are damaged or where outer jacket has been torn during pulling through conduit or openings. 3.04 GROUNDING A. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations,splices, and separable insulated connectors. Ground metal bodies of terminators,splices, cable and separable insulated connector fittings, and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Ground in accordance with Section 16452—"Grounding." 3.05 TESTING A. Provide voltage stress test after conductors are installed. Provide report to Engineer. -END OF SECiION- J 16125-4 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16126 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE PART GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012—"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for instrumentation cable. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM). 1. ASTM 83: Soft or Annealed Copper Wires. 2. ASTM 88: Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard,Soft. 3. ASTM 833: Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers(IEEE),IEEE 383-2.5: IEEE Standard for Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables,Field Splices,and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations. C. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 1. ICEA S-61-402: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy(NEMA WC-5). 2. ICEA S-66-524: Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy(NEMA WC-7). 3. ICEA 5-68-516: Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy(NEMA WC-8). D. Underwriters' Laboratories(UL). 1. UL 44: Rubber Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. UL 83: Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cables. E. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association(ANSI/NFPA),NFPA No. 70- National Electrical Code (NEC),Chapter No. 3-Wiring Methods and Materials, Article 725 -Class 1,Class 2, and Class 3 Remote Control,Signaling, and Power-Limited Circuits. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this Section for Engineers approval. 16126-1 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 1. Completed engineer's data sheets from this specification or manufacturer's data sheets, cut sheets, and catalog data. 2. Installation, terminating and splicing procedure (including bending radius and pulling tension data). 3. Instruction for handling and storage. 4. Dimensions and weight. B. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests 1. Cable shall be tested at the factory to confirm that the cable complies with requirements of ICEA Section 7.7.9 of 5-66-524 or 7.5.9 of S-68-516. 2. Where applicable,the cable shall meet the requirements of the vertical tray flame test as described in IEEE 383-2.5. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Ship cable on manufacturer's standard reel sizes unless otherwise specified. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. Reels shall be of the type specified on the data sheets. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. Provide moisture protection by manufacturer's standard procedure or heat shrinkable self-sealing end caps applied to both ends of the cable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Alpha Wire Corporation B. Belden Division,Cooper Industries, Inc. C. Cablec Continental Cables Company D. General Cable Company E. Manhattan Electric Cable Corporation F. Okonite Company 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Design. Provide cable with the following design characteristics. The cable shall consist of multiple conductors. The cable assembly shall be UL listed,flame,oil,and sunlight resistant,and certified for continuous operation at the temperature specified in wet or dry locations while installed in underground duct, conduit, or cable tray. The number and size of conductors supplied in each cable shall correspond to the quantities specified. 16126-2 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 cpcEach conductor shall be individually insulated. Pairs and triads shall have conductors,which are twisted together with a drain wire,shielded,and covered with a jacket. Multi-pair/triad cables shall consist of the required number of electrically isolated, shielded pairs or triads,which are bundled together and covered by an overall jacket as specified. Provide composite multi- conductor,shielded pair or triad, outer sheathed cables where shown on plans. B. Conductors. Provide conductors,which are Class B,concentric stranded,annealed tinned copper whose physical and electrical properties comply with ASTM 83,B8 or B33 and Part 2 of ICEA 5-61- 402,S-66-524,or S-68-516, unless otherwise specified. C. Insulation. Each conductor shall be insulated as specified in compliance the requirements of Part 3 of ICEA 5-61-402,S-66-524,or S-68-516. The average insulation thickness shall not be less than the dimensions shown in Table 7-32 or 7.5.1 of ICEA S-66-524 or 5-68-516 for 600-volt insulation unless otherwise specified. The minimum insulation thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the value given in the table. D. Drain Wire. Provide drain wire which is Class B,seven-stranded,tin-coated copper in accordance with ASTM B3, B8,or 833 and as specified. The drain wire shall not be less than two AWG sizes smaller than the insulated conductor's size,except for multiple pair triad drain wires,which shall not be less than the insulated conductor size. E. Shielding. Provide shielding consisting of laminated,non-burning,mylar-backed aluminum tape applied helically around a twisted pair or triad with the aluminum side in continuous contact with the drain wire unless otherwise specified. Wrap the tape around each twisted pair or triad with a 25 percent minimum overlap unless otherwise specified. F. Jacket. The physical and electrical properties of the jacket used to cover single or multi-pair or triad cables shall meet the requirements of section 7.7.7 or ICEA S-66-524 or section 7.5.6 of ICEA 5-68-516. Jacket material as specified. The jacket thickness shall be equal to the dimensions shown in Table 7-33 or 7.5.2 of ICEA 5-66-524 or 5-68-516. G. Armor. Where requested, use instrumentation cables protected by an interlocked metal tape armor coating made of galvanized steel,which meets the requirements of paragraph 4.5 of ICEA 5-68-516 or 5-66-524, unless otherwise specified. H. Conductor Identification. Use individual conductors in single-pair and single-triad cables,which are,color coded black and white;and black,white and red,respectively. Multi-pair-triad cables shall have one conductor in each pair or triad colored white,and all other conductors are color coded in sequence according to Table L-2 of Appendix 2 of ICEA 5-66-524, and as specified. Cable Marking. Print cable marking information on the jacket of each cable at 2-foot intervals. Use a permanent printing method with color sharply contrasting the jacket color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Complete cable raceway systems, underground duct banks,and cable support systems before thr installing cables. 16126-3 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 B. Verify sizing of raceways and pull boxes to ensure proper accommodation for the cables. j C. Check the length of the cable raceway system against the length of cable on the selected reel. `/ D. Do not install or work on PVC insulated or jacketed cables in temperatures below 32 degrees F. E. Clean conduits of foreign matter before cables are pulled. F. Provide at least 30 percent spare conductors or pairs. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cable in Conduit and Ductbank 1. Install cables in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and NEC Article 725- Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote Control, Signaling and Power Limited Circuits. Do not exceed maximum wire tension,maximum insulation pressure,and minimum bending radius. 2. Pull cables into conduits using adequate lubrication to reduce friction. Lubricants must not be harmful to the conductor insulation or cable jacket. 3. Conduits carrying low level signal cables shall be PVC-coated rigid steel. B. Cable in Tray. Install instrument and signal cable in cable tray only when the tray is dedicated for this type cable and cables are approved for tray installation. C. Termination J 1. Do not splice conductors. For termination use crimp-on type ring tongue non-insulated tin plated copper lugs. 2. For shielded control cable,terminate the shield and ground it at one end only,preferably at the control panel end for instrument and communication cable and at the supply end for electronic power cables. 3. If splicing is required,maintain shield continuity by jumpering the ground shield across connection point where it is broken at junction boxes, or other splice points. Insulate these points from ground. 4. Mark wiring on both ends with circuit numbers or loop tag numbers. Heat shrink wire markers after the ring tongue terminal has been installed. Extend the marker over the crimp or base of the terminal. D. Tests 1. Before connecting the cables,test insulation integrity and conductor continuity. 2. Use a 500 VOC megohmmeter and perform the cable insulation test in accordance with the operating instructions. E. Termination. After the cable has been tested with satisfactory results, the cable can be terminated at both ends to their designated terminal points. -END OF SECTION- 16126-4 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16131 DEVICE,PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for device,pull, and junction boxes. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NEMA). 1. FBI- Fittings and Support for Conduits and Cable Assemblies 2. 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum) 41, B. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association(ANSI/NFPA),NFPA70 - National Electrical Code(NEC) -Article 314-Outlet Device, Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit Bodies and Fittings. C. Underwriters Laboratories(UL): 1. SO-Safety Cabinets and Boxes 2. 508-Safety Industrial Control Equipment 3. 514B-Safety Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes 4. 886-Safety Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous Areas. D. National Electrical Code —Article 110, Section V— Manholes and other Electric Enclosures Intended for Personnel Entry—All Voltages. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets, catalog data 2. Instruction for handling and storage 3. Installation instructions 4. Dimensions and weights CV 16131-1 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 B. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Pack and crate boxes to permit ease of handling and to provide protection from damage during shipping, handling,and storage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Sheet Metal Boxes 1. Hoffman Industrial Products 2. Pauluhn Electric Manufacturing Company 3. Hennessy 4. Tanco 5. Tejas 6. Circle A.W. B. Cast Device Boxes 1. Appleton Electric Company 2. Crouse-Hinds, Division of Cooper Industries 3. Killark Electric Manufacturing Company 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Sheet Metal Boxes 1. Provide UL-approved junction boxes and pull boxes manufactured from stainless steel sheet metal and meeting requirements of NEMA 4X for corrosive and wet areas,NEMA 250 and NEC Article 314. Enclosures located outdoors or in environmentally harsh or wet locations shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel. 2. Provide boxes with a stainless-steel continuous hinge, closure hasps and all-stainless steel hardware. 3. Furnish the door with neoprene gasket and provision for padlock. B. Device Boxes: 1. Provide UL-approved boxes designed and manufactured to house electrical devices like receptacles and switches,and in conformance with NEMA FB1 and NEC Article 314. 2. Supply boxes that are hot-dip galvanized on cast iron suitable for corrosive and wet atmosphere. 3. All boxes located in environmentally harsh or wet or outdoor locations shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel. J 4. All boxes located in chemical rooms shall be H.D. PVC only. 16131-2 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 5. Where unprotected service conductors are routed through a pull box with other conductors a divider wall shall be provided in the pull box for separation as required by the NEC. C. Hardware 1. Mounting Hardware: Stainless steel 2. Conduit Connectors: Watertight as manufactured by Myers Hubs,or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Review the drawings and determine how many boxes of each kind are required and check if supplied quantity is sufficient. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Boxes described in this specification shall be used both in dry and wet, corrosive areas, both inside and outside locations. B. Install boxes in accordance with NEC Article 314 in locations indicated on the Drawings. C. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible places to facilitate wire pulls, maintenance, and repair. D. Plug unused conduit openings. E. Make conduit connections to sheet metal boxes with watertight conduit connectors. F. Size underground pull boxes and manholes large enough to allow cables and conductors to be routed around walls and supported on wall racks. See plans for details. Do not use arms on mounted racks,except for MV cables or large multiple 600 Volt cables. Do not cross and occupy middle of pull box or manhole with cables or conductors. -END OF SECTION- tor 16131-3 of 3 REVISED 9/23/201.9 SECTION 16135 4.04 CABINETS, BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected p specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Outlet and device boxes. 2. Pull and junction boxes. 3. Floor boxes and service fittings. 4. Cabinets. 5. Hinged door enclosures. 6. Boxes and fittings for hazardous locations. B. Conduit-body-type electrical enclosures and wiring fittings are specified in Section 16111 — "Conduit, Fittings,and Bodies." 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): ASTM A167-91-Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,and Strip. B. Underwriter's Laboratory(UL): 1. UL 50-UL Standard for Safety Cabinets and Boxes. 2. UL 514A- UL Standard for Safety Metallic Outlet Boxes. 3. UL 514B-UL Standard for Safety Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes. 4. UL 886 - UL Standard for Safety Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. C. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA ICS 6- Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems. 2. NEMA 05 1-Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes,Covers, and Box Supports. 3. NEMA 250- Enclosure for Electrical Equipment(1,000V maximum). 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Cabinets: Enclosure designed either for surface or for flush mounting and having frame or trim in which door or doors may be mounted. 411110 B. Device Box: Outlet box designed to house receptacle device or wiring box designed to house switch. 16135.1of7 REVISED 9/23/2019 C. Enclosure: Box,case,cabinet, or housing for electrical wiring or components. D. Hinged Door Enclosure: Enclosure designed for surface mounting and having swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with walls of box. NgSi E. Outlet Box: Wiring enclosure where current is taken from wiring system to supply utilization equipment. F. Wiring Box: Enclosure designed to provide access to wiring systems orfor mounting of indicating devices or of switches for controlling electrical circuits. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Product Data: Submit for cabinets and enclosures with classification higher than NEMA 1. C. Shop Drawings:Submit to Engineer for approval. D. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms"listed"and"labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code,Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS, BOXES,AND FITTINGS,GENERAL A. Electrical Cabinets, Boxes,and Fittings: Of indicated types,sizes,and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated,provide units of types,sizes,and classes appropriate for use and location. Provide items complete with covers and accessories required for intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. B. Cabinet and Enclosures Heights: Cabinet,panel,and enclosure heights shall not exceed 6 feet-6 inches from floor to top fastening devices to allow access by Operator without use of ladders or steps to open enclosure doors. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Fasteners for General Use: Stainless steel screws and hardware. B. Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware. C. Fittings for Boxes,Cabinets,and Enclosures: Conform to UL 514B. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel for conduit hubs,bushings,and box connectors. D. Finishes: 1. Exterior Finish: Gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as J 16135-2 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 otherwise indicated. E 2. Interior Finish: Where indicated,white baked enamel. �r 2.03 METAL OUTLET, DEVICE,AND SMALL WIRING BOXES A. General: 1. Conform to UL 514A and UL 514B. 2. Boxes shall be of type,shape, size,and depth to suit each location and application. B. Steel Boxes: Conform to NEMA OS 1. Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes,and accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps,cable clamps, exterior rings and fixture studs. C. Cast-Iron Boxes: Iron alloy, waterproof, with threaded raceway entries and features and accessories suitable for each location,including mounting ears,threaded screw holes for devices and closure plugs. 2.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. General: Comply with UL 50 for boxes over 100 cu in. volume. Boxes shall have screwed or bolted on covers of material same as box and shall be of size and shape to suit application. B. Galvanized Steel Boxes: Flat rolled, code gauge, sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide rigid assembly, construct with internal structural steel bracing. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Cover shall be gasketed. C. Stainless-Steel Boxes: Fabricate of 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A167. Where necessary to provide rigid assembly, construct with internal structural stainless-steel bracing. Cover shall be gasketed. D. Cast-Iron Boxes: Molded of cast iron alloy with gasketed cover and integral threaded conduit entrances. E. Boxes Approved for Classified Locations: Cast metal or cast nonmetallic boxes conforming to UL 886 listed and labeled for use in specific location classification, and with specific hazardous material encountered. Conduit entrances shall be integral threaded type. 2.05 CABINETS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Hennessey Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman Engineering 3. The EMF Company 4. Rose Enclosure 5. Weigman Company 6. NEMA Enclosure Manufacturing Company B. Indoor Control Cabinets 1. Enclosure: NEMA 250,Type 12 unless shown otherwise on plans. 2. Enclosure Size: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as required to mount equipment indicated to UL Standards. 3. Backboard for Mounting Terminal Blocks,Components,and Inner Door: 12-gauge steel, 4000 finished in white enamel. 16135-3 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 4. Fronts: Steel pan-type doors with concealed stainless-steel piano hinges,held closed by stainless steel 3-point latch operable by pistol grip handle. "Si 5. Provide solid metal barriers to separate compartments containing control wiring operating at less than 50 volts from power wiring. 6. Clean surfaces to remove dirt and corrosion residue. Phosphatize for corrosion protection. Prime with two coats,and finish with one coat,of factory-applied textured polyurethane, minimum 5 mils thickness, color as selected by City Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors. 7. Panel Construction: Provide panel stiffeners and bracing. Fully gasket doors. Weld seams and grind smooth. 8. Conduit Entrances: Bottom entry unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 9. Material: Minimum 12-gauge steel. 10. Finish: Enamel;gray outside,white inside. 11. Provide thermostat-controlled strip-type space heater (150 watts maximum), convenience outlets and internal fluorescent lighting(where shown on drawings.) 12. Nameplates: On the outside of each cabinet's inner door,provide motor data nameplate information for each pump motor;copy all information exactly as shown on each motor nameplate. Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplates; black letters with white background; fasten to outside of cabinet door of each motor starter section with stainless steel screws. 13. Install wiring in open-slot plastic wiring duct. 14. On indoor panels, install a 4-inch passive vent in the side near the top and near the bottom of an adjacent side panel. These vents shall have removable filters to resist dust and insect entry. C. Outdoor Control Cabinets ika 1. Enclosures: NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel. 2. Enclosure Size: As indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, as required to accommodate equipment and as indicated in UL standards. 3. Material: Exterior and interior enclosure doors, shelves and component enclosures: Fabricate of 14-gauge type 316 stainless steel. 4. Doors: Stainless steel pan-type construction,with full-length stainless-steel piano hinge (for stainless steel or aluminum). Equip exterior door with locking hasp,padlock,heavy- duty locking pistol-grip handles, door restraint and 3-point latching mechanism of the draw roller type (0.750 inch minimum diameter rollers). Handles shall be 3/4 inch minimum diameter stainless steel. Equip interior doors with flush quarter-turn closure devices. Equip interior and exterior doors with neoprene gaskets. Provide restraints on all outer doors. 5. Space Heaters: Provide minimum 150 watt strip-type space heaters with an individual thermostat in each section. Use heaters rated for 240V,producing the required wattage when operated at 120V. 6. Provide rain shield with 1 inch drip lip for outdoor cabinets to protect against direct sun radiation and rainfall. Design shield to provide 1 foot of cover front and back and 2 inches of cover on the sides. Design shield to provide no more than 1 foot peak height above the top of the panel with 1 inch airflow clearance from the top of the control panel. Shielding material: Type 316 stainless steel. 7. Nameplates: On the outside of each cabinet's inner door,provide motor data nameplate information for each pump motor;copy all information exactly as shown on each motor nameplate. Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplates; black letters with white 16135-4 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 background; fasten to outside of cabinet door of each motor starter section with stainless steel screws. 8. In each cabinet section, provide a 120V convenience outlet and a switched 40 watt minimum fluorescent light fixture,with 0 degrees F ballast in each section(where shown on plans.) 9. Inside and outside of cabinet shall be smooth and free from burrs. 10. NEMA 4%enclosures shall have all boltholes gasketed. 11. A divider of same material and thickness as the cabinet shall be added to divide electrical components and wiring from instrumentation and pneumatic components and wiring. 12. No control devices are allowed on outer door of outdoor enclosures. D. Clear plastic outer or inner doors are not acceptable unless specifically noted on plans. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Locations: Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements and installation conditions. B. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs. C. Sizes shall be adequate to meet current NEC volume requirements,but in no case smaller than sizes indicated. D. Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel. 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of materials and NEMA types for each location in conformance with following requirements unless otherwise noted: 1. Interior Dry Locations: Sheet steel,NEMA type 1 for flush mounting and feraloy Type FS or FD cast boxes with threaded conduit hubs for surface mounting. 2. Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Galvanized,cast metal, NEMA Type 3R. 3. Wet Locations: 316 Stainless Steel, NEMA type 4%enclosures. 4. Corrosive Locations: 316 Stainless Steel, NEMA type 4X enclosures. 5. Hazardous(Classified)Locations: NEMA type listed and labeled for location and class of hazard indicated. B. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable for each location. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES A. Gasketed Boxes: At following locations use cast metal,threaded hub type boxes with gasketed weatherproof covers: 1. Exterior locations. 2. Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere. 3. Where indicated. cor 16135-5 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 B. Mounting: Mount outlet boxes for switches with long axis vertical or as indicated. Mount boxes for receptacles vertically. Gang boxes shall be mounted with long axis horizontal. C. Cover Plates for Surface Boxes: Use plates sized to box front without overlap. J D. Set boxes in concealed conduit runs,flush with wall surfaces,with or without covers as required. E. Set outlet boxes parallel to construction, securely mounted and adjusted to set true and flush with finished surface. F. Provide outlet box divider barriers between 277/480 vand 120/240 v devices as required and per current NEC. 3.04 OUTLET BOX LOCATIONS A. Locate flush mounted wall boxes in corner of nearest brick or block to keep cutting to minimum. B. Location of outlets and equipment as shown on Drawings is approximate and exact location to be verified and shall be determined by: 1. Construction or code requirements. 2. Conflict with equipment or other trades. 3. Equipment manufacturer's drawings. C. Minor modification in location of outlets and equipment considered incidental up to distance of 10 ft with no additional compensation,provided necessary instructions given prior to roughing in of outlet. D. Mounting heights for devices and equipment to be measured from finished floor to centerline of device unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES S A. Box Selection: For boxes in main feeder conduit runs,use sizes not smaller than 8-in.square by ,/1 4-in.deep. Do not exceed six(6)entering and six(6)leaving raceways in single box. Quantities of conductors (including equipment grounding conductors) in pull or junction box shall not exceed following: Size of Largest Maximum No.of Conductors in Box Conductors in Box No.4/0 AWG 30 250 MCM 20 500 MCM 15 Over500MCM 10 1. Cable Supports: Install clamps, grids, or devices to which cables may be secured. Arrange cables so they may be readily identified. Support cable at least every 30 in. inside boxes. 2. Size: Provide pull and junction boxes for telephone,signal,instrumentation,control,and other systems at least 50% larger than would be required by Article 370 of NEC, or as 16135-6 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 indicated. Locate boxes strategically and provide shapes to permit easy pulling of future wires or cables of types normal for such systems. 3.06 GROUNDING A. Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes, and enclosures. Where wiring to item includes grounding conductor, provide grounding terminal in interior of cabinet, box,or enclosure. B. Ground in accordance with Section 16452—"Grounding." 3.07 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches,abrasions,and weld marks. B. Galvanized Finish: Repair damage using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. C. Painted Finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating. -END OF SECTION- 411110 16135-7 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16150 41111, ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Observe electrical plans,motor protection unit specifications,and all equipment specifications to verify additional requirements before bidding. Vendor's failure to do so is at Vendor's own risk and at no additional cost to Owner for providing everything called for in plans and specifications. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Description of Work: 1. Motors furnished under other sections of these Specifications as part of equipment items shall conform to requirements of this section except as noted otherwise in that section or indicated otherwise on Drawings or schedules. 2. Submersible well motor shall be supplied in accordance with other sections of this specification. 3. Blower and booster pump motors shall conform to any additional requirements by Equipment Manufacturers where noted in other specifications. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Refer to latest addition of following standards. 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. NEMA MG 1-Motors and Generators. b. NEMA MG1-Part 31 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE): IEEE Standard 112-Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 3. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA): AFBMA Standards for Ball and Roller Bearings and Balls. 4. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): Standard of Installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Include motor submittal as part of equipment submittal for equipment specified in other 411, sections. 16150-1 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 C. Include identification of equipment by name and tag number as indicated in Specifications or on Drawings. D. Submit in accordance with General Conditions and other applicable sections of the Contract Documents. 1. Complete nameplate data in accordance with NEMA standards. Include space heater wattage and voltage. Include sound pressure rating. 2. Full load power factor and maximum correction capacitor kVA for motors 5 hp and larger. 3. Nominal efficiency in accordance with IEEE 112 for motors 5 hp and larger. 4. Insulation in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 31 or, as stated elsewhere in this specification. 5. Motor dimensions and frame size. 6. Manufacturer's printed data on each motor type being provided to indicate compliance with specified performance and construction. 7. Service manual to include storage and alignment instructions. 8. Complete motor winding and bearing,RTD curve data,and provide motor temperature ratings. 9. All motor characteristics and data required for programming Multilin motor protection where described in Section 16662—"Motor Management Relay"or,as shown on plans. Submittals without this data will be rejected in entirety. Data to include: a. Motor full load current b. Locked rotor current c. Locked rotor time-hot ,Il d. Locked rotor time-cold e. Hot: Safe stall ratio f. Service factor g. Overload/thermal damage curves h. Running cool time Stopped cool time 10. No motor data shall be submitted until motor horsepower, voltage, and phase have been coordinated with MCC and Controls Manufacturer. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. E. Operation and Maintenance(O&M)Data: Submit in accordance with General Conditions,Section 16012—"Electrical Work"and other applicable sections of the Contract Documents. F. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control: 16150-2 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 1. Perform individual motor test on motors over 1 horsepower. 2. Test shall be standard NEMA routine production test in accordance with MG 1-12.51, and consisting of following. a. No load running current. b. Locked rotor current. c. High potential test. d. Bearing inspection. 3. Provide motor data to motor control center(MCC)or motor starter supplier at time MCC is ordered to assure coordination of control and overcurrent protective devices. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA No.70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.(UL). 3. Local codes and ordinances. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for purpose of establishing standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Unless otherwise specified,meet or exceed following requirements for general-purpose motors: 1. High efficiency,equivalent to U.S.Motors premium efficiency for motors 5 hp and above. 2. Motors 1/2 hp and Larger: 3-ph, 60 Hz, 230/460V or 240/480V. a. Squirrel cage type,NEMA B. b. Motor Housing and Bearing Brackets: Cast grey iron with tensile strength of 30,000 psi. Do not provide rolled steel and aluminum. c. Secure bearing brackets to motor cast iron housing. Do not use bolt- clamping methods. d. Provide dual voltage windings, 230/460V or 240/480V. 3. Motors Less than 1/2 hp: 1-ph, 60 Hz, 115/230V, 120/240V, or 120/208V. a. Provide dual voltage windings. 4. Motor Operated Valve Motors: Provide dual voltage windings, 240/480V, 3 phase or 208/480V,3 phase as required by plans. 5. Suitable for continuous operation with line voltage variation within ±10% of rated voltage. 6. Suitable for continuous operation in 40°C ambient with 80°C temperature rise. 7. Copper motor windings. 16150-3 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 C. Design for frequent starting. Coordinate with programming of motor protection devices,such as Multilin,for number of starts limitations. D. Provide internal,120 VAC,heaters sized per manufacturer's recommendations based on use and location. Provide stamped stainless steel nameplate with space heater wattage and voltage. Install heaters in lower winding area of vertical motors. Contractor to provide 120 volt circuits from low voltage panel via starter contactors. E. Provide RTD's where shown on plans or required by specifications, by motor manufacturer or, where shown on drawings. Provide RTD's for both end bearings and for three phase windings. Provide RTDs for all VFD drives and motors 50 horsepower and greater. Provide vibration sensors where indicated on plans. Contractor to provide shielded circuits from motors to controls per RTD manufacturer requirements. F. Where used in conjunction with electronic variable speed drive units such as VFD's,coordinate with drive equipment manufacturer to provide a matched motor and drive system. Motor shall be capable of safe operation,without over heating,throughout full speed range of VFD. Failure to coordinate will result in any additional charges to be paid by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. G. Contractor to coordinate motors and MCC construction to assure starter,MCP and breaker sizes are properly sized for each motor and are satisfactory for safe operation. Where required by high efficiency or high inrush motor design criteria,all devices and conductors shall be adjusted as required. Failure to coordinate will result in any additional charges to be paid by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. H. Where specific equipment specifications motor requirements conflict with this specification, Contractor,Vendor, Supplier and Manufacturer shall contact Engineer for clarification before bidding or,shall be responsible for providing motors with the more stringent requirements. I. The general requirements of this specification shall be followed where the more specific sections do not apply. J. All submersible pump over-temperature and seal leak modules shall have latching circuit with reset and alarm indicator light built-in or provided as external circuitry. K. Coordinate location of motor terminal box to match location of conduit stub up, drop or connection on same side of motor. L. All equipment,instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge,phase fail,or other line conditions that may damage equipment,instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers'responsibility to provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. U.S. Motors B. General Electric C. Marathon D. As indicated in equipment specifications. E. Or equal,as approved by Engineer. J 16150-4of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 2.03 ENCLOSURES-GENERAL w A. Open Drip Proof(ODP): Indoor areas where clean, dry,and well ventilated, unless shown with more stringent requirement in other specification or on plans. B. Totally Enclosed,Fan Cooled(TEFC):Indoor or outdoor areas where exposed to corrosive vapors, driving rain or washdown activities. All locations for wastewater facilities. C. Provide enclosure indicated on Plans. D. Or,as approved by Engineer in writing. 2.04 INSULATION-GENERAL A. Dripproof Motors: Class F, 1.15 service factor. 1. Two extra dips and bakes of epoxy varnish. B. Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled: Class F, 1.15 service factor. 1. Two extra dips and bakes of epoxy varnish. C. All Well Motors and All VFD Driven Motors: Provide 1600-volt insulation, or 3.1 times motor rated voltage and rise time of 0.1 microseconds per NEMA recommendations. 2.05 BEARINGS-GENERAL A. Ball or roller bearing type at manufacturer's option, unless specified in equipment sections of 4111, Specifications. B. Support side thrust loadings. C. Re-greaseable with alamite fittings extended to accessible location for Frame 250 and larger. D. AFBMA B10 bearing life rated (flexible coupled) at 50,000 hrs. E. For VFD driven motors 100 hp and greater, provide insulated bearing at one end and shaft grounding ring at other end. For motors less than 100 hp, provide a shaft grounding ring at either end of motor. 2.06 SPEED A. As specified under equipment section and as required by specific applications. 2.07 TORQUE-GENERAL A. Breakdown torque shall be 200%or more of maximum torque load placed on motor shaft. B. Provide necessary WK,curves for special loads to coordinate with motors. C. Supply special motors where load requirements exceed standard design. 2.08 SLIDE RAILS AND SOLE PLATE A. As required for application. Provide as furnished by or, as recommended by, Motor Manufacturer. 16150-S of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 2.09 SINGLE PHASE FRACTIONAL HP MOTORS A. Capacitor or open split phase start, unless otherwise noted. err 2.10 THREE PHASE MOTORS-GENERAL A. Provide horizontal or vertical squirrel cage induction motors for standard duty. B. Full voltage starting or, as specified in equipment sections of specifications or, on plans. Use reduced voltage autotransformer starting for motors as indicated, rated 100 horsepower and greater or, use solid-state starter where specifically shown otherwise on plans. C. Provide low pass filter protection for VFD driver motors 10 horsepower to 500 horsepower where conductor length between VFD and motor exceeds 50 feet. 2.11 VERTICAL MOTORS A. This section provides guidelines for design and manufacture of low and medium voltage vertical squirrel cage induction motors on larger than NEMA size frames. B. Conditions of Service 1. Motors shall be suitable for continuous operation on a three phase, 60-hertz system rated 240 or 480 volts. 2. Motors shall be designed to operate at rated load in a minimum ambient temperature of 40"C at maximum altitude of 1,000 meters. 3. The location of installation will be either indoors or outdoors as dictated by the specific provisions for each motor. C. Design Requirements 1. Motors shall be capable of withstanding all normal forces,which may be imposed upon them during the course of normal operation,including starting and normal stops. 2. Motors shall be suitable for across the line starting and shall be able to start and accelerate the connected load to full load speed with 90%of rated voltage at the motor terminals. Where shown on plans or,noted in specifications,motors shall be suitable for reduced voltage starting. 3. Motors shall be capable of continuous operation at full load and rated frequency with a voltage variation of+10%. 4. Motors shall be capable of continuous operation at full load and rated voltage with a frequency variation of+5%. 5. Motor starting current shall not exceed a value equal to 650%of the motor full load current. 6. Motor installation in hostile environments subject to dust, moisture,and/or corrosive atmospheric conditions shall have all parts given protective treatment such as U.S. Motors' "CORRO-DUTY°"or equal. D. Enclosure: 16150-6of16 REVISED 9/23/2019 1. Motors shall be furnished with enclosure types based on the location of installation and t the specific requirements for each motor. Unless specifically noted otherwise in equipment specifications,all motors for this project are to be TEFC. 2. Openings on all weather-protected designs shall be covered with metal guard screens having a mesh size no larger than S4 inch square. a. Weather Protected Type I motors shall be designed to protect internal components from falling water and debris at angles up to 100 degrees from vertical. b. When specified,Weather Protected Type II designs shall be furnished with removable, cleanable, and reusable air filters over intake air openings. 3. Enclosures shall be of fabricated steel or cast iron construction in accordance with the Manufacturer's standard design. Canopy caps shall be of aluminum,cast iron,or sheet metal and shall be easily removable for maintenance purposes. 4. Motors to be installed in locations where moisture may collect shall be furnished with drain openings and plugs. In the case of explosion-proof motors,drains and breathers shall be furnished and shall be of the type approved by UL. E. Stator Construction 1. Stator laminations shall be of fully processed steel. Each lamination surface shall be given the necessary treatment so as to have core plate type C-5 insulation. 411/ 2. Stator windings for system voltages above 600 volts shall be form wound of rectangular copper magnet wire. Aluminum magnet wire is not acceptable. Individual coils shall be insulated with mica bearing tape prior to insertion. Coil extensions shall be blocked and braced sufficiently to minimize movement during normal starting and running conditions at full rated voltage. 3. Insulation system shall be Class B or better. 4. Insulation systems shall receive a minimum of two(2) vacuum pressure impregnation treatments using a 100%solids epoxy resin. 5. When specified, a completely sealed insulation system shall be supplied. This system shall be capable of passing the NEMA MG1-20.48 water immersion test and shall be U.S. Motors' "EVERSEAL,"or equivalent system. 6. When specified,motors to be rated for variable frequency drive applications shall meet NEMA MG-1 Part 31 dated 1993 and shall be U.S. Motors' Inverter Grade® insulation system or equal. The insulation system shall be warranted for a minimum of 3 years operation on VFD power, which shall not be limited by maximum cable length restrictions. 7. Temperature rise shall not exceed the limits defined by NEMA for Class B insulation systems while operating at nameplate horsepower,frequency, and voltage. 8. In the case of a particular rating where a Class F temperature rise is required, motors shall be furnished with Class For better insulation. F. Rotor Construction: Rotors shall be of cast or fabricated aluminum in accordance with 0. Manufacturer's standard design. 16150-7 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 G. Bearings 1. Bearings supplied shall be of type and size sufficient to satisfy thrust loading requirements for each motor in accordance with manufacturer's standard design. Bearings shall be rated for a minimum in-service B-10 life of 50,000 hours. 2. Thrust Bearings: a. Motors shall be designed and constructed with thrust bearings on top to allow inspection and/or replacements without requiring complete disassembly of motor. b. Thrust bearings shall be deep-groove ball, angular contact ball, or spherical roller type. Bearings mounted back-to-back or in tandem are acceptable and may be furnished when required according to Manufacturer's standard design. 3. Deep-groove ball bearings shall be used only on normal thrust design motors and shall be capable of handling thrust loads in either direction. 4. High thrust design motors shall be supplied with angular contact ball bearings whenever possible and in accordance with Manufacturer's standard design. 5. Where thrust requirements restrict the use of angular contact bearings,spherical roller bearings shall be furnished. 6. When required, motors furnished with spherical roller bearings shall also be provided with a system of coils in the oil reservoir for the circulation of cooling water. 7. Spherical roller bearings shall be spring loaded to keep the lower bearing race in contact and prevent bearing damage during starting and momentary upthrust conditions. H. Guide Bearings: 1. Guide bearings shall be deep-groove ball type and shall be located at the bottom of the motor. 2. Guide bearings may be stacked when necessary according to Manufacturer's standard design to accommodate specified upthrust conditions. 3. Guide bearings or bearing assemblies shall be provided with sufficient means for preventing the leakage of lubricant or entrance of foreign matter along the shaft. Lubrication 1. Thrust bearings shall be oil lubricated and contained in an oil reservoir with oil sight level gauge and oil fill and drain openings with plugs. 2. Deep-groove ball bearings furnished as thrust bearings for normal thrust motors shall be grease lubricated. When furnished as guide bearings for high thrust units,they shall be oil lubricated. 3. Grease lubricated bearings shall be furnished with provisions for in-service positive lubrication. A drain shall be provided to guard against over lubrication. 16150-B of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 J. Noise Level: Sound pressure levels shall be measured according to IEEE 85 and shall not exceed 85 decibels as measured on the A-Weighted Scale at a distance of 1 meter from any motor �/ surface under no load,free field conditions. K. Nameplates: 1. Motors nameplates shall be of stainless steel and shall be securely fastened to the motor fame with pins of a like material. Nameplate data shall be pressure stamped into nameplate to form an embossed impression. Painted data is not acceptable except where painted in addition to embossed impression. 2. The following information shall be contained on the motor nameplate as a minimum: a. Rated Horsepower b. Full Load Speed c. Frequency d. NEMA KVA Code and Design Letter(when applicable) e. Rated Voltage f. Manufacturer's Serial Number g. Service Factor h. Insulation Class Maximum Ambient j. Full Load Current at Nameplate Voltage k. Frame Size Designation L. Terminal Boxes 1. Terminal boxes shall be of fabricated steel or cast iron construction to be compatible with motor enclosure specified and when possible,shall be diagonally split and capable of rotation in 90' increments. Boxes not suitable for rotation must be capable of top entry. 2. The area in which the main terminal box is connected with the motor frame shall be fully gasketed in order to prevent entrance of foreign matter into the motor and to provide support for the stator leads where they pass through the motor frame. 3. A properly sized grounding terminal shall be mounted in the main terminal box when specified. 4. The motor terminal box shall be sufficiently oversized to allow stress cone terminals of shielded power cables and to allow mounting of any surge capacitors, lightning arrestors,or current transformers as may be specified. 5. Size motor terminal box shall be adequately sized to accommodate conduits as shown on Plans or described in schedule. 6. Coordinate location of motor terminal box to match location of conduit stub up,drop or connection on same side of motor. M. Leads: 1. Main motor leads shall have EPDM or equal type jackets and shall be permanently tagged for identification. 16150-9 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 2. The relationship between lead markings and the direction of rotation shall be indicated on a separate motor nameplate. J N. Space Heaters 1. When specified motors shall be furnished with space heaters to provide sufficient wattage to maintain the internal temperature of the motor at a level approximately 10* C above the ambient temperature while the motor is not in operation. 2. Space heaters shall be of the silicone rubber strip type attached directly to the stator end turns. When specified,the leads shall be brought out to an auxiliary terminal box. 3. Space heaters shall be rated for operation on a single phase,60 hertz,120-volt system. 4. Space heater shall be energized via a temporary 120-volt circuit while motors are stored prior to installation, and shall be energized via the permanent 120-volt circuit after installation. Where motor is allowed to stand for extended periods exceeding one(1) day without heaters energized,Contractor shall have motor inspected by motor shop for corrosion. Where corrosive damage is found,motor shall be replaced with new moor. 0. Protective Devices 1. Stator winding protection shall consist of one or more of the following systems unless indicated otherwise in plans or specifications: a. Six (6), 100 or 120 ohm nickel resistance-type temperature detectors (RTD's) embedded in the stator windings, two (2) per phase. Each detector shall have its leads wired to an auxiliary terminal box. Verify ohm resistance required with Motor Protection Unit Manufacturer. b. One(1)positive temperature coefficient(PTC)thermistor temperature sensor embedded in each phase of the stator winding and corresponding solid-state electronic control. (Where indicated on plans)Thermistor system shall be U.S. Motors' "THERMA-SENTRY,"or equal. c. Three (3) bi-metallic thermostats of the automatic reset type, with normally closed contacts,mounted one(1)per phase. Each thermostat shall be furnished with leads suitable for connection to the control circuit. (Where indicated on plans) 2. Bearing protection shall consist of one of the following unless indicated otherwise in plans or specifications: a. Two (2) 100 or 120 ohm nickel resistance-type temperature detectors (RTD's),one(1)per bearing,mounted as closely as possible to the outer surface of each bearing. Each detector shall have its leads wired to a terminal block located in an auxiliary terminal box. Verify ohm resistance required with Motor Protection Unit Manufacturer. b. Two(2)bearing temperature relays one(1)per bearing,furnished with indicating scale,where otherwise indicated in plans or specifications. 16150-10 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 c. Two(2)dial type thermometers,one (2)per bearing. d. Two(2)iron or copper constantan thermo-couples,one(1)per bearing, where otherwise indicated in plans or specifications. P. Testing 1. When specified motor shall be given a complete initial test in accordance with IEEE 112 method B and shall include the following items: a. Current Balance b. High Potential Test c. Vibration Test d. Winding Resistance e. Locked Rotor Current f. No Load Running Current g. Full Load Heat Run h. Full Load Percent Slip Efficiency at 100%,75%and 50%Load j. Power Factor at 100%,75%and 50%Load 2. When specified, noise test shall be performed in accordance with IEEE standard 85 decibel. 3. When specified,water immersion test shall be performed in accordance with NEMA MG 1-20.48. 411119 4. Five (5) copies of certified test reports shall be submitted to the purchaser upon completion of all required tests. 5. Purchaser reserves the right to witness any or all of the tests specified to be performed. Prices for this shall be included as a separate item in the seller's quotation. 6. Motor Vibration: Shall not exceed 0.08 inches/second velocity. Q. Submittal Data 1. Required with Proposal a. Preliminary Dimension Print and Frame Size b. Approximate Motor Weight c. Complete Motor Nameplate Information d. Motor Performance Data, including the following: 2. Guaranteed minimum efficiencies at 100%, 75%, and 50%of full load. 3. Guaranteed minimum power factor at 100%,75%, and 50%of full load. 4. Locked Rotor Current 5. Full Load Current 6. Starting Torque 7. Full Load Torque 8. Breakdown Torque a. Complete description of testing facilities. 16150-11 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 b. Job site storage requirements. 9. Required within 6 weeks of purchase order award: 411) a. Certified Dimension Prints b. Recommended Spare Parts List Priced 10. Required within motor upon shipment: a. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals b. Connection Diagrams c. Test Reports as Specified R. Acceptable Manufacturers: Motors shall be U.S.Electrical Motors"TITAN Line"or pre-approved equal. 2.12 INVERTER AND/OR HOSTILE DUTY TEFC NEMA DESIGN A OR B MOTORS A. This section covers inverter duty, continuous rated, horizontal, 3 phase, integral horsepower, TEFC,squirrel cage,AC induction motors in NEMA frame sizes 143-447,600 volts and below for Variable Frequency Drive(VFD)or Full voltage,across-the-line starting. 1. Service Conditions: Unless otherwise specified,motors conforming to this section shall be suitable for operation in accordance with their rating under the service conditions. B. Voltage and Frequency: 1. Standard motors shall be dual voltage through 405 frame and single voltage 444 frame and above. Motors will be rated for operation on 3 phase,VFD power supply. 2. Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load with variation in the voltage or the frequency not exceeding the following conditions: a. +/- 10% rated voltage at rated constant volts/hertz ratio except for specific torque boost situations. b. Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load and volts/hertz ratio when the voltage unbalance at the motor terminals does not exceed one percent. C. Operating Characteristics: With rated volts/hertz ratio applied,motor performance shall be as follows for critical operating characteristics: 1. Torques: Motors shall meet or exceed the minimum locked rotor (starting) and breakdown torques specified in NEMA Standard MG1 Part 12 for Design B for the rating specified when on sine wave power 2. Currents: Locked rotor(starting)currents shall not exceed NEMA Design Bvalues for the specified rating on 5:1 constant torque or less and variable torque motors. NEMA Design A values are allowed for 6:1 constant torque or higher value constant torque J 16150-12 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 rated motors. Motors shall be capable of a 20-second stall at six times full load current coo without injurious heating to motor components. 3. Efficiency: Motors 600 volts and below shall have a nameplate minimum and nominal full load efficiency, which will meet or exceed the values listed in Table 1 for motors when tested in accordance with NEMA Standard MG1 Part 12,IEEE Test Procedure 112 Method B,using accuracy improvement by segregated loss determination including stray load loss measurements. 4. Temperature Rise: The temperature rise, by resistance, shall be 80° C or less when measured at rated load on sine wave power,on inverter power ratings shall be 105°or less. D. Service Factor and Ambient: Standard motors shall be rated for a 1.15 service factor on sine wave power and 1.0 service factor on VFD power in a 40'C ambient. E. Insulation: Standard motors shall utilize the U.S. Electrical Motors' Inverter Grade insulation system, which consists of at a minimum Class F or better insulation materials with additional phase insulating material, extra end-turn bracing a Class H spike resistant wire. The resultant system shall withstand 2000-volt transients without premature motor failure and have no cable limitations in motor application. Standard motors shall be given U.S.Electrical Motors'Insulife 2000 an additional insulation treatment to increase moisture resistance. F. Frame Size: The horsepower to frame relationship shall conform to the latest NEMA MG 13 Standard for T frame motors for frames 143—447 frames. 10:1 constant torque speed range motors may exceed frame standard by one frame rating. All motors 600 volts and below 182— 447 frame shall be capable of field modification of NEMA Fl to F2 mounting assembly. Motors covered by this specification are 143—447 frame sizes. G. Enclosure: Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled(TEFC)or totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) construction and convertible for severe environments. Motor frame, end shields, and inner bearing caps shall be cast iron construction. Conduit box and fan cover may be of steel construction but with field modifiable kits for cast iron fan cover and conduit box on 182—447 frames. H. Bearings: All motors 250 frame and above shall have fully re-greasable, anti-friction bearings. 140 frame shall be sealed and lubed for life, 180-360 frame shall be double shielded,and 400- 440 frame bearings will be open. All motors 182 frame and above shall have cast iron inner bearing caps. All motors shall have a charged lubrication system to inhibit moisture condensation. Standard motors in frames 254-447 shall have extended grease fittings on the opposite drive-end to facilitate re-lubrication. Grease ports shall be located on the periphery of the motor end shield. Motor shall be fitted with a shaft slinger for a minimum of iP-54 protection. Ventilating Fans: Shall be corrosion resistant,non-sparking material. All fans shall be suitable for bi-directional rotation. 1. Conduit Box: Shall be gasketed between the conduit box halves. A grounding provision shall be provided in the conduit box. The conduit box shall be oversize as compared to NEMA requirements and diagonally split and rotatable in 90°increments. The conduit box shall be field convertible to cast iron. K. External screws and bolts shall be grade five, hex heads and be plated to resist corrosion. L. Motor Shaft: Shall be provided with an external recessed slinger at the drive end of the motor to provide additional (minimum IP-54) protection from moisture and foreign material. 16150-13 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 M. Rotor and stator air gap surfaces shall be coated so as to prevent corrosion. N. External Paint: Shall be corrosion resistant—mill and chemical duty paint. O. Nameplate: Shall be of stainless steel and stamped per NEMA Standard MG1 Part 10 and Part 31. Nameplate information shall include as a minimum,the nominal efficiency value per NEMA Standard MG1 Part 12, the bearing identification numbers, power factor, torque values with speed range and amps for that torque value. Nameplate also shall include Full Load Slip RPM,magnetizing amps and(if included)encoder PPR and voltage rating. P. Motor Vibration: Shall not exceed .08 inches/second velocity. Q. For VFD driven motors 100 hp and greater, provide insulated bearing at one end and shaft grounding ring at other end. For motors less than 100 hp, provide a shaft grounding ring at either end of motor. R. Noise Levels: Sound pressure levels shall be average expected values in accordance with values listed in Table 1. Sound pressure dBA shall be measured in a free field with average reading at 3 feet. S. Tests: Tests shall be performed on each design to assure compliance with the critical design criteria of this specification for inverter duty motors. Encoder tests,if included,all encoders shall be tested after assembly to the motor. Testing shall include verification of complete quadrature output and index pulse at a full range of speed. 2.13 SUBMERSIBLE ELECTRIC WELL MOTORS A. Motor: 1. The motor shall be constructed of material suitable for their application from the 461) standpoints of corrosion resistance and mechanical performance. 2. The motor shall be of the squirrel-cage induction type, suitable for across-the-line starting,designed to directly couple to the bottom of the pump utilizing a NEMA flange. It shall be capable of continuous operation under water at the specified conditions. 3. The motor shall be designed for water-filling,water-cooling,and water lubrication. Oil or grease lubricated motors are not acceptable. 4. The stator shall be hermetically sealed canned type consisting of a core of resin- impregnated windings within a watertight stainless steel enclosure. 5. The motor shall be filled with a mixture of water and propylene glycol,equipped with a diaphragm for pressure equalization,and a check valve to allow water into the motor. 6. The motor temperature shall be rated no higher than the allowable operating temperature of the motor thrust,radial bearings,and upthrust bearings and in no case shall it exceed the temperature rating of the insulation class used to wind the motor. 7. The bearings shall be of ample capacity to carry the weight of all parts plus the maximum hydraulic thrust generated by the submersible vertical turbine pump. 8. Suitable precautions shall be taken to restrict sand,silt,or foreign material from entering the motor. 9. The maximum motor diameter and the minimum inside diameter of the well's conductor casing shall be in such relationship that under any operating condition the water velocity past the motor does not exceed 12 ft. per second and not less than 0.5 ft.per second. 10. Motors to have service factor of 1.15. 16150-14 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 11. Where Design B, high inrush,type motors are provided, pump vendor shall submit for approval prior to Bidding. Where these motors are furnished, pump vendor is to coordinate with electrical equipment vendor. Failure to do so will be fully at cost of Contractor at no cost to Owner. B. Submersible Motor Power Cable 1. Pump cable shall be sized to limit the voltage drop to no more than 3%. The flat cable shall consist of three(3)or more separate insulated conductors,plus a ground ora single flat cable assembly consisting of three(3)or more insulating conductors,plus a ground. Each conductor shall be insulated by plastic insulation or synthetic rubber suitable for continuous immersion in water. 2. Individual conductors and/or cable assembly must be jacketed with an oil-and-water resistant synthetic rubber, metal, or other suitable mechanically protective material. 3. The flat cable shall have sufficient conductor area to meet the ICEA code for operation in air. The connecting electrical cable from the starting equipment to the surface plate shall comply with local codes or the National Electric Code,whichever governs. 4. The flat cable shall be secured to the column pipe at 10-foot intervals with stainless steel clamps and rubber or polymer material bushings. Provide shop drawing for Engineer's approval. 5. For every 50 feet of setting,3 foot of extra flat cable shall be supplied plus an additional 10 feet beyond the surface plate shall be supplied. 6. The electrical conductors shall be protected by a corrosion resistant mechanical shield where they pass the pump bowl. 7. All cable fittings and terminals shall be watertight at the pressure encountered in use. 8. Cables shall not be spliced from point of entry into motor to point of exit at well head. 2.14 SUBMERSIBLE LIFT PUMP MOTORS A. Power Cable: Multiple power cables for lift pump motors that have parallel conductors less than size 1/0 are not acceptable unless specifically approved y Engineer in writing. B. Control Cables: Control conductors shall be an integral part of a single power/control cable assembly. A separate control cable is only acceptable where specifically approved by Engineer in writing. C. Conduit for Multiple Cable Assembly: Where a multi-cable assembly is acceptable,Contractor shall provide all additional conduits,pull boxes,and appurtenances required at no additional cost to Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,applicable requirements of NEC, NECA"Standard of Installation,"and recognized industry practices. CO 16150-15 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 B. Energize motor heater while motor is stored on job site. After installation, motor heater shall remain energized at all times. See Item 1.04—"Quality Assurance"of this specification section for additional requirements. 3.02 ALIGNMENT A. Contractor furnishing motor shall be responsible for alignment. B. Check alignment of motors prior to startup. C. Motors over 50 hp shall have alignment and balance checked using test equipment specially designed for this purpose. 3.03 TESTING A. Before connecting motor to power source, Meg test each conductor and motor. Record results for Engineer's review. B. After energizing motor, measure load current of each phase leg for start and run conditions. Where multiple motors,start all sequentially smallest to largest and record in-rush for each step. Record measurements and submit for Engineer's review. C. Verify measurements are acceptable before energizing motor. D. For VFD driven motors: 1. Test installation for presence of VFD induced shaft current by use of oscilloscope and provide correct action as required to resolve objectionable conditions. 2. Measure motor voltage at terminals for presence of objectionable VFD induced voltage spikes using an oscilloscope. \ 3. Where objectionable conditions exist, provide wave form recordings for Engineer's review. 3.04 GROUNDING A. Provide bare copper grounding grid buried or under concrete slabs and loop to all motors and electrically operated equipment. Refer to Specification Section 16452 — "Grounding" for additional requirements. -END OF SECTION- 16150-16of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16175 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16013—"Electrical Submittals",for submittal requirements. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section provides for furnishing and installing variable frequency drives for the pump stations. 1.03 REFERENCES 41110 A. Section 16012—"Electrical Work" B. Section 16150—"Electric Motors" C. Section 16195—"Electrical Identification" D. Section 16481—"Motor Controllers" E. Section 16482—"Motor Control Centers(600 V or Less)" 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this section for Engineer's approval. B. Where submittals for a particular equipment,device or material item vary from that specified or shown on plan drawings,and where that item is not specifically noted as acceptable and,where installation of submitted item results in improper or undesirable operation of the system, Contractor shall be liable for removal and/or replacement of that item with the item specified or shown on plan drawings at no additional cost to Owner. C. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide full 3-year service warranty on the overall installation and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware, and software. This 16175-1 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 warranty shall begin on date of written "Final Acceptance"of the electrical systems and to be executed as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor's warranty shall also guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide labor, work, or materials as necessary to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for more than 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All equipment and materials installed shall have full warranty from Manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for harsh industrial electrical/mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where Manufacturers products fail prematurely, Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have the option of declaring that failures were caused by environmental conditions and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that Product Manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawing submittals. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within 5 working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and back charging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. C. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. D. Any equipment failures before final acceptance of installation,and before warranty period starts shall be replaced with new equipment. No repaired equipment or devices are allowed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Variable Frequency Drives(VFD's)furnished under this specification shall be rated for service on 460 volt,3 phase,grounded wye electrical systems with plus or minus 10 percent(10%)voltage variation and two(2)percent(2%)frequency variation. Motors are assumed to be induction type NEMA design B of the submersible type or of the TEFC type. 1. Standard features shall include: a. Pulse width modulation technology b. High efficiency--97 percent(97%)at full load c. Constant power factor at all speeds: 95 percent(95%) d. Quick response time e. Fully compatible with NEMA frame or submersible pump motors f. 4-20 Ma speed control if required including process card g. External contact on-off h. Automatic short circuit shut-off Ammeter with adjustable contacts for control j. Overvoltage,undervoltage, and overcurrent protection k. Run/stop and manual/auto selector switch Manual speed control pot and selector switchNal 16175-2 of 4 REVISED 9/23/2019 41110 m. Diagnostic and operation control and programming panel n. Motor over temp. shutdown and alarm B. It shall be understood that this is a basic specification. Sizing and selection of the VFD is the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Provide reactors and/or filters as required to prevent any harmonics or disturbance on the plant power system and on the load side of the VFD. Any interference to other instruments or equipment shall be resolved to satisfaction of Engineer. D. Vendors for equipment with solid-state controller shall include provisions for both hardwired and data path status,command and alarm functions included under contract without additional cost to Owner, Programmer, or Engineer. E. For all motors 50 hp and over,provide means for detecting motor over-temp from five(5)RTDs in motor(3 phases and 2 bearing RTDs), or as noted otherwise on plans. F. Contractor to provide motor winding RTDs and shielded circuits from motor VFD controller. G. Contactor shall include minimum of four single pole,double throw spare auxiliary contacts rated at 10 amperes continuous,for each starter furnished. H. All equipment,instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge,phase fail,or other line conditions that may damage equipment,instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers'responsibility to provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. I. Provide CPT with 120V secondary and primary circuit breakers. CPT to be rated at minimum of 500VA providing 350VA capacity for loads above controller requirements. Provide secondary 41111, circuit breakers for controls and other devices indicated on plans. Do not feed motor heater circuits from starter CPT power source. 2.02 PUMP STATION VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE A. Variable frequency drives for pump stations utilizing submersible pumps shall be designed for application with submersible pumps. Ratings shall be such as to provide required horsepower through the pumping range of the pump. B. VFD unit manufacturer shall coordinate with pump motor manufacturer to assure a matched system that performs flawlessly as a unit. 2.03 INSTALLATION A. Installation of the variable frequency drives in equipment or individually shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. Equipment enclosures shall be so designed that the ambient temperature will not exceed the manufacturer's recommendation. Provide forced draft cooling or refrigerated air as required to maintain the operating temperatures recommended by the manufacturer. For the purposes of design, assume an ambient air temperature of 95°F. B. Each VFD shall have a disconnecting means within sight of the VFD,per NEC. The disconnecting means shall be one of the following: 1. A circuit breaker or switch internal to the VFD. 2. An external disconnecting means where specifically shown on plans. C. Use VFD rated cable only for motor feeders. 16175-3 of REVISED 9/23/2019 2.04 RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION A. Radio frequency radiation from the unit shall meet the latest published standards of the IEEE and NEMA. Particular attention shall be given the wiring and installation of the VFD in equipment so as to minimize radiation from the system that may affect other instruments, equipment or electronic devices installed at this location. All filtering devices required shall be furnished at no additional cost to Owner. 2.05 PROTECTION A. All equipment installed on this project shall incorporate all devices and features to protect that equipment from the influence of other equipment, line voltage and phase irregularities, harmonics and other disturbances that may effect the proper and safe operation of that equipment whether these required features are a standard component of that equipment as an off-the-line product. No equipment shall be installed without these features. PART 3 EXECUTION—(NOT USED) -END OF SECiION- J 16175-4 of REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification of electrical materials,equipment,and installations. 2. Nameplate identification on MCC's and control panels. 3. Arc Flash Warning Signs 4. Equipment and High Voltage Warning Signs 5. Identification of conduit and conductors. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of product specified. C. Samples: Submit for each color, lettering style, and or graphic representation required for identification materials;samples of labels and signs. D. Miscellaneous: Schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification signs and labels. E. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with ANSI C2. 16195-1 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option,but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI 413.1, NFPA 70,or as specified elsewhere. B. Conform to ANSI A13.1,Table 3,for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway or cable size. 1. Color: Black legend on orange field. 2. Legend: Indicates voltage. C. Pre-tensioned,Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible,preprinted,color coded,acrylic bands sized to suit diameter of line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when placed in position. 1. Provide identification wire marker for all power and control conductors. D. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 in.wide for phase and ground conductor identification. E. Underground Line Warning Tape: Permanent,bright colored,continuous printed,vinyl tape with following features: I. Size: Not less than 6 in.wide by 4 mils thick. J 2. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed Legend: Indicates type of underground line. F. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl cloth,self adhesive,wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. Limited use for indoor control cabinets. G. Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014 in. (0.4 mm) thick aluminum sheet,with stamped or embossed legend,and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. H. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field printed legends. Orange background,except as otherwise indicated,with eyelet for fastener. Aluminum Faced Card Stock Tags: Wear resistant, 18 point minimum card stock faced on both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002 in. (0.05 mm) thick, laminated with moisture resistant acrylic adhesive,and punched for fastener. Preprinted legends suit each application. 1. Brass or Aluminum Tags: Metal tags with stamped legend,punched for fastener. Dimensions: 2 by 2 in. by 0.05 in. for conduit and power conductor identification. Attached with stainless steel bands. 2.02 ENGRAVED NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70,or as specified elsewhere. 16195-2 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 B. Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) minimum thick for signs up to 20 sq.in. (129 sq.cm), 1/8 in. (3.2 mm)thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved Legend: Black letters on white face. 2. Punched for mechanical fasteners or stainless-steel screws. 3. Use in control panels,MCC's,device housings, boxes, and similar locations. C. Baked Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend,and size as indicated or as otherwise required for application. 1/4 in.(6.4 mm) grommets in corners for mounting. D. Exterior,Metal Backed,Butyrate Signs: Wear resistant,non-fading,preprinted,cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 in. (1 mm), galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to application. 1/4 in.(6.4 mm)grommets in corners for mounting. E. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or No.10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts,flat washers and lock washers. F. Exterior,Painted Aluminum,Warning Signs: Wear resistant,non-fading,pre-printed aluminum with glossy finish with colors,and size appropriate to applications,'/.inch grommets in corners for mounting. Provide per standards ANSI 2535 and OSHA 1910.145. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert,self-extinguishing,1 piece,self-locking,Type 6/6 nylon cable ties with following features: 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch 2. Tensile Strength: 50-pound minimum. 3. Temperature Range: -40°1 to 185°F. 4. Color: As indicated where used for color coding. B. Paint: Alkyd-urethane enamel. Primer as recommended by enamel manufacturer. 2.04 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS AND CONTROL PANELS A. Wire Markers: Provide wire markers on all power and wiring in MCC's and panels of all types. Identify wire at points of termination at devices and at terminal strips. B. Provide nameplates on body or housing of all pressure switches,transmitters,and other devices. C. Provide engraved nameplates near base of all relays and similar devices. Adhesive materials not allowed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install identification devices according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 4110, 16195-3 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 C. Lettering,Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names,abbreviations,colors, and or designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations used in Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. D. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish,install identification after completion of finish work. E. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Not allowed. Use stainless steel screws. F. Identify feeders over 600 V with "DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters 2 in. (51 mm)high, stenciled with paint at 30 ft(3 m)intervals over continuous,painted orange background. Identify following: 1. Entire floor area directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 in.(305 mm)of basement or ground floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above un-excavated space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to conduits concealed within wall. 3. All accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around conduits in vertical shafts,exposed in building,or concealed above suspended ceilings. 4. Entire surface of exposed conduits. G. Install painted identification as follows: 1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. 2. Prime Surfaces: For galvanized metal, use single component, acrylic vehicle coating formulated for galvanized surfaces. For concrete masonry units,use heavy duty,acrylic resin block filler. For concrete surfaces, use clear, alkali resistant, alkyd binder type sealer. 3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of silicone alkyd enamel. 4. Apply primer and finish materials according to manufacturer's instructions. H. Identify Raceways and Exposed Cables of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed and accessible raceways of systems listed below for identification. 1. Bands: Pre-tensioned,snap around,colored plastic sleeves;colored adhesive tape;or combination of both. Make each color band 2 in. (51 mm)wide,completely encircling conduit,and place adjacent bands of 2 color markings in contact,side by side. 2. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50 ft maximum intervals in straight runs,and at 25 ft(7.6 m)in congested areas. 3. Colors: As follows: a. Fire Alarm System: Red. b. Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. c. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. d. Security System: Blue and yellow. e. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. f. Telecommunications System: Green and yellow. Install Caution Signs for Enclosures: Use label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange field. Install on exterior of door or cover with stainless screws. 1. Install Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Label externally as follows: J 16195-4 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 1. Exposed Boxes: Plastic label on cover. 2. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card stock tags. 3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent. K. Identify Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power,control,signal,and communications lines,install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 6 to 8 in.(150 to 200 mm)below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in common trench or concrete envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16 in. (400 mm),use single line marker. 1. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway. L. Color Code Conductors: Secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout secondary electrical system. 1. Field applied,color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG. a. Colored,pressure sensitive plastic tape in half lapped turns for distance of 6 in. (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last 2 turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1 in. (25 mm) wide tape in colors as specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid Cobscuring cable identification markings. b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of three (3)ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 in. (76 mm)from terminal and spaced 3 in.(76 mm)apart. Apply with special tool or pliers,tighten to snug fit, and cut off excess length. System Voltage A B C Neutral 120/240 Volt 1Ph/3w Black Red White 120/208 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Red Blue White 120/240 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Orange Blue White 277/480 Volt 3Ph/4w Brown Purple Yellow Grey Motor Control 1 Black 2 Red 3 Blue Ground Green M. Power Circuit Identification: Use metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes,junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms. 1. Legend: 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend corresponding to indicated circuit designations. 2. Fasten tags with nylon cable ties;fasten bands using integral ears. coo 16195-S of REVISED 9/23/2019 N. Conduit Identification: Use aluminum tags with 55 bands at termination points such as MCC, Nri light fixtures,control panels, receptacles and junction boxes. Tag is to include conduit tag and panel circuit number(where applicable.). O. Apply identification to conductors as follows: 1. Conductors to Be Extended in Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color coding for voltage and phase indication of secondary circuit. 3. Multiple Control and Communications Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use consistent system of tags, color coding,or cable marking tape. P. Apply warning,caution,and instruction signs and stencils as follows: 1. Install warning,caution,and instruction signs where indicated or required to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved, plastic laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. 2. Install warning signs on the following equipment as a minimum requirement. a. MCC Main Breaker b. Main Service Breaker c. Transfer Switch d. Where exposed bus bars inside. e. Automatic Power Factor Correction Units f. VFD's and Solidstate Starters g. Other locations described in No. 1 above. 3. Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8 inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer,load shedding, and/or emergency operations. q. Install identification as follows: 1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes communication,signal control,and alarm systems,unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated,provide single line of text with Y.inch high lettering on 1 inch high label;where two(2)lines of text are required,use h inch lettering on 2 inch high label. For small control panels a smaller text may be used but shall be clearly readable. Use black lettering on white field. Use red lettering on white field where shown on plans or as requested by Engineer or Owner. Apply labels with stainless screws for each unit of following categories of equipment. a. Panelboards,electrical cabinets,and enclosures b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items 16195-6 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards d. Electrical substations e. Motor control centers and control panels f. Motor starters B. Push button stations h. Power transfer equipment Contactors j. Remote controlled switches k. Dimmers Control devices m. Transformers n. Inverters o. Rectifiers p. Frequency converters q. Battery racks r. Power generating units s. Telephone equipment t. Conduits at manholes,at junction boxes,and pull boxes 2. Apply designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches,breakers, push buttons,pilot lights,motor control centers,and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed,typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. 3. For control panels the nameplate designation shall be according to the control,alarm or status function indicated on the control diagrams,one-line diagrams,details as required in other applicable specifications for this project. 4. Provide nameplate designations list and nameplate and text size for Engineer and/or Owner's approval as required by 1.02 of this specification. -END OF SECTION- 16199-7 of 7 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16402 UNDERGROUND DUCTBANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Ductbanks and underground pull boxes shown on plans are assumed worst case site conditions. Locations, quantities and routing may adjusted to facilitate installation per N.E.C. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Underground electrical duct banks. 1.03 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): No.70-National Electrical Code(NEC)Appendix B. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Catalog cut sheets of the ducts and spacers. C. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Have duct spacers and associated hardware packed and crated to avoid damage during shipment and handling. B. Clearly mark packages or crates stating that the material is for electrical duct banks only. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Thomas and Betts. B. Underground Devices Inc. figeC. Walker Division,Butler Manufacturing Company. 16402-I of S REVISED 9/23/2019 D. Carlon E. Or approved equal 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.03 Conduit: Construct ducts using schedule BO rigid PVC conduit. Refer to Section 16111 — "Conduit,Fittings, and Bodies." 2.04 Spacers: Secure conduit with non-magnetic, universal,interlocking-type spacers for both horizontal and vertical duct arrangements. 2.05 Concrete: Use steel reinforced,red concrete as duct encasement. Provide Class F concrete in non-truck traffic areas. Provide Class C concrete under gravel or asphalt driveways subject to heavy traffic. 2.06 Where unprotected service conductors are routed through a pull box with other conductors a divider wall shall be provided in the pull box for separation as required by the NEC. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify from Drawings and field survey that the location of ductbanks does not interfere with any existing or new underground facilities.Adjust route of electrical conduits and ductbanks below proposed or existing buried piping. Provide minimum 24-inch clearance vertically and horizontally. This work shall be performed in a satisfactory manner and at no additional cost to Owner. B. Verify that materials are on site in proper condition and that sufficient quantity is on hand forthe work. C. Verify that trenches are in the correct places and prepared with sufficient depth and width to accommodate the duct banks, reinforcing rod,and concrete. D. Be prepared for inspection of the duct banks before reinforcing rod is installed. E. Before pouring concrete, verify that the ducts are free of debris and properly installed in the support and spacer systems and that the ducts are properly fitted together and firmly held in place by the hold down hardware. F. Provide 24-hour notice to Engineer and the Local Code Inspector for cover-up inspection before pouring electrical conduit ductbanks. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. All underground conduits shall be buried to a minimum depth of 24-inches below finished grade. All trenches shall be uniform width and shall be backfilled and compacted to 95 percent that of original density. Any damage to underground conduits caused by other Contractor's shall be repaired by this Contractor and shall be compensated accordingly by the party or parties 16402-2 of 5 REVISED 9/23/2019 4.0 responsible for the damage. Concrete shall be poured evenly on all sides of ductbanks. Do not over pour and do not dump spoils on site. B. Do not cut paved driveways, sidewalks, etc. Bore under such construction, maintaining a minimum of 24 inches below the underside of the pavement or concrete. C. All underground duct banks require inspection prior to concrete pour and inspection prior to covering the concrete. Contact the Inspector, or if not available, contact the Engineer for inspections. Schedule minimum 48 hours in advance. Any duct banks not inspected will be required to be exposed for inspection by Engineer regardless of status of concrete slabs or foundations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. All underground conduit routing on site plan shall be followed as close as practical. Do not route conduits diagonally across property unless clearly shown as such or, with Engineer's written approval. Any conduits added or changed shall be indicated to Engineer on marked up drawing and submitted for approval. Any unauthorized changes shall be corrected at Contractor's expense,regardless of time discovered by Engineer and,in which case existing concrete shall not be cut or damaged but, shall be replaced in its entirety as shown on the plans as new construction. Do not route underground conduits in conflict with structures or obstructions. B. Allow in bid for relocation of underground conduits up to 20 feet to avoid obstructions shown on all other drawings issued under this contract. Coordinate prior to installation of conduits. C. Use the size and types of conduit as indicated on the Drawings for the various duct banks required for the project. D. Make duct bank installations and penetrations through foundation walls watertight. E. Assemble ductbanks using non-magnetic saddles,spacers,and separators. Position separators to provide 3-inch minimum concrete separation between the outer surfaces of the conduits. F. Provide a 3-inch minimum concrete covering on both sides, top and bottom of concrete envelopes around conduits. Add red dye at the rate of 10 pounds per cubic yard to concrete used for envelopes for easy identification during subsequent excavation. G. Firmly fix ducts in place during pouring of concrete. Carefully spade and vibrate the concrete to ensure filling of spaces between ducts. H. Make bends with sweeps of radius not less than 6 times the smallest diameter of the raceway. Make a transition from non-metallic to metallic rigid conduit where duct banks enter structures or turn upward for continuation above grade. 1. Make bends of 30 degrees or more using rigid galvanized steel. K. Reinforce duct banks throughout,where indicated on the Drawings. 1. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, reinforce with No. 5 longitudinal steel bars placed at each corner and along each face at a maximum parallel spacing of 12 inches on centers, and No. 5 tie-bars transversely placed at 18-inch maximum longitudinal intervals. 2. Maintain a maximum clearance of 3 inches from bars to the edge of the concrete encasement. 16402-3 of 5 REVISED 9/23/2019 L. Where ducts enter structures such as handholes,manholes, pull boxes,or buildings,terminate the ducts in suitable end bells,insulated L-bushings,Myers hubs or couplings on steel conduits. Tag conduit entering pull boxes with stamped,stainless steel tags. Identify as designated in cable and conduit schedule. M. Do not backfill with material containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large or sharply angular substances, corrosive material, or other materials that can damage or contribute to corrosion of ducts or prevent adequate compaction of fill. N. Install a bare stranded copper duct bank ground on top of duct bank. Make ground electrically continuous throughout the entire duct bank system. Connect ground to switchgear and MCC ground buses and to steel conduit extensions of the underground duct system. 0. After completion of the duct bank and prior to pulling cable, pull a mandrel, not less than 12 inches long and with a cross section approximately one-fourth inch less than the inside cross section of the duct,through each duct. Then pull a rag swab or sponge through to remove any particles of earth,sand or gravel that may have been left in the duct. Re-pull the rag or sponge swab until the swab emerges clean. P. Use hemp rope to pull conductors into PVC conduit. Do not use nylon or wire cable for this purpose. Q. Install a warning ribbon approximately 12 inches below finished grade over underground duct banks. Refer to Section 16195—"Electrical Identification." R. For manholes and pull boxes below grade, install racks to support cables properly around the perimeter and keep them dry. Arrange cables in orderly fashion and tie to racks. If metallic racks are used, provide grounding per NEC. S. For manholes and pull boxes below grade,construct a french drain,or other drainage as detailed on the Drawings. T. All manhole and U.G.pull boxes used for electrical construction are to have the work"Electrical" permanently embossed on cover. U. Conduits penetrating underground pull boxes shall be sealed with CSBE seals where larger than 1 ''A-inch diameter and with RTV silicon based sealant where smaller than 1%-inch diameter. V. Conduits penetrating structural walls of lower levels shall be sealed with CSBE seals where larger than 1'%-inch diameter and with RN silicon based sealant where smaller than 1'A-inch diameter. W. All conduit duct banks penetrating lower level structures and penetrating underground pull boxes shall be sealed watertight between conduit and wall of structure or pull box. X. Install identification tags on all conduits at manholes, pull boxes, and junction boxes. Y. Conduits shall be separated by means of manufactured interlocking"chairs"spaced at no more than 5 feet apart along the length of the ductbank. Spacing between conduits shall not be less than 3 inches. Z. Every effort shall be made to minimize the number of bends in all ductbank systems. Field bends shall be made using a "hot box" designed for the size of PVC used. Care shall be given to ductbank routing so that very large radius sweeping turns are designed into the route as opposed to factory made 45°and 90°bends. When factory 90°bends are used,they shall be a minimum of 36-inch radius for 4 inch and 48-inch radius for 5 inch. Factory 90° bends used in ductbank construction shall be rigid metal conduit (ferrous) only. These factory made bends shall be protected by corrosion tape such as 3M Scotchrap 50 or approved equal prior to the concrete pour. 16402-4 of 5 REVISED 9/23/2019 (610 AA. The ductbank support"chairs"shall be spaced up from the bottom of the trench using cement brick to insure that the proper amount of concrete is poured under the conduits. Sides of the trench may be used as the form if the width does not exceed 1 % times the recommended dimension of the ductbank(width.) BB. The Electrician shall vacuum, swab, and install pull strings in every conduit of the completed ductbank. The pull string shall be permanently marked in 1-foot increments to aid in wire estimation on future projects. Use Greenlee#435 pull string or approved equal. CC. Route all electrical ductbanks and conduits below water lines. Maintain minimum of 24 inches between bottom of water line and top of ductbank. DD. Electrical ductbanks are not required below concrete floors of buildings or below process equipment slabs,at which locations conduits shall be encased in minimum 3 inches of stabilized sand. Where ductbanks are shown on plans to be routed under existing concrete slabs or pavements,install per plan details. Do not cut rebar in existing conduit except where approved by Engineer. Repair any cut or damaged rebar by welding back together after conduits are installed. Submit detail of intent for cutting or removal of existing concrete for ductbank installation to Engineer for approval. EE. A fish wire shall be left in all conduits in which the permanent wiring is not installed. -END OF SECiION- civ 16402-5 of 5 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16452 GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. 2. Basic requirements for grounding for protection of life,equipment,circuits,and systems. 3. Grounding requirements specified in this Section maybe supplemented in other sections of these Specifications. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B3-Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard,or Soft. 3. B33 - Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. 4. E699 - Standard Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality Assurance,and Evaluating Building Components. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 780 — Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. C. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): 467 - UL Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Test Results: Report of field tests and observations certified by Contractor. C. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 16452-1 of REVISED 9/23/2019 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed OR labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms"listed"and"labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code,Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association(NEPA)70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS A. Products: Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with current NEC. Where types, sizes,ratings,and quantities indicated are in excess of current NEC requirements,more stringent requirements and greater size, rating,and quantity indications govern. B. Conductor Materials: Copper. 2.02 WIRE AND CABLE CONDUCTORS A. Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated. C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Stranded cable. D. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM 83. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM 88. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM 833. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS A. Ground Bus: Bare annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section. B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape,braided No.30 gage bare copper wire,terminated with copper ferrules. C. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper,0.05 inch thick and 2 inch wide, except as indicated. 2.04 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. General: Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for materials used. B. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units. C. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for application. D. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provide in kit form and select for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected. 16052-2 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 41, 2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic-grade copper outer sheath, molten welded to core. 1. Size: 3/4 inch by 20 feet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Exothermic welded connections only. B. Plate Electrodes: Copper plates, minimum 0.10 in.thick, size as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Equipment Grounding Conductor Application: Comply with NEC Article 250 for sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors,except where larger sizes or more conductors are indicated. 1. Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductors with circuit conductors. a. Raceway shall not be used as equipment ground conductor unless specifically permitted or shown on plans. b. Install insulated equipment ground conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless designated for telephone or data cables. B. Underground Conductors: Bare,tinned,stranded copper except as otherwise indicted. C. Signal and Communications: For telephone, alarm, instrumentation and communication systems, provide #4 AWG minimum green insulated copper conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each terminal cabinet or central equipment location. D. Ground separately derived systems required by NEC to be grounded in accordance with NEC Paragraph 250-30. E. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Ground pole to grounding electrode as indicated on plans in addition to separate equipment grounding conductor run with supply branch circuit. F. Connections to Lightning Protection System: Bond grounding conductors or grounding conductor conduits to lightning protection down conductors or grounding conductors in compliance with NFPA 780. Use exothermic connections. G. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: 1. Bond electric power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electric service grounding electrode, using exothermic welded connection. 2. Use bonding conductor sized same as system ground conductor and installed in conduit. H. At all water, wastewater and industrial facilities, install UFER grounding per Item 3.02 — "Installation"at all equipment structures and buildings unless specifically deleted. I. Bond all metallic fences, gates, posts, steel structural columns, and other exposed steel structures. 16452-3 of 8 REVISE0 9/23/2019 J. Install ground rod at all outdoor control panels, transformers, service racks, equipment 11111) enclosures,equipment racks, radio towers,steel canopy structures,and other steel structures where electrical equipment is installed. K. Ground all motor frames using bar copper conductor grid looped to all motors and terminating at ground rods via exothermic connection. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment in accordance with current NEC requirements except where Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements. B. Ground Rods: 1. Locate minimum of one-rod length from each other and at least same distance from any other grounding electrode. 2. Interconnect ground rods with bare conductors buried at least 24 in. below grade. 3. Connect bare-cable ground conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic welds. 4. Make connections without damaging copper coating or exposing steel. 5. Use 3/4-inch by 20-ft.ground rods except as otherwise indicated. 6. Drive rods until tops are 6 inches below finished floor or final grade except as otherwise indicated. Do not locate where obstructing standing or walk space. 7. Install a minimum of two ground rods for motor and equipment grounding grids. Locate at opposite ends of grid loop. C. Metallic Water Service Pipe: 1. Provide insulated copper ground conductors,sized as indicated,in conduit from building main service equipment, or ground bus, to main metallic water service entrances to building. 2. Connect ground conductors to street side of main metallic water service pipes by means of ground clamps. 3. Bond ground conductor conduit to conductor at each end. D. Braided-Type Bonding Jumpers: Use elsewhere for flexible bonding and grounding connections. E. Route grounding conductors along shortest and straightest paths possible without obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain,impact,or damage,except as indicated. F. Test Wells: Where"test well"are specifically shown on plans,locate as indicated,and fabricate in accordance with details indicated. G. UFER Ground: 1. Fabricate with 20 feet of bare 2/0 (minimum) copper conductor laid lengthwise in excavation for foundation or footings. 2. Install so conductor is within 2 in.of bottom of concrete. 3. Where base of foundation is less than 20 feet in length,coil excess conductor at base of foundation. 4. Bond conductor to reinforcing steel at four locations, minimum. Bond to all electrical equipment. 5. Extend conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or grounding electrode. J 16452-4 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 6. Extend to all steel support columns for buildings,equipment structures or roof columns. 7. Alternate UFER Grounding: Install 2/0(minimum) bare copper conductor in 24"deep trench around perimeter of structures,buildings,slabs,and foundations where electrical or mechanical equipment is located. Install 4 ft. from edge of structure. Bond to all steel structure and equipment and to grounding system, using exothermic welded connections. 8. Do not install ground grid conductors in or under existing concrete adjacent to generators electrical equipment without written approval from Engineer. H. Surge Protection Device(SPD) Grounding: 1. Route SPD ground conductor directly to driven ground rod. Route with minimum possible bends in conduits. Do not ground SPD's to ground bus at MCC only. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. General: Make connections to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact. 3. Aluminum to steel connections: stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4111, 4. Aluminum to galvanized steel connections:tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. B. Exothermic Welded Connections: 1. Use for connections to ground rods,structural steel,water tanks,motors,ground grids, electrical/mechanical equipment, generators and enclosures, and for underground connections,except those at electrodes specifically designated on plans as"test wells". 2. Install at connections to ground rods and plate electrodes. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. Use CAD-Weld or approved equal. 4. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Terminations: 1. Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits with approved pressure-type grounding lugs. 2. Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing,terminate each conduit with grounding bushing. 3. Connect grounding bushings with bare grounding conductor to ground bus in housing. 460 4. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors. 16052-5 of a REVISED 9/23/2019 5. Do not use metallic housing or mounting plates for ground path to other circuits. J D. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated,tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A-486B. E. Connections at "Test Wells": Refer to plan details for connections between conductors and ground rods only,where specifically noted. Otherwise,use exothermic well connections,where specifically designated as test well on plans. F. Compression-Type Connections: Where compression type connections are specifically called for on plans, use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by manufacturer of connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make visible indication that connector has been adequately compressed on ground conductor. G. Moisture Protection: Where insulated ground conductors are connected to ground rods or ground buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable. 3.04 OVERHEAD LINE GROUNDING A. General: Comply with ANSI C2,"National Electrical Safety Code"for"Single-Grounded Systems," using two or more electrodes in parallel if single electrode resistance to ground exceeds 25 ohms. B. Ground Rod Connections: Use exothermic welds for underground connections and connections to rods. viaC. Lightning Arresters: Separate arrester grounds from other ground conductors. D. Secondary Neutral and Tank of Transformer: Interconnect and connect to ground. E. Grounding Conductor Protection: Protect grounding conductors running on surface of wood poles with molding of a type manufactured for this purpose. Extend from grade level up to and through communications and transformer spaces. 3.05 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING A. Manholes and Handholes: 1. Install 3/4-inch by 20-ft.driven ground rod in corner close to wall and set rod depth such that 4 inches will extend above finished floor. 2. Where necessary,install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No.1/0 bare tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through waterproof sleeve in manhole wall, unless specifically shown otherwise on plans. 3. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with double wrapping of pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 in.above to 6 in.below concrete. 4. Seal floor opening with waterproof non-shrink grout. B. Connections at Manholes: 1. Connect exposed metal parts, such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole to ground rod or ground conductor. 2. Make connections with minimum No.4 AWG stranded hard-drawn copper wire. 16452-6 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 ILO 3. Train conductors plumb or level around corners and fasten to manhole walls. 4. Connect to cable armor and cable shields by means of tinned terminals soldered to armor or shield,or as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits. C. Grounding System: Ground non-current-carrying metallic items associated with manholes, substations,and pad-mounted equipment by connecting them to bare underground cable and grounding electrodes arranged as indicated. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test: 1. Subject completed grounding system to megger test at each location where grounding rod is indicated in plans, including at service disconnect enclosure, surge protection devices,ground terminals,motors,MCCs,electrical equipment,steel structures,and at ground test wells. 2. Measure ground resistance without soil being moistened by any means other than natural precipitation or natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. 3. Perform tests by 2-point method in accordance with Section 9.03 of IEEE 81,"Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System." 41104 B. Ground/resistance maximum values shall be as follows: 1. Equipment rated 500 kVA and less: 10 Ohms. 2. Equipment rated 500 kVA to 1000 kVA: 5 Ohms. 3. Equipment rated over 1000 kVA: 3 Ohms. 4. Unfenced substations and pad-mounted equipment: 5 Ohms. 5. Manhole grounds: 10 Ohms. C. Deficiencies: Where ground resistances exceed specified values,drive additional rods(total of three) to achieve acceptable resistance. Notify Engineer after first rod measurement, and if directed by Engineer,provide the additional ground rods to reduce resistance values. D. Report: Prepare test reports,certified by testing organization,of ground resistance at each test location.Note if additional rods are required as described in item C above. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. 3.07 RESTORATION A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. B. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other Work to their original condition. 16452-7 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 D. Include necessarytopsoiling,fertilizing, liming,seeding,sodding,sprigging,or mulching. E. Restore disturbed paving as indicated. -END OF SECTION- J 16052-8 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.00 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Overcurrent protective devices(DCPD's)rated 600V and below and switching devices commonly used with them. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 1. NEMA KS-1-83-Enclosed Switches. 2. NEMA 250-85-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum). 3. NEMA F111-86-Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 4. NEMA AB1-86-Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70-National Electrical Code(NEC). C. Underwriters Laboratory(UL): 1. UL 98-87-Enclosed and Dead Front Switches. 2. UL 198C-86-High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses,Current-Limiting Types. Fifth Edition. 3. UL 198E-88-Class R Fuses. Fourth Edition. 4. UL 486A-80 - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. Seventh Edition. 5. UL 489-86 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures. Seventh Edition. 6. UL 943-85-Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters.Second Edition. 7. UL 977-84-Fused Power-Circuit Devices. Third Edition. 8. UL 1981-88-UL Standard for Safety D-C Fuses for Industrial Use. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): Device operative on excessive current that causes and maintains interruption of power in circuit it protects. B. Ampere-Squared-Seconds: Expression of available thermal energy resulting from current flow. With regard to current-limiting fuses and circuit breakers,ampere-squared-seconds during fault 410 current interruption represents energy allowed to flow before fuse or breaker interrupts fault current within its current limiting range. 16475-1 of 11 REVISED 9/23/2019 1.04 SUBMITTALS ■ A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. B. Shop Drawings: Spare fuse cabinet showing dimensions and features including storage provision for fused cartons,where shown on plans. C. Product Data: 1. Product data for fuses,fusible switches,circuit breakers,and OCPD accessories specified in this Section,including descriptive data and time-current curves for protective devices and let-through current curves for those with current limiting characteristics. 2. Include coordination charts and tables and related data. D. Test Results: Certified reports of field tests and observations. E. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. F. Coordination: Contractor shall determine size,horsepower,voltage and phase of all equipment and motors supplied and shall adjust breaker and fused switch size accordingly and shall note on submittals. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). J 1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in 051-IA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms"listed"and"labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code,Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Components and Installation: a. NFPA 70"National Electrical Code(NEC)." b. Local codes and ordinances. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain similar OCPD's from single manufacturer. D. Coordinate OCPD sizes with characteristics of motors supplied for this project. Pay special attention to high efficiency motors. E. Handle operator mechanisms shall be on side of enclosure and not on front. Keyed mechanisms that separate handle from breaker mechanism when door is opened are not acceptable. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Maintenance Stock,Fuses: For types,voltage,and ampere ratings required furnish 10% spare fuses,but not less than one(1)set of three(3)of each kind. 16475-2 of 11 REVISED 9/23/2019 4.0 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES(OCPD'S),GENERAL A. General: Provide OCPD's in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards, switchboards,and motor control centers;and as individually enclosed and mounted single units. B. Enclosures: NEMA 250,except that all outdoor areas and indoor environmentally harsh locations such as wastewater process areas shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel. 2.01 GENERAL FUSES A. General: Provide fuses of types, classes,and current ratings as indicated. Voltage ratings shall be consistent with circuits on which used. B. Fuses for Direct Current Circuits: UL 198L and marked for such use by manufacturer on fuse label. C. Cartridge Fuse: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bussmann Div., Cooper Industries, Inc. b. Gould Shawmut. c. Littelfuse Inc. 2. NEMA Standard FU1,unless indicated otherwise,provide nonrenewable cartridge fuses of indicated types,classes,and current ratings that have voltage ratings consistent with circuits on which used. 3. Class CC Fuses: UL 198C. 4. Class 1 Fuses: 1.11 198C. 5. Class L Fuses: UL 198C. a. Current limiting threshold of 10 times current rating or less and time delay of 4 sec at 5 times rating. 6. Class RK1 and RK5 Dual Element Time-Delay Fuses: UL 198E. 7. Class RIG Fast-Acting Fuses: UL 198E. 2.02 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Co. 2. General Electric 3. Eaton Corp. 4. Or equal. B. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1 quick-make,quick-break heavy-duty units. C. Rating: Load-breaking capacity in excess of normal horsepower rating for switch. D. Withstand Capability: In excess of let-through current permitted by its fuse when subject to faults up to 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. ihrE. Operation: By means of external handle. F. Interlock: Prevents access to switch interior except when in "off" position. 16475-3 of 11 REVISED 9/23/2019 G. Fuse Clips: Rejection type. H. Padlocking Provisions: For two (2)padlocks,whether open or closed. 1. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting where indicated. 1. Enclosure for Switchboard Mounting: Provide individual mounting where indicated. K. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type G as indicated or required to suit environment where located,except all outdoor areas and all indoor environmentally harsh locations such as wastewater process areas shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel. 2.03 FUSED POWER CIRCUIT DEVICES A. Manufacturers: 1. Pringle Electric Mfg.Co. 2. Square D Co. 3. Or equal. B. UL 977,with either bolted-pressure-type or high-pressure contact-type switch. C. Operation: As indicated. D. Ground Fault Protection: Integral,self-powered type with mechanical ground fault indicator,test function, adjustable pick-up current and delay time with inverse and constant time characteristics, internal memory arranged to integrate intermittent arcing ground faults, and ground fault current sensor located as indicated. E. Open Fuse Trip Device: Arranged to trip switch open if phase fuse opens. F. Enclosure for Switchboard Mounting: Suitable for individual mounting. G. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure,as indicated or as required to suit environment where located. H. Minimum Fault Current Rating: As indicated. 2.04 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Co. 2. General Electric 3. Eaton Corp. 4. Or equal. B. UL 489 and NEMA AB 1. C. Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers in load-center-type panelboards and breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger may be plug-in type if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal. D. Characteristics: Indicated frame size,trip rating,number of poles,and short-circuit interrupting capacity rating of 10,000 amperes symmetrical,unless greater rating is indicated on Drawings. E. Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole. All service or feeder breakers to have removable trip plug,to have adjustable overcurrent trip,or to be electronic adjustable type. F. Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Devices: Factory adjusted to low-trip-setting current values. G. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting in switchboard or panelboards where indicated. 16475-4 of 11 REVISED 9/23/2019 H. Enclosure for Switchboard or Motor Control Center Mounting: Provide individual mounting where indicated. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA 4X stainless steel outdoor or damp environments, NEMA 1 stainless steel indoor enclosures,as indicated or required to suit environment where located. Handle operator mechanisms shall be on side of enclosure and not on front. Keyed mechanisms that separate handle from breaker mechanism when door is opened are not acceptable. J. Combination Circuit Breakers and Ground-Fault CircuitInterrupters: UL 943 arranged for sensing and tripping for ground-fault current in addition to overcurrent and short-circuit current. 1. Match features and module size of panelboard breakers and provide clear identification of ground fault trip function. 2. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes,listed and labeled as Class A,Type 1 device. 3. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 30 milliamperes. K. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Arranged to limit let-through ampere-squared-seconds during fault conditions to value less than ampere-squared-seconds of one-half-cycle wave of prospective symmetrical fault current. Circuit breaker shall use no fusible devices in its operation. Current- limiting characteristic shall be in addition to normal time-delay and instantaneous-trip characteristics and other features as indicated. L. Circuit Breakers With Solid-State Trip Devices: Provide indicated circuit breakers with solid-state trip devices having following features: cov 1. Ambient Compensation: Trip device insensitive to temperature changes between minus 20°C and plus 55°C. 2. Adjustability: Breaker ratings and trip settings shall be changeable by operation of controls on front panel of breaker, by change of plug-in element without removing breaker from mounting,or by combination of two methods. 3. Ground-Fault Tripping: Adjustable for pick-up and time-delay values. Provide for indicated units. 4. Provide clear plastic shield limiting access to rating plug and adjustments on solid-state trip circuit breaker. Seal by attaching sealing wire through hole in posts provided. With wire seal installed, circuit breaker rating plug and adjustments shall not be "readily accessible." M. For all electronic breakers requiring programming unit for trip adjustments provide one(I)unit for Owner and Engineers use in setting adjustments after contract ends. This unit to be supplied in new box with all appurtenances included. Submit unit to Engineer for examination prior to final acceptance testing of equipment. N. Provide auxiliary contacts on all motor circuit protectors (MCP), motor starter circuit breakers, motor starter overloads, solid state starters,variable speed drive units, MCC feeder breakers, main service breaker,generator main breaker, low voltage transformer primary breakers and other breakers shown with trip units on one-line diagram to show tripped condition. Route trip circuits to solid state controller,SCADA, pump controller,and autodialer inputs for alarm initiation and annunciation.Coordinate with all equipment, MCC,control panel and SCADA suppliers and,with programmers. cor 16475-5 of 11 REVISED 9/23/2019 2.05 INSULATED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Co. 2. General Electric 3. Or equal. B. UL 489 and NEMA AB 1. C. Ratings: Continuous-current, interrupting, and short-time-current ratings, and voltage and frequency ratings as indicated. D. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with following features: 1. Moving Contacts Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. E. Circuit-Breaker Trip Devices: Solid-state overcurrent trip device system that includes one (1) integrally mounted current transformer or sensor per phase,release mechanism,and following features: 1. Functions: Long-time-delay,short time delay,and instantaneous-trip functions,which are independent of each other in both action and adjustment. 2. Temperature compensation to assure accuracy and calibration stability from minus 20°C to plus 55°C. 3. Field-adjustable,time-current characteristics. 4. Current Adjustability: Effected by operating controls on front panel or by changing plug-in elements or current transformers or sensors. 5. Three bands for long-time- and short-time-delay functions marked "minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum." 6. Five(5)pickup points, minimum,for long-time-and short-time-trip functions. 7. Six(6)pickup points, minimum,for instantaneous-trip functions. 8. Ground fault protection with at least three(3)short-time-delay settings and thirty-seven (37)trip-time-delay bands. Adjustable current pickup. 9. Trip Indication: Labeled lights or mechanical indicators on trip device shall indicate type of fault causing breaker trip. If lights are used, integral power source shall maintain indication for 60 hours, minimum. F. Auxiliary Contacts for Remote Indication: Where remote indication of breaker position is indicated, provide spare auxiliary switch in addition to other auxiliary switches required for normal breaker operation. Spare auxiliary switch shall consist of two (2)Type "a" and two(2) Type"b"stages (contacts),wired to terminal block in breaker housing. G. Provide auxiliary contacts on all motor circuit protectors (MCP),motor starter circuit breakers, motor starter overloads,solid state starters,variable speed drive units, MCC feeder breakers, main service breaker,generator main breaker,low voltage transformer primary breakers and other breakers shown with trip units on one-line diagram to show tripped condition. Route trip circuits to solid state controller,SCADA, pump controller, and autodialer inputs for alarm initiation and annunciation.Coordinate with all equipment, MCC, control panel and SCADA suppliers and,with programmers. J 16475-6 of 11 REVISED 9/23/2019 H. Draw Out Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with racking mechanism that properly positions power circuit breaker and holds it rigidly in connected, test, and fully disconnected positions and includes following features: 1. Interlock arrangement, preventing movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is in closed position and closure of circuit breaker unless it is in connected,test,or disconnected position. 2. Construction, permitting racking open circuit breaker to or from connected, test, and disconnected positions with associated compartment door closed or equivalent dead- front barrier protection,and manual withdrawal to position for removal from structure with door open. 3. Primary disconnecting devices disengaged and secondary disconnecting devices engaged when breaker is in test position. 4. Primary and secondary devices disengaged when circuit breaker is in disconnected position. 5. Ground contact engaged when circuit-breaker element is in connected and test positions. Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Includes the following: 1. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least two(2)padlocks on each breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of draw out mechanism. 2. Operating Handle: Provide one(1)for each manually operated breaker. No handle ties are permitted. 3. Electric Close Button: Provide one (1)for each electrically operated breaker. 4. Indicating Lights: Contacts for"Breaker Open"and"Breaker Closed,"for main and bus tie circuit breakers, and for other indicated breakers. 2.06 OCPD ACCESSORIES A. Key Interlocks: Arrange interlocking so keys are held captive at devices indicated. Where future key interlocking provisions are indicated,provide necessary mountings and hardware as required for future installation. B. Instantaneous Undervoltage Trip Device: For indicated OCPD's. C. Adjustable-Time-Delay Undervoltage Trip Devices: For indicated OCPD's. D. Shunt-Trip Devices for Circuit Breakers: Where indicated,arrange to trip breaker from external source of power through control switch or relay contacts. E. For all electronic breakers requiring programming unit for trip adjustments provide one(1)unit for Owner and Engineers use in setting adjustments after contract ends. This unit to be supplied in new box with all appurtenances included. Submit unit to Engineer for examination prior to final acceptance testing of equipment. F. All service and feeder breakers to have removable trip plug,to have adjustable overcurrent trip, or to be electronic adjustable type. 2.07 SPARE FUSE CABINET-(WHERE INDICATED) A. Cabinet: Wall-mounted, 18 gauge minimum steel unit with full-length,recessed piano-hinged door with key coded cam lock and pull. B. Size: Provide for orderly storage of all spare fuses of this project plus 15% spare capacity, minimum. 16475-7 of 11 REVISED 9/23/2019 C. Finish: Gray baked enamel. 141111) D. Cabinet Door: Bear legend in stenciled 114 inch high letters,"Spare Fuses." 2.08 ENCLOSURES A. Where OCPD's are installed in enclosures. Provide for operating via external lockable three(3) point latching handle without removing a cover or a bolted-on plate. Lockable hinged door access is acceptable where approved by Engineer or where required by enclosure classification. All outdoor enclosures to be NEMA 4X stainless steel unless specifically show otherwise on plans or approved by Engineer in writing. 2.09 MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTION (MCP) A. Provide electronic type MCP for motor starters. Unit shall learn inrush current and adjust accordingly. 2.10 LOAD SIZE CONNECTIONS A. Where OCPD serves as an incoming service main breaker or switch,include provisions for fixture connection of transfer switch conductor lugs. Provide removable bus bars. Provide adequate wiring space inside enclosure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.00 INSTALLATION A. Fuses: Install fuses in fusible devices indicated. B. Independently Mounted OCPD's: Locate as indicated and install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. C. Factory install OCPD's furnished in distribution equipment. D. Coordinate size overcurrent protective devices with each motor and equipment manufacturer to assure correct size devices and provide accordingly. 3.01 APPLICATION OF FUSES A. Control Circuits: Class CC,time delay. B. General Purpose Fusible Switches: Apply following class and types: 1. 30-600 Amperes: Class 1 or RK1,time delay. 2. 601-6,000 Amperes: Class L,time delay. a. Size at 125%of motor FLA not to exceed 150%. b. For transformers, size per NEC Table 450-3(b). c. Size at 100%of load for mains and feeders with non-inductive loads. C. Combination Starters: Class 1 or RK1,time delay. D. Bolted Pressure Switches: Class L,time delay. 16475-8 of11 REVISED 9/23/2019 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify with components as specified in Section 16195—"Electrical Identification." 3.03 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between OCPD's and control/indication devices as specified in Section 16120—"600 Volt Building Wire and Cable"for hard-wired connections. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Check connectors,terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness. B. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals,including screws and bolts,in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.05 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as indicated and as required by NEC. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. B. Ground in accordance with Section 16452—"Grounding." 3.06 COORDINATION STUDY A. Provide coordination study to determine settings for overcurrent protective devices. Where coordination study recommends changes in types, classes,features or ratings of equipment or devices those indicated, make written request for instructions. Obtain instructions from Engineer before ordering equipment or devices recommended to be changed. Make all settings and adjustments according to coordination study results. Provide hard copy records of study for Engineer's review. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Manufacturer's Technician for equipment specified herein shall be present at job site for assistance during plant startup, equipment adjustment, and training of Owner's personnel for plant operation. 2. Factory Technician shall make all adjustments and settings. 3. Manufacturers Technician shall be for final acceptance and testing and shall demonstrate equipment operation to Engineer and Owner's Representative. B. Testing: 1. Reports: Prepare certified written reports on tests and observations. Report defective materials, workmanship, and unsatisfactory test results. Include complete records of repairs and adjustments made. 2. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort,apply label to tested components indicating test results,date,and responsible person. 16475-9 of 11 REVISED 9/23/2019 3. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one (1) week's advance notification. 4. Pre-testing: Upon completing installation of system,perform following preparations for tests: a. Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting supply,feeder,and control circuits. b. Make continuity tests of circuits. c. Include full updating on final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract Documents. d. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of OCPD's. 5. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include following inspections and related work. a. Overcurrent Protective Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and settings to be appropriate for final system arrangement and parameters. Where discrepancies are found, test organization shall recommend final protective device ratings and settings. Use accepted revised ratings or settings to make final system adjustments. b. Inspect for defects and physical damage,NRTL labeling,and nameplate compliance with current single line diagram. c. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. d. Check tightness of electrical connections of OCPD's with calibrated torque wrench.Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values. e. Clean OCPD's using manufacturer's approved methods and materials. f. Verify installation of proper fuse types and ratings in fusible OCPD's. 6. Electrical Tests: Include following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions: a. Insulation resistance test of OCPD conducting parts. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. b. Verify trip unit reset characteristics for insulated-case circuit breakers. c. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable-trip devices. d. Activate auxiliary protective devices such as ground fault or undervoltage relays,to verify operation of shunt-trip devices. e. Check stored-energy charging motors for proper operation of motor, mechanism, and limit switches. f. Check operation of electrically operated OCPD's in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. g. Check key and other interlock and safety devices for operation and sequence. Make closing attempts on locked-open and opening attempts on locked-closed devices including moveable barriers and shutters. \111) 16475-10 of 11 REVISED 9/23/2019 7. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest. Verify by system tests that specified requirements are met. 3.08 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation,inspect OCPD's. Remove paint splatters and other spots,dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. -END OF SECTION- 16475-11 of 11 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16481 MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.00 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: AC motor control devices rated 600 volts and below. B. Overcurrent protective devices and disconnect switches used with motor controllers are specified in Section 16475—"Overcurrent Protective Devices." 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Motor Controller: Device that controls, protects, and energizes electric motor, and where required, controls its speed or torque or power delivered by it. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this section for Engineer's approval. 1. Product Data: Include dimensions,ratings, and data on features and components. 2. Test Results: Certified reports of field tests and observations. 3. Miscellaneous: Load Current and Overload Relay Heater List: Compiled by Contractor after motors have been installed. Arrange list to demonstrate selection of heaters to suit actual motor nameplate full load currents. 4. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data: Manufacturer's data on maintenance and operation of equipment. B. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies","Non-Compliance",or"Exceptions"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain similar motor-control devices from single manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide controllers from manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment of types and capacities indicated,with such products in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 yrs. C. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 16481-1 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 100. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70. E. Testing and Startup: 1. All elements of each electrical control system shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of this Specification. All special testing of materials and equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all of his testing and startup work with the Owner and Systems Integration Engineer. As a minimum,the testing shall include both a factory test and a field test. Testing requirements are as follows: a. Factory Tests: The electrical controls and all other associated hardware shall be tested via a full simulation at the factory,prior to shipment,to demonstrate that each component is operational and meets the requirements of these specifications. Manufacturer shall provide test routine program for shop testing of I/O wiring. Test results shall be certified, with written documentation provided to the Engineer upon test completion. Factory testing may be witnessed by the Engineer. b. Field Tests: All electrical control system components shall be checked to verify that they have been installed properly and that all terminations have been made correctly. Witnessed field tests shall be performed on the complete system. Contractor shall provide a checklist for all electrical,control and instrumentation functions and send to Engineer for approval. Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer on a paragraph-by- paragraph basis. Each test shall be witnessed and signed off by the Contractor and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. The Contractor shall notify the Owner at least two(2)weeks prior to the commencement date of the field tests. After tests are completed and with system fully operational, system shall run continuously for a period of ten(10)days without failure. Any failures shall be repaired and test shall start over again. c. Pump Controller Program: Where applicable,testing will require a minimum of ten (10)working days after programs are downloaded to the pump controller. Provide four(4)weeks notice for program downloading by Programmer. This shall be accounted for in project schedule. d. Where applicable, prior to testing system, or PLC programs or HMI programs provided by other than the Systems Integration Engineer noted in Paragraph 1.03, C shall be furnished on CD for review by Engineer. Provide any special software necessary to run and test complete program. 16481-2 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of controllers and control devices with pilot devices and control circuits provided under other sections of Specifications covering control systems. B. Coordinate motor controls, starters and overcurrent devices with motor manufacturer's data. Provide motor manufacturer's data sheets to motor control manufacturer at time of order. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Spare Fuses and Incandescent Indicating Lamps: Furnish one spare for every five (5)installed units, but not less than one set of three(3) of each kind. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers: 1. Eaton 2. Cutler-Hammer 3. Siemens 4. Square D. 5. General Electric 6. Or equal, as pre-approved in writing. 2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS,GENERAL A. Coordinate features of each motor controller with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, duty cycle of motor, drive, and load, and pilot device, and control circuit affecting controller functions. Provide controllers horsepower rated to suit motor controlled. B. NEMA Size 1 minimum. C. Contacts shall open each ungrounded connection to motor. D. Overload Relays: 1. Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic. 2. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full load current of specific motor to which connected with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. Overload devices to require manual reset after tripping occurs. 3. Enhanced Protection Overload Relay: Provide overload relays with NEMA Class 10 tripping characteristics for submersible equipment or where indicated. Select to protect motor against voltage unbalance and single phasing. 16081-3 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2D19 E. Enclosures: 1. For individually mounted motor controllers and control devices,comply with NEMA 250. 2. Provide enclosures suitable for environmental conditions at controller location. 3. Provide NEMA Type enclosures as indicated or required to suit environment where located. 4. All enclosures for motor starters 100 hp and greater shall have forced cooling. 5. All enclosures to have 120-volt space heaters. 6. Provide door restraints for all inner and outer doors. F. Auxiliary Contacts: 1. Provide auxiliary contacts on all motor circuit protectors(MCP), motor starter circuit breakers, motor starter overloads,solid state starters,variable speed drive units, MCC feeder breakers,main service breaker,generator main breaker, low voltage transformer primary breakers and other breakers shown with trip units on one-line diagram to show tripped condition.Route trip circuits to solid state controller, SCADA, pump controller,and autodialer inputs for alarm initiation and annunciation. Coordinate with all equipment, MCC, control panel and SCADA suppliers and,with programmers. G. Control Diagrams: Provide complete and accurate control diagrams and one-line diagram laminated in clear plastic and installed in door pockets of motor control center. 2.03 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Quick-make,quick-break toggle action. B. Doublebreak silver alloy contacts. C. Pilot light. D. Padlocking provision. 2.04 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Full voltage, non-reversing, across-the-line, magnetic controller, except where another type indicated. B. Control Circuit: 120 volts. Control power transformer integral with controller where no other supply of 120-volt control power to controller indicated. Control power transformer with adequate capacity to operate connected pilot,indicating and control devices,plus 100%spare capacity. C. Combination Controller: Switch type; Circuit breaker or non-fused as indicated; quick-make, quick-break switch;factory assembled with controller and arranged to disconnect it. For fused switches,provide rejection type fuse clips and fuses rated as indicated. Provide only where specifically shown on drawings. Otherwise use circuit breakers only. D. Combination Controller: Motor circuit protector;molded case circuit breaker type with magnetic only trip element calibrated to coordinate with actual locked rotor current of connected motor and controller overload relays. Provide breakers factory-assembled with controller,interlocked with unit cover or door,and arranged to disconnect controller. Provide motor circuit protectors with field-adjustable trip elements. E. Overvolcage/Undervoltage/Phase-Failure Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output 16481-4 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 contacts for hard-wired connection. Provide adjustable undervoltage setting. 1. Provide in starter enclosure for Size 2 and larger starters. 2. Delay initial motor start. 3. Delay motor restart due to starter dropout caused by undervoltage or starter coil circuit interruption for maintained control circuits. 4. Adjustable on delay from 0.15 to 30.0 sec set at 10.0 sec. 5. Connect control relay in motor starter coil circuit. 6. Coordinate control relay selection with motor starter to cause motor starter to drop out at voltage slightly higher than dropout voltage of starter and have dropout time slightly faster than motor starter to ensure if motor starter drops out,relay will drop out. F. For combination starter units provide interlocks so disconnect means must be in"Off"position before door can be opened and so door cannot be closed with disconnect means in "On" position, except by consciously operating permissive release devices. Rotating type operators located outside of door are not acceptable. G. Provide CPT with 120V secondary and primary circuit breakers. CPT to be rated at minimum of 500VA providing 350VA capacity for loads above controller requirements. Provide secondary circuit breakers for controls and other devices indicated on plans. Do not feed motor heater circuits from starter CPT power source. 2.05 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES A. General: Furnish auxiliary control device as shown on 1-line diagrams,Drawings,or as specified. Factory-install in controller enclosure except as otherwise indicated. B. Run/Stop and HOA Selector Switches and Pilot Lights: Heavy duty type. Controls shall have HOA switch and circuits that allow automatic restart of controls after momentary power interruption, without rest action required. Lock-in push button controls are not allowed. Provide time delay for restart. C. Stop Pushbutton Station: Momentary break pushbutton station with factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock pushbutton in depressed position with control circuit open. (Only where specifically shown on Plans.) D. Lockout Pushbutton Station: Maintained contact red mushroom pushbutton station with factory- applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock pushbutton in depressed position with control circuit open. (Only where specifically shown on Plans.) E. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. F. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hrs. G. Ammeters, Voltmeters, and Frequency Meters: Panel type, 2 inch minimum size with 90 or 120 degree scale,and±2%accuracy. Where indicated,provide transfer device with off position. H. Current Sensors: Rated to suit application. Current-Sensing Phase-Failure Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated contacts for hard- wired connection. Arranged to operate on phase failure, phase reversal,current unbalance of from 5%to 30%, or loss of supply voltage. Provide adjustable response delay. 1. Over temperature sensors are to be installed on transformers in reduced voltage auto- transformer starters. Sensor stall interrupt and lockout starter control circuit. Provide reset switch and alarm light. K. All well and blower motor starters to have start time delay relay. L. Contactor shall include minimum of four single pole,double throw spare auxiliary contacts rated at 10 amperes continuous,for each starter furnished. 16481-5 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 2.06 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION A. All equipment,instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge,phase fail,or other line conditions that may damage equipment,instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers'responsibility to provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install motor controllers and auxiliary motor control devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals. B. Mounting: 1. For control equipment at walls,bolt single units to wall. Mount multiple units on light- weight structural steel channels bolted to wall. 2. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks fabricated of structural steel members and light-weight slotted structural steel channels. Use feet consisting of 3/8 in. thick steel plates, 6 in. square, bolted to floor. Use feet for welded attachment of 1-1/2-in.by 1-1/2-in.by 1/4 in.vertical angle posts not over 3 ft oc. Connect posts with horizontal lightweight slotted steel channels and bolt control equipment to channels. 3. Unless shown otherwise on plans. .00 C. Motor Controller Fuses and Circuit Breakers: Conform to requirements of Section 16475 — "Overcurrent Protective Devices." D. Cabinet and Enclosures Heights: Cabinet,panel and enclosure heights shall not exceed 6 feet-6 inches from floor to top fastening devices to allow access by Operator without use of ladders or steps to open enclosure doors. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 16195—"Electrical Identification." 3.03 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring as specified in Section 16120—"600-Volt Building Wire and Cable." B. Install wiring in enclosures bundled,trained, and supported. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten connectors, terminals, and mountings. Tighten field connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts,in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements not indicated,comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and 486B. 16481-6 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Supplier's or manufacturer's technician for equipment specified herein shall be present at job site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum mandays indicated,travel time excluded,for equipment adjustment,and training of Owners personnel for plant operation. Include minimum of: 1. 2 man-day for Instructional Services. B. Testing: 1. Reports: Notify Engineer in writing indicating defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include records of repairs and adjustments made. 2. On completing installation of system,perform following tests. a. Make insulation resistance tests of conducting parts of motor control components;and of connecting supply,feeder,and control circuits. For devices containing solid-state components, use test equipment and methods recommended by manufacturer. b. Make continuity tests of circuits. c. Review updating of final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract Documents. d. Review manufacturer's written instructions for installation and testing of motor control devices. 3. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include following inspections and related work. a. Motor Control Device Ratings and Settings: Verify ratings and settings as installed are appropriate for final loads and final system arrangement and parameters. Recommend final protective device ratings and settings where differences found. Use accepted revised ratings or settings to make final system adjustments. b. Inspect for defects and physical damage and nameplate compliance with Drawings. c. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. d. Check tightness of electrical connections of devices with calibrated torque wrench. Use manufacturer's recommended torque values. e. Clean devices using manufacturer's approved methods and materials. f. Verify proper fuse types and ratings in fusible devices. 4. Electrical Tests: Perform following in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. a. Insulation resistance test of motor control devices conducting parts to extent permitted by manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms not acceptable. b. Use primary current injection to check performance characteristics of motor circuit protectors and for overload relays of controllers for motors 15 hp and 16481-7 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 larger. Trip characteristics not within manufacturer's published time-current 110) tolerances not acceptable. c. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable trip devices. d. Test auxiliary protective features such as loss of phase, phase unbalance, and undervoltage to verify operation. e. Check for improper voltages at terminals in controllers having external control wiring when controller disconnect opened. Voltage over 30 v unacceptable. 5. Correct deficiencies and retest motor control devices. Verify by system tests that specified requirements are met. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Overvoltage/Undervoltage/phase Failure Control Relay: Adjust control relay to cause motor starter to drop out at voltage slightly higher than dropout voltage of starter and have dropout time slightly faster than motor starter to ensure if motor starter drops out, relay will drop out. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove paint splatters and other spots,dirt,and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices internally using manufacturer's recommended methods and materials. -END OF SECTION- ., J 16481-8 of 8 REVISED 9/23/2019 tipeSECTION 16482 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS(600 VOLTS OR LESS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.00 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected ® specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16013—"Electrical Submittals",for submittal requirements. D. Listing of acceptable Equipment Manufacturers does not limit or remove the intent of these specification requirements. 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Motor Control Centers (MCC's)for use on ac circuits rated 600 volts or less. B. Overcurrent protective devices and disconnect switches used with motor control centers(MCC's) 41111, are specified in Section 16475—"Overcurrent Protective Devices." C. See Section 16012—"Electrical Work,"Item 2.01—"Materials"UL fabrication requirements and Section 16013—"Electrical Submittals,"for additional submittal requirements. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI C2-90 - National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). B. International Electrical Testing Association(P.O.Box 687,Morrison,CO 80465): ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250-89-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA ICS 2-88- Industrial Control Devices,Controllers, and Assemblies. 3. NEMA ICS 2.3-88 - Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers. D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 486A-89-Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. 2. UL 845-89- Motor Control Centers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for Engineer's approval. B. Shop Drawings: 16482-1 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 1. Each MCC including dimensioned plans and elevations and component lists. 2. Show ratings,including short-time and short-circuit ratings,and horizontal and vertical bus ampacities. 3. Schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual MCC units. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Interconnecting wiring diagrams pertinent to class and type specified for MCC. Schematic diagram of each type of controller unit indicated. 5. Dimensioned floor plans with MCC location and required stub-up entries into MCC. Show all pertinent dimensions that verify MCC fits space allocated on plans. Identify areas where equipment fit is a problem and describe any proposed solutions. All equipment shall be fabricated to fit available space shown. C. Product Data: Each product and component included in MCC(such as VFD)that is described in other specification sections shall be submitted separately or under the MCC cover, and with applicable specification section marked according to requirements of item F below. Submittals received that are incomplete will be returned without review. D. Test Results: Certified reports of field tests and observations. E. Operations and Maintenance Data: Maintenance data for MCC's. F. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies"or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. G. Provide one-line diagram with MCC submittal showing actual horsepower of motors to be provided for this project. Do not rely solely on plans but rather,coordinate with other vendors providing motors and equipment. Failure to do so will be at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. H. All submittals for motor control centers,control panels,control sections,SCADA panels,lift pump panels,and Vendor furnished panels must contain statement of U.L.certification and identifying name and number of U.L.certification. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other nationally recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). This includes complete MCC and switchgear assembly, including controls section. 1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms"listed"and "labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code,Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a member of NEMA,regularly engaged in manufacturing LV MCC's complying with requirements of these Specifications,and experienced with at least five(5) projects of similar size and scope. D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for MCC's including clearances between MCC's and adjacent surfaces and items and are based on types and models indicated. MCC's of other manufacturers having equal performance characteristics and 16482-2 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 complying with indicated maximum dimensions may be considered. E. MCC starters,MCP,and breaker sizes shall be coordinated with motors supplied device and sizes shall be adjusted as required by motor criteria. This especially applies to high efficiency motors. Provide motor data to MCC Manufacturer at time MCC is ordered to assure coordination of overcurrent protective devices. F. Final assembly and mating of control sections or motor control center section shall be performed at facilities within 200 miles of project location. The following final assembly facilities are acceptable: 1. Weimar Manufacturing Co. 2. B.L.Technology, Inc. 3. W.W. Payton 4. Ace Controls 5. Texas Industrial Controls Manufacturing(TICM) 6. Systems, Inc. 7. Control Panel Manufacturers listed in other Specification Sections. G. Testing and Startup: 1. All elements of each electrical control system shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of this Specification. All special testing of materials and equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all testing and startup work with the Owner and Systems Integration Engineer. As a minimum, the testing shall include both a shop test and a field test by the Engineer. 2. Factory Tests: The electrical controls and all other associated hardware shall be tested via a full simulation at the factory or shop,prior to shipment,to demonstrate that each component is operational and meets the requirements of these specifications. Manufacturer shall provide test routine program for shop testing of I/O wiring. Test results shall be certified,with written documentation provided to the Engineer upon test completion. Shop testing may be witnessed by the Engineer, who will provide programming at time of testing. 3. Field Tests: All electrical control system components shall be checked to verify that they have been installed properly and that all terminations have been made correctly. Witnessed field tests shall be performed on the complete system. General Contractor shall provide commission services for entire electrical system.Contractor shall provide a checklist for all electrical,control and instrumentation functions and send to Engineer for approval. Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer on a paragraph-by-paragraph basis. Each test shall be witnessed and signed off by the Contractor and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. The Contractor shall notify the Owner at least 2 weeks prior to the commencement date of the field tests. After tests are completed and with system fully operational,system shall run continuously for a period of 10 days without failure. Any failures shall be repaired and test shall start over again. 4. Pump Controller Program: Testing will require a minimum of 10 working days after programs are downloaded to the pump controller. Provide 4 weeks'notice for program downloading by Programmer. This shall be accounted for in project schedule. 16482-3 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 5. Prior to testing system,or PLC programs or HMI programs provided by other than the Systems Integration Engineer shall be furnished on CO for review by Engineer. Provide any special software necessary to run and test complete program. H. Provide MCC that fits space available. Where dimensions exceed available space,sections are to be relocated in room or,MCC shall be specifically manufactured for this project to accommodate the space restrictions at no additional cost to Owner. Contractor shall contact Engineer before ordering equipment or installing conduits where space restriction exists. Where controls section is fabricated by other than MCC Manufacturer, a matching controls sections shall be provided and shipped to controls fabrication shop at time MCC is ordered so as to expedite controls assembly. 1. Cabinet and Enclosures Heights: Cabinet,panel,and enclosure heights shall not exceed 6feet-6 inches from floor to top fastening devices to allow access by Operator without use of ladders or steps to open enclosure doors. K. All equipment,instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge, phase fail,or other line conditions that may damage equipment,instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers'responsibility to provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions. B. Store so condensation will not occur on or in MCC's. Provide temporary heaters as required to prevent condensation. J C. Handle MCC's in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for Handling, Installation, Operation,and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers." Use factory-installed lifting provisions. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every five of each type and rating of fuse and fusible devices installed, but not less than one set of three of each kind. Include spares for: a. Control power circuit breakers. b. Fuses and fusible devices for fused circuit breakers. (Where fuses approved.) c. Fuses for fusible switches. (Where fuses approved.) 2. Spare Indicating Lights: Furnish five of each type installed. 3. Touch-Up Paint: Furnish three(3) half-pint unopened containers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton B. Cutler-Hammer 16482-6 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 tillr C. Siemens D. Square D. E. Or equal,as pre-approved in writing before bid date. 2.02 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS A. Wiring Classification: Class I,Type B, as defined in NEMA ICS 2. B. Enclosure: NEMA Type 1, gasketed, as defined in NEMA 250, except as otherwise indicated. C. Compartments: 1. Modular,with individual doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw fasteners. 2. For combination starter units provide interlocks so disconnect means must be in off position before door can be opened and so door cannot be closed with disconnect means in on position, except by consciously operating permissive release device. Rotating type operators located outside of door are not acceptable. D. Interchangeability: 1. Construct compartments so it is possible to remove units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments,or disturbing operation of other units in control center. 2. Units requiring same size compartment shall be interchangeable, and compartments shall be constructed to permit ready rearrangement of units such as replacing three single units with unit requiring three spaces without cutting or welding. E. Wiring Spaces: 1. Provide each vertical section of structure with horizontal and vertical wiring spaces for wiring to each unit compartment in each section. 2. Provide separate door over vertical wiring space. 3. Provide supports to hold wiring rigidly in place. F. Meet current NEC requirements for service entrance. G. Ratings: Provide nominal system voltage, continuous main bus amperage,and short time and short-circuit-current ratings as indicated and conform to short circuit and coordination study. H. All enclosures for motor starters 100 hp and greater shall have forced air cooling. All outdoor enclosures are to have sufficient forced fan cooling. Provide rain hood, intake louvers, insect screens and fan motor circuits with t-start"On/Off"controls. I. Unless specifically noted or shown on plans,all outdoor MCC's shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel with three(3)point latching doors. Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 1,unless shown otherwise on plans. Where NEMA 1 enclosure is installed outdoors in a NEMA 3R or 4%outer enclosure, the inner NEMA 1 enclosure shall be independently fabricated and installed,separate from the outer enclosure such that the outer enclosure may be replaced without disturbing the inner enclosure in any manner. 1. All outdoor enclosures shall have means of cooling and/or ventilation where environmental temperatures exceed any internal device ratings. K. All step-in or walk-in enclosures shall have adequate ventilation for cooling. L. Door Restraints: Provide door restraints on all doors for outdoor enclosures. M. All MCC sections to have 120-volt space heater with t-stat. 16482-5 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 N. All connections to devices and controls external to MCC shall be made at terminal strips on J blocks only. Direct connection to MCC devices is prohibited. O. Door latches shall not be operated with hex head type screws. Flat blade screwdriver shall be able to open latches. P. Provide enclosed type fluorescent light fixture in each MCC section. Install switch at location shown on Plans. 2.03 BUSES A. Material: Tin plated copper. B. Ampacity Ratings: As indicated for horizontal main buses and vertical bus sized for indicated loads or 300A minimum. C. Neutral Buses: Full size. D. Equipment Ground Bus: Non-insulated, horizontal copper bus 2 inches by Y.inch,minimum. E. Horizontal Bus Arrangement: Extend main phase,neutral and ground buses with same capacity entire length of MCC unless otherwise indicated,and provision for future extension at both ends by means of holt holes and captive bus splice sections or approved equivalent. F. Natural Disconnect Link: For switchgear assembly having main service disconnect. Arrange to permit disconnecting the switchgear assembly neutral bus from the common ground bus and the incoming service neutrals. Also,provide a bolted,un-insulated,V.inch x 2 inch copper bus(main bonding jumper). Arrange to interconnect the neutral and the ground buses to establish the system common ground point. G. Short-Circuit Withstand Rating: Same as short-circuit current rating of section. H. Current transformers shall be mounted with factory brackets in line with bus bar or conductor routing. Provide warning label to deactivate power to MCC before attempting service to C.T. 2.04 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES A. General: Provide modular arrangement of motor controllers, control devices, overcurrent protective devices,transformers,panelboards,instruments,indicating panels,blank panels,and other items mounted in compartments of motor-control center as indicated. B. Motor Controller Units: 1. Combination controller units;of types and with features,ratings,and circuit assignments indicated. 2. Units with full-voltage,across-the-line,magnetic controllers up to and including Size 3 shall be installed on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical section buses while being racked into their normal energized positions. 3. Units shall have short-circuit current ratings equal to or greater than short-circuit current rating of MCC section. 4. Units in MCC's shall be equipped with pull-apart terminal strips or drawout terminal boards for external control connections. 5. All autotransformer type start installation shall be coordinated with power factor capacitors to avoid resonant conditions that might produce harmonics. 6. All autotransformer type starters to have temperature sensor devices. Connect to controls to protect autotransformer from over-temperature. 7. All well and blower motor starters to have start time delay relay. 8. Contactor shall include minimum of four single pole, double throw spare auxiliary1111) 16082-6 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 411, contacts rated at 10 amperes continuous,for each starter furnished. C. Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. Provide types of devices with features, ratings, and circuit assignments indicated, as specified in Section 16475—"Overcurrent Protective Devices." 2. Individual feeder tap units through 225 ampere rating shall be installed on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical section buses while being racked into their normal energized positions. 3. All equipment feeder and/or motor circuit breakers(not MCP)are to have plug-in trip unit. 4. Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) shall be electronic type that learn inrush current and adjust accordingly. D. Overload Relays: 1. Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic. 2. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full load current of specific motor to which connected with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. Overload devices to require manual reset after tripping occurs. Provide trip relay and provide signal circuit to PLC,SCADA,autodialer or annunciator to indicate trip signal. 3. Enhanced Protection Overload Relay: Provide overload relays with NEMA Class 10 tripping characteristics for submersible equipment or where indicated. Select to protect motor against voltage unbalance and single phasing. 4. Select overload heaters and relays based on Motor Manufacturer's requirements, or based on motor nameplate data, size at 1.15 FLA(nameplate). Measure actual FLA in operation and provide data in O&M Manual. Where overloads trip during normal operation,provide current recordings to analyze cause and time of events,and provide data to Engineer for recommended corrective action. E. Coordinate size of circuit breakers,trip units, MCP's and other overcurrent protective devices, with motor manufacturer's and provide proper rated devices accordingly. F. Spaces and Blank Units: Compartments fully bussed and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units. G. Spare Units: Type, sizes, and ratings as indicated, and installed in compartments indicated "spare." H. All motor starter controls are to include ETM, HOA, start time delay relay, and Run light as a minimum. Controls shall have HOA switch and circuits that allow automatic restart of controls after momentary power interruption,without rest action required. Lock-in push button controls are not allowed. Provide time delay for restart. Control Diagrams: Provide complete and accurate control diagrams and one-line diagram laminated in clear plastic and installed in door pockets of motor control center. 1. All control transformers shall be sized for 250 percent of full load. K. All display screens or readouts shall be mounted in panel at height of 60 inches above level where operator stands. This must be accounted for where panels are installed on concrete pads or other elevated structures. L. Inhibit Relays: Where generator is not designed to carry full load of motors,provide inhibit relay CPI for each motor starter over 5 horsepower to inhibit motor starter operation when generator runs. Relay is to be energized by generator run signal from ATS or generator. Provide bypass 16482-7 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 switch across the inhibit relay contacts to allow selected motors to run on generator power. M. Provide one(1)additional auxiliary contact for each motor starter. N. Where standard MCC controls section shown on Plans will not contain all devices on backplate, provide additional plate hinged to side of section wall for mounting additional devices. Space location to all clearance from devices on backplate. O. Manufacturer to provide all controller addresses, HMI and 010 templates and other data pertinent to SCADA programming by Engineer. No exceptions. P. All control device settings are to be adjusted by Contractor for values recommended by the Plant Operator. Contract Engineer for clarifications. Q. Controls—Trouble, Failure and Status Indications 1. Control circuit devices shall have auxiliary contacts to indicate position, alarm and status for annunciating a control circuit string condition at any specific time. This string shall include all devices from start of diagram such as HOA switch,control devices,alarm devices,status devices, motor starters, overload relays and circuit breakers,which shall all have status or alarm contacts. Provide circuits from each inputs of PLC controller,SCADA,autodialer or annunciation equipment.This requirement is to allow operator to immediately identify any device or function that may prevent proper operation of electrical system equipment. Refer to control diagrams in places for typical control circuits. 2.05 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Provide identifying devices. B. Equipment Markers: Provide 2-ply,1/8-in.thick laminated plastic,engraved equipment markers. 1. Color: Black letters on white background. 2. Nomenclature: Include following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: a. Equipment name(i.e. motor control center). b. Equipment Tag No. (i.e. 30-MCC-1). 3. Size: Provide approximate 3-in. by 6-in. (minimum)for equipment. a. 1-in. high letters for equipment tag number. b. 1/2-in.high letters for descriptive equipment name. 4. Size: Provide approximate 1'/a inch by 3 inch (minimum)for device or component. a. 1/4 inch high letters for equipment tag number. b. Y.inch high letters for descriptive equipment name. 5. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws except contact type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. C. Wire Markers: Provide wire markers for all power and control wiring. Install at points where wire terminates at devices and terminal strip. D. Place wire identification tags at each end of all conductors. `m/] 16482-8 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 2.06 FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard finish suitable for environment in which installed. 2.07 CONCRETE BASES A. Class "B" as specified in Part 3—"Execution." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install MCC's in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3"Instructions for Handling,Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of MCC's," and with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Anchor each motor-control center assembly to concrete base in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Level and grout sills flush with motor-control center mounting surface. C. Remove temporary lifting eyes,channels,brackets,and temporary blocking of moving parts from MCC units and components. D. Install separate independent anchor bolts for NEMA 1 enclosure where based outdoors with an outer enclosure. Outer enclosure shall be removable without disturbing inner enclosure, as described in Item 2.02—"Motor Control Centers." E. All components inside enclosures shall be fastened down with proper hardware. All cables shall be bundled and bound with waxed cord or nylon tie-raps manufactured for that purpose. Adhesive tie down blocks are not allowed. Provide threaded press-in or welded studs for nylon cable clamps as required. F. Contractor shall coordinate all conduit stub-ups into MCC. Any mis-located conduits shall be relocated at Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to Owner. G. All motor control centers shall be fabricated to fit space available as shown on plans,even when special fabrication is required. H. Stub up all conduits entering MCC's,and other equipment enclosures from the bottom into each respective starter,feeder breaker or control section per equipment manufacturers conduit layout detail. Coordinate with equipment manufacture data sheets before starting any underground or below slab conduit installations. 3.02 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide 4-inch high concrete foundation on pad under MCC or as shown on plans. 3.03 LOCKOUT TAG OUT STATION A. Provide and install wall mounted enclosed padlock storage module with hinged door. Module shall have 8 hooks,each capable of holding 2 locks. Provide 8 safety locks and tags. Provide sign on door. Brady or equal quality Manufacturer. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs,as specified in Section 16195—"Electrical Identification." 16482-9 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 3.04 CONNECTIONSla A. Tighten MCC bus joint bolts, electrical connector, and terminal bolts in accordance with Manufacturer's installation instructions and torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not stated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Supplier's or manufacturer's technician for equipment specified herein shall be present at job site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum of 2 workdays, travel time excluded, for assistance during plant startup, equipment adjustment, and training of Owner's personnel for plant operation. Include minimum of: a. Two(2) person-days for Instructional Services. 2. Supplier or Manufacturer shall direct services to specific system and equipment operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting. B. Testing: 1. Comply with applicable requirements of InterNational Electrical Testing Association (INETA) Standard ATS, "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems." 2. Reports: Notify Engineer in writing indicating defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include record of repairs and adjustments made. 3. Perform following tests: a. Test insulation resistance of MCC buses;components;and of connecting supply, feeder,and control circuits. For components with solid-state devices or other sensitive components, perform tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Make continuity tests of circuits. c. Inspect MCC's for defects and physical damage,testing laboratory labels,circuit connections,and nameplate compliance with up-to-date system drawings. d. Perform operational test and exercise of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. e. Check MCC anchorage, external clearances, and alignment and fit of components including internal elements. f. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values. g. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for motor control and protective devices. h. Device Ratings and Settings: Verify ratings and settings of overload relays, motor circuit protectors,and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Quality Control Testing Program: Assure MCC installation meets specified requirements, is operational within specified tolerances, and provides appropriate protection for 1111 16482-10 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 411, systems and equipment. a. Test and inspect MCC's in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. b. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test commencement. c. Reports: Prepare written reports of test results and observations. Report defective materials and workmanship. Include complete records of adjustments and corrective action taken. d. Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests and related effort,apply label to tested components indicating results, person responsible,and date. e. Test insulation resistance of buses and portions of control wiring that disconnect from solid-state devices through normal disconnecting features. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. f. Verify appropriate capacity, overcurrent protection, and operating voltage of control power elements including control power transformers and control power wiring. g. Check phasing of supply source to bus. h. Test motor-control devices. Test overcurrent protective devices. 5. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest. Verify by retests that specified requirements are met. 3.06 CLEANING A. Inspect interior and exterior of MCC's. Remove paint splatters and other spots,dirt,and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation within each section of switchgear throughout periods during which the switchgear is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. 3.08 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide full 3-year service warranty on the overall installation and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware,and software. This warranty shall begin on date of written"Final Acceptance"of the electrical systems and to be executed as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor's warranty shall also guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide labor, work, or materials as necessary to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for more than 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All equipment and materials installed shall have full warranty from Manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for harsh industrial electrical/mechanical environment in which it is installed. 16482-11 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 Where Manufacturer's products fail prematurely,Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have the option of declaring that failures were caused by environmental conditions and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that Product Manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawing submittals. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within 5 working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and back charging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. C. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. 3.09 TRAINING A. Provide minimum eight (8) hours of "hands-on" instruction each for Owner's staff. To be conducted at project site by control systems manufacturer's representative,at no additional cost to Owner. Training is to be conducted after all control systems are fully operational. To include PLCs and other devices. See Section 16012—"Electrical Work"for additional requirements and refer to other equipment B. Provide minimum two(2)weeks notice to Engineer and Owner before conducting training. -END OF SECTION- lea 16482-12 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16650 DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected p specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Refer to Item 2.01—"Ratings"for EPA tier rating requirements before bidding. D. A complete generating system and all related equipment, including cooling system, coolant pumps, expansion tanks, valves, piping lubricating systems, fuel system components, miscellaneous devices and all required appurtenances shall be furnished and installed by the generator Manufacturers Supplier and/or Local Representative. It is the Generator Suppliers responsibility that any and all electrical and mechanical parts of the complete generator system that Supplier sub-assigns for installation by another Contractor be accounted for,approved and coordinated by said Generator Supplier. Any additional electrical and/or mechanical equipment or devices required for the specific generating system for this project shall be accounted for in Supplier and Contractor's bid where or not shown in plan and specifications details for this project. (1601 Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. It is accepted that each manufacturer listed may have variation in certain specified parameters that are particularto each specific product,and this is to be accounted for in bid and in the data submitted for Engineer's review. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16012— "Electrical Work",for submittal requirements. E. Coordinate generator circuit breaker and controls with transfer switch and switchgear supplier and provide interface circuits, equipment and devices as required for a complete operating system. F. Listing of acceptable Equipment Manufacturers does not limit or remove the intent of these specification requirements. G. Refer to Specification Section 15012—"Mechanical Work,"for mechanical work methods related to generator installation. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies the furnishing and installation of a packaged electric generating plant. B. The packaged,diesel engine-electric generating plant shall be pre-wired,pre-piped,assembled, and aligned on a single skid type base. The packaged system of new, unused equipment of the manufacturer's latest design includes all necessary instruments, devices, switches, and other appurtenances for proper operation of the unit: supplies steel safety guards around all external rotating parts,and provides a unit on which adjustments,repairs,and normal maintenance are possible without the use of special tools. The supplier will be responsible for the proper performance of the complete unit and support systems. Only manufacturers with a minimum of (' 5 years experience will be considered. The supplier of the package must have complete parts �r and service available on a 24-hour basis in the area of the job site. 16650-1 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 Parts stock must be maintained on engine/generator by the supplier of the package. C. The successful bidder of this equipment shall herein be referred to as vendor. Ns/ D. Any failure to take exception to any part of this specification in the initial bid by the vendor shall imply complete compliance to the specification and will subject the vendor to complete liability for any omitted items. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide the Generator Manufacturer's full 5 year comprehensive extended coverage service warranty on the generator installation and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware, and software. This warranty shall begin on date of written "Final Acceptance" of the electrical systems and to be executed as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor's warranty shall also guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide labor,work,or materials as necessary to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for more than 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All equipment and materials installed shall have full warranty from Manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for harsh industrial electrical/mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where Manufacturer's products fail prematurely,Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have the option of declaring that failures were caused by environmental conditions and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that Product Manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawing submittals. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1/ B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within 5 working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and back charging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. C. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. 1.04 STANDARDS AND CODES A. All material and equipment supplied under this specification shall be designed,assembled,and tested in full compliance with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. NEC-National Electric Code 2. IEEE-Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 3. UL- Underwriters' Laboratories 4. NEMA-National Electronic Manufacturers Association 5. ASA-American Standards Association 6. ANSI-American National Standards Institute B. The generator shall be listed by UL2200 as a complete assembly. C. Generator system shall comply with all EPA,state and local requirements. Where generator size shown on plans is not properly rated,the next size up shall be supplied. 16650-2 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 1.05 DRAWINGS AND DATA A. Provide CAD files of diagrams, equipment views, and material & device schedules on CD and include with submittals. Only one(1)copy required for Electrical Engineer. Only electronic files will be reviewed. Hard copy submittals are not acceptable and will be returned as rejected. B. Six(6)copies of the following items are required of the successful bidder prior to manufacture: 1. Certified dimensional drawings showing weight,outline dimensions,bolting and drilling details,clearances for installation,operation and maintenance,and required ventilation. 2. Elevation views, showing and identifying all items furnished and section views as required to locate all components. 3. Bill of material describing all components and recommended spare parts with pricing and delivery. 4. Brochures on engine, generator, muffler, batteries, charger, control panel, and any accessory equipment showing ratings, construction features, and performance characteristics. 5. Schematic and wiring diagrams of the electrical system showing all factory wiring and clearly indicating wiring and voltage of any electrical strip heaters. Also, submit fully detailed inter-connection drawings indicating each individual connection to any remote equipment, including a separate connection drawing to show point-to-point electrical wiring connections. 6. Submit documentation showing compliance with EPA/TCEQ emission requirements via location and EPA"TIER"rating. Include the current EPA conformity documentation for engine supplied with submittal package for review. 4111, 7. Calculations of steps,voltage drops,and kVA. 8. Descriptive literature describing the standard series specified (not a one-of-a-kind fabrication). 9. Drawing submittal schedule with approval allowance requirements. 10. Shipping time after receipt of order. 11. Exceptions and clarifications to this specification. 12. Factory testing procedures. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Factory and Field Tests: Deliver to the purchaser six copies of each factory and field test report on the actual packaged electric generating plant provided, indicating results for all tests described herein. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the purchaser six sets of the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals pertaining directly to the unit provided. Bind each set in a substantial binder, with each item properly indexed. Include the following information: 1. Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and including as-built shop drawings,outline drawings,schematic and wiring diagrams. 2. Instructions for erection and alignment, including tolerances and preparation for use. C. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer's approval. Refer to Section 16012—"Electrical Work," Item 1.04—"Submittals"for additional requirements. D. With each submittal,include an electronic copy of the applicable specification(s)page(s)for the item submitted and mark "Complies" or "Non-Compliance" or "Exception" adjacent to the 16650-3 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. E. Provide CAD files of all diagrams,equipment views,and material and device schedules on CD and include with submittals. Only one(1)copy required for Electrical Engineer. Only electronic files will be reviewed. Hard copy submittals are not acceptable and will be returned as"Rejected." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RATINGS A. Diesel Engine Driven Generating Set, complete with accessories, shall be at minimum the KW rating shown on plans and as manufactured by the following: 1. Cummins/Onan (Southern Plains Power, Inc.) 2. Detroit Diesel(Stewart&Stevenson) 3. Kohler 4. Caterpillar 5. Taylor Power Systems B. Generator shall be at minimum the KVA shown on plans at a 0.8 power factor. If a particular Manufacturer's unit of kVA shown on plans does not have proper EPA tier ratings or,will not start all loads then,next largest size meeting these requirements shall be used. Voltage rating should be as shown on plans. Generator shall be capable of starting all plant loads sequentially, starting with smallest load first and progressing up to largest load, in steps. Refer to one-line diagram and load analysis on drawing sheets. C. Generator shall be capable of starting loads in sequential order,smallest to largest loads,with not more than 20%terminal voltage drop,and not more then 5%frequency drop. Voltage drop shall be defined as the voltage drop at a period of time specified by the engineer after review of the generator data sheets D. Contractor shall verify code letter of motors furnished and shall adjust generator size accordingly where code letters vary from design values. E. Generator system shall meet current EPA Tier 1,2 or 3 status requirements as applicable.Where size shown on plans is not proper tier rated,the next size unit shall be supplied. F. When next size generator is required, all conductor and conduit sizes shall be adjusted accordingly. 2.02 ENGINE A. Type: Liquid cooled, full diesel compression ignition engine, either naturally aspirated or turbocharged. 4-cycled engine required,or as approved by the Engineer. B. Rating: Provide an engine with brake horsepower not less than required by the full load rating of the generator, including losses,and with all accessories attached. C. Speed: The engine speed will be suitable for direct connection to the generator without exceeding engine manufacturer's published curves. Speed must not exceed 1800 RPM. D. BMEP: The engine BMEP will not exceed 310 PSI,when producing rated load. Piston speed shall be 1800 feet per minute or less. E. Construction: 1. Replaceable liners. 16650-4 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 the 2. Two (2)valves per cylinder. 3. Full pressure lube system with crankshaft driven oil pump. 4. Unit injectors. 5. Full flow replaceable oil filter. 6. Lube Oil Heater 7. Primary and secondary fuel oil filters. 8. Replaceable fuel transfer pump suitable for 6 feet suction lift or, as required for this project. 9. Dry type air intake cleaner. 10. Fuel water separator with see-through polycarbonate bowl and manual drain. F. Starting System 1. Heavy duty,battery driven electric starter motor. 2. A fully charged 24-volt lead acid,impact resistant,storage battery or batteries mounted on the unit. Make battery capacity sufficient for four cranking cycles at firing speed of 10 seconds duration each, with 15 seconds rest periods- Provide all battery cables, connections, electrolyte, and a hydrometer. Battery rack to have rubber coating or epoxy paint. G. Cooling System: The generator set will be furnished with a unit mounted radiator having sufficient capacity for cooling the engine when delivering full rated horsepower at the design ambient. The fan is to be engine driven pusher type. An immersion heater shall be furnished in the jacket water system. Where unit mounted radiator does not have sufficient cooling capacity a remote cooling system shall be furnished by Generator Supplier and shall include all equipment v devices and pumps, expansion tanks, piping, and appurtenances required for a complete operating system. H. Exhaust System: High degree,critical-rated 316 stainless exhaust system with maximum silencing capacity mounted on unit. Include a suitable length of flexible 316 stainless steel exhaust tubing for mounting between engine and muffler. When V type engines are used,a wye type flex will be furnished all exhaust system components to be 316 stainless steel. Provide(1)digital exhaust gas temperature meter on in-line engine or(2)on"V"engine. Digital readout to be included in engine/generator control panel. Fuel System: 1. Engine driven, self-priming fuel pump suitable for unassisted transfer of fuel from the fuel tank to the engine. Provide fuel pump capable of satisfactory flow from tank to generator at distance shown on plans. Optional fuel pump may be installed at tank location by providing all power and control circuits and equipment required for complete operating fuel system. 2. Where shown on plans, provide fuel tank meeting UL 142, unless noted otherwise. Capacity will be for hour operation at maximum load noted on plans or for gallon shown on plans. Where plans show separate fuel tank,furnish according to Section 15248— "Above Ground Fuel Tank." 3. Where plans show sub-base fuel tank,furnish according to Section 16655—"Diesel Fuel Generator Base Tanks." 4. Full flow fuel/water separator with see-through polycarbonate bowl and drain. 5. Full flow replaceable element fuel filter. 6. Fuel connection lines between tank and engine. 7. Provide governor of the full electronic type to maintain frequency stability at any 16650-5 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 constant load, including no load, within plus or minus 1/4 percent, and to maintain frequency regulation between no load steady state and full load steady within 3 percent. 8. Fuel restriction indicators. 9. Air filter restriction indicators. 10. Generator Manufacturer shall designate piping entry into generator, and shall consult with Contractor on fuel pipe sizes and routing. It is Contractors responsibility to secure Manufacturer's directions and advise for a proper fuel system operation. 11. Contractor shall provide full tank of fuel after testing is completed. 1. Battery Charger: A static,solid-state type battery charger unit,which automatically controls the charge rate. Include a charging rate ammeter,thermal overload circuit and transformer. The charge shall be suitable for operation at 120 volts single phase,60 Hertz. The maximum charging time to bring the batteries up to full charge will be 12 hours. Mount charger on unit, using adequate vibration devices. Charger shall be of the dual rate type. K. Engines used in proposed generator set to be certified to comply with current US EPA and CARB Mobile Off-highway emission limits when tester per ISO 8178 D2. Engines used shall also comply with TCEQ air quality regulations at location and time of installation. L. Where installation of sub-base fuel tank is shown on plans and elevates generator controls above normal access level, Contractor to provide an approved stair/platform structure for access to controls and generator components. Provide shop drawings for Engineer's approval. 2.03 ALTERNATOR A. Type: Furnish a direct coupled, synchronous, brushless type alternator with amortisseur windings, revolving field,exciter,and built-in static rectifier and permanent magnet excitation system. B. Rating: 1. Voltage and Phase,as shown on plans. 2. Frequency-60 Hertz. 3. Minimum KW and KVA, rating as shown on plans. 4. Power Factor-0.8. C. Insulation System: Class H, 150 degrees Celsius rise over a 40°C ambient. Generator not to exceed 105°C over 40°C ambient at 100%rated power. D. Instantaneous Voltage Dip: Less than 20 percent when full load is applied to the unit. E. Voltage Stability: Maintain within plus or minus 2 percent of rated voltage at any constant from no load to full load. F. Voltage Regulation -Maintain within plus or minus 1-1/2 percent deviation from rated voltage between no load steady state and full load steady state. Voltage regulation shall allow motor starting with solid state soft starters and reduce voltage autotransformer starters, and shall maintain continuous power to the starter during the transition from Start to Run phase of operation. G. Enclosure: Weatherproof,except where sound attenuating enclosure is indicated on plans,refer to Section 16622—"Sound Attenuating Enclosures." H. Coupling: From engine, drive rotor through a semi-flexible coupling to ensure permanent alignment. I. Strip Heaters: Provide low surface temperature space heaters to prevent condensation. 1. Generator set shall have automatic controls to protect alternator from overload. Controls shall be independent of main breaker, which shall not be depended on or, used for, generator 16650-6 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 protection. Controls shall be provided to monitor the output current of the generator set and initiate an alarm when load current exceeds 110%of the rated current of the generator set on any phase for more than 60 seconds. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator for both single phase and three phase fault conditions. The system shall control the alternator output to provide 300%of rated current under short circuit conditions, for both single phase and three phase faults. Systems,which regulate single phase and three phase faults at identical excitation levels, are not acceptable. There shall be no exceptions to this requirement, regardless of standards for manufacturers listed in Item 2.01—"Ratings." K. Provide 100%rated circuit breaker. Where alternator is rated for 3 phase,4 wire service greater than 800 amps, provide GFI trip function per NEC. L. Coordinate generator and accessories such as conductor lugs on breaker and dimensional spaces shown before shipping. Lack of coordination shall be atvendor's risk and at no additional cost to Owner. M. Control and voltage regulator's operation shall not be affected by electrical system leading power factor conditions.Where power factor capacitors may affect generator operation,provide means to disengage capacitors during generator operation. 2.04 CONTROL PANEL A. General: Provide a solidstate control panel mounted to unit,which includes,but is not limited to, the following instruments and protective devices. 1. AC ammeter. 2. Phase selector switch. 3. Current transformers. 4. AC voltmeter. 5. Automatic solid-state voltage regulator. 6. Rheostat for adjusting voltage plus or minus 5 percent of rated voltage. 7. Engine Malfunction Warning Lights: a. Low oil pressure. b. High water temperature. c. Engine overcrank. d. Engine overspeed. 8. Frequency meter. 9. Non-resetable elapsed time meter with a 9,999.9-hour maximum indication. 10. Coolant temperature gage. 11. Oil pressure gage. 12. Main circuit breaker-molded case type. 13. Combination alarm-shutdown system with manual reset and indicating lights for high engine temperature, low oil pressure, engine overspeed, and engine fail-to-start. Include an additional set of contacts for remote alarms. 14. Manual start/stop switch for control of engine. 15. Alarm dry contact closures as follows: a. Low oil pressure b. High water temperature c. Engine overcrank 16650-7 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 d. Engine run e. Fuel low level 16. Remote control contacts as follows: a. Engine start via transfer switch (which will include power transfer). 17. Provide latest electronic control panel at engine. 18. Provide space heater in generator set mounted control panel to prevent condensation. B. Provide remote annunciator with minimum of (6) six programmable relays for use as alarm outputs unit to be recess mounted in door of automatic transfer switch, except where ATS is outdoors,in which case annunciator shall be installed in the inner panel of the ATS or,on wall in MCC Room as shown on plans or otherwise designated by Engineer. Wall surface mounted annunciator shall be installed in manufacturer's surface mounted style box.Recessed mounted annunciator shall be installed in recessed box with annunciator free place trim flush with wall. C. Contractor shall provide fail and problem alarms and run signals to monitoring station at Operator's room to autodialer,when present. Provide circuits,devices,expansion modules,and programming as required for autodialer. D. Non-resetable elapsed time meter with a 9,999.9-hour maximum indication. E. Provide data port for use with SCADA monitoring of generator status using ModBus protocol via Ethernet. Provide CD with program, information and status display. Provide generator communications interface module with Ethernet connector, power supply, programming for SCADA system use and all appurtenances. Provide compatible HMI template for specific generator. Provide all addresses, HMI templates,and software required for display on SCADA HMI. Provide Owners copy of Manufacturer's software for use in displaying generator data. Include Manufacturers time for assisting in installation and set-up of program. Assist Systems Integration Engineer in setting up plant controller PLC and/or SCADA. F. Provide factory built, U.L. listed, remote annunciator that interfaces with generator control panel. 2.05 ENGINE START/STOP CONTROLS A. The engine controls shall be provided with bypassing of the low oil pressure shutdown circuitry during start-up. B. If unit fails to start in an appropriate time(normally 30 seconds),the starting circuit shall shut down for an appropriate time(approximate 10 seconds)and then repeat the start cycle. If the unit still fails to start after approximately four start attempts,the overcrank alarm shall activate and the starting circuit shall shut down. C. The engine start/stop control shall be static solid state. 2.06 BASE A. Mount the assembled packaged unit on a base of welded structural steel,box type construction. Prime all exposed metal parts with a rust inhibitor and finish in durable machinery enamel. B. Vibration isolators shall be of the steel spring type. 16650-8 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 2.07 WEATHERPROOF HOUSING—(WHERE INDICATED ON PLANS) A. Construction: Provide an overall weather protective housing with removable side panels and a hinged,padlockable meter panel door to make the engine generating plant suitable for outdoor installation. In addition, sound levels at the nearest property line shall not exceed 58 db at project locations within the City of Houston city limits or ETl. Where sound attenuating housing is shown on plans,provide according to those specifications. B. Painting: Prime all exposed metal parts with a suitable rust inhibitor applied to the clean,bare metal,followed by two coats of epoxy paint for exterior weather. C. All doors and access panels shall be lockable. Provide mechanical (non-magnetic) contact switches on all moveable panels and doors to detect entry into generator enclosure. D. Contractor to coordinate with manufacturer on housing size prior to constructing concrete pad. E. Provide low voltage transformer,panel and appurtenance sized for all low voltage requirements at generator. Provide feeder circuit from Motor Control Center. F. Where sound attenuating enclosure is shown on plans,or where referred to in Section 16622— "Sound Attenuating Enclosures," provide enclosure instead of the standard weatherproof enclosure. Enclosure manufacturer shall be consulted for piping and conduit entries into housing. Also,coordinate with generator manufacturer and engineer before installing. 2.08 GENERATOR CONCRETE FOUNDATION A. Provide concrete pad as shown on plans. Use 3000-psi concrete with US rebar 12" O.C. Coordinate pad construction with generator drawings and weight. 2.09 GENERATOR ACCESS A. Where generator controls or enclosure step-up height is greater than 18 inches above grade, Contractor shall provide concrete or galvanized steel steps for access to controls or to enclosure. 2.10 LOAD BANK A. Load Bank Controls: 1. Where load bank is required, provide all controls, contactors, and devices needed to exercise generator on load bank. Normal plant loads shall not be on generator during load bank operation of generator. 2. Coordinate with Generator Vendor. 3. Submit load bank controls data. 2.11 GENERATOR MONITORING SYSTEM A. Provide interface to the generator solidstate controller and route data signal(ModBus TCP)to data switch as shown on plans. B. Provide all software, programming, and devices required for monitoring trouble status, run status, alternator loading, fuel tank level, and all other available status signals. Provide HMI templates for display on SCADA HMI. Route data cable to monitoring station PLC via Ethernet switch as shown on plans. Assist in setting up system during construction, testing, demonstrations to Owner,and final inspection. C. Provide all addressing information needed to display all alarm,function,and status information at PLC HMI. Send information on CD or via e-mail to Engineer. 16650-9 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 2.12 GENERATOR INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall consult with Generator Manufacturer on all aspects of generator installation to assure all work is proper and professional. 2.13 FUEL LINE ROUTING A. Fuel lines from supply source that are routed in generator stub area shall be installed in a covered trench, up into generator enclosure or in a buried line as described in Section 15249— "Above-Ground Fuel Tank," Item 2.06—"Fuel Lines" and as shown on plans. 2.14 STORAGE A. Where generator is stored on site prior to installation, provide any heating or other measures required to prevent moisture accumulation in high humidity areas. Consult Manufacturer for requirements. 2.15 INHIBIT RELAYS A. Where generator is not designed to carry full load of motors,provide inhibit relay for each motor starter over 5 horsepower to inhibit motor starter operation when generator runs. Relay is to be energized by generator run signal from ATS or generator. Provide bypass switch across the inhibit relay contacts to allow selected motors to run on generator power. 2.16 GENERATOR ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall provide power,control,and instrument circuits as well as all fuel source piping and devices,cooling equipment,pumps,and related appurtenances,and all accessory equipment that is standard factory component supplied by the generator manufacturer.as part of this installation. Contractor shall coordinate all requirements with generator vendor and include all materials and design in bid cost. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING A. Units shall be factory tested under design conditions. Engineer and/or Owner,may witness test. Vendor shall give one(1)week notice to Engineer before test is conducted. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation of generator shall be according to Manufacturer's instructions and shall be witnessed and inspected by Manufacturer's Representative. B. Do not install vibration isolation rubber pads at random locations under skids. Place continuous pad,that is width of skids or,do not place at all. Manufacturer is to advise on this requirement. C. Install on concrete pad that is sloped to avoid any standing water under generator or skids. Standing water test will be conducted and where water stands, the concrete slab shall be reworked to provide satisfactory installation. D. Generator frame is to be bonded to ground grid via exothermic welded connection with 2/0 bare cu conductor(minimum). 16650-10 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 3.03 TESTING AFTER INSTALLATION A. Perform Startup test to insure all systems work properly together to include transfer switches, annunciator panel and other associated accessories. B. Perform a load bank test as follows: 1. Utilizing a resistive load bank, load test the generator set as follows: a. Load should be applied as 50%of the generator name plate output for the first 30 minutes, 75%of the generator name plate output for the next 30 minutes, 100%of the generator name plate output for the next 60 minutes, for a total run time of at least 2 hours. b. At a minimum, record the following at least every 15 minutes during the test. Time Frequency(Hz) Battery Voltage (DC) Voltage(AC-L1,12, L3) Oil Pressure(PSI) Amperage (AC-L1, L2, L3) Coolant Temperature Power Factor(1.0) Ambient Temperature kW Exhaust Temperature 411W Load Percentage C. Perform a plant load test as follows: 1. After the resistive load bank test has been completed, perform a plant load test to confirm generator can run connected loads as designed.Testing shall be performed as a complete simulation of power loss-ie shut off main disconnect and observe generator starts and ATS transfers to back-up source as required.All loads shown for connection shall be operated for up to 15 minutes(full load)unless system parameters do not allow pumps to run for that amount of time. Coordinate system parameters with plant Operator who shall be present for all plant load testing.Allow plant to run on generator under normal conditions for minimum of 1 hour. Record all values as shown for load bank testing every 5 minutes during plant load test. 2. Allow generator to run unloaded for at least 5 minutes before shutting down. 3.04 LOAD LIMITING A. Where generator is not sized to carry all motor loads simultaneously, Contractor shall provide inhibit relays and bypass switches to prevent operation of selected loads when on standby power. Locate devices in motor control section of MCC. 3.05 FIELD TESTS A. Perform field tests at the site after installation is complete and in the presence of the Owner's 16650-11 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 representative to verify that unit meets start up sequences listed. B. Manufacturer's Representative shall conduct field tests after electrical installation is completed and shall provide a certified report of these tests for the Owner and Engineer. The tests shall include sequential stating of all motor loads and recording the voltage dip as each motor starts. This report shall be sent to Engineer no less than 10 working days prior to"Final Acceptance" testing. Operation of system shall be demonstrated to Owner and Engineer by the Representative during setup tests and at final inspection and testing. C. Load testing shall be performed using a reactive load bank sized to simulate all loads running with largest load then applied. Provide written report of tests for Engineer's review. D. The following minimum work shall be performed by the Contractor and Manufacturer's Representative under the technical direction of the manufacturer's service representative. Allow for a minimum of twelve(12)days for factory technician including all expenses for the following services: 1. Inspection and final adjustments for startup, and acceptance testing. 2. Operational and functional test of controllers. 3. Participation in commissioning services. Technical Representative shall be present for duration of commissioning tests related to vendor equipment. E. The Contractor shall provide three(3)copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report before final payment is made. 3.06 OIL PAN A. Provide galvanized steel oil pan beneath engine to catch oil drips. Provide drain valve with oil resistant drain hose extending to the skid and attached with stainless steel clamp to prevent oil spills when draining oil pan. 3.07 FIRE EXTINGUISHER A. Provide two (2) high quality portable fire extinguishers noted for diesel fuel fire suppression. Provide mounting brackets and install on both sides of the enclosure doors located in the electrical control panel area. Coordinate location with Owner. 3.08 EAR PROTECTION A. Provide dispenser with disposable ear protection devices on inside of generator enclosure near entry at controls section. 3.09 FUEL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall provide all fuel required for use during the construction phase. Fuel tank shall be full when the facility is turned over to the Owner after final acceptance. -END OF SECTION- 16650-12 of 12 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16655 DIESEL FUEL GENERATOR BASE TANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16012—"Electrical Work", "Submittals'for submittal requirements. D. Registration 1. All fuel storage tanks that exceed a capacity of 1100 gallons shall be registered with TCEQ. 2. Contractor shall assist Owner in completing TCEQ registration form (TCEQ-00659). 1.02 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS (1111, A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum often(10)years experience in the design and construction of generator base tank systems. B. Manufacturer must be Underwriters Laboratories(UL) listed. 1.03 GENERATOR BASE TANK CONSTRUCTION A. Generator base tank shall be Engine&Compressor Accessories SCGBT,CTDGBT,OTDGBT,or GBT series or approved equal, and constructed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL-142. The generator base tank shall also be constructed in accordance with Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code,NFPA 30;and The Standard for Installation and use of Stationary Combustible Engine and Gas Turbines,NFPA 37. Generator base tank shall be made of heavy gauge steel construction. Include reinforced steel box channel for generator support with load rating of 4,000 pounds per gen-set mounting hole location. Two full height gussets shall be provided at gen-set mounting holes. Tank interior shall be coated with a permanent, rust inhibiting,two part epoxy.Interior temporarily coated with solvent based or petroleum based film rust preventative shall be unacceptable. Tank shall be primed and finish painted outside. Exterior color is to be selected by Owner. Coal tar coating to be applied to bottom of tank after finish coating is applied. Secondary containment is required. 1.04 GENERATOR BASE TANK TESTING A. Primary tank sections shall be pressurized at 3 psi and leak tested to ensure integrity of 4111, generator base weld seams per UL-142 standards. B. Open Top Dikes and Closed Top Dikes shall be hydrostatically tested to ensure integrity of 16655-1.of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 generator base weld seams. Dye penetrant testing is unacceptable C. Secondary Containment basin shall be pressurized at 3 psi and leak tested to ensure integrity of generator base weld seams per UL-142 standards. 1.05 GENERATOR BASE TANK FITTINGS A. The generator base tank shall include the following fittings labeled with adhesive backed metal labels. 1. 1" NPT fuel return fitting 2. 1 NPT for normal vent(two if Secondary Containment) 3. NPT for emergency vent, sized as appropriate(two if Secondary Containment) 4. 2" NPT for manual fill 5. 1 2" NPT for level gauge 6. 1" NPT basin drain (tank drain if single wall) 7. 1" NPT with low level float switch 8. 1 1/4" NPT fitting with leak detection float switch. 1.06 FUEL LEVEL GAUGE AND LEVEL TRANSMITTER A. The generator base tank shall include a direct-reading fuel level gauge. B. The generator base tank shall include a level transmitter with 4-20 mA. Output signal;Siemens Sitrans Model LC300 or equal. Electrical Contractor shall provide wiring to MCC controls section. 1.07 FUEL CONTAINMENT BASIN (DOUBLE WALL TANKS) A. Generator base tank shall include a welded steel containment basin,sized at a minimum of 110% of the tank capacity to prevent escape of fuel into the environment in the event of a tank leakage. 1.08 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM (DOUBLE WALL TANKS) A. A fuel containment basin leak detector float switch shall be provided. 1.09 GENERATOR BASE TANK VENTING A. Normal Venting 1. Normal venting shall be sized at 1-1/4"NPT in accordance with The American Petroleum Institute Standard No. 2000,for venting atmospheric and low pressure storage tanks. Tank shall be provided with atmospheric(normal)vent cap with screen. 2. A second normal vent fitting shall be provided for the interstitial space on Secondary Containment tanks. B. Emergency Venting 1. The emergency vent NPT fitting shall be sized to accommodate the total capacity of both normal and emergency vents, and not less than that derived from NEPA 30,Table 2-8 based on wetted surface area of the tank(calculated based on 100&of primary tank). A UL listed emergency pressure relief vent cap shall be furnished. The vent shall be pressure operated. Opening pressure shall be 0.5 psig;full opening pressure shall be 2.5 16655-2 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 4/0 psig. Limits shall be marked on top of each vent. 2. A secondary UL Listed emergency vent fitting shall be provided for the interstitial space on Secondary Containment tanks. PART 2 PRODUCTS—(NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING A. Provide testing in presence of Engineer and Owner. B. Contractor shall provide all fuel required for use during the construction phase. Fuel tank shall be full when the facility is turned over to the Owner after final acceptance. -END OF SECTION- 41/ 16655-3 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16740 SINGLE MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable System. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement.This Item will be measured by the foot of cable furnished,installed,spliced, connected,terminated,stored, and tested. B. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under"Measurement"will be paid for at the unit price bid for"Fiber Optic Cable System" of the type, and number of fibers as applicable. This price is full compensation for furnishing and installing all cable (including patch cables and Ethernet cables);for relocating or removing cables as required;for pulling through conduit or duct; testing;for installing cable along messenger cable;for minorrelocation of messengercable on poles; splicing; connecting; and for materials, equipment, labor, tools, documentation, warranty,training and incidentals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General Requirements.Provide new corrosion resistant materials that comply with the details shown on the plans and the requirements of this item. Provide splicing kits,fiberopticcablecaps,moisture/watersealants,connectors,patchcords,aerial cable storage systems, and accessories to complete the fiber optic communication system. Furnish equipment for installation,splicing,and testing. B. Cable Requirements. Furnish fiber optic cable suitable for underground conduit and aerial environment, as applicable. Do not purchase cablefor use on this project priorto receiving written approval of submittals for fiber optic cable by the Engineer. All fiber optic cable(s)supplied and utilized on this project will be from a single manufacturer. Optical fiber and cable manufacturer shall be vertically integrated. The opticalfibershall be a matched clad design manufactured bytheoutsidevapor deposition process. Manufacturers proposing to supplyfiber optic cable for this project will be Certified ISO-9001 and TL 9000 Certified. Fiber optic cable manufacturer proposed for this project will demonstrate, as a prerequisite, engagement in the production of each and every fiber optic cable(s) specified herein, for a continuous period of twenty years. All cables supplied forthis projectwill be produced utilizing the construction processes noted herein and warranted bymanufacturer.Ensurethatall proposedfiberopticcable is compatible with existing equipment/infrastructure. 16740-1 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 PART 3 EXECUTION j 3.01 INSTALLATION vr/ A. Description.Furnish and install single mode fiber optic cable as shown on the plans. B. Submittals. Provide the Engineer all submittals identified in the specification no later than two(2)weeks following award of the contract. Do not purchase cable for use on this project prior to receiving written approval of submittals for fiber optic cable by the Engineer. Additional details about submittals can befound inthespecificequipmentsections below.Refer to Submittal Checklist for Fiber Optic Specifications at the end of this specification. C. Materials, 1. Submittal Requirements forFiberOpticCable Manufacturers.Submitdocumentation for the fiber optic cable manufacturer that documents,as a minimum,the following information: a. Manufacturer 150-9001 and TL 9000 Certification. b. "Proof of Compliance"with (Bellcore (Telcordia)) GR-20-CORE, Issue No. 2 TL9000. c. Documentation for each cable,indicating that the cable is listed bythe Rural Utilities Service(RUS),7CFR 1755.900 or,if cable is in transition to RUS and be fully compliant with ANSI/ICEA5-87-640. d. Manufacturing SiteTesting Procedures.The Engineerreservesthe rightto require verification of anyor all of the manufacturerstest procedures and those test results. When required by the Engineer, the cable manufacturer issuing the test data as verification of testing will conduct this testing,and/or the testing will be performed in the presence of the Engineer or his Agent. 2. Cable.Single Mode Fiber OpticCable All fiber optic cable will be loose tube telecommunications grade designed for high speed transmission of voice,data,and video communications.The cable will combine a loose tube fiber with a UV rated outer(MDPE)jacket and be designed for duct and aerial installations. The maximum pulling tension shall be 2700 N (608 lbf) during installation (short term) and 890 N (200 lbf) long term installed. The cable shall withstand a minimum compressive load of 220 N/cm. The Cable and fiber manufacturer shall be the same companyto ensure long-term reliabilityof the cabled fiberand to ensure theavailabilityoffullyintegrated technical support. Cable shall be Coming Cable Systems part number_ a. Buffer Tube Requirements. U4-T 1 D20. Optical fibers shall be placed inside a loose buffer tube.The nominal outer diameter of the buffer tube shall be either 2.5 mm or 3.0 mm. Each buffer tube shall contain up to 12 fibers.The fibers shall not adhere to the inside of the buffer tube. Each fiber shall be distinguishable by means of color coding inaccordancewithTlA/EIA-598-B,"OpticalFiberCableColorCoding."The fibers shall be colored with ultraviolet (UV) curable inks. Buffer tubes containing1811) 16740-2 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 411, fibers shall be color coded with distinct and recognizable colors in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-8,"Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding." Buffer tube colored stripes shall be inlaid in the tube by means ofco-extrusion when required.The nominal stripe width shall be 1 mm. The buffer tubes shall be resistant to external forces and shall meet the buffer tube cold bend and shrinkback requirements of 7 CFR 1755.900. Each buffer tube shall contain a water- swellable yarn or water blocking element for water-blocking protection.The water-swellable yarn or water blocking element shall be non- nutritive to fungus, electrically non-conductive, and homogeneous. It shall also be free from dirt or foreign matter.This yarn or element will preclude the need for other water-blocking material;the buffer-tube shall be gel-free. b. Cable Construction The central member shall consist of a dielectric,glass reinforced plastic(GRP) rod(optional steel central member).The purpose of the central member is to provide tensile strength and prevent buckling. Tensile strength shall be provided bythe central member,and additional dielectric yarns as required. The central membershall be overcoated with a thermoplasticwhen required to achieve dimensional sizingto accommodate buffertubes/fillers. Buffertubes shall be stranded around the dielectric central member using the reverse oscillation,or"S-Z", stranding process. Water swellable yarn(s) shall be applied longitudinally along the central member duringstranding. Fillers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to the cable cross-section where needed.Fillers shall be placed so that they do not intemipt the consecutive positioning of the buffer tubes. In 410 dual layer cables, any fillers shall be placed in the inner layer. Fillers shall be nominally 2.5 mm or 3.0 mm in outer diameter. Two polyester yarn binders shall be applied contrahelically with sufficient tension to secure each buffer tube layerto the dielectric central member without crushing the buffer tubes. The binders shall be non- hygroscopic, non-wicking,and dielectric with low shrinkage. For single layer cables, a water swellable tape shall be applied longitudinally around the outside of the stranded tubes/fillers. The water swellable tape shall be non-nutritivetofungus,electrically non-conductive,and homogenous. It shall also be free from did and foreign matter.For dual layer cables, a second (outer) layer of buffer tubes shall be stranded over the original core to form a two layer core.A water swellable tape shall be applied longitudinally over both the inner and outer layer.The water swellable tape shall be non-nutritive to fungus, electrically non-conductive, and homogenous.It shall also be free from dirt and foreign matter.The dielectric yarns shall be helically stranded evenly around the cable core. C. Cable Jacket Non-armored cables shall be sheathed with medium density polyethylene (MDPE). The minimum nominal jacket thickness shall. be 1.3 mm. For reduced diameter(RD)cables,the minimum norminal jacketthicknessshall be 1.4mm.Jacketing material shall be applied directly over the tensile strength members(as required)andwaterswellabletape.The polyethylene shallcontain carbon black to provide ultraviolet light protection and shall not promote the growth of fungus. The MDPE jacket material shall be as defined by ASTM D1248,Type II,Class C,Category4 and Grades J4, E7 and E8. 411110 The cable jacket shall contain no metal elements and shall be of a consistent thickness. 16740-3 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 d. Trunk Cable. Single mode fiber optic trunk cable will be utilized to connect the network data loop to all drop cables via the fusion splice process. Each cable will havetraceability of each fiber backtothe original fiber manufacturer'sfiber number and parameters of the fiber. The optical fibers will meet all optical fiber specifications as listed in Section 3.01,C. Thefibercount foreach trunk cable will beas indicated in the project drawings. e. Drop Cable. Single mode fiber optic drop cable will be utilized to connectthetrunk cable to field equipment via fusion splicing. Each cable will have traceability of each fiber back to the original fiber manufacturer's fiber number and parameters of the fiber. The optical fibers will meet all optical fiber specifications as listed in Section2B(4)a. The fiber count for each drop cable will be as indicated in the project drawings. A fan-out kit will be required within the Secondary Fiber Distribution Unit (SFDU)on the terminal end of each drop cable that is utilized for this project. Thefan-out kit will be installed in aclimatemnbolcdenvironment. Ensure that the length of all drop cables,not indicated by drawings, is adjusted for field conditions. Additional costs caused by failure to establish the lengths of any and all drop cables in the field will be atthe Contractor's expense.Color Coding of Buffer Tubes. Buffer tubes containing fibers shall be color coded with distinct and recognizable colors in accordance with EIA-TIA-598-B,"Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding." f. Fiber Optic Cable Jacket Marking. Cable jackets shall be marked withthe manufacturersname,month and year of manufacture, sequential meter or foot markings, a telecommunication handset symbol as required by Section 3506 of the National Electrical Safety Code(N ESC),fiber count and fiber type. The actual length of the cable shall be within-01+1%of the length markings. The print color shall be white,with the exception that cablejackets containing one or more coextruded white stripes,which shall be printed in light blue.The height of the marking shall be approximately 2.5 mm. If the initial marking fails to meet the specified requirements(i.e., improper text statement,color,legibility,or print interval),the cable may be remarked using a contrasting alternate color.The numbering sequence will differ from the previous numbering sequence, and a tag will be attached to both the outside end of the cable and to the reel to indicatethe sequence of remarking. The preferred remarking color will be yellow,with the secondary choice being blue. All loose tubefiberoptic cable,foreach length of cable,will be marked with the following legend: 1) Manufacture Name 2) "OPTICAL CABLE" 3) YearofManufacture. 4) Facility Owner's Representative 5) Number of Fibers 6) SM FOC—Contact INSTALLATION OWNER Representative 16740-4 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 g. Submittals for Fiber Optic Cable. Documentation will consist of catalog sheets, engineering drawings, and maintenance procedures forall fiberoptic cables to be used on this project. As a minimum, fiber optic cable submittals will include the following information: 1) Current Catalog Cut Sheet 2) Manufacture's production cable cross section drawings 3) Manufacture's confirmation letter listing the optical fiber cable(s) 4) Current RUS "Listing Letter"for said cablemanufacturer 5) Cable manufacturers installation procedures and technical support information associated with the cable proposed foruse. 3. Packaging and Shipping of Fiber OpticCable. a. Requirements. The cable will be packaged, wound on spools or reels. Each package will contain only one continuous length of cable. The packaging will be constricted so as to prevent damage to the cable during shipping and handling. When the cable length creates a reel weight exceeding 800 pounds, the manufacturer will be required to supply the cable on a large wooden reel,the reel will be lagged with wooden staves. The cable will be covered with a thermal wrap. The outer end of the cable will be securelyfastened to the reel head so as to preventthe cablefrom becoming loose in transit. The inner end of the cable will project a minimum of ten feet into a slot in the side of the reel or into a housing on the inner slot of the drum, in such a manner to make it available for testing. An arbor hole of 1-1/2-inch minimum is required. Finally,end seals will be applied to each end of the cableto prevent moisture from entering the cable. Reels will be permanently marked with an identification number that can be used by the manufacturer totracethe manufacturing historyofthe cable and the fiber. Each reel will be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it should be rolled to prevent loosening of the cable on the reel. b. Submittal. Submit manufactures cut sheets for all fiber optic cable to be used. 4. Optical Fiber Materials. Optical fiber will be glass and consist of a germania-doped silica core surrounded by concentric silica cladding. The fiber will be a matched clad design manufactured by the Outside Vapor Deposition (OVD) process.All fibers will be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical and environmental requirements of these specifications. The optical fiber utilized in the manufacture of all fiber optic cable for this project will be produced by one manufacturer.The optical fiber characteristics will be in accordance with Section 3.01,C. a. Optical Requirements. Onlydispersion unshifted single modefiberas specified byElA492-CAAA,Class 4a will be utilized in the manufacture of all cable for this project. 16740-5 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 All fibers will be coated with a dual layer acrylate protective coating. The ■ coating will be mechanically or chemically strippable without damaging the \/ fiber. Each optical fiber will be proof tested by the fiber manufacturer at a minimum of 100 kpsi (0.7 GN/m '). The required optical fiber grade will reflect the maximum individual fiber attenuation, to guarantee the required performance of every fiber in the cable at 23 5 C on the original shipping reel. The optical fiber will comply with all optical and mechanical requirements over a storage temperature range of-50 C to +70 C, an installation temperature range of--40 C to+70 C,and an operating temperature range of- 30 C to+70 C. PARAMETERS SINGLE MODE Type Step Index Core Diameter 8.3 him (Nominal) Cladding Diameter 125 bm 1 pm Core to Cladding Diameter 0.5 Atm Coating Diameter(OSP) 245 pm +5 pm Cladding-Noncircularity 1.0% Proof Tensile Test 100 kpsi (0.7 GN/m') Max Attenuation: @ 1310 rim (SM) 0.4 dB/km - - - — i @ 1550 rim (SM) ' 0.3 d8/km Chromatic Dispersion Zero Dispersion 1302/1322 rim Zero Dispersion Slope 0.089 ps/(nm'•Km) Maximum Dispersion 3.5ps/(nm2•Km)for 1285-1330 rim 18ps/(nm'•Km)for 1550 rim I Cut-Off Wavelength 1260 rim b. Submittal.Submitdocumentation fortheopticalfiberthatsufficiently documents that,optical fiber meets all criteria specified in Section 2B. Provide the manufacturer's Standard Operating Procedure(SOP)for installation of this cable. 16740-6 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 c. Color Coding of Individual Optical Fibers. Individual optical fibers will be color coded in accordance with EIA-TIA-598-B, "Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding". The fibers will be colored with ultraviolet(UV)curable inks. 5. Pull Tape. Pull Tape is required. No pull ropes,twine,or pull strings will be used on this project for the purpose of installation. Further,if the plans and specifications indicate pull tape forfuture use do not substitute pull ropes,twine or pull strings for pull tape. a. Requirements. Pull tape will be prefabricated woven polyester tape made from low friction,high abrasion resistant yarns providing a low coefficient of friction. Pull tapes will be prelubricated. Pull tapes will be printed with sequential footage markings for accurate measurement. Pull tapes will be'Zi inch wide and have aminimum tensile strength of 1,250 pounds. b. Submittal.Submit manufacturer cut sheets for pull tapeto be used on this project. 6. Underground Marking Tape. Underground marking tape will be used in all areas where trenching is utilized to install underground conduit.Use marking tape in conjunction with marking posts and marking discs. a. Requirements. The technical specificationsof underground markingtape are identified below,along with applicable testing methods necessaryto establish that a cable submitted for approval meets these specifications. TEST THRESHOLD PROPERTY SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS Standard Weight ASTM D2103 20 lbs/100 feet Thickness—Overall ASTM D2I0 4 mil 3 in.Tensile Break—MD ASTM D882 35 lbs/ft 3 in.Tensile Strength —MD ASTM D882 4 kpsi 3 in.Tensile Break—TD ASTM D882 38 lbs/ft 3 in.Tensile Strength —TD ASTM 882 5 kpsi Elongation— MD—MD ASTM 882 530% 4101 16740-7 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 Elongation—TD—TD ASTM 882 660% Tear Strength ASTM D2261 1.5 lbs/ft b. Labeling Requirements for Underground Marking Tape. Underground marking tape will be a 3-inch wide,tear resistant,corrosion resistantelastic PVC orange tape, imprinted with the legend SM FOC —Contact Facility Representative. This legend will be printed every three (3)feet in black letters. c. Submittal.Submitmanufacturercutsheets and all applicable documentation necessary to establish that the specifications are met for the underground marking tape to be used on this project. 7. Underground Cable Marking Post and Marking Discs. Underground cable marking posts will be used everywhere feasible and practical in all areas where fiber optic cable is installed in underground conduit.This is the preferred method of marking, since it is very visible. Marking posts should be placed every 500 feet in urban area, and every 1000 feet in suburban areas, as well as at every intersection corner and every change in direction. Exception would be locations like downtown where all surfaces are paved,where discs would be more practical. Use marking discs set in concrete or pavement where the use of marking posts is not feasible and practical,i.e.,areas such as downtown where everything is paved and for aesthetics. a. Requirements.Technical specificationsof underground marking posts are identified below. 1) Line Markers will be made from ultraviolet-stabilized High-Density Polyethylene(HDPE) 2) Minimum 3-1/2"O.D.tubular design 3) Text will be hot-stamped into the fittings with an extra u-v clear coat. 4) Crossing casing ventswill be used tohelpmaintain atmosphere conditions. 5) Line markers will require no maintenance afterinstallation. b. Submittal.Submitmanufacturercutsheetsforunderground marking posts and discs to be used on this project. 8. Fiber Optic Connectors a. Requirements. 1) Fiber Optic Connectors will be field installed, SC compatible for single mode applications orST compatible if specified as such on the plans. Ensure that all connectors are the same as the manufacturer's cable. Connectors will be compliant with TIA/EIA 604 and have a tensile strength of lO pounds,with 0.2 dB change. 16740-8 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 Durability will be 0.3 dB change for 500 rematings per FOTP—21. 1111, 2) Fiber Optic Connectors will not exceed the maximum loss listed below for each connector type: ConnectorType Installation Max. Loss SC" Single Mode Field 0.50 dB(Insertion) SC""Single Mode Field -40 dB (+18 C to+26 C) Reflectance C torT e Jnstallation Max. Loss ST' single Mode Field 0.50 dB(Insertion) sr "Single Mode Field -40 dB (+18 C to+26 C) Reflectance 3) Submittal.Submit manufacturercutsheetsforfiberopticconnectors to be used on this project. 9. Fiber Optic Adapters a. Requirements. 1) Fiber Optic Adapters will be SC type. If ST type adapters are specified on the plans ensure compatibilitywith STstyleconnectors. SC Body Parts Metal or ceramic Sleeve Zirconia Testing TIA/EIA 604 and TIA 586 B.3 compliant ST Body Parts Brass or Nickel Plated Brass Body Construction Precision-machined Sleeve Zirconia Panel Thickness 0.06" minimum to 0.13"maximum Withdrawal Force 200-600 grams Testing TIA/EIA 604 compliant Durability 500 cycles per EIA 455-21 2) Adapter unit will include Nut, lockwasher, and dust cap. D. Patch Cords 1. Requirements.All fiber patch cords will meet National Electric Code(NEC)jacketing requirements for this project's application and will have outer jacket coloration of yellow for single mode patch cords. All duplex patch cords will be of a zip cord design cprand will have connector boots of two(2)colors,namelywhite oroff-white for one leg 16740-9 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 of the duplex cord(non-printed zip leg)and red for the opposite leg(printed zip leg) /1111) or the duplex cord. Connector losses will not exceed those established in Section 3.01,C. No splices ofanytype are allowed within an assembly. Each assembly is tobefully tested and those test results placed on a test tag for each mated pairof connectors.Connectors will then be attached to one end of each pair within the assembly. Each assembly will be individually packaged within a plastic bag with the submitted manufacturer's part number marked clearly on the outside of said bag. Label each installed patch cord as directed by the Engineer. 2. Submittals for Patch Cords Submit catalog sheets, engineering drawings and specifications for patch cords for approval prior to commencement of work. E. Equipment Racks and Bays (where applicable). Install equipment racks and bays at designated locations as shown on the plans, as detailed in accordance with these specifications,and as directed. 1. Requirements. Provide all new equipment in strictaccordance with the details shown on the plans and in the specifications. At the "head end" and hubs all distribution hardware, network electronics, video equipment,VDS processors,and all controllers and miscellaneous electronics will be mounted within a 7 feet high by 24 inch wide bay or cabinet for 19 inch wide mounting rack(s). Each installed and populated individual rack segment will be identified as a "bay". The primary structure material of each rack will be factory painted steel. Each rack will be field attachable to one another in a modular configuration.The frames themselves will be equipped with components that will allow for the field management of cables,jumpers and pigtails as mayor may not be used in the interconnect system. All these components will be manufactured in such a way as to meet all fiber bend radius requirements. Above and below each rack will be an enclosed fiber management system allowing for proper field cross connect management. All rack ends will be sealed with"end caps"thus protecting any patch cords,cable,or pig tails which may be routed at that location. Between each rack will be mounted jumper management rings or loops that allow for the efficient management, routing,and protection of all cable patch cords/jumpers,or pig tails used within the rack system to interconnect the network electronics. Additionally, management troughs will be mounted at the top and bottom of each rack and ten made continuous as bays are attached. 2. Submittal. Submit all manufacturer's cut sheets for equipment racks and bays. F. Fiber Optic Cable Aerial Storage System (where applicable). Install a Fiber Optic Cable Aerial Storage System at designated locations as shown on the plans,as detailed in accordance with these specifications,and as directed. 1. Requirements.Provide all newequipment in strict accordance with the details shown on the plans and in the specifications. Aerial Location. Used to store, and protect the minimum bend radius,of a surplus length of fiber cable at splice points,or for future expansion along aerial messenger span fiber optic cable installations. a. Thestorage units will be a snowshoe type,designed to maintain the minimum 16740-10 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 bending radius of the fiber optic cable indicated in the fiber optic cable specifications. b. Thesnowshoe storage units will be constructed of aluminum with continuous welds at crossbars and ends. c. Each snowshoe storage unit will be double coated with a baked on,polyester powder coat finish. d. Design snowshoe with 12"radius with a channel width(I.D.)of 1.25". e. Tie eyelets will accommodate both stainless steel and tie wrap securing methods. f. To counteract wind loading,aerial fiber optic cable storage units should be installed as close to span support poles as feasible. g. Do not install snowshoe above a roadway ordriveway. h. All installation hardware includingstainless steel mounting bolts,stainless nuts and washers are included. Ensure quantity of fiber optic cable stored is per plan drawings. 2. Submittals for Fiber Optic Aerial Storage System (as applicable) Submit catalog sheets,engineering drawings and specifications for a Fiber Optic Aerial Storage System to the Engineer for approval priorto commencement of work. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Construction.Install fiber opticcable without changingthe optical and mechanical characteristics of the cables. Perform all work in a workmanlike manner and meet the highest industry standards, and in accordance with the requirements of the latest editions of the NEC and National Electrical Safety Code. B. Installation 1. Installation Methods Install fiber optic cable and communication equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended practices. Install fiber optic cable on poles or in conduits as specified in the plans. In conduits,if required, relocate existing cable to allow new fiber optic cable routing in conduits. When pulling the cable,do not exceed the bending radius.Ensure a minimum bend radius with no load at 10 x fiber optic cable diameter. Minimum bend radius at maximum stringing tension is 20x fiber optic cable diameter. Use rollers,wheels,or guides that have radii greater than the bending radius. Provide separate grooved rollers for each cable when simultaneously pulling multiple cables.Use a lubricating compound to minimize friction. Use fuse links and breaks. Measure the pulling tension. Do not exceed a pulling tension of 2700 N (600 lbf). Seal conduits with a two (2) part urethane after installing cable. Bury an approved copper tracer wire directly inside the conduit forthe entire length of the conduit as directed by the field engineer. Ensure tracer wire is continuous between communication service boxes. �+ 2. Fusion Splicing 16740-11 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 Fusion splicing is the only approved splicing method. Fusion splicing consists of aligning the cores of two clean (stripped of coating), cleaved fibers or a group of such fibers (mass splice) and fusing the ends together with an electric arc. The fiber ends are positioned under a microscope or a high- resolution video monitor and then aligned using various precision movement micro- positioners (commonly stepping motors or piezoelectric devices). High voltage electrodes contained inthe splicerconductan arc across thefiberends asthefibers are moved together, thus fusing the fibers together. Optimum core alignment will be verified prior to splicing and splice estimated devices and profile alignment algorithms. Fusion splicing equipment will provide the operator with reference estimated splice loss measurements. Further, it will automatically align fibers, determine cleave quality and fuse the fibers. No splice will result in a loss of more than 0.03 dB, as measured by an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) bi- directionally. Maintain records of the OTDR measurements and submit this documentation to the installation owner representativefor review and final approval ofthefiber optic cable plant. Perform optical power meter test on the single mode fiber at 1310 rim and 1550 rim.All testing requirements are detailed in Section 3.01,C. C. Testing. Perform tests in accordance with testing requirements in this Item. All optical fibers within each cable will be factory tested by the manufacturer for continuity and to establish the attenuation of each fiber prior to shipping. Testing will be conducted, and the results documented in accordance with GR-20-CORE(Bellcore(Telcordia))Issue 10.Thistesting will be conducted immediately prior to shipping while the fiber is on the reel and the results will be provided with each cable reel and affixed within the reel wrapping.An additional copyofthe test documentation will be provided tothe Engineer underseparate cover. Ma minimum,the results provided in these reports will indicate attenuation foreach fiberin the cable in units of dB/km at both 1310 rim and at 1550 rim. 1. Test Methods. a. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer(OTDR)Tests.Use the OTDR to measure fiber optic cable for overall attenuation (signal loss dB/km), fiber cable length,and identify fiber optic cable anomalies such as breaks.Perform four (4)OTDR tests.They are as follows: 1) Acceptance test 2) Pre installation test 3) Posttermination test 4) Final end to end test 2. OTDR Settings: a. Use the file name ofthefiber scan to indicate the location or direction thetest was run from, as well as the fiber number being tested. b. Setthe"A"cursor at the beginning of the fiber trace and set the"B"cursorat the end of the fiber trace.The distance to cursor"B"indicates the length of the fiber cable segment being measured. c. Match the index of refraction to the index of the factory report. 16740-12 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 1111.0 d. Set the loss indicator to dB's/km for the acceptance test. e. The reflectance is automatically set internally by the OTDR. f. Set the pulse width ata medium range.Change the pulse width to a slow pulse width when an anomaly occurs on the fiber trace so that it can be examined closely. Set the average to medium speed.Change the average to slow speed when an anomaly appears on the fiber trace to allow for closer examination of the anomaly. h. Set wavelength at 1310 rim and 1550 rim forsingle mode cable sothe cable is tested at both windows for each type of cable. Show all settings on test result fiber scans. 3. Optical Power Meter Test. Use the optical power meter test to check fiber optic cable for fiber optic cable anomalies such as breaks causing dB loss. Test single mode fiber optic cable at both 1310 rim and 1550 rim. In order to evaluate results solely for the fiber optic cable, initially calculate loss from connector to connector and subtract this value when testing the fiber optic cable. 4. Pre-InstallationTests.Test and record the fiber optic cable at the site storage area prior to installation. Test each optical fiber in the cable from one end with an OTDR compatible with wavelength and fiber type. Check testing for length, point discontinuity, and approximate attenuation. Record each measurement by color,location,and type of fiber measured.Perform a measurement from the opposite end of that fiber in case a measurement cannot be made from one end. Wait for notification if loss per km exceeds manufacturer's test data by more than 0.5 dB/km or point discontinuity greater that 0.2 dB. Perform this test within three (3) days from receipt of the fiber optic cable. Test overall attenuation (dB/km),total cable length, anomalies,or cable problems.Test cable at both windows (1310 rim and 1550 rim for single mode cable). Compare factory test results against test results and return to manufacture if different. If identical,document the test results.Deliver documentation for future reference. 5. Post Installation Tests. Immediately perform the post installation testafterthefiber optic cable has been installed. Re-test and re-record each optical fiber in the cable after installation,before termination,for loss characteristics. Test both directions of operations of the fiber. Test cable for overall attenuation,cable segment length,and damage.Usethesame OTDR settings for Post Installation Test as the Pre-Installation Test.Replace any cable segment that is damaged during thetestand document test results.Delivertests results for future reference. 6. PostTermination Test.Perform the post termination test as the cable is terminated or spliced, whether there is termination of fiber cable to fiber cable or fiber cable to equipment.Check atten uation,fusion ortermination point problems,and overallfiber cable segment.Determine if the attenuation and quality of the termination meets the specification;if not,repeat the termination until it meets specification requirements. Test the fiber segment for attenuation and anomalies after termination acceptance. Document and submit test results as stated in this Item afterfibersegment acceptance. Testthe splices at 1310 nm for single-mode and provide printouts of the splicetests.Take tests in both directions and record theaverage. Use a launch reel of the same type of fiber to test the fusion splices on pigtails. Use the same OTDR settings for Post Termination Testas the Post Installation Test and 16740-13 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 Pre-Installation Test,except move the"B"cursor to the middle of the termination or splice point.After the termination,return"8"cursor to the end of the fiber segment and measure overall length and attenuation. Conduct Power Meter Test after termination of cable is completed. 7. Subsystem Tests. Perform Network Subsystem Tests after integration to the fiber optic network.Test the capability of the fiber optic cable to transmit video and digital information.Complete and submit approved data forms for review and rejection or acceptance. Correct and substitutecomponents in thesubsystem ifthe Subsystem Tests fail and repeat the tests. Prepare and submit a report if a component was modified as result of the Subsystem Test failure. Describe in the report the failure and action taken to remedy the situation. 8, Final End to End Test and ping test. Perform Final End to End Test on the entire system with both the OTDR and Power Meter after fiber cable segments of the system are terminated. Also, perform a ping test between all controllers and switches on the system. A report of successful pings shall be submitted to the engineer/project manager.The installation owner must be presentduring the ping test. Perform the Final End to End Test: a. Measure the overall fiber cable system length. b. Measure the overall system attenuation,and c. Check for anomalies. Document and submit results as stated in this Item,after test acceptance. 9. Test Procedures.Submit test procedures and data forms forthe pre-installation,post- installation,subsystem,and system integrationtestforapproval.Testprocedureswill require approval before performing tests. Submit one (1) copy of the data forms containing data and quantitative results,as well as an authorized signature. Submit a copy of the OTDR and Power Meter Test results as an electronic copy; supply original software packages and PC for OTDR results interpretation. 10. Submittals for Installation Submit documentation including all OTDR,optical Power Meter Tests,and end-to- end attenuation tests performed on the as-built cable system. Submitthree(3)units each of the hardware components/equipment required for the OTDR and the power meter tests to Engineer. D. Documentation Submittal Checklist for Fiber Optic Specifications.This is a summary of the submittals included in this Specification. 1. Fiber Optic Cable Technician Qualifications Submitdocumentation to ensure that Fiber OpticCable Technician meets all requirements stated in Section 6A. 2. Fiber Optic Cable Manufacturer Manufacturer 150-9001 and TL 9000 Certification.Proof of compliance with Bellcore (Telcordia)GR-20-CORE,Issue No.1 TL9000.Documentation for each cable indicating that the cable is listed by the Rural Utilities Service(RUS),7CFR 1755.900 or PE-90 if in 16740-1.4 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 toe transition to RUS. Manufacturing Site testing procedures and results. 3. Cable Documentation Current Catalog Cut Sheet. Manufacturer's production cable cross section drawings. Manufacturer's confirmation letter listing the optical field cables.Current RUS"Listing Letter". letter of certification forGR-20-CORETL 9000 compliance. Manufacturer's installation procedures and technical support information. 4. Packaging and Shipping of Fiber Optic Cable Submit manufacturer's test results documented in accordance with GR-20-CORE Issue 10.Attenuation for each fiber in the cable in units of dB/km at both 1310 rim and 1550 rim. 5. Optical Fiber Materials Documentation that cable meets all requirements ofdissedionand manufacturer's SOP for installation. 6. Pull Tape Manufacturer's cut sheets for pull tape. 7. Underground Marking Tape Manufacturer cut sheets and documentation necessary to ensure that tape meets all specification requirements. 8. Underground Cable Marking Posts and Discs Manufacturer's cut sheets for proposed posts and discs. 9. Fiber Optic Connectors Manufacturer's cut sheets for fiber optic connectors for proposed use. 10. Patch Cords Submit catalog sheets, engineering drawings and specifications for patch cords for approval. 11. Equipment Racks and Bays Manufacturer's cut sheets for equipment racks and bays for proposed use. 12. Testing Submit OTDR, Optical Power Meter, end-to-end attenuation, and ping tests performed on as-built cable system. E. Training Requirements for Technicians 1. Fiber Optic Cable Technician Qualifications a. Work to Be Performed By Fiber Optic Technicians Any task requiring the opening of the fiber optic cable jacket,installation of fiber optic connectors,fusion splicing together of two fibers,arthe testing of any fiber optic cable,drop cable,or patch cords will be performed by Fiber Optic Technicians that have been pre-approved bythe Engineer. b. Minimum Requirements for Fiber Optic Technicians Certifications—All fiber optic technicians will maintain Fiber Optic Installer Certification by the Electronic Technical Association(ETA)or approved equal. It should be noted that approved fiber optic technicians will maintain all certifications on their person at all times while working on the subject project. Training—All fiberoptictechnicians will beabletodemonstratetheir participation in at least one of the following: c. Attendance and successful completion of at least onefourday"Installation of 16790-15 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 Fiber Optic Products School" conducted by a major manufacturer of fiber optic products within one calendar year of the commence work date of this project.Said course outline will be submitted for review by the Engineer in order to determine if the course content is adequate to address the work requirements described above. d. Demonstration of attendance and successful completion of an independent generic four(4)dayschool that encompasses all aspects of outside plantfiber optictechnician certification within one calendar year of the commence work date of this project. Said course outline will be submitted for review by the Engineer in orderto determine if the course content is adequateto addressthe work requirements established in this section. Work HistoryforFiber OpticTechnicians—All FiberOpticTechnicians who will perform work on this project will be able to demonstrate a minimum of three (3) years work experience, with a minimum of eighteen (18) months continuous work experience during this timeframe. Work experience will be any work activity involving those work elements described in this section. F. Submittals for Fiber Optic Technician Qualifications 1. Submit to the Engineer all documentation necessary to demonstrate that all fiber optic technicians providing services on this contract meet the minimum requirements established in this section,prior to the start of construction.Written approval of the technicians submitted for review by the Engineer is required prior to beginning any work on thefiberopticcableplant.AddressanydeficienciesnotedbytheEngineerpriorto beginning any work on the fiber optic cable plant. G. TxDot Fiber Standards 1. Refer to attached pages from TxDot Standards that apply to this project.Specifically refer to fiber cable spicing at existing ground box. 2. Where discrepancies occur between specifications and TxDot standards, contact Engineer for clarifications. -END OF SECTION- J 16740-16 of 16 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16936 PILOT AND MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. All equipment and devices shall be NEMA rated. IEC rated equipment and devices are not acceptable. 0. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16012 — "Electrical Work,' for submittal requirements. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pilot and control devices for instrumentation and control (I&C)system. 2. Products listed are applicable where indicated on plans or required in other specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PUSHBUTTON/SELECTOR SWITCH CONTROL UNITS AND PILOT LIGHTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Class 9001,Type K 2. Cutler-Hammer 10250T 3. Allen Bradley 800T 4. Or, pre-approved equal B. Construction: 1. Heavy duty 2. Watertight 3. Oiltight 4. Base mounting 5. Flush panel mounting 6. Size to mount in 30.5 mm diameter opening without adapter. Smaller units are not CPO acceptable. 7. Padlock attachments, where required, constructed of metal. Plastic material is not 16936-1 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 acceptable. J 8. Legend plates,as required,for type of operation or as specified elsewhere. C. Pushbuttons: 1. Flush head unless specified elsewhere. 2. Contact Blocks: a. Double break silver contacts b. AC Ratings: 7,200 VA make,720 VA break c. Single pole, double throw or double pole, single throw d. Up to six(6)tandem blocks 3. Maintained contact unless specified elsewhere. 4. Non-illuminated. 5. Legend plates,as required,for type of operation or as specified elsewhere. D. Selector Switches: 1. Maintained position unless specified elsewhere 2. Contact Blocks: a. Double break silver contacts b. AC Rating:7,200 VA make,720 VA break c. Single pole,double throw or double pole,single throw d. Up to six(6)tandem blocks 3. Operators: a. Number of positions as specified elsewhere b. Standard knob type unless specified elsewhere E. Pilot Lights: 1. LED,high visibility type 2. Colored lenses as specified elsewhere 3. Interchangeable lenses 4. Push to test 5. Legend plates as specified elsewhere F. Enclosures: 1. Mounted in control or instrument panel as specified elsewhere 2. Control Station: a. Environment: 1) NEMA 12 in general areas 2) NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel in wet locations or outdoors. yell) 16936-2 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 b. Flush or surface mounted as specified elsewhere. 1) Provide flush mounted pull box. G. Nameplates: 1. Control Stations: a. Engraved laminated plastic b. Letters 3/16 in. high c. White letters on black background d. Identify per equipment controlled 2.02 MOTOR STARTER CONTROL RELAYS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. Or pre-approved equal B. Construction: 1. Industrial type 2. 300 V rated 3. AC operation 4. Pressure wire connectors C. Operating Data: 1. Pickup Time: 11 ms maximum 2. Dropout Time: 6 ms maximum D. Coil: 1. Molded construction 2. 120 VAC,60 Hz 3. Continuous rated 4. Color coded to indicate status 5. Pilot duty 6. 60A make,6A break, (120 V inductive) E. Contacts: 1. Double break 2. Silver alloy 3. Convertible 4. Color coded to indicate status 5. Pilot duty 6. 60A make, 6A break,(120V inductive) 16936-3 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 F. Track mounting capability. G. Accessories: 1. Add-on pole attachment: a. 4 NO and 4 NC contacts b. Add-on to 0 to 4 pole relay 2. Latch attachment. 3. Pneumatic Timer Attachment: a. Single pole,double throw, double break timed contact. b. Adjustable 0.2 to 60 sec. c. Repeat accuracy of±15 percent. d. Convertible timing mode. 4. Transient Timing Mode: Suppress coil transients to 300 V or less. H. All relays to be 4PDT type. 2.03 CONTROL RELAYS A. Manufacturers: 1. Potter and Brumfield 2. Struthers Dunn 3. Or pre-approved equal B. Operating Data: 1. Pickup Time: 13 ms maximum. 2. Dropout Time: 10 ms maximum. 3. Operating Temperature: -45°C to 70°C. C. AC Coil: 1. 120 or 240 Vac. 2. Continuous rated 3. 3.5 VA inrush 4. 1.2 VA sealed 5. 50 to 60 Hz 6. Minimum Dropout Voltage: 10%of coil rated voltage. D. DC Coil: 1. 24 or 120 Vdc. 2. Continuous rated 3. Minimum Coil Resistance 16936-4 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 41110. a. 24 Vdc:450 ohm b. 120 Vdc:9,000 ohm E. Contacts: 1. Silver cadium oxide for 1 amp or less resistive load 2. Gold flashed fine silver,gold diffused 3. 4 Form C 4. 120 VAC 5. 20 amp make, 1.5 amp break(inductive) F. Rated at 10 million operations G. Plug-in sockets H. Enclosed and protected by polycarbonate cover Provide relay retaining clips. J. All relays to be 4PDT type. 2.04 TIME DELAY RELAY A. ATC#319D-016,with 2 SPDT switches rated 5 amps at 120 Volt,contacts and coil,plug in base and socket, 5 ranges, .02 seconds to 30 minutes. B. AGASTAT#7022AC, Instantaneous open on energization,time delay close on de-energization. Time range 1.5 seconds to 15 seconds, 120 volt,60 Hz C. ATC Model#319D-134,with 2 S.P.D.T.switches rated 5 Amps at 120 Volt,contacts and coil,plug in base and socket,3 ranges, .1 to 100 seconds. D. Macromatic Industrial Controls,Model#TAA1U,with two(2)S.P.D.P.switches rated 3 amps at 250 volt contacts, 24-240VAC/DC coil, plug-in base, six (6) functions, sixteen (16) ranges, 0.5 seconds to 10 hours. E. Or approved equal 2.05 ELAPSED TIME METER A. Manufacturers: 1. Cramer#6356/HRS. 2. Digits: Five(5), non-resettable. 3. Power: 120 VAC,60 Hz. B. Manufacturers: 1. Cramer#6355 surface mounted. 2. Digits: Five (5), non-resettable 3. Power: 120 VAC, 60 Hz 2.06 TIMERS A. 24 Hour Clock Timer(Repeat Cycle): 1. Manufacturers: 16936-5 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 a. Tork Time Controls b. Intermatic c. Or pre-approved equal 2. Mounting:Surface 3. Display:24-hr LCD 4. Contacts:One (1)SPDT rated 20A 5. Set Points:288 per 24 hr. 6. Skip Feature: 1 to 7-day adjustable 7. Minimum On-Off Time:5 min. 8. Time cycle programmable by keypad 9. Power: 120 VAC,60 Hz B. Interval/Duration Timer: 1. Manufacturers:ATC or equal. 2. Mounting: Plug-in with dust tight cover 3. Type:Integrated circuit 4. Range:As indicated on drawings 5. Contacts:Two (2) DPDT contacts rated 10 amp 6. Power: 120 VAC, 60 Hz. 2.07 PRESSURE SWITCHES A. Prosense PS025 Series Pressure Switch,Model No.PSD25-OP-145H or other model as required. (Where shown on Plans.) B. Electronic,adjustable dials, pressure switch. Prosense Series PSD25 with factory cable. C. Bourdon Tube Pressure Switches with SPDT or DPDT mercury switch, adjustable dead band/differential, shall be used for all pump control and alarm applications. Size for range required. (Where shown on plans.) D. Mercoid Series DA and DS Bourdon Tube Pressure Switches, NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosure, manual reset,SPDT,mercury switch rated 4 amps at 120 volts. (Where shown on plans.) E. Mercoid Series BB Differential Pressure Switches, Bourdon Tube,SPOT,mercury switch rated 4 amps at 120 VAC. (Where shown on plans.) F. Mercoid Series PO Ultra Sensitive Large Diaphragm Pressure Switches, where application requires. G. Honeywell Model L404A Pressure Switch 10-150 psi operating range, 8-16 psi subtractive differential, 120V, breaks on pressure rise. (Where shown on Plans.) H. Mercoid Series DA Model No.DRW-33-153L-7,5-150 psi range,NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosure, manual reset,SPOT,mercury switch rated 4 amps at 120V. (Use all well discharge applications.) Mercoid Model No. DA-31-153-3A, 1/8—20 PSIG, brass bourdon tube, SPOT, mercury switch rated 4A at 120 VAC. (Where shown on Plans.) 1. No exceptions for Manufacturer,series,or type switches without written approval. 2.08 EXTERIOR MOUNTED ALARM LIGHT A. Manufacturers: 1. Edwards 16936-6 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 2. Appleton Electric Company 3. Crouse Hinds 4. Or pre-approved equal B. 120 VAC C. Suitable for use in wet location,gasketed. D. Cabinet mounted, provide mounting lugs. Body to include outlet box. E. Aluminum mounting hood. F. Red glass globe with guard. G. %inch conduit hubs 2.09 EXTERIOR MOUNTED ALARM HORN A. Manufacturers: 1. Edwards 2. Or,pre-approved equal. B. 120 VAC C. Suitable for use in wet location,gasketed. D. Cabinet mounted, provide mounting lugs. Body to include outlet box. E. Aluminum mounting hood. F. % inch conduit hubs 2.10 ROTATING BEACON A. Manufacturers: 1. Edwards: 40 Watts, 75 FPM, 120 Volt, 50-LMP, 4CW lamp red acrylic dome lens, Edwards#52R-N5-40W with wall mounted bracket Edwards#WBR. 2.11 ALTERNATOR A. Manufacturers: 1. Diversified Electronics: a. Two(2) Pump Duplexor: 1) 24 VAC/DC,ARA-24-ABA. 2) 48 VDC,ARA-48-ABA 3) 120 VAC/DC,ARA-120-ABA 4) 208 VAC,ARA-208-ABA 5) 240 VAC,ARA-240-ABA b. Three(3) Pump Triplexor: 1) 24 V.ARA-24-AFE 4111# 2) 120 V,ARA-120-AFE 16936-7 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 c. Four(4) Pump Quadraplexor: 1) 24 V,ARA-24-AGE 2) 120 V,ARA-120-AGE d. Two (2)/Three(3) Pump Duplexor/Triplexor: 120 V,ARA-120-AME e. Three(3)/Four(4) Pump Triplexor/Quadraplexor: 120 V,ARA-120-ANE f. Five (5)-Pump Pentaplexor: 120 V,ARP-100 B. Six(6)-Pump Hexaplexor: 120 V,ARA-100 2. Time Mark Corporation: 120 V, B 471 3. Macromatic Industrial Controls: Two(2)pump duplexor,120 volt,ARP120A6,240 volt, ARP240A6 4. Or equal as pre-approved by Engineer B. Provide automatic alternation of energizing motor starters. C. Permit operation of units singly or together as called by pilot devices. D. N.O. auxiliary contacts from motor starters required to operate alternator. E. Alternator shall provide for operation of standby or lag unit through second pilot device in event of failure of lead unit or first pilot device or alternator coil. F. With pump selector switch for operation of two(2),three(3),four(4)and five(5)pump systems. 2.12 PHASE FAIL PROTECTION DEVICES A. Diversified Electronics Model#SLD-440-ALE,480 Volt,3 Phase. , B. Diversified Electronics Model#SLD-220-ALE, 240 Volt,3 Phase. C. Macromatic Industrial Controls, Model#PMDU, 208-480 Volt,3 Phase D. Franklin Electric or Equal, Submonitor Model #5860005000, 190-600Volt, 3 Phase, with detachable display E. Franklin Electric or Equal, Submonitor Model #5860005100, 190-600 Volt, 3 Phase, with detachable display F. Franklin Electric or Equal,Submonitor Model#D3 Dwonload Tools,with software and USB cable 2.13 FLOW SWITCH A. Vane operated stainless steel switches with vane length sized to maximum diameter of pipe. 1. Flowtect Series V4 Vane Operated Flow Switch, Model No. V4-5S-U-D for vertical mounting. 2. Flowtect Series V4 Vane Operated Flow Switch, Model No.V4-SS-2-U-D-V with upward flow option for horizontal mounting(vertical pipe with upflow.) 3. Static 0 Ring, Model No. 1520B-F5A-C-W1-EF-X,vertical mounting only. 4. Potter Model IFS-WP. 5. Or pre-approved equal. B. Thermal mass sensing stainless steel flow sensor with controls. 1. Kaydem Instruments, CMP 112 and 115 Flow Switch Vie 1.6936-8 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 4111, 2.14 UNIVERSAL AC CURRENT SENSOR A. Manufacturer: 1. Entrelec,SSAC, Inc.—P.O. Box 1000, Baldwin, NY, 13027 2. Or, approved equal. B. TSC, ECS, ECSH, and ECSL Series: Provides relay contact closure when current reaches pre-set level. C. Install per Manufacturer's instructions. D. Sensor to be rated at 125%of current rating. 2.15 CURRENT TRANSDUCER A. Manufacturers: 1. NK Technologies 2. Ohio Semitronics, Inc. 3. Or, approved equal B. AT Series: Current transformer with signal conditioner. Split or solidcore as applicable. 420 model with 4-20 MA output. Self powered. 0-200 amp range. U.L.listed. C. A.C. Current Transformer Model No. MCTS, 005E or 005E2 (as shown on plans) with r Manufacturer's recommended CT rated per circuit maximum amps x 1.25. ` D. AT/ATR Series: 0-200 amp range or, as required by motor current rating. E. Transducer to be rated for 125%of voltage rating. F. Size unit to detect peak inrush current of motor. 2.16 VOLTAGE TRANSDUCER A. Manufacturer: 1. Ohio Semitronics,Inc. 2. Or, approved equal B. A.C.Voltage Transducer Model VT,rated per circuit maximum voltage x 1.25. Select version that matches shown on plans. C. Transducer to be rated for 125%of current rating. 2.17 FLOAT SWITCH A. Wastewater/Non-Potable Use: 1. Manufacturers: a. Anchor Scientific b. Conery MFG, Inc. c. Pre-approved equal. 4111, 2. Construction: 16936-9 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 a. Direct acting. b. Polyprosylene body. c. Form C type contact mercury switch. d. 10 amps at 230 VAC maximum. e. Integral cord weight-zinc plated cast iron B. Potable Water Use: 1. Manufacturer: a. U.S. Filter b. Pre-approved equal 2. Construction: a. Model 9GEF, mercury free 2.18 DC INPUT, FIELD CONFIGURABLE ISOLATOR A. Manufacturer: 1. Action Instruments, Model ACTIONI/Q Q406 2. Or,approved equal. B. Construction: 1. Provides one or two fully isolated DC output signals in proportion to one or two DC inputs. 2. Field Configurable:4-20 ma,0-1 ma,0-10V or 0-20 ma. 3. 120 V power source. 2.19 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL PROBE AND LEVEL RELAY A. Level Probe: 1. Manufacturer: ITT Flygt/MultiTrode Model 1.0/10-l0M. 2. Description: Submersible level sensing probe suspended from top of the wet well via power cable. 3. Construction: Probe casing I14-inch epoxy filled PVC,sensor-Avesta 254 SMO high-grade stainless steel alloy,cable PVC/PVC multi-core conductors (ten per probe). B. Level Relay: 1. Manufacturer: ITT Flygt/MultiTrode Model MTRA. 2. Description: Level control relay for operation of pumps from the level probe input inthe back up mode. 3. Display: Front face high intensity LED indication, power on (green),alarm on(red),and pump on (yellow). 4. Sensor: Three(3) inputs, 12 VDW,0.8 mA max per sensor. 5. Sensitivity: 1K,4K,20K,and 80K ohms adjustable via dip switches. 16936-10 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 6. Relay Output: Two(2)sets of NO output w/adjustable time delay. Power requirements options for 240 VAC, 110 VAC, 24 VAC or 10-30 VDC. 2.20 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSDUCER Non-Potable Water Application: A. Manufacturer: 1. CA Briggs 2. Mercoid 3. Pre-approved equal B. Model: Blue Ribbon Bird Cage Water Level Sensor—Model BC 001 C. Surge Protector Blue Ribbon Corp.Surge Protector Model BCP 3000 D. Power: 10-30 VDC E. Output:4-20 mA. F. Accuracy: plus/minus 0.1 percent of calibrated span, minimum. G. Range: 0.2 to 100 meters of H10, minimum. H. Sensor: Flush mounted ceramic. Heavy stainless steel body. 1. Cable: Heavy duty,submersible rated with strain relief device. K. Cable Length: Wet well depth plus length to terminal box with 10 feet slack coiled in terminal box(not in wet wells). �r L. Kellum grip with protective bushing. Suspend on stainless steel cable clear of pump and 4 inches above intake. Clamp transducer cable to stainless steel cable with suitable stainless steel clamps at 24-inch intervals. Provide epoxy coated lead weight at end of stainless steel cable. Provide stainless steel cable strain relief device at transducer that fits threaded connection at transducer, and that has ring for support by stainless steel cable. II. Potable Water Application: A. Manufacturer: 1. Dynotek 2. Pre-approved equal B. Model: Slim Line C. Power: 9-30 VDC D. Output:4 mA at 12.7 psi 20 mA at full scale. E. Accuracy: plus/minus 0.25 percent of full scale B.L.S. F. Pressure Range: 50, 100, 200, 350, 520,750 and 1000 psi sealed gauge. G. Diameter: 7.1 in. H. Heavy stainless steel 316 L body. Cable: Heavy duty shield 2 conductors,submersible rated with strain relief device. 0.30 in.TPE alloy jacket and kevlar 130 lb. min.tensile strength. J. Cable Length: Well depth plus length to terminal box with 10 feet slack coiled in terminal box. 16936-11 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 2.21 SIGNAL CONVERTER/ISOLATION AMPLIFIER A. Manufacturers: 1. MCR-C Series manufactured by Phoenix Contact. 2. AKT Series manufactured by Wieland Manufacturing. B. Voltage to current and current to voltage conversion. C. Current to current isolation amplifier. 2.22 ETHERNET SWITCH—FIVE (5)PORT A. Manufacturer and Model: 1. MOXA EDS-828 Series Layer 3 Modular Managed Ethernet Switch 2. CISCO Industrial Ethernet(IE) 1000 Series Lightly Managed rugged ethernet switch. 3. Red Lion N-Tron 700 Series Managed Ethernet Switches 4. Or,approved equal. B. Features: 1. Plug-n-Play, Ring Redundancy solution(recovery time<300 ms) 2. 10/100BaseT(X) (RJ-45), 100BaseFX(SC optical fiber transceiver connection port). 3. Support IEEE 802.3/802.3u/802.3x. + 4. Store and Forward switching process type. J 5. 10/100M, Full/Half-Duplex, MDI, MDI-X auto-sensing. 6. SPAN/Port Mirroring 7. Alarm I/O C. Specifications: 1. RJ-45 Ports: 10/100BaseT(X)auto MDI-X negotiation speed,F/H duplex mode,and auto MDI/MDI-X connection. 2. Fiber Ports: SIP Transceivers and connectors as required for speed and connection types. 3. LED Indicators 4. Power: a. External power supplies as required to power additional network modules. b. Input Voltage: 12 to 48 VDC c. Input Current(@ 24V): 2.1 A D. Design: 1. Operating temperature ranges from 0 to 60°C,or extended operating temperature from -40 to 70°C. 2. IP30, rugged high-strength metal case. 3. For hazardous location (CLASS 1 DIV.2) 4. DIN-Rail or panel mounting ability. 16936-12 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 E. Execution: 1. For additional parts, provide switch with similar characteristics. 2. Provide Manufacturer's recommended power supply. 3. Install per Manufacturer's instructions. F. Limited Warranty: Five(5)years. 2.23 ETHERNET SWITCH—MULTI-PORT—(NOT APPLICABLE) 2.24 FLOW-NO-FLOW SWITCH A. Manufacturer and Model: 1. Flow Technology Uniprobe Flow-No-Flow Switch 2. Or pre-approved equal. B. Specifications: 1. Flow Threshold Switch Point 2. Maximum No-Damage Flow Velocity 3. Response Time 4. Switch Capacity 5. Switch Configuration 6. Operating Temperature Range 7. Maximum Operating Pressure a. UP01 b. SPO1 8. Power Required 9. Construction of 316 Stainless Steel 10. NEMA 4X or Explosion-Proof Enclosure 11. Omni-Directional Flow Sensing 12. Clean-In-Place 13. Operates in corrosive or abrasive liquids and gases. 2.25 PANEL GAUGES A. Provide front flange,flush, panel mounted 6-inch diameter and with lower back mount type. B. Range: 1. Water Pressure: 0 to 150 psi. 2. Ground Storage Tank Level: 0 to 50 feet. 3. Other measured parameter range plus 25 percent. C. Accuracy: 1 percent or better. D. Manufacturers: 16936-13 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 1. Marshal Town 2. Or approved equal. 2.26 INTRUSION SWITCHES A. Doors: 1. On all entrance doors for alarm switch and, on MCC and control panel doors for intrusion or light operation,install Model E700,DPDT switch as manufactured by ERSCE except where shown otherwise on plans. 2. MicroSwitch,applicable model,where indicated on plans. 3. Special Applications: a. Where indicated on Plans for loose fitted doors and/or for areas where subject to damage,install GRI Model 4400 magnetic switches with stainless steel cable. B. Overhead Rollup Doors: 1. For overhead door applications,install ADEMCO Model 958-2 Magnetic OHD Contractor, or approved equal. 2.27 DC/DC CONVERTER A. Manufacturer and Model: AGM Electronics,Group 4000 or, as pre-approved in writing. B. Supply Voltage: 8—90 VDC. C. Load Drive: 0—350 ohms. D. 2 or 4 wire,as required. E. 4-20 ma or 8—10 vdc,as required for inputs and outputs. F. Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.1 percent calibration. G. Adjustable signal offset and span. H. Outputs: Multiple, as indicated on plans or as required for circuit application. See Manufacturer's data sheets for additional requirements. 2.28 POSITION/DISPLACEMENT SENSOR A. Sensor: Macro Sensors Model HSDR 750 Hermetically Sealed DC-LVDT Position Sensor and Loop Powered LVDT Positioned Transmitter. 1. DC-LVDT Sensor: a. Plus/minus 15 VDC input,0 to plus/minus 10 VDC output. b. Non-linearity less than plus/minus 0.25 percent of FRO. c. Range: Plus/minus 0.050 inch to plus/minus 10 inches. d. Environmentally sealed to IEC IP.68. 2. Loop Powered LVDT Transmitter: a. 4—20 mA loop powered I/O. b. Non-linearity less than plus/minus 0.5 percent of FRO. 16936-14 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 c. Range: 1 inch to 10 inches. d. Hermetically sealed for harsh environments. B. Macro Sensor DMC-A2-100 Dual Channel Controller: AC-LVDT controller with digital display and with RS232C/Ethernet/analog outputs. C. Macro Sensor Modular LVDT Signal Conditioner: 1. Model: LVC-2412. 2. DIN rail mounting. 3. 4—20 ma output or 0—10 VDC output. 4. 12 vdc or 24 VDC operating voltage. 5. Temperature Range: 0'F to 160' F. 6. Install per Manufacturer's instructions. D. Calibration and Settings: 1. Calibration to be performed by Factory Representative. 2. Field settings per Manufacturer's instructions. 2.29 MULTIPLE CHANNEL ISOLATED SWITCH A. Manufacturer: Diversified Electronics. B. Model: ISO and 15L Series. C. Contacts: SPST-N.O. per channel. D. Temperature Range: -4' F to 135' F. E. LED indicators for each output. 2.30 AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER A. Manufacturer: HCS. B. Model: CR4170 Series. C. Output: 4-20 mA or 0-5 VDC, as required. D. Three(3) element AC current. E. Calibration: True RMS sensing. F. Temperature Range: 0 to 50 degrees Celsius. 2.31 IMPEDANCE MATCHING TRANSFORMER A. Manufacturer: Hammond Manufacturing B. Model: 802 and 803E C. 50 ohm to 600 ohm 2.32 ELECTRONIC VIBRATION SENSOR/SWITCH A. Manufacturer: 1. Robertshaw B. Model: 16936-15 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 441) 1. 566-A2-E Velocity-Acceleration Vibration Monitor C. Outputs: 1. One (1) SPST relay trip for alarm, one (1) SPST relay trip for shutdown, and 4-20 MA absolute analog signal. D. Scale: 1. Coordinate with Pump/Motor Vendor for displacement ranges required. E. Input Power: 1. 115 VAC, 60 Hz F. Enclosure: 1. Epoxy coated NEMA 4 G. Lockout Feature: 1. Adjustable 15 second start up delay H. Accessories: 1. Provide alarms as follows: a. Alarm No.1: Operates with adjustable time delay(0.5 to 15 seconds.) When a vibration signal continues to exceed the set point for as long as the time delay setting,the alarm actuates. b. Alarm No.2: Actuates when vibration signal exceeds set point. No time delay is available. c. Latch Disable: Disables alarm latches. Alarms reset automatically when vibration level returns to normal from an alarm condition. Model 566 monitor, installed in SCADA cabinet door, or at each motor starter cabinet, as indicated on Plans. 1. Input Signal: 1. Velocity: a. Low Range: 0 to 1.5 in./sec RMS b. High Range: 0 to 3 in./sec RMS 2. Acceleration: a. Low Range: 0 to 5 G's RMS b. High Range: 0 to 10 G's RMS J 16936-16 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 K. Remote sensor for motor mounting. L. High temperature accelerometer/transmitter sufficient for use at motor housing temperature. M. Provide all necessary factory hardware for attachment to motor and for cable connections to junction box. Install sensors for both X and V axis displacement on motor housing. Submit mounting detail for Engineer's approval. N. Provide program software to install in plant SCADA PC for analysis and trending of analog signal. To allow observation of entire frequency range of vibration transducer,filtering and gating of signal for display at operator's station. Program shall be furnished along with shop drawings and ready for SCADA programmer's use. 2.33 LIQUID LEVEL SENSOR A. Siemens Sitrans Model LC300 B. 4-20 mA current loop circuit with power supply. Route to SCADA or controller I/O. C. Measure full depth of tank. D. Threaded or flange connection to match port or tank. E. Rod or rope probe with PFA jackets as applicable for conditions. F. Local LCD user interface where shown on plans. 2.34 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP PROTECTION MODULE 41110 A. Flight MiniCAS II: Model No.83 58 57(24 volt),40-501098(120 volt);MiniCAS II/FUS Model No. 14-40 71 13 92(24 volt). B. Module shall be capable of monitoring temperature via a thermal switch embedded in motor winding, and capable of detecting leakage via sensor located in pump. C. Temperature detection to operate Form "C"10 amp contact,such that when wired into pump controls will shut down pump when over-temperature condition is detected. D. Leakage detection to operate Form "C" 10 amp contact, such that when wired into pump controls will initiate alarm. E. 20-30 VDC,50-60 Hz with 24 volt external power supply,or 120 VAC,5-60 control power source. F. LED indicators for over-temperature and leak indications. G. Manual reset pushbutton to interrupt power supply. H. Model No. 14-50 70 97 Socket I. Temperature Range: 0-50'C(32-123° F), Max 90%RH 2.35 MODBUS Ethernet Serial Server A. Manufacturer: 1. B&B Electronics. B. Models: 1. MESA1A, MES1B. C. Dimensions: 16936-17 of 2D REVISED 9/23/2019 1. MES1A/MES1B—1.25 x 4.5 x 4.75 in (3.2 x 11.3 x 12.2 cm). D. Power Supply Requirements: 1. 10VDC to 30VDC @ 3.6W. E. Power Consumption: 1. 12VDC @300 mA. F. Operating Temperature: 1. -20 to 80°C(-4 to 176°F). G. Humidity: 1. 10%to 90%R.H. non-condensing. H. Ethernet: 1. Single R1-45 female (with built-in LED indicators). 2. IEEE 802.310/100 Mbps auto-detecting, 10BaseT, 100BaseTX. 3. TCP,UDP, DHCP,SNMP,TELNET,ICMP,ARP,TFTP, Modbus ASCII, Modbus RTU, Modbus/TCP Serial: 1. 12V TVS for MES1A. 2. MES1A-9 pin D-type male (DB-9M). 3. 5 V TVS for MES1B. 4. MES1B removable screw terminal(5)block with screw down. J. Interface Lines Supported: 1. MES1A—RS-232 TD, RD, GND. 2. MES1B—R5-422-485 TDA(-),TDB(+), RDA(-), RDB(+), GND. K. Configuration Modes: 1. Telnet,XPort Device Installer with integrated Telnet. L. Device Management: 1. SNMP—RFC 1213-1215-1316-131. 2.36 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES A. Photocells: 1. Provide photocell rated at 120 volt, 5 amp minimum, temperature range -40 to 150 16936-18 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 degree F,weather proof outdoor use. Twist lock base where noted. 2. Manufacturers: Tork,GE,Woods or approved equal. B. Lighting Contractors: 1. Provide multipole,120/300/600 volt range as applicable with contacts rated at 10 to 100 amps as required by lighting load. 2. Manufacturers: Eaton,GE,Allen Bradley, or approved equal. C. Enclosure: 1. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor use and NEMA 4%for outdoor use,or as indicated on plans. Outdoor enclosures to have no devices on outer door. D. Selector Switches&Pilot Lights: 1. Provide Hand/Off/Auto selector switch as indicated on plans. See item 2.01 of this specification for acceptable manufacturers and models. 2.37 HYBRID VOLTAGE/CURRENT SENSOR MODULE A. Provide a solid state hybrid voltage/current sensor module equal in quality to Potter Brumfield CR Series unit,to control and monitor VFD driven submersible pumps in event of "over temperature"conditions as shown on control diagram sheet of the construction plans. This is a proprietary monitor and control scheme that is designed for this specific project only. It is intended for use with Flygt pumps only and may not provide the protection required with other pump controls. This control circuit replaces the standard Mini Cas unit provide with Flygt pumps and may not function with other manufactures pumps. B. The pump shall be ordered without the standard Leak Detector system when this specific method of control is used.The pump shall contain only the temperature sensor switch manufactured by Thermik and installed inside pump by Flygt. C. The controls shall operate in a manner as follows for VFD operated pumps: 1. Provide solid state hybrid voltage/current sensor module as manufactured by Potter Brumfield or equal for use with 12vdc power to pump motor temperature sensor model SO6-140.05 manufactured by Thermik as supplied installed in Flygt grit pump. Circuit shall operate to sense current flow thru the temperature sensor and output a 4-20 am signal over a calibrated range that allows the SCADA PLC to determine motor temperature based on current flow. In addition,the sensor module shall provide a discrete signal output when sensor current is zero, indicating the sensor switch has opened at the high temperature limit setpoint.The sensor will reset internally when the motor temperature decreases as the motor cools. 2. The control circuit shall lock Out when the sensor switch opens on high temperature, and requires operator manual reset before pump will restart.Contacts will inhibit the motor control circuit and also send an alarm to the control panel indicator light and to the SCADA PLC. 3. The 4-20 ma signal to the SCADA AO module shall be calibrated to temperature of each specific pump sensor.The PLC can inhibit the motor controls at any time before 16936-19 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 the temperature sensor switch is opened,and shall lock out the PLC pump VFD Call signal until reset at the PLC. This allows two means to stop the pump in event temperature rise is greater than set at the PLC,or greater than the operating point of the temperature sensor internal switch to assure pump temperature is not ever excessive at any VFD controlled speed. 4. The sensor circuit shall operate in same in Hand or Auto control of the pump.The temperature monitoring circuit will be powered up when the pump HOA switch is turned to the Hand or Auto position.The circuit shall have a settling time after initiation of the activation relay as shown on the pump control diagram.The pump start time delay relay shall be set a value not less than the time it requires for the over temperature circuits to be fully activate to assure the pump Call controls function normally when the HOA switch is set.When the pump HOA is Off or when a specific pump VFD breaker is turned off,the over temperature circuit is to be deactivated. D. Controls manufacture shall perform field calibration tests based on test figures from manufacturer and shall confirm temperature readings are accurate based on current flow thru the over temperature sensor/switch provided with each pump.Pump manufacture is to provide certified calibration data for the current flow thru sensor over the range of pump operating temperatures. 2.38 TAGGING A. Provide Type 316 stainless steel tag on field-mounted units and permanently affix tag to unit. B. Include Engineer's tag number where listed in Control Diagrams. C. See Section 16195—"Electrical Identification"for additional requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,applicable requirements of NEC, NECA"Standard of Installation," and recognized industry practices. B. Control Relay: 1. Install panel control relays in l&C panel. 2. Install motor starter control relays in MCC and wherever more rugged type relay required. -END OF SECTION- 16936-20 of 20 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16941 VALVE CONTROLLER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16012—"Electrical Work,"Paragraph 1.04— "Submittals"for submittal requirements. D. Refer to motor operated valves in Civil & Mechanical plans and specifications for additional requirements.This specification covers the valve controller(actuator) and not the valve itself, but is to be included as a part of the control valve system.Coordinate with other trades and valve manufacturer before bidding or before submitting shop drawing. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers work necessary for the installation, field testing and startup and final documentation for a valve controller unit hereafter referred to as the Controller and as described herein. 1.03 PRODUCTS A. Major components of this system shall include the specified materials, equipment, and installation required to implement a complete and operational valve control system along with associated instrumentation. B. In order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer's service to the greatest extent possible, like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one(1) manufacturer. C. Requirements for the electrical work associated with the installation of the Controller and instrumentation equipment are as specified herein. D. There is no intent to describe a single preferred Controller Manufacturer's equipment or software but rather to describe system concepts and technical requirements. 1.04 RESPONSIBILITY FOR COMPLETE SYSTEM A. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall provide for the supply, delivery, installation, certification, calibration, adjustment,testing, and startup,of a complete,coordinated system, which shall perform the specified functions indicated herein, and as indicated on the plans. B. The Owner and the Engineer will review system technical information as submitted by the Contractor for hardware,peripheral devices,control logic,and alarming for complete compliance 411110 with these specifications. 16901-1 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Valve Control System Contractor(or subcontractor)may be required to submit a statement of qualifications to the Engineer before bid is awarded for control system work. Qualification Statement shall show proof of similar water plant installations for not less than four(4)recent projects in County of project location or, immediate vicinity there of. Provide name of project; name of Owner,address and telephone number of Owner's representative who can be contacted for references regarding successful completion and satisfactory performance of most recent projects. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this section for Engineer's approval. B. Hardware Submittals: Before any components are fabricated,and/or integrated into assemblies or shipped to the job site, furnish to the Engineer for his review six (6) copies of submittal documents. Submittals shall include full details, shop drawings, catalog cuts and such other descriptive matter and documentation as may be required to fully describe the equipment and to demonstrate its conformity to these specifications.Specifically,the Contractor shall submit the following materials: 1. Block diagram and operational description of the system showing all major components and their interconnections and interrelationships. Label each diagram and specify all external power and communications interfaces. All diagrams shall be in an 11 by 17 format.Provide CD in AutoCad Release 14 format. 2. Drawings of equipment to be supplied shall include, as a minimum: overall dimension details for each panel,console, etc., including internal and external arrangements and door mounted operator devices with nameplate designations. Wiring diagrams of equipment including field device connections shall be included and specific installation/wiring requirements identified. Provide in AutoCad on CD. 3. Operational Description shall include the principal functions/capabilities of the Controller,as provided. 4. Provide a detailed Bill of Materials along with descriptive literature identifying component name, manufacturer, model number, and quantity supplied. 5. Provide system hydraulic layout(s)where applicable. C. Software Submittals (Where Applicable): Provide user manuals for all supplier furnished software and firmware. D. Test Outlines and Procedures Submittals: Test descriptions shall be in sufficient detail to fully describe the specific tests to be conducted to demonstrate conformance with this specification. E. Spares and Expendables Recommendations: The Contractor shall provide a list of recommended spares and expendable items. The list shall be exclusive of any spares furnished under this Contract.A total purchase cost for the recommended list shall be provided in addition to the unit cost for each item. F. With each submittal, include a copy of the applicable specification(s) page(s) for the item submitted and mark"Complies'or"Non-Compliance"or"Exception"adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 14111) 16941-2 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 tiaw1.07 ON SITE SUPERVISION A. The Contractor shall provide experienced personnel to supervise, perform,and coordinate the installation,adjustment,testing,and startup of the valve control system. The personnel shall be present on-site as required to effect a complete and operating system. 1.08 TESTING AND STARTUP A. All elements of the control system shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of this Specification. All special testing materials and equipment shall be provided by the Contractor.The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all of his testing and startup work with the Owner.As a minimum,the testing shall include both a factory test and a field test.Testing requirements are as follows: 1. Factory Tests: The valve controller and all other associated hardware shall be tested at the factory,prior to shipment,so as to demonstrate that each component is operational and meets the requirements of these specifications. Test results shall be certified,with written documentation provided to the Owner upon test completion. Factory testing may be witnessed by the Owner or Engineer. 2. Field Tests: All system components shall be checked to verify that they have been installed properly and that all terminations have been made correctly. Witnessed field tests shall be performed on the complete system.Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer on a paragraph-by-paragraph basis.Each test shall be witnessed and signed off by the Contractor and the Engineer upon CPO satisfactory completion. The Contractor shall notify the Owner at least two (2) weeks prior to the commencement date of the field tests. 1.09 TRAINING A. The training program shall be conducted by the Controller Manufacturer's Representative,or as pre-approved,and shall educate operators,maintenance,and management personnel with the required levels of system familiarity to provide a common working knowledge concerning all significant aspects of the system being supplied. The training program shall consist of the equivalent of one(1)8-hour day and conforming to Owner's schedule of operators. At least two weeks prior to the requested start of the program, the proposed dates of training shall be submitted to the Owner and the Engineer for approval. B. The Training Instructor shall provide all instructional course material,equipment,and manuals to conduct the training program. Owner shall provide facilities for the training. C. The training program shall be conducted as follows: 1. Operator training shall be conducted utilizing the actual system. 2. Maintenance training shall address each item of equipment being supplied down to the individual module,board, or card level. 3. Configuration training shall, as a minimum, address control logic, ladder diagrams, special requirements,configuration,and modification of all specified functions. 4. The training shall provide Owner personnel with basic proficiency in control functions and set points adjustments pertaining to the specified system. 5. Engineer's representative may be present during training. r 6. The Training Instructor shall provide a professional published training manual for owners err use during training classes. Provide six (6) copies for Engineers and Owners approval 16941-3 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 four (4) weeks prior to training. Provide ten (10) copies for training after approval. Manual shall be professionally bound. (Ring type binders are unacceptable). A well constructed Operation & Maintenance Manual may be substituted for the training manual where approved by the Engineer. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall provide (6) complete sets of hard-covered ring-bound loose-leaf O&M manuals. In addition to "as-built" system drawings, the manuals shall include internal wiring diagrams and operating and maintenance literature for all components provided under this section. The submitted literature shall be in sufficient detail to facilitate the operation,removal, installation,programming and configuration,adjustment,calibration,testing and maintenance of each component and/or instrument. The O&M manual shall be professionally composed and compiled and shall not be an assembly of"cut-sheets". Engineer shall have sole discretion of acceptance of O&M manual contents and composition. B. The contents of the O&M manuals shall be generally organized as follows: 1. System Hardware/Installation 2. System Software 3. Operation (step-by-step procedures) 4. Maintenance and Troubleshooting C. Where the control system is to be installed under this contract or the Contractor shall further provide a complete set of as-built plans, diagrams, parts and materials list, parts source, operational instructions, programming data, maintenance and trouble shooting instructions, service data,calibration data,testing data,required service and programming instruments and wiring diagrams sufficient for complete operation,service and programming and maintenance of the System by plant technicians and operators or by outside service technicians. This shall be included as part of Operation&Maintenance Manual.This information shall be provided on CD in AutoCAD 14, or later version, and in Word format and shall be arranged in final order for insertion into System files. Coordinate overall layout and contents with Engineer and with System Programmer. Allow adequate manhours for adjustment of layout and contents during System testing and Owner review. All data submitted will be reviewed by Engineer for acceptance and where deemed insufficient by Engineer,data will be resubmitted at no additional cost to Owner. 1.11 DEFINITION OF ACCEPTANCE A. System acceptance shall be defined as that point in time when the following requirements have been fulfilled: 1. All O&M documentation has been submitted,reviewed,and approved. 2. The complete control system and instrumentation have successfully passed all acceptance testing requirements specified herein and have successfully been started up, tested and accepted by the Engineer. 3. All Owner's staff personnel training programs have been completed. 4. Owner/Engineer sign a document indicating system has formally been accepted. 5. All as-built drawings have been received and approved. 16941-4 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 411, PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The functions and features specified hereunder are the minimum acceptable requirements for the system. The provided system shall equal or exceed each requirement. B. In some cases,the specifications may allow the accomplishing of certain functions by means of more than one hardware/firmware/software approach. Any approach that is proposed shall equal or exceed all functional, operational, convenience and maintenance aspects of the one described. Whether a proposed approach is equal to or exceeds specification requirements shall be in the sole desecration of the Engineer. C. Major equipment,component,and software items are specified;however,the Contractor shall, at no additional cost, provide all appurtenant items,whether specifically referenced herein or not, but which may be required for system operation as hereinafter specified. 2.02 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. The valve control system shall monitor and control the equipment functions stated herein and as indicated on the plans. Location shall be coordinated with Owner and approved by the Engineer. 2. Under this contract,the Control System Contractor is to interconnect all listed systems, setup controls for all systems and,in general,provide a complete unified operating valve control system. Coordinate with valve requirements and provide as part of the valve �r assembly. 2.03 COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS A. General 1. Enclosures shall be corrosion resistant welded NEMA Type 4X stainless or painted steel for outdoor locations,NEMA Type 12 for indoor locations,or as shown on plans. All SS enclosures shall be fabricated from 316 stainless steel. Units shall include a single gasketed front door.Full height hinges,locking hasp and door clamping hardware shall be included.All enclosures shall be UL listed. 2. Controls shall operate from a source of 120 Vac, 1 phase, 60 Hz. All controls shall be protected from lightning or other transient voltages by power arresters and surge protectors on both power and telephone lines. 3. Condensation protection shall be provided for panels not in climate-controlled environments. Enclosures shall have a heater which operates continuously to prevent condensation build-up. A freeze protective heater and thermostat shall also be provided at those outdoor locations containing hydraulics. Where ambient temperatures(assume 100 degrees F) exceed component manufacturers specified maximum operating temperature by a factor of.85,cooling shall be supplied with the enclosure. 4. All DC power supplies required for operation of control system or instruments shall be provided. Units shall provide sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to assure powered components can operate within their required tolerances. 5. Included shall be a battery backed power source to run Controller for a period of four hours,after which time generator power shall be available. The battery shall be of the 16941-5 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 gel cell type and sized to provide DC power for the specified 4 hour power fail period. The battery shall be kept fully charged using a regulated float voltage charging system. "Switching"type battery supplies are not acceptable. 6. Control unit shall have an operational temperature range of-40°C to 70°C(-40°F to 158° F), and a storage temperature range of-40°C to 800 C(-4°F to 176°F), under relative humidity conditions of 10%to 95%non-condensing. 7. All wiring shall be in complete conformance with the National Electrical Code,state,local and NEMA electrical standards. All incoming and outgoing wires shall be connected to numbered terminal blocks and all wiring neatly tied and fastened to chassis as required. 8. Local construction permits shall be sole responsibility of Contractor. Local inspection authorities'acceptance is required before final acceptance of system. 9. Outdoor Controllers shall not have devices mounted in outer doors. B. UL Labeling: Panels provided under this section shall meet the requirements of UL508. All panels shall bear the UL508 serialized label or be third party certified when delivered to the job site. All field modifications shall be in conformance with UL508. When the Owner accepts the panels, the contractor certifies that the panels have retained their UL labeling or third party certification. C. Valve Controller: General: Controller shall be a part of the valve installation and part of valve submittal. Install valve as shown on the plan drawings or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. Units shall be specifically designed for telemetry applications. The Controller shall be equal in operation,construction and quality to Intelligent units by listed manufacturers listed in specifications or pre-approved equal. Listing of a Manufacturer does not relieve ■ obligation of meeting all conditions on this specification. The use of generic r/ programmable logic controllers (PLC's) not designed for water and wastewater is specifically prohibited. Controller shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of not less than three years from date of shipment. 2. Hardware: The Controller shall,as a minimum,be a 16-bit microprocessor with 3 MB of total memory and support for three full duplex serial ports. Minimum required: 3 RS- 232. Each serial port shall include a 9-pin RS232 connector. Supply modem as required as part of this contract.All integrated circuits shall utilize CMOS components to ensure low power consumption. Unit shall incorporate a watchdog timer circuit. The unit shall include a lithium battery to backup the on board RAM and real time calendar/clock chip for up to two years with power off. Basic input/output capabilities of the typical unit shall include: a. A minimum of four 12-24 Vdc digital inputs,three of which can also be used as high speed counter input capable of accepting up to 5 KHz),expandable to 260 digital inputs. Digital inputs shall be optically isolated and meet IEEE 2.5 kV surge suppression b. A minimum or two digital outputs, expandable to 258 Digital (Relay) outputs. Digital outputs shall be form C relays (SPDT). c. A minimum or two analog inputs, expandable to 133 analog inputs. Analog input shall support a 12 bit minimum bipolar analog to digital conversion. d. Unit shall include two expansion bus connectors allowing support of up to 40 expansion modules. e. All inputs/outputs shall have LED's to indicate status. LED's can be turned on/off in the program. 16941-6 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 4110, f. The following technical specifications for the valve controller are the minimum requirements. 1) 128k RAM expandable to 1MB RAM, non-volatile. 2) 28K ROM expandable to 2MB ROM 3) 0.5K EEPROM. 4) Clock/calendar accurate to+/- 1 Min./Month 5) Diagnostic LED's 6) Internal temperature sensor. 7) Ladder Logic Memory; 12K words non-volatile program memory. 8) 11,000 words, 16 bit register,non-volatile data memory 9) 8,192 bits,one bit wide,non-volatile data memory. 10) Protocols: Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII with store and forward repeater function and Master and Slave on all ports. 11) Optional protocols: Allen-Bradley DF! Full Duplex and DF1 Half Duplex. 12) Environment:-40 Deg F to 158 Deg. F, 5%to 95%RH,non-condensing. 13) Process I/O Terminations: Removable terminal blocks with screw compression terminals. 14) Certifications and Standards: a) Surge withstand capability: ANSI/IEEE C37.90 b) RF emission compatibility: FCC Part 15,Subparti,Class A. c) Electrical safety classification: UL 508/CSA C22.2/142 d) Hazardous area classification: CSA Class 1, Division 2, Groups 4A, B,C, D. e) CE standards: EN55011,EN55022,EN60082-1,EN60082-2,and EMC directive 89/226/EEC. 15) Programmable in Relay Ladder Logic, IEC 61'131-3 and multitasking C languages. 16) OPC communications. (OLE for Process Control) g. The unit shall include a lithium battery to backup the on board RAM and real time calendar/clock chip for up to two years with power off. h. Expansion modules/cards shall be available(Minimum requirements)as: 1) 4 channel isolated analog output module(0-20/4-20 madc) 2) 8 channel isolated analog input module(0-5/1-5 Vdc) 3) 8 channel discrete input module (12 B 240 Vac/dc) 4) 16 channel discrete input module (12-240 Vac/dc) 5) 8 channel discrete output module(Relay B 6Amp Contacts) 6) 16 channel discrete output module (Relay B 6 Amp Contacts) 7) HART Protocol Module. Include Ethernet link to SCADA PLC 8) 4 channel High Speed Counter/Accumulator input module. All discrete input and output modules shall have status indicating LED's which can be enabled/disabled by the program in the base card. All input/output modules shall have removable terminal blocks. 16941-7 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 3. Diagnostics: Controller shall include integral diagnostic tests of the base card to determine current operating conditions, including ambient temperature and Lithium Battery conditions. On board LED's shall be utilized for indication of:power on,carrier detect, receive data,request-to-send and transmit data for each communication port, and each digital input and output. 4. Communications: All communications ports shall be capable of communicating with the Controller utilizing leased-line or dial-up modem, or communication link to another device. All ports shall be capable of utilizing custom protocols and as a minimum utilize either/or the ASCII or RTU version of the Modbus protocol with any combination of baud rate,parity,duplex and word length. All ports shall support RTS/CTS handshaking for radio transmitter control and all ports shall be capable of Modbus master and/or slave operation,dynamic switching between master and slave on the same communication port,and allowing report by exception. All ports shall be capable of utilization for programming and diagnostics. All communications ports shall allow remote programming and configuration. 5. Power Requirements: Controller shall be capable of being powered by 10-28 Vdc or 16Vac. A sealed gel cell 12 volt battery and charger as previously specified shall be supplied to power the Controller and base station during emergency power outage conditions,for duration of time for generator to active power. Controller shall be capable of being put in a Sleep-Mode by turning off the power supply under application software control and being reactivated by any combination of external interrupt input,a specific time and date,or expiration of a time delay. During the Sleep- Mode the high-speed counter/accumulator inputs shall be functional. All I/O module LED's and diagnostic LED's which are powered by the Controller shall have the capability of being enabled or disabled under software control. 6. Application Software: Controller shall be equipped for Relay Ladder Logic programs,PID feedback control, modem dialing and control and communications using the Modbus protocol. A "C" compiler shall be programmed for custom protocols and complex functions. Controller shall have multitasking capability where ladder and"C"programs execute concurrently. Ladder Logic programming software shall be provided and shall be IEC-1131 compliant and shall include a simulator which does not require hardware to test a program. Ladder Logic application programs shall be capable of being developed on Windows NT, Windows 95/98 or Windows 2000,as applicable. The valve control system shall be capable of full program support and diagnostics being performed remotely via a telephone line connection.System supplier shall provide the "Systems Integration Engineer" with all programming packages, manuals, licenses, development keys, hardkeys, etc. at least 60 days prior to date programming is to be installed. 7. Operator Interface: Operator interface to the Controller shall be provided by means of an Alphanumeric Keyboard and Display Terminal,which is compatible with third party Modbus or A-B DF1 MMI's. Operator Interface Unit shall be a product of the Controller Manufacturer unless specifically approved otherwise by Engineer. The terminal shall display analog and digital input/output signal status in appropriate engineering units. Terminal shall allow changes to set points,control parameters and outputs.All changes by operators shall be password protected.In addition to the displays,the terminal shall provide menu driven commands,communications status and statistics,alarm history and on-line help.Terminal shall communicate via an RS232C interface at 9600 baud. 16941-8 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 taw D. Input/Output Expansion Modules,Power Supplies,Gateways,Modems and Interface Modules utilized. E. Un-interruptible Power Supply: The power supply shall provide all operating power for the controller. Power supply shall provide a battery charger,which maintains a charge on the gelled electrolyte backup battery. The battery backup shall maintain system operation during power outages. Power supply shall utilize transformer isolated, switch-mode technology. All outputs shall be isolated form the input and from each other. Power supplies shall be cascaded to provide the necessary power capacity for the system.The following technical specifications are minimum requirements: 1. Primary Input: 14B40V or 16624Vrms 2. DC/Battery Input:Turn on at 11.5V V 0.3V,Turn off at 10.5V V 0.5V 3. Maximum:40V 4. Input Power: 35VA maximum at 24Vrms, 1.9A maximum at 13.5V 5. Outputs:5V @ 1.0 ampere,24V @ 0.5 ampere, 11 to 14V battery charger @ 200mA 6. Mode Isolated:switch-mode,30 KHz switch frequency 7. Line Regulation:< 1%over operating range 8. Load Regulation: 5V V 1%over operating range 9. 24V V 17% 10. Output Ripple 5V:< 10mV 11. 24V:<50mV 12. Visual Indicators:5V and 24V green LED's 13. Battery Charger 13.5V @ 0.2 Ampere for gelled electrolyte lead/acid battery 14. Terminations: 10 pole, removable terminal block, 12-22 AWG, 15 amp contacts 15. Dimensions 4.25 inch (108 mm)wide x 4.625 inch (118 mm) high x 1.75 inch (44 mm) deep. 16. Mounting 7.5 x 35 DIN rail 17. Packaging Corrosion resistant zinc plated steel with black enamel paint 18. Environment 5%RH to 95%RH, non-condensing-40°C/F to 60°C/140°F F. Isolated Analog Input Modules: The Isolated Analog Input Module shall provide eight analog inputs to the system I/O. The Isolated Analog Input Module shall be capable of being configured for 20 madc loop or 5 Vote operation. Offset shall be controlled by DIP switches. The Isolated Analog Input Module shall as a minimum utilize a 12 bit successive approximation analog to digital (A/D) converter. All inputs shall be transient protected and optically isolated from the main logic power.The inputs shall be single ended and share a common return. The following technical specifications are minimum requirements. 1. Number of Signals: 8 2. Input Offset DlPswitch configurable for 20%offset 3. Type:Single ended 4. Over-voltage: 60%over-scale sustained input signal without damage 115Vrms will only damage 20mA current resistor and transient suppressor. 5. Isolation: 500Vrms from the logic power 6. Resolution: 12 bits 7. Input Resistance: 100 KSL nominal for 5V inputs 25051 for 20mA inputs. 411, 8. Converter type: Successive approximation 16941-9 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 9. Accuracy:V 0.1%@ 25°C(77°F)V a2%over temperature range 10. Transient Protection:Transient suppresser on each input 11. Response Time:20m5 typical for 10%to 90%signal change 12. Addressing: DIP switch configurable 13. Power Requirements: 5V @ 20mA 11 to 28V @ 10mA (loop power extra @ 20mA maximum per loop) 14. Terminations: 12 pole, removable terminal block, 12-22 AWG, 15 A contacts 15. Dimensions:4.25 inch wide x 4.625 inch high x 1.75 inch deep. 16. Mounting:7.5 x 35 DIN rail 17. Packaging:Corrosion resistant zinc plated steel with black enamel paint. 18. Environment: 5%RH to 95%RH, non-condensing-40°C/F to 60°C/140°F G. Analog Output Module: The analog output module shall provide four analog outputs to the system I/O.The analog output module shall generate either 4 to 20 ma outputs or 0 to 20 ma outputs,switch selectable. The output resolution shall be a minimum of 12 bits.Outputs shall be isolated from the logic circuits. The following technical specifications are minimum requirements. 1. Number of Analog Outputs:4 2. Output Signal Range:0-20m4 or 4-20mA,switch configurable 3. Maximum Load Resistance: 1000 ohms with 24V loop power 4. 400 ohms with 12V loop power 5. 250 ohms with 9V loop power 6. Output Type:Single ended regulation on positive side with common negative return 7. Isolation: 1500Vrms field to logic J 8. D/A Resolution: 12 bits 9. Absolute Accuracy: V 0.05 % @ 25°C with 250 ohm load V 0.2 % over temperature range,0-1000 ohm load 10. Noise and Ripple:0.04%maximum 11. Transient Protection:600 watt 12. Response Time: 250m5 typical for 10%to 90%signal change 13. Addressing:DIP switch configurable 14. Power Requirements:5V @ 45mA 9 to 28V @ 95mA(with all outputs at 20mA, 15mA quiescent) 15. Field Terminations: 10 pole, removable terminal block, 12-22 AWG, 15 A contacts 16. Dimensions:4.25 inch wide x 4.625 inch high x 1.75 inch deep. 17. Mounting: 7.5 x 35 DIN rail 18. Packaging: Corrosion resistant zinc plated steel with black enamel paint 19. Environment:5% RH to 95%RI-I, non-condensing-40°C/F to 60°C/140°F. H. Combination Digital Input/Output Module: The combination digital input/output module shall provide eight digital inputs/outputs(any combination)to the system I/O. The I/O modules shall utilize sockets to facilitate field replacement and point configuration. Each I/O point shall be individually isolated,and have two poles on the field wiring terminal block. A light emitting diode (LED) shall be provided for each I/O point indicating the status of the I/O point. The following technical specifications are minimum requirements. 1. Number of Inputs or Outputs:8/16 2. Voltage Range: Output relay 12-28OVac, Input Relay 90-140 Vac 3. Load Current: 3 Amps 16941-10 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 1111/ 4. Transient Protection: Integral to the solid-state relay 5. Isolation: 1500Vrms 6. Addressing: DlPswitch configurable. Addressed as 8 inputs and 8 outputs 7. Input/Output Assignment DIP switch selection for each I/O point 8. Power Requirements:5V @ 90mA 24V @ OmA(not required) 9. Visual Indicators:8 red LED's, permanently enabled 10. Field Terminations:Two 8 pole,removable terminal block 12 to 22 AWG 15 amp contacts 11. Dimensions:4.25 inch wide x 4.625 inch high x 1.75 inch deep 12. Mounting:7.5 x 35 DIN rail 13. Packaging:Corrosion resistant zinc plated steel with black enamel paint 14. Environment: 5%RH to 95%RH, non-condensing-40°C/F to 60°C/140°F High Level Digital Input Module: The High Level Digital Input module shall provide sixteen digital inputs to the system I/O. The Digital inputs shall be capable of utilizing a signal range of 12 V ac/dc to 240 V ac/dc.Each I/O point shall be individually isolated,and have two poles on the field wiring terminal block. A light emitting diode(LED)shall be provided for each I/O point indicating the status of the I/O point. The following technical specifications are minimum requirements. 1. Number of Signals:8 or 16 2. Input Logic: HI Level Off to on transition threshold is typically 50% of full scale signal range 3. Over-voltage:Tolerance 150%sustained over-voltage without damage 4. Input Current:5mA typical 5. Response Time:OFF to ON:7ms,ON to OFF: 24mS typical 6. Isolation: 1500Vrms in groups of 4 inputs 7. Addressing:DIP switch configurable 8. Power Requirements:5V @ 80mA all LED's on,5V @ 25mA with LED's disabled,24V @ OmA(not required) 9. Visual Indicators: 16 red LED's,controlled by CPU for power reduction 10. Field Terminations One, 10 pole, removable terminal blocks, 12-22 AWG, 15 amp contacts 11. Dimensions:5.65 inch(144 mm)wide by4.625 inch(118 mm)high by 1.75 inch(44mm) deep 12. Mounting: 7.5 x 35 DIN rail 13. Packaging:Corrosion resistant zinc plated steel with black enamel paint 14. Environment:5%RH to 95%RH, non-condensing-40°C/F to 60°C/140°F J. Dry Contact Relay Output Module,8 and 16 Point: The Dry contact Digital Output Module shall provide sixteen,sealed,dry contact, Form A(N.O.)mechanical relay outputs to the system I/O. Each I/O point shall be individually isolated, and have two poles on the field wiring terminal block. A light emitting diode(LED)shall be provided for each I/O point indicating the status of the I/O point. The following technical specifications are minimum requirements: 1. Number of Relay Outputs:8/16 2. Type: Sealed mechanical relay, Form A (Normally open) resistive loads to Form B (Normally closed contacts). 3. Contact Ratings:6 amperes @ 250Vrms resistive loads 6 amperes @ 30V resistive loads 3.5 amperes @ 30V/250Vrms inductive load(pf=0.4. L/R=7 ms) 1/4 HP 125Vrms. 16941-11 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 4. Operating Frequency: 18,000 operations/hour mechanically, 1,800 electrically at rated load 5. Service Life:1,500,000 operations at 0-250mA loads,600,000 operations at 1A resistive load, 100,000 operations at 6A resistive load,300,000 operations at 1A inductive loads (pf=0.4), 100,000 operations at 3.5A inductive loads (p1=0.4). 6. Operate Time: 10mS maximum, 5mS typical 7. Release Time: 10mS maximum,2m5 typical 8. Bounce Time: 3mS typical 9. Contact Isolation: 1000Vrms 10. Logic Isolation: 1500Vrms 11. Addressing:DIP switch configurable 12. Power Requirements: 5V @ 600mA with all LED's and all relays energized 13. 5V @ 540mA with LED's disabled and all relays energized 24V @ OmA(not required) 14. Visual Indicators: 16 red LED's,controllable by CPU for power reduction 15. Field Terminations Four 8 pole, removable terminal blocks, 12 to 22 AWG 15 amp contacts. 16. Dimensions:8.37 inch wide x 4.625 inch high x 1.75 inch deep. 17. Mounting:7.5x 35 DIN rail 18. Packaging:Corrosion resistant zinc plated steel with black enamel paint 19. Environment: 5%RH to 95% RH, non-condensing-40°C to 60°C/140°F. K. Where specifically shown, Bell 202 Radio or Leased Line Modem: The Bell 202 Radio or Leased Line Modem shall convert RS-232 signal levels to audio tones for transmission over radios,two wire networks, four wire multi-point networks, and four wire point-to-point networks. Each signal shall be capable of being wired for active high or active low signals.Each modem shall have configurable carrier detect and loss delays, and RTS/CTS delays. The Bell 202 Radio or Leased Line Modem shall be protected against inadvertent sustained transmission through a user selected anti-streaming timer. Configuration switches shall be provided that permit adjustment of carrier detection and loss delays,anti-streaming time,soft-carrier turn-off tones,RT5/CTS handshake timing,and full/half duplex selection. The following technical specifications are minimum requirements: 1. Modulation:Bell 202 FSK,mark=1200 Hz,space=2200 Hz,soft carrier turnoff=900 Hz 2. Data Rate: DC to 1200 baud 3. Transmit Level-35 dBm to 0 dam,potentiometer adjustable,factory set at 0 dam 4. Input/Output Impedance: 600 ohm balanced,transformer isolated 5. Duplex Full or half. Half requires DTE to implement hardware RTS/CTS handshake 6. Wires:Two or four 7. Receive Sensitivity:-30 dam to+3 dam,potentiometer adjustable to-40 dam 8. Receive Dynamic Range:45 dB 9. RT5/CTS Delay Wire:25m5,50m5,125mS,250m5 Radio:67mS,133mS,266m5,1000m5 10. as Hold Time: lmS,8mS 11. Transmit-Receive Turnaround Delay: 3-10mS 12. Soft Carrier Tone Transmit Time: None, 13m5, 25mS,38mS 13. Soft Carrier Turnoff Detect Time:4-10mS 14. Radio Transmit Key Output:Optical coupler open collector transistor,5-15V, 25mA 15. Radio Carrier Detect Input: Optical coupler LED input,5V @ 1mA, 12V @ 3mA,24V @ 7mA 16. Radio Carrier Detect Input Mode: Use or ignore 16941-12 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 17. Carrier Detect Delay: Wire; 19mS, 30mS, 51mS, 92mS, Radio; 33m5, 67m5, 133mS, 265m5 18. Carrier Loss Delay: 6mS, 10mS, 23mS,39mS 19. Anti-Streaming: None, 10 Sec, 30 Sec,60 Sec 20. Visual Indicators: TD (transmitted data), RD (received data), CS (clear-to-send), RS (request-to-send)CD(carrier detect), KEY(radio transmit key) 21. Test Modes: Half duplex test pattern transmission Full duplex loopback Self-diagnostic test 22. Dimensions:4.25 inch wide x 4.625 inch high x 1.75 inch deep 23. Terminations: 8 pole, removable terminal block, 12-22 AWG, 15 amp contacts R1-45 modular jack. 24. Power Requirements: 5V @ 60 mA 25. Mounting: 7.5 x 35 DIN rail 26. Packaging: Corrosion resistant zinc plated steel with black enamel paint 27. Environment 5% RH to 95%RH, non-condensing-40°C/F to 60°C/140°F L. Spare Parts: Where not specifically available locally,as part of this contract,the Contractor shall furnish a minimum of one(1) each of the following spare parts: control board and I/O boards (one each type). Parts shall be provided in a single package with each component tagged. All cables or wiring assemblies such as ribbon cables,that are specific to this project and can not be purchased as complete assemblies shall be considered a required spare part. M. I/O Listing: 1. Digital Inputs: See plans for digital input requirements. 2. Digital Outputs: See plans for digital output requirements. 3. Analog Inputs: See plans for analog input requirements. 4. Analog Outputs: See plans for analog output requirements. 5. Allow for three(3)each spare discrete inputs,three(3)each spare discrete outputs,one (1) each spare analog inputs and one (1) each spare analog outputs with complete circuits and devices to be installed at no additional cost to Owner. 6. See plans and specifications for additional I/O's. 7. Contact Systems Integration Engineer for exact I/O assignment for each device before connections are made. Failure to coordinate will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner or Systems Integration Engineer. N. Equipment Protection: All equipment, instruments and devices provided for this project shall have means of protection from power line conditions such as surge, phase fail, or other line conditions that may damage equipment, instruments or devices furnished. It is vendors and manufacturers'responsibility to provide protective devices as required for maintaining warranty of furnished items and to assure no damage occurs from power line conditions. 2.04 SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. Provide Ladder Logic programming software specific applicable to Controller provided and provide to Systems Integration Engineer 60 days prior to scheduled testing of control system; unless, Integration Engineer specifically notes not required for this project. 2.05 ENGINEERS DIAGNOSTIC AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION A. Valve control system contractor shall provide means for Engineer to observe system setup,verify functional operation, view process and observe settings and data during warranty period of 16961-13 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 system and to evaluate the overall control system performance to assure compliance with the Plans and Specifications. B. As a minimum requirement,the Contractor shall provide the following to Engineer prior to the time system graphics are developed: 1. Networking software as required to access system via modem. 2. Additional software required for complete analysis of control system operation,control, programming,and set point adjustment. 3. The means to access the control system via a standard dial-up type modem using the Engineers Computer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Coordinate all work with the engineer/owner to avoid conflicts,errors,delays and unnecessary interference with operation of the existing system during installation, testing, cut-over and startup. B. Install all new equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. PART 4 WARRANTY 4.01 GENERAL ., A. Contractor shall provide full 3-year service warranty on the overall installation,and shall include all labor and materials required to repair or replace equipment and/or components that are defective or malfunctioning. Included under this warranty shall be all equipment, devices, hardware,and software.This warranty shall begin on date of written"Final Acceptance"of the electrical systems and to be executed as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor's warranty shall also guarantee 24-hour service response time and shall provide labor, work, or materials as necessary to maintain plant operation when replacement parts are on order. In no case shall plant electrical systems be out of service for more than 24 hours from time Owner calls for warranty service. This shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All equipment and materials installed shall have full warranty from Manufacturer that guarantees equipment is rated for harsh industrial electrical/mechanical environment in which it is installed. Where Manufacturer's products fail prematurely, Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for new replacement and shall not have the option of declaring that failures where caused by environmental conditions and its affect on the product. Contractor is fully responsible for assuring that Product Manufacturers are aware of this condition and that warranty statement is included in shop drawing submittals. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All critical warranted repairs shall be made within 24 hours of receipt of required parts from Manufacturer with reasonable delivery time of overnight shipping. Any repairs not completed within 5 working days from date of notice are subject to Owner making other arrangements for repair and back charging Contractor. This requirement is a condition of this contract. C. Where equipment or instrument problems remain unresolved by Contractor beyond a 16941-14 of 1.5 REVISED 9/23/201.9 taw reasonable time, a Factory Technician shall be provided on-site to take any corrective actions necessary to put equipment or instruments in operating order. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to determine a reasonable time for corrective action by Contractor. D. The Valve Control System Supplier shall provide all necessary operation,use and development keys and licensing required for unlimited system operation, programming,and maintenance. -END OF SECTION- 411101 16941-15 of 15 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16947 ELECTRICAL ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS STUDY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide ARC FLASH ANALYSIS for new VFD sections added to MCC. 1. Conduct electrical arc flash hazard analysis, including: a. MCC after installation of two new 150 hp VFD units. Coordinate with VFD vendor. Use electrical system one-line diagram to model an accurate representation of the installed electrical system. b. Determination of system operating modes and conditions that can impact short circuit currents and arc flash hazard energy levels. c. Short circuit and equipment duty study to verify that equipment is rated to safely handle short circuit currents without creating hazardous conditions. d. Protective device coordination study and review to help ensure proper electrical system reliability and to determine if arc flash hazard energy levels can be reduced. e. Arc flash hazard analysis study to determine arc flash energy levels and Personal Protective Equipment(PPE). f. A copy of the power system model and database electronic file that is fully compatible with arc flash and electrical safety program implementation software. 2. Support services for implementation of the arc flash hazard and electrical safety program at the Water Facility,including: a. Power System Modeling and Arc Flash Analysis software for ongoing use by facility staff members in maintaining the electrical equipment. b. Arc flash hazard labeling. c. Arc flash and electrical safety training,where applicable. d. Personal Protective Equipment(PPE)training,where applicable. e. Consulting services to assist Owner with development of safe work practices and procedures. B. An electrical arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed on the Water Plant Facility to determine incident energy,arc flash protection boundaries, and required PPE for all electrical equipment in the facility. The calculations shall comply with NFPA-70E 2004, and IEEE-1584. An integral part of NFPA-70E compliance is integrating work permits with arc flash assessment for all equipment in this facility.This section describes in detail the requirements for the study as well as integrating work permits in the system model for 70E compliance. C. The purpose of this study is to provide a comprehensive software model of the Water Plant Facility electrical distribution system,which will document Facility compliance with NFPA 70E 41110 mandates as described below. 16947-I of REVISED 9/23/2019 This model will serve as an integral part of an ongoing safety program by providing integral work permits and arc flash calculations in compliance with NFPA-70E 2004 Article 130.1 (A)(2)for each electrical equipment in the facility. 1. Article 205.3, 120.2 (F)(1): Updated and verified one-line diagram for all electrical distribution voltages including all sources for lock-out and tag out procedures. 2. Article 400.5, 400.6: Updated short circuit and equipment duty verification study showing all electrical equipment is properly rated to withstand and interrupt the available short circuit duty per ANSI Standards and NEMA/UL/NEC requirements. 3. Article 4006, 410.9: Updated protective device coordination study showing the system protective devices are properly set to coordinate and clear a fault without extensive equipment damage or personnel risk. 4. Article 130.3 (A) (B), 110.8: Updated arc flash study providing maximum incident energies, arc flash boundaries, and PPE requirements for each equipment in the system. In addition, these calculations shall be integrated with 70E compliant work permits to as part of an ongoing safety program. 5. Article 130.16(E), 400.11, 400.14, 400.21(C)(2), 410.8: Updated labeling displaying the worst-case arc hazard values for all equipment in the facility. D. The analysis shall consist of the following: 1. Field data collection by qualified personnel(as defined by NFPA 70E). 2. Data entry and system one-line modeling in commercially available power system software. 3. Model verification. 4. Short Circuit and equipment verification study. 5. Protective device coordination study. 6. Arc flash hazard study 7. Detailed report and findings of the analysis. 8. Electronic Copies of the Project Report and the System Modeling File. 9. Review of a draft copy of the report and presentation of the final copy of the report in person,via teleconference,or via teleconference and web conference. 10. Hard copies of the project report(note all printing, postage,etc.) shall be included in proposed project pricing. E. The analysis and procedures shall comply with the following standards and recommend practices for power system studies. 1. NFPA-70E, 2004 Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace 2. IEEE-1584 3. IEEE-242"Buff Book" Protection and Coordination of Industrial Power Systems 4. IEEE-399"Brown Book" Power System Analysis 5. IEEE-141"Red Book"Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants 1.02 DATA COLLECTION A. Field data collection shall be performed by a qualified (as defined by NFPA 70E-2004) consultant/contractor to ensure accurate equipment modeling J 16947-2 of 5 REVISED 9/23/2019 B. Consultant/contractor field personnel shall have up-to-date training in electrical safety and shall supply and utilize their own Personal Protective Equipment for electrical shock hazards and arc flash hazards. Consultant/contractor shall provide an energized Work Permit for all field work where live parts are exposed. Facility personnel shall not be responsible for reviewing or evaluating successful consultant/contractors safety program for suitability. Attach information describing recommended safety training and program. C. Consultant/contractor shall review Facility safety requirements and shall comply with all requirements. D. Field data collection and system modeling shall be based on the system represented by the following drawings provided by Abc Facility personnel: 1. Electrical one-line drawing. E. Equipment shall be visually inspected to collect the necessary nameplate data used in the analysis. Contractor is responsible for visual verification of this data, including transformers, switchgear and breakers, relays, direct-acting trip units, etc. Data that may not be readily accessible or may not have nameplate data such as conductors, Busway, etc. can be taken from drawings. F. Plant/facility shall provide qualified personnel to show contractor/consultant equipment location and to open all equipment doors, locks,etc. necessary to collect nameplate data. G. Where equipment data is available from the plant/facility on updated drawings or in database format, consultant/contractor may use this data in building the model, but shall field verify information when necessary. 4111, 1.03 SYSTEM MODELING A. The system model shall be developed using a commercially available, fully integrated software package that meets the performance specifications developed in this Section. To ensure compliance with NFPA-70E 2004, ANSI, and IEEE Standards, and OSHA mandates, no exceptions or substitutions to the performance specification are allowed. B. The system model shall be laid out in one drawing/view and in a manner that provides for easy viewing of all analysis results. The one drawing/view requirements ensures that problem areas found and highlighted by the program are easily seen and not hidden or buried in multiple drawings, eliminating potential human errors where multiple drawing verification is required. C. Equipment names used in the modeling software shall be identical to the equipment and naming convention shown on the existing facility drawings and equipment unless conflicts exist. Consultant/contractor shall bring all naming convention conflicts or deficiencies to the attention of Facility Staff members for clarification. D. The Facility may have multiple operating conditions, including, but not limited to,generation on/off, shutdown, bus-ties, start-up, emergency operation, etc. Consultant/contractor shall discuss facility operation with designated Abc Facility to determine the possible operating modes of the system. Each of the operating modes shall be documented and modeled in the software in order to determine the worst-case arc flash hazard and associated parameters for the electrical equipment. E. The software shall model each operating mode in a manner such that each mode is a scenario or change case from the base case. Each scenario shall be a simple differential 411110 algorithm storing only the difference from the base case and the scenario. 16947-3 of 5 REVISED 9/23/2019 Modifications to the base case databases for each condition, providing for a manageable file size that can be Emailed and eliminating the associated time, man hours, and errors with updating each database individually. 1.04 MODEL VERIFICATION A. The system model shall be verified by reviewing the results of short circuit current flows for all buses/equipment in the system.The results shall be viewed as flows on each branch and total flow into a bus/equipment on the system one-line diagram. The purposes is to visually spot check all substations with recognized industry benchmarks as to the expected amount of short circuit current and correct any problem areas. 1.05 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A. A short circuit study shall be performed to verify all equipment duties in the system. The calculations shall comply with ANSI C37.101, C37.13, C37.5, IEEE-141, and IEEE-399. The short circuit study shall verify the system electrical equipment is properly rated to withstand and interrupt the expected bolted and arcing faults in the system. Improperly rated and applied equipment may not protect personnel against arc flash hazards even if properly applied PPE is used.The software program must comply with the above standards in order to properly verify equipment installed in North America. No substitutions will be allowed. R. The equipment duty verification shall determine both the line side and load side fault current through each equipment and use the highest current to verify equipment ratings. Standard bus faults are not acceptable for protective devices in that they do not accurately model the current through the device and provide erroneous results. For solidly grounded systems, both three-phase and single-line-to-ground faults should be modeled.For other grounding configurations only a three-phase fault is required. C. Equipment duty results shall be graphically displayed on the electrical one-line as well as tabular report format. D. The results of the equipment duty verification tabular format report shall provide the following data: 1. Equipment name and kV. 2. Manufacture,type,style,and ratings of the device. 3. Actual line or load side currents through the device and percent over/under duty. 4. Flag for the device showing VIOLATION or WARNING level for visual identification E. A report of all problem areas shall be provided. Consultant/contractor shall notify Abc Facility personnel immediately of all problems found in this system before proceeding in the study.A recommended action list shall be provided for all underrated equipment in the system. 16947-4 of 5 REVISED 9/23/2019 trf 1.06 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION REVIEW OR STUDY A. A PDC review shall be performed in order to determine if the system protection characteristics are sufficient to provide reliable power to the facility.The PDC review will also determine if the existing settings entered in the software will provide proper personnel protection in the arc flash portion of this study. For facilities where the main distribution is low voltage (under 600 volts) and only instantaneous breakers or fuses are used,this section may not apply. -END OF SECTION- 16947-5 of REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16949 CELLULAR ROUTER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012 - "Electrical Work" for additional requirements. Failure to do so will be at expense of Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Contractor shall contact local Factory Representative to verify all equipment purchased conforms to the requirements of this project. Failure to do so may result in equipment removal and replacement at Contractor's expense. See Section 16012 — "Electrical Work," for submittal requirements. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: LAN-Cell 3 Mobile Cellular Router. PART 2 PRODUCTS 46, 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Proxicast. B. Written pre-approved equal 2.02 36/46 CELLULAR ROUTER A. Cellular Router shall be Proxicast LAN-Cell 3, high performance mobile 36/46,with all related power supplies, cabling, mounting devices, adapters, Wi-Fi antenna, and documentation. Provide and install according to Manufacturer's instructions, per Plans and Specifications, and to fit space in controls cabinet. B. Provide and install Verizon capable 36/46 LTE USB modem. C. Provide and install Cellular Amplifier to boost signal reception. Include all required appurtenances for a complete operating system. D. Provide three (3) VPN client licenses, and all other license required for a complete communication link between stations shown on plans and indicated in specifications. E. Provide all required Wireless Air Cards for communications link. Air Cards are available separately on a carrier-to-carrier basis and shall be provided for the carrier specified, and as required for 36 access using the Proxicast LAN-Cell 2 kit. F. Provide outdoor rated antennas with length of cable required for connection to router or cards with antenna located in outdoor location shown on Plans, or for optimum signal reception at site. Antenna cables to be complete with SMA connector, or as required by devices supplied. Antenna shall have swivel base for adjustment of antenna. Multiband cellular antennas shall be rated 2 dm or better,as required for optimum signal strength. �r G. Router Characteristics: 16949-1 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 1. Open Upgradable Architecture: High Speed 3G/4G Modem Slot with Modem-Lock No and External Antenna Ports 2. Supports LTE, HSPA+ EV-DO Rev-A, EV-DO Rev-0, 1xRTT, HSUPA, HSDPA, UMTS, EDGE,GPRS USB Modems 3. Enterprise-Class 30/46 Router and WiFi(802.11 a/b/g)Wireless Features 4. Four(4) Port 10/100 Ethernet LAN Switch+(1) 10/100 Ethernet WAN Port 5. Full VPN,Client and Server Firewall and Security Functions 6. Automatic Fail-Over Between 36/46 Cellular and Ethernet WAN 7. Built-In Cellular Cost Control Features 8. Web Interface and SMNP H. Provide router, cards, software, firmware, accessories, and services for Electrical Engineer's use to remotely set-up, monitor,and observe control systems operation. Provide all equipment, devices, accessories, software,firmware,set-up, and programming of Owner's mobile laptop for access to SCADA system via the 3G/4G cellular network. 1. Provide "unlimited" monthly service from Provider. Activation shall be paid for by Contractor until end of 1 — year warranty period of contract, at which time Owner may continue service. Provide a Public Static IP address for each USB modem provided. 2.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawing per requirements of Section 16012—"Electrical Work." PART 3 EXECUTION J 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, Contract Documents, and approved submittals. B. Provide Verizon cellular service that extends from date controls and/or SCADA systems are activated for testing and programming to end of 1-year warranty period of contract, after which time service contract shall be transferred to Owner. C. All installation and service costs through this period are at Contractor's expense. D. Failure to active service at designated time will result in Owner's Representative activating system,and all related costs, including person-hours and overhead,charged to Contractor. E. Any delay in activation of cellular router system installation will be at Contractor's risk for all testing and engineering schedule changes required. F. Cellular router shall be activated and coordinated with Engineer prior to any controls inspections or testing by Engineer. Any delay in construction due to this provision is at Contractor's risk. 3.02 OPERATION& MAINTENANCE(O&M)MANUALS A. Provide O&M manuals per requirements of Section 16012 — "Electrical Work," Item 1.05 — "Operation and Maintenance(O&M)Manuals." J 16949-2 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 41/0 3.03 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty per requirements of Section 16012 — "Electrical Work," Item 3.06 — "Warranty." 3.04 TRAINING A. Provide training per requirements of Section 16012 — "Electrical Work;' Item 3.07 — "Training." -END OF SECTION- 16949-3 of 3 REVISED 9/23/2019 SECTION 16995 D.O SYSTEM COMMISSIONING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. This copyright protected © specification is issued confidentially for this specific project only. Reproduction of this document for any other purpose is prohibited. B. Refer to Section 16012-"Electrical Work"for additional requirements. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The purpose of this section is to specify Divisions 11, 13, 15 and 16 responsibilities in the commissioning process,which are being directed by the TE. Other electrical system testing are required under the direction of the General Contractor, prior to start of the commissioning process. B. Description of equipment and systems included in the commissioning process are found in Specification sections 11370, 13450, 13624, 13630, 15101, 16016, 16176,and 16944. C. Commissioning requires the participation of the Contractor and subcontractors and equipment suppliersto ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents.The general equipment setup,testing and inspection requirements to be complete prior to start of commissioning process are detailed in the above listed Specification Sections.All thIrt work described in these specifications is to be finished and accepted prior to start of commissioning testing. The Contractor shall be familiar with all parts of the commissioning requirements and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. TE: "Test Engineer" B. Contractor:General Contractor 1.04 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractors: The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the Contractor, and subcontractors,and equipment suppliers are as follows. B. Construction and Acceptance Phases: 1. Include the all cost related to the D.O. control system commissioning in the contract price. 2. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings scheduled by the TE to facilitate the commissioning process. 3. Contractors shall provide standard cut sheets and shop drawing submittals to the TE. These are the documents required under the terms of the construction contract. 4. Provide additional requested equipment installation and/or operation documentation for the O&M manual submittals to the TE for use in development of start-up and functional testing procedures. 16995-1 of 6 REVISED 9/23/2019 a. The Commissioning Engineer or TE may request further documentation necessary for the commissioning process where original submittals or O&M Manuals are not adequate or lack complete information. 5. Contractor, subcontractors or supplier shall assist TE in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the submitted,control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. 6. Provide assistance to the TE in preparation of the specific functional performance test procedures. Equipment vendors or manufacturers shall review test procedures to ensure feasibility,safety,and equipment protection during commissioning testing,and shall provide all required alarm limits(in writing)to be used during the tests to assure no damage to equipment. It is the Contractors responsibility to assure safe equipment operation during testing and commissioning procedures. 7. Develop a plan for full start-up and initial checkout procedures using Manufacturer's recommended start-up procedures. Submit copy of Manufacturer's start-up procedures and other requested equipment documentation to TE for review. 8. During the start-up and initial checkout process, execute and document the electrical/mechanical/instrumentation related portions of the pre-functional checklists for all commissioned equipment. 9. Perform and clearly document all completed pre start-up and system operational checkout procedures required by construction contract documents and,provide a copy to the TE prior to starting commissioning tests. 10. Address all current Engineer's inspection punch list items for electrical,mechanical and instrumentation installations. 11. Provide skilled,factory trained Technicians to execute setup and starting of equipment and to execute the functional performance demonstrations required by the construction documents prior to the commissioning process. Ensure that Technicians are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests,adjustments,and provide problem resolutions in a timely manner so as to not delay start of commissioning activities. . Where a Technician will be absent during a prescheduled test, Contractor shall have replacement Technician, or shall provide 48 hour notice to Engineer and TE. Any absence of testing personnel, subcontractors or suppliers may result in rescheduling of tests and may result in additional Commissioning costs at Contractors expense. 13. Perform functional performance testing under the direction of the TE for specified equipment during commissioning testing. Assist the TE in interpreting the monitored data,as necessary to confirm proper operation of equipment being tested. 14. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance during commissioning)as interpreted by the TE and/or Engineer and be prepared to retest the equipment where requested to do so. 15. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Construction Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions based on results of commissioning tests. 16. Prepare red-line, as-built drawings for all drawings and final as-builts for Contractor generated drawings, based on results of commissioning testing. 17. Provide training of the Owner's operating personnel as described in Specification sections of the contract documents. TE or TS Representative may be present during training sessions. 18. Coordinate with Equipment Manufacturers to determine specific testing conditions to maintain the validity of the warranty. J 16995-2 of 6 REVISED 9/23/2019 19. Power System Studies: a. Provide power system studies that include a complete short-circuit study; equipment evaluation study and protective device coordination study based on the installed electrical distribution system, is required under the construction contract.These studies shall be undated if commissioning testing requires any variation from original studies. b. Include in the study updates, all portions of the electrical distribution system from the main service circuit breaker(s)and from alternate generator source of power in the electrical distribution system under study. c. Cover normal system operating configuration plus any plausible alternate configurations and operations that could result in maximum fault conditions occurring. d. Short-Circuit Study: 1) Perform all short circuit studies using the E-TAP software package as produced by Operation Technology Inc. 2) Provide electronic copy of studies in format that is compatible with other E-TAP versions. e. Provide Arc Flash Study and signage per NEC Requirements. f. Notify the Engineer of any problem areas or inadequacies in the electrical distribution system equipment. tirPART 2 PRODUCTS(not applicable this project.) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COMMISSIONING PRETESTING PROCEDURES A. All electrical and mechanical equipment and systems will be tested individually prior to conducting the official Commissioning testing to assure each system is functional, all setpoint settings are correct,all signal paths to test computers are complete and accurate and,all systems respond to commands from the Commissioning station PC.All pretesting will be recorded at the Commissioning station PC. At this point, any equipment or systems operation not already demonstrated to Engineer and Owners Representative as required under the Contract shall be demonstrated. B. After all pretests are complete and all systems are confirmed as operating properly, the final Commissioning test will be scheduled by the TE and Contractor. After this point in time, no adjustments are alterations to any equipment or systems will be allowed,unless approved by the TE. If time permits,the pretesting is to be completed immediately, or the following day. As with all previous inspections and testing,the Contractor,subcontractors,equipment supplier Representatives will be required to be present to assist in event problems occur during the test routines. The final test routine will be a computer controlled automatic test and will not be interruptible without halting the complete test routine, in which case,testing will start from the beginning. coy C. After successful completion of the computer controlled automatic tests, and after analysis of test data is completed and acceptable,the Engineer will notify the Owners Representative 16995-3 of 6 REVISED 9/23/2019 that the Commissioning procedures are over and the plant is operating in an acceptable manner. 3.02 START-UP A. The Electrical Contractors shall follow the start-up and initial checkout procedures listed in the responsibilities described in this section. Division 16—"Electrical"has start-up responsibility and is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully functional,meeting the design objectives of the Contract Documents. The commissioning procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the commissioning agent or Owner. B. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of the complete instrumentation and control systems. Functional testing may proceed prior to the completion of systems, or sub- systems at the discretion of the TE and CM. Beginning system testing before full completion does not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system,including all prefunctional checklists. 3.03 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS—(NOT APPLICABLE) 3.04 TESTING DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE,AND APPROVALS—(NOT APPLICABLE) 3.05 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE(O&M)MANUALS A. Division 16—"Electrical"shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and systems covered in Division 16— "Electrical" and deliver to the TE for inclusion in the O&M manuals, according to Section 01730. B. The TE shall receive a copy of the O&M manuals for review. 3.06 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. The Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure that training is completed. Refer to Division 16 Specifications for additional details. B. The TE shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment. C. Contractor: The Contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 1. Provide the TE with a training plan two(2)weeks before the planned training according to the outline described in Division 16 Specifications. 2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each major piece of commissioned electrical equipment or system. 3. Training shall start with classroom sessions,if necessary,followed by hands on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including start-up,shut down,fire/smoke alarm,power failure, etc. 4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated. 5. The appropriate Trade or Manufacturer's Representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the Start-Up Technician for the piece of equipment, the installing Contractor or Manufacturer's Representative. In- 16995-4 of 6 REVISED 9/23/2019 depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment is required. More than one party may be required to execute the training. 6. The training sessions shall follow the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate, whenever possible,the use of the O&M manuals for reference. 7. Training shall include: a. Use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in the O&M Manuals. b. Include a review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance,special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up,operation in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures. c. Cover common troubleshooting problems and solutions. d. Explain information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans and manuals in the facility. e. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. f. Classroom sessions may include the use of overhead projections, slides,video and audio taped material as might be appropriate. 8. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut down, and any emergency procedures and maintenance of all pieces of equipment. 9. The Electrical Contractor and vendor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the instrumentation and control systems. 10. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete,unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. 11. Training Scope: The Electrical Contractor, vendor and manufacturer's representative shall provide training on each system and piece of equipment according to the following schedule and as specified in the associated Specification sections of the construction contract. a. D.O. Control System and Gas Detection Systems b. Oxygen Generating System Controls c. Emergency Operations(simulate power failure) d. SCADA System e. Instrumentation System f. Variable Frequency Controllers(VFD) g. Motor Operated Valves h. Mass Flow Meters CL2 Leak Detection j. Clarifier Controls k. Alarms Air Lift Controls m. NPW Pump Controls n. Level Transmitter Controls o. HVAC Systems Operation CIO p. SCADA Master Station Operation q. Lift Station 16995-5 of 6 REVISED 9/23/2019 r. Headworks J s. WAS/RAS/Sludge Transfer t. Scum Air Lift u. Misc.Air Lifts v. Power Monitor w. Autodialer x. Autosensory Controls y. Chlorine and LAS Controls z. And, all other equipment and controls installed in this project. -END OF SECTION- J J 16995-6 of 6 REVISED 9/23/2019 'r APPENDIX A - STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 'r Cir STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN FM 521 GROUND STORAGE TANK EXPANSION — PHASE 2 SERVING CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS September 2019 CI JOB NO. 2019050 411, TABLE OF CONTENTS I. Pollution Prevention Plan 2. Certifications 3. Inspection and Maintenance Reports 4. Specifications a. Sodding for Erosion Control 5. TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 6. Exhibits a Vicinity Map b. SWPPP:Site Plan c. Notice of Intent dir d. Construction Site Notices e. Transfer of Operational Control L SECTION 1 'r FM 521 GROUND STORAGE TANK EXPANSION—PHASE 2 CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN Project Name and Location: Owner Name and Address: FM 521 Ground Storage City of Pearland Tank Expansion—Phase 2 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77584 Pearland, Texas 77581 Location: Latitude: 29° 34' 43"North Longitude: 95° 25' 56" West City of Pearland, Fort Bend County, Texas Contractor Name and Address: L 1 1.0 SITE DESCRIPTION a. Description of the Construction Activity: The project will entail the removal and replacement of two booster pumps and two variable frequency drives; installation of a generator with diesel tank,quiet enclosure, fuel cleaner and concrete pad; analyze electrical loads; modification to civil, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, HVAC, and controls; installation of fiber optic extension from FM 2234 to water plant electrical building;SWPPP measures; site grading; and site restoration. The excess excavation material will be hauled offsite. b. Potential Pollutants and Their Sources: The following potential pollutants can be reasonably expected at the construction site: construction debris, litter, chemical wastes, construction materials, sediment, dust, waste materials, petroleum products, sand, concrete truck wash out water, erosive flow velocity, crushed rock, discarded equipment, acid, sanitary wastes, curing compounds, lime, fly ash, cement, biological materials, and other similar pollutants. Any additional or unique potential pollutants will be addressed on the project site map. Potential pollutants can be reasonably associated with the following typical point sources: fuel tanks, construction equipment, parked vehicles, waste containers, vehicle traffic, pumps, drainage swales, channels, exposed soil, construction entrances, stored construction materials, construction personnel, temporary buildings,demolished structures,concrete trucks,sanitary facilities,and other similar point sources. Any additional or unique point sources will be addressed on the project's site map. c. Sequence of Major Activities: This project is expected to be completed within a period of 330 calendar days, weather permitting. The project will entail the removal and replacement of two booster pumps and two variable frequency drives; installation of a generator with diesel tank, quiet enclosure,fuel cleaner and concrete pad; analyze electrical loads; modification to civil,mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, HVAC, and controls; installation of fiber optic extension from FM 2234 to water plant electrical building; SWPPP measures; site grading; and site restoration.. d. Estimated Total Site Area,Total Disturbed Area: This project qualifies as a small construction activity under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Construction General Permit No. TXRI50000, effective March 5,2018. The total site/disturbed area associated with construction of this project is approximately 1.3 acres. V 2 e. Type of Soils: Several geotechnical borings were taken across the project site. Surface and sub- surface materials are lean clay, sandy lean clay, fat clay and silty clay from 0 to 30 feet deep and silt with sand, silty sand, sandy lean clay and fat clay from 30 to 140 feet. f. Vicinity Map: The vicinity maps are attached. g. Site Map A site map showing erosion and sedimentation control measures is attached. The project construction plans provide details of slopes in the fill areas. h. Asphalt and Concrete Plants: None dedicated to this project or proposed for coverage under this permit. Name of the Receiving Water and Extent of Wetlands: The project initially outfall into an existing drainage channel maintained by Fort Bend County Drainage District called Clear Creek Above Tidal(1102).The runoffo Segment 1101 (Clear Creek Tidal) which outfall into Segment 2425 (Clear Lake) which outfalls into Segment 24210W (Upper Galveston Bay(Oyster Waters)). j. Permit Requirements: Copy of permit attached. k. NOI and Site Notice: Copy of notices attached. 2.0 CONTROLS a. Erosion and Sediment Controls I. Control measures will be properly selected,installed and maintained in good accordance with manufacturer's specifications and good engineering practice."If damaged or rendered ineffective,the erosion and sediment controls will be repaired or replaced immediately". 2. "When pumping(dewatering)standing storm water from the site,the 411, operator shall use appropriate Best Management Practices (BMPs) 3 form the Storm Water Management Handbook for Construction Activities that address dewatering activities. Untreated/DirectJ discharge into a storm sewer will not be allowed". b. Stabilization Practices 1. If the interim period between construction of drainage and street construction will be more than 21 days,the street rights-of way will be mulched or otherwise stabilized within 14 days. 2. Ditch slopes will have 6 inches of topsoil, placed, and followed by hydromulch seeding. Fill areas and disturbed areas will be sodded. 3. After ground storage tank completion, newly graded areas and all exposed soils will be completely stabilized. c. Structural Practices 1. Reinforced filter fabric fences will be constructed around temporary earth stockpiles of significant size and partially around the site perimeter. 2. Rock Filter dams will be utilized to capture site runoff in drainage swales. 3. Concrete trucks will not be allowed to wash out or discharge surplus concrete or drum wash water on the site, unless they are using a properly designed and designated concrete washout area. d. Permanent Storm Water Controls None required or proposed. e. Other Controls: (1) Waste Disposal: Waste Materials All waste materials will be collected and stored in a designated area. All trash and construction debris from the site will be deposited in the area. The trash and debris will be hauled to an approved landfill. No construction waste material will be buried onsite. All personnel will be instructed regarding the correct procedure for waste disposal. Hazardous Waste No hazardous waste is expected to be generated or encountered in this a project. In the event that hazardous waste is encountered,all hazardous waste Vl 4 materials will be disposed of in the manner specified by local or state 4111, regulation or by the manufacturer. Sanitary Waste All sanitary waste will be regularly collected from the portable units by a licensed sanitary waste management contractor. (2) Offsite Vehicle Tracking A vehicle entry/exit area will be constructed adjacent to the site as shown on the attached site plan. The paved streets adjacent to the site entrance will be cleaned to remove any excess mud, dirt or rock tracked from the site. (3) Outside Potential Pollutant Sources: No outside pollutant sources affect this project. (4) Demonstration of Compliance with State and Local Regulations The proposed project will be in compliance with applicable state and local waste disposal and sanitary sewer regulations. 410, 3.0 MAINTENANCE The following is a list of erosion and sediment controls to be used on this project. Stabilization Practices Sodding and hydromulch Structural Practices Filter Fabric Fence,straw bales, rock dams or sand bags generally will be placed as shown on the plans. Use and placement of these items will be modified in the field as warranted by the conditions encountered. A vehicle entry/exit is also required. To maintain the above practices,the following will be performed: "Maintenance and repairs will be conducted within 24 hours of inspection report" (see Section 4.0 below). 2. Sediment will be removed from behind the structural controls when it reaches 1/3 the height of the protection. 3. Adjacent streets will be cleared daily, as needed, to minimize siltation of adjacent storm sewers. 5 4. "Erosion and sediment control measures that have been improperly installed or have been disabled,run-over,removed,or otherwise rendered ineffective must be replaced or corrected immediately." 5. "If sediment escapes the site, accumulations must be removed at a frequency that minimizes off-site impacts,and prior to the next rain event, if feasible." 6. Maintenance responsibilities are as follows: The contractor is responsible for maintenance of erosion and sediment controls he constructs until he files a Notice of Termination(NOT). The NOT cannot be filed until the contractor has completed all items of his work to the satisfaction of the Owner(or his representative). 4.0 INSPECTIONS a. Each contractor will designate a qualified person or persons to perform the following inspections: * Disturbed areas and areas used for storage of materials that are exposed to precipitation will be inspected for evidence of,or the potential for,pollutants entering the drainage system. * Erosion and sediment control measures identified in the plan will be observed to ensure that they are operating correctly. Noile * Where discharge locations or points are accessible,they will be inspected to ascertain whether erosion control measures are effective in preventing significant impacts to receiving waters. * Locations where vehicles enter or exit the site will be inspected for evidence of offsite sediment tracking. The inspection will be conducted by the responsible person at least once every 10 calendar days and within 24 hours after a storm of 0.5 inch or greater. After a portion of the site is finally stabilized, inspection will be conducted at least once every month. b. Based on the results of the inspection, the site description (section 1) and control measures(section 2)of this PPP will be revised as appropriate,but in no case later than 7 calendar days following the inspection. c. A report summarizing the scope of the inspection, name(s) and qualifications of personnel making the inspection, the date(s) of the inspection, major observations relating to the implementation of the storm water pollution prevention plan, and actions taken in accordance item Ab@ above will be made and retained as part of the storm water pollution prevention plan for at least three years from the date that the 6 site is finally stabilized. The report will be signed in accordance with Part VLG of 411, the General Permit. Copies of the forms to be used for the Inspection and Maintenance report are included in the following pages as a part of this PPP. 5.0 NON-STORM WATER DISCHARGES Inventory for Pollution Prevention Plan The following substances listed below are expected to be present onsite during construction: Fertilizers Fuels Lubricants Wood Spill Prevention The following are the material management practices that will be used to reduce the risk of spills or other accidental exposure of the materials and substances described above to storm water runoff. Good Housekeeping The following good housekeeping practices will be followed onsite during the construction project. I. An effort will be made to store only enough products required to do the job. 2. All materials stored onsite will be stored in a neat, orderly manner in their appropriate container and, if possible, under a roof or other enclosure. 3. Products will be kept in their original containers with the original manufacturer=s label. 4. Substances will not be mixed with one another unless recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Whenever possible,all of a product will be used up before disposing of the container. 6. Manufacturer's recommendations for proper use and disposal will be followed. 7. The site superintendent will inspect daily to ensure proper use and disposal of materials onsite. 8. "All litter,trash and floatable debris will be contained". 11110 Hazardous Products 7 These practices will be used to reduce the risks associated with hazardous materials, if hazardous materials are used. 1. Products will be kept in original containers unless they are not resealable. 2. Original labels and material safety data will be retained. 3. If surplus product must be disposed of, manufacturer's or local and State recommended methods for proper disposal will be followed. Product Specific Practices The product specific practices to be followed are listed in Table 1. Spill Prevention Practices The spill prevention practices to be followed are listed in Table I. V 8 TABLE I thw PRODUCT SPECIFIC PRACTICES The following product specific practices will be followed onsite: PETROLEUM PRODUCTS: All onsite vehicles will be monitored for leaks and receive regular preventive maintenance to reduce the chance of leakage. Petroleum products will be stored in tightly sealed containers which are clearly labeled. Any asphalt substances used onsite will be applied according to the manufacturer=s recommendations. FERTILIZERS: Fertilizers used will be applied only in the minimum amounts recommended by the manufacturer. Once applied,fertilizer will be worked in the soil to limit exposure to storm water. Storage will be in a covered shed. The contents of any partially used bags of fertilizer will be transferred to a sealable plastic bin to avoid spills. PAINTS: All containers will be tightly sealed and stored when not required for use. Excess paint will not be discharged to the storm sewer system but will be properly disposed of according to manufacturer's instructions or State and local regulations. CONCRETE TRUCKS: Concrete trucks will be allowed to wash out or discharge surplus concrete or drum wash water only at designated areas on the site. SPILL PREVENTION PRACTICES In addition to the good housekeeping and material management practices discussed in the previous sections of this plan, the following practices will be for spill prevention and cleanup: * Manufacturers recommended methods for spill cleanup will be clearly posted and site personnel will be made aware of the procedures and the location of the information and cleanup supplies. * Materials and equipment necessary for spill cleanup will be kept in the material storage area onsite. Equipment and materials will include but not be limited to brooms,dust pans,mops, rags, gloves, goggles,kitty litter, sand, sawdust, and plastic and metal trash containers. * All spills will be cleaned up immediately after discovery. * The spill area will be kept well ventilated and personnel will wear appropriate protective �,. clothing to prevent injury from contact with a hazardous substance. 9 * Spills of toxic or hazardous material will be reported to the appropriate State or local government agency, regardless of the size. * The spill prevention plan will be adjusted to include measures to prevent this type of spill from reoccurring and how to clean up the spill if there is another one. A description of the spill,what caused it,and the cleanup measures will also be included. V J l0 Lr 4r SECTION 2 t FM 521 GROUND STORAGE TANK EXPANSION—PHASE 2 FOR THE CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system,or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is,to the best of my knowledge and belief,true,accurate,and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signed: Clay Pearson City Manager Date: 411/ 11 CONTRACTOR/SUB-CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION J Site: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion—Phase 2 La Latitude: 29° 34' 43"North Longitude: 95° 25' 56" West I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES)permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site identified as part of this certification. Signature: For: Ground Storage Tank Installation By: Date: J 12 POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION FOR INSPECTION REPORTS FOR FM 521 GROUND STORAGE TANK EXPANSION—PHASE 2 I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system,or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is,to the best of my knowledge and belief,true,accurate,and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signed: Date: By: Cr 41119 13 SECTION 3 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT INSPECTOR: DATE: DAYS SINCE LAST RAINFALL: AMOUNT OF LAST RAINFALL: INCHES STABILIZATION MEASURES DATE SINCE DATE OF LAST NEXT STABILIZED AREA DISTURBED DISTURBANCE STABILIZED? WITH CONDITION STABILIZATION REQUIRED: TO BE PERFORMED BY: ON OR BEFORE: CORRECTED BY: DATE: ihr 14 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT J STRUCTURAL CONTROLS INSPECTOR'S INITIALS: DATE: DIVERSION DIKES AND SWALES EVIDENCE OF WASHOUT FROM TO STABILIZED? OR OVER-TOPPING? Na MAINTENANCE REQUIRED FOR DIVERSION DIKES AND SWALES: TO BE PERFORMED BY: ON OR BEFORE: CORRECTED BY: DATE: 15 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 411, INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT STRUCTURAL CONTROLS TEMPORARY DIVERSION SWALE EVIDENCE OF WASHOUT FROM TO STABILIZED? OR OVER-TOPPING? te MAINTENANCE REQUIRED FOR TEMPORARY DIVERSION SWALE: TO BE PERFORMED BY: ON OR BEFORE: CORRECTED BY: DATE: 16 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT J STRUCTURAL CONTROLS FILTER FABRIC FENCE BOTTOM OF THE FABRIC STILL FABRIC TORN POSTS TIPPING HOW DEEP IS LOCATION BURIED? OR SAGGING? OVER? SEDIMENT? J MAINTENANCE REQUIRED FOR SILT FENCE: TO BE PERFORMED BY: ON OR BEFORE: CORRECTED BY: DATE: 17 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (hr INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT �/ STRUCTURAL CONTROLS EXCAVATED EARTH OUTLET SEDIMENT TRAPS DEPTH OF CONDITION OF TRAP SEDIMENT IN CONDITION OF OUTFALL FROM LOCATION TRAP TRAP SIDE SLOPES TRAP MAINTENANCE REQUIRED FOR SEDIMENT TRAP: TO BE PERFORMED BY: ON OR BEFORE: CORRECTED BY: DATE: 18 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT STRUCTURAL CONTROLS INLET PROTECTION BARRIER IN PLACE?/ DEPTH OF CONDITION OF LOCATION CONDITION? SEDIMENT INLET MAINTENANCE REQUIRED FOR INLET PROTECTION BARRIER TO BE PERFORMED BY: ON OR BEFORE: CORRECTED BY: DATE: 19 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT STRUCTURAL CONTROLS REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER BOTTOM OF THE FABRIC STILL FABRIC TORN POSTS TIPPING HOW DEEP IS LOCATION BURIED? OR SAGGING? OVER? SEDIMENT? MAINTENANCE REQUIRED FOR REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER: TO BE PERFORMED BY: ON OR BEFORE: CORRECTED BY: DATE: 20 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT OTHER CONTROLS STRAW BALES HOW DEEP IS THE LOCATION CONDITION? IN PLACE? SEDIMENT? J MAINTENANCE REQUIRED FOR STRAW BALES: TO BE PERFORMED BY: ON OR BEFORE: CORRECTED BY: DATE: J 21 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 411, INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT OTHER CONTROLS STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE/STAGING AREA DOES MUCH SEDIMENT GET TRACKED ONTO ENTRY SURFACE CLEAN DOES ALL TRAFFIC ROAD? OR SEDIMENT FILLED? USE ENTRANCE? MAINTENANCE REQUIRED FOR STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE/STAGING AREA: TO BE PERFORMED BY: ON OR BEFORE: CORRECTED BY: DATE: 22 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT OTHER CONTROLS PROTECTION OF TREES IN CONSTRUCTION AREAS: LOCATION CONDITION IN PLACE? MAINTENANCE REQUIRED FOR TREE PROTECTION: TO BE PERFORMED BY: ON OR BEFORE: CORRECTED BY: DATE: J 23 SECTION 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 410 Section 02922 SODDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Sodding areas of residential lawns disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01 140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Definitions: 1. Lawn-ground covered with fine textured grass kept neatly mowed. 2. Sod- blocks, squares, strips of turf grass, and adhering soil used for vegetative planting. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for utility or paving. B If sodding is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C No payment shall be made for sodding of restoration areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Submit material sources and product quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. tie 07/2006 02922- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in ,/ conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Fertilizer: Available nutrient percentage by weight: 12 percent nitrogen, 4 percent phosphoric acid, and 8 percent potash; or 15 percent nitrogen, 5 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. D Weed and Insect Treatment: Provide acceptable treatment to protect sod from weed and insect infestation. Submit treatment method to the Engineer for approval. All insect and disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas E Water: Potable, available on-site through Contractor's water trucks. Do not use private resident's water. 2.02 SOD A Species: Bermuda (Cynodon Dactylon), Buffalo (Buchloe Dactyloides), or St. Augustine to match existing or as directed. B Contents: 95 percent permanent grass suitable to climate in which it is to be placed; not more than 5 percent weeds and undesirable grasses; good texture, free from obnoxious grasses, roots, stones and foreign materials. C Size: 12 inch wide strips,uniform in thickness(2 inch minimum with clean-cut edges. D Sod is to be supplied and maintained in a healthy condition as evidenced by the grass being a normal, green color. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Do not start work during inclement or impending inclement weather. Perform Sodding only when weather and soil conditions are deemed by Engineer to be suitable for proper placement. 07/2006 02922-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING B After the areas to receive sod are brought to grade, rake out any foreign organic or inorganic material, including stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 — Topsoil. Top soil shall be free of weeds and foreign material immediately before sodding. F Spread 2-inch (±1") layer of Bank Sand over prepared topsoil. G Prior to placing sod,rake areas smooth,free from unsightly variations,bumps,ridges, or depressions, and completely free from stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. H Apply fertilizer at a rate of 25 lbs/1000 SF. Apply after raking soil surface and not more than 48 hours prior to laying sod. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of soil. Lightly water to aid in dissipation of fertilizer. 3.02 APPLICATION A Lay sod with closely fitted joints leaving no voids and with ends of sod strips staggered. Sod shall be laid within 24 hours of harvesting. B After sod is laid, irrigate thoroughly to secure 6-inch minimum penetration into soil below sod. C Tamp and roll sod with approved equipment to eliminate minor irregularities and to form close contact with soil bed immediately after planting and watering. Submit type of tamping and rolling equipment to be used to the Engineer for approval, prior to construction. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintenance Period: 1. Begin maintenance immediately after each section of grass sod is installed and continue for a 30-day period from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Re-sod unacceptable areas. 3. Water, fertilize, control disease and insect pests, mow, edge, replace unacceptable materials, and perform other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice to ensure normal, vigorous and healthy growth. All disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas. 4. Notify Engineer 10 days before end of maintenance period for inspection. B Watering: Cl. Water lawn areas once a day with minimum 1/2 inch water for the first 3 weeks after area is sodded. 07/2006 02922-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 2. After 3-week period, water twice a week with 3/4 inch of water each time unless comparable amount has been provided by rain. Na 3. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil unless soil is in frozen condition. 4. Water in the morning to enable soil to absorb maximum amount of water with minimum evaporation. C Mowing: 1. Mow sod at intervals which will keep grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches. 2. Set mower blades at 2-1/2 inches. 3. Do not remove more than one-half of grass leaf surface. 4. Sodded areas requiring mowing within 1 month after installation, shall be mowed with a light-weight rotary type mower. The sod shall be mowed only when dry and not in a saturated or soft condition. 5. Remove grass clippings during or immediately after mowing. D Fertilizer and Pest Control: I. Evenly spread fertilizer composite at a rate of 40 pounds per 5,000 square feet or as recommended by manufacturer. Fertilizer shall not be placed until 2 weeks after placement of sod. 2. Restore bare or thin areas by topdressing with a mix of 50 percent sharp sand and 50 percent sphagnum peat moss. 3. Apply mixture 1/4 to 1/2 inch thick. 4. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by treatment manufacturer. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140- Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain sod in good condition until 30 days after Substantial Completion. B Replace sod damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION V 07/2006 02922-4 of 4 Cr SECTION 5 _r1 General Permit to Discharge Under TCEQ the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activities TXR150000 Effective March 5, 2018 fir pdared on TEXAS COMMISSION ON ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY recycled paper C Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P.O.Box 13087,Austin,Texas 78711-3087 N ;1 GENERAL PERMIT TO DISCHARGE UNDER THE TEXAS POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM under provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Chapter 26 of the Texas Water Code This permit supersedes and replaces TPDES General Permit No.11R1500oo,issued March 5,2013 Construction sites that discharge stormwater associated with construction activity located in the state of Texas may discharge to surface water in the state only according to monitoring requirements and other conditions set forth in this general permit,as well as the rules of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ or Commission),the laws of the State of Texas,and other orders of the Commission of the TCEQ. The issuance of this general permit does not grant to the permittee the right to use private or public property for conveyance of stormwater and certain non-stormwater discharges along the discharge route. This includes property belonging to but not limited to any individual,partnership,corporation or other entity. Neither does this general permit authorize any invasion of personal rights nor any violation of federal,state,or local laws or regulations. It is the responsibility of the permittee to acquire property rights as may be necessary to use the discharge route. This general permit and the authorization contained herein shall expire at midnight,five years from the permit effective date. EFFECTIVE DATE: March 5,2018 ISSUED DATE: Z'g -fig 0,---k.474 14w`(.•t�- For te Coytmission 4111/ TPDES GENERAL PERMIT NUMBER TXRt50000 RELATING TO STORMWATER DISCHARGES ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Table of Contents Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions 5 Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required 5 Section B. Definitions 6 Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage 13 Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 13 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity 13 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities 13 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges 13 4. Other Permitted Discharges 14 Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out 14 Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage 14 1. Post Construction Discharges 14 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges 14 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards 14 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)Requirements 14 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone 15 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas 16 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities 16 8. Indian Country Lands 16 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation 16 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities 16 it. Endangered Species Act i6 12. Other 17 Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 L Large Construction Activities 17 2. Small Construction Activities 17 Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion. 17 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: 18 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: 19 Nal) Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 4610 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities. 20 5. Effective Date of Coverage 20 6. Notice of Change(NOC) Y1 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination(NOT)Forms,NOC Letters, and Construction Site Notices 22 8. Contents of the NOI 22 Section F. Terminating Coverage 23 1. Notice of Termination(NOT)Required 23 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT 23 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites 24 4. Transfer of Day-to-Day Operational Control 24 Section G. Waivers from Coverage 25 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage 25 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver 26 3. Effective Date of a LREW 26 4. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period 26 Section II. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 27 cpe 1. Individual Permit Alternative 27 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges 27 3. Individual Permit Required 27 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization 27 Section I. Permit Expiration 27 Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) 28 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development 29 Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 29 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications 29 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control 30 Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation,Implementation,and Compliance 30 Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 30 Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s 31 Section F. Contents of SWP3 31 Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites 40 Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants 42 Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 42 L. Section B. Best Management Practices(BMPs)and SWP3 Requirements 44 Page 3 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges 46 Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements 46 Part VI. Retention of Records 47 Part VII.Standard Permit Conditions 47 Part VIII. Fees 48 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization 5o Appendix B: Erosivity Index(EI)Zones in Texas 52 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map 53 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas 54 J Page 4 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required When calculating the acreage of land area disturbed, include the disturbed land-area of all construction and construction support activities. How much land will be disturbed?('1) <I acre 1 or more acres ("I) 01) NO Do you meet the 1-eS Will 5 or more definition of acres be disturbed? "operator'f'('2) Pry NO 41, Permit Coverage Reoulred • Prepare and Implement S W P3 • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of She Notice to MS4 Operator \ j , Arc you a"primary rv0 operator?"(*2) V Permit Coverage Not FES Required,Unless Part ' Permit Coverage Remitted of Larger Common • Prepare end Implement SW P3 Plan of Development or Sale • Submir NOIm TCEQ • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of NOI to MS4 Operator ('I) To determine the size of the can4rMetion project,use the size of the entire area to be disturbed,and include the size of the larger common plan of development or.sale,tithe project is pan of a harper project(refer to Parl I,&, "Definitions."for an explanation of"common plan of development or sale} ('2) Refer to the definivansfer"operator,"'primary operator,"and"secondary operator"in tan l., Section R.of this permit. C Page 5 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1.500oo Section B. Definitions J Arid Areas-Areas with an average annual rainfall of o to io inches. Best Management Practices(BMPs)-Schedules of activities,prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures,structural controls,local ordinances,and other management practices to prevent or reduce the discharge of pollutants. BMPs also include treatment requirements,operating procedures,and practices to control construction site runoff,spills or leaks,waste disposal,or drainage from raw material storage areas. Commencement of Construction-The initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavation activities,as well as other construction-related activities (e.g.,stockpiling of fill material,demolition). Common Plan of Development-A construction activity that is completed in separate stages,separate phases,or in combination with other construction activities. A common plan of development(also known as a"common plan of development or sale")is identified by the documentation for the construction project that identifies the scope of the project,and may include plats,blueprints,marketing plans,contracts,building permits,a public notice or hearing,zoning requests,or other similar documentation and activities. A common plan of development does not necessarily include all construction projects within the jurisdiction of a public entity(e.g.,a city or university). Construction of roads or buildings in different parts of the jurisdiction would be considered separate"common plans,"with only the interconnected parts of a project being considered part of a"common plan"(e.g.,a building and its associated parking lot and driveways,airport runway and associated taxiways,a building complex,etc.). Where discrete construction projects occur within a larger common plan of development or sale but are located 1/4 mile or more apart,and the area between the projects is not being disturbed,each individual project can be treated as a separate plan of development or sale,provided that any interconnecting road,pipeline or utility project that is part of the same"common plan"is not included in the area to be disturbed. Construction Activity-Includes soil disturbance activities,including clearing,grading, excavating,construction-related activity(e.g.,stockpiling of fill material,demolition),and construction support activity. This does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site (e.g.,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities). Regulated construction activity is defined in terms of small and large construction activity. Construction Support Activity—A construction-related activity that specifically supports construction activity,which can involve earth disturbance or pollutant-generating activities of its own,and can include,but are not limited to,activities associated with concrete or asphalt batch plants,rock crushers,equipment staging or storage areas,chemical storage areas,material storage areas, material borrow areas,and excavated material disposal areas. Construction support activity must only directly support the construction activity authorized under this general permit. Dewatering—The act of draining rainwater or groundwater from building foundations, vaults,and trenches. Discharge—For the purposes of this permit,the drainage,release,or disposal of pollutants in stormwater and certain non-stormwater from areas where soil disturbing activities(e.g., clearing,grading,excavation,stockpiling of fill material,and demolition),construction materials or equipment storage or maintenance(e.g.,fill piles,borrow area,concrete truck wash out,fueling),or other industrial stormwater directly related to the construction process (e.g.,concrete or asphalt batch plants)are located. Drought-Stricken Area—For the purposes of this permit,an area in which the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration's U.S.Seasonal Drought Outlook indicates for the ` period during which the construction will occur that any of the following conditions are J Page 6 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1,50000 likely: (i)"Drought to persist or intensify",(2)"Drought ongoing,some improvement",(3) tir "Drought likely to improve,impacts ease",or(4)"Drought development likely". See http://www.cpc.ncep.noaa.gov/products/expert assessment/seasonal drought.html. Edwards Aquifer-As defined under Texas Administrative Code(TAC)§213.3 of this title (relating to the Edwards Aquifer),that portion of an arcuate belt of porous,water-bearing, predominantly carbonate rocks known as the Edwards and Associated Limestones in the Balcones Fault Zone trending from west to east to northeast in Kinney,Uvalde,Medina, Bexar,Comal, Hays,Travis,and Williamson Counties;and composed of the Salmon Peak Limestone,McKnight Formation,West Nueces Formation, Devil's River Limestone,Person Formation,Kainer Formation, Edwards Formation,and Georgetown Formation. The permeable aquifer units generally overlie the less-permeable Glen Rose Formation to the south,overlie the less-permeable Comanche Peak and Walnut Formations north of the Colorado River,and underlie the less-permeable Del Rio Clay regionally. Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone-Generally,that area where the stratigraphic units constituting the Edwards Aquifer crop out,including the outcrops of other geologic formations in proximity to the Edwards Aquifer,where caves,sinkholes,faults,fractures,or other permeable features would create a potential for recharge of surface waters into the Edwards Aquifer. The recharge zone is identified as that area designated as such on official maps located in the offices of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and the appropriate regional office. The Edwards Aquifer Map Viewer,located at httn://www.tceu.texas.gov/compliance/field oos/eapp/mapdisclaimer.html,can be used to determine where the recharge zone is located. Edwards Aquifer Contributing Zone-The area or watershed where runoff from precipitation flows downgradient to the recharge zone of the Edwards Aquifer. The contributing zone is located upstream(upgradient)and generally north and northwest of the recharge zone for the following counties:all areas within Kinney County,except the area within the watershed draining to Segment No.2304 of the Rio Grande Basin; all areas within Uvalde, Medina,Bexar,and Comal Counties;all areas within Hays and Travis Counties, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Colorado River above a point 1.3 miles upstream from Tom Miller Dam, Lake Austin at the confluence of Barrow Brook Cove, Segment No. 1403 of the Colorado River Basin; and all areas within Williamson County, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Lampasas River above the dam at Stillhouse Hollow reservoir,Segment No. 1216 of the Brazos River Basin. The contributing zone is illustrated on the Edwards Aquifer map viewer at httu://www.tceu.texas.eov/compliance/field oos/eapp/mapdisclaimer.html. Effluent Limitations Guideline(ELG)—Defined in 4o Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)§122.2 as a regulation published by the Administrator under§3040))of the Clean Water Act(CWA)to adopt or revise effluent limitations. Facility or Activity—For the purpose of this permit,referring to a construction site,the location of construction activity,or a construction support activity that is regulated under this general permit,including all contiguous land and fixtures(for example,ponds and materials stockpiles),structures,or appurtenances used at a construction site or industrial site. Final Stabilization-A construction site status where any of the following conditions are met: (a) All soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and a uniform(that is, evenly distributed,without large bare areas)perennial vegetative cover with a density of at least 70%of the native background vegetative cover for the area has been established on all unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent structures, or equivalent permanent stabilization measures(such as the use of riprap,gabions,or geotextiles) { have been employed. Page 7 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (b) For individual lots in a residential construction site by either: (1) the homebuilder completing final stabilization as specified in condition(a)above; or (2) the homebuilder establishing temporary stabilization for an individual lot prior to the time of transfer of the ownership of the home to the buyer and after informing the homeowner of the need for,and benefits of,final stabilization.If temporary stabilization is not feasible,then the homebuilder may fulfill this requirement by retaining perimeter controls or BMPs,and informing the homeowner of the need for removal of temporary controls and the establishment of final stabilization. Fulfillment of this requirement must be documented in the homebuilder's stormwater pollution prevention plan(SWP3). (c) For construction activities on land used for agricultural purposes(such as pipelines across crop or range land),final stabilization may be accomplished by returning the disturbed land to its preconstruction agricultural use. Areas disturbed that were not previously used for agricultural activities,such as buffer strips immediately adjacent to surface water and areas that are not being returned to their preconstruction agricultural use must meet the final stabilization conditions of condition(a)above. (d) In arid,semi-arid,and drought-stricken areas only,all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and both of the following criteria have been met: (i) Temporary erosion control measures(for example,degradable rolled erosion control product)are selected,designed,and installed along with an appropriate seed base to provide erosion control for at least three years without active maintenance by the operator,and (2) The temporary erosion control measures are selected,designed,and installed to achieve 70%of the native background vegetative coverage within three years. Hyperchlorination of Waterlines—Treatment of potable water lines or tanks with chlorine for disinfection purposes,typically following repair or partial replacement of the waterline or tank,and subsequently flushing the contents. Impaired Water-A surface water body that is identified as impaired on the latest approved CWA§303(d)List or waters with an EPA-approved or established total maximum daily load(TMDL)that are found on the latest EPA approved Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b)and 303(d),which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. Indian Country Land—All land within the limits of any Indian reservation under the jurisdiction of the United States government, notwithstanding the issuance of any patent, and,including rights-of-way running through the reservation;(2)all dependent Indian communities with the borders of the United States whether within the originally or subsequently acquired territory thereof,and whether within or without the limits of a state; and(3)all Indian allotments,the Indian titles to which have not been extinguished, including rights-of-way running through the same. (40 CFR§122.2) Indian Tribe-Any Indian Tribe,band,group,or community recognized by the Secretary of the Interior and exercising governmental authority over a Federal Indian Reservation(40 CFR§122.2). Infeasible—Not technologically possible,or not economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. (40 CFR§45o.ii(b)). Large Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than five(5)acres of land. Large construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than five(5)acres of total Page 8 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TX10.50000 (6110 land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than five(5)acres of land. large construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site(for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities.) Linear Project—Includes the construction of roads,bridges,conduits,substructures, pipelines,sewer lines,towers,poles,cables,wires,connectors,switching,regulating and transforming equipment and associated ancillary facilities in a long,narrow area. Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver(LREW)-A written submission to the executive director from an operator of a construction site that is considered as small construction activity under the permit,which qualifies for a waiver from the requirements for small construction activities,only during the period of time when the calculated rainfall erosivity factor is less than five(5). Minimize-To reduce or eliminate to the extent achievable using stormwater controls that are technologically available and economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System(MS4)-A separate storm sewer system owned or operated by the United States,a state,city,town,county,district,association,or other public body(created by or pursuant to state law)having jurisdiction over the disposal of sewage,industrial wastes,stormwater,or other wastes,including special districts under state law such as a sewer district,flood control or drainage district,or similar entity,or an Indian tribe or an authorized Indian tribal organization,that discharges to surface water in the state. Notice of Change(NOC) —Written notification to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this permit,providing changes to information that was previously provided to the agency in a notice of intent form. Notice of Intent(NOI)-A written submission to the executive director from an applicant requesting coverage under this general permit. Notice of Termination(NOT)-A written submission to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this general permit requesting termination of coverage. Operator-The person or persons associated with a large or small construction activity that is either a primary or secondary operator as defined below: Primary Operator—the person or persons associated with construction activity that meets either of the following two criteria: (a) the person or persons have on-site operational control over construction plans and specifications,including the ability to make modifications to those plans and specifications;or (b) the person or persons have day-to-day operational control of those activities at a construction site that are necessary to ensure compliance with a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3)for the site or other permit conditions(for example,they are authorized to direct workers at a site to carry out activities required by the SWP3 or comply with other permit conditions). Secondary Operator—The person or entity,often the property owner,whose operational control is limited to: (a) the employment of other operators,such as a general contractor,to perform or supervise construction activities;or Page 9 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (b) the ability to approve or disapprove changes to construction plans and specifications, but who does not have day-to-day on-site operational control over construction activities at the site. Secondary operators must either prepare their own SWP3 or participate in a shared SWP3 that covers the areas of the construction site,where they have control over the construction plans and specifications. If there is not a primary operator at the construction site,then the secondary operator is defined as the primary operator and must comply with the requirements for primary operators. Outfall-For the purpose of this permit,a point source at the point where stormwater runoff associated with construction activity discharges to surface water in the state and does not include open conveyances connecting two municipal separate storm sewers,or pipes, tunnels,or other conveyances that connect segments of the same stream or other water of the U.S.and are used to convey waters of the U.S. Permittee-An operator authorized under this general permit. The authorization may be gained through submission of a notice of intent,by waiver,or by meeting the requirements for automatic coverage to discharge stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction activity. Point Source—Any discernible,confined,and discrete conveyance,including but not limited to,any pipe,ditch,channel,tunnel,conduit,well,discrete fissure,container,rolling stock concentrated animal feeding operation,landfill leachate collection system,vessel or other floating craft from which pollutants are,or maybe,discharged. This term does not include return flows from irrigated agriculture or agricultural stormwater runoff(40 CFR §122.2). Pollutant-Dredged spoil,solid waste,incinerator residue,sewage,garbage,sewage sludge, filter backwash,munitions,chemical wastes,biological materials,radioactive materials,heat, wrecked or discarded equipment,rock,sand,cellar dirt,and industrial,municipal,and agricultural waste discharged into any surface water in the state. The term"pollutant"does not include tail water or runoff water from irrigation or rainwater runoff from cultivated or uncultivated rangeland,pastureland,and farmland. For the purpose of this permit,the term "pollutant"includes sediment. Pollution-The alteration of the physical,thermal,chemical,or biological quality of,or the contamination of,any surface water in the state that renders the water harmful,detrimental, or injurious to humans,animal life,vegetation,or property or to public health,safety,or welfare,or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose(Texas Water Code(TWC)§26.001(14)). Rainfall Erosivity Factor(R factor)-the total annual erosive potential that is due to climatic effects,and is part of the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE). Receiving Water-A"Water of the United States"as defined in 4o CFR§122.2 or a surface water in the state into which the regulated stormwater discharges. Semiarid Areas-areas with an average annual rainfall of to to 20 inches. Separate Storm Sewer System-A conveyance or system of conveyances(including roads with drainage systems,streets,catch basins,curbs,gutters,ditches,man-made channels,or storm drains),designed or used for collecting or conveying stormwater;that is not a combined sewer,and that is not part of a publicly owned treatment works(POTW). Small Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than one(1)acre and less than five(5)acres of land. Small construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than one(1)acre of total land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than one(1)and Page 10 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 less than five(5)acres of land. Small construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site(for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities). Steep Slopes—Where a state,Tribe,local government,or industry technical manual(e.g. stormwater BMP manual)has defined what is to be considered a"steep slope",this permit's definition automatically adopts that definition. Where no such definition exists,steep slopes are automatically defined as those that are 15 percent or greater in grade. Stormwater(or Stormwater Runoff)-Rainfall runoff,snow melt runoff,and surface runoff and drainage. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity-Stormwater runoff,as defined above,from a construction activity. Structural Control(or Practice)-A pollution prevention practice that requires the construction of a device,or the use of a device,to reduce or prevent pollution in stormwater runoff. Structural controls and practices may include but are not limited to:silt fences, earthen dikes,drainage swales,sediment traps,check dams,subsurface drains,storm drain inlet protection,rock outlet protection,reinforced soil retaining systems,gabions,and temporary or permanent sediment basins. Surface Water in the State- Lakes,bays,ponds,impounding reservoirs,springs, rivers, streams,creeks,estuaries,wetlands,marshes,inlets,canals,the Gulf of Mexico inside the territorial limits of the state(from the mean high water mark(MHWM)out 10.36 miles into the Gulf),and all other bodies of surface water,natural or artificial,inland or coastal,fresh or salt,navigable or non-navigable,and including the beds and banks of all water-courses and bodies of surface water,that are wholly or partially inside or bordering the state or 411, subject to the jurisdiction of the state; except that waters in treatment systems which are authorized by state or federallaw,regulation,or permit,and which are created for the purpose of waste treatment are not considered to be water in the state. Temporary Stabilization-A condition where exposed soils or disturbed areas are provided a protective cover or other structural control to prevent the migration of pollutants. Temporary stabilization may include temporary seeding,geotextiles,mulches,and other techniques to reduce or eliminate erosion until either permanent stabilization can be achieved or until further construction activities take place. Thawing Conditions—for the purposes of this permit,thawing conditions are expected based on the historical likelihood of two or more days with daytime temperatures greater than 32 T. This date can be determined by looking at historical weather data. Note: The estimation of thawing conditions is for planning purposes only. During construction,the permittee will be required to conduct site inspections based upon actual conditions(i.e.,if thawing conditions occur sooner than expected,the permittee will be required to conduct inspections at the regular frequency). Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)-The total amount of a pollutant that a water body can assimilate and still meet the Texas Surface Water Quality Standards. Turbidity—A condition of water quality characterized by the presence of suspended solids and/or organic material. Waters of the United States-Waters of the United States or waters of the U.S.means: (a) all waters which are currently used,were used in the past,or may be susceptible to use in interstate or foreign commerce,including all waters which are subject to the ebb and flow of the tide; (b) all interstate waters,including interstate wetlands; Page it Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRrg0000 (c) all other waters such as intrastate lakes,rivers,streams(including intermittent streams),mudflats,sandflats,wetlands,sloughs,prairie potholes,wet meadows, playa lakes,or natural ponds that the use,degradation,or destruction of which would affect or could affect interstate or foreign commerce including any such waters: (r) which are or could be used by interstate or foreign travelers for recreational or other purposes; (2) from which fish or shellfish are or could be taken and sold in interstate or foreign commerce;or (3) which are used or could be used for industrial purposes by industries in interstate commerce; (d) all impoundments of waters otherwise defined as waters of the United States under this definition; (e) tributaries of waters identified in paragraphs(a)through(d)of this definition; (f) the territorial sea;and (g) wetlands adjacent to waters(other than waters that are themselves wetlands) identified in paragraphs(a)through(f)of this definition. Waste treatment systems,including treatment ponds or lagoons designed to meet the requirements of CWA are not waters of the U.S. This exclusion applies only to manmade bodies of water which neither were originally created in waters of the U.S.(such as disposal area in wetlands)nor resulted from the impoundment of waters of the U.S. Waters of the U.S.do not include prior converted cropland. Notwithstanding the determination of an area's status as prior converted cropland by any other federal agency,for the purposes of the CWA,the final authority regarding CWA jurisdiction remains with EPA. J 1) Page 12 41, Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization r. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from small and large construction activities may be authorized under this general permit. 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction support activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit may be authorized,provided that the following conditions are met: (a) the construction support activities are located within one(i)mile from the boundary of the construction site where the construction activity authorized under the permit is being conducted that requires the support of these activities; (b) an SWP3 is developed for the permitted construction site according to the provisions in Part III.F of this general permit,and includes appropriate controls and measures to reduce erosion and the discharge of pollutants in stormwater runoff according to the provisions in Part III.G of this general permit; (c) the activities are directly related to the construction site; (d) the activities are not a commercial operation,nor serve other unrelated construction projects; and (e) the activities do not continue to operate beyond the completion of the construction activity at the project it supports. Construction support activities that operate outside the terms provided in(a)through(e) above must obtain authorization under a separate Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES)permit,which may include the TPDES Multi Sector General Permit(MSGP),TERo50000(related to stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity),an alternative general permit(if available),or an individual water quality permit. 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges The following non-stormwater discharges from sites authorized under this general permit are also eligible for authorization under this general permit: (a) discharges from fire-fighting activities(fire-fighting activities do not include washing of trucks,run-off water from training activities,test water from fire suppression systems,or similar activities); (b) uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings(excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life),which include flushings from systems that utilize potable water,surface water,or groundwater that does not contain additional pollutants(uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings do not include systems utilizing reclaimed wastewater as a source water); (c) water from the routine external washing of vehicles,the external portion of buildings or structures,and pavement,where detergents and soaps are not used, where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred(unless spilled materials have been removed;and if local state,or federal regulations are applicable,the materials are removed according to those regulations),and where the 41.0 purpose is to remove mud,dirt,or dust; Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRrs0000 (d) uncontaminated water used to control dust; (e) potable water sources,including waterline flushings,but excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life; (t) uncontaminated air conditioning condensate; (g) uncontaminated ground water or spring water,including foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with industrial materials such as solvents; and (h) lawn watering and similar irrigation drainage. 4. Other Permitted Discharges Any discharge authorized under a separate National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(NPDES),TPDES,or TCEQ permit may be combined with discharges authorized by this general permit,provided those discharges comply with the associated permit. Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out The wash out of concrete trucks at regulated construction sites must be performed in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage r. Post Construction Discharges Discharges that occur after construction activities have been completed,and after the construction site and any supporting activity site have undergone final stabilization,are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Discharges originating from the sites are not authorized under this general permit following the submission of the notice of termination(NOT)or removal of the appropriate site notice,as applicable,for the regulated construction activity. 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges Except as otherwise provided in Part ILA of this general permit,only discharges that are composed entirely of stormwater associated with construction activity may be authorized under this general permit. 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards Discharges to surface water in the state that would cause,have the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or that would fail to protect and maintain existing designated uses of surface water in the state are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. The executive director may require an application for an individual permit or alternative general permit(see Parts II.H.2 and 3.)to authorize discharges to surface water in the state if the executive director determines that any activity will cause,has the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or is found to cause,has the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to,the impairment of a designated use. The executive director may also require an application for an individual permit considering factors described in Part II.H.3 of this general permit. 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)Requirements The permittee shall determine whether the authorized discharge is to an impaired water body on the latest EPA-approved CWA Section 3o3(d)List or waters with an EPA- approved or established TMDL that are found on the latest EPA-approved Texas ,r/J Page 14 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRis0000 cor Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 305(6)and 303(d), which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. New sources or new discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired waters are not authorized by this permit unless otherwise allowable under 3o TAC Chapter 305 and applicable state law. Impaired waters are those that do not meet applicable water quality standard(s)and are listed as category 4 or 5 in the current version of the Texas Integrated Report ofSurface Water Quality,and waterbodies listed on the CWA§ 303(d)list.Pollutants of concern are those for which the water body is listed as impaired. Discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired water bodies for which there is a TMDL are not eligible for coverage under this general permit unless they are consistent with the approved TMDL. Permittees must incorporate the conditions and requirements applicable to their discharges into their SWP3,in order to be eligible for coverage under this general permit. For consistency with the construction stormwater-related items in an approved TMDL,the SWP3 must be consistent with any applicable condition,goal,or requirement in the TMDL,TMDL Implementation Plan(I-Plan),or as otherwise directed by the executive director. 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone Discharges cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 3o TAC Chapter 213(relating to Edwards Aquifer). In addition,commencement of construction (i.e.,the initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavating activities,as well as other construction-related activities such as stockpiling of fill material and demolition)at a site regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213,may not begin until the appropriate Edwards Aquifer Protection Plan(EAPP)has been approved by the TCEQ's Edwards Aquifer Protection Program. 41, (a) For new discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,or within that area upstream from the recharge zone and defined as the Contributing Zone (CZ),operators must meet all applicable requirements of,and operate according to, 3o TAC Chapter 213(Edwards Aquifer Rule)in addition to the provisions and requirements of this general permit. (b) For existing discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,the requirements of the agency-approved Water Pollution Abatement Plan(WPAP) under the Edwards Aquifer Rule is in addition to the requirements of this general permit. BMPs and maintenance schedules for structural stormwater controls,for example,maybe required as a provision of the rule. All applicable requirements of the Edwards Aquifer Rule for reductions of suspended solids in stormwater runoff are in addition to the requirements in this general permit for this pollutant. (c) For discharges located within ten stream miles upstream of the Edwards Aquifer recharge zone,applicants shall also submit a copy of the NOI to the appropriate TCEQ regional office. Counties: Comal,Bexar,Medina,Uvalde,and Kinney Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager San Antonio Regional Office 14250 Judson Road San Antonio,Texas 78233-4480 (210)490-3096 Counties: Williamson,Travis, and Hays Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager Ile Austin Regional Office 12100 Park 35 Circle Page 15 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Room 179, Building A Austin,Texas 78753 (512)339-2929 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas Discharges otherwise eligible for coverage cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 3o TAC Chapter 311(relating to Watershed Protection)for water quality areas and watersheds. 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities This general permit does not limit the authority or ability of federal,other state,or local governmental entities from placing additional or more stringent requirements on construction activities or discharges from construction activities. For example,this permit does not limit the authority of a home-rule municipality provided by Texas Local Government Code§401.002. 8. Indian Country Lands Stormwater runoff from construction activities occurring on Indian Country lands are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. If discharges of stormwater require authorization under federal NPDES regulations,authority for these discharges must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA). 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation Stormwater runoff from construction activities associated with the exploration, development,or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources,including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline,are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Authorization for stormwater discharges from construction activities that are associated with production of oil or gas or geothermal resources,including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline must be obtained,as required,from the U.S.EPA or the Texas Railroad Commission,as applicable. Discharge of stormwater related to construction activity, from a facility that stores both refined products intended for off-site use and crude oil in aboveground storage tanks,is regulated by the TCEQ and is eligible for coverage under this general permit. 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities Stormwater discharges from agricultural activities that are not point source discharges of stormwater are not subject to TPDES permit requirements. These activities may include clearing and cultivating ground for crops,construction of fences to contain livestock,construction of stock ponds,and other similar agricultural activities. Discharges of stormwater runoff associated with the construction of facilities that are subject to TPDES regulations,such as the construction of concentrated animal feeding operations,would be point sources regulated under this general permit. u. Endangered Species Act Discharges that would adversely affect a listed endangered or threatened aquatic or aquatic-dependent species or its critical habitat are not authorized by this permit,unless the requirements of the Endangered Species Act are satisfied.Federal requirements related to endangered species apply to all TPDES permitted discharges and site-specific controls may be required to ensure that protection of endangered or threatened species is achieved. If a permittee has concerns over potential impacts to listed species,the permittee may contact TCEQ for additional information. Page 16 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 12. Other Nothing in Part II of the general permit is intended to negate any person's ability to assert force majeure(act of God,war,strike,riot,or other catastrophe)defenses found in 3o TAC§70.7. Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Large Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction-Operators of large construction activities continuing to operate after the effective date of this permit,and authorized under the TPDES Construction General Permit TXR1S0000(effective on March 5,2013), must submit an NOI to renew authorization or a NOT to terminate coverage under this general permit within qo days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim or grace period,as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES general permit. 2. Small Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction-Discharges from ongoing small construction activities that commenced prior to the effective date of this general permit,and that do not meet the conditions to qualify for termination of this permit as described in Part ILF of this general permit, must meet the requirements to be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim period,as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES Construction General Permit. Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion: Operators of small construction activity,as defined in Part I.B of this general permit, shall not submit an NOI for coverage,unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities,which occur in certain counties and during periods of low potential for erosion that do not meet the conditions of the waiver described in Part II.G of this general permit,may be automatically authorized under this general permit if all the following conditions are met. (a) the construction activity occurs in a county and during the corresponding date range(s)listed in Appendix A; (b) the construction activity is initiated and completed,including either final or CPI temporary stabilization of all disturbed areas,within the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; Page 17 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRt50000 (c) all temporary stabilization is adequately maintained to effectively reduce or prohibit erosion,permanent stabilization activities have been initiated,and a condition of final stabilization is completed no later than 3o days following the end date of the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; (d) the permittee signs a completed TCEQ small construction site notice for low potential for erosion,including the certification statement; (e) a signed and certified copy of the small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is posted at the construction site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities,and maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity; NOTE:Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified site notice,with a viewable signature,located on- site and available for review by any applicable regulatory authority. CO a copy of the signed and certified small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities; (g) discharges of stormwater runoff or other non-stormwater discharges from any supporting concrete batch plant or asphalt batch plant is separately authorized under an individual TPDES permit,another TPDES general permit,or under an individual TCEQ permit where stormwater and non-stormwater is disposed of by evaporation or irrigation(discharges are adjacent to water in the state);and (h) any non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization,are not considered by TCEQ to be a wastewater,or are captured and routed for disposal at a publicly operated treatment works or licensed waste disposal facility. Nal If all of the conditions in(a)—(h)above are met,then the operator(s)of small construction activities with low potential for erosion are not required to develop a SW P3. If an operator is conducting small construction activities and any of the above conditions (a)—(h)are not met,the operator cannot declare coverage under the automatic authorization for small construction activities with low potential for erosion and must meet the requirements for automatic authorization(all other)small construction activities,described below in Part II.E.z. For small construction activities that occur during a period with a low potential for erosion,where automatic authorization under this section is not available,an operator may apply for and obtain a waiver from permitting(Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver— LREW),as described in Part II.G of this general permit. Waivers from coverage under the LREW do not allow for any discharges of non-stormwater and the operator must ensure that discharges on non-stormwater are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization. 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: Operators of small construction activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit shall not submit an NOI for coverage,unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities,as defined in Part LB of this general permit or as defined but who do not meet in the conditions and requirements located in Part II.E.r above,may be automatically authorized for small construction activities,provided that they meet all of the following conditions: Nia Page 18 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit,that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site for which the applicant is the operator,and implement the SWP3 prior to commencing construction activities; (b) all operators of regulated small construction activities must post a copy of a signed and certified Small Construction site notice,the notice must be posted at the construction site in a location where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities,at least two days prior to commencing construction activity,and maintain the notice in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities, e.g. pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway;notice for these linear sites maybe relocated,as necessary,along the length of the project,and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state,and federal authorities); (c) operators must maintain a posted site notice at the construction site until final stabilization has been achieved;and NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Small Construction site notice,with a viewable signature,located on-site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. (d) provide a copy of the signed and certified construction site notice to the operator of any municipal separate storm sewer system(MS4)receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities. As described in Part I.B of this general permit,large construction activities include those that will disturb less than five(5)acres of land,but that are part of a larger common plan 41110 of development or sale that will ultimately disturb five(5)or more acres of land,and must meet the requirements of Part II.E.3.below. 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: Operators of large construction activities that qualify for coverage under this general permit must meet all of the following conditions: (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site where the applicant is the operator. The SWP3 must be developed and implemented prior to obtaining coverage and prior to commencing construction activities; (b) primary operators of large construction activities must submit an NOI prior to commencing construction activity at a construction site.A completed NOI must be submitted to TCEQ electronically using the online e-Permits system on TCEQ's website. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver must submit a completed NOI to TCEQ at least seven(y)days prior to prior to commencing construction activity to obtain provisional coverage seven(7)days from the postmark date for delivery to the TCEQ. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOI. If an additional primary operator is added after the initial NOI is submitted,the additional primary operator must meet the same requirements for existing primary operator(s),as indicated above. If the primary operator changes due to responsibility at the site being transferred from one primary operator to another after the initial NOI is submitted,the new 41111, primary operator must submit a paper NOI or an electronic NOI at least ten(ro) Page 19 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRrs0000 days prior to assuming operational control of a construction site and commencing construction activity. Operators that submit NOIs electronically must use the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. (c) all operators of large construction activities must post a site notice in accordance with Part III.D.2 of this permit. The site notice must be located where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities,and must be maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities,e.g.pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway;notice for these linear sites may be relocated,as necessary,along the length of the project,and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local, state,and federal authorities); (d) two days prior to commencing construction activities,all primary operators must: i. provide a copy of the signed NOI to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to any secondary construction operator,and ii. list in the SWP3 the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy; (e) all persons meeting the definition of`secondary operator"in Part I of this permit are hereby notified that they are regulated under this general permit,but are not required to submit an NOI,provided that a primary operator at the site has submitted an NOI,or prior to commencement of construction activities,a primary operator is required to submit an NOI and the secondary operator has provided notification to the operator(s)of the need to obtain coverage(with records of notification available upon request). Any secondary operator notified under this provision may alternatively submit an NOI under this general permit,may seek 14111) coverage under an alternative TPDES individual permit,or may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES general permit if available;and (f) all secondary operators of large construction activities must post a copy of the signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice and provide a copy of the signed and certified site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to the commencement construction activities. NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice,with a viewable signature,located on-site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. Effective September 1,2018,applicants must submit an NOI using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities: Operators of certain small construction activities may obtain a waiver from coverage under this general permit,if applicable. The requirements are outlined in Part II.G below. 5. Effective Date of Coverage (a) Operators of small construction activities as described in either Part II.E.i or II.E.2 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions of Part II.E.r or II.E.2. Secondary operators of large construction Nolle Page 20 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRis0000 activities as described in Part ILE.3 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions in Part II.E.3. For activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (b) Primary operators of large construction activities as described in Part II.E.3 above that electronically submit an NOI are authorized immediately following confirmation of receipt of the electronic form by the TCEQ, unless otherwise notified by the executive director. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver are provisionally authorized seven(7)days from the date that a completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ,unless otherwise notified by the executive director. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOI. For construction activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction activities may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (c) Operators are not prohibited from submitting late NOIs or posting late notices to obtain authorization under this general permit. The TCEQ reserves the right to take appropriate enforcement action for any unpermitted activities that may have occurred between the time construction commenced and authorization was obtained. 41110 (d) If operators that submitted NOIs have active authorizations for construction activities that are ongoing when the term of the current general permit expires and a new general permit is issued,a 90-day interim(grace)period is granted to provide coverage that is administratively continued until operators with active authorizations can obtain coverage under the newly issued CGP. The 90-day grace period starts on the effective date of the newly issued CGP. Deadlines for obtaining coverage for operators of small and large construction are provided in Part ILD.2 and 2 above. 6. Notice of Change(NOC) If relevant information provided in the NOI changes,the operator that has submitted the NOI must submit an NOC to TCEQ at least fourteen(14)days before the change occurs, if possible. Where a 14-day advance notice is not possible,the operator must submit an NOC to TCEQ within 14-days of discovery of the change. If the operator becomes aware that it failed to submit any relevant facts or submitted incorrect information in an NOI, the correct information must be submitted to TCEQ in an NOC within 14 days after discovery. The NOC shall be submitted on a form provided by the executive director,or by letter if an NOC form is not available. A copy of the NOC form or letter must also be placed in the SWP3 and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge. A list that includes the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy of the NOC(or NOC letter)must be included in the SWP3. Information on an NOC may include,but is not limited to,the following: a change in the description of the construction project; an increase in the number of acres disturbed(for increases of one or more acres);or the name of the operator(where the name of the operator has changed). A transfer of operational control from one operator to another,including a transfer of the ownership of a company. Coverage under this general permit is not transferable Page 21 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150oo0 from one operator to another or one company to another,and may not be included in an NOC. A transfer of ownership of a company may include,but is not limited to,the following: changes to the structure of a company,such as changing from a partnership to a corporation or changing corporation types,so that the filing number(or charter number)that is on record with the Texas Secretary of State must be changed. An NOC is not required for notifying TCEQ of a decrease in the number of acres disturbed. This information must be included in the SWP3 and retained on site. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants must submit an NOC using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination(NOT)Forms,NOC Letters,and Construction Site Notices NOI forms,NOT forms,NOC letters,and Construction Site Notices that require a signature must be signed according to 3o TAC§305.44(relating to Signatories for Applications). 8. Contents of the NOI The NOI form shall require,at a minimum,the following information: (a) the TPDES CGP authorization number for existing authorizations under this general permit,where the operator submits an NOI to renew coverage within qo days of the effective date of this general permit; (b) the name,address,and telephone number of the operator filing the NOI for permit coverage; (c) the name(or other identifier),address,county,and latitude/longitude of the construction project or site; (d) the number of acres that will be disturbed by the applicant; (e) confirmation that the project or site will not be located on Indian Country lands; (0 confirmation that a SWP3 has been developed in accordance with this general permit,that it will be implemented prior to commencement of construction activities,and that it is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans;for multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3,the confirmation for an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3 provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator; (g) name of the receiving water(s); (h) the classified segment number for each classified segment that receives discharges from the regulated construction activity(if the discharge is not directly to a classified segment,then the classified segment number of the first classified segment that those discharges reach);and (i) the name of all surface waters receiving discharges from the regulated construction activity that are on the latest EPA-approved CWA§303(d)List of impaired waters or Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 305(6)and 303(d)as not meeting applicable state water quality standards. Page 22 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 411100 Section F. Terminating Coverage 1. Notice of Termination(NOT) Required Each operator that has submitted an NOI for authorization of large construction activities under this general permit must apply to terminate that authorization following the conditions described in this section of the general permit. Authorization of large construction must be terminated by submitting an NOT on a paper form to TCEQ supplied by the executive director or electronically via the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates at midnight on the day a paper NOT is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ or immediately following confirmation of the receipt of the NOT submitted electronically by the TCEQ. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until an NOT is submitted. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants must submit an NOT using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. The NOT must be submitted to TCEQ,and a copy of the NOT provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(with a list in the SWP3 of the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy),within 3o days after any of the following conditions are met: (a) final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; (b) a transfer of operational control has occurred(See Section II.F.q below);or (c) the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual TPDES permit or alternative TPDES general permit. 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT The NOT form shall require,at a minimum,the following information: (a) if authorization for construction activity was granted following submission of an NOI,the permittee's site-specific TPDES authorization number for a specific construction site; (b) an indication of whether final stabilization has been achieved at the site and a NOT has been submitted or if the permittee is simply no longer an operator at the site; (c) the name,address,and telephone number of the permittee submitting the NOT; (d) the name(or other identifier),address,county,and location(latitude/longitude)of the construction project or site;and (e) a signed certification that either all stormwater discharges requiring authorization under this general permit will no longer occur,or that the applicant is no longer the operator of the facility or construction site,and that all temporary structural erosion controls have either been removed,will be removed on a schedule defined in the SWP3,or have been transferred to a new operator if the new operator has applied for permit coverage. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats,are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal. L Page 23 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites (a) Each operator that has obtained automatic authorization for small construction or is a secondary operator for large construction must perform the following when terminating coverage under the permit: i. remove the site notice; ii. complete the applicable portion of the site notice related to removal of the site notice;and iii. submit a copy of the completed site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(or provide alternative notification as allowed by the MS4 operator, with documentation of such notification included in the SWP3). (b) The activities described in Part II.F.3.(a)above must be completed by the operator within 3o days of meeting any of the following conditions: i. final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; ii. a transfer of day-to-day operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions has occurred(See Section II.F.4.below);or iii. the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual or general TPDES permit. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates immediately upon removal of the applicable site notice. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until the site notice is removed. 4. Transfer of Day-to-Day Operational Control (a) When the primary operator of a large construction activity changes or operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions is transferred to another primary operator,the original operator must do the following: i. submit an NOT within ten(to)days prior to the date that responsibility for operations terminates,and the new operator must submit an NOI at least ten (ro)days prior to the transfer of operational control,in accordance with condition(c)below;and ii. submit a copy of the NOT from the primary operator terminating its coverage under the permit and its operational control of the construction site and submit a copy of the NOI from the new primary operator to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge in accordance with Part ICFs above. (b) For transfer of operational control,operators of small construction activities and secondary operators of large construction activities who are not required to submit an NOI must do the following: i. the existing operator must remove the original site notice,and the new operator must post the required site notice prior to the transfer of operational control,in accordance with the conditions in Part ILF.4.(c)i or ii below;and ii. a copy of the site notice,which must be completed and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge,in accordance with Part II.F.3 above. (c) Each operator is responsible for determining its role as an operator as defined in Part I.B and obtaining authorization under the permit,as described above in Part J Page 24 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi,50000 AW II.E. 1—3. Where authorization has been obtained by submitting an NOI for coverage under this general permit,permit coverage is not transferable from one operator to another. A transfer of operational control can include changes to the structure of a company,such as changing from a partnership to a corporation, or changing to a different corporation type such that a different filing(or charter) number is established with the Texas Secretary of State. A transfer of operational control can also occur when of the following criteria is met,as applicable: i. Another operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that do not meet the definition for final stabilization; ii. all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have either been removed, scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3,or transferred to a new operator,provided that the original permitted operator has attempted to notify the new operator in writing of the requirement to obtain permit coverage. Records of this notification(or attempt at notification)shall be retained by the operator transferring operational control to another operator in accordance with Part VI of this permit. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats,are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal; or iii. a homebuilder has purchased one or more lots from an operator who obtained coverage under this general permit for a common plan of development or sale. The homebuilder is considered a new operator and shall comply with the requirements of this permit. Under these circumstances,the homebuilder is only responsible for compliance with the general permit requirements as they apply to the lot(s)it has operational control over in a larger common plan of development,and the original operator remains responsible for common controls or discharges, and must amend its SWP3 to remove the lot(s) transferred to the homebuilder. Section G. Waivers from Coverage The executive director may waive the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit for stormwater discharges from small construction activities under the terms and conditions described in this section. 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage Operators of small construction activities may apply for and receive a waiver from the requirements to obtain authorization under this general permit,when the calculated rainfall erosivity(R)factor for the entire period of the construction project is less than five(5). The operator must submit either a signed paper Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver(LREW) certification form to the TCEQ,supplied by the executive director,or complete the form electronically via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. The form is a certification by the operator that the small construction activity will commence and be completed within a period when the value of the calculated R factor is less than five(5). The paper LREW certification form must be postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ at least seven(7)days before construction activity begins or,if submitted electronically, construction may begin at any time following the receipt of written confirmation from TCEQ that a complete electronic application was submitted and acknowledged. This waiver from coverage does not apply to any non-stormwater discharges,including what is allowed under this permit. The operator must insure that all non-stormwater ffrae discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization,or are captured and routed to an authorized treatment facility for disposal. Page 25 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Effective September 1,2018,applicants must submit an LREW using the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver The construction site operator may calculate the R factor to request a waiver using the following steps: (a) Estimate the construction start date and the construction end date. The construction end date is the date that final stabilization will be achieved. (b) Find the appropriate Erosivity Index(EI)zone in Appendix B of this permit. (c) Find the EI percentage for the project period by adding the results for each period of the project using the table provided in Appendix D of this permit,in EPA Fact Sheet 2.1,or in USDA Handbook 703,by subtracting the start value from the end value to find the percent EI for the site. (d) Refer to the Isoerodent Map(Appendix C of this permit)and interpolate the annual isoerodent value for the proposed construction location. (e) Multiply the percent value obtained in Step(c)above by the annual isoerodent value obtained in Step(d). This is the R factor for the proposed project. If the value is less than 5,then a waiver may be obtained. If the value is five(5)or more,then a waiver may not be obtained,and the operator must obtain coverage under Part II.E.2.of this permit. Alternatively,the operator may calculate a site-specific R factor utilizing the following online calculator: http://ei.tamu.edu/index.html,or using another available resource. A copy of the LREW certification form is not required to be posted at the small construction site. 3. Effective Date of a LREW Unless otherwise notified by the executive director,operators of small construction activities seeking coverage under a LREW are provisionally waived from the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit seven(7)days from the date that a completed paper LREW certification form is postmarked for delivery to TCEQ,or immediately upon receiving confirmation of approval of an electronic submittal,made via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Effective September 1,2018,applicants seeking coverage under a LREW must submit an application for a LREW using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. q. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period If a construction activity extends beyond the approved waiver period due to circumstances beyond the control of the operator,the operator must either: (a) recalculate the R factor using the original start date and a new projected ending date,and if the R factor is still under five(5),submit a new waiver certification form at least two(2)days before the end of the original waiver period;or (b) obtain authorization under this general permit according to the requirements for automatic authorization for small construction activities in Part ILE.2 of this permit, prior to the end of the approved LREW period. Page 26 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRts0000 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage r. Individual Permit Alternative Any discharge eligible for coverage under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under an individual TPDES permit according to 3o TAC§305(relating to Consolidated Permits). Applications for individual permit coverage must be submitted at least three hundred and thirty(330)days prior to commencement of construction activities to ensure timely authorization. Existing coverage under this general permit should not be terminated until an individual permit is issued and in effect. 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges Certain discharges eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),as applicable. 3. Individual Permit Required The executive director may require an operator of a construction site,otherwise eligible for authorization under this general permit,to apply for an individual TPDES permit in the following circumstances: (a) the conditions of an approved TMDL or TMDL I-Plan on the receiving water; (b) the activity being determined to cause,has a reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or being found to cause,or contribute to,the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state: and (c) any other consideration defined in 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges)including 3o TAC Chapter 2o5.4(c)(3)(D),which allows the commission to deny authorization under the general permit and require an individual permit if a discharger has been determined by the executive director to have been out of compliance with any rule,order,or permit of the commission, including non-payment of fees assessed by the executive director. A discharger with a TCEQ compliance history rating of"unsatisfactory"is ineligible for coverage under this general permit. In that case,3o TAC§60.3 requires the executive director to deny or suspend an authorization to discharge under a general permit. However,per TWC§ 26.040(h),a discharger is entitled to a hearing before the commission prior to having an authorization denied or suspended for having an "unsatisfactory"compliance history. Denial of authorization to discharge under this general permit or suspension of a permittee's authorization under this general permit for reasons other than compliance history shall be done according to commission rules in 3o TAC Chapter 205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges). 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization Any discharge eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),if applicable. Section I. Permit Expiration 1. This general permit is effective for a term not to exceed five(5)years. All active discharge authorizations expire on the date provided on page one(t)of this permit. Following public notice and comment, as provided by 3o TAC§205.3(relating to 4111/ Public Notice, Public Meetings,and Public Comment),the commission may amend, Page 27 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRrs0000 revoke,cancel,or renew this general permit. All authorizations that are active at the time the permit term expires will be administratively continued as indicated in Part I1.I.2 below and in Part II.D.t(b)and D.2(b)of this permit. 2. If the executive director publishes a notice of the intent to renew or amend this general permit before the expiration date,the permit will remain in effect for existing,authorized discharges until the commission takes final action on the permit. Upon issuance of a renewed or amended permit,permittees may be required to submit an NOI within 90 days following the effective date of the renewed or amended permit,unless that permit provides for an alternative method for obtaining authorization. 3. If the commission does not propose to reissue this general permit within 90 days before the expiration date,permittees shall apply for authorization under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. If the application for an individual permit is submitted before the expiration date,authorization under this expiring general permit remains in effect until the issuance or denial of an'individual permit. No new NOIs will be accepted nor new authorizations honored under the general permit after the expiration date. Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) All regulated construction site operators shall prepare an SWP3,prior to submittal of an NOI,to address discharges authorized under Parts II.E.2 and II.E.3 of this general permit that will reach Waters of the U.S. This includes discharges to MS4s and privately owned separate storm sewer systems that drain into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. Individual operators at a site may develop separate SWP3s that cover only their portion of the project,provided reference is made to the other operators at the site. Where there is more than one SWP3 for a site,operators must coordinate to ensure that BMPs and controls are consistent and do not negate or impair the effectiveness of each other. Regardless of whether a single comprehensive SWP3 is developed or separate SWP3s are developed for each operator,it is the responsibility of each operator to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit in the areas of the construction site where that operator has control over construction plans and specifications or day-to-day operations. An SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater associated with construction activity and non-stormwater discharges described in Part IIA.3,in compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit. An SWP3 must also identify any potential sources of pollution that have been determined to cause,have a reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause or contribute to the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state from discharges of stormwater from construction activities and construction support activities. Where potential sources of these pollutants are present at a construction site,the SWP3 must also contain a description of the management practices that will be used to prevent these pollutants from being discharged into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. NOTE: Construction support activities can also include vehicle repair areas,fueling areas,etc.that are present at a construction site solely for the support construction activities and are only used by operators at the construction site. The SWP3 is intended to serve as a road map for how the construction operator will comply with the effluent limits and other conditions of this permit and does not establish the effluent limits that apply to the construction site's discharges. These limits are established in Part III.G of the permit. Page 28 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRr5o0oo Section A. Shared SWP3 Development For more effective coordination of BMPs and opportunities for cost sharing,a cooperative effort by the different operators at a site is encouraged. Operators of small and large construction activities must independently obtain authorization under this permit,but may work together with other regulated operators at the construction site to prepare and implement a single,comprehensive SWP3,which can be shared by some or all operators,for the construction activities that each of the operators are performing at the entire construction site. 1. The SWP3 must include the following: (a) for small construction activities—the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3; (b) for large construction activities-the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3,the general permit authorization numbers of each operator (or the date that the NOI was submitted to TCEQ by each operator that has not received an authorization number for coverage under this permit); and (c) for large and small construction activities-the signature of each operator participating in the shared SWP3. 2. The SWP3 must clearly indicate which operator is responsible for satisfying each shared requirement of the SWP3. If the responsibility for satisfying a requirement is not described in the plan,then each permittee is entirely responsible for meeting the requirement within the boundaries of the construction site where they perform construction activities. The SWP3 must clearly describe responsibilities for meeting each requirement in shared or common areas. 3. The SWP3 may provide that one operator is responsible for preparation of a SWP3 in compliance with the CGP,and another operator is responsible for implementation of the SWP3 at the project site. Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications All secondary operators and primary operators with control over construction plans and specifications shall: (a) ensure the project specifications allow or provide that adequate BMPs are developed to meet the requirements of Part III of this general permit; (b) ensure that the SWP3 indicates the areas of the project where they have control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications; (c) ensure that all other operators affected by modifications in project specifications are notified in a timely manner so that those operators may modify their BMP s as necessary to remain compliant with the conditions of this general permit; and (d) ensure that the SWP3 for portions of the project where they are operators indicates the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number(s)for operators with the day-to-day operational control over those activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions. If a primary operator has not been authorized or has abandoned the site,the secondary operator is considered to be the responsible party and must obtain authorization Page 29 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRiso0oo as a primary operator under the permit,until the authority for day-to-day operational control is transferred to another primary operator. The new primary operator must update or develop a new SWP3 that will reflect the transfer of operational control and include any additional updates to the SWP3 to meet requirements of the permit. 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control Primary operators with day-to-day operational control of those activities at a project that are necessary to ensure compliance with an SWP3 and other permit conditions must ensure that the SWP3 accomplishes the following requirements: (a) meets the requirements of this general permit for those portions of the project where they are operators; (b) identifies the parties responsible for implementation of BMPs described in the SWP3; (c) indicates areas of the project where they have operational control over day-to- day activities;and (d) the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number of the parties with control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications for areas where they have operational control over day-to-day activities. Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation,Implementation,and Compliance The SWP3 must be prepared prior to obtaining authorization under this general permit, and implemented prior to commencing construction activities that result in soil disturbance. The SWP3 must be prepared so that it provides for compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit. Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 1. The SWP3 must be retained on-site at the construction site or,if the site is inactive or does not have an on-site location to store the plan,a notice must be posted describing the location of the SWP3. The SWP3 must be made readily available at the time of an on-site inspection to: the executive director;a federal,state,or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans,grading plans,or stormwater management plans;local government officials;and the operator of a municipal separate storm sewer receiving discharges from the site. If the SWP3 is retained off-site,then it shall be made available as soon as reasonably possible. In most instances,it is reasonable that the SWP3 shall be made available within 24 hours of the request. 2. Operators with authorization for construction activity under this general permit must post a TCEQ site notice at the construction site at a place readily available for viewing by the general public,and local,state,and federal authorities. (a) Primary and secondary operators of large construction activities must each post a TCEQ construction site notice,respective to their role as an operator at the construction site,as required above and according to requirements in Part II.E.3 of this general permit. (b) Primary and secondary operators of small construction activities must post the TCEQ site notice as required in Part III.D.z.(a)above and for the specific type of small construction described in Part II.E.r and 2 of the permit. (c) If the construction project is a linear construction project,such as a pipeline or highway,the notices must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway. Site notices for small and large construction Page 30 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 41, activities at these linear construction sites may be located,as necessary,along the length of the project,but must still be readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state,and federal authorities;and contain the following information: i. the site-specific TPDES authorization number for the project if assigned; ii. the operator name,contact name,and contact phone number; iii. a brief description of the project; and iv. the location of the SWP3. 3. This permit does not provide the general public with any right to trespass on a construction site for any reason,including inspection of a site;nor does this permit require that permittees allow members of the general public access to a construction site. Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s The permittee must revise or update the SWP3 within seven days of when any of the following occurs: 1. a change in design,construction,operation,or maintenance that has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants and that has not been previously addressed in the SWP3; 2. changing site conditions based on updated plans and specifications,new operators, new areas of responsibility,and changes in BMPs;or 3. results of inspections or investigations by construction site personnel authorized by the permittee,operators of a municipal separate storm sewer system receiving the discharge,authorized TCEQ personnel,or a federal,state or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans indicate the SWP3 is proving ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutants in discharges authorized under this general permit. Section F. Contents of SWP3 The SWP3 must be developed and implemented by primary operators of small and large construction activities and include,at a minimum,the information described in this section and must comply with the construction and development effluent guidelines in Part III,Section G of the general permit. 1. A site or project description,which includes the following information: (a) a description of the nature of the construction activity; (b) a list of potential pollutants and their sources; (c) a description of the intended schedule or sequence of activities that will disturb soils for major portions of the site,including estimated start dates and duration of activities; (d) the total number of acres of the entire property and the total number of acres where construction activities will occur,including areas where construction support activities(defined in Part I.B of this general permit)occur; (e) data describing the soil or the quality of any discharge from the site; (f) a map showing the general location of the site(e.g. a portion of a city or county map); (g) a detailed site map(or maps)indicating the following: Page 31 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRrs0000 i. drainage patterns and approximate slopes anticipated after major grading activities; ii. areas where soil disturbance will occur; iii. locations of all controls and buffers, either planned or in place; iv. locations where temporary or permanent stabilization practices are expected to be used; v. locations of construction support activities,including those located off-site; vi. surface waters(including wetlands)either at,adjacent,or in close proximity to the site,and also indicate whether those waters are impaired; vii. locations where stormwater discharges from the site directly to a surface water body or a municipal separate storm sewer system; viii. vehicle wash areas;and ix. designated points on the site where vehicles will exit onto paved roads(for instance,this applies to construction transition from unstable dirt areas to exterior paved roads). Where the amount of information required to be included on the map would result in a single map being difficult to read and interpret,the operator shall develop a series of maps that collectively include the required information. (h) the location and description of support activities authorized under the permittee's NOI,including asphalt plants,concrete plants,and other activities providing support to the construction site that is authorized under this general permit; (i) the name of receiving waters at or near the site that may be disturbed or that may receive discharges from disturbed areas of the project; (j) a copy of this TPDES general permit; (k) the NOI and the acknowledgement of provisional and non-provisional authorization for primary operators of large construction sites,and the site notice for small construction sites and for secondary operators of large construction sites; (1) stormwater and allowable non-stormwater discharge locations,including storm drain inlets on site and in the immediate vicinity of the construction site where construction support activities will occur;and (m) locations of all pollutant-generating activities at the construction site and where construction support activities will occur,such as the following: Paving operations; concrete,paint and stucco washout and water disposal;solid waste storage and disposal;and dewatering operations. 2. A description of the BMPs that will be used to minimize pollution in runoff. The description must identify the general timing or sequence for implementation. At a minimum,the description must include the following components: (a) General Requirements i. Erosion and sediment controls must be designed to retain sediment on-site to the extent practicable with consideration for local topography,soil type, and rainfall. ii. Control measures must be properly selected,installed,and maintained according to the manufacturer's or designer's specifications. J Page 32 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1,5000o 41/ iii. Controls must be developed to minimize the offsite transport of litter, construction debris,and construction materials. (b) Erosion Control and Stabilization Practices The SWP3 must include a description of temporary and permanent erosion control and stabilization practices for the construction site,where small or large construction activity will occur. The erosion control and stabilization practices selected by the permittee must be compliant with the requirements for sediment and erosion control,located in Part III.G of this permit. The description of the SWP3 must also include a schedule of when the practices will be implemented. Site plans must ensure that existing vegetation at the construction site is preserved where it is possible. i. Erosion control and stabilization practices may include but are not limited to:establishment of temporary or permanent vegetation,mulching, geotextiles,sod stabilization,vegetative buffer strips,protection of existing trees and vegetation,slope texturing,temporary velocity dissipation devices,flow diversion mechanisms,and other similar measures. ii. The following records must be maintained and either attached to or referenced in the SWP3,and made readily available upon request to the parties listed in Part IILD.i of this general permit: (A) the dates when major grading activities occur; (B) the dates when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site;and (C) the dates when stabilization measures are initiated. iii. Erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily ceased and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. Stabilization measures that provide a protective cover must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have permanently ceased. The term`immediately"is used to define the deadline for initiating stabilization measures.In the context of this requirement,`immediately"means as soon as practicable,but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth-disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Except as provided in (A)through(D)below,these measures must be completed as soon as practicable,but no more than 14 calendar days after the initiation of soil stabilization measures: (A) Where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased due to frozen conditions, non-vegetative controls must be implemented until thawing conditions(as defined in Part I.B of this general permit) are present,and vegetative stabilization measures can be initiated as soon as practicable. (B) In arid areas,semi-arid areas,or drought-stricken areas,as they are defined in Part I.B of this general permit,where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased or is precluded by arid conditions, other types of erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated at the site as soon as practicable. Where vegetative controls are infeasible due to and conditions, and within 14 calendar days of a temporary or permanent cessation of construction activity in �y any portion of the site,the operator shall immediately install non- Page 33 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRr50000 vegetative erosion controls in areas of the construction site where construction activity is complete or has ceased. If non-vegetative controls are infeasible,the operator shall install temporary sediment controls as required in Part III.F.2.(b).iii.(C)below. (C) In areas where non-vegetative controls are infeasible,the operator may alternatively utilize temporary perimeter controls. The operator must document in the SWP3 the reason why stabilization measures are not feasible,and must demonstrate that the perimeter controls will retain sediment on site to the extent practicable. The operator must continue to inspect the BMPs at the frequencies established in Part III.F.7.(c)for unstabilized sites. (D) The requirement for permittees to initiate stabilization is triggered as soon as it is known with reasonable certainty that construction activity at the site or in certain areas of the site will be stopped for 14 or more additional calendar days. If the initiation or completion of vegetative stabilization is prevented by circumstances beyond the control of the permittee,the permittee must employ and implement alternative stabilization measures immediately. When conditions at the site changes that would allow for vegetative stabilization,then the permittee must initiate or complete vegetative stabilization as soon as practicable. iv. Final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. v. TCEQ does not expect that temporary or permanent stabilization measures to be applied to areas that are intended to be left un-vegetated or un- stabilized following construction(e.g.,dirt access roads,utility pole pads, areas being used for storage of vehicles,equipment,or materials). (c) Sediment Control Practices The SWP3 must include a description of any sediment control practices used to remove eroded soils from stormwater runoff,including the general timing or sequence for implementation of controls. i. Sites With Drainage Areas of Ten or More Acres (A) Sedimentation Basin(s) (t) A sedimentation basin is required,where feasible,for a common drainage location that serves an area with ten(10)or more acres disturbed at one time. A sedimentation basin maybe temporary or permanent,and must provide sufficient storage to contain a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year,24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained. When calculating the volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm event,it is not required to include the flows from offsite areas and flow from onsite areas that are either undisturbed or have already undergone permanent stabilization,if these flows are diverted around both the disturbed areas of the site and the sediment basin.Capacity calculations shall be included in the SWP3. (2)Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,the sedimentation basin must provide at least 3,60o cubic feet of storage per acre drained until final stabilization of the site. J Page 34 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (3) If a sedimentation basin is not feasible,then the permittee shall provide equivalent control measures until final stabilization of the site. In determining whether installing a sediment basin is feasible,the permittee may consider factors such as site soils, slope,available area,public safety,precipitation patterns,site geometry,site vegetation,infiltration capacity,geotechnical factors,depth to groundwater,and other similar considerations. The permittee shall document the reason that the sediment basins are not feasible,and shall utilize equivalent control measures, which may include a series of smaller sediment basins. (4) Unless infeasible,when discharging from sedimentation basins and impoundments,the permittee shall utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface. (B) Perimeter Controls: At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips,or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area,and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. ii. Controls for Sites With Drainage Areas Less than Ten Acres: (A) Sediment traps and sediment basins may be used to control solids in stormwater runoff for drainage locations serving less than ten(io) acres. At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips,or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area,and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. (B) Alternatively,a sediment basin that provides storage for a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained may be utilized. Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,a temporary or permanent sediment basin providing 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained may be provided. If a calculation is performed,then the calculation shall be included in the SWP3. (C) If sedimentation basins or impoundments are used,the permittee shall comply with the requirements in Part IILG.6 of this general permit. 3. Description of Permanent Stormwater Controls A description of any stormwater control measures that will be installed during the construction process to control pollutants in stormwater discharges that may occur after construction operations have been completed must be included in the SWP3. Permittees are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater management measures,as follows: (a) permittees authorized under the permit for small construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures prior to final stabilization of the site; or (b) permittees authorized under the permit for large construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures prior to final stabilization of the site and prior to submission of an NOT. 4111110 4. Other Required Controls and BMPs Page 35 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRrs0000 (a) Permittees shall minimize,to the extent practicable,the off-site vehicle tracking of sediments and the generation of dust. The SWP3 shall include a description of controls utilized to accomplish this requirement. (b) The SWP3 must include a description of construction and waste materials expected to be stored on-site and a description of controls to minimize pollutants from these materials. (c) The SWP3 must include a description of potential pollutant sources in discharges of stormwater from all areas of the construction site where construction activity,including construction support activities,will be located, and a description of controls and measures that will be implemented at those sites to minimize pollutant discharges. (d) Permittees shall place velocity dissipation devices at discharge locations and along the length of any outfall channel(i.e.,runoff conveyance)to provide a non- erosive flow velocity from the structure to a water course,so that the natural physical and biological characteristics and functions are maintained and protected. (e) Permittees shall design and utilize appropriate controls to minimize the offsite transport of suspended sediments and other pollutants if it is necessary to pump or channel standing water from the site. (f) Permittees shall ensure that all other required controls and BMPs comply with all of the requirements of Part III.G of this general permit. (g) For demolition of any structure with at least to,000 square feet of floor space that was built or renovated before January 1,198o,and the receiving waterbody is impaired for polychlorinated biphenyls(PCBs): i. Implement controls to minimize the exposure of PCB-containing building materials,including paint,caulk,and pre-198o fluorescent lighting fixtures to precipitation and to stormwater;and ii. Ensure that disposal of such materials is performed in compliance with applicable state,federal,and local laws. S. Documentation of Compliance with Approved State and Local Plans (a) Permittees must ensure that the SWP3 is consistent with requirements specified in applicable sediment and erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by federal,state,or local officials. (b) SWP3s must be updated as necessary to remain consistent with any changes applicable to protecting surface water resources in sediment erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by state or local official for which the permittee receives written notice. (c) If the permittee is required to prepare a separate management plan,including but not limited to a WPAP or Contributing Zone Plan in accordance with 3o TAC Chapter 213(related to the Edwards Aquifer),then a copy of that plan must be either included in the SWP3 or made readily available upon request to authorized personnel of the TCEQ. The permittee shall maintain a copy of the approval letter for the plan in its SWP3. 6. Maintenance Requirements (a) All protective measures identified in the SWP3 must be maintained in effective operating condition. If,through inspections or other means,as soon as the permittee determines that BMPs are not operating effectively,then the permittee shall perform maintenance as necessary to maintain the continued effectiveness Page 36 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRrs0000 of stormwater controls,and prior to the next rain event if feasible. If maintenance prior to the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,the reason shall be documented in the SWP3 and maintenance must be scheduled and accomplished as soon as practicable. Erosion and sediment controls that have been intentionally disabled,run-over,removed,or otherwise rendered ineffective must be replaced or corrected immediately upon discovery. (b) If periodic inspections or other information indicates a control has been used incorrectly,is performing inadequately,or is damaged,then the operator shall replace or modify the control as soon as practicable after making the discovery. (c) Sediment must be removed from sediment traps and sedimentation ponds no later than the time that design capacity has been reduced by 5o%. For perimeter controls such as silt fences,berms,etc.,the trapped sediment must be removed before it reaches 5o%of the above-ground height. (d) If sediment escapes the site,accumulations must be removed at a frequency that minimizes off-site impacts,and prior to the next rain event,if feasible. If the permittee does not own or operate the off-site conveyance,then the permittee shall work with the owner or operator of the property to remove the sediment. 7. Inspections of Controls (a) Personnel provided by the permittee must inspect disturbed areas(cleared, graded,or excavated)of the construction site that do not meet the requirements of final stabilization in this general permit,all locations where stabilization measures have been implemented,areas of construction support activity covered under this permit,stormwater controls(including pollution prevention controls) for evidence of,or the potential for,the discharge of pollutants,areas where stormwater typically flows within the construction site,and points of discharge from the construction site. i. Personnel conducting these inspections must be knowledgeable of this general permit,the construction activities at the site,and the SWP3 for the site. ii. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC§3o5.t28. (b) Requirements for Inspections i. Inspect all stormwater controls(including sediment and erosion control measures identified in the SWP3)to ensure that they are installed properly, appear to be operational,and minimizing pollutants in discharges,as intended. ii. Identify locations on the construction site where new or modified stormwater controls are necessary. iii. Check for signs of visible erosion and sedimentation that can be attributed to the points of discharge where discharges leave the construction site or discharge into any surface water in the state flowing within or adjacent to the construction site. iv. Identify any incidents of noncompliance observed during the inspection. v. Inspect locations where vehicles enter or exit the site for evidence of off-site sediment tracking. vi. If an inspection is performed when discharges from the construction site are occurring:identify all discharge points at the site,observe and document the visual quality of the discharge(i.e.,color,odor,floating,settled,or Page 37 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR.150000 suspended solids,foam,oil sheen,and other such indicators of pollutants in stormwater). vii. Complete any necessary maintenance needed,based on the results of the inspection and in accordance with the requirements listed in Part III.F.6 above. (c) Inspection frequencies: i. Inspections of construction sites must be conducted at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,unless as otherwise provided below in Part III.F.y.(c).ii—v below. ii. Inspection frequencies must be conducted at least once every month in areas of the construction site that meet final stabilization or have been temporarily stabilized. iii. Inspection frequencies for construction sites,where runoff is unlikely due to the occurrence of frozen conditions at the site,must be conducted at least once every month until thawing conditions begin to occur(See definitions for thawing conditions in Part I.B). The SWP3 must also contain a record of the approximate beginning and ending dates of when frozen conditions occurred at the site,which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly, while those conditions persisted,instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. iv. In arid,semi-arid,or drought-stricken areas,inspections must be conducted at least once every month and within 24 hours after the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. The SWP3 must also contain a record of the total rainfall measured,as well as the approximate beginning and ending dates of when drought conditions occurred at the site,which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly,while those conditions persisted,instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. v. As an alternative to the inspection schedule in Part IILF.y.(c).i above,the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven(y)calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed, then the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. vi. The inspection procedures described in Part IILF.7.(c).i.—v above can be performed at the frequencies and under the applicable conditions indicated for each schedule option,provided that the SWP3 reflects the current schedule and that any changes to the schedule are made in accordance with the following provisions: the inspection frequency schedule can only be changed a maximum of one time each month;the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month;and the reason for the schedule change documented in the SWP3(e.g.,end of"dry"season and beginning of`wet"season). (d) Utility line installation,pipeline construction,and other examples of long, narrow,linear construction activities may provide inspection personnel with limited access to the areas described in Part IILF.7.(a)above. i. Inspection of linear construction sites could require the use of vehicles that could compromise areas of temporary or permanent stabilization,cause Page 38 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRrs0000 additional disturbance of soils,and result in the increase the potential for erosion. In these circumstances,controls must be inspected at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,but representative inspections may be performed. ii. For representative inspections, personnel must inspect controls along the construction site for 0.25 mile above and below each access point where a roadway,undisturbed right-of-way,or other similar feature intersects the construction site and allows access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a) above. The conditions of the controls along each inspected 0.25 mile portion maybe considered as representative of the condition of controls along that reach extending from the end of the 0.25 mile portion to either the end of the next 0.25 mile inspected portion,or to the end of the project, whichever occurs first. As an alternative to the inspection schedule described in Part III.F.7.(c).i above,the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven(7)calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed,the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. iii. The SWP3 for a linear construction site must reflect the current inspection schedule. Any changes to the inspection schedule must be made in accordance with the following provisions: (A) the schedule maybe changed a maximum of one time each month; (B) the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month,and (C) the reason for the schedule change must be documented in the SWP3 (e.g.,end of"dry"season and beginning of"wet"season). (e) In the event of flooding or other uncontrollable situations which prohibit access to the inspection sites,inspections must be conducted as soon as access is practicable. (0 Inspection Reports i. A report summarizing the scope of any inspection must be completed within 24-hours following the inspection. The report must also include the date(s) of the inspection and major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3. Major observations in the report must include: the locations of where erosion and discharges of sediment or other pollutants from the site have occurred;locations of BMPs that need to be maintained;locations of BMPs that failed to operate as designed or proved inadequate for a particular location;and locations where additional BMPs are needed. ii. Actions taken as a result of inspections must be described within,and retained as a part of,the SWP3. Reports must identify any incidents of non- compliance. Where a report does not identify any incidents of non- compliance,the report must contain a certification that the facility or site is in compliance with the SWP3 and this permit. The report must be retained as part of the SWP3 and signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC§305.128(relating to Signatories to Reports). iii. The names and qualifications of personnel making the inspections for the permittee may be documented once in the SWP3 rather than being included in each report. (g) The SWP3 must be modified based on the results of inspections,as necessary,to better control pollutants in runoff. Revisions to the SWP3 must be completed Page 39 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRl50000 within seven(7)calendar days following the inspection. If existing BMPs are modified or if additional BMPs are necessary,an implementation schedule must be described in the SWP3 and wherever possible those changes implemented before the next storm event. If implementation before the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,these changes must be implemented as soon as practicable. 8. The SWP3 must identify and ensure the implementation of appropriate pollution prevention measures for all eligible non-stormwater components of the discharge,as listed in Part II.A.3 of this permit. 9. The SWP3 must include the information required in Part III.B of this general permit. io. The SWP3 must include pollution prevention procedures that comply with Part III.G.q of this general permit. Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites Except as provided in go CFR§§125.3o-12532,any discharge regulated under this general permit,with the exception of sites that obtained waivers based on low rainfall erosivity,must achieve,at a minimum,the following effluent limitations representing the degree of effluent reduction attainable by application of the best practicable control technology currently available(BPT). r. Erosion and sediment controls. Design,install,and maintain effective erosion controls and sediment controls to minimize the discharge of pollutants.At a minimum,such controls must be designed,installed, and maintained to: (a) Control stormwater volume and velocity within the site to minimize soil erosion in order to minimize pollutant discharges; (b) Control stormwater discharges,including both peak flowrates and total videstormwater volume,to minimize channel and streambank erosion and scour in the immediate vicinity of discharge point(s); (c) Minimize the amount of soil exposed during construction activity; (d) Minimize the disturbance of steep slopes; (e) Minimize sediment discharges from the site. The design,installation,and maintenance of erosion and sediment controls must address factors such as the amount,frequency,intensity and duration of precipitation,the nature of resulting stormwater runoff,and soil characteristics,including the range of soil particle sizes expected to be present on the site; (t) If earth disturbance activities are located in close proximity to a surface water in the state,provide and maintain appropriate natural buffers if feasible and as necessary,around surface water in the state,depending on site-specific topography,sensitivity,and proximity to water bodies. Direct stormwater to vegetated areas and maximize stormwater infiltration to reduce pollutant discharges,unless infeasible. If providing buffers is infeasible,the permittee shall document the reason that natural buffers are infeasible and shall implement additional erosion and sediment controls to reduce sediment load; (g) Preserve native topsoil at the site,unless the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that the topsoil be disturbed or removed,or it is infeasible; and (h) Minimize soil compaction. In areas of the construction site where final vegetative stabilization will occur or where infiltration practices will be installed, either: i. restrict vehicle and equipment use to avoid soil compaction;or Page go Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRts0000 41110 ii. prior to seeding or planting areas of exposed soil that have been compacted, use techniques that condition the soils to support vegetative growth,if necessary and feasible; Minimizing soil compaction is not required where the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that it be compacted. (i) TCEQ does not consider stormwater control features(e.g.,stormwater conveyance channels,storm drain inlets,sediment basins)to constitute"surface water"for the purposes of triggering the buffer requirement in Part III.G.r.(f) above. 2. Soil stabilization.Stabilization of disturbed areas must,at a minimum,be initiated immediately whenever any clearing,grading,excavating,or other earth disturbing activities have permanently ceased on any portion of the site,or temporarily ceased on any portion of the site and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. In the context of this requirement,"immediately"means as soon as practicable, but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth- disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Temporary stabilization must be completed no more than 14 calendar days after initiation of soil stabilization measures,and final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. In arid,semi-arid,and drought-stricken areas where initiating vegetative stabilization measures immediately is infeasible,alternative non- vegetative stabilization measures must be employed as soon as practicable.Refer to Part III.F.z.(b)for complete erosion control and stabilization practice requirements. In limited circumstances,stabilization may not be required if the intended function of a specific area of the site necessitates that it remain disturbed. 3. Dewatering.Discharges from dewatering activities,including discharges from 410 dewatering of trenches and excavations,are prohibited,unless managed by appropriate controls. 4. Pollution prevention measures. Design,install,implement,and maintain effective pollution prevention measures to minimize the discharve of pollutants.At a minimum,such measures must be designed,installed,implemented, and maintained to: (a) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from equipment and vehicle washing, wheel wash water,and other wash waters.Wash waters must be treated in a sediment basin or alternative control that provides equivalent or better treatment prior to discharge; (b) Minimize the exposure of building materials,building products,construction wastes,trash,landscape materials,fertilizers,pesticides,herbicides,detergents, sanitary waste,and other materials present on the site to precipitation and to stormwater; (c) Minimize the exposure of waste materials by closing waste container lids at the end of the work day.For waste containers that do not have lids,where the container itself is not sufficiently secure enough to prevent the discharge of pollutants absent a cover and could leak,the permittee must provide either a cover(e.g.,a tarp,plastic sheeting,temporary roof)to minimize exposure of wastes to precipitation,or a similarly effective means designed to minimize the discharge of pollutants(e.g.,secondary containment);and (d) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from spills and leaks,and implement chemical spill and leak prevention and response procedures. 5. Prohibited discharges.The following discharges are prohibited: Page 41 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TX12.150000 (a) Wastewater from wash out of concrete,unless managed by an appropriate control; (b) Wastewater from wash out and cleanout of stucco,paint,form release oils, curing compounds and other construction materials; (c) Fuels,oils,or other pollutants used in vehicle and equipment operation and maintenance; (d) Soaps or solvents used in vehicle and equipment washing;and (e) Toxic or hazardous substances from a spill or other release. 6. Surface outlets.When discharging from basins and impoundments,utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface,unless infeasible. Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants Discharges of stormwater runoff from concrete batch plants present at regulated construction sites and operated as a construction support activity may be authorized under the provisions of this general permit,provided that the following requirements are met for concrete batch plant(s)authorized under this permit. Only the discharges of stormwater runoff and non-stormwater from concrete batch plants that meet the requirements of a construction support activity can be authorized under this permit(see the requirements for "Non-Stormwater Discharges"in Part II.A.3 and"Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activity"in Part IIA.2). If discharges of stormwater runoff or non-stormwater from concrete batch plants are not authorized under this general permit,then discharges must be authorized under an alternative general permit or individual permit[see the requirement in Part II.A.2.(c)]. This permit does not authorize the discharge or land disposal of any wastewater from 1111) concrete batch plants at regulated construction sites. Authorization for these wastes must be obtained under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 1. Operators of concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit shall sample the stormwater runoff from the concrete batch plants according to the requirements of this section of this general permit,and must conduct evaluations on the effectiveness of the SWP3 based on the following benchmark monitoring values: Table 1.Benchmark Parameters Benchmark Benchmark Value Sampling Sample Type Parameter Frequency Oil and Grease(*1) 15 mg/L 1/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) Total Suspended 5o mg/L 1/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) Solids(*1) pH 6.o—9.o Standard Units 1/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) Total Iron(*1) 1.3 mg/L 1/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) (*1) All analytical results for these parameters must be obtained from a laboratory that is accredited based on rules located in 3o TAC§25.4(a)or through the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program(NELAP). Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 4o CFR§136.1(c)and 40 CFR §122.44(i)(1)(iv). Page 42 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRis0000 (*2) When discharge occurs. Sampling is required within the first 3o minutes of discharge. If it is not practicable to take the sample,or to complete the sampling,within the first 30 minutes,sampling must be completed within the first hour of discharge. If sampling is not completed within the first ao minutes of discharge,the reason must be documented and attached to all required reports and records of the sampling activity. (*3) Sampling must be conducted at least once during each of the following periods. The first sample must be collected during the first full quarter that a stormwater discharge occurs from a concrete batch plant authorized under this general permit. January through March April through June July through September October through December For projects lasting less than one full quarter,a minimum of one sample shall be collected,provided that a stormwater discharge occurred at least once following submission of the NOI or following the date that automatic authorization was obtained under Section ILE.2,and prior to terminating coverage. (*4) A grab sample shall be collected from the stormwater discharge resulting from a storm event that is at least o.r inches of measured precipitation that occurs at least 72 hours from the previously measurable storm event. The sample shall be collected downstream of the concrete batch plant,and where the discharge exits any BMPs utilized to handle the runoff from the batch plant,prior to commingling with any other water authorized under this general permit. 2. The permittee must compare the results of sample analyses to the benchmark values above,and must include this comparison in the overall assessment of the SWP3's effectiveness. Analytical results that exceed a benchmark value are not a violation of this permit,as these values are not numeric effluent limitations. Results of analyses are indicators that modifications of the SWP3 should be assessed and maybe necessary to protect water quality. The operator must investigate the cause for each exceedance and must document the results of this investigation in the SWP3 by the end of the quarter following the sampling event. The operator's investigation must identify the following: (a) any additional potential sources of pollution,such as spills that might have occurred; (b) necessary revisions to good housekeeping measures that are part of the SWP3; (c) additional BMPs,including a schedule to install or implement the BMPs;and (d) other parts of the SWP3 that may require revisions in order to meet the goal of the benchmark values. Background concentrations of specific pollutants may also be considered during the investigation. If the operator is able to relate the cause of the exceedance to background concentrations,then subsequent exceedances of benchmark values for that pollutant may be resolved by referencing earlier findings in the SWP3. Background concentrations may be identified by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-on to the permitted facility,by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-off from adjacent non-industrial areas,or by identifying the pollutant is a naturally occurring material in soils at the site. C Page 43 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRts0000 Section B. Best Management Practices(BMPs)and SWP3 Requirements Minimum SWP3 Requirements—The following are required in addition to other SWP3 requirements listed in this general permit,which include,but are not limited to the applicable requirements located in Part III.F.7 of this general permit,as follows: i. Description of Potential Pollutant Sources-The SWP3 must provide a description of potential sources(activities and materials)that can cause,have a reasonable potential to cause or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause,or contribute to,the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state in stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this permit. The SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity and non-stormwater discharges(described in Part ll A.3 of this general permit),in compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit,including the protection of water quality, and must ensure the implementation of these practices. The following must be developed, at a minimum,in support of developing this description: (a) Drainage—The site map must include the following information: i. the location of all outfalls for stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this permit; ii. a depiction of the drainage area and the direction of flow to the outfall(s); iii. structural controls used within the drainage area(s); iv. the locations of the following areas associated with concrete batch plants that are exposed to precipitation:vehicle and equipment maintenance activities(including fueling,repair,and storage areas for vehicles and equipment scheduled for maintenance);areas used for the treatment, storage,or disposal of wastes;liquid storage tanks;material processing and storage areas; and loading and unloading areas; and v. the locations of the following: any bag house or other dust control device(s); recycle/sedimentation pond,clarifier or other device used for the treatment of facility wastewater(including the areas that drain to the treatment device);areas with significant materials;and areas where major spills or leaks have occurred. (b) Inventory of Exposed Materials—A list of materials handled at the concrete batch plant that maybe exposed to stormwater and that have a potential to affect the quality of stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this general permit. (c) Spills and Leaks-A list of significant spills and leaks of toxic or hazardous pollutants that occurred in areas exposed to stormwater and that drain to stormwater outfalls associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit must be developed,maintained,and updated as needed. (d) Sampling Data-A summary of existing stormwater discharge sampling data must be maintained,if available. 2. Measures and Controls-The SWP3 must include a description of management controls to regulate pollutants identified in the SWP3's"Description of Potential Pollutant Sources"from Part IV.B.i of this permit,and a schedule for implementation of the measures and controls. This must include,at a minimum: J Page 44 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (a) Good Housekeeping-Good housekeeping measures must be developed and implemented in the area(s)associated with concrete batch plants. i. Operators must prevent or minimize the discharge of spilled cement, aggregate(including sand or gravel),settled dust,or other significant materials from paved portions of the site that are exposed to stormwater. Measures used to minimize the presence of these materials may include regular sweeping or other equivalent practices. These practices must be conducted at a frequency that is determined based on consideration of the amount of industrial activity occurring in the area and frequency of precipitation,and shall occur at least once per week when cement or aggregate is being handled or otherwise processed in the area. ii. Operators must prevent the exposure of fine granular solids,such as cement,to stormwater.Where practicable,these materials must be stored in enclosed silos,hoppers or buildings,in covered areas, or under covering. (b) Spill Prevention and Response Procedures-Areas where potential spills that can contribute pollutants to stormwater runoff,and the drainage areas from these locations,must be identified in the SWP3. Where appropriate,the SWP3 must specify material handling procedures,storage requirements,and use of equipment. Procedures for cleaning up spills must be identified in the SWP3 and made available to the appropriate personnel. (c) Inspections-Qualified facility personnel(i.e.,a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit,the concrete batch plant,and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s)for the site)must be identified to inspect designated equipment and areas of the facility specified in the SWP3. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC§305.128. Inspections of facilities in operation must be performed once every seven days. Inspections of facilities that are not in operation must be performed at a minimum of once per month. The current inspection frequency being implemented at the facility must be recorded in the SWP3. The inspection must take place while the facility is in operation and must,at a minimum,include all areas that are exposed to stormwater at the site,including material handling areas,above ground storage tanks,hoppers or silos,dust collection/containment systems, truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Follow-up procedures must be used to ensure that appropriate actions are taken in response to the inspections. Records of inspections must be maintained and be made readily available for inspection upon request. (d) Employee Training-An employee training program must be developed to educate personnel responsible for implementing any component of the SWP3, or personnel otherwise responsible for stormwater pollution prevention,with the provisions of the SWP3. The frequency of training must be documented in the SWP3,and at a minimum,must consist of one training prior to the initiation of operation of the concrete batch plant. (e) Record Keeping and Internal Reporting Procedures-A description of spills and similar incidents,plus additional information that is obtained regarding the quality and quantity of stormwater discharges,must be included in the SWP3. Inspection and maintenance activities must be documented and records of those inspection and maintenance activities must be incorporated in the SWP3. (0 Management of Runoff-The SWP3 shall contain a narrative consideration for reducing the volume of runoff from concrete batch plants by diverting runoff or otherwise managing runoff,including use of infiltration,detention ponds, retention ponds,or reusing of runoff. Page 45 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 3. Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation—At least once per year,one or more qualified personnel(i.e.,a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit, the concrete batch plant,and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s)for the site)shall conduct a compliance evaluation of the plant. The evaluation must include the following. (a) Visual examination of all areas draining stormwater associated with regulated concrete batch plants for evidence of,or the potential for,pollutants entering the drainage system. These include,but are not limited to: cleaning areas, material handling areas,above ground storage tanks,hoppers or silos,dust collection/containment systems,and truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Measures implemented to reduce pollutants in runoff(including structural controls and implementation of management practices)must be evaluated to determine if they are effective and if they are implemented in accordance with the terms of this permit and with the permittee's SWP3. The operator shall conduct a visual inspection of equipment needed to implement the SWP3,such as spill response equipment. (b) Based on the results of the evaluation,the following must be revised as appropriate within two weeks of the evaluation: the description of potential pollutant sources identified in the SWP3(as required in Part IV.B.1, "Description of Potential Pollutant Sources");and pollution prevention measures and controls identified in the SWP3(as required in Part IV.B.2, "Measures and Controls"). The revisions may include a schedule for implementing the necessary changes. (c) The permittee shall prepare and include in the SWP3 a report summarizing the scope of the evaluation,the personnel making the evaluation,the date(s)of the evaluation,major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3,and actions taken in response to the findings of the evaluation. The report must identify any incidents of noncompliance. Where the report does not identify incidences of noncompliance,the report must contain a statement that the evaluation did not identify any incidence(s),and the report must be signed according to 3o TAC§305.128,relating to Signatories to Reports. (d) The Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation may substitute for one of the required inspections delineated in Part IV.B.2.(c)of this general permit. Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges Wastewater discharges associated with concrete production including wastewater disposal by land application are not authorized under this general permit. These wastewater discharges must be authorized under an alternative TCEQ water quality permit or otherwise disposed of in an authorized manner. Discharges of concrete truck wash out at construction sites may be authorized if conducted in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements This general permit authorizes the land disposal of wash out from concrete trucks at construction sites regulated under this general permit,provided the following requirements are met. Any discharge of concrete production waste water to surface water in the state must be authorized under a separate TCEQ general permit or individual permit. A. Discharge of concrete truck wash out water to surface water in the state,including discharge to storm sewers,is prohibited by this general permit. B. Concrete truck wash out water shall be disposed in areas at the construction site where structural controls have been established to prevent discharge to surface water Page 46 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 in the state,or to areas that have a minimal slope that allow infiltration and filtering of wash out water to prevent discharge to surface water in the state. Structural controls may consist of temporary berms,temporary shallow pits,temporary storage tanks with slow rate release,or other reasonable measures to prevent runoff from the construction site. C. Wash out of concrete trucks during rainfall events shall be minimized. The discharge of concrete truck wash out water is prohibited at all times, and the operator shall insure that its BMPs are sufficient to prevent the discharge of concrete truck wash out as the result of rainfall or stormwater runoff. D. The disposal of wash out water from concrete trucks,made under authorization of this general permit must not cause or contribute to groundwater contamination. E. If a SWP3 is required to be implemented,the SWP3 shall include concrete wash out areas on the associated site map. Part VI. Retention of Records The permittee must retain the following records for a minimum period of three(3)years from the date that a NOT is submitted as required in Part II.F.i and 2 of this permit. For activities in which an NOT is not required,records shall be retained for a minimum period of three(3)years from the date that the operator terminates coverage under Section ILF.3 of this permit. Records include: A. Acopy of the SWP3; B. All reports and actions required by this permit,including a copy of the construction site notice; C. All data used to complete the NOI,if an NOI is required for coverage under this general permit; and D. All records of submittal of forms submitted to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to the secondary operator of a large construction site,if applicable. Part VII. Standard Permit Conditions A. The permittee has a duty to comply with all permit conditions. Failure to comply with any permit condition is a violation of the permit and statutes under which it was issued(CWA and TWC),and is grounds for enforcement action,for terminating, revoking and reissuance,or modification,or denying coverage under this general permit,or for requiring a discharger to apply for and obtain an individual TPDES permit,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,3o TAC§305.66 and 40 CFR§122.41 (a). B. Authorization under this general permit may be modified,suspended,revoked and reissued,terminated or otherwise suspended for cause,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,3o TAC§305.66 and 40 CFR§122.41(£). Filing a notice of planned changes or anticipated non-compliance by the permittee does not stay any permit condition. The permittee must furnish to the executive director,upon request and within a reasonable time,any information necessary for the executive director to determine whether cause exists for modifying,revoking and reissuing,terminating or,otherwise suspending authorization under this permit,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,3o TAC§305.66 and 40 CFR§122.41(h). Additionally,the permittee must provide to the executive director,upon request,copies of all records that the permittee is required to maintain as a condition of this general permit. C. It is not a defense for a discharger in an enforcement action that it would have been necessary to halt or reduce the permitted activity to maintain compliance with the 410, permit conditions. Page 47 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1,5o000 D. Inspection and entry shall be allowed under TWC Chapters 26-28,Texas Health and Safety Code§§361.032-361.033 and 361.037,and 40 CFR§122.41(1).The statement in TWC§26.014 that commission entry of a facility shall occur according to an establishment's rules and regulations concerning safety,internal security,and fire protection is not grounds for denial or restriction of entry to any part of the facility or site,but merely describes the commission's duty to observe appropriate rules and regulations during an inspection. E. The discharger is subject to administrative,civil,and criminal penalties,as applicable,under TWC Chapter 7 for violations including but not limited to the following: 1. negligently or knowingly violating the federal CWA§§3o1,302,306,307,308, 318,or 405,or any condition or limitation implementing any sections in a permit issued under CWA§402,or any requirement imposed in a pretreatment program approved under CWA§§4o2(a)(3)or 402(b)(8); 2. knowingly making any false statement,representation,or certification in any record or other document submitted or required to be maintained under a permit,including monitoring reports or reports of compliance or noncompliance; and 3. knowingly violating CWA§303 and placing another person in imminent danger of death or serious bodily injury. F. All reports and other information requested by the executive director must be signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC§305.128(relating to Signatories to Reports). G. Authorization under this general permit does not convey property or water rights of any sort and does not grant any exclusive privilege. H. The permittee shall take all reasonable steps to minimize or prevent any discharge in violation of this permit that has a reasonable likelihood of adversely affecting human health or the environment. I. The permittee shall at all times properly operate and maintain all facilities and systems of treatment and control(and related appurtenances)that are installed or used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the conditions of this permit. Proper operation and maintenance also includes adequate laboratory controls and appropriate quality assurance procedures.This provision requires the operation of back-up or auxiliary facilities or similar systems that are installed by a permittee only when the operation is necessary to achieve compliance with the conditions of the permit. J. The permittee shall comply with the monitoring and reporting requirements in 40 CFR§122.41(1)and(1),as applicable. K. Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 40 CFR§136.1(c)and 40 CFR§122.44(i)(1)(iv). Part VIII. Fees A. A fee of must be submitted along with the NOI: 1. $325 if submitting a paper NOI,or 2. $225 if submitting an NOI electronically. B. Fees are due upon submission of the NOI. An NOI will not be declared administratively complete unless the associated fee has been paid in full. C. No separate annual fees will be assessed for this general permit. The Water Quality Annual Fee has been incorporated into the NOI fees as described above. r/ Page 48 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRt,50000 D. Effective September r, 2018,applicants seeking coverage under an NOI or LREW must submit their application using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. Page 49 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization Periods of Low Erosion Potential by County—Eligible Date Ranges Andrews: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Ector: Nov. r5-Apr.30 Archer: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Edwards: Dec. 1$-Feb. 14 Armstrong: Nov. 15-Apr.3o El Paso: Jan. 1-Jul. 14,or May 15-Jul. Bailey: Nov.1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15-May 31,or Jun. 1-Aug. 14,or Jun. 15-Sept. 14, or Jul. 1-Oct. 14,or Jul. 15-Oct.31,or 14 Aug. 1-Apr.30,or Aug.15-May 14,or Baylor: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Sept. 1-May 30,or Oct. 1-Jun.14,or Borden: Nov. -Apr.3o Nov. 1-Jun.3o,or Nov. 15-Jul. 14 Brewster: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Fisher: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Briscoe: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Floyd: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Brown: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Foard: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Callahan: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Gaines: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Carson: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Garza: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Castro: Nov. 15-Apc 3o Glasscock: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Childress: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Hale: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Cochran: Nov.1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- Hall: Feb. 1-Mar.30 May 14 Hansford: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Coke: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Hardeman: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Coleman: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Hartley: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Collingsworth: Jan. 1-Mar. 30,or Dec. 1- Haskell: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Feb.28 Hockley: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15- Concho: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Apr.30 Cottle: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Howard: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Crane: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Hudspeth: Nov. 1-May 14 Crockett: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb. 1- Hutchinson: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Mar.3o Irion: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Crosby: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Jeff Davis: Nov. 1-Apr.30 or Nov. 15- Culberson: Nov. 1-May 14 May 14 Dallam: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. Jones: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 3o Kent: Nov. 15-Jan. 14 or Feb. 1-Mar. 30 Dawson: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Kerr: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Deaf Smith: Nov.15-Apr.3o Kimble: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Dickens: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb.1-Mar. King: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 30 Birth Dec. -Feb. 14 Kinney: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Donley: Jan. 1-Mar.30,or Dec. 1-Feb. Knox: Dec. 15-Feb. 14, 28 Lamb: Nov. 1-Apr.14,or Nov.15-Apr. Eastland: Dec.15-Feb. 14 30 Page 50 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Loving: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15-May Scurry: Nov. 15-Apr.30 lq Shackelford: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Lubbock: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Sherman: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Lynn: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Stephens: Dec. g-Feb.14 Martin: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Sterling: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Mason: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Stonewall: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Maverick: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Sutton: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 McCulloch: Dec. 15-Feb. lq Swisher: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Menard: Dec.15-Feb. lq Taylor: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Midland: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Terrell: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Mitchell: Nov. Ur-Apr.3o Terry: Nov. 15 -Apr.30 Moore: Nov.15-Apr.30 Throckmorton: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Motley: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb. 1-Mar. Tom Green: Dec. 15-Feb.14 30 Nolan: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Upton: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Oldham: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Uvalde: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Farmer: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. Val Verde: Nov.15-Jan. 14,or Feb. - 30 Mar.30 Pecos: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Ward: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. 30 1111110 Potter: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Wichita: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Presidio: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- Wilbarger: Dec. 15-Feb.14 May 14 Randall: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Winkler: Nov. 1-Apr.3o,or Nov. 15- May 14 Reagan: Nov.15-Apr.3o Yoakum: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- Real: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 May 14 Reeves: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15-May Young: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 14 Wheeler: Jan. 1-Mar.30,or Dec. 1-Feb. Runnels: Dec.15-Feb. 14 28 Schleicher: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Zavala: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Page 51 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRiS0000 Appendix B: Erosivity Index(El)Zones in Texas f7 .'b •. ,... i* *tit*R~•** ®r m , lM * * * ft *ft • ***i•ii * _ does:sr• r kr }Rl g,t 1ika **�•Q s. •*** # • * ♦ ft C. • 41011 . CA 4 *• **• MR VMS a# W •*�••*. 19 t t f iiii a • K.,t.' ♦. YY Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703:"Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture,Agricultural Research Service Page 52 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map • aariii::,:lJ�Oral Eli al Mr arAfiria- "U►,/r►/ •l+r Farr lulu astwojestAudi ire Ia�ila- /11 a SIltrite M //stuns mj.,ink;II et 'IT tea Is ens trt asea Anna HIM&ifilr.:41411,WifelI ullimirMilitalati t tea' r, ♦al irS for o tp 04.tur-Poirif,tait:c4r;_ tiv " j .nrsrsi rsin sq, oft.j � % War Arse r:»..... n ,r .__-- Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 7o3:"Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),U.S.Department of Agriculture,Agricultural Research Service C Page 53 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for El Zones in Texas Periods: ELY 1/1 1/16 1/31 2/15 3/1 3/16 3/31 4/15 4/30 5/15 5/30 6/14 6/29 7/14 7/29 8/13 8/28 9/12 9/27 10/1210/2711/11 11/2612/1112/31 89 0 1 1 2 3 4 7 2 8 27 38 48 55 62 69 76 83 90 94 97 98 99 100 100 100 90 0 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 21 29 37 46 54 6o 65 69 74 81 87 92 95 97 98 99 100 91 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 6 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 100 100 92 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 6 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 100 100 93 0 1 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 25 40 49 56 62 67 72 76 80 85 91 97 98 99 99 900 94 0 9 2 4 6 8 90 is 21 29 38 47 53 57 61 65 70 76 83 88 91 94 96 98 100 95 0 1 3 5 7 9 II 14 18 27 35 41 46 51 57 62 68 73 79 84 89 93 96 98 100 96 0 2 4 6 9 12 17 23 30 37 43 49 54 58 62 66 70 74 78 82 86 90 94 97 100 97 0 1 3 5 7 10 14 20 28 37 48 56 61 64 68 72 77 81 86 89 92 95 98 99 100 106 0 3 6 9 13 17 21 27 33 38 44 49 55 61 67 T 75 78 81 84 86 90 94 97 100 Each period begins on the date listed in the table above and lasts until the day before the following period. The final period begins on December a and ends on December 31. Table adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703:"Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),'U.S.Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service Page 54 fir SECTION 6 L CO O ON wetland '. :Enc' x da H9M�a Huns 1y W a0 831N30 SS3NIS118' ras eeaia -._. -, ; �H rc 5 YddYd� ,. . Oa t13d00H w til re C Oa a3d00H � p O I a C of a ILW LIG a60wex1 % ' N C w U a a r a0 A33SONIS ON 100HOS 0'03111V re o pP '�!R s r d i a 5 i/` , v, gg, • E. WNIak _ 0 - . . ..< • ES - g r rc g as 1s3M 6 hp 2 el W E-, . � Q O a c Cr 5 S aO1:4ki Rg351, a z550 1, A 5.gA!i=, A e iil 0o U 1 Q X 44 r- *H P t ¢p1 a /y St '''94, . ISE 1 l" i 11 ic t.. `,j y [¢ C /i x,45 i • @ A II 8 it 6®tin Qtla£ `y�` x x i e. I sl ® . ° ` � \ \\� > °tro / : j & / 1 � -> . b= v. klii /|/ , mem - / \ � -.:2 / / ( } gti ! /; i / \ \ ` \ 1 ! ! 1 \ 1 ( I | ( | ¢ :) { | 1 | § | § } { ( 0\ƒ n �2 � | , ©two' --..._ _ N . h ii I b � III 1} \\ / < ' i , > / ) \ � � �\ I�f \ i ° \ i} \ . y { ti 1 (Pr I / ' Ala I c~ "I_ s i 11.1 1111 6 g eq Zo a s 8 °it 3 $ .fir iii! I SL ONTO N tl'F 080dyy YH I Y I1t I I, s� , x x AMNd N9,3119 ROOVHS 'Ka? d \ 1 z (EI . \ I r \ d y ilk 9 y�AN . 0 iv ��� il S ;; ' Q it h a 5 9 p ®Fy �.yt{p j iiio Sp"1 ea 1IIAIi leig e k ga 1121 1 4qft i � qppt § H i MIM W U N G ,o E I g11;a p2p t IP! SO 1 ,$ pe '— Etlpi ig `! ` ` ig iit ip i i © 4 Y l Y'e gt > g 160 r Pix Sa k1b��pii ag !!� I. t + 2 t ,E; 96 g li i E _ IeL ff E 1: !a _ � l 8ell !,g i E . & N si 1 ,., p y Fr .1 Ig • il /c hi ai Iig @� ti 9� ! 2 S 9 i pli 3 hi j g 1 iit �1g gad 2 'Rts o, ' E x. !R . gi ig d hsilo § �� IIRU �!! i2tli+ ' 1� ig ! t cc . i :p �1 8 ;itpl `�E 1i1,§ 9h 2L5 fi ::; aiiisy1y 5$$I1 ``0yy c. 8 1 ILI isi f E i 1 1 11 E p 41 6 Et ae f 1 � �!,. 0 �; ! � � �� i! l�1i ® i iso lihi gI1 pi � � t i1e p9i �k0�lb: , 11 ig 1 F gp ei s 999 :11 g p �i it ,i1i 16i11t�iE Ig g 4 E Id,. t di PROJECT DESCRIPTION • GLLVANIZEO WOVEN WIRE MESH TOTAL PROJECT AREA FOR TYPES 2 h 3) MAINTENANCE NroTN OF PAYMENT TOTAL AREA TO BE DISTURBED ALL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL WILL BE MAINTAINED ' `. E'LOW AT CENTER WEIGHTED RUNOFF COEFFICIENT IN GOOD WORKING ORDER. IF A REPAIRS NECESSARY IT AFTER CONSTRUCTION WILL BE DONE AT THE EARLIEST DATE POSSIBLE. BUT NO NAME OF RECEIVING WATER LATER THAN 7 CALENDAR DAYS AFTER THE SURROUNDING EXPOSED GROUND HAS DRIED SUFFICIENTLY TO PREVENT. • )♦, _ -- FURTHER DAMAGE FROM HEAVY EQUIPMENT. THE AREA ADJACENT TO CREEKS AND DRAINAGE WAYS SHALL HAVE 41N]'EMBEDMENT SOIL STABII I7ATION PRACTICES PRIORITY FOLLOWED BY DEVICES PROTECTING STORM SEWER MULE 1L II TEMPORARY SEEDING INLETS. • C PERMANENT PLANTING, SODDING. OR SEEDING . FILTER DAM AT CHANNEL SECTIONS MULCHING • INSPECTION vON---IA:,—OR -- SOIL RETENTION BLANKET - TYPE 1 OR TYPE 2 BUFFER ZONE ALL INSPECTION WILL BE PERFORMED BY A XXX INSPECTOR EVERY SEVEN DAYS OR TWO WEEKS. AS WELL AS AFTER PRESERVATION OF NATURAL RESOURCES EVERY HALF—INCH OR MORE OF RAIN (AS RECOMMENDED ON A NON—FREEZING RAIN GAUGE TO BE LOCATED AT THE • STRUCTURAL PRACTICES PROJECT SITE). AN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT SHOULD BE MADE FOR EACH INSPECTION. BASED ON THE GALVANIZED WOVEN WIRE MESS I]'MIN I INSPECTION RESULTS, THE CONTROLS SHALL BE REVISED — SILT FENCES ACCORDING TO THE INSPECTION REPORT. (FOR TYPES 2&3) . HAY BALES SIOE SLOPE 2:1 OR MTTER' /i 2 J€.\??,Wit ROCK FILTER DAMS %INr�:'��.�•� TYPES I m x.1e' — - - - _ WASTE MATERIALS y•�:�I3`�:�L•_r:�� TYPE 3.ae• PIPE SLOPE DRAINS OPEN GRADED Roca .Yi)r•'I�T�2:'�' il.,. — .,�le't� � S�%5�1 PAVED FLUMES THE DUMPSTER USED TO STORE ALL WASTE MATERIAL WILL .&c#36= MEET ALL STATE AND THE CITY OF,PEARLAND SOLID WASTE 4-INN. =TEXTILE - - CHANNEL LINERS ORDINANCE. ALL TRASH AND CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS WILL BE SECTION C C SEDIMENT BASINS/ DETENTION PONDS DEPOSITED IN THE DUMPSTER. THE DUMPSTER WILL BE - EMPTIED AS NECESSARY -OR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL ROCK BEDDING AT CONSTRUCTION EXIT REGULATION AND THE TRASH-WILL BE HAULED TO A LOCAL DUMP. NO CONSTRUCTION WASTE MATERIAL WILL BE BURIED CURBS AND GUTTERS ON SITE. VELOCITY CONTROL DEVICES - ROCK FILTER DAM USAGE GUIDELINES EROSION CONTROL LOGS HAZARDOUS WASTE (INCLUDING SPILL REPORTING), ROCK FILTER DAMS SHOULD BE CONSTRUCTED DOWNSTREAM FROM OFFSITE VEHICLE TRACKING IN THE EVENT OF A SPILL WHICH MAY BE CONSIDERED DISTURBED AREAS TO INTERCEPT SEDIMENT FROM OVERLAND RUNOFF AND/QR HAZARDOUS. THE CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE DEPARTMENT SHALL CONCENTRATED FLOW. THE DAMS SHOULD BE SIZED TO FILTER A MAXIMUM HAUL ROADS DAMPENED FOR DUST'CONTROL BE CONTACTED IMMEDIATELY AT 281-997-4650. FLOW THROUGH RATE OF 60 GPM/FT"OF CROSS SECTIONAL AREA. A 3—YEAR LOADED HAUL TRUCKS TO BE COVERED STORM FREQUENCY MAY BE USED TO CALCULATE THE FLOW RATE. WITH TARPAULIN .. f•�ED.JaN TYPE 1 (18" HIGH WITH NO WIRE MESH): TYPE 1 MAY BE USED AT THE EXCESS DIRT ON ROAD-REMOVED DAILY SANITARY WASTE ' ++4 TOE OF SLOPES, AROUND INLETS. IN SMALL DITCHES, AND AT DIKE OR ,r__ . SWALE OUTLETS. THIS TYPE OF DAM IS RECOMMENDED TO CONTROL STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVE SANITARY WASTE FACILITIES IN o,RI w.uCY EROSION FROM A DRAINAGE AREA OF 5 ACRES OR LESS. TYPE 4 MAY NOT ACCORDANCE WITH - LOCAL. STATE AND FEDERAL eazaz BE USED IN CONCENTRATED HIGH VELOCITY FLOWS (APPROX. 8 FT/SEC - - REQUIREMENTS AND SPACING. ALL SANITARY WASTE SHALL t";'"'%°'�' OR MORE) IN WHICH AGGREGATE WASH OUT MAY OCCUR. SANDBAGS MAY BE BE COLLECTED FROM THE PORTABLE UNITS BY A LICENSED ',I;IN '! USED AT THE EMBEDDED FOUNDATION (4" DEEP MIN.) FOR BETTER FILTERING SANITARY WASTE MANAGEMENT CONTRACTOR OR FIRM AS EFFICIENCY OF LOW FLOWS IF CALLED FOR ON THE PLANS OR DIRECTED BY NEEDED OR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL REGULATIONS. THE ENGINEER. - TYPE 2 (18" HIGH WIHT WIRE MESH)" TYPE 2 MAY BE USED IN DITCHES OAS DETAIL WENTNAOEEEN PREPARED MOUSE ON AND AT DIKE OR SWALE OU LETS. - ADDITIONAL MADAM CRY OF PEARLAND PROJECT.. AN el0MEER WHO II EOR1TSTNE DOA.ON THIS SHEET COMES I✓FSPORSTBLE FORM RSA INT C END TYPE 3 (36" HIGH WITH WIRE MESH)• Type 3 MAY BE USED IN STREAM DISPOSAL AREAS, STOCKPILES, AND HAUL ROADS SHALL BE PRODUCT wAcmar.ro WRN RUE ULM ryTA.OA FLOW AND SHOULD B SECURED TO THE STREAM BED. CONSTRUCTED IN A MANNER THAT WILL MINIMIZE AND oR INFTEXANWM BOARD OF NECIsm.ANONFOR PROFFsslauL E.N£EJO. CONTROL THE SEDIMENT TART MAY ENTER RECEIVING I - WATERWAYS. N CONSTRUCTION STAGING AREAS AND VEHICLE MAINTENANCE '6'� ` a AREAS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED BY THE CONTRACTOR IN A a MANNER WHICH MINIMIZES THE RUNOFF OF ALL POLLUTANTS: �1✓ ROCK FILTER DAM • ALL WATERWAYS SHALL BE CLEARED AS SOON AS PRACTICAL City of Peorlond, Texas OF TEMPORARY EMBANKMENTS, TEMPORARY BRIDGES, STANDARD DETAILS MATTING. FALSEWORK. -PILING. DEBRIS. AND OTHER OBSTRUCTIONS PLACED DURING CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS STORM WATER POLLUTION NOTE: THE GUIDELINES SHOWN HEREON ARE SUGGESTIONS ONLY AND THAT ARE NOT PART OF THE FINISHED OWRK. PREVENTIONERPLAN MAY BE MODIFIED BY THE ENGINEER: co,Nv SHEET C C P.SEPT 20I9 H,1r•NN IILD 40 C.0 CAD u pr0. MR6 STW COP-S-SIIPPP] OF 41 J U '''',--.) ti- 3 TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No: CN: RN: 411Pr Notice of Intent (NOI) for an Authorization for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TCEQ TPDES General Permit TXR150000 UIPORI .A,A'I IAIURVI ATIOA Please read and use the General Information and Instructions prior to filling out each question in the NOI form. Use the NOI Checklist to ensure all required information is completed correctly. Incomplete applications delay approval or result in automatic denial. Once processed your permit authorization can be viewed by entering the following link into your Internet browser: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm or you can contact TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700. ePER urs ' Effective September 1, 2018, this paper form must be submitted to TCEQ with a completed electronic reporting waiver form(TCEQ-20754). To submit an NOI electronically, enter the following web address into your internet browser and follow the instructions: https://www3.tceq.texas.gov/steers/index.cfm APPLICATION FEE AND PAYMENT . . The application fee for submitting a paper NOI is $325. The application fee for electronic submittal of a NOI through the TCEQ ePermits system (STEERS) is $225. Payment of the application fee can be submitted by mail or through the TCEQ ePay system. The payment and the NOI must be mailed to separate addresses. To access the TCEQ ePay system enter the following web address into your Internet browser: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/epay. Provide your payment information for verification of payment: • If payment was mailed to TCEQ provide the following: o Check/Money Order Number o Name printed on Check: " • If payment was made via ePay, provide the following: o Voucher Number: o A copy of the payment voucher is attached to this paper NOI form. TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Paget Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRt50oo0 REf"f� `A�,.tris'j}iS%'k$4n'ittl.CNiisn#?'K�PPiab�Fa#ieY;JUti43.2i1181 ':i '"' Is this NOI for a renewal of an existing authorization? 0 Yes C No If Yes, provide the authorization number here: TXR1 5 .. _ NOTE: If an authorization number is not provided, a new number will be assigned. SIX l IoN I . OI'I R \ (7R LAI'I'I.I( AA I I a) If the applicant is currently a customer with TCEQ what is the Customer Number (CN) issued to this entity? CN (Refer to Section 1.a) of the Instructions) b) What is the Legal Name of the entity (applicant) applying for this permit? (The legal name must be spelled exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State, County, or in the legal document forming the entity.) c) What is the contact information for the Operator (Responsible Authority)? Prefix(Mr. Ms. Miss): : First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: ..=P Credentials: ik5,, .r Phone Number: • ' Fax Number: E-mail Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing Information if outside USA: Territory: .. Country Code: f ' ' Postal Code: d) Indicate the type of customer: O Individual 0 Federal Government O Limited Partnership G7 County Government O General Partnership FY State Government (i Trust 0 City Government 0 Sole Proprietorship (D.B.A.) 0 Other Government Ci Corporation 0 Other: O Estate e) Is the applicant an independent operator? 0 Yes 0 No TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 2 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 (If a governmental entity, a subsidiary, or part of a larger corporation, check No.) f) Number of Employees. Select the range applicable to your company. ❑ 0-20 C9 251-500 0 21-100 0 501 or higher 101-250 g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers: (Required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. Not Required for Individuals, Government, or Sole Proprietors.) State Franchise Tax ID Number: Federal Tax ID: Texas Secretary of State Charter(filing) Number: DUNS Number (if known): SI:( I'IUA 2. APPLI( \710.A CUN VC'I Is the application contact the same as the applicant identified above? GI Yes, go to Section 3 0 No, complete this section Prefix(Mr. Ms. Miss):tisfr First and Last Name:: . . . :'.Suffix: . ... Title: ' .. : '., . . _�`� - Credential: Organization Name: Phone Number: . .. . ° Fax Number: Email: _... Mailing Address: Internal Routing(Mail Code, Etc.): City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing information if outside USA: Territory: Country Code: Postal Code: SlfCIIUA ;. R11,1I_A ! WI N IIII ikfl IAI URN!.Al]0A UA 192011( IuR sill': a) If this is an existing permitted site, what is the Regulated Entity Number (RN) issued to this site? RN . (Refer to Section 3.a) of the Instructions) TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 3 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 b) Name of project or site(the name known by the community where it's located): ]] c) In your own words,briefly describe the type of construction occurring at the `r/ regulated site (residential, industrial, commercial, or other): `i d) County or Counties(if located in more than one): .' ti. ' e) Latitude , . . Longitude. . f) Site Address/Location If the site has a physical address such as 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, complete Section A. If the site does not have a physical address, provide a location description in Section B. Example: located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1. Section A: • Street Number and Name: . ... ?i City, State, and Zip Code: Section B: Location Description: City (or city nearest to) where the site is located: , Zip Code where the site is located: SI.( IION 4. LI NI,I{ U. ('II.Ak.AI II.] IS I I( a) Is the project or site located on Indian Country Lands? E1 Yes, do not submit this form. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. CI No b) Is your construction activity associated with a facility that, when completed, would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources? fYes. Note: The construction stormwater runoff may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas and may need to obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. tl No c) What is the Primary Standard Industrial Classification(SIC) Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site? ' . ,. d) What is the Secondary SIC Code(s),if applicable e) What is the total number of acres to be disturbed r f) Is the project part of a larger common plan of development or sale? TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 4 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRis0000 t Yes 41, 0 No. The total number of acres disturbed, provided in e) above, must be 5 or more. If the total number of acres disturbed is less than 5, do not submit this form. See the requirements in the general permit for small construction sites. g) What is the estimated start date of the project? h) What is the estimated end date of the project? i) Will concrete truck washout be performed at the site? O Yes O No j) What is the name of the first water body(ies) to receive the stormwater runoff or potential runoff from the site? k) What is the segment number(s) of the classified water body(ies) that the discharge will eventually reach? I) Is the discharge into a Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4)? C1yes 0 N If Yes, provide the name of the MS4 operator ,... ....�..,;'; Note: The general permit requires you to send a copy of this NOI form to the MS4 operator. m) Is the discharge or potential discharge from the site within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, as defined in 30 TAC Chapter 213? 411, O Yes, complete the certification below. C1 No, go to Section 5 I certify that the copy of the TCEQ-approved Plan required by the Edwards Aquifer Rule (30 TAC Chapter 213) that is included or referenced in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan will be implemented. 0 Yes SI Tll(lN 3. NUI c I:R Illl( \llnA a) I certify that I have obtained a copy and understand the terms and conditions of the Construction General Permit (TXR150000). O Yes b) I certify that the full legal name of the entity applying for this permit has been provided and is legally authorized to do business in Texas. Cl Yes c) I understand that a Notice of Termination (NOT)must be submitted when this authorization is no longer needed. 0 Yes d) I certify that a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan has been developed,will be implemented prior to construction and to the best of my knowledge and belief is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans, as required in the Construction General Permit (TXR150000). Cl Yes Note: For multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3, the confirmation of an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3, provided all obligations are t confirmed by at least one operator. TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Pages �II Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRis0000 SIX I I(1A ft AIt( I( \AT CI I2111I( \Il(1.A SI(,V \ I RL. Operator Signatory Name .... Operator Signatory Title -j I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted.Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete.I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information,including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature (use blue ink): Date: TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 6 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRag0000 \!r NOTICE OF INTENT CHECKLIST (TXR150000) Did you complete everything?Use this checklist to be sure! Are you ready to mail your form to TCEQ? Go to the General Information Section of the Instructions for mailing addresses. Confirm each item(or applicable item) in this form is complete. This checklist is for use by the applicant to ensure a complete application is being submitted. Missing information may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. (See NOI process description in the General Information and Instructions.) APPLICATION FEE If paying by check: .. a Check was mailed separately to the TCEQs Cashier's Office. (See Instructions for Cashier's address and Application address.) O Check number and name on check is provided in this application. If using ePay: 0 The voucher number is provided in this application and a copy of the voucher is attached. RENEWAL O If this application is for renewal of an existing authorization, the authorization number is provided. OPERATOR}It1POR 4ATION O Customer Number (CN) issued by TCEQ Central Registry O Legal name as filed to do business in Texas. (Call TX SOS 512-463-5555 to verify.) O Name and title of responsible authority signing the application. O Phone number and e-mail address O Mailing address is complete &verifiable with USPS. www.usps.com 0 Type of operator(entity type). Is applicant an independent operator? 0 Number of employees. O For corporations or limited partnerships - Tax ID and SOS filing numbers. O Application contact and address is complete &verifiable with USPS. httn://www.usps.com REGULATED ENTITY(RE)INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE O Regulated Entity Number (RN) (if site is already regulated by TCEQ) O Site/project name and construction activity description O County O Latitude and longitude httn://www.tceq.texas.gov/gis/sgmaview.htnil TCEQ-20022 Checklist (03/06/2018) Page 1 0I Site Address/Location. Do not use a rural route or post office box. GENERALCI3ARAC UUSnCS , ... p Indian Country Lands -the facility is not on Indian Country Lands. O Construction activity related to facility associated to oil,gas, or geothermal resources O Primary SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site. www.osha.gov/oshstats/sicser.html O Estimated starting and ending dates of the project. O Confirmation of concrete truck washout. Cl Acres disturbed is provided and qualifies for coverage through a NOI. O Common plan of development or sale. O Receiving water body or water bodies. O Segment number or numbers. O MS4 operator. p Edwards Aquifer rule. CaTIFICA'EtQI+t ': 'i, O Certification statements have been checked indicating Yes. O Signature meets 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44 and is original. J TCEQ-20022 Checklist (03/06/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Intent (NOI) for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TPDES General Permit (TXR150000) (iffAI'.0 \I I,A1 (101 \IH),C Where to Send the Note of Intent(NM: By Regular Mail: By Overnight or Express Mail: TCEQ TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center(MC228) Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) P.O. Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, Texas 78711-3087 Austin, TX Application Fee The application fee of $325 is required to be paid at the time the NOI is submitted. Failure to submit payment at the time the application is filed will cause delays in acknowledgment or denial of coverage under the general permit. Payment of the fee may be made by check or money order, payable to TCEQ, or through EPAY(electronic payment through the web). Mailed Payments: Use the attached General Permit Payment Submittal Form. The application fee is submitted to a different address than the NOI. Read the General Permit Payment 40, Submittal Form for further instructions, including the address to send the payment. ePAY Electronic Payment httn://www.tceo.texas.gov/epav When making the payment you must select Water Quality, and then select the fee category "General Permit Construction Storm Water Discharge NOI Application". You must include a copy of the payment voucher with your NO1. Your NOI will not be considered complete without the payment voucher. TCg Contact List Application - status and form questions: 512-239-3700, swpermit@tceq.texas.gov Technical questions: 512-239-4671, swgp@tceq.texas.gov Environmental Law Division: 512-239-0600 Records Management- obtain copies of forms: 512-239-0900 Reports from databases (as available): 512-239-DATA (3282) Cashier's office: 512-239-0357 or 512-239-0187 Notice of IntentAbt ess When your NOI is received by the program,the form will be processed as follows: • Administrative Review: Each item on the form will be reviewed for a complete response. In addition, the operator's legal name must be verified with Texas Secretary of State as valid and active (if applicable). The address(es) on the form must be verified with the US Postal service as receiving regular mail delivery. Do not give an overnight/express mailing address. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 1 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 • Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a notice of deficiency(NOD) will be mailed to the operator. The operator will have 30 days to respond to the NOD. The response will be reviewed for completeness. • Acknowledgment of Coverage: An Acknowledgment Certificate will be mailed to the operator. This certificate acknowledges coverage under the general permit. or Denial of Coverage: If the operator fails to respond to the NOD or the response is inadequate, coverage under the general permit may be denied. If coverage is denied, the operator will be notified. Getteral.Peitil MAW' Permit) For NOls submitted electronically through ePermits, provisional coverage under the general permit begins immediately following confirmation of receipt of the NOI form by the TCEQ. For paper NOIs, provisional coverage under the general permit begins 7 days after a completed NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. You should have a copy of your general permit when submitting your application.You may view and print your permit for which you are seeking coverage, on the TCEQ web site htto://www.tceq.texas.Eov. Search using keyword TXR150000. changoit .. ' . . t [, ..? :: :. t .... s An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated project or site changes, the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted no later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. tact f Ceam.lo strF`Care Thitakronn The Core Data Form has been incorporated into this form. Do not send a Core Data Form to TCEQ.After final acknowledgment of coverage under the general permit, the program will assign a Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number, if one has not already been assigned to this customer or site. For existing customers and sites, you can find the Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number by entering the following web address into your Internet browser: http://wwwl S.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/ or you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. On the website, you can search by your permit number, the Regulated Entity(RN)number, or the Customer Number(CN). If you do not know these numbers, you can select "Advanced Search" to search by permittee name, site address, etc. The Customer (Permittee) is responsible for providing consistent information to the TCEQ and for updating all CN and RN data for all authorizations as changes occur.For this permit, a Notice of Change form must be submitted to the program area. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 41, INSTRUCTIONS FOR MING out THE NO!FORM .' .. Renewal of General Permit. Dischargers holding active authorizations under the expired General Permit are required to submit a NOI to continue coverage. The existing permit number is required. If the permit number is not provided or has been terminated, expired, or denied, a new permit number will be issued. Saila 1.OPERATOR‘APPLICANT) a) Customer Number(CN) TCEQ's Central Registry will assign each customer a number that begins with CN, followed by nine digits. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. If the applicant is an existing TCEQ customer, the Customer Number is available at the following website: http://wwwl5.tceo.texas.gov/crpub/. If the applicant is not an existing TCEQ customer, leave the space for CN blank. b) Legal Name of Applicant Provide the current legal name of the applicant. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, as filed in the county. You may contact the SOS at 512-463-5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. If filed in the county,provide a copy of the legal documents showing the legal name. c) Contact Information for the Applicant(Responsible Authority) Provide information for the person signing the application in the Certification section. This person is also referred to as the Responsible Authority. Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. The mailing address must be recognized by the US Postal Service. You may verify the address on the following website: Mips://tools.uses.com/Qo/ZintookuoAction!innut.action. The phone number should provide contact to the applicant. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the applicant. d) Type of Customer(Entity Type) Check only one box that identifies the type of entity. Use the descriptions below to identify the appropriate entity type. Note that the selected entity type also indicates the name that must be provided as an applicant for an authorization. Individual An individual is a customer who has not established a business, but conducts an activity that needs to be regulated by the TCEQ. Partnership A customer that is established as a partnership as defined by the Texas Secretary of State Office (TX SOS). If the customer is a 'General Partnership' or 'Joint Venture' filed in the county(not filed with TX SOS), the legal name of each partner forming the 'General Partnership' or 'Joint Venture' must be provided. Each 'legal entity' must apply as a co-applicant. [`✓ TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 3 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Trust or Estate J A trust and an estate are fiduciary relationships governing the trustee/executor with respect to the trust/estate property. Sole Proprietorship(DBA) A sole proprietorship is a customer that is owned by only one person and has not been incorporated.This business may: 1. be under the person's name 2. have its own name (doing business as or DBA) 3. have any number of employees. If the customer is a Sole Proprietorship or DBA, the 'legal name' of the individual business 'owner' must be provided.The DBA name is not recognized as the 'legal name' of the entity.The DBA name may be used for the site name (regulated entity). Corporation A customer that meets all of these conditions: 1. is a legally incorporated entity under the laws of any state or country 2. is recognized as a corporation by the Texas Secretary of State 3. has proper operating authority to operate in Texas The corporation's 'legal name' as filed with the Texas Secretary of State must be provided as applicant.An'assumed' name of a corporation is not recognized as the 'legal name' of the entity. Government Federal, state, county, or city government (as appropriate) The customer is either an agency of one of these levels of government or the governmental body itself. The government agency's 'legal name' must be provided as the applicant. A department name or other description of the organization is not recognized as the 'legal name'. Other This may include a utility district,water district, tribal government, college district, council of governments, or river authority. Provide the specific type of government. e) Independent Entity Check No if this customer is a subsidiary, part of a larger company, or is a governmental entity. Otherwise, check Yes. 0 Number of Employees Check one box to show the number of employees for this customer's entire company, at all locations. This is not necessarily the number of employees at the site named in the application. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 4 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 [' g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers �/ These are required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. These are not required for Individuals, Government, and Sole Proprietors. State Franchise Tax ID Number Corporations and limited liability companies that operate in Texas are issued a franchise tax identification number. If this customer is a corporation or limited liability company, enter the Tax ID number. Federal Tax ID All businesses, except for some small sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships should have a federal taxpayer identification number(TIN). Enter this number here.Use no prefixes, dashes, or hyphens. Sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships do not need to provide a federal tax ID. TX SOS Charter (tiling) Number Corporations and Limited Partnerships required to register with the Texas Secretary of State are issued a charter or filing number. You may obtain further information by calling SOS at 512-463-5555. DUNS Number Most businesses have a DUNS (Data Universal Numbering System) number issued by Dun and Bradstreet Corp. If this customer has one, enter it here. Sectldh2.APVUCAT1ON.CONTACT : . s . `,. Provide the name and contact information for the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. Section..a.REGt3MT S ENTITYtRE)INFORNIATZON ON PROJECT OR SITE , a) Regulated Entity Number (RN) The RN is issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites where an activity is regulated by TCEQ. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. Search TCEQ's Central Registry to see if the site has an assigned RN at http://wwwl5.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/. If this regulated entity has not been assigned an RN, leave this space blank. If the site of your business is part of a larger business site, an RN may already be assigned for the larger site. Use the RN assigned for the larger site. If the site is found, provide the assigned RN and provide the information for the site to be authorized through this application. The site information for this authorization may vary from the larger site information. An example is a chemical plant where a unit is owned or operated by a separate corporation that is accessible by the same physical address of your unit or facility. Other examples include industrial parks identified by one common address but different corporations have control of defined areas within the site.In both cases, an RN would be assigned for the physical address location and the permitted sites would be identified separately under the same RN. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page S Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXRI50000 b) Name of the Project or Site J Provide the name of the site or project as known by the public in the area where the site is located. The name you provide on this application will be used in the TCEQ Central Registry as the Regulated Entity name. c) Description of Activity Regulated In your own words, briefly describe the primary business that you are doing that requires this authorization. Do not repeat the SIC Code description. d) County Provide the name of the county where the site or project is located. If the site or project is located in more than one county, provide the county names as secondary. e) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees, minutes, and seconds or decimal form.For help obtaining the latitude and longitude, go to: ham://www.tcea.texas.zov/gis/samaview.html. f) Site Address/Location If a site has an address that includes a street number and street name, enter the complete address for the site in Section A. If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address,you may need to validate the address with your local police (911 service) or through an online map site used to locate a site.Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. If a site does not have an address that includes a street number and street name, r/ provide a complete written location description in Section B. For example: "The site is located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1." Provide the city (or nearest city) and zip code of the site location. Section 4.GENERAf HARACITIUSTICS a) Indian Country lands If your site is located on Indian Country Lands, the TCEQ does not have authority to process your application. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6, Dallas. Do not submit this form to TCEQ. b) Construction activity associated with facility associated with exploration, development, or production of oil, gas, or geothermal resources If your activity is associated with oil and gas exploration, development, or production, you may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas(RRC) and may need to obtain authorization from EPA Region 6. Construction activities associated with a facility related to oil,gas or geothermal resources may include the construction of a well site; treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 6 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 carbon dioxide geologic storage facility; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas,including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. Where required by federal law, discharges of stormwater associated with construction activities under the RRC's jurisdiction must be authorized by the EPA and the RRC, as applicable. Activities under RRC jurisdiction include construction of a facility that, when completed,would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources, such as a well site; treatment or storage facility;underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a carbon dioxide geologic storage facility under the jurisdiction of the RRC; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. The RRC also has jurisdiction over stormwater from land disturbance associated with a site survey that is conducted prior to construction of a facility that would be regulated by the RRC. Under 33 U.S.C. §1342(1)(2) and §1362(24), EPA cannot require a permit for discharges of stormwater from field activities or operations associated with {oil and gas} exploration,production, processing, or treatment operations, or transmission facilities, including activities necessary to prepare a site for drilling and for the movement and placement of drilling equipment, whether or not such field activities or operations may be considered to be construction activities unless the discharge is [ contaminated by contact with any overburden, raw material,intermediate product, �y finished product,byproduct, or waste product located on the site of the facility.Under §3.8 of this title (relating to Water Protection), the RRC prohibits operators from causing or allowing pollution of surface or subsurface water. Operators are encouraged to implement and maintain best management practices (BMPs) to minimize discharges of pollutants, including sediment, in stormwater during construction activities to help ensure protection of surface water quality during storm events. For more information about the jurisdictions of the RRC and the TCEQ read the Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) between the RRC and TCEQ at 16 Texas Administrative Code, Part 1, Chapter 3, Rule 3.30, by entering the following link into an Internet browser: http://texreg.sos.state.tx.us/public/readtac$ext.TacPage?s1=R&app=9&p_dir=&p_rloc= &p_tloc=&p_ploc=&pg=1&p_tac=&ti=16&pt=1&ch=3&r1=30 or contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 for additional information. c) Primary Standard Industrial Classification(SIC) Code Provide the SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at this site. Common SIC Codes related to construction activities include: • 1521 - Construction of Single Family Homes • 1522 - Construction of Residential Buildings Other than Single Family Homes • 1541 - Construction of Industrial Buildings and Warehouses TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 7 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 • 1542 - Construction of Non-residential Buildings, other than Industrial Buildings and Warehouses • 1611 - Highway and Street Construction, except Highway Construction • 1622 - Bridge, Tunnel, and Elevated Highway Construction • 1623 -Water, Sewer, Pipeline and Communications, and Power Line Construction For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your intemet browser: Inp://www.osha.gov/nls/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Local Government Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. d) Secondary SIC Code Secondary SIC Code(s) may be provided. Leave this blank if not applicable. For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your Internet browser: http://www.osha.gov/ols/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. e) Total Number of Acres Disturbed Provide the approximate number of acres that the construction site will disturb. Construction activities that disturb less than one acre,unless they are part of a larger common plan that disturbs more than one acre, do not require permit coverage. Construction activities that disturb between one and five acres,unless they are part of a common plan that disturbs more than five acres, do not require submission of an N . Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five, unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing,grading, excavating, or other similar 441) activities. If you have any questions about this item, please contact the stormwater technical staff by phone at 512-239-4671 or by email at swgp@tceq.texas.gov. f) Common Plan of Development Construction activities that disturb less than five acres do not require submission of an NOI unless they are part of a common plan of development or for sale where the area disturbed is five or more acres. Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five,unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. For more information on what a common plan of development is,refer to the definition of"Common Plan of Development" in the Definitions section of the general permit or enter the following link into your intemet browser: www.tceq.texas.eov/nermitting/stormwater/common plan of development steps.html For further information,go to the TCEQ stormwater construction webpage enter the following link into your Internet browser: www.tceq.texas.govLeoto/construction and search for "Additional Guidance and Quick Links". If you have any further questions about the Common Plan of Development you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 or the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance at 800-447- 2827. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 8 J Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 g) Estimated Start Date of the Project This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity is initiated at the site. If renewing the permit provide the original start date of when construction activity for this project began. h) Estimated End Date of the Project This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity will end and final stabilization will be achieved at the site. f) Wfl1 concrete truck washout be performed at the site? Indicate if you expect that operators of concrete trucks will washout concrete trucks at the construction site. j) Identify the water body(s)receiving stormwater runoff The stormwater may be discharged directly to a receiving stream or through a MS4 from your site. It eventually reaches a receiving water body such as a local stream or lake, possibly via a drainage ditch. You must provide the name of the water body that receives the discharge from the site (a local stream or lake). If your site has more than one outfall you need to include the name of the first water body for each outfall,if they are different. k) Identify the segment number(s) of the classified water body(s) Identify the classified segment number(s) receiving a discharge directly or indirectly. Enter the following link into your Internet browser to find the segment number of the classified water body where stormwater will flow from the site: www.tceo.texas.gov/waterouality/monitoring/viewer.htmt or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. You may also find the segment number in TCEQ publication GI-316 by entering the following link into your internet browser: www.tcetl.texas.gov/publications/gi/gi-316 or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge is into an unclassified receiving water and then crosses state lines prior to entering a classified segment, select the appropriate watershed: • 0100(Canadian River Basin) • 0200 (Red River Basin) • 0300 (Sulfur River Basin) • 0400 (Cypress Creek Basin) • 0500(Sabine River Basin) Call the Water Quality Assessments section at 512-239-4671 for further assistance. 1) Discharge into MS4 -Identify the MS4 Operator The discharge may initially be into a municipal separate storm sewer system (MS4). If the stormwater discharge is into an MS4, provide the name of the entity that operates the MS4 where the stormwater discharges. An MS4 operator is often a city, town, county, or utility district, but possibly can be another form of government. Please note ` that the Construction General Permit requires the Operator to supply the MS4 with a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 9 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 copy of the NOI submitted to TCEQ. For assistance,you may call the technical staff at 1 512-239-4671. v�/ m) Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone and Certification The general permit requires the approved Contributing Zone Plan or Water Pollution Abatement Plan to be included or referenced as a part of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. See maps on the TCEQ website to determine if the site is located within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer by entering the following link into an internes browser: www.tceq.texas.zov/field/eann/viewer.html or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at 512-239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge or potential discharge is within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, a site-specific authorization approved by the Executive Director under the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program(30 TAC Chapter 213) is required before construction can begin. For questions regarding the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program, contact the appropriate TCEQ Regional Office. For projects in Hays, Travis and Williamson Counties: Austin Regional Office, 12100 Park 35 Circle,Austin, TX 78753, 512-339- 2929. For Projects in Bexar, Comal, Kinney, Medina and Uvalde Counties:TCEQ San Antonio Regional Office, 14250 Judson Rd., San Antonio, TX 78233-4480, 210-490- 3096. section 5. CERTIFRCA'ft0)tl j Note: Failure to indicate Yes to all of the certification items may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. a) Certification of Understanding the Terms and Conditions of Construction General Permit (TXR15O0O0) Provisional coverage under the Construction General Permit (7702150000)begins 7 days after the completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. Electronic applications submitted through ePermits have immediate provisional coverage.You must obtain a copy and read the Construction General Permit before submitting your application. You may view and print the Construction General Permit for which you are seeking coverage at the TCEQ web site by entering the following link into an intemet browser:www.tceq.texas.zov/zoto/construction or you may contact the TCEQ Stormwater processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. b) Certification of Legal Name The full legal name of the applicant as authorized to do business in Texas is required. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, that is filed in the county where doing business. You may contact the SOS at 512-463 5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. c) Understanding of Notice of Termination A permittee shall terminate coverage under the Construction General Permit through the submittal of a NOT when the operator of the facility changes, final stabilization has TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 10 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 been reached, the discharge becomes authorized under an individual permit, or the construction activity never began at this site. d) Certification of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan The SWP3 identifies the areas and activities that could produce contaminated runoff at your site and then tells how you will ensure that this contamination is mitigated. For example, in describing your mitigation measures,your site's plan might identify the devices that collect and filter stormwater, tell how those devices are to be maintained, and tell how frequently that maintenance is to be carried out.You must develop this plan in accordance with the TCEQ general permit requirements. This plan must be developed and implemented before you complete this NO!. The SWP3 must be available for a TCEQ investigator to review on request. Section,6.APPLZ Mft Cara ltATION$1CNAm . . The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44. If you are a corporation: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(1) (see below).According to this code provision, any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. 410. If you are a municipality or other government entity: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(3) (see below). According to this code provision, only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity, it may be beneficial to consult your city charter, county or city ordinances, or the Texas statute(s)under which your government entity was formed.An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3). The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation. By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above, please contact the TCEQ's Environmental Law Division at 512-239-0600. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 11 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 301thats''Ad 9oiii Code:. §305.44. Signatories to Applications (a)All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation, the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph, a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy or decision- making functions for the corporation; or the manager of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million(in second-quarter 1980 dollars), if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship, the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor, respectively. (3) For a municipality, state, federal, or other public agency, the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph, a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency, or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g., regional administrator of the EPA). ,figi) TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 12 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit Payment Submittal Form Use this form to submit your Application Fee only if you are mailing your payment. • Complete items 1 through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mail this form with your NOI form. • Do not mail this form to the same address as your NO!. Mail this form and your check to either of the following, By Regular U.S. Mail By Overnight or Express Mail Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Financial Administration Division Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office, MC-214 Cashier's Office, MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 12100 Park 3S Circle Austin, TX 78711-3088 Austin,TX 78753 Fee Cale: GPA General Permit TXR150000 1. Check or Money Order No: 2. Amount of Check/Money Order: Cr3. Date of Check or Money Order: 4. Name on Check or Money Order: S. NOI Information: If the check is for more than one NOI, list each Project or Site(RE) Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. Do not submit a copy of the NOI with this form,as it could cause duplicate permit application entries! If there is not enough space on the form to list all of the projects or sites the authorization will cover, then attach a list of the additional sites. Project/Site (RE) Name: Project/Site (RE) Physical Address: . . Staple the check or money order to this form in this space. L TCEQ-20134 (03/06/2018) Page 1 man a MINIM ""11111MI OW OS Mt IN aell SW SMALL CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 The following information is posted in compliance with Part ILE.2. of the TCEQ General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from small construction sites. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the Internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wo construction.html jiorOperator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: oject Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: For Small Construction Activities Authorized Under Part 11.E.2. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.2.of TPDES General Permit TXRI50000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed _MS4 operator notified per Part/L E3. Cr Exhibit F E„ TRANSFER OF OPERATIONAL CONTROL FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Storm Water Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 Instructions: Fill out the form and meter or affix stamps to the Certificate of Mailing below. Make a copy, place it in a self-addressed stamped envelope, and then mail the copy to the New Operator at a USPS facility. At the time of mailing, present the original to a USPS employee, and they will date stamp the certificate so that the original can be retained in the SWPPP as a Transfer of Operational Control. Permitted operators may attempt to notify new operators of the requirement to obtain authorization, as appropriate, under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Construction General Permit TXR150000 when a transfer of operational control occurs. Authorization under this general permit is not transferable. Each operator is entirely responsible for meeting Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) requirements within the boundaries of the construction site where they perform construction activities. Construction Project or Site Name: FM 521 Ground Storage Tank Expansion — Phase 2 Operator Name: New Operator: 411/ New Operator Mailing Address: Date Transfer is Effective: The Operator has relinquished control over all areas of the site that have not been finally stabilized, and SWPPP responsibilities for all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls are now transferred to the New Operator. The Operator is required to retain record of this notification for a minimum period of three (3) years from the date that permit coverage is terminated. The information on this notification is required in Part II.F.4 of the general permit. a UNITED STATES Certificate Of POSTAL SERVICETo payee.a'"'818mps or Mailing meter postage here. Tin Ce1firsy icellnp pmmm eevidence that mail hes been presented to usne far mailing be This farm may be used for domestic end international oall. From: To: POStmerk Here INew Operator] [New Operator Mailing Address] [New Operator Mailing Address] PS Form 3817.April 2007 PSN 7530-02-000-9065